Modern Advanced ing In Canada 7th Edition 6d3x5l

McGraw-Hill Create™ Review Copy for Instructor [NOT SPECIFIED]. Not for distribution.

2

Modern Advanced ing in Canada

Preface Welcome to the seventh edition of Modern Advanced ing in Canada. This book’s well-deserved reputation for being the most current, concise, and technically accurate advanced ing text on the market has not only been maintained but has been improved upon in this new edition. This edition is 100 percent compliant with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRSs), not only with regard to the typical advanced ing topics of business combinations and foreign currency transactions, but also for the topics studied in intermediate ing and other courses. It also contains the reporting requirements for private enterprises and not-for-profit organizations. All of the extracts from financial statements are now taken from Canadian entities. The book reflects standards that are expected to be in effect as of January 1, 2014, based on standards approved by the IASB or based on exposure drafts that were outstanding as of December 31, 2012. We have made every effort to illustrate and explain the requirements of the current standards at the time of publication, anticipating how these might change, what the effects of the changes will be, and what they will mean to the industry, professionals, and students. We have also continued the presentation of advanced ing topics that has been so well received by such a large number of instructors and students. Emphasis on the direct approach of preparing consolidated financial statements along with the “building block” development of the basics of consolidations has been maintained and strengthened. The working-paper approach is illustrated in Chapters 3 through 5, either in the body of the chapter or in the appendices. Finally, as requested by instructors on behalf of their students, the following enhancements to problem material have been made in this edition: • At least one new case has been added to each chapter to encourage critical thinking and classroom discussion. There are now five to seven cases in each chapter. • All of the web-based problems have been changed to Canadian companies. These problems involve the analysis and interpretation of the recently published financial statements of public companies and not-for-profit organizations. • One new self-study problem has been added to ten chapters, such that each chapter now has two self-study problems. • The questions and/or solutions have been revised for approximately 55 percent of the end-of-chapter cases and problems. • Finally, even more problems and questions can be found online for additional study on Connect.

xii


3

Modern Advanced ing in Canada, Seventh Edition

NEW FEATURES • The financial statement disclosure examples in the body of each chapter have been changed to Canadian companies and to more recent years. The IFRS disclosure requirements are summarized, each followed by a real-life example from a public company or a not-for-profit organization. • A new section on Analysis and Interpretation of Financial Statements has been added for each chapter. These sections compare the impact of different reporting methods on key financial ratios and illustrate and explain the interrelationship of financial statements. • The following new IFRSs have been explained and applied in the appropriate chapters of the text: IFRS 10: Consolidated Financial Statements, IFRS 11: t Arrangements, IFRS 12: Disclosure for Interests in Other Entities, and IFRS 13: Fair Value Measurement. • The titles and format of financial statements as traditionally used by Canadian companies are used in the illustrations throughout the body of the text, on the assumption that many Canadian companies will continue to use the same titles and format as used in the past. In the self-study problems and end-of-chapter material, both the format suggested by the IASB and the traditional format of Canadian companies are used. • Major reorganization has occurred in Chapters 3, 4, 11, and 12. Substantial revisions have been made in eight chapters. The following sections are provided at the end of all relevant chapters: • ASPE Differences. This section highlights the differences in GAAP between ing standards for private enterprises (ASPE) and IFRSs. There are sufficient illustrations throughout the text for the of the text to know and apply both sets of GAAP. • U.S. GAAP Differences. This section highlights the differences in GAAP between IFRSs and U.S. GAAP. Since the IASB and the FASB are working to merge their standards over the next few years, it is important to know where the differences lie so that we can anticipate where changes in IFRSs are likely to be made. • Each chapter’s Summary includes the following: • Significant Changes in GAAP in the Last Three Years. This section summarizes the major changes in GAAP since the publication of the sixth edition of the text. • Changes Expected in GAAP in the Next Three Years. This section summarizes the changes expected in IFRSs in the next few years, based on the projects currently on the IASB’s work plan.

Preface

xiii


4


ORGANIZATION Chapter 1 begins with an overview of the conceptual framework for financial reporting. Most of this material was previously contained in the prologue. The remainder of the chapter presents a survey of international ing practices. It includes a listing of major countries requiring or permitting the use of IFRSs for listed companies. Some of the major differences between IFRSs and U.S. GAAP are identified, and the convergence project between the FASB and the IASB to harmonize their ing standards is described. Some of the major differences between IFRSs and ASPE are identified. A new self-study problem on U.S. GAAP differences has been added. Chapter 2 commences with an overview of the CICA pronouncements that make up the “big picture.” Readers are encouraged to revisit this big picture many times as consolidation topics are developed in later chapters so that they do not lose sight of the forest as they examine the myriad of details that make up the trees. The chapter continues with a comprehensive example to illustrate the fair value, cost, and equity methods of reporting investments in equity securities, and it concludes with two self-study problems that compare these different reporting methods. Coverage of the comprehensive example could be postponed until after Chapter 4 without breaking continuity or could be omitted altogether if it is felt that adequate coverage has occurred in previous intermediate ing courses. The new standards on Fair Value Measurement (IFRS 13) and Financial Instruments: Classification and Measurement (IFRS 9) are briefly described.

Chapter 3 describes two forms of business combinations and three methods that have been proposed or used to for business combinations. The direct and working-paper methods are used to illustrate the acquisition method of ing for a business combination. The new definition of control is discussed and used as the criterion for preparation of consolidated financial statements. A new section on reporting depreciable assets is added. Reverse takeovers are covered in an appendix.

Chapter 4 examines the preparation of consolidated financial statements for non– wholly owned subsidiaries at the date of acquisition. The direct method is used in the body of the chapter and the working-paper method is used in the appendix. Four theories of consolidation are discussed and illustrated. All four theories are currently or have recently been required under Canadian GAAP. ing for contingent consideration and bargain purchases are also illustrated.

Chapter 5

covers the preparation of consolidated financial statements subsequent to the date of acquisition when the parent uses the cost method in its internal records. The amortization and impairment of the acquisition differential is explained and illustrated, including an application of the effective interest method. A new appendix on goodwill impairment is added. The parent’s journal entries under the equity method are summarized. Ten basic steps in the preparation of consolidated statements are introduced and form the foundation for the consolidation topics in the chapters that follow. The direct approach is used in the body of the chapter. Appendix B illustrates the working-paper approach for the same examples used throughout the chapter.

xiv

Preface


5


Chapter 6 discusses and illustrates the ing for intercompany revenues and expenses, as well as intercompany unrealized profits or losses in inventory and land. The revenue recognition, matching, and historical cost principles are used to explain the rationale for consolidation adjustments associated with the holdback and realization of intercompany profits. The consolidation adjustments when the entities use the revaluation model for reporting land are described in the appendix. Chapter 7 discusses the elimination of intercompany profits in depreciable assets, the recognition of gains or losses resulting from the elimination of intercompany bondholdings, and the related income tax adjustments that are required. Two self-study problems are presented using the direct approach and involving the effective interest method for bond amortization. The consolidation adjustments when the entities use the revaluation model for reporting depreciable assets are described in the appendix. Chapter 8 discusses the preparation of the consolidated cash flow statement and such ownership issues as subsidiaries with preferred shares, step purchases, reduction of parent’s interest, and indirect holdings. In all situations, the direct approach is used. The chapter concludes with two self-study problems involving changes in ownership and preferred shares. Chapter 9 examines other consolidation reporting issues, including specialpurpose entities, deferred income taxes and business combinations, and segment disclosures. The ing for t arrangements is illustrated both under the equity method in the body of the chapter and under proportionate consolidation in the appendix. A new self-study problem on deferred income taxes pertaining to business combinations has been added. Chapter 10 introduces the topic of foreign currency and four different perspectives in which currencies can be viewed. Foreign currency transactions are discussed, as are the concepts of hedging and hedge ing. The handling of foreign currency gains and losses is illustrated, as are the ing for fair value and cash flow hedges. The appendix describes how discounting can be applied when determining the fair value of a forward contract. Chapter 11 concludes the foreign currency portion of the text by examining and illustrating the translation and subsequent consolidation of subsidiaries whose functional currency is the same as the parent’s (i.e., integrated subsidiary) and whose functional currency is not the same as the parent’s (self-sustaining subsidiary). The reporting of exchange gains and losses from the translation of self-sustaining subsidiaries in other comprehensive income is also illustrated. A new self-study problem has been added to illustrate the preparation of consolidated financial statements after translating the foreign operations under both the temporal and current-rate methods.

Chapter 12 discusses in depth the 13 not-for-profit sections in the CICA Handbook. The chapter concludes with a comprehensive illustration of the required journal entries and the preparation of financial statements using both the deferral method and the restricted fund method. Appendix 12A provides a real-life example of the deferral method by reproducing the financial statements of the United Way/Centraide Ottawa. Appendix 12B provides a comprehensive outline of the PSAB reporting requirements for federal, provincial, and local governments. Preface

xv


6


CONNECT McGraw-Hill Connect™ is a web-based assignment and assessment platform that gives students the means to better connect with their coursework, with their instructors, and with the important concepts that they will need to know for success now and in the future. With Connect, instructors can deliver assignments, quizzes, and tests online. Nearly all the problems from the text are presented in an auto-gradeable format and tied to the text’s learning objectives. Instructors can edit existing questions and author entirely new problems; track individual student performance—by question, assignment, or in relation to the class overall—with detailed grade reports; and integrate grade reports easily with Learning Management Systems (LMS) such as WebCT and Blackboard. By choosing Connect, instructors are providing their students with a powerful tool for improving academic performance and truly mastering course material. Connect allows students to practise important skills at their own pace and on their own schedule. Importantly, students’ assessment results and instructors’ are all saved online, so students can continually review their progress and plot their course to success. Connect also provides 24/7 online access to an eBook—an online edition of the text—to aid them in successfully completing their work, wherever and whenever they choose.

Key Features Simple Assignment Management With Connect, creating assignments is easier than ever, so you can spend more time teaching and less time managing. • Create and deliver assignments easily with selectable end-of-chapter questions and testbank material to assign online. • Streamline lesson planning, student progress reporting, and assignment grading to make classroom management more efficient than ever. • Go paperless with the eBook and online submission and grading of student assignments. Smart Grading When it comes to studying, time is precious. Connect helps students learn more efficiently by providing and practice material when they need it, where they need it. • Automatically score assignments, giving students immediate on their work and side-by-side comparisons with correct answers. • Access and review each response; manually change grades or leave comments for students to review. • Reinforce classroom concepts with practice tests and instant quizzes. Instructor Library The Connect Instructor Library is your course creation hub. It provides all the critical resources you’ll need to build your course, just how you want to teach it. xvi

Preface


7

• Assign eBook readings and draw from a rich collection of textbook-specific assignments. • Access instructor resources, including ready-made PowerPoint presentations and media to use in your lectures. • View assignments and resources created for past sections. • Post your own resources for students to use. eBook Connect reinvents the textbook learning experience for the modern student. Every Connect subject area is seamlessly integrated with Connect eBooks, which are designed to keep students focused on the concepts key to their success. • Provide students with a Connect eBook, allowing for anytime, anywhere access to the textbook. • Merge media, animation, and assessments with the text’s narrative to engage students and improve learning and retention. • Pinpoint and connect key concepts in a snap using the powerful eBook search engine. • Manage notes, highlights, and bookmarks in one place for simple, comprehensive review.

Instructor Resources The following instructor resources are available online on Connect: • Solutions Manual: This manual, prepared by the author, contains complete solutions to all the text’s end-of-chapter review questions, cases, problems, and web-based problems. • Computerized Test Bank: This test bank contains over 1,000 multiple-choice, true/false, and problem questions. Each test item is coded for level of difficulty and learning objective. • Microsoft® PowerPoint® Presentations: These slides cover key concepts found in each chapter using outlines, summaries, and visuals. Superior Learning Solutions and The McGraw-Hill Ryerson team is ready to help you assess and integrate any of our products, technology, and services into your course for optimal teaching and learning performance. Whether it’s helping your students improve their grades, or putting your entire course online, the McGraw-Hill Ryerson team is here to help you do it. your Learning Solutions Consultant today to learn how to maximize all of McGraw-Hill Ryerson’s resources! For more information on the latest technology and Learning Solutions offered by McGraw-Hill Ryerson and its partners, please visit us online: www.mcgrawhill .ca/he/solutions.

Preface

xvii



9


1 chapter

A Survey of International ing

learning objectives After studying this chapter, you should be able to do the following: LO1 Describe the conceptual framework for financial reporting.

LO2 Identify factors that can influence a country’s ing standards. LO3 Identify the role that the IASB intends to play in the establishment of uniform worldwide ing standards. LO4 Identify the direction that the FASB intends to follow for public companies.

LO5 Describe how ing standards in Canada are tailored to different types of organizations. LO6 Analyze and interpret financial statements to assess the impact of different ing methods on key financial statement ratios. LO7 Identify some of the differences between IFRS and ASPE.

INTRODUCTION Welcome to advanced ing. We wish you a prosperous learning experience. We will study three major ing topics: consolidations, foreign currency transactions and operations, and not-for-profit and government organizations. The topics are presented and illustrated in accordance with the generally accepted ing principles (GAAP) that are expected to be in effect in Canada as of January 1, 2014. You may have had some exposure to these topics in your previous ing courses. We will build on this prior knowledge and the conceptual framework studied in intermediate ing while we develop a thorough understanding of these selected topics. Prior to the 1990s, the study of ing principles in Canada focused on the CICA Handbook - ing (hereafter referred to as CICA Handbook or Handbook) and involved very little, if any, thought or discussion of ing standards in other parts of the world. But since then, rapid changes have taken place throughout the world, and even more drastic changes are coming. Canadian companies now view the entire world as their marketplace; not only are they exporting their products to more countries than ever before, but they are also establishing factories and offices in foreign locations. Companies that used to raise capital strictly in their home countries are now finding that capital markets are available to them 1


10


2

CHAPTER 1

Canadian companies are now able to raise capital resources on the world’s marketplace.

LO1


around the world. Because their shares trade on stock exchanges, they are often required to prepare financial reports using ing principles of countries other than Canada. Many ing firms have offices throughout the world, and there are abundant opportunities for their Canadian staff to transfer to these offices. With all these changes taking place, an ing education that takes a narrow, parochial view is clearly inadequate. Canadian students of ing need to be fully aware of what is happening in the rapid movement toward worldwide ing standards, and it is imperative that the textbooks of today address this topic. Before embarking on the study of the major topics in this book, we will review the role of ants and the objectives of reporting. Then, we will survey the ing principles and practices used in a sample of other countries. It is hoped that this exposure to other countries’ standards will help us understand the future direction of standards in our own country.

THE CONCEPTUAL FRAMEWORK FOR FINANCIAL REPORTING Professional ants provide a variety of services ranging from ing to tax planning to assurance to business consulting. In this course, we will focus on financial ing; that is, providing general-purpose financial information to external s such as investors and creditors. These s usually have limited financial resources to invest in an entity. They wish to invest where they can earn the highest return with the lowest amount of risk. The general-purpose set of financial statements (balance sheet, income statement, cash flow statement, and notes to the financial statements) will be used by the external s to help them make their resource allocation decisions and to assess the stewardship of management. The general-purpose reports are not the only source of information used for decision making but provide a good starting point. In most cases, s want to receive the general-purpose financial statements prepared in accordance with generally accepted ing principles (GAAP) because by following these principles, the information is relevant, reliable, understandable, and comparable. However, there are times when s may want or require special-purpose financial reports that do not follow GAAP. For example, entities may need to prepare non–GAAP-based statements for legislative or regulatory purposes, or for contract compliance. Or, a prospective lender may want to receive a balance sheet with assets reported at fair value rather than historical cost. As ants, we are able to provide financial information in a variety of formats or using a variety of ing policies because we have the skills and abilities to produce this information. If we do provide fair-value-based financial statements, we cannot say that the statements were prepared in accordance with GAAP. We would simply state that the statements were prepared in accordance with the policies described in the notes to the financial statements. GAAP encom broad principles and conventions of general application, as well as rules and procedures that determine accepted ing practices at a particular time. The process of developing GAAP is political. Both preparers and s of financial statements have an opportunity to comment on a proposal for a new ing standard before it becomes generally accepted. If a new requirement is preferred by the preparers but not accepted by s, it is unlikely to become part of GAAP. Therefore, as we study existing ing practices and


11


CHAPTER 1


proposed changes, we need to continually evaluate whether information provided by a reporting entity will satisfy s’ needs. In most cases, the s of the financial statements have access to information about the entity in addition to that provided in the financial statements. For example, the owner of a private company may also be the manager and would have intimate knowledge of the company. In such cases, the owner/manager may place less reliance on the financial statements than outside investors in public companies do. In other situations, the owner may not understand the financial reporting for complex transactions such as business combinations. In both of these situations, the owners may feel that the costs of complying with some of the complex sections of the Handbook are not worth the benefit. They may prefer to issue more simplified statements. The Canadian Institute of Chartered ants (CICA) recognized this difference in s’ needs. In 2002, differential reporting was incorporated in the Handbook whereby qualifying enterprises could choose to apply differential reporting options and still be in compliance with GAAP. In 2011, these differential options were eliminated and replaced with a Handbook that is now segregated into different parts for different types of organizations. The CICA Handbook is an authoritative document in Canada because many legal statutes require its use. For example, companies incorporated under the Canada Business Corporations Act and certain provincial Companies Acts are required to prepare financial statements in accordance with the CICA Handbook. Publicly traded companies are required to submit financial statements that comply with GAAP to the securities commissions under which they are ed. The CICA Handbook provides the ing and reporting requirements as well as explanations and guidance for most transactions and events encountered by an entity. When an entity following International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRSs) encounters transactions or events that are not explicitly addressed by the standards, the entity should adopt ing practices that are consistent with the spirit of the IFRSs and consistent with the financial statement concepts. These concepts are described in the “The Conceptual Framework for Financial Reporting,” which is a document found just prior to the IFRSs in Part I of the Handbook. Entities that are reporting under ing Standards for Private Enterprises (ASPE) should adopt ing practices that are consistent with Section 1000: Financial Statement Concepts, in Part II of the Handbook. The financial statement concepts describe the principles and assumptions underlying the preparation of financial statements. They are very important parts of GAAP because they provide the framework for the development and issuance of other financial ing standards. The main items included in this document are as follows:

3

Financial statements should cater to the needs of the s.

The Handbook is divided into different parts to cater to different types of reporting entities.

• The objective of general-purpose financial reporting • Qualitative characteristics of useful financial information • Underlying assumptions • Definition, recognition, and measurement of the elements of financial statements You will probably recognize most of the concepts and studying them in your intermediate ing courses. If you can explain the ing practices learned there in of these basic concepts, you should have no trouble applying these concepts in the new situations we will encounter in this course. If you do not understand or cannot explain ing requirements in of these basic concepts, it is never too late to start. As you study the ing

All ing practices should be able to be traced back to and ed by the conceptual framework.


12


4

CHAPTER 1


requirements in this course, try to understand them in of the basic concepts and principles that the Handbook describes. By gaining a broad understanding of the logic and basic principles behind the ing requirements, you will develop confidence and be able to apply these basic principles in a wide variety of situations. Rather than simply accepting ing practices or memorizing specific requirements in the Handbook, you will begin to understand the logic of the requirements and evaluate whether these are consistent with the basic financial statement concepts. You will soon realize that most of the requirements in ing can be understood, developed, and derived from these basic principles and concepts. Then, in turn, you will be able to use professional judgment to apply these basis principles to whatever situation you may encounter.

Professional Judgment Lots of judgment is involved when preparing financial statements.

Judgment is involved when adopting ing policies, making estimates and writing the notes to the financial statements.

Judgment is the ability to make a decision in situations where the answer is not clear-cut. Professional judgment is the ability to make decisions for issues encountered by professionals in carrying out their day-to-day responsibilities. Judgment is a skill developed over many years of study and learning from one’s experiences. Professional judgment is derived from knowledge and experience in the profession. It is not something that is learned from rote or memorization of requirements or answers to certain problems. It often involves making choices between meaningful alternatives and the ability to understand the consequences of one’s actions. In the preparation of financial statements, there are three main areas where judgment needs to be applied. First, ing policies such as when to recognize revenue and whether or not to consolidate a special-purpose entity involve making a decision after considering various methods. The method adopted for a particular company must be appropriate for that company based on its existing situation. For example, if Company A is selling to customers with poor credit history and without obtaining any security for the receivables from these customers, it would be appropriate to recognize revenue when cash is received. If competitors were selling to customers with very high credit ratings, it would be appropriate for them to recognize revenue when the goods are delivered. The professional judgment of an ant will take these factors into consideration and recognize that although one method is appropriate for the competitors, another may be more appropriate for Company A. Second, judgment is involved in making ing estimates of many kinds. What is the estimated useful life of property, plant, and equipment? What is the recoverable amount for goodwill? Will a forward contract be effective as a hedge of expected sales for the next three years? The answers to these questions are not clearly defined. In the classroom, we are usually provided with this information, but in the real world, we must gather data and make our own assessment. Whether we feel that the company can continue as a going concern or not would likely have a material difference on the valuation of goodwill and the bottom line on the income statement. Third judgment is involved in deciding what to disclose and how to disclose it in the notes to the financial statements. For example, in disclosing a contingent liability resulting from a lawsuit, the company could simply say that it has been sued but no provision is made in the financial statements because it feels that the lawsuit has no merit. Or, it could provide details of the lawsuit and give some probabilities of different outcomes in the note. Is there too much latitude in ing? Do the financial statements ever portray the complete facts? One could argue that there is no latitude because ants


13


CHAPTER 1


are not free to randomly select any reporting method. They must represent faithfully what really happened and what really exists using the generally accepted conceptual framework. If the revenue has been earned, then the revenue should be recognized. If the expenditure will provide a future benefit, then the cost of the expenditure should be recognized as an asset. Latitude is necessary so that the ant can choose the methods to reflect the real situation. If the requirements are written too rigidly, companies may be forced to use methods that do not reflect their own situations. If ants take their jobs seriously and have high ethical standards, they will present the financial statements as reliably as possible by using appropriate ing policies, by making the best estimates possible, and by making honest and forthright statements in the notes to the financial statements. They will use judgment to fairly present the financial position and financial performance of the entity. Otherwise, the individual ants and the entire ing profession will lose credibility. In this course, we will have an opportunity to develop our judgment skills and to exercise judgment through the use of cases. The cases provide realistic scenarios where conflicts exist and choices must be made. The answers are not usually clearcut. In fact, different valid answers can be defended. For these cases, it is how you your recommendation that is important, as opposed to what your final recommendation is. You will need to apply basic principles and use judgment to come up with an answer that “tells it how it is” as accurately as possible. In so doing, you will be developing the skills required of a professional ant.

5

Financial statements should present what really happened during the period: that is, they should tell it how it is.

A SURVEY OF INTERNATIONAL ING GAAP have varied in the past from country to country around the world. If a detailed study had been made of the ing practices used by every country in the world, it would probably have concluded that very few countries used exactly the same standards for external financial reporting purposes. Some comparisons would have yielded minor differences; others would have shown substantial ones. Differences existed in terminology and style of presentation, as well as in methods of measurement and disclosure. Differences in measurement ranged from departures to the historical cost principle to varying standards within the historical cost model. A variety of methods existed worldwide for measuring and reporting inventories, research and development costs, fixed assets, leases, computer software, and deferred income taxes. Income-smoothing devices varied from country to country. In Canada and the United States, GAAP allowed little opportunity to smooth income, while in other countries income-smoothing devices were allowed under GAAP or were encouraged by government regulation. This was often accomplished by setting up reserves, which are special equity s, and using them to transfer amounts to and from the statement of comprehensive income as needed. Inadequate disclosures often masked the real effect on yearly income measurements. Asset revaluations have long been acceptable in many countries. Circumstances for these revaluations range from price-level-adjusted historical costs, used to counteract distortions resulting from very high inflation rates, to the regular or periodic adjustment of asset measurements to current replacement costs. Even under historical costs, great variations have existed in yearly measurements. The ing for the asset of goodwill, which arises as a result of one company

In past years, the variety of ing principles being used throughout the world was large.

Asset revaluations have been a common practice in many countries.


14


6

CHAPTER 1

Information disclosed is often more voluminous in other countries than that required in Canada.

Technology has improved the global flow of information.


buying another business, is a prime example. Practices included the immediate write-off of purchased goodwill to equity, capitalization with amortization over greatly varying periods, capitalization without amortization (thus, leaving it on the balance sheet forever), and capitalization and write-off to income only when there was evidence of impairment. Not only were there differences in measurement, but there were often also differences in the presentation and description of elements in financial statements. For example, in many countries, long-term assets were, and continue to be, presented before current assets on the balance sheet, and shareholders’ equity appears before liabilities. Examples of areas where disclosure differences still exist are segment reporting, reporting financial forecasts, shareholder and environmental disclosures, and other value-added information. While many foreign multinational companies disclose the lines of business they are in and the geographical area in which they operate, there is still inconsistency in the level of detail provided. While the provision of financial forecasts is not common in North America, some companies in Europe do provide this information. Foreign companies often provide voluminous disclosures about their shares, shareholders’ rights, and changes in shareholders’ equity. Finally, while this is not required by ing standards, multinational companies are increasingly providing information about environmental safety and protection issues and the ways in which they have added value to society by their distributions to owners, creditors, employees, and governments. Differences in ing standards have always existed, but they have been receiving greater attention in recent years because of the many changes taking place in the world economy. For example, the dismantling of the former Soviet empire has been accompanied by a shift from controlled to market-driven economies, and most of the countries in Europe have ed together to form the European Union (EU). The North American Free Trade Agreement allows the free flow of goods and services among Canada, the United States, and Mexico, and this agreement may soon be expanded to include some countries in South America. In the midst of all this, there have been major advances in computer and communication technology that are dramatically improving the global flow of information and changing how business activities are conducted. As a result, foreign currencies now trade 24 hours a day in the world’s financial centres. Accompanying this shift toward a global marketplace has been substantial growth in the size and number of multinational corporations. This growth has been achieved to a great extent by takeovers and mergers, often financed through the capital markets of many countries. Not only has there been a shift to a global marketplace for goods and services, but there has also been a shift toward a global capital market. Many of the world’s stock exchanges now list foreign companies. There is also considerable activity involving mergers of stock exchanges from different parts of the world. With such a global capital market comes the need to provide the suppliers of capital with useful ing information. Fragmented ing principles seriously compromise comparability, which is one of the key concepts associated with information usefulness. To counter this, securities regulators in foreign countries often require foreign companies listed on their stock exchanges either to prepare financial statements in accordance with their domestic ing standards or to prepare reconciliations from foreign to domestic standards. For example, foreign companies listed on U.S. stock exchanges are required by the Securities and


15


CHAPTER 1

Exchange Commission (SEC) to prepare reconciliations of net income measured in accordance with foreign GAAP to net income in accordance with U.S. GAAP, unless they use the IFRSs issued by the International ing Standards Board (IASB). Prior to the adoption of IFRSs in 2011, Canadian companies that were listed on U.S. stock exchanges also had to prepare these reconciliations. Exhibit 1.1 provides an extract from the 2010 financial statements of Encana Corporation, a leading North American natural gas producer. It shows the reconciliation of net income from Canadian GAAP to U.S. GAAP. It is important to note that Encana’s net income under Canadian GAAP was substantially different from net income under U.S. GAAP. The main difference in the Encana example is the impairment test for property, plant, and equipment. Under U.S. GAAP, future cash flows were based on the average price this past year and were discounted at 10%. Under Canadian GAAP, the future cash flows were based on forecast pricing and were not discounted. The extract below is only a small portion of Note 21. The entire note is seven pages long. It provides narrative explanations of the main reasons for the difference in net income and provides condensed financial statements under U.S. GAAP. With such a significant difference in net income and such extensive note disclosure, it is little wonder that there is pressure to develop one high-quality, worldwide ing standard. These requirements substantially increase a company’s costs of preparing financial statements. Investment analysts and other s then incur further additional costs when interpreting financial statements prepared under different standards. Because of these problems, many countries in the world have either recently adopted, or are seriously considering adopting IFRSs. However, there still are many countries that have not adopted IFRSs and may not ever do so. In order to fully understand the issues and how changes may occur in the future, we must first examine the major causes of differences in GAAP between countries.

EXHIBIT 1.1

7


The SEC requires foreign companies to reconcile their earnings to U.S. GAAP unless they use IFRSs.

Encana reported a significant difference between net earnings under Canadian GAAP and net earnings under U.S. GAAP.

The reconciliation of net income from a foreign country’s GAAP to U.S. GAAP is very costly to prepare.

Extracts (in Part) from Encana’s 2010 Financial Statements

For the years ended December 31 Net Earnings—Canadian GAAP Less: Net Earnings from Discontinued Operations – Canadian GAAP Net Earnings from Continuing Operations – Canadian GAAP Increase (Decrease) in Net Earnings from Continuing Operations under U.S. GAAP: Revenues, net of royalties Operating Depreciation, depletion and amortization istrative Interest, net Foreign exchange (gain) loss, net Stock-based compensation – options Income tax expense (recovery) Net Earnings (Loss) from Continuing Operations – U.S. GAAP Net Earnings (Loss) from Discontinued Operations – U.S. GAAP Net Earnings (Loss) – U.S. GAAP

Note

D ii), H B, D ii) D ii) A G C E

2010

2009

2008

$ 1,499

$ 1,862

$ 5,944

— 1,499

32 1,830

(555) 6,499

— (7) 1,234 (3) — 35 — (415) 2,343 — $ 2,343

— (16) (10,926) 22 — 128 — 3,378 (5,584) 32 $ (5,552)

— (46) (1,755) (27) (3) — 2 695 5,365 (555) $ 4,810

Source: http://www.sec.gov/Archives/edgar/data/1157806/000110465911007980/a11-4497_240f.htm#introduction_143230 Page 46.


16


8

CHAPTER 1


LO2

Factors That Can Influence a Country’s ing Standards Many factors can influence a country’s ing standards. Usually, there is not one dominant factor. The following five factors can affect standards.

The Role of Taxation In some countries, income tax has a minimal effect on how

ing income and taxable income are virtually the same in some countries.

net income is measured for financial reporting. For example, in Canada and the United States, companies often report net incomes on their operating statements that are substantially different from the taxable incomes they report on their tax returns. This has led to the GAAP concept of inter-period tax allocation. However, in some countries where such differences exist, full tax allocation has not always been used. In other countries, taxation has a profound effect on how ing income is measured. ing income will not differ much from taxable income if a country’s tax statutes state that expenses must be recorded on the income statement if they are to be allowed as a deduction on the tax return. In countries where this is the case, the result is often the use of extreme conservatism in ing measurements on the part of companies trying to keep their incomes as low as possible within the law. and Japan are examples of countries whose tax laws have strongly influenced GAAP. In the United States, while taxable income and ing income are different numbers, one area where consistency is required is the costing of inventory. If LIFO (last in, first out) is to be used for tax purposes, it must also be used for financial reporting.

Highly developed capital markets often result in the development of quality ing standards.

The Level of Development of Capital Markets

Code law systems specify what individuals and corporations can do, while common law systems specify what cannot be done.

Differing Legal Systems Two different kinds of legal system are in existence

In countries where publicly traded debt and equity securities play a substantial role in the financing of business activities, ing and disclosure standards tend to be much more extensive than in countries where this is not the case. This is because highly developed public capital markets tend to have fairly sophisticated investors who demand current and useful information from those who have received their capital. Canada, the United Kingdom, and the United States all have highly developed capital markets and strong ing and disclosure standards. In countries where business financing tends to be private rather than public, there is less reliance on extensive ing standards because the private suppliers of capital can demand and receive the information they need directly from the “consumers” of such capital. Japan is a prime example; there, corporate capital needs have been supplied by very large private suppliers, such as banks. However, it should be noted that when Japan’s economy took a severe dive in the 1990s, many of Japan’s major banks incurred massive loan losses that nearly bankrupted them; this was cited as a major contributor to the Japanese recession. and Switzerland also have very large banks that satisfy much of the capital needs of business. Historically, a large number of businesses in Mexico were state owned, but in the 1990s, a change to private ownership resulted in a shift to financing through private and public capital markets.

today: code law systems and common law systems. Code law systems, which originated with the Roman Empire, contain very detailed statutes that govern a wide range of human activities. In general, they specify what individuals and corporations can do. Common law systems have less-detailed statutes and rely on the court


17


CHAPTER 1


system to interpret statutes and thus establish precedents through case law. In general, they specify what individuals and corporations cannot do (i.e., what is illegal). In many common law countries, governments tend to take a hands-off approach to the setting of ing standards. While there may be statutes requiring that companies make information available to the providers of capital, the type of information required is left to the private sector. In the United States, the SEC, which isters securities legislation, has given the right to develop ing standards to a private group, the Financial ing Standards Board (FASB). In Canada, the CICA Handbook pronouncements constitute the ing standards required by the provincial and federal Companies Acts and the Ontario Securities Commission (OSC). The United Kingdom also uses a private standard-setting body. In code law countries such as , , and Japan, the private sector is involved only in an advisory capacity, and ing standards are reflected in legal statutes, often as protection for creditors and other capital suppliers. It should not be surprising to note that tax law also heavily influences ing standards in these countries.

In , , and Japan, ing standards are set by legal statutes.

Ties between Countries Political and economic ties between countries have historically had some effect on ing standards. For example, the ing standards and professional ing organizations of countries that were once colonies are often patterned after those of the “home” country. There have been strong similarities between the standards of India, South Africa, Australia, New Zealand, and Malaysia and those of Great Britain. During their early development, Canadian ing standards were influenced by Great Britain’s, but in later years, this influence shifted away from Britain to the United States due to the very strong economic ties that developed between those two countries. The formation of the European Union has certainly had an effect on the ing standards used by its member countries. We will see more of this later. Inflation Levels The historical cost model, which implicitly assumes a relatively stable unit of measure, is used by many countries. However, the model is not useful when inflation rates are very high. Countries that have experienced high inflation rates often make financial reporting adjustments to counteract the effects of inflation. These adjustments involve price-level-adjusted statements, or a shift from historical costs to current-value ing, or both. Many countries in South America that experienced inflation rates of 1,000% or more per annum in the 1980s and 1990s adopted inflation-based ing. Inflation in most of these South American countries is now more reasonable and inflation ing has been discontinued. Mexico used price-level ing because of high inflation rates from 1983 to 2007. Canada, the United States, and the United Kingdom all experimented with the supplemental reporting of price level and current-value information in the 1970s when the inflation rate approached 20%. The experiment was not successful because of the high cost of providing such information and the general lack of comprehension on the part of financial statement s. All three countries abandoned the experiment when inflation declined.

Toward ing Harmonization and Convergence A truly global economy will require some sort of harmonized ing standards if it is to function properly. Three organizations that have been working

9

High inflation rates often result in departures from historical cost measurements.

The European Union, the IASB, and the FASB have been working toward ing harmonization.


18


10

CHAPTER 1


toward accomplishing this objective are the European Union, the IASB, and the FASB. The role of these three organizations is discussed next.

The use of the euro as a common currency in the European Union has not been a resounding success.

The EU has attempted to harmonize ing standards used by its member countries.

LO3

The European Union In 1957, six European countries signed the Treaty of Rome, thereby establishing a common market for goods and services and common institutions for economic development. Originally called the European Economic Community, it is now called the European Union (EU), which had 27 at the end of 2012.1 A major goal of the EU is the promotion of the free flow of goods, labour, and capital among member countries. In 1998, in order to establish a common economic policy for the area, a European central bank was established, which subsequently issued a common currency called the euro. The intent was that the currencies of the member nations would be gradually phased out with full adoption of this common currency. As of January 1, 2013, only 17 have complied.2 Both Sweden and Denmark held referendums in which their citizens voted to reject the adoption of the euro. The government of the United Kingdom, sensing that a referendum would be defeated, decided to wait until such time that the public mood has changed. A major reason for rejection by these three countries was the fact that they did not wish to individually relinquish their ability to determine economic policy. It was also observed that each country’s economy had performed much better than many of the other EU member countries that had switched their currencies, such as , Italy, and . The credit crisis in Europe in 2011 and 2012 put much strain on the euro and the EU. Greece and Spain received conditional bailouts from the EU in attempts to avoid the complete collapse of the EU. Harsh austerity measures had to be taken by many of the member countries. Time will tell whether the euro and the European Union will survive. The European Union has also attempted to harmonize the ing principles used by its member countries by issuing “directives.” In order to minimize conflict with the legal reporting requirements of certain of its member nations, these directives often allowed many alternative reporting practices. This is particularly true with respect to the first ing directive. The second directive, issued in 1983, requiring the presentation of consolidated financial statements, has had a major impact on the ing of many countries where consolidation was not previously a common practice. While flexibility appears to be contrary to the concept of harmonization, the adoption of the directives has, nevertheless, caused major changes to the ing practices of some of its . The IASB The IASB became operational in 2001 as a result of a major restructuring of its former organization, which was called the International ing Standards Committee (IASC). This committee, based in London, England, was formed in 1973 by an agreement between the professional ing bodies of 10 countries with the purpose of establishing worldwide ing principles. The founding came from Australia, Canada, , , Japan, Mexico, Netherlands, United Kingdom, Ireland, and United States. Over the years, the hip grew such that it represented more than 140 ing


19


CHAPTER 1


100 countries. It should be pointed out, however, that hip in the organization did not translate into the adoption of its standards, and the number of countries actually using IASC standards was a much lower number. Initially, many of the standards issued by the IASC were characterized by the number of acceptable alternatives that were permitted, but in the early 1990s, efforts were made to eliminate many of these alternatives. This initiative was partially successful, but it left a number of standards still allowing alternative treatments. Given that some of the board came from countries whose ing standards are reflected in legal statutes, it is understandable that the removal of alternatives can be a tricky political process requiring compromise. Notwithstanding this difficulty, achieving worldwide ing uniformity will depend greatly on eliminating alternative ing practices. Note that standards issued by the original IASC were issued in numerical order with the prefix IAS, while subsequent standards issued by the IASB were also issued numerically with the prefix IFRS. In future, we will refer to the current collection of international financial reporting standards as IFRSs. For a complete list of IFRSs, see the Table of Contents for Part I of the CICA Handbook. In March 2001, a major restructuring of the IASB was completed, and the board adopted the following major objectives: • To develop a single set of high-quality, global ing standards that require transparent and comparable information in general-purpose financial statements

IASs often allow alternative ing treatments.

The IASB hopes to develop a single set of high-quality, global ing standards that will be adopted by countries around the world.

• To cooperate with various national ing standard setters in order to achieve convergence in ing standards around the world A dictionary meaning of the term converge is “to approach” or “to tend to meet.” The hope of the board is that the appropriate national bodies will adjust their individual standards in such a way that the essence of the IASB standard is achieved, even though the exact wording is not adopted. The IASB is now located in London, England, and has 16 from 13 countries. The are chosen more for their expertise than for geographical representation. However, nine of the are expected to have formal liaison responsibilities with major national standard-setting bodies but must not be actual of such national bodies. Presumably such a liaison will be instrumental in harmonizing the national standards of a very important group of countries with those of the IASB. The number of countries adopting international standards has rapidly increased in recent years. Some of the increase has come from the adoption by those countries that previously had no standards but, because of a shift to a market economy, required new forms of financial reporting. Most of the increase has come from initiatives of the EU and the standard setters from Australia and New Zealand. (These initiatives are fully discussed in the next section.) As of December 2012, more than 100 countries required IFRSs for publicly traded companies, required IFRSs for some companies, or permitted IFRSs to be used by some companies. However, there are still some countries that do not permit the use of IFRSs. See Exhibit 1.2 for a selection of major countries in each of these categories. We expect that the number of countries requiring the use of IFRSs will continue to grow.

11

Companies in over 100 countries are now using IFRSs.


20


12

CHAPTER 1

EXHIBIT 1.2


Use of IFRSs by Major Countries — December 2012 IFRSs Required for All Domestic Listed Companies

Argentina Australia Brazil Canada*

European Union Italy

Other Countries

Status

China India Indonesia Japan Saudia Arabia United States

National standards substantially converged with IFRSs Convergence process ongoing Converging with IFRS Permitted for some international companies Banks and insurance companies listed on the Saudi Stock Exchange must use IFRSs Not permitted for domestic listed companies

Korea Mexico New Zealand

South Africa Russia Turkey

*Some rate regulated companies have been exempted from applying IFRSs and are using U.S. GAAP Source: http://www.ifrs.org/Use-around-the-world/Pages/Use-around-the-world.aspx Source: Copyright © 2012 IFRS FoundationAll rights reserved. Reproduced by McGraw-Hill Ryerson with the permission of the IFRS Foundation ®. No permission granted to third parties to reproduce or distribute

Initiatives from the European Union, Australia, and New Zealand

Public companies in the EU as well as in Australia have been using IFRSs since 2005.

The EU changeover affected more than 8,000 companies.

A major development toward the convergence or harmonization of ing standards throughout the world occurred in 2002 when the European Union issued a directive stating that effective January 1, 2005, all European companies whose shares trade on stock exchanges would be required to prepare their consolidated financial statements in accordance with IFRSs. Two other important developments occurred when Australia switched over to IFRSs in 2005, and New Zealand switched in 2007. It should be noted that while these developments brought 29 countries into the international standards arena, the methods used to do so were different. The standards boards of both Australia and New Zealand issued new domestic standards that were “equivalent to” IFRSs. In Australia’s case, it was announced in 2002 that the Australian ing Standards Board intended to issue new standards that would essentially be the same as IFRSs, effective for all Australian business entities (public or private and incorporated or unincorporated). The issue of new standards was essential because Australian corporate law requires financial reports to comply with Australian ing standards. The standards issued were not identical to IFRSs. In some instances, the new Australian standards restricted the use of the optional provisions allowed in some international standards and in other cases required additional disclosures when international disclosure requirements did not match existing Australian ones. The standards board also indicated that it intends to issue additional standards to cover areas that are purely domestic and not covered by IFRSs. In the EU situation, the directive did not require each of the 27 member countries to change their domestic ing standards but, rather, required all publicly traded companies located in EU countries to prepare their financial statements in accordance with IFRSs. The member states were not all required to issue new standards in such a short period of time but were expected to do so later. Keep in mind that the ing standards of and are set by legislation, and changes to legislation are not made quickly. The EU directive resulted in more than 8,000 listed companies implementing international standards in their 2005 financial reports. In their document,


21


CHAPTER 1


Observations on the Implementation of IFRS3, Ernst and Young provided an overview of how some large multinationals reported their 2005 results using IFRSs. In general, the study concluded that the changeover was successful, even though many companies found that they had to make significant changes in their measurement and disclosure practices. Because IFRSs do not require uniform presentation of the financial statement elements and descriptions, many companies were able to maintain previous presentations that were unique to their particular country. While this helps comparability from a domestic point of view, consistency and comparability are compromised from an international point of view when terminology differences are not understood. In many cases, it was noted that the IFRS statements were far more complex than those based on national standards. Overall, the 2005 statements were 20 to 30% longer than the prior year’s statements and contained far more notes than in prior years. The study questioned whether the overall usefulness of the financial information had been compromised as a result. The study concluded that because IFRSs are broad based, extensive judgment is required in their application, and if judgment is not used on a consistent basis by the preparers of the financial statements in each of the EU countries, comparability could be, and probably is, severely compromised. It should be noted that when IFRSs were adopted by the EU, Australia, and New Zealand, some tailoring of the standards for local conditions was done. For example, the EU standards related to IAS 39: Financial Instruments—Recognition and Measurement are not the same as the IASB standards. As a result, companies must disclose in their financial statements whether they are following the IASB standards or some sort of modified standards. Unless otherwise stated, when we refer to IFRSs in this textbook, we will always be referring to the standards published by the IASB.

IFRSs versus U.S. GAAP ing principles in the United States are set by the FASB, which is a private organization. FASB’s pronouncements are rule based and far more detailed than IFRSs, which are often described as principle-based standards requiring greater application of professional judgment by the preparers and auditors of financial statements. (U.S. public ing firms have often indicated their for the rule-based FASB over principle-based standards.) While the FASB has often indicated its for a single set of global ing standards, it has also stated its belief that its standards are the best in the world and therefore should be used as a benchmark by the IASB. This argument somewhat lost its thrust with the ing scandals associated with companies such as Enron and WorldCom. Despite this setback, FASB still carries a lot of clout, and its cooperation with the IASB is imperative if the goal of common, worldwide standards is to be met. In September 2002, the IASB and the FASB signed the Norwalk Agreement, in which they each acknowledged their commitment to the development of highquality, compatible ing standards that could be used for both domestic and cross-border financial reporting. They pledged to use their best efforts (a) to make their existing financial reporting standards fully compatible as soon as is practicable and (b) to coordinate their future work programs to ensure that once achieved, compatibility is maintained.

13

Significant changes to corporate reporting were the result of the switch to IFRSs.

LO4 FASB’s statements are considered to be rule based, while IFRSs are principle based.

The FASB and the IASB have been trying to converge their standards since 2002.


22


14

CHAPTER 1

The FASB has already revised a number of its standards to be fully consistent with IFRSs.


As part of the Norwalk Agreement, the two boards identified areas where differences could be eliminated in the short term by selecting existing standards from either the IASB or the FASB as the high-quality solution. This project was called the Short Term Convergence Project. By the end of 2009, the FASB issued new or amended standards to converge with IFRSs in the following areas: • Inventory costs: Recognize idle facilities costs, excessive spoilage, double freight, and rehandling costs as current-period expenses. • Asset exchanges: A non-monetary exchange of similar assets must apply the general rules for asset exchange and does not receive special treatment. • ing changes: Reporting the cumulative effect of a change in ing principle in the current-period net income is no longer permissible; retrospective adjustment is now required. • Financial instruments: Require the reporting entity to measure a wide range of financial assets and liabilities at fair value. • Business combination: In-process research and development could be recognized as an asset at the date of acquisition and tested for impairment thereafter. • Subsequent events: The period for subsequent events ends when the financial statements are “available to be issued.”

After much deliberation, the IASB and the FASB issued new but slightly different standards on a t project on business combinations.

The SEC now allows foreign registrants to use IFRSs instead of U.S. GAAP for reporting on U.S. stock exchanges.

In a reciprocal fashion, the IASB issued new or amended standards to converge with the FASB for borrowing costs and segment reporting. In 2006, the FASB and the IASB issued a memorandum of understanding (MOU) setting out the milestones of the FASB-IASB t work program. The first t project on business combinations has been completed, and both boards issued new standards in 2007/2008. Unfortunately, the standards issued by the two boards are not exactly the same, even though the project was carried out tly with the goal of convergence. This underlies a key aspect of convergence. The process of attempting to dissect and eliminate every possible difference that may be experienced in practice is very costly and time consuming, if not impossible. A more effective approach focuses on aligning the general principles and overall methodologies. This is further illustrated in other converged standards such as operating segments and borrowing costs. Although the general principles and overall methodology of these standards are converged, there are still a few differences in the detail. This is an example of the politicization of the standard setting process. We may have been overly optimistic in expecting that convergence would eliminate all differences. Given that companies from the EU had to report under IFRSs, and given that progress was being made on converging IFRSs and U.S. GAAP, there was increasing pressure from the EU to allow its companies to use IFRSs when reporting on American exchanges. As a result, the SEC made a monumental decision to change the requirements for foreign registrants. Commencing in November 2007, foreign registrants could use IFRSs in preparing their financial statements without reconciling them to U.S. GAAP. In order to qualify for this exemption, a foreign private issuer’s financial statements must fully comply with the IASB’s version of IFRSs, with one exception. The exception relates to foreign private issuers that use the version of IFRSs that includes the European Commission’s special rules on financial instruments, which has been referred to as a “carve-out for IAS 39.” The SEC has permitted such issuers to use that version in preparing their financial statements for a two-year period, as long as reconciliation to the


23


CHAPTER 1

IASB’s version of IFRSs is provided. After the two-year period, these issuers had to either use the IASB’s version of IFRSs or provide reconciliation to U.S. GAAP. Barrick Gold Corporation, a Canadian company, is the gold industry leader. It has a portfolio of 26 operating mines and advanced exploration and development projects located across five continents, and large land positions on some of the world’s most prolific and prospective mineral trends. Prior to the adoption of IFRSs in 2011, Barrick, which is listed on a number of U.S. stock exchanges, chose to prepare its financial statements in accordance with U.S. GAAP. When Barrick adopted IFRSs in 2011, it had to apply most of the new ing policies on a retrospective basis; that is, adjust retained earnings at the beginning of 2010 as if the new policies had always been applied. Then, it had to provide reconciliation from U.S. GAAP to IFRSs for 2010 to show the impact of changing to IFRSs and to make the 2010 figures comparable to 2011. Exhibit 1.3 is an extract from Barrick’s 2011 financial statements. See Self-Study Problem 1 for another example of reconciliation between U.S. GAAP and IFRSs.

EXHIBIT 1.3

15


Barrick reported numerous items where there was a difference between U.S. GAAP and IFRSs.

Extracts (in Part) from Barrick’s 2011 Financial Statements

The following is a reconciliation of the company’s total equity reported in accordance with US GAAP to its total equity under IFRS at the transition date of January 1, 2010:

(millions of US$) As reported under US GAAP IFRS 1 Exemptions Deemed cost election for Barrick Energy Reset of pension plan actuarial losses Reset of cumulative translation losses IFRS Policy impacts Capitalized production phase stripping costs Capitalized exploration and evaluation costs Reversal of past impairments Changes in capitalized interest Changes in PER Bifurcation of senior convertible debt Exclusion of time value changes in fair value of options designated as hedging instruments Reclassification of hedge gains to related asset Tax effect of IFRS changes Others, net As reported under IFRS

Ref

Capital Stock

Retained Earnings (Deficit)

Accumulated Other Comprehensive Income (AOCI)

Noncontrolling Other Interests

Total Equity

$

—

$ 484

$ 15,547

—

—

—

(166)

(37)

37

—

—

—

—

(141)

141

—

—

—

(i)

—

408

—

—

—

408

(ii)

—

160

—

—

50

210

(iii) (iv) (v) (vi) (vii)

— — — — —

55 (125) (101) (31) (33)

— — — — 33

— — — 143 —

— — — — —

55 (125) (101) 112 —

(viii)

—

—

(20)

—

—

(20)

(6) 8 $ 17,392

(119) (23) $ (2,535)

(14) — $ 232

— — $ 143

(12) — $ 522

(151) (15) $ 15,754

$ 17,390

$ (2,382)

$ 55

Note 3A (ii) Note 3A (iv) Note 3A (v)

—

(166)

—

Source: http://www.sec.gov/Archives/edgar/data/756894/000119312511115614/dex991.htm Page 70.


24


16

CHAPTER 1

The reconciliation of equity from one GAAP to another GAAP is very costly to prepare.

New standards have been issued by the IASB and the FASB on t projects undertaken under the updated MOU.


It is important to note that total equity under U.S. GAAP was different from total equity under IFRSs. The above extract is only a small portion of Note 3. The entire note is more than four pages long. It provides reconciliations for net income, other comprehensive income, and shareholders’ equity, and provides narrative explanations of the main reasons for the differences. In September 2008, the FASB and the IASB signed an updated MOU that sets out priorities and milestones to be achieved on major t projects by 2011. The boards acknowledged that although considerable progress has been made on a number of designated projects, achievements on other projects have been limited for various reasons. There were differences in views over issues of agenda size and project scope, over the most appropriate approach, and about whether and how similar issues in active projects should be resolved consistently. In April 2009, the leaders of the G20 countries called on FASB and the IASB to work urgently to achieve a single set of high-quality global ing standards. The following table lists the major t projects of the updated MOU and the status as at December 31, 2012. STATUS OF T PROJECTS BETWEEN IASB AND FASB

Progress has been slow in converging U.S. GAAP and IFRSs.

t Project

Project Standards Completed? Converged?

Consolidation

Yes

Yes

New standards, IFRS 10 & IFRS 12, effective 2013

Leases

No

Not yet

New exposure draft issued in 2012

Liabilities and equity

No

Not yet

Paused until completion of other major projects

Fair value measurement guidance

Yes

Yes

New standard, IFRS 13, effective 2013

Post-employment Yes benefits (including pensions)

Yes

Amended IAS 19, effective 2013

Financial statement Partially presentation

Yes for OCI

Amended IAS 1 for presentation of OCI, effective 2012

Status

No for others IASB staff has prepared draft of position paper Revenue recognition

No

Not yet

Issued re-exposure draft in 2011

Derecognition

Yes

Yes

Amended IFRS 7

Financial instruments

Partially

Yes

Classification and measurement of financial assets and liabilities in IFRS 9, effective 2015

No

Major differences still outstanding and being debated

Yes

New standard, IFRS 11, effective 2013

t ventures

Yes


25


CHAPTER 1


Although some progress was made on these major projects, it has been slow, and there is still considerable work to be done. The project on financial instruments is the most troublesome. The two boards’ efforts to improve and achieve convergence of their standards have been complicated by differing imperatives that pushed their development timetables out of alignment. The IASB has been replacing its financial instrument requirements in a phased approach, whereas the FASB has been developing a single comprehensive proposal. Those differing development timetables and other factors have contributed to the boards reaching differing conclusions on a number of important technical issues. Each board will publish its proposals along with those of the other board as a way of giving interested parties the opportunity to compare and assess the relative merits of both boards’ proposals. The boards will consider together the comment letters and other they receive in an effort to reconcile differences in ways that foster improvement and convergence. The projects for leases and revenue recognition are still being worked on tly. However, getting consensus from stakeholders is proving to be difficult. A second exposure draft was issued on revenue recognition late in 2011 and on leases in 2012. If and when these t projects are completed, attention will be directed to other areas. These ts projects were the priority items identified by the two boards in 2006. There are still hundreds of differences between U.S. GAAP and IFRSs. The Big Four ing firms have all published documents comparing IFRSs and U.S. GAAP. Many of these documents are available on their websites. Exhibit 1.4 lists some of these differences in areas that may have

EXHIBIT 1.4

17

By identifying differences between U.S. GAAP and IFRSs, we can identify the standards that are most likely to change in the next few years.

Some Key Differences between IFRSs and U.S. GAAP

ing Item

IFRSs

U.S. GAAP

Conceptual Framework

Framework provides authoritative guidance, and the concepts are applied when there is no standard or interpretation that specifically applies to a transaction, other event, or condition

Concepts provide guidance for development of future standards but are not authoritative in and by themselves

LIFO cannot be used Net realizable value is used for market value

LIFO can be used Market value is replacement cost but not greater than net realizable value and not less than net realizable value less normal profit margin

Can be revalued to fair value with adjustment to OCI and with depreciation based on revalued amount Must split asset into major components and depreciate over lives of separate components

Must be measured at cost less accumulated depreciation

Inventory Costing method Lower of cost or market

Property, Plant, and Equipment Revaluation option

Componentization of depreciation

Do not need to split capital assets into major components when calculating depreciation expense

(continued)


26


18

CHAPTER 1

EXHIBIT 1.4


(continued )

Asset Impairment Test for impairment when indicators require it

Subsequent reversal of an impairment loss

Asset’s carrying amount exceeds the higher of its (1) value in use (discounted expected future cash flows) and (2) fair value less costs of disposal Required if indicators change

Asset’s carrying amount exceeds the undiscounted expected future cash flows from the asset

Capitalized if certain criteria are met

Expensed immediately (except computer software development)

Recognized immediately

Amortized over the lease term

Recognize revenue using probabilities to calculate an expected value Defer revenue until performance criterion is met related to loyalty award

Recognize revenue only when contingency is resolved Either defer as under IFRS or recognize revenue on delivery of main goods while accruing the cost of delivering the loyalty award

Not allowed

Research and Development Costs Development costs

Leases Recognition of gain on sale and leaseback on an operating lease

Revenue Recognition Contingencies associated with price Customer loyalty programs

In 2008, the SEC released a roap for possible adoption of IFRSs by U.S. public companies by 2014.

been studied in previous courses. Other differences will be listed in the U.S. GAAP “Differences” section at the end of each chapter in this text. If all of these standards are to be converged over the next few years, we can expect many changes. By noting these differences, we can get a sense of what standards may change. With the movement to IFRSs as the international standard, and due to the high cost of reconciling to and from U.S. GAAP, there is increasing pressure on the SEC to allow U.S. domestic issuers to prepare financial statements in accordance with IFRSs. In a significant step toward that objective, in 2008, the SEC issued a roap for possible adoption of IFRSs by domestic issuers as early as 2014. In the roap, the SEC acknowledges that IFRSs have the potential to become the global set of high-quality ing standards and sets out the seven milestones shown below that, if achieved, could lead to mandatory adoption of IFRSs. Milestones 1–4 identified the following issues that needed to be addressed before mandatory adoption of IFRS: 1. Improvements in ing standards (i.e., IFRSs). 2. Funding and ability of the International ing Standards Committee Foundation. 3. Improvement in the ability to use interactive data (e.g., XBRL) for IFRS reporting. 4. Education and training on IFRSs in the United States. Milestones 5–7 identified the transition plan for mandatory use of IFRSs.


27


CHAPTER 1


19

In July 2012, the SEC staff issued a report on the IFRS work plan. The report summarized the SEC’s efforts in advancing the potential adoption of IFRSs in the U.S. and noted some key findings as follows: • The standards that are issued by the IASB are generally perceived to be of high quality by the global financial reporting community, but there are areas that are not addressed by IFRSs that may be important to the U.S. marketplace, including ing for the extractive industries, insurance, and rate-regulated entities. • The IFRS Interpretations Committee (IFRS IC) should do more to address practice issues on a timely basis.

In 2012, the SEC issued a report that commented positively on the work done by the IASB in developing high quality standards but that much more must be done to satisfy the SEC.

• The IASB should consider placing greater reliance on national standard setters to assist with individual projects. • Global application of IFRSs and cooperation among regulators could be improved with an objective to reduce diverse practices. • The overall design of the governance structure of the IFRS Foundation appears to strike a reasonable balance of providing oversight of the IASB while ing its independence; however, additional mechanisms such as maintaining an active FASB to endorse IFRSs may be necessary to protect the U.S. capital markets. • The IFRS Foundation has made progress in developing a funding mechanism that is broad based, compelling, open ended, and country specific. However, more needs to be done to reduce reliance on voluntary contributions from the large ing networks and to obtain a funding mechanism for the U.S. portion of the IASB budget. • U.S. investors’ current understanding of IFRSs varies significantly. The SEC staff invited constituents to provide on its final report but did not specify a submission deadline. Additional analysis and consideration will need to be done before the Commission would make any decision. The next steps and timing of future action were not announced by the staff or the Commission. Therefore, it is still not known if and when the U.S. will adopt IFRSs for use by public companies in the United States.

Where Is Canada Going?

LO5

Prior to 2000, the CICA Handbook did not have separate parts for public versus private corporations. Most sections applied equally to all entities. In 2002, differential reporting was introduced into the Handbook. Under differential reporting, qualifying entities could choose between different ing policies for selected sections of the Handbook. It allowed qualifying entities to adopt simpler and less costly policies. This was the first step to customizing ing standards for different types of entities. At the end of 2012, there were five parts of the CICA Handbook. The following table indicates to whom the different parts apply and the effective dates: Part #

Applicable to

Name for Standards

Effective Date*

I

Publicly able entities

IFRSs

II III IV V

Private enterprises

ASPE

January 1, 2011, with some exceptions January 1, 2011

Pre-Changeover GAAP

January 1, 2012 January 1, 2011 Until new parts adopted

Not-for-profit organizations Pension plans All entities not yet using other parts

As of January 2013, the SEC has not made a commitment as to when, if ever, it would allow U.S. companies to report in accordance with IFRSs.

*The standards are effective for fiscal periods beginning on or after the dates indicated in the table.


28


20

CHAPTER 1


The next few sections describe a bit of the history behind the development of different standards for different entities and the choices available for these entities in applying the different parts of the CICA Handbook. At one time, Canada intended to harmonize its standards with those of the United States.

Canadian publicly able enterprises had to report under IFRSs starting in 2011.

GAAP for Publicly able Enterprises Public companies seemed to be moving toward American ing standards when in 1998 the CICA announced that it would work with the FASB to harmonize the ing standards of the United States and Canada, at the same time encouraging the IASB in its efforts to develop global ing standards. The concept of harmonization would probably have proven to be a fairly difficult one because Canadian ing standards tend to be broad based, while American standards tend to be based on detailed rules. This problem was alleviated when the CICA’s position changed in 2006 with the announcement of the adoption of a strategic plan that would see the harmonization of the CICA Handbook with IFRSs for publicly able enterprises. A publicly able enterprise (PAE) is defined as an entity other than a not-for-profit organization or a government or another entity in the public sector that (i) has issued, or is in the process of issuing, debt or equity instruments that are, or will be, outstanding and traded in a public market (a domestic or foreign stock exchange or an over-the-counter market, including local and regional markets), or (ii) holds assets in a fiduciary capacity for a broad group of outsiders as one of its primary businesses.

Part I of the CICA Handbook contains the IFRSs.

IFRSs allow the use of fair values and optional treatments to a greater degree than pre-changeover Canadian GAAP (Part V of the CICA Handbook).

Banks, credit unions, insurance companies, securities brokers or dealers, mutual funds, and investment banks typically meet the second of these criteria. Other entities may also hold assets in a fiduciary capacity for a broad group of outsiders because they hold and manage financial resources entrusted to them by clients, customers, or not involved in the management of the entity. However, if an entity does so for reasons incidental to one of its primary businesses (as, for example, may be the case for some travel or real estate agents, or cooperative enterprises requiring a nominal hip deposit), it is not considered to be publicly able. Harmonization was chosen instead of the simple adoption of the international standards because security regulations and federal and provincial Companies Acts require financial reporting to be in accordance with Canadian GAAP. Because of this requirement, Part I of the CICA Handbook now contains standards that are the same as IFRSs. Rather than always referring to Part I of the Handbook, we will simply refer to IFRSs. Commencing in 2011, Canadian publicly able enterprises had to report under IFRSs. The IFRSs were quite similar to Canadian standards prior to the adoption of the international standards because they are based on similar conceptual frameworks and reach similar conclusions. However, there were many differences in the detailed requirements. IFRSs often allow for optional treatments and in some instances allow or require the use of fair values in financial statement measurements, whereas Canadian standards did not


29


CHAPTER 1


21

often allow optional treatments and tended to require more historical cost measurements. Much time, energy, and resources had to be devoted to identify the differences and prepare for the changeover to international standards. In 2010, the entities had to gather data for reporting under both pre-changeover Canadian GAAP and IFRSs because their 2011 statements had to present both the current year and comparative amounts for the previous year under IFRSs.

Disclosure Requirements The disclosure requirements when adopting IFRSs for the first time are quite extensive. The following summarizes the main disclosures required by IFRS 1: • Reconciliations of its equity reported in accordance with previous GAAP to its equity in accordance with IFRSs for both of the following dates: • the date of transition to IFRSs; and • the end of the latest period presented in the entity’s most recent annual financial statements in accordance with previous GAAP.

Reconciliations of equity and comprehensive income had to be provided when a Canadian company adopted IFRSs for the first time.

• Reconciliation to its total comprehensive income in accordance with IFRSs for the latest period in the entity’s most recent annual financial statements. • Sufficient detail to enable s to understand the material adjustments to the statement of financial position, statement of comprehensive income and statement of cash flows. Exhibit 1.5 is an extract from the financial statements for Kinross Gold Corporation, a Canadian company engaged in gold mining and related activities. It shows the impact on the company’s Canadian GAAP balance sheet as a result of adopting IFRSs. It shows the adjustments in dollar values and the changes in classification and titles on the balance sheet. A similar reconciliation was provided for the statement of operations. Explanations of the impact of the adjustments were provided in the explanatory notes following the reconciliations.

GAAP for Private Enterprises In the 1970s, there was considerable discussion in Canada of Big GAAP versus Little GAAP. The question was as follows: Should there be different standards for big companies and for little companies? It was argued that ing standards were becoming increasingly complex and that a small company’s costs of preparing its financial statements in compliance with the standards were greater than the benefits received by the s of such statements. Hence, small companies should be granted some sort of relief from having to use complex and hard-to-understand standards. Counter arguments suggested that the concept of fair presentation and comparability could not be achieved with different sets of standards, and the dividing line between big and small would be too arbitrary to be useful. After much study and discussion, the concept of Big GAAP/Little GAAP was abandoned. In the meantime, the issuance of new, complex financial reporting standards continued, and the last straw, so to speak, was the issuance of both the section on presentation and disclosure of financial instruments and the exposure draft on the

The balance sheet presentation under IFRSs is very similar, but not exactly the same, as the presentation under prechangeover Canadian GAAP.

The cost-benefit constraint is used when determining whether a private enterprise can use simpler reporting methods.

30

22 KINROSS’S GOLD CORPORATION RECONCILIATION OF CONDENSED CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET At January 1, 2010 (Unaudited and expressed in millions of United States dollars) CDN IFRS CDN GAAP s GAAP Adjustments Assets Current assets Cash, cash equivalents and short-term investments Restricted Cash s receivable and other assets Inventories Unrealized fair value of derivative assets

Property, plant, and equipment Goodwill Long-term investments Unrealized fair value of derivative assets Deferred charges and other long-term assets

Reclassifications

IFRS

IFRS s

(35.0)

$ 597.4

Assets Current assets Cash and cash equivalents

135.5

— — —

— 35.0 —

24.3 35.0 135.5

Restricted cash Short-term investments s receivable and other assets

554.4 44.3

— —

— —

554.4 44.3

Inventories Unrealized fair value of derivative assets

1,390.9

—

—

1,390.9

4,989.9 1,179.9 292.2

(153.2) — 16.3 — — —

— — (150.7) 150.7 — —

4,836.7 1,179.9 157.8 150.7 1.9 158.4

$ 632.4

$

24.3

1.9 158.4 $ 8,013.2

$

—

(136.9)

$

$

—

$ 7,876.3

Non-current assets Property, plant, and equipment Goodwill Long-term investments Investments in associates and Working interest Unrealized fair value of derivative assets Deferred charges and other long-term assets


Extracts (in Part) from Kinross 2011 Financial Statements


EXHIBIT 1.5

CDN GAAP s

IFRS s

(24.4) 24.4 — —

$ 287.6 24.4 177.0 17.1

Liabilities Current liabilities s payable and accrued liabilities Current tax payable Current portion of long-term debt Current portion of provisions

83.6

—

214.6

638.0

82.7

—

720.7

Long-term debt

515.2

Other long-term liabilities Future income and mining taxes

543.0 624.6

(39.4) 169.0 77.2 — (390.3)

— 279.5 212.8 (492.3) —

475.8 448.5 290.0 50.7 234.3

2,320.8

(100.8)

132.9

—

—

—

(132.9)

(68.8)

—

6,379.3

169.6 (838.1) (220.1)

(62.2) 97.5 1.7

— — —

107.4 (740.6) (218.4)

5,559.5

(31.8) (4.3) (36.1)

— 132.9 132.9

5,527.7 128.6 5,656.3

$ 8,013.2

$

(136.9)

$

—

Non-current liabilities Long-term debt Provisions Unrealized fair value of derivative liabilities Other long-term liabilities Deferred tax liabilities

2,220.0

6,448.1

5,559.5

Current portion of unrealized fair value of derivative liabilities

$ 7,876.3

Source: http://www.sec.gov/Archives/edgar/data/701818/000104746911004489/a2203873zex-99_1.htm Page 100.

Equity Common shareholders’ equity Common share capital and common share purchase warrants Contributed surplus Accumulated deficit Accumulated other comprehensive loss

Non-controlling interest


131.0

Common shareholders’ equity Common share capital and common share purchase warrants Contributed surplus Accumulated deficit Accumulated other comprehensive loss

$

IFRS

177.0 17.1


$

Reclassifications

(0.9) — — —

Current portion of long-term debt Current portion of reclamation and remediation obligations Current portion of unrealized fair value of derivative liabilities

$ 312.9

IFRS Adjustments


Liabilities Current liabilities s payable and accrued liabilities

CDN GAAP

31

23


32


24

CHAPTER 1


related measurement issues in the early 1990s. The issue of different standards was revisited by a CICA task force, but this time in relation to public versus nonpublic companies. The task force considered two basic approaches: • A non-GAAP approach whereby non-public companies could use ing policies completely separate from GAAP. An example is the use of cash-basis reporting instead of the required accrual basis. This approach was abandoned mainly because provincial and federal Companies Acts require companies to prepare financial statements in accordance with the CICA Handbook. Companies were following GAAP when they adopted differential reporting options.

• A GAAP approach. This was looked at from two perspectives: full differentiation and partial differentiation. Full differentiation would encom two distinct sets of GAAP, somewhat similar to the ing for non-profit organizations and governments (discussed in Chapter 12). Partial differentiation encomes one set of ing standards with different treatments. This latter approach was adopted in 2002 when Section 1300, Differential Reporting, was issued and certain sections of the CICA Handbook were amended to allow optional treatments. Section 1300 allowed a qualifying enterprise to select which reporting options it would apply when it prepared its financial statements. The differential reporting options allowed were contained in individual Handbook sections, and only a few sections contained such options. Section 1300 was a part of the Handbook and was considered a primary source of GAAP. When a company adopted one or more of the differential reporting options, it was still considered to be following GAAP. In 2006, when the decision was made by the ing Standards Board (AcSB) to adopt IFRSs for publicly able enterprises commencing in 2011, a CICA task force was established to revisit the question of what standards should be applied to private companies. The task force considered three different approaches: • A non-GAAP approach, whereby private companies could use a more simplified method of reporting than what was presently required under differential reporting. • A GAAP approach based on requirements being developed by IASB for small and medium-sized enterprises. • A GAAP approach by developing a separate part of the CICA Handbook dedicated solely to private enterprises.

Part II of the CICA Handbook contains GAAP for private enterprises.

After much discussion and input from interested stakeholders, in 2009, the Canadian AcSB chose the third approach. These standards are included in Part II of the Handbook and are referred to as ing Standards for Private Enterprises (ASPE). A private enterprise is defined as a profit-oriented enterprise that (a) has not issued, and is not in the process of issuing, debt or equity instruments that are, or will be, outstanding and traded in a public market (a domestic or foreign stock exchange or an over-the-counter market, including local and regional markets), and (b) does not hold assets in a fiduciary capacity for a broad group of outsiders as one of its primary businesses. The standards are available to any private enterprise. No size threshold or other barriers such as unanimous consent by shareholders or other s will be


33


CHAPTER 1


imposed. The standards stand alone (i.e., private enterprises applying them are not required to refer to standards applicable to publicly able enterprises). Private enterprises may adopt either ASPE (Part II) or IFRSs (Part I). Whichever set of standards is adopted, it must be the whole package. It is not possible to apply certain standards from ASPE and others from IFRSs. Some private companies may choose to follow GAAP for public companies for the following reasons:

25

Private enterprises can either report under IFRSs or ASPE.

• The company may be of a similar size to certain public companies, and the s of its financial statements may insist on IFRSs so that the company can be compared with other public companies. • The company may be planning to go public in the near future. • A parent company uses IFRSs. Prior to 2009, the IASB did not have any special standards for private enterprises. In response to strong international demand from both developed and emerging economies for a rigorous and common set of ing standards for smaller and medium-sized businesses, the IASB developed a separate set of standards for use by small and medium-sized entities (SMEs), which are estimated to represent more than 95% of all companies. The IFRS for SMEs is a self-contained standard of about 230 pages (about 10% the size of IFRSs for public companies) tailored to the needs and capabilities of smaller businesses. Many of the principles for recognizing and measuring assets, liabilities, income, and expenses for the IFRSs required for public companies have been simplified, topics not relevant to SMEs have been omitted, and the number of required disclosures has been significantly reduced. To further reduce the reporting burden for SMEs, revisions to the IFRSs for SMEs will be limited to once every three years. The IFRS for SMEs • provides improved comparability for s of financial statements, • enhances the overall confidence in the s of SMEs and • reduces the significant costs involved in maintaining standards on a national basis. For now, Canada has developed and will maintain its own standards for private enterprises. Canadian public companies cannot use IFRS for SMEs. It is possible that it could adopt IFRS for SMEs sometime in the future. For the next ten chapters, we will concentrate on IFRSs throughout the main body of each chapter. At the end of each chapter, we will summarize the main differences in the standards for private enterprises as compared with the standards for publicly able enterprises. To avoid information overload, we will not compare the Canadian standards for private enterprises to the IFRSs for SMEs.

GAAP for Not-for-Profit Organizations Prior to segmentation of the CICA Handbook into five parts, the Handbook had a series of sections, the 4400 series, dedicated to not-for-profit organizations (NFPOs). Many of the other Handbook sections were also applicable to NFPOs. With the adoption of IFRSs for public companies and ASPE for private enterprises, a decision had to be made as to how to service the NFPOs. In December 2008, the AcSB and the Public Sector ing Board (PSAB) tly issued an Invitation to Comment, Financial Reporting by Not-For-Profit Organizations. In December 2010, the final standards for NFPOs were released.

The IASB has also developed a self-contained set of standards for small and medium-sized businesses.


34


26

CHAPTER 1


Non-government NFPOs can either report under IFRSs or Part III of the CICA Handbook, combined with relevant sections from Part II of the Handbook.

Cautionary Note: Unless otherwise stated, assume that IFRSs should be applied when answering end-of-chapter material.

As part of this process, the not-for-profit (NFP) sector was divided into two sectors: the government NFP sector and the non-government NFP sector. The government NFP sector includes NFPOs that are controlled by the government. They have a choice to follow either the 4200 series of the CICA Public Sector ing (PSA) Handbook or the PSA Handbook without the 4200 series. The non-government NFP sector includes NFPOs that are not controlled by the government. They have a choice to follow either IFRSs (which do not currently contain any standards specifically tailored for NFPOs) or Part III of the CICA Handbook. An NFPO applying Part III of the Handbook also applies the standards for private enterprises in Part II, to the extent that the Part II standards address topics not addressed in Part III. Part III carries forward the 4400 series of sections from the pre-changeover Handbook, largely without change. Five new sections were added. They contain relevant material from Part II that the AcSB deemed necessary to clarify their applicability to NFPOs. The ing standards for NFPOs will be discussed and illustrated in Chapter 12.

GAAP for Government and Other Government Organizations All levels of government should follow the PSA Handbook. Government business enterprises are expected to follow IFRSs. Other government organizations can either follow IFRSs or the PSA Handbook. The ing standards for government entities are summarized in the appendix for chapter 12. The following table summarizes the standards required or allowed for different types of Canadian organizations: Type of Organization

Standards Required or Allowed

Publicly able organization Private enterprise Non-governmental NFPO Governmental NFPO

IFRSs (Part I) IFRSs (Part I) or ASPE (Part II) IFRSs (Part I) or Standards for NFPOs (Part III) PSA Handbook with 4200 series or 4200 series in PSA Handbook PSA Handbook IFRSs (Part I) IFRSs (Part I) or PSA Handbook Standards for Pension Plans (Part IV)

Government Government business enterprise Other government organization Pension plan The entity should specify in the notes to the financial statements the part of the Handbook being used for reporting purposes.

LO6

By using the above noted standards, the organization is considered to be following GAAP. In choosing between the various options, the organization would consider the needs of the s of their financial statements and the comparability of the organization with counterparts in the private or the public sector. In the notes to the financial statements, the set of standards being used should be explicitly stated.

ANALYSIS AND INTERPRETATION OF FINANCIAL STATEMENTS We have seen many examples in this chapter of differences in ing and reporting practices. U.S. GAAP is different from IFRSs. ASPE is different from IFRSs. The CICA Public Sector ing (PSA) Handbook is different from Parts I,


35


CHAPTER 1


II, or III of the CICA Handbook. With all of these differences, is there an opportunity for a company to manipulate its financial statements by choosing policies to produce desirable results? Do financial analysts know that these choices exist in ing? Do they understand the impact of the different ing methods on the financial statements? These questions point out the importance of disclosing ing policies in the notes to the financial statements. This will allow s to determine whether or not the same policies are being used by different entities and whether adjustments must be made to make the statements comparable from one entity to the next. At the end of every chapter, there is a section on analysis and interpretation of financial statements. It reminds the reader that different ing methods will have an impact on the financial statements. In turn, the different methods will have an impact on the ratios used by analysts in evaluating an entity. As preparers and s of financial statements, we should understand the impact of ing methods on the financial statements. In this text, we will focus on the following key ratios: Ratio

Formula

What is measured

Current ratio

Current assets Current liabilities Total debt Shareholders’ equity Income before interest & taxes Total assets Net income Shareholders’ equity

Liquidity; i.e., ability to pay short term obligations as they come due Solvency; i.e., ability to pay all debt as it comes due Profitability of assets

Debt-to-equity ratio Return on assets Return on equity

27

Different ing methods have different impacts on key financial statement ratios.

Profitability of owners’ investment

These ratios have been covered in previous courses in ing. They are summarized above for ease of reference. When asked to indicate the impact on these ratios, be sure to always consider and/or comment on the impact on both the numerator and denominator. For the denominator for the return ratios, it is more appropriate to use average balances for the year because the assets or equity likely changed during the year. However, many analysts use balances at the end of the year because it is simpler. To make the expectations clear for the end-ofchapter problems, we will use average in the ratio—that is, return on average equity—when we want you to use average of opening and closing balances in your calculation. If we simply use return on equity, you should use the balance at the end of the year in your calculation of the ratio. See Self-Study Problem 2 for a good illustration of the impact of ing policies on key financial ratios.

When determining the impact on ratios of changes in reporting methods, we must consider the impact on both the numerator and the denominator.

ASPE Differences

LO7

Some of differences between IFRSs and ASPE in topics discussed in intermediate ing are listed in Exhibit 1.6.

ASPE sometimes allow a choice between different reporting methods.


36


28

CHAPTER 1

EXHIBIT 1.6


Some Key Differences between IFRSs and ASPE

ing Item

IFRSs

ASPE

Disclosure

Very extensive for many items, especially financial instruments, post-employment benefits, and segment reporting Discount future cash flows using original discount rate

Moderate for financial instruments and post-employment benefits, and no disclosure for segments

Can be revalued to fair value with adjustment to OCI and with depreciation based on revalued amount

Must be measured at cost less accumulated depreciation

Asset’s carrying amount exceeds the higher of its (1) value in use (discounted expected future cash flows) and (2) fair value less costs of disposal Required if indicators change

Asset’s carrying amount exceeds the undiscounted expected future cash flows from the asset. If so, write asset down to fair value.

Capitalize if certain criteria are met

Choice between capitalize, if criteria met, or expense

Recognize immediately in OCI Set up deferred income taxes as applicable Capitalize if certain criteria are met Allocate between debt and equity

Recognize immediately in net income Choice between taxes payable or future income tax methods Choice between capitalize or expense Can choose to allocate a nominal amount to equity Record as equity unless redemption demanded

Impaired loans Property, plant, & equipment Revaluation option

Asset impairment Test for impairment if indicator requires

Subsequent reversal of impairment loss Development costs Post-employment benefits Actuarial gains/losses Income taxes Interest capitalization Compound financial instrument Preferred shares in tax planning arrangement

Assess whether debt or equity

Discount future cash flows using current rate of interest

Not allowed

SUMMARY The diversity among the ing principles in use throughout the world has long been viewed as a major stumbling block toward achieving the desired goal of a truly global capital market. The IASB has attempted to narrow this diversity by issuing a set of international standards, with the intent that they will be adopted worldwide. While a great deal of progress has been made, the goal of global harmonization and/ or convergence has not yet been fully reached. Over 100 countries have adopted these standards, but the United States is still not on board. The United States is lobbying the IASB to incorporate some of the American standards in IFRSs as a condition for their adoption of IFRSs. However, there is often a clash between the rule-based standards used in the United States and the more principle-based approach used in IFRSs. Even if this problem is solved, absolute comparability of financial information on a worldwide basis is still going to be difficult to achieve. There is a problem of consistency in the interpretation of the standards by preparers of financial

McGraw-Hill Create™ Review Copy for Instructor [NOT SPECIFIED]. Not for distribution. Modern Advanced ing in Canada, Seventh Edition

CHAPTER 1


37

29

statements because these standards are broad based and require professional judgment. An additional problem is created by the fact that some countries are adopting IFRSs but are making certain modifications and still calling them IFRSs. Other countries are adding additional home-grown standards to their own standards to make them more comparable with IFRSs. Readers of the financial statements of companies from these countries will have to understand where the differences lie if they wish to make realistic comparisons with companies in other countries. Canadian public companies were required to adopt IFRSs starting in 2011, and Canadian private enterprises were required to adopt ASPE starting in 2011. The standards for NFPOs were modified slightly and were effective in 2012. Needless to say, a great deal is changing. Lots of work was required to change over to the new standards. Further changes can be expected over the next few years as IFRSs and U.S. GAAP converge.

Significant Changes in GAAP in the Last Three Years 1. Publicly able enterprises made the transition to and started reporting under IFRSs. 2. Differential reporting was withdrawn for private enterprises on the adoption of ASPE. 3. FASB has announced that IFRSs may be required by U.S. companies by 2016.

Changes Expected in GAAP in the Next Three Years 1. The format and structure of financial statements may change to present a cohesive relationship between the various statements. There would be separate sections for operating, investing, and financing activities in each of the balance sheet, statement of comprehensive income, and cash flow statement. The classification of assets and liabilities in the balance sheet would determine the classification of any related income or expense in the statement of comprehensive income, and any related cash flows in the cash flow statement. There may be further disaggregation of assets and liabilities into current and non-current and then according to the measurement basis used. There would be further disaggregation of expenses by function and then by nature. Discontinued operations and income taxes would be presented separately in each of the statements. 2. The SEC will announce a framework for transitioning to IFRSs for U.S. companies. 3. The definitions of assets and liabilities may change to focus more on rights and obligations and to eliminate the reference to past events. The when and how of use of the various measurement bases may be clarified.

S ELF- STUDY PROBLEM 1 LO4, 6

Hyde Ltd. is an EU-based company that prepares its consolidated financial statements in accordance with IFRSs. Its profit in Year 3 was $1,000,000, and shareholders’ equity at December 31, Year 3, was $8,000,000. Hyde wishes to list its shares on a U.S. stock exchange. Although no longer required to do so, Hyde has decided to provide a U.S. GAAP reconciliation voluntarily, and has engaged you to reconcile profit and shareholders’ equity to a


38


30

CHAPTER 1


U.S. GAAP basis. You have identified the following five areas in which Hyde’s ing principles differ from U.S. GAAP: 1. Inventory—lower of cost or market 2. Property, plant, and equipment—measurement subsequent to initial recognition 3. Research and development costs—capitalization of development costs 4. Sale and leaseback transaction—gain on sale 5. Property, plant, and equipment—impairment Hyde provides the following information with respect to each of these ing differences.

Inventory At the end of Year 3, inventory had a historical cost of $20,000, a replacement cost of $18,000, a net realizable value of $19,000, and a normal profit margin of 20% of cost.

Property, Plant, and Equipment Hyde acquired equipment at the beginning of Year 2 at a cost of $250,000. The equipment has an estimated useful life of 10 years and an estimated residual value of $50,000 and is being depreciated on a straight-line basis. At the beginning of the current year, the equipment was appraised and determined to have a fair value of $320,000; its estimated useful life and residual value did not change. The company uses the allowed alternative treatment in IAS 16 to periodically revalue the equipment at fair value subsequent to acquisition. The revaluation adjustment goes through OCI.

Research and Development Costs Hyde incurred research and development costs of $100,000 in Year 3. Of this amount, 60% related to development activities subsequent to the point at which criteria indicating that the creation of an intangible asset had been met. As of yearend, development of the new product had not been completed.

Sale and Leaseback In January Year 1, Hyde realized a $150,000 gain on the sale and leaseback of an office building. The lease is ed for as an operating lease and the term of the lease is five years.

Property, Plant, and Equipment Hyde owns machinery on December 31, Year 3, with a carrying amount of $20,000, an estimated salvage value of $2,000, and an estimated remaining useful life of 10 years. On that date, there is an indication that the machinery may be impaired. The machinery is expected to generate future cash flows of $22,500 and has an estimated fair value, after deducting costs to sell, of $18,000. The present value of expected future cash flows is $18,600.

Required: Prepare a schedule reconciling IFRS profit and IFRS shareholders’ equity to a U.S. GAAP basis. Ignore income taxes.


39


CHAPTER 1

S OLUTION

TO


31

SELF-STUDY PROBLEM 1 Hyde Ltd. Reconciliation from IFRSs to U.S. GAAP Profit under IFRSs Adjustments: Additional write-down of inventory to replacement cost (Note 1) Reversal of additional depreciation on revaluation of equipment (Note 2) Reversal of deferred development costs (Note 3) Amortization of deferred gain on sale and leaseback (Note 4) Reversal of impairment loss (Note 5) Profit under U.S. GAAP

$1,000,000 (1,000) 10,000 (60,000) 30,000 1,400 $ 980,400

$8,000,000 Shareholders’ equity under IFRSs Adjustments: Additional write-down of inventory to replacement cost (Note 1) (1,000) Reversal of revaluation surplus on equipment (Note 2) (90,000) Reversal of accumulated depreciation on revaluation of equipment (Note 2) 10,000 Reversal of deferred development costs (Note 3) (60,000) Reversal of gain on sale and leaseback in Year 1 (Note 4) (150,000) Accumulated amortization of deferred gain on sale and leaseback 90,000 (Year 1–Year 3) (Note 4) 1,400 Reversal of impairment loss (Note 5) $7,800,400 Shareholders’ equity under U.S. GAAP

Notes: 1. Inventory In accordance with IAS 2, the company reports inventory on the statement of financial position at the lower of cost ($20,000) and net realizable value ($19,000). As a result, it reported inventory on the December 31, Year 3, statement of financial position at its net realizable value of $19,000, and profit reflected a loss on write-down of inventory of $1,000. Under U.S. GAAP, the company reports inventory at the lower of cost or market, with market defined as replacement cost ($18,000) but not greater than net realizable value ($19,000), and not less than net realizable value less a normal profit ($19,000 2 20% 3 $20,000 5 $15,000). In this case, inventory would be written down to replacement cost. A $2,000 loss would be included in Year 3 profit. U.S. GAAP profit is $1,000 less than IFRS profit. U.S. GAAP retained earnings are lower by the same amount. 2. Property, Plant, and Equipment Under IAS 16, depreciation expense on equipment in Year 2 was $20,000 ([$250,000 2 $50,000]/ 10 years), resulting in a carrying amount of $230,000 at the end of Year 2. The equipment was then revalued upward to its fair value of $320,000 at the beginning of Year 3. The journal entry to record the revaluation was as follows: Dr. Equipment—net Cr. OCI—revaluation surplus

90,000 90,000

The accumulated revaluation surplus is reported as a separate component of shareholders’ equity. In Year 3, depreciation expense was $30,000 ([$320,000 2 $50,000]/9 years). Under U.S. GAAP, the company reported depreciation expense of $20,000 in both Year 2 and Year 3. The additional


40


32

CHAPTER 1


depreciation under IFRSs causes IFRS-based profit in Year 3 to be $10,000 lower than U.S. GAAP-based profit. The revaluation surplus caused IFRSbased shareholders’ equity to be $90,000 higher than U.S. GAAP shareholders’ equity. This is partially offset by the $10,000 additional depreciation in Year 3 under IFRSs, which resulted in retained earnings being $10,000 lower under IFRSs than under U.S. GAAP. 3. Research and Development Costs Under IAS 38, $40,000 of research and development costs would be expensed in Year 3, and $60,000 of development costs would be capitalized as an intangible asset. Under U.S. GAAP, research and development expense of $100,000 would be recognized in determining Year 3 profit. IFRS-based profit and retained earnings in Year 3 would be $60,000 higher than U.S. GAAP-based profit. Because the new product had not yet been brought to market, there was no amortization of the deferred development costs under IFRSs in Year 3. 4. Sale and Leaseback Under IAS 17, the entire gain of $150,000 on the sale and leaseback was recognized in profit in Year 1. This resulted in a $150,000 increase in retained earnings in that year. Under U.S. GAAP, the gain on the sale and leaseback is recognized in profit over the life of the lease. With a lease term of five years, $30,000 of the gain would be recognized in Year 3, and $30,000 of the gain would have been recognized in each of Year 1 and Year 2, resulting in a cumulative amount of retained earnings of $90,000 at the end of Year 3. In Year 3, U.S. GAAP profit would be $30,000 higher than IFRS-based profit, and shareholders’ equity under IFRS was $60,000 higher than under U.S. GAAP at December 31, Year 3. 5. Property, Plant, and Equipment Since there is an indication that the asset may be impaired, an impairment test must be performed. Under IAS 36, an asset is impaired when its carrying amount exceeds its recoverable amount, which is the higher of (1) its value in use (present value of expected future cash flows) and (2) its fair value less costs of disposal. The machinery had a carrying amount of $20,000, and its value in use was $18,600, which is more than the fair value less cost to sell of $18,000. An impairment loss of $1,400 ($20,000 – $18,600) would have been recognized in determining Year 3 profit, with a corresponding reduction in retained earnings under IFRSs. Under U.S. GAAP, an impairment occurs when an asset’s carrying amount exceeds its undiscounted expected future cash flows. In this case, the expected future cash flows are $22,500, which is higher than the machinery’s carrying amount, so no impairment occurred under U.S. GAAP.

SELF- S TUDY P ROBLEM 2 LO4, 6

Jia Ltd. is a Canadian company listed on the TSX. One of its subsidiaries, Ian Ltd., is listed on the NYSE. Ian prepares its financial statements in accordance with U.S. GAAP for reporting on the NYSE. Ian’s financial statements must be converted to


41


CHAPTER 1


33

IFRSs and then consolidated with Jia’s financial statements for reporting on the TSX. For its Year 4 financial statements, Ian reported the following in accordance with U.S. GAAP: Net income Current assets Current liabilities

$1,500 6,800 5,400

Total debt Total shareholders’ equity

$12,600 10,900

You have identified the following four areas where Ian’s ing policies have differences between U.S. GAAP and IFRSs: 1. Revenue recognition 2. Inventory costing 3. Depreciation expense 4. Patent impairment loss The controller at Ian provides the following information with respect to each of these ing differences:

Revenue Recognition Ian introduced a customer loyalty program in Year 4. In its U.S. GAAP statements, it reported revenue under this program of $7,600 in Year 4, and accrued a current liability for costs related to this program of $770 at the end of Year 4. Under IFRSs, Ian would not accrue any liability but would have to defer revenue of $1,980 at the end of Year 4. The deferred revenue would be expected to be earned within one year.

Inventory Ian used LIFO for reporting under U.S. GAAP and needs to convert to average costing for reporting under IFRSs. The value of Ian’s inventory under these two costing methods was as follows: LIFO December 31, Year 3 December 31, Year 4

$1,200 1,200

Average $1,500 1,560

Depreciation Ian depreciated its property, plant, and equipment on a group basis for U.S. reporting purposes but must refine the calculation of depreciation under IFRSs to separate items of property, plant, and equipment into significant components and depreciate each component over its own useful life. The carrying amount of Ian’s depreciable property, plant, and equipment under these two depreciation methods was as follows: December 31, Year 3 December 31, Year 4

Group

Components

$9,000 8,250

$8,600 7,810

Patents Ian owns a number of patents and depreciates them over their useful lives, ranging from 3 to 7 years. The patents are checked for impairment on an annual basis. Relevant values pertaining to these patents were as follows:


42


34

CHAPTER 1


Dec 31, Yr3 Carrying amount before impairment Undiscounted future cash flows Value in use Fair value

Dec 31, Yr4

$6,000 6,100 5,870 5,800

$4,800 4,930 4,770 4,380

The CEO is concerned about the impact of converting Ian’s financial statements from U.S. GAAP to IFRSs on the following metrics: current ratio, debt-toequity ratio, and return on total shareholders’ equity.

Required: (a) Calculate the three ratios first using U.S. GAAP and then using IFRSs. Prepare a schedule showing any adjustments to the numerator and denominator for these ratios. Ignore income taxes. (b) Explain whether Ian’s liquidity, solvency and profitability look better or worse under IFRSs after considering the combined impact of the four areas of difference.

SOLUTION

TO

SELF-STUDY PROBLEM 2 Ian Ltd. Reconciliation from U.S. GAAP to IFRSs: Description

Net Income

Current Assets

Per U.S. GAAP Revenue recognition LIFO to average Group to component Impairment loss reversed Per IFRSs

$1,500 (1,210)1 602 (40)4 1006 $410

$6,800

Current Liabilities

Debt

Equity

$5,400 1,2101

$12,600 1,2101

$6,610

$13,810

$10,900 (1,210)1 3603 (440)5 (30)7 9,580

3603

$7,160

U.S. GAAP Current ratio Debt to equity Return on total equity

Current assets Current liabilities Debt Equity Net income Total equity

6,800 5 1.26 5,400 12,600 5 1.16 10,900 1,500 5 13.76% 10,900

IFRS 7,160 5 1.08 6,610 13,810 5 1.44 9,580 410 5 4.28% 9,580

Notes: Net income captures the change in equity during one period; i.e., Year 4. Equity is the difference between assets and liabilities at a point in time; i.e., end of Year 4. It also captures the cumulative effect of net income and dividends for all years. The other items above are balance sheet items at the end of Year 4. 1. Current liabilities at end of the year increased by $1,210 (1,980 2 770) 2. Costs of goods sold for the year decreased by $60 (1,560 2 1,200) 2 (1,500 2 1,200) 3. Current assets at end of the year increased by $360 (1,560 2 1,200) 4. Depreciation expense for the year increased by $40 (9,000 2 8,250) 2 (8,600 2 7,810) 5. Assets at end of the year decreased by $440 (8,250 2 7,810)


CHAPTER 1


43

35

6. No impairment under U.S. GAAP because undiscounted future cash flows exceed net book value. Under IFRS, impairment loss is excess of carrying amount over recoverable amount, which is higher of value in use and fair value. Accumulated impairment loss decreased during the year by $100 (6,000 2 5,870) 2 (4,800 2 4,770). Therefore, impairment loss reversal during the year was $100. 7. (a) Assets decreased at end of the year by $30 (4,800 2 4,770) (b) The current ratio decreased, which means that liquidity looks worse under IFRS. The debt-to-equity ratio increased, which means that solvency looks worse under IFRSs. The return on total equity decreased, which makes profitability look worse under IFRSs.

REVIEW QUESTIONS LO1

1. Explain if and when it may be appropriate for an ant to prepare financial statements that are not in accordance with GAAP.

LO2, 4

2. Why is it important to supplement studies of Canadian ing principles with studies of the ing practices used in other countries?

LO2

3. In what manner has there been a shift toward a global capital market in recent years?

LO2

4. List the factors that have influenced the ing standards used in a particular country.

LO2

5. What role does the stage of development of a country’s capital markets have on the direction taken by the country’s ing standards?

LO2

6. In what way has the level of inflation influenced the ing standards of a particular country?

LO3

7. In what manner does the balance-sheet format used by companies in other countries differ from the format used by Canadian companies?

LO4

8. Identify some of the financial statement items where U.S. GAAP is different from IFRSs.

LO3

9. What is the goal of the IASB?

LO4

10. What does the FASB-IASB convergence project expect to achieve? How will it be carried out?

LO3

11. What evidence is there that IASB pronouncements are becoming acceptable throughout the world?

LO5

12. Describe the extent of harmonization or convergence of ing standards for publicly able enterprises in Canada with the standards published by the IASB.

LO3, 4

13. Explain why complete comparability on a worldwide basis is going to be difficult to achieve despite a switchover to IFRSs.

LO4

14. Briefly explain why the Canadian AcSB decided to create a separate section of the CICA Handbook for private enterprises.

LO4

15. Briefly explain why a Canadian private company may decide to follow IFRSs for public companies, even though it could follow GAAP for private companies.


44


36

CHAPTER 1


CASES Case 1-1 LO1, 4

In this era of rapidly changing technology, research and development (R&D) expenditures represent one of the most important factors in the future success of many companies. Organizations that spend too little on R&D risk being left behind by the competition. Conversely, companies that spend too much may waste money or not be able to make efficient use of the results. In the United States, all R&D expenditures are expensed as incurred. However, expensing all R&D costs is not an approach used in much of the world. Firms using IFRSs must capitalize development costs as an intangible asset when they can demonstrate (a) the technical feasibility of completing the intangible asset so that it will be available for use or sale; (b) its intention to complete the intangible asset and use or sell it; (c) its ability to use or sell the intangible asset; (d) how the intangible asset will generate probable future economic benefits— among other things, the entity can demonstrate the existence of a market for the output of the intangible asset or for the intangible asset itself or, if it is to be used internally, the usefulness of the intangible asset; (e) the availability of adequate technical, financial, and other resources to complete the development and to use or sell the intangible asset; and (f) its ability to measure reliably the expenditure attributable to the intangible asset during its development.

Required: (a) Using basic ing principles as a guide, provide arguments to (i) the IASB approach for reporting R&D costs, and (ii) the FASB approach for reporting R&D costs. (b) In your opinion, which approach should become the sole worldwide standard? Briefly explain.

Case 1-2 LO1

You are examining the consolidated financial statements of a European company, which have been prepared in accordance with IFRSs. You determine that property, plant, and equipment is revalued each year to its current replacement cost, income and equity are adjusted, and the notes to the financial statements include the following items as a part of the summary of significant ing policies: • Tangible fixed assets are measured at replacement cost, less accumulated depreciation. The replacement cost is based on valuations made by internal and external experts, taking technical and economic developments into and ed by the experience gained in the construction of plant assets throughout the world. • Valuation differences resulting from revaluation are credited or debited to equity, where it is applicable, after deduction of an amount for deferred tax liabilities. • Depreciation based on replacement cost is applied on a straight-line basis in accordance with the estimated useful life of each asset. The provisions of IFRSs permit the use of alternatives to historical cost in the valuation of assets. IAS 16 specifically notes that as an allowed alternative treatment to historical cost:


CHAPTER 1


45

37

Subsequent to initial recognition as an asset, an item of property, plant, and equipment shall be carried at a revalued amount, being its fair value at the date of the revaluation less any subsequent accumulated depreciation and subsequent accumulated impairment losses. Revaluations should be made with sufficient regularity such that the carrying amount does not differ materially from that which would be determined using fair value at the balance sheet date. The auditor of the company has expressed his opinion on the financial statements and concluded that they present a “true and fair view.” The use of replacement cost ing is a departure from the historical cost principle and represents a fundamental difference in the approach to financial reporting in this country compared with the United States. The debate as to the relative importance of relevance and reliability is one that surfaces often in the study of international ing issues. Many countries are very strict as to the use of historical cost for all valuations and in the computation of income and often allow reductions from historical cost (such as with the application of the lower of cost or market requirement), but not increases. Others are very flexible in the choice of permissible approaches, while still others are very strict in that particular alternatives to historical cost (such as replacement cost or general price-level-adjusted amounts) must be used.

Required: (a) Can any alternative to historical cost provide for fair presentation in financial reports, or are the risks too great? Discuss. (b) Discuss the relative merits of historical cost ing and replacement cost ing. Consider the question of the achievement of a balance between relevance and reliability and the provision of a “true and fair view” or “fair presentation” in financial reporting. (c) Financial statements are now beyond the comprehension of the average person. Many of the ing and methods of ing used are simply too complex to understand just from reading the financial statements. Additional explanations should be provided with, or in, the financial statements, to help investors understand the financial statements. Briefly discuss. (adapted from a case developed by Peter Secord, St. Mary’s University)

Case 1-3 LO1, 4, 5, 6

John McCurdy has recently ed a consultant group that provides investment advice to the managers of a special investment fund. This investment fund was created by a group of NFPOs, all of which have endowment funds, and rather than investing their resources individually, they have instead chosen a pooled approach whereby a single fund invests their moneys and distributes the earnings back to them on an annual basis. The board of directors of the investment fund, made up of from each of the NFPOs, meets periodically to review performance and to make investment decisions. John has been following the fortunes of Ajax Communications Corporation for a number of years. Ajax is a Canadian company listed on the TSX. At the beginning of this past year, Ajax acquired 60% of the shares of Waqaas Inc., a U.S. company, which was and continues to be listed on the NYSE. Ajax must decide whether to prepare financial statements for Waqaas in accordance with IFRSs or U.S. GAAP for reporting to the SEC.


46


38

CHAPTER 1


As a starting point, John asked for and received the following comparison of financial statement information under U.S. GAAP and IFRSs from the controller at Waqaas (in millions of dollars): U.S. GAAP U.S. dollars

IFRSs U.S. dollars

Income statement Total revenue Operating income Income before extraordinary items Net income

$3,388.9 89.1 14.9 (66.2)

$2,611.9 329.1 199.4 199.4

Balance sheet Total current assets Investments Property, plant, and equipment, net Deferred income taxes Intangibles, net Other assets Total assets

$ 862.1 233.1 889.9 50.3 1,016.4 90.8 $3,142.6

$1,360.7 59.2 1,866.5 47.6 5,473.0 265.1 $9,072.1

Working with this list, John’s next step will be to determine why there is such a difference in the numbers.

Required: (a) As John McCurdy, outline the initial approach that you will take in order to determine the reasons for the differences in the numbers. (b) List some of the obvious items that need resolution, and indicate some of the possible causes of the discrepancies. (c) In your opinion, which GAAP best reflects economic reality? Briefly explain. (adapted from a case developed by Peter Secord, St. Mary’s University)

Case 1-4 LO1, 5, 6, 7

Roman Systems Inc. (RSI) is a Canadian private company. It was incorporated in Year 1 by its sole common shareholder, Marge Roman. RSI manufactures, installs, and provides product for its line of surveillance cameras. Marge started the company with a small investment. For Years 7 through 9, the company grew rapidly. Most of the expansion was funded through debt financing. The rapid growth is attributable to several large contracts signed with banks for the installation of security camera systems at their branches. RSI has a June 30 year-end. You, the CA, are with the firm of Sylvain and Charest, Chartered ants (SC). Your firm has performed the audit of RSI since its incorporation and prepares RSI’s corporate tax returns and those of Marge Roman and her family. Marge Roman called you in April Year 12 to inform you that she plans to take RSI public within the next year. Marge is negotiating with several underwriters, but no deal is in place yet. She plans to highlight the company’s revenue growth in its annual press release publicizing its year-end results. Marge wants to show strong revenue growth to attract investors. During the telephone conversation, Marge asked you and the partner on the audit to meet with her some time in early June to discuss and resolve potential issues related to the June 30 audit of RSI. In prior years, financial statements were


47


CHAPTER 1


39

issued in September, but this year the deadline for finalizing the financial statements will likely be in early August. Marge agreed that you would perform your interim audit procedures based on RSI’s results as at April 30, Year 12. It is now June Year 12. The planning and interim work for the fiscal Year 12 audit has been completed. A summary of items noted in the April 30, Year 12, interim financial statements as a result of work done to date is included in Exhibit I. You are about to leave for the day when the partner in charge of the comes into your office and announces that he has just received a call from Marge and she would like to meet with him within the next few days. He asks you to prepare a memo discussing the financial reporting issues arising from the interim audit work and any other matters that he should raise at the meeting. Ignore any additional audit procedures that should be considered as a result of the issues raised during the interim audit.

Required: Prepare the memo.

EXHIBIT I NOTES FROM THE INTERIM AUDIT General Pre-tax earnings for the period ended April 30, Year 12, were $1,375,000. For the fiscal years Year 11 and Year 10, RSI recorded pre-tax earnings of $435,000 and $325,000, respectively. Marge Roman has received a valuation report valuing the company at $12 million. Shareholders’ equity as at April 30, Year 12, consisted of: 100 common shares (voting) Retained earnings

$100 $9,159,000

New Software The company has been using a standard general ledger software package originally installed in Year 6 by a local computer consulting firm and upgraded annually. In January Year 12, RSI hired BBC to oversee the implementation of a new third-party package. In March Year 12, RSI began converting its financial reporting system. The new general ledger software was installed in parallel with the old software and went live on April 1, Year 12. The new general ledger software has been used to generate RSI’s financial results since April 1, Year 12. Starting July 1, Year 12, the old system will no longer be used in parallel. To date, RSI has been invoiced $720,000 by BBC. These costs have all been capitalized in the April 30, Year 12, financial statements. The invoices show the following services and costs: Initial review and recommendations Cost of new software Implementation work Training work Monthly fee (April) Other consulting (to April 30)

$110,000 200,000 120,000 225,000 25,000 40,000 $720,000

(continued)


48


40

CHAPTER 1


In addition, as at April 30, Year 12, RSI also capitalized $70,000 related to the salaries of four employees who have worked on the ing software project since January 1, Year 12. As a result of these individuals being pulled out of their regular jobs to handle the problem, RSI had to hire two additional employees. The costs will be amortized beginning on July 1, Year 12, on a straight-line basis over three years. RSI intends to treat approximately $135,000 of carrying amount for the old software as part of the cost of the new software by reallocating this balance.

Revenues During fiscal Year 11, total product revenue was $18.2 million and maintenance contract revenue was $5.6 million. For the period ended April Year 12, product revenue was $13.2 million, and maintenance contract revenue was $5.2 million. RSI recognizes product revenue when shipment and installation take place. It is RSI’s standard practice to request a customer sign-off for any installation work. The installation crew normally gets sign-off on the day of installation. During interim work for fiscal Year 12, it was noted in the audit file that approximately $640,000 of revenue recognized in April Year 12 related to work installed and invoiced in April, but customer sign-off was obtained only in early May. Such situations have not caught anyone’s attention in previous years. RSI explained that it had recently hired new service technicians who were unfamiliar with the policy of customer sign-off and, accordingly, had to send technicians back to the client days after the installation was completed to get the sign-offs. Maintenance contract revenues relate to one-year agreements that RSI signs with customers wanting product . During the year, the company changed its revenue recognition policy on maintenance contracts to recognize revenue based on estimated costs incurred on the contract. Revenue is recognized as follows: 25% in each of the first two months of the contract and 5% in each subsequent month. This allocation is based on a study done by RSI in Year 10, which showed that the costs incurred on the contracts are mostly incurred in the first two months, during which RSI sends out a technician to perform preventive maintenance. The preventive maintenance reduces the number of future service calls and, therefore, overall costs.

ABM Business As a result of RSI’s strong relationship with its financial institution and Marge’s desire to diversify RSI’s product line, RSI began selling “Automated Bank Machines” (ABMs) in fiscal Year 12. The machines are purchased from a large electronic equipment manufacturer that is responsible for ongoing maintenance of the ABMs. RSI sells the ABMs to restaurants, bars, and clubs at margins of 5%. The sales revenue is included as product revenue. The standard ABM sales agreement states that for a three-year period from the date of sale, RSI receives 40% of the transaction fee charged to customers using the machine, in addition to the sales revenue. A further 40% of the fee is payable to the financial institution for managing the cash in the machines, and the remaining 20% is remitted to the machine owners. The transaction fee charged to customers using an ABM is normally $1.50, and is set by the financial institution. RSI is not responsible for stocking the ABM with cash or emptying the cash machine. The financial institution performs all cash management duties and remits to RSI, at month-end, a statement showing money owed to RSI for its share of the transaction fee. A day later, the funds are deposited directly into RSI’s main bank . A total of 2,830,000 ABM transactions were processed in Year 12 for a total fee of $4,245,000. RSI has booked transaction-fee revenue of $4,245,000 and an expense of $2,547,000 related to the fees, attributable to the financial institution and the machine owners.

Debentures In January Year 12, RSI needed long-term financing and issued to a third-party venture capitalist $2,500,000 of debentures maturing in 10 years, with interest at 7.35%.

(continued)


49


CHAPTER 1


41

The debentures are included as long-term debt in the s. The debentures are convertible at the option of the holder, at a rate of one voting common share for every $5 of debenture, if RSI issues shares to the public. If RSI does not issue shares to the public before June 30, Year 13, the debentures are repayable upon demand.

s Receivable Review of the aging of s receivable at April 30, Year 12, showed an amount of $835,000 in the over-120-day category. According to RSI’s collection department, the balance relates to payments withheld by one of RSI’s largest customers, Mountain Bank. RSI had contracted to install security cameras at all of its branches. The work was performed in August Year 11, a customer sign-off was received at each branch, and invoices were sent in early September. Mountain Bank refused to pay individual invoices. It wants to pay the total of all invoices in one payment. In October Year 11, a few branches of Mountain Bank ed their head office and requested that no payment be made to RSI until certain corrections were made to the angles at which the cameras were installed. Although not required to do so under its agreement with Mountain Bank, RSI fixed the problems, as Mountain Bank is one of its largest customers. On June 1, Year 12, $450,000 was received. Mountain Bank asserts that some work remains to be done at 5 to 10 sites and is withholding final payment until it is completely satisfied. All amounts related to the contract are recorded as revenues. Internal reports reveal that it takes a service person approximately one hour to fix the problems at each branch. No significant materials costs have been incurred for the follow-up visits. (CICA adapted )

Case 1-5 LO1, 5, 6

Minink Limited (ML) is a subsidiary of a large public company, federally incorporated 50 years ago. Until this year, ML’s corporate structure consisted of three operating divisions and a corporate head office. Senior management receives financial reports on each division on a monthly basis. Bonuses are awarded annually to divisional managers based on the growth in net income on a year-over-year basis. The corporate head office oversees the divisions and provides financial, payroll, legal, and istrative services. Corporate head office charges the divisions one-half of the cost of providing these services and absorbs the other half. The Ladium Extraction Division (Extraction) mines ladium, a metal used in many industrial chemical processes. This division also performs the first stage in the refining process. The Ladium Processing Division (Processing) buys ladium from Extraction and further refines the metal before selling it to customers in North and South Americas. Both stages of the refining process cause airborne pollutants whose levels the government regulates (see Exhibit II for new legislation). Processing’s operations were sold to Donaz Integrated Limited (DIL) effective August 15, Year 4. An integral part of this sale is a long-term contract for Extraction to supply ladium to DIL. The negotiations leading up to the sale lasted nearly a year. An agreement was finally reached after DIL threatened to break off negotiations. Two offers were made by DIL, summarized in Exhibit III. ML management favoured the second offer but accepted the first offer under pressure from its parent company. The balance sheet of Processing


50


42

CHAPTER 1


EXHIBIT II HIGHLIGHTS OF NEW LEGISLATION ON EMISSIONS New legislation to be implemented on January 1, Year 5, imposes a quota, or limits, on total annual emissions of sulphur by the mining industry in Canada. Each company in the mining industry, depending on its level of production, will annually be allocated a portion of the fixed, industry-wide quota. All companies will be required to file documents certifying actual emission and production levels for each calendar year. At the beginning of each calendar year, the government will grant companies “pollution rights” that represent their portion of the annual sulphur emission quota. The rights will be valid for that year only. A company exceeding its own pollution rights (i.e., emitting more sulphur than it is allowed to emit) will have to buy pollution rights from other companies to make up the difference. On the other hand, a “clean company” (one emitting less sulphur than the amount permitted) will be allowed to sell its unused pollution rights. The big mining companies gained this compromise on the grounds that business should be allowed to find the least costly, most efficient way of meeting an annual target. “Dirty” companies will have until March 31 of the following year to purchase pollution rights from clean companies. Companies that violate the legislation will be subject to heavy fines or closure. The government’s objective is to give mining companies an incentive to invest in the innovative technology needed to reduce their current sulphur emission levels. Over time, the government will lower the emission levels for the industry; therefore, fewer pollution rights will be granted.

EXHIBIT III LETTER CONCERNING SALE OF LADIUM PROCESSING DIVISION May 2, Year 4 Mr. I. P. Labigne President and Chief Executive Officer Minink Limited Dear Mr. Labigne, For nearly a year now, we have been negotiating the purchase price of the operating assets of Minink Limited’s Ladium Processing Division and the related long-term ladium supply contract. Following our telephone conversation yesterday, this letter confirms that Donaz Integrated Limited is not prepared to continue these negotiations. We require a fax confirming acceptance of one of our two offers by midnight on May 4, Year 4. Our offers are summarized as follows, within the context of the detailed Purchase and Sale Agreement already agreed to: 1) 2)

$398.6 million for the operating assets of the division and $3,450/tonne adjusted annually for inflation as the price for ladium under the long-term supply contract. $97.1 million for the operating assets of the division and $4,100/tonne adjusted annually for inflation as the price for ladium under the long-term supply contract.

I look forward to receiving your response by the deadline. Yours sincerely, Ms. S.N. Wong, CA Vice-President, Finance and Chief Financial Officer Donaz Integrated Limited


51


CHAPTER 1


43

EXHIBIT IV LADIUM PROCESSING DIVISION BALANCE SHEET July 31, Year 4 (unaudited, in thousands of dollars) s receivable Inventories* Prepaid expenses Production equipment, net* Buildings, net* s payable and accruals Advance from corporate head office Divisional equity

Year 4

Year 3

$ 51,223 23,454 4,002 17,846 18,010 $ 114,535 $ 19,123 14,569 80,843 $ 114,535

$ 47,228 21,460 5,103 18,105 19,385 $ 111,281 $ 18,614 12,665 80,002 $ 111,281

*Included in Purchase and Sale Agreement with Donaz Integrated Limited

at July 31, Year 4, is found in Exhibit IV, and selected information on Extraction is in Exhibit V. The third division is the Mining Equipment Division (Equipment) which designs, builds, and sells sophisticated mining equipment. During Year 4, Equipment built six Crushones. Crushones are a new breed of open-pit mining machines

EXHIBIT V LADIUM EXTRACTION DIVISION SELECTED INFORMATION (in thousands of dollars) Year 4/5 Fiscal Year Budget Sales (volume 84,000 tonnes @ $3,700 per tonne) Variable cost of sales ($3,400 per tonne) Contribution margin Expenses Head office charges Fixed costs Divisional income before taxes

$310,800 285,600 25,200 3,100 9,610 12,710 $ 12,490

Additional information: 1. 2.

3.

This budget was prepared on the basis that the Extraction Division would sell its ladium to the Processing Division. When annual volumes exceed 90,000 tonnes, variable ladium extraction costs increase by $562/tonne on the additional volume. New extraction equipment with a useful life of 5 years must also be purchased, at a cost of approximately $58 million, to handle annual volumes over 85,000 tonnes. The carrying amount of Extraction’s equipment and buildings that are dedicated to ladium extraction at July 31, Year 4, was $76 million.


52


44

CHAPTER 1


that have a very high output relative to capital cost. The provincial government agreed to fund 90% of the total production costs of $165.46 million. In return, the provincial government is entitled to 90% of the net proceeds on sale of the Crushones. Management expects that due to the nature of these machines, ML may have to wait several years to sell the Crushones that have been built. As of late July Year 4 the six Crushones were included in inventory and measured at their production cost of $165.46 million. ML is the largest subsidiary of its parent and its financial statements are material to its parent’s financial statements. The parent company has reported losses for the past few years, and the price of its shares has dropped. The parent company plans to issue additional shares in the near future. The request for proposal for the audit of ML and its parent company for the year ended August 31, Year 4, resulted in the appointment of your firm, Douglas & Co., Chartered ants (DC). DC has already sent out an engagement letter to ML and corresponded with the previous auditors, who said they knew of no reason why DC should not accept the engagement. You, the CA, have been selected as the audit senior for the assignment. The manager in charge of the audit has requested that you prepare a memo covering the major ing issues arising from this year’s audit of ML. It is now early August Year 4. Ian Kao, the audit partner, has met with the CFO of ML who is in charge of coordinating the external audit. The partner’s notes from these meetings are summarized in Exhibit VI.

Required: Prepare the memo requested by the audit manager.

EXHIBIT VI NOTES FROM DISCUSSIONS WITH ML’S CFO 1.

2.

3. 4.

In February Year 4, ML started to receive $3 million per month from the provincial government to help fund research and development (R&D) into new mining techniques. ML has recorded these funds as revenue. R&D work will commence in September Year 4. The Purchase and Sale Agreement with DIL specifies that Extraction must sell between 102,000 and 124,000 tonnes of ladium per year to DIL at the agreed price. The price for any sales beyond this range will be agreed upon at the time the order is made. Extraction is not permitted to sell to any other party. The duration of the agreement is 9 years from the closing of the sale. Selling costs for the disposal of Processing are expected to amount to $6.7 million. In response to public pressure to reduce pollution and protect the environment, the Canadian government will require all companies in the mining industry to maintain emissions at or below levels prescribed under the new legislation by allocating pollution rights. In June Year 4, ML purchased equipment that will reduce emission levels below the prescribed level. ML will therefore be able to sell pollution rights to other companies when the new legislation comes into effect. The equipment purchased by ML was more expensive than other equipment it could have purchased that would have reduced emissions only to the level prescribed for Year 5. Management wants to know how to for the pollution rights.

(CICA adapted)


CHAPTER 1


53

45

P ROBLEMS Problem 1-1 LO4, 5, 6

IAS 16, “Property, Plant, and Equipment” requires assets to be initially measured at cost. Subsequently, assets may be carried at cost less accumulated depreciation, or they can be periodically revalued upward to current value and carried at the revalued amount less accumulated depreciation. If revalued, the adjustment is reported in other comprehensive income. Subsequent depreciation is based on the revalued amount. U.S. GAAP does not allow assets to be revalued at an amount exceeding historical cost less accumulated depreciation. ABC Ltd. lists its shares on an exchange that allows it to report either in accordance with U.S. GAAP or by using IFRSs. On January 1, Year 1, it acquired an asset at a cost of $10 million, which will be amortized on a straight-line basis over an estimated useful life of 20 years. On January 1, Year 3, the company hired an appraiser, who determined the fair value of the asset (net of accumulated depreciation) to be $12 million. The estimated useful life of the asset did not change.

Required: (a) Determine the depreciation expense recognized in Year 2, Year 3, and Year 4 under (i) the revaluation treatment allowed under IAS 16, and (ii) U.S. GAAP. (b) Determine the carrying amount of the asset under the two different sets of ing requirements at January 2, Year 3; December 31, Year 3; and December 31, Year 4. (c) Summarize the differences in profit and shareholders’ equity over the 20-year life of the asset using the two different sets of ing requirements. Assume that future appraisals indicated that the fair value of the asset was equal to carrying amount.

Problem 1-2 LO4, 5, 6

Fast Ltd. is a public company that prepares its consolidated financial statements in accordance with IFRSs. Its net income in Year 2 was $200,000, and shareholders’ equity at December 31, Year 2, was $1,800,000. Fast lists its shares on a U.S. stock exchange. Although no longer required to do so, Fast has decided to voluntarily provide a U.S. GAAP reconciliation. You have identified the following four areas in which Fast’s ing principles differ from U.S. GAAP. 1. Fast Company gathered the following information related to inventory that it owned on December 31, Year 2: Historical cost Replacement cost Net realizable value Normal profit margin as percentage of cost

$100,000 95,000 98,000 20%

2. Fast incurred research and development costs of $500,000 in Year 1. Thirty percent of these costs were related to development activities that meet the criteria for capitalization as an intangible asset. The newly developed product was brought to market in January Year 2 and is expected to generate sales revenue for 10 years. 3. Fast sold a building to a bank at the beginning of Year 1 at a gain of $50,000 and immediately leased the building back for a period of five years. The lease is ed for as an operating lease.


54


46

CHAPTER 1


4. Fast acquired equipment at the beginning of Year 1 at a cost of $100,000. The equipment has a five-year life with no expected residual value and is depreciated on a straight-line basis. At December 31, Year 1, Fast compiled the following information related to this equipment: Expected future cash flows from use of the equipment Present value of expected future cash flows from use of the equipment Fair value (net selling price), less costs to dispose

$85,000 75,000 72,000

Required: (a) Determine the amount at which Fast should report each of the following on its balance sheet at December 31, Year 2, using (1) IFRSs and (2) U.S. GAAP. Ignore the possibility of any additional impairment or reversal of impairment loss at the end of Year 2. (i) Inventory (ii) Research and development (iii) Deferred gain on lease (iv) Equipment (b) Prepare a reconciliation of net income for Year 2 and shareholders’ equity at December 31, Year 2, under IFRSs to a U.S. GAAP basis.


Harmandeep Ltd. is a private company in the pharmaceutical industry. It has been preparing its financial statements in accordance with ASPE. Since it has plans to go public in the next 3 to 5 years, it is considering changing to IFRSs for the current year. It wishes to adopt policies that will maximize the return on shareholders’ equity. Based on the draft financial statements prepared in accordance with ASPE, its net income for Year 5 is $400,000, and its shareholders’ equity at December 31, Year 5 is $3,500,000. Harmandeep has engaged you to reconcile net income and shareholders’ equity from ASPE to IFRSs. You have identified the following five areas for which IFRSs differs from ASPE: 1. Impaired loans—original versus market rate of interest 2. Interest costs—capitalize versus expense 3. Actuarial gains/losses—recognize immediately or defer and amortize 4. Compound financial instrument—debt versus equity components 5. Income taxes—future income tax method or taxes payable method Harmandeep provides the following information with respect to each of these ing differences.

Impaired Loans One of Harmandeep’s debtors is in financial difficulty and defaulted on its loan payment during the year. The outstanding balance on this loan receivable at the end of Year 5 was $220,000. Harmandeep agreed to accept five annual payments of $50,000 with the first payment due at December 31, Year 6, as a full settlement of the loan. The original interest rate on the loan was 8%. The market rate of interest for this type of loan is 6%. No adjustment has been made for the impairment of the loan receivable.


55


CHAPTER 1


47

Interest Costs Harmandeep arranged a loan of $800,000 to finance the construction of a warehouse. $400,000 was borrowed on March 1, Year 5, and another $400,000 was borrowed on October 1, Year 5. The loan is repayable over 5 years with an interest rate of 6%, with the first payment due on September 30, Year 6. The warehouse was nearly complete at the end of Year 5. No interest has been accrued on the loan at the end of Year 5.

Actuarial Gains/Losses Harmandeep instituted a defined benefit pension plan in Year 3. The first actuarial evaluation, which was done as at June 30, Year 5, indicated an actuarial gain of $150,000. The expected average remaining service life of the employee workforce was 15 years at the time of the actuarial evaluation. The actuarial gain has not yet been recognized in the preliminary financial statements.

Compound Financial Instrument Harmandeep issued bonds for proceeds of $1,000,000 on December 31, Year 5. The bonds are convertible into common shares at any time within the next five years. The bonds would have been worth only for $950,000 if they did not have the conversion feature. The proceeds on the bonds have been recognized as long-term debt in the preliminary financial statements.

Income Tax Harmandeep’s income tax rate has been and is expected to continue at 40%. Assume that any adjustments to ing income for the above items are fully deductible or taxable for tax purposes. The preliminary financial statements reflect the tax payable method of ing for income taxes. If the future income tax method were adopted, future tax liabilities should be set up for $300,000 at the end of Year 4 and $340,000 at the end of Year 5.

Required: Prepare a schedule to convert net income and total shareholders’ equity from the preliminary financial statements amounts to amounts under ASPE and IFRSs. Where ing choices exist, choose policies that minimize return on total shareholders’ equity under ASPE and maximize return on total shareholders’ equity under IFRSs.


Andrew Ltd. is a large private company owned by the Andrew family. It operates a number of ski resorts in a very competitive industry. Its main competition comes from a couple of public companies. Andrew has been using ASPE in the past but has come under pressure from its bank to convert to IFRSs. Its bank is particularly concerned with the debt to equity ratio and the return on total shareholders’ equity. Andrew reported the following on its preliminary Year 6 financial statements in compliance with ASPE: Net income

$3,000

Total debt Total shareholders’ equity

$25,200 21,800

You have identified four areas where Andrew’s ing policies could have differences between ASPE and IFRSs. Where choices exist under ASPE, Andrew has adopted allowable policies that maximize net income and shareholders’ equity.


56


48

CHAPTER 1


The controller at Andrew provides the following information for the four areas:

Intangible Assets Andrew owns a number of intangible assets and depreciates them over their useful lives, ranging from 3 to 7 years. The patents are checked for impairment on an annual basis. Relevant values pertaining to these patents were as follows: Carrying amount before impairment Undiscounted future cash flows Value in use Fair value

Dec 31, Yr5

Dec 31, Yr6

$12,000 12,100 11,700 11,600

$9,800 9,840 9,400 8,600

Property, Plant, and Equipment Andrew acquired equipment at the beginning of Year 4 at a cost of $1,250. The equipment has an estimated useful life of 10 years, an estimated residual value of $50, and is being depreciated on a straight-line basis. At the beginning of Year 6, the equipment was appraised and determined to have a fair value of $1,090; its estimated useful life and residual value did not change. The company could adopt the revaluation option in IAS 16 to periodically revalue the equipment at fair value subsequent to acquisition.

Research and Development Costs Andrew incurred research and development costs of $200 in Year 6. Of this amount, 40% related to development activities subsequent to the point at which criteria indicating that the creation of an intangible asset had been met. As of yearend, development of the new product had not been completed.

Redeemable Preferred Shares In Year 4, Andrew issued redeemable preferred shares to the original founders of the company in exchange for their previously held common shares as part of a tax planning arrangement. The preferred shares were assigned a value of $100 and have been reported in shareholders’ equity in the preliminary financial statements. The common shares, which had a carrying amount of $100, were cancelled. The preferred shares would be classified as long-term debt under IFRSs and would need to be reported at their redemption value of $1,800. The CEO is concerned about the impact of converting Andrew’s financial statements from ASPE to IFRSs.

Required: (a) Calculate the two ratios first using ASPE and then using IFRSs. Prepare a schedule showing any adjustments to the numerator and denominator for these ratios. Ignore income taxes. (b) Explain whether Andrew’s solvency and profitability look better or worse under IFRSs after considering the combined impact of the four areas of difference.


CHAPTER 1


57

49

WEB -BASED PROBLEMS Note: The annual reports of companies listed on U.S. stock exchanges can be accessed through the SEC’s EDGAR system at www.sec.gov/edgar.shtml. Under this system, one can search by company name, country, SIC code, etc. The annual report is labelled as Form 20-F or Form 40-F. The annual reports of companies listed on the Toronto Stock Exchange (TSX) can be accessed at http://www.sedar. com or through the investor relations section of the company’s website.

Web Problem 1-1 LO4, 6

Access the 2011 annual report for China Mobile Limited, which is a company incorporated in China and listed on the NYSE. Answer the questions below. Round ratios to two decimal points. For each question, indicate where in the financial statements you found the answer and/or provide a brief explanation. (a) In what currency are the financial statements presented? (b) GAAP from what country or jurisdiction was used in preparing the financial statements? See the notes to the financial statements. (c) Is there a reconciliation of net income as reported to net income under U.S. GAAP? If so, identify the three major differences. If not, explain why the reconciliation was not provided. (d) Calculate the current ratio for each of the last two years. Did the liquidity position of the company improve or weaken during the year? Briefly explain. (e) Calculate the total debt to equity ratio for each of the last two years. Did the solvency position of the company improve or weaken during the year? Briefly explain. (f) Did income increase or decrease from the previous year? What item on the income statement had the biggest impact on the change in income?




Access the 2012 annual report for Dr. Reddy’s Laboratories Limited, which is a company incorporated in India and listed on the NYSE. Answer the same questions as in Problem 1. For each question, indicate where in the financial statements you found the answer, and/or provide a brief explanation. Access the 2012 annual report for Toyota Motor Corporation, which is a company incorporated in Japan and listed on the NYSE. Answer the same questions as in Problem 1. For each question, indicate where in the financial statements you found the answer, and/or provide a brief explanation. Commencing in 2007, foreign companies that were using IFRSs did not have to reconcile their reported profit to profit under U.S. GAAP. Access the 2011 and 2010 annual reports for Cenovus, a Canadian oil company. Answer the questions below for each of the two years. Round ratios to two decimal points. For each question, indicate where in the financial statements you found the answer, and/or provide a brief explanation. (a) In what currency are the financial statements presented? (b) GAAP from what country or jurisdiction was used in preparing the financial statements?


58


50

CHAPTER 1


(c) What was the percentage difference in reported net earnings under Canadian GAAP versus net earnings under U.S. GAAP? (d) What three items, other than income taxes, caused the biggest change in net earnings between the two different GAAPs? (e) If a reconciliation to U.S. GAAP were not provided, how would a financial analyst deal with this situation when comparing Cenovus to another company reporting under U.S. GAAP? (f) What was the percentage difference in reported net earnings under Canadian GAAP versus net earnings under IFRSs? (g) What three items, other than income taxes, caused the biggest change in net earnings between the two different GAAPs?


Commencing in 2007, foreign companies that were using IFRSs did not have to reconcile their reported shareholders’ equity to shareholders’ equity under U.S. GAAP. Access the 2011 and 2010 annual reports for Goldcorp Inc., a Canadian gold producer. Answer the questions below for each of the two years. Round percentages to one decimal point. For each question, indicate where in the financial statements you found the answer, and/or provide a brief explanation. (a) In what currency are the financial statements presented? (b) GAAP from what country or jurisdiction was used in preparing the financial statements? (c) What was the percentage difference between the reported shareholders’ equity under Canadian GAAP and shareholders’ equity under U.S. GAAP? (d) What three items caused the biggest change in shareholders’ equity between the two different GAAPs? (e) If a reconciliation to U.S. GAAP were not provided, how would a financial analyst deal with this situation when comparing Goldcorp to another company reporting under U.S. GAAP? (f) What was the percentage difference in reported shareholders’ equity under Canadian GAAP versus shareholders’ equity under IFRSs? (g) What three items caused the biggest change in shareholders’ equity between the two different GAAPs?

Practise and learn online with Connect


59

2 chapter

Investments in Equity Securities

learning objectives After studying this chapter, you should be able to do the following: LO1 Describe the broad relationship between all the relevant standards from Part I of the CICA Handbook that make up the “big picture.”

LO2 Distinguish between the various types of equity investments measured at fair value. LO3 Prepare journal entries to for investments under the cost and equity methods.

LO4 Evaluate relevant factors to determine whether an investor has significant influence over an investee. LO5 State the main disclosure requirements related to an investment in associate. LO6 Analyze and interpret financial statements involving investments in equity securities. LO7 Identify some of the differences between IFRSs and ASPE for investments in equity securities.

INTRODUCTION Rogers Communications Inc. is a diversified public Canadian communications and media company with annual revenues in excess of $12 billion. It has operations in three segments—wireless, cable, and media. The wireless segment includes 100% interests in Fido Solutions Inc. and Rogers Communications Partnership, which operates both the wireless and cable businesses. The media segment includes the wholly owned subsidiary Rogers Media Inc. and its subsidiaries, including Rogers Broadcasting (which owns a group of 55 radio stations), the CityTV television network, the Sportsnet channels, and Canadian specialty channels, including Outdoor Life Network and CityNews Channel; Digital Media, which provides digital advertising solutions to over 1,000 websites; Rogers Publishing, which produces more than 50 consumer, trade, and professional publications; and Rogers Sports Entertainment, which owns the Toronto Blue Jays Baseball Club and Rogers Centre. Media also holds ownership interests in entities involved in specialty television content, television production, and broadcast sales. Such ownership structures are hardly uncommon in the business world; corporate as well as individual investors frequently acquire ownership shares of both domestic and foreign businesses. These investments can range from a few shares to the acquisition of 100% control. There are many different methods of reporting

There are many different methods for reporting investments in equity securities.

51


60


52

CHAPTER 2


these investments, ranging from fair value to cost-based approaches. Unrealized gains can be recognized in net income or in other comprehensive income. Over the next eight chapters, we will examine various methods of reporting investments in equity securities. The focus is on investments, where one firm possesses either significant influence or control over another through ownership of voting shares. Transactions between these non–arm’s-length entities require special scrutiny and special ing procedures. We will begin our journey by reviewing the requirements for reporting equity investments, and then spend considerable time in preparing consolidated financial statements in increasingly complicated situations.

LO1 Equity investments are investments in shares of another company.

There is a trend in financial reporting to measure more assets at fair value on an annual basis.

EQUITY INVESTMENTS—THE BIG PICTURE This is the first of eight chapters that make up a single ing topic. This topic can be represented by the following question: How should a Canadian company report, in its financial statements, an investment in the shares of another company? There are two main categories of equity investments: strategic and nonstrategic. For strategic investments, the investor intends to establish or maintain a longterm operating relationship with the entity in which the investment is made and has some level of influence over the strategic decisions of the investee company. The level of influence varies among full control, t control, and significant influence. For nonstrategic investments, the investor is hoping for a reasonable rate of return without having the ability to play an active role in the strategic decisions of the investee company. The methods of reporting equity investments have changed significantly over the past 10 years. Prior to 2005, these investments were typically reported at some cost-based amount. The investments were written down if there was impairment in value. However, the investments were not written up to reflect increases in value; gains were only reported when the investments were sold. In 2005, IAS 39: Financial Instruments—Recognition and Measurement was introduced for the reporting of nonstrategic investments. For the first time, it was possible to report certain investments at fair value, regardless of whether fair value was higher or lower than the cost-based amounts. This was part of a trend to report more and more assets at fair value on the basis that fair value is more relevant information. The unrealized gains and losses were reported either in net income or in a new category of income called other comprehensive income (OCI). When the investments were sold, the unrealized gains and losses were removed from OCI and reported in net income; that is, the unrealized gains were recycled through net income. After a few years of reporting these nonstrategic investments at fair value with gains and losses reported either in net income or other comprehensive income, both preparers and s of the financial statements started to complain about the different reporting options under IAS 39. They felt that the financial statements were getting too complicated and that IAS 39 was difficult to understand, apply, and interpret. They urged the International ing Standards Board (IASB) to develop a new standard for the financial reporting of financial instruments that was principle based and less complex. Although the Board amended


61


CHAPTER 2


IAS 39 several times to clarify requirements, add guidance, and eliminate internal inconsistencies, it had not previously undertaken a fundamental reconsideration of reporting for financial instruments. In 2009, the IASB introduced a new ing standard for nonstrategic investments, International Financial Reporting Standard (IFRS) 9: Financial Instruments—Classification and Measurement. IFRS 9 established principles for the financial reporting of financial assets and financial liabilities that will present relevant and useful information to s of financial statements for their assessment of the amounts, timing, and uncertainty of an entity’s future cash flows. It has replaced and superseded the classification and measurement standards that are in IAS 39. It will be mandatorily effective for fiscal periods beginning on or after January 1, 2015, but early adoption is permitted. In this text, we will focus on IFRS 9. IFRS 9 requires that all nonstrategic equity investments be measured at fair value, including investments in private companies. Under IAS 39, investments that did not have a quoted market price in an active market and whose fair value could not be reliably measured were reported at cost. This provision no longer exists under IFRS 9. However, in limited circumstances, cost may be an appropriate estimate of fair value. The IASB recognizes that measuring all investments in equity instruments at fair value will impose additional costs on preparers. In the IASB’s view, these costs are justified by improved and useful decision-making information about equity investments for s of financial statements. Measuring all investments in equity instruments in the same way would also simplify the ing requirements and improve comparability. IFRS 9 no longer refers to and does not have any specific provisions for available-for-sale (AFS) investments; in effect, the AFS investment disappears as a separate category of equity investments. However, on initial recognition, an entity can elect to present the fair value changes on an equity investment that is not held for short-term trading in OCI. This concept is similar to that previously applied to AFS investments. One significant change is that the gains or losses are cleared out of accumulated OCI and transferred directly to retained earnings, and never recycled through net income. In 2011, the IASB introduced a new ing standard, IFRS 13: Fair Value Measurement. It replaced the fair value measurement guidance previously contained in individual IFRSs with a single, unified definition of fair value and a framework for measuring it. It also states the required disclosures about fair value measurements. Fair value is defined as the price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date (i.e., an exit price). It would reflect the highest and best use for a nonfinancial asset. In 2011, the IASB issued an amendment to IAS 1: Presentation of Financial Statements. Entities must now group items presented in OCI in two categories— those that will be recycled through net income and those that will not be recycled through net income. If the items are presented before tax, then the tax related to each of the two groups of OCI items must be shown separately. Exhibit 2.1 summarizes the reporting methods for equity investments. It would be easier if only one method was used for all investments, but such is not the case under current standards. The rationale for the different methods will be

53

Starting in 2015, nonstrategic investments in private companies must be reported at fair value.

Available-for-sale investments are being phased out as a separate category of investments.


62


54

CHAPTER 2


EXHIBIT 2.1

Reporting Methods for Investments in Equity Securities

Type of Investment

Reporting Method

Reporting of Unrealized Gains

Equity method Full consolidation Equity method

Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable

Fair value method Fair value method

In net income

Strategic investments Significant influence Control t control through t venture

Nonstrategic investments FVTPL (fair value through profit or loss) Other – elect FVTOCI (fair value through OCI)

Always try to understand the forest before looking at the trees.

Cautionary Note: At the time of writing this seventh edition, there were a number of exposure drafts outstanding on topics relevant to this course. This text has incorporated these exposure drafts on the basis that the latest proposals will be approved and required as of January 1, 2015, or earlier. We will use Connect (www. mcgrawhillconnect.ca) to keep you informed of any deviations from what is in the text and what finally ends up in the CICA Handbook. In addition, this text uses the requirements for IFRSs that have been approved even though they may not yet be effective because early adoption is typically allowed for IFRSs once they have been approved. Consolidated financial statements are prepared when one company controls another company.

In other comprehensive income

discussed as the methods are introduced throughout the text. It is important that you try to understand the rationale because that will make it easier to which method to apply to which situation. There is always a danger that in attempting to absorb a large amount of new material, you will concentrate on the details to the point of losing sight of the big picture. It is very important that you do not lose sight of the forest when you study the trees. Before proceeding with our examination of the “trees,” it would be useful to look at this “forest.” The question posed at the beginning of this section provides a path into the forest. The ing principles involved with that question are contained in numerous standards and interpretations issued by the IASB. We will use a summarized balance sheet to illustrate the question, and then outline the possible answers that are contained in the IASB standards. The balance sheet of J Company Ltd. follows: J COMPANY LTD. BALANCE SHEET Miscellaneous assets Investment in shares of K Corporation

$ XXX XXX

Liabilities Shareholders’ equity Common shares Retained earnings

$ XXX

$ XXX XXX XXX $ XXX

Dollar amounts have been omitted from the statement because our focus is only on the reporting of the “Investment in shares of K Corporation.” Five IFRSs are directly related to providing an answer to this question, while eight other IFRSs and one interpretation must also be considered. A brief summary of the provisions contained in these sections is presented next.

Directly Related IFRSs 1. IFRS 10: Consolidated Financial Statements

If J Company controls K Corporation, then J Company is called a parent company and K Corporation


63


CHAPTER 2


is called a subsidiary, and GAAP require the preparation of consolidated financial statements by J Company. This involves removing the investment in K Corporation from J Company’s balance sheet and replacing it with the assets and liabilities from the balance sheet of K Corporation. This process is illustrated in Chapters 3 through 9. An investor controls an investee when it is exposed, or has rights, to variable returns from its involvement with the investee and has the ability to affect those returns through its power over the investee. In other words, J Company can determine the key operating and financing policies of K Company. Control is generally presumed if J Company’s investment consists of a majority of the voting shares of K Corporation. But as we will see in later discussions,1 control can exist with smaller holdings and does not necessarily exist with all majority holdings.

55

Control is the power to direct the activities of another entity to generate variable returns.

2. IAS 28: Investments in Associates and t Ventures This standard describes the financial reporting requirements for investments in associates, that is, investments where the investor has significant influence over the investee and sets out the requirements for the application of the equity method when ing for investments in associates and t ventures. Significant influence is defined as the power to participate in the financial and operating policy decisions of the investee, but it is not control or t control of those policies. IAS 28 indicates that an investment of 20% or more of the voting shares of K Corporation, without control or t control being present, would be presumed to be a significant influence investment, unless there is evidence to the contrary. If J Company’s investment is one of significant influence, it must be reported by the equity method. Thus, the investment is initially recorded at cost, and adjusted thereafter to include J Company’s pro rata share of the earnings or losses of K Corporation, adjusted for the acquisition differential2 and the elimination and subsequent recognition of all unrealized intercompany profits and losses that occur as a result of transactions between the two companies. Dividends received from K Corporation are recorded as a reduction of the investment. The ing for significant influence investments will be illustrated in later sections of this chapter and in Chapters 5 through 8.

The equity method is used when the investor has significant influence over the investee.

3. IFRS 11: t Arrangements If the investment is not one of the two just described, it may possibly be a t arrangement, if the following general provisions of this standard are satisfied. For a t arrangement to exist, the owners (the venturers) must have made a contractual arrangement that establishes t control over the venture. Under such t control, the venturers are exposed, or have the rights, to variable returns from their involvement with the investee and have the ability to affect those returns through their power over the investee. No single venturer is able to unilaterally control the venture. Under this standard, J Company Ltd. (the venturer) reports its investment in K Corporation Ltd. (the venture) by using the equity method when K Corporation is a t venture. Some other types of t arrangements will be reported using proportionate consolidation. ing for t arrangements is illustrated in Chapter 9.

4. IFRS 9: Financial Instruments—Classification and Measurement IFRS 9 requires that all nonstrategic equity investments be measured at fair value, with

The equity method is required when the investor has t control over a t venture. All nonstrategic investments must be measured at fair value at each reporting date.


64


56

CHAPTER 2


the fair value changes reported in net income. However, an entity can elect on initial recognition to present the fair value changes on an equity investment that is not held for short-term trading in OCI. The dividends on such investments must be recognized in net income. The gains or losses are cleared out of accumulated OCI and transferred directly to retained earnings. ing for fair value investments will be illustrated later in this chapter. IFRS 9 also indicates when and how hedge ing can be used to ensure that gains and losses on a hedged item are reported in income in the same period in which they occurred. In Chapters 10 and 11, we will illustrate fair value hedges, cash flow hedges, and hedges of net investments in foreign operations.

5. IFRS 12: Disclosure of Interests in Other Entities

IFRS 12 contains the disclosure requirements related to investments in associates, t arrangements, noncontrolled structured entities, and subsidiaries. It establishes disclosure objectives that require an entity to disclose information that helps s • understand the judgments and assumptions made by a reporting entity when deciding how to classify its involvement with another entity, • understand the interest that non-controlling interests have in consolidated entities, and • assess the nature of the risks associated with interests in other entities. Disclosure requirements related to the different types of investments will be described in each chapter of this text.

Other Related IFRSs The remaining eight important IFRSs and one interpretation are directly related to the five standards that were just outlined. They are discussed briefly below. A parent company does not have to issue consolidated financial statements if its parent issues consolidated financial statements.

6. IAS 27: Separate Financial Statements

A business combination can occur indirectly by buying shares or directly by buying the net assets of another company.

7. IFRS 3: Business Combinations A business combination is a transaction

IAS 27 states that a parent is not required to present consolidated financial statements for external reporting purposes if it is itself a subsidiary of another entity, and the ultimate or any intermediate parent of the parent does produce consolidated financial statements available for public use that comply with IFRSs. If the parent meets these conditions, it can (but is not required to) present separate financial statements as its only financial statements to external s. When an entity prepares separate financial statements, it shall for investments in subsidiaries either at cost or fair value. Separate financial statements are described further in Chapter 3. or other event in which an acquirer obtains control of one or more businesses. J Company Ltd. usually obtains control over the net assets of K Corporation by either (a) investing in the voting shares of K Corporation (a parent–subsidiary relationship) or

(b) purchasing the net assets of K Corporation (not a parent–subsidiary relationship). Business combination ing is explained in Chapter 3.


65


CHAPTER 2


8. IFRS 8: Operating Segments Consolidated financial statements often result in the aggregation of the statements of companies in diverse businesses located in countries throughout the world. Disaggregation into operating segments and disclosures about products, geographical areas, and major customers is required by this standard in order to improve the information content of the consolidated statements. Segment disclosures are discussed in Chapter 9. 9. IAS 1: Presentation of Financial Statements This standard states that a complete set of financial statements comprises the following statements: (a) Financial position as at the end of the period (b) Comprehensive income for the period (c) Changes in equity for the period (d) Cash flows for the period The statement of comprehensive income comprises a section for profit or loss and a section for other comprehensive income. IAS 1 requires reporting enterprises to differentiate between profit as traditionally reported on the income statement and OCI. OCI includes unrealized gains and losses on certain equity investments and exchange gains and losses related to certain hedges of foreign currency transactions and types of foreign operations, which will be illustrated in Chapters 10 and 11.

10. IAS 12: Income Taxes The provisions of this standard add some complexity to the measurements associated with business combinations and consolidated financial statements. These provisions are discussed in Chapters 6 and 9.

11. IAS 21: The Effects of Changes in Foreign Exchange Rates This standard deals with the translation of the financial statements of foreign investees, subsidiaries, and t ventures, and with the translation of transactions denominated in foreign currencies. Provisions of this section apply if (a) K Corporation was located in a foreign country and/or prepared its financial statements in a foreign currency, or (b) J Company Ltd. had borrowings or lendings and/or export and import activities denominated in foreign currencies. Chapters 10 and 11 examine the ing concepts involved here.

12. IAS 36: Impairment of Assets This standard describes the impairment tests to be applied to all assets. We will primarily apply the standard to investments in associates, goodwill, and other intangible assets. This topic is discussed in Chapter 5. 13. IAS 38: Intangible Assets IFRS 3: Business Combinations outlines the procedures for measuring the identifiable assets acquired, liabilities assumed, and goodwill acquired in a business combination. IAS 38 provides additional

57

Segment disclosures provide a breakdown of the aggregated information into various operating and geographical segments. Cautionary Note: Although the titles stated in item 9 are recommended, they are not mandatory. Many Canadian companies now use and will likely continue to use the titles of balance sheet (rather than statement of financial position) and income statement (rather than statement of profit or loss). In this textbook, we will use both sets of titles. We will also vary the ordering of assets, liabilities, and shareholders’ equity. In some cases, current assets will appear first and shareholders’ equity will appear last. In other cases, long-term assets will be followed by current assets and shareholders’ equity will precede liabilities on the credit side of the statement of financial position. Both formats are acceptable under IAS 1. In the problems and illustrations that do not involve OCI, we will focus only on the statement of profit or loss (i.e., the income statement), rather than the statement of comprehensive income, and on a statement of retained earnings, rather than preparing a complete statement of changes in equity.

Foreign transactions and foreign financial statements must be translated to the entity’s presentation currency.


66


58

CHAPTER 2


guidance regarding the identifiable assets by detailing the various intangible assets that might have been acquired. This topic is discussed in Chapter 3.

14. IFRIC 16: Hedges of a Net Investment in a Foreign Operation This interpretation provides guidance in applying IAS 21. We will discuss this topic further in Chapter 11. LO2 Unrealized gains and losses are reported in net income for FVTPL investments.

Unrealized gains and losses are reported in OCI for FVTOCI investments.

INVESTMENTS MEASURED AT FAIR VALUE IFRS 9 deals with two types of equity investments: fair value through profit or loss (FVTPL) and fair value through OCI (FVTOCI). FVTPL investments include investments held for short-term trading. These investments are classified as current assets on the basis that they are actively traded and intended by management to be sold within one year. FVTPL investments are initially measured at fair value and subsequently measured at fair value at each reporting date. The unrealized gains and losses are reported in net income along with dividends received or receivable. FVTOCI investments are equity investments that are not held for short-term trading and those for which management, on initial acquisition, irrevocably elects to report all unrealized gains and losses in OCI. These investments are classified as current or noncurrent assets, depending on how long company managers intend to hold on to these shares. They are initially measured at fair value and subsequently remeasured at fair value at each reporting date. The unrealized gains and losses are reported in OCI. Dividend income is reported in net income as the dividends are declared. The cumulative unrealized gains or losses are cleared out of accumulated OCI and transferred directly to retained earnings. The transfer to retained earnings would usually occur when the investment is sold or derecognized but could be transferred at any time.

Illustration On January 1, Year 1, Jenstar Corp. purchased 10% of the outstanding common shares of Safebuy Company at a cost of $95,000. Safebuy reported net income of $100,000 and paid dividends of $80,000 for the year ended December 31, Year 1. The fair value of Jenstar’s 10% interest in Safebuy was $98,000 at December 31, Year 1. On January 10, Year 2, Jenstar sold its investment in Safebuy for $99,000. The following table presents Jenstar’s journal entries for the abovenoted transactions under FVTPL, AFS under IAS 39, and the option under IFRS 9 to designate at FVTOCI. It ignores income tax and assumes that accumulated OCI for the FVTOCI investment is transferred to retained earnings when the investment is sold. FVTPL Jan. 1, Year 1 Investment in Safebuy 95,000 Cash (95,000) To record the acquisition of 10% of Safebuy’s shares Dec. 31, Year 1 Cash (10% 3 80,000) Dividend income Receipt of dividend from Safebuy

8,000 (8,000)

AFS

FVTOCI

95,000 (95,000)

95,000 (95,000)

8,000 (8,000)

8,000 (8,000)


67


CHAPTER 2

FVTPL Dec. 31, Year 1 Investment in Safebuy (98,000 2 95,000) Unrealized gains (reported in net income) OCI 2 unrealized gains To record investment at fair value Jan. 10, Year 2 Cash Investment in Safebuy Gain on sale (reported in net income) OCI—gain on sale Record sale of investment

3,000 (3,000)

99,000 (98,000) (1,000)

Jan. 10, Year 2 OCI—reclassification to net income Accumulated OCI—reclassification to retained earnings Gain on sale (reported in net income) Retained earnings—gain on sale of FVTOCI investments Clear OCI/Accumulated OCI to net income/retained earnings

AFS


FVTOCI

3,000

3,000

(3,000)

(3,000)

99,000 (98,000)

99,000 (98,000)

(1,000)

(1,000)

59

The investment is reported at fair value at each reporting date under all three methods of reporting. The credit side of the entry is shown in brackets.

4,000 4,000 (4,000) (4,000)

There are two options for reporting OCI—a single-statement format and a two-statement format. In the single-statement format, all items of income and expenses are reported in the section for net income, which is then immediately followed by OCI items, and, finally, by the total of comprehensive income for the period. In the two-statement format, the statement of profit or loss (or income statement) is separate, and it is then followed by the statement of comprehensive income, which starts with net income and then displays the other comprehensive income items and provides the final total of comprehensive income. In either case, net income is added to retained earnings as in the past, and OCI is added to accumulated other comprehensive income (AOCI). Retained earnings and AOCI must be reported as separate components of shareholders’ equity. We will illustrate the presentation of OCI and the components of shareholders’ equity in Chapters 10 and 11.

Accumulated other comprehensive income is not included in retained earnings but is included as a separate component of shareholders’ equity.

INVESTMENTS NOT MEASURED AT FAIR VALUE When investments are not reported at fair value, they are usually reported using the cost method or the equity method. The next two subsections describe when these methods are used and illustrate how to apply them. LO3

Cost Method of Reporting an Equity Investment The cost method is used under IFRSs in the following situations: • For investments in controlled entities. This is an option when the reporting entity prepares separate-entity financial statements in addition to or instead of consolidated financial statements. This situation will be discussed further in Chapter 3.

The cost method is used for external reporting and internal recording purposes.


68


60

CHAPTER 2


• For available-for-sale investments that do not have a quoted market price in an active market and whose fair value cannot be reliably measured. This requirement is specified in IAS 39 and is available until 2015, if the reporting entity does not adopt IFRS 9 early. • For a parent company’s internal ing records prior to preparing consolidated financial statements. This situation will be discussed further in Chapter 5.

The investment must be written down when there is impairment.

A liquidating dividend is now reported as dividend income under the cost method.

The cost method is allowed under ing Standards for Private Enterprises (ASPE) for equity investments that are not quoted in an active market. Under the cost method, the investment is initially recorded at cost. The investor’s share of the dividends declared is reported in net income. The investment is reported at original cost at each reporting date unless the investment becomes impaired. Impairment losses are reported in net income. When the investment is sold, the realized gains or losses are reported in net income. Prior to 2009, a liquidating dividend was treated by the investor as a reduction in the investment . A liquidating dividend occurred when the cumulative amount paid out as dividends, since acquisition of the investment was greater than the cumulative net incomes earned by the investee since acquisition. Since dividends are a company’s method of distributing earnings to its owners, it follows that a company cannot distribute as income more than it has earned. When it does so, it is really returning part of the original investment to its owners. Even though it may be conceptually more appropriate to treat a liquidating dividend as a return of capital, the costs and complexities involved in determining whether or not the dividend is a liquidating dividend are often greater than the benefit. Accordingly, IAS 27 was changed in 2009 to require that all dividends be recognized in net income regardless of whether or not they were liquidating dividends. Using the same data as in the previous illustration, Jenstar would make the following journal entries under the cost method: Jan. 1, Year 1 Investment in Safebuy Cash To record the acquisition of 10% of Safebuy’s shares

Under the cost method, income is recognized when dividends are received or receivable.

LO4 An associate is an entity over which the investor has significant influence.

Dec. 31, Year 1 Cash Dividend income Receipt of dividend from Safebuy Jan. 10, Year 2 Cash Investment in Safebuy Gain on sale (reported in net income) Record sale of investment

95,000 95,000

8,000 8,000

99,000 95,000 4,000

Equity Method of Reporting an Equity Investment An investment in an associate is an investment in the voting shares of a corporation that permits the investor to exercise significant influence over the strategic operating and financing policies of the investee. However, it does not


69


CHAPTER 2


61

establish control or t control over that investee. Note that the criteria for this type of investment require only the ability to exercise significant influence; there is no requirement to show that such influence is actually being exercised in a particular situation. The following conditions are possible indicators that significant influence is present and that the investee is an associate: (a) Representation on the board of directors or equivalent governing body of the investee (b) Participation in policy-making processes, including participation in decisions about dividends or other distributions (c) Material transactions between the investor and the investee (d) Interchange of managerial personnel (e) Provision of essential technical information IAS 28 suggests that holding 20–50% of voting shares may indicate the presence of significant influence, but it also states that a holding of this size does not necessarily mean that such influence exists. The following scenarios will illustrate this. Given that A Company owns 60% of the voting shares of C Company (probably a control investment), does B Company’s holding of 30% of C Company’s shares indicate that B Company has a significant influence investment? Not necessarily. If B Company were unable to obtain hip on the board of directors of C Company or participate in its strategic policy-making because of A Company’s control, it would be difficult to conclude that B Company has significant influence. In such a situation, B Company’s holding would be considered a nonstrategic investment. Would this situation be different if B Company were allowed hip on C Company’s board of directors? IAS 28 indicates that a substantial or majority ownership by another investor would not necessarily preclude an investor from exercising significant influence. In other words, another company’s control investment in C Company does not mean that B Company’s 30% investment in C Company can never be considered a significant influence. Determination of significant influence depends on the particular circumstances and the use of judgment. On the other hand, is it possible to have significant influence with less than 20%? Normally, an investment of less than 20% would not allow the investor to elect any to the board of directors of the investee corporation; because of this, it probably cannot exert any influence on the decision-making processes of that company. However, 20% is only a guideline, and an examination of the facts may suggest some other type of investment. For example, if the investee’s shares are widely distributed, and all the other shareholders hold very small blocks of shares and display indifference as to the make-up of the board of directors, an investment of less than 20% may be considered a significant influence investment. This could certainly be the case if some of the remaining shareholders gave the investor proxies to vote their shares. From all these discussions and examples, it should be obvious that considerable professional judgment is required in determining whether an investor has significant influence. In later chapters, when we discuss the criteria used to

A guideline (not a rigid rule) in determining significant influence is holding 20–50% of voting shares. When one investor has control, other investors usually do not have significant influence.

When an investor has less than 20% of the voting shares, it usually does not have significant influence.


70


62

CHAPTER 2


determine whether a particular investment establishes control over an investee, we will also conclude that considerable professional judgment is required. When an investor has significant influence, the investment should be reported by the equity method. The basic concept behind the equity method is that the investor records its proportionate share of the associate’s income as its own income and reduces the investment by its share of the associate’s dividends declared. LO4

Illustration of Equity Method Basics We return to the example of the Jenstar and Safebuy companies. All the facts remain the same, including the 10% ownership, except that we assume this is a significant influence investment. Using the equity method, Jenstar’s journal entries would be as follows: Jan. 1, Year 1 Investment in Safebuy Cash To record the acquisition of 10% of Safebuy’s shares

Income is recognized based on the income reported by the associate, and dividends are reported as a reduction of the investment .

The equity method picks up the investor’s share of the changes in the associate’s shareholders’ equity.

The equity method provides information on the potential for future cash flows.

Dec. 31, Year 1 Investment in Safebuy (10% 3 100,000) Investment income 10% of Safebuy’s Year 1 net income Cash (10% 3 80,000) Investment in Safebuy Receipt of dividend from Safebuy

95,000 95,000

10,000 10,000 8,000 8,000

Under the equity method, the investor’s investment changes in direct relation to the changes taking place in the investee’s equity s. The ing objective is to reflect in the investor’s financial statements the financial results arising from the close relationship between the companies. The equity method is effective at achieving this. Because the investor is able to influence the associate’s dividend policy, dividends could end up being paid in periods during which the investee was suffering considerable losses. The cost method of reporting would reflect investment income, whereas the equity method would report investment losses during these periods. The equity method reflects the accrual method of income measurement. As the investee earns income, the investor accrues its share of this income. The associate is not obligated to pay out this income as a dividend on an annual basis. The investor can expect to get the dividend at a later date or to sell its shares at a higher value if the income is not paid out as a dividend. Therefore, the equity method does provide useful information about the future cash flow potential from the investment.

Additional Features Associated with the Equity Method The previous example illustrated the basic concepts of the equity method. Besides these fundamentals, the following features are relevant for this course: • The ing for other changes in associate’s equity • Acquisition costs greater than carrying amount • Unrealized intercompany profits


71


CHAPTER 2


63

• Changes to and from the equity method • Losses exceeding the balance in the investment • Impairment losses • Gains or losses on sale of the investment • Held for sale • Disclosure requirements

Other Changes in Associate’s Equity In ing for an investment by the equity method, IAS 28 requires that the investor’s proportionate share of the associate’s discontinued operations, other comprehensive income, changes in ing policy, corrections of errors relating to prior-period financial statements, and capital transactions should be presented and disclosed in the investor’s financial statements according to their nature. Companies report certain items separately on their statements of comprehensive income so that financial statement s can distinguish between the portion of comprehensive income that comes from continuing operations and the portion that comes from other sources such as discontinued operations and other comprehensive income. Retrospective adjustments of prior-period results and capital transactions are shown as separate components of retained earnings or are disclosed in the footnotes.

The investor’s statement of comprehensive income should reflect its share of the investee’s income according to its nature and the different statement classifications.

Example A Company owns 30% of B Company. The statement of comprehensive income for B Company for the current year is as follows: B COMPANY STATEMENT OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME Sales Operating expenses

$500,000 200,000

Operating income before income tax Income tax

300,000 120,000

Net income from operations Loss from discontinued operations (net of tax) Net income Other comprehensive income (net of tax)

180,000 40,000 140,000 10,000

$150,000

Comprehensive income

Upon receiving this statement of comprehensive income, A Company makes the following journal entry to apply the equity method: Investment in B Company (30% 3 150,000) Discontinued operations 2 investment loss (30% 3 40,000) Other comprehensive income (30% 3 10,000) Investment income (30% 3 180,000)

45,000 12,000 3,000 54,000

All three income items, which total $45,000, will appear on A Company’s statement of comprehensive income. The investment loss from discontinued operations and the other comprehensive income items require the same presentation as

The investor’s shares of income from continuing operations, discontinued operations, and other comprehensive income are reported separately.


72


64

CHAPTER 2

Many ing procedures required for consolidated purposes are also required under the equity method.


would be made if A Company had its own discontinued operations or other comprehensive income items. Full footnote disclosure is required to indicate that these particular items arise from an investment in associate ed for by the equity method. Materiality has to be considered because these items do not require special treatment in A Company’s statement of comprehensive income if they are not material from A Company’s point of view, even though they are material from B Company’s perspective. Many of the ing procedures for the application of the equity method are similar to the consolidation procedures for a parent and its subsidiary. Furthermore, the concepts underlying the procedures used in ing for the acquisition of a subsidiary are also adopted in ing for the acquisition of an investment in an associate. The next two sections briefly describe procedures required in applying the equity method that are equally applicable under the consolidation process. In this chapter, we will describe the procedures very generally. We will discuss these procedures in more detail in later chapters when we illustrate the consolidation of a parent and its subsidiary.

Acquisition Costs Greater than Carrying Amounts

The investor’s cost is usually greater than its share of the carrying amount of the associate’s net assets.

In the previous examples, we recorded Jenstar’s initial investment at its cost, but we did not consider the implications if this cost was different from the carrying amount of Safebuy’s net assets at the time of the acquisition. We now add a new feature to equity method reporting by considering the difference between the amount paid for the investment and the investor’s share of the carrying amount of the associate’s net assets. Companies’ shares often trade at prices that are different from their carrying amount. There are many reasons for this. The share price presumably reflects the fair value of the company as a whole. In effect, it reflects the fair value of the assets and liabilities of the company as a whole. However, many of the company’s assets are reported at historical cost or cost less accumulated amortization. For these assets, there will be a difference between the fair value and the carrying amount. Some of the company’s value may be attributed to assets that are not even reported on the company’s books. For example, the company may have expensed its research and development costs in the past but is now close to patenting a new technology. This technology could have considerable value to a prospective purchaser, even though there is no asset recorded in the company’s books. Last but not least, the company’s earnings potential may be so great that an investor is willing to pay an amount in excess of the fair value of the company’s identifiable net assets.3 This excess payment is referred to as goodwill. The difference between the investor’s cost and the investor’s percentage of the carrying amount of the associate’s identifiable net assets is called the acquisition differential. The investor allocates this differential to specific assets and liabilities of the associate, and then either depreciates the allocated components over their useful lives or writes down the allocated component when there has been impairment in its value. This process of identifying, allocating, and amortizing the acquisition differential will be illustrated in later chapters.

Unrealized Profits

As we will see in later chapters, consolidated financial statements result from combining the financial statements of a parent company with


73


CHAPTER 2


65

the financial statements of its subsidiaries. The end result is the financial reporting of a single economic entity, made up of a number of separate legal entities. One of the major tasks in this process is to eliminate all intercompany transactions— especially intercompany “profits”—so that the consolidated statements reflect only transactions with outsiders. The basic premise behind the elimination is that, from the point of view of this single ing entity, “you cannot make a profit selling to yourself.” Any such “unrealized profits” from intercompany transfers of inventory (or other assets) must be held back until the specific assets involved are sold to outside entities or used in producing goods or providing services to outsiders. In the case of a significant influence investment, any transactions between the investor and the associate (they are related parties) must be scrutinized so that incomes are not overstated through the back-and-forth transfer of assets. From an ing perspective, any transfer is acceptable provided that both parties record the transfer at the value at which it is being carried in the records of the selling company. However, if the transfer involves a profit, a portion of that profit must be held back on an after-tax basis in the investor’s equity method journal entries. When the asset in question is sold outside or consumed by the purchaser, the after-tax profit is realized through an equity method journal entry, again made by the investor. The entries under the equity method to for unrealized and realized profit from intercompany transactions will be discussed and illustrated in detail in Chapters 6 and 7.

Consolidated statements should reflect only the results of transactions with outsiders.

Changes to and from the Equity Method The classification of investments will change as the particular facts change. An investment may initially be FVTPL and subsequently change to one of significant influence. This could happen if additional shares were acquired. Once significant influence has been achieved, a switch from the previous way of reporting is made on a prospective basis. The carrying amount of the FVTPL investment, which would be the fair value of the investment, becomes its new cost. If circumstances change, significant influence may also be achieved without additional shares being acquired, in which case the equity method would commence. For example, the holdings of a large block of investee shares by another company could prevent an investor from exercising significant influence. But if that other company sells its block on the market, the investor’s previous FVTPL investment may now amount to significant influence. See Part A of Self-Study Problem 1 for an example of changing from FVTPL to the equity method on a prospective basis. When an investment changes from significant influence to FVTPL, the equity method ceases to be appropriate and the fair value method takes its place, also on a prospective basis. On this date, the investor shall measure at fair value any investment the investor retains in the former associate. The investor shall recognize in net income any difference between

Changes in reporting methods are ed for prospectively if they are changed because of a change in circumstance.

(a) the fair value of any retained investment and any proceeds from disposing of the part interest in the associate, and (b) the carrying amount of the investment at the date when significant influence is lost. If an investor loses significant influence over an associate, the investor must for all amounts recognized in other comprehensive income in relation to

Profits from intercompany transactions must be eliminated until the assets are sold to outsiders or used in producing goods or providing services to outsiders.


74


66

CHAPTER 2


that associate on the same basis as would be required if the associate had directly disposed of the related assets or liabilities. When the investor sells its investment in the associate, it is, in effect, selling its proportionate share of the assets and liabilities of the associate. Therefore, if a gain or loss previously recognized in other comprehensive income by an associate would be reclassified to net income on the disposal of the related assets or liabilities, the investor reclassifies the gain or loss from accumulated other comprehensive income to net income (as a reclassification adjustment) when it loses significant influence over the associate. For example, if an associate had reported other comprehensive income on a cash flow hedge and the investor loses significant influence over the associate, the investor must reclassify to net income the gain or loss previously recognized in OCI in relation to that hedge. If an investor’s ownership interest in an associate is reduced, but the investment continues to be an associate, the investor must reclassify to net income only a proportionate amount of the gain or loss previously recognized in OCI. When an investment changes from significant influence to control, the preparation of consolidated statements commences, again on a prospective basis. The concepts relating to this particular situation will be discussed at length in later chapters. If an investor guaranteed an investee’s obligations, the investor could end up reporting its investment as a liability rather than an asset.

Other long-term interests in the associate may have to be written down when the associate is reporting losses.

Losses Exceeding the Balance in the Investment A question arises as to the appropriate ing when an investor’s share of an associate’s losses exceeds the carrying amount of the investment. There are two possible ways to treat this. The investor could reduce the investment to zero and recommence the use of the equity method when its share of associate’s earnings exceeds its share of losses. Alternatively, the investor could continue to accrue losses, even though they result in a negative balance in the investment . IAS 28 provides some guidance on this issue. After the investor’s interest in the associate is reduced to zero, additional losses are provided for, and a liability is recognized, only to the extent that the investor has incurred legal or constructive obligations or made payments on behalf of the associate. The investor would have an obligation if it guaranteed certain liabilities of the associate or if it committed to provide additional financial to the associate. If a liability is not reported, the investor resumes recognizing its share of those profits only after its share of them equals the share of losses not recognized. If the investor has other long-term interests in the associate over and above its equity investment, these other assets may also have to be written down. Such items may include preference shares and long-term receivables or loans but do not include trade receivables, trade payables, or any long-term receivables for which adequate collateral exists. Losses recognized under the equity method in excess of the investor’s investment in ordinary shares are applied to the other components of the investor’s interest in an associate in the reverse order of their seniority (i.e., priority in liquidation). Accordingly, an investment in preferred shares should be written down before a long-term note receivable because the preferred share becomes worthless before a note receivable. In other words, the note receivable has priority over the investment in preferred shares in the event that the associate is liquidated.

Impairment Losses If there is an indication that the investment may be impaired, the investment is tested for impairment in accordance with IAS 36, as a single asset, by comparing its recoverable amount (higher of value in use and fair value less


75


CHAPTER 2


67

costs of disposal) to its carrying amount. In determining the value in use of the investment, an entity estimates (a) its share of the present value of the estimated future cash flows expected to be generated by the associate, including the cash flows from the operations of the associate and the proceeds on the ultimate disposal of the investment, or (b) the present value of the estimated future cash flows expected to arise from dividends to be received from the investment and from its ultimate disposal. If the recoverable amount is less than the carrying amount, the investment is written down to the recoverable amount. The impairment loss is not allocated to goodwill or any other assets underlying the carrying amount of the investment because these underlying assets were not separately recognized. If the recoverable amount increases in subsequent periods, the impairment loss can be reversed.

Gains and Losses on Sale of Investments When all the shares that make up a long-term investment are sold, the gain (loss) is shown on the income statement and is calculated as the difference between the sale proceeds and the carrying amount of the investment. When only some of the shares are sold, the gain is calculated using the average carrying amount of the investment. Formulas such as first in, first out (FIFO), last in, first out (LIFO), or specific identification are not permitted. If a portion of a significant influence or a control investment is sold, a re-evaluation must be made to determine whether the previous classification is still valid.

Average cost should be used in determining any gain or loss when an investor sells part of its investment.

Held for Sale Investments in associates that meet the criteria to be classified as held for sale should be measured at the lower of carrying amount and fair value less costs of disposal, and should be reported as current assets. An entity shall classify an investment in associate as held for sale if its carrying amount will be recovered principally through a sale transaction rather than through continuing use. For this to be the case, the asset must be available for immediate sale in its present condition, subject only to that are usual and customary for sales of such assets, and its sale must be highly probable. For the sale to be highly probable, the appropriate level of management must be committed to a plan to sell the asset, and an active program to locate a buyer and complete the plan must have been initiated. Further, the asset must be actively marketed for sale at a price that is reasonable in relation to its current fair value. In addition, the sale should be expected to qualify for recognition as a completed sale within one year from the date of classification, and actions required to complete the plan should indicate that it is unlikely that significant changes to the plan will be made or that the plan will be withdrawn. Presentation and Disclosure Requirements Investments in associates shall be

LO5

classified as noncurrent assets. The investor’s share of the profit or loss of such associates and the carrying amount of these investments must be separately disclosed. In addition, the following summarizes the main disclosures required in IFRS 12 for investments in associates: (a) Nature of the entity’s relationship with the associate and the proportion of ownership interest or participating share held by the entity (b) Fair value of investments in associates for which there are published price quotations

The fair value of an investment in associate should be disclosed when it is readily available.


76


68

CHAPTER 2


(c) Summarized financial information of associates, including the aggregated amounts of assets, liabilities, revenues, and profit or loss (d) Unrecognized share of losses of an associate, both for the period and cumulatively, if an investor has discontinued recognition of its share of losses of an associate (e) Nature and extent of any significant restrictions on the ability of associates to transfer funds to the entity in the form of cash dividends, or to repay loans or advances made by the entity (f) Contingent liabilities incurred relating to its interests in associates Aecon Group Inc. is a publicly traded construction and infrastructuredevelopment company incorporated in Canada. Aecon and its subsidiaries provide services to private and public sector clients throughout Canada and on a selected basis internationally. It reported numerous construction projects under the equity method in its 2011 financial statements. Excerpts from these statements, which applied the disclosure requirement in IAS 28 rather than IFRS 12, are presented in Exhibit 2.2. Much of the disclosure provided under IAS 28 would also be required under IFRS 12.

EXHIBIT 2.2

Extracts (in Part) from Aecon’s 2011 Financial Statements

5. Summary of Significant ing Policies 5.24 Associates Entities in which the Company has significant influence and which are neither subsidiaries nor t ventures are ed for using the equity method of ing. Under the equity method of ing, the Company’s investments in associates are carried at cost and adjusted for post-acquisition changes in the net assets of the investment. Profit or loss reflects the Company’s share of the results of these investments. The consolidated statements of comprehensive income include the Company’s share of any amounts recognized by associates in other comprehensive income. Where there has been a change recognized directly in the equity of the associate, the Company recognizes its share of that change in equity. The financial statements of the associates are generally prepared for the same reporting period as the Company, using consistent ing policies. Adjustments are made to bring into line any dissimilar ing policies that may exist in the underlying records of the associate. Adjustments are made in the consolidated financial statements to eliminate the Company’s share of unrealized gains and losses on transactions between the Company and its associates. The Company discontinues the use of the equity method from the date on which it ceases to have significant influence, and from that date s for the investment in accordance with IAS 39, “Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement” (its initial costs are the carrying amount of the associate on that date), provided the investment does not then qualify as a subsidiary or t venture. 14. Construction Projects ed for Using the Equity Method The Company performs some construction projects through non-consolidated entities. The Company’s participation in construction project entities where the Company exercises significant influence (i.e., associates), but does not control or tly control the entity, are ed for using the equity method. The Company’s share of assets, liabilities, revenues, and expenses of construction project entities ed for using the equity method is as follows (in 000s):

(continued)


77


CHAPTER 2

EXHIBIT 2.2


69

(continued)

December 31 December 31 2011 2010 Assets $ 25,337 $ 26,950 Liabilities (15,077) (7,406) $ 17,931 $ 11,873 Net investment in construction projects ed for using the equity method Revenue and expenses for the year ended were as follows: December 31 December 31 2011 2010 Revenue $ 84,253 $ 53,794 Expenses (70,195) (53,389) $ 14,058 $ 405 Share of profits before income taxes

ANALYSIS AND INTERPRETATION OF FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Information on the income, assets, and liabilities of the associates must be disclosed.

LO6

In this chapter, we have used the Jenstar example to illustrate five different methods for reporting equity investments. Exhibit 2.3 presents financial data (ignoring income tax) for Jenstar for Year 1. The data for the investment in and investment income from Safebuy for each method below has been taken from the previous examples earlier in this chapter. All other data is now being given so that we can see the impact of the ing policy choice on three key financial ratios.

EXHIBIT 2.3

Impact of Reporting Methods on Key Financial Ratios (in 000s)

Investment income Other income Net income OCI Comprehensive income

IFRS 9 FVTOCI

Cost

Equity

FVTPL

AFS

$

$

$

$

$

8 67 75 0 75

$

10 67 77 0 77

Investment in Safebuy Other current assets Current assets Investment in Safebuy Other noncurrent assets Total assets

$ 300 300 95 700 $1,095

$ 300 300 97 700 $1,097

Current liabilities Noncurrent liabilities Total liabilities Accumulated OCI Other shareholders’ equity Total shareholders’ equity Liabilities & shareholders’ equity

$ 250 400 650 75 370 445 $1,095

$ 250 400 650 77 370 447 $1,097

Current ratio Debt-to-equity ratio Return on equity

IAS 39

$ $

1.20 1.461 16.85%

1.20 1.454 17.23%

11 67 78 0 78 98 300 398

$

8 67 75 3 78

$

$

8 67 75 3 78

700 $1,098

$ 300 300 98 700 $1,098

$ 300 300 98 700 $1,098

$ 250 400 650 78 370 448 $1,098

$ 250 400 650 78 370 448 $1,098

$ 250 400 650 78 370 448 $1,098

1.59 1.451 17.41%

1.20 1.451 16.74%

1.20 1.451 16.74%

The FVTPL investment must be shown as a current asset, whereas the other investments could be current or noncurrent, depending on management’s intention.

The FVTPL investment shows the best liquidity and profitability.


78


70

CHAPTER 2


The following observations are made on the data in Exhibit 2.3: • The current ratio is highest for the FVTPL method because the investment in Safebuy is shown as a current asset. Therefore, the FVTPL method shows the best liquidity. • The last three methods show the lowest debt-to-equity ratio (and the best solvency) because equity is the highest under these three methods. • The return on equity is highest for the FVTPL ratio because net income, rather than comprehensive income, is typically used as the numerator for this equity. Therefore, the FVTPL method shows the best profitability even though AFS and FVTOCI show the same comprehensive income as the FVTPL method. Although the reporting methods show different values for liquidity, solvency, and profitability, the real economic situation is exactly the same for the five different methods. See Self-Study Problem 2 for another example, to compare the ing for the different methods of reporting. This example shows that the timing of reporting income is different but the cumulative results are the same. If this is so, which method best represents the real economic situation? This is a question we should ask as we study different ing and reporting methods throughout the course. Many of the end-of-chapter problems ask this question and give you an opportunity to express your own opinion. LO7

ASPE Differences As mentioned in Chapter 1 and as we have seen in this chapter, most of the discussion in this textbook deal with IFRSs. Starting in this chapter and in each subsequent chapter, we will have a section at the end on Canadian ing standards for private enterprises, which we will refer to as ASPE. In this section, the differences in the reporting requirements for private entities for the topics discussed in the chapter will be summarized. Detailed illustrations will not be provided. Section 3051: Investments of Part II of the CICA Handbook has different standards for a private enterprise than for a publicly able enterprise. The following excerpts from Section 3051 outline the main requirements for significant influence investments:

Under ASPE, investments in associates can be reported using the cost method, equity method, or at fair value.

• An investor that is able to exercise significant influence over an investee should make an ing policy choice to for the investment using either the equity method or the cost method. An investor should for all investments within the scope of this section using the same method. • When an investee’s equity securities are traded in an active market, the cost method cannot be used. Under such circumstances, the investment should be ed for using the equity method or at fair value, with changes in fair value recorded in net income. • The investments in and income from companies subject to significant influence, and other investments ed for at cost, should be reported separately.


79


CHAPTER 2


ASPE is also quite different for financial instruments. The following excerpts from Section 3856: Financial Instruments of Part II of the CICA Handbook outline the main requirements for nonstrategic investments: • Nonstrategic investments in equity instruments that are quoted in an active market should be reported at fair value, and any changes in fair value should be reported in net income.

71

Under ASPE, nonstrategic equity investments should be reported at cost unless the value of the investment is quoted in an active market or the entity elects to report at fair value.

• Nonstrategic investments in equity instruments that are not quoted in an active market should be reported at cost less any reduction for impairment, and the impairment losses should be reported in net income. • An entity may irrevocably elect to measure any equity investment at fair value by designating that fair value measurement shall apply. • Other comprehensive income does not exist under ASPE.

U.S. GAAP Differences U.S. GAAP and IFRSs are essentially the same for investments in associates. The minor differences are summarized as follows: 1. Whereas IFRSs require that the time between reporting dates of the investor and associate must not be more than three months and that the reporting entity must adjust for any significant intervening transactions, U.S. GAAP state that the time between reporting dates generally should not be more than three months and the reporting entity must disclose the effects of (and may adjust for) any significant intervening transactions. 2. Whereas IFRSs require that the ing policies of the investor and associate conform, the SEC staff does not require policies to conform, provided that policies are in accordance with U.S. GAAP. 3. Losses in excess of the investor’s interest in the associate should continue to be recognized when the associate is imminently expected to return to profitability.

There are some minor differences between U.S. GAAP and IFRSs for reporting investments in associates.

Cautionary Note: When answering the end-ofchapter material for Chapters 2 through 11, assume that IFRSs are to be applied unless otherwise stated.

SUMMARY FVTPL and FCTOCI investments and most AFS investments are reported at fair value. Dividends from these investments are reported in income when they are declared. Unrealized gains and losses are reported in net income for FVTPL investments and in OCI for FVTOCI and AFS investments. If a quoted market price in an active market is not available for the AFS investments, these investments are reported using the cost method. AFS investments will cease to exist as


80


72

CHAPTER 2


an investment category when IFRS 9 becomes mandatory on January 1, 2015, or when a reporting entity chooses to adopt IFRS 9 early. An investment where the investor is able to significantly influence the operations of the investee is called an investment in associate and must be ed for using the equity method, as described in IAS 28. This requires the investor to record its share of any changes in the shareholders’ equity of the investee, adjusted for the amortization of the acquisition differential and the holdback and realization of profits from the intercompany sale of assets.

Significant Changes in GAAP in the Last Three Years 1. The effective date for IFRS 9 has been changed from January 1, 2013, to January 1, 2015, with early adoption permitted. Under IFRS 9, all nonstrategic equity investments must be measured at fair value, with changes in fair value reported in net income; however, an entity can irrevocably elect on initial recognition to report the fair value changes on an equity investment that is not held for short-term trading in other comprehensive income. 2. IFRS 10 replaced certain components of IAS 28 and SIC 12; IFRS 11 replaced IAS 31 and SIC 13; and IRFS 12 replaced the disclosure requirements previously listed in IAS 28 and 31. 3. IFRS 13 is a new standard on fair value measurement. It replaces the fair value measurement guidance that was previously contained in individual IFRSs with a single, unified definition of fair value and a framework for measuring fair value. It also states the required disclosures about fair value measurements. It includes guidance to determine fair value measurement in inactive or illiquid markets. Fair value is defined as the price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date (i.e., an exit price). It would reflect the highest and best use for non financial assets.

Changes Expected in GAAP in the Next Three Years No major changes are expected in the next three years for the topics discussed in this chapter.

SELF- STUDY PROBLEM 1 Part A LO2, 3

On January 1, Year 5, High Inc. purchased 10% of the outstanding common shares of Lowe Corp. for $192,000. From High’s perspective, Lowe was a FVTPL investment. The fair value of High’s investment was $200,000 at December 31, Year 5. On January 1, Year 6, High purchased an additional 25% of Lowe’s shares for $500,000. This second purchase allowed High to exert significant influence over Lowe. There was no acquisition differential on the date of the 25% acquisition. During the two years, Lowe reported the following: Year 5 Year 6

Profit

Dividends

$200,000 270,000

$120,000 130,000


CHAPTER 2


81

73

Required: Prepare High’s journal entries with respect to this investment for both Year 5 and Year 6.

Part B

The following are summarized income statements for the two companies for Year 7:

Operating income before income taxes Income tax expense Net income before discontinued operations Loss from discontinued operations (net of tax) Net income

High Inc.

Lowe Corp.

$750,000 300,000 450,000 — *$450,000

$340,000 140,000 200,000 20,000 $180,000

*The net income of High does not include any investment income from its investment in Lowe.

Lowe paid no dividends in Year 7.

Required: (a) Prepare the journal entries that High should make at the end of Year 7 with respect to its investment in Lowe. (b) Prepare High’s income statement for Year 7, taking into consideration the journal entries in part (a).

S OLUTION

TO

SELF-STUDY PROBLEM 1 The 10% purchase should be ed for under the fair value method. High’s journal entries during Year 5 are as follows: Investment in Lowe Cash Purchase of 10% of shares of Lowe Cash (10% 3 120,000) Dividend income Investment in Lowe (200,000 2 192,000) Unrealized gain on FVTPL investment

192,000 192,000 12,000 12,000 8,000 8,000

The 25% purchase in Year 6 changes the investment to one of significant influence, which is ed for prospectively under the equity method. The journal entries in Year 6 are as follows: Investment in Lowe Cash Purchase of additional 25% of shares of Lowe Investment in Lowe (35% 3 270,000 profit) Investment income Cash (35% 3 130,000 dividends) Investment in Lowe

500,000 500,000 94,500 94,500 45,500 45,500


82


74

CHAPTER 2


Part B

(a) Applying the equity method, High makes the following journal entries in Year 7: Investment in Lowe (35% 3 180,000) Discontinued operations—investment loss, (35% 3 20,000) Investment Income (35% 3 200,000)

63,000 7,000 70,000

(b) HIGH INC. INCOME STATEMENT Year Ended December 31, Year 7 Operating income Investment income* Income before income taxes Income tax expense Net income before discontinued operations Discontinued operations 2 investment loss (net of tax)* Net income

$750,000 70,000 820,000 300,000 520,000 7,000 $513,000

* A footnote would disclose that these items, in whole or in part, came from a 35% investment in Lowe, ed for using the equity method.

SELF- S TUDY P ROBLEM 2 LO2, 3, 6

On January 1, Year 1, Joshua Corp. purchased 20% of the outstanding ordinary shares of Deng Company at a cost of $950,000. Deng reported profit of $900,000 and paid dividends of $600,000 for the year ended December 31, Year 1. The market value of Joshua’s 20% interest in Deng was $990,000 at December 31, Year 1. On June 30, Year 2, Deng paid dividends of $350,000. On July 2, Year 2 Joshua sold its investment in Deng for $1,005,000. Deng did not prepare financial statements for Year 2 until early in Year 3.

Required: (a) Prepare the journal entries for Joshua Corp. for Years 1 and 2 for the abovenoted transactions under the following reporting methods: cost, equity, FVTPL, and FVTOCI. (b) Prepare a schedule to show the profit, OCI, comprehensive income, and change in retained earnings for Joshua for Year 1, Year 2, and the total of the changes for Years 1 and 2 under the four methods. (c) Prepare a schedule to compare the change in cash with change in profit, comprehensive income, and retained earnings for Joshua for the sum of the two years under the four methods. (d) Comment on the similarities and differences in financial reporting for the four methods.


83


CHAPTER 2

S OLUTION

TO

75


SELF-STUDY PROBLEM 2 (a) Credit entries are noted in brackets. Cost

Equity

FVTPL

FVTOCI

Jan. 1, Year 1 Investment in Deng 950,000 950,000 950,000 950,000 Cash (950,000) (950,000) (950,000) (950,000) To record the acquisition of 20% of Deng’s shares Dec. 31, Year 1 Investment in Deng (20% 3 900,000) 180,000 Investment income (180,000) Accrue share of profit Cash (20% 3 600,000) 120,000 120,000 120,000 120,000 Dividend income (120,000) (120,000) (120,000) Investment in Deng (120,000) Receipt of dividend from Deng Investment in Deng (990,000 2 950,000) 40,000 40,000 Unrealized gains (reported in profit) (40,000) OCI (40,000) To record investment at fair value June 30, Year 2 Cash (20% 3 350,000) 70,000 70,000 70,000 70,000 Dividend income (70,000) (70,000) (70,000) Investment in Deng (70,000) Receipt of dividend from Deng July 2, Year 2 Cash 1,005,000 1,005,000 1,005,000 1,005,000 Investment in Deng (950,000) (940,000) (990,000) (990,000) Gain on sale (reported in profit) (55,000) (65,000) (15,000) OCI–unrealized gains (15,000) Record sale of investment Accumulated OCI–reclassification to retained earnings 55,000 Retained earnings (55,000) Clear accumulated OCI to retained earnings

(b) (in $000s) Profit OCI Comprehensive income Change in retained earnings

YR1

Cost YR2

Total

YR1

Equity YR2 Total

120

125

245

180

65

245

160

85

245

120 120

125 125

245 245

180 180

65 65

245 245

160 160

85 85

245 245

YR1

FVTPL YR2 Total

YR1

FVTOCI YR2 Total

120 40 160 120

70 15 85 125

190 55 245 245

(c) (in $000s)

Cost

Equity

FVTPL

FVTOCI

Cash received Dividends in Year 1 Dividends in Year 2 Sales proceeds in Year 2

120 70 1,005

120 70 1,005

120 70 1,005

120 70 1,005

Total cash received

1,195

1,195

1,195

1,195

(continued)


84


76

CHAPTER 2


Cash paid for investment

950

950

950

950

Change in cash

245

245

245

245

5 Change in profit 5 Change in comprehensive income 5 Change in retained earnings

245 245

245 245

245 245

190 245

245

245

245

245

(d) Similarities – Change in cash is the same for all methods. – Profit for the two years in total is the same for the first three methods and comprehensive income is the same for all methods. – Change in retained earnings for the two years in total is the same for all methods. – Change in cash is equal to change in profit for the two years in total for the first three methods. – Change in cash is equal to change in comprehensive income for the two years in total for all methods. – Change in cash is equal to change in retained earnings for the two years in total for all methods. Differences – Timing of income recognition is different. – Gains from appreciation go through profit for first three methods but never get reported in profit for the FVTOCI investment.


1. How is the concept of a business combination related to the concept of a parent–subsidiary relationship?

LO2

2. Distinguish between the financial reporting for FVTPL investments and that for investments in associates.

LO2

3. What is the difference between a “control” investment and a “t control” investment?

LO1

4. What is the purpose of IFRS 8 on Operating Segments?

LO2, 4

5. What criteria would be used to determine whether the equity method should be used to for a particular investment?

LO3

6. The equity method records dividends as a reduction in the investment . Explain why.

LO4

7. The Ralston Company owns 35% of the outstanding voting shares of Purina Inc. Under what circumstances would Ralston determine that it is inappropriate to report this investment using the equity method?

LO3

8. Because of the acquisition of additional investee shares, an investor may need to change from the fair value method for a FVTPL investment to the


CHAPTER 2


85

77

equity method for a significant influence investment. What procedures are applied to effect this ing change? LO3

9. An investor uses the equity method to report its investment in an investee. During the current year, the investee reports other comprehensive income on its statement of comprehensive income. How should this item be reflected in the investor’s financial statements?

LO3

10. Ashton Inc. acquired a 40% interest in Villa Corp. at a bargain price because Villa had suffered significant losses in past years. Ashton’s cost was $200,000. In the first year after acquisition, Villa reported a loss of $700,000. Using the equity method, how should Ashton for this loss?

LO3

11. Able Company holds a 40% interest in Baker Corp. During the year, Able sold a portion of this investment. How should this investment be reported after the sale?

LO5

12. Briefly describe the disclosure requirements related to an investment in an associated company.

LO6

13. Which of the reporting methods described in this chapter would typically report the highest current ratio? Briefly explain.

LO7

14. How should a private company that has opted to follow ASPE report an investment in an associate?

LO2

15. How will the investment in a private company be reported under IFRS 9, and how does this differ from IAS 39?

Case 2-1

Hil Company purchased 10,000 common shares (10%) of Ton Inc. on January 1, Year 4, for $345,000, when Ton’s shareholders’ equity was $2,600,000, and it classified the investment as a FVTPL security. On January 1, Year 5, Hil acquired an additional 15,000 common shares (15%) of Ton for $525,000. On both dates, any difference between the purchase price and the carrying amount of Ton’s shareholders’ equity was attributed to land. The market value of Ton’s common shares was $35 per share on December 31, Year 4, and $37 per share on December 31, Year 5. Ton reported net income of $500,000 in Year 4 and $520,000 in Year 5, and paid dividends of $480,000 in both years. The management of Hil is very excited about the increase in ownership interest in Ton because Ton has been very profitable. Hil pays a bonus to management based on its net income determined in accordance with GAAP. The management of Hil is wondering how the increase in ownership will affect the reporting of the investment in Ton. Will Hil continue to classify the investment as FVTPL in Year 5? What factors will be considered in determining whether the equity method should now be used? If the equity method is now appropriate, will the change be made retroactively? They would like to see a comparison of income for Year 5 and the balance in the investment at the end of Year 5 under the two options for reporting this investment. Last but not least, they would like to get your opinion on which method should be used to best reflect the performance of Hil for Year 5.

C ASES LO2, 3, 4


86


78

CHAPTER 2


Required: Respond to the questions raised and the requests made by management. Prepare schedules and/or financial statements to your presentation.

Case 2-2 LO2, 4, 7

Floyd’s Specialty Foods Inc. (FSFI) operates over 60 shops throughout Ontario. The company was founded by George Floyd when he opened a single shop in the city of Cornwall. This store sold prepared dinners and directed its products at customers who were too busy to prepare meals after a long day at work. The concept proved to be very successful, and more stores were opened in Cornwall. Recently, new stores were opened in five other Ontario cities. Up to the current year, the shares of FSFI have been owned entirely by Floyd. However, during this year, the company suffered severe cash flow problems, due to too-rapid expansion exacerbated by a major decline in economic activity. Profitability suffered and creditors threatened to take legal action for long-overdue s. To avoid bankruptcy, Floyd sought additional financing from his old friend James Connelly, who is a majority shareholder of Cornwall Autobody Inc. (CAI), a public company. Subsequently, CAI paid $950,000 cash to FSFI to acquire enough newly issued shares of common stock for a one-third interest. At the end of this year, CAI’s ants are discussing how they should properly report this investment in the company’s financial statements. One argues for maintaining the asset at original cost, saying, “What we have done is to advance money to bail out these stores. Floyd will continue to run the organization with little or no attention to us, so in effect we have lent him money. After all, what does anyone in our company know about the specialty food business? My guess is that as soon as the stores become solvent, Floyd will want to buy back our shares.” Another ant disagrees, stating that the equity method is appropriate. “I realize that our company is not capable of running a specialty food company. But the requirements state that ownership of over 20% is evidence of significant influence.” A third ant s equity method reporting for a different reason. “If the investment gives us the ability to exert significant influence, that is all that is required. We don’t have to actually exert it. One-third of the common shares certainly give us that ability.”

Required: How should CAI report its investment? Your answer should include a discussion of all three ants’ positions.

Case 2-3 LO2, 4, 6

Magno Industries Ltd., a public company, is a major supplier to the automotive replacement-parts market, selling parts to nearly every segment of the industry. Magno has a September 30 year-end. During January Year 5, Magno acquired a 13% interest in the common shares of Grille-to-Bumper Automotive Stores, and in June Year 5 it acquired an additional 15%. Grille-to-Bumper is a retail chain of company-owned automotive replacement parts stores operating in most Canadian provinces. Its shares are not traded in an active market. Grille-to-Bumper has a December 31 year-end and, despite being profitable each year for the last 10 years, has never paid a dividend. While


CHAPTER 2


87

79

Magno occasionally makes sales to Grille-to-Bumper, it has never been one of its major suppliers. After the second acquisition of Grille-to-Bumper’s shares, Magno Industries ed Grille-to-Bumper to obtain certain financial information and to discuss mutual timing problems with respect to financial reporting. In the initial , Magno found Grille-to-Bumper to be uncooperative. In addition, Grille-to-Bumper accused Magno of attempting to take it over. Magno replied that it had no intention of attempting to gain control but rather was interested only in making a sound long-term investment. Grille-to-Bumper was not impressed with this explanation and refused to have any further discussions regarding future information exchanges and the problems created by a difference in year-ends. At the year-end of September 30, Year 5, Magno’s management expressed a desire to use the equity method to for its investment.

Required: (a) What method of ing would you recommend Magno Industries use for its investment in Grille-to-Bumper Automotive common shares? As part of your answer, discuss the alternatives available. (b) Why would the management of Magno want to use the equity method to for the investment, as compared with other alternatives that you have discussed? (c) Are there any circumstances under which the method you have recommended might have to be changed? If so, how would Magno Industries for such a change?

Case 2-4 LO3

Canadian Computer Systems Limited (CCS) is a public company engaged in the development of computer software and the manufacturing of computer hardware. CCS is listed on a Canadian stock exchange and has a 40% non-controlling interest in Sandra Investments Limited (SIL), a U.S. public company that was de-listed by an American stock exchange due to financial difficulties. In addition, CCS has three wholly owned subsidiaries. CCS is audited by Roth & Minch, a large public ing firm. You, the CA, are the audit manager responsible for the engagement. CCS has a September 30 fiscal year-end. It is now mid-November, Year 11, and the year-end audit is nearing completion. CCS’s draft financial statements are included in Exhibit I. While reviewing the audit working papers (see Exhibit II), you identify several issues that raise doubts about CCS’s ability to realize its assets and discharge its liabilities in the normal course of business. After you have reviewed the situation with the engagement partner, he asks you to prepare a memo for his use in discussing the going-concern problem with the president of CCS, and suggests that you look to IAS 1 for guidance. Your memo should include all factors necessary to assess CCS’s ability to continue operations. You are also to comment on the ing and disclosure implications.

Required: Prepare the memo requested by the partner.

(CICA adapted)


88


80

CHAPTER 2


EXHIBIT I CANADIAN COMPUTER SYSTEMS LIMITED EXTRACTS FROM CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET As at September 30 (in thousands of dollars) Year 11

Year 10

$

190 2,540 610 3,340 33,930 1,850 410 $39,530

$

$ 1,150 11,510 2,500 21,600 290 50,000 87,050 26,830 250 114,130

$ 3,080 10,480 2,100 21,600 1,780 55,420 94,460 21,330 330 116,120

10 250 100,170

10 250 100,010

Assets Current assets Cash s receivable Inventories, at the lower of cost and net realizable value Plant assets (net of accumulated depreciation) Property held for resale Other assets Liabilities Current liabilities Demand loans Accrued interest payable s payable Mortgages payable due currently because of loan defaults Long-term debt due within one year Debt obligation of Sandra Investments Limited Long-term debt Other long-term liabilities Contributed Capital and Deficit Contributed capital Issued: 261 9% cumulative, convertible, preferred shares 1,000,000 Class B preferred shares 10,243,019 Common shares

170 1,600 420 2,190 34,970 1,840 420 $39,420

100,430 100,270 (175,030) (176,970)

Deficit

(74,600)

(76,700)

$ 39,530

$39,420

CANADIAN COMPUTER SYSTEMS LIMITED EXTRACTS FROM CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF OPERATIONS AND DEFICIT For the years ended September 30 (in thousands of dollars) Year 11 Sales Hardware Software Other income

$ 12,430 3,070 15,500 1,120 16,620

Year 10 $ 19,960 3,890 23,850 – 23,850

(continued)


89


CHAPTER 2

EXHIBIT I


81

(continued)

Expenses Operating Interest General and istrative Depreciation Provision for impairment in plant assets Loss before the undernoted items Loss from Sandra Investments Limited Loss before discontinued operations Gain (loss) from discontinued operations Net income (loss) Deficit, beginning of year Deficit, end of year

10,240 4,590 2,970 2,400 — 20,200 (3,580) (2,830) (6,410) 8,350 1,940 (176,970) $(175,030)

15,050 4,690 4,140 3,630 2,220 29,730 (5,880) (55,420) (61,300) (4,040) (65,340) (111,630) $(176,970)

EXHIBIT II EXTRACTS FROM AUDIT WORKING PAPERS 1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

Cash receipts are collected by one of CCS’s banks. This bank then releases funds to CCS based on operating budgets prepared by management. Demand loans bearing interest at 1% over the bank’s prime rate are used to finance ongoing operations. The demand loans are secured by a general assignment of s receivable and a floating-charge debenture on all assets. CCS s for its interest in SIL using the equity method. As a result of SIL’s recurring losses in prior years, the investment was written off in Year 9. In Year 10, CCS recorded in its s the amount of SIL’s bank loan and accrued interest, as CCS guaranteed this amount. During Year 11, CCS made debt payments of $5.42 million and interest payments of $1.8 million on behalf of SIL. In October Year 11, SIL issued preferred shares in the amount of US$40 million, used the proceeds to pay down the bank loan, and was re-listed on the stock exchange. Interest expense on the debt obligation in Year 11 totalled $2.83 million and has been included in the income statement under “Loss from Sandra Investments Limited.” Current liabilities include mortgages payable of $21.6 million due currently. They have been reclassified from long-term debt because of CCS’s failure to comply with operating covenants and restrictions. The prior year’s financial statements have been restated for comparative purposes. Long-term debt is repayable over varying periods of time. However, the banks reserve the right to declare the loans due and payable upon demand. The loan agreements require CCS to obtain advance approval in writing from the bank if it wishes to exceed certain limits on borrowing and capital expenditures. The agreements also prohibit the sale of certain plant assets, payment of dividends, and transfer of funds among related companies without prior written approval. One loan of $15 million was in default at September 30, Year 11. During the year, CCS issued common shares to the directors and officers to satisfy amounts owing to them totalling $160,000. New equity issues are being considered for the Year 12 fiscal year. On November 10, Year 11, a claim related to a breach of contract was filed against one of the company’s subsidiaries in the amount of $3.7 million, plus interest and costs of the action. Management believes that this claim is without merit. However, if any amounts do have to be paid as a result of this action, management believes that the amounts would be covered by liability insurance. In Year 11, operating expenses include $1 million in development costs relating to a computer software program. Sales of this software are expected to commence in Year 12.


90


82

CHAPTER 2


Case 2-5 LO2, 7

“The thing you, the CA, have to understand is how these stage plays work. You start out with just an idea, but generally no cash. That’s where promoters like me come in. First, we set up a separate legal entity for each play. Then, we find ways of raising the money necessary to get the play written and the actors trained. If the play is a success, we hope to recover all those costs and a whole lot more, but cash flow is the problem. Since less than half of all plays make money, you cannot get very much money from banks. “Take my current project, Penguins in Paradise. You only have to look at the cash inflows (Exhibit III) to see how many sources I had to approach to get the cash. As you can see, most of the initial funding comes from the investors in the Penguins in Paradise Limited Partnership (PIP). They put up their money to buy units in the limited partnership. One main reason a partnership is used is to let them immediately write off, for tax purposes, the costs of producing the play. “Some investors do not want to invest the amount required for a partnership unit. So, for them, we structure the deal a little differently. Instead of buying a unit in the partnership, they buy a right to a royalty—a percentage of future operating profits (i.e., gross revenue less true operating expenses). In this way, these investors get an interest in the play without being in the partnership. Since they do not have a vote at the partnership meetings, they are more concerned about their risks. However, we agreed that PIP would get term insurance on my life in case I get hit by a truck! “Funding the play is not that easy. The money that the investors put up is not enough to fund all the start-up costs, so you have to be creative. Take reservation fees, for example. You know how tough it is to get good seats for a really hot play. Well, PIP sold the right to buy great seats to some dedicated theatre-goers this year for next year’s performance. These amounts are non-refundable, and the great thing is that the buyers still have to pay full price for the tickets when they buy them.

EXHIBIT III PENGUINS IN PARADISE (A LIMITED PARTNERSHIP) SUMMARY OF CASH FLOWS For the period ended December 31, Year 1 (in thousands of dollars) Cash inflows Investor contributions to limited partnership Sale of royalty rights Bank loan Sale of movie rights Government grant Reservation fees Cash outflows Salaries and fees Costumes and sets Life insurance Miscellaneous costs Net cash inflows

$5,000 1,000 2,000 500 50 20 8,570 3,500 1,000 10 1,250 5,760 $2,810


91


CHAPTER 2


83

“Consider the sale of movie rights. Lots of good plays get turned into movies. Once the stage play is a success, the movie rights are incredibly expensive. My idea was to sell the movie rights in advance. PIP got a lot less money, but at least we got it up front when we needed it. “The other sources are much the same. We received the government grant by agreeing to have at least 50% Canadian content. We also negotiated a bank loan with an interest rate of 5% a year plus 1% of the gross revenue of the play, instead of the usual 20% interest a year. Even my fee for putting the deal together was taken as a percentage of the operating profits, so just about everybody has a strong interest in the play’s performance. “As you know, I know nothing about ing, so I need you to put together a set of financial statements. I will need you to certify that they are in accordance with GAAP for enterprises such as Penguins in Paradise because the investors and the bank require this. Since everybody else has taken an interest in the play in lieu of cash, I would like you to consider doing the same for your fees.” When you, the CA, discussed this conversation with a partner in your office, he asked you to prepare a memo addressing the major ing implications of the client’s requests.

Required: (a) Prepare the memo to the partner. (b) Briefly discuss how the following three investor groups would classify and for their investment: (i) Investor in Limited Partnership units (ii) Investor in royalties (iii) Investor in movie rights (CICA adapted)

Case 2-6 LO2, 4

Michael Metals Limited (MML) has been a private company since it was incorporated under federal legislation over 40 years ago. At the present time (September, Year 5), ownership is divided among four cousins, each of whom holds 25% of the 100 outstanding common shares of MML. Each shareholder obtained the shares from his or her parents, who formed and operated the company for many years. The owners have decided to offer the business for sale over a period of years. Laser Investments Limited (LIL), a public company holding shares of companies in a number of other businesses, has been given the opportunity to acquire 46.67% of MML immediately, and the balance over the next five years. The proposal is to purchase 70 shares now as follows: Percentage Obtain 33.33% by purchasing 50 new shares of MML Acquire one-fifth of the shares held by each cousin, reducing their shares from 25 to 20 each

50

33.33%

20 70

13.34% 46.67%

The other 80 shares would be acquired at a rate of four per year from each cousin for five years. The purchase price of the 80 shares would be tied to MML’s profitability as measured by ing standards for private enterprises (ASPE).


92


84

CHAPTER 2


The board of directors of LIL is interested in pursuing the investment in MML. The proposed purchase price of the initial 70 shares is to be partially based on the financial statements for fiscal Year 5 and for future years. The board of directors of LIL has asked its advisors, Bouchard and Co., Chartered ants, to assist it in evaluating the proposed purchase. Jules Bouchard, the partner in charge of the engagement, has asked you, the CA, to prepare a memo discussing (1) all relevant business considerations pertaining to the purchase so that he can discuss the issues with the board of directors and (2) how LIL should report its investment in MML if it were to proceed with the purchase of 70 shares. MML has always been a scrap-metal dealer, primarily of iron and copper. In recent years, it has also dealt in lead, brass, aluminum, and other metals. Scrap iron is acquired from a variety of sources (e.g., old automobiles, appliances, and spoilage during manufacturing processes) and is sorted, compacted, and sold to steel mills. Much of the scrap copper is coated electrical wiring, which has to be stripped of the insulation coating and then chopped into pieces. The copper wire pieces are stored in barrels, which are about one metre high. In summary, a limited amount of processing is needed to convert the purchased scrap into saleable products. Most of the scrap arrives at MML’s storage yards on trucks, which are weighed both loaded and empty in order to determine the physical quantities of scrap on the truck. Some of the scrap is kept indoors, but most is kept outdoors in several large piles in different yard locations. MML’s property is protected by tall wire fences and monitored by security cameras 24 hours a day. To be successful in this industry, a scrap dealer has to buy at low prices and store the processed or unprocessed scrap until metal prices are high. Sometimes, quantities of some grades of metal have to be stored for several years. When selling prices are stable, the purchase price has to be sufficiently low that a profit can be made after processing costs have been incurred. MML tends to operate at its maximum bank line of credit, as it is generally short of cash. MML’s maximum line of credit is 70% of its receivables and 50% of its inventory. Your client arranged for you to have access to all of MML’s ing records and the auditors’ working papers. MML’s fiscal year-end is June 30. From the ing records and auditors’ working papers, you and your staff have assembled the information provided in Exhibit IV.


(CICA adapted)

EXHIBIT IV INFORMATION GATHERED BY CA FROM MML’S ING RECORDS AND AUDITORS’ WORKING PAPERS 1. From audit working paper reviews: a. Most of the processing equipment and the buildings are old and almost fully depreciated. The company’s land was purchased many years ago. As a result, inventory often represents two-thirds of the balance sheet assets, and receivables are close to one-ifth of assets in most years. Total assets vary between $25 and $32 million from year to year. s receivable turnover can be anywhere between 1.5 and 4 times per year.

(continued)


93


CHAPTER 2

EXHIBIT IV


85

(continued)

b. Perpetual records are limited to estimates of quantity because the quality of the scrap, the amount of insulation on wires, and a variety of other factors affect how much saleable metal will result from a bulk purchase of scrap. c. A seller of scrap seldom knows how much it weighs. MML usually quotes a price per unit, but does not inform the seller of the weight until the delivery truck has been weighed at MML’s yard. MML’s auditors are suspicious that MML reduces weights before calculating the amount payable. d. The auditors visit MML’s yard and ofices three times per year to conduct an interim audit, to attend the physical inventory count, and to carry out year-end substantive audit procedures. 2. MML owns 40% of a t venture, Green Environmental Limited (GEL), a waste disposal company. The other 60% is owned by the spouses of the four cousins who own MML. All of MML’s waste is handled by GEL, and MML purchases scrap iron and wire from GEL. 3. MML deals with a Japanese trading company that allows lengthy credit and uses letters of credit stating that MML does not have to pay for five or six months. A substantial amount of MML’s metal purchases are from various sites that are owned by the Japanese company. 4. The truck weigh scales produce weigh tickets that can be attached to receivable and payable invoices. However, no numerical ticket sequence exists to for all tickets that have been printed. Receiving records are handwritten in a loose-leaf book. 5. Approximately 15% of sales invoices have to be adjusted for weight discrepancies between what was shipped and what the customer claims to have received. On average, the reductions are approximately 20% of the invoice amount. 6. The perpetual inventory weight records appear to have been adjusted each year to whatever the physical inventory count indicated. 7. In recent years, the after-tax profits of MML have ranged between $1.2 and $3 million, after management bonuses. 8. MML maintains two vacation homes, one in Florida and one in Barbados. These homes are usually occupied by suppliers and customers of MML, free of charge. 9. s receivable and inventory are pledged as security to MML’s bank. In addition, the bank has a general security agreement against all other assets, and has limited personal guarantees from the shareholders. 10. Revenue is usually recognized on shipment of the metal. Adjustments for weight discrepancies are made as they become known to MML. 11. MML’s management has been considering expansion because one competitor is nearing retirement and wants to sell his company. In recent years, MML has purchased from, and sold to, this competitor. MML has also borrowed inventory from and loaned inventory to this competitor. 12. Some purchases of scrap are acquired on a conditional basis. MML pays the supplier only after it has determined the quality of metal that the scrap yielded when processed.

OBLEMS PRROBLEMS Problem 2-1 LO2, 3

PART A On January 1, Year 5, Anderson Corporation paid $650,000 for 20,000 (20%) of the outstanding shares of Carter Inc. The investment was considered to be one of significant influence. In Year 5, Carter reported profit of $95,000; in Year 6, its profit was $105,000. Dividends paid were $60,000 in each of the two years.

Required: Calculate the balance in Anderson’s investment as at December 31, Year 6.


94


86

CHAPTER 2


PART B Now assume that on December 31, Year 6, Anderson lost its ability to significantly influence the operating, investing, and financing decisions for Carter when another party obtained sufficient shares in the open market to obtain control over Carter. Accordingly, the investment in Carter was reclassified as a FVTPL investment. The fair value of the Carter shares was $35 per share on this date. In Year 7, Carter reported profit of $115,000 and paid dividends of $50,000. On December 31, Year 7, Anderson sold its investment in Carter for $37 per share.

Required: (a) Prepare the journal entry at December 31, Year 6, to reclassify the investment from significant influence to FVTPL. (b) Prepare all journal entries for Year 7 related to Anderson’s investment in Carter.

Problem 2-2 LO2, 3

Baskin purchased 20,000 common shares (20%) of Robbin on January 1, Year 5, for $275,000 and classified the investment as FVTPL. Robbin reported net income of $85,000 in Year 5 and $90,000 in Year 6, and paid dividends of $40,000 in each year. Robbin’s shares were trading at $16 per share on December 31, Year 5, and January 1, Year 6. On January 1, Year 6, Baskin obtained significant influence over the operating, investing, and financing decisions of Robbin when the controlling shareholder sold some shares in the open market and lost control over Robbin. Accordingly, the investment in Robbin was reclassified to an investment in associate. On December 31, Year 6, Baskin sold its investment in Robbin for $17 per share.

Required: Prepare all journal entries for Years 5 and 6 related to Baskin’s investment in Robbin.


On January 1, Year 5, Blake Corporation purchased 30% of the outstanding common shares of Stergis Limited for $1,500,000. The following relates to Stergis since the acquisition date: Year Year 5 Year 6

Net Income

Other Comprehensive Income

Dividends Paid

$ 42,000 120,000

$10,000 25,000

$60,000 60,000

Required: (a) Assume that Blake is a public company and the number of shares held by Blake is enough to give it significant influence over Stergis. Prepare all the journal entries that Blake should make regarding this investment in Year 5 and Year 6. Also, state the disclosure requirements for Year 6 pertaining to Blake’s investment in Stergis. (b) Assume that Blake is a private company. Even though it has significant influence, it chose to use the cost method to for its investment. Prepare all the journal entries that Blake should make regarding this investment in Year 5 and Year 6. (c) If Blake wants to show the lowest debt-to-equity ratio at the end of Year 6, would it prefer to use the cost or equity method to report its investment in Stergis? Briefly explain.


CHAPTER 2

Problem 2-4 LO3, 6


95

87

Pender Corp. paid $234,000 for a 30% interest in Saltspring Limited on January 1, Year 6. During Year 6, Saltspring paid dividends of $100,000 and reported profit as follows: Profit before discontinued operations Discontinued operations loss (net of tax) Profit

$288,000 (30,000) $258,000

Pender’s profit for Year 6 consisted of $900,000 in sales, expenses of $400,000, income tax expense of $200,000, and its investment income from Saltspring. Both companies have an income tax rate of 40%.

Required: (a) Assume that Pender reports its investment using the equity method. (i) Prepare all journal entries necessary to for Pender’s investment for Year 6. (ii) Determine the correct balance in Pender’s investment at December 31, Year 6. (iii) Prepare an income statement for Pender for Year 6. (b) Assume that Pender uses the cost method. (i) Prepare all journal entries necessary to for Pender’s investment for Year 6. (ii) Determine the correct balance in Pender’s investment at December 31, Year 6. (iii) Prepare an income statement for Pender for Year 6. (c) Which reporting method would Pender want to use if its bias is to report the highest possible return on investment to s of its financial statements? Briefly explain and show ing calculations.

Problem 2-5 LO2, 3

Her Company purchased 20,000 common shares (20%) of Him Inc. on January 1, Year 4, for $340,000. Additional information on Him for the three years ending December 31, Year 6, is as follows:

Year Year 4 Year 5 Year 6

Net Income

Dividends Paid

Market Value per Share at December 31

$200,000 225,000 240,000

$150,000 160,000 175,000

$18 20 23

On December 31, Year 6, Her sold its investment in Him for $460,000.

Required: (a) Compute the balance in the investment at the end of Year 5, assuming that the investment is classified as one of the following: (i) FVTPL (ii) Investment in associate (iii) FVTOCI


96


88

CHAPTER 2


(b) Calculate how much income will be reported in net income and other comprehensive income in each of Years 4, 5, and 6, and in total for the three years assuming that the investment is classified as one of the following: (i) FVTPL (ii) Investment in associate (iii) FVTOCI (c) What are the similarities and differences in your answers for the three parts of (b)?

Problem 2-6 LO2

COX Limited is a multinational telecommunication company owned by a Canadian businesswoman. It has numerous long-term investments in a wide variety of equity instruments. Some investments have to be measured at fair value at each reporting date. In turn, the unrealized gains will be reported in either net income or other comprehensive income. Since COX has considerable external financing through a number of Canadian banks, it applies IFRSs for public companies in its general-purpose financial statements. The CFO of COX has heard about the reporting standards for equity investments but has had limited time to study them in detail. He would like you to prepare a presentation on the reporting requirements. He wants to understand how equity investments should be reported. More specifically, he wants to know • which investments must be measured at fair value and what the main rationale for this method of reporting is; • how to determine whether the unrealized gains are to be reported in net income or other comprehensive income, and what the main rationale for the difference in reporting is; and • which investments, if any, will still be reported using the cost method, using the equity method, or on a consolidated basis.

Required: Prepare the slides for the presentation. Limit your presentation to six slides. Your presentation should cover the reporting of (1) FVTPL, (2) FVTOCI, (3) cost method, (4) investments in associates and (5) investment in subsidiaries. (CGA-Canada adapted)

Problem 2-7 LO7

All facts are the same as in Problem 6 except that COX applies ASPE . Follow the same instructions as those given in the Required section of Problem 6.

WEB E B -B B ASED A S E D P ROBLEMS RO B L E M S Web Problem 2-1 LO6

Access the 2011 financial statements of Rogers Communications Inc. by going to the investor’s relations section of the company’s website. Answer the questions below. Round percentages to one decimal point and other ratios to two decimal points. For each question, indicate where in the financial statements you found the answer, and/or provide a brief explanation. (a) What percentage of total assets at the end of 2011 is represented by investments ed for using the equity method?


CHAPTER 2


97

89

(b) What was the before-tax rate of return for 2011 from the investments ed for using the equity method? (c) Calculate the three ratios listed below for 2011. Then, assume that each year the associates have generated a return similar to the return in part (b) and have paid dividends equal to 75% of the income earned. If the company had used the cost method rather than the equity method since the date of acquisition of the investments, how would this change affect the following ratios: (i) Current ratio (ii) Debt-to-equity ratio (iii) Return on average equity (d) How much comprehensive income after tax was earned from available-forsale investments during 2011? (e) What percentage of shareholders’ equity at the end of 2011 is represented by cumulative unrealized gains from available-for-sale investments? (f) What s on the balance sheet would change and would they increase or decrease if the available-for-sale investments had always been classified as FVTPL investments?

Web Problem 2-2 LO6

Access the 2011 financial statements for Goldcorp Inc. by going to investor’s relations section of the company’s website. Answer the same questions as in Problem 1. For each question, indicate where in the financial statements you found the answer, and/or provide a brief explanation. (Some questions may not be applicable.)



98


3 chapter

Business Combinations

learning objectives After studying this chapter, you should be able to do the following: LO1 Define a business combination and evaluate relevant factors to determine whether control exists in a business acquisition.

LO2 Describe the basic forms for achieving a business combination. LO3 Prepare and compare consolidated balances sheets under the acquisition and new-entity methods.

LO5 Apply the acquisition method to a purchaseof-shares business combination. LO6 Analyze and interpret financial statements involving business combinations. LO7 Identify some of the differences between IFRSs and ASPE for business combinations. LO8 Explain a reverse takeover and its reporting implications.

LO4 Apply the acquisition method to a purchaseof-net-assets business combination.

INTRODUCTION In Chapter 2, we illustrated the ing for nonstrategic investments and significant influence investments. The next six chapters are largely devoted to situations where the investor has control of the investee. When one company obtains control of one or more businesses, a business combination has occurred. Some of the reasons for business combinations are to1 • defend a competitive position within a market segment or at a particular customer; • diversify into a new market and/or geographic region; • gain access to new customers and/or partners; • acquire new and/or complementary products or services; • acquire new expertise or capabilities; • accelerate time to market (for a product and/or service); • improve the company’s rate of innovation either by acquiring new technology and/or intellectual property;

90


99


CHAPTER 3


91

• gain control over a supplier; and • position the company to benefit from industry consolidation Business combinations are frequent events in Canada, the United States, and throughout the world. Hardly a week es without some reference in the press to actual or proposed takeovers and mergers. Many people think that the typical takeover involves an American multinational swallowing up a smaller Canadian firm. But that is not always the case. In 2011, the biggest deals involving Canadian companies were as follows:

Mergers and acquisitions occur regularly in Canada and throughout the world.

• Barrick Gold of Canada bought Equinox Minerals of Canada for $7.5 billion. • Cliffs Natural Resources Inc. of the United States bought Consolidated Thompson Iron Mines Limited of Canada for $4.6 billion. • Brookfield Renewable Energy Partners of Bermuda bought assets of Brookfield Renewable Power Inc. of Canada for $3.4 billion. • Intact Financial Corporation of Canada bought AXA Canada from AXA SA of for $2.8 billion. • Sinopec of China bought Daylight Energy Ltd. of Canada for $2.8 billion. • Berkshire Partners of the United States and OMERS of Canada bought Husky International of Canada for $2.5 billion. • Newmont Mining of USA bought Fronteer Gold Inc of Canada for $2.0 billion Business combinations can be described as either friendly or hostile. Often a merger is initiated by one company submitting a formal tender offer to the shareholders of another company. In a friendly combination, the top management and the board of directors of the companies involved negotiate the of the combination and then submit the proposal to the shareholders of both companies along with a recommendation for approval. An unfriendly combination occurs when the board of directors of the target company recommends that its shareholders reject the tender offer. The management of the target company will often employ defences to resist the takeover. They include the following: • Poison pill. This occurs when a company issues rights to its existing shareholders, exercisable only in the event of a potential takeover, to purchase additional shares at prices below market. • Pac-man defence. This involves the target company making an unfriendly countervailing takeover offer to the shareholders of the company that is attempting to take it over. • White knight. In this case, the target company searches out another company that will come to its rescue with a more appealing offer for its shares. • Selling the crown jewels. This involves selling certain desirable assets to other companies so that the would-be acquirer loses interest. In the next section of this chapter, we define a business combination. The discussion then proceeds to the ing for business combinations in Canada.

Business acquisitions can be friendly or hostile.

There are many tactics to resist takeovers.


100


92

CHAPTER 3


LO1 A business combination occurs when an acquirer obtains control of a business.

A business consists of inputs and processes applied to those inputs that have the ability to create outputs.

Buying a group of assets that do not constitute a business is a basket purchase, not a business combination.

BUSINESS COMBINATIONS A business combination is defined in International Financial Reporting Standard 3 (IFRS 3) as a transaction or other event in which an acquirer obtains control of one or more businesses. This definition has two key aspects: control and businesses. We will discuss each aspect in considerable depth, starting with businesses. A business is defined as an integrated set of activities and assets that is capable of being conducted and managed for the purpose of providing a return in the form of dividends, lower costs, or other economic benefits directly to investors or other owners, , or participants. A business consists of inputs and processes applied to those inputs that have the ability to create outputs. An input is any economic resource that creates, or has the ability to create, outputs when one or more processes are applied to it. Examples of inputs would include raw materials for a manufacturing company, intellectual property of a hi-tech company, and employees. A process is any system, standard, protocol, convention, or rule that, when applied to an input or inputs, creates or has the ability to create outputs. Examples include strategic management processes, operational processes, and resource management processes. A workforce with the necessary skills and experience following rules and conventions may provide the necessary processes capable, when applied to inputs, of creating outputs. An output is the result of inputs plus processes applied to those inputs, which then provide or have the ability to provide a return in the form of dividends, lower costs, or other economic benefits directly to investors or other owners, , or participants. Any product or service that is sold is obviously an example of an output. The two essential elements of a business are inputs and processes applied to those inputs. Although businesses usually have outputs, outputs are not required for an integrated set of inputs and processes to qualify as a business. As long as the inputs and processes have the ability to produce outputs, the inputs and processes would qualify as a business. A company in the development stage may have materials and processes developed sufficiently that a prospective buyer could buy the company, complete the development, and begin producing outputs for sale to prospective customers. Or the buyer could integrate the seller’s materials and processes with its own inputs and processes. Determining whether a particular set of assets and activities is a business should be based on whether a potential buyer will be able to manage the integrated set as a business. In this evaluation, it is not relevant whether a seller operated the set as a business or whether the acquirer intends to operate the set as a business. When a business combination does occur, the requirements of IFRS 3 must be applied. On the other hand, if an entity acquires all of the assets of another entity but they do not meet the definition of a business, IFRS 3 would not be applicable. Instead, the assets acquired would be treated as a basket purchase, and the total cost would be allocated to the individual assets in proportion to their fair market values. Basket purchases were studied in the property, plant, and equipment section of intermediate ing. Let us now turn our attention to the other key aspect of a business combination: control. Guidance for determining control is provided in IFRS 10.


CHAPTER 3


101

93

IFRS 10 states that an investor controls an investee when it is exposed or has rights to variable returns from its involvement with the investee, and it has the ability to affect those returns through its power over the investee. This definition contains the following three elements: (a) The investor has power over the investee. (b) The investor has exposure, or rights, to variable returns from its involvement with the investee. (c) The investor has the ability to use its power over the investee to affect the amount of the investor’s returns. All three elements must be met for the investor to have control. If the investor does have control over the investee, the investor is called the parent and the investee is called the subsidiary. Let us now discuss each element of control. Power An investor has power over an investee when the investor has existing rights giving it the current ability to direct relevant activities, that is, the activities that significantly affect the investee’s returns. Sometimes, assessing power is straightforward, such as when power over an investee is obtained directly and solely from the voting rights granted by equity instruments such as shares and can be assessed by considering the voting rights from those shareholdings. In other cases, the assessment will be more complex and require consideration of more than one factor, for example, when power results from one or more contractual arrangements. An investor with the current ability to direct the relevant activities has power, even if its rights to direct have yet to be exercised. Evidence that the investor has been directing relevant activities can help determine whether the investor has power, but such evidence is not, in itself, conclusive in determining whether the investor has power over an investee. If two or more investors each have existing rights giving them unilateral ability to direct different relevant activities, the investor with the current ability that most significantly affects the returns of the investee has power over the investee. Returns An investor is exposed or has rights to variable returns from its involvement with the investee when those returns from its involvement could vary as a result of the investee’s performance; the investor’s returns can be only positive, only negative, or both positive and negative. An investment in common shares is exposed to variable returns because the common shareholders receive the residual returns in the company. If the company is very profitable, the dividends to the shareholders or appreciation in the price of common shares will be positive and can be substantial. On the other hand, if the company is incurring losses, the prospects for dividends or appreciation in the share price is minimal or non-existent. Link between power and returns An investor controls an investee if the investor not only has power over the investee and exposure or rights to variable returns from its involvement with the investee, but the investor also has the ability to use its power to affect his or her returns from its involvement. A common shareholder usually has the power through voting rights and exposure to variable returns. A preferred shareholder may have exposure to a variable return. However, the preferred shareholder typically does not have voting rights and, therefore, does not have power over the relevant activities of the investee.

Control is the power to direct the relevant activities of the investee.

The definition of control requires that the investor has exposure, or rights, to variable returns from its involvement with the investee.

The definition of control requires that the investor has the ability to use its power over the investee to affect the amount of the investor’s returns.


102


94

CHAPTER 3


Appendix B of IFRS 10 provides extensive guidance to determine whether an entity has control. It states that the following factors may assist in making the determination about control: (a) The purpose and design of the investee (b) What the relevant activities are and how decisions about those activities are made (c) Whether the rights of the investor give it the current ability to direct the relevant activities (d) Whether the investor is exposed, or has rights, to variable returns from its involvement with the investee (e) Whether the investor has the ability to use its power over the investee to affect the amount of the investor’s returns A key aspect of control is the ability to direct the activities that most significantly affect the investor’s returns.

The following example is taken from Appendix B of IFRS 10. Two investors form an investee to develop and market a medical product. One investor is responsible for developing and obtaining regulatory approval of the medical product, a responsibility that includes having the unilateral ability to make all decisions relating to the development of the product and obtaining regulatory approval. Once the regulator has approved the product, the other investor will manufacture and market it. This investor has the unilateral ability to make all decisions about the manufacture and marketing of the project. If all the activities—developing and obtaining regulatory approval, as well as manufacturing and marketing of the medical product—are relevant activities, each investor needs to determine whether it is able to direct the activities that most significantly affect the investee’s returns. Accordingly, each investor needs to consider which of developing and obtaining regulatory approval or manufacture and marketing of the medical product is the activity that most significantly affects the investor’s returns, and whether he or she is able to direct that activity. In determining which investor has power, the investors would consider the following: (a) Purpose and design of the investee (b) Factors that determine the profit margin, revenue, and value of the investee, as well as the value of the medical product (c) Effect on the investee’s returns resulting from each investor’s decision-making authority, with respect to the factors in (b) (d) Investors’ exposure to variability of returns In this particular example, the investors would also consider these: (e) The uncertainty of and effort required in obtaining regulatory approval (considering the investor’s record of successfully developing and obtaining regulatory approval of medical products) (f) Which investor controls the medical product once the development phase is successful Let us now apply the elements of control to other practical situations. If the means of paying for the business is cash or a promise to pay cash in the future, the company making the payment is usually the one obtaining control. If shares were issued as a means of payment, relative holdings of voting shares of the combined company by shareholders of the combining companies is key. In a


CHAPTER 3


combination involving two companies, if one shareholder group holds more than 50% of the voting shares of the combined company, that company would usually have control. If more than two companies are involved, the shareholder group holding the largest number of voting shares would usually be identified as the company with control. Since the board of directors establishes the strategic policies of a corporation, the ability to elect a majority of the of the board would generally be evidence of control. Therefore, the first element of control is presumed to exist if the parent owns, directly or indirectly, enough voting shares to elect the majority of the board of directors of a subsidiary. In most situations, more than 50% of the voting shares are required to elect the majority of the board, and so the first element of control is presumed to exist with 50% ownership. However, we have to look at all factors. For example, if D Company owns 60% of the voting shares of E Company and F Company owns the other 40%, then we can presume that D Company has power over the activities of E Company. But if F Company owns convertible bonds of E Company or options or warrants to purchase E Company shares, which, if converted or exercised, would give F Company 62% of the outstanding shares of E Company, then F Company, not D Company, would have power over the activities of E Company. There is also a general presumption that a holding of less than 50% of the voting shares does not constitute control. This presumption can be overcome if other factors clearly indicate control. For example, an irrevocable agreement with other shareholders to convey voting rights to the parent would constitute control, even if the parent owned less than 50% of the voting shares. A parent may also have power despite owning less than 50% of the voting shares if its holdings of rights, warrants, convertible debt, or convertible preferred shares would give it enough voting power to control the board of directors of the subsidiary. Exercise or conversion would not be necessary, only the right to exercise or convert is. It is also possible for a parent to have power without a majority share ownership if it also has agreements in writing allowing it to dictate the operating policies of the subsidiary, and resulting in it receiving fees, royalties, and profits from intercompany sales. In Chapter 9, we will discuss special-purpose entities where control exists through operating agreements. For these situations, the parent makes the key decisions, receives the majority of the benefits, and absorbs most of the risk, even though the parent may own very few, if any, of the shares in the controlled company. In another example, X Company owns 40% of Y Company, which is the largest single block of Y Company’s outstanding shares. The other 60% is very widely held and only a very small proportion of the holders appear at the annual meeting of Y Company. As a result, X Company has had no trouble electing the majority of the board of directors. Thus, X Company could be deemed to have control in this situation as long as the other shareholders do not actively cooperate when they exercise their votes so as to have more voting power than X Company. Temporary control of an entity does not of itself change the fact that control exists. During the time that control is held and until such time as control ceases, the reporting requirements for controlled entities should be applied. The seizure of the company’s assets by a trustee in a receivership or bankruptcy situation would be evidence that control has probably ceased, as would the imposition of governmental restrictions over a foreign company’s ability to pay

103

95

Owning more than 50% of the voting shares usually, but not always, indicates control.

A company could have control with less than 50% of the voting shares when contractual agreements give it control.

Normal business restrictions do not preclude control by the parent.


104


96

CHAPTER 3


A parent can control a subsidiary, even though other parties have protective rights relating to the subsidiary.

dividends to its Canadian investor. However, when a receiver seizes a specific asset in satisfaction of a default under a loan agreement but permits the company to continue in business under the direction of the parent, this is not a loss of control. A reporting entity can control another entity, even though other parties have protective rights relating to the activities of that other entity. Protective rights are designed to protect the interests of the party holding those rights, without giving that party control of the entity to which they relate. They include, for example, the following: (a) Approval or veto rights granted to other parties that do not affect the strategic operating and financing policies of the entity. Protective rights often apply to fundamental changes in the activities of an entity, or apply only in exceptional circumstances. For example, (i) a lender might have rights that protect the lender from the risk that the entity will change its activities to the detriment of the lender, such as selling important assets or undertaking activities that change the credit risk of the entity. (ii) non-controlling shareholders might have the right to approve capital expenditures greater than a particular amount, or the right to approve the issue of equity or debt instruments. (b) The ability to remove the party that directs the activities of the entity in circumstances such as bankruptcy or on breach of contract by that party. (c) Limitations on the operating activities of an entity. For example, a franchise agreement for which the entity is the franchisee might restrict the pricing, advertising, or other operating activities of the entity but would not give the franchisor control of the franchisee. Such rights usually protect the brand of the franchisor. Let us now discuss the common forms of business combinations and the reporting requirements for business combinations.

LO2

FORMS OF BUSINESS COMBINATIONS Essentially, there are three main forms of business combinations. One company can obtain control over the net assets of another company by (a) purchasing its net assets, (b) acquiring enough of its voting shares to control the use of its net assets or (c) gaining control through a contractual arrangement.

When purchasing assets, the transaction is carried out with the selling company.

Purchase of Assets An obvious way to obtain control over a business is by outright purchase of the assets that constitute a business. The selling company is left only with the cash or other consideration received as payment from the purchaser, and the liabilities present before the sale. Often, the acquirer purchases all the assets of the acquiree and assumes all its liabilities, recording these assets and liabilities in its ing records. The shareholders of the selling company have to approve the sale, as well as decide whether their company should be wound up or continue operations after the sale.

When purchasing shares, the transaction is usually consummated with the shareholders of the selling company.

Purchase of Shares As an alternative to the purchase of assets, the acquirer could purchase enough voting shares from the acquiree’s shareholders to give it the power to determine the acquiree’s strategic operating and financing policies. This is the most common form of combination, and it is often achieved through a tender offer made by the management of the acquirer to the shareholders of the


105


CHAPTER 3


acquiree. These shareholders are invited to exchange their shares for cash or for shares of the acquirer company. The share-purchase form of combination is usually the least costly to the acquirer because control can be achieved by purchasing less than 100% of the outstanding voting shares. In addition, in Canada there can be important tax advantages to the vendor if shares rather than assets are sold. Because the transaction is between the acquirer and the acquiree’s shareholders, the acquiree’s ing for its assets and liabilities is not affected,2 and the company carries on as a subsidiary of the acquirer. The acquirer becomes a parent company and, therefore, must consolidate its subsidiary when it prepares its financial statements.

Control through Contractual Arrangement A company can get control of another company by g an agreement with the acquiree’s shareholders to give it control, without actually acquiring any shares of the other company. Nevertheless, the company with control will be deemed a parent and the controlled company will be a subsidiary. Since there were no actual transactions between the parent and the subsidiary for the transfer of control, there will be no entries made on the subsidiary’s books to record this change in control. However, the parent would have to consolidate this subsidiary when it prepares its financial statements. We will discuss this type of arrangement in further detail in Chapter 9. All three forms of business combination result in the assets and liabilities of the two companies being combined. If control is achieved by purchasing net assets, the combining takes place in the ing records of the acquirer. If control is achieved by purchasing shares or through contractual arrangement, the combining takes place when the consolidated financial statements are prepared. Variations One variation from the forms of business combinations described above occurs when the companies involved agree to create a new company, which either purchases the net assets of the combining companies or purchases enough shares from the shareholders of the combining companies to achieve control of these companies. Another variation that can occur is a statutory amalgamation, whereby, under the provisions of federal or provincial law, two or more companies incorporated under the same Companies Act can combine and continue as a single entity. The shareholders of the combining companies become shareholders of the surviving company, and the non-surviving companies are wound up. The substance of a statutory amalgamation indicates that it is simply a variation of one of the basic forms. If only one of the companies survives, it is essentially a purchase of net assets, with the method of payment being shares of the surviving company. Exhibit 3.1 shows the intercompany shareholdings, both before and after a business combination, under a variety of forms. Intercompany shareholdings are often depicted in this manner. The arrow points from the investor to the investee company, with the number beside the arrow showing the number of shares owned by the investor. Mr. A and Mr. X were the sole shareholders in A Co. and X Co. prior to the business combination. We will be exposed to all of these different forms of business combinations as we proceed through the next few chapters.

97

The acquired company makes no journal entries when the acquiring company purchases shares.

Control can be obtained through a contractual arrangement that does not involve buying assets or shares.

There are many different legal forms in which a business combination can be consummated.

A statutory amalgamation occurs when two or more companies combine to form a single legal entity.


106


98

CHAPTER 3


EXHIBIT 3.1

Different Forms of Business Combinations Intercompany Shareholdings before the Business Combination

Stick diagrams can be an effective way to depict intercompany shareholdings.

Mr. A 100 A Co. Intercompany Shareholdings after the Business Combination

Consolidated financial statements are not required when an acquirer directly purchases the net assets of a business.

X Co. Intercompany Shareholdings after the Business Combination

Consolidated Statements Not Required

Consolidated Statements Are Required

A Co. purchased net assets of X Co. with cash Mr. A Mr. X

A Co. purchased shares of X Co. with cash Mr. A Mr. X

100

10

A Co.

100 A Co.

X Co.

A Co. purchased net assets of X Co. with 50 shares Mr. A

10

A Co.

50

500

250

A Co. New Co.

X Co.

A Co. purchased net assets of X Co. with shares & X Co. is wound up (Statutory amalgamation) Mr. A 100

Mr. X 50

A Co.

10

X Co.

A Co. purchased shares of X Co. with 150 shares (Reverse Takeover) Mr. A

10

Mr. X 50

A Co.

X Co.

Mr. X

Mr. A

X Co.

A Co. purchased shares of X Co. with 50 shares 100

New company purchased net assets of both companies with cash 100

10

Mr. A

Mr. X

100

Under a reverse takeover, the shareholders of the acquired company control the acquiring company.

Mr. X 10

100 A Co.

Mr. X

150

X Co.

10

New company purchased shares of both companies with shares Mr. A Mr. X

500

250 New Co.

100 A Co.

10 X Co.

A Co. obtained control of X Co. through contractual arrangement Mr. A 100 A Co.

LO3

Mr. X 10 X Co.

METHODS OF ING FOR BUSINESS COMBINATIONS There are three methods of ing for business combinations that have either been recently used in practice or discussed in theory: • Purchase method • Acquisition method • New-entity method


107


CHAPTER 3


99

These methods differ in how identifiable net assets of the acquiring company and acquired company are measured at the date of a business combination. The following table indicates the measurement basis and the current status and effective usage dates for these three methods:

Method Purchase method Acquisition method New-entity method

Measurement basis for net assets of Acquiring company Acquired company Carrying amount Allocation of purchase price Carrying amount Fair value Fair value Fair value

Status Was required prior to adoption of acquisition method Was required starting in 2011 Never achieved status as an acceptable method, but worthy of future consideration

We will now briefly discuss the merits of these three methods. Prior to 2011, the purchase method was used to for the combination. Under this method, the acquiring company’s net assets are measured at their carrying amount and the acquired company’s net assets are measured at the price paid for the assets by the acquiring company. This price included any cash payment, the fair value of any shares issued, and the present value of any promises to pay cash in the future. Any excess of the price paid over the fair value of the acquired company’s identifiable net assets was recorded as goodwill. This method of ing was consistent with the historical cost principle of ing for any assets acquired by a company. Such assets were initially recorded at the price paid for them, and subsequently their cost was charged against earnings over their useful lives. Starting in 2011, the acquisition method must be used to for business combinations. Under this method, the acquiring company reports the identifiable net assets being acquired at the fair value of these net assets, regardless of the amount paid for them. When the purchase price is greater than the fair value of identifiable net assets, the excess is reported as goodwill, similar to the purchase method. When the purchase price is less than the fair value of identifiable net assets, the identifiable net assets are still reported at fair value and the deficiency in purchase price is reported as a gain on purchase. This practice is not consistent with the historical cost principle, where assets are reported at the amount paid for the assets. However, it is consistent with the general trend in financial reporting to use fair value more and more often to report assets and liabilities. Fair value is viewed as a relevant benchmark to help investors and creditors assess the success or failure of business activity. Fair value of the investee is likely to be readily available since the investor likely determined fair value when deciding on the price to be paid in acquiring the investee. Therefore, the cost involved in determining the fair value of the investee’s assets and liabilities is more than offset by the benefits of the more relevant information. We will illustrate the acquisition method in detail later in this chapter. Unless otherwise noted, all of the illustrations throughout this text and in the end-of-chapter material will use the acquisition method. The third method, the new-entity method, has been proposed in the past by proponents of fair value ing. It has been suggested that a new entity has been created when two companies combine by the ing together of two ownership groups. As a result, the assets and liabilities contributed by the two combining companies should be reported by this new entity at their fair values. This would make the relevant contributions by the combining companies more comparable because the net assets are measured on the same basis. However, this method has

The net assets of the acquired company are reported at the amount paid by the acquiring company under the purchase method.

The identifiable net assets of the acquired company are reported at their fair value under the acquisition method.

The net assets of both the acquiring company and acquired company are reported at their fair value under the new entity method.


108


100

CHAPTER 3


received virtually no in the ing profession because of the additional revaluation difficulties and costs that would result. Furthermore, it has been argued that if the owners were simply combining their interests, there would be no new invested capital and, therefore, no new entity created. See Self-Study Problem 1 for a simple example to compare the new entity and acquisition methods of reporting a business combination. It shows that the values are quite different. LO4

ing for Business Combinations under Acquisition Method—Main Principles IFRS 3 outlines the ing requirements for business combinations:

The acquisition method is required for all business combinations in Canada as of 2011.

• All business combinations should be ed for by applying the acquisition method. • An acquirer should be identified for all business combinations. • The acquisition date is the date the acquirer obtains control of the acquiree. • The acquirer should attempt to measure the fair value of the acquiree, as a whole, as of the acquisition date. The fair value of the acquiree as a whole is usually determined by adding together the fair value of consideration transferred by the acquirer (i.e., the acquisition cost) plus the value assigned to the non-controlling shareholders. In this text, we will refer to the sum of the acquisition cost plus value assigned to the non-controlling shareholders as total consideration given. The value assigned to the non-controlling interest is measured as either the fair value of the shares owned by the non-controlling shareholders or as the non-controlling interest’s proportionate share of the fair value of the acquiree’s identifiable net assets. Business valuation techniques would be used to measure the fair value of the business acquired, especially if the parent acquired less than 100% of the shares, if control is obtained without transferring any consideration or if the consideration transferred does not represent the fair value of the business acquired. Certain business valuation techniques are referred to in IFRS 3 but are beyond the scope of this book. • The acquirer should recognize and measure the identifiable assets acquired and the liabilities assumed at fair value and report them separately from goodwill. • The acquirer should recognize goodwill, if any.

An acquirer must be identified for all business combinations.

Identifying the Acquirer and Date of Acquisition The acquirer is the entity that obtains control of one or more businesses in a business combination. The concept of control and how to determine who has control was discussed earlier in this chapter. It is important to determine who has control because this determines whose net assets are reported at carrying amount and whose assets are reported at fair value at the date of acquisition. The date of acquisition is the date that one entity obtains control of one or more businesses.

The acquisition cost is measured as the fair value of consideration given to acquire the business.

Acquisition Cost The acquisition cost is made up of the following: • Any cash paid • Fair value of assets transferred by the acquirer


CHAPTER 3


109

101

• Present value of any promises by the acquirer to pay cash in the future • Fair value of any shares issued—the value of shares is based on the market price of the shares on the acquisition date • Fair value of contingent consideration The acquisition cost does not include costs such as fees for consultants, ants, and lawyers as these costs do not increase the fair value of the acquired company. These costs should be expensed in the period of acquisition. This treatment differs from the treatment under the purchase method (historical cost ing) where these costs would be capitalized as a cost of the purchase. Costs incurred in issuing debt or shares are also not considered part of the acquisition cost. These costs should be deducted from the amount recorded for the proceeds received for the debt or share issue; for example, deducted from loan payable or common shares as applicable. The deduction from loan payable would be treated like a discount on notes payable and would be amortized into income over the life of the loan using the effective interest method.

Recognition and Measurement of Net Assets Acquired

The acquirer should recognize and measure the identifiable assets acquired and the liabilities assumed at fair value and report them separately from goodwill. An identifiable asset is not necessarily one that is presently recorded in the records of the acquiree company. For example, the acquiree company may have patent rights that have a fair value but are not shown on its balance sheet because the rights had been developed internally. Or the acquiree’s balance sheet may show a pension asset, though an up-to-date actuarial valuation may indicate a net pension obligation. IAS 38 defines an identifiable asset if it either (a) is separable; that is, is capable of being separated or divided from the entity and sold, transferred, licensed, rented, or exchanged, either individually or together with a related contract, identifiable asset, or liability, regardless of whether the entity intends to do so; or (b) arises from contractual or other legal rights, regardless of whether those rights are transferable or separable from the entity or from other rights and obligations. To qualify for recognition, as part of applying the acquisition method, the identifiable assets acquired and liabilities assumed must meet the definitions of assets and liabilities in IASB’s The Conceptual Framework for Financial Reporting at the acquisition date. For example, costs that the acquirer expects but is not obliged to incur in the future to effect its plan to exit an activity of an acquiree or to terminate the employment of or to relocate an acquiree’s employees do not meet the definition of a liability at the acquisition date. Therefore, the acquirer does not recognize those costs as a liability at the date of acquisition. Instead, the acquirer recognizes those costs in its post-combination financial statements in accordance with other IFRSs. Appendix B to IFRS 3 provides guidance in identifying assets to be recognized separately as part of a business combination.

The acquisition cost does not include costs such as professional fees or costs of issuing shares.

Identifiable assets and liabilities should be recorded separately from goodwill.


110


102

CHAPTER 3

Most, but not all, of the acquiree’s assets and liabilities are recognized and measured at fair value at the date of acquisition.

Goodwill is the excess of total consideration given over the fair value of identifiable assets and liabilities.

Negative goodwill could result in the reporting of a gain on purchase by the acquiring company.


There are some exceptions to the general principle in ing for a business combination that all assets and liabilities of the acquired entity must be recognized and measured at fair value. One of the exceptions for recognition pertains to contingent liabilities. For the acquired company, the contingent liability would only be recognized in its separate entity financial statements if it were probable that an outflow of resources would be required to settle the obligation. The acquirer must recognize a contingent liability if it is a present obligation that arises from past events and its fair value can be measured reliably. Therefore, the acquirer recognizes the liability even if it is not probable that an outflow of resources embodying economic benefits will be required to settle the obligation. Special requirements for recognition and measurement of financial statement items at the date of acquisition also apply to employee benefits, indemnification assets, reacquired rights, share-based payment awards, and assets held for sale. Deferred income tax assets and liabilities are not fair valued and carried forward. Instead, new amounts for deferred tax assets and liabilities are determined at the date of acquisition. Because of the added complexity that this brings, discussion and illustration of this topic is delayed until Chapter 9.

Recognition of Goodwill If the total consideration given by the controlling and non-controlling shareholders is greater than the fair value of identifiable assets and liabilities acquired, the excess is recorded in the acquirer’s financial statements as goodwill. Goodwill represents the amount paid for excess earning power plus the value of other benefits that did not meet the criteria for recognition as an identifiable asset. If the total consideration given is less than the fair value of the identifiable net assets acquired, we have what is sometimes described as a “negative goodwill” situation. This negative goodwill is recognized as a gain attributable to the acquirer on the acquisition date. We will illustrate the ing for negative goodwill in Chapter 4.

ILLUSTRATIONS OF BUSINESS COMBINATION ING

Company A and Company B are separate legal entities.

To illustrate the ing involved using the acquisition method, we will use the summarized balance sheets of two companies. Summarized statements are used here so that we can focus completely on the broad ing concepts. In later examples, more detailed statements will be used. Exhibit 3.2 presents the December 31, Year 1, balance sheets of the two companies that are party to a business combination. Because the identification of an acquirer requires the analysis of shareholdings after the combination, Notes 1 and 2 are presented in the exhibit to identify the shareholders of each company as belonging to two distinct groups. A Company Ltd. will initiate the takeover of B Corporation. The first two illustrations will involve the purchase of net assets with cash and the issuance of shares as the means of payment. Later illustrations will have A Company purchasing enough shares of B Corporation to obtain control over that company’s net assets and will introduce the preparation of consolidated statements.


111


CHAPTER 3


103

EXHIBIT 3.2 A COMPANY LTD. BALANCE SHEET December 31, Year 1 $300,000

Assets Liabilities Shareholders’ equity Common shares (Note 1) Retained earnings

$120,000 100,000 80,000 $300,000

Note 1 The shareholders of the 5,000 common shares issued and outstanding are identified as Group X.

B CORPORATION BALANCE SHEET December 31, Year 1 Assets

$ 88,000

Liabilities Shareholders’ equity Common shares (Note 2) Retained earnings

$ 30,000 25,000 33,000 $ 88,000

The fair values of B Corporation’s identifiable assets and liabilities are as follows as at December 31, Year 1: Fair value of assets Fair value of liabilities Fair value of net assets

$109,000 29,000 $ 80,000

Note 2 The shareholders of the common shares of B Corporation are identified as Group Y. The actual number of shares issued and outstanding has been purposely omitted because this number would have no bearing on the analysis required later.

Control through Purchase of Net Assets In the following independent illustrations, A Company offers to buy all assets and assume all liabilities of B Corporation. The management of B Corporation accepts the offer.

Illustration 1 Assume that on January 1, Year 2, A Company pays $95,000 in cash to B Corporation for all of the net assets of that company, and that no other direct costs are involved. Because cash is the means of payment, A Company is the acquirer. Goodwill is determined as follows: Acquisition cost Fair value of net assets acquired Goodwill

5 cash paid

$95,000 80,000 $15,000

A Company would make the following journal entry to record the acquisition of B Corporation’s net assets: Assets (in detail) Goodwill Liabilities (in detail) Cash

109,000 15,000 29,000 95,000

The acquiring company records the net assets purchased on its own books at fair value.


112


104

CHAPTER 3


A Company’s balance sheet after the business combination would be as follows: A COMPANY LTD. BALANCE SHEET January 1, Year 2 The acquiring company’s own assets and liabilities are not revalued when it purchases the net assets of the acquired company.

Assets (300,000 2 95,000* 1 109,000) Goodwill

$314,000 15,000 $329,000 $149,000

Liabilities (120,000 1 29,000) Shareholders’ equity Common shares Retained earnings

100,000 80,000 $329,000

* Cash paid by A Company to B Corporation

The selling company records the sale of its net assets on its own books.

While this illustration focuses on the balance sheet of A Company immediately after the business combination, it is also useful to look at B Corporation in order to see the effect of this economic event on that company. B Corporation would make the following journal entry to record the sale of its assets and liabilities to A Company: Cash Liabilities (in detail) Assets (in detail) Gain on sale of assets & liabilities

95,000 30,000 88,000 37,000

The balance sheet of B Corporation immediately after the sale of all of its net assets follows: B CORPORATION BALANCE SHEET January 1, Year 2 After the sale of net assets, B Corporation’s sole asset is cash.

Cash Shareholders’ equity Common shares Retained earnings (33,000 1 37,000*)

$95,000 $25,000 70,000 $95,000

* The gain on sale of the net assets amounts to $37,000 (95,000 – [88,000 – 30,000]).

The management of B Corporation must now decide the future of their company. They could decide to invest the company’s cash in productive assets and carry on in some other line of business. Alternatively, they could decide to wind up the company and distribute the sole asset (cash) to the shareholders.

Illustration 2 Assume that on January 1, Year 2, A Company issues 4,000 common shares, with a market value of $23.75 per share, to B Corporation as payment for the company’s net assets. B Corporation will be wound up after the sale of its net assets. Because the method of payment is shares, the following analysis is made to determine which company is the acquirer. Group X now holds Group Y will hold (when B Corporation is wound up) The acquirer is determined based on which shareholder group controls Company A after B Corporation is wound up.

Shares of A Company 5,000 4,000 9,000

Group X will hold 5/9 (56%) of the total shares of A Company after the combination, and Group Y will hold 4/9 (44%) of this total after the dissolution of B Corporation. Because one shareholder group holds more than 50% of the voting shares, that group will have power to make the key decisions for A Company.


113


CHAPTER 3


105

Accordingly, A Company is identified as the acquirer. Goodwill is determined as follows: Acquisition cost (4,000 shares @ 23.75) Fair value of net assets acquired Goodwill

$95,000 80,000 $15,000

A Company would make the following journal entry to record the acquisition of B Corporation’s net assets and the issuance of 4,000 common shares at fair value on January 1, Year 2: Assets (in detail) Goodwill Liabilities (in detail) Common shares

109,000 15,000 29,000 95,000

A Company’s balance sheet after the business combination would be as follows: A COMPANY LTD. BALANCE SHEET January 1, Year 2 Assets (300,000 1 109,000) Goodwill

$409,000 15,000 $424,000

Liabilities (120,000 1 29,000) Shareholders’ equity Common shares (100,000 1 95,000) Retained earnings

$149,000

The recently purchased assets are recorded at fair value and the old assets are retained at carrying amount.

195,000 80,000 $424,000

This balance sheet was prepared by combining the carrying amounts of A Company’s assets and liabilities with the fair values of those of B Corporation. B Corporation would make the following journal entry to record the sale of its assets and liabilities to A Company: Investment in shares of A Company Liabilities (in detail) Assets (in detail) Gain on sale of assets and liabilities

95,000 30,000 88,000 37,000

The selling company records the sale of its net assets in exchange for shares of the acquiring company.

B Corporation’s balance sheet immediately following the sale of its net assets is given below: B CORPORATION BALANCE SHEET January 1, Year 2 Investment in shares of A Company Shareholders’ equity Common shares Retained earnings (33,000 1 37,000)

$95,000 $25,000 70,000 $95,000

B Corporation’s sole asset is 4,000 of the issued shares of A Company. This single block represents a voting threat to A Company’s shareholders (Group X). A Company will likely insist that B Corporation be wound up and distribute these 4,000 shares to its shareholders (Group Y), who presumably will not get together to determine how to vote them.

After the sale of net assets, B Corporation’s sole asset is investment in shares of A Company.


114


106

CHAPTER 3


LO5 Distinguish between separate-entity financial statements and consolidated financial statements.

CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS When an investor acquires sufficient voting shares to obtain control over the investee, a parent-subsidiary relationship is established. The investor is the parent, and the investee is the subsidiary. Usually, the two (or more) companies involved continue as separate legal entities, with each maintaining separate ing records and producing separate financial statements. However, the two entities now operate as a family of companies. In effect, they operate or have the ability to operate as one economic entity. s of the parent’s financial statements would generally prefer to get one financial statement for the entire family rather than obtain separate statements for each company in the family. Therefore, it is not surprising that IFRSs require the preparation of consolidated financial statements to present the financial position and financial performance for the family as a whole. The ing principles involved in the preparation of consolidated financial statements are found in IFRS 10. In the material that follows in this and later chapters, the preparation of consolidated statements will follow this standard’s requirements. Consolidated statements consist of a balance sheet, a statement of comprehensive income, a statement of changes in equity, a cash flow statement, and the accompanying notes. In this chapter and in Chapter 4, we will illustrate the preparation of the consolidated balance sheet on the date that control is obtained by the parent company. Consolidation of other financial statements will be illustrated in later chapters. The following definitions are provided in IFRS 10: (a) Consolidated financial statements: The financial statements of a group in which the assets, liabilities, equity, income, expenses, and cash flows of the parent and its subsidiaries are presented as those of a single economic entity (b) Group: A parent and its subsidiaries (c) Parent: An entity that controls one or more entities (d) Subsidiary: An entity that is controlled by another entity (e) Non-controlling interest: Equity in a subsidiary not attributable, directly or indirectly, to a parent

Consolidated financial statements combine the financial statements of the parent and its subsidiaries as if they were one entity.

When a parent company has control over one or more subsidiaries, it has the right to benefit economically from the subsidiaries’ resources and, at the same time, is exposed to the related risks involved. Consolidated financial statements reflect a group of economic resources that are under the common control of the parent company, even though these resources are owned separately by the parent and the subsidiary companies. Note that the key concept is common control. This concept is reinforced in Conceptual Framework for Financial Reporting, where the definition of an asset focuses on control rather than ownership.3 When control over a subsidiary is present, the parent is required to consolidate its subsidiaries for external reporting purposes. In other words, the parent and subsidiary will each prepare their own financial statements (which we will refer to as separate-entity financial statements or financial statements for internal purposes). The consolidated financial statements are additional financial statements that combine the separate-entity financial statements of the parent and subsidiary under the hypothetical situation that these two legal entities were operating as one single entity. The consolidated financial statements are


115


CHAPTER 3


prepared by the parent company and are referred to in this text as the third set of financial statements. The following diagram shows the interrelationship of the two companies and the number of financial statements involved:

1

Parent

107

Consolidated financial statements are a separate set of financial statements ed by a working paper that combines the separate-entity financial statements of the parent and subsidiaries.

3

2

Subsidiary

Financial statements 1 and 2 are the separate entity statements of the parent and subsidiary, respectively. Financial statements 3 are the consolidated financial statements. As we will soon see, consolidated financial statements are ed by working papers or worksheets that combine the s of the parent and subsidiaries. As we proceed through the next few chapters, it is important to understand in whose records or on which financial statements the journal entries or adjustments are being made. Consolidation adjustments are made to the consolidated financial statements (statements 3) and are not typically made to the separate entity records of the parent and subsidiary (statements 1 and 2). All intercompany transactions are eliminated in the preparation of the consolidated statements. As a result, these statements reflect only transactions of this single entity with those outside the entity. (The process required to eliminate these intercompany transactions will be discussed thoroughly in later chapters.) Consolidated statements are considered more useful to financial statement s than the separate financial statements of all of the companies that make up the group. Present and prospective shareholders of the parent company are interested in future profitability and cash flows. Creditors of the parent company want to be repaid and, accordingly, have information needs similar to those of the shareholders. The profitability and financial health of the parent are directly related to those of the companies it controls. While consolidated statements are considered the best vehicle to satisfy the needs of stakeholders in the parent, they also have limitations. A poor performance by certain subsidiaries can be hidden as a result of the aggregation process. In addition, many parent companies have subsidiaries in different industries in various countries throughout the world, and this can be hidden in a single set of statements. Footnote disclosures that present details about the companies’ operating segments help to alleviate this problem. Segment reporting will be discussed in Chapter 9. Finally, the information needs of non-controlling shareholders and creditors of the subsidiary companies are not served by consolidated statements. These s are better served with the separate entity statements of the subsidiary by itself. Therefore, separate entity financial statements for the subsidiary will have to be prepared to satisfy the information needs of the subsidiary’s stakeholders.

Adjustments on consolidation are not typically recorded in the separate entity records for the parent or subsidiary.

Consolidated financial statements are prepared primarily for the benefit of the shareholders and creditors of the parent company.

The non-controlling shareholders and creditors of the subsidiary find the separate-entity statements of the subsidiary more useful than the consolidated statements.


116


108

CHAPTER 3

A parent company does not have to issue consolidated financial statements if its parent issues consolidated financial statements.


IAS 27 states that a parent is not required to present consolidated financial statements for external reporting purposes if it meets all of the following conditions: (a) It is a wholly-owned subsidiary, or is a partially-owned subsidiary, of another entity and its other owners, including those not otherwise entitled to vote, have been informed about, and do not object to, the parent not presenting consolidated financial statements. (b) Its debt or equity instruments are not traded in a public market (a domestic or foreign stock exchange or an over-the-counter market, including local and regional markets). (c) It did not file, nor is it in the process of filing, its financial statements with a securities commission or other regulatory organization for the purpose of issuing any class of instruments in a public market. (d) Its ultimate or any intermediate parent produces consolidated financial statements available for public use and comply with IFRSs.

In the parent’s separate financial statements for external s, the investment in subsidiary would be reported at cost or fair value.

If the parent meets these conditions, it can (but is not required to) present separate financial statements in accordance with IFRSs as its only financial statements to external s. When an entity prepares separate financial statements, it shall for investments in subsidiaries (a) at cost, or (b) in accordance with IAS 39: Financial Instruments—Recognition and Measurement (or IFRS 9: Financial Instruments if it is early adopted). If a parent does not issue either consolidated or separate financial statements in accordance with IFRSs to external s, it may still prepare financial statements for internal record-keeping purposes and/or for special external s with special needs. The ing policies used for these special-purpose financial statements should be disclosed. Unless otherwise noted, our illustrations throughout the text will comply with IFRSs and will produce general-purpose financial statements for use by external s. Now that we have a better understanding of the concept of consolidated financial statements, we will turn our attention to business combinations resulting from the purchase of shares. We will continue to use the financial statements of the two companies from Exhibit 3.2.

Control through Purchase of Shares In the next two illustrations, A Company issues a tender offer to the shareholders of B Corporation (Group Y) for all of their shareholdings. Group Y accepts the offer.

Illustration 3 Assume that on January 1, Year 2, A Company pays $95,000 in cash to the shareholders of B Corporation for all of their shares and that no other direct costs are involved. Because cash was the means of payment, A Company is the acquirer. A Company’s journal entry to record the acquisition of 100% of B Corporation’s shares on January 1, Year 2, is as follows: Investment in B Corporation Cash

95,000 95,000


117


CHAPTER 3


The financial statements of B Corporation have not been affected by this transaction because the shareholders of B Corporation, not B Corporation itself, sold their shares. A Company is now a parent company and must prepare consolidated financial statements for external reporting purposes. We will now illustrate the preparation of the consolidated balance sheet as at January 1, Year 2, using a working paper approach. Before preparing the working paper, it is useful to calculate and allocate the acquisition differential. The acquisition differential is defined as the difference between the total consideration given and the carrying amount of the assets of the acquired company at the date of acquisition. The required calculation and allocation is shown in Exhibit 3.3.

109

With a purchase of shares, the transaction is with the shareholders of the acquired company, not with the acquired company itself.

EXHIBIT 3.3 CALCULATION AND ALLOCATION OF THE ACQUISITION DIFFERENTIAL Total consideration given Carrying amount of B Corporation’s net assets Assets Liabilities

5 cash paid by A Company

$ 95,000 $88,000 30,000 58,000 37,000

Acquisition differential Allocated as follows: Fair value excess Assets Liabilities

Fair value 2 Carrying amount 109,000 2 88,000 29,000 2 30,000

5 5

Balance—goodwill

$21,000 1,000

22,000 $ 15,000

Since A Company purchased all of the shares in an arm’s length transaction, it is reasonable to conclude that the $95,000 cost of the investment represents the total fair value of the subsidiary on the date of acquisition. The $95,000 value can be segregated into three components as indicated in the following bar chart: Total Value of Subsidiary

Carrying amount of identifiable assets and liabilities $58,000 Excess of fair value over carrying amount of identifiable assets and liabilities $22,000 Goodwill $15,000 Since assets minus liabilities equals shareholders’ equity, the top component of the bar chart could be described as either carrying amount of identifiable assets and liabilities or carrying amount of shareholders’ equity. The carrying amount component is the amount reflected on the subsidiary’s separate-entity balance sheet.

The total value of the subsidiary can be segregated into three components.


118


110

CHAPTER 3


Goodwill is the difference between the total consideration given and the fair value of identifiable net assets.

The sum of the top two components is equal to the fair value of identifiable assets and liabilities. The bottom component, goodwill, represents the additional value of the acquiree over and above the fair value of the identifiable net assets. When the parent acquires 100% of the subsidiary, goodwill can be calculated as follows: Cost of A Company’s investment Fair value of B Corporation’s identifiable net assets Assets Liabilities

$95,000 109,000 29,000

80,000 $15,000

Balance—goodwill

The fair value excess is added to the carrying amount of the subsidiary’s assets on the consolidated balance sheet; it is not added to the tax basis of the assets for income tax purposes. The fair value excess meets the definition of a temporary difference. Accordingly, deferred taxes should be set up for the tax effect on these temporary differences. We will ignore the deferred tax implications for this illustration and for most illustrations in the text because they overly complicate the allocation of the acquisition differential. We will revisit this issue in Chapter 9. Because consolidated working papers use the financial statements of the parent and its subsidiary as the starting point, the calculation and allocation of the acquisition differential is necessary because it provides the amounts needed to make the working paper eliminations and adjustments. The working paper for the preparation of the consolidated balance sheet on the date of acquisition is shown in Exhibit 3.4.

EXHIBIT 3.4 A COMPANY LTD. CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET WORKING PAPER January 1, Year 2

The consolidation entries are made on the consolidated working papers and not in the ing records of the combining companies.

Assets Investment in B Corporation Acquisition Differential Goodwill Liabilities Common shares Retained earnings Common shares Retained earnings

A Company

B Corp.

$205,000 95,000

$88,000

Adjustments and Eliminations Dr. Cr. (2) $ 21,000

$314,000 (1) $ 95,000

(1)

37,000

(2)

15,000

15,000 $329,000 $149,000 100,000 80,000

$300,000

$88,000

$120,000 100,000 80,000

$30,000

(2)

1,000

25,000 33,000 $88,000

(1) (1)

25,000 33,000 $132,000

$300,000

Consolidated balance sheet

(2)

37,000

$132,000

$329,000


119


CHAPTER 3


111

The following points should be noted regarding the preparation of this working paper: 1. A Company’s asset “Investment in B Corporation” and B Corporation’s common shares and retained earnings do not appear on the consolidated balance sheet. These items are eliminated by a working paper elimination entry because they are reciprocal in nature. The entry labelled (1) eliminates the parent’s ownership percentage of the shareholders’ equity of the subsidiary against the parent’s investment . These shareholders’ equity s are separately shown in the working paper to facilitate this. The acquisition differential that results is the portion of the investment not yet eliminated. 2. The acquisition differential line does not appear as a separate on the consolidated balance sheet. With reference to the calculations of Exhibit 3.3, the acquisition differential is allocated to revalue the net assets of B Corporation for consolidation purposes. This is accomplished by the entry labelled (2). 3. When we add the acquisition differential to the carrying amount of the net assets of B Corporation, the resulting amount used for the consolidation is the fair value of each individual asset and liability of B Corporation. 4. The elimination entries are made on the working paper only. They are not entered in the ing records of the parent or the subsidiary.

The consolidated balance sheet reflects the acquiring company’s net assets at carrying amount and the acquired company’s net assets at fair value.

5. The consolidated balance sheet is prepared from the amounts shown in the last column of the working paper. 6. Under the acquisition method of ing, consolidated shareholders’ equity on acquisition date is that of the parent. It is worth noting that the consolidated balance sheet for illustration 3 is exactly the same as A Company’s balance sheet in illustration 1. This is not a coincidence. In both illustrations, the net assets of the two companies were combined and the amount paid for B Corporation was $95,000 in cash. In illustration 1, A Company acquired the net assets directly; in illustration 3, A Company acquired a percentage of B Corporation’s shares and thereby indirectly acquired B Corporation’s net assets. As we proceed through more complicated examples of consolidation, it is important to that the consolidated financial statements should present the same results as if the parent had acquired the net assets directly.

Illustration 4 Assume that on January 1, Year 2, A Company issues 4,000 common shares, with a fair value of $23.75 per share, to the shareholders of B Corporation (Group Y) for all of their shares and that there are no direct costs involved. The analysis made in Illustration 2 indicates that A Company is the acquirer. A Company’s January 1, Year 2, journal entry to record the issuance of 4,000 shares at market value in payment for the acquisition of 100% of B Corporation’s shares is as follows: Investment in B Corporation (4,000 shares 3 23.75) Common shares

95,000 95,000

Once again, B Corporation would not make any journal entry because the transaction was with the shareholders of B Corporation and not with B Corporation itself.

The consolidated balance sheet produces the same financial position as when A Company purchased the net assets directly.


120


112

CHAPTER 3

Goodwill appears on the consolidated balance sheet; that is, on the third set of statements


The calculation and allocation of the acquisition differential is identical to the one used in the last illustration (see Exhibit 3.3). The working paper for the preparation of the consolidated balance sheet as at January 1, Year 2, is shown in Exhibit 3.5. Once again, it is worth noting that the consolidated balance sheet for illustration 4 is exactly the same as A Company’s balance sheet in Illustration 2. This is not a coincidence. In both illustrations, the net assets of the two companies were combined and the amount paid for B Corporation was $95,000 in the form of A Company shares.

The Direct Approach An alternative approach to the preparation of consolidated financial statements is to prepare the statements directly without the use of a working paper. We know from the working paper approach that the parent’s investment does not appear on the consolidated balance sheet because it is replaced with the underlying assets and liabilities of the subsidiary. The subsidiary’s shareholders’ equity s also do not appear on the consolidated balance sheet because they are not part of the consolidated entity’s shareholders’ equity. Therefore, we will never incorporate the investment from the parent’s balance sheet or the shareholders’ equity s from the subsidiary’s balance sheet when preparing the consolidated balance sheet at the date of acquisition. We also know from the working paper approach that the allocation of the acquisition differential provides the amounts used to revalue the net assets of the subsidiary. By adding the acquisition differential to the carrying amount of the subsidiary’s net assets on a line-by-line basis, we end up with the fair value of the subsidiary’s assets and liabilities.

EXHIBIT 3.5 The allocation of the acquisition differential is made on the consolidated worksheet and is not recorded in the ing records of either of the combining companies.

A COMPANY LTD. CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET WORKING PAPER January 1, Year 2

Assets Investment in B Corporation Acquisition Differential Goodwill

Liabilities Common shares Retained earnings Common shares Retained earnings

A Company

B Corp.

$300,000 95,000

$88,000

Adjustments and Eliminations Dr. Cr. (2)

$ 21,000

$409,000 (1)

$ 95,000

(2)

37,000

(1)

37,000

(2)

15,000

15,000 $424,000 $149,000 195,000 80,000

$395,000

$88,000

$120,000 195,000 80,000

$30,000

(2)

1,000

25,000 33,000 $88,000

(1) (1)

25,000 33,000 $132,000

$395,000

Consolidated balance Sheet

$132,000

$424,000


121


CHAPTER 3


113

The direct approach achieves the same results as the working paper approach but with a slightly different format. The basic process involved in the direct approach is as follows: Carrying amount (parent)

+

Carrying amount (subsidiary)

+ (−)

Acquisition differential

=

Consolidated amounts

The preparation of the consolidated balance sheet using the direct approach for illustration 4 is shown in Exhibit 3.6. The non-bolded amounts shown in brackets come from the separate-entity balance sheets of A Company and B Corporation. The bolded amounts in brackets are consolidation adjustments related to the allocation of the acquisition differential. Consolidated shareholders’ equity on acquisition date is always that of the parent company.

EXHIBIT 3.6

On the date of acquisition, consolidated shareholders’ equity 5 parent’s shareholders’ equity.

Illustration of the Direct Approach A COMPANY LTD. CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET January 1, Year 2

Assets (300,000 1 88,000 1 21,000) Goodwill (0 1 0 1 15,000)

$409,000 15,000 $424,000

Liabilities (120,000 1 30,000 2 1,000)

$149,000 195,000 80,000 $424,000

Common shares Retained earning

The ing for a business combination has been examined in four illustrations. The first two involved the acquisition of net assets directly, and the last two the acquisition of 100% of shareholdings. Because the amount paid was the same in each of these paired illustrations, the balance sheets prepared immediately after the combination are identical for each pair. In the last two illustrations, it was quite clear that A Company was the acquirer. The former shareholders of A Company own 56% of the shares after the new 4,000 shares were issued to acquire B Corporation. If A Company had issued 6,000 rather than 4,000 new shares, the former shareholders of B Corporation would own 55% (6,000 / 11,000) of the outstanding shares of A Company and would control the combined company. This is an example of a reverse takeover where the shareholders of the company being acquired (in this case, B Corporation) own the majority of the shares of the acquirer (in this case, A Company). The legal parent, being A Company, is treated as the subsidiary and the legal subsidiary, being B Corporation, is treated as the parent for ing purposes. Therefore, the consolidated balance sheet would incorporate B Corporation’s net assets at carrying amounts and A Company’s net assets at fair value. See Appendix 3A for a more detailed explanation and illustration of a reverse takeover situation.

Push-down ing Under push-down ing, the acquisition differential is “pushed down” to the actual ing records of the subsidiary on the date of acquisition. The subsidiary revalues its assets and liabilities, including goodwill, to

Under the direct approach, the acquisition differential and other consolidation adjustments are added or subtracted to the appropriate line on the consolidated financial statements.

In a reverse takeover, the consolidated balance sheet incorporates the carrying amount of the net assets of the deemed parent (the legal subsidiary) and the fair value of the deemed subsidiary (the legal parent).

Under push-down ing, the subsidiary revalues its assets and liabilities, including goodwill, to the amounts included in the consolidated balance sheet.


122


114

CHAPTER 3


the same amount that is being used on the consolidated balance sheet. This practice became permissible under Canadian generally accepted ing principles (GAAP) in 1992 with the issuance of Section 1625, “Comprehensive Revaluation of Assets and Liabilities.” Push-down ing is not presently addressed and is, therefore, not allowed under IFRSs. However, it is still permissible under ing Standards for Private Enterprises (ASPE). Since it may be incorporated in IFRSs in the future, we will briefly describe how it works. Push-down ing is another instance where GAAP allow a departure from historical cost ing and allows the use of fair values in financial reporting. Even though the subsidiary was not involved in the transaction with the parent (the transaction involved the parent and the shareholders of the subsidiary), the subsidiary is allowed to revalue its identifiable assets and liabilities to fair value and its goodwill to the amount reported on the consolidated balance sheet. Since the parent and subsidiary were not related prior to the acquisition, the amount paid by the parent was probably equal to or fairly close to the fair value of these net assets. So, it is appropriate to use these values to provide more relevant, yet very reliable, information to the s of the subsidiary’s financial statements. Section 1625 in Part II of the Handbook allows push-down ing only when a subsidiary is at least 90% owned by a parent. Theoretically, a parent could demand a 95%-owned subsidiary to use it. Practically, it probably would not, because when a non-controlling interest is present, the consolidation becomes very complex and the benefits from its use disappear. We will not provide a detailed illustration of push-down ing in this textbook; however, for those readers that wish to pursue this further, a full discussion and illustration of comprehensive revaluations can be found on Connect at www.mcgrawhillconnect.ca. When the parent establishes a new company as a subsidiary, there should be no acquisition differential.

Subsidiary Formed by Parent In some situations, a subsidiary is not acquired through a share purchase from an outside party. Rather, it is quite common in Canada and the United States for the parent company to set up the subsidiary company. The parent company purchases all of the initial share issue after the subsidiary is incorporated.4 At this time, the carrying amounts and fair values of the subsidiary’s net assets are obviously equal, and there is no goodwill. It should also be obvious that the subsidiary has no retained earnings at this time. The preparation of the consolidated balance sheet on the date of formation of the subsidiary is simplified, requiring only the elimination of the parent’s investment against the subsidiary’s share capital. Reporting Depreciable Assets In the previous illustrations, we did not show the details for the subsidiary’s assets because we wanted to illustrate the concepts in a simple scenario. We will now consider the complications when the subsidiary has a depreciable asset. Assume the following data pertaining to a building for the parent and subsidiary at the date of acquisition: Cost Accumulated depreciation Carrying amount Fair value

Parent

Subsidiary

$500 180 320 375

$200 50 150 210


123


CHAPTER 3


115

The consolidated balance sheet should incorporate the carrying amount of $320 for the parent’s building and the fair value of $210 for the subsidiary’s building for a total value of $530. But, how much should be reported for cost and accumulated depreciation? IFRS 10 does not give any guidance on how to report these two components. However, IAS 16 does give some guidance when using the revaluation model to report property, plant, and equipment at fair value on an annual basis. IAS 16 states that when an item of property, plant, and equipment is revalued, any accumulated depreciation at the date of the revaluation is treated in one of the following ways: (a) Restated proportionately with the change in the gross carrying amount of the asset so that the carrying amount of the asset after revaluation equals its revalued amount. This method is similar to a depreciated replacement cost method because it shows the fair value of the asset as if it was new and then deducts accumulated depreciation to derive the fair value of the used asset. This method shows that the asset is used because it reports accumulated depreciation. (We will refer to this approach as the proportionate method.) (b) Eliminated against the gross carrying amount of the asset and the net amount restated to the revalued amount of the asset. Under this method, it will appear as if the asset is new because it does not report any accumulated depreciation. (We will refer to this approach as the net method.)

Cautionary Note: In this textbook, we will use the net method unless otherwise indicated.

Under the proportionate method, both the cost and accumulated depreciation of the subsidiary’s building would be grossed up by a factor of 210/150 5 1.40 to produce a grossed up cost of $280 (200 3 1.4) and a grossed up accumulated depreciation of $70 (50 3 1.4). Under the net method, the accumulated depreciation will be reported at zero and the cost reported at $210. In both cases, the difference between cost and accumulated depreciation will be $210, which is the fair value of the building at that point in time. The net method seems more appropriate because the parent is, in effect, acquiring the asset from the shareholders of the subsidiary at the date of acquisition. There should be no accumulated depreciation for a recently purchased asset. The following presents the consolidated balance sheet amounts under the two different methods:

Parent Cost Accumulated depreciation Carrying amount

$500 180 320

Subsidiary Consolidated Subsidiary ConsoliProportionate Proportionate Net dated Net Method Method Method Method $280 70 210

$780 250 530

$210 0 210

$710 180 530

See Self-Study Problem 2 for a further illustration and comparison of a purchase of assets compared with a purchase of shares. This problem also incorporates the presentation of cost and accumulated depreciation on the consolidated balance sheet.

Other Consolidated Financial Statements in Year of Acquisition

Consolidated financial statements must be prepared once an entity obtains controls of the net assets of another entity. The assets and liabilities of the two entities are combined

Both methods report the subsidiary’s depreciable asset at fair value but report different amounts for cost and accumulated depreciation.


124


116

CHAPTER 3

Consolidated net income, retained earnings, and cash flows include the subsidiary’s income and cash flows only subsequent to the date of acquisition.


for reporting purposes as of the date that control has been obtained. Similarly, the revenues and expenses are combined starting on the date of acquisition; they are not combined on a retroactive basis. If a business combination occurs half way through the year, the consolidated income statement for the year will incorporate only the income of the parent for the first half of the year and the income for both the parent and subsidiary for the second half of the year.5 The column in the consolidated statements for last year (i.e., the comparative year) will only include the parent’s income because the two companies were not one economic entity in the prior year. This treatment is consistent with what would be done if the parent had purchased the net assets directly from the subsidiary. That is, when a company acquires assets, it reports income from those assets starting on the date of purchase. It does not retroactively adjust to state what income would have been had these assets always belonged to the purchaser. Therefore, consolidated net income and retained earnings do not change on the date of acquisition. The consolidated statements will combine the results of the parent and subsidiary for transactions occurring on and subsequent to the date of acquisition. To illustrate these financial reporting requirements, assume the following information for G Corporation and H Company for Years 1 and 2: G Corporation: Separate income (excluding any income from H) Common shares outstanding, December 31 H Company: Net income

Year 1

Year 2

$30,000 10,000

$30,000 14,000

$14,800

$14,800

On January 1, Year 2, G Corporation issued 4,000 common shares to buy 100% of H Company’s common shares. Assume that there was no acquisition differential on this business combination. The net income and earnings per share that G Corporation would present on its comparative consolidated financial statements at the end of Year 2 would be as follows: Net income (30,000 1 0; 30,000 1 14,800) Earnings per share (30,000/10,000; 44,800/14,000) The acquirer must disclose information that enables s of its financial statements to evaluate the nature of, and risks associated, with its interests in subsidiaries.

Year 1

Year 2

$30,000 $3.00

$44,800 $3.20

Disclosure Requirements The acquirer must disclose information that enables s of its financial statements to do the following: (a) Evaluate the nature of, and risks associated with, its interests in subsidiaries (b) Evaluate the effects of those interests on its financial position, financial performance and cash flows (c) Understand the significant judgments and assumptions it has made in determining that it has control of another entity (d) Understand the composition of the group (e) Evaluate the nature and extent of significant restrictions on its ability to access or use assets, and settle liabilities, of the group RONA Inc. is a distributor and a retailer of hardware, home improvement, and gardening products in Canada. It reported business combinations in 2011


125


CHAPTER 3


involving both the purchase of net assets and the acquisition of several subsidiaries. Excerpts from its 2011 financial statements are presented in Exhibit 3.7.

EXHIBIT 3.7 EXTRACTS (IN PART) FROM RONA INC.’S 2011 FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 9. Business acquisitions (in 000s) On December 20, 2011, the Corporation acquired the assets of Centre de Rénovations Mirabel Inc., a dealer located in Quebec operating in the retail and commercial segment. On October 25, 2011, the Corporation acquired the assets of 9202-8950 Québec Inc., a dealer located in Quebec operating in the retail and commercial segment. On August 2, 2011, the Corporation acquired the assets of Palliser Lumber Sales Ltd, a company located in Alberta operating in the distribution segment. On June 29, 2011, the Corporation acquired all the shares of Gestion 2HL Inc., a dealer located in Quebec operating in the retail and commercial segment. On April 11, 2011, the Corporation acquired the assets of Duncan Pacific, located in Vancouver, British Columbia. This dealer, operating in the retail and commercial segment, has four outlets with major lumberyards in Duncan, Nanaimo, Campbell River, and Cobble Hill. On January 31, 2011, the Corporation acquired the assets of La Boutique Plomberie Décoration 25 Inc. in Quebec. The company is a retailer of basic and finishing plumbing products. The company operates in the retail and commercial segment. On January 24, 2011, the Corporation acquired the minority interests in the assets of a store previously held by one of its 51%-owned subsidiaries. This transaction resulted in a $490 decrease in non-controlling interests with a corresponding change in contributed surplus. During 2010, the Corporation acquired nine companies in the retail and commercial segment through asset purchases and one company in the distribution segment by way of a share purchase. The financial performance of these companies is consolidated from their acquisition date. The consideration paid for these acquisitions amounted to $56,195 ($136,566 in 2010). Direct acquisition costs of $666 were recognized in selling, general, and istrative expenses for the year ended December 25, 2011 ($4,062 in 2010). The Corporation financed these acquisitions from its available cash and existing credit facilities. The preliminary purchase price allocation of these acquisitions was established as follows:

Trade and other receivables Inventory Other current assets Other financial assets Property, plant, and equipment Goodwill on acquisition Intangible assets Deferred tax assets Current liabilities Long-term debt Deferred tax liabilities Cost of acquisitions

Less: Issuance of common shares Balances of purchase prices Cash consideration paid

2011

2010

$ 6,298 19,956 244 – 30,040 16,777 45 – (15,251) (1,144) (770)

$ 50,567 60,511 3,272 1,959 34,386 74,040 5,481 849 (62,924) (31,513) (62)

56,195 –

136,566 (35,722)

(8,488)

(20,569)

$ 47,707

$ 80,275

(continued)

117

Rona acquired businesses through direct asset purchases and by way of share purchases.


126


118

CHAPTER 3


EXHIBIT 3.7

The acquirer has up to one year from the date of acquisition to finalize the determination of fair value for the identifiable net assets.

(continued )

The Corporation expects that an amount of $6,989 ($8,590 in 2010) of goodwill will be deductible for tax purposes. The excess of the purchase price over the value of net identifiable items of property, plant, and equipment and intangible assets acquired, less liabilities assumed, is recognized as goodwill and represents expected synergies in connection with the acquisitions. The preliminary purchase price allocation of the 2011 acquisitions may be subject to adjustment pending completion of the final valuations. During 2011, as a result of additional information obtained concerning the preliminary purchase price allocation of fourth quarter 2010 acquisitions, the Corporation reduced the goodwill on acquisition by $1,903 with a corresponding change in property, plant, and equipment. Source: Reproduced with permission from Rona Inc. http://www.rona.ca/corporate/financial-documents

LO6

ANALYSIS AND INTERPRETATION OF FINANCIAL STATEMENTS Consolidated financial statements combine the financial statements of the separate entity financial statements of the parent and subsidiary. The separate entity financial statements of the parent present the investment in subsidiary as one line on the balance sheet. When the consolidated balance sheet is prepared, the investment is replaced by the underlying assets and liabilities of the subsidiary. This gives the same result as if the investor had bought the subsidiary’s assets and liabilities directly. Exhibit 3.8 presents the separate-entity balance sheet of the parent and the parent’s consolidated balance sheet. The values are taken directly from Exhibit 3.7. It also indicates the debt-to-equity ratio for each situation. The separate-entity balance presents the legal situation for Company A in that Company A does, in fact, own an investment in shares of B Corporation. The consolidated balance sheet presents the combined financial position of the parent and subsidiary as if they were one economic entity. The debt-to-equity ratio is substantially higher for the consolidated balance sheet. This may better present the risk of insolvency to the parent’s shareholders because it presents the total debt of the combined entity.

EXHIBIT 3.8

Impact of Presentation Method on Debt-to-Equity Ratio

Assets Investment in B Corporation Goodwill The debt-to-equity ratio is substantially higher for the consolidated balance sheet as compared with the separate-entity balance sheet.

Liabilities Shareholders’ equity Common shares Retained earnings

Debt-to-equity ratio

Separate Entity

Consolidated

$300,000

$409,000

95,000 $395,000

15,000 $424,000

$120,000

$149,000

195,000 80,000 $395,000

195,000 80,000 $424,000

0.44

0.54


127


CHAPTER 3


ASPE Differences

119

LO7

The following paragraphs from Part II of the CICA Handbook outline the main ing and reporting requirements for investments in subsidiaries: • An enterprise shall make an ing policy choice to either consolidate its subsidiaries or report its subsidiaries using either the equity method or the cost method. All subsidiaries should be reported using the same method. (Section 1590) • When a subsidiary’s equity securities are quoted in an active market and the parent would normally choose to use the cost method, the investment should not be reported at cost. Under such circumstances, the investment should be reported at fair value, with changes in fair value reported in net income. (Section 1590)

A private entity can choose to report an investment in a subsidiary by preparing consolidation financial statements, by using the cost or equity methods or at fair value in limited situations.

• Private companies can apply push-down ing but must disclose the amount of the change in each major class of assets, liabilities, and shareholders’ equity in the year that push-down ing is first applied. (Section 1625)

U.S. GAAP Differences U.S. GAAP and IFRSs for business combination have many similarities. Some of the significant differences are summarized as follows: 1. Whereas IFRSs define control as the power to direct relevant activities of the investee, U.S. GAAP generally looks for majority voting rights, except for variable interest entities, where it looks for control and other factors. 2. Whereas IFRSs requires that potential voting rights be considered when assessing whether control exists, U.S. GAAP does not require that potential voting rights be considered.

There are some significant differences between IFRSs and U.S. GAAP for the ing for business combinations.

3. Whereas IFRSs provide an exemption from the requirement to prepare consolidated financial statements if the reporting entity’s parent prepares consolidated financial statements, U.S. GAAP does not provide an exemption. 4. Whereas IFRSs require that the ing policies of the parent and subsidiary conform, the SEC staff does not require policies to conform provided that policies are in accordance with U.S. GAAP.

SUMMARY A business combination takes place when one company gains control over the net assets of a business. An investor controls an investee when it is exposed, or has rights, to variable returns from its involvement with the investee, and has the ability to affect those returns through its power over the investee. Control can be achieved by purchasing the net assets directly, by purchasing enough voting shares to gain control over the use of the net assets, or through contractual arrangements. In the latter two situations, a parent–subsidiary relationship is created that requires the preparation of consolidated financial statements.


128


120

CHAPTER 3


Under IFRS 3, the acquisition method must be used to report a business combination. Under the acquisition method, an acquirer must be identified based on the definition of control. The balance sheet for the combined entity at the date of acquisition includes the assets and liabilities of the acquirer at their carrying amounts and the identifiable assets and liabilities of the acquiree at their fair value. Any excess of the total consideration given over the fair value of the subsidiary’s identifiable assets and liabilities is recorded as goodwill. The preparation of consolidated financial statements is usually ed by a consolidation worksheet, or by a direct approach for calculating balances for each line on the consolidated financial statements. Consolidation adjustments for the allocation of the acquisition differential are reflected on the worksheet and are not typically incorporated in the general ledger of the parent or subsidiary.

Significant Changes in GAAP in the Last Three Years 1. The definition of control has changed. It now focuses on whether the investor is exposed, or has rights, to variable returns from its involvement with the investee and has the ability to affect those returns through its power over the investee.

Changes Expected in GAAP in the Next Three Years No major changes are expected in the next three years for topics covered in this chapter.


On December 31, Year 1, P Company obtains control over the net assets of S Company by purchasing 100% of the ordinary shares of S Company. P Company paid for the purchase by issuing ordinary shares with a fair value of $44,000. In addition, P Company paid $1,000 for professional fees to facilitate the transaction. The following information has been assembled: P Company Carrying amount Fair value

S Company Carrying amount Fair value

$

Goodwill Plant assets (net) Current assets

0 80,000 50,000 $130,000

$ 38,000 90,000 55,000 $ 183,000

$ 0 20,000 15,000 $35,000

$ 22,000 26,000 14,000 $ 62,000

Shareholders’ equity Long-term debt Current liabilities

$ 75,000 25,000 30,000

$ 29,000 30,000

$18,000 7,000 10,000

$ 8,000 10,000

$130,000

$35,000

Required: (a) Prepare a consolidated statement of financial position for P Company and calculate the debt-to-equity ratio immediately after the combination under (i) the acquisition method, and (ii) the new entity method.


129


CHAPTER 3

121


(b) Which method shows the better solvency position? Briefly explain. (c) In your opinion, which method best reflects the true economic reality for the combined economic entity? Briefly explain.

S OLUTION

TO

SELF-STUDY PROBLEM 1 P COMPANY Consolidated Statement of Financial Position at December 31, Year 1 (See notes)

(a)

(i)

(ii)

Goodwill Plant assets (net) Current assets

$ 22,000 106,000 63,000 $191,000

$ 60,000 116,000 68,000 $244,000


$118,000 33,000 40,000 $191,000

$167,000 37,000 40,000 $244,000

0.62:1

0.46:1


(b) The new entity method shows the better solvency position because its debtto-equity ratio is lower than the acquisition method. Both the debt and equity are higher under the new entity method. However, the increase in equity is proportionately greater than the increase in debt. (c) In the opinion of the author, fair values are better measures of the economic value of assets and liabilities than historical cost-based values. If so, the new entity method would best reflect the true economic value of the combined economic entity. This method is not generally accepted at the present time, primarily because the cost of measuring the fair value of all of the parent’s assets and liabilities, including goodwill, could be quite expensive and may not be worth the effort. If s continue to ask for more fair value information, and if the cost of measuring fair values of assets and liabilities decreases, the new entity method could become generally accepted in the future. Notes: 1. The statement of financial position values for assets and liabilities are calculated as follows: (i) Carrying amounts for P plus fair values for S. (ii) Fair values for P plus fair values for S. 2. The $1,000 paid for professional fees reduces cash (which is included in current assets) and increases expenses (which reduce retained earnings, a component of shareholders’ equity). 3. Shareholders’ equity is the amount required to balance the statement of financial position. Under the acquisition method, it is the parent’s carrying amount for shareholders’ equity plus the value of shares issued less the expense for the professional fees.


130


122

CHAPTER 3



On December 31, Year 1, the condensed balance sheets for ONT Limited and NB Inc. were as follows: ONT Assets: Cash s receivable Inventories Property, plant & equipment Accumulated depreciation Liabilities: Current liabilities Bonds payable Shareholders’ equity: Common shares Retained earnings

NB

$

44,000 480,000 650,000 2,610,000 (1,270,000) $2,514,000

$

80,000 420,000 540,000 870,000 (130,000) $1,780,000

$ 660,000 820,000 1,480,000

$ 560,000 490,000 1,050,000

200,000 834,000 1,034,000 $2,514,000

400,000 330,000 730,000 $1,780,000

The fair value of all of NB’s assets and liabilities were equal to their carrying amounts except for the following: Asset Inventories Property, plant & equipment Bonds payable

Carrying amount

Fair value

$540,000 740,000 490,000

$570,000 790,000 550,000

Required: (a) Assume that on January 1, Year 2, ONT acquired all of NB’s net assets by issuing new common shares with a fair value of $1,000,000. This was the only transaction on this day. (i) Prepare the journal entry on ONT’s book to record the purchase of NB’s net assets. (ii) Prepare a balance sheet for ONT at January 1, Year 2, after recording the purchase of NB’s net assets. (b) Ignore part (a). Assume instead that on January 1, Year 2, ONT acquired all of NB’s common shares by issuing new common shares with a fair value of $1,000,000. This was the only transaction on this day. (i) Prepare the journal entry on ONT’s book to record the purchase of NB’s common shares. (ii) Prepare a schedule to calculate and allocate the acquisition differential. (iii) Prepare a consolidated balance sheet for ONT and its subsidiary at January 1, Year 2, after recording the purchase of NB’s common shares. (c) What are the similarities and differences between the balance sheets in parts (a) and (b)?


131



CHAPTER 3

S OLUTION

TO

123

SELF-STUDY PROBLEM 2 (a) (i) Cash s receivable Inventories Property, plant & equipment Goodwill (see [b] [ii])

80,000 420,000 570,000 790,000 250,000

Current liabilities Bonds payable Common shares

560,000 550,000 1,000,000

(ii) ONT LIMITED Balance sheet January 1, Year 2 Cash (44,000 1 80,000) s receivable (480,000 1 420,000) Inventories (650,000 1 570,000) Property, plant & equipment (2,610,000 1 790,000) Accumulated depreciation (1,270,000 1 0) Goodwill

$ 124,000 900,000 1,220,000 3,400,000 (1,270,000) 250,000 $4,624,000

Liabilities: Current liabilities (660,000 1 560,000) Bonds payable (820,000 1 550,000)

$1,220,000 1,370,000 2,590,000

Shareholders’ equity: Common shares (200,000 1 1,000,000) Retained earnings

1,200,000 834,000 2,034,000 $4,624,000

(b) (i) Investment in NB Common shares

1,000,000 1,000,000

(ii) Cost of ONT’s investment in NB Carrying amount of NB’s net assets Assets Liabilities Acquisition differential Allocated as follows: Inventories (570,000 2 540,000) Property, plant & equipment (790,000 2 740,000) Bonds payable (550,000 2 490,000) Balance—goodwill

$1,000,000 $1,780,000 (1,050,000)

$

30,000 50,000 (60,000)

730,000 270,000

20,000 $ 250,000


132


124

CHAPTER 3


(iii) ONT LIMITED Consolidated Balance Sheet January 1, Year 2 Cash (44,000 1 80,000) s receivable (480,000 1 420,000) Inventories (650,000 1 540,000 1 30,000) Property, plant & equipment (2,610,000 1 870,000 2 130,000 1 50,000) Accumulated depreciation (1,270,000 1 130,000 2 130,000) Goodwill Liabilities: Current liabilities (660,000 1 560,000) Bonds payable (820,000 1 490,000 1 60,000) Shareholders’ equity: Common shares (200,000 1 1,000,000) Retained earnings

$

124,000 900,000 1,220,000 3,400,000 (1,270,000) 250,000 $ 4,624,000

$ 1,220,000 1,370,000 2,590,000 1,200,000 834,000 2,034,000 $ 4,624,000

c. The balance sheets are exactly the same, except for the wording in the second line of the title. In part (a), it is ONT Limited’s balance sheet for ONT by itself. In part (b), it is ONT Limited’s consolidated balance sheet.

APPENDIX 3A Reverse Takeovers LO8 For reporting purposes, the acquirer is identified based on which shareholder group has control over the combined entity.

A reverse takeover occurs when an enterprise obtains ownership of the shares of another enterprise but, as part of the transaction, issues enough voting shares as consideration that control of the combined enterprise es to the shareholders of the acquired enterprise. Although, legally, the enterprise that issues the shares is regarded as the parent or continuing enterprise, the enterprise whose former shareholders now control the combined enterprise is treated as the acquirer for reporting purposes. As a result, the issuing enterprise (the legal parent) is deemed to be the acquiree and the company being acquired in appearance (the legal subsidiary) is deemed to have acquired control of the assets and business of the issuing enterprise. While not a common event, this form of business combination is often used by active non-public companies as a means to obtain a stock exchange listing without having to go through the listing procedures established by the exchange. A takeover of a public company that has a stock exchange listing is arranged in such a way that the public company emerges as the legal parent, but the former shareholders of the non-public company have control of the public company.


CHAPTER 3


133

125

EXHIBIT 3A.1 BALANCE SHEETS Reverse Ltd.

Takeover Co.

Carrying amount

Fair value

Carrying amount

Current assets Plant assets

$ 560 1,600 $2,160

$ 700 1,650

$1,560 5,100 $6,660

Liabilities

$ 720 500 940

$ 720

$3,060

Common shares (160 shares) Retained earnings Common shares (96 shares)* Retained earnings

1,080 2,520 $6,660

$2,160 * The shares of Takeover Co. have a fair value of $30 per share.

Reverse Takeover Illustration The balance sheets of Reverse Ltd. and Takeover Co. on the date of a reverse takeover business combination are shown in Exhibit 3A.1. Reverse is a small public company engaged in business activity with a listing on a major stock exchange. Takeover is an active company not listed on any exchange. A business combination is initiated by Takeover whereby Reverse issues 240 shares to the shareholders of Takeover for 100% of their shareholdings. By structuring the combination in this manner, Reverse becomes the legal parent and Takeover the legal subsidiary. An examination of the shares held by the two shareholder groups in the following manner clearly indicates that Takeover is identified as the acquirer: Shareholders of Reverse Ltd. Shareholders of Takeover Co.

Shares of Reverse Ltd.

%

160 240 400

40% 60% 100%

Under the acquisition method of ing for a business combination, the fair value of the net assets of the acquiree is combined with the carrying amount of the net assets of the acquirer. Because Takeover is the acquirer, the acquisition cost is determined as if Takeover had issued shares to the shareholders of Reverse. A calculation has to be made to determine the number of shares that Takeover would have issued to achieve the same result (i.e., so that its shareholders would end up holding 60% of Takeover’s outstanding shares). The number of shares can be determined as follows: 1. Before the combination, the shareholders of Takeover hold 96 shares in that company. 2. Takeover would have to issue X additional shares such that the 96 shares will represent 60% of the total shares outstanding. 3. After the share issue, the total shares outstanding will be 96 1 X shares. 4. 96 5 0.6(96 1 X). Therefore, X 5 64 shares.

In a reverse takeover, the legal parent is deemed to be the subsidiary for reporting purposes and the legal subsidiary is deemed to be the parent.

The acquisition cost for the deemed parent is determined based on a hypothetical situation that could have achieved the same percentage ownership in the combined entity.


134


126

CHAPTER 3


If Takeover had issued 64 shares, the holdings of the two groups of shareholders would have been as follows:

Shareholders of Takeover Shareholders of Reverse

Goodwill of the deemed subsidiary is based on the hypothetical acquisition cost.

Shares of Takeover Co.

%

96 64 160

60% 40% 100%

The acquisition cost is the number of shares that Takeover would have issued, measured at their fair value, and is allocated in the following manner: Acquisition cost—64 shares @ $30 Fair value of identifiable net assets of Reverse Co. Goodwill

Shareholders’ equity should reflect the shareholders’ equity of the deemed parent.

Note disclosure is required to explain that the reporting follows the substance (rather than the legal form) of who has control.

$1,920 1,630 $ 290

The balance sheet of the consolidated company immediately after the business combination is prepared by combining the fair value of the net assets of Reverse, including the goodwill from the combination, with the carrying amount of the net assets of Takeover. It should be noted that Takeover’s shareholders’ equity becomes the shareholders’ equity of the combined company. The dollar amount shown for common shares is determined by summing the dollar amount of the common shares of Takeover before the combination and the deemed issue of 64 shares at fair value. However, the number of shares shown as issued is the number of outstanding shares of the legal parent Reverse. The consolidated balance sheet of Reverse immediately after the reverse takeover takes place is shown in Exhibit 3A.2. The financial statements of Reverse would contain the following footnote to describe this event: During the year, Reverse Ltd. entered into a share exchange agreement with the shareholders of Takeover Co. Under this agreement, Reverse exchanged 240 common shares for 100% of the issued and outstanding shares of Takeover. As a result of the share exchange, Reverse obtained control over Takeover. Legally, Reverse is the parent of Takeover; however, as a result of the share exchange, control of the combined companies ed to the shareholders of Takeover, which for reporting purposes is deemed to be the acquirer. For financial reporting purposes, this share exchange is considered to be a reverse takeover and

EXHIBIT 3A.2 REVERSE LTD. CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET The legal parent/deemed subsidiary’s assets are brought in at fair value while the legal subsidiary/deemed parent’s assets are brought in at carrying amount.

Current assets (700 1 1,560) Plant assets (1,650 1 5,100) Goodwill

$2,260 6,750 290 $9,300

Liabilities (720 1 3,060) Common shares* (1,080 1 1,920) Retained earnings

$3,780 3,000 2,520 $9,300

* The number of shares issued and outstanding would be shown as 400 shares (160 1 240).


135


CHAPTER 3


127

Reverse is considered to be a continuation of Takeover. The net assets of Takeover are included in the balance sheet at carrying amounts, and the deemed acquisition of Reverse is ed for by the acquisition method, with the net assets of Reverse recorded at fair values. The fair value of Reverse on the date of acquisition was as follows: Current assets Plant assets Goodwill Liabilities

$ 700 1,650 290 (720) $1,920

In this example, the acquisition cost was determined by multiplying the number of shares that the legal subsidiary would have had to issue by the fair value of that company’s shares. However, because the legal subsidiary is often a private company, the fair value of its shares may have to be determined using business valuation concepts. If a fair value cannot be determined for the shares of the legal subsidiary, the fair value of the net assets of the legal parent are used to determine acquisition cost. Comparative amounts presented in the consolidated financial statements of the legal parent are those of the deemed parent. In the year of the reverse takeover, consolidated net income is made up of the income of the deemed parent before the takeover and the income of the combined company after the takeover. Because the outstanding shares shown on the consolidated balance sheet are those of the legal parent, the calculation of earnings per share is based on these shares; so is the calculation of the weighted average shares outstanding in the year of the takeover. In the example of Reverse, assuming the combination date was July 31, the weighted average shares outstanding for the fiscal year December 31 is 307 shares, calculated as follows:

The comparative amounts are those of the legal subsidiary/deemed parent.

The consolidated financial statements use the name and shares outstanding of the legal parent.

• 240 shares deemed outstanding for 7 months, and • 400 shares outstanding for 5 months. This calculation is in contrast to the normal calculation of weighted average shares outstanding, and requires further clarification. that the consolidated statements of Reverse (the legal parent) are considered to be a continuation of those of Takeover (the deemed parent) and that the ing assumes that the deemed parent (the legal subsidiary) acquired the legal parent. But the shares outstanding are those of the legal parent. Consolidated net income for the year does not contain the income of Reverse prior to the takeover date because this income is considered to be pre-acquisition earnings. Reverse picked up the first seven months’ income of Takeover with the issue of 240 shares. The last five months’ income is that of Takeover and Reverse, during which time 400 shares (160 1 240) were outstanding. The consolidated balance sheet of Reverse Ltd. (Exhibit 3A.2) was prepared using a non-working paper (or direct) approach. We will now illustrate the preparation of the consolidated balance sheet using a working paper (Exhibit 3A.3). On the date of the reverse takeover, Reverse (the legal parent)

The consolidated financial statements use values consistent with whoever, in substance, is the parent and who, in substance, is the subsidiary.


136


128

CHAPTER 3


EXHIBIT 3A.3 REVERSE LTD. CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET WORKING PAPER (at date of acquisition) Reverse Ltd. The assets reflect the fair values of the deemed subsidiary and the carrying amounts of the deemed parent.

Retained earnings are the retained earnings of the deemed parent.

Current assets $ 560 Plant assets 1,600 Investment in Takeover Co. 1,920 Acquisition differential Goodwill $4,080 $ 720 Liabilities Common shares (old) 500 Retained earnings 940 Common shares Common shares (new) 1,920 Retained earnings $4,080

Adjustments and Eliminations Dr. Cr.

Takeover Co. $1,560 5,100

(2) (2)

$ 140 50

(1) (2)

480 290

(1) (1)

500 940

$2,260 6,750 (1) $1,920 (2) 480

290 $9,300

$6,660 $3,060

$3,780

1,080 2,520 $6,660


3,000

$2,400

$2,400

2,520 $9,300

would make the following journal entry to record the acquisition of 100% of the outstanding shares of Takeover by the issuance of 240 common shares: Investment in Takeover Co. Common shares (new)

The calculation of the acquisition differential uses the acquisition cost under the hypothetical situation.

1,920 1,920

These “new” shares are issued at the deemed acquisition cost and are shown separately on the working paper to simplify the consolidation process. The calculation and allocation of the acquisition differential is as follows: Acquisition cost of Takeover Co. Carrying amount of Reverse Ltd’s net assets Assets Liabilities Acquisition differential Allocated:

Current assets (700 2 560) Plant assets (1,650 2 1,600) Goodwill

$1,920 $2,160 720

$ 140 50

1,440 480

190 $ 290

Elimination entry (1) eliminates Reverse’s investment in Takeover against Reverse’s precombination shareholders’ equity, with the acquisition differential the balancing amount. Elimination (2) allocates the acquisition differential to revalue the net assets of Reverse. The consolidated common shares are the common shares of Takeover (the deemed parent) before the takeover plus the new shares issued by Reverse, which are measured at Takeover’s deemed acquisition cost of Reverse.


137


CHAPTER 3


129

REVIEW QUESTIONS Questions, cases, and problems that deal with the appendix material are denoted with an asterisk. LO1

1. What key element must be present in a business combination?

LO2

2. Can a statutory amalgamation be considered a form of business combination? Explain.

LO1

3. Explain how an acquirer is determined in a business combination for a 100%-owned subsidiary.

LO3

4. Outline the ing involved with the acquisition method for a 100%-owned subsidiary.

LO3

5. Briefly describe the ing involved with the new-entity method.

LO2

6. If one company issued shares as payment for the net assets of another company, it would probably insist that the other company be wound up after the sale. Explain why this condition would be part of the purchase agreement.

LO1

7. What criteria must be met for a subsidiary to be consolidated? Explain.

LO1

8. What part do irrevocable agreements, convertible securities, and warrants play in determining whether control exists? Explain.

LO5

9. What is an acquisition differential, and where does it appear on the consolidated balance sheet?

LO4

10. What are some reasons for the purchase price being in excess of the carrying amount of the acquiree’s assets and liabilities? What does this say about the accuracy of the values used in the financial statements of the acquiree?

LO4

11. How is goodwill determined at the date of acquisition? Describe the nature of goodwill.

LO4

12. When must an intangible asset be shown separately from goodwill? What are the criteria for reporting these intangible assets separately from goodwill?

LO4

13. Does the historical cost principle or fair value reporting take precedence when preparing consolidated financial statements at the date of acquisition under the acquisition method? Explain.

LO5

14. What are separate financial statements, and when can they be presented to external s in accordance with IFRSs?

LO1

15. What are protective rights, and how do they affect the decision of whether one entity has control over another entity?

LO5

16. In the preparation of a consolidated balance sheet, the differences between the fair value and the carrying amount of the subsidiary’s net assets are used. Would these differences be used if the subsidiary applied push-down ing? Explain.

LO7

17. What are some of the main differences between IFRSs and ASPE for business combinations?

LO8

*18. What is a reverse takeover, and why is such a transaction entered into?

LO8

*19. Explain how the acquisition cost is determined for a reverse takeover.


138


130

CHAPTER 3


CASES Case 3-1 LO3, 7

On December 30, Year 7, Pepper Company agreed to form a business combination with Salt Limited. Pepper issued 2,320 of its common shares for all (2,900) of the outstanding common shares of Salt. This transaction increased the number of the outstanding Pepper shares from 3,800 to 6,120. The market value of the shares was $50 per share for Pepper and $40 for Salt. The balance sheets for the two companies just prior to the acquisition were as follows (in 000s): Pepper Carrying amount

Salt Fair value

Carrying amount

Fair value

Identifiable assets Goodwill

$200 0 $200

$250 100 $350

$100 0 $100

$130 70 $200

Liabilities Shareholders’ equity

$150 50 $200

$160 190 $350

$ 80 20 $100

$ 84 116 $200

Consolidated financial statements will be prepared to combine the financial statements for the two companies. The management of Pepper is concerned about not exceeding a debt-to-equity ratio of 3:1 because of a covenant in a borrowing agreement with its bank. It wants to see how these consolidated statements would differ under two different methods of reporting: acquisition and new entity. Management also has the following questions when reporting this business combination: • Why, under the acquisition method, is one set of assets and liabilities adjusted to fair value, whereas the other set is left at carrying amount? • Given that under the acquisition method we can measure and report the net assets at fair values at the date of acquisition, why would we not report fair values at each subsequent reporting date? • Which balance sheet best reflects the economic reality of the business combination?

Required: Prepare a consolidated balance sheet at the date of acquisition under the two methods and respond to the questions asked by management.

Case 3-2 LO1

The directors of Atlas Inc. and Beta Corp. have reached an agreement in principle to merge the two companies and create a new company called AB Ltd. The basics of the agreement confirmed so far are outlined below: The new company will purchase all of the assets and assume all of the liabilities of Atlas and Beta by issuing shares. After the sale the two companies will be wound up. Some but not all of the top management of each company will be retained. The number of AB shares that will be issued has not yet been determined. The founding shareholders of Atlas Corp., who owned 60% of the voting shares of Atlas prior to the merger, have rights to veto any sale of patents, which


139


CHAPTER 3


131

they developed and ed. Some of the other shareholders of Atlas also owned non-voting preferred shares of Atlas. These preferred shares were convertible into common shares of Atlas on a one-for-one basis. The chair of the merger committee has asked you to provide him with advice as to the ing implications that will result from this merger, even though many of the details have not yet been ironed out. He has requested that you submit to him a preliminary report.

Required: Prepare an outline of your report.

Case 3-3 LO2, 5, 8

Manitoba Peat Moss (MPM) was the first Canadian company to provide a reliable supply of high-quality peat moss to be used for greenhouse operations. Owned by Paul Parker, the company’s founder and president, MPM began operations approximately 30 years ago when demand for peat moss was high. It has shown consistently high profits and stable growth for over 20 years. Parker holds all of the 50,000 outstanding common shares in MPM. Prairie Greenhouses (PG), a publicly traded company that purchases over 70% of MPM’s output, provides tree seedlings to various government agencies and logging companies for reforestation projects. In Year 5, PG approached MPM with an offer to buy all of the company’s outstanding shares in exchange for a part ownership in PG, with a view to integrating vertically. Parker was very interested in the offer, since he hoped to retire soon. PG currently has 100,000 shares outstanding, and they are widely distributed. It would issue 100,000 new common shares to Paul Parker in a two-for-one exchange for all of MPM’s shares. PG’s shares are currently trading on the TSX at $65 per share. The board of directors of PG is uncertain as to the ing implications of the proposed share exchange. They believe that since they are purchasing all of the outstanding common shares of MPM, it is similar to buying the company outright. As a result, they want to report all of MPM’s assets on PG’s consolidated financial statements at fair value. This will be very advantageous to PG because the land carried on MPM’s books was purchased 30 years ago and has appreciated substantially in value over the years. The board has asked you, its ing adviser, to prepare a report explaining how PG’s purchase of shares should be reported. They are particularly interested in how the increase in the value of the land will be shown on the consolidated statements. The condensed balance sheets of the two companies at the time of the offer are shown below: PG

MPM

Current assets Property, plant & equipment

$ 870,000 8,210,000 $9,080,000

$ 450,000 2,050,000 $2,500,000

Current liabilities Long-term debt Common shares Retained earnings

$ 525,000 2,325,000 4,000,000 2,230,000 $ 9,080,000

$ 200,000 1,300,000 500,000 500,000 $2,500,000


140


132

CHAPTER 3


Note: Land held by MPM at a carrying amount of $1,000,000 has a fair value of $6,000,000. All other assets of both companies have carrying amounts approximately equal to their fair values.

Required: Prepare the report to the board of directors. (adapted from a case prepared by J.C. (Jan) Thatcher, Lakehead University, and Margaret Forbes, University of Saskatchewan)

Case 3-4 LO5

When Conoco Inc. of Houston, Texas, announced the CDN$7 billion acquisition of Gulf Canada Resources Limited of Calgary, Alberta, a large segment of the press release was devoted to outlining all of the expected benefits to be received from the assets acquired. The acquisition price represented a 35% over Gulf’s closing share price on the announcement date. Included in the assets of Gulf were the following: • • • • • •

Proven reserves of over 1 billion barrels of oil Probable reserves of approximately 1.2 billion barrels of oil Proven reserves of 1.4 trillion cubic feet of natural gas Probable reserves of 2.9 trillion cubic feet of natural gas Four million acres of undeveloped land in western Canada A 72% interest in Gulf Indonesia Resources Limited; included in this company’s assets were reserves of 180 million barrels of oil and 1.5 trillion cubic feet of gas • A 9% interest in t venture, Syncrude Canada Ltd., which is developing the heavy oil tar sands in northern Alberta • Long-term contracts to deliver 3 trillion cubic feet of natural gas to Southeast Asia • Recent exploration successes in Sumatra and offshore Java

Required: Many of the assets acquired in this business combination present particular valuation challenges. Provide guidance to the financial staff of Conoco as to how the price should be allocated among various tangible and intangible assets (including goodwill) and how liabilities included in the portfolio of Gulf Canada Resources Limited should be measured. Explain your answer in of the provisions of IFRSs. (case prepared by Peter Secord, St. Mary’s University)

Case 3-5 LO4, 7

Regina Communications Ltd. develops and manufactures equipment for technology and communications enterprises. Since its incorporation in Year 5, it has grown steadily through internal expansion. In the middle of Year 14, Arthur Lajord, the sole owner of Regina, met a couple of engineering students who were working on new technology to increase the efficiency of data transferred over cable lines. Arthur has provided moral and some financial to these students over the past few months. The company has developed some materials and processes sufficiently that a prospective buyer could buy


141


CHAPTER 3


133

the company, complete the development, and begin producing outputs for sale to prospective customers, or integrate the seller’s materials and processes with its own inputs and processes. At a lunch with the students last Friday, the students told Arthur that they had been able to a patent to protect their technology. Furthermore, they were interested in selling their business, Davin Technologies Inc., which owns the patent and some other assets used in the development of this technology. After a week of negotiation, Arthur and the students agreed to the following: • Rather than buying the shares of Davin, Regina would buy the assets and assume the liabilities of Davin effective January 1, Year 15. • The purchase price would be payable as follows: – $200,000 on January 1, Year 15 – $100,000 a year for three years commencing January 1, Year 16 • The students would commit to work for Regina as consultants over the next three years and would be paid $40 per hour for their services. The condensed statement of financial position for Davin at January 1, Year 15, was as follows: Carrying amount

Fair value

Computer equipment Patent registration costs Current assets

$ 30,000 25,000 50,000 $105,000

$35,000 ? 50,000

Shareholders’ equity Liabilities

$ 95,000 10,000 $105,000

? 10,000

Arthur was pleased and excited about the acquisition. He felt that it was a fair deal for both parties given that the business had not yet earned any revenue. He was particularly pleased that the students agreed to be paid over three years because he otherwise would have had to arrange a bank loan with an interest rate of 8%. Arthur is now worried about the ing for this acquisition because it is the first time that his company has purchased another business. Although Regina has always followed IFRSs, he is wondering whether now is the time to opt for a simpler approach. In particular, he is wondering whether IFRSs would allow the entire acquisition differential to be allocated to goodwill. This would keep it simple and would also avoid a charge to income over the first few years, since goodwill does not need to be amortized. If the acquisition differential is allocated to patent, then Arthur would like to write off the patent over the maximum period of 20 years. Arthur has asked you, a CGA, to prepare a presentation on the ing implications for the proposed acquisition. He wants to understand how to determine the acquisition cost, how to measure the individual assets and liabilities, and how this measurement would affect profit in the first year after the date of acquisition.


142


134

CHAPTER 3


Required: Prepare the presentation slides and related speaker’s notes for the presentation. Limit your presentation to five slides. Your presentation should provide recommendations related to the issues raised by Arthur. Use financial statement concepts to your recommendations. Provide a detailed calculation to show the impact on profit for Year 15. State your assumptions. (CGA-Canada adapted)

*Case 3-6 LO1, 8

Uni-Invest Ltd. holds commercial and residential real estate interests in Nova Scotia, New Brunswick, Prince Edward Island, Alberta, and British Columbia. On October 23, Year 10, Basic Realty Investment Corporation acquired 100% of the outstanding common shares of Uni-Invest Ltd. in exchange for 32,584,051 common shares of Basic. At October 31, Year 9, Basic had 3,333,320 common shares and 6,000,001 Class C preferred shares issued and outstanding. Prior to the acquisition, the 6,000,001 Class C preferred shares were converted to common shares on a sharefor-share basis. Then, on October 23, Year 10, the 9,333,321 common shares were consolidated five for one to yield 1,866,664 common shares, with a carrying amount of $746 and a fair value of $2,024,845. Values for Basic’s shareholders’ equity are summarized as follows: Capital shares issued Balance prior to investment in Uni-Invest Issued to effect investment on October 23, Year 10, net of costs of $84,177 Balance December 31, Year 10

Number of shares 1,866,664 32,584,051 34,450,715

Amount $

746

33,236,248 $33,236,994

Details of the fair value excess for the assets acquired and liabilities assumed on the transaction are as follows: Assets acquired Property, plant & equipment Other assets Liabilities assumed Long-term debt Other liabilities Fair value excess for net assets acquired

$4,632,398 271,436 4,903,834 2,707,504 143,000 2,850,504 $2,053,330

Required: Based on this information, how should this investment be reported? More specifically, which company is the parent? Which is the subsidiary? Why? What earnings, and for what period, are reported in the consolidated financial statements for the year ended December 31, Year 10? Why? (adapted from a case prepared by Peter Second, St. Mary’s University)

Case 3-7 LO1, 2, 5

Planet Publishing Limited (Planet) is a medium-sized, privately owned Canadian company that holds exclusive Canadian distribution rights for the publications of Typset Daily Corporation (TDC). Space Communications Ltd. (Space), an unrelated privately owned Canadian company, held similar distribution rights for the publications of Worldwide Affairs Limited (WAL).


143


CHAPTER 3


135

TDC and WAL were unrelated US publishers of magazines and books. WAL went into receivership in early Year 3 and was then purchased by TDC. TDC did not want the exclusive rights for its publications split between two companies, and it did not believe that either Planet or Space, individually, could adequately distribute its products in Canada. In order to retain the distribution rights that otherwise would have been lost at the expiry of the contracts, Space merged with Planet on July 31, Year 3. Details regarding the merger and the restructuring that followed soon after the merger are provided in Exhibit I. In September Year 3, the directors of Planet requested that your firm let its name be offered as auditor for the year ending February 28, Year 4. Your firm accepted the request. In prior years, two other firms audited Planet and Space. It is now October Year 3, and your firm was appointed as auditors at a shareholders’ meeting. Subsequent to your appointment as auditors, the president requested a report on the following matters: 1. The ing treatment that should be given to the merger and to the transactions that have arisen since February 28, Year 3, together with full reasons for all recommendations. 2. Any other issues (other than tax and assurance) that the president should be aware of, arising from the merger, or from recent events, together with recommendations. The partner in charge of the engagement asked you, aCA, a manager in the firm, to prepare the draft report. You and your staff have gathered information on Planet. This information is contained in Exhibit II.

EXHIBIT I INFORMATION REGARDING THE MERGER 1.

2. 3.

4.

The merger of Planet and Space took effect on July 31, Year 3, and involved these steps: a. Planet issued voting shares of the company to the shareholders of Space in exchange for all the outstanding shares of Space. Planet’s original shareholders now own 75% of Planet’s voting shares. b. Space was wound up. c. Space’s offices were closed, and its operations were moved to Planet’s offices. Space had a 10-year lease with four years remaining. All warehouses remained in operation. d. Several employees were terminated (and given two to six months’ salary) or offered early retirement packages. Planet retained the same year-end of February 28. After the merger, Planet signed new exclusive distribution contracts with TDC and its wholly owned subsidiary, WAL. This gave Planet all the rights that had previously been assigned to Planet or to the former Space. The rights are for five years but are renewable for another five at the option of Planet. These rights include distribution of magazines, books, and videos that accompany books. TDC sells to Planet at a special discount that precludes Planet from returning any merchandise. Before the merger Space had been in financial difficulty, incurring large losses over the past few years. During the merger negotiations Space and Planet approached Space’s creditors with a plan to restructure Space’s debt. In September Year 3, Planet had been able to finalize the restructuring of some of the debts of the former Space as follows: a. A trade of US$320,000 due to TDC was converted into a two-year note payable, due in September Year 5. The note is non–interest bearing and is unsecured.

(continued)


144


136

CHAPTER 3


EXHIBIT I

(continued )

b.

5.

6. 7.

Loans of $500,000 due to shareholders and accrued interest of $125,000 were converted in September Year 3 into convertible, preferred shares bearing an 8% non-cumulative dividend. c. One of the major shareholders forgave a loan of $110,000 in September, Year 3. d. Creditors who were owed $200,000 agreed to accept $0.80 on the dollar provided that they were paid before November 17, Year 3. Approximately 10% had been paid by the end of September, Year 3. Under both the merger agreement and a separate contractual arrangement with Planet’s banker, the shareholders of Planet were required to contribute $1.5 million of new equity into the company in August Year 3. After the funds had been deposited, the banker made the following loans: a. A $1 million demand loan to be secured by receivables, inventory, and a ed debenture on all unencumbered assets of Planet. In order to borrow the full $1 million, the company must maintain average balances of $1.2 million in receivables and $600,000 in inventory. b. A $2 million term loan on real property belonging to the original Planet, and chattels, for which the bank holds the first mortgage or a lien claim with priority over those of other creditors. The term loan is for up to two years and can be drawn upon as needed. As part of the distribution agreement with TDC, Planet must provide financial statements to TDC for fiscal Year 4, Year 5, and Year 6. The bank wants monthly listings of inventory, aged receivables, and cash flows. The bank loan agreement stipulates covenants that must be adhered to, including debt-to-equity ratios, no dividends on voting shares, maximum salary limits, and limits on bonuses.

EXHIBIT II INFORMATION ON PLANET 1.

2.

In August Year 3, Planet made the following transactions: a. To diversify, Planet invested $800,000 cash in a Canadian specialist magazine. This magazine has been successful for several years, and it is expected to generate over $150,000 per year in cash flows after taxes. Planet acquired customer and r lists, title to the magazine, some files, and many back issues. Six staff from the magazine ed Planet, forming the core management and providing continuity. b. Planet decided to invest about $350,000 in cash in an advertising program to attract new subscribers to the specialist magazine. The $350,000 is to be amortized over the expected subscription life of the group of new subscribers. The $350,000 was paid to an advertising agency in August Year 3. In addition, Planet and the agency have agreed that the agency will provide the equivalent of another $300,000 for a promotion campaign in exchange for free advertising space in Planet’s specialist magazine. These free ments are expected to be published over the next six months. In recent years, the cost of preparing or producing a magazine published in Canada has tended to be three to four times the average subscription price. Throughout Year 3, subscriptions were offered at half price if subscribers paid in advance for three years. The sales of magazines published by TDC and other publishers for most of Planet’s (and the former Space’s) business. Retail sales dollars and margins have remained constant over the past few years in this market. Retailers are generally permitted to return each month’s unsold magazines to the distributor for credit against future sales.

(continued)


145


CHAPTER 3

EXHIBIT II 3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

137


(continued )

Arrangements with book stores allow them to return half of the books that they purchase, as long as the returns occur within six months of purchase. Over the past five to eight years, returns have varied considerably. Most book stores pay about 120 days after purchase. Several small book stores have gone bankrupt during the recent recession, and only some of the inventory was returned prior to bankruptcy. Minimal payments from trustees for these bankrupt stores are expected over the next three to five years. Over $400,000 had been withdrawn from Planet by the major shareholders in the two years leading to the merger. There are rumours that some minority shareholders may file a lawsuit against Planet. Before the merger, both Space and Planet engaged in various non-arm’s length transactions that were materially different from fair values. Notes to the respective financial statements mentioned that non–arm’s length transactions had occurred but did not provide any details. Planet’s Year 4 financial statements will be included in documents designed to attract capital through an initial public offering in the near future. Planet wants to apply ing standards for public enterprises. Considerable investment in subscription drives is expected over the next several months. Management wants to capitalize all expenditures and employ a 10-year amortization period. In the fiscal year ended in Year 3, about one-third of both Planet’s and Space’s sales came from Canadian published products and two-thirds from TDC and WAL products.

Required: Prepare the draft report. (CICA adapted)

P ROBLEMS Problem 3-1 LO3, 6

G Company is considering the takeover of K Company whereby it will issue 6,000 common shares for all of the outstanding shares of K Company. K Company will become a wholly owned subsidiary of G Company. Prior to the acquisition, G Company had 20,000 shares outstanding, which were trading at $4.90 per share. The following information has been assembled: G Company Carrying amount

K Company

Fair value

Carrying amount

Fair value

Current assets Plant assets (net)

$ 40,000 60,000 $100,000

$47,500 70,000

$ 10,000 20,000 $ 30,000

$9,200 25,000


$ 20,000 15,000 30,000 35,000 $100,000

20,000 19,000

$ 5,000 2,500 10,000 12,500 $ 30,000

5,000 3,200


146


138

CHAPTER 3


Required: (a) Prepare G Company’s consolidated balance sheet immediately after the combination using (i) the new-entity method, and (ii) the acquisition method. (b) Calculate the current ratio and debt-to-equity ratio for G Company under both methods. Explain which method shows the strongest liquidity and solvency position and which method best reflects the true financial condition of the company.

Problem 3-2 LO2, 4

Three companies, A, L, and M, whose December 31, Year 5, balance sheets below, have agreed to combine as at January 1, Year 6. Each of the companies has a very small proportion of an intensely competitive market dominated by four much larger companies. In order to survive, they have decided to merge into one company. The merger agreement states that Company A will buy the assets and liabilities of each of the other two companies by issuing 27,000 common shares to Company L and 25,000 common shares to Company M, after which the two companies will be wound up. Company A’s shares are currently trading at $5 per share. Company A will incur the following costs: Costs of issuing shares Professional fees

$ 8,000 20,000 $28,000

The following information has been assembled regarding the three companies: COMPANY A Carrying amount

Fair value

Current assets Plant and equipment (net)

$ 99,900 147,600 $247,500

$102,000 160,000

Liabilities Common shares (50,000 shares) Retained earnings

$ 80,000 75,000 92,500

75,000

$247,500

COMPANY L Carrying amount

Fair value


$ 60,000 93,000 $153,000

$ 65,000 98,000


$ 35,000 48,000 70,000

36,000

$153,000


147


CHAPTER 3


COMPANY M Carrying amount

139

Fair value


$ 52,000 115,000 $167,000

$ 68,000 120,000


$ 72,000 60,000 35,000

70,000

$167,000

Required: Prepare the balance sheet of Company A on January 2, Year 6, after Company L and Company M have been wound up.

Problem 3-3 LO4

The statement of financial position of Bagley Incorporated as at July 31, Year 4, is as follows: BAGLEY INCORPORATED STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION at July 31, Year 4 Carrying amount Fair value Plant and equipment—net Patents Current assets

$ 910,000 — 455,000 $1,365,000

Ordinary shares Retained earnings Long-term debt Current liabilities

$ 182,000 520,000 390,000 273,000 $1,365,000

$1,053,000 78,000 507,000

416,000 273,000

On August 1, Year 4, the directors of Bagley considered a takeover offer from Davis Inc., whereby the corporation would sell all of its assets and liabilities. Davis’s costs of investigation and drawing up the merger agreement would amount to $19,500.

Required: (a) Assume that Davis made a $1,040,000 cash payment to Bagley for its net assets. Prepare the journal entries in the ing records of Davis to record the business combination. (b) Assume that Davis issued 130,000 ordinary shares, with a market value of $8 per share, to Bagley for its net assets. Legal fees associated with issuing these shares amounted to $6,500 and were paid in cash. Davis had 150,000 shares outstanding prior to the takeover. (i) Prepare the journal entries in the records of Davis to record the business combination. (ii) Prepare the statement of financial position of Bagley immediately after the sale.


148


140

CHAPTER 3


Problem 3-4 LO2, 5

The shareholders of Prong Company and Horn Company agreed to a statutory amalgamation under which a share exchange took place. On September 1, Year 5, Prong Company issued 60,000 ordinary shares for all of the ordinary shares of Horn Company, after which Horn Company was dissolved. The ordinary shares of Prong Company traded at $7 per share on this date. After the amalgamation, Prong Company changed its name to Pronghorn Corporation. The statements of financial position of the two companies on August 31, Year 5, were as follows: Prong Company

Horn Company

Plant and equipment Accumulated depreciation Other assets Current assets

$ 635,000 (205,000) 41,000 135,000 $ 606,000

$ 489,000 (189,000) 20,000 170,000 $ 490,000

Ordinary shares (note 1) Retained earnings Long-term debt Current liabilities

$ 70,000 260,000 180,000 96,000 $ 606,000

$ 100,000 200,000 160,000 30,000 $ 490,000

70,000

25,000

Note 1 Ordinary shares outstanding

The carrying amounts of the net assets of both companies were equal to fair values except for plant and equipment. The fair values of plant and equipment were as follows: Prong Company Horn Company

$500,000 280,000

Prong’s other assets include patent registration costs with a carrying amount of $25,000. An independent appraiser placed a value of $100,000 on this patent.

Required: Prepare the statement of financial position of Pronghorn Corporation immediately after the statutory amalgamation.

Problem 3-5

The balance sheet of Drake Enterprises as at December 31, Year 5, is as follows:

LO5, 6, 7

Assets Cash s receivable Inventory Property, plant, and equipment Accumulated depreciation

$

99,000 143,000 191,400 1,692,000 (900,000)

$1,225,400

Liabilities and Equity Current liabilities Bonds payable Common shares (100,000 shares) Retained earnings

$ 242,000 352,000 220,000 411,400 $1,225,400


149


CHAPTER 3


141

Effective January 1, Year 6, Drake proposes to issue 82,500 common shares (currently trading at $20 per share) for all of the common shares of Hanson Industries. In determining the acquisition price, the management of Drake noted that Hanson Industries has unrecorded customer service contracts and directed its ing staff to reflect this when recording the acquisition. An independent appraiser placed a value of $150,000 on this unrecorded intangible asset. Direct costs associated with the acquisition were as follows: Costs of issuing shares Professional fees

$44,000 38,500 $82,500

The balance sheet of Hanson Industries as at December 31, Year 5, is as follows: Carrying amount

Fair value

Cash s receivable Inventory Property, plant, and equipment Accumulated depreciation

$

55,000 275,000 187,000 1,169,000 (300,000) $1,386,000

$ 55,000 280,500 178,200 1,017,500

Current liabilities Liability for warranties Common shares Retained earnings

$ 137,500 99,000 660,000 489,500 $1,386,000

137,500 129,800

Hanson Industries is to be wound up after the sale.

Required: (a) Assume that the shareholders of Hanson accept Drake’s offer on the proposed date. Prepare Drake’s January 1, Year 6, consolidated balance sheet after the proposed transaction occurred. (b) Assume that Drake is a private entity, uses ASPE, and chooses to use the equity method to for its investment in Hanson. Prepare Drake’s January 1, Year 6, balance sheet after the proposed transaction occurred. (c) Compare the balance sheets in parts (a) and (b). Which balance sheet shows the highest debt-to-equity ratio? Which balance sheet better reflects Drake’s solvency risk? Briefly explain.

Problem 3-6 LO4

D Ltd. and H Corporation are both engaged in the manufacture of computers. On July 1, Year 5, they agree to a merger, whereby D will issue 300,000 shares with current market value of $9 each for the net assets of H. Summarized balance sheets of the two companies prior to the merger are presented below: BALANCE SHEET June 30, Year 5 D Ltd. Carrying amount Current assets Non-current assets (net)

H Corporation Carrying amount

Fair value

$ 450,000 4,950,000

$ 500,000 3,200,000

$ 510,000 3,500,000

$5,400,000

$3,700,000 (continued)


150


142

CHAPTER 3


BALANCE SHEET June 30, Year 5 D Ltd. Carrying amount Current liabilities Long-term debt Common shares Retained earnings

H Corporation Carrying amount

$ 600,000 1,100,000 2,500,000

$ 800,000 900,000 500,000

1,200,000

1,500,000

$5,400,000

$3,700,000

Fair value 800,000 920,000

In determining the purchase price, the management of D Ltd. noted that H Corporation leases a manufacturing facility under an operating lease that has that are favourable relative to market . However, the lease agreement explicitly prohibits transfer of the lease (through either sale or sublease). An independent appraiser placed a value of $60,000 on this favourable lease agreement.

Required: Prepare the July 1, Year 5, balance sheet of D, after the merger.


The July 31, Year 3, balance sheets of two companies that are parties to a business combination are as follows: Red Corp.

Current assets Property, plant, and equipment (net) Patents


Sax Inc.

Carrying amount

Carrying amount

Fair value

$1,600,000 1,080,000 —

$ 420,000 840,000 —

$468,000 972,000 72,000

$2,680,000

$1,260,000

$1,360,000 480,000 720,000 120,000

$ 252,000 360,000 168,000 480,000

$2,680,000

$1,260,000

252,000 384,000

In addition to the property, plant, and equipment identified above, Red Corp. attributed a value of $100,000 to Sax’s assembled workforce. They have the knowledge and skill to operate Sax’s manufacturing facility and are critical to the success of the operation. Although the eight manufacturing employees are not under any employment contracts, management of Red was willing to pay $100,000 as part of the purchase price on the belief that most or all of these employees would continue to work for the company. Effective on August 1, Year 3, the shareholders of Sax accepted an offer from Red Corporation to purchase all of their common shares. Red’s costs for investigating and drawing up the share purchase agreement amounted to $18,000.

Required: (a) Assume that Red made a $960,000 cash payment to the shareholders of Sax for 100% of their shares.


151


CHAPTER 3


143

(i) Prepare the journal entry in the records of Red to record the share acquisition. (ii) Prepare the consolidated balance sheet of Red Corp. as at August 1, Year 3. Explain the rationale for the ing for the $100,000 value attributed to Sax’s assembled workforce. (b) Assume that Red issued 120,000 common shares, with market value of $8 per share to the shareholders of Sax for 100% of their shares. Legal fees associated with issuing these shares amounted to $6,000 and were paid in cash. Red is identified as the acquirer. (i) Prepare the journal entries in the records of Red to record the share acquisition and related fees. (ii) Prepare the consolidated balance sheet of Red as at August 1, Year 3. (c) Assume the same facts as part (b) expect that Red is a private company, uses ASPE, and chooses to use the cost method to for its investment in Sax. (i) Prepare the journal entries in the records of Red to record the share acquisition and related fees. (ii) Prepare the balance sheet of Red as at August 1, Year 3.

Problem 3-8 LO4

The following are summarized statements of financial position of three companies as at December 31, Year 3: Company X

Company Y

Company Z

Assets

$400,000

$300,000

$250,000

Ordinary shares (note 1) Retained earnings Liabilities

$ 75,000 92,500 232,500

$ 48,000 70,000 182,000

$ 60,000 35,000 155,000

$400,000

$300,000

$250,000

50,000

12,000

16,500

Note 1 Shares outstanding

The fair values of the identifiable assets and liabilities of the three companies as at December 31, Year 3, were as follows:

Assets Liabilities

Company X

Company Y

Company Z

$420,000 233,000

$350,000 180,000

$265,000 162,000

On January 2, Year 4, Company X will purchase the assets and assume the liabilities of Company Y and Company Z. It has been agreed that Company X will issue common shares to each of the two companies as payment for their net assets as follows: To Company Y—13,500 shares To Company Z—12,000 shares The shares of Company X traded at $15 on December 31, Year 3. Company X will incur the following costs associated with this acquisition: Costs of ing and issuing shares Other professional fees associated with the takeover

$12,000 30,000 $42,000

Company Y and Company Z will be wound up after the sale.


152


144

CHAPTER 3


Required: (a) Prepare a summarized pro forma statement of financial position of Company X as at January 2, Year 4, after the purchase of net assets from Company Y and Company Z. (b) Prepare the pro forma statements of financial position of Company Y and Company Z as at January 2, Year 4, after the sale of net assets to Company X and prior to being wound up.

Problem 3-9 LO4

Myers Company Ltd. was formed 10 years ago by the issuance of 22,000 common shares to three shareholders. Four years later, the company went public and issued an additional 30,000 common shares. The management of Myers is considering a takeover in which Myers would purchase all of the assets and assume all of the liabilities of Norris Inc. Two alternative proposals are being considered: PROPOSAL 1 Myers would offer to pay $400,000 cash for the Norris net assets, to be financed by a $400,000 bank loan due in five years. In addition, Myers would incur legal, appraisal, and finders’ fees for a total cost of $5,000. PROPOSAL 2 Myers would issue 50,000 shares currently trading at $8 each for the Norris net assets. Other costs associated with the takeover would be as follows: Legal, appraisal, and finders’ fees Costs of issuing shares

$ 5,000 7,000 $12,000

Norris shareholders would be offered five seats on the 10-member board of directors of Myers, and the management of Norris would be absorbed into the surviving company. Balance sheet data for the two companies prior to the combination are as follows: Myers

Norris

Carrying amount

Carrying amount

Fair value

Cash s receivable Inventory Land Buildings (net) Equipment (net)

$ 140,000 167,200 374,120 425,000 250,505 78,945

$ 52,500 61,450 110,110 75,000 21,020 17,705

$ 52,500 56,200 134,220 210,000 24,020 15,945

$1,435,770

$337,785

Current liabilities Non-current liabilities Common shares Retained earnings

$ 133,335 — 500,000 802,435

$ 41,115 150,000 100,000 46,670

$1,435,770

$337,785

41,115 155,000

Required: (a) Prepare the journal entries of Myers for each of the two proposals being considered.


CHAPTER 3


153

145

(b) Prepare the balance sheet of Myers after the takeover for each of the proposals being considered.

Problem 3-10 LO5

Refer to Problem 9. All of the facts and data are the same except that in the proposed takeover, Myers Company will purchase all of the outstanding common shares of Norris Inc.

Required: (a) Prepare the journal entries of Myers for each of the two proposals being considered. (b) Prepare the consolidated balance sheet of Myers after the takeover for each of the proposals being considered.

Problem 3-11

Baker Corporation has the following balances at December 31, Year 4:

LO5 Receivables Inventory Land Building (net) Liabilities Common shares Retained earnings, 1/1/Year 4 Revenues Expenses

$ 80,000 200,000 600,000 500,000 400,000 200,000 700,000 300,000 220,000

Several of Baker’s s have fair values that differ from carrying amount: land, $400,000; building, $600,000; inventory, $280,000; and liabilities, $330,000. Home Inc. purchases all of the outstanding shares of Baker by issuing 20,000 common shares with a market value of $56 per share. Stock issuance costs amount to $10,000.

Required: (a) What is the acquisition cost in this business combination? (b) What is the carrying amount of Baker’s net assets on the date of the takeover? (c) How does the issuance of these shares affect the shareholders’ equity s of Home, the parent? (d) How are the stock issuance costs handled? (e) What amounts are incorporated on the consolidated balance sheet for each of Baker’s assets (including goodwill, if any) and liabilities at the date of acquisition? (f) How do Baker’s revenues and expenses affect consolidated totals? Why? (g) How do Baker’s common shares affect consolidated totals? (h) If Home’s shares had been worth only $40 per share rather than $56, how would the consolidation of Baker’s assets and liabilities have been affected?

Problem 3-12 LO5

The financial statements for CAP Inc. and SAP Company for the year ended December 31, Year 5, follow: CAP Revenues Expenses Profit

$ 900,000 660,000 $ 240,000

SAP $ 300,000 200,000 $ 100,000


154


146

CHAPTER 3


CAP

SAP

Retained earnings, 1/1/Year 5 Profit Dividends paid Retained earnings, 12/31/Year 5

$ 800,000 240,000 90,000 $ 950,000

$ 200,000 100,000 0 $ 300,000

Equipment (net) Patented technology (net) Receivables and inventory Cash Total assets

$ 700,000 900,000 400,000 80,000 $2,080,000

$ 600,000 300,000 170,000 110,000 $1,180,000

Ordinary shares Retained earnings Liabilities Total equities and liabilities

$ 530,000 950,000 600,000 $2,080,000

$ 470,000 300,000 410,000 $1,180,000

On December 31, Year 5, after the above figures were prepared, CAP issued $300,000 in debt and 15,000 new shares to the owners of SAP to purchase all of the outstanding shares of that company. CAP shares had a fair value of $40 per share. CAP also paid $30,000 to a broker for arranging the transaction. In addition, CAP paid $40,000 in stock issuance costs. SAP’s equipment was actually worth $710,000 but its patented technology was valued at only $270,000.

Required: What are the balances for following s on the on the Year 5 consolidated financial statements? (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g)

Problem 3-13 LO1

Profit Retained earnings, 12/31/Year 5 Equipment Patented technology Goodwill Ordinary shares Liabilities

Z Ltd. is a public company with factories and distribution centres located throughout Canada. It has 100,000 common shares outstanding. In past years, it has reported high earnings, but in Year 5, its earnings declined substantially in part due to a loss of markets as a result of the North American Free Trade Agreement. In Year 6, it closed a large number of its manufacturing and distribution facilities and reported a substantial loss for the year. Prior to Year 6, 70,000 of Z Ltd.’s shares were held by C Ltd., with the remaining shares being widely distributed in the hands of individual investors in Canada and the United States. On January 1, Year 6, C Ltd. sold 40,000 of its shares in Z Ltd. to W Corporation.

Required: (a) How should C Ltd. report its investment in Z Ltd., both before the sale of 40,000 shares and after the sale? (b) How should W Corporation report its investment in Z Ltd.? Explain fully, and include in your answers a reference to Z Ltd.’s Year 6 loss.


155


CHAPTER 3

*Problem 3-14

147


The balance sheets of X Ltd. and Y Ltd. on December 30, Year 7, are as follows:

LO8 X Ltd. Book value

Y Ltd.

Fair value

Book value

Fair value

Current assets Non-current assets

$ 300 1,500 $1,800

$ 300 1,700

$1,000 2,700 $3,700

$1,000 2,800

Current liabilities Long-term debt Common shares—100 issued Common shares—60 issued Retained earnings

$ 400 300 400

400 300

$ 900 800

900 800

700 $1,800

600 1,400 $3,700

On December 31, Year 7, X issued 150 common shares for all 60 outstanding common shares of Y. The fair value of each of Y’s common shares was $40 on this date.

Required: (a) Explain why this share issue most likely occurred. (b) Prepare the consolidated balance sheet of X Ltd. on December 31, Year 7. (CICA adapted)

WEB-BASED PROBLEMS Web Problem 3-1 LO3, 6

Access the 2011 consolidated financial statements for Rogers Communications Inc. by going to the investor’s relations section of the company’s website. Answer the questions below. Round percentages to one decimal point and other ratios to two decimal points. For each question, indicate where in the financial statements you found the answer, and/or provide a brief explanation. (a) What method was used to for business combinations? (b) Describe the most significant business acquisition during the year. Was it a purchase of net assets or shares? (c) How much cash was paid for all business acquisitions during the year? (d) In the allocation of the acquisition cost for the most significant business acquisition, what amounts were allocated to (i) intangible assets and (ii) goodwill? (e) What percentage of total assets at the end of the year is represented by (i) intangible assets and (ii) goodwill? (f) Assume that the company had paid 10% more for its acquisitions of 100%-owned subsidiaries, and that the extra amount was paid in cash. How would this have affected the (i) current ratio and (ii) debt-to-equity ratio at the date of acquisition? (g) Assume that the market capitalization of the company’s shares (i.e., number of shares outstanding times market value per share) was double the carrying amount of shareholders’ equity on the date when the business acquisitions occurred, and that the company uses the new-entity method


156


148

CHAPTER 3


to for business combinations. How would this have affected the (i) debt-to-equity ratio at the date of acquisition and (ii) the return on equity for the first year after the date of acquisition?


Access the 2011 consolidated financial statements for ATCO Ltd. by going to the investor’s relations section of the company’s website. Answer the same questions as in Web Problem 1. For each question, indicate where in the financial statements you found the answer, and/or provide a brief explanation. (Some questions may not be applicable.)



157

4 chapter

Consolidation of Non–Wholly Owned Subsidiaries learning objectives After studying this chapter, you should be able to do the following for non–wholly owned subsidiaries at the date of acquisition: LO1 Explain the basic differences between the four theories of consolidation.

LO5 for contingent consideration based on its classification as a liability or equity.

LO2 Prepare a consolidated balance sheet using the entity theory.

LO6 Analyze and interpret financial statements involving consolidation of non–wholly owned subsidiaries.

LO3 Prepare a consolidated balance sheet using the parent company extension theory. LO4 Explain the concept of negative goodwill and describe how it should be treated when it arises in a business combination.

LO7 Identify some of the differences between IFRSs and ASPE involving consolidation of non–wholly owned subsidiaries. LO8 Prepare a consolidated balance sheet using the working paper approach.

INTRODUCTION Financial statements published and distributed to owners, creditors, and other interested parties appear to report the operations and financial position of a single company. In reality, these statements frequently represent a number of separate organizations tied together through common control as a result of a business combination. Whenever financial statements represent more than one corporation, we refer to them as consolidated financial statements. Consolidated financial statements are typical in today’s business world. Most major organizations, and many smaller ones, have control over an array of organizations. For example, between 2006 and 2009, Cisco Systems Inc. acquired or established more than 60 subsidiaries that now are consolidated in its financial reports. PepsiCo Inc., as another example, consolidates data from a multitude of companies into a single set of financial statements. By gaining control over these companies, which include, among others, Pepsi-Cola Company, Quaker Foods, and Frito-Lay, a single reporting entity is formed by PepsiCo. The consolidation of financial information as exemplified by Cisco Systems and PepsiCo is one of the most complex procedures in all of ing. To comprehend this process completely, the theoretical logic that underlies the

Consolidated financial statements report the combined results of the parent and all its subsidiaries.

149


158


150

CHAPTER 4

Consolidation of Non–Wholly Owned Subsidiaries

creation of a business combination must be understood. Furthermore, a variety of procedural steps must be mastered to ensure that proper ing is achieved for this single reporting entity. In Chapter 3, we introduced the preparation of a consolidated balance sheet at the date of acquisition using the acquisition method. Summarized financial statements were used to focus on the basic concepts involved. In this chapter, we elaborate on these concepts and use more detailed financial statements. We will now focus on the consolidation of non– wholly owned subsidiaries.

NON–WHOLLY OWNED SUBSIDIARIES

These balance sheets present the financial position just prior to the business combination.

The part of the subsidiary not owned by the parent is called non-controlling interest (NCI).

In the illustrations in Chapter 3, the parent acquired 100% of the subsidiary. The subsidiary’s assets and liabilities were brought onto the consolidated balance at fair value.1 We will now consider situations where the parent acquires less than 100% of the shares. The following example will form the basis of many of the illustrations that will be used in this chapter. We will call the two companies to be consolidated P Ltd. and S Ltd. Both companies have a June 30 fiscal year-end. The balance sheets of the two companies on June 29, Year 1, are shown in Exhibit 4.1. On June 30, Year 1, P Ltd. obtains control over S Ltd. by paying cash to the shareholders of S Ltd. for a portion of that company’s outstanding common shares. No additional transactions take place on this date. Immediately after the share acquisition, P Ltd. prepares a consolidated balance sheet. The shares not acquired by the parent are owned by other shareholders, who are referred to as the non-controlling shareholders. The value of the shares attributed to the non-controlling shareholders, when presented on the consolidated

EXHIBIT 4.1 BALANCE SHEET At June 29, Year 1 P Ltd.

S Ltd.

Carrying amount

Carrying amount

Fair value

Cash s receivable Inventory Plant Patent Total Assets

$100,000 90,000 130,000 280,000 — $600,000

$ 12,000 7,000 20,000 50,000 11,000 $100,000

$ 12,000 7,000 22,000 59,000 10,000 $110,000

Current liabilities Long-term debt Total liabilities Common shares Retained earnings Total Liabilities and Shareholders’ Equity

$ 60,000 180,000 240,000 200,000 160,000 $600,000

$

$

8,000 22,000 30,000 40,000 30,000 $100,000

8,000 25,000 $ 33,000


159


CHAPTER 4


financial statements, is referred to as non-controlling interests, abbreviated as NCI. The non-controlling interests represent an additional set of owners who have legal claim to the subsidiary’s net assets. Three questions arise when preparing consolidated financial statements for less-than-100%-owned subsidiaries: 1. How should the portion of the subsidiary’s assets and liabilities that was not acquired by the parent be measured on the consolidated financial statements?

151

There are many ways of measuring and presenting NCI on the consolidated financial statements.

2. How should NCI be measured on the consolidated financial statements? 3. How should NCI be presented on the consolidated financial statements? The following theories have developed over time and have been proposed as solutions to preparing consolidated financial statements for non–wholly owned subsidiaries: • Proprietary theory • Parent company theory • Parent company extension theory • Entity theory The entity theory is sometimes referred to as the fair value of subsidiary method. The parent company extension theory is sometimes referred to as the net identifiable assets method. In this text, we will refer to the different theories by the names introduced in the previous paragraph. Each of the theories has been or is currently required by generally accepted ing principles (GAAP). The following table indicates the current status and effective usage dates for these four theories: Method

Status

Proprietary theory

Present GAAP for consolidating certain types of t arrangements; was an option under GAAP prior to 2013 when consolidating t ventures.

Parent company theory

Was GAAP for consolidating subsidiaries prior to January 1, 2011.

Parent company extension theory

An acceptable method for consolidating subsidiaries after January 1, 2011.

Entity theory

An acceptable method for consolidating subsidiaries after January 1, 2011.

All four theories have been or now are required under Canadian GAAP under specified situations.

The merits of these four theories are discussed in the following section.

INTRODUCTION TO CONSOLIDATION THEORIES These four theories differ in the valuation of the NCI and in how much of the subsidiary’s value pertaining to the NCI is brought onto the consolidated financial statements. The following chart highlights the differences between the four theories. The left side for each theory shows the portion of the subsidiary owned by the parent while the right side shows the portion owned by the NCI. The shaded area represents the values brought onto the consolidated financial statements.

LO1


160


152

CHAPTER 4


Proprietary

The parent’s portion of the subsidiary’s value is fully represented under all theories. The NCI’s share varies under the four theories.

Parent

NCI

Parent Company Parent

NCI

Parent Company Extension Parent

NCI

Entity Parent

NCI

Carrying amount of Subsidiary’s net assets Fair value excess Goodwill

We will illustrate the preparation of consolidated financial statements under these four theories using the following example. Assume that on June 30, Year 1, S Ltd. had 10,000 shares outstanding and P Ltd. purchases 8,000 shares (80%) of S Ltd. for a total cost of $72,000. P Ltd.’s journal entry to record this purchase is as follows: Investment in S Ltd. Cash

72,000 72,000

The balance sheets of P Ltd. and S Ltd. just prior to this purchase on June 30, Year 1, were shown in Exhibit 4.1.

Proprietary Theory Proprietary theory focuses solely on the parent’s percentage interest in the subsidiary.

Only the parent’s share of the fair values of the subsidiary is brought onto the consolidated balance sheet.

Proprietary theory views the consolidated entity from the standpoint of the shareholders of the parent company. The consolidated statements do not acknowledge or show the equity of the non-controlling shareholders. The consolidated balance sheet on the date of acquisition reflects only the parent’s share of the assets and liabilities of the subsidiary, based on their fair values, and the resultant goodwill from the combination. The calculation and allocation of the acquisition differential is a useful first step in the preparation of the consolidated balance sheet. The information provided in this calculation forms the basis of the elimination and adjusting entries required. This calculation is shown in Exhibit 4.2. Goodwill is determined as part of this calculation. Using the direct approach, the consolidated balance sheet is prepared by combining, on an item-by-item basis, the carrying amounts of the parent with the parent’s share of the fair values of the subsidiary, which is derived by using the parent’s share of the carrying amount of the subsidiary plus the acquisition differential. This consolidation process is shown in Exhibit 4.3. The consolidation process becomes increasingly more complex as we proceed from one chapter to the next. To make it easier to follow the consolidation adjustments, a referencing system will be adopted for Exhibit 4.3 and subsequent illustrations in the book. The references will be placed either after the name or before the dollar figure to which they relate. The references will look


161


CHAPTER 4


153

EXHIBIT 4.2 CALCULATION OF ACQUISITION DIFFERENTIAL (proprietary theory) Cost of 80% investment in S Ltd. Carrying amount of S Ltd.’s net assets Assets Liabilities

P Ltd.’s ownership Acquisition differential Allocated: Inventory Plant Patent

100,000 (30,000) 70,000 80%

(FV 2 CA) 3 80% 1 2,000 3 80% 1 9,000 3 80% 2 1,000 3 80%

Long-term debt Balance—goodwill

The acquisition differential consists of 80% of the fair value excess plus the parent’s share of the goodwill.

$72,000

1 3,000 3 80%

5 1   1,600 5 1 7,200 5 2      800 8,000 5 1 2,400

56,000 16,000 (a) (b) (c) 5,600 $10,400

(d) (e)

something like this, (1b), which means that we are referring to item “b” in Exhibit 1 for this chapter. Proprietary theory is not used in practice to consolidate a parent and its subsidiaries. However, it is used to report certain types of t arrangements. This consolidation process is described as “proportionate consolidation” and will be illustrated in Chapter 9.

EXHIBIT 4.3 Illustration of the Direct Approach (Proprietary Theory) P LTD. CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET At June 30, Year 1 Cash (100,000 2 72,000* 1 80% 3 12,000) s receivable (90,000 1 80% 3 7,000) Inventory (130,000 1 80% 3 20,000 1 [2a] 1,600) Plant (280,000 1 80% 3 50,000 1 [2b] 7,200) Patent (0 1 80% 3 11,000 2 [2c] 800) Goodwill (0 1 0 1 [2e] 10,400)

$ 37,600 95,600 147,600 327,200 8,000 10,400 $626,400

Current liabilities (60,000 1 80% 3 8,000) Long-term debt (180,000 1 80% 3 22,000 1 [2d] 2,400) Total liabilities Shareholders’ equity Common shares Retained earnings

$ 66,400 200,000 266,400

* Cash paid by P Ltd. to acquire S Ltd.

200,000 160,000

The consolidated amounts include 100% of the parent’s carrying amount plus the parent’s share of the fair value of the subsidiary’s net assets.

NCI is not recognized under the proprietary theory. 360,000 $626,400


162


154

CHAPTER 4


Parent Company Theory Parent company theory focuses on the parent company but gives some recognition to NCI.

Parent company theory is similar to proprietary theory in that the focus of the consolidated statements is directed toward the shareholders of the parent company. However, NCI is recognized and reflected as a liability in the consolidated balance sheet; its amount is based on the carrying amounts of the net assets of the subsidiary. NCI is calculated as follows: Carrying amount of S Ltd.’s net assets Assets Liabilities

$100,000 (30,000) 70,000 20% $ 14,000

Non-controlling ownership percentage Non-controlling interest

The NCI’s share of the subsidiary’s net assets is measured at their carrying amount.

The consolidated balance sheet is prepared by combining, on an item-by-item basis, the carrying amount of the parent with 100% of the carrying amount of the subsidiary plus the parent’s share of the acquisition differential. Under this theory, the parent’s share of the subsidiary is measured at fair value, whereas the NCI’s share is based on the subsidiary’s carrying amount on the consolidated balance sheet. This process is consistent with the historical cost principle, because the parent’s portion of the subsidiary’s net asset is being acquired by the parent at the date of acquisition. Since the NCI’s share of the subsidiary’s net assets is not being purchased and is not changing hands, this portion is retained at carrying amount. Exhibit 4.4 shows the preparation of

EXHIBIT 4.4 Illustration of the Direct Approach (Parent Company Theory) P LTD. CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET At June 30, Year 1 100% of the subsidiary’s carrying amounts plus the parent’s share of the fair value excess are brought onto the consolidated balance sheet.

NCI is presented as a liability.

Cash (100,000 2 72,000* 1 12,000) s receivable (90,000 1 7,000) Inventory (130,000 1 20,000 1 [2a] 1,600) Plant (280,000 1 50,000 1 [2b] 7,200) Patent (0 1 11,000 2 [2c] 800) Goodwill (0 1 0 1 [2e] 10,400)

$ 40,000 97,000 151,600 337,200 10,200 10,400 $646,400

Current liabilities (60,000 1 8,000) Long-term debt (180,000 1 22,000 1 [2d] 2,400) Non-controlling interest Total liabilities Shareholders’ equity Common shares Retained earnings

$ 68,000 204,400 14,000 286,400


200,000 160,000

360,000 $646,400


163


CHAPTER 4


155

the consolidated balance sheet under parent company theory. This theory was required by GAAP prior to January 1, 2011.

Entity Theory Entity theory views the consolidated entity as having two distinct groups of shareholders—the controlling shareholders and the non-controlling shareholders. NCI is presented as a separate component of shareholders’ equity on the consolidated balance sheet. In acquiring a controlling interest, a parent company becomes responsible for managing all the subsidiary’s assets and liabilities, even though it may own only a partial interest. If a parent can control the business activities of its subsidiary, it directly follows that the parent is able to its investors and creditors for all of the subsidiary’s assets, liabilities, and profits. To provide the s with a complete picture about the performance of the entity and the resources under its control, the consolidated statements should include 100% of the subsidiary’s assets and liabilities. Furthermore, these assets and liabilities should be measured at full fair value at the date of acquisition, to enable s to better assess the cash-generating abilities of the identifiable net assets acquired in the business combination and the ability of management for the resources entrusted to it. The full fair value of the subsidiary is typically determined by combining the fair value of the controlling interest and the fair value of the NCI. Measurement of the controlling interest’s fair value is straightforward in the vast majority of cases. The consideration paid by the parent typically provides the best evidence of fair value of the acquirer’s interest. However, there is no parallel consideration transferred by the NCI to value the NCI. Therefore, the parent must employ other valuation techniques to estimate the fair value of the non-controlling interest at the acquisition date. Usually, a parent can rely on readily available market trading activity to provide a fair valuation for its subsidiary’s non-controlling interest. Market trading prices for the non-controlling interest’s shares in the weeks before and after the acquisition provide an objective measure of their fair value. The fair value of these shares then becomes the initial basis for reporting the non-controlling interest in consolidated financial statements. Acquirers frequently must pay a price per share to garner sufficient shares to ensure a controlling interest. A control , however, typically is needed only to acquire sufficient shares to obtain a controlling interest. The remaining (non-controlling interest) shares provide no added benefit of transferring control to the new owner, and, therefore, may sell at a price less than that paid by the parent to obtain shares that provided control. Such control s are properly included in the fair value of the controlling interest but usually do not affect the fair values of the remaining subsidiary shares. Therefore, separate independent valuations for the controlling and noncontrolling interests are typically best for measuring the total fair value of the subsidiary. In the absence of fair value evidence based on market trades, firms must turn to less objective measures for determining the fair value of the non-controlling interest. For example, comparable investments may be available to estimate fair value. Alternatively, valuation models based on subsidiary discounted cash flows

LO2 Entity theory gives equal attention to the controlling and non-controlling shareholders.

The trading price of the subsidiary’s shares or shares of a comparable company in an active market is probably the most accurate reflection of the value of the NCI. An investor typically pays a over the trading price of a company’s shares when acquiring sufficient shares to obtain control of the company.

Discounted cash flow analysis could be used to estimate the fair value of the subsidiary.


164


156

CHAPTER 4


or residual income projections can be employed to estimate the acquisition-date fair value of the non-controlling interest. Finally, if a control is unlikely, the consideration paid by the parent can be used to imply a fair value for the entire subsidiary. The non-controlling interest’s fair value is then simply measured as its percentage of this implied subsidiary fair value. The following illustrations explain how NCI is measured under different scenarios.

Illustration 1 Fair Value of Non-controlling Interest as Evidenced by Market Trades In the majority of cases, direct evidence based on market activity in the outstanding subsidiary shares (not owned by the parent) will provide the best measure of acquisition-date fair value for the non-controlling interest. For example, assume that P Ltd. wished to acquire 8,000 of S Ltd.’s shares in order to obtain substantial synergies from the proposed acquisition. P Ltd. estimated that a 100% acquisition was not needed to extract these synergies. Also, P Ltd. projected that financing more than an 80% acquisition would be too costly. P Ltd. then offered all of S Ltd.’s shareholders a price for up to 80% of the outstanding shares. To induce a sufficient number of shareholders to sell, P Ltd. needed to offer $9 per share, even though the shares had been trading in the $7.65 to $7.85 range. During the weeks following the acquisition, the 20% non-controlling interest shares in S Ltd. continued to trade in the $7.65 to $7.85 range. In this case, the $9 per share paid by P Ltd. does not appear representative of the fair value of all the shares of S Ltd. The fact that the non-controlling interest shares continued to trade around $7.75 per share indicates a fair value for the 2,000 shares not owned by P Ltd of $15,500 (7.75 3 2,000 shares). Therefore, the valuation of the non-controlling interest is best evidenced by the trading price of S Ltd.’s shares, not the price paid by P Ltd. The $9 share price paid by P Ltd. nonetheless represents a negotiated value for the 8,000 shares. In the absence of any evidence to the contrary, P Ltd.’s shares have a fair value of $72,000 incorporating the additional value P Ltd. expects to extract from synergies with S Ltd. Thus, the fair value of S Ltd. as a whole is measured as the sum of the respective fair values of the controlling and non-controlling interests as follows: Fair value of controlling interest ($9 3 8,000 shares) Fair value of non-controlling interest ($7.75 3 2,000 shares) Total acquisition-date fair value of S Ltd.

$72,000 15,500 $87,500

At the acquisition date, P Ltd. assessed the total fair value of S Ltd.’s identifiable net assets at $77,000, as indicated in Exhibit 4.1. Therefore, we compute goodwill as the excess of the total fair value of the firm over the fair values of the identifiable net assets as follows: Total acquisition-date fair value of S Ltd. Fair value of identifiable net assets acquired Goodwill

$87,500 77,000 $10,500

To provide a basis for potential future allocations of goodwill impairment charges, acquisition-date goodwill should be apportioned across the controlling


165


CHAPTER 4


157

and non-controlling interests. The parent first allocates goodwill to its controlling interest for the excess of the fair value of the parent’s equity interest over its share of the fair value of the identifiable net assets. Any remaining goodwill is then attributed to the non-controlling interest. As a result, goodwill allocated to the controlling and non-controlling interests will not always be proportional to the percentages owned. Continuing with our example, the acquisition goodwill is allocated as follows:

Fair value at acquisition date Relative fair value of identifiable net assets acquired (80% and 20%) Goodwill

Controlling Interest

NCI

Total

$72,000

$15,500

$87,500

61,600 $10,400

$

15,400 100

77,000 $10,500

Illustration 2 Fair Value of Non-controlling Interest Implied by Parent’s Consideration Transferred In some cases, the price paid by the parent on a per share basis may reflect what would have been paid on a per share basis for 100% of the subsidiary’s shares. This is true in the following situations: 1. The parent acquired a large percentage of the acquiree’s voting stock. 2. The parent’s offer to buy shares was based on the value of the subsidiary as a whole.

The goodwill component as a percentage of total value is much higher for the controlling interest as compared with the noncontrolling interest when a parent pays a to obtain control.

Sometimes, it is appropriate to measure NCI using the price per share paid by the parent to obtain control.

3. The trading price of the acquiree’s share just before and just after the business combination was similar to the price paid by the parent. 4. The non-controlling shareholders could use their minority shareholder rights to demand the same price per share that was paid to the other shareholders. Therefore, if there was no compelling evidence that the $9 acquisition price was not representative of all of S Ltd.’s 10,000 shares, then it appears reasonable to estimate the fair value of the 20% non-controlling interest using the price paid by P Ltd. The total fair value of S Ltd. is then estimated at $90,000 and allocated as follows: Fair value of controlling interest ($9 3 8,000 shares) Fair value of non-controlling interest ($9 3 2,000 shares) Total acquisition-date fair value of S Ltd.

$72,000 18,000 $90,000

Alternatively, the total fair value can be calculated using basic math by simply dividing the amount paid of $72,000 by the percentage ownership, 80% or 0.8, to get $90,000. Goodwill for the subsidiary as a whole would be valued at $13,000, as indicated in Exhibit 4.5. A third approach for valuing the NCI is to perform an independent business valuation. This involves many assessments and assumptions relating to future cash flows, inflation rates, growth rates, discount rates, synergies between the parent and subsidiary, valuation of identifiable assets and liabilities, etc. Not only is a business valuation a very costly exercise, it also involves a lot of judgment. In some cases, the cost of determining the implied value of the subsidiary as a whole

The implied value assumes that the parent’s purchase price can be extrapolated linearly to determine the total value of the subsidiary.

NCI could be valued using business valuation techniques, but this is a costly exercise.


166


158

CHAPTER 4


EXHIBIT 4.5 CALCULATION OF ACQUISITION DIFFERENTIAL (Entity Theory) Cost of 80% investment in S Ltd.

$72,000

Implied value of 100% investment in S Ltd. (72,000 4 80%) Carrying amount of S Ltd.’s net assets Assets Liabilities

The acquisition differential consists of 100% of the fair value excess plus the implied value of total goodwill.

In this text, we will assume a linear relationship to calculate the value of NCI except when we are given the market price of the subsidiary’s shares. Cautionary Note: Unless otherwise noted, all of the illustrations throughout this text and in the end-ofchapter material will use the entity theory. It is one of the acceptable methods in IFRS 10. It was the only method proposed in the exposure draft leading up to IFRS 3 and is the only method allowed by the FASB. It will likely be used when the total value of goodwill of the subsidiary can be reasonably measured at the date of acquisition.

$100,000 (30,000)

70,000 20,000

Implied acquisition differential Allocated: Inventory Plant Patent

(FV 2 CA) 3 100% 1 2,000 3 100% 5 1 2,000 1 9,000 3 100% 5 1 9,000 2 1,000 3 100% 5 2 1,000 10,000 1 3,000 3 100% 5 1 3,000

Long-term debt Balance—goodwill NCI can be easily measured, if we assume a linear relationship between percentage ownership and value of that ownership.

$90,000

(a) (b) (c) 7,000 $13,000

(d) (e)

CALCULATION OF NCI Implied value of 100% investment in S Ltd. NCI ownership

$90,000 20% $18,000

(f)

may not be worth the benefit of the information provided. If so, the reporting entity may be reluctant to use the entity theory. We should note that the value assigned to the subsidiary as a whole will have a big impact on the value allocated to goodwill. The fair values of the identifiable assets and liabilities are usually readily available because these items (or similar items) are bought and sold quite often in the marketplace. However, goodwill is not traded in the marketplace by itself. Therefore, determining a value for goodwill is quite subjective and is directly tied to the overall value of the firm and the price paid by the parent. Throughout this text, when the market price of the subsidiary’s shares at the date of acquisition is not given, the implied value of the subsidiary as a whole will be calculated by dividing the price paid for the shares purchased by the percentage acquired. We recognize that this is an oversimplification; however, the material in this text is complex enough as is, and by keeping it simple in some cases, we may be able to see the forest rather than the multitude of trees. When the market price of the subsidiary’s shares at the date of acquisition is given, we will use this price to value the NCI and then calculate the goodwill attributable to each of the controlling and non-controlling interests. Using the direct approach and the implied value of $90,000, the consolidated balance sheet is prepared by combining, on an item-by-item basis, the carrying amounts of P Ltd. with the fair values of S Ltd. The calculated goodwill is


CHAPTER 4


167

159

EXHIBIT 4.6 Illustration of the Direct Approach (Entity Theory) P LTD. CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET At June 30, Year 1 Cash (100,000 2 72,000* 1 12,000) s receivable (90,000 1 7,000) Inventory (130,000 1 20,000 1 [5a] 2,000) Plant (280,000 1 50,000 1 [5b] 9,000) Patent (0 1 11,000 2 [5c] 1,000) Goodwill (0 1 0 1 [5e] 13,000)

$ 40,000 97,000 152,000 339,000 10,000 13,000 $651,000

Current liabilities (60,000 1 8,000) Long-term debt (180,000 1 22,000 1 [5d] 3,000) Total liabilities Shareholders’ equity Controlling interest Common shares Retained earnings

$ 68,000 205,000 273,000

Non-controlling interest [5f]

200,000 160,000 360,000 18,000

100% of the subsidiary’s fair values are brought on to the consolidated balance sheet.

NCI is presented as a separate component in shareholders’ equity.

378,000 $651,000


inserted as an asset, and the calculated NCI is shown in shareholders’ equity. Exhibit 4.6 above illustrates the preparation of the consolidated balance sheet using the direct approach. The working paper used to prepare the consolidated balance sheet under the entity theory is shown in Exhibit A4.1 in Appendix 4A.

Parent Company Extension Theory Parent company extension theory was invented to address the concerns about goodwill valuation under entity theory. Given that many people feel that goodwill for the subsidiary, as a whole, is very difficult to measure when the parent does not purchase 100% of the subsidiary, they did not the use of entity theory. However, there is much for valuing the subsidiary’s identifiable assets and liabilities at their full fair value on the consolidated statements at the time of acquisition. Parent company extension theory does just that—it values both the parent’s share and the NCI’s share of identifiable net assets at fair value. Only the parent’s share of the subsidiary’s goodwill is brought onto the consolidated statements at the value paid by the parent. Since the total value of the subsidiary’s goodwill is not reasonably measurable, the NCI’s portion of the subsidiary’s goodwill is not measured and not brought onto the consolidated statements. Under parent company extension theory, NCI is recognized in shareholders’ equity in the consolidated balance sheet, similar to entity theory. Its amount is

LO3 All of the subsidiary’s value except for the NCI’s share of goodwill is brought onto the consolidated balance sheet.

NCI is based on the fair value of identifiable assets and liabilities.


168


160

CHAPTER 4


based on the fair values of the identifiable net assets of the subsidiary; it excludes any value pertaining to the subsidiary’s goodwill. NCI is calculated as follows: Carrying amount of S Ltd.’s net assets Assets Liabilities

$100,000 (30,000) 70,000

Excess of fair value over carrying amount for identifiable net assets (see Exhibit 4.5) Fair value of identifiable net assets Non-controlling ownership percentage Non-controlling interest

Either entity theory or parent company extension theory can be used under IFRSs.

7,000 77,000 20% $ 15,400

The consolidated balance sheet is prepared by combining, on an item-by-item basis, the carrying amount of the parent with the fair value of the subsidiary’s identifiable net assets plus the parent’s share of the subsidiary’s goodwill. Exhibit 4.7 shows the preparation of the consolidated balance sheet under parent company extension theory. Either entity theory or parent company extension theory can be used under IFRSs. It is an ing policy choice. However, IFRS 3 does not use the term parent company extension theory. It simply states the following in paragraph 19: For each business combination, the acquirer shall measure any non-controlling interest in the acquiree either at fair value or at the non-controlling interest’s proportionate share of the acquiree’s identifiable net assets.

EXHIBIT 4.7 Illustration of the Direct Approach (Parent Company Extension Theory) P LTD. CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET At June 30, Year 1 100% of the subsidiary’s fair values of identifiable assets and liabilities plus the parent’s share of the subsidiary’s goodwill are brought onto the consolidated balance sheet.

NCI is presented in shareholders’ equity.

Cash (100,000 2 72,000* 1 12,000) s receivable (90,000 1 7,000) Inventory (130,000 1 20,000 1 [5a] 2,000) Plant (280,000 1 50,000 1 [5b] 9,000) Patent (0 1 11,000 2 [5c] 1,000) Goodwill (0 1 0 1 [2e] 10,400)

$40,000 97,000 152,000 339,000 10,000 10,400 $648,400

Current liabilities (60,000 1 8,000) Long-term debt (180,000 1 22,000 1 [5d] 3,000) Total liabilities Shareholders’ equity Common shares Retained earnings Non-controlling interest

$ 68,000 205,000 273,000


$200,000 160,000 15,400

375,400 $648,400


CHAPTER 4


See Self-Study Problem 1 for another example of preparing and comparing the consolidated balance sheet under these four theories. It shows that the values are quite different, and, in turn, the current ratio and debt-to-equity ratios are different. Also, see Self-Study Problem 2 for an illustration of the entity and parent company extension theories in a more complex situation. The problem also compares the consolidated balance sheet for a non–wholly owned subsidiary with the same data for a wholly owned subsidiary. There are a lot of similarities and only a few differences.

Bargain Purchases

169

161

Cautionary Note: Unless otherwise noted, assume, in this text, that the parent has chosen to use entity theory.

LO4

In all of the business combinations in Chapter 3 and to this point in Chapter 4, the total consideration given by the controlling and non-controlling shareholders always exceeded the fair value of the identifiable net assets. Accordingly, goodwill appeared under a direct purchase of net assets on the balance sheet of the acquirer, or on the consolidated balance sheet when the parent acquired shares of the subsidiary. We will now consider situations where the total consideration given is less than the fair value of the subsidiary’s identifiable net assets. Assume that on January, Year 1, P Ltd. purchased 100% of the outstanding shares of S Ltd. at a total cost of $72,000. The calculation and allocation of the acquisition differential on this date is shown in Exhibit 4.8. A business combination that results in negative goodwill is often described as a “bargain purchase.” This means that the parent gained control over the subsidiary’s assets and liabilities at a price that was less than the fair values assigned to the identifiable assets and liabilities. This can occur when the subsidiary is an awkward situation and the shares are sold under conditions of a distressed sale. Or it could be that the fair value of the identifiable assets is overstated and/or the fair value of the liabilities is understated. Therefore, prior to recognizing a gain on bargain purchase, IFRS 3 requires that all components of the negative goodwill

Since negative goodwill is very rare, the parent should check the valuations of the identifiable net assets before recording a gain on bargain purchase.

EXHIBIT 4.8 CALCULATION AND ALLOCATION OF ACQUISITION DIFFERENTIAL (Negative Goodwill, Wholly Owned Subsidiary) Cost of investment in S Ltd. Carrying amount of S Ltd.’s net assets Assets Liabilities Acquisition differential Allocated: Inventory Plant Patent Long-term debt Balance—“negative goodwill” (gain on bargain purchase)

$ 72,000 100,000 (30,000) (FV 2 CA) 1 2,000 1 9,000 2 1,000 10,000 1 3,000

70,000 2,000

7,000 $25,000

Negative goodwill arises when the total consideration given is less than the fair value of identifiable net assets.

The negative goodwill is recognized as a gain on bargain purchase.


170


162

CHAPTER 4


calculation be reassessed to ensure that they are correct. After reassessment, the gain can be recognized if it is determined that no errors were made in the various valuations involved with the calculation. To record a gain on a purchase of any asset may seem very strange. It goes against the long-standing tradition of recording assets at cost and recording gains only when realized. However, under the acquisition method, the subsidiary’s identifiable net assets are reported at fair value. If the acquirer pays less than the fair value of the identifiable net assets, it has realized a gain on a purchase. It does not have to wait to sell the assets to recognize the gain. Since, for this example, there is no goodwill on the subsidiary’s books, none of the negative goodwill can be used to reduce goodwill to zero. Therefore, the entire $5,000 of negative goodwill is recorded as a gain on the consolidated income statement and ends up in consolidated retained earnings at the date of acquisition. If the parent company uses the equity method to for its investment in the subsidiary, the following entry should be made in the parent’s separate-entity records to record the $5,000 gain resulting from the bargain purchase: Investment in S Ltd. Gain on purchase of S Ltd.

The parent company extension theory must be used in situations involving negative goodwill for a non–wholly owned subsidiary.

A negative acquisition differential is not the same as negative goodwill.

5,000 5,000

This entry will result in the investment being valued at the parent’s share of the fair value of identifiable net assets of the subsidiary. Let us now modify the situation by reducing the percentage of shares acquired in the business combination and changing the purchase price. Assume that on January, Year 1, P Ltd. purchased 80% of the outstanding shares of S Ltd. at a total cost of $60,000. If we used the implied value approach, the value of the subsidiary as a whole would be set at $75,000 (60,000/0.8). This is less than the fair value of identifiable net assets of $77,000 and would imply negative goodwill of $2,000. Normally, the $2,000 gain would be split between the parent and non-controlling interests. However, IFRS 3 states that a gain on a bargain purchase can only be recognized by the acquirer. This implies that only the parent’s share of the negative goodwill can be recognized. It also implies that non-controlling interest must be measured at its share of the fair value of the identifiable net assets. In effect, the parent company extension method must be used for valuing the NCI. The calculation and allocation of the acquisition differential on this date is shown in Exhibit 4.9. Exhibit 4.10 illustrates the preparation of the consolidated balance sheet using the direct approach. The working paper to prepare the consolidated balance sheet is shown in Exhibit A4.2 in Appendix 4A.

Negative Acquisition Differential It is possible for an acquisition differential to be negative. In this situation, the total consideration given would be less than the carrying amount of the subsidiary’s net assets. A negative acquisition differential is not the same as negative goodwill, nor does it necessarily imply that there will be negative goodwill. If the fair values of the subsidiary’s net assets are less than their carrying amounts, and if the total consideration given is greater than the fair value of the subsidiary’s identifiable net assets, there will be positive goodwill.


171


CHAPTER 4


163

EXHIBIT 4.9 CALCULATION AND ALLOCATION OF ACQUISITION DIFFERENTIAL (Negative Goodwill, Non–Wholly Owned Subsidiary) Parent 80% Cost of 80% investment in S Ltd. Value of NCI (20% 3 77,000) Total value of subsidiary Carrying amount of S Ltd.’s net assets Assets Liabilities

Acquisition differential Allocated: Inventory Plant Patent Long-term debt

NCI 20%

Total 100%

$15,400

$60,000 15,400 75,400

56,000 4,000

14,000 1,400

70,000 5,400

5,600 $ 1,600

1,400 0

7,000 $ 1,600

$60,000

$100,000 (30,000) $ 70,000

(FV 2 CA) 1$2,000 1 9,000 2 1,000 10,000 1 3,000 $ 7,000

Balance—“negative goodwill” (gain on bargain purchase)

Only the parent can recognize a gain on bargain purchase.

EXHIBIT 4.10 Illustration of the Direct Approach (Negative Goodwill, Non–Wholly Owned Subsidiary) P LTD. CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET At June 30, Year 1 Cash (100,000 2 60,000* 1 12,000) s receivable (90,000 1 7,000) Inventory (130,000 1 20,000 1 [5a] 2,000) Plant (280,000 1 50,000 1 [5b] 9,000) Patent (0 1 11,000 2 [5c] 1,000)

$ 52,000 97,000 152,000 339,000 10,000 $650,000

Current liabilities (60,000 1 8,000) Long-term debt (180,000 1 22,000 1 [5d] 3,000) Total liabilities Shareholders’ equity Common shares Retained earnings (160,000 1 [9a] 1,600) Non-controlling interest

$ 68,000 205,000 273,000


$200,000 161,600 15,400

377,000 $650,000

The negative goodwill is not recognized as a separate item on the balance sheet.

The gain on bargain purchase ends up in consolidated retained earnings.


172


164

CHAPTER 4

The subsidiary’s goodwill arose in a previous business combination.


Subsidiary with Goodwill The goodwill appearing on the balance sheet of a subsidiary on the date of a business combination is not carried forward when the consolidated balance sheet is prepared. At some date in the past, the subsidiary was the acquirer in a business combination and recorded the goodwill as the difference between the acquisition cost and the fair value of the identifiable net assets acquired. Now this company has itself become an acquiree. From the perspective of its new parent, the goodwill is not considered to be an identifiable asset at the time of the business combination. The acquisition differential is calculated as if the goodwill had been written off by the subsidiary, even though in fact this is not the case. The acquisition differential is allocated first to the fair value excess for identifiable net assets, and then the remaining balance goes to goodwill. In effect, the old goodwill is ignored and the acquisition cost determines the value, if any, of new goodwill at the date of acquisition. The following illustration will examine the consolidation process when the subsidiary has existing goodwill. Assume that on June 30, Year 1, P Ltd. purchased 80% of the outstanding shares of S Ltd. for a total cost of $62,000, paid in cash. Exhibit 4.11 shows the balance sheets of the two companies at this time. Note that the goodwill (highlighted in boldface) of $11,000 was called a patent in Exhibit 4.1. Note also that the acquisition cost is the same as in the last example, where the result turned out to be negative goodwill. When we calculate and allocate the acquisition differential in this illustration, the result is positive goodwill of $10,500, as shown in Exhibit 4.12. The preparation of the June 30, Year 1, consolidated balance sheet using the direct approach is presented in Exhibit 4.13, and the working paper approach is presented in Exhibit A4.3 in Appendix 4A.

EXHIBIT 4.11 BALANCE SHEET At June 29, Year 1 P Ltd.

The goodwill on the subsidiary’s books (it is old goodwill) will be remeasured on the date of acquisition.

S Ltd.

Carrying amount

Carrying amount

Fair value

Cash s receivable Inventory Plant Goodwill

$100,000 90,000 130,000 280,000 — $600,000

$ 12,000 7,000 20,000 50,000 11,000 $100,000

$12,000 7,000 22,000 59,000


$ 60,000 180,000 200,000 160,000 $600,000

$ 8,000 22,000 40,000 30,000 $100,000

8,000 25,000


173


CHAPTER 4


165

EXHIBIT 4.12 CALCULATION AND ALLOCATION OF ACQUISITION DIFFERENTIAL (Subsidiary with Goodwill) Cost of 80% investment in S Ltd. Implied value of 100% investment in S Ltd. Carrying amount of S Ltd.’s net assets Assets Liabilities

Deduct old goodwill of S Ltd. Adjusted net assets Acquisition differential Allocated: Inventory Plant

$62,000 (62,000/0.80)

$77,500 $100,000 (30,000) 70,000 11,000

59,000 18,500 (FV 2 CA) 1$2,000 1 9,000 11,000 1 3,000 (c)

Long-term debt Balance—goodwill

(a) (b) 8,000 $10,500

(d)

$77,500 20% $15,500

(e)

CALCULATION OF NCI Implied value of 100% investment in S Ltd. NCI ownership

The subsidiary’s goodwill is now worth $10,500, based on the recent price paid by the parent.

The subsidiary’s goodwill was revalued at the date of acquisition.

EXHIBIT 4.13 Illustration of the Direct Approach (Subsidiary with Goodwill) P LTD. CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET At June 30, Year 1 Cash (100,000 2 62,000* 1 12,000) s receivable (90,000 1 7,000) Inventory (130,000 1 20,000 1 [12a] 2,000) Plant (280,000 1 50,000 1 [12b] 9,000) Goodwill (0 1 11,000 2 11,000 1 [12d] 10,500)

$ 50,000 97,000 152,000 339,000 10,500 $648,500

Current liabilities (60,000 1 8,000) Long-term debt (180,000 1 22,000 1 [12c] 3,000) Common shares Retained earnings Non-controlling interests [12e]

$ 68,000 205,000 200,000 160,000 15,500 $648,500


The direct approach produces the same results as the working paper approach but appears to be easier to perform.


174


166

CHAPTER 4

LO5 Contingent consideration should be recorded at the date of acquisition at its expected value.

The range of potential payment for contingent consideration should be disclosed.


CONTINGENT CONSIDERATION The of a business combination may require an additional cash payment, or an additional share issue contingent on some specified future event. The ing for contingent consideration is contained in IFRS 3. The material that follows illustrates the concepts involved. Contingent consideration should be measured at fair value at the date of acquisition. To do so, the parent should assess the amount expected to be paid in the future under different scenarios, assign probabilities as to the likelihood of the scenarios occurring, derive an expected value of the likely amount to be paid, and use a discount rate to derive the value of the expected payment in today’s dollars. This is all very subjective and involves a lot of judgment. The contingent consideration will be classified as either a liability or equity depending on its nature. If the contingent consideration will be paid in the form of cash or another asset, it will be classified as a liability. If issuing additional shares will satisfy the contingent consideration, it will be classified as equity. After the initial recognition, the contingent consideration classified as equity will not be remeasured. After the acquisition date, the fair value of a contingent consideration classified as a liability may change due to changes in circumstances, such as meeting specified sales targets, fluctuations in share price, or subsequent events, such as receiving government approval on an in-process research and development project. Changes in the fair value of a contingent consideration classified as a liability due to changes in circumstances since the acquisition date should be recognized in earnings. Changes in the fair value of a contingent consideration due to gathering of new information about facts and circumstances that existed at the acquisition date and within a maximum of one year subsequent to the acquisition date would be considered as an adjustment of the acquisition cost. Given the uncertainty involved, the following should be disclosed regarding contingent consideration: • The amount of contingent consideration recognized on the acquisition date. • A description of the arrangement and the basis for determining the amount of the payment. • An estimate of the range of outcomes (undiscounted) or, if a range cannot be estimated, that fact and the reasons why a range cannot be estimated. If the maximum amount of the payment is unlimited, the acquirer shall disclose that fact. The following discussions illustrate the two types of contingent consideration discussed above.

Changes in contingent consideration classified as a liability are reported in net income.

Contingent Consideration Classified as a Liability If the contingency is classified as a liability, any consideration issued at some future date is recorded at fair value and the change in fair value is recognized in net income. The following example will illustrate this situation. Able Corporation issues 500,000 common shares for all of the outstanding common shares of Baker Company on January 1, Year 1. The shares issued have a fair value of $10 at that time. The business combination agreement states that if the earnings of Baker Company exceed an average of $1.75 per share over the next two years, Able Corporation will make an additional cash payment of $600,000 to


175


CHAPTER 4


the former shareholders of Baker Company on January 1, Year 3. Able predicts that there is a 30% probability that Baker’s earnings will be less than $1.75 per share and a 70% probability that it will be greater than $1.75 per share. The probabilityadjusted expected payment is $420,000 (30% 3 0 1 70% 3 600,000). Using a discount rate of 7%, the fair value of the contingent consideration at January 1, Year 1, is $366,844 (420,000/1.072). Able’s journal entry on January 1, Year 1, is as follows: Investment in Baker Company Common shares Liability for contingent consideration

The expected value incorporates the probability of payments being made.

5,366,844 5,000,000 366,844

The consolidated financial statements at January 1, Year 1 would be prepared using the $5,366,844 acquisition cost. This amount is allocated to the identifiable net assets of Baker Company in the usual manner and may result in goodwill, or “negative goodwill.” If at the end of Year 1, the probability assessment has not changed, the undiscounted probability-adjusted expected payment remains at $420,000; but the present value is now $392,523 (420,000/1.07), an increase of $25,679 since the beginning of the year. Able’s journal entry at December 31, Year 1, is as follows: Interest expense Liability for contingent consideration

167

The likelihood of having to make an additional payment should be reassessed and the liability remeasured, if necessary, at the end of each reporting period.

25,679 25,679

If at the end of the two-year period it is determined that Baker’s earnings exceeded the average of $1.75 per share, the change in contingent consideration will be recorded by Able on December 31, Year 2, as follows: Liability for contingent consideration Interest expense (392,523 3 0.07) Loss from contingent consideration Liability for contingent consideration

392,523 27,477 180,000 600,000

If Baker did not exceed the earnings level and Able does not have to pay the contingent consideration, Able would make the following journal entry at December 31, Year 2: Liability for contingent consideration Interest expense (392,523 3 0.07) Gain from contingent consideration

392,523 27,477 420,000

The following is an example of a Canadian company that had a business combination in 2011 involving contingent consideration. It indicates how the initial amount and change in contingent consideration were ed for. Intact Financial Corporation is the leading provider of property and casualty (P&C) insurance in Canada, with $6.7 billion in direct s written on an annual basis. It insures more than five million individuals and businesses through its insurance subsidiaries and is the largest private-sector provider of P&C insurance in British Columbia, Alberta, Ontario, Quebec, and Nova Scotia. It manages its own investment portfolio, totalling approximately $11.8 billion. One of its subsidiaries, Intact Insurance, was formerly known as ING Insurance. On September 23, 2011, the Company acquired all of the issued and outstanding shares of AXA Canada for a cash consideration of $2,621 million and contingent consideration of up to $100 million based on the development of the consolidated

Each period, the liability is increased by the amount of interest accruing on the liability.


176


168

CHAPTER 4


reserves of AXA Canada. During the fourth quarter of 2011, the Company determined that based on development of AXA Canada’s reserves prior to September 23, 2011, the fair value of the contingent consideration as at September 23, 2011, was $48 million. That contingent consideration was recorded as an increase in goodwill and a payable to AXA. As at December 31, 2011, the fair value of the contingent consideration was reassessed to be $89 million. The increase in value of $41 million was recorded as a non-operating expense. Any future amounts payable, up to an additional $11 million, will be recorded in a similar manner.

Contingent Consideration Classified as Equity If the contingency is classified as equity, any consideration issued at some future date will be recorded at fair value, but will not be considered an additional cost of the purchase. Instead, the consideration issued will be recognized but offset by a reduction in the amount recorded for the original share issue. The following example illustrates this. Alpha Corporation issues 500,000 common shares for all the outstanding common shares of Beta Company on July 1, Year 1. If the shares issued have a fair market value of $5.00 per share, Alpha’s journal entry is as follows: Investment in Beta Company Common shares

2,500,000 2,500,000

The purchase agreement states that if the market price of Alpha’s shares is below $5.00 one year from the date of the agreement, Alpha will issue additional shares to the former shareholders of Beta in an amount that will compensate them for their loss in value. On July 1, Year 2, the market price of Alpha’s shares is $4.50. In accordance with the agreement, Alpha Corporation issues an additional 55,555.55 shares ($2,500,000 4 4.50 2 500,000 shares) and records the transaction as follows: The additional shares compensates for the loss in value for shares originally issued as consideration for the purchase.

Companies must disclose the value for NCI at the date of acquisition and how it was measured.

Common shares—old shares (55,555.55 shares 3 4.50) Common shares—new shares

250,000 250,000

Alternatively, Alpha could simply make a memorandum entry to indicate that 55,555 additional shares were issued for no consideration. Footnote disclosure in the Year 2 statements will be made for the amount of and reasons for the consideration and the ing treatment used. IFRS 3 requires that a reporting entity disclose the following for each business combination in which the acquirer holds less than 100% of the equity interests in the acquiree at the acquisition date: (a) The amount of the NCI in the acquiree recognized at the acquisition date and the measurement basis for that amount. (b) For each NCI in an acquiree measured at fair value, the valuation techniques and key model inputs used for determining that value. Goldcorp Inc. is a gold producer engaged in the operation, exploration, development and acquisition of precious metal properties in Canada, the United States, Mexico, and Central and South America. The Company’s current sources of operating cash flows are primarily from the sale of gold, silver, copper, lead and zinc. The extracts in Exhibit 4.14 are taken from Goldcorp’s 2011 consolidated financial statements.


177


CHAPTER 4

EXHIBIT 4.14


169

Extracts in Part from Goldcorp’s 2011 Financial Statements

7. ACQUISITIONS OF MINING INTERESTS c) Acquisition of 70% interest in Sociedad Contractual Minera El Morro On February 16, 2010, the Company acquired Xstrata Copper Chile S.A.’s (“Xstrata Copper”) 70% interest in Sociedad Contractual Minera El Morro (“SCM”), the owner of the El Morro project, and associated loan receivable balances held by Xstrata Copper from a subsidiary of New Gold Inc. (“New Gold”) in exchange for total consideration of $513 million in cash. The New Gold subsidiary had completed its acquisition of Xstrata Copper’s 70% interest in SCM and associated loan receivable balances on February 16, 2010, just prior to the acquisition by the Company, pursuant to the exercise of its right of first refusal on January 7, 2010. The right of first refusal came into effect on October 12, 2009 when Barrick Gold Corporation (“Barrick”) entered into an agreement with Xstrata Copper to acquire Xstrata Copper’s 70% interest in SCM. Goldcorp now holds a 70% interest in the El Morro project with the remaining 30% held by New Gold (note 34(a)). The El Morro project is an advanced gold/copper project in northern Chile and is expected to benefit the Company’s already strong organic growth pipeline. Goldcorp, as the project operator has agreed to fund, through interest bearing loans, New Gold’s share of development and construction costs until intended operating levels are achieved. The amounts outstanding will be repaid to the Company during the production period of the El Morro project. The acquisition of the 70% interest in SCM and loan receivable balances held by Xstrata Copper has been ed for as a business combination, with Goldcorp as the acquirer. The El Morro project has been classified as a separate reportable operating segment in these consolidated financial statements. The final allocation of the purchase price was as follows: Purchase price: Cash Net assets acquired: Cash and cash equivalents Mining interests Current liabilities Deferred income tax liabilities Other non-current liabilities Non-controlling interest

$513 1 1,146 (1) (419) (1) (213) $513

The amount assigned to non-controlling interest represents New Gold’s 30% interest in SCM which was measured as New Gold’s proportionate share of the fair value of SCM’s identifiable net assets at the date of acquisition. Total transaction costs incurred relating to the acquisition and included in other expenses during the year ended December 31, 2010 amounted to $6 million. The net loss of SCM for the period from February 16, 2010, the acquisition date, to December 31, 2010 included in these consolidated financial statements was negligible. The impact to net earnings of the Company for the year ended December 31, 2010, had the acquisition of the 70% interest in SCM and loan receivable balances held by Xstrata Copper occurred on January 1, 2010, would be negligible.

Goldcorp uses the parent company extension theory to for its business combinations.

Source: Reproduced with permission from Goldcorp Inc. http://www.goldcorp.com/files/april-24-2012/_ docs/Goldcorp_AR_2011_mda_financials.pdf

ANALYSIS AND INTERPRETATION OF FINANCIAL STATEMENTS When preparing consolidated financial statements for a parent and one or more non–wholly owned subsidiaries, the parent company can value non-controlling interest based on the fair value of the subsidiary as a whole (entity theory) or the

LO6 The key ratios are different under the different reporting methods.


178


170

CHAPTER 4

The classification of noncontrolling interest has a big impact on the debt-to-equity ratio.


fair value of identifiable net assets (parent company extension theory). Prior to 2011, parent company theory was required. Exhibit 4.15 presents consolidated balance sheets, the current ratio, and the debt-to-equity ratio for these three theories based on Exhibits 4.4, 4.6 and 4.7, respectively. Note the following from Exhibit 4.15: • The current ratio is highest and therefore the liquidity position looks the best under the entity theory. • Non-controlling interest is classified as debt under the parent company theory and as equity under the other two theories. This has a significant impact on the debt-to-equity ratio. • The debt-to-equity ratio is lowest, and therefore the solvency position looks the best under entity theory. This could affect whether or not the company is in compliance with covenants for lending agreements. • Financial analysts need to be aware of ing policy choices and may need to make adjustments to companies’ financial statements to make the financial statements truly comparable from one company to another.

EXHIBIT 4.15

Impact of Consolidation Theories on Current and Debt-to-Equity Ratios P LTD. CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET At June 30, Year 1

The value and classification of NCI is significantly different under the three theories.

Parent Company (Exhibit 4.4)

Entity (Exhibit 4.6)

Parent Company Extension (Exhibit 4.7)

Cash s receivable Inventory Current assets Plant Patent Goodwill

$ 40,000 97,000 151,600 288,600 337,200 10,200 10,400 $646,400

$ 40,000 97,000 152,000 289,000 339,000 10,000 13,000 $651,000

$ 40,000 97,000 152,000 289,000 339,000 10,000 10,400 $648,400

Current liabilities Long-term debt Non-controlling interest Total liabilities Common shares Retained earnings Non-controlling interest Shareholders’ equity

$ 68,000 204,400 14,000 286,400 200,000 160,000

$ 68,000 205,000

$ 68,000 205,000

360,000 $646,400

273,000 200,000 160,000 18,000 378,000 $651,000

273,000 200,000 160,000 15,400 375,400 $648,400

4.24 0.80

4.25 0.72

4.25 0.73

Current ratio Debt-to-equity ratio


CHAPTER 4


179

171

LO7

ASPE Differences • As mentioned in Chapter 3, private companies can either consolidate their subsidiaries or report their investments in subsidiaries under the cost method or the equity method, or at fair value if they would otherwise have chosen the cost method and the equity securities of the investee are quoted in an active market.

U.S. GAAP Differences U.S. GAAP and IFRSs for consolidated statements have many similarities. The significant differences are summarized as follows: 1. Whereas IFRSs do not allow push-down ing, it is required for SEC registrants in some cases.

There are some significant differences between U.S. GAAP and IFRSs with respect to consolidated financial statements.

2. Whereas IFRSs allow either the parent company extension theory or the entity theory, U.S. GAAP requires entity theory. 3. Whereas IFRSs require that contingent payments be recognized at fair value using best estimates at the date of acquisition, U.S. GAAP requires that contingent payments be recognized only if the obligation is probable and the amount is reasonably estimated.

summary A consolidated balance sheet presents the financial position of a group of companies under common control as if they constitute a single entity. The preparation of the consolidated balance sheet at the date of acquisition involves eliminating the parent’s investment and the parent’s share of the subsidiary’s shareholders’ equity s, revaluing the net assets of the subsidiary to fair value, and establishing the non-controlling interest (NCI). Either entity theory or parent company extension theory must be used when consolidating non–wholly owned subsidiaries. When the total consideration given is less than the fair value of identifiable net assets, a gain on bargain purchase is reported on the consolidated income statement. When a subsidiary has goodwill on its separate-entity balance sheet, this goodwill is eliminated on consolidation and replaced by the goodwill inherent in the parent’s purchase of the subsidiary at the date of acquisition. When the of a business combination require an additional payment contingent on some specified future event, the fair value of the contingent consideration should be estimated and recorded as part of the acquisition cost at the date of acquisition. A working paper can be used to prepare the consolidated statements, and is necessary if there are a large number of subsidiaries to consolidate. A computerized


180


172

CHAPTER 4


spreadsheet is particularly useful in this situation. When there are only one or two subsidiaries, the direct approach is a more efficient way to arrive at the desired results.

Significant Changes in GAAP in the Last Three Years 1. The definition of control has changed. Extensive guidance is given in IFRS 10 to evaluate whether one entity has control of another entity.

Changes Expected in GAAP in the Next Three Years • No major changes are expected related to the topics in this chapter.


On December 31, Year 1, CAN Company (CAN) takes control over the net assets of UKS Company (UKS) by purchasing 80% of the ordinary shares of UKS. CAN paid for the purchase by issuing ordinary shares with a market value of $35,200. The following information has been assembled: CAN Company

UKS Company

Carrying amount

Carrying amount

Fair value

Plant assets Goodwill Current assets

$ 80,000 0 50,000 $130,000

$20,000 0 15,000 $35,000

$26,000 22,000 14,000 $62,000


$ 75,000 25,000 30,000 $130,000

$18,000 7,000 10,000 $35,000

$ 8,000 10,000

Required: (a) Prepare a consolidated statement of financial position for CAN and calculate the current and debt-to-equity ratios immediately after the combination under (i) (ii) (iii) (iv)

proprietary theory, parent company theory, parent company extension theory, and entity theory.

(b) Which theory shows the better liquidity position, and which theory shows the best solvency position? Briefly explain. (c) Which theory best portrays the economic value of the subsidiary? Briefly explain.


181


CHAPTER 4

S OLUTION

TO


173

SELF-STUDY PROBLEM 1 CAN COMPANY Balance Sheet At December 31, Year 1 (See notes) Proprietary See notes below Plant assets Goodwill Current assets Shareholders’ equity CAN Non-controlling interest Non-controlling interest Long-term debt Current liabilities

Current ratio Debt-to-equity ratio

Parent Company

Parent Company Extension

Entity

(a.i)

(a.ii)

(a.iii)

(a.iv)

$100,800 17,600 61,200 $179,600

$104,800 17,600 64,200 $186,600

$106,000 17,600 64,000 $187,600

$106,000 22,000 64,000 $192,000

$110,200

$110,200

$110,200 4,400

$110,200 8,800

31,400 38,000 $179,600

3,600 32,800 40,000 $186,600

33,000 40,000 $187,600

33,000 40,000 $192,000

1.611 0.63

1.605 0.69

1.600 0.64

1.600 0.61

(b) Proprietary theory shows the best liquidity position because its current ratio is higher than the other theories. Entity theory shows the best solvency position because its debt-to-equity ratio is lower than the other theories. Both the debt and equity are higher under entity theory. However, the increase in equity is proportionately greater than the increase in debt. (c) In the opinion of the author of this text, fair values are better measures of the economic value of assets and liabilities than historical cost-based values. If so, entity theory best reflects the true economic value of the subsidiary. All of the subsidiaries’ identifiable assets and liabilities are reported at fair value, and the full value of the subsidiary’s goodwill is included in the consolidated financial statements. Notes: 1. The assets and liabilities are calculated as follows: (a.i) Carrying amounts for CAN and 80% of fair values for UKS (a.ii) Carrying amounts for CAN and carrying amounts for UKS plus 80% of fair value excess for UKS’s identifiable assets and liabilities plus 80% of the value of UKS’s goodwill (a.iii) Carrying amounts for CAN and carrying amounts for UKS plus 100% of fair value excess for UKS’s identifiable assets and liabilities plus 80% of the value of UKS’s goodwill (a.iv) Carrying amounts for CAN and carrying amounts for UKS plus 100% of fair value excess for UKS’s identifiable assets and liabilities plus 100% of the value of UKS’s goodwill


182


174

CHAPTER 4


2. The non-controlling interest is calculated as follows: (a.ii) 20% 3 carrying amount of UKS’s identifiable assets and liabilities (a.iii) 20% 3 fair value of UKS’s identifiable assets and liabilities (a.iv) 20% 3 fair value of UKS’s identifiable assets, identifiable liabilities, and goodwill


On December 31, Year 1, the condensed balance sheets for ONT Limited and NB Inc. were as follows: ONT Assets: Cash s receivable Inventories Property, plant & equipment Accumulated depreciation

Liabilities: Current liabilities Bonds payable Shareholders’ equity: Ordinary shares Retained earnings

NB

$

44,000 480,000 650,000 2,610,000 (1,270,000) $2,514,000

$

80,000 420,000 540,000 870,000 (130,000) $1,780,000

$ 660,000 820,000 1,480,000

$ 560,000 490,000 1,050,000

200,000 834,000 1,034,000 $2,514,000

400,000 330,000 730,000 $1,780,000

The fair value of all of NB’s assets and liabilities were equal to their carrying amounts except for the following: Asset Inventories Property, plant & equipment Bonds payable

Carrying amount

Fair value

$540,000 740,000 490,000

$570,000 790,000 550,000

Required: (a) Assume that on January 1, Year 2, ONT acquired 70% of NB’s ordinary shares by issuing new ordinary shares with a fair value of $700,000. This was the only transaction on this day. (i) Prepare the journal entry on ONT’s book to record the purchase of NB’s ordinary shares. (ii) Prepare a schedule to calculate and allocate the acquisition differential. (iii) Prepare a consolidated balance sheet for ONT and its subsidiary at January 1, Year 2, after recording the purchase of NB’s ordinary shares.


CHAPTER 4


183

175

(b) In Self-Study Problem 2 in Chapter 3, the same set of data was presented except that ONT acquired 100% of NB’s ordinary shares for $1,000,000. What are the similarities and differences between the balance sheet above and the balance from part (b) in Self-Study Problem 2 in Chapter 3? (c) Calculate goodwill and non-controlling interest on the consolidated balance sheet on January 1, Year 2, under the parent company extension theory.

S OLUTION

TO

SELF-STUDY PROBLEM 2

(a) (i)

(ii)

Investment in NB Common shares

700,000 700,000

Cost of ONT’s 70% investment in NB

$ 700,000

Implied value of 100% investment in NB (700,000/0.70) Carrying amount of NB’s net assets Assets Liabilities Acquisition differential Allocated as follows: Inventories (570,000 2 540,000) Property, plant & equipment (790,000 2 740,000) Bonds payable (550,000 2 490,000) Balance—goodwill

$1,000,000 $1,780,000 (1,050,000)

$

Non-controlling interest (30% 3 [b] 1,000,000)

(iii)

30,000 50,000 (60,000) (e)

(a)

(b)

730,000 270,000 (c) (d) 20,000 $ 250,000

(f)

$ 300,000

(g)

ONT LIMITED Consolidated Balance Sheet January 1, Year 2 Cash (44,000 1 80,000) s receivable (480,000 1 420,000) Inventories (650,000 1 540,000 1 [c] 30,000) Property, plant & equipment (2,610,000 1 870,000 2 130,000* 1 [d] 50,000) Accumulated depreciation (1,270,000 1 130,000 2 130,000*) Goodwill [f] Liabilities: Current liabilities (660,000 1 560,000) Bonds payable (820,000 1 490,000 1 [e] 60,000) Shareholders’ equity: Common shares (200,000 1 [a] 700,000) Retained earnings Non-controlling interests [g]

* eliminates NB’s accumulated depreciation

$ 124,000 900,000 1,220,000 3,400,000 (1,270,000) 250,000 $4,624,000 $1,220,000 1,370,000 2,590,000 900,000 834,000 300,000 2,034,000 $4,624,000


184


176

CHAPTER 4


(b) The balance sheets are exactly the same except for shareholders’ equity. The assets and liabilities are exactly the same because the implied value of the subsidiary as a whole is $1,000,000 in both cases. In Chapter 3, the purchase price was $1,000,000 for 100% of the subsidiary. In Chapter 4, the parent paid $700,000 for 70%, which produces an implied value of $1,000,000 for the subsidiary as a whole. The difference between the total value of $1,000,000 and the purchase price of $700,000 for 70% is attributed to non-controlling interest. Therefore, consolidated common shares is $300,000 less and NCI is $300,000 more when the parent only acquired 70% of the subsidiary. (c) Goodwill under entity theory Less: NCI’s share (30%) Goodwill under parent company extension theory

$250,000 75,000 $175,000

NCI under entity theory Less: NCI’s share of goodwill (30%) NCI under parent company extension theory

$300,000 75,000 $225,000

APPENDIX 4A Working Paper Approach for Consolidation of Non–Wholly Owned Subsidiaries LO8

In this chapter, we illustrated the direct approach for preparing a consolidated balance sheet for non–wholly owned subsidiaries at the date of acquisition. We considered four different theories of consolidations, bargain purchases, and subsidiaries with goodwill on their own balance sheet. We will now illustrate the working paper approach using the same examples. A number of methods can be used to prepare consolidation working papers at the date of acquisition. All methods must result in identical consolidated amounts. Our approach is to prepare adjusting entries to eliminate the investment , establish non-controlling interest, and allocate the acquisition differential to appropriate s. The entries are ed by the same calculations and schedules used under the direct approach.

ENTITY THEORY Exhibit 4A.1 shows the preparation of the consolidated balance sheet when P Ltd. acquires 80% of the common shares of S Ltd. for $72,000. P Ltd. uses the entity theory and thereby reports 100% of the fair value of the S Ltd.’s goodwill on the consolidated balance sheet. To compare it with the direct approach, see Exhibit 4.6.


185


CHAPTER 4


177

EXHIBIT A4.1 P LTD. CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET WORKING PAPER (Entity Theory)

P Ltd. Cash $ 28,000 s receivable 90,000 Inventory 130,000 Plant 280,000 Patent Investment in S Ltd. 72,000 Acquisition differential

S Ltd. $ 12,000 7,000 20,000 50,000 11,000

$600,000

$100,000

$ 60,000 180,000 200,000 160,000

$ 8,000 22,000

40,000 30,000

Retained earnings

(3) $ 2,000 (3) 9,000

(1) (2) (3)

Goodwill

Current liabilities Long-term debt Common shares Retained earnings Common shares


(1) (2) (1) (2)

16,000 4,000 13,000

$100,000

$ 40,000 97,000 152,000 339,000 10,000

The subsidiary’s assets and liabilities are brought onto the consolidated balance sheet at 100% of their fair values.

13,000 $651,000 (3)

3,000

(2)

18,000 $114,000

$ 68,000 205,000 200,000 160,000

32,000 8,000 24,000 6,000

Non-controlling interest $600,000

(3) $ 1,000 (1) 72,000 (3) 20,000


$114,000

18,000 $651,000

NCI is presented as a component of shareholders’ equity on the consolidated balance sheet.

Three working paper entries are used. Entry (1) eliminates the parent’s share of the subsidiary’s shareholders’ equity s and the parent’s investment , with the difference established as the acquisition differential. Entry (2) eliminates the NCI’s share of the subsidiary’s shareholders’ equity s and establishes the NCI on the consolidated balance sheet, with the difference going to acquisition differential. Entry (3) allocates the acquisition differential to revalue the identifiable net assets of the subsidiary, and establishes the resulting goodwill. The three working paper elimination entries are as follows: (1)

Common shares—S Ltd. Retained earnings—S Ltd. Acquisition differential Investment in S Ltd. (2) Acquisition differential Common shares Retained earnings—S Ltd. Non-controlling interest

32,000 24,000 16,000 72,000 4,000 8,000 6,000 18,000

The first two entries record the acquisition differential and the NCI on the consolidated balance sheet.


186


178

CHAPTER 4


The implied acquisition differential is allocated to identifiable assets and liabilities and goodwill.

(3) Inventory—S Ltd. Plant—S Ltd. Goodwill Patent—S Ltd. Long-term debt—S Ltd. Acquisition differential

2,000 9,000 13,000 1,000 3,000 20,000

It must be emphasized again that these worksheet entries are made only in the working paper; they are not entered in the ing records of either P Ltd. or S Ltd.

BARGAIN PURCHASE Exhibit 4A.2 shows the preparation of the consolidated balance sheet when P Ltd. acquires 80% of the common shares of S Ltd. for $60,000. This results in negative goodwill, which is reported as a gain on bargain purchase. To compare it with the direct approach, see Exhibit 4.10. Three working paper entries are used. Entry (1) eliminates the parent’s share of the subsidiary’s shareholders’ equity s and the parent’s investment , with the difference established as the acquisition differential. Entry (2)

EXHIBIT A4.2 P LTD. CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET WORKING PAPER (Bargain Purchase, Parent Company Extension Theory)

P Ltd. The subsidiary’s identifiable assets and liabilities are measured at fair value on the consolidated balance sheet.

The gain from the bargain purchase is recorded in income and ends up in consolidated retained earnings on the date of acquisition.

Cash s receivable Inventory Plant Patent Investment in S Ltd. Acquisition differential



S Ltd.

$ 40,000 $ 12,000 90,000 7,000 130,000 20,000 280,000 50,000 11,000 60,000

(3) (3)

(1) (2)

$600,000

$100,000

$ 60,000 180,000 200,000 160,000

$ 8,000 22,000

40,000

Retained earnings

30,000

2,000 9,000

4,000 1,400

$100,000

$ 52,000 97,000 152,000 339,000 10,000

$650,000

(1) (2) (1) (2)

(3)

3,000

(3)

1,600

(2)

15,400 $86,400

$ 68,000 205,000 200,000 161,600

32,000 8,000 24,000 6,000

Non-controlling interest $600,000

(3) $ 1,000 (1) 60,000 (3) 5,400


$86,400

15,400 $651,000


187


CHAPTER 4


179

eliminates the NCI’s share of the subsidiary’s shareholders’ equity s and establishes the NCI on the consolidated balance sheet, with the difference going to acquisition differential. Entry (3) allocates the acquisition differential to revalue the identifiable net assets of the subsidiary, and establishes the resulting gain on purchase. The three working paper elimination entries are as follows: (1)

Common shares—S Ltd. Retained earnings—S Ltd. Acquisition differential Investment in S Ltd. (2) Acquisition differential Common shares Retained earnings—S Ltd. Non-controlling interest (3) Inventory—S Ltd. Plant—S Ltd. Patent—S Ltd. Long-term debt—S Ltd. Retained earnings (gain on bargain purchase) Acquisition differential

32,000 24,000 4,000 60,000 1,400 8,000 6,000 15,400 2,000 9,000 1,000 3,000 1,600 5,400

Subsidiary with Goodwill Exhibit 4A.3 shows the preparation of the consolidated balance sheet when S Ltd. had goodwill on its own balance sheet. P Ltd. pays $62,000 for 80% of the common shares of S Ltd. This results in goodwill of $10,500 on the consolidated balance sheet. To compare it with the direct approach, see Exhibit 4.13. Three working paper entries are required. Entry (1) writes off the previous goodwill (labelled “old” goodwill in the working paper) to S Ltd.’s retained earnings for purposes of consolidation. Entry (2) eliminates the parent’s share of the subsidiary’s common shares and adjusted retained earnings and the parent’s investment , and establishes the difference as the acquisition differential. Entry (3) eliminates the NCI’s share of the subsidiary’s shareholders’ equity s and establishes the NCI on the consolidated balance sheet, with the difference going to acquisition differential. Entry (4) allocates the acquisition differential to revalue the net assets of the subsidiary, and establishes the new goodwill from the business combination. The three working paper elimination entries are shown below: (1)

Retained earnings—S Ltd. Goodwill—old: S Ltd. (2) Common shares—S Ltd. Retained earnings—S Ltd. ([30,000 2 11,000] 3 80%) Acquisition differential Investment in S Ltd. (3) Common shares—S Ltd. Retained earnings—S Ltd. ([30,000 2 11,000] 3 20%) Acquisition differential NCI

11,000 11,000 32,000 15,200 14,800 62,000 8,000 3,800 3,700 15,500

These worksheet entries establish the appropriate balances for the consolidated balance sheet.


188


180

CHAPTER 4


EXHIBIT A4.3 P LTD. CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET WORKING PAPER At June 30, Year 1 Adjustments and Eliminations P Ltd. Cash $ 38,000 s receivable 90,000 Inventory 130,000 280,000 Plant Goodwill—old Investment in S Ltd. 62,000 Acquisition differential

S Ltd. $ 12,000 7,000 20,000 50,000 11,000


$600,000

$100,000

$ 60,000 180,000 200,000 160,000

$ 8,000 22,000

40,000 30,000

Retained earnings

(4) $ (4)

(2) (3) (4)

Goodwill

The revalued goodwill appears on the consolidated balance sheet.

Dr.

Cr.

$ 50,000 97,000 152,000 339,000

2,000 9,000

14,800 3,700 10,500

(1) $ 11,000 (2) 62,000 (4) 18,500

10,500 $648,500 (4)

(2) (3) (1) (2) (3)

(3)

$600,000

(4) Inventory—S Ltd. Plant—S Ltd. Goodwill Long-term debt—S Ltd. Acquisition differential

$100,000

3,000

$ 68,000 205,000 200,000 160,000

32,000 8,000 11,000 15,200 3,800

NCI

The working paper approach produces the same results as the direct approach.


$110,000

15,500

15,500

$ 110,000 $648,500

2,000 9,000 10,500 3,000 18,500

All entries were working paper entries and were not recorded in the records of S Ltd. Since S Ltd. does not write off its goodwill in its separate-entity records, the preparation of consolidated statements in Year 2 and all future years will require working paper entries to write off any goodwill that still exists in S Ltd.’s records, and to reverse goodwill impairment that has been recorded.


1.

Is a negative acquisition differential the same as negative goodwill? Explain.

LO1

2.

With respect to the valuation of non-controlling interest, what are the major differences among proprietary, parent company, and entity theories?


CHAPTER 4


189

181

LO1

3. How does the presentation of non-controlling interest on the consolidated balance sheet differ under the four theories of consolidating a non–wholly owned subsidiary?

LO2

4. How is the goodwill appearing on the statement of financial position of a subsidiary prior to a business combination treated in the subsequent preparation of consolidated statements? Explain.

LO2

5. Under the entity theory, consolidated goodwill is determined by inference. Describe how this is achieved, and comment on its shortcomings.

LO2

6. What is non-controlling interest, and how is it reported in the consolidated balance sheet under entity theory?

LO3

7. What s on the consolidated balance sheet differ in value between entity theory and parent company extension theory? Briefly explain why they differ.

LO5

8. What is contingent consideration, and how is it measured at the date of acquisition?

LO5

9. Explain how changes in the fair value of contingent consideration should be reported, assuming that the contingent consideration will be paid in the form of cash.

LO7

10. What reporting options related to business combinations are available to private companies?

LO4

11. What is negative goodwill, and how is it ed for?

LO4

12. Explain whether or not the historical cost principle is applied when ing for negative goodwill.

LO2

13. How is the net income earned by a subsidiary in the year of acquisition incorporated in the consolidated income statement?

LO8

14. In whose ing records are the consolidation elimination entries recorded? Explain.

LO2

15. Don Ltd. purchased 80% of the outstanding shares of Gunn Ltd. Before the purchase, Gunn had a deferred charge of $10.5 million on its balance sheet. This item consisted of organization costs that were being amortized over a 20-year period. What amount should be reported in Don’s consolidated statements with respect to this deferred charge? Explain briefly.

LO2

16. How would the consolidation of a parent-founded subsidiary differ from the consolidation of a purchased subsidiary?

Case 4-1

On December 31, Year 7, Maple Company issued preferred shares with a fair value of $600,000 to acquire 12,000 (60%) of the common shares of Leafs Limited. The Leafs shares were trading in the market at around $40 per share just days prior to and just after the purchase by Maple. Maple had to and was willing to pay a of $10 per share, or $120,000, in total in order to gain control over Leafs.

C ASES LO1


190


182

CHAPTER 4


The balance sheets for the two companies just prior to acquisition were as follows (in 000s): Maple

Identifiable assets Goodwill

Leafs

Carrying amount

Fair value

$2,000 0

$2,500 ??

$2,000 Liabilities Shareholders’ equity

$1,500 500 $2,000

Carrying amount

Fair value

$1,000 0

$1,400 ??

$1,000 1,600 ??

$ 800 200

840 ??

$1,000

Consolidated financial statements will be prepared to combine the financial statements for the two companies. The management of Maple is concerned about the valuation of goodwill on the consolidated financial statements. It was willing to pay a of $120,000 to gain control of Leafs. It maintains that it would have paid the same in total whether it acquired 60% or 100% of the shares of Leafs. Given that the return on assets is a closely monitored ratio by the shareholders, the management of Maple would like to minimize the value assigned to goodwill on consolidation. Management wants to see how the consolidated balance sheet would differ under four different theories of reporting: proprietary, parent company, parent company extension, and entity. Management also has the following questions when reporting this business combination: • How will we determine the value of the goodwill for the subsidiary? • How will this affect the valuation of NCI? • Will we have to revalue the subsidiary’s assets and liabilities every year when we prepare the consolidated financial statements? • Which consolidation theory best reflects the economic reality of the business combination?

Required: Prepare a consolidated balance sheet at the date of acquisition under the four theories, and respond to the questions asked by management.

Case 4-2 LO2

Eternal Rest Limited (ERL) is a public company; its shares are traded on a stock exchange in Canada. ERL operates both funeral homes and cemeteries in Canada. Funeral services (casket, flowers, cemetery stone, prayer service) are sold on an “as needed” basis and also “in advance” (prepaid). ERL recognizes revenue only as the funeral services are performed. Cemetery land is purchased years in advance, and carrying costs (e.g., interest and property taxes) are capitalized. The company sells burial plots or gravesites in advance, or on an “as needed” basis. Revenues from plots sold in advance are recognized upon g a contract, regardless of the timing of receipt of cash. The cost of maintenance for 100 years is recognized as an expense of earning revenue.


CHAPTER 4


191

183

By law, funds for maintenance are sent to a trustee, for investment. Funds are allowed to be withdrawn annually for current maintenance costs. The cost of the cemetery land and land improvements (including trees, fencing, and pathways) is allocated to cost of sales. As a result of acquisitions, ERL tripled its assets in fiscal Year 5. Effective September 1, Year 4, ERL acquired the assets and liabilities of Tranquil Cemeteries Limited (Tranquil) by issuing common shares and debt. ERL also acquired, effective November 1, Year 4, 70% of the voting common shares of Peaceful Cemeteries Limited (Peaceful) in exchange for $1 million cash (borrowed from ERL’s banker) plus common shares of ERL. Peaceful was privately owned by a single shareholder before the purchase of its shares by ERL. The common shares of ERL that were issued with respect to the acquisitions have been escrowed and may not be sold for one year from their issuance date. You, a CA, are a new manager with a CA firm. Your firm was appointed as the auditor of ERL in September Year 4, for the year ending June 30, Year 5. Your firm was also appointed as the auditor of Peaceful. It is now September Year 5. Your firm has experienced severe staffing shortages. The partner has advised you that because of the recent departure of another manager, you have been assigned to the ERL and Peaceful engagements. The audit fieldwork has been completed, but the file review has not taken place. The partner has asked you to review the audit files and notes prepared by the senior in charge of the engagements and to prepare a memo that provides your analysis and disposition of the ing issues. The following information was assembled from your review of the working papers of ERL and Peaceful. 1. The acquisition of Tranquil’s net assets resulted in the following additions to ERL’s balance sheet as at September 1, Year 4 (in thousands of dollars): Working capital Land Buildings and equipment, net Non-competition agreements Goodwill Total net assets of Tranquil The $20.2 million was paid as follows: 5-year non-interest-bearing first mortgage bonds of ERL Common shares of ERL, escrowed for one year

$

850 1,400 3,700 3,000 11,250 $20,200 $18,150 2,050 $20,200

The auditors read the purchase and sale agreement and noted that $820,000 of the working capital represented funds that were being held in trust for future maintenance of the cemetery lands. The new common shares issued by ERL were measured at the market price on the day prior to the g of the agreement. The $3 million paid for non-competition agreements represents a payment to the sellers of Tranquil in exchange for their commitment not to engage in the same type of business for five years. The $3 million represents the otherwise expected earnings of the sellers, discounted at the 9% market rate of interest that prevailed at the time. The $1.4 million and $3.7 million assigned to land, buildings, and equipment represent management’s estimates


192


184

CHAPTER 4


of the fair values of these assets and coincide with carrying amounts on Tranquil’s books. 2. The shares of Peaceful were acquired primarily because the company had non–capital loss carry-forwards for income tax purposes. The purchase price for the acquisition was a $1 million cash payment by ERL plus the issuance of $24 million of ERL shares for the 70% ownership. The acquisition cost was allocated to assets and liabilities in a manner similar to the allocation for the Tranquil acquisition. The auditors did not request that the estimated value of the loss carry-forward be recorded. ERL attributed $4 million to non-competition agreements (to be amortized over five years) and $14 million to goodwill. 3. After the acquisition of Peaceful by ERL, sufficient business was directed to Peaceful to commence the process of utilizing the tax loss carry-forwards. During fiscal Year 5, the benefit realized from the utilization of the loss carryforwards amounted to $2.36 million and was recognized as a gain on the income statement. 4. Excess cemetery land (acquired in the purchase of Tranquil) was sold in December Year 4 at a gain of $1.2 million. The proceeds were reported as “other revenue.” 5. One working paper entitled “Land” contains the following note: “Land recorded on the books at $2,305,600 and called ‘Sunset Hill’ is undeveloped and is not scheduled for use until Year 8 or Year 9. It is subject to a Year 5 government order requiring that ERL clear up environmental concerns on the site. I asked one employee what the cost would be and was told ‘half a million dollars.’ No amount was accrued because of uncertainty.” 6. A working paper entitled “Management Compensation” shows that senior management shares in what is called a “Bonus Pool.” The bonus is 15% of income before income taxes.

Required: Prepare the memo. (CICA adapted)

Case 4-3 LO2

Factory Optical Distributors (FOD) is a publicly held manufacturer and distributor of high-quality eyeglass lenses located in Burnaby, British Columbia. For the past 10 years, the company has sold its lenses on a wholesale basis to optical shops across Canada. Beginning in Year 3, the company began to offer franchise opportunities to opticians wanting to sell only FOD lenses. The franchise agreements contain the following stipulations: • Each franchise must be a corporation. FOD (Burnaby) will purchase 35% of the corporation’s outstanding common shares and the franchisee will hold the remaining 65%. No other equity instruments can be issued. • Franchises can be established in new locations or in existing locations under the name Factory Optical Distributors. If a new building is required, FOD (Burnaby) will guarantee the mortgage to ensure that the best interest rates can be obtained. If an existing location is used, it must be renovated to meet company specifications, and again FOD (Burnaby) will guarantee any required financing.


CHAPTER 4


193

185

• To qualify as a franchisee, an individual must be a licensed optician and must commit to 40 hours a week in the franchise location, managing the day-to-day activities. • Franchisees are to be paid a salary that does not exceed 1.5 times the industry average for opticians with equivalent experience. • The franchise agreement specifies that only FOD lenses can be sold in franchise locations. FOD lenses can be purchased by franchisees at 20% below normal selling price for the first $500,000 of purchases and at 25% below normal selling price if purchases exceed $500,000 on an annual basis. • The agreement also requires that frames sold by the franchisee be purchased from designated suppliers, to ensure the best quality and fit to FOD lenses. • All franchise advertising must be approved by FOD (Burnaby). Franchisees must allocate 1% of revenue to advertising each month. • The franchisee is required to participate in special promotions and seasonal sales as determined by FOD (Burnaby). • A franchise fee of 2% of sales is payable monthly to FOD (Burnaby). • Other products and services can be sold from the franchise location provided that they do not negatively impact the sale of FOD lenses. During Year 5, eight franchise agreements were signed in locations across Canada. At December 31, Year 5, the company’s year-end, five of these locations were open for business. It is now January Year 6. You are the senior auditor on the FOD (Burnaby) . The company’s corporate controller has come to you with the franchise agreement to discuss how FOD must report its share ownership in the five operating franchises. She has heard that the definition of control in IFRS 10 encomes some situations where 50% share ownership does not exist.

Required: Examine the details of the franchise agreement. Do you think FOD controls the franchise operations? Would consolidation be required? Explain. (adapted from a case prepared by J.C. Thatcher, Lakehead University, and Margaret Forbes, University of Saskatchewan)

Case 4-4 LO2

The following are a number of scenarios that show variations in the nature of longterm intercorporate investments. Assume that all companies are public companies. 1. A Ltd. owns 45% of B Co. Typically, only about 70% of the outstanding shares are voted at the annual meetings of B Company. Because of this, A Ltd. always casts a majority of the votes on every ballot when it votes the shares it holds. 2. A Ltd. holds no shares of B Co.; however, it holds convertible bonds issued by B Co. that, if A Ltd. converted them, would result in the ownership of 51% of the outstanding shares of B Co. 3. A Ltd. owns 75% of B Co. Recently a receiver, acting on behalf of a bank, seized a portion of B Co.’s inventory when B Co. defaulted on a loan. 4. Last year B Co. was a wholly owned subsidiary of C Inc. At the beginning of this year, B Co. was put up for sale and A Ltd. purchased all of its 100,000


194


186

CHAPTER 4


voting shares from C Inc. by making a cash payment of 40% of the purchase price and issuing a promissory note for the balance owing, due in equal installments over the next two years. B Co. has a bond issue outstanding that can be converted at the option of the holder into 150,000 voting common shares of that company. At the time of the sale, C Inc. held 100% of these bonds; it has agreed to sell these bonds proportionately to A Ltd. as it receives the proceeds from the promissory note. 5. A Ltd. owns 100% of B Co., which is insolvent. A licensed trustee has seized all of its assets in bankruptcy. 6. B Co. is located in a foreign country. This country requires that its citizens hold a majority of the ownership of all businesses. A Ltd. has the expertise and technical knowledge required to successfully operate B Co. In order to satisfy the country’s foreign ownership requirements, B Co. has been structured as a partnership, with 50 partners each having a 2% equity interest. Forty-nine of the partners, who are all citizens of the foreign country, have signed an irrevocable agreement that establishes A Ltd. as the managing partner, with complete authority to determine the operating, financing, and investing policies of B Co.

Required: For each scenario, discuss how A Ltd. should report its investment in B Co.

Case 4-5 LO2

Smith & Stewart (Stewart) is a partnership of lawyers. It was recently formed from a merger of two predecessor partnerships: Becker and Brackman (Becker) and Copp and Copp (Copp). The merged firm has 38 partners, six from Becker and 32 from Copp, and a total of 75 employees. At the date of the merger, Stewart purchased land and an office building for $1.25 million and fully computerized the new offices. The partners have decided that the financial statements will be audited annually, although neither of the predecessor firms was audited. The partnership agreement requires an annual valuation of the assets and liabilities of the firm. This valuation is to be used to determine the payment to be made by the partnership to a withdrawing partner, and the contribution to be made to the partnership by a newly itted partner. The partners are unsure of the ing implications of this requirement. The partners have been actively engaged in establishing and managing the practice and have paid little attention to the ing policies. Before the merger, Becker recorded revenue when it invoiced the client. Time reports were used to keep track of the number of hours worked for each client, although this information was not recorded in the ing system. In general, its ing records were not well maintained. In contrast, work in progress was recorded for employees of Copp at their regular billing rate, on a client-by-client basis, based on the hours worked, even though the full amount was not always recoverable. At year-end, an adjustment was made to reduce work in progress to reflect the actual costs incurred by Copp. Copp recorded revenue for partner hours at the time that clients were invoiced.


CHAPTER 4


195

187

The new partnership agreement requires a valuation of the work in progress at the merger date, with this amount to be recorded as goodwill. This amount has not yet been determined. Stewart has arranged a line of credit with a bank that allows the partnership to borrow up to 75% of the carrying amount of receivables and 40% of the carrying amount of work in progress, as recorded in the monthly financial statements. The bank has also provided mortgage financing of $750,000 on the recently acquired land and building. As well as annually audited financial statements, the bank requires unaudited financial statements monthly. As of the date of the merger, property, plant, and equipment owned by the predecessor firms were transferred to the new partnership. Each partner receives a monthly “draw” payment, which represents an advance on the partner’s share of annual profit. Although the individual partners cannot incorporate, the partnership is considering incorporating a company to provide management services to the partnership. If it proceeds with this idea, the land and building and related mortgage, and the equipment would be transferred to this company. Your firm has been engaged by Stewart to prepare a report advising the partnership on financial ing issues. The manager in charge of the Stewart engagement has asked you, a CA, to prepare a draft report to the client addressing its concerns.

Required: Prepare the draft report. (CICA adapted)

Case 4-6 LO2

Lauder Adventures Limited (LAL) was incorporated over 40 years ago as an amusement park and golf course. Over time, a nearby city has grown to the point where it borders on LAL’s properties. In recent years LAL’s owners, who are all of one family, have seen LAL’s land values increase significantly. LAL’s majority shareholder, Hassan Poosti, owns 55% of the outstanding shares and is not active in LAL’s day-to-day activities. Last year, Hassan hired a new chief executive officer, Leo Titan. Leo has a reputation for being an aggressive risk taker. Hassan is committed, and has the personal financial resources required, to Leo’s plans. Eight months ago, LAL became the successful bidder for a new sports franchise, in conjunction with a minority partner. Under the of the franchise agreement, LAL is required to build a sports arena, which is currently being constructed. The arena is being built on a section of the amusement park. Another section of the amusement park is being relocated to ensure that the entrances to the arena are close to public transportation and parking. Consequently, some of the rides will be relocated. LAL is the sole owner of the arena at present. The sports franchise is separately incorporated as Northern Sports Limited (NSL); LAL holds 75% of the shares in the company. Another bid is being prepared by NSL to obtain a second sports franchise so that the arena can be used more often. NSL will be required to lease space from LAL when the arena is completed, in about 22 months.


196


188

CHAPTER 4


For the first two sports seasons, NSL will have to lease arena space from Aggressive Limited (AL). During this time, NSL does not expect to be profitable because • it may take time to build a competitive team; • AL is charging a high rent, and it is not giving NSL a share of concession (hot dogs, drinks) revenue; • AL cannot make the better dates (e.g., Saturday night) available to NSL to attract sports fans; and • as a newcomer to the league, NSL is restricted with regard to the players who are available to it and the days of the week it can play in its home city. Consequently, NSL has arranged to borrow funds from LAL and from others to finance costs and losses. Your employer, Fabio & Fox, Chartered ants, has conducted the audit of LAL for several years. LAL has tended to be marginally profitable one year and then have losses the next year. The company has continued to operate because the directors know that the real estate holdings were becoming increasingly valuable. Leo is expected to oversee the expanded ing and finance functions in the company. He has met with you and the partner in charge of the LAL audit and discussed various issues related to the year ending September 30, Year 8. His comments are provided in Exhibit I. It is September 5, Year 8. You have been asked by the partner to prepare a report for him, which will be used for the next meeting with Leo. He would like

EXHIBIT I NOTES FROM DISCUSSION WITH LEO TITAN 1.

2.

In order to build a road to the arena’s parking lot, two holes of the 18-hole golf course will be relocated next spring. Costs of $140,000 are expected to be incurred this year in design, tree planting, ground preparation, and grass seeding in order to ready the area for next spring. These costs are to be capitalized as part of the golf course lands, along with related property taxes of $13,000 and interest of $15,000. In May Year 8, LAL acquired, for $4.25 million, all of the shares of an amusement park in a different city when its land lease expired. The amusement park company was wound up and the equipment, rides, concessions, and other assets are being transported to LAL at a cost of $350,000. The estimated fair value of the assets and liabilities (according to Leo) is as follows: Concession prizes (e.g., stuffed animals) Rides and games Equipment and parts Electrical supplies Lighting and signs Estimated present value of tax loss carry-forward Liabilities Net assets

$

22,500 4,200,000 1,650,000 75,000 100,000 700,000 6,747,500 1,200,000 $ 5,547,500

LAL expects to spend approximately $400,000 in getting the assets in operating order and $500,000 on foundations and site preparations for the rides. Leo wants to “capitalize as much as possible.”

(continued)


197


CHAPTER 4

EXHIBIT I 3.

4.


189

(continued )

Approximately $600,000 will be required to relocate the rides that are currently on land that is needed for the arena. This amount is to be capitalized, net of scrap recovery of $60,000 on dismantled and redundant equipment. Virtually all the rides were fully depreciated years ago. To assist in financing the new ventures, LAL sold excess land to developers who intend to construct a shopping centre, office buildings, and expensive homes adjacent to the golf course and away from the amusement park. The developers and LAL agreed to these : Paid to LAL on May 1, Year 8 To be paid to LAL on March 1, Year 9 To be paid to LAL on March 1, Year 10

$ 6,000,000 10,000,000 8,000,000 $24,000,000

The land is to be turned over to the developers on or about February 1, Year 9, but the sale is to be reported in fiscal Year 8. 5. An additional “contingent profit” will accrue to LAL if the developers earn a return on investment of more than 25% when they re-sell the newly constructed buildings. Leo wants a note to the Year 8 financial statements that describes the probability of a contingent gain. 6. The excess land that was sold to developers was carried on LAL’s books at $1.35 million, on a pro rata cost basis. Leo would like to revalue the remaining land from $5.4 million to about $100 million in the Year 8 financial statements. 7. The golf course has been unprofitable in recent years. However, green fees are to be raised and specific tee-off times will be allotted to a private club, which is currently being organized. of the private club will pay a non-refundable entrance fee of $2,000 per member plus $100 per month for five years. The $2,000 is to be recorded as revenue on receipt. Approximately $350,000 is to be spent to upgrade the club facilities. 8. Leo wants to capitalize all costs of NSL on NSL’s books until it has completed its first year of operations. In addition to the franchise fee, $20 million will have to be spent on the following: Acquisition of player contracts Advertising and promotion Equipment Wages, benefits, and bonuses Other operating costs Less Revenue - ticket sales - other

$12,000,000 1,500,000 3,200,000 6,800,000 3,300,000 26,800,000 (6,000,000) (800,000) $20,000,000

The value of players can change quickly, depending upon their performance, injuries, and other factors. 9. The new sports arena will have private boxes in which a company can entertain groups of clients. The boxes are leased on a five-year contract basis, and they must be occupied for a fixed number of nights at a minimum price per night. To date, 12 boxes have been leased for $15,000 per box for a five-year period, exclusive of nightly charges. A down payment of $3,000 was required; the payments have been recorded as revenue.

(continued)


198


190

CHAPTER 4


EXHIBIT I

(continued )

10. Three senior officers of LAL, including Leo, receive bonuses based on income before income taxes. The three have agreed to have their fiscal Year 8 bonuses accrued in fiscal Year 9 along with their fiscal Year 9 bonuses. Actual payments to them are scheduled for January Year 10. 11. Insurance s on the construction activity that is taking place total $1.4 million in fiscal Year 8, and to date they have been capitalized. 12. A $500,000 fee was paid to a mortgage broker to arrange financing for LAL. This amount has been recorded as “Other assets.” No financing has been arranged to date.

you to discuss the ing issues related to your discussion with Leo. The partner wants a thorough analysis of all important issues as well as for your position. LAL has been and wishes to continue using IFRSs. In your review of documents, and as a result of various conversations, you have learned the following: 1. The arena will be mortgaged, but only for about 50% of its expected cost. Lenders are concerned about the special-use nature of the arena and whether it will be successfully rented for other events such as concerts. 2. The mortgage lenders to LAL and the non-controlling shareholders in NSL are both expected to want to see appraisals and financial statements before deciding whether to invest. Covenants will be required by the lenders to ensure that excessive expenditures are not undertaken and that cash is preserved. 3. Leo does not intend to consolidate NSL until it is profitable. The investment in NSL will be reported on LAL’s financial statements at cost. Thus, LAL’s financial statements will also be used for income tax purposes. 4. LAL’s non-controlling shareholders are not active in the business and want quarterly financial statements in order to monitor progress and assess Leo’s performance. The non-controlling shareholders have all expressed concern over Leo’s growth strategy over the past year. Most are relying on LAL to supplement their income.

Required: Prepare the report. (CICA adapted)

P ROBLEMS Problem 4-1 LO2, 3

The statements of financial position of Pork Co. and Barrel Ltd. on December 31, Year 2, are shown next: Plant and equipment (net) Investment in Barrel Ltd. Inventory s receivable Cash

Pork Co.

Barrel Ltd.

$400,000 329,000 120,000 45,000 22,000 $916,000

$270,000 — 102,000 48,000 60,000 $480,000

(continued)


199


CHAPTER 4


191


Pork Co.

Barrel Ltd.

$260,000 200,000 240,000 216,000 $916,000

$120,000 180,000 108,000 72,000 $480,000

Pork acquired 70% of the outstanding shares of Barrel on December 30, Year 2, for $329,000. Direct costs of the acquisition amounted to $12,000. The carrying amounts of the net assets of Barrel approximated fair values except for plant and equipment, which had a fair value of $320,000.

Required: (a) Prepare a consolidated statement of financial position at December 31, Year 2, under entity theory. (b) Calculate goodwill and non-controlling interest on the consolidated statement of financial position at December 31, Year 2, under parent company extension theory.

Problem 4-2

The balance sheets of Par Ltd. and Sub Ltd. on December 31, Year 1, are as follows:

LO2, 4 Par Ltd.

Sub Ltd.

Cash s receivable Inventory Plant Trademarks

$100,000 25,000 30,000 175,000 — $330,000

$ 2,000 7,000 21,000 51,000 7,000 $88,000


$ 50,000 80,000 110,000 90,000 $330,000

$10,000 20,000 30,000 28,000 $88,000

The fair values of the identifiable net assets of Sub on December 31, Year 1, are as follows: Cash s receivable Inventory Plant Trademarks

Current liabilities Long-term debt Net assets

$

2,000 7,000 26,000 60,000 14,000 109,000

$10,000 19,000

29,000 $ 80,000

Assume that the following took place on January 1, Year 2. (Par acquired the shares with a cash payment to the shareholders of Sub.) Case 1. Par paid $95,000 to acquire all of the common shares of Sub. Case 2. Par paid $76,000 to acquire 80% of the common shares of Sub.


200


192

CHAPTER 4


Case 3. Par paid $80,000 to acquire all of the common shares of Sub. Case 4. Par paid $70,000 to acquire all of the common shares of Sub. Case 5. Par paid $63,000 to acquire 90% of the common shares of Sub.

Required: For each of the five cases, prepare a consolidated balance sheet as at January 1, Year 2.


The balance sheets of Petron Co. and Seeview Co. on June 29, Year 2, were as follows: Petron

Seeview

Cash and receivables Inventory Plant assets (net) Intangible assets

$ 80,000 47,500 190,000 20,000 $337,500

$16,250 7,500 58,750 5,000 $87,500

Current liabilities Long-term debt Common shares Retained earnings (deficit)

$ 52,500 81,250 127,500 76,250 $337,500

$25,000 37,500 38,750 (13,750) $87,500

On June 30, Year 2, Petron Co. purchased 90% of the outstanding shares of Seeview Co. for $40,500 cash. Legal fees involved with the acquisition were an additional $1,000. These two transactions were the only transaction on this date. The carrying amounts of Seeview’s net assets were equal to fair value except for the following: Fair value Inventory Plant assets Intangible assets Long-term debt

$8,750 67,500 7,500 32,500

Seeview has a five-year agreement to supply goods to Bardier. Both Petron and Seeview believe that Bardier will renew the agreement at the end of the current contract. The agreement is between Seeview and Bardier; it cannot be transferred to another company without Seeview’s consent. Seeview does not report any value with respect to this contract on its balance sheet. However, an independent appraiser feels that this contract is worth $10,000.

Required: (a) Assume that Petron Co. is a public entity. Prepare the consolidated balance sheet of Petron Co. on June 30, Year 2. (Round all calculations to the nearest dollar.) (b) Assume that Petron is a private entity, uses ASPE, and chooses to use the equity method to for its investment in Seeview. Prepare Petron’s June 30, Year 2, separate-entity balance sheet after the business combination.


201


CHAPTER 4

Problem 4-4 LO2, 5


193

The balance sheets of Hill Corp. and McGraw Ltd. on December 31, Year 4, were as follows: Hill Corp.

McGraw Ltd.

Cash s receivable Inventory Land Plant and equipment Investment in McGraw Ltd. Goodwill

$

13,000 181,300 117,000 91,000 468,000 288,000 117,000 $1,275,300

$

6,500 45,500 208,000 52,000 377,000 — 39,000 $728,000


$ 156,000 416,000 520,000 183,300 $1,275,300

$104,000 286,000 390,000 (52,000) $728,000

On December 31, Year 4, Hill purchased 80% of the common shares of McGraw for $288,000 plus a commitment to pay an additional $100,000 in 2 years if sales grow by more than 30% over the next two years. An independent business valuator stated that Hill could have paid an extra $40,000 at the date of acquisition instead of agreeing to a potential payment of $100,000 in 2 years. On this date, the inventory of McGraw had a fair value of $214,500, its land had a fair value of $91,000, and its plant and equipment had a fair value of $364,000.

Required: Prepare a consolidated balance sheet as at December 31, Year 4.

Problem 4-5 LO2

On December 31, Year 2, Blue purchased a percentage of the outstanding ordinary shares of Joy. On this date all but two categories of Joy’s identifiable assets and liabilities had fair values equal to carrying amounts. Following are the statements of financial position of Blue Ltd. and Joy Corp. on December 31, Year 2 subsequent to the acquisition. Blue Ltd.

Joy Corp.

Plant and equipment Accumulated amortization Investment in Joy Corp. Inventory s receivable Cash

$ 640,000 (200,000) 424,000 105,000 78,000 17,000 $1,064,000

$430,000 (110,000) — 220,000 35,000 5,000 $580,000


$ 422,000 224,000 250,000 168,000 $1,064,000

$300,000 (40,000) 240,000 80,000 $580,000


202


194

CHAPTER 4


Below is the consolidated statement of financial position for Blue at December 31, Year 2. BLUE LTD. CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION December 31, Year 2 Plant and equipment Accumulated amortization Goodwill Inventory s receivable Cash

$1,060,000 (200,000) 150,000 345,000 113,000 22,000 $1,490,000

Ordinary shares Retained earnings Non-controlling interest Long-term debt Current liabilities

$ 422,000 224,000 106,000 490,000 248,000 $1,490,000

Required: (a) From the information provided, determine the percentage of Joy’s ordinary shares purchased by Blue on December 31, Year 2. (b) Which of Joy’s assets or liabilities had fair values that were not equal to their carrying amounts at acquisition? Calculate the fair value of each of these assets at December 31, Year 2.

Problem 4-6

The balance sheets of E Ltd. and J Ltd. on December 30, Year 6, were as follows:

LO1, 2, 3, 4, 6 E Ltd.

J Ltd.

Cash and receivables Inventory Plant assets (net) Intangible assets

$ 96,000 57,000 228,000 24,000 $405,000

$ 19,500 9,000 70,500 6,000 $105,000

Current liabilities Long-term debt Common shares Retained earnings (deficit)

$ 63,000 97,500 153,000 91,500 $405,000

$ 30,000 45,000 46,500 (16,500) $105,000

On December 31, Year 6, E Ltd. issued 350 shares, with a fair value of $40 each, for 70% of the outstanding shares of J Ltd. Costs involved in the acquisition, paid in cash, were as follows: Costs of arranging the acquisition Costs of issuing shares

$2,500 1,600 $4,100


203


CHAPTER 4


195

The carrying amounts of J Ltd.’s net assets were equal to fair values on this date except for the following: Fair value Plant assets Long-term debt

$65,000 40,000

E Ltd. was identified as the acquirer in the combination.

Required: (a) Prepare the consolidated balance sheet of E Ltd. on December 31, Year 6, under each of the following: (i) (ii) (iii) (iv)

Proprietary theory Parent company theory Parent company extension theory Entity theory

(b) Calculate the current ratio and debt-to-equity ratio for E Ltd. under the four different theories. Explain which theory shows the strongest liquidity and solvency position and which method best reflects the true financial condition of the company.

Problem 4-7 LO1, 2, 3, 6

On December 31, Year 1, P Company purchased 80% of the outstanding shares of S Company for $6,960 cash. The statements of financial position of the two companies immediately after the acquisition transaction appear below. P Company Book value

S Company Book value Fair value

Plant and equipment (net) Investment in S Company Inventory s receivable Cash

$ 8,100 6,960 5,160 3,150 1,500 $24,870

$ 6,900 — 3,750 1,800 1,050 $13,500

Ordinary shares Retained earnings Long-term liabilities Other current liabilities s payable

$10,500 8,370 4,200 1,200 600 $24,870

$ 3,000 6,000 2,000 1,800 700 $13,500

$6,000 3,900 1,800 1,050

2,000 1,800 700

Required: (a) Prepare a consolidated statement of financial position at the date of acquisition under each of the following: (i) Proprietary theory (ii) Parent company theory (iii) Parent company extension theory (iv) Entity theory


204


196

CHAPTER 4


(b) Calculate the current ratio and debt-to-equity ratio for P Company under the four different theories. Explain which theory shows the strongest liquidity and solvency position and which method best reflects the true financial condition of the company.

Problem 4-8 LO2

On January 1, Year 5, Black Corp. purchased 90% of the common shares of Whyte Inc. On this date, the following differences were observed with regard to specific net assets of Whyte: Fair value – carrying amount differences Land Buildings (net) Equipment (net) Notes payable

1 50,000 1 20,000 2 10,000 1 5,000

The non-consolidated and consolidated balance sheets of Black Corp. on January 1, Year 5, are presented below. Whyte’s retained earnings were $140,000 on this date. Non-consolidated

Consolidated

Cash s receivable Inventory Investment in Whyte Land Buildings (net) Equipment (net) Goodwill

$

36,000 116,000 144,000 292,500 210,000 640,000 308,000 — $1,746,500

$

s payable Notes payable Common shares Retained earnings Non-controlling interest

$

$

88,000 507,500 380,000 771,000 — $1,746,500

52,000 168,000 234,000 — 280,000 720,000 338,000 50,000 $1,842,000

96,000 562,500 380,000 771,000 32,500 $1,842,000

Required: Prepare the January 1, Year 5, balance sheet of Whyte Inc.

Problem 4-9 LO2

The balance sheets of Percy Corp. and Saltz Ltd. on December 31, Year 10, are shown below: Percy

Saltz

Cash s receivable Inventory Plant Accumulated amortization Trademarks—net

$200,000 50,000 60,000 475,000 (125,000) — $660,000

$

4,000 14,000 42,000 192,000 (90,000) 14,000 $176,000


$100,000 160,000 220,000 180,000 $660,000

$ 20,000 40,000 60,000 56,000 $176,000


205


CHAPTER 4

197


The fair values of the identifiable net assets of Saltz Ltd. on December 31, Year 10, were as follows: Cash s receivable Inventory Plant Trademarks Current liabilities Long-term debt Net assets

$

4,000 14,000 52,000 120,000 28,000 218,000

$20,000 38,000

58,000 $160,000

In addition to the assets identified above, Saltz owned a taxi licence in the City of Moose Jaw. This licence expires in 9 years. These licenses are selling in the open market at approximately $40,000. On January 1, Year 11, Percy Corp paid $175,000 in cash to acquire 7,000 (70%) of the common shares of Saltz Ltd. Saltz’s shares were trading for $20 per share just after the acquisition by Percy.

Required: Prepare the consolidated balance sheet on January 1, Year 11.

Problem 4-10 LO2, 3

The balance sheets of Prima Ltd. and Donna Corp. on December 31, Year 5, are shown below: Prima

Donna

Cash s receivable Inventory Plant Patents

$ 370,000 80,000 96,000 510,000 100,000 $1,156,000

$

6,400 22,400 67,200 163,200 22,400 $281,600


$ 160,000 256,000 352,000 388,000 $1,156,000

$ 32,000 64,000 96,000 89,600 $281,600

The fair values of the identifiable net assets of Donna Corp. on this date are as follows: Cash s receivable Inventory Plant Trademarks Patents Current liabilities Long-term debt

$ 6,400 20,000 85,000 192,000 30,000 60,000 32,000 70,000

In addition to the assets identified above, Donna owned a significant number of Internet domain names, which are unique alphanumeric names that are used to identify a particular numeric Internet address. These domain names can be sold separately and are estimated to be worth $50,000.


206


198

CHAPTER 4


On January 1, Year 6, Prima Ltd. paid $351,000 in cash to acquire 90% of the common shares of Donna Corp.

Required: (a) Prepare the consolidated balance sheet on January 1, Year 6, under entity theory. (b) Now assume that an independent business valuator valued the NCI at $35,000 at the date of acquisition. What s on the consolidated balance would change, and at what amount would they be reported? (c) Assume that Prima is a private entity, uses ASPE, and chooses to use the cost method to for its investment in Donna. Prepare Prima’s January 1, Year 6, separate-entity balance sheet after the business combination.


On January 1, Year 5, FLA Company issued 6,300 ordinary shares to purchase 9,000 ordinary shares of MES Company. Prior to the acquisition, FLA had 180,000 and MES had 10,000 ordinary shares outstanding, which were trading at $5 and $3 per share, respectively. The following information has been assembled for these two companies just prior to the acquisition: FLA Company Carrying amount Plant assets Current assets

$ 60,000 40,000 $100,000


$ 30,000 35,000 15,000 20,000 $100,000

MES Company

Fair value

Carrying amount

Fair value

$70,000 47,500

$20,000 10,000 $30,000

$25,000 11,200

19,000 20,000

$10,000 12,500 2,500 5,000 $30,000

3,200 5,000

Required: (a) Prepare a consolidated statement of financial position for FLA Company and its non–wholly owned subsidiary at January 1, Year 5, under each of the following: (i) (ii) (iii) (iv)

Proprietary theory Parent company theory Parent company extension theory Entity theory

(b) Which of the above theories is required under IFRS 3?

Problem 4-12 LO2

The condensed financial statements for OIL Inc. and ERS Company for the year ended December 31, Year 5, follow:

Revenues Expenses Net income

OIL

ERS

$ 900,000 660,000 $ 240,000

$ 300,000 200,000 $ 100,000

(continued)


207


CHAPTER 4


199

OIL

ERS

Retained earnings, 1/1/Year 5 Net income Dividends paid Retained earnings, 12/31/Year 5

$ 800,000 240,000 90,000 $ 950,000

$ 200,000 100,000 0 $ 300,000

Cash Receivables and inventory Patented technology (net) Equipment (net) Total assets

$

80,000 400,000 900,000 700,000 $2,080,000

$ 110,000 170,000 300,000 600,000 $1,180,000

Liabilities Common shares Retained earnings Total liabilities and equities

$ 600,000 530,000 950,000 $2,080,000

$ 410,000 470,000 300,000 $1,180,000

On December 31, Year 5, after the above figures were prepared, OIL issued $240,000 in debt and 12,000 new shares to the owners of ERS for 80% of the outstanding shares of that company. OIL shares had a fair value of $40 per share. OIL also paid $30,000 to a broker for arranging the transaction. In addition, OIL paid $32,000 in stock issuance costs. ERS’s equipment was actually worth $690,000, but its patented technology was appraised at only $280,000.

Required: What are the consolidated balances for the year ended/at December 31, Year 5, for the following s? (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h)

Problem 4-13 LO2

Net income Retained earnings, 1/1/Year 5 Equipment Patented technology Goodwill Liabilities Common shares Non-controlling interests

The July 31, Year 3, balance sheets of two companies that are parties to a business combination are as follows: Ravinder Corp.

Robin Inc.

Carrying amount

Carrying amount

Fair value

Current assets Plant and equipment Accumulated depreciation Patents—net

$1,600,000 1,330,000 (250,000) — $2,680,000

$ 420,000 1,340,000 (500,000) — $1,260,000

$468,000 972,000


$1,360,000 480,000 720,000 120,000 $2,680,000

$ 252,000 360,000 168,000 480,000 $1,260,000

252,000 384,000

72,000


208


200

CHAPTER 4


In addition to the assets identified above, Ravinder Corp. attributed a value of $100,000 to a major research project that Robin Inc. was working on. Robin Inc. feels that it is within a year of developing a prototype for a state-of-the-art biomedical device. If this device can ever be patented, it could be worth hundreds of thousands of dollars. Effective on August 1, Year 3, the shareholders of Robin Inc. accepted an offer from Ravinder Corp. to purchase 80% of their common shares for $1,040,000 in cash. Ravinder Corp.’s legal fees for investigating and drawing up the share purchase agreement amounted to $25,000.

Required: (a) Prepare the journal entries in the records of Ravinder Corp. to record the share acquisition and cost of legal fees. (b) Prepare a schedule to calculate and allocate the acquisition differential. Explain the rationale for the ing treatment of the $100,000 attributed to the research project. (c) Prepare Ravinder Corp.’s consolidated balance sheet as at August 1, Year 3. Assume there were no transactions on this date other than the transactions described above.

WEB -BASED P ROBLEMS Web Problem 4-1 LO2, 3, 6

When ing for the acquisition of a non–wholly owned subsidiary, the parent can use entity theory or parent company extension theory to for the business combination. Access the 2011 consolidated financial statements for BCE Inc. by going to investor’s relations section of the company’s website. Answer the questions below for 2011. Round percentages to one decimal point and other ratios to two decimal points. For each question, indicate where in the financial statements you found the answer, and/or provide a brief explanation. (a) Which theory of consolidation is used to value non-controlling interest at the date of acquisition? (b) What portion of the additions to property, plant, and equipment during the year came from business combinations, and what portion came from direct purchases? (c) What percentage of shareholders’ equity at the end of the year pertains to non-controlling interests? (d) How were costs directly attributable to the business combination ed for? (e) Were any of the subsidiaries controlled, even though the percentage ownership was equal to or less than 50%? If so, what explanation was provided to explain how control was achieved with ownership of 50% or less? (f) Assume that the company used the other acceptable theory of consolidation for valuing non-controlling interest and that the fair value of the subsidiary as a whole was greater than the fair value of the identifiable net assets at the date of acquisition. How would this change in theory affect the debt-to-equity ratio at the date of acquisition?


CHAPTER 4

Web Problem 4-2 LO2, 3, 6


209

201

Access the 2011 consolidated financial statements for Barrick Gold Corporation by going to investor’s relations section of the company’s website. Answer the same questions as in Problem 1. For each question, indicate where in the financial statements you found the answer, and/or provide a brief explanation. (Some questions may not be applicable.)



210


5 chapter

Consolidation Subsequent to Acquisition Date learning objectives After studying this chapter, you should be able to do the following for consolidations subsequent to the date of acquisition: LO1 Perform impairment tests on property, plant, equipment, intangible assets, and goodwill.

LO2 Prepare schedules to allocate and amortize the acquisition differential on both an annual and a cumulative basis. LO3 Prepare consolidated financial statements using the entity theory subsequent to the date of acquisition. LO4 Prepare consolidated financial statements using parent company extension theory subsequent to the date of acquisition.

LO5 Prepare journal entries and calculate balance in the investment under the equity method. LO6 Analyze and interpret financial statements involving consolidations subsequent to the date of acquisition. LO7 Identify some of the differences between IFRSs and ASPE involving consolidations subsequent to the date of acquisition.

INTRODUCTION In Chapters 3 and 4, we discussed and illustrated the preparation of a consolidated balance sheet immediately after a parent company gained control over a subsidiary. We saw that the acquisition differential was allocated to identifiable assets and liabilities when the fair values were different than carrying amounts, and the excess was recognized as goodwill. In this chapter, we will see that the acquisition differential must be amortized and tested for impairment when preparing consolidated financial statements subsequent to the date of acquisition. The impairment testing can result in huge impairment losses. Some of the more significant losses in recent years were as follows: • Manulife Financial Corporation, one of Canada’s largest life insurance companies, reported a goodwill impairment loss of $2.3 billion in 2010 attributable to the U.S. Life Insurance, U.S. Variable Annuity and Fixed Products, and Canadian Individual Life cash-generating units. • Bell Aliant Regional Communications Inc. is one of Canada’s largest telecommunications providers. It provides telephone services primarily in Ontario, Quebec, and Atlantic Canada. In 2010, it reported a $1.7 billion loss attributable to a decline in value of customer relationships, a finite life intangible asset. 202


211


CHAPTER 5

Consolidation Subsequent to Acquisition Date

• The biggest impairment loss in Canadian history was the goodwill impairment loss of $12.1 billion reported by Nortel Networks in 2001. Nortel was Canada’s largest public company in of market capitalization at the time. In this chapter, we will prepare the consolidated income statement, retained earnings statement, and balance sheet at fiscal year-ends after the date of acquisition. The consolidated cash flow statement will be discussed in a later chapter. We will start by looking at how the parent s for its investment in its own internal records.

203

Some Canadian companies have reported substantial impairment losses on goodwill and other intangible assets.

METHODS OF ING FOR AN INVESTMENT IN A SUBSIDIARY For a parent company, there are two methods available to for an investment in a subsidiary in its own internal ing records in periods subsequent to the date of acquisition: the cost method and the equity method. The cost and equity methods of ing for various types of equity investments were discussed in Chapter 2. While this chapter is concerned with control investments (requiring consolidation), the ing concepts involved with the cost and equity methods are identical to those presented in Chapter 2. These concepts will be applied in this chapter and in the ones that follow. The key difference is that here they are discussed in relation to the preparation of consolidated financial statements, whereas earlier the emphasis was on the presentation in an investor’s unconsolidated financial statements for external s. The cost method is a method of ing for investments whereby the investment is initially recorded at cost; income from the subsidiary is recognized in net income when the investor’s right to receive a dividend is established. This usually occurs when the dividend is declared. IAS 28 defines the equity method as a method of ing whereby the investment is initially recognized at cost and adjusted thereafter for the postacquisition change in the investor’s share of net assets of the investee. The profit or loss of the investor includes the investor’s share of the profit or loss of the investee. Distributions received from an investee reduce the carrying amount of the investment. Adjustments to the carrying amount may also be necessary for changes in the investor’s proportionate interest in the investee’s other comprehensive income. Such changes include those arising from the revaluation of property, plant, and equipment and from foreign-exchange translation differences. The investor’s share of those changes is recognized in other comprehensive income. The cost method is the simpler of the two methods because, typically, the only entry made by the parent each year is to record, as income, its pro rata share of dividends declared by the subsidiary. Occasionally, there may be an entry to record an impairment loss on the investment. IAS 28 states that the concepts underlying the procedures used in ing for the acquisition of a subsidiary are also adopted in ing for the acquisition of an investment in an associate, which is reported using the equity method. This means that the types of adjustments made for consolidation purposes will also be made under the equity method. For this reason, the equity method is often referred to as the “one-line consolidation.” If used fully and correctly for an investment in a subsidiary, the net income, other comprehensive income, and retained earnings under the equity method on the internal records of the parent will be equal to net income, other comprehensive income, and retained earnings

The cost and equity methods are used in the parent’s own internal records for ing for investments in subsidiaries.

The cost method records income when the investor’s right to receive a dividend is established.

The equity method captures the investor’s share of any changes to the investee’s shareholders’ equity.


212


204

CHAPTER 5

The equity method captures the net effect of any adjustments that would be made on the consolidated financial statements.

We must differentiate between ing in the internal records and reporting in the external financial statements.

An entity could issue nonconsolidated financial statements to external s in addition to consolidated financial statements.


attributable to the parent’s shareholders on the parent’s consolidated financial statements. The only difference is that the consolidated financial statements incorporate the subsidiary’s values on a line-by-line basis, whereas the equity method incorporates the net amount of the subsidiary’s values on one line (investment in the subsidiary) on the balance sheet and, typically, on one line (investment income from the subsidiary) on the income statement. As we will see later in this chapter, the acquisition differential must be amortized or written off over the useful lives of the related assets. The consolidated financial statements must be adjusted to reflect the amortization and/or impairment. In Chapters 6 and 7, we will make consolidation adjustments to eliminate unrealized profits from intercompany transactions. When the parent uses the equity method to for its investment in the subsidiary, the net effect of the aforementioned consolidation adjustments must be processed through the investment and investment income s on the parent’s internal records. It is very important that we differentiate between the internal ing records and the financial statements for external s. Each entity maintains its own internal ing records; that is, a general ledger ed by various subledgers. In the internal records for the parent, there will be an investment in subsidiary , which will be ed for using the cost, equity, or fair value method. Since the parent controls the subsidiary, it will prepare consolidated financial statements for distribution to its external s. The consolidated financial statements will be ed by a worksheet or set of working papers. In addition to the consolidated financial statements, the parent could also prepare nonconsolidated financial statements for its external s. In this text, we will refer to these nonconsolidated financial statements as separate-entity financial statements, which may or may not be prepared in accordance with IFRSs. Since income tax is assessed in Canada at a separate-entity level, a Canadian company must prepare nonconsolidated statements for the Canada Revenue Agency.1 Since dividends received and investment income pertaining to a subsidiary are not usually taxable for income tax purposes, this income will have to be reversed when calculating taxable income. Accordingly, the income tax authorities are indifferent as to whether the parent uses the cost method or the equity method on its separate-entity financial statements. In fact, the statements given to the tax authorities may be prepared using tax laws rather than IFRSs. When a bank or other external wants to receive nonconsolidated statements, it may insist that they be prepared in accordance with IFRSs. If so, IAS 27 requires that the investment in subsidiary on the separate-entity financial statements be reported at cost or in accordance with IFRS 9. The following diagram shows the interrelationships between the various records and financial statements:

P 1 3

S 2


CHAPTER 5


Each circle represents a different set of records/financial statements. The triangle indicates the number given to the set of records/financial statements—the parent’s set is number 1, the subsidiary’s set is number 2, and the consolidated set is number 3. In the first part of this chapter, the parent will be using the cost method on set number 1. At the end of this chapter, we will show the entries if the parent had used the equity method in its internal records. The adjustments on consolidation will be different, depending on whether the parent uses the cost method or the equity method on set 1. However, the consolidated financial statements will look exactly the same regardless of whether the parent used the cost method or the equity method in its internal records. The parent can choose any method to for its investment for internal purposes. In most cases, it will use the cost method because it is simple and involves little effort. However, if the entity wants to capture its share of the income earned by the subsidiary without having to prepare consolidated financial statements, the equity method should be used. Since comprehensive income under the equity method should be equal to consolidated comprehensive income attributable to the parent’s shareholders, the results from the equity method should be compared with the consolidated financial statements to ensure that no errors have been made. In the end, it is a cost-benefit decision. The equity method should be used for internal purposes only if the benefits derived from the information provided exceed the extra cost involved in using this method.

213

205

Consolidated net income will be the same regardless of whether the parent used the cost method or the equity method for its internal ing records.

CONSOLIDATED INCOME AND RETAINED EARNINGS STATEMENTS Before examining the details for preparing consolidated income and retained earnings statements,2 it is useful to outline the overall consolidation process. Just as a consolidated balance sheet is prepared basically by combining, on an item-by-item basis, the assets and liabilities of the parent and the subsidiary, the consolidated statement of comprehensive income is prepared by combining, on an item-by-item basis, the revenues, expenses, and other comprehensive income of the two companies. The parent’s investment does not appear on the consolidated balance sheet, and some of the subsidiary’s assets and liabilities are remeasured to reflect the fair values used in the consolidation process. In a similar manner, the parent’s investment income from its subsidiary does not appear on the consolidated statement of comprehensive income, and some of the revenues and expenses of the subsidiary are remeasured to reflect the amortizations and impairments of the fair values being used in the consolidated balance sheet. Except for the eliminations and adjustments that are required, the whole consolidation process is basically one of combining the components of financial statements. No preparation is required for the consolidated retained earnings statement when the parent has used the equity method because, as previously mentioned, the parent’s retained earnings reported in its internal records under the equity method should be equal to consolidated retained earnings. We commence our discussion of the preparation of the consolidated income statement by describing the make-up of the bottom line, consolidated

The investment income from subsidiary is replaced by the subsidiary’s revenues and expenses on a line-by-line basis.


214


206

CHAPTER 5


net income. Consolidated net income for any fiscal period is made up of the following: The amortization of the acquisition differential is reflected on the consolidated financial statements—not on the subsidiary’s financial statements.

The acquisition differential is amortized or written off on consolidation as if the parent had purchased these net assets directly.

The parent’s separate-entity retained earnings ed for under the equity method should always be equal to consolidated retained earnings.

The net income of the parent from its own operations (i.e., excluding any income resulting from its investment in the subsidiary) plus: the net income of the subsidiary less: the amortization and impairment of the acquisition differential equals: consolidated net income Attributable to Shareholders of parent company Non-controlling interest

$ XXX XXX (XXX) $ XXX

$ XXX XXX

It is important to note the distinction between consolidated net income and consolidated net income attributable to the shareholders of the parent company. Consolidated net income includes the combined income of the parent and subsidiary, plus or minus consolidation adjustments. Consolidated net income attributable to the shareholders of the parent company is the parent’s shareholders’ share of consolidated net income. It is the latter amount that is recorded by the parent when the parent uses the equity method for its own internal records. Assume that a 100%-owned subsidiary was purchased at carrying amount (i.e., no acquisition differential and no fair value–carrying amount differences). Consolidated net income will be made up of the sum of the parent’s and the subsidiary’s net incomes. If the subsidiary was purchased at a price greater than carrying amount, the subsidiary’s net income from its separate-entity financial statements will not be correct from a consolidated point of view because the subsidiary’s expenses have not been measured using amortizations of the fair values being used in the consolidated balance sheet. Therefore, the third component—the amortization and impairment of the acquisition differential—must be deducted in determining consolidated net income. The acquisition differential is allocated to remeasure the assets and liabilities of the subsidiary at fair value for consolidation purposes. It must be amortized or written off for consolidation purposes to reflect the use, impairment, or sale of the underlying net assets. The amount amortized or written off is calculated in the same way as if these items were owned directly by the parent. The acquisition differential related to long-term assets with definite useful lives (such as buildings, equipment, and patents) is amortized over the useful lives of these assets. Inventory is not amortized but is reflected on the income statement as cost of goods sold expense when it is sold. The amount allocated to land is not amortized; it is incorporated in the calculation of the gain or loss and recognized on the income statement only when it is sold or impaired. Goodwill and certain other intangible assets are also not amortized, but, instead, a loss is reflected on the income statement when a test indicates that they are impaired. Testing for impairment is explained in more detail in the following section. Consolidated retained earnings on the date of acquisition are the parent’s retained earnings only. Subsequent to acquisition, consolidated retained earnings reflect the parent’s shareholders’ share of the combined operations. The NCI’s share of the combined operations is reflected in the NCI , which is a separate within the shareholders’ equity section of the consolidated balance sheet. The changes in consolidated retained earnings subsequent to acquisition consist of the yearly consolidated net incomes attributable to the


CHAPTER 5


215

207

parent, less the yearly dividends declared by the parent. The changes in NCI subsequent to acquisition consist of the yearly consolidated net incomes attributable to the NCI, less the dividends paid by the subsidiary to the NCI. Dividends paid or declared by a subsidiary company to the parent do not appear on the consolidated statements because they do not change the financial position of the combined entity. This is an example of an intercompany transaction that must be eliminated when preparing consolidated financial statements. Intercompany transactions are discussed and illustrated in much more detail in Chapter 6.

TESTING GOODWILL AND OTHER ASSETS FOR IMPAIRMENT Prior to July 1, 2001, pre-change-over GAAP required that all long-term tangible and intangible assets, except for land, had to be amortized over their estimated useful life, which could not exceed 40 years. This resulted in substantial reductions to reported earnings due to yearly amortization of goodwill and other intangible assets, even though these assets may have been increasing in value and/or had indefinite useful lives. On July 1, 2001, new rules were introduced. They provided more practical guidelines for the recognition and measurement of intangibles other than goodwill, and, in addition, replaced the annual amortization of goodwill and other assets with indefinite lives with periodic reviews for impairment. In addition, extensive guidelines were provided for the impairment testing of all long-lived assets, including intangibles. In 2011, the impairment test for long-term tangible and intangible assets changed with the adoption of IFRSs. Now, IAS 36: Impairment of Assets applies to all assets, unless they are specifically excluded because of a requirement in another standard. IAS 36 prescribes the procedures that an entity applies to ensure that its assets are carried at no more than their recoverable amount. It indicates that an asset, a group of assets, or a cash-generating unit should be written down if its carrying amount exceeds the amount to be recovered through use or sale of the asset. The write-down is called an impairment loss and is reported in net income, unless the asset is carried at a revalued amount in accordance with another standard such as the revaluation model in IAS 16. In certain cases, the revaluation loss would be reported in other comprehensive income. Recoverable amount is defined as the higher of fair value less costs of disposal and value in use. Fair value is defined as the price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date (i.e., an exit price). It would reflect the highest and best use for nonfinancial assets. It can be determined by using quoted market prices, if available, or by making comparisons with the prices of other similar assets. Value in use is the present value of the future cash flows expected to be derived from the asset or group of assets. It may not be necessary to measure both fair value less costs of disposal and value in use when testing for impairment. If it is determined that one of these values is higher than the carrying amount, then the asset is not impaired and the other value need not be determined. Sometimes, it will not be possible to determine fair value less costs of disposal because there is no basis for making a reliable estimate of the amount obtainable from the sale of the asset in an orderly transaction. In this case, the entity may use the asset’s value in use as its

LO1

Starting in 2001, goodwill and certain intangible assets were no longer amortized but tested for impairment on an annual basis.

An asset is impaired if its carrying amount exceeds its recoverable amount.

Recoverable amount is the higher of fair value less costs of disposal and value in use.


216


208

CHAPTER 5

It is possible for an asset not to be impaired at the subsidiary level but to be impaired at the consolidated level.


recoverable amount. When an asset is being held for disposal, most of its value in use will consist of the net disposal proceeds to be received in the near term, and future cash flows from continuing use of the asset until its disposal are likely to be negligible. In this situation, the fair value less costs of disposal would be very similar to value in use, and it would be unnecessary to explicitly determine a value in use. Impairment testing requires the estimation of future net cash flows (cash inflows less cash outflows) associated with an individual asset. In many instances, it is impossible to associate cash flows with a single asset, and so the standard suggests that it should be accomplished with a cash-generating unit, which is defined as the smallest identifiable group of assets that generates cash inflows that are largely independent of the cash inflows from other assets or groups of assets. In the ensuing discussion on impairment testing, any reference to an individual asset is equally applicable to an individual asset or a cash-generating unit. In this chapter, we will discuss impairment at the level of the consolidated financial statements. Although the principles of impairment testing are the same, whether it is applied at the consolidated level or at the separate-entity level, the results could be different. For example, a subsidiary could determine that there is no impairment of its assets based on the carrying amounts used in its separate-entity statements. Since the values used on the consolidated statements are often reported at a higher amount than the separate-entity statements because of the acquisition differential, there could be impairment at the consolidated level. IAS 36 has different requirements for impairment testing for the following types of assets: • Property, plant, equipment, and intangible assets with definite useful lives • Intangible assets with indefinite useful lives or not yet available for use • Cash-generating units and goodwill We will discuss these three different groups separately in the following sections.

Property, Plant, Equipment, and Intangible Assets with Definite Useful Lives The recoverable amount needs to be determined only if indicators exist that the asset may be impaired.

Property (except for land with an unlimited useful life), plant, equipment, and intangible assets with definite useful lives should be amortized over their useful lives. At the end of each reporting period, there is a two-step approach to determining whether an impairment loss should be reported. In step 1, the entity assesses whether indicators exist that an asset may be impaired. If, in the preparer’s judgment, any such indicators exist, then step 2 must be performed and the recoverable amount must be determined. If no indicators exist, then it is not necessary to perform step 2. In step 2, the recoverable amount is determined and compared with the asset’s carrying amount. If the recoverable amount is greater than the carrying amount, no impairment exists and the asset is reported at the carrying amount. If the recoverable amount is less than the carrying amount, impairment exists and the asset is written down to its recoverable amount.


217


CHAPTER 5


209

The following factors should be considered at a minimum when assessing whether there is an indication of impairment: External Factors

Internal Factors

An asset’s market value has declined significantly.

There is evidence of obsolescence or physical damage of an asset.

Significant adverse changes in the technological, market, economic, or legal environment of the entity have occurred.

There have been significant adverse changes in how an asset is used or expected to be used.

A significant increase in market rates of return has occurred that will cause a reduction to value in use.

Evidence has arisen that the economic performance of an asset is, or will be, worse than expected.

The carrying amount of the net assets of the entity is more than its market capitalization.

The carrying amount of the investment in subsidiary in the separate-entity financial statements exceeds the carrying amounts in the consolidated financial statements of the investee’s net assets, including associated goodwill.

Internal and external factors are considered when assessing if there is an indication that the asset may be impaired.

The dividend from the subsidiary exceeds the total comprehensive income of the subsidiary.

Intangible Assets with Indefinite Useful Lives Intangible assets with indefinite3 useful lives are not amortized but must be assessed for impairment on an annual basis, regardless of whether there is any indication that it may be impaired. In other words, step 1 as mentioned in the previous section is ignored and step 2 must be performed. This same requirement is applied to an intangible asset that is not yet available for use. This impairment test may be performed at any time during an annual period, provided it is performed at the same time every year. Different intangible assets may be tested for impairment at different times. However, if such an intangible asset was initially recognized during the current annual period, that intangible asset must be tested for impairment before the end of the current annual period. In exceptional circumstances, the entity can use the recoverable amount from a preceding period rather than determine a new recoverable amount this period. This cost-saving measure may be used, provided all of the following criteria are met: (a) If the intangible asset does not generate cash inflows from continuing use that are largely independent of those from other assets or groups of assets, and is therefore tested for impairment as part of the cash-generating unit to which it belongs, the assets and liabilities making up that unit have not changed significantly since the most recent recoverable amount calculation. (b) The most recent recoverable amount calculation resulted in an amount that exceeded the asset’s carrying amount by a substantial margin. (c) Based on an analysis of events that have occurred and circumstances that have changed since the most recent recoverable amount calculation, the likelihood that a current recoverable amount determination would be less than the asset’s carrying amount is remote.

An intangible asset that is not subject to amortization is tested for impairment annually (step 2).

When certain criteria are met, the recoverable amount from a preceding period can be used rather than determining a new recoverable amount for the current year.


218


210

CHAPTER 5


Cash-Generating Units and Goodwill Goodwill is tested for impairment annually at the cash-generating unit level.

Cash-generating units that have goodwill assigned to them must be assessed for impairment on an annual basis, and more frequently if there is an indication that the unit may be impaired. In identifying individual cash-generating units, the entity must consider whether the cash inflows from an asset (or group of assets) are largely independent of the cash inflows from other assets (or groups of assets). Various factors should be considered, such as how management monitors the entity’s operations—that is, by product lines, businesses, individual locations, districts, or regional areas—or by how management makes decisions about continuing or disposing of the entity’s assets and operations. Each unit or group of units to which the goodwill is so allocated shall (a) represent the lowest level within the entity at which the goodwill is monitored for internal management purposes; and (b) not be larger than an operating segment determined in accordance with IFRS 8: Operating Segments.4 The following example from IAS 36 illustrates the application of this requirement:

Cautionary Note: Unless otherwise noted, the examples used in the body of the text and in the endof-chapter material will assume that goodwill is assessed for impairment at the level of the entity as a whole. When information is available to test for impairment at lower levels, then the tests should be performed at the lower level.

Any impairment loss for a CGU is applied first to goodwill and then to other assets.

A bus company provides services under contract with a municipality that requires minimum service on each of five separate routes. Assets devoted to each route and the cash flows from each route can be identified separately. One of the routes operates at a significant loss. Because the entity does not have the option to curtail any one bus route, the lowest level of identifiable cash inflows that are largely independent of the cash inflows from other assets or groups of assets is the cash inflows generated by the five routes together. Therefore, the individual bus routes cannot be identified as cash generating units. The company as a whole is identified as the cash-generating unit. To test goodwill for impairment, the recoverable amount for the subsidiary as a whole is compared with the carrying amount of the subsidiary’s assets and liabilities, including goodwill. If the recoverable amount exceeds the carrying amount, goodwill is not impaired. If the recoverable amount is less than the carrying amount, an impairment loss should be recognized and should be allocated to reduce the carrying amount of the assets in the following order: (a) First, to reduce the carrying amount of any goodwill (b) Then, to the other assets of the unit pro rata on the basis of the carrying amount of each asset The following example illustrates the goodwill impairment test when the subsidiary as a whole is identified as the cash-generating unit: On January 1, Year 1, P Co. acquired 100% of S Co. for $1,000. At the date of acquisition, $900 was assigned to identifiable net assets and $100 was recognized as goodwill. At the end of Year 1, the carrying amount of S Co.’s net assets was $950, including the goodwill of $100. Since S Co is now wholly owned by P Co., the shares of S are not being traded and a market value is not readily available. Therefore, the recoverable amount for S Co. at the end of Year 1 is based on the present value of future cash flows.


219


CHAPTER 5


211

The following table shows the goodwill impairment test under three different scenarios:

Recoverable amount Carrying amount Total impairment Goodwill impairment loss Impairment of other assets Goodwill before impairment Goodwill after impairment

#1

#2

#3

995 950 n/a n/a n/a 100 100

945 950 5 5 n/a 100 95

840 950 110 100 10 100 0

Appendix 5A provides further details of the tests for goodwill impairment and illustrations of goodwill impairment in more complex situations.

Reversing an Impairment Loss An impairment loss recognized in a prior period for an asset or cash-generating unit can be reversed under certain conditions. However, an impairment loss recognized for goodwill cannot be reversed in a subsequent period. A two-step process for reversing an impairment loss is followed, similar to the process followed for the initial recognition of impairment losses. In step 1, an entity assesses whether there is any indication that an impairment loss may no longer exist or may have decreased. If any such indication exists, then step 2 must be performed and the recoverable amount determined. If no such indication exists, it is not necessary to perform step 2. Indications of a potential decrease in an impairment loss are basically the same as those of a potential impairment loss, which were described earlier. If there is an indication that an impairment loss may no longer exist or may have decreased, this may signal that the remaining useful life, the depreciation method, or the residual value may need to be reviewed and adjusted in accordance with the IFRS applicable to the asset, even if no impairment loss is reversed for the asset. An impairment loss shall be reversed if, and only if, there has been a change in the estimates used to determine the asset’s recoverable amount. An impairment loss is not reversed when the recoverable amount increases strictly due to the age of time; that is, the present value of future cash inflows increases as they become closer to occurring. The reversal of an impairment loss is reported in net income unless the asset is carried at a revalued amount in accordance with another standard (e.g., in accordance with the revaluation model in IAS 16). The assets should not be written up to an amount exceeding the carrying amount that would have been determined had no impairment loss been recognized for the asset in prior years. A reversal of an impairment loss for a cash-generating unit must be allocated to the assets of the unit pro rata with the carrying amount of those assets. However, an asset should never be reduced to less than its recoverable amount. An impairment loss relating to goodwill must not be reversed. Any increase in the recoverable amount of goodwill is likely to be an increase in internally generated goodwill, rather than a reversal of the impairment loss recognized for the acquired goodwill. IAS 38 prohibits the recognition of internally generated goodwill.

Impairment losses on assets other than goodwill can be reversed.

The asset cannot be written up to an amount higher than it would have been if impairment losses had not been recognized.


220


212

CHAPTER 5


Disclosure Requirements The disclosure requirements related to impairment of assets are quite extensive. The following summarizes the main requirements: Substantial information relating to impairment losses and reversals of impairment losses must be disclosed.

• For each class of assets—the amount of impairment losses and reversals of impairment losses segregated by what amounts are recognized in net income versus other comprehensive income • For each major impairment loss recognized or reversed related to individual assets—the events and circumstances that led to the recognition or reversal, whether the recoverable amount is its fair value less costs of disposal or value in use; the basis used to determine fair value less costs of disposal; and the discount rate(s) used in determining value in use • For cash-generating units or intangible assets with indefinite lives—the carrying amount of goodwill and of intangible assets with indefinite useful lives allocated to the unit, the basis used in determining recoverable amount, a description of key assumptions on which management has based its cash flow projections, and the methodology used to determine fair value less costs of disposal RONA inc. is a distributor and a retailer of hardware, home improvement and gardening products in Canada. It reported goodwill impairment losses of $117 million in its 2011 financial statements. Excerpts from these statements are presented in Exhibit 5.1.

EXHIBIT 5.1 EXTRACTS (IN PART) FROM RONA’S 2011 FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 3. Significant ing policies (j) Goodwill Goodwill represents the future economic benefits arising from a business combination that are not individually identifiable and recorded separately. Goodwill is not amortized and is tested for impairment annually or more frequently if events or changes in circumstances indicate that it is impaired. Goodwill is measured at cost less accumulated impairment losses.

Value-in-use incorporates expected future cash flows discounted using a before-tax rate that reflects current market assessments of the time value of money and the risks specific to the asset.

(k) Impairment of non-current assets At the end of each reporting period, the carrying amounts of property, plant and equipment and intangible assets with finite useful lives are assessed to determine if there is any evidence that an asset is impaired. If there is such evidence, the recoverable amount of the asset is estimated. The recoverable amount of intangible assets with indefinite useful lives or that are not ready for use is estimated on the same date each year. The recoverable amount of an asset or a cash generating unit is the higher of value-inuse and fair value less costs to sell. To determine value-in-use, expected future cash flows are discounted using a before-tax rate that reflects current market assessments of the time value of money and the risks specific to the asset. In the process of measuring expected future cash flows, the Corporation makes assumptions about future operating profit. These assumptions relate to future events and circumstances. Although the assumptions are based on market information available at the time of the assessment, actual results may vary. Assets that cannot be tested individually for the impairment test are grouped into the smallest group of assets that generates cash inflows through continued use that are largely independent of the cash inflows from other assets or groups of assets (“cash-generating unit” or “CGU”). For the impairment test of goodwill, CGUs to which goodwill has been

(continued)


CHAPTER 5

EXHIBIT 5.1


221

213

(continued)

allocated are grouped so that the level at which the impairment is tested represents the lowest level at which management monitors goodwill for internal management purposes. CGU groupings are limited to the operating sector. Goodwill acquired in a business combination is allocated to CGU groups that are expected to benefit from synergies of the related business combination. The Corporation’s corporate assets do not generate separate cash flows. If there is evidence that a corporate asset is impaired, the recoverable amount is determined for the CGU to which the corporate asset belongs. Impairments are recorded when the carrying amount of an asset or its CGU is higher than its recoverable amount. Impairment charges are recognized in income or loss. Impairment losses recognized for a CGU (or group of CGU) first reduce the carrying amount of any goodwill allocated to that CGU and then reduce the carrying amounts of the other assets of the CGU (or group of CGU) pro rata on the basis of the carrying amount of each asset in the CGU (or group of CGU). An impairment loss recognized for goodwill may not be reversed. On each reporting date, the Corporation assesses if there is an indication that impairment losses recognized in previous periods for other assets have decreased or no longer exist. An impairment loss is reversed if there has been a change in the estimates used to determine the recoverable amount. The increased carrying amount of an asset attributable to a reversal of an impairment loss shall not exceed the carrying amount that would have been determined (net of amortization or depreciation) had no impairment loss been recognized.

Goodwill acquired in a business combination is allocated to CGU groups that are expected to benefit from synergies of the related business combination.

14. Goodwill 2011 As at December 25 Balance at beginning Acquisition through business combinations (Note 9) Impairment Adjustment related to the purchase price allocation of a 2010 acquisition (Note 9) Balance at end

$ 529,094 16,777 (117,000) (1,903) $ 426,968

For the purpose of the annual impairment testing, goodwill is allocated to the following CGU groups, which are the groups of units expected to benefit from the synergies of the business combinations: 2011 As at December 25 Corporate and franchised stores Commercial and professional stores Distribution Goodwill allocation

2010 2009 As at December 26 As at December 28

$187,056

$299,993

$254,856

130,416 109,496 $426,968

126,726 102,375 $529,094

116,167 84,549 $455,572

The Corporation performed its annual test for goodwill impairment as at December 25, 2011. The carrying amount of the CGU groups has been determined using the value in use. To determine value in use, five-year cash flow forecasts were prepared using the budget and strategic plan approved by the Board of Directors. Cash flow forecasts for periods beyond that of the budget and strategic plan were prepared using a stable growth rate for future periods, not exceeding the rate of long term average growth of the Corporation’s sectors of activity. These forecasts were based on historical data and future trends expected by the Corporation.

(continued)

RONA primarily uses value in use to determine if goodwill is impaired.


222


214

CHAPTER 5


EXHIBIT 5.1 A key assumption in determining value is use is the projected growth in samestore sales.

RONA reported a goodwill impairment loss of $117.0 million in 2011. This resulted in a loss before income taxes of $60.9 million.

(continued)

For the impairment test carried out as at December 25, 2011, management’s key assumptions were average annual increases in same-store sales of 2.25% (average of 3.0% as at December 26, 2010) for the first five years and hereafter (2.5% as at December 26, 2010). The Corporation’s valuation model also takes of working capital and capital investments to maintain the condition of the assets of each group of CGU. Forecasted cash flows are discounted using pre-tax rates ranging from 11.8% to 11.9% (11.9% to 13.0% as at December 26, 2010) which reflect current market assessments of the time value of money and the risks specific to the asset. As the Corporation’s strategic plan evolves, the Corporation regularly reviews the allocation of net assets and corporate assets between CGU groups. In 2011, the Corporation changed the classification of part of goodwill and some corporate assets. Comparable amounts reflect this reclassification. Based on its impairment test, the fair value of the corporate and franchise store CGU group was less than its carrying amount. As a result, and considering the difficult market conditions, the Corporation recognized a goodwill impairment loss of $117,000 in respect of this CGU group. In addition to its various programs already in effect to enhance sales in the corporate and franchise store sector, as part of its business plan 2012, the Corporation has prepared a new strategy focusing on improving efficiency, optimizing the capital structure and increasing the return on capital. This is a critical sector for the Corporation and in 2012 sustained efforts has been and will be deployed to improve this sector’s profitability. The fair value of the other groups of CGUs was higher than their carrying amount. The sensitivity analysis indicated that no reasonably possible changes in the assumptions would cause the carrying amount of each group of CGU to exceed its recoverable amount. Source: Reproduced with permission from Rona Inc. http://www.rona.ca/corporate/financial-documents

Now that we have seen how to test for impairment, we will illustrate the preparation of consolidated financial statements subsequent to the date of acquisition. The first illustrations assume that the subsidiary is 100% owned. Later illustrations will assume a less than 100%-owned subsidiary. LO2

CONSOLIDATION OF A 100%-OWNED SUBSIDIARY Company P purchased 100% of the outstanding common shares of Company S on January 1, Year 1, for $19,000. On that date, Company S’s common shares had a carrying amount of $10,000 and its retained earnings balance was $6,000. The inventory of Company S had a fair value that was $2,000 greater than carrying amount, and the carrying amounts of all other assets and liabilities of Company S were equal to fair values. Any goodwill will be tested yearly for impairment. Both companies have a December 31 year-end. The journal entry made by Company P to record the acquisition of 100% of Company S was as follows: Investment in S Cash

19,000 19,000

There is no compelling reason for Company P to prepare a consolidated balance sheet on acquisition date; however, it is useful to illustrate its preparation as the starting point for the preparation of consolidated statements in subsequent years. The calculation and allocation of the acquisition differential is shown in Exhibit 5.2.


223


CHAPTER 5


215

EXHIBIT 5.2 CALCULATION OF ACQUISITION DIFFERENTIAL January 1, Year 1 Cost of 100% of Company S Carrying amount of Company S‘s net assets Assets Liabilities

$19,000 $ 27,000 (11,000) 16,000 3,000

Acquisition differential Allocated: Inventory Balance—goodwill

FV 2 CA 2,000

2,000 $ 1,000

(a) (b)

Below are the individual balance sheets of Company P and Company S on January 1, Year 1, along with Company P’s consolidated balance sheet prepared using the direct approach: BALANCE SHEETS—January 1, Year 1 Company P

Company S

Consolidated

Assets (miscellaneous) Inventory Investment in S Goodwill

$139,000 22,000 19,000 — $180,000

$17,000 10,000 — — $27,000

$156,000 34,000 — 1,000 $191,000

Liabilities Common shares Retained earnings

$ 45,000 50,000 85,000 $180,000

$11,000 10,000 6,000 $27,000

$ 56,000 50,000 85,000 $191,000

The investment is replaced by the carrying amount of the subsidiary’s assets and liabilities plus the acquisition differential.

The consolidated balance sheet was prepared by eliminating the shareholders’ equity of Company S ($16,000) against Company P’s investment ($19,000) and then by allocating the resultant acquisition differential ($3,000) to the inventory of Company S ($2,000), with the unallocated balance recognized as goodwill ($1,000).

Consolidated Statements, End of Year 1

LO3

In Year 1, Company S reported net income of $7,300 and paid a cash dividend of $2,500. Company P’s net income for the year was $18,300 (not including income from its investment in Company S). Using the cost method to for its investment, Company P makes a single entry to record the dividend received from Company S on December 31, Year 1, as follows: Cash Dividend income Dividend received from Company S

2,500 2,500

Company P adds the dividend income ($2,500) to its earnings from its own operations ($18,300) and reports a final net income for Year 1 of $20,800. An impairment test on goodwill conducted on December 31, Year 1, indicated that a $50 loss had occurred. The financial statements of Company P and Company S as at December 31, Year 1, are presented in Exhibit 5.3.

The cost method records income when dividends are received or receivable.


224


216

CHAPTER 5


EXHIBIT 5.3 YEAR 1 INCOME STATEMENTS The parent’s income from its own operations is $20,800 2 $2,500 5 $18,300.

Sales Dividend income Total revenue Cost of sales Expenses (miscellaneous) Total expenses Net income

Company P

Company S

$ 50,000 2,500 52,500 26,500 5,200 31,700 $ 20,800

$30,000 — 30,000 14,700 8,000 22,700 $ 7,300

YEAR 1 RETAINED EARNINGS STATEMENTS Company P

Company S

Balance, January 1 Net income

$ 85,000 20,800

$ 6,000 7,300

Dividends Balance, December 31

105,800 6,000 $ 99,800

13,300 2,500 $10,800

BALANCE SHEETS—December 31, Year 1 The investment remains at the original cost in the parent’s separateentity balance sheet.

Company P

Company S

Assets (misc.) Inventory Investment in S (cost method)

$147,800 30,000 19,000 $196,800

$18,300 14,000 — $32,300


$ 47,000 50,000 99,800 $196,800

$11,500 10,000 10,800 $32,300

Before beginning to prepare the consolidated financial statements, Company P prepares Exhibit 5.4, which shows the amortization of the acquisition differential for Year 1. This schedule and the financial statements of the two companies shown in Exhibit 5.3 form the basis for the preparation of Company P’s Year 1 consolidated statements, shown in Exhibit 5.5. The details of the Year 1 amortizations are explained as follows: The acquisition differential related to inventory is expensed when the inventory is sold.

1. The inventory of Company S was remeasured for consolidated purposes on January 1, Year 1, to reflect its fair value. If we assume that Company S uses a FIFO cost flow,5 it would be safe to assume that this inventory was sold during Year 1. Since the cost of sales of Company S does not reflect the $2,000 additional cost, cost of sales on the Year 1 consolidated income statement will be increased by $2,000 to reflect the additional cost of Company S. 2. An impairment test on goodwill conducted on December 31, Year 1, indicated that a $50 loss had occurred. 3. The $1,000 goodwill is not reflected in the financial statements of Company S, nor is the impairment loss. The consolidated income statement will have to reflect this loss, and at December 31, Year 1, the consolidated balance sheet will have to show the goodwill at cost less accumulated impairment losses.


225


CHAPTER 5


217

EXHIBIT 5.4 ACQUISITION DIFFERENTIAL AMORTIZATION AND IMPAIRMENT SCHEDULE

Inventory (2a) Goodwill (2b)

Balance Jan. 1, Year 1

Amortization and Impairment Year 1

Balance Dec. 31, Year 1

$2,000 1,000 $3,000

$2,000 50 $2,050

$ — 950 $ 950

(a) (b) (c)

The amortization and impairment of the acquisition differential will be reflected on the consolidated financial statements.

Using the schedule we introduced in the Consolidated Income and Retained Earnings Statements section earlier in this chapter, we make the following calculation: CALCULATION OF CONSOLIDATED NET INCOME—Year 1 Company P net income—cost method Less dividend income from Company S Company P net income, own operations Company S net income Acquisition differential amortization and impairment (4c) Consolidated net income

$20,800 2,500 18,300

7,300 (2,050)

This calculation starts with income under the cost method and converts it to consolidated net income.

5,250 $23,550

Since Company P owns 100% of Company S, all of the consolidated net income is attributable to the shareholders of Company P.

Note that dividend income from Company S is not included in consolidated net income. The consolidated income statement is prepared by excluding the dividend income and adding the revenues and expenses of the two companies.

EXHIBIT 5.5 Year 1 Consolidated Financial Statements (Direct Approach) COMPANY P CONSOLIDATED INCOME STATEMENT for the Year Ended December 31, Year 1 Sales (50,000 1 30,000) Cost of sales (26,500 1 14,700 1 [4a] 2,000) Goodwill impairment loss (0 1 0 1 [4b] 50) Expenses (misc.) (5,200 1 8,000) Net income

$ 80,000 43,200 50 13,200 56,450 $ 23,550

Consolidated net income is the same regardless of whether the parent used the cost method or the equity method in its internal records.

$ 85,000 23,550 108,550 6,000 $102,550

Dividends on the consolidated statement of retained earnings are the dividends of the parent.

COMPANY P CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF RETAINED EARNINGS for the Year Ended December 31, Year 1 Balance, January 1 Net income Dividends Balance, December 31

(continued)


226


218

CHAPTER 5


EXHIBIT 5.5

(continued ) COMPANY P CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET December 31, Year 1

The amortization/impairment of the various components of the acquisition differential is reflected on the consolidated financial statements.

The underlying assets and liabilities of the subsidiary plus the unamortized acquisition differential replace the investment .

Assets (misc.) (147,800 1 18,300) Inventory (30,000 1 14,000 1 [4a] 0) Goodwill (0 1 0 1 [4b] 950)

$166,100 44,000 950 $211,050

Liabilities (47,000 1 11,500) Common shares Retained earnings

$ 58,500 50,000 102,550 $211,050

The preparation of the Year 1 consolidated financial statements is shown in Exhibit 5.5. The consolidated amounts were determined by adding the amounts shown in brackets. These amounts came from the financial statements of Company P and Company S and from the acquisition differential amortization and impairment schedule. Note the bracketed amounts shown for goodwill impairment loss and for goodwill on the balance sheet. The two zero amounts indicate that these items do not appear in the separate-entity financial statements of Company P and Company S. The Year 1 consolidated retained earnings statement is prepared using the January 1 retained earnings of Company P, consolidated net income attributable to Company P, and Company P’s dividends. Only Company P’s retained earnings are included on January 1 because, as we learned in Chapter 3, consolidated retained earnings at the date of acquisition consist only of the parent’s retained earnings. Only the parent’s dividends are included on the consolidated statement of retained earnings, because only the parent’s dividends were paid to shareholders outside of the consolidated entity. The subsidiary’s dividends were received by the parent and were not paid to anyone outside of the consolidated entity, and they are therefore eliminated when preparing the consolidated financial statements. The parent’s investment does not appear on the consolidated balance sheet. Consolidated shareholders’ equity contains the common shares of the parent and retained earnings from the consolidated retained earnings statement. The net assets of the parent are combined with the net assets of the subsidiary after they have been remeasured with the unamortized acquisition differential. If the parent had used the equity method in its internal records, the entries made during the year would have been different than under the cost method. When preparing the consolidated net income at the end of the year, the subsidiary’s assets, liabilities, revenues, and expenses replace the investment and investment income . After making the adjustments for the amortization of the acquisition differential, the consolidated financial statements will look exactly the same as the statements above. Further explanation and illustration of the consolidation process when the parent used the equity method is provided later in this chapter in the Parent Company Extension Theory section.


CHAPTER 5


227

219

Consolidated Statements, End of Year 2 In Year 2, Company S reported net income of $10,000 and paid a cash dividend of $3,000. Company P’s net income for the year was $19,000 (not including income from its investment in Company S). An impairment test conducted on December 31, Year 2, indicated that the goodwill had a recoverable amount of $870. As a result, a loss of $80 has occurred. On December 31, Year 2, Company P makes the following cost-method journal entry: Cash Dividend income Dividend received by Company S

3,000 3,000

The dividend income ($3,000) combined with the previous operating earnings ($19,000) gives Company P a final net income for Year 2 of $22,000. The financial statements of the two companies as at December 31, Year 2, are presented in Exhibit 5.6, and the acquisition differential amortization and impairment schedule at the end of Year 2 follow, in Exhibit 5.7. Because Company P has used the cost method, it is necessary to make two preliminary calculations before preparing the consolidated income statement and retained earnings statement. We first calculate consolidated net income for Year 2, as follows: Company P net income—cost method Less: dividend income from Company S Company P net income, own operations Company S net income Acquisition differential amortization and impairment (7c) Consolidated net income

$22,000 3,000 19,000

10,000 (80)

9,920 $28,920

Only the Year 2 amortization of the acquisition differential is deducted when calculating consolidated net income for Year 2.

EXHIBIT 5.6 YEAR 2 INCOME STATEMENTS Sales Dividend income Total revenue Cost of sales Expenses (misc.) Total expenses Net income

Company P

Company S

$ 60,000 3,000 63,000 32,000 9,000 41,000 $ 22,000

$40,000 — 40,000 18,000 12,000 30,000 $10,000

YEAR 2 RETAINED EARNINGS STATEMENTS Balance, January 1 Net income Dividends Balance, December 31

Company P

Company S

$ 99,800 22,000 121,800 8,000 $113,800

$10,800 10,000 20,800 3,000 $17,800

(continued)

The parent’s income includes dividend income from the subsidiary, which can be reconciled to dividends paid by the subsidiary.


228


220

CHAPTER 5


EXHIBIT 5.6

(continued ) BALANCE SHEETS—December 31, Year 2

The investment still remains at the original cost.

Company P

Company S


$131,800 35,000 19,000 $185,800

$21,000 16,000 — $37,000


$ 22,000 50,000 113,800 $185,800

$ 9,200 10,000 17,800 $37,000


The amortization of the acquisition differential is not reflected in the investment when the parent uses the cost method.



Amort. & Impair. to end of Year 1


Amort. & Impair. Year 2


$2,000 1,000 $3,000

$2,000 50 $2,050

$ — 950 $950

$— 80 $80

$ — 870 $870

(a) (b) (c)

Because we are consolidating more than one year after the date of acquisition, an additional calculation is required. Company P’s separate-entity retained earnings on January 1, Year 2, are not equal to consolidated retained earnings. The calculation of consolidated retained earnings as at January 1, Year 2, is as follows: This calculation converts retained earnings from the cost method to the equity method at a point in time.

Company P retained earnings, Jan. 1, Year 2 (cost method) Company S retained earnings, Jan. 1, Year 2 Company S retained earnings, acquisition date Increase since acquisition Acquisition differential amortization and impairment to end of Year 1 (7c)

Company P ownership Consolidated retained earnings, Jan. 1, Year 2 Retained earnings reflect the cumulative effect of all adjustments to a point in time.

$ 99,800 10,800 6,000 4,800

(2,050) 2,750 100%

2,750 $102,550

The points that follow are presented as further explanation of why a calculation of this nature adjusts a parent’s retained earnings under the cost method to retained earnings under the equity method. These points require careful reading because it is very important that you understand fully why this particular process actually works. 1. Consolidated retained earnings at the acquisition date consist only of the retained earnings of the parent company. Consolidated retained earnings subsequent to the date of acquisition represent only the parent’s portion of retained earnings of the combined entities. The non-controlling interest’s


229


CHAPTER 5


221

portion of retained earnings is incorporated in non-controlling interest, which is reported in a separate line in shareholders’ equity. 2. Consolidated net income attributable to the parent company in any single year since the acquisition date consists of the net income of the parent company (from its own operations), plus the parent’s share of the net income of the subsidiary, less the parent’s share of the acquisition-differential amortization for that year. 3. It should logically follow that the consolidated retained earnings balance at any time subsequent to the acquisition date must contain the parent’s share of the subsidiary’s net incomes earned since the acquisition date, less the total of the amortization of the acquisition differential to that date. 4. Since the parent has used the cost method for internal record keeping, the parent’s retained earnings contain only the parent’s share of the dividends that the subsidiary has declared since the acquisition date. 5. The sum of net incomes less the sum of dividends, both measured from the acquisition date, equals the change (increase or decrease) in retained earnings measured from the same date. 6. When we add the parent’s share of the change in the retained earnings of the subsidiary to the retained earnings of the parent (which contain the parent’s share of the subsidiary’s dividends under the cost method), the resulting calculated amount now contains the parent’s share of the subsidiary’s net income earned since the date of acquisition. By deducting the parent’s share of the total amortization of the acquisition differential to date from this amount, we arrive at a retained earnings number that represents the retained earnings of the parent under the equity method, which of course is equal to consolidated retained earnings. The consolidated income statement is prepared—using the income statements of the two companies (see Exhibit 5.6), the Year 2 acquisition differential amortization and impairment schedule, and the calculation of consolidated net income for Year 2—by adding the revenues and expenses of the two companies, adjusting the expenses for the Year 2 amortization, excluding the dividend income, and ing that the net income on the statement equals the calculated net income. The consolidated retained earnings statement for Year 2 is prepared using the calculated amount for consolidated retained earnings for January 1, adding consolidated net income, and deducting the dividends of Company P. The consolidated balance sheet is prepared in the usual manner, except that the amount for retained earnings is taken from the consolidated retained earnings statement. Exhibit 5.8 shows the preparation of the Year 2 consolidated financial statements using the direct approach.

CONSOLIDATION OF AN 80%-OWNED SUBSIDIARY— DIRECT APPROACH We now illustrate the consolidation of Company P and its 80%-owned subsidiary, Company S, over a two-year period when the cost method has been used to for the investment.

The parent’s retained earnings under the cost method include dividend income from the subsidiary since the date of acquisition.

The change in retained earnings plus cumulative dividends paid is equal to cumulative net income.

The consolidated financial statements present the combined position of the parent and the subsidiary as if the parent had acquired the subsidiary’s assets and liabilities directly.


230


222

CHAPTER 5


EXHIBIT 5.8 YEAR 2 CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Direct Approach) COMPANY P CONSOLIDATED INCOME STATEMENT for the Year Ended December 31, Year 2 Sales (60,000 1 40,000) Cost of sales (32,000 1 18,000) Goodwill impairment loss (0 1 0 1 (7b) 80) Expenses (misc.) (9,000 1 12,000)

$100,000 50,000 80 21,000 71,080 $ 28,920

Net income

COMPANY P CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF RETAINED EARNINGS for the Year Ended December 31, Year 2 Consolidated retained earnings are the same regardless of whether the parent used the cost method or the equity method in its internal records.

Balance, January 1 Net income

$102,550 28,920 131,470 8,000 $123,470


COMPANY P CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET December 31, Year 2 The unamortized acquisition differential related to goodwill is reported on the consolidated balance sheet and is the same amount regardless of whether the parent used the cost method or the equity method in its internal records.

Assets (misc.) (131,800 1 21,000) Inventory (35,000 1 16,000) Goodwill (0 1 0 1 (7b) 870)

$152,800 51,000 870 $204,670

Liabilities (22,000 1 9,200) Common shares Retained earnings

$ 31,200 50,000 123,470 $204,670

Assume that on January 1, Year 1, instead of purchasing 100% of Company S for $19,000, Company P purchased 80% for $15,200. Non-controlling interest is measured using the fair value enterprise approach; that is, entity theory. All other facts about the two companies are the same as in the previous example. The journal entry of Company P on January 1, Year 1, is as follows: Investment in S Cash

15,200 15,200

The calculation and allocation of the acquisition differential and the calculation of the non-controlling interest on January 1, Year 1, are shown in Exhibit 5.9. The following are the individual balance sheets of Company P and Company S, as well as Company P’s consolidated balance sheet on January 1, Year 1, prepared using the direct approach:


231


CHAPTER 5


223

BALANCE SHEETS—January 1, Year 1 Company P

Company S

Consolidated

Assets (misc.) Inventory Investment in S Goodwill

$142,800 22,000 15,200 — $180,000

$17,000 10,000 — — $27,000

$159,800 34,000 — 1,000 $194,800

Liabilities Common shares Retained earnings Non-controlling interest

$ 45,000 50,000 85,000 — $180,000

$11,000 10,000 6,000 — $27,000

$ 56,000 50,000 85,000 3,800 $194,800

The subsidiary’s assets and liabilities are brought onto the consolidated financial statements at 100 percent of their fair values.

The consolidated balance sheet was prepared as follows: 1. Eliminate the investment and Company S’s shareholders’ equity. 2. Add the implied acquisition differential to Company S’s assets and liabilities in order to use 100% of the fair values for Company S’s assets and liabilities. 3. Report non-controlling interest as a component of shareholders’ equity at a value representing the non-controlling interest’s share of Company S’s implied value.

Consolidated Statements, End of Year 1 In Year 1, Company S reported net income of $7,300 and paid a cash dividend of $2,500. Company P’s net income for the year was $18,300 (not including income from its investment in Company S).

EXHIBIT 5.9 COMPANY P CALCULATION AND ALLOCATION OF ACQUISITION DIFFERENTIAL January 1, Year 1 Cost of 80% of Company S

$15,200

Implied value of 100% of Company S Carrying amount of Company S’s net assets Assets Liabilities

$19,000

Acquisition differential Allocated: Inventory Balance—goodwill

The implied value of the subsidiary is derived by taking the purchase price and dividing by the percentage ownership acquired by the parent.

$27,000 (11,000) 16,000 3,000 (FV 2 CA) 2,000

2,000 $ 1,000

(a) (b)

CALCULATION OF NON-CONTROLLING INTEREST—January 1, Year 1 Implied fair value, Company S (above) Non-controlling interest’s percentage ownership Non-controlling interest

$19,000 20% $ 3,800

(c)

NCI is based on the implied value of the subsidiary as a whole.


232


224

CHAPTER 5


Company P’s dividend income is 80% of dividends paid by the subsidiary.

The cost method journal entry of Company P on December 31, Year 1, is as follows: Cash Dividend income 80% of the dividend received from Company S

2,000 2,000

Company P’s net income for Year 1 is reported as $20,300 after the receipt of the dividend from Company S. An impairment test on goodwill conducted on December 31, Year 1, indicated that a $50 loss had occurred. The financial statements of Company P and Company S as at December 31, Year 1, are shown in Exhibit 5.10. The Year 1 amortizations of the acquisition differential and consolidated net income must be calculated before the consolidated financial statements can be prepared. These calculations are as shown in Exhibit 5.11. These calculations form the basis for preparing the Year 1 consolidated financial statements for both the direct and the working paper approaches (see Appendix 5B for the latter).

EXHIBIT 5.10 YEAR 1 INCOME STATEMENTS The parent’s income includes dividend income from the subsidiary, which can be reconciled to dividends paid by the subsidiary.

Sales Dividend income Total revenue Cost of sales Expenses (miscellaneous) Total expenses Net income

Company P

Company S

$ 50,000 2,000 52,000 26,500 5,200 31,700 $ 20,300

$30,000 — 30,000 14,700 8,000 22,700 $ 7,300

(a)

(b)

YEAR 1 RETAINED EARNINGS STATEMENTS The parent’s retained earnings include the parent’s income under the cost method, which includes dividend income from the subsidiary.

Balance, January 1 Net income Dividends Balance, December 31

Company P

Company S

$ 85,000 20,300 105,300 6,000 $ 99,300

$ 6,000 7,300 13,300 2,500 $10,800

(c)

BALANCE SHEETS—December 31, Year 1 These are the separateentity balance sheets of the two legal entities.

Company P

Company S


$151,100 30,000 15,200 $196,300

$18,300 14,000 — $32,300


$ 47,000 50,000 99,300 $196,300

$11,500 10,000 10,800 $32,300

(d) (e)


233


CHAPTER 5


225




Amortization and Impairment Year 1


$2,000 1,000 $3,000

$2,000 50 $2,050

$ — 950 $950

(a) (b) (c)

This schedule reflects 100% of the acquisition differential, which will be attributed to the shareholders of the parent and the noncontrolling interest.

CALCULATION OF CONSOLIDATED NET INCOME—Year 1 Company P net income—cost method (10b) Less: dividend income from Company S (10a) Company P net income, own operations Company S net income (10b) Less: Acquisition differential amortization and impairment

$20,300 2,000 18,300

$7,300 (2,050)

Consolidated net income

5,250 $23,550

(d) (e)

Attributable to Shareholders of Company P Non-controlling interest (20% 3 [d] 5,250)

$22,500 1,050

(f) (g)

Exhibit 5.12 shows the preparation of the consolidated financial statements when the direct approach is used. The consolidated income statement is prepared by combining the revenues and expenses of the two companies, adjusted for the Year 1 amortization of the acquisition differential. Company P’s dividend income is excluded. The bottom portion of the consolidated income statement attributes the consolidated net income between the shareholders of the parent company and the non-controlling interest. First, the portion attributable to the non-controlling interest is calculated by multiplying the non-controlling interest’s percentage ownership times the subsidiary’s net income less the amortization of the acquisition differential. The portion attributable to the parent is equal to consolidated net income less the portion attributable to the non-controlling interest. Alternatively, consolidated net income attributable to the parent’s shareholders could be calculated directly as follows: Company P net income, own operations Share of Company S net income after consolidation adjustments (80% 3 [d] 5,250)

$18,300 4,200 $22,500

The consolidated retained earnings statement contains the retained earnings of Company P at the beginning of the year, consolidated net income attributable to Company P, and the dividends of Company P. The consolidated balance sheet is prepared by combining the assets and liabilities of the two companies, adjusted for the unamortized acquisition differential. The parent’s investment is excluded, and the non-controlling interest in the net assets of the subsidiary is shown as a component of shareholders’ equity. The non-controlling interest is 20% of the December 31 shareholders’ equity of Company S plus 20% of the unamortized acquisition differential.

The consolidated income statement combines the income statements of the separate legal entities and incorporates consolidation adjustments for the amortization of the acquisition differential.


234


226

CHAPTER 5


EXHIBIT 5.12 Year 1 Consolidated Financial Statements (Direct Approach) COMPANY P CONSOLIDATED INCOME STATEMENTS for the Year Ended December 31, Year 1 Consolidated net income is attributed to the controlling shareholders and noncontrolling interest.

Net income

$ 80,000 43,200 50 13,200 56,450 $ 23,550

Attributable to Shareholders of Company P (11f) Non-controlling interest (11g)

$ 22,500 1,050

Sales (50,000 1 30,000) Cost of sales (26,500 1 14,700 1 [11a] 2,000) Goodwill impairment loss (0 1 0 1 [11b] 50) Expenses (miscellaneous) (5,200 1 8,000)

COMPANY P CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF RETAINED EARNINGS for the Year Ended December 31, Year 1 Balance, January 1 Net income

$ 85,000 22,500 107,500 6,000 $101,500


COMPANY P CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET December 31, Year 1

Non-controlling interest is shown as a component of shareholders’ equity.

Assets (misc.) (151,100 1 18,300) Inventory (30,000 1 14,000) Goodwill (0 1 0 1 (11b) 950)

$169,400 44,000 950 $214,350

Liabilities (47,000 1 11,500) Common shares Retained earnings Non-controlling interest (20% 3 [(10d) 10,000 1 (10e) 10,800 1 (11c) 950])

$ 58,500 50,000 101,500 4,350 $214,350

The changes in non-controlling interest would be presented in the column for non-controlling interest in the statement of changes in equity as follows: CHANGES IN NON-CONTROLLING INTEREST Non-controlling interest on the balance sheet increases when the subsidiary earns income and decreases when the subsidiary pays a dividend.

Balance, January 1 (9c) Allocated income of entity (11g)

Dividends to non-controlling shareholders Balance, December 31 * $2,500 3 20% 5  $500

$3,800 1,050 4,850 500* $4,350


235


CHAPTER 5


227

It is often useful to prepare this reconciliation when preparing a solution to consolidation problems because it helps show where the allocated income of this single entity and the dividends of the subsidiary end up in the consolidated financial statements. The consolidated retained earnings statement does not contain the dividends of the subsidiary. In this example, Company S paid $2,500 in dividends. Eighty percent of this amount ($2,000) was paid to Company P and therefore did not leave the consolidated entity. The other 20% ($500) was paid to the non-controlling shareholders and reduced the equity of that group, as shown in the statement. The consolidation of the 80%-owned subsidiary for Year 1 financial statements using the working paper approach is illustrated in Appendix 5B.

Consolidated Statements, End of Year 2 In Year 2, Company S reported earnings of $10,000 and paid a cash dividend of $3,000. Company P’s earnings for the year were $19,000 (excluding any income from its investment in Company S). Company P’s journal entry to record the dividend received from Company S is as follows: Cash Dividend income (80% 3 3,000) 80% of the dividend paid by Company S

2,400 2,400

Company P reports earnings of $21,400 in Year 2. That amount includes this dividend income. An impairment test conducted on December 31, Year 2, indicated that the goodwill had a recoverable amount of $870, and therefore an $80 impairment loss had occurred. The financial statements of the two companies as at December 31, Year 2, are shown in Exhibit 5.13. Regardless of the approach to be used (direct or working paper), the four calculations shown in Exhibit 5.14 must be made before the consolidated financial

Under the cost method, investment income is reported when dividends are received or receivable from the investee company.

EXHIBIT 5.13 YEAR 2 INCOME STATEMENTS Sales Dividend income Total revenue Cost of sales Expenses (misc.) Total expenses Net income

Company P

Company S

$ 60,000 2,400 62,400 32,000 9,000 41,000 $ 21,400

$40,000 — 40,000 18,000 12,000 30,000 $10,000

(a)

These statements are the separate-entity statements of the parent and the subsidiary.

(b)

YEAR 2 RETAINED EARNINGS STATEMENTS Balance, Jan. 1 Net income Dividends Balance, Dec. 31

Company P

Company S

$ 99,300 21,400 120,700 8,000 $112,700

$10,800 10,000 20,800 3,000 $17,800

(c)

(d)

(continued)

The parent’s retained earnings include dividend income received from the subsidiary since the date of acquisition.


236


228

CHAPTER 5


EXHIBIT 5.13

(continued ) BALANCE SHEETS—December 31, Year 2

The parent has used the cost method on its separateentity financial statements.

Company P

Company S


$134,500 35,000 15,200 $184,700

$21,000 16,000 — $37,000


$ 22,000 50,000 112,700 $184,700

$ 9,200 10,000 17,800 $37,000

(e) (f)

EXHIBIT 5.14 ACQUISITION DIFFERENTIAL IMPAIRMENT SCHEDULE

This schedule is used to adjustments made when preparing consolidated financial statements.


Impairment Year 2


$ — 950 $950

$— 80 $80

$ — 870 $870


(a)

CALCULATION OF CONSOLIDATED NET INCOME—Year 2

This schedule calculates the bottom line for the consolidated income statement.

Company P net income—cost method (13b) Less: Dividend income from Company S (13a) Company P net income, own operations Company S net income (13b) Less: Acquisition differential impairment (14a)

$21,400 2,400 19,000

10,000 (80)

Consolidated net income

9,920 $28,920

(b) (c)

Attributable to Shareholders of Company P Non-controlling interest (20% 3 [14b] 9,920)

$26,936 1,984

(d) (e)

CALCULATION OF CONSOLIDATED RETAINED EARNINGS as at January 1, Year 2

This schedule incorporates cumulative adjustments to a point in time.

Company P retained earnings, Jan. 1, Year 2 (cost method) (13c) Company S retained earnings, Jan. 1, Year 2 (13c) Company S retained earnings, acquisition date (10c) Increase since acquisition Less: Acquisition differential amortization and impairment to end of Year 1 (11c) Company P’s ownership percentage

$ 99,300 10,800 6,000 4,800 (2,050) 2,750 80%

(f)

2,200 Consolidated retained earnings (which is equal to Company P’s retained earnings—equity method)

$101,500

(g)

(continued)


237


CHAPTER 5

EXHIBIT 5.14


229

(continued )

CALCULATION OF NON-CONTROLLING INTEREST December 31, Year 2 Shareholders’ equity—Company S Common shares (13e) Retained earnings (13f)

Unamortized acquisition differential (14a) Non-controlling interest’s ownership

$10,000 17,800 27,800 870 28,670 20% (h) $ 5,734

This schedule calculates non-controlling interest on the balance sheet at a point in time.

statements are prepared. These four calculations are the starting point for the preparation of the consolidated financial statements whether the direct or the working paper approach is used. Exhibit 5.15 shows the consolidated financial statements prepared using the direct approach. The concepts involved are the same as were outlined earlier for a 100%-owned subsidiary. The only difference here is that the noncontrolling interest is reflected in the consolidated income statement and balance sheet.

EXHIBIT 5.15 Year 2 Consolidated Financial Statements (Direct Approach) COMPANY P CONSOLIDATED INCOME STATEMENT for the Year Ended December 31, Year 2 Sales (60,000 1 40,000) Cost of sales (32,000 1 18,000) Goodwill impairment loss (0 1 0 1 [14a] 80) Expenses (misc.) (9,000 1 12,000) Net income

$100,000 50,000 80 21,000 71,080 $ 28,920

Attributable to Shareholders of Company P (14d) Non-controlling interest (14e)

$ 26,936 1,984

COMPANY P CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF RETAINED EARNINGS for the Year Ended December 31, Year 2 Balance, January 1 (14g) Net income Dividends Balance, December 31

$101,500 26,936 128,436 8,000 $120,436

(continued)

The income statement includes adjustments for only one year and non-controlling interest’s share of income for only one year.


238


230

CHAPTER 5


EXHIBIT 5.15

(continued ) COMPANY P CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET December 31, Year 2

The balance sheet reflects adjustments at the end of the year and non-controlling interest’s share of net assets at the end of the year.

Assets (misc.) (134,500 1 21,000) Inventory (35,000 1 16,000) Goodwill (0 1 0 1 [14a] 870)

$155,500 51,000 870 $207,370

Liabilities (22,000 1 9,200) Common shares Retained earnings Non-controlling interest (14h)

$ 31,200 50,000 120,436 5,734 $207,370

The consolidation of the 80%-owned subsidiary for Year 2 financial statements using the working paper approach is illustrated in Appendix 5B.

Additional Calculations The preparation of the consolidated financial statements of companies P and S for Year 2 has been illustrated. Because the parent, Company P, used the cost method, additional calculations had to be made to determine certain consolidated amounts. An additional calculation can be made to the consolidated retained earnings shown on the balance sheet. This calculation is shown below: CALCULATION OF CONSOLIDATED RETAINED EARNINGS at December 31, Year 2 This schedule incorporates cumulative adjustments to the end of Year 2 and is used to retained earnings at the end of Year 2.

Company P retained earnings, Dec. 31, Year 2—cost method (13d) Company S retained earnings, Dec. 31, Year 2 (13d) Company S retained earnings, acquisition date (10c) Increase since acquisition Less acquisition differential amortization and impairment to the end of Year 2 ([11c] 2,050 1 [14a] 80) Company P’s ownership Consolidated retained earnings

$112,700 17,800 6,000 11,800 (2,130) 9,670 80%

(a) 7,736 $120,436

An alternative way to calculate NCI at the end of year 2 under the entity theory is as follows: NCI at date of acquisition (9c) Increase is Company S retained earnings, since acquisition net of consolidation adjustments (as per a) above) Non-controlling interest’s ownership NCI, end of year 2

$3,800 9,670 20%

1,934 $5,734


CHAPTER 5


Parent Company Extension Theory

239

231

LO4

If the non-controlling interest was measured based on the fair value of identifiable net assets approach—that is, parent company extension theory—only the parent’s share of the subsidiary’s goodwill would be included on the consolidated financial statements. The NCI’s share of the subsidiary’s goodwill would be excluded. Once goodwill and NCI have been calculated under the entity theory, we can simply back out the NCI’s share of goodwill to determine these two s under parent company extension theory. The following shows these calculations at the end of Year 2: Goodwill under entity theory (14a) Less: NCI’s share of goodwill (3 20%) Goodwill under parent company extension theory

$ 870 174 $ 696

NCI under entity theory (14h) Less: NCI’s share of goodwill NCI under parent company extension theory

$5,734 174 $5,560

Goodwill and NCI are the only two s on the consolidated balance sheet that would be different under parent company extension theory compared with entity theory.

Self-Study Problem 2 involves the parent company extension theory throughout the problem and solutions. All of the schedules and financial statements are prepared using this theory. The problem also involves amortization and impairment of the acquisition differential pertaining to depreciable assets.

Acquisition Differential Assigned to Liabilities With the considerable swings in interest rates over the past decade, companies often find that liabilities assumed in a business combination have fair values different from their carrying amounts. As with assets acquired, liabilities assumed in a business combination must be measured at their fair values. The difference between fair value and carrying amount for these liabilities is similar to a bond or discount that must be amortized over its remaining life. Prior to 2006, the CICA Handbook was silent on the amortization method to be used in amortizing any or discount on a bond payable or investment in bonds. Companies could use either the straight-line method or the effective interest method. Most companies used the straight-line method because it is simpler to use. IFRS 9 requires the use of the effective interest method. Some companies may continue to use the straight-line method where the difference between the two methods is not material. In this text, we will use both the straight-line and the effective interest methods. For situation A, assume that Pubco acquires 100% of the common shares of Subco on December 31, Year 2. On that date, Pubco had no bonds payable outstanding and Subco had bonds payable with a carrying amount of $100,000 and a fair value of $105,154. These bonds were issued on January 1, Year 1, at their par value of $100,000, and mature on December 31, Year 5. The bonds pay interest on December 31 each year at a stated rate of 10%. The market rate of interest was 8% on December 31, Year 2. Given that the stated rate of interest was higher than the market rate, the bonds were trading at a . The fair value of the bonds can be determined by taking the present value of future cash flows using a discount rate of 8% as follows: Principal $100,000 3 (P/F, 8%, 3 years) (0.79383) Interest $10,000 3 (P/A, 8%, 3 years) (2.57710)

$ 79,383 25,771 $105,154

The effective interest method should be used to for financial assets and liabilities.

Bonds trade at a when the stated rate is greater than the market rate of interest.


240


232

CHAPTER 5


The acquisition differential of $5,154 is considered a on the bonds from a consolidated viewpoint. On the date of acquisition, the entire $5,154 is assigned to the bonds payable, and bonds payable will be reported at $105,154 on the consolidated balance sheet. The following schedule shows the amortization of this using the effective interest method as if Pubco had actually issued these bonds at $105,154 on December 31, Year 2: Period

Interest paid

Interest expense

Amortization of bond

Amortized cost of bonds

Year 2 Year 3 Year 4 Year 5

$10,0001 10,000 10,000

$8,4122 8,285 8,149

$1,5883 1,715 1,851

$105,154 103,5664 101,851 100,000

1 3

2

$100,000 3 10% 5 $10,000 $10,000 2 $8,412 5 $1,588

4

$105,154 3 8% 5 $8,412 $105,154 2 $1,588 5 $103,566

In preparing consolidated financial statements subsequent to the date of acquisition, interest expense and bonds payable must be adjusted as follows to obtain the same results as if the parent had issued the bonds itself:

The acquisition differential related to bonds payable should, theoretically, be amortized using the effective interest method.

Period

Subco’s interest expense

Adjustment on consolidation

Consolidated interest expense

Subco’s Bond Payable


Consolidated bond payable


$10,000 10,000 10,000

$1,588 1,715 1,851

$8,412 8,285 8,149

$100,000 100,000 100,000 100,000

$5,154 3,566 1,851 0

$105,154 103,566 101,851 100,000

Subco’s interest expense is equal to the interest paid because the bonds were issued at par; that is, there is no or discount on the bonds. For situation B, assume that Subco had issued the bonds on January 1, Year 1, at $92,791 when the market rate of interest was 12% and everything else was the same as in situation A. Given that the stated rate of interest was lower than the market rate, the bonds were issued at a discount. The following schedule shows how Subco would amortize this discount on its separate-entity financial statements:

The subsidiary amortizes the bond discount for its separate-entity financial statements.

Period

Interest paid

Interest expense

Amortization of bond discount


Year 0 Year 1 Year 2 Year 3 Year 4 Year 5

$10,0001 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000

$11,1352 11,271 11,424 11,594 11,785

$1,1353 1,271 1,424 1,594 1,785

$ 92,791 93,9264 95,197 96,621 98,215 100,000

1 3

$100,000 3 10% 5 $10,000 $10,000 2 $11,135 5 2 $1,135

2 4

$92,791 3 12% 5 $11,135 $92,791 1 $1,135 5 $93,926

The acquisition differential on December 31, Year 2, the date of acquisition, would now be $9,957 (105,154 2 95,197) and is considered a on the bonds from a consolidated viewpoint. The entire $9,957 is assigned to the bonds payable, and bonds payable will be reported at $105,154 (same amount as in situation A) on the consolidated balance sheet. In preparing consolidated financial statements


241


CHAPTER 5


233

subsequent to the date of acquisition, interest expense and bonds payable must be adjusted as follows to obtain the same results as in situation A:

Period



Consolidated interest expense

Subco’s bond payable


Consolidated bond payable


$11,424 11,594 11,785

$3,012 3,309 3,636

$8,412 8,285 8,149

$95,197 96,621 98,215 100,000

$9,957 6,945 3,636 0

$105,154 103,566 101,851 100,000

In both situations, the acquisition differential was amortized over the threeyear term to maturity of the bonds. Under the effective interest method, the annual amortization changes over time. If the straight-line method were used, the annual amortization would be the same each year. The following schedule summarizes the amortization of the acquisition differential under the effective interest and straight-line methods: Acquisition differential at acquisition A B

$5,154 9,957

The straight-line and effective interest methods produce the same results in total over the life of the bond.

Amortization of acquisition differential Effective interest method St-line per Year 3 Year 4 Year 5 year $1,588 3,012

$1,715 3,309

$1,851 3,636

$1,718 3,319

If Pubco acquired less than 100% of Subco, the non-controlling interest would absorb their share of the acquisition differential and amortization of the acquisition differential. See Self-Study Problem 1 for a comprehensive example of consolidating a non–wholly owned subsidiary subsequent to the date of acquisition. It includes most of the issues we have covered in this chapter and includes a bond amortization schedule using the effective interest method.

Intercompany Receivables and Payables Consolidated financial statements are designed to reflect the results of transactions between the single consolidated entity and those outside the entity. All transactions between the parent and its subsidiaries, or between the subsidiaries of a parent, must be eliminated in the consolidation process to reflect this singleentity concept. While many of these intercompany eliminations are discussed in later chapters, we will introduce the topic now by discussing the elimination of intercompany receivables and payables. If the parent’s s receivable contain a receivable of $5,000 from its subsidiary, then the s payable of the subsidiary must contain a $5,000 payable to the parent. If these intercompany receivables and payables were not eliminated in the consolidation process, both the s receivable and the s payable on the consolidated balance sheet would be overstated from a single-entity point of view. The entry to eliminate these intercompany balances on the consolidated worksheet or working papers is as follows: s payable—subsidiary s receivable—parent

5,000 5,000

The consolidated financial statements should reflect only the result of transactions with outsiders.


242


234

CHAPTER 5


Because the net assets (assets less liabilities) are unchanged after this elimination, the equities of the non-controlling and controlling interests are not affected.

Subsidiary Acquired during the Year In all of our examples to date, we have assumed that the parent acquired the subsidiary on the first day of the fiscal year. As a result, when we prepared the first consolidated income statement at the end of the first fiscal year, it contained all of the subsidiary’s revenue and expenses for that year. We will now describe the consolidation process if the acquisition took place during the year. Assume that Parent Inc. (which has a December 31 year-end) acquired 80% of Subsidiary Ltd. on September 30, Year 2. The Year 2 operations of Subsidiary would impact the December 31, Year 2, consolidated income statement in the following manner: Revenues: Subsidiary’s revenues October 1 to December 31 Expenses: Subsidiary’s expenses plus amortization and impairment of acquisition differential October 1 to December 31

The consolidated financial statements should include the subsidiary’s income only from the date of acquisition.

Net impact on consolidated net income attributable to shareholders of Parent Inc.: Increased by 80% of Subsidiary’s net income adjusted for amortization and impairment of acquisition differential for last three months Net impact on consolidated net income attributable to non-controlling interest: 20% 3 Subsidiary’s net income adjusted for amortization and impairment of acquisition differential for period October 1 to December 31 This form of presentation makes subsequent-year comparisons difficult for readers. To assist s, IFRS 3 requires disclosure of what the revenue and profit or loss of the combined entity for the current reporting period would have been if the acquisition date for all business combinations that occurred during the year had been as of the beginning of the annual reporting period. Alternatively, a pro forma consolidated income statement could be prepared as if the subsidiary had been acquired at the beginning of the fiscal year. This pro forma consolidated income statement could be presented in summary form in the notes to the financial statements.

LO5 The parent can use the cost method or equity method in its general ledger to for an investment in a subsidiary.

EQUITY METHOD OF RECORDING The illustrations throughout this chapter have assumed that the parent used the cost method of recording its investment for its internal records. We will use the same example for an 80%-owned subsidiary to illustrate the use of the equity method. The key events of the example are repeated here for ease of use. On January 1, Year 1, Company P purchased 80% of Company S for $15,200. In Year 1, Company S reported net income of $7,300 and paid a cash dividend of $2,500. Company P’s net income for the year was $18,300 (not including income from its investment in Company S). Company P would make the following journal entries in Year 1 under the equity method: January 1, Year 1 Investment in S Cash Purchased 80% of Company S

15,200 15,200


CHAPTER 5


December 31, Year 1 Investment in S (7,300 3 80%) Investment income 80% of Company S Year 1 net income

5,840 5,840

Cash (2,500 3 80%) Investment in S 80% of the dividend received from Company S

2,000

Investment income (2,050 3 80%) Investment in S 80% of acquisition differential amortization and impairment for Year 1

1,640

2,000

243

235

Only the investor’s share of the investee’s income, dividends, and amortization of acquisition differential are recorded in the investor’s records.

1,640

After these journal entries are posted, the two related s in the records of Company P will show the following changes and balances under the equity method: Investment in S January 1, Year 1 Changes during Year 1 Income from S Dividends from S Acquisition differential amortization and impairment Balance, December 31, Year 1

Investment income

$15,200 5,840 (2,000) (1,640) $17,400

$5,840 — (1,640) $4,200

Company P’s net income for Year 1 would now be $22,500 (18,300 1 4,200). It is not a coincidence that P’s net income is now equal to P’s share of consolidated net income. In fact, it should be equal to the consolidated net income attributable to the shareholders of Company P, as reported on the consolidated income statement. That is why the equity method is sometimes referred to as one-line consolidation. The one line on Company P’s non-consolidated income statement, being investment income, captures the net effect of all entries related to the subsidiary such that net income from the separate-entity books for Company P equals the consolidated net income attributable to the shareholders of Company P. Even though Company P has used the equity method for its internal record keeping, the amounts reported on the consolidated financial statements would be exactly the same as in our previous illustration when P used the cost method. What differs is what is recorded in Company P’s general ledger. This does not change what is reported on the consolidated financial statements. At this point, it is useful to discuss a further relationship that results from the use of the equity method of ing. The balance in the investment at any point in time can be broken down into two components—the carrying amount of the subsidiary’s shareholders’ equity and the unamortized acquisition differential. The following illustrates this point at December 31, Year 1: Total 100% Shareholders’ equity, Company S Common shares Retained earnings Unamortized acquisition differential Balance in the investment Non-controlling interest

$10,000 10,800 20,800 950 $21,750

P’s share 80%

NCI’s share 20%

$16,640 760

$4,160 190

$17,400 $4,350

The parent’s separate-entity net income should be equal to consolidated net income attributable to shareholders of the parent.

The investment can be reconciled to the carrying amount of the subsidiary’s shareholders’ equity and the unamortized acquisition differential.


244


236

CHAPTER 5


Let us now look at what happens in Year 2. In Year 2, Company S reported earnings of $10,000 and paid a cash dividend of $3,000. Company P’s earnings for the year were $19,000 (excluding any income from its investment in Company S). On December 31, Year 2, Company P would make the following journal entries under the equity method: Investment in S (10,000 3 80%) Investment income 80% of Company S, Year 2, net income

8,000

Cash (3,000 3 80%) Investment in S Dividends received from Company S

2,400

8,000

2,400

Investment income (80 3 80%) Investment in S 80% of acquisition differential amortization and impairment for Year 2

The investment captures all adjustments since the date of acquisition, whereas investment income captures adjustments for the current period.

64 64

After these journal entries are posted, the investment in S and the investment income in the records of P Company will show the following changes and balances: Investment in S December 31, Year 1 Changes during Year 2 Income from S Dividends from S Acquisition differential amortization and impairment Balance, December 31, Year 2

Investment income

$17,400 8,000 (2,400) (64) $22,936

$8,000

(64) $7,936

Company P combines its Year 2 investment income ($7,936) with the earnings from its own operations ($19,000) and reports a final net income of $26,936. Once again, it is not a coincidence that P’s net income is now equal to P’s share of consolidated net income. The parent’s use of the equity method should always produce the following results: • Consolidated net income attributable to the shareholders of the parent in any one year will always be equal to the parent’s net income reported in its internal records for that year. The parent’s retained earnings under the equity method should be equal to consolidated retained earnings.

• Consolidated retained earnings are always equal to the parent’s retained earnings in its internal records. The equity method captures the parent’s share of the net effect of any adjustments made on consolidation. When the cost method is used, the consolidated net income attributable to the parent and consolidated retained earnings do not equal the parent’s net income and retained earnings recorded in its internal records. However, one of the consolidation procedures involved when using the working paper approach is to adjust the parent’s s from the cost method to the balances that would have resulted if the equity method had been used instead.


245


CHAPTER 5


237

The following schedule converts the investment from the cost equity to the equity method: Investment in Company S, Dec. 31, Year 2—cost method Company S retained earnings, Dec. 31, Year 2 (13d) Company S retained earnings, acquisition date (10c) Increase since acquisition Less acquisition differential amortization and impairment to the end of Year 2 ([11c] 2,050 1 [14a] 80)

Company P’s ownership Investment in Company S, Dec. 31, Year 2—equity method

$15,200 17,800 6,000 11,800

(2,130) 9,670 (a) 80%

7,736 $22,936

Compare the calculation above to the calculation of consolidated retained earnings found after Exhibit 5.15. The adjustments are exactly the same. When you adjust the investment , something else must change on the balance sheet. The other change is to retained earnings. A thorough understanding of the equity method and the financial statement numbers that it produces will help you to understand the consolidation process. See Self-Study Problem 2 for a comprehensive example of consolidating a non–wholly owned subsidiary when the parent uses the equity method for its internal records.

ANALYSIS AND INTERPRETATION OF FINANCIAL STATEMENTS The parent company can use the cost or equity method to for the investment in subsidiary for its internal records. The separate-entity financial statements of the parent present the investment in subsidiary as one line on the balance sheet and investment income from the subsidiary as one line on the income statement. When the consolidated financial statements are prepared, the one line on the balance sheet and the one line on the income statement are replaced by the underlying assets, liabilities, revenues, and expenses of the subsidiary, plus or minus the acquisition differential. The consolidated financial statements are not affected by the method used by the parent to for its investment in the subsidiary. The adjustments to get from the separate-entity statements to the consolidated statements may be different, depending on the method used by the parent. But the end result is the exact same set of consolidated financial statements. Exhibit 5.16 presents the income statements and balance sheets for the parent’s separate-entity statements under two scenarios: first, when the parent uses the cost method and, second, when the parent uses the equity method. The last column presents the consolidated financial statements. The values for the cost method are taken directly from Exhibit 5.13. The values for the equity method are the same as the cost method, except for the investment and investment income (which are taken from the previous section) and retained earnings (which is taken from the consolidated balance sheet in Exhibit 5.15). The consolidated statements are taken from Exhibit 5.15. The exhibit also indicates the debt-to-equity ratio and return-on-equity ratio for each set of financial statements. The return on equity for all shareholders uses consolidated net income and total shareholders’ equity, including the non-controlling interest. The return on equity for shareholders of Company P uses consolidated net income attributable to the shareholders of Company P and total shareholders’ equity, excluding the non-controlling interest.

Investment in subsidiary and retained earnings are the only two s on the separate-entity balance sheet that would be different under the equity method as compared with the cost method.

LO6

Consolidated financial statements are exactly the same and do not depend on whether the parent uses the cost method or equity method for internal record keeping.


246


238

CHAPTER 5


EXHIBIT 5.16

Impact of Presentation Method on Debt-to-Equity and Return-on-Equity Ratios INCOME STATEMENTS for the Year Ended December 31, Year 2 Company P-Separate Entity Cost

Net income on the parent’s separate-entity income statement should always be equal to net income attributable to the shareholders of the parent on the consolidated income statement.

Sales Income from Company S Total revenue Cost of sales Goodwill impairment loss Expenses (misc.) Total expenses Net income Attributable to Shareholders of Company P Non-controlling interest

Consolidated

Equity

$ 60,000 2,400 62,400 32,000

$60,000 7,936 67,936 32,000

9,000 41,000 $ 21,400

9,000 41,000 $ 26,936

$100,000 — 100,000 50,000 80 21,000 71,080 $ 28,920

$ 26,936 1,984

BALANCE SHEETS at December 31, Year 2 Company P- Separate Entity Assets (misc.) Inventory Goodwill Investment in S

Retained earnings on the parent’s separate-entity balance under the equity method should always be equal to consolidated retained earnings sheet.


Debt-to-equity Return-on-equity - for all shareholders (28,920 / (50,000 1 120,436 1 5,734) - for shareholders of Company P

Consolidated

Cost

Equity

$134,500 35,000

$134,500 35,000

15,200 $184,700

22,936 $192,436

$ 22,000 50,000 112,700

$ 22,000 50,000 120,436

$184,700

$192,436

$ 31,200 50,000 120,436 5,734 $207,370

0.14

0.13

0.18

n/a 13.2%

n/a 15.8%

16.4% 15.8%

$155,500 51,000 870 $207,370

Note the following from Exhibit 5.16: • The separate-entity net income and return-on-equity ratio under the cost and equity methods are different. • The separate-entity net income and retained earnings under the equity method are equal to consolidated net income attributable to the shareholders of Company P and consolidated retained earnings, respectively.


CHAPTER 5


• The separate-entity return on equity under the equity method is equal to the consolidated return on equity for the shareholders of Company P. • The solvency position looks worst on the consolidated financial statements because the subsidiary’s debt is included on the consolidated financial statements. This increases the debt-to-equity ratio.

247

239

Return on equity for the parent’s separate-entity financial statements under the equity method should always to equal to the return on equity for the shareholders of Company P on the consolidated financial statements.

ASPE Differences • As mentioned in Chapter 3, private companies could either consolidate their subsidiaries or report their investments in subsidiaries under the cost method, equity method, or at fair value if the market value is quoted in an active market.

LO7

• The investments in and income from non-consolidated subsidiaries should be presented separately from other investments. • All intangible assets and goodwill should be tested for impairment whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying amount may exceed the fair value. • The impairment test for property, plant, and equipment and for intangible assets with definite useful lives has three steps. In step 1, consider whether there are any indicators; that is, events or circumstances that indicate that the asset may be impaired. If not, no further testing is required. In step 2, determine if the carrying amount exceeds its recoverable amount (i.e., the sum of the undiscounted cash flows expected to result from its use and eventual disposition). If not, no further testing is required. In step 3, determine if the carrying amount exceeds its fair value. If so, an impairment loss should be recognized. If not, there is no impairment.

Undiscounted cash flows are considered in step 3.

• For intangible assets with indefinite useful lives and goodwill, an impairment loss should be recognized when the carrying amount exceeds its fair value. • In all cases, the impairment loss is equal to the excess of carrying amount over the fair value, and impairment losses cannot be reversed.

U.S. GAAP Differences U.S. GAAP and IFRSs for consolidated statements subsequent to the date of acquisition have many similarities. The significant differences are summarized as follows: 1. Whereas goodwill is allocated to cash-generating units under IFRSs, it is allocated to reporting units under U.S. GAAP. A reporting unit is defined as an operating segment or one level below an operating segment.

The impairment loss is equal to the excess of carrying amount over the fair value.


248


240

CHAPTER 5

The impairment test for goodwill is quite different under U.S. GAAP as compared to IFRSs.


2. Impairment testing is a two-step approach. In step 1, the fair value and the carrying amount of the reporting unit, including goodwill, are compared. If the fair value is less than the carrying amount, step 2 is performed. In step 2, goodwill impairment is measured as the excess of the carrying amount of goodwill over its implied fair value, which is calculated in the same manner that goodwill is determined at the date of acquisition; that is, the difference between fair value of the reporting unit as a whole and the fair value of the identifiable net assets. 3. The goodwill impairment loss is not permitted to exceed the carrying amount of the goodwill.

summary While a parent company can for its investment by either the equity method or the cost method in its internal records, the consolidated statements are the same regardless of the method used. The method of presentation is quite different between the separate-entity financial statements and the consolidated financial statements. When the parent uses the equity method on its separate-entity financial statements, the parent’s share of the subsidiary’s income and net assets is typically shown on one line on the income statement (investment income) and one line on the balance sheet (investment in subsidiary). Accordingly, the equity method is sometimes referred to as one-line consolidation. The income and retained earnings reported by the parent on its separate-entity financial statements will be equal to the consolidated net income attributable to shareholders of the parent and consolidated retained earnings, respectively. This chapter has illustrated the preparation of consolidated financial statements covering a two-year period after the date of acquisition when the parent has used the cost method to for its investment. Additional calculations were performed to convert the income and retained earnings from the amounts shown on the separate-entity financial statements to the consolidated financial statements. The basic steps in the consolidation process when the parent has used the equity and cost methods are outlined in Exhibit 5.17. It is important to have a good grasp of the procedures under both methods, because these procedures are the foundation for the consolidation issues we will introduce in the chapters that follow.

Significant Changes in GAAP in the Last Three Years No significant changes for the topics discussed in this chapter.

Changes Expected in GAAP in the Next Three Years No major changes are expected in the next three years for the topics discussed in this chapter.


249


CHAPTER 5


241

EXHIBIT 5.17 PREPARATION OF CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS Basic Steps Parent company uses Cost Equity method method 1. Calculate and allocate the acquisition differential at the date of acquisition. 2. Prepare an acquisition differential amortization and impairment schedule (date of acquisition to present date). 3. Calculate consolidated net income—current year. 4. Prepare the consolidated income statement. 5. Calculate the start-of-year balance of consolidated retained earnings.** 6. Prepare the consolidated retained earnings statement.*** 7. Calculate the end-of-year balance of consolidated retained earnings. 8. Calculate non-controlling interest at the end of the year (for the consolidated balance sheet). 9. Prepare a statement of changes in non-controlling interest (optional). 10. Prepare a consolidated balance sheet.

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes Yes Yes

No* Yes No*

Yes Yes

Yes No*

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

* If the parent company uses the equity method of ing, the parent’s net income equals consolidated net income attributable to the shareholders of the parent, and the parent’s retained earnings always equal consolidated retained earnings. Therefore, the calculations in steps 3, 5, and 7 are not necessary. ** Only do so if preparing a statement of retained earnings. *** Not required in all problems.

S ELF- STUDY PROBLEM 1 LO1, 2, 3

On January 1, Year 1, Allen Company acquired 7,000 (70%) of the outstanding common shares of Bell Company for $87,500 in cash. On that date, Bell had common shares of $50,000 and retained earnings of $45,000. The Bell shares were trading for $11 per share just after the date of acquisition. At acquisition, the identifiable assets and liabilities of Bell had fair values that were equal to carrying amounts, except for equipment, which had a fair value of $150,000, a cost of $200,000, and accumulated depreciation of $80,000; inventory, which had a fair value $8,000 less than carrying amount; and bonds payable, which had a fair value $12,420 greater than carrying amount. The equipment had a remaining useful life of eight years on January 1, Year 1, and is amortized on a straight-line basis. The bonds payable mature on December 31, Year 8; pay interest annually; and are amortized using the effective interest method. The market rate of interest for similar bonds is 6%.


250


242

CHAPTER 5


Financial statements for the Year 6 fiscal year are as follows: Allen Income statements Sales Rent revenue Dividend revenue Cost of sales Depreciation Interest expense Other expenses Profit Retained earnings statements Balance, January 1 Profit Dividends Balance, December 31 Statement of financial position Property, plant, and equipment Accumulated depreciation Investment in Bell—cost method Inventory s receivable Cash

Ordinary shares Retained earnings Bonds payable, 8% s payable

Bell

$ 400,000 15,000 3,500 418,500 200,000 55,000 32,000 28,000 315,000 $ 103,500

$250,000 — — 250,000 160,000 20,000 8,000 42,000 230,000 $ 20,000

$ 400,000 103,500 503,500 30,000 $ 473,500

$ 65,000 20,000 85,000 5,000 $ 80,000

$1,200,000 (300,000) 87,500 200,000 60,000 12,500 $1,260,000

$400,000 (210,000) — 40,000 25,000 10,000 $265,000

$ 300,000 473,500 400,000 86,500 $1,260,000

$ 50,000 80,000 100,000 35,000 $265,000

Additional Information In Year 2, a goodwill impairment loss of $7,000 was recorded ($6,300 pertained to Allen’s 70% interest). Subsequent goodwill testing yielded no further evidence of impairment until Year 6, when a decline in the recoverable amount of Bell Company occurred and management decided to reflect an impairment loss of $6,000 in the year’s consolidated statements ($5,400 pertained to Allen’s 70% interest). On December 31, Year 6, Bell Company owes Allen Company $9,000.

Required: (a) Using the direct approach, prepare the following Year 6 consolidated financial statements: (i) Income statement (ii) Retained earnings statement (iii) Statement of financial position (b) Prepare a schedule of the Year 6 changes in non-controlling interest.


251


S OLUTION

TO

243


CHAPTER 5

SELF-STUDY PROBLEM 1 CALCULATION OF ACQUISITION DIFFERENTIAL

Parent’s 70%

Noncontrolling interest’s 30%

Total 100%

Cost of 70% of Bell $87,500 Value of 30% of Bell $33,000 (3,000 shares 3 11) Implied value of 100% of Bell Carrying amount of Bell’s net assets 5 Carrying amount of shareholders’ equity Ordinary shares 50,000 Retained earnings 45,000 95,000 66,500 28,500 21,000 4,500 Acquisition differential Allocated: FV 2 CA Equipment 30,000 (a) (150,000 2 [200,000 2 80,000]) Inventory 2 8,000 (b) Bonds payable 212,420 (c) 9,580 6,706 2,874

$120,500

95,000 25,500

9,580

$14,294 (d)

Goodwill (approximately 90% of total)

$ 1,626 (e)

Goodwill (approximately 10% of total) Total goodwill

$ 15,920

BOND AMORTIZATION SCHEDULE

Date Jan 1/ Year 1 Dec 31/ Year 1 Dec 31/ Year 2 Dec 31/ Year 3 Dec 31/ Year 4 Dec 31/ Year 5 Dec 31/ Year 6 Dec 31/ Year 7 Dec 31/ Year 8

Cash paid

Interest expense

$ 8,000 8,000 8,000 8,000 8,000 40,000 8,000 8,000 8,000 $64,000

$ 6,745 6,670 6,590 6,506 6,416 32,927 6,321 6,220 6,112 $51,580

Bond amortization $ 1,255 1,330 1,410 1,494 1,584 7,073 1,679 1,780 1,888 $12,420

Amortized cost of bonds $112,420 111,165 109,835 108,425 106,931 105,347 103,668 (f) 101,888 100,000

ACQUISITION DIFFERENTIAL AMORTIZATION AND IMPAIRMENT

Balance Jan. 1/Year 1 Equipment (a) Inventory (b) Bonds payable (c)

$ 30,000 2 8,000 212,420

Amortization and Impairment To end of Year 5 Year 6 $18,750 2 8,000 2 7,073

$ 3,750 — 21,679

Balance Dec. 31/Year 6 $ 7,500 — 23,668

(g) (h) (i)

(continued)


252


244

CHAPTER 5


Balance Jan. 1/Year 1 Goodwill—parent (d) Goodwill—NCI (e) Goodwill—total

Amortization and Impairment To end of Year 5 Year 6

9,580 14,294 1,626 15,920 $25,500

3,677 6,300 700 7,000 $10,677

Balance Dec. 31/Year 6

2,071 5,400 600 6,000 $ 8,071

3,832 2,594 326 2,920 $ 6,752

(j) (k) (l) (m)

CALCULATION OF CONSOLIDATED NET INCOME ATTRIBUTABLE TO PARENT Year 6 Profit—Allen Less dividend from Bell

$103,500 3,500 100,000

Profit—Bell 20,000 (o) Allen’s ownership 70% Parent’s share of acquisition differential amortization and impairment (70% 3 [j] 2,071 1 [k] 5,400)

(n)

14,000 26,850 $107,150

(p) (q)

CALCULATION OF CONSOLIDATED NET INCOME ATTRIBUTABLE TO NCI Net income—Bell NCI’s ownership

$ 20,000 30% 6,000

NCI’s share of acquisition differential amortization and impairment (30% 3 [j] 2,071 1 [l] 600) $

21,221 4,779

(r)

CALCULATION OF CONSOLIDATED RETAINED EARNINGS January 1, Year 6 Retained earnings—Allen Retained earnings—Bell Retained earnings—Bell, acquisition date Increase since acquisition Allen’s ownership

$400,000 65,000 45,000 20,000 70% 14,000

Parent’s share of acquisition differential amortization and impairment (70% 3 [j] 3,677 1 [k] 6,300)

28,874 $405,126

(s) (t)

CALCULATION OF CONSOLIDATED RETAINED EARNINGS December 31, Year 6 Retained earnings—Allen Retained earnings—Bell Retained earnings—Bell, acquisition date Increase since acquisition Allen’s ownership

$473,500 80,000 45,000 35,000 70%

Parent’s share of acquisition differential amortization and impairment ([p] 6,850 1 [s] 8,874)

24,500 215,724 $482,276

(u) (v)


253


CHAPTER 5

245


CALCULATION OF NON-CONTROLLING INTEREST (Method 1) at December 31, Year 6 Ordinary shares—Bell Retained earnings—Bell

$ 50,000 80,000 130,000 30% 39,000

NCI’s ownership NCI’s share of unamortized acquisition differential (30% 3 [j] 3,832 1 [l] 326)

1,476 $ 40,476

(w)

CALCULATION OF NON-CONTROLLING INTEREST (Method 2) Non-controlling interest at acquisition (3,000 shares 3 11) Increase in Bell’s retained earnings since acquisition NCI’s share @ 30% NCI’s share of amortization of acquisition differential ([(j) 3,677 1 (j) 2,071] 3 30% 1 [l] 700 1 [l] 600)

33,000 35,000

Accumulated depreciation and equipment need to be reduced by $80,000 so that equipment held by subsidiary is reported at a cost of $150,000 with no accumulated depreciation at date of acquisition

(3,024) 40,476

(w)

$ 80,000

(x)

ALLEN COMPANY CONSOLIDATED INCOME STATEMENT for the Year Ended December 31, Year 6

(a) (i)

Sales (400,000 1 250,000) Rent revenue Dividend revenue (3,500 1 0 2 [n] 3,500) Cost of sales (200,000 1 160,000) Depreciation (55,000 1 20,000 1 [g] 3,750) Interest expense (32,000 1 8,000 2 [ i] 1,679) Other expenses (28,000 1 42,000) Goodwill impairment loss (m) Profit Add: Attributable to Shareholders of Allen (q) Non-controlling interest (r)

(ii)

10,500

$650,000 15,000 — 665,000 360,000 78,750 38,321 70,000 6,000 553,071 $111,929 $107,150 4,779

ALLEN COMPANY CONSOLIDATED RETAINED EARNINGS STATEMENT for the Year Ended December 31, Year 6 Balance, January 1 (t) Profit Dividends Balance, December 31 (v)

$405,126 107,150 512,276 30,000 $482,276


254


246

CHAPTER 5


ALLEN COMPANY CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION December 31, Year 6

(iii)

Plant and equipment (1,200,000 1 400,000 1 [a] 30,000 2 [x] 80,000) Accumulated depreciation (300,000 1 210,000 1 [g] 18,750 1 [g] 3,750 2 [x]) 80,000) Goodwill (m) Inventory (200,000 1 40,000) s receivable (60,000 1 25,000 2 *9,000) Cash (12,500 1 10,000)

$1,550,000

Ordinary shares Retained earnings (v) Non-controlling interest (w)

$ 300,000 482,276 40,476 822,752 503,668 112,500 $1,438,920

(452,500) 2,920 240,000 76,000 22,500 $1,438,920

Bonds payable (400,000 1 100,000 1 [i] 3,668) s payable (86,500 1 35,000 2 *9,000) * Intercompany receivable/payable

YEAR 6 CHANGES IN NON-CONTROLLING INTEREST

(b)

Balance, January 1* Allocation of entity net income (r)

$37,197 4,779 41,976 1,500 $40,476

Dividends (30% 3 5,000) Balance, December 31 (v) *Ordinary shares Retained earnings, January 1 NCI’s ownership NCI’s share of unamortized acquisition differential (30% 3 [j] [9,580 2 3,677] 1 [l] [1,626 2 700])

$50,000 65,000 115,000 30% 34,500 2,697 $37,197

SELF- S TUDY P ROBLEM 2 LO1, 2, 4, 5

On December 31, Year 2, Pat Inc. purchased 80% of the outstanding common shares of Sam Company for $620,000. At that date, Sam had common shares of $400,000 and retained earnings of $125,000. In negotiating the purchase price, it was agreed that the assets on Sam’s balance sheet were fairly valued, except for plant assets, which had an $80,000 excess of fair value over carrying amount. It was also agreed that Sam had unrecognized intangible assets consisting of trademarks that had an estimated value of $50,000. The plant assets had a remaining useful life of 8 years at the acquisition date, and the trademarks would be


255


CHAPTER 5


247

amortized over a 10-year period. Any goodwill arising from this business combination would be tested periodically for impairment. Pat s for its investment using the equity method and prepares consolidated statements using the parent company extension theory. Additional Information • Impairment tests performed at the end of Year 6 indicated that Pat’s portion of the goodwill had a recoverable amount of $85,000 and the trademarks had a recoverable amount of $29,000. The impairment loss on these assets occurred entirely in Year 6. • On December 26, Year 6, Pat declared dividends of $72,000 while Sam declared dividends of $40,000. • Amortization expense is reported in selling expenses, while impairment losses are reported in other expenses. Condensed inancial statements for Pat and Sam for the year ended December 31, Year 6, were as follows: STATEMENTS OF FINANCIAL POSITION December 31, Year 6 Assets Plant assets—net Investment in Sam Company Other assets

Shareholders’ Equity and Liabilities Common shares Retained earnings Liabilities

Pat

Sam

$ 460,000 700,200 580,000 $1,740,200

$ 320,000 — 804,000 $1,124,000

$1,000,000 300,200 440,000 $1,740,200

$400,000 300,000 424,000 $1,124,000

INCOME STATEMENTS Year ended December 31, Year 6 Sales Cost of goods sold Gross profit Selling expenses Other expenses Interest and investment income Profit

Pat

Sam

$1,740,000 (1,276,000) 464,000 (44,000) (296,000) 92,200 $ 216,200

$1,030,000 (720,000) 310,000 (70,000) (144,000) 4,000 $ 100,000

Required: (a) Prepare a schedule to allocate the acquisition differential at the date of acquisition and a schedule to amortize the acquisition differential from the date of acquisition to the end of Year 6


256


248

CHAPTER 5


(b) Prepare the journal entries for Pat’s separate-entity books to for the investment in Sam for Year 6, and determine the investment income from Sam for Year 6 under the i) equity method, and ii) cost method. (c) Prepare consolidated financial statements for Year 6.

SOLUTION

TO

SELF-S TUDY P ROBLEM 2 CALCULATION OF ACQUISITION DIFFERENTIAL

(a)

$620,000

Cost of 80% of Sam

Implied value of 100% (620,000/0.8) $775,000 Carrying amount of Sam’s net assets 5 Carrying amount of Sam’s shareholders’ equity Common shares 400,000 Retained earnings 125,000 525,000 Acquisition differential 250,000 Allocated: FV 2 CA Plant assets 80,000 Trademarks 50,000 130,000 Goodwill for 100% 120,000 Less: NCI’s share at 20% 24,000 96,000 Goodwill for Sam’s 80% NCI at date of acquisition (20% 3 [(a) 525,000 1 (b) 130,000])

Bal Dec. 31/Yr2

Amortization to Dec.31/Yr5 Yr6

(a)

(b)

(c)

131,000

Loss Yr6

Bal Dec. 31/Yr6

Plant assets (8 years) Trademarks (10 years) Subtotal Goodwill for Sam’s 80% Total

80,000 50,000 130,000 96,000 226,000

30,000 15,000 45,000 -------45,000

10,000 5,000 15,000 -------15,000

1,000 1,000 11,000 12,000

40,000 29,000 69,000 85,000 154,000

(d) (e) (f) (g) (h)

NCI’s share [20% 3 (f)] Pat’s share

26,000 200,000

9,000 36,000

3,000 12,000

200 11,800

13,800 140,200

(i) (j)

(i) Equity Method

(b) Investment in Sam (80% 3 100,000) Investment income To record Pat’s share of Sam’s income Cash (80% 3 40,000) Investment in Sam Investment income To record Pat’s share of Sam’s dividend

(ii) Cost Method

80,000 80,000 32,000

32,000 32,000

Investment income [(j) (12,000 1 (j) 11,800)] 23,800 Investment in Sam 23,800 To record Pat’s share of amortization and impairment of acquisition differential

32,000


CHAPTER 5


Investment income for Year 6 under the equity method is $56,200 (80,000 2 23,800) and $32,000 under the cost method.

257

249

(k)

(c) Calculation of consolidated profit attributable to NCI Sam’s profit

100,000

NCI’s share @ 20% Acquisition differential amortization [(i) (3,000 1 (i) 200)]

20,000 (3,200) 16,800

(l)

Pat Inc. Consolidated Income Statement Year ended December 31, Year 6 Sales (1,740,000 1 1,030,000) Interest & investment income (92,200 1 4,000 2 [k] 56,200) Cost of sales (1,276,000 1 720,000) Selling expenses (44,000 1 70,000 1 [h] 15,000) Other expenses (296,000 1 144,000 1 [h] 12,000)

$2,770,000 40,000 2,810,000 1,996,000 129,000 452,000

Profit

2,577,000 $ 233,000

Attributable to: Pat’s shareholders (5 income under equity method) Non-controlling interest (l)

Calculation of NCI at December 31, Year 6 NCI at acquisition (c) Sam retained earnings Dec. 31, Year 6 Acquisition retained earnings Increase NCI’s share Less: Acquisition differential amortization ((i) 9,000 1 3,000 1 200)

$ 216,200 16,800 $ 233,000 131,000 300,000 125,000 175,000 3 20%

35,000 (12,200) 153,800

Pat Inc. Consolidated Balance sheet December 31, Year 6 Plant assets (460,000 1 320,000 1 [d] 40,000) Trademarks (0 1 0 1 [e] 29,000) Goodwill (0 1 0 1 [f] 85,000) Other assets (580,000 1 804,000)

$ 820,000 29,000 85,000 1,384,000 $2,318,000

Common shares Retained earnings (5 retained earnings under equity method) Non-controlling interest (m) Liabilities (440,000 1 424,000)

$1,000,000 300,200 153,800 864,000 $2,318,000


258


APPENDIX 5A goodwill impairment LO1

At the date of acquisition, the total value of the subsidiary is segregated by cashgenerating units. Individual assets should be tested for impairment before each cash-generating unit is tested for impairment.

The recoverable amount is compared with the carrying amount of net assets for each cash-generating unit.

Any impairment loss is applied first to goodwill and then to other assets.

Goodwill is recorded only when it is purchased as part of a business combination. When the subsidiary is made up of more than one cash-generating unit (CGU), these CGUs must be identified at the date of acquisition. The assets and liabilities (including goodwill) acquired in a business combination are then assigned to these identified CGUs. The assignment should consider where the acquired assets and liabilities will be employed. The goodwill should be assigned to those units that are expected to benefit from the synergies of the combination. Overall, the objective of the assignment of acquired assets and liabilities to CGUs is to facilitate the required fair value/carrying amount comparisons for periodic impairment testing. Each year, starting with the year of acquisition, goodwill in each cashgenerating unit is tested for impairment. At the time of impairment testing of a cash-generating unit to which goodwill has been allocated, there may be an indication of an impairment of an asset within the unit containing the goodwill. In such circumstances, the entity tests the individual asset for impairment first and recognizes any impairment loss for that asset before testing for impairment of the CGU containing the goodwill. In other words, the impairment procedures are applied at the single asset level first and the CGU levels last. To test goodwill for impairment, the recoverable amount of each CGU is compared with its carrying amount, including goodwill. If the recoverable amount exceeds the carrying amount, goodwill is not impaired. If the recoverable amount is less than the carrying amount, an impairment loss should be recognized and allocated to reduce the carrying amount of the assets of the unit (group of units) in the following order: (a) First, to reduce the carrying amount of any goodwill allocated to the cashgenerating unit (b) Then, to the other assets of the unit, pro rata on the basis of the carrying amount of each asset in the unit However, an entity shall not reduce the carrying amount of an individual asset below the higher of its recoverable amount and zero. The amount of the impairment loss that could not be allocated to an individual asset because of this limitation must be allocated pro rata to the other assets of the unit (group of units). Several alternative methods exist for determining the recoverable amount of the cash generating units that compose a consolidated entity. First, any quoted market prices that exist can provide a basis for assessing fair value, especially for subsidiaries with actively traded non-controlling interests. Second, comparable businesses may exist that can help indicate market values. Third, present value of future cash flow streams or profit projections can be calculated to determine the value in use. The discount rate used in the present value calculations should consider the riskiness of the future flows. The following example6 illustrates impairment testing for a subsidiary with more than one CGU. At the end of year 1, T Company acquires 100% of the

250


259


CHAPTER 5


common shares of M Limited for $10,000. M has manufacturing plants in three countries. Each country is deemed to be a separate cash-generating unit because activities in each country represent the lowest level at which the goodwill is monitored for internal management purposes. The acquisition cost was allocated to the CGUs as follows at the date of acquisition:

CGU Activities in Country A Activities in Country B Activities in Country C Total

Allocation of acquisition cost

Fair value of identifiable assets

Goodwill

$ 3,000 2,000 5,000 $10,000

$2,000 1,500 3,500 $7,000

$1,000 500 1,500 $3,000

Because goodwill has been allocated to the activities in each country, each of those activities must be tested for impairment annually, or more frequently if there is any indication that it may be impaired. The recoverable amounts of the cashgenerating units are determined on the basis of value in use calculations. At the end of Year 1 and Year 2, the value in use of each cash-generating unit exceeds its carrying amount. Therefore, the activities in each country and the goodwill allocated to those activities are regarded as not impaired. At the beginning of Year 3, a new government is elected in Country A. It es legislation significantly restricting exports of T’s main product. As a result, and for the foreseeable future, T’s production in Country A will be cut by 40%. The significant export restriction and the resulting production decrease require T also to estimate the recoverable amount of the Country A operations at the beginning of Year 3. To determine the value in use for the Country A cash-generating unit, T does the following:

251

CGUs are identified based on the lowest level at which the goodwill is monitored for internal management purposes.

The new legislation in Country A is an example of an indicator that goodwill may be impaired.

(a) Prepares cash flow forecasts derived from the most recent financial budgets/ forecasts for the next five years (Years 3–7) approved by management (b) Estimates subsequent cash flows (Years 8–13) based on declining growth rates. The growth rate for Year 8 is estimated to be 3%. This rate is lower than the average long-term growth rate for the market in Country A (c) Selects a 15% discount rate, which represents a pre-tax rate that reflects current market assessments of the time value of money and the risks specific to the Country A cash-generating unit Exhibit 5A.1 shows the calculation of the value in use of the Country A cashgenerating unit at the beginning of Year 3. Based on the calculation in Exhibit 5A.1, the recoverable amount of the Country A cash-generating unit is $1,360. Assuming that the carrying amount of Country A’s identifiable net assets is $1,833 at the beginning of Year 3, there would be an impairment loss of $1,473 calculated as follows: Carrying amount of Country A’s: Identifiable net assets Goodwill Total carrying amount Recoverable amount Total impairment loss

$1,833 1,000 2,833 1,360 $1,473

The value in use is determined by calculating the present value of future cash flows.


260


252

CHAPTER 5


EXHIBIT 5A.1 VALUE IN USE OF COUNTRY A CASH-GENERATING UNIT

Year Future cash flows are discounted using a pre-tax rate that reflects current market assessments of the time value of money and the risks specific to the cashgenerating unit.

Year 3 (n 5 1) Year 4 Year 5 Year 6 Year 7 Year 8 Year 9 Year 10 Year 11 Year 12 Year 13 Value in use

Long-term growth rates

Future cash flows

Present value at 15% discount rate

Discounted future factor cash flows

3% - 2% - 6% - 15% - 25% - 67%

$230 253 273 290 304 313 307 289 245 184 61

0.86957 0.75614 0.65752 0.57175 0.49718 0.43233 0.37594 0.32690 0.28426 0.24719 0.21494

$ 200 191 180 166 151 135 115 94 70 45 13 $1,360

The impairment loss is applied first to goodwill to reduce it to zero and then to identifiable assets as indicated by the following: The impairment loss is allocated to goodwill first and then to other identifiable net assets.

Goodwill at the date of acquisition is allocated to the CGUs that benefit from the synergies of the business combination.

Carrying amount Impairment loss Carrying amount after impairment loss

Goodwill

Identifiable assets

Total

1,000 (1,000) 0

1,833 (473) 1,360

2,833 (1,473) 1,360

In the example above, the subsidiary is wholly owned by the parent. The value in use was calculated for the CGU as a whole and compared to the carrying amount of goodwill and identifiable net assets for the unit as a whole. When the subsidiary is non–wholly owned, certain adjustments may be required when making this comparison. This is especially important when parent company extension theory is used to for NCI. In this situation, the carrying amount of goodwill allocated to the unit will have to be grossed up to include the goodwill attributable to the non-controlling interest. This adjusted carrying amount is then compared with the recoverable amount of the unit to determine whether the cashgenerating unit is impaired. The following example7 illustrates impairment testing for a non-wholly subsidiary ed for using parent company extension theory. Parent acquired an 80% ownership interest in Subsidiary for $2,200 on January 1, Year 3. At that date, Subsidiary’s net identifiable assets had a fair value of $1,500. Parent chooses to measure the non-controlling interests as the proportionate interest of Subsidiary’s net identifiable assets of $300 (20% 3 1,500). Goodwill of $1,000 is the difference between the total consideration given, $2,500 (2,200 1 300) and the fair value of the identifiable net assets, $1,500. The assets of Subsidiary together are the smallest group of assets that generate cash inflows that are largely independent of the cash inflows from other assets or groups of assets. Therefore, Subsidiary is a cash-generating unit. Because other cash-generating units of Parent are expected to benefit from the synergies of the combination, goodwill of $600 related to those synergies has been allocated to other cash-generating units within Parent. Therefore, only $400 of goodwill is allocated to Subsidiary. Because the cash-generating unit Subsidiary is made up


261


CHAPTER 5


of includes goodwill within its carrying amount, it must be tested for impairment annually, or more frequently if there is an indication that it may be impaired. At the end of Year 3, Parent determines that the recoverable amount of cashgenerating unit Subsidiary is $1,200. The carrying amount of the net assets of Subsidiary, excluding goodwill, is $1,350. Goodwill attributable to non-controlling interests is included in Subsidiary’s recoverable amount of $1,200 but has not been recognized in Parent’s consolidated financial statements. Therefore, the carrying amount of Subsidiary is grossed up to include goodwill attributable to the non-controlling interests, before being compared with the recoverable amount of $1,200. Goodwill attributable to Parent’s 80% interest in Subsidiary at the acquisition date is $400 after allocating $600 to other cash-generating units within Parent. The goodwill attributable to the 20% non-controlling interests in Subsidiary at the acquisition date is $100 (400 3 20/80). The adjusted carrying amount of goodwill is $500 ($400 pertaining to parent’s 80% interest plus $100 pertaining to the NCI’s unrecognized interest). The impairment loss is $650 calculated as follows: Carrying amount of Subsidiary’s: Identifiable net assets Goodwill Total carrying amount Recoverable amount Total impairment loss

253

The carrying amount of the subsidiary must be grossed up for the unrecognized portion of its goodwill (i.e., the NCI’s portion) to make it comparable to the recoverable amount for the subsidiary as a whole.

$1,350 500 1,850 1,200 $ 650

The impairment loss is applied first to goodwill to reduce it to zero and then to identifiable assets. Since the calculation of impairment loss included a value for the NCI’s unrecognized share of goodwill, part of the impairment loss should be allocated to the NCI as follows: Parent’s Goodwill Carrying amount Impairment loss Carrying amount after impairment loss

$400 (400) 0

NCI’s Goodwill $100 (100) 0

Identifiable assets $1,350 (150) $1,200

Total $1,850 (650) $1,200

The previous examples have shown that the impairment testing for goodwill has added a new and complex valuation exercise to the consolidation process. The determination of recoverable amounts will be a costly one for many companies and will likely require the yearly services of business valuation specialists. Although impairment testing for goodwill and intangible assets with indefinite lives is required on an annual basis, a detailed evaluation of the recoverable amount may not be required annually. The most recent detailed calculation made in a preceding period of the recoverable amount of a CGU to which goodwill has been allocated may be used in the impairment test of that unit in the current period given the following: (a) There is very little change in the make-up of the assets and liabilities of the CGU since the most recent recoverable amount determination. (b) The most recent recoverable amount determination yielded an amount that substantially exceeded the carrying amount of the unit (c) Based on analyzing events since the most recent recoverable amount determination, the likelihood that a current recoverable amount determination would be less than the carrying amount of the unit is remote.

The impairment tests are complex and often require considerable professional judgment.


262


APPENDIX 5B Working Paper Approach for Consolidations Subsequent to Acquisition LO3

In this chapter, we illustrated the direct approach for preparing consolidated financial statements when the parent used the cost method to for its investment. In the examples used, we first examined the situation where the subsidiary was 100% owned, and then the situation where the parent’s ownership was 80%. We will now illustrate the working paper approach using the same examples.

Year 1 Consolidated Financial Statement Working Paper There are many different ways of using a working paper to the preparation of consolidated financial statements.

Total debits must equal total credits on the consolidated worksheet.

254

A number of methods can be used to prepare consolidated financial statement working papers when the parent has used the cost method. All methods used must result in identical consolidated amounts. The approach that we will illustrate adjusts the parent’s retained earnings on the working paper to what they would have been if the equity method had been used to for the investment. Since retained earnings under the equity method are equal to consolidated retained earnings, we are, in effect, adjusting the parent’s cost-method retained earnings to consolidated retained earnings. The adjustment is made as of the earliest date that retained earnings are needed for the current year’s financial statements. If a statement of retained earnings or a statement of changes in shareholders’ equity is prepared, the balance for retained earnings is needed as of the beginning of the reporting period. The working paper approach requires the same additional calculations used in the direct approach. Then, we make “adjustments and eliminations” similar to Chapters 3 and 4. In this chapter, we have shortened the description to “eliminations.” Exhibit 5B.1 shows the preparation of the consolidated financial statements for Year 1 using a working paper, assuming Company S is a 100%-owned subsidiary of Company P. To compare it with the direct approach, see Exhibit 5.5. Before explaining the various entries, a few comments about the overall format would be useful.8 1. In observing the effect of the elimination entries, the reader must take into the debit and credit balances of the financial statement items. Revenues, net income, retained earnings, liabilities, and share capital s have credit balances, while expenses, dividends, and assets have debit balances. The debit and credit elimination entries are either increasing or decreasing these financial statement items, depending on their nature. 2. Some elimination entries affect two or more of the financial statements, but the total debits and credits for each entry are equal. 3. The totals from the net income line from the income statement, including the totals of the elimination entries made there, are carried down to the net income line in the retained earnings statement. In a similar manner, the end-of-year retained earnings totals are carried down to the retained earnings on the balance sheet. Because the cumulative effect of the elimination entries from each statement has been carried down to the balance sheet, the total elimination debits and credits on that statement are equal.


263



CHAPTER 5

255

EXHIBIT 5B.1 CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENT WORKING PAPER December 31, Year 1 (Cost Method)

P

S

$ 50,000 2,500 52,500 26,500

$30,000

5,200 31,700 $ 20,800

8,000 22,700 $ 7,300

Retained earnings, Jan. 1 $ 85,000 Net income 20,800 105,800 Dividends 6,000 Retained earnings, $ 99,800 Dec. 31

Sales Dividend income Cost of sales Goodwill impairment loss Misc. expenses Net income

Assets, misc. Inventory Investment in S Acquisition differential Goodwill


$147,800 30,000 19,000

Eliminations Dr. Cr.

Consolidated $80,000

(1) $ 2,500 30,000 14,700

(3) (3)

2,000 50

$ 4,550

$

0

$ 6,000 7,300 13,300 2,500

(2) $ 6,000 4,550

$

0

$10,800

$10,550

(1)

2,500

$ 85,000 23,550 108,550 6,000

$ 2,500

$102,550

$18,300 14,000

$166,100 44,000 (2) (3)

$196,800

$32,300

$ 47,000 50,000 99,800 $196,800

$11,500 10,000 10,800 $32,300

80,000 43,200 50 13,200 56,450 $ 23,550*

The consolidated balances are derived by combining the carrying amount from the parent’s and subsidiary’s separate-entity financial statements, plus or minus consolidation adjustments.

(2) 19,000 3,000 (3) 3,000 950

(2) 10,000 10,550 $24,500

2,500 $24,500

950 $211,050 $ 58,500 50,000 102,550 $211,050

The investment is replaced by the carrying amount of the subsidiary’s assets and liabilities plus the unamortized acquisition differential.

* Attributable to shareholders of Company P.

Since Year 1 is the first period since the date of acquisition, the retained earnings at the beginning of Year 1 would be the same amount under both the cost and equity methods. Therefore, no adjustment is necessary to convert retained earnings at the beginning of this reporting period to the equity method. The working paper elimination entries are reproduced below, with an explanation of each. (1) Dividend income—Company P Dividends—Company S

2,500 2,500

The parent’s dividend income does not appear in the consolidated income statement, and the subsidiary’s dividends do not appear in the consolidated retained earnings statement. Therefore, these s need to be eliminated. Now, the revenue and expenses of the parent and subsidiary can be combined, plus or minus adjustments for amortization of the acquisition differential, to determine consolidated revenues and expenses.

Dividend income is eliminated against the dividends paid by the subsidiary.


264


256

CHAPTER 5

The investment is eliminated since it will be replaced by the carrying amount of the subsidiary’s assets and liabilities plus the unamortized acquisition differential.


(2)

Retained earnings Jan. 1—Company S Common shares—Company S Acquisition differential Investment in S—Company P

6,000 10,000 3,000 19,000

This entry eliminates the parent’s share of the start-of-year retained earnings and common shares of Company S, and the investment in S of Company P, and establishes the acquisition differential at the beginning of the year. (In Year 1, this is the acquisition differential on the date of acquisition.) (3)

Cost of sales—Company S Goodwill impairment loss Goodwill Acquisition differential

2,000 50 950 3,000

This entry eliminates the acquisition differential established by entry (2), and allocates it in accordance with the acquisition differential amortization schedule by (a) adjusting the expenses of Company S and (b) reflecting the unamortized balance at the end of the year on the consolidated balance sheet.

Year 2 Consolidated Financial Statement Working Paper The working papers for the preparation of the Year 2 consolidated financial statements are presented in Exhibit 5B.2. See Exhibit 5.8 to compare with the direct approach. Elimination entry (a) adjusts Company P’s retained earnings to the balance under the equity method as at the beginning of Year 2, which is the same balance as at the end of Year 1. Retained earnings under the equity method is equal to consolidated retained earnings. Therefore, retained earnings at the beginning of Year 2 has to be adjusted from $99,800 under the cost method to $102,550 under the equity method. (a)

First, convert the parent’s beginning retained earnings from the cost method to the equity method.

Investment in S—Company P Retained earnings, Jan. 1—Company P (102,550 2 99,800)

2,750 2,750

This entry adjusts the investment in S and the January 1 retained earnings of Company P to the equity method balances at the beginning of the year. The calculation of consolidated retained earnings as at January 1, Year 2, following Exhibit 5.7 provides the amounts for this entry. The working paper elimination entries are reproduced below, with an explanation of each. (1)

Dividend income—Company P Dividends—Company S

3,000 3,000

This entry eliminates Company P’s dividend income and the dividend of Company S. Now, the revenue and expenses of the parent and subsidiary can be combined, plus or minus adjustments for amortization of the acquisition differential, to determine consolidated revenues and expenses. (2)

Retained earnings Jan. 1—Company S Common shares—Company S Acquisition differential Investment in S

10,800 10,000 950 21,750


265



CHAPTER 5

257

EXHIBIT 5B.2 CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENT WORKING PAPER December 31, Year 2 (Cost Method) Eliminations Dr. Cr.

P

S

$ 60,000 3,000 63,000 32,000

$40,000

9,000 41,000 $ 22,000

12,000 30,000 $10,000

$ 99,800 22,000 121,800 8,000

$10,800 10,000 20,800 3,000

(2) $10,800 3,080

$113,800

$17,800

$13,880


$131,800 35,000 19,000

$21,000 16,000

$185,800

$37,000


$ 22,000 50,000 113,800 $185,800

$ 9,200 10,000 17,800 $37,000

Sales Dividend income

Cost of sales Goodwill impairment loss Expenses, misc. Net income Retained earnings, Jan. 1 Net income Dividends Retained earnings, Dec. 31


(1) $ 3,000

40,000 18,000 (3)

80

$ 3,080

$

0

(a) $ 2,750 0 (1)

100,000 50,000 80 21,000 71,080 $ 28,920*

3,000

$102,550 28,920 131,470 8,000

$ 5,750

$123,470

The entries on the income statement are adjustments for one period to bring the s to the desired balance for one period of time, that is, for one year.

$152,800 51,000 (a) $ 2,750 (2) 950 870 (3)

(2) 10,000 13,880 $28,450

(2) 21,750 (3) 950

The entries on the balance sheet are cumulative adjustments to bring the s to the desired balance at the end of the period, that is, at a point in time.

870 $204,670

5,750 $28,450

$ 31,200 50,000 123,470 $204,670

* Attributable to shareholders of Company P.

This entry eliminates the common shares and retained earnings of Company S on December 31, Year 1, against the December 31, Year 1, balance of Company P’s investment ; it also establishes the difference as the unamortized acquisition differential on that date. (3)

Goodwill impairment loss Goodwill Acquisition differential

80 870 950

This entry eliminates the unamortized acquisition differential at the end of Year 1 and allocates it in accordance with the Year 2 acquisition differential amortization schedule.

80%-Owned Subsidiary—Year 1 Exhibit 5B.3 shows the preparation of the consolidated financial statements as at December 31, Year 1, using a working paper. See Exhibit 5.12 to compare with the direct approach.

These entries bring the consolidated balances to the desired amounts.


266


258

CHAPTER 5


The working paper entries are produced and explained below. The only new items here are the entries required to establish the non-controlling interest. (1)


2,000 2,000

This entry eliminates the dividend income against Company P’s share of the dividends of Company S.


The entries on the worksheet are recorded only on the worksheet and not in the separate-entity books of the parent or the subsidiary.


Cost of sales Goodwill impairment loss Misc. expenses Net income

P

S

$ 50,000 2,000 52,000

$30,000

26,500

14,700

5,200 31,700 $ 20,300

8,000 22,700 $ 7,300

Non-controlling interest appears both on the income statement (for a period of time) and on the balance sheet (at a point in time).

$ 80,000

30,000

80,000 (3) (3)

2,000 50

43,200 50 13,200 56,450 $ 23,550

(4)

1,050

$

$ 5,100

$

0

$

0

$ 6,000 7,300 13,300 2,500

(2) $ 6,000 5,100

Dividends

$ 85,000 20,300 105,300 6,000

Retained earnings, Dec. 31

$ 99,300

$10,800

$11,100

$151,100 30,000 15,200

$18,300 14,000

Assets, misc. Equipment (net) Investment in S Acquisition differential Goodwill


(1) (5)

$196,300

$32,300

$ 47,000 50,000 99,300

$11,500 10,000 10,800

$ 2,500

3,000 950

22,500 23,550 $ 85,000 22,500 107,500 6,000

$101,500

(2) 15,200 (3) 3,000

950 $214,350

(2) 10,000 11,100

(5)

$32,300

2,000 500

1,050

$169,400 44,000 (2) (3)

$196,300

Consolidated

(1) $ 2,000

Attributable to: Non-controlling interest Company P’s shareholders Retained earnings, Jan. 1 Net income


500 $25,550

(2) (4)

2,500

$ 58,500 50,000 101,500

3,800 1,050 $25,550

4,350 $214,350


267


CHAPTER 5

(2)

Retained earnings, Jan. 1—Company S Common shares—Company S Acquisition differential Investment in S—Company P Non-controlling interest


6,000 10,000 3,000 15,200 3,800

This entry eliminates 100% of the start-of-year shareholders’ equity of Company S and the investment , and establishes the acquisition differential and the non-controlling interest as at the beginning of the year. Note that there is no separate section of the working paper for changes in non-controlling interest. Instead, the establishment of non-controlling interest at the beginning of the year is recorded directly to non-controlling interest in the balance sheet section of the working paper. Entries (4) and (5), below, record the changes to non-controlling interest during the year. They are also recorded directly to non-controlling interest in the balance sheet section of the working paper. These entries to non-controlling interest will be needed to prepare the non-controlling interest column in the statement of changes in equity during the year. (3)

Cost of sales—Company S Goodwill impairment loss Goodwill Acquisition differential

259

The investment is eliminated, since it will be replaced by the carrying value of the subsidiary’s assets and liabilities, the unamortized acquisition differential, and noncontrolling interest.

2,000 50 950 3,000

In accordance with the Year 1 amortization schedule, this entry reflects the acquisition differential amortization on the consolidated income statement and the unamortized balance of the acquisition differential on the consolidated balance sheet. (4)

Non-controlling interest (income statement) Non-controlling interest (balance sheet)

1,050 1,050

This entry allocates the net income attributable to the non-controlling interest to the non-controlling interest on the consolidated balance sheet. (5)

Non-controlling interest (balance sheet) Dividends—Company S

500 500

This final entry eliminates 20% of the dividends of Company S that were paid to the non-controlling interest shareholders and reduces the equity of that group on the consolidated balance sheet.

80%-Owned Subsidiary—Year 2 Exhibit 5B.4 shows the working paper approach to the preparation of the Year 2 consolidated financial statements. See Exhibit 5.15 to compare with the direct approach. Elimination entry (a) adjusts the s of Company P to equity method balances at the beginning of Year 2, which is the same balance as at the end of Year 1. Retained earnings under the equity method is equal to consolidated retained earnings. Therefore, retained earnings at the beginning of Year 2 has to be adjusted from $99,300 under the cost method to $101,500 under the equity method. (a)

Investment in S—Company P Retained earnings, Jan. 1—Company P (101,500 2 99,300)

2,200 2,200

Adjust the investment in subsidiary at the beginning of the current period from the balance under the cost method to the balance under the equity method.


268


260

CHAPTER 5



Consolidated net income attributable to parent’s shareholders is equal to the parent’s separate-entity income under the equity method.


Cost of sales Goodwill impairment loss Expenses, misc. Net income

P

S

$ 60,000 2,400 62,400 32,000

$40,000

9,000 41,000 $ 21,400

12,000 30,000 $10,000



(1) $ 2,400

40,000 18,000

Attributable to Non-controlling interest Company P’s shareholders

(3)

80

(4)

1,984

100,000 50,000 80 21,000 71,080 $ 28,920 $

$ 4,464

$

0

1,984 26,936

$ 28,920 Retained earnings, Jan. 1 Net income

Consolidated retained earnings are equal to the parent’s separate-entity retained earnings under the equity method.

Dividends

$ 99,300 21,400 120,700 8,000

$10,800 (2) $10,800 10,000 4,464 20,800 3,000

Retained earnings, Dec. 31

$112,700

$17,800

$134,500 35,000 15,200

$21,000 16,000

$184,700

$37,000

$ 22,000 50,000 112,700

$ 9,200 10,000 (2) 10,000 17,800 15,264



2,400 600 $ 5,200

$101,500 26,936 128,436 8,000

$120,436 $155,500 51,000

(a) $ 2,200 (2) 950 870 (3)

$37,000

(1) (5)

$15,264

(5)

$184,700

(a) $ 2,200 0

600 $29,884

(2) 17,400 (3) 950

870 $207,370

(2) (4)

5,200 4,350 1,984 $29,884

$ 31,200 50,000 120,436 5,734 $207,370

The remaining elimination entries are produced and explained below. (1)


2,400 2,400

This entry eliminates Company P’s dividend income against 80% of the dividends of Company S. The remaining 20% of the dividends of Company S are eliminated in entry (5).


CHAPTER 5

(2)

Retained earnings, January 1—Company S Common shares—Company S Acquisition differential Investment in S—Company P Non-controlling interest


269

261

10,800 10,000 950 17,400 4,350

This entry eliminates 100% of the start-of-year retained earnings and common share s of Company S against the start-of-year balance in Company P’s investment , and it establishes both the unamortized acquisition differential and the non-controlling interest at the beginning of Year 2. The amount for non-controlling interest ($4,350) is 20% of the start-of-year common shares and retained earnings s of Company S, plus 20% of the unamortized acquisition differential. (3)

Goodwill impairment loss Goodwill Acquisition differential

80 870 950

Entry (3) allocates the unamortized acquisition differential in accordance with the Year 2 amortization schedule. (4)

Non-controlling interest (income statement) Non-controlling interest (balance sheet)

1,984 1,984

Entry (4) allocates the net income attributable to the non-controlling interest for Year 2 to the equity of the non-controlling interest on the balance sheet. (5)

Non-controlling interest (balance sheet) Dividends—Company S

These journal entries appear only on the consolidated worksheet and are not posted to the separate-entity ing records.

600 600

The final entry eliminates the remaining 20% of the dividends of Company S and reduces the equity of the non-controlling interest on the balance sheet by this amount. In this appendix, we have illustrated the working paper approach, which allows the reader to see where all of the eliminations end up. However, as we proceed with some of the more difficult aspects of consolidated statement preparation, the number of elimination entries used becomes overwhelming. Additionally, there is no set standard working paper approach. This appendix presented elimination entries associated with a financial statement working paper. Other approaches could use a different set of entries and still arrive at the same consolidated amounts. If a trial balance working paper approach had been used instead, the entries would have been different. In practice, a computerized spreadsheet or a specialized software program would probably be used in the majority of cases. The working paper entries required by these programs would no doubt be different from those illustrated here. As you will see, working papers are not used in the chapters that follow because the major focus of this text is the direct approach, which stresses understanding of relationships rather than memorization of working paper entries. If a thorough understanding of the consolidation process is present, it can then be applied to any computerized working paper program that may be seen in practice. When consolidation questions appear on professional ing examinations in Canada, a direct approach is invariably expected to be used when formulating an answer.

The direct approach will be used exclusively in subsequent chapters of this text.


270


262

CHAPTER 5



1. Briefly outline the process for determining if goodwill is impaired.

LO1

2. Is the impairment test for intangibles other than goodwill the same as the one used for goodwill? Briefly explain.

LO3, 4

3. When the parent has used the equity method, its net income equals consolidated net income attributable to its shareholders, and its retained earnings equal consolidated retained earnings. However, the parent’s financial statements are not the same as consolidated statements. On consolidated statements, which assets and income are replaced from the parent’s statements, and what are they replaced with?

LO5

4. A parent company’s 75%-owned subsidiary declared and paid a dividend totalling $10,000. How would the parent company record this dividend under the equity method? under the cost method?

LO5

5. By which method , cost or equity, do IFRSs require a parent company to record its investment in a subsidiary? Why?

LO3, 4

6. The retained earnings column in the statement of changes in equity shows dividends declared during the year. Do these dividends consist of the parent’s, the subsidiary’s, or both? Explain.

LO2

7. “An acquisition differential allocated to revalue the land of a subsidiary on acquisition date will always appear on subsequent consolidated balance sheets.” Do you agree? Explain.

LO5

8. “Under the equity method, the investment is adjusted for the investor’s share of post-acquisition earnings computed by the consolidation method.” Explain this statement.

LO5

9. At the end of the year, the parent’s investment had an equity method balance of $120,000. At this time, its 75%-owned subsidiary had shareholders’ equity totalling $125,000. How much was the unamortized acquisition differential at the end of the year?

LO3, 4

10. On the consolidated balance sheet, what effect does the elimination of intercompany receivables and payables have on shareholders’ equity and noncontrolling interest?

LO2

11. Explain how the matching principle is applied when amortizing the acquisition differential.

LO5

12. What s in the financial statements of the parent company have balances that differ depending on whether the cost or the equity method has been used?

LO3, 4

13. Why does adding the parent’s share of the increase in retained earnings of the subsidiary and the parent’s retained earnings under the cost method result in consolidated retained earnings? Assume that there is no acquisition differential.

LO3, 4

14. A subsidiary was acquired in the middle of the fiscal year of the parent. Describe the preparation of the consolidated income statement for the year.


CHAPTER 5


271

263

LO2

*15. What are the initial entries on the working paper when the parent has used the cost method to for its investment?

LO3, 4, 5

*16. When the parent company uses the cost method, an adjustment must be made to its retained earnings on consolidation in every year after the year of acquisition. Why is this entry necessary? Why is a similar entry not required when the parent utilized the equity method?

Case 5-1

BIO Company is a private company. It employs 30 engineers and scientists who are involved with research and development of various biomedical devices. All of the engineers and scientists are highly regarded and highly paid in the field of biomedical research. BIO is 50% owned by Rod Smart, who started the company in Year 3, and 50% owned by a group of venture capitalists who contributed $10 million of equity capital in Year 4 to fund the R & D activity of the group. On January 1, Year 6, REX Ltd., a public company listed on the TSX Venture Exchange, acquired 100% of the shares of BIO by issuing 5 million of its own shares. Its shares were trading at $4 per share on the date of this transaction. The balance sheet for BIO on January 1, Year 6, was as follows:

C ASES LO1

Cash and marketable securities Property, plant, and equipment—net Development costs

$2,500,000 800,000 3,000,000 $6,300,000

Liabilities Common shares Deficit

$ 900,000 10,100,000 (4,700,000) $6,300,000

The cash, marketable securities, property, plant and equipment, and liabilities have fair values equal to carrying amounts. Prior to Year 5, all of the research and development costs were expensed. Starting in Year 5, the developments costs were capitalized because the management of BIO felt that they were getting close to patenting some of their products. The management of REX is aware that BIO will need to be included in REX’s consolidated financial statements. Management has the following questions related to these consolidated financial statements:

Required: (a) Will any part of the acquisition cost be allocated to BIO’s skilled workers? If so, how will this asset be measured, and how will it be amortized or checked for impairment on an annual basis? (b) Will any part of the acquisition cost be allocated to identifiable intangible assets? If so, how will this asset be measured, and how will it be amortized or checked for impairment on an annual basis? (c) How much of the purchase price will be recognized as goodwill, and how will goodwill be evaluated for impairment on an annual basis?


272


264

CHAPTER 5


Case 5-2 LO2

When Valero Energy Corp. acquired Ultramar Diamond Shamrock Corp. (UDS) for US$6 billion, it created the second-largest refiner of petroleum products in North America, with over 23,000 employees in the United States and Canada, total assets of $10 billion, and combined revenues of $32 billion. Combined, it had 13 refineries with a total throughput capacity of just under 2 million barrels per day (BPD); it also became one of the continent’s largest retailers, with more than 5,000 retail outlets in the United States and Canada. The Canadian operations of UDS continued to operate under the Ultramar brand. It was announced that the combination of Valero’s complex refining system and an extensive UDS refining, logistics, and retail network created synergies and strategic benefits that would result in cost savings of approximately $200 million per year and the enhanced ability to compete effectively in a rapidly consolidating industry. The retail assets included in the acquisition were the brands Ultramar, Diamond Shamrock, Beacon, and Total. UDS had more than 2,500 company-owned sites in the United States and Canada, and also supplied 2,500 dealer, truck stop, and cardlock sites. The company-owned stores had extensive brand programs such as proprietary consumer and fleet credit cards, radio and television brand , and strong in-store marketing programs, to which Valero was able to add its 350-store retail network in California. In addition, UDS operated one of the largest home heating oil businesses in North America, selling heating oil to approximately 250,000 households. The acquisition clearly included more than the physical assets of Ultramar Diamond Shamrock. A variety of unrecorded intangible assets were represented in the portfolio of assets held by UDS, and these are the matters that require your attention at this time.

Required: With reference to IFRS 3, prepare a memorandum including the following items to the chief financial officer of Valero: • Discuss the valuation of the various intangible assets included in this acquisition. • Indicate which items should be included in the amount assigned to goodwill in the acquisition. • Indicate which items should be separately identified as intangible assets. • Discuss how you would measure the various items identified and what amortization policy (if any) is appropriate. (case prepared by Peter Secord, St. Mary’s University)

Case 5-3 LO3

It is now mid-September Year 3. Growth Investments Limited (GIL) has been owned by Sam and Ida Growth since its incorporation under the Canada Business Corporations Act many years ago. The owners, who are both 55 years of age, have decided to effect a corporate reorganization of capital in the form of an estate freeze. Sam and Ida will maintain control by holding voting preferred shares that carry a fixed dividend. New common shares will be issued to the three Growth children and to Mario Thibeault, a GIL manager who has been with the company since its inception. GIL operates primarily in the real estate industry. It holds raw land, which will be subdivided and sold in the future, and it owns a variety of revenue-producing properties. The land and the properties are either directly or through wholly owned


CHAPTER 5


273

265

subsidiaries. A valuation of GIL’s net assets will be done as of November 30, Year 3, the date of the proposed corporate reorganization. Innes & Panners has audited GIL’s financial statements for the past several years. The financial statements are used by the owners and the company’s banker as well as for tax purposes. One of the rights of the preferred shareholders (Sam and Ida) will be to have audited financial statements for GIL’s year-end, which has always been November 30. You, the CA, have been hired as a consultant to GIL for the year ending November 30, Year 3. The board of directors of GIL has engaged your firm, at the request of Mario Thibeault, to advise on alternatives available with respect to ing and reporting policies for the company for Year 3 and subsequent years. This engagement is separate from the audit engagement. You will prepare a report that should be addressed to the board of directors of GIL. It should outline the feasible ing and reporting alternatives that exist in preparing audited, comparative financial statements for Year 3 and subsequent years. You and your staff have learned the following about GIL’s activities during the current fiscal year: 1. Under the plan for reorganizing capital, Sam and Ida are to be issued preferred shares on November 30, Year 3 in exchange for all their common shares. The preferred shares will be redeemable at the fair value of the company as determined at November 30, Year 3. Each of the four new shareholders will pay $100 for 25% of the new voting common shares of GIL. The valuation of GIL’s net assets is nearly complete. 2. Except for one parcel of raw land, all of GIL’s real estate assets have an appraisal value that exceeds cost, or cost less capital cost allowance to date. (GIL has always used income tax methods and rates for depreciation purposes.) Each asset’s fair value is based on an estimated net selling price as at November 30, Year 3. For the one parcel of raw land, fair value is expected to be approximately 70% of cost. 3. Current five-year mortgage interest rates on properties similar to GIL’s range between 10% and 10 ½% per annum. GIL’s debt, as of November 30, Year 3, will consist of: $2,200,000; 1,600,000; 1,300,000;

14% rate; due in 3 years 8% rate; due in 4 years 10 ½% rate; due to bank on demand

4. In December Year 2, GIL sold an apartment building for $2,500,000 in a province that is subject to rent controls and took back a non–interest bearing note. Payments of $500,000 per year are due on December 15 for each of the next five years, commencing in Year 3. GIL’s financial statements at August 31, Year 3, show the $2,500,000 as a current asset. 5. In all years to November 30, Year 2, GIL had expensed real estate taxes and interest on debt incurred to finance raw land purchases. The new shareholders have asked whether these sums ought to be capitalized retroactively for all raw land held at November 29, Year 3. 6. An application is pending to have one of GIL’s apartment buildings converted to condominium status. Several levels of government have to approve the conversion, but ultimate approval is expected in Year 4 because other buildings in the vicinity have already been accepted as condominiums.


274


266

CHAPTER 5


7.

8.

9.

10.

When approval is received, the fair value of this building will increase from $4,300,000 to about $5,700,000. Each condominium apartment unit will be offered for sale to its occupants, or to others. GIL leases its head office building space on a 20-year lease; 14 years are left in the lease. GIL pays $100,000 per year plus all occupancy costs such as light, heat, insurance, and cleaning. Current leasing costs have increased, and GIL would have to pay $220,000 per year for equivalent space in the same building if it were to sign a lease in Year 3. The financial statements at November 30, Year 2 treat the head office situation as an operating lease. They contain a short note on lease obligations. Construction of a shopping centre is in progress for GIL. A fixed-price contract for $8 million has been signed with a construction company, which has undertaken to complete the centre by August Year 4. Financing for 10 years at 12% interest per annum on a $6 million mortgage has been approved. GIL purchased the land on which the centre is being located several years ago. It paid $750,000 for the land and sold one-half interest to the 50% partner for $1,800,000 in December Year 2. Approximately one-half of the shopping centre space has been leased for 5 or 10 years commencing August Year 4. Several of the leases contain escalation-of-rent clauses tied to store sales. GIL paid a demolition company $120,000 in December Year 2 to clear old farm buildings and fences and ready the site for construction. It also paid $110,000 in July Year 3 to the agent who arranged the leases. In December Year 2, GIL sold a small office building for $4,200,000 cash, and paid off the $2 million mortgage on the property plus a penalty of $82,000. The purchase/sale agreement contains a clause that enables GIL to receive sums additional to the $4,200,000 if rental receipts for the next four years exceed an average of $700,000 per year. On the basis of new leases signed by the purchaser in Year 3, GIL ought to be receiving some additional compensation each year. Traditionally, the senior management of GIL has received a bonus based on audited net income.

Required: Prepare the report to the Board of Directors. (CICA adapted)

Case 5-4 LO2, 7

Total Protection Limited (TPL) was incorporated on January 1, Year 1, by five homebuilders in central Canada to provide warranty protection for new-home buyers. Each shareholder owns a 20% interest in TPL. While most homebuilders provide one-year warranties, TPL offers ten-year warranties and includes protection for a number of items not usually covered. For example, if a problem arose as a result of faulty construction or construction materials, TPL would protect its customers against any resulting decline in the market value of their property and would provide for the costs of restoring the property. TPL does not, however, cover general declines in market value. The five shareholders believe TPL will increase their home sales and at the same time minimize their individual risks. The idea for TPL originated with Safe-Way Builders and, therefore, this shareholder will receive a royalty payment of 5% of income before income taxes. The shareholders have engaged your firm to prepare a report that will assist them in managing TPL in order to maximize its long-term profitability.


CHAPTER 5


275

267

In particular, they are wondering whether TPL is pricing its services appropriately and adequately controlling its costs. In addition, as a separate report, the shareholders would like your firm to recommend appropriate financial ing policies for TPL. It is mid-December Year 1. You, the CA, and the partner on the engagement, meet with Gina Filmore, president of Safe-Way Builders. Filmore is currently operating TPL from the offices of Safe-Way Builders, for which TPL will be charged rent. Filmore provides you with the following information on TPL’s operations. “TPL’s revenues consist of an initial fee paid at the time of purchase of the warranty and an annual maintenance fee paid over the term of the warranty. Currently, the initial fee and annual maintenance fee depend on a number of factors, including the cost of the home, reputation of the builder, construction design of the home (e.g., brick versus aluminum siding), and the home’s location. The warranties are sold through each builder, who can adjust the initial fee and the annual maintenance fee if it is considered necessary to make the sale. The builder receives a commission of 10% of the total warranty revenue, which should ensure that the builder would try to maximize the initial fee and the annual maintenance fee. Typically, a buyer of a brick house worth $250,000 that was constructed by a good-quality builder should expect to pay an initial fee of $2,000 plus an annual maintenance fee of $250. “To date, TPL has been doing very well, primarily as a result of two factors: central Canada has been experiencing a boom in the residential construction industry, and TPL has expanded to offer coverage for homes built by builders other than the shareholders. Quite frankly, an increasing share of our business is from these outside builders, many of which have entered the industry just to try to capitalize on the demand. We don’t think that permitting these homebuilders to sell coverage will hurt our home sales, since most of them are in the low-price segment of the market, keeping costs down by employing new, less expensive construction methods and materials. We require that their initial fee be at least $1,500 per home to ensure that they don’t lower the price just to make a sale. “Our real problem is keeping up with the paperwork. I have my own business to run and cannot devote much time to TPL. We haven’t even had time to get organized or set up any system for TPL. Lately, I must it that I’ve lost track of what’s going on. All I know is that we’re making money. In just 11 months, TPL has collected about $1.6 million while paying out only $224,000 in repair costs. Keep in mind, however, that I’ve been able to keep these repair costs down by having Safe-Way Builders do the repairs. Business will only get better when we expand within the next month to offer coverage in western Canada and the southwestern United States. “Since we have accumulated a lot of cash, we recently decided, in a 3-to-2 vote among the shareholders, to buy 100% of the shares of Gainery Construction Ltd., a local construction company. Mr. Gainery, the owner of the company, had a heart attack about six months ago and wanted to get out of the business. Details of the purchase agreement are provided in Exhibit I.” Just before you leave the client’s premises, you manage to collect some additional information on the operations of TPL (see Exhibit II). When you return to the office, the partner reminds you that he will be meeting with TPL shareholders in one week and asks you to prepare the reports requested by the shareholders.

Required: Prepare the reports requested by the partner.

(CICA adapted)


276


268

CHAPTER 5


EXHIBIT I INFORMATION GATHERED FROM PURCHASE AGREEMENT 1. 2. 3.

4.

Closing date will be December 31, Year 1. TPL will purchase 100% of the shares of Gainery Construction Ltd. for $500,000 in cash on closing, plus $500,000 per year for the next two years. Mr. Gainery will provide, without additional consideration, a minimum of 300 hours of consulting services in the first year and a minimum of 150 hours in the second year, to ensure a smooth transition of the business. The carrying amount and estimated fair value of identifiable assets and liabilities were as follows on the date of acquisition:

Carrying value

Fair value

Cash s receivable Homes under construction Undeveloped land Equipment, net Other assets

$ 100,000 200,000 1,300,000 1,000,000 700,000 70,000 $3,370,000

$ 100,000 200,000 1,500,000 1,600,000 650,000 70,000 $4,120,000


$2,470,000 100,000 800,000 $3,370,000

$2,470,000

EXHIBIT II INFORMATION GATHERED FROM CLIENT’S RECORDS TPL Shareholders Larkview Estates Number of warranties sold Warranty revenue ($000s) Repair costs incurred ($000s)

Case 5-5 LO3, 6, 7

Towne Homes

Granite Homes

Kings Road

Safe-Way Builders

Other Builders

Total

50

85

190

250

175

465

1,215

$120

$165

$395

$90

$160

$705

$1,635

$

$

$ 21

$42

$ 39

$107

$ 224

6

9

Beaver Ridge Oilers’ Players Association and Mr. Slim, the CEO of the Beaver Ridge Oilers Hockey Club (Club), ask for your help in resolving a salary dispute. Mr. Slim presents the following income statement to the player representatives: BEAVER RIDGE OILERS HOCKEY CLUB INCOME STATEMENT Ticket revenues Player salaries Stadium rent Staff salaries Advertising Net income (loss)

$3,000,000 $ 600,000 2,100,000 500,000 200,000

3,400,000 $ (400,000)

Mr. Slim argues that the Club loses money and cannot afford a salary increase. After further investigation, you determine that the Club owns 90% of the voting


CHAPTER 5


277

269

shares of Oilers Stadium Inc. (Stadium), which is used primarily by the Oilers. The Club s for its investment in the Stadium under the cost method. The Stadium has not declared any dividends since its inception three years ago. As such, the Club has never reported any income on its investment in the Stadium. Mr. Slim insists that the income for the Stadium should not be a factor in the negotiation of the players’ salaries since the Stadium is a separate legal entity and is taxed as a separate legal entity. The income statement for the Stadium is as follows: OILERS STADIUM INC. INCOME STATEMENT Stadium rent revenue Concession revenue Parking revenue Cost of concessions Depreciation of stadium Staff salaries Net income

$2,100,000 1,200,000 100,000 400,000 500,000 700,000

$3,400,000

1,600,000 $1,800,000

Required: (a) What advice would you give the negotiating parties regarding the issue of whether to consider the Stadium’s income in the salary negotiations? Give ing arguments. Indicate what other pertinent information you would need to provide specific recommendations. (b) How would your advice change if the Stadium were 90% owned by Mr. Slim directly rather than by the Club? Explain.

Case 5-6 LO1, 5, 6, 7

Gerry’s Fabrics Ltd. (GFL), a private company, manufactures a variety of clothing for women and children and sells it to retailers across Canada. Until recently, the company has operated from the same plant since its incorporation under federal legislation 40 years ago. Over the years, the profits of the company have varied widely, and there have been periods of losses. In the year ended March 31, Year 1, the company entered into an arrangement whereby it issued common shares from treasury to a group of new shareholders. At the same time, the existing shareholders were given the option of exchanging their common shares for preferred shares, which are redeemable at the option of the company and retractable at the option of the shareholder. One shareholder, who had held 25 percent of the common shares, elected to accept the preferred shares, while the other shareholders elected to retain their common shares. A “Preferred Share Agreement” (the Agreement), was signed by the shareholder who had accepted the preferred shares (the “preferred shareholder”). Under the Agreement, the preferred shareholder can require GFL to redeem all of his shares in any year, after giving at least 90 days’ notice prior to the fiscal yearend. The Agreement does not provide for partial redemptions. The total redemption price for all shares is 1.25 times “income before taxes” for that year. The term income before taxes is defined in the Agreement as follows: 1. Income before taxes for the year of redemption must be calculated • in accordance with the ing policies set forth in this Agreement, or • where no ing policy has been clearly specified, in accordance with policies consistent in intent with the policies contained in this Agreement. 2. Income before taxes for the year of redemption need not, for the purposes of the Agreement, be the same as that which is reported to shareholders or that which is used for calculating income taxes payable.


278


270

CHAPTER 5


The Agreement specifies the applicable ing policies as follows: A. Revenue recognition: 1. In cases where a deposit of 10 percent or more of the sales price has been received from the customer, revenue shall be recognized on completion of the manufacturing of the goods ordered. 2. In all other cases, revenue shall be recognized upon shipment to the customer, and no allowance shall be made for returned merchandise or adjustments. B. Cost of goods sold and inventory: 1. All inventory on hand at the end of a fiscal year (excluding raw materials) shall be costed at actual production costs, including its full share of all overhead expenditures. 2. Raw materials inventory shall include all expenditures that were needed to make the inventory available for use, including unpacking and storing costs. C. Amortization: 1. All applicable amortization shall be computed on a straight-line basis using realistic residual values. 2. Amortization shall be recorded over the physical life of the assets, regardless of their useful life to the company. 3. No amortization shall be recorded on assets that are increasing in value. D. Capitalization: 1. All expenditures shall be capitalized as assets unless their life is limited to the current financial period. All maintenance and repair costs that extend an asset’s useful life shall be capitalized. 2. Assets shall be recorded at cost and amortized in accordance with C above. E. Liabilities: 1. Each liability shall be recorded at the amount required to settle the obligation. A debt-to-equity ratio of 1:1 is assumed to exist. Interest incurred on debt in excess of this ratio will not be deductible in computing income before taxes. F. Errors and adjustments: 1. All errors, adjustments, and changes in value shall be attributed to the year to which the error or adjustment or change relates. G. Compensation and related transactions: 1. Average compensation per employee shall be in accordance with levels used in fiscal Year 1 adjusted by the Consumer Price Index. 2. All related-party transactions must be measured at fair value or values established in the marketplace for transactions between GFL and unrelated third parties. The Agreement also contains a separate clause that deals with “arbitration procedures.” These procedures allow an independent arbitrator to calculate the share redemption price after having obtained full access to the books and records of GFL. The preferred shareholder has advised GFL of his intention to have GFL redeem his preferred shares and has provided GFL with the required 90 days’ notice. The redemption price, calculated by GFL, was based on the March 31, Year 5, financial statements. However, the preferred shareholder disagrees with GFL’s figure for income before taxes.


279


CHAPTER 5


271

Since the price is being disputed, the matter is to be resolved by an independent arbitrator. Both parties have agreed to engage Cook & Co., Chartered ants, to make a binding decision. You, CA, are employed by Cook & Co. The engagement partner has asked you to prepare a memo providing complete analyses required for and recommendations to be considered in the calculation of the shareredemption price. Your notes from your investigations are contained in Exhibit III.

Required: Prepare the memo to the partner.

(CICA adapted)

EXHIBIT III NOTES FROM INVESTIGATION OF GFL 1.

2.

The disputed share-redemption price calculation was prepared by the vice-president of finance of GFL and is 1.25 times the company’s unaudited income before taxes of $895,420 for the year ended March 31, Year 5. The unaudited financial statements for the year ended March 31, Year 5, reflect the following transactions and ing policies: •

• •

• •

•

•

•

•

3.

During fiscal Year 4, GFL acquired all the shares of a competing company (J Ltd.) for $8 million. Most of the amount by which the purchase price exceeded the book value of the assets and liabilities acquired was recorded as goodwill and is being amortized over 10 years. The purchase was financed almost entirely by debt at 10 percent interest for five years. On January 1, Year 5, a volume discount policy was introduced. At March 31, Year 5, an estimated liability of $95,500 was provided for volume discounts that may become due. In fiscal Year 4, the manufacturing processes were altered to introduce more mechanization, and standard costing was adopted. All variances from standard costs are being expensed. In order to reduce taxable income and save cash, all employee incentives are being accrued at year-end and paid five months later. In Year 3, GFL decided to for one of its successful investments on the equity basis. During fiscal Year 5, the directors of GFL chose to revert to the cost basis for the investment. In fiscal Year 5, GFL commenced construction of another manufacturing facility at a cost of $1.8 million, including equipment. Some manufacturing occurred in a part of the new facility before the whole facility was ready for use. To be conservative, any costs that were incurred after manufacturing had commenced were expensed, except for new equipment installations. Land that has been held for several years for future expansion of the company was recorded at cost plus carrying costs (property taxes, maintenance, and similar) until fiscal Year 5. The land was reclassified in late fiscal Year 5 as inventory and was written down to the lower of cost and net realizable value. In March Year 5, GFL sold some of its capital assets under a deferred payment arrangement. Gains on disposal will be recorded as payment is received, on a proportional basis. In April Year 5, an enhanced executive pension plan was introduced. The March 31, Year 5, financial statements include pension expenses that reflect the additional costs resulting from the new pension plan enhancements.

Notes to the financial statements for fiscal Year 5 disclose the following: •

•

During the year, GFL sold $4 million worth of goods to DGR Ltd. DGR is owned by several of the common shareholders of GFL. DGR paid a special price for goods that was about $380,000 lower than the price paid by other retailers. A $200,000 liability has been recorded for legal costs pertaining to a patent infringement case that is before the courts.


280


272

CHAPTER 5



When Pill Ltd. acquired 85% of Sill Corporation on January 1, Year 1, for $238,000, the imputed acquisition differential of $60,000 was allocated entirely to goodwill. On December 31, Year 1, a goodwill impairment loss of $1,500 was recognized. Pill uses the cost method for internal purposes to for its investment. Pill reported a separate-entity Year 1 net income of $25,000 and declared no dividends. Sill reported a separate-entity net income of $40,000 and paid dividends of $9,000 in Year 1.

Required: Compute the following: (a) Consolidated net income attributable to Pill’s shareholders for Year 1. (b) Consolidated net income attributable to non-controlling interest that would appear on the Year 1 consolidated income statement. (c) Investment in Sill at December 31, Year 1 (equity method).


Large Ltd. purchased 75% of Small Company on January 1, Year 1, for $600,000, when the statement of financial position for Small showed common shares of $400,000 and retained earnings of $100,000. On that date, the inventory of Small was undervalued by $40,000, and a patent with an estimated remaining life of 5 years was overvalued by $70,000. Small reported the following subsequent to January 1, Year 1:

Year 1 Year 2 (loss) Year 3

Profit

Dividends

$ 80,000 (35,000) 90,000

$25,000 10,000 40,000

A test for goodwill impairment on December 31, Year 3, indicated a loss of $19,300 being recorded for Year 3 on the consolidated income statement. Large uses the cost method to for its investment in Small and reported the following for Year 3 for its separate-entity statement of changes in equity: Retained earnings, beginning Profit Dividends Retained earnings, end

$500,000 200,000 (70,000) $630,000

Required: (a) Prepare the cost method journal entries of Large for each year. (b) Compute the following on the consolidated financial statements for the year ended December 31, Year 3: (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v)

Goodwill Non-controlling interest on the statement of financial position Retained earnings, beginning of year Profit attributable to Large’s shareholders Profit attributable to non-controlling interest


281


CHAPTER 5


273

(c) Now assume that Large is a private entity, uses ASPE, and chooses to use the equity method to report its investment in Small. (i) Prepare Large’s journal entries for each year related to its investment in Small. (ii) Determine the investment in Small at December 31, Year 3.

Problem 5-3 LO2, 3

On January 1, Year 2, Gros Corporation acquired 70% of the outstanding common shares of Petite Company for a total cost of $84,000. On that date, Petite had $35,000 of common shares and $25,000 of retained earnings. The carrying amounts of each of Petite’s identifiable assets and liabilities were equal to their fair values except for the following:

Inventory Equipment

Carrying amount

Fair value

$45,000 70,000

$55,000 90,000

The equipment had an estimated useful life of 10 years as at January 1, Year 2, and the entire inventory was sold during Year 2. Selected balances from the records of Gros and Petite for the year ended December 31, Year 6, were as follows: Inventory Equipment, net Goodwill Retained earnings, end of year Non-controlling interest on balance sheet Cost of goods purchased Change in inventory Amortization expense Non-controlling interest on income statement Net income Dividends paid

Gros

Petite

$150,000 326,000

$ 80,000 160,000

270,000

50,000

500,000 20,000 35,000

450,000 12,000 20,000

90,000 30,000

48,000 10,000

Additional Information • Gros uses the cost method to for its investment in Petite. • An independent valuator has estimated that the goodwill associated with Gros’s acquisition of Petite had a recoverable amount of $28,000 as of December 31, Year 6. (Note: No impairment losses have been recognized in all years prior to Year 6.)

Required: (a) Determine the amounts on the Year 6 consolidated financial statements for the above-noted s. (b) If the independent appraisal of the recoverable amount for goodwill as at December 31, Year 6, showed an amount of $8,000 instead of the $28,000 indicated above, what would be the impact on the following? (i) Consolidated net income attributable to Gros’s shareholders (ii) Consolidated retained earnings (iii) Consolidated net income attributable to non-controlling interest


282


274

CHAPTER 5


Problem 5-4 LO3, 5

Summarized balance sheets of Corner Company and its subsidiary Brook Corporation on December 31, Year 4, were as follows: Corner

Brook

Consolidated

Current assets Investment in Brook (cost) Other assets

$ 160,000 640,000 600,000 $1,400,000

$ 700,000

$ 860,000

900,000 $1,600,000

1,500,000 $2,360,000


$ 800,000 900,000 (300,000) — $1,400,000

$ 200,000 600,000 800,000 — $1,600,000

$1,000,000 900,000 180,000 280,000 $2,360,000

On the date that Corner acquired its interest in Brook, there was no acquisition differential and the carrying amounts of Brook’s net assets were equal to fair values. During Year 4, Corner reported a net loss of $60,000, while Brook reported a net income of $140,000. No dividends were declared by either company during Year 4. Corner uses the cost method to for its investment.

Required: Compute the following: (a) The percentage of Brook’s shares owned by Corner (b) Consolidated net income attributable to Corner’s shareholders for Year 4 (c) Corner’s December 31, Year 3, retained earnings if it had used the equity method to for its investment (d) The retained earnings of Brook on the date that Corner acquired its interest in Brook


Pen Ltd. acquired an 85% interest in Silk Corp. on December 31, Year 1, for $646,000. On that date, Silk had common shares of $500,000 and retained earnings of $100,000. The imputed acquisition differential was allocated $70,000 to inventory, with the balance to patents being amortized over 10 years. Silk reported profit of $30,000 in Year 2 and $52,000 in Year 3. While no dividends were declared in Year 2, Silk declared a dividend of $15,000 in Year 3. Pen, which uses the cost method, reported a profit of $28,000 in Year 2 and a loss of $45,000 in Year 3. Pen’s retained earnings on December 31, Year 3, were $91,000.

Required: Compute the following: (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f)


Non-controlling interest in profit for Year 2 and Year 3 Consolidated profit attributable to Pen’s shareholders for Year 2 and Year 3 Consolidated retained earnings at December 31, Year 3 Non-controlling interest at December 31, Year 3 Investment in Silk at December 31, Year 3, if Pen had used the equity method Consolidated patents at December 31, Year 3

Peach Ltd. acquired 70% of the common shares of Cherry Company on January 1, Year 4. On that date, Cherry had common shares of $600,000 and retained earnings of $300,000.


283


CHAPTER 5


275

The following is a summary of the changes in Peach’s investment from January 1, Year 4, to December 31, Year 6: INVESTMENT IN CHERRY January 1, Year 4 December 31, Year 4 December 31, Year 5 December 31, Year 6

Cost Investment income Dividends Investment income Dividends Investment income Dividends Balance

$651,000 51,800 (28,000) 63,700 (35,000) 78,400 (42,000) $739,900

Additional Information • Dividends declared by Cherry each year were equal to 50% of Cherry’s reported profit each year. • On January 1, Year 4, the carrying amounts of the identifiable net assets of Cherry were equal to fair values.

Required: Calculate the following: (a) The amount of dividends declared by Cherry in Year 4 (b) The reported profit of Cherry for Year 5 (c) The amount for non-controlling interest that would appear in the Year 6 consolidated income statement and statement of financial position (d) The amount of goodwill that would appear on the December 31, Year 6, consolidated statement of financial position

Problem 5-7 LO2, 3

On January 1, Year 4, Grant Corporation bought 8,000 (80%) of the outstanding common shares of Lee Company for $70,000 cash. Lee’s shares were trading for $7 per share on the date of acquisition. On that date, Lee had $25,000 of common shares outstanding and $30,000 retained earnings. Also on that date, the carrying amount of each of Lee’s identifiable assets and liabilities was equal to its fair value except for the following: Inventory Patent

Carrying amount

Fair value

$50,000 10,000

$55,000 20,000

The patent had an estimated useful life of 5 years at January 1, Year 4, and the entire inventory was sold during Year 4. Grant uses the cost method to for its investment. Additional Information • The recoverable amount for goodwill was determined to be $10,000 on December 31, Year 6. The goodwill impairment loss occurred in Year 6. • Grant’s s receivable contains $30,000 owing from Lee. • Amortization expense is grouped with distribution expenses and impairment losses are grouped with other expenses.


284


276

CHAPTER 5


The following are the separate-entity financial statements of Grant and Lee as at December 31, Year 6. BALANCE SHEETS December 31, Year 6 Assets Cash s receivable Inventory Investment in Lee Equipment, net Patent, net

Liabilities and Shareholders’ Equity s payable Other accrued liabilities Income taxes payable Common shares Retained earnings

Grant

Lee

$ 5,000 185,000 310,000 70,000 230,000 — $800,000

$ 18,000 82,000 100,000 — 205,000 2,000 $407,000

$190,000 60,000 80,000 170,000 300,000 $800,000

$195,000 50,000 72,000 25,000 65,000 $407,000

INCOME STATEMENT Year ended December 31, Year 6 Sales Cost of goods sold Gross margin Distribution expense Other expenses Income tax expense Net income

Grant

Lee

$900,000 (340,000) 560,000 (30,000) (180,000) (120,000) $230,000

$360,000 (240,000) 120,000 (25,000) (56,000) (16,000) $ 23,000

Required: (a) Calculate consolidated retained earnings at December 31, Year 6. (b) Prepare consolidated financial statements for Year 6.

Problem 5-8 LO2, 3

Paris Corporation and Slater Company prepared the following statements of income and retained earnings on December 31 of the current year: Sales Dividend income Cost of sales Operating expenses Net income Retained earnings, January 1 Dividends Retained earnings, December 31

Paris

Slater

$900,000 60,000 960,000 600,000 200,000 800,000 160,000 301,000 461,000 150,000 $311,000

$500,000 — 500,000 300,000 80,000 380,000 120,000 584,000 704,000 75,000 $629,000


285


CHAPTER 5


277

Paris obtained its 80% interest in Slater 8 years ago when Slater had retained earnings of $53,000. The $100,000 acquisition differential on acquisition date was allocated entirely to intangible assets with an estimated remaining useful life of 10 years. Paris uses the cost method to for its investment.

Required: Prepare the following statements for the current year: (a) Consolidated income statement (b) Consolidated retained earnings statement

Problem 5-9 LO2, 3

On July 1, Year 5, Big purchased 80% of the outstanding common shares of Little for $122,080. On that date, Little’s equipment had a fair value that was $21,600 less than carrying amount. The equipment had accumulated depreciation of $20,000 and an estimated remaining useful life of 8 years. Also, at the date of acquisition, Little had an exclusive contract with the provincial government to perform periodic environmental audits of selected mining companies for the next five years. An independent business valuator indicated that a third party might pay up to $50,000 to take over this contract. All other assets and liabilities had carrying amounts equal to fair values. On June 30, Year 6, goodwill had a recoverable amount of $20,000. On June 30, Year 6, the following financial statements were prepared. Big uses the cost method to for its investment. INCOME STATEMENTS Big Sales Investment income

$ 270,000 10,800 280,800 140,100 31,080 171,180 $ 109,620

Cost of sales Expenses (misc.) Net income

Little $162,000 — 162,000 94,380 28,200 122,580 $ 39,420

RETAINED EARNINGS STATEMENTS Balance, July 1 Net income Dividends Balance, June 30

$ 459,000 109,620 568,620 32,400 $ 536,220

$ 32,400 39,420 71,820 13,500 $ 58,320

BALANCE SHEETS—June 30, Year 6 Miscellaneous assets Equipment Accumulated depreciation Investment in Little

$ 835,940 162,000 (60,000) 122,080 $1,060,020

$128,820 95,600 (50,000) — $174,420


$ 253,800 270,000 536,220 $1,060,020

$ 62,100 54,000 58,320 $174,420


286


278

CHAPTER 5


Required: (a) Prepare a schedule to calculate and allocate the acquisition differential. Explain the rationale for the ing treatment of the $50,000 attributed to the government contract. (b) Prepare the consolidated financial statements of Big as at June 30, Year 6. (c) Prepare a schedule showing the changes in non-controlling interest during the year.


On December 31, Year 2, Palm Inc. purchased 80% of the outstanding ordinary shares of Storm Company for $310,000. At that date, Storm had ordinary shares of $200,000 and retained earnings of $60,000. In negotiating the purchase price, it was agreed that the assets on Storm’s statement of financial position were fairly valued except for plant assets, which had a $40,000 excess of fair value over carrying amount. It was also agreed that Storm had unrecognized intangible assets consisting of trademarks that had an estimated value of $24,000. The plant assets had a remaining useful life of 8 years at the acquisition date and the trademarks would be amortized over a 12-year period. Any goodwill arising from this business combination would be tested periodically for impairment. Palm s for its investment using the cost method. Additional Information • At December 31, Year 5, an impairment test of Storm’s goodwill revealed the following: Fair value less disposal costs based on recent offer from prospective purchaser Value in use based on undiscounted future net cash flows Value in use based on discounted future net cash flows using a discount rate of 6%, which is Storm’s incremental borrowing rate 3%, which is the risk-free rate on government bonds

$46,000 65,000 50,000 55,000

An impairment test indicated that the trademarks had a recoverable amount of $13,750. The impairment loss on these assets occurred entirely in Year 6. • On December 26, Year 6, Palm declared dividends of $36,000, while Storm declared dividends of $20,000. • Amortization expense is reported in selling expenses, while impairment losses are reported in other expenses. Financial statements for Palm and Storm for the year ended December 31, Year 6, were as follows: STATEMENTS OF FINANCIAL POSITION December 31, Year 6 Assets Plant assets—net Investment in Storm Other investments Notes receivable Inventory s receivable Cash

Palm

Storm

$230,000 310,000 82,000 — 100,000 88,000 20,000 $830,000

$160,000 — 22,000 10,000 180,000 160,000 30,000 $562,000

(continued)


287


CHAPTER 5


Palm Shareholders’ Equity and Liabilities Ordinary shares Retained earnings Notes payable Other current liabilities s payable

279 Storm

$500,000 110,000 130,000 10,000 80,000 $830,000

$200,000 150,000 100,000 50,000 62,000 $562,000

Palm

Storm

$870,000 (638,000) 232,000 (22,000) (148,000) 34,000 $ 96,000

$515,000 (360,000) 155,000 (35,000) (72,000) 2,000 $ 50,000

INCOME STATEMENTS Year ended December 31, Year 6 Sales Cost of goods sold Gross profit Selling expenses Other expenses Interest and dividend income Profit

Required: (a) Prepare consolidated financial statements. (b) If none of the acquisition differential had been allocated to trademarks at the date of acquisition, how would this affect (i) the return on total shareholders’ equity for Year 6? (ii) the debt-to-equity ratio at the end of Year 6?


On July 1, Year 4, Aaron Co. purchased 80% of the voting shares of Bondi Ltd. for $543,840. The statement of financial position of Bondi on that date follows. The s receivable of Bondi were collected in October Year 4, and the inventory was completely sold by May Year 5. Bondi’s fixed assets had a remaining life of 15 years on July 1, Year 4, and the bonds payable mature on June 30, Year 8. The bonds were issued on July 1, Year 1. The stated rate of interest on the bonds is 6% payable semi-annually. The market rate of interest was 8% on July 1, Year 4. Tests for impairment of goodwill indicated a loss of $8,329 in Year 5 and $5,553 in Year 6. BONDI LTD. STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION as at July 1, Year 4 Carrying amount Plant assets (net) Inventory s receivable Cash

$540,000 180,000 120,000 96,000 $936,000

Ordinary shares Retained earnings Bonds payable Current liabilities

$120,000 508,800 200,000 107,200 $936,000

Fair value $450,000 228,000 144,004 96,000

186,534 107,200


288


280

CHAPTER 5


The financial statements for Aaron and Bondi at December 31, Year 6, are presented below. Aaron has used the equity method to for its investment in Bondi. STATEMENTS OF FINANCIAL POSITION Aaron

Bondi

Plant assets (net) Investment in Bondi Other investments Inventory s receivable Cash

$ 720,000 520,319 250,666 300,000 180,000 120,000 $2,090,985

$ 540,000 — — 276,000 114,000 84,000 $1,014,000

Ordinary shares Retained earnings Bonds payable Current liabilities

$ 300,600 1,295,185 315,000 180,200 $2,090,985

$ 120,000 558,200 200,000 135,800 $1,014,000

$1,261,000 4,394 25,000 1,290,394 880,000 (40,000) 60,000 37,000 227,000 1,164,000 $ 126,394

$1,200,000 — — 1,200,000 1,005,000 15,000 54,000 26,400 91,200 1,191,600 $ 8,400

INCOME STATEMENTS Sales Investment income from Bondi Income from other investments Raw materials used Change in inventory Depreciation Interest expense Other expenses Profit

Required: (a) Prepare the consolidated financial statements for the year ended December 31, Year 6. (b) Calculate goodwill impairment loss and non-controlling interest on the consolidated income statement for the year ended December 31, Year 6, under parent company extension theory. (c) Calculate goodwill and non-controlling interest on the consolidated statement of financial position at December 31, Year 6, under the parent company extension theory.


Foxx Corp. purchased 75% of the outstanding shares of Rabb Ltd. on January 1, Year 3, at a cost of $117,000. Non-controlling interest was valued at $35,000 by an independent business valuator at the date of acquisition. On that date, Rabb had common shares of $50,000 and retained earnings of $30,000. Fair values were equal to carrying amounts for all the net assets except the following: Inventory Equipment Software

Carrying amount

Fair value

$30,000 45,000 —

$19,000 69,000 15,000


289


CHAPTER 5


281

The equipment had an estimated remaining useful life of 6 years on January 1, Year 3, and the software was to be amortized over 10 years. Foxx uses the cost method to for its investment. The testing for impairment at December 31, Year 6, yielded the following fair values: Software Goodwill

$ 8,000 20,000

The impairment loss on these assets occurred entirely in Year 6. Amortization expense is grouped with istrative expenses, and impairment losses are grouped with miscellaneous expenses. The parent’s share of the goodwill noted above is $15,000. The following are the financial statements of Foxx Corp. and its subsidiary Rabb Ltd. as at December 31, Year 6: BALANCE SHEETS December 31, Year 6 Foxx Corp.

Rabb Ltd.

Cash s receivable Note receivable Inventory Equipment, net Land Investment in Rabb

$

— 40,000 — 66,000 220,000 150,000 117,000 $593,000

$ 10,000 30,000 40,000 44,000 76,000 30,000 — $230,000

Bank indebtedness s payable Notes payable Common shares Retained earnings

$ 90,000 70,000 40,000 150,000 243,000 $593,000

$

— 60,000 — 50,000 120,000 $230,000

STATEMENTS OF RETAINED EARNINGS Year ended December 31, Year 6 Retained earnings, January 1, Year 6 Net income Dividends Retained earnings, December 31, Year 6

Foxx Corp.

Rabb Ltd.

$153,000 120,000 (30,000) $243,000

$ 92,000 48,000 (20,000) $120,000

Foxx Corp.

Rabb Ltd.

$821,000 15,000 836,000 480,000 40,000 116,000 80,000 716,000 $120,000

$320,000 3,600 323,600 200,000 12,000 31,600 32,000 275,600 $ 48,000

INCOME STATEMENTS Year ended December 31, Year 6 Sales Investment income Cost of sales istrative expenses Miscellaneous expenses Income taxes Net income


290


282

CHAPTER 5


Additional Information The notes payable are intercompany.

Required: (a) Prepare the Year 6 consolidated financial statements. (b) Calculate goodwill impairment loss and non-controlling interest on the consolidated income statement for the year ended December 31, Year 6, under parent company extension theory. (c) If Foxx used parent company extension theory rather than entity theory, how would this affect the debt-to-equity ratio at the end of Year 6?

Problem 5-13

The following financial statements were prepared on December 31, Year 6.

LO2, 3, 4 BALANCE SHEET Pearl

Silver

Cash s receivable Inventory Plant and equipment Accumulated depreciation Investment in Silver Company—at cost

$ 300,000 200,000 2,000,000 3,000,000 (750,000) 2,400,000 $7,150,000

$ 100,000 — 420,000 2,690,000 (310,000) — $2,900,000


$ 900,000 2,850,000 3,400,000 $7,150,000

$ 300,000 1,600,000 1,000,000 $2,900,000

$4,000,000 150,000 4,150,000 2,500,000 320,000 80,000 250,000 3,150,000 $1,000,000

$1,000,000 — 1,000,000 400,000 70,000 10,000 120,000 600,000 $ 400,000

INCOME STATEMENT Sales Dividend income Cost of sales Miscellaneous expenses istrative expense Income tax expense Net income

RETAINED EARNINGS STATEMENT Balance, January 1 Net income Dividends Balance, December 31

$2,900,000 1,000,000 3,900,000 500,000 $3,400,000

$ 800,000 400,000 1,200,000 200,000 $1,000,000

Additional Information Pearl purchased 75% of the outstanding voting shares of Silver for $2,400,000 on July 1, Year 2, at which time Silver’s retained earnings were $400,000, and


291


CHAPTER 5

283


accumulated depreciation was $60,000. The acquisition differential on this date was allocated as follows: • 30% to undervalued inventory • 40% to equipment—remaining useful life 8 years • Balance to goodwill During Year 3, a goodwill impairment loss of $70,000 was recognized, and an impairment test conducted as at December 31, Year 6, indicated that a further loss of $20,000 had occurred. Amortization expense is grouped with cost of goods sold and impairment losses are grouped with istrative expenses. Silver owes Pearl $75,000 on December 31, Year 6.

Required: (a) Prepare consolidated financial statements on December 31, Year 6. (b) Calculate goodwill impairment loss and non-controlling interest on the consolidated income statement for the year ended December 31, Year 6, under parent company extension theory. (c) Calculate goodwill and non-controlling interest on the consolidated balance sheet at December 31, Year 6, under parent company extension theory.

Problem 5-14 LO2, 3

Balance sheet and income statement data for two d companies for the current year appear below. Additional Information • Albeniz acquired an 80% interest in Bach on January 1, Year 1, for $272,000. On that date the following information was noted about specific net assets of Bach: Carrying amount

Fair value

$20,000 25,000 60,000 —

$50,000 45,000 78,000 42,000

Inventory Land Equipment (estimated useful life 15 years) Misc. intangibles (estimated useful life 20 years)

Amortization expense is grouped with distribution expenses. Albeniz’s accumulated depreciation was $240,000 at the date of acquisition. • On January 1, Year 1, Bach had a retained earnings balance of $30,000. • Albeniz carries its investment at cost. BALANCE SHEET as at December 31, Year 4 Cash Receivables Inventories Land Plant and equipment Accumulated depreciation Investment in Bach Company (cost) Advances to Bach Company Total assets

Albeniz

Bach

$ 40,000 92,000 56,000 20,000 200,000 (80,000) 272,000 100,000 $700,000

$ 21,000 84,000 45,000 60,000 700,000 (350,000) — — $560,000

(continued)


292


284

CHAPTER 5


s payable Advances payable Common shares Retained earnings Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity

Albeniz

Bach

$130,000 — 400,000 170,000 $700,000

$ 96,500 100,000 200,000 163,500 $560,000

INCOME STATEMENT Year Ended December 31, Year 4 Sales revenues Interest income Dividend income from Bach Total revenues Cost of goods sold Distribution expense Selling and istrative expense Financing expense Income taxes expense Total expenses Net income

Albeniz

Bach

$600,000 6,700 6,400 613,100 334,000 20,000 207,000 1,700 20,700 583,400 $ 29,700

$400,000 — — 400,000 225,000 70,000 74,000 6,000 7,500 382,500 $ 17,500

Required: Prepare the following: (a) Consolidated income statement (b) Consolidated balance sheet

Problem 5-15 LO2, 3, 5, 6, 7

On January 2, Year 1, Brady Ltd. purchased 80% of the outstanding shares of Partridge Ltd. for $4,120,000. Partridge’s statement of financial position and the fair values of its identifiable assets and liabilities for that date appear later in this section. The patents had a remaining useful life of 10 years on the acquisition date. The bonds were issued on January 1, Year 1, and mature on December 31, Year 10. Goodwill impairment losses were recorded as follows: • Year 1: $25,000 • Year 3: $12,500 Partridge declared and paid dividends of $100,000 in Year 3. Carrying amount

Fair value

Plant and equipment (net) Patents (net) Inventory s receivable Cash

$4,500,000 1,000,000 2,000,000 1,500,000 500,000 $9,500,000

$4,500,000 1,500,000 2,200,000 1,500,000 500,000

Ordinary shares Retained earnings 10% bonds payable s payable

$2,000,000 2,500,000 3,000,000 2,000,000 $9,500,000

3,300,000 2,000,000


293


CHAPTER 5


285

On December 31, Year 3, the financial statements of the two companies were as follows: STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION Brady

Partridge

Plant and equipment (net) Patents (net) Investment in Partridge Ltd. (equity method) Inventory s receivable Cash

$ 8,000,000 — 4,362,000 4,600,000 1,000,000 400,000 $18,362,000

$5,000,000 700,000 — 1,900,000 1,300,000 600,000 $9,500,000

Ordinary shares Retained earnings Bonds payable s payable

$ 5,000,000 6,362,000 4,000,000 3,000,000 $18,362,000

$2,000,000 3,100,000 3,000,000 1,400,000 $9,500,000

$10,000,000 134,000 10,134,000 6,930,000 70,000 900,000 — 480,000 680,000 600,000 9,660,000 $ 474,000

$5,000,000 — 5,000,000 2,890,000 110,000 400,000 100,000 300,000 850,000 150,000 4,800,000 $ 200,000

INCOME STATEMENTS Sales Investment revenue from Partridge Cost of goods purchased Change in inventory Depreciation expense Patent amortization expense Interest expense Other expenses Income taxes Profit

Required: (a) Prepare consolidated financial statements on December 31, Year 3. (b) Assume that Brady is a private entity, uses ASPE, and chooses to use the cost method to for its investment in Partridge. Which items on Brady’s separate-entity financial statements would have amounts different from those shown? Compute the equity method balances of these items. (c) Calculate the current ratio, debt-to-equity ratio, and return on total shareholders’ equity for Brady’s Year 3 financial statements assuming that the i) equity method was used to report its investment in Partridge; ii) cost method was used to report its investment in Partridge; and iii) consolidated statements were used to the business combination with Partridge. Round percentages to one decimal point and other ratios to two decimal points. (d) Briefly explain which of the different reporting methods in (c) report the highest i) liquidity. ii) risk of insolvency. iii) profitability.


294


286

CHAPTER 5


WEB -BASED P ROBLEMS Web Problem 5-1 LO3, 4, 6

When ing for the acquisition of a non–wholly owned subsidiary, the parent can use entity theory or parent company extension theory to for the business combination. Access the 2011 consolidated financial statements for Thomson Reuters Corporation by going to the investor relations section of the company’s website. Answer the questions below for 2011. Round percentages to one decimal pint and other ratios to two decimal points. For each question, indicate where in the financial statements you found the answer, and/or provide a brief explanation. (a) Which theory of consolidation is used to value non-controlling interest at the date of acquisition? (b) What percentage of net income for the year is represented by non-controlling interest (sometimes referred to as minority interest)? (c) What portion of the additions to other intangible assets during the year came from business combinations, and what portion came from direct purchases? (d) What was the goodwill impairment loss for the year, or what were total impairment losses? Describe the two main factors contributing to the goodwill impairment. (e) Assume that performance bonuses for the company’s top executives are based, in part, on net income. How will the goodwill impairment loss for the year affect the bonuses for the executives in the current year? in future years? (f) Explain why different discount rates are used for different geographical areas, and explain how a change in discount rate can negatively affect the value of goodwill. (g) Assume that the company used the other acceptable theory of consolidation for valuing non-controlling interest ing. How would this change in theory affect the return on total shareholders’ equity for the first year after the date of acquisition?


Access the 2011 consolidated financial statements for BCE Inc. by going to the investor relations section of the company’s website. Answer the same questions as in Web Problem 1, for 2011. For each question, indicate where in the financial statements you found the answer, and/or provide a brief explanation. (Some questions may not be applicable.)



295


6 chapter

Intercompany Inventory and Land Profits

learning objectives After studying this chapter, you should be able to do the following: LO1 Describe the effect on consolidated profit of the elimination of both intercompany revenues (and expenses) and intercompany asset profits.

LO4 Prepare consolidated financial statements that reflect the realization of upstream and downstream intercompany profits in inventory and land that were held back in previous periods.

LO2 Prepare consolidated financial statements that reflect the elimination of upstream and downstream intercompany profits in inventory and land.

LO5 Prepare the journal entries under the equity method to reflect the elimination and subsequent realization of intercompany profits in inventory and land.

LO3 Explain how the cost, revenue recognition, and matching principles are used to adjustments for intercompany transactions when preparing consolidated financial statements.

LO6 Analyze and interpret financial statements involving intercompany transactions. LO7 Identify some of the differences between IFRSs and ASPE involving intercompany transactions.

INTRODUCTION In previous discussions, we stressed that consolidated financial statements report the activities of a group of d companies as if they constitute a single company. While these companies may transact business with one another as well as with non-d companies, all intercompany transactions are eliminated so that the final consolidated statements reflect only the result of transactions with entities outside the group. The elimination of intercompany transactions and unrealized profit is one of the most complex topics encountered in the consolidation process. The volume of transfers within most large enterprises can be quite large. For example, Vodaphone Group, a world leader in wireless communication, reported intersegment revenue of €359 million in 2011. Such transactions are especially common in companies that have been constructed as a vertically integrated chain of organizations. These entities reduce their costs and risks by developing affiliations in which one operation furnishes products to another. Intercompany transactions are also used to shift income from one jurisdiction to another to minimize or avoid paying income taxes. As a result, Canadian

Consolidated financial statements should reflect only transactions with entities outside of the consolidated entity.

287


296


288

CHAPTER 6


legislation prevents Canadian companies from trying to avoid paying income tax by using offshore tax havens such as non-resident trusts and foreign investment entities. The legislation was enacted because the government felt that multinational companies operating in Canada had avoided “hundreds of millions” of dollars in taxes over the previous decade through the use of tax havens. Chapter 5 illustrated the elimination of intercompany receivables and payables. The next two chapters focus on the elimination of other transactions that occur between a parent and its subsidiaries or between two or more subsidiaries that have a common parent.

LO1

INTERCOMPANY REVENUE AND EXPENSES Intercompany Sales and Purchases

The transaction with the dealer is an arm’s-length transaction (i.e., with an outsider).

Revenue is recognized when it is earned in a transaction with an outsider in accordance with the revenue recognition principle.

The following simple example will be used to illustrate the basic idea behind the elimination of intercompany sales and purchases in the preparation of a consolidated income statement. Let your imagination stray a bit, and suppose that when you went shopping for groceries, the change you received from the cashier included some dollar coins. When you got home you noticed that the loon on one of these coins was upside down. You took the coin to a dealer and learned that some coins with this flaw had been accidentally released into circulation by the Royal Canadian Mint and as a result were worth substantially more than their face value. The dealer offered you $41 for this dollar coin, which you accepted. It is obvious that you made a profit of $40 on this transaction. An income statement showing only this transaction would appear as follows: INCOME STATEMENT—COIN TRANSACTION Sales Cost of goods sold Net income

$41 1 $40

Now let your imagination stray even further, and assume that the following events took place between the time you received the coin from the supermarket and the time you sold it to the coin dealer. Your pants have four pockets. Let us call them pocket 1, pocket 2, pocket 3, and pocket 4. Pocket 1 received the coin from the supermarket and sold it to pocket 2 for $10. Pocket 2 sold the coin to pocket 3 for $15. Pocket 3 sold the coin to pocket 4 for $25, and then pocket 4 sold the coin to the dealer for $41. Has any part of the transaction changed as far as you (as an entity) are concerned? The answer is, of course, no. You still had sales of $41, cost of goods sold of $1, and a net income of $40. But assume that each of your pockets recorded its part in the transaction and prepared an income statement: INCOME STATEMENTS OF FOUR POCKETS Income was recorded when the coin was moved from one pocket to another.

Sales Cost of goods sold Net income

Pocket 1

Pocket 2

Pocket 3

Pocket 4

$10 1 $ 9

$15 10 $ 5

$25 15 $10

$41 25 $16

The arrows indicate the interpocket transactions that took place. Also, the sum of the net incomes of your four pockets is equal to your net income of $40. We should


297


CHAPTER 6


289

therefore be able to prepare an income statement for you (as an entity) by combining the components of the income statements of your four pockets as follows: COMBINED INCOME STATEMENT Sales (10 1 15 1 25 1 41) Cost of goods sold (1 1 10 1 15 1 25) Net income

$91 51 $40

However, sales and cost of goods sold are not the correct amounts because they contain the interpocket sales and purchases. Both items should reflect only sales to and purchases from outside the entity. If we eliminate the interpocket sales and purchases, we will have an income statement that reflects only transactions that you as an entity incurred with others outside the entity. This statement can be prepared as follows: COMBINED INCOME STATEMENT—ENTITY

Sales Cost of goods sold Net income

Total of four pockets

Interpocket sales & purchases

Total

$91 51 $40

$50 50 $ 0

$41 1 $40

The cost of the coin is expensed in the same period as the revenue in accordance with the matching principle.

Note that if we eliminate an equal amount of revenue and expense from an income statement, the resultant net income remains unchanged. Your four pockets in this example are similar in all respects to a parent company and its subsidiary companies. Let us assume that a parent company (P) has holdings in three subsidiaries as follows: P owns 80% of S1, 90% of S2, and 75% of S3. The coin transactions previously illustrated were carried out by P and its three subsidiaries. These were the only transactions that took place during the current year. At year-end, the parent and its subsidiaries prepared the following income statements: INCOME STATEMENTS—PARENT AND SUBSIDIARIES Sales Cost of goods sold Net income

P

S1

S2

S3

$10 1 $ 9

$15 10 $ 5

$25 15 $10

$41 25 $16

We are assuming that P uses the equity method but has made no entries during the current year and that all acquisition differentials have been fully amortized in prior years. Before preparing a consolidated income statement, we can calculate consolidated net income attributable to P as follows: P’s net income

$ 9

S1

S2

S3

Total $31

Subsidiary net income

$ 5

$ 10

$ 16

P’s ownership Share of subsidiary’s net income Consolidated net income attributable to P

80% $ 4

90% $ 9

75% $ 12

25 $34

Only S3 had a transaction with an outsider.


298


290

CHAPTER 6


Suppose we prepare a consolidated income statement without eliminating intercompany sales and purchases, in the following manner: P AND SUBSIDIARIES CONSOLIDATED INCOME STATEMENT for Current Year Sales and cost of sales are overstated because intercompany sales and purchases have not yet been eliminated.

Sales (10 1 15 1 25 1 41) Cost of goods sold (1 1 10 1 15 1 25) Net income Attributable to Shareholders of parent Non-controlling interest

$91 51 $40

$34 6

CALCULATION OF NET INCOME ATTRIBUTABLE TO NON-CONTROLLING INTEREST S1 (20% 3 5) S2 (10% 3 10) S3 (25% 3 16)

$ 1 1 4 $ 6

Note that the net income of the consolidated entity is made up of the net incomes of the parent and its three subsidiaries. But we have not eliminated the intercompany sales and purchases that took place during the year. If we eliminate these intercompany transactions, the bottom-line net income earned by the consolidated entity will not change. Non-controlling interest and consolidated net income are only allocations of the entity’s net income, so they also will not be affected by the elimination of these intercompany sales and purchases. The consolidated income statement after the elimination of intercompany sales and purchases is as follows: CONSOLIDATED INCOME STATEMENT (after Elimination of Intercompany Items) The consolidated income statement now reflects only the transactions with outsiders.

Sales (91 2 50) Cost of goods sold (51 2 50) Net income Attributable to Shareholders of parent Non-controlling interest

$41 1 $40 $34 6

Other Examples of Intercompany Revenue and Expenses Suppose the parent company lends $100,000 to the subsidiary company and receives a note payable on demand with interest at 10% paid annually. The transactions would be recorded as follows: These transactions are recorded on the separateentity books of the parent and the subsidiary.

Parent Company Note receivable Cash

Subsidiary Company 100,000 100,000

Cash Note payable

100,000 100,000

To record intercompany borrowings on January 1 of the current year Cash Interest revenue

10,000 10,000

Interest expense Cash

10,000 10,000

To record the intercompany payment of interest on December 31 of the current year.


CHAPTER 6


From the consolidated entity’s point of view, all that has happened is that cash has been transferred from one bank to another. No revenue has been earned, no expense has been incurred, and there are no receivables or payables with parties outside the consolidated entity. The elimination of $10,000 interest revenue and interest expense on the consolidated income statement does not change the net income of the consolidated entity. If total net income is not affected, then the amount allocated to the non-controlling and controlling interest is also not affected. On the consolidated balance sheet, we eliminate $100,000 from notes receivable and notes payable. An equal elimination of assets and liabilities on the balance sheet leaves the amounts of the two equities (non-controlling interest and controlling interest) unchanged. Note also that if the roles are reversed and the subsidiary lends $100,000 to the parent, the eliminations on the consolidated income statement and balance sheet are the same and have no effect on the amount of the non-controlling interest appearing on each statement.

299

291

Consolidated net income does not change when we eliminate an equal amount of revenue and expense.

Intercompany Management Fees Often the parent will charge its subsidiary companies a yearly management fee as a means of allocating head office costs to all the companies within the group. (We will not discuss the pros and cons of this procedure here. Readers who are interested in the reasons for, and effectiveness of, allocations of this nature are advised to consult a management ing textbook.) From an external reporting point of view, we have intercompany revenues and expenses that must be eliminated on the consolidated income statement. Intercompany Rentals Occasionally, buildings or equipment owned by one company are used by another company within the group. Rather than transfer legal title, the companies agree on a yearly rental to be charged. In such cases, intercompany rental revenues and expenses must be eliminated from the consolidated income statement. The four examples mentioned above and any other intercompany revenues and expenses are eliminated to ensure that revenue is recognized only when it is earned with a party outside of the consolidated entity and to stop the doublecounting of revenues and expenses. This has no effect on the calculation of the non-controlling interest in the net income of the subsidiary companies, since there is no change to consolidated net income.

INTERCOMPANY PROFITS IN ASSETS When one d company sells assets to another d company, it is possible that the profit or loss recorded on the transaction has not been realized from the point of view of the consolidated entity. If the purchasing has sold these assets outside the group, all profits (losses) recorded are realized. If, however, all or a portion of these assets have not been sold outside the group, we must eliminate the remaining intercompany profit and may need to eliminate the intercompany loss1 from the consolidated statements. The intercompany profit (loss) will be realized for consolidation purposes during the ing period in which the particular asset is sold to outsiders. The sale to outsiders may also result in an additional profit (loss) that is not adjusted in the

The elimination entries are recorded on the consolidated working papers and not in the separate-entity books of the parent and the subsidiary.


300


292

CHAPTER 6


consolidation process. Three types of unrealized intercompany profits (losses) are eliminated: • Profits in inventory • Profits in nondepreciable assets • Profits in depreciable assets The first two of these will be discussed in this chapter; the last one will be discussed in Chapter 7. The examples that follow illustrate the holdback of unrealized intercompany profits in one ing period and the realization of the profit in a subsequent period. In a downstream transaction, the parent sells to a subsidiary. In an upstream transaction, the subsidiary sells to the parent or another subsidiary of the parent.

Downstream and upstream transactions are defined by who the seller is.

Upstream versus Downstream Transactions When we talk about intercompany transactions, it is important to distinguish between downstream and upstream transactions. When the parent sells to the subsidiary, the transaction is referred to as a downstream transaction. When the subsidiary sells to the parent, it is referred to as an upstream transaction. The name of the method is consistent with the common perception that the parent is the head of the family and the subsidiary is the child of the parent. The parent looks down to the child, while the child looks up to the parent. The company doing the selling is the company recognizing the profit on the sale. When we eliminate the profit from intercompany transactions, we should take it away from the selling company, that is, from the company that recognized the profit in the first place. On downstream transactions, we will eliminate the profit that the parent had recognized. On upstream transactions, we will eliminate the profit that the subsidiary had recognized. The name of the method is also based on which company was the selling company. When one subsidiary sells to another subsidiary, the profit must also be eliminated because it is not realized with an outside party. Since a subsidiary was the selling company, this lateral type of transaction is also referred to as an upstream transaction. To illustrate the concepts involved in the elimination of intercompany profits, we will use as a simple example the financial statements of a parent and its 90%-owned subsidiary one year after the acquisition date. On January 1, Year 1, Parent Company acquired 90% of the common shares of Sub Incorporated for $11,250. On that date, Sub had common shares of $8,000 and retained earnings of $4,500, and there were no differences between the fair values and the carrying amounts of its identifiable net assets. The acquisition differential was calculated as follows: Cost of 90% of Sub

$11,250

Implied value of 100% of Sub Carrying amount of Sub’s net assets (equals Sub’s shareholders’ equity) Common shares Retained earnings

$12,500


8,000 4,500 12,500 $ 0

The financial statements of Parent and Sub as at December 31, Year 1, are presented in Exhibit 6.1. Parent s for its investment using the cost method, and because there were no dividends declared by Sub, no entry was made on December 31, Year 1.


301


CHAPTER 6


293

EXHIBIT 6.1 YEAR 1 INCOME STATEMENTS Sales Cost of sales Miscellaneous expenses Income tax expense

Net income

Parent

Sub

$20,000 13,000 1,400 2,200 16,600 $ 3,400

$ 8,000 4,300 900 1,100 6,300 $ 1,700

These are the separate-entity statements of the parent and the subsidiary.

BALANCE SHEETS—December 31, Year 1 Parent

Sub

Inventory Assets (miscellaneous) Investment in Sub Inc.

$ 7,500 21,650 11,250 $40,400

$ 4,000 19,200 — $23,200


$12,000 15,000 13,400 $40,400

$ 9,000 8,000 6,200 $23,200

The parent uses the cost method in its separate-entity records.

Intercompany Inventory Profits: Subsidiary Selling (Upstream Transactions) The following intercompany transactions occurred during Year 1: 1. During Year 1, Sub made sales to Parent amounting to $5,000 at a gross profit rate of 30%. 2. At the end of Year 1, Parent’s inventory contained items purchased from Sub for $1,000.

From Sub’s separate-entity perspective, it earned the income on the sale to the Parent.

3. Sub paid (or accrued) income tax on its taxable income at a rate of 40%.

Holdback of Inventory Profits—Year 1 It should be noted that the subsidiary recorded a gross profit of $1,500 (30% 3 5,000) on its sales to the parent during the year and paid income tax of $600 (40% 3 1,500) on this profit. If the parent had sold all of its intercompany purchases to customers outside the entity, this $1,500 gross profit would be considered realized from the point of view of this consolidated single entity. But the parent’s inventory contains items purchased from the subsidiary for $1,000. There is an unrealized intercompany profit of $300 (30% 3 1,000) in this inventory, which must be held back from consolidated income in Year 1 and realized in the period in which it is sold to outsiders. In addition, the $120 tax expense relating to this profit must also be held back from the Year 1 consolidated income statement. When this $300 gross profit is realized on a future consolidated income statement, the income tax expense will be matched on that statement with the profit realized. Not only do we have to hold back an unrealized profit for consolidation purposes, but also we must make an adjustment for the income taxes relating to that profit. Since income taxes are computed at the individual company level rather than at the consolidated-entity level, the company that recorded the profit also paid (or accrued) income taxes on that profit, and the income tax expense on its

From the consolidated perspective, some of Sub’s income was not realized with an outsider.


302


294

CHAPTER 6


Income tax should be expensed in the same period as profit. From a consolidated perspective, some of the tax paid by the subsidiary was prepaid, since the income was not yet earned.

Non-controlling interest is not affected by intercompany profits made on downstream transactions.

Non-controlling interest is affected and will share in intercompany profits made on upstream transactions.

LO2

income statement reflects this. The matching of expenses with revenues is a basic ing concept; the adjustment made for income taxes on intercompany profits is a perfect example of this matching process. The difference between the buyer’s tax basis and the cost of transferred assets as reported in the consolidated financial statements meets the definition of a temporary difference and will give rise to deferred income taxes. While IAS 27 explicitly states that profits and losses resulting from intragroup transactions should be eliminated in full, it does not explicitly state how the eliminated amount should be allocated between the controlling and non-controlling interests. Because the amount attributed to non-controlling interest will affect the amount attributed to the shareholders of the parent, the handling of this issue can affect the reported profitability of a business combination. To determine an appropriate allocation, the relationship between an intercompany transaction and the non-controlling shareholders must be analyzed. If a transfer were downstream, a logical view would be that the unrealized gross profit belongs to the parent company. The parent made the original sale; therefore, the gross profit is included in its financial records. Since the non-controlling shareholders do not have any interest in the parent company, it seems appropriate that they should not be affected by the elimination of the profit on downstream transactions. In contrast, if the subsidiary sells inventory to the parent, the subsidiary’s financial records recognize the gross profit. If this profit is eliminated when preparing the consolidated financial statements, the parties having an interest in the subsidiary’s profit are affected by the elimination of the profit. Since the non-controlling shareholders do have an interest in the subsidiary, it seems appropriate that they should be affected by the elimination of the profit on upstream transactions. Throughout this textbook, the non-controlling interest’s share of profit and retained earnings will be computed based on the reported profit and retained earnings of the subsidiary after they have been adjusted for any unrealized profits on upstream transactions. Using the direct approach, we will now prepare the Year 1 consolidated statements after making the consolidation adjustments shown in Exhibit 6.2.

EXHIBIT 6.2 INTERCOMPANY TRANSACTIONS $ 5,000 (a)

Intercompany sales and purchases Intercompany inventory profits: Ending inventory—Sub Inc. selling Income tax (40%) After-tax profit

$ $

300 (b) 120 (c) 180 (d)

CALCULATION OF CONSOLIDATED NET INCOME —Year 1 The unrealized profit is always deducted from the selling company’s income.

Net income—Parent Co. Net income—Sub Inc. Less after-tax profit in ending inventory (2d) Adjusted net income—Sub Inc. Net income Attributable to Shareholders of parent Non-controlling interest (10% 3 1,520)

$ 3,400 1,700 180 1,520 $ 4,920 $ 4,768 (e) 152 (f)

(continued)


CHAPTER 6

EXHIBIT 6.2


303

295

(continued)

CALCULATION OF CONSOLIDATED RETAINED EARNINGS at December 31, Year 1 Retained earnings—Parent Co. Retained earnings—Sub Inc. Acquisition retained earnings Increase since acquisition Less profit in ending inventory (2d) Adjusted increase since acquisition Parent Co.’s share Consolidated retained earnings

$ 13,400 6,200 4,500 1,700 180 1,520 90%

The unrealized profit at the end of Year 1 must be eliminated when calculating consolidated retained earnings at the end of Year 1.

(g) 1,368 $14,768 (h)

CALCULATION OF NON-CONTROLLING INTEREST (METHOD 1) at December 31, Year 1 Shareholders’ equity—Sub Inc. Common shares Retained earnings

$ 8,000 6,200 14,200 180 14,020 10% $ 1,402 (i)

Less after-tax profit in ending inventory Adjusted shareholders’ equity Non-controlling interest’s share

CALCULATION OF NON-CONTROLLING INTEREST (METHOD 2) Non-controlling interest at date of acquisition (10% 3 [11,250 / .9]) Sub’s adjusted increase in retained earnings (g) NCI’s share @ 10% Non-controlling interest, December 31, Year 3

$ 1,250 1,520 152 $ 1,402 (i)

that the purpose of the calculation of consolidated net income is to adjust the parent’s cost method net income to what it would have been under the equity method. Note that the after-tax profit is deducted from the net income of Sub because the subsidiary was the selling company and its net income contains this profit being held back for consolidation purposes. Note also that the non-controlling interest’s share of the Year 1 income is based on the adjusted income of Sub. Exhibit 6.3 illustrates the preparation of the Year 1 consolidated financial statements. The first two numbers in brackets are from the statements of Parent and Sub. Any additional numbers, which are in boldface and labelled, are adjustments made to eliminate the intercompany transactions. The eliminations made on the income statement require further elaboration: 1. The eliminations of intercompany sales and purchases are equal reductions of revenues and expenses that do not change the net income of the consolidated entity or the amount allocated to the non-controlling and controlling equities.

Non-controlling interest is affected when there are unrealized profits on upstream transactions.


304


296

CHAPTER 6


EXHIBIT 6.3 YEAR 1 CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS Elimination of Intercompany Profits in Inventory (Direct Approach) PARENT COMPANY CONSOLIDATED INCOME STATEMENT for the Year Ended December 31, Year 1 The unrealized profits are eliminated on the consolidated financial statements.

Sales (20,000 1 8,000 2 [2a] 5,000) Cost of sales (13,000 1 4,300 2 [2a] 5,000 1 [2b] 300) Miscellaneous expenses (1,400 1 900) Income tax expense (2,200 1 1,100 2 [2c] 120)

Net income Attributable to Shareholders of parent (2e) Non-controlling interest (2f)

$23,000 12,600 2,300 3,180 18,080 $ 4,920 $ 4,768 152

PARENT COMPANY CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET at December 31, Year 1 By eliminating the unrealized profit, inventory is now stated at cost to the consolidated entity.

When ending inventory is overstated, cost of sales is understated.

When cost of sales is increased, income decreases and income tax expense should decrease.

Inventory (7,500 1 4,000 2 [2b] 300) Assets—miscellaneous (21,650 1 19,200) Deferred income taxes (0 1 0 1 [2c] 120)

$11,200 40,850 120 $52,170

Liabilities (12,000 1 9,000) Common shares Retained earnings (2h) Non-controlling interest (2i)

$21,000 15,000 14,768 1,402 $52,170

2. To hold back the gross profit of $300 from the consolidated entity’s net income, we increase cost of goods sold by $300. The reasoning is as follows: (a) Cost of goods sold is made up of opening inventory, plus purchases, less ending inventory. (b) The ending inventory contains the $300 gross profit. (c) If we subtract the $300 profit from the ending inventory on the balance sheet, the ending inventory is now stated at cost to the consolidated entity. (d) A reduction of $300 from ending inventory in the cost of goods sold calculation increases cost of goods sold by $300. (e) This increase to cost of goods sold reduces the before-tax net income earned by the entity by $300. 3. Because the entity’s before-tax net income has been reduced by $300, it is necessary to reduce the income tax expense (the tax paid on the profit held back) by $120. 4. A reduction of income tax expense increases the net income of the consolidated entity.


CHAPTER 6


305

297

5. A $300 increase in cost of goods sold, together with a $120 reduction in income tax expense, results in the after-tax profit of $180 being removed from consolidated net income. The $300 adjustment to inventory and cost of goods sold is similar to the adjustment we studied in intermediate ing to correct errors in inventory. If you have difficulty understanding the adjustments for unrealized profits in inventory, you may want to go back to your intermediate ing text to review the adjustment for errors in inventory. As a result of the adjustments above, the following ing principles have been properly applied: Cost principle—inventory is reported at $11,200, which is the original cost to the consolidated entity when the inventory was purchased from outsiders. Revenue recognition principle—sales are reported at $23,000, which is the amount earned on sales to outsiders. Matching principle—cost of goods sold is recognized as an expense in the same period as the related revenue, and therefore is matched to the revenue. The amount of $12,600 is the inventory actually sold to outsiders at the amount paid when the goods were originally purchased from outsiders. Similarly, income tax is expensed in the same period as the related income and in proportion to the income earned. It is important to realize that all of the above adjustments are being made on the consolidated working papers and not on the separate-entity financial statements. What was recorded on the subsidiary’s own books was legitimate from its own perspective. But from the consolidated perspective, some of the profit was not yet realized. It must be held back from the consolidated financial statements. Again it is important to note the following components of the entity’s net income: Net Income—Parent Co. Adjusted net income—Sub Inc. Consolidated net income

LO3 The adjustments to eliminate the unrealized profits are needed in order to properly apply the cost, revenue recognition, and matching principles.

The unrealized profits are not eliminated on the separateentity financial statements.

$3,400 1,520 $4,920

The only new concepts relating to the preparation of the consolidated balance sheet involve the adjustments made on the asset side (a) to eliminate the unrealized profit in inventory and (b) to set up the deferred income taxes on this profit. These adjustments are shown in boldface in Exhibit 6.3 and are labelled to correspond with the calculations in Exhibit 6.2. The reasons for these adjustments can be further explained as follows: 1. The holdback of the $300 gross profit on the consolidated income statement was accomplished by reducing the amount of ending inventory in calculating the cost of goods sold. (A reduction in ending inventory increases cost of goods sold.) The ending inventory in the cost of goods sold calculation is the inventory balance on the consolidated balance sheet. Removing the $300 gross profit from the asset will result in the consolidated inventory being reflected at cost to the entity. 2. On the consolidated income statement, we reduced income tax expense by $120, representing the tax paid on the gross profit. As far as the consolidated entity is concerned, this tax of $120 was paid prematurely because the income was not yet earned. The tax will become an expense when the inventory is sold

The unrealized profit is deducted from the inventory to bring inventory back to its original cost in accordance with the historical cost principle.

Income tax will be expensed when the profit is realized in accordance with the matching principle.


306


298

CHAPTER 6


to outsiders. This results in a temporary difference for the consolidated entity. The resultant deferred income taxes are “added into” the assets on the consolidated balance sheet. (The illustration assumes that neither the parent nor the subsidiary had deferred income taxes on their individual balance sheets.) 3. A reduction of $300 from inventory and a $120 increase in deferred income taxes results in a net reduction to consolidated assets of $180, which equals the $180 reduction that has been made on the equity side.

Equity Method Journal Entries While our example has assumed that Parent uses the cost method to for its investment, it is useful to see where the differences would lie if the equity method was used. If Parent was using the equity method, the following journal entries would be made on December 31, Year 1: The equity method captures the net effect of all consolidation entries.

Investment in Sub Inc. Investment income 90% of the net income of Sub Inc. (90% 3 1,700 5 1,530)

1,530 1,530

Investment income 162 Investment in Sub Inc. 162 To hold back 90% of the after-tax inventory profit recorded by Sub Inc. (90% 3 180 5 162)

After these entries were posted, the two related equity method s of Parent would show the following changes and balances: Investment in Sub Inc. January 1, Year 1 December 31, Year 1 Income from Sub Inc. After-tax inventory profit (held back) Balance, December 31, Year 1

The parent’s income under the equity method should be equal to consolidated net income attributable to Parent’s shareholders.

LO4

In Year 2, the parent sold its Year 1 inventory to outsiders.

Investment income

$11,250

$

—

1,530 (162) $12,618

1,530 (162) $1,368

Parent’s total income under the equity method would be $4,768, consisting of $3,400 from its own operations as reported in Exhibit 6.1, plus investment income of $1,368, as reported above. This income of $4,768 should be and is equal to consolidated net income attributable to Parent’s shareholders.

Realization of Inventory Profits—Year 2 The previous example illustrated the holdback of an unrealized intercompany inventory profit in Year 1. We will continue our example of Parent Company and Sub Inc. by looking at the events of Year 2. On December 31, Year 2, Parent reported earnings from its own operations of $4,050 and declared dividends of $2,500. Sub reported a net income of $3,100 and, again, did not declare a dividend. Using the cost method, Parent made no journal entries with respect to the operations of Sub. During Year 2, there were no intercompany transactions, and at year-end, the inventory of Parent contained no items purchased from Sub. In other words, the December 31, Year 1, inventory of Parent was sold during Year 2, and the unrealized profit that was held back for consolidated purposes in Year 1 will have to be released into income in Year 2. The financial statements of Parent and Sub are presented in Exhibit 6.4. Before we prepare the Year 2 consolidated income statement, we must carry out the calculations shown in Exhibit 6.5.


307


CHAPTER 6


299

EXHIBIT 6.4 YEAR 2 INCOME STATEMENTS Parent

Sub

$25,000 16,000 2,350 2,600 20,950 $ 4,050

$12,000 5,500 1,400 2,000 8,900 $ 3,100

Cost of sales for the parent includes the inflated inventory value at the beginning of the year.

Parent

Sub

Inventory Assets (miscellaneous) Investment in Sub Inc.

$ 9,900 22,800 11,250 $43,950

$ 7,500 20,800 — $28,300

Inventory at the end of Year 2 does not include any unrealized profit.


$14,000 15,000 14,950 $43,950

$11,000 8,000 9,300 $28,300

Sales Cost of sales Miscellaneous expenses Income tax expense

Net income

BALANCE SHEETS—December 31, Year 2

EXHIBIT 6.5 INTERCOMPANY INVENTORY PROFITS—Year 2 Intercompany inventory profits: Opening inventory—Sub Inc. selling Income tax (40%) After-tax profit

$ $

300 (a) 120 (b) 180 (c)

CALCULATION OF CONSOLIDATED NET INCOME—Year 2 Net income—Parent Co. Net income—Sub Inc. Add after-tax profit in opening inventory (5c) Adjusted net income—Sub Inc. Net income

$ 4,050 3,100 180 3,280 $ 7,330

Attributable to Shareholders of parent Non-controlling interest (10% 3 3,280)

$ 7,002 (d) 328 (e)

CALCULATION OF CONSOLIDATED RETAINED EARNINGS December 31, Year 2 Retained earnings—Parent Co. Retained earnings—Sub Inc. Acquisition retained earnings Increase since acquisition Parent Co.’s share Consolidated retained earnings

$14,950 9,300 4,500 4,800 90%

(f) 4,320 $19,270 (g)

(continued)

When the profits are realized, they are credited to the income of the original seller.


308


300

CHAPTER 6


EXHIBIT 6.5

(continued)

CALCULATION OF NON-CONTROLLING INTEREST (METHOD 1) December 31, Year 2 All of subsidiary’s shareholders’ equity is legitimate from a consolidated perspective at the end of Year 2.

Common shares—Sub Inc. Retained earnings—Sub Inc.

$ 8,000 9,300 17,300 10% $ 1,730 (h)

CALCULATION OF NON-CONTROLLING INTEREST (METHOD 2) Non-controlling interest at date of acquisition (10% 3 [11,250/.9]) Sub’s adjusted increase in retained earnings (g) Non-controlling interest’s share @ 10% Non-controlling interest, December 31, Year 2

LO4

$ 1,250 4,800 480 $ 1,730

(i)

The after-tax inventory profit of $180 that was held back in Year 1 is being realized in Year 2 and is added to the net income of Sub, because the subsidiary was the company that originally recorded the profit. Note that the non-controlling interest’s share of the Year 2 net income of Sub is based on the adjusted net income of that company. The calculation of consolidated retained earnings at December 31, Year 2, does not require any adjustments for unrealized profits because there are no unrealized profits at the end of Year 2. The subsidiary had reported profits in Year 1 on an intercompany sale to the parent. The unrealized profits were eliminated when calculating consolidated retained earnings at the end of Year 1. When the parent sold the inventory to outsiders, the previous unrealized profit was realized from a consolidated perspective. Since neither the parent nor the subsidiary had any inventory at the end of Year 2 that had been purchased through an intercompany sale, there was no unrealized profit in ending inventory. Consequently, there is no unrealized profit in retained earnings at the end of Year 2. Exhibit 6.6 illustrates the preparation of the Year 2 consolidated financial statements using the direct approach.

EXHIBIT 6.6 Year 2 Consolidated Statements (Direct Approach) PARENT COMPANY CONSOLIDATED INCOME STATEMENT for the Year Ended December 31, Year 2 The unrealized profits from the end of Year 1 are released into consolidated income in Year 2.

Sales (25,000 1 12,000) Cost of sales (16,000 1 5,500 2 [5a] 300) Miscellaneous expenses (2,350 1 1,400) Income tax expense (2,600 1 2,000 1 [5b] 120) Net income

$37,000 21,200 3,750 4,720 29,670 $ 7,330

Attributable to Shareholders of parent (5d) Non-controlling interest (5e)

$ 7,002 328

(continued)


309


CHAPTER 6

EXHIBIT 6.6


301

(continued) PARENT COMPANY CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET December 31, Year 2

Inventory (9,900 1 7,500) Assets—miscellaneous (22,800 1 20,800)

$17,400 43,600 $61,000

Liabilities (14,000 1 11,000) Common shares Retained earnings (5g) Non-controlling interest (5h)

$25,000 15,000 19,270 1,730 $61,000

There are no unrealized profits at the end of Year 2.

In preparing the Year 2 consolidated income statement, we make consolidation adjustments that bring the original before-tax profit into the income statement and increase income tax expense for the tax on this profit. The eliminations (i.e., adjustments) made are shown in boldface and are labelled. The elimination entries are explained as follows: 1. There were no intercompany sales or purchases in Year 2, and therefore no elimination is required on the income statement. 2. To realize the gross profit of $300 in Year 2, we decrease cost of goods sold by $300. The reasoning behind this is as follows: (a) Cost of goods sold is made up of opening inventory, plus purchases, less ending inventory. (b) Parent’s opening inventory contains the $300 gross profit. After we reduce it by $300, the opening inventory is at cost to the entity. (c) A reduction of $300 from opening inventory decreases cost of goods sold by $300. (d) This decrease in cost of goods sold increases the before-tax net income earned by the entity by $300. 3. Using the concepts of matching, we increase income tax expense by $120 in order to match it with the $300 gross profit being realized. Note that the deferred income tax on the December 31, Year 1, consolidated balance sheet (see Exhibit 6.3) becomes an expense on the Year 2 consolidated income statement, because the December 31, Year 1, inventory was sold in Year 2. 4. A $300 decrease in cost of goods sold, together with a $120 increase in income tax expense, results in the after-tax intercompany Year 1 profit of $180 being realized for consolidation purposes in Year 2. Before the consolidated balance sheet is prepared, we must calculate non-controlling interest at December 31, Year 2. This calculation was shown in Exhibit 6.5. The preparation of the consolidated balance sheet on December 31, Year 2, is straightforward because no inventory profit eliminations are required. The inventory of Parent does not contain any unrealized profit, and there are no related deferred income taxes on the balance sheet. All previous unrealized inventory profits have now been realized for consolidation purposes.

Since beginning inventory was inflated, cost of sales for Year 2 was inflated.

When cost of sales is decreased, income increases, and tax expense should increase.


310


302

CHAPTER 6


When you view the adjustments that were made to prepare the Year 2 consolidated statements (see Exhibit 6.6), it may strike you that the adjustments made on the income statement have not been reflected in the rest of the consolidated statements, and that, as a result, the statements should not balance. But they do balance, so the $180 increase in the after-tax net income of the entity must have been offset by a $180 change in the retained earnings statement and balance sheet. To see where this $180 difference ended up, it is useful to prepare a calculation that shows the changes in non-controlling interest during Year 2. This calculation is shown below. CHANGES IN NON-CONTROLLING INTEREST—Year 2 Non-controlling interest is based on Sub’s shareholders’ equity after it has been adjusted for unrealized profit on upstream transactions.

Sub Inc. Common shares Retained earnings—January 1

$8,000 6,200 14,200 180 14,020 10%

Less unrealized inventory profit Adjusted Non-controlling interest, January 1 Allocation of Year 2 consolidated net income (5e) Non-controlling interest, December 31

The intercompany profit of $180 was recorded in Sub’s separate-entity income in Year 1 but reported in consolidated income in Year 2.

$1,402 328 $1,730

In examining this calculation and the calculation of consolidated retained earnings on December 31, Year 1, in Exhibit 6.2, we see that the $180 increase in the entity’s Year 2 consolidated net income was offset by a $180 decrease in the December 31, Year 1, balances of non-controlling interest and retained earnings, allocated as follows: To non-controlling interest (10% 3 180) To controlling interest (90% 3 180)

LO5

$ 18 162 $180

Equity Method Journal Entries If Parent had used the equity method, the following journal entries would have been made on December 31, Year 2:

The equity method captures the net effect of all consolidation entries, including the adjustment for realized profits.

Investment in Sub Inc. Investment income To record 90% of the reported income of Sub Inc. (90% 3 3,100) Investment in Sub Inc. Investment income To release in Year 2 the after-tax inventory profit held back in Year 1 (90% 3 180)

2,790 2,790

162 162

After these entries are posted, the two related equity method s of Parent show the following changes and balances: Investment in Sub Inc. January 1, Year 2 Changes during Year 2 Income from Sub Inc. After-tax inventory profit (realized) Balance, Dec. 31, Year 2

Investment income

$12,618

$

—

2,790 162 $15,570

2,790 162 $2,952


311


CHAPTER 6


303

Note that the January 1 balance ($12,618) included the $162 holdback and that this amount was realized during the year with a journal entry. It should be obvious that the December 31 balance ($15,570) does not contain any holdback.

Intercompany Inventory Profits: Parent Selling (Downstream Transactions) In our previous example, the subsidiary was the selling company in the intercompany profit transaction (an upstream transaction). This resulted in the $180 after-tax profit elimination being allocated to the controlling and non-controlling equities. Suppose we had assumed that it was the parent company that sold the inventory to the subsidiary (a downstream transaction). The calculation of consolidated net income for each of the two years should indicate where the differences lie. CALCULATION OF CONSOLIDATED NET INCOME—YEAR 1 Net income—Parent Co. Less after-tax profit in ending inventory Adjusted net income—Parent Co. Net income—Sub Inc. Consolidated net income

$3,400 180 3,220 1,700 $4,920


$4,750 170

Note that the after-tax profit is deducted from the net income of Parent because it was the selling company, and that Parent’s net income contains this profit being held back for consolidation purposes. The eliminations on the consolidated income statement for intercompany sales and purchases and for unrealized profit in inventory, and the related adjustment to income tax expense would not change. But the split of the consolidated net income between the shareholders of the parent and the non-controlling interest is different, as indicated in the previous calculation. Because Parent was the selling company, all of the $180 holdback was allocated to the parent and none was allocated to the non-controlling interest. On the December 31, Year 1, consolidated balance sheet, the elimination entries to adjust inventory and deferred income taxes would be the same as before. However, the non-controlling interest on the consolidated balance sheet is based on the December 31, Year 1, balances of the common shares and retained earnings of Sub. The after-tax inventory holdback is not allocated to non-controlling interest; because Parent was the selling company, it has been allocated entirely to consolidated retained earnings. Year 2 consolidated net income is calculated as follows: Net income—Parent Co. Add: After-tax profit in opening inventory Adjusted net income—Parent Co. Net income—Sub Inc. Consolidated net income

$4,050 180 4,230 3,100 $7,330


$7,020 310

Unrealized profits on downstream transactions are deducted from the parent’s separate-entity income.

Non-controlling interest is not affected by the elimination of unrealized profits on downstream transactions.

When unrealized profits on downstream transactions are realized, they are added to the parent’s separate-entity income.


312


304

CHAPTER 6


The elimination entries on the Year 2 consolidated income statement would be the same as in the previous illustration (see Exhibit 6.6), but because the amount for non-controlling interest is $310, the consolidated net income attributable to Parent’s shareholders is a higher amount, as indicated in the previous calculations. To summarize, the holdback and subsequent realization of intercompany profits in assets is allocated to the non-controlling and controlling equities only if the subsidiary was the original seller in the intercompany transaction. If the parent was the original seller, the allocation is entirely to the controlling equity.

Equity Method Journal Entries If Parent used the equity method to for its investment, it would make the following entries as at December 31, Year 1:

The parent absorbs the full charge for unrealized profits on downstream transactions in Year 1. The equity method is referred to as the one-line consolidation.

Investment in Sub Inc. 1,530 Investment income To record 90% of the reported Year 1, net income of Sub Inc. (90% 3 1,700) Investment income Investment in Sub Inc. To hold back the after-tax inventory profit recorded by Parent Co. in Year 1

1,530

180 180

An astute reader will notice that because the parent was the selling company, the second entry is removing the profit from s that did not contain it in the first place. This is, of course, quite true. However, it is the investment income that establishes the equality between Parent’s net income (under the equity method) and consolidated net income attributable to Parent’s shareholders. In the same manner, the investment in Sub on the balance sheet of Parent establishes the equality between Parent’s retained earnings (under the equity method) and consolidated retained earnings. This means that all adjustments that affect consolidated net income are reflected in these two s. Rather than preparing two separate entries, the following entry could be made to capture the overall impact of the two separate entries: Investment in Sub Inc. 1,350 Investment income To record investment income from Sub Inc. net of adjustment for unrealized profit in ending inventory (90% 3 1,700 2 100% 3 180)

1,350

On December 31, Year 2, Parent would make the following journal entries if it used the equity method: The parent receives the full benefit when unrealized profits on downstream transactions are realized in Year 2.

Investment in Sub Inc. Investment income To record 90% of the reported net income of Sub Inc. (90% 3 3,100)

2,790

Investment in Sub Inc. Investment income To release in Year 2 the after-tax inventory profit held back in Year 1

180

2,790

180

Alternatively, the following entry could be made to capture the overall impact of the two separate entries: Investment in Sub Inc. 2,970 Investment income 2,970 To record investment income from Sub Inc. net of adjustment for unrealized profit in ending inventory (90% 3 3,100 1 100% 3 180)


CHAPTER 6


Unrealized Profits with Associates When the investor only has significant influence in an associate, it cannot control the decisions made by the associate. As such, transactions with the associate are similar to transactions with outsiders. Therefore, the ing for unrealized profits on downstream transactions is a bit different for an investment in an associate. Rather than eliminating all of the profit, only the investor’s percentage ownership of the associate, times the profit earned on the transaction with the associate is eliminated. For example, if X Co. had a 40% interest in Y Co. and made a profit of $100 on a transaction with Y Co., only $40 (40% 3 100) of the profit would be eliminated as part of the entries under the equity method. The $100 of profit would be recorded in the sales and cost of sales , and the $40 would be eliminated through the investment . That leaves $60 of profit remaining in income. This $60 is deemed to be a transaction with outsiders. Self-Study Problem 6-1 illustrates the preparation of consolidated financial statements when there are intercompany sales of inventory. It also shows the ing for unrealized profits with an associate.

313

305

Only the investor’s share of profit on intercompany transactions with associates is eliminated.

Income Statement with Expenses Classified by Nature The previous illustrations in this chapter presented cost of goods sold as a separate line on the income statement. This would typically occur under two scenarios: 1. When expenses are classified according to their function and cost of goods sold represents the expenses of the production function. 2. When expenses are classified by nature and the reporting entity is a merchandising company; that is, it buys and sells finished goods. When a manufacturing company presents its expenses according to their nature, a cost-of-goods-sold line typically does not exist. Instead, raw materials consumed, labour costs, depreciation of factory equipment, and other conversion costs are shown separately. In addition, there is a separate line for changes in inventories of work in progress and finished goods. The adjustments on consolidation to eliminate the intercompany transactions and any unrealized profits are slightly different when expenses are classified according to their nature. If the intercompany transaction involves raw materials, all consolidation adjustments are put through the raw materials on the balance sheet and the raw materials consumed on the income statement. If the intercompany transaction involves work in progress or finished goods, the intercompany purchase is eliminated from the purchases of work in progress and finished goods on the income statement; the unrealized profits are eliminated from work in progress and finished goods inventory on the balance sheet, and from the changes in inventories of work in progress and finished goods on the income statement.

Losses on Intercompany Transactions When one d company sells inventory to another d company at a loss, the intercompany transaction and any unrealized losses should be eliminated on consolidation in a similar fashion to the previous discussion for unrealized profits. However, selling inventory at a loss raises a red flag that it may be impaired. If the inventory is impaired, it should be written down to its net realizable value. Ideally, the impairment should be reported on the separate-entity statements. If not, the impairment will have to be reported on the consolidated statements. The following example illustrates these issues.

Consolidation adjustments for unrealized profits in inventory will likely be made to the changes in inventory rather than cost of goods sold.


314


306

CHAPTER 6


Impairment tests for inventory are usually performed at the end of the fiscal period.

Sub has inventory with an original cost of $5,500 and a net realizable value of $4,800. If Sub were to value its inventory at net realizable value at this point, it would recognize a loss of $700. In Year 1, Sub sells this inventory to Parent for $5,000. It had not written down the inventory to its net realizable value prior to the sale to Parent. Before the end of Year 1, Parent sells 80% of these goods to outsiders for $3,840, which equals their net realizable value. It has the remaining inventory purchased from Sub on its books at $1,000 at the end of Year 1. The net realizable value of this inventory is $960, which is the same net realizable value prior to the sale by Sub. Based solely on the above information, selected s from the financial statements for Parent and Sub for Year 1 are as follows: Parent Inventory on balance sheet

$1,000

Sales Cost of sales Gross profit

3,840 4,000 $2160

Sub $5,000 5,500 $2500

The following adjustments would normally be made on consolidation: When intercompany losses are eliminated, the inventory is brought back to the original cost to the selling entity.

(a) Sales and cost of goods sold should be reduced by $5,000, being the amount of the intercompany sale. (b) Unrealized loss in ending inventory of $100 (500/5,000 3 1,000) should be eliminated. The consolidated financial statements show the following amounts for the selected s: Inventory on balance sheet (1,000 1 0 1 [b] 100)

$1,100

Sales (3,840 1 5,000 2 [a] 5,000) Cost of sales (4,000 1 5,500 2 [a] 5,000 2 [b] 100) Gross profit

3,840 4,400 $2560

By eliminating the unrealized loss and not making any adjustment for impairment of the inventory, the inventory is measured at $1,100, which is 20% of the original cost to Sub. This is consistent with the historical cost principle. However, this inventory is stated above its net realizable value of $960. It should be written down from $1,100 to $960, a write-down of $140. If the write-down were made as adjustment (c) on consolidation, the consolidated financial statements would show the following amounts for the selected s: Inventory on the consolidated balance sheet should be reported at the lower of cost and net realizable value.

Inventory on balance sheet (1,000 1 0 1  [b] 100 2 [c] 140)

$ 960

Sales (3,840 1 5,000 2 [a] 5,000) Cost of sales (4,000 1 5,500 2 [a] 5,000 2 [b] 100) Gross profit Loss in value of inventory (0 1 0 1 [c] 140) Profit before tax on the above items

3,840 4,400 $2560 2140 $2700

Now the consolidated balance sheet reports inventory at the lower of cost and net realizable value, and the consolidated income statement reports a loss of $700, being the total impairment loss on the inventory. This more faithfully represents the situation for the consolidated entity. It may appear strange to adjust the inventory upward by $100 in (b), and then to adjust it downward by $140 in (c). The same result could have been achieved


315


CHAPTER 6


by not eliminating the unrealized loss in (b) and then writing down the inventory from $1,000 to $960 for a $40 adjustment in (c). For this reason, some people believe that unrealized losses should not be eliminated on consolidation, but the losses should be a warning sign for potential impairment. If the subsidiary had not sold any of the inventory to the parent or to outsiders, it should have tested the inventory for impairment at the end of Year 1. In so doing, it would have determined that inventory was impaired and that an impairment loss of $700 would need to be reported. In some cases, the exchange price on intercompany transactions between the parent and the subsidiary does not reflect the true value of the inventory. Even though the net realizable value of the inventory in the above example was $4,800, the subsidiary could have sold the inventory to the parent for $4,000. If so, the inventory would be reported by the parent at less than net realizable value on its separate-entity balance sheet. If the unrealized loss is not eliminated, the inventory and net income of the consolidated entity will be understated. For this reason, IFRSs suggest that the intercompany loss be eliminated on consolidation. Then, the reporting entity should perform an impairment test to determine if the inventory is impaired from the perspective of the consolidated entity.

307

Intercompany transactions are not always consummated at market value.

Intercompany Land Profit Holdback The holdback and realization of an intercompany profit in land is accomplished in a more straightforward manner on the consolidated income statement. Suppose that in Year 1 there was an intercompany sale of land for $2,300 on which a before-tax profit of $300 was recorded, that $120 tax was accrued, and that on December 31, Year 1, the land was still held by the purchasing company. (Throughout the text and endof-chapter material, we assume that these gains are not capital gains.) The selling company would make the following entry to record the intercompany transaction: Cash Land Gain on sale of land

2,300 2,000 300

The purchasing company would record the intercompany transaction as follows: Land Cash

2,300 2,300

When consolidated financial statements are prepared, the profit elimination and the related income tax adjustment will take place as follows: PARENT COMPANY CONSOLIDATED INCOME STATEMENT Year 1 Gain on sale of land (300 2 300) Income tax expense (P 1 S 2 120) Net income

Attributable to Shareholders of parent Non-controlling interest

$

0 XXX $XXX

$XXX XXX

It should be obvious that the holdback of the gain, along with the reduction of the income tax expense, has reduced the consolidated entity’s net income by $180.

The purchasing company’s cost is $300 higher than the selling company’s cost.


316


308

CHAPTER 6


The after-tax profit is deducted from the selling company’s separate-entity income.

If the subsidiary is the selling company, the $180 after-tax profit held back will be used to calculate non-controlling interest in the consolidated income statement; in this manner, it will be allocated to the two equities. If the parent is the selling company, non-controlling interest will not be affected and the entire after-tax holdback will be allocated to the controlling entity. The following shows the eliminations required in the preparation of the assets section of the Year 1 balance sheet: PARENT COMPANY CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET December 31, Year 1

After eliminating the profit, the land is stated at the original cost to the consolidated entity.

Land (2,300 2 300) Deferred income taxes (P 1 S 1 120) Total assets

$2,000 120 $ XXX

The balance sheet eliminations for a land profit are very similar to those for an inventory profit. The before-tax profit is deducted from land rather than from inventory. The tax asset is added into the consolidated balance sheet. We will refer to this tax asset as deferred income taxes. The equity side of the balance sheet is not presented. If the subsidiary is the selling company, the calculation of non-controlling interest on December 31, Year 1, will have to reflect this fact. If the parent is the selling company, the entire $180 after-tax profit holdback is attributed to the parent company’s shareholders and is reflected in the retained earnings shown on the balance sheet.

Realization of Intercompany Land Profits

The unrealized profits will be eliminated from retained earnings of the selling company on the consolidated working papers each year until the land is sold to outsiders.

The gain on the separateentity income statement is $1,300.

An unrealized intercompany inventory profit held back for consolidation purposes in Year 1 is considered realized in Year 2 because any inventory on hand at the beginning of a year has usually been sold by the end of that year. When are intercompany land profits considered realized for consolidation purposes? The answer is this: when the land is sold to outsiders, which may be many years later. At the end of each successive year prior to the sale to outsiders, the preparation of the consolidated balance sheet requires the same adjustments as those of Year 1. Consolidated income statements require no adjustment until the year of the sale to outsiders because in each year prior to that event, the income statements of both s will not contain any transactions with regard to the land. However, assuming that Parent Company uses the cost method, the calculation of beginning consolidated retained earnings each year will have to include an adjustment to hold back the $180 unrealized land profit. The calculation would be identical to that shown in Exhibit 6.5, except that it would be described as land profit rather than profit in opening inventory. (This particular calculation is based on the assumption that Sub Inc. was the selling company.) Each successive year would require the same adjustment, until the land is sold to outsiders. In this case, let us assume that the land was sold to outsiders during Year 8 at a profit of $1,300. The company making the sale in Year 8 would record the following journal entry: Cash Land Gain on sale of land

3,600 2,300 1,300


317


CHAPTER 6


309

While the selling company recorded a gain of $1,300, the gain to the entity is $1,600 (1,300 1 300). On the Year 8 consolidated income statement, the gain held back in Year 1 is realized and the income tax expense is adjusted as follows: PARENT COMPANY CONSOLIDATED INCOME STATEMENT Year 8 Gain on sale of land (1,300 1 300) Income tax expense (P 1 S 1 120) Net income

$1,600 XXX $ XXX

Attributable to Shareholders of parent Non-controlling interest

$ XXX XXX

The gain on the consolidated income statement is $1,600 (1,300 1 300 previously held back).

The entity’s consolidated net income is increased by $180 (300 2 120). If the subsidiary was the original selling company, the net income of the non-controlling interest is affected in Year 8; the entire $180 is attributed to the controlling interest if the parent was the original seller. Appendix 6A of this chapter illustrates the consolidation adjustments relating to an intercompany sale of land when the parent company uses the revaluation model under IAS 16 and periodically revalues its land to fair value.

Equity Method Journal Entries Parent Co.’s equity journal entries for the land gain in Years 1 and 8 would be identical to the entries illustrated previously for inventory in Years 1 and 2, depending of course on which company was the original seller in the intercompany profit transaction. The examples in this chapter regarding the elimination of unrealized intercompany profits follow the dictates of entity theory, which requires the same ing treatment for measuring the controlling and non-controlling shareholders’ interest in the subsidiary. Entity theory is also required when measuring the subsidiary’s assets and liabilities at fair value at the date of acquisition, as we learned in Chapter 4. Therefore, the standard-setters are consistent in requiring the use of entity theory in many different aspects of preparing consolidated financial statements. See Self-Study Problem 6-2 for a comprehensive problem that includes acquisition differential and intercompany sales of inventory and land.

The equity method reports only the investor’s share of the subsidiary’s profit that has been realized from a consolidated viewpoint.

Intercompany Transfer Pricing In our coin example at the beginning of this chapter, we saw a loonie sold for a gross profit of $40, which was allocated to the four related companies as follows: Parent Sub 1 Sub 2 Sub 3 Total

$ 9 5 10 16 $40

From a financial reporting point of view, we are not concerned with the amount of profit earned by each company, but only with eliminating intercompany transactions and profits that are unrealized because they have not been sold outside the consolidated “single entity.” From a Canadian taxation point of view,

Intercompany transactions are sometimes undertaken to transfer profit from high-tax to low-tax jurisdictions.


318


310

CHAPTER 6


the consolidated entity is not subject to tax; rather each company pays tax on its taxable income. It should seem obvious that the management of the parent company would be interested in maximizing the after-tax profit of this single entity, if possible. If all of the companies are in one taxation jurisdiction, there is nothing that management can do to increase the after-tax profit. However, if some of the companies are in jurisdictions with low rates of corporate income tax while others are in high-tax-rate jurisdictions, management may try to structure each company’s transfer price so that the majority (or all) of the $40 profit is earned in low-tax-rate jurisdictions. This will often bring companies into conflict with the governments of the high-tax-rate jurisdictions. Companies always disclose that all significant intercompany transactions and balances have been eliminated.

LO6 The parent’s separate-entity income statement reports the parent’s revenues and expenses, whereas the consolidated income statement reports the combined revenues and expenses of the parent and its subsidiaries.

The parent’s separateentity balance sheet reports the parent’s assets and liabilities, whereas the consolidated balance sheet reports the combined assets and liabilities of the parent and its subsidiaries.

Disclosure Requirements The disclosure requirements for consolidated financial statements were summarized in Chapters 3 and 4. In addition to those requirements, the entity would normally indicate that intercompany transactions have been eliminated. The excerpt in Exhibit 6.7 above is taken from the 2011 financial statements of Eastern Platinum Limited, Canada’s leading platinum group metals producer.

ANALYSIS AND INTERPRETATION OF FINANCIAL STATEMENTS In this chapter, we prepared consolidated financial statements under two scenarios: first, for upstream transactions and, second, for downstream transactions. In both cases, the unrealized profits from the intercompany transactions had to be eliminated. The elimination entries were made on the consolidated financial statements. The net effect of the consolidation adjustments was captured in the parent’s internal records when the parent used the equity method. Exhibit 6.8 presents the Year 1 separate entity and consolidated financial statements that were developed for the intercompany transactions involving inventory. The first three columns present the statements when the intercompany transactions were upstream. In the last three columns, the intercompany transactions were downstream. The exhibit also indicates the debt-to-equity and return-on-equity ratios for each set of financial statements. The return on equity for all shareholders uses consolidated net income and total shareholders’ equity including the non-controlling interests. The return on equity for shareholders of Parent uses consolidated net income attributable to the shareholders of Parent and total shareholders’ equity excluding the non-controlling interests.

EXHIBIT 6.7 Extracts from Eastern Platinum’s 2011 Financial Statements (a) Basis of consolidation These consolidated financial statements incorporate the financial statements of the Company and the entities controlled by the Company (its subsidiaries, including special purpose entities). Control exists when the Company has the power, directly or indirectly, to govern the financial and operating policies of an entity so as to obtain benefits from its activities. The financial statements of subsidiaries are included in the consolidated financial statements from the date that control commences until the date that control ceases. All significant intercompany transactions and balances have been eliminated. Source: Reproduced with permission from Eastern Platinum Limited http://eastplats.com/


319


CHAPTER 6

EXHIBIT 6.8

311


Impact of Presentation Method on Debt-to-Equity and Return-on-Equity Ratios INCOME STATEMENTS—December 31, Year 1 Upstream Transaction

Sales Investment income Total income Cost of sales Miscellaneous expenses Income tax expense

Net income

Downstream Transaction

Parent Cost

Parent Equity

Consol.

Parent Cost

Parent Equity

Consol.

$20,000 0 20,000 13,000 1,400 2,200 16,600 $ 3,400

$20,000 1,368 21,368 13,000 1,400 2,200 16,600 $ 4,768

$23,000 0 23,000 12,600 2,300 3,180 18,080 $ 4,920

$20,000 0 20,000 13,000 1,400 2,200 16,600 $ 3,400

$20,000 1,350 21,350 13,000 1,400 2,200 16,600 $ 4,750

$23,000 0 23,000 12,600 2,300 3,180 18,080 $ 4,920

Attributable to Shareholders of Parent Non-controlling interests

$ 4,768 152

$ 4,750 170

BALANCE SHEETS—December 31, Year 1 Inventory Assets (miscellaneous) Deferred income tax Investment in Sub Inc.

Liabilities Common shares Retained earnings Non-controlling interests

Debt-to-equity Return on equity 2 for all shareholders 2 for shareholders of Parent

$ 7,500 21,650

$ 7,500 21,650

$ 7,500 21,650

$ 7,500 21,650

12,618 $41,768

$11,200 40,850 120 0 $52,170

11,250 $40,400

12,600 $41,750

$11,200 40,850 120 0 $52,170

11,250 $40,400 $12,000 15,000 13,400 0 $40,400

$12,000 15,000 14,768 0 $41,768

$21,000 15,000 14,768 1,402 $52,170

$12,000 15,000 13,400 0 $40,400

$12,000 15,000 14,750 0 $41,750

$21,000 15,000 14,750 1,420 $52,170

0.42

0.40

0.67

0.42

0.40

0.67

n/a 11.97%

n/a 16.02%

15.78% 16.02%

n/a 11.97%

n/a 15.97%

15.78% 15.97%

Note the following from Exhibit 6.8: • The separate-entity statements under the cost method are the same for upstream and downstream transactions because the cost method does not record anything pertaining to the subsidiary’s income or unrealized profits from intercompany transactions. • The separate-entity statements under the cost method are the same as the statements under the equity method except for the investment , retained earnings, and investment income. • Consolidated net income is the same regardless of whether the transactions were upstream or downstream. However, the split of the consolidated net income between the shareholders of the parent and the non-controlling interest is different. In turn, consolidated retained earnings and non-controlling interests are different, depending on whether the transactions were upstream or downstream. The separate-entity net income and retained earnings under

The return on equity for the separate-entity statements under the equity method is equal to the consolidated return on equity for the shareholders of Parent.


320


312

CHAPTER 6


the equity method are equal to consolidated net income attributable to the shareholders of Parent and consolidated retained earnings, respectively. The return on equity for shareholders of Parent for the downstream scenario is lower than the upstream scenario because the shareholders of Parent absorb the full charge when the unrealized profits are eliminated.

• The return on equity for the separate-entity statements under the equity method is equal to the consolidated return on equity for the shareholders of Parent. • The return on equity for the downstream scenario is lower than the upstream scenario because the shareholders of Parent absorb the full charge when the unrealized profits are eliminated. • The solvency position looks worst on the consolidated financial statements, because the subsidiary’s debt is included on the consolidated financial statements. This increases the debt-to-equity ratio.

ASPE Differences LO7

1. As mentioned in Chapter 3, private companies can either consolidate their subsidiaries or report their investments in subsidiaries under the cost method, under the equity method, or at fair value. 2. When eliminating unrealized profits on downstream transactions between an investor and its associate, the entire profit is eliminated under ASPE, whereas only the investor’s proportionate interest is eliminated under IFRSs.

U.S. GAAP Differences U.S. GAAP and IFRSs for intercompany transactions have many similarities. The significant differences are summarized as follows: 1. Whereas IFRSs do not allow the use of LIFO for reporting inventory, LIFO is allowed under U.S. GAAP. 2. Whereas IFRSs require the use of net realizable value to determine whether inventory is impaired, U.S. GAAP uses either net realizable value, replacement cost, or net realizable value less normal gross margin.

summary To ensure that consolidated financial statements reflect only transactions between the single entity and those outside the entity, all intercompany transactions are eliminated. The elimination of intercompany revenues and expenses does not affect the net income of this entity; therefore, it cannot affect the amounts allocated to the two equities in the balance sheet. Intercompany profits in assets are not recognized in the consolidated financial statements until the assets have been sold outside the group or consumed. (The concept of realization as a result of consumption is discussed in the next chapter.) The elimination of unrealized intercompany profits in assets reduces the net income of the consolidated entity. It will affect the amount allocated to non-controlling interest only if the subsidiary was the selling company. The income tax recorded on the unrealized profit is also removed from the consolidated income statement and is shown as a deferred income tax asset or liability until a sale to outsiders takes place.


321


CHAPTER 6


313

When the assets that contain the intercompany profit are sold outside (or consumed), the profit is considered realized and is reflected in the consolidated income statement. The appropriate income tax is removed from the consolidated balance sheet and reflected as an expense in the income statement. The adjustments for income tax ensure that income tax expense is properly matched to income recognized on the consolidated income statement.

Significant Changes in GAAP in the Last Three Years No major changes occurred in the last three years for the topics presented in this chapter.

Changes Expected in GAAP in the Next Three Years No major changes are expected in the next three years for the topics presented in this chapter.

S ELF- STUDY PROBLEM 1 LO2, 3, 5

On December 31, Year 5, the EL Company purchased 70% of the outstanding common shares of the BOW Company for $5.6 million in cash when BOW’s shareholders’ equity consisted of $2,000,000 of common shares and $6,000,000 of retained earnings. There was no acquisition differential. For the year ending December 31, Year 10, the income statements for EL and BOW were as follows: Sales and other income Cost of goods sold Depreciation expense Income tax and other expenses Total expenses Net income

EL

BOW

$28,800,000 18,000,000 3,400,000 4,200,000 25,600,000 $ 3,200,000

$13,000,000 8,200,000 1,800,000 1,600,000 11,600,000 $ 1,400,000

At December 31, Year 10, the condensed balance sheets for the two companies were as follows: EL

BOW

Current assets Investment in BOW Other noncurrent assets Total assets

$15,000,000 5,600,000 23,000,000 $43,600,000

$8,800,000 17,400,000 $26,200,000

Liabilities Common shares Retained earnings Total

$26,400,000 4,000,000 13,200,000 $43,600,000

$13,800,000 2,000,000 10,400,000 $26,200,000

OTHER INFORMATION: 1. During Year 10, EL sold merchandise to BOW for $600,000. Seventy-five percent of this merchandise remains in BOW’s inventory at December 31, Year 10. On December 31, Year 9, the inventory of BOW contained $100,000 of merchandise purchased from EL. EL earns a gross margin of 30% on its intercompany sales.


322


314

CHAPTER 6


2. On January 2, Year 8, BOW sold land to EL for $1,200,000. BOW purchased the land on January 1, Year 6, for $1,100,000. EL still owns this land at December 31, Year 10. 3. During Year 10, EL declared and paid dividends of $2,600,000, while BOW declared and paid dividends of $800,000. 4. EL s for its investment in BOW using the cost method. 5. Both companies pay income tax at the rate of 40%.

Required: (a) Prepare a consolidated income statement for the year ended December 31, Year 10. Show ing calculations. (b) Calculate consolidated retained earnings at December 31, Year 10. Show ing calculations. (c) Assume that BOW is a subsidiary and EL is a private entity. EL uses ASPE and chooses to use the equity method to for its investment in BOW. Prepare EL’s separate entity balance sheet at December 31, Year 10. (d) Assume that BOW is an associate rather than a subsidiary and that EL uses IFRSs. Calculate the balance in the investment in BOW under the equity method at December 31, Year 10.

SOLUTION

TO

SELF-S TUDY P ROBLEM 1 (a)

ing Schedules Intercompany transactions $600,000 (a) 560,000 (b)

Intercompany sales and cost of goods sold Intercompany dividend (800,000 3 70%) Intercompany inventory profits—EL selling Beginning inventory (100,000 3 30%) Ending inventory (600,000 3 75% 3 30%) Gain on sale of land in Year 6 (1,200,000 2 1,100,000)

Before tax

40% tax

After tax

$30,000 135,000 100,000

$12,000 54,000 40,000

$18,000 81,000 60,000

(c) (d) (e)

EL COMPANY Consolidated Statement of Income for Year Ended December 31, Year 10 Sales and other income [28,800,000 1 13,000,000 2 (a) 600,000 2 (b) 560,000] Cost of goods sold [18,000,000 1 8,200,000 2  (a) 600,000 2 (c) 30,000 1 (d) 135,000] Depreciation expense [3,400,000 1 1,800,000] Income tax and other expenses [4,200,000 1 1,600,000 1 (c) 12,000 2 (d) 54,000] Total expenses Net income Attributable to Shareholders of EL (3,200,000 2 (b) 560,000 1 (c) 18,000 2 (d) 81,000 1 70% 3 1,400,000) Non-controlling interests (30% 3 1,400,000)

$ 40,640,000 25,705,000 5,200,000 5,758,000 36,663,000 $ 3,977,000

$ 3,557,000 420,000


CHAPTER 6

(b)


EL’s retained earnings, Dec. 31, Year 10 Unrealized profit in ending inventory—net of tax (d) BOW’s retained earnings, Dec. 31, Year 10 BOW’s retained earnings, at acquisition Change in retained earnings since acquisition Gain on sale of land (e)

315

$ 13,200,000 (81,000) 10,400,000 6,000,000 4,400,000 (60,000) 4,340,000

EL’s share @ 70% Consolidated retained earnings, Dec. 31, Year 10

(c)

323

3,038,000 $ 16,157,000

ing Schedules Investment in BOW, cost method Unrealized profit in ending inventory—net of tax (d) BOW’s retained earnings, Dec. 31, Year 10 BOW’s retained earnings, at acquisition Change in retained earnings since acquisition Gain on sale of land

$ 5,600,000 (81,000) $ 10,400,000 6,000,000 4,400,000 (60,000) 4,340,000

EL’s share @ 70% Investment in BOW, equity method

3,038,000 $ 8,557,000

OR Consolidated retained earnings, Dec. 31, Year 10 EL’s retained earnings, cost method, Dec. 31, Year 10 Change from cost to consolidation Investment in BOW, cost method Investment in BOW, equity method

$ 16,157,000 13,200,000 2,957,000 5,600,000 $ 8,557,000

EL COMPANY Balance Sheet December 31, Year 10

(d)

Current assets Investment in BOW Other noncurrent assets Total assets

$ 15,000,000 8,557,000 23,000,000 $ 46,557,000

Liabilities Common shares Retained earnings (same as consolidation) Total

$ 26,400,000 4,000,000 16,157,000 $ 46,557,000

For a downstream transaction with an associate, only the investor’s share of the profit in ending inventory is considered unrealized. Investment in BOW, cost method Unrealized profit in ending inventory—net of tax (81,000 3 70%) BOW’s retained earnings, Dec. 31, Year 10 BOW’s retained earnings, at acquisition Change in retained earnings since acquisition Gain on sale of land (e) EL’s share @ 70% Investment in BOW, equity method

$ 5,600,000 (56,700) 10,400,000 6,000,000 4,400,000 (60,000) 4,340,000 3,038,000 $ 8,581,300


324


316

CHAPTER 6


SELF- S TUDY PROBLEM 2 LO1, 2, 4, 5

The following are the Year 5 financial statements of Peter Corporation and its subsidiary, Salt Company: Peter

Salt

$900,000 25,000 — — 12,000 937,000 540,000 3,600 196,400 80,000 820,000 $117,000

$250,000 — 3,600 20,000 — 273,600 162,000 — 71,600 16,000 249,600 $ 24,000

$153,000 117,000 270,000 50,000 $220,000

$ 72,000 24,000 96,000 15,000 $ 81,000

Land Plant and equipment, net Investment in Salt Co. Inventory Notes receivable s receivable Cash

$175,000 238,000 65,000 32,000 — 70,000 12,000 $592,000

$ 19,000 47,000 — 27,000 60,000 10,000 8,000 $171,000

Ordinary shares Retained earnings Notes payable Other liabilities

$100,000 220,000 60,000 212,000 $592,000

$ 50,000 81,000 — 40,000 $171,000

Year 5 Income Statements Sales Management fees Interest Gain on land sale Dividends Cost of sales Interest expense Other expenses Income tax expense Profit

Year 5 Statements of Retained Earnings Balance, January 1 Profit Dividends Balance, December 31

Statements of Financial Position—December 31, Year 5

Additional Information • On January 1, Year 3, Peter purchased 80% of the ordinary shares of Salt for $65,000. On that date, Salt had retained earnings of $10,000, and the carrying amounts of its identifiable net assets were equal to fair values. • The companies sell merchandise to each other. Peter sells to Salt at a gross profit rate of 35%; Salt earns a gross profit of 40% from its sales to Peter. • The December 31, Year 4, inventory of Peter contained purchases made from Salt amounting to $7,000. There were no intercompany purchases in the inventory of Salt on this date.


CHAPTER 6


325

317

• During Year 5, the following intercompany transactions took place: (a) Salt made a $25,000 payment to Peter for management fees, which was recorded as “other expense.” (b) Salt made sales of $75,000 to Peter. The December 31, Year 5, inventory of Peter contained merchandise purchased from Salt amounting to $16,500. (c) Peter made sales of $100,000 to Salt. The December 31, Year 5, inventory of Salt contained merchandise purchased from Peter amounting to $15,000. (d) On July 1, Year 5, Peter borrowed $60,000 from Salt and signed a note bearing interest at 12% per annum. Interest on this note was paid on December 31, Year 5. (e) In Year 5, Salt sold land to Peter, recording a gain of $20,000. This land is being held by Peter on December 31, Year 5. • Goodwill impairment tests have been conducted yearly since the date of acquisition. Losses due to impairment were as follows: Year 3, $2,600; Year 4, $800; Year 5, $1,700. • Peter s for its investment using the cost method. • Both companies pay income tax at a rate of 40%.

Required: (a) Prepare the Year 5 consolidated financial statements. (b) Prepare the following: (i) A calculation of consolidated retained earnings as at December 31, Year 5 (ii) A calculation of non-controlling interest at December 31, Year 5 (iii) A statement of changes in deferred income taxes for Year 5 (c) Assume that Peter changes from the cost method to the equity method for its internal records. (i) Calculate the balance in the investment under the equity method as at December 31, Year 4. (ii) Prepare Peter’s equity method journal entries for Year 5.

SOLUTION

TO


ing Schedules CALCULATION AND IMPAIRMENT OF THE ACQUISITION DIFFERENTIAL Cost of 80% of Salt, Jan. 1, Year 3 Implied value of 100% of Salt Carrying amount of Salt, Jan. 1, Year 3 Ordinary shares Retained earnings Acquisition differential Allocated to revalue the net assets of Salt Goodwill, Jan. 1, Year 3 Impairment losses Year 3—Year 4 Year 5 Goodwill, Dec. 31, Year 5 Non-controlling interest at date of acquisition (20% 3 81,250)

$65,000 $81,250 50,000 10,000 60,000 21,250 0 21,250 3,400 1,700

(a) (b)

5,100 $16,150 $16,250

(c) (d)


326


318

CHAPTER 6


INTERCOMPANY ITEMS Notes receivable and payable

$ 60,000 (e)

Management fee revenue and expense

$ 25,000 (f)

Sales and purchases (100,000 1 75,000)

$175,000 (g)

Interest revenue and expense (12% 3 60,000 3 ½ year)

$

Dividend from Salt (80% 3 15,000)

$ 12,000 (i)

3,600 (h)

UNREALIZED PROFITS Inventory Opening (7,000 3 40%)—Salt selling Ending Salt selling (16,500 3 40%) Peter selling (15,000 3 35%)

Land—Salt selling

Before tax

40% tax

$ 2,800

$1,120

$

1,680 (j)

$ 6,600 5,250 $11,850

$2,640 2,100 $4,740

$ $

3,960 (k) 3,150 (l) 7,110 (m)

$20,000

$8,000

$ 12,000 (n)

After tax

CALCULATION OF CONSOLIDATED PROFIT—Year 5 Profit of Peter Less: Dividends from Salt (i) Ending inventory profit (l) Adjusted profit Profit of Salt Less: Ending inventory profit (k) Land gain (n) Impairment of acquisition differential (b) Add: Opening inventory profit (j) Adjusted profit Profit

$117,000 12,000 3,150

15,150 101,850

24,000 3,960 12,000 1,700

17,660 6,340 1,680 8,020 $109,870


$108,266 (o) 1,604 (p)

CALCULATION OF CONSOLIDATED RETAINED EARNINGS January 1, Year 5 Retained earnings—Peter Retained earnings—Salt Acquisition retained earnings Increase Less: Opening inventory profit (j) Less: Acquisition-differential impairment Year 3—Year 4 (a) Adjusted increase Peter’s share Consolidated retained earnings, Jan. 1, Year 5

$153,000 72,000 10,000 62,000 1,680 3,400 56,920 80%

45,536

(q)

$198,536

(r)

CALCULATION OF DEFERRED INCOME TAXES—December 31, Year 5 Ending inventory (m) Land (n)

$ 4,740 8,000 $12,740

(s)


327


CHAPTER 6

319


CALCULATION OF NON-CONTROLLING INTEREST—December 31, Year 5 Ordinary shares—Salt Retained earnings—Salt Add: Unamortized acquisition differential (c) Less: Ending inventory profit (k) Land gain (n) Adjusted Non-controlling interest’s share

$50,000 81,000 131,000 16,150 3,960 12,000

(15,960) 131,190 20% $26,238

(t)

PETER CORPORATION CONSOLIDATED INCOME STATEMENT—Year 5 Sales (900,000 1 250,000 2 [g] 175,000) Management fees (25,000 1 0 2 [f] 25,000) Interest (0 1 3,600 2 [h] 3,600) Gain on land sale (0 1 20,000 2 [n] 20,000) Dividends (12,000 1 0 2 [i] 12,000) Cost of sales (540,000 1 162,000 2 [g] 175,000 2 [j] 2,800 1 [m] 11,850) Interest expense (3,600 1 0 2 [h] 3,600) Other expenses (196,400 1 71,600 1 [b] 1,700 2 [f] 25,000) Income tax (80,000 1 16,000 2 [n] 8,000 1 [j] 1,120 2 [m] 4,740) Total expense Net income

$975,000 0 0 0 0 536,050 0 244,700 84,380 865,130 $109,870

Attributable to Shareholders of parent (o) Non-controlling interest (p)

$108,266 1,604

PETER CORPORATION CONSOLIDATED RETAINED EARNINGS STATEMENT—Year 5 Balance, January 1 (r) Profit Dividends Balance, Dec. 31

$198,536 108,266 306,802 50,000 $256,802

PETER CORPORATION CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION —December 31, Year 5 Land (175,000 1 19,000 2 [n] 20,000) Plant and equipment, net (238,000 1 47,000) Goodwill (c) Deferred income taxes (s) Inventory (32,000 1 27,000 2 [m] 11,850) s receivable (70,000 1 10,000) Cash (12,000 1 8,000)

$174,000 285,000 16,150 12,740 47,150 80,000 20,000 $635,040

Ordinary shares Retained earnings Non-controlling interest (t) Other liabilities (212,000 1 40,000)

$100,000 256,802 26,238 252,000 $635,040


328


320

CHAPTER 6


(b) (i)

CALCULATION OF CONSOLIDATED RETAINED EARNINGS —December 31, Year 5 Retained earnings, Dec. 31, Year 5—Peter Less: Ending inventory profit (l) Adjusted Retained earnings, Dec. 31, Year 5—Salt Acquisition retained earnings Increase Less: Acquisition-differential impairment (a) 1 (b) Ending inventory profit (k) Land gain (n) Adjusted increase Peter’s share Consolidated retained earnings, December 31, Year 5

(ii)

$220,000 3,150 216,850 81,000 10,000 71,000 5,100 3,960 12,000

21,060 49,940 80%

(u) 39,952 $256,802

CALCULATION OF NON-CONTROLLING INTEREST—Dec. 31 Year 5 Non-controlling interest at date of acquisition (d) Increase is Company S retained earnings, since acquisition net of consolidation adjustments (u) Non-controlling interest’s ownership

$16,250 49,940 20%

NCI, end of Year 2

(iii)

CHANGES IN DEFERRED INCOME TAXES—Year 5 Balance, Jan. 1, Year 5 (inventory) (j) Taxes paid in Year 5 but deferred Inventory (m) Land (n)

$ 1,120 4,740 8,000

Expensed Year 5 (j) Balance, Dec. 31, Year 5

(c) (i)

Investment in Salt, Dec. 31, Year 4 (cost method) Retained earnings, Dec. 31, Year 4—Salt Acquisition retained earnings Increase Less: Inventory profit (j) Amort. of acquisition differential (a) Adjusted increase Peter’s share

12,740 13,860 1,120 $12,740 $ 65,000

72,000 10,000 62,000 1,680 3,400

5,080 56,920 80%

45,536 $110,536

Investment in Salt, Dec. 31, Year 4 (equity method)

(ii)

9,988 $26,238

EQUITY METHOD JOURNAL ENTRIES—Year 5 (See Calculation of Consolidated Profit) Investment in Salt Co. Investment income 80% of adjusted profit of Salt Co. (80% 3 8,020) Cash Investment in Salt Co. Dividends from Salt Co. (i) Investment income Investment in Salt Co. Ending inventory profit—Peter selling (l)

6,416 6,416 12,000 12,000 3,150 3,150


329


APPENDIX 6A Reporting Land under Revaluation Model IAS 16: Property, Plant and Equipment allows a reporting entity the option to periodically revalue its property, plant, and equipment to fair value. Any increase in the fair value of the asset over the carrying amount without the revaluation is reported in other comprehensive income. Any decrease in the fair value below the carrying amount without the revaluation is an impairment loss and is reported in net income. The reversal of an impairment loss is also reported in net income. Any balance in accumulated other comprehensive income relating to the revaluation surplus is transferred directly to retained earnings, either when the asset is sold or as the asset is being depreciated over its useful life. In the example found in the sections “Intercompany Land Profit Holdback” and “Realization of Intercompany Land Profits” earlier in this chapter, the companies used the cost model to for land. We will use the same figures from that example to illustrate the ing when the companies periodically revalue land to fair value under the revaluation model. At the end of Year 0, selected balances from the separate-entity balance sheet for the company holding the land were as follows: Land at cost Fair value excess for land Deferred income tax liability (40% 3 250) Accumulated revaluation surplus, net of tax (250 2 100)

$2,000 250 100 150

An entity can report its property, plant, and equipment at fair value on an annual basis.

The fair value excess for land is a contra 2 to the land . When added to the land , land will be reported at fair value. The accumulated revaluation surplus is reported separately as a component of shareholders’ equity. It is also referred to as accumulated other comprehensive income. The selling company would make the following entries pertaining to the sale of the land in Year 1: Cash Land Fair value excess for land Gain on sale of land To record sale of land Accumulated revaluation surplus Retained earnings To transfer revaluation surplus to retained earnings on sale of land

2,300 2,000 250 50 150

Income tax expense 20 Deferred income tax liability 100 Income tax payable To record tax on sale and transfer deferred income tax liability to current income taxes payable

150

The revaluation surplus is transferred to retained earnings when the property is sold.

120

321


330


322

CHAPTER 6


Assuming that the fair value of the land is $2,325 at the end of Year 1, the purchasing company would make the following entries pertaining to the land in Year 1: Land Cash To record purchase of land

The revaluation surplus is reported through other comprehensive income on an after-tax basis.

2,300 2,300

Fair value excess for land Other comprehensive income—revaluation surplus for land To revalue land to fair value

25

Other comprehensive income—income tax on revaluation surplus for land Deferred income tax liability To record income tax on revaluation surplus

10

25

10

The following summarizes what would be reported on the separate-entity statements and what should be reported on the consolidated statements for Year 1: Selling Co. The consolidated statements should report amounts that would have existed had the intercompany transaction not occurred.

Land Fair value excess for land Income tax payable Deferred income tax liability Accumulated revaluation surplus Gain on sale of land Income tax expense Other comprehensive income—revaluation surplus for land, net of tax (2,325 2 2,250) 3 (1 2 40%)

Buying Co.

Consolidated

$2,300 25

$2,000 325

10 15

130 195

$120

50 20 15 45

The consolidated statements present what would have been reported on the selling company’s statements had the intercompany transaction not taken place.


LO1, 2

LO1

LO4

1. In what way are an individual’s pants with four pockets similar to a parent company with three subsidiaries? Explain, with reference to intercompany revenues and expenses. 2. List the types of intercompany revenue and expenses that are eliminated in the preparation of a consolidated income statement, and indicate the effect that each elimination has on the amount of net income attributable to noncontrolling interest. 3. “From a consolidated-entity point of view, intercompany revenue and expenses and intercompany borrowings do nothing more than transfer cash from one bank to another.” Explain. 4. If an intercompany profit is recorded on the sale of an asset to an within the consolidated entity in Period 1, when should this profit be considered realized? Explain.


CHAPTER 6


331

323

LO3

5. Explain how the revenue recognition principle s the elimination of intercompany transactions when preparing consolidated financial statements.

LO2

6. “The reduction of a $1,000 intercompany gross profit from ending inventory should be accompanied by a $400 increase to deferred income taxes in consolidated assets.” Do you agree? Explain.

LO3

7. Explain how the matching principle s adjustments to income tax expense when eliminating intercompany profits from consolidated financial statements.

LO1

8. A parent company rents a sales office to its wholly owned subsidiary under an operating lease requiring rent of $2,000 a month. What adjustments to income tax expense should accompany the elimination of the parent’s $24,000 rent revenue and the subsidiary’s $24,000 rent expense when a consolidated income statement is being prepared? Explain.

LO2

9. “Intercompany losses recorded on the sale of assets to an within the consolidated entity should always be eliminated when consolidated financial statements are prepared.” Do you agree with this statement? Explain.

LO1, 2

10. Describe the effects that the elimination of intercompany sales and intercompany profits in ending inventory will have on the various elements of the consolidated financial statements.

LO2

11. What difference does it make on the consolidated financial statements if there are unrealized profits in land resulting from a downstream transaction as compared with an upstream transaction?

LO2, 4

12. When there are unrealized profits in inventory at the end of Year 1, consolidated profit would normally be affected for Years 1 and 2. Explain.

LO2, 4

13. An intercompany gain on the sale of land is eliminated in the preparation of the consolidated statements in the year that the gain was recorded. Will this gain be eliminated in the preparation of subsequent consolidated statements? Explain.

LO1, 2

14. A subsidiary periodically revalues its land to fair value under the revaluation option for property, plant, and equipment. Explain the adjustments required to the consolidated financial statements if the subsidiary sells this land to the parent at an amount in excess of its carrying amount.

LO5

15. Describe the journal entry on the parent’s books under the equity method to adjust for unrealized profits in ending inventory for upstream transactions.

LO7

16. Describe the difference in ing under ASPE versus IFRSs for the elimination of unrealized profits in ending inventory on a downstream transaction between an investor and an associate.

C ASES Case 6-1 LO1, 2, 3, 4

You, the controller, recently had the following discussion with the president: President: I just don’t understand why we can’t recognize the revenue from the intercompany sale of inventory on the consolidated financial statements. The subsidiary company sold the goods to the parent at fair value and received the cash


332


324

CHAPTER 6


for the sale. We need to record the profit on this sale in order to maintain a steady earnings growth for our company. Otherwise, the bank will be concerned about our ability to repay the loan. Controller: You are right that the subsidiary has received the cash, but that is not the main criterion for determining when to recognize the revenue. Furthermore, you need to understand that the consolidated financial statements are different from the individual financial statements for the parent and the subsidiary. President: I have never understood why we need to prepare consolidated financial statements. It is just extra work. Who uses these statements? Furthermore, the profit on the intercompany transaction should be reported on the income statement because tax had to be paid on this profit. Surely, if tax is paid, the profit is legitimate. Controller: Once again, cash payments do not determine when we report income tax expense on the income statement. How about we get together for lunch tomorrow? I will prepare a brief presentation to illustrate the difference between the income for the parent and subsidiary and the income for the consolidated entity and will explain how all of these statements properly apply generally accepted ing principles for revenue and expense recognition. As part of the presentation, you decided to prepare monthly income statements for the parent, subsidiary, and consolidated entity for the following situation: • Parent owns 100% of the subsidiary. • Subsidiary buys goods from outsiders for $200 in July and sells them to Parent in August at a markup of 20% of cost. • In September, Parent sells these goods to an outsider at a markup of 20% of selling price. • Both companies pay income tax at the rate of 40%.

Required: Prepare notes for your presentation to the president.

Case 6-2 LO1, 2

In the course of the audit of King Limited (King), you, the CA, while reviewing the draft financial statements for the year ended August 31, Year 17, noticed that King’s investment in Queen Limited (Queen) was measured on the cost basis. In Year 16, it had been measured on the equity basis. Representing a 22% interest in Queen, this investment had been made 10 years ago to infuse fresh equity, with a view to protecting King’s source of supply for drugs. King’s controller informed you that Queen had suffered a large loss in Year 17, as shown by the May interim financial statements. King’s representative on Queen’s board of directors had resigned because King’s purchases from Queen now constitute less than 5% of its total purchases. In addition, Queen had been uncooperative in providing profit data in time to make the year-end equity adjustment. Consequently, King’s controller had revised the method of ing for the investment in Queen. You then found out that King’s managers are planning a share issue in Year 18 and do not want their earnings impaired by Queen’s poor performance. However, they are reluctant to divest themselves of Queen in case the rumoured development by Queen of a vaccine for a serious viral disease materializes.


333


CHAPTER 6


325

When you approached Queen’s managers, they refused to disclose any information on Queen’s operations. You then learned from a stockbroker friend that Queen’s poor results were due to its market being undercut by generic drug manufacturers. The loss had been increased when Queen’s management wrote off most of Queen’s intangible assets. You summarized the relevant information on the treatment of the investment for your audit file (Exhibit I).

Required: Discuss how King should report its investment in Queen, and describe what should be disclosed in the notes to the Year 17 financial statements. Assume that King and Queen are public companies. (CICA adapted)

EXHIBIT I YOUR (THE CA’S) NOTES ON KING’S INVESTMENT IN QUEEN’S SHARES Extracts from King’s draft financial statements for the year ended August 31, Year 17, in thousands of dollars, follow:

Investment in Queen (Note 1) Retained Earnings: Opening balance Plus: Net earnings Less: Prior-period adjustment (Note 2) dividends Closing balance

Year 17

Year 16

$25,000

$27,400

$ 6,500 4,500 11,000 2,400 2,250 $ 6,350

$ 2,350 7,300 9,650 — 3,150 $ 6,500

Note 1: The investment in Queen originally cost $25 million. The carrying value under the equity method at the end of Year 16 was $27.4 million. The equity adjustment for Year 16 involved the elimination of King’s share of the $5 million unrealized profit included in ending inventory, on sales from Queen to King.

Note 2: In the nine months ended May 31, Year 17, Queen reported a net loss of $140 million after writing off development and patent costs as unusual items. At the end of Year 17, King changed its method of ing for the investment from the equity method to the cost method and reduced the investment from $27.4 million back to its original cost of $25 million. The unrealized profit in King’s ending inventory for Year 17 amounts to $1 million. King has not made any adjustment for its share of this unrealized profit in the investment . Stock market trading in Queen’s common shares has been heavy in the last year. Prices were as follows: August 31, Year 16 February 28, Year 17 August 31, Year 17

$20 5 13

King owns 2,000,000 common shares of Queen. Queen did not pay any dividends in Year 16 or Year 17.


334


326

CHAPTER 6


Case 6-3 LO1, 2, 3, 7

Metal Caissons Limited (MCL) was incorporated on December 15, Year 8, to build metal caissons, which are large containers used for transporting military equipment. John Ladd (president) and Paul Finch (vice-president) each own 50% of MCL’s shares. Until September 30, Year 9, MCL’s first fiscal year-end, they applied their energy to planning and organizing the business. John and Paul developed the product, sought government assistance, designed the plant, and negotiated a sales contract. In October Year 9, MCL signed a $7.5 million contract with the Canadian Department of National Defence (DND). The contract stipulates that MCL must deliver one caisson to DND on the first business day of each month over a period of five years, commencing on April 1, Year 10. Any delay in delivery entails a $2,000 penalty per day, per caisson delivered late, up to a maximum of $50,000 per caisson. DND has the right to cancel its contract with MCL at any time if the company is unable to meet its commitments. The caissons must be manufactured according to DND’s detailed plans and specifications. Any caisson not meeting the specifications will be rejected, thereby causing a delay in delivery. During November Year 9, MCL obtained two government grants. Details of the grant agreements are as follows: 1. A $1 million grant for the construction of a manufacturing plant. The plant must be located in a designated area of the country and must be constructed primarily of Canadian-made components, failing which MCL must repay the grant in full. 2. A $500,000 grant for job creation. As a condition of the grant, MCL must employ at least 85% of its total workforce in the plant for a period of three years. If employment at the plant falls below this minimum level, MCL will have to repay the grant in full. On December 1, Year 9, MCL borrowed $1 million from the bank to construct the plant in northern Quebec, one of the designated areas. Construction was scheduled to start immediately and to be completed by the end of February Year 10. Unfortunately, construction was delayed, and the manufacturing section of the plant was not fully operational until the beginning of May. As a result, the April, May, and June caissons were delivered 25, 18, and 12 days late, respectively. The inexperienced employees had to work quickly but met the delivery deadlines for the July and August caissons. The istrative section of the plant (supervisors’ office, etc., representing 5% of the total area) is still under construction. As a condition of a bank loan and the DND contract, the company must issue audited financial statements commencing with the year ending September 30, Year 10. It is now mid-September, Year 10. Linda Presner, a partner with Presner & Wolf, Chartered ants, and you, the CA in charge of the audit, have just met with MCL’s senior management to discuss MCL’s ing policies. During the meeting, you obtained the condensed internal financial statements of MCL for the eleven months ended August 31, Year 10 (Exhibit II) and other information on MCL (Exhibit III in Case 6-3). After the meeting, Linda asks you to prepare a memo for her dealing with the ing issues connected with this engagement.


335


CHAPTER 6

327


EXHIBIT II METAL CAISSONS LIMITED CONDENSED BALANCE SHEET (in Thousands of Dollars, Unaudited)

Current assets Property, plant, and equipment, net of amortization (Note 1) Capitalized expenditures, net of amortization (Note 1) Investment in MSL, at cost

Current liabilities Long-term liabilities Shareholders’ equity

Aug. 31

Sept. 30

Year 10

Year 9

$2,388 2,154 109 240 $4,891

$242

$2,489 1,000 1,402 $4,891

120 $362 $120 242 $362

METAL CAISSONS LIMITED CONDENSED INCOME STATEMENT for the 11 Months Ended August 31, Year 10 (in Thousands of Dollars) Revenues Cost of sales Gross margin istrative expenses Net income

$2,125 375 1,750 590 $1,160

METAL CAISSONS LIMITED EXTRACTS FROM NOTES TO CONDENSED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS for the 11 Months Ended August 31, Year 10 1. ing policies Inventories. Inventories are valued at the lower of cost and net realizable value. Cost is determined on a first-in, first-out basis. Property, plant, and equipment. Property, plant, and equipment are recorded at cost. Depreciation is calculated on a straight-line basis over the following periods: Plant Production equipment Office equipment Computer equipment

50 years 15 years 20 years 10 years

Capitalized expenditures. Capitalized expenditures consist of costs incurred during the start-up of the company. Amortization is calculated on a straight-line basis over a 10-year period. Capitalized interest. The company is capitalizing 100% of the interest on the long-term debt until construction of the plant is complete. This interest is included in the cost of the plant.


336


328

CHAPTER 6


EXHIBIT III INFORMATION GATHERED BY CA The bank loan bears interest at 8% and is secured by a mortgage on the plant. The loan is repayable over 10 years, with monthly payments of interest and principal of $12,133. The head office of MCL, located in Montreal, is strictly an istrative unit. Twentyfour people, including the president and the vice-president, work at head office. A bookkeeper who ed MCL in February Year 10 supervises the preparation of the various financial and istrative reports. The plant employs 90 people. As at September 30, Year 9, capitalized expenditures included the following items: Incorporation costs Office equipment Travel costs related to search for plant site Costs of calls for tenders for manufacturing plant Product development costs Grant negotiation costs Costs related to contract negotiations with DND Miscellaneous istrative costs Miscellaneous legal fees

$

5,000 24,000 16,000 12,000 22,000 13,000 10,000 11,000 7,000 $120,000

The capitalized legal fees of $7,000 as at September 30, Year 9, include $2,000 in fees related to a $2.5 million lawsuit filed by Deutsch Production (a German company) against MCL for patent infringements. As at September 15, Year 10, John Ladd is unable to determine the outcome of the suit. In fiscal Year 10, $12,000 in legal fees has been incurred and expensed. MCL reported no income or expenses in its Year 9 fiscal year. DND did not take any action following the delays in delivery. On October 1, Year 9, MCL purchased 60% of the shares of Metal Supply Inc. (MSI) for $240,000. There was no acquisition differential on this acquisition. During fiscal Year 10, MSI sold parts to MCL for $300,000 and earned a gross margin of 30%. At August 31, Year 10, there was $100,000 of these intercompany purchases in MCL’s inventory. MSI reported a profit of $40,000 but paid no dividends for the 11 months ended August 31, Year 10.

Required: Prepare the memo requested by the partner.

Case 6-4 LO1, 2

(CICA adapted)

In early September Year 1, your firm’s audit client, D Ltd. (D) acquired in separate transactions an 80% interest in N Ltd. (N) and a 40% interest in K Ltd. (K). All three companies are federally incorporated Canadian companies and have August 31 year ends. They all manufacture small appliances, but they do not compete with each other. You are the senior on the audit of D. The partner has just received the preliminary consolidated financial statements from the controller of D along with unconsolidated statements for the three separate companies. Extracts from these statements are summarized in Exhibit IV. The partner has requested that you provide him with a memorandum discussing the important financial ing issues of D. balances for the consolidated financial statements should be recalculated to the extent that information is available.


337


CHAPTER 6


329

EXHIBIT IV EXTRACTS FROM FINANCIAL STATEMENTS At August 31, Year 2 (in Thousands) Unconsolidated D Investment in N Ltd., at cost Investment in K Ltd., at cost Deferred development costs Goodwill Non-controlling interest Common shares Retained earnings, beginning Profit Dividends Retained earnings, end of year

N

Consolidated K

$4,000 2,100

$2,100 $

6,000 618 600 (400) $ 818

D

90 60

1,000 1,850 300 (200) $1,950

$2,000 1,760 100 (150) $1,710

590 6,000 618 660 (400) $ 878

D acquired the 80% interest in N for $4,000,000 paid as follows: (1) $2,000,000 in cash, and (2) 160,000 common shares of D recorded in the books of D at $2,000,000. D acquired its 40% interest in K at a cost of $2,100,000 paid as follows: (1) $100,000 in cash, and (2) 160,000 common shares of D recorded in the books of D at $2,000,000. During the course of the audit, the following information was obtained: 1. The carrying amount of 80% of N’s net assets at the date of acquisition was $2,280,000. The acquisition differential consisted of the following: The excess of fair value of land over carrying amount The excess of fair value of plant and equipment over carrying amount 20% non-controlling interest’s share of excess of fair value over carrying amount Goodwill of N written off Deferred research and development expenditures written off Unallocated excess

$ 800,000 700,000 (300,000) (48,000) (72,000) 640,000 $1,720,000

The plant and equipment had a remaining useful life of 10 years when D acquired N. 2. The price paid by D for its investment in K was 10% lower than 40% of the fair value of K’s identifiable net assets. 3. During August Year 2, K sold goods to D as follows: Cost to K Normal selling price Price paid by D

D had not sold these goods as of August 31, Year 2.

$1,000,000 1,250,000 1,200,000


338


330

CHAPTER 6


N also sold goods to D in August Year 2 and D had not sold them by August 31, Year 2. Cost to N Normal selling price Price paid by D

$630,000 750,000 850,000

4. For the year ended August 31, Year 2, D’s sales were $8,423,300 and N’s sales were $6,144,500. 5. The companies pay income tax at the rate of 40%.

Required: Prepare the memorandum requested by the partner.

Case 6-5 LO1, 2, 6

(CICA adapted)

Good Quality Auto Parts Limited (GQ) is a medium-sized, privately owned producer of auto parts, which are sold to car manufacturers, repair shops, and retail outlets. In March Year 10, the union negotiated a new three-year contract with the company for the 200 shop-floor employees. At the time, GQ was in financial difficulty and management felt unable to meet the contract demands of the union. Management also believed that a strike of any length would force the company into bankruptcy. The company proposed that in exchange for wage concessions, the company would implement a profit-sharing plan whereby the shop floor employees would receive 10% of the company’s annual after-tax profit as a bonus in each year of the contract. Although the union generally finds this type of contract undesirable, it believed that insisting on the prevailing industry settlement would jeopardize GQ’s survival. As a result, the contract were accepted. The contract specifies that no major changes in ing policies may be made without the change being approved by GQ’s auditor. Another clause in the contract allows the union to engage a chartered ant to examine the books of the company and meet with GQ’s management and auditor to discuss any issues. Under the of the contract, any controversial ing issues are to be negotiated by the union and management to arrive at a mutual agreement. If the parties cannot agree, the positions of the parties are to be presented to an independent arbitrator for resolution. GQ presented to the union its annual financial statements and the unqualified audit report, for the year ended February 28, Year 11, the first year during which the profit-sharing plan was in effect. The union engaged you, the CA, to analyze these financial statements and determine whether there are any controversial ing issues. As a result of your examination, you identified a number of issues that are of concern to you. You met with the controller of the company and obtained the following information: 1. GQ wrote off $250,000 of inventory manufactured between Year 4 and Year 7. There have been no sales from this inventory in over two years. The controller explained that up until this year she had some hope that the inventory could be sold as replacement parts. However, she now believes that the parts cannot be sold. 2. The contracts GQ has with the large auto manufacturers allow the purchaser to return items for any reason. The company has increased the allowance


CHAPTER 6


339

331

for returned items by 10% in the year just ended. The controller contends that because of the weak economy and stiff competition faced by the auto manufacturers with whom GQ does business, there will likely be a significant increase in the parts returned. 3. In April Year 10, GQ purchased $500,000 of new manufacturing equipment. To reduce the financial strain of the acquisition, the company negotiated a six-year payment schedule. Management believed that the company would be at a serious competitive disadvantage if it did not emerge from the current downturn with updated equipment. GQ decided to use accelerated depreciation at a rate of 40% for the new equipment. The controller argued that because of the rapid technological changes occurring in the industry, equipment purchased now is more likely to become technologically, rather than operationally, obsolete. The straight-line depreciation method applied to the existing equipment has not been changed. 4. In Year 5, GQ purchased 100% of the shares of Brake Inc., a manufacturer of car brakes. At the time of acquisition, $35,000 of goodwill was reported on CG’s consolidated financial statements and was being amortized over 35 years. The company has written off the goodwill in the year just ended. The controller explained that the poor performance of the auto parts industry, and of GQ in particular, has made the goodwill worthless. 5. During Year 11, Brake Inc. sold brakes to GQ for $800,000. Ten percent of this merchandise remains in CQ’s inventory at February 28, Year 11. On February 28, Year 10, the inventory of CQ contained $200,000 of merchandise purchased from Brake. Brake earns a gross margin of 35% on its intercompany sales. GQ has not made any adjustments for the intercompany transactions for Year 11. 6. In February Year 11, the president and the chairman of the board, who between them own 75% of the voting shares of the company, received bonuses of $250,000 each. GQ did not pay any dividends during the current year. In the prior year, dividends amounting to $650,000 were paid. The controller said that the board of directors justified the bonuses as a reward for keeping the company afloat despite extremely difficult economic times. 7. Until this year, GQ used the taxes-payable method for ing purposes. This year, the company has used the liability method of ing for income taxes. The change has been made retroactively. The effect of the change has been to reduce net income for fiscal Year 11. The controller argued that, because the company is likely to need significant external financing from new sources in the year, the company should adopt policies under ASPE that are the same as IFRSs. The union has asked you to prepare a report on the position it should take on the issues identified when discussing them with management. The union also wants to know what additional information you require in order to this position.



340


332

CHAPTER 6


Case 6-6 LO1, 2, 7

You, the CA, an audit senior at Grey & Co., Chartered ants, are in charge of this year’s audit of Plex-Fame Corporation (PFC). PFC is a rapidly expanding, diversified, and publicly owned entertainment company with operations throughout Canada and the United States. PFC’s operations include movie theatres, live theatre production, and television production. It is June 22, Year 7, the week before PFC’s year-end. You meet with the chief financial officer of PFC to get an update on current developments and learn the following. PFC acquires real estate in prime locations where an existing theatre chain does not adequately serve the market. After acquiring a theatre site, the company engages a contractor to construct the theatre complex. During the year, the company received a $2 million payment from one such contractor who had built a 10-theatre complex for PFC in Montreal. This payment represents a penalty for not completing the theatre complex on time. Construction began in June Year 6 and was to have been completed by December Year 6. Instead, the complex was not completed until the end of May Year 7. The company is staging a Canadian version of “Rue St. Jacques,” which is to open in November Year 7. The smash-hit musical has been running in Paris for three years and is still playing to sold-out audiences. PFC started receiving advance bookings in November Year 6, and the first 40 weeks of the show’s run are completely sold out. As at June 22, Year 7, PFC has already collected $22 million from the advance bookings and invested the cash in interest-bearing securities. It included in revenue $1.7 million of interest collected on the funds received from advance ticket sales. In addition to the substantial investment in advertising for this production ($4 million), the company will have invested $15 million in pre-production costs by November Year 7 and will incur weekly production costs of $250,000 once the show opens. PFC has retained Media Inc. (Media), a company that specializes in entertainment-related advertising and promotion, to promote PFC’s activities. Media bills PFC’s corporate office for all advertising and promotion related to PFC’s activities. Advertising and promotions have significantly increased this year, in part due to large costs associated with the forthcoming opening of “Rue St. Jacques.” Media has billed PFC $12 million this year for advertising and promotion, an increase of $7 million over the preceding year. PFC has $43 million invested in Government of Canada treasury bills. During the past year, $30 million of these treasury bills were set aside to cover interest and principal obligations on the company’s syndicated loan of US$25 million. At the time the loan agreement was signed, PFC entered into a forward contract to buy U.S. dollars for the same amounts as the obligations under the syndicated loan and for the same dates as the obligations came due. PFC considers that in substance the debt has been settled, and as a result, both the treasury bills and the syndicated loan have been removed from the company’s balance sheet. PFC started selling movie theatres a couple of years ago. Each theatre’s contribution to long-run operating cash flow is assessed and, if the value of the real estate is greater than the present value of future theatre operating profits, the theatre is sold. In the past, revenue from these sales has been relatively minor, but this year 25% of net income (i.e., $6 million) came from the sale of theatres. Since these sales are considered an ongoing part of the company’s operations, proceeds from the sale of theatres are recorded as revenue in the income statement. On May 31, Year 7, PFC and an unrelated company, Odyssey Inc. (Odyssey), formed a partnership, Phantom. Odyssey contributed $40 million in cash.


CHAPTER 6


341

333

PFC contributed the assets of its TV production company, which had a carrying amount of $65 million. The $90 million value assigned to PFC’s contribution may be adjusted if the net income of Phantom earned between July 1, Year 7, and June 30, Year 8, does not meet expectations. PFC has recorded a gain of $25 million. The partnership agreement states that PFC is permitted to withdraw the $40 million for its own use, and it has done so. As a result, Odyssey has a 45% interest in the partnership and PFC has the remaining 55% interest. PFC’s bank operating loan in the amount of $200 million is well within its maximum of $240 million. The loan agreement calls for a maximum debt-to-equity ratio of 2:1, where debt is defined as monetary liabilities. Failure to meet the loan covenant would cause the operating loan to become payable within 30 days. On the May 31, Year 7, interim financial statements, PFC meets the restriction because its debt is $1,490 million while its shareholders’ equity is $780 million. PFC’s consolidated income before tax was $147 million for the 11 months ended May 31, Year 7. PFC hopes to maintain its recent trend of reporting a minimum before-tax return on shareholders’ equity of 20%. When you return to the office, you discuss the aforementioned issues with the partner in charge of the PFC audit. She asks you to prepare a report on the ing implications of the issues you have identified as a result of your meeting. When the ing for an individual transaction has not been specified, you should indicate how it should be ed for and the impact that the ing would have had on the key metric(s).

Required: Prepare the report to the partner. Ignore income taxes.

(CICA adapted)


On January 1, Year 2, PAT Ltd. acquired 90% of SAT Inc. when SAT’s retained earnings were $900,000. There was no acquisition differential. PAT s for its investment under the cost method. SAT sells inventory to PAT on a regular basis at a markup of 30% of selling price. The intercompany sales were $150,000 in Year 2 and $180,000 in Year 3. The total amount owing by PAT related to these intercompany sales was $50,000 at the end of Year 2 and $40,000 at the end of Year 3. On January 1, Year 3, the inventory of PAT contained goods purchased from SAT amounting to $60,000, while the December 31, Year 3, inventory contained goods purchased from SAT amounting to $70,000. Both companies pay income tax at the rate of 40%. Selected balances from the records of PAT and SAT for the year ended December 31, Year 3, were as follows: Inventory s payable Retained earnings, beginning of year Sales Cost of sales Income tax expense

$ 500,000 600,000 2,400,000 4,000,000 3,100,000 80,000

$ 300,000 320,000 1,100,000 2,500,000 1,700,000 50,000


342


334

CHAPTER 6


Required: (a) Determine the amount to report on the Year 3 consolidated financial statements for the above noted s. (b) Indicate how non-controlling interest on the Year 3 consolidated income statement and Year 3 consolidated balance sheet will be affected by the intercompany transactions noted above.


The consolidated income statement of a parent and its 90%-owned subsidiary appears below. It was prepared by an ing student before reading this chapter. CONSOLIDATED INCOME STATEMENT Sales Rental revenue Interest revenue Total revenue Cost of goods sold Rent expense Interest expense istration expenses Income tax expense Non-controlling interest in profit Total costs and expenses Profit

$500,000 24,000 50,000 574,000 350,000 24,000 35,000 45,000 42,000 9,000 505,000 $ 69,000

The following items were overlooked when the statement was prepared: • The opening inventory of the parent contained an intercompany profit of $5,000. This inventory was sold by the parent during the current year. • During the year, intercompany sales (at a 30% gross profit rate) were made as follows: By the parent to the subsidiary By the subsidiary to the parent

$100,000 80,000

• At the end of the year, half of the items purchased from the parent remained in the inventory of the subsidiary and none of the inventory purchased from the subsidiary remained in the parent’s inventory. • All of the rental revenue and 70% of the interest revenue were intercompany and appeared on the income statement of the parent. • Assume a 40% rate for income tax.

Required: (a) Prepare a correct consolidated income statement. (b) Use the matching principle to explain the adjustments for unrealized profits on intercompany sales when preparing consolidated financial statements.

Problem 6-3 LO2, 4

On January 1, Year 1, Spike Ltd. purchased land from outsiders for $100,000. On December 31, Year 1, Pike Co. acquired all of the common shares of Spike. The fair value of Spike’s land on this date was $115,000.


343


CHAPTER 6


335

On December 31, Year 2, Spike sold its land to Pike for $128,000. On December 31, Year 3, Pike sold the land to an arm’s-length party for $140,000. Both companies use the cost model for valuing their land and pay income tax at the rate of 40%. Assume that any gain on sale of land is fully taxable. The only land owned by these two companies is the land purchased by Spike in Year 1.

Required: Determine the balances for land, gain on sale of land, and income tax on gain for Years 1, 2, and 3 for three sets of financial statements (i.e., separate-entity statements for Pike and Spike and consolidated statements) by completing the following table: Pike

Consolidated

Spike

December 31, Year 1 Land Gain on sale Income tax on gain December 31, Year 2 Land Gain on sale Income tax on gain December 31, Year 3 Land Gain on sale Income tax on gain

Problem 6-4 LO1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6

The income statements for Paste Company and its subsidiaries, Waste Company, and Baste Company were prepared for the year ended December 31, Year 6, and are shown below: Paste

Waste

Baste

Income Sales Dividend Rent Interest Total income

$450,000 43,750 — 10,000 503,750

$270,000 — 130,000 — 400,000

$190,000 — — — 190,000

Expenses Cost of sales General and istrative Interest Income tax Total expenses Profit

300,000 93,000 — 27,000 420,000 $ 83,750

163,000 48,000 10,000 75,000 296,000 $104,000

145,000 29,000 — 7,000 181,000 $ 9,000

Additional Information • Paste purchased its 80% interest in Waste on January 1, Year 1. On this date, Waste had a retained earnings balance of $40,000, and the acquisition


344


336

CHAPTER 6


•

• • •

differential amounting to $15,000 was allocated entirely to plant, with an estimated remaining life of eight years. The plant is used exclusively for manufacturing goods for resale. Paste purchased its 75% interest in Baste on December 31, Year 3. On this date, Baste had a retained earnings balance of $80,000. The acquisition differential amounting to $19,000 was allocated to goodwill; however, because Baste had failed to report adequate profits, the goodwill was entirely written off for consolidated purposes by the end of Year 5. Paste has established a policy that any intercompany sales will be made at a gross profit rate of 30%. On January 1, Year 6, the inventory of Paste contained goods purchased from Waste for $15,000. During Year 6, the following intercompany sales took place: Paste to Waste Waste to Baste Baste to Paste

$ 90,000 170,000 150,000

• On December 31, Year 6, the inventories of each of the three companies contained items purchased on an intercompany basis in the following amounts: Inventory of Paste from Baste Waste from Paste Baste from Waste

$ 60,000 22,000 60,000

• In addition to its merchandising activities, Waste is in the office equipment rental business. Both Paste and Baste rent office equipment from Waste. General and istrative expenses for Paste and Baste include rent expense of $25,000 and $14,000, respectively. • During Year 6, Waste paid $10,000 interest to Paste for intercompany advances. • All of Paste’s dividend revenue pertains to its investments in Waste and Baste. • Retained earnings at December 31, Year 6, for Paste, Waste, and Baste were $703,750, $146,000, and $79,000, respectively. • Paste Company uses the cost method to for its investments, and uses tax allocation at a rate of 40% when it prepares consolidated financial statements.

Required: (a) Prepare a consolidated income statement for Year 6. (b) Calculate consolidated retained earnings at December 31, Year 6. (c) Now assume that Paste is a private company, uses ASPE, and chooses to use the equity method. Calculate its income from investments for Year 6. (d) Use the criteria for revenue recognition to explain the adjustments for unrealized profits on intercompany sales when preparing consolidated financial statements.

Problem 6-5 LO2, 4, 5, 6

X Co. acquired 75% of Y Co. on January 1, Year 1, when Y Co. had common shares worth $100,000 and retained earnings of $70,000. The acquisition differential was allocated as follows on this date: Inventory Equipment (15-year life) Total acquisition differential

$ 60,000 45,000 $105,000


345


CHAPTER 6


337

Since this date the following events have occurred: Year 1 • Y Co. reported a net income of $130,000 and paid dividends of $25,000. • On July 1, X Co. sold land to Y Co. for $112,000. This land was carried in the records of X Co. at $75,000. • On December 31, Year 1, the inventory of X Co. contained an intercompany profit of $30,000. • X Co. reported a net income of $400,000 from its own operations. Year 2 • Y Co. reported a net loss of $16,000 and paid dividends of $5,000. • Y Co. sold the land that it purchased from X Co. to an unrelated company for $130,000. • On December 31, Year 2, the inventory of Y Co. contained an intercompany profit of $12,000. • X Co. reported a net income from its own operations of $72,000.

Required: Assume a 40% tax rate. (a) Prepare X Co.’s equity method journal entries for each of Years 1 and 2. (b) Calculate consolidated net income attributable to X Co.’s shareholders for each of Years 1 and 2. (c) Prepare a statement showing the changes in non-controlling interest in each of Years 1 and 2. (d) Now assume that X Co. is a private company, uses ASPE, and chooses to use the equity method. Calculate the balance in the Investment in Y Co. as at December 31, Year 2.

Problem 6-6 LO2, 4

L Co. owns a controlling interest in M Co. and Q Co. L Co. purchased an 80% interest in M Co. at a time when M Co. reported retained earnings of $500,000. L Co. purchased a 70% interest in Q Co. at a time when Q Co. reported retained earnings of $50,000. There was no acquisition differential for either of these acquisitions. An analysis of the changes in retained earnings of the three companies during the current year appears below: Retained earnings balance, beginning of current year Profit Dividends paid or declared Retained earnings balance, end of current year

L Co.

M Co.

Q Co.

$ 976,000 580,000 (250,000) $1,306,000

$ 843,000 360,000 (200,000) $1,003,000

$682,000 240,000 (150,000) $772,000

Q Co. sells parts to L Co., which after further processing and assembly are sold by L Co. to M Co., where they become a part of the finished product sold by M Co. Intercompany profits included in raw materials inventories at the beginning and end of the current year are estimated as follows: Beginning inventory Intercompany profit in raw materials inventory On sales from Q to L On sales from L to M

$80,000 52,000

Ending inventory $ 35,000 118,000


346


338

CHAPTER 6


L Co. uses the cost method to for its investments and income tax allocation at a 40% rate when it prepares consolidated financial statements.

Required: (a) Calculate consolidated profit attributable to M Co’s shareholders for the current year. (b) Calculate consolidated retained earnings at the beginning of the current year.

Problem 6-7 LO1, 2, 3, 4, 7

On January 1, Year 3, the Most Company purchased 80% of the outstanding voting shares of the Least Company for $1.6 million in cash. On that date, Least’s balance sheet and the fair values of its identifiable assets and liabilities were as follows: Carrying value

Fair value

Cash s receivable Inventories Plant and equipment (net) Total assets

$

25,000 310,000 650,000 2,015,000 $3,000,000

$ 25,000 290,000 600,000 2,050,000

Current liabilities Long-term liabilities Common shares Retained earnings Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity

$ 300,000 1,200,000 500,000 1,000,000 $3,000,000

300,000 1,100,000

On January 1, Year 3, Least’s plant and equipment had a remaining useful life of 8 years. Its long-term liabilities matured on January 1, Year 7. Goodwill, if any, is to be tested yearly for impairment. The balance sheets as at December 31, Year 9, for the two companies were as follows: BALANCE SHEETS December 31, Year 9 Most

Least

Cash s receivable Inventories Plant and equipment, net Investment in Least, at cost Land Total assets

$

500,000 1,700,000 2,300,000 8,200,000 1,600,000 700,000 $15,000,000

40,000 500,000 1,200,000 4,000,000 — 260,000 $6,000,000

Current liabilities Long-term liabilities Common shares Retained earnings Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity

$

$ 200,000 3,000,000 500,000 2,300,000 $6,000,000

600,000 3,000,000 1,000,000 10,400,000 $15,000,000

$

Additional Information • The inventories of both companies have a maximum turnover period of one year. Receivables have a maximum turnover period of 62 days.


347


CHAPTER 6


339

• On July 1, Year 7, Most sold a parcel of land to Least for $100,000. Most had purchased this land in Year 4 for $150,000. On September 30, Year 9, Least sold the property to another company for $190,000. • During Year 9, $2 million of Most’s sales were to Least. Of these sales, $500,000 remain in the December 31, Year 9, inventories of Least. The December 31, Year 8, inventories of Least contained $312,500 of merchandise purchased from Most. Most’s sales to Least are priced to provide it with a gross profit of 20%. • Most and Least reported net income of $1,000,000 and $400,000, respectively, for Year 9. • During Year 9, $1.5 million of Least’s sales were to Most. Of these sales, $714,280 remains in the December 31, Year 9, inventories of Most. The December 31, Year 8, inventories of Most contained $857,140 of merchandise purchased from Least. Least’s sales to Most are priced to provide it with a gross profit of 30%. • Dividends declared on December 31, Year 9, were as follows: Most Least

$350,000 100,000

• Goodwill impairment tests resulted in losses of $52,200 in Year 4 and $8,700 in Year 9. • Assume a 40% tax rate for both companies and that dividends have not yet been paid.

Required: (a) Prepare the consolidated statement of changes in equity for Year 9. (b) Prepare the consolidated balance sheet. (c) Explain how the cost principle s the adjustments to inventory when eliminating unrealized profits from intercompany sales from the consolidated financial statements. (d) If Most had used the parent company extension theory rather than the entity theory, how would this affect the debt-to-equity ratio at the end of Year 9?

Problem 6-8

H Co. has controlling interests in three subsidiaries, as shown in the data below:

LO2, 4, 5 H Co. Retained earnings at acquisition Percentage ownership Retained earnings, Jan. 1, Year 5 Profit (loss), Year 5 Dividends paid, Year 5 Intercompany sales

$12,000 10,000

Subsidiaries L Co. J Co. $30,000 95% 50,000 20,000 5,000 50,000

$40,000 90% 43,000 (5,000) 3,000 70,000

K Co. $25,000 85% 30,000 30,000 15,000

K Co. had items in its inventory on January 1, Year 5, on which L Co. had made a profit of $5,000. J Co. had items in its inventory on December 31, Year 5, on which K Co. had made a profit of $8,000. J Co. rents premises from L Co. at an annual rental of $8,500. The parent company has no income (other than from its investments) and no expenses. It uses the equity method of recording its investments but has made no entries during Year 5. Assume a 40% tax rate.


348


340

CHAPTER 6


Required: Prepare the following related to its investments: (a) Entries that H Co. would make in Year 5. (b) A calculation of consolidated retained earnings, January 1, Year 5. (c) A calculation of consolidated profit attributable to shareholders of H Co. for Year 5.

Problem 6-9 LO2, 4

Purple Company purchased a 70% interest in Sand Company several years ago in order to obtain retail outlets for its major products. Since that time, Purple has sold to Sand a substantial portion of its merchandise requirements. At the beginning of the current year, Sand’s inventory of $690,000 was composed of 60% of goods purchased from Purple at markups averaging 30% on Purple’s cost. Sales from Purple to Sand during the current year were $5,600,000. The estimated intercompany profit in Sand’s ending inventory was $194,000. Purple owns buildings and land used in Sand’s retail operations and rented to Sand. Rentals paid by Sand to Purple during the current year amounted to $743,000. At the end of the current year, Purple sold to Sand for $260,000 land to be used in the development of a shopping centre that had cost Purple $203,500. The gain was included in Purple’s net income for the current year. Purple also holds a one-year, 6% note of Sand on which it has accrued interest revenues of $22,500 during the current year. During the current year, Purple reported net income of $568,100 and Sand reported net income of $248,670. Purple uses the cost method to for its investment.

Required: Calculate the current year’s consolidated net income attributable to Purple’s shareholders. Assume a 40% tax rate.

Problem 6-10 LO2, 4

The income statements of Evans Company and Falcon Company for the current year are shown below: Sales revenues Dividend revenues Rental revenues Interest revenues Raw materials and finished goods purchased Changes in inventory Other expenses Interest expense Income taxes Profit

Evans

Falcon

$450,000 32,000 33,600 — 515,600 268,000 20,000 104,000 30,000 31,700 453,700 $ 61,900

$600,000 — — 18,000 618,000 328,000 25,000 146,000 — 43,500 542,500 $ 75,500

The following amounts were taken from the statement of changes in equity for the two companies: Retained earnings, beginning of year Dividends declared

Evans

Falcon

$632,000 30,000

$348,000 40,000

Evans owns 80% of the outstanding common shares of Falcon, purchased at the time the latter company was organized.


349


CHAPTER 6


341

Evans sells parts to Falcon at a price that is 25% above cost. Total sales from Evans to Falcon during the year were $90,000. Included in Falcon’s inventories were parts purchased from Evans amounting to $21,250 in beginning inventories and $28,750 in the ending inventory. Falcon sells back to Evans certain finished goods, at a price that gives Falcon an average gross profit of 30% on these intercompany sales. Total sales from Falcon to Evans during the year were $177,000. Included in the inventories of Evans were finished goods acquired from Falcon amounting to $11,000 in beginning inventories and $3,000 in ending inventories. Falcon rents an office building from Evans and pays $2,800 per month in rent. Evans has borrowed $600,000 through a series of 5% notes, of which Falcon holds $360,000 as notes receivable. Use income tax allocation at a 40% rate.

Required: (a) Prepare a consolidated income statement with expenses classified by nature. (b) Calculate retained earnings, beginning of year, and dividends declared for the consolidated statement of changes in equity for the current year.

Problem 6-11

The partial trial balances of P Co. and S Co. at December 31, Year 5, were as follows:

LO2, 4 P Co. Dr. Investment in S. Co. Common shares Retained earnings (charged with dividends, no other changes during the year)

Cr.

Dr.

S Co. Cr.

90,000 150,000

60,000

101,000

34,000

Additional Information • The investment in the shares of S Co. (a 90% interest) was acquired January 2, Year 1, for $90,000. At that time, the shareholders’ equity of S Co. was common shares of $60,000 and retained earnings of $20,000 and the common shares for P Co. of $150,000. • Net incomes of the two companies for the year were as follows: P Co. S Co.

$60,000 48,000

• During Year 5, sales of P Co. to S Co. were $10,000, and sales of S Co. to P Co. were $50,000. Rates of gross profit on intercompany sales in Years 4 and 5 were 40% of sales. • On December 31, Year 4, the inventory of P Co. included $7,000 of merchandise purchased from S Co., and the inventory of S Co. included $3,000 of merchandise purchased from P Co. On December 31, Year 5, the inventory of P Co. included $20,000 of merchandise purchased from S Co. and the inventory of S Co. included $5,000 of merchandise purchased from P Co. • During the year ended December 31, Year 5, P Co. paid dividends of $12,000 and S Co. paid dividends of $10,000. • At the time that P Co. purchased the shares of S Co., the acquisition differential was allocated to patents of S Co. These patents are being amortized for consolidation purposes over a period of five years.


350


342

CHAPTER 6


• In Year 3, land that originally cost $40,000 was sold by S Co. to P Co. for $50,000. The land is still owned by P Co. • Assume a corporate tax rate of 40%.

Required: Prepare a consolidated statement of changes in equity for the year ended December 31, Year 5.

Problem 6-12 LO1, 2, 4, 7

On January 2, Year 1, Road Ltd. acquired 70% of the outstanding voting shares of Runner Ltd. The acquisition differential of $280,000 on that date was allocated in the following manner: Inventory Land Plant and equipment Patent Goodwill

$100,000 50,000 60,000 40,000 30,000

estimated life, 5 years estimated life, 8 years

$280,000

The Year 5 income statements for the two companies were as follows: Sales Intercompany investment income Rental revenue Total income Materials used in manufacturing Changes in work-in-progress and finished goods inventory Employee benefits Interest expense Depreciation Patent amortization Rental expense Income tax Total expenses Profit

Road

Runner

$4,000,000 210,700 — 4,210,700 2,000,000

$2,100,000 — 70,000 2,170,000 800,000

45,000 550,000 250,000 405,000 — 35,000 300,000 3,585,000 $ 625,700

(20,000) 480,000 140,000 245,000 25,000 — 200,000 1,870,000 $ 300,000

Additional Information • Runner regularly sells raw materials to Road. Intercompany sales in Year 5 totalled $420,000. • Intercompany profits in the inventories of Road were as follows: January 1, Year 5 December 31, Year 5

$75,000 40,000

• Road’s entire rental expense relates to equipment rented from Runner. • A goodwill impairment loss of $3,000 occurred in Year 5. • Retained earnings at December 31, Year 5, for Road and Runner were $2,525,700 and $1,150,000, respectively. • Road uses the equity method to for its investment, and uses income tax allocation at the rate of 40% when it prepares consolidated statements.


351


CHAPTER 6


343

Required: (a) Prepare a consolidated income statement for Year 5 with expenses classified by nature. (b) Calculate consolidated retained earnings at December 31, Year 5. (c) If Road had used parent company extension theory rather than entity theory, how would this affect the return on equity attributable to shareholders of Road for Year 5?


The following are the financial statements of Post Corporation and its subsidiary, Sage Company, as at December 31, Year 3: STATEMENTS OF FINANCIAL POSITION December 31, Year 3 Land Plant and equipment Accumulated depreciation Investment in Sage Inventory Notes receivable s receivable Cash

Ordinary shares Retained earnings Notes payable s payable

Post

Sage

$175,000 520,000 (229,400) 103,707 34,000 — 17,200 12,200

$ 19,000 65,000 (17,000) — 27,000 55,000 9,100 12,900

$632,707

$171,000

$100,000 265,707 55,000 212,000 $632,707

$ 50,000 81,000 — 40,000 $171,000

Post

Sage

$900,000 26,500 — 1,479 —

$240,000 — 6,800 — 30,000

927,979

276,800

540,000 20,000 180,000

162,000 — 74,800

STATEMENTS OF PROFIT—Year 3 Sales Management fee revenue Interest revenue Investment income from Sage Gain on sale of land Cost of goods sold Interest expense Other expenses Income tax expense Profit

80,000

16,000

820,000 $107,979

252,800 $ 24,000

Additional Information • Post purchased 70% of the outstanding shares of Sage on January 1, Year 1, at a cost of $63,000, and has used the cost method to for its investment. On that date, Sage had accumulated depreciation of $10,000, retained earnings of $15,000, and fair values were equal to carrying amounts for all its net assets, except inventory (overvalued by $12,000).


352


344

CHAPTER 6


• In determining the purchase price, the management of Post noted that Sage, as lessee, leases a warehouse under an operating lease that has that are unfavourable relative to market . However, the lease agreement explicitly prohibits transfer of the lease (through either sale or sublease). An independent appraiser indicated that the fair value of this unfavourable lease agreement is $18,000. There were five years remaining on this lease on the date of acquisition. • The companies sell merchandise to each other at a gross profit rate of 25%. • The December 31, Year 2, inventory of Post contained purchases made from Sage amounting to $14,000. There were no intercompany purchases in the inventory of Sage on this date. • During Year 3 the following intercompany transactions took place: — Sage made a payment of $26,500 to Post for management fees, which was recorded under the category “other expenses.” — Sage made sales of $90,000 to Post. The December 31, Year 3, inventory of Post contained goods purchased from Sage amounting to $28,000. — Post made sales of $125,000 to Sage. The December 31, Year 3, inventory of Sage contained goods purchased from Post amounting to $18,000. — On July 1, Year 3, Post borrowed $55,000 from Sage and signed a note bearing interest at 12% per annum. The interest on this note was paid on December 31, Year 3. — During the year, Sage sold land to Post and recorded a gain of $30,000 on the transaction. This land is being held by Post on December 31, Year 3. • Goodwill impairment losses occurred as follows: Year 1, $2,600; Year 2, $460; Year 3, $1,530. • Post uses the equity method to for its investment in Sage. • Both companies pay income tax at 40% on their taxable incomes.

Required: (a) Prepare the following consolidated financial statements for Year 3: (i) Income statement (ii) Statement of financial position (b) Calculate goodwill impairment loss and profit attributable to non-controlling interest for the year ended December 31, Year 3, under parent company extension theory. (c) Calculate goodwill and non-controlling interest on the consolidated statement of financial position at December 31, Year 3, under parent company extension theory.


On January 1, Year 1, the Vine Company purchased 60,000 of the 80,000 ordinary shares of the Devine Company for $80 per share. On that date, Devine had ordinary shares of $3,500,000, and retained earnings of $2,100,000. When acquired, Devine had inventories with fair values $100,000 less than carrying amount, a parcel of land with a fair value $200,000 greater than the carrying amount, and equipment with a fair value $200,000 less than carrying amount. There were also internally generated patents with an estimated market value of $400,000 and a five-year remaining life. A long-term liability had a market value $100,000 greater than carrying amount; this liability was paid off December 31, Year 4. All other


353


CHAPTER 6


345

identifiable assets and liabilities of Devine had fair values equal to their carrying amounts. Devine’s accumulated depreciation on the plant and equipment was $500,000 at the date of acquisition. At the acquisition date, the equipment had an expected remaining useful life of 10 years. The equipment and patents are used in manufacturing. Both companies use the straight-line method for all depreciation and amortization calculations and the FIFO inventory cost flow assumption. Assume a 40% income tax rate on all applicable items and that there were no impairment losses for goodwill. On September 1, Year 5, Devine sold a parcel of land to Vine and recorded a total non-operating gain of $400,000. Sales of finished goods from Vine to Devine totalled $1,000,000 in Year 4 and $2,000,000 in Year 5. These sales were priced to provide a gross profit margin on selling price of 33 1/3% to the Vine Company. Devine’s December 31, Year 4, inventory contained $300,000 of these sales; December 31, Year 5, inventory contained $600,000. Sales of finished goods from Devine to Vine were $800,000 in Year 4 and $1,200,000 in Year 5. These sales were priced to provide a gross profit margin on selling price of 40% to the Devine Company. Vine’s December 31, Year 4, inventory contained $100,000 of these sales; the December 31, Year 5, inventory contained $500,000. Vine’s investment in Devine’s is carried in accordance with the cost method and includes advances to Devine of $200,000. There are no intercompany amounts other than those noted, except for the dividends of $500,000 (total amount) declared and paid by Devine. INCOME STATEMENTS for Year Ending December 31, Year 5 (in Thousands of Dollars) Sales Dividends, investment income, and gains Total income Cost of goods sold Other expenses Income taxes Total expenses Profit

Vine

Devine

$11,600 400 12,000 8,000 500 500 9,000 $ 3,000

$3,000 1,000 4,000 1,500 300 200 2,000 $2,000

STATEMENTS OF FINANCIAL POSITION December 31, Year 5 (in Thousands of Dollars) Land Plant and equipment Accumulated depreciation Investment in Devine, cost Inventories Cash and current receivables Total assets

Vine

Devine

$ 6,000 18,800 (5,800) 5,000 4,600 900 $29,500

$ 2,500 11,800 (5,000) 2,400 300 $12,000

(continued)


354


346

CHAPTER 6


Ordinary shares Retained earnings Long-term liabilities Deferred income taxes Current liabilities Total equity and liabilities

Vine

Devine

$10,000 12,000 6,600 200 700 $29,500

$ 3,500 7,000 1,100 100 300 $12,000

Required: (a) Show the allocation of the acquisition cost at acquisition and the related amortization schedule. Show and label all calculations. (b) Prepare a consolidated income statement with expenses classified by function. (c) Calculate consolidated retained earnings at December 31, Year 5. (d) Prepare a consolidated statement of financial position for Vine Company at December 31, Year 5. (e) Assume that Devine’s shares were trading at $75 per share shortly before and after the date of acquisition, and that this data was used to value non-controlling interest at the date of acquisition. Calculate goodwill and non-controlling interest at December 31, Year 5. (adapted from a problem prepared by Peter Secord, St. Mary’s University)

Problem 6-15 LO2, 4, 5, 6

Paper Corp. purchased 70% of the outstanding shares of Sand Ltd. on January 1, Year 2, at a cost of $84,000. Paper has always used the equity method to for its investments. On January 1, Year 2, Sand had common shares of $50,000 and retained earnings of $30,000, and fair values were equal to carrying amounts for all its net assets, except inventory (fair value was $9,000 less than carrying amount) and equipment (fair value was $24,000 greater than carrying amount). The equipment, which is used for research, had an estimated remaining life of 6 years on January 1, Year 2. The following are the financial statements of Paper Corp. and its subsidiary Sand Ltd. as at December 31, Year 5: BALANCE SHEETS at December 31, Year 5 Paper

Sand

Cash s receivable Note receivable Inventory Equipment, net Land Investment in Sand

$

— 36,000 — 66,000 220,000 150,000 112,350 $584,350

$ 10,000 30,000 40,000 44,000 76,000 30,000 — $230,000

Bank indebtedness s payable Notes payable Common shares Retained earnings

$ 90,000 50,000 40,000 150,000 254,350 $584,350

$

— 60,000 — 50,000 120,000 $230,000


355


CHAPTER 6


347

INCOME STATEMENTS for the Year Ended December 31, Year 5 Sales Management fee revenue Investment income from Sand Interest income Gain on sale of land Cost of sales Research and development expenses Interest expense Miscellaneous expenses Income taxes Net income

Paper

Sand

$798,000 24,000 1,500 — — 823,500 480,000 40,000 10,000 106,000 80,000 716,000 $107,500

$300,000 — — 3,600 20,000 323,600 200,000 12,000 — 31,600 32,000 275,600 $ 48,000

Additional Information • During Year 5, Sand made a cash payment of $2,000 per month to Paper for management fees, which is included in Sand’s “Miscellaneous expenses.” • During Year 5, Paper made intercompany sales of $100,000 to Sand. The December 31, Year 5, inventory of Sand contained goods purchased from Paper amounting to $30,000. These sales had a gross profit of 35%. • On April 1, Year 5, Paper acquired land from Sand for $40,000. This land had been recorded on Sand’s books at a carrying amount of $20,000. Paper paid for the land by g a $40,000 note payable to Sand, bearing yearly interest at 8%. Interest for Year 5 was paid by Paper in cash on December 31, Year 5. This land was still being held by Paper on December 31, Year 5. • The fair value of consolidated goodwill remained unchanged from January 1, Year 5 to July Year 5. On July 1, Year 5, a valuation was performed, indicating that the recoverable amount of consolidated goodwill was $3,500. • During the year ended December 31, Year 5, Paper paid dividends of $80,000 and Sand paid dividends of $20,000. • Sand and Paper pay taxes at a 40% rate. Assume that none of the gains or losses were capital gains or losses.

Required: (a) Prepare, in good form, a calculation of goodwill and any unamortized acquisition differential as of December 31, Year 5. (b) Prepare Paper’s consolidated income statement for the year ended December 31, Year 5, with expenses classified by function. (c) Calculate the following balances that would appear on Paper’s consolidated balance sheet as at December 31, Year 5: (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v)

Inventory Land Notes payable Non-controlling interest Common shares


356


348

CHAPTER 6


(d) Assume that an independent business valuator valued the non-controlling interest at $30,000 at the date of acquisition. Calculate goodwill impairment loss and profit attributable to non-controlling interest for the year ended December 31, Year 5. (CGA–Canada adapted)

WEB -BASED P ROBLEMS Web Problem 6-1 LO6

Access the 2011 consolidated financial statements for RONA Inc. by going to investor relations section of the company’s website. Answer the questions below. Round percentages to one decimal point and other ratios to two decimal points. For each question, indicate where in the financial statements you found the answer, and/or provide a brief explanation. (a) What inventory costing method does the company use? (b) What portion of the company’s assets is inventory? Has the portion increased or decreased from last year? (c) Does the company eliminate intercompany transactions and unrealized profits when preparing consolidated financial statements? (d) Ignore your answer to part (c), and assume the following: (1) 25% of the inventory at December 31, 2011, had been sold by the parent to a wholly owned subsidiary during the year and that this inventory was the only intercompany sale during the year; (2) the gross margin on the sale was the same as the average gross margin for the consolidated entity as a whole; and (3) the intercompany sale and unrealized profit were not eliminated when preparing the consolidated financial statements. What is the impact of these errors on inventory turnover and earnings per share for the year? (e) Does the company value its land at cost or fair value? (f) Now assume that the company changes its policy to report its land at fair value under the revaluation option in IAS 16 (or to cost if it was using fair value). Also, assume that the fair value of land has increased steadily since it was acquired. What impact would this change in policy have on the debt-to-equity ratio at the end of the year and on return on average equity for the year?

Web Problem 6-2 LO6

Access the 2011 financial statements for Cenovus Energy Inc. by going to investor relations section of the company’s website. Answer the same questions as in Web Problem 1. For each question, indicate where in the financial statements you found the answer, and/or provide a brief explanation. (Some questions may not be applicable.)



357


7 chapter

(A) Intercompany Profits in Depreciable Assets (B) Intercompany Bondholdings learning objectives After studying this chapter, you should be able to do the following: LO1 Prepare consolidated financial statements that reflect the elimination and subsequent realization of upstream and downstream intercompany profits in depreciable assets.

LO5 Calculate the gain or loss that results from the elimination of intercompany bondholdings and the allocation of such gain or loss to the equities of the controlling and non-controlling interests.

LO2 Explain how the historical cost principle s the elimination of unrealized profits resulting from intercompany transactions when preparing consolidated financial statements.

LO6 Explain how the recognition of gains on the elimination of intercompany bondholdings is consistent with the principle of recording gains only when they are realized.

LO3 Prepare the journal entries under the equity method to reflect the elimination and subsequent realization of intercompany profits in depreciable assets. LO4 Analyze and interpret financial statements with intercompany transactions involving depreciable assets.

LO7 Prepare consolidated financial statements that reflect the gains or losses that are the result of intercompany bondholdings. LO8 Identify some of the differences between IFRSs and ASPE involving intercompany transactions. LO9 Prepare consolidated financial statements when depreciable assets are remeasured to fair value each period.

INTRODUCTION The elimination of intercompany transactions and unrealized profit is one of the most significant problems encountered in the consolidation process. The volume of transfers within most large enterprises can be quite large. For example, Suncor Energy Inc., Canada’s largest integrated energy company, reported intersegment revenue of $3,967 million in 2011,1 which represented 9.5% of total revenues. In this chapter, we complete our examination of intercompany profits in assets. We also examine the consolidation issues that arise from intercompany bondholdings. Because these transactions are so distinctly different in their impact on the consolidated statements, this chapter is divided into two parts. Part (A) looks at the elimination and realization of intercompany profits (losses) in depreciable assets. The concepts involved in the holdback of profits (losses) are similar to those examined previously with regard to intercompany 349


358


350

CHAPTER 7

(A) Intercompany Profits in Depreciable Assets (B) Intercompany Bondholdings

land profits (losses), but the realization concepts are different because they are based on consumption rather than a sale. Part (B) examines the gains (losses) that are created in the consolidated financial statements when intercompany bondholdings are eliminated.

LO1

(A) INTERCOMPANY PROFITS IN DEPRECIABLE ASSETS Holdback and Realization—Year 1

Profit is recognized when the goods are sold to outsiders.

In Chapter 6, we illustrated the holdback of an intercompany profit in inventory and land. In both cases, the before-tax profit of $300 and the corresponding income tax of $120 were held back in the year of the intercompany transaction and realized in the year that the asset was sold to outsiders. In both cases, the profit was eventually recognized in both the financial statements of the individual companies and the consolidated financial statements. Only the timing of the recognition was different. We will now examine the holdback and the realization in the consolidated statements of an intercompany profit in a depreciable asset. We return to the Chapter 6 example of Parent Company and its 90%-owned subsidiary, Sub Inc. The Year 1 financial statements of the two companies are shown in Exhibit 7.1. Parent has used the cost method to for its investment. Note that although the net incomes and total assets of the two companies are unchanged, the details on each statement have been changed so that we can focus on the following intercompany transaction involving equipment that occurred during the year. On July 1, Year 1, Sub sold highly specialized equipment with a very short useful life to Parent and recorded a profit of $300 on the transaction. We are assuming that Sub purchased this equipment for $1,500 on this date with the intention of using it, but instead immediately sold it to Parent for $1,800. The two companies recorded this intercompany transaction in the following manner: Parent Company Equipment Cash

Sub Inc. 1,800 1,800

Cash Equipment Gain on sale of equipment

1,800 1,500 300

It is also assumed that this transaction was not a capital gain for tax purposes, and that Sub’s tax rate is 40%. This means that Sub paid $120 (40% 3 300) income tax on this profit. We further assume that this is the only depreciable asset held by either company and that the equipment is expected to be obsolete in one-and-ahalf years. On December 31, Year 1, Parent recorded depreciation expense on this equipment in the following manner: The parent’s depreciation expense is based on the parent’s cost.

LO2 The cost of the equipment to the combined economic entity was $1,500.

Depreciation expense Accumulated depreciation To record depreciation for half a year (1,800 4 1½ 5 1,200; 1,200 3 ½ 5 600)

600 600

It should be noted that if Sub had sold the equipment at its cost, Parent’s Year 1 depreciation expense would have been $500 (1,500 4 1½ 3 ½). This is the amount of depreciation expense that should appear in the income statement of the entity (i.e., in the consolidated income statement) for Year 1 in that it represents depreciation based on the historical cost of the equipment to the entity.


359


CHAPTER 7


351

EXHIBIT 7.1 INCOME STATEMENTS—for Year 1 Parent Sales Gain on sale of equipment

Depreciation expense Miscellaneous expenses Income tax expense Net income

$20,000 —

20,000 600 13,800 2,200 16,600 $ 3,400

Sub $

$

7,700 300

8,000 — 5,200 1,100 6,300 1,700

The gain on sale is recorded on the separate-entity books of Sub.

RETAINED EARNINGS STATEMENTS—for Year 1 Parent Balance, January 1 Net income Dividends Balance, December 31

$12,000 3,400 15,400 2,000 $13,400

Sub $

$

4,500 1,700 6,200 — 6,200

BALANCE SHEETS—at December 31, Year 1 Parent

Sub

Assets (miscellaneous) Equipment Accumulated depreciation Investment in Sub Inc.

$27,950 1,800 (600) 11,250 $40,400

$ 23,200 — — — $ 23,200


$12,000 15,000 13,400 $40,400

$

The equipment is recorded at the parent’s cost on the separate-entity books of Parent.

9,000 8,000 6,200 $ 23,200

When we examine the separate income statements of the two companies (see Exhibit 7.1), it should be obvious that the $300 gain is not a gain from a combined entity point of view and that the $600 depreciation expense does not represent historical cost depreciation to the entity. Two adjustments need to be made when the Year 1 consolidated income statement is prepared; these have opposite effects on the before-tax income of the entity. The first adjustment eliminates the gain on sale of equipment recorded on July 1, Year 1, because as of that date the gain is unrealized from the combined entity point of view. This adjustment reduces before-tax income by $300 and holds back this profit for consolidation purposes. A corresponding reduction of $120 should be made to income tax expense so that a net after-tax gain of $180 is held back. This concept is similar in all respects to the holdback of the land gain that was illustrated in Chapter 6. The second adjustment reduces depreciation expense by $100 (300 4 1½ 3 ½). The amount of the reduction represents the depreciation taken in Year 1 on this $300 gain and results in a consolidated depreciation expense of $500 based on historical cost, as required. This reduction of depreciation expense increases the before-tax income of the entity by $100. In other words, the parent uses the equipment to

The depreciation expense for the combined economic entity was $500.


360


352

CHAPTER 7


carry out its business of selling goods or providing services to its customers. Even though the equipment is not sold to outsiders, the products or services are sold to outsiders. Therefore, the gain from the intercompany sale of the equipment is realized over the life of the equipment as the parent uses it to produce goods or provide services for outsiders. This concept bases the realization of the gain on the consumption (by depreciation) of the asset containing the unrealized gain. A corresponding increase of $40 should be made to income tax expense, to match the tax with the portion of the gain realized. The result will be a net after-tax realization of $60 for consolidation purposes. The net effect of the two after-tax adjustments results in the entity’s Year 1 net income being reduced by $120 (180 2 60). Because Sub was the selling company, this $120 reduction is allocated to the non-controlling and controlling interests in the same manner as was illustrated in Chapter 6. The preceding paragraphs have briefly outlined the concepts involved in the holdback and realization of an intercompany gain in a depreciable fixed asset. We will now apply these concepts by preparing the Year 1 consolidated financial statements of Parent using the direct approach. It is useful to start by preparing the three calculations shown in Exhibit 7.2.

EXHIBIT 7.2 EQUIPMENT GAIN—SUB INC. SELLING Before 40% tax tax This is an upstream transaction, since Sub sold to Parent.

Gain, July 1, Year 1 Less realized by depreciation for Year 1 Balance, unrealized at Dec. 31, Year 1

$300 100 $200

$120 40 $ 80

After tax $

$

180 (a) 60 (b) 120 (c)

CALCULATION OF CONSOLIDATED NET INCOME—for Year 1 Sub’s income is adjusted for both the unrealized gain and the realization of the gain through depreciation by Parent.

Net income—Parent Co. Net income—Sub Inc. Less after-tax gain on sale of equipment (2a) Add after-tax gain realized by depreciation (2b) Adjusted net income—Sub Inc. Consolidated net income

$ 3,400 1,700 180 1,520 60

Attributable to Shareholders of Parent Non-controlling interest (10% 3 1,580)

1,580 $ 4,980 $ 4,822 (d) 158 (e)

CALCULATION OF NON-CONTROLLING INTEREST at December 31, Year 1 Non-controlling interest is affected by unrealized profits on upstream transactions.

Shareholders’ equity—Sub Inc. Common shares Retained earnings Less net unrealized equipment gain after tax (2c) Adjusted shareholders’ equity Non-controlling interest’s share

$ 8,000 6,200 14,200 120 14,080 10% $ 1,408 (f)


361


CHAPTER 7


353

It should be noted that the calculation of consolidated net income attributable to the parent is made to adjust the net income of the parent from the cost method to the equity method. If the parent had used the equity method, we would still have to adjust for unrealized profits from intercompany transactions. Exhibit 7.3 illustrates the preparation of the consolidated financial statements using the direct approach. The consolidated income statement was prepared by combining, line by line, the revenues and expenses of the two companies. The amount

EXHIBIT 7.3 Year 1 Consolidated Statements Adjusted for Intercompany Equipment Profit (Direct Approach) PARENT COMPANY CONSOLIDATED INCOME STATEMENT for the Year Ended December 31, Year 1 Sales (20,000 1 7,700) Gain on sale of equipment (0 1 300 2 [2a] 300)

Net income

$27,700 –0– 27,700 500 19,000 3,220 22,720 $ 4,980

Attributable to Shareholders of Parent (2d) Non-controlling interest (2e)

$ 4,822 158

Depreciation expense (600 1 0 2 [2b] 100) Miscellaneous expenses (13,800 1 5,200) Income tax expense (2,200 1 1,100 2 [2a] 120 1 [2b] 40)

Income tax expense is matched to the income of the consolidated entity.

PARENT COMPANY CONSOLIDATED RETAINED EARNINGS STATEMENT for the Year Ended December 31, Year 1 Balance, January 1 Net income

$12,000 4,822 16,822 2,000 $14,822


PARENT COMPANY CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET at December 31, Year 1 Assets—miscellaneous (27,950 1 23,200) Equipment (1,800 1 0 2 [2a] 300) Accumulated depreciation (600 1 0 2 [2b] 100) Deferred income taxes (0 1 0 1 [2a] 120 2 [2b] 40)

$51,150 1,500 (500) 80 $52,230

Liabilities (12,000 1 9,000) Common shares Retained earnings Non-controlling interest

$21,000 15,000 14,822 1,408 $52,230

The equipment is reported at the cost when it was purchased from outsiders.


362


354

CHAPTER 7


for non-controlling interest is based on the adjusted income of Sub. The intercompany eliminations are shown in the exhibit in boldface and are summarized as follows: (i) The $300 gain on sale of the equipment and the income tax expense for the tax on this gain are eliminated. The net effect is to reduce the after-tax income of the entity by $180. (ii) The excess depreciation to the consolidated entity in Year 1 is eliminated. Consolidated depreciation is now based on historical cost. Because this elimination results in a realization of $100 of the original gain, income tax expense is increased by $40 to match the tax with the gain realized. The net result is an after-tax realization of $60. The two eliminations decreased the entity’s net income by $120, which was allocated to the two equities as follows: To non-controlling interest (10% 3 120) To controlling interest (90% 3 120)

$ 12 108 $120

The consolidated retained earnings statement has been prepared in the normal manner. Because we are consolidating one year after acquisition, the parent’s retained earnings at the beginning of the year are equal to consolidated retained earnings on that date. The consolidated balance sheet was prepared by combining the assets and liabilities of the two companies and by making the following adjustments (shown in Exhibit 7.3 in boldface) for the equipment gain: The tax paid on the unrealized profits represents a prepayment from a consolidated viewpoint.

(i) When the before-tax gain of $300 is removed from the equipment, the resulting balance of $1,500 represents the original cost to the entity. The $120 increase to deferred income taxes represents the tax on this gain and corresponds to the reduction of tax expense in the income statement.

Accumulated depreciation is based on the original cost to the consolidated entity.

(ii) The amount of the gain contained in accumulated depreciation is removed. The resulting amount ($500) is the accumulated depreciation on the original cost. The $40 decrease to deferred income taxes corresponds to the increase in income tax expense made in the income statement. Note that the $200 reduction of the carrying amount of the equipment ($300 2 $100), together with an increase in deferred income taxes of $80 (40% 3 $200), results in total consolidated assets being reduced by $120, which corresponds to the reduction made to the entity’s net income in the consolidated income statement. The fact that this reduction was allocated to the two equities was noted above.

LO3

Equity Method Journal Entries Our example has assumed that Parent uses the cost method to for its investment. If Parent were using the equity method, the following journal entries would be made on December 31, Year 1:

The equity method captures the net effect of all consolidation entries.

Investment in Sub Inc. Investment income 90% of the net income of Sub Inc. (90% 3 1,700 5 1,530)

1,530 1,530


363


CHAPTER 7


Investment income Investment in Sub Inc. To hold back 90% of the after-tax equipment profit recorded by Sub (90% 3 180 5 162)

355

162 162

Investment in Sub Inc. Investment income To realize 90% of the after-tax profit realized by depreciation (90% 3 60 5 54)

54 54

After these entries are posted, the two related equity method s of Parent would show the following changes and balances: Investment in Sub Inc. Balance, January 1, Year 1 Income from Sub Inc. Equipment profit (held back) Equipment profit realized Balance, December 31, Year 1

Investment Income

$11,250 1,530 (162) 54 $12,672

$1,530 (162) 54 $1,422

Parent’s total income under the equity method would be $4,822, consisting of $3,400 from its own operations as reported in Exhibit 7.1 plus investment income of $1,422 as reported above. This income of $4,822 should be and is equal to consolidated net income attributable to the parent.

The investment is a balance sheet at the end of the year, whereas investment income is an income statement for one period of time. The parent’s income under the equity method should be equal to consolidated net income attributable to the parent.

Downstream Transaction If the sale of equipment had been from the parent to the subsidiary—a downstream transaction—the consolidated net income would be the same as before. The elimination of after-tax unrealized profits of $180 and subsequent realization of after-tax profit of $60 would be charged and credited, respectively, entirely to the parent. The non-controlling interest would not have been charged anything for the consolidation adjustments. Therefore, consolidated net income attributable to non-controlling interest would increase by $12 from $158 to $170. The consolidated net income attributable to the parent’s shareholders and the parent’s net income under the equity method would decrease by $12 (from $4,822 to $4,810) to offset the increase to the non-controlling interest.

ANALYSIS AND INTERPRETATION OF FINANCIAL STATEMENTS In this chapter, we prepared consolidated financial statements where there were unrealized profits from the intercompany sale of depreciable assets. The elimination entries were made on the consolidated financial statements. The net effect of the consolidation adjustments was captured in the parent’s internal records when the parent used the equity method. Exhibit 7.4 presents selected s from the Year 1 separate entity and consolidated financial statements that were developed for the intercompany transactions involving equipment. The first three columns present the statements when the intercompany transactions were upstream. In the last three columns, the intercompany transactions were downstream. The exhibit also indicates the debt-to-equity and return-on-equity ratios for each set of financial statements. The return on equity for all shareholders uses consolidated net income and total shareholders’ equity, including the non-controlling interests. The return on equity for shareholders of Parent uses consolidated net

LO4

The net income for the parent’s separate-entity income statement under the equity method is equal to consolidated net income attributable to the shareholders of the parent.


364


356

CHAPTER 7

EXHIBIT 7.4


Impact of Presentation Method on Debt-to-Equity and Return-on-Equity Ratios INCOME STATEMENTS—December 31, Year 1 Upstream Transaction

Investment income Net income Attributable to Shareholders of Parent Non-controlling interests

$

Parent Cost

Parent Equity

0 3,400

$ 1,422 4,822

Downstream Transaction

Consol. $

0 4,980

$

Parent Cost

Parent Equity

0 3,400

$ 1,410 4,810

$ 4,822 158

Consol. $

0 4,980

$ 4,810 170

BALANCE SHEETS—December 31, Year 1 Equipment Accumulated depreciation Investment in Sub Inc.

$ 1,800 (600) 11,250

$ 1,800 (600) 12,672

$ 1,500 (500) 0

$ 1,800 (600) 11,250

$ 1,800 (600) 12,660

$ 1,500 (500) 0

Liabilities Common shares Retained earnings Non-controlling interests Debt-to-equity Return on equity - for all shareholders - for shareholders of Parent

$12,000 15,000 13,400 0 0.42

$12,000 15,000 14,822 0 0.40

$21,000 15,000 14,822 1,408 0.67

$12,000 15,000 13,400 0 0.42

$12,000 15,000 14,810 0 0.40

$21,000 15,000 14,810 1,420 0.67

n/a 12.0%

n/a 16.2%

15.94% 16.2%

n/a 12.0%

n/a 16.14%

15.94% 16.14%

income attributable to the shareholders of Parent, and total shareholders’ equity excluding the non-controlling interests. Note the following from Exhibit 7.4: Retained earnings for the parent’s separate-entity balance sheet under the equity method are equal to consolidated retained earnings.


• The separate-entity statements under the cost method are the same for upstream and downstream transactions because the cost method does not record any adjustments pertaining to the subsidiary’s income or unrealized profits from intercompany transactions. • The separate-entity statements under the cost method are the same as the statements under the equity method except for the investment , investment income, and retained earnings. • Consolidated net income is the same regardless of whether the transactions where upstream or downstream. However, the split of the consolidated net income between the shareholders of the parent and the non-controlling interest is different. In turn, consolidated retained earnings and non-controlling interests are different, depending on whether the transactions were upstream or downstream. The separate-entity net income and retained earnings under the equity method are equal to consolidated net income attributable to the shareholders of Parent and consolidated retained earnings, respectively. • The return on equity for the separate-entity statements under the equity method is equal to the consolidated return on equity for the shareholders of Parent.


365


CHAPTER 7


• The return on equity for the downstream scenario is lower than the upstream scenario because the shareholders of Parent absorb the full charge when the unrealized profits are eliminated. • The solvency position looks worst on the consolidated financial statements because the subsidiary’s debt is included on the consolidated financial statements. This increases the debt-to-equity ratio.

357

The return on equity for the downstream scenario is lower than the upstream scenario because the shareholders of Parent absorb the full charge when the unrealized profits are eliminated.

Realization of Remaining Gain—Year 2 The equipment sold to the parent on July 1, Year 1, had a remaining life of 1½ years on that date. When the Year 1 consolidated income statement was prepared, both the holdback of the total gain and the realization of one-third of the gain took place. When the Year 2 consolidated income statement is prepared, adjustments will be made to realize the remaining two-thirds of the gain. This intercompany gain will be fully realized for consolidation purposes at the end of Year 2, only because the equipment had an unusually short remaining life of 1½ years on the date of the intercompany sale. The Year 2 financial statements for the two companies are shown in Exhibit 7.5. Before the consolidated financial statements are prepared, we must make the four calculations shown in Exhibit 7.6. In the first table in Exhibit 7.6, you should

EXHIBIT 7.5 INCOME STATEMENTS—for Year 2 Sales Depreciation expense Miscellaneous expenses Income tax expense Net income

Parent

Sub

$ 25,000 1,200 17,150 2,600 20,950 $ 4,050

$ 12,000 — 6,900 2,000 8,900 $ 3,100

The parent reports depreciation expense for one full year on its separateentity income statement.

RETAINED EARNINGS STATEMENTS—for Year 2 Balance, January 1 Net income Dividends Balance, December 31

Parent

Sub

$ 13,400 4,050 17,450 2,500 $ 14,950

$ 6,200 3,100 9,300 — $ 9,300


Sub

Assets (miscellaneous) Equipment Accumulated depreciation Investment in Sub Inc.

$ 32,700 1,800 (1,800) 11,250 $ 43,950

$ 28,300 — — — $ 28,300


$ 14,000 15,000 14,950 $ 43,950

$ 11,000 8,000 9,300 $ 28,300

The parent reports accumulated depreciation for 1½ years on its separateentity balance sheet.


366


358

CHAPTER 7


EXHIBIT 7.6 EQUIPMENT GAIN—SUB INC. SELLING

Differentiate between adjustments for a period of time (i.e., for Year 2) versus a point in time (i.e., at the end of Year 2).

Gain, July 1, Year 1 Less realized by depreciation for Year 1 Balance unrealized at Dec. 31, Year 1 Less realized by depreciation for Year 2 Balance unrealized at Dec. 31, Year 2

This schedule shows the calculation for a period of time, that is, for Year 2.

Net income—Parent Co. Net Income—Sub Inc. Add after-tax equipment gain realized by depreciation (d) Adjusted net income—Sub Inc. Consolidated net income

Before tax

40% tax

After tax

$300 100 200 200 $–0–

$120 40 80 80 $ –0–

$180 (a) 60 (b) 120 (c) 120 (d) $ –0–

CALCULATION OF CONSOLIDATED NET INCOME—for Year 2 $ 4,050 3,100 120 3,220 $ 7,270


$ 6,948 (e) 322 (f)

CALCULATION OF CONSOLIDATED RETAINED EARNINGS at January 1, Year 2 This schedule shows the calculation at a point in time, that is, at the beginning of Year 2, which is the same as the end of Year 1.

Retained earnings—Parent Co. Retained earnings—Sub Inc. Acquisition retained earnings Increase since acquisition Less unrealized after-tax equipment gain, Jan. 1 (c) Adjusted increase since acquisition Parent Co.’s share Consolidated retained earnings

$13,400 6,200 4,500 1,700 120 1,580 90%

1,422 $14,822 (g)

CALCULATION OF NON-CONTROLLING INTEREST at December 31, Year 2 At the end of Year 2, the intercompany gain has been fully realized and no adjustment is necessary from a consolidated viewpoint.

Common shares—Sub Inc. Retained earnings—Sub Inc. Non-controlling interest’s share

$ 8,000 9,300 17,300 10% $ 1,730 (h)

note that the $300 gain on sale in Year 1 is fully realized from a consolidated perspective by the end of Year 2. From a consolidated perspective, the $300 gain was eliminated in Year 1 but was realized by adjusting depreciation expense over the remaining life of the equipment. Since the remaining life of the equipment was only 1½ years at the date of the intercompany sale, the $300 gain was brought into consolidated income over 1½ years. If the remaining useful life were five years, the $300 gain would be brought into consolidated income over five years. The Year 2 consolidated financial statements prepared using the direct approach are shown in Exhibit 7.7. (Eliminations required for the intercompany equipment gain are shown in boldface.)


367


CHAPTER 7


359

EXHIBIT 7.7 Year 2 Consolidated Statements Adjusted for Intercompany Equipment Profit (Direct Approach) PARENT COMPANY CONSOLIDATED INCOME STATEMENT for the Year Ended December 31, Year 2

Net income

$37,000 1,000 24,050 4,680 29,730 $ 7,270

Attributable to Shareholders of Parent (6e) Non-controlling interest (6f)

$ 6,948 322

Sales (25,000 1 12,000) Depreciation expense (1,200 1 0 2 [6d] 200) Miscellaneous expenses (17,150 1 6,900) Income tax expense (2,600 1 2,000 1 [6d] 80)

Depreciation expense for one year is based on the original cost to the consolidated entity.


$14,822 6,948 21,770 2,500 $19,270


PARENT COMPANY CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET at December 31, Year 2 Assets—miscellaneous (32,700 1 28,300) Equipment (1,800 1 0 2 [6a] 300) Accumulated depreciation (1,800 1 0 2 [6b 1 6d] 300)

$61,000 1,500 (1,500) $61,000

Liabilities (14,000 1 11,000) Common shares Retained earnings Non-controlling interest (6h)

$25,000 15,000 19,270 1,730 $61,000

When the consolidated income statement is prepared, the depreciation expense is reduced by $200. The result is a consolidated depreciation expense of $1,000 based on the consolidated entity’s cost. This adjustment realizes $200 of the equipment gain for consolidation purposes. Income tax expense is increased by $80 to match expense with the gain realized. The net effect of the two adjustments in the income statement is to increase the consolidated entity’s net income by an after-tax realization amounting to $120. The Year 2 consolidated retained earnings statement is prepared using the calculated January 1 balance, consolidated net income attributable to the parent, and the dividends of Parent Company.

Accumulated depreciation is total depreciation taken to the end of Year 2, based on the original cost to the consolidated entity.


368


360

CHAPTER 7


At the end of Year 2, the equipment’s carrying amount is zero on Parent’s separateentity balance sheet and on the consolidated balance sheet.

The unrealized profit at the end of Year 1 was realized in income for Year 2.

Two adjustments are required in the preparation of the consolidated balance sheet. A reduction of $300 in equipment removes the gain and restates the equipment to the $1,500 historical cost to the entity. This equipment is fully depreciated on December 31, Year 2; therefore, accumulated depreciation should be equal to the historical cost of $1,500. When the accumulated depreciation is reduced by $300, the resulting balance ($1,500) is equal to the entity’s historical cost. Note that when both the equipment and the accumulated depreciation are reduced by $300, total consolidated assets are not changed. The net gain held back on the Year 1 consolidated balance sheet has been realized as at the end of Year 2. If no unrealized gains are being held back, there will be no deferred income tax adjustments made in the consolidated balance sheet. The deferred charge of $80 that appeared in the December 31, Year 1, consolidated balance sheet became an expense in the Year 2 consolidated income statement. As discussed above, the adjustments made in the consolidated income statement increased the entity’s net income by $120, while the adjustments made in the asset side of the consolidated balance sheet did not change total assets. In order for this to balance out, there must have been both an increase and a decrease of $120 on the liability side of the consolidated balance sheet. The $120 increase occurred in the income statement and was allocated to the two equities in the balance sheet. The $120 decrease occurred in Sub’s retained earnings at the beginning of the year and was allocated to the two equities. In the calculation of consolidated retained earnings in Exhibit 7.6, Parent absorbs $108 (90% 3 120). In the schedule below, which shows the changes in non-controlling interest for the year, we see that the remaining $12 (10% 3 120) decreases noncontrolling interest. CHANGES IN NON-CONTROLLING INTEREST—for Year 2 Sub Inc.: Common shares Retained earnings, Jan. 1

Less after-tax equipment profit (6c) Adjusted NCI is affected by the realization of the gain in Year 2, even though Parent recorded the excess depreciation.

Non-controlling interest Jan. 1 Year 2 entity net income allocated (6f) Non-controlling interest, Dec. 31 (6h)

$8,000 6,200 14,200 120 14,080 10% 1,408 322 $1,730

Equity Method Journal Entries If Parent had been using the equity method, the following journal entries would have been made on December 31, Year 2: Investment in Sub Inc. Investment income 90% of Sub Inc.’s Year 2 net income (90% 3 3,100 5 2,790) Investment in Sub Inc. Investment income 90% of the portion of the after-tax equipment gain realized by depreciation in Year 2 (90% 3 120 5 108)

2,790 2,790 108 108


369


CHAPTER 7


361

After these entries are posted, the two related equity method s of Parent show the following changes and balances:

Balance, January 1, Year 2 Income from Sub Inc. Equipment gain realized Balance, December 31, Year 2

Investment in Sub Inc.

Investment income

$12,672 2,790 108 $15,570

$2,790 108 $2,898

The investment contains all adjustments to the end of the period, whereas the investment income contains adjustments for only one period.

Intercompany Sale of a Used Depreciable Asset In the preceding illustration, the equipment sold by Sub was a new asset. As such, Sub had not yet recorded any accumulated depreciation, and the cost to Sub was the same as the carrying amount on the date of the intercompany sale. Let us now consider the sale of a used depreciable asset, that is, an asset with accumulated depreciation. Assume that Sub had acquired the equipment for $5,000 three-and-one-half years prior to the intercompany sale, and had been depreciating it over an estimated useful life of five years. The accumulated depreciation on July 1, Year 1, would have been $3,500 and the carrying amount would have been $1,500. Sub would have made the following entry when it sold the equipment to Parent for $1,800: Cash Accumulated depreciation Equipment Gain on sale of equipment

1,800 3,500 5,000 300

All of the previous calculations of unrealized gains and excess depreciation would be the same for this situation. However, the consolidated balance sheet at the end of Year 1 should reflect the equipment at $5,000, the original cost to the consolidated entity, and accumulated depreciation at $4,000, the amount that would have appeared on Sub’s books had the intercompany transaction not occurred. Therefore, the following journal entry should be made in the consolidation working papers at the end of Year 1 to gross up the equipment and accumulated depreciation: Equipment Accumulated depreciation

3,500 3,500

This entry does not change the carrying amount of the equipment but does change the cost and accumulated depreciation on the consolidated balance sheet. This entry should be made on the consolidation working papers year after year as long as Parent has this equipment on its separate-entity books. Appendix 7A of this chapter illustrates the consolidation adjustments relating to an intercompany sale of a depreciable asset when the parent company periodically revalues its equipment to fair value under IAS 16.

Comparison of Realization of Inventory and Equipment Profits over a Two-Year Period In Chapter 6, the holdback and realization of an intercompany profit in inventory was illustrated. In this chapter, we have illustrated the holdback and realization of an intercompany gain in equipment. In both cases, the after-tax profit (gain)

Equipment and accumulated depreciation need to be grossed up to the original cost to the consolidated entity.


370


362

CHAPTER 7


was $180 (60% 3 300), and the subsidiary was the selling company. The following summarizes the effect on the entity’s net income over a two-year period: INTERCOMPANY INVENTORY PROFIT The intercompany profits are eventually realized from a consolidated viewpoint.

Parent Co., net income Sub Inc., net income

After-tax profit (held back) realized Net income—consolidated entity Allocated to the two equities: Non-controlling interest Shareholders of parent

Year 1

Year 2

Total

$3,400 1,700 5,100 (180) $4,920

$4,050 3,100 7,150 180 $7,330

$7,450 4,800 12,250 –0– $12,250

$ 152 4,768 $4,920

$ 328 7,002 $7,330

$ 480 11,770 $12,250

INTERCOMPANY EQUIPMENT GAIN Intercompany profits on depreciable assets are realized as the assets are used over their useful lives.

Parent Co., net income Sub Inc., net income After-tax gain (held back) After-tax gain realized Net income—consolidated entity Allocated as follows: Non-controlling interest Shareholders of parent

Year 1

Year 2

Total

$3,400 1,700 5,100 (180) 60 $4,980

$4,050 3,100 7,150 –0– 120 $7,270

$ 7,450 4,800 12,250 (180) 180 $12,250

$ 158 4,822 $4,980

$ 322 6,948 $7,270

$

480 11,770 $12,250

The two-year summaries just shown help illustrate a number of significant points in relation to consolidated financial statements: Differentiate between pointin-time (balance sheet) and period-of-time (income statement) adjustments.

1. The consolidated entity’s net income is measured for periods of time that are usually one year in length. 2. During this measurement process, the holdback and subsequent realization of profits (losses) resulting from intercompany transactions takes place. 3. The realization of previously held back profits (losses) occurs during the period in which the acquiring company either sells the asset containing the profit (loss) to outsiders or depreciates the asset, thereby consuming the asset while it produces other products or services for outsiders. 4. If we examine a time period longer than one year, and if, at the end of that period, the assets of the constituent companies do not contain intercompany profits, the following becomes evident: The consolidated entity’s net income for this longer period consists of (a) the reported net income of the parent company, exclusive of intercompany investment or dividend income, (b) plus the reported net income of the subsidiary company (or companies), (c) minus the acquisition-differential amortization. In the illustration above, we assumed that the acquisition differential was zero.


CHAPTER 7


371

363

5. The entity’s net income measurement for this longer time period is not affected by the fact that assets were sold at intercompany profits (losses) during the period. (See the two-year total column.) The same is true of the allocation to the two equities. 6. When consolidated statements are prepared at the end of an intervening time period (e.g., Year 1, Year 2) we have to determine whether there were profits (losses) recorded by any of the constituent companies that were not realized by the end of the period. 7. The profit holdbacks and realizations are used in the measurement of the consolidated entity’s net income and are adjustments to the reported net income of the selling constituent in the allocation of that net income. In Chapter 6, we also illustrated the holdback and realization of a $180 aftertax intercompany gain in land. In that case, the realization process took place in Year 8; however, the overall concepts discussed above remain the same. See Self-Study Problem 1 for a comprehensive consolidation problem involving intercompany profits in depreciable assets. It includes most of the issues we have covered so far in this chapter.

(B) INTERCOMPANY BONDHOLDINGS

Adjustments for unrealized and realized profits from intercompany transactions are always charged or credited to the original seller.

LO5

Our discussions so far have focused on gains (losses) resulting from the intercompany sale of inventory, land, and depreciable assets. The treatment of these gains (losses) in the preparation of consolidated financial statements can be summarized as follows: Gains (losses) resulting from the intercompany sale of assets are realized subsequent to the recording of the intercompany transaction by the selling . Occasionally, one will purchase all or a portion of the bonds issued by another . When consolidated financial statements are being prepared, the elimination of the intercompany s (investment in bonds and bonds payable, interest revenue and interest expense) may result in a gain (loss) being reflected in those statements. The treatment of this type of gain (loss) can be summarized in the following manner: Gains (losses) arising because of the elimination of intercompany bondholding s are realized prior to the recording of these gains (losses) by the s on their separate-entity statements. Before we examine how these gains and losses occur in the elimination of the intercompany s, let us look at intercompany bondholding situations that do not result in gains or losses.

Gains or losses on intercompany bondholdings are reported on consolidated statements prior to recording them on the separate-entity statements.

Intercompany Bondholdings—No Gain or Loss Not all intercompany bondholdings result in gains or losses being reflected in the consolidated statements. For example, let us assume that one issued $10,000 in bonds and that another acquired the whole issue. (The amounts used are unrealistically low for a bond issue but are realistic in relation to the size of Parent Company and Sub Inc., the two companies that we have been using in our illustrations. In any case, the concepts are the same regardless of the amounts used.) Immediately after the issue, the records of the two companies would show the following s: Acquiring ’s Records Investment in bonds

Issuing ’s Records 10,000

Bonds payable

10,000

The asset and liability appear on the separate-entity financial statements.


372


364

CHAPTER 7


From the entity’s point of view, the two s are similar to intercompany receivables and payables and would be eliminated by the following working paper entry when the consolidated balance sheet is being prepared: This entry is made on the consolidation working papers.

Bonds payable Investment in bonds

10,000 10,000

It is important to note that the eliminations are equal, and because of this, there is no gain or loss resulting from the working paper elimination of these two intercompany s. At the end of each succeeding year, this working paper elimination is repeated until the bonds mature. After that date, the two s no longer exist in the s’ records and further working paper eliminations are not required. The consolidated balance sheet is not the only statement requiring working paper eliminations. If we assume that the bonds pay interest at the rate of 10%, the income statement of the issuing will show interest expense of $1,000, while the income statement of the acquiring will show interest revenue of $1,000. These intercompany revenue and expense s are eliminated by the following working paper entry when the consolidated income statement is being prepared: This entry does not change the net income of the consolidated entity.

Interest revenue Interest expense

1,000 1,000

Again, it is important to note that the amounts are equal and that because of this, there is no gain or loss resulting from this working paper elimination. The consolidated income statement working paper elimination is repeated each year until the bonds mature. Our example has assumed that the bonds were issued at par. Suppose, now, that the bonds were issued to the purchasing at a or a discount. Provided that both s use the same methods to amortize the issue or discount and the purchase or discount, the amounts in the intercompany s on all successive balance sheets and income statements will be equal. The important concept of equal eliminations on both statements would still be true.

Intercompany Bondholdings—with Gain or Loss The market price of bonds moves inversely with changes in interest rates.

When the market rate is different from the coupon rate on the date of a bond issue, the bonds will be issued at a price that is different from the par or face value. If the interest rates are higher (lower) than the coupon rate, the bonds will be issued at a discount (). Subsequent to the issue, bond market prices will rise (fall) if the market interest rate falls (rises). It is the market price differential on the date of an intercompany purchase, combined with any unamortized issue discount or , that causes the consolidated gains or losses that result from the elimination of intercompany bondholdings. Let us change our example slightly to illustrate this. Parent Co. has a $10,000 bond issue outstanding that pays 10% interest annually on December 31. The bonds were originally issued at a , which is being amortized by the company on a straight-line basis at the rate of $25 per year.2 On December 31, Year 1, the unamortized issue amounts to $100. The bonds mature on December 31, Year 5. On December 31, Year 1, Sub purchases all of the outstanding bonds of Parent on the open market at a cost of $9,800. Immediately after Sub acquires these bonds, the records of the two companies would show the following s:


373


CHAPTER 7


Sub Inc.’s Records

Parent Co.’s Records

Investment in bonds of Parent Co. Less discount on purchase Net

Bonds payable Add unamortized issue Net

$10,000 200 $ 9,800

$10,000

100 $10,100

365

Sub purchased the bonds in the market for $9,800, which is $300 less than the carrying amount of these bonds on Parent’s books.

The net amounts reflect how the asset and the liability would be presented on the respective balance sheets of the two companies on December 31, Year 1. The preparation of the consolidated balance sheet on this date would require the elimination of the two intercompany amounts by the following working paper entry: Bonds Payable—Parent Co. Investment in bonds of Parent Co.—Sub. Inc. Gain on bond retirement To eliminate the intercompany bond s and recognize the resulting gain on the retirement of bonds

10,100 9,800 300

The eliminations of the asset and the liability would appear in the consolidated balance sheet working paper. The balancing amount of the elimination entry “Gain on bond retirement” appears in the consolidated income statement working paper. From the consolidated entity’s point of view, the bonds of the entity have been purchased on the open market and retired. The retirement gain can be calculated in the following manner: Carrying amount of the bond liability Cost of purchasing bonds in the open market Gain on bond retirement

A gain of $300 is recorded on the consolidation working papers.

LO6 From the consolidated perspective, Parent’s bonds have been retired; Parent no longer has a bond payable to outsiders.

$10,100 9,800 $ 300

The gain should be recognized because the benefits and risks of the consolidated entity have substantially changed in a transaction with outsiders. From a consolidated perspective, the entity has retired a liability of $10,100 by paying $9,800. Its financial position has improved; the gain has been realized and should be recognized. Note that if Parent had acquired and retired its own bonds in the same manner, it would have recorded a gain on bond retirement of the same amount. This gain would appear on Parent’s income statement and would also appear on the consolidated income statement. The actual event was different (Sub purchased the bonds), but because the two companies are a single economic entity, the gain will still appear on the consolidated income statement. The only difference is that the gain on the consolidated income statement does not appear on the income statement of the parent. Instead, it appears on the consolidated income statement as a result of the unequal elimination of the intercompany asset and liability s in the preparation of the consolidated balance sheet. An examination of the makeup of the asset and liability s will indicate why there is a gain of $300. If the bonds had originally been issued at par (face value), and if they had been acquired on the open market at a price equal to par, there would be no gain on retirement. It is the unamortized issue and the discount on the bond purchase that cause the gain. This and discount will be amortized by the two companies in Years 2 to 5, and thus will be reflected in the individual income statements of the two companies in those future periods. This will become clearer when we examine the consolidation procedures in Year 2. The important point to note at this stage is that the constituent companies will pay tax on this gain in future periods when the actual recording of the gain takes place. The consolidated entity is realizing the gain in Year 1; therefore, this

The gain on bond retirement was realized on a transaction with outsiders.

The gain is reported on the consolidated statements, not on the single-entity statements.


374


366

CHAPTER 7


requires income tax allocation if a proper matching is to take place. Assuming a 40% tax rate, the following additional working paper elimination entry is required: Income tax expense is reported on the consolidated statements in accordance with the matching principle.

Income tax expense Deferred income tax liability To record the deferred income tax liability and expense on the Year 1 intercompany bond gain (40% 3 300 5 120)

120 120

The effect of the two eliminating entries on the Year 1 consolidated income is to increase the net income of the entity by $180 (300 2 120). The entity’s net income consists of the net income of the parent plus the net income of the subsidiary; therefore, the after-tax increase must affect one or the other, or perhaps both. Four possible approaches could be taken: There are various approaches to allocate the gain between the two companies.

1. Allocate the gain to the issuing company because the company purchasing the bonds is acting as an agent for the issuing company. (This approach is commonly referred to as the agency approach.) 2. Allocate the gain to the purchasing company because its investment led to the retirement of the bonds for consolidation purposes. 3. Allocate the gain to the parent company because its management controls the actions of all the d companies in the group. This would only be a separate alternative if both parties to the transaction were subsidiaries of that parent. 4. Allocate the gain between the issuing and purchasing companies because each will record its portion of the gain in future periods.

We will use approach 4 because it is consistent with the income measurement by the separate entities in future years.

LO7

An allocation of the gain would not be required in the case of 100%-owned subsidiaries because there would be no non-controlling interest in the consolidated financial statements. The approach adopted is very important when the subsidiaries are less than 100% owned because approaches 1, 2, and 4 could result in all or a portion of the gain being allocated to the subsidiary company, and this would affect non-controlling interest. IFRSs are silent regarding the approach to be taken. In the illustrations that follow, any gains (losses) from the elimination of intercompany bondholding will be allocated to the purchasing and issuing s (approach 4) because it reflects how each company will actually record the transaction in future years. The agency approach is briefly discussed in the section “Gains (Losses) Not Allocated to the Two Equities” later in this chapter.

Calculation of the Portion of the Gain Allocated to the s From the point of view of the purchasing , the cost of the acquisition is compared with the par value of the bonds acquired, the difference being a gain or loss. From the point of view of the issuing , the cost to retire the bonds is compared with the par value of the bonds; the difference between the par value and the carrying amount is the gain or loss. The gain and its allocation can be calculated in the following manner: Par (face) value of bond liability Cost of investment in bonds Gain allocated to purchasing —before tax

$10,000 9,800 $ 200

Carrying amount of bond liability Par (face) value of bond liability Gain allocated to issuing —before tax

$ 10,100 10,000 $ 100


375


CHAPTER 7


Note that the gain to the consolidated entity of $300 is made up of the two gains allocated to the s (200 1 100). The gain allocated to the purchasing is equal to the discount on the purchase ’s books, and the gain allocated to the issuing is equal to the on the issuing ’s books. Both the entity’s gain and the amounts allocated are expressed in before-tax dollars. The chart in Exhibit 7.8 is useful in calculating the after-tax amounts required when the entity’s after-tax net income is being allocated to the two equities. The Year 1 financial statements of the two companies are shown in Exhibit 7.9. Parent Co. has used the cost method to for its investment.

367

The $300 gain is allocated to the s based on the or discount on their separate-entity books.

EXHIBIT 7.8 ALLOCATION OF GAIN ON BOND Entity 40% tax

After tax

$300

$120

$180

$100

$40

$60

$200

$80

$120

(a)

(b)

(c)

(d)

(e)

(f)

(g)

(h)

(i)

Before tax Gain on bond retirement— Dec. 31, Year 1

Parent Co. Before 40% After tax tax tax

Sub Inc. Before 40% After tax tax Tax

This chart shows how the after-tax gains are allocated for consolidation purposes.

EXHIBIT 7.9 INCOME STATEMENTS—for Year 1 Sales Interest expense Miscellaneous expenses Income tax expense Net income

Parent

Sub

$ 20,000 975 13,425 2,200 16,600 $ 3,400

$ 8,000 — 5,200 1,100 6,300 $ 1,700

Sub has no interest revenue because it purchased the bonds on the last day of the year.

RETAINED EARNINGS STATEMENTS—for Year 1 Balance, January 1 Net income Dividends Balance, December 31

Parent

Sub

$ 12,000 3,400 15,400 2,000 $ 13,400

$ 4,500 1,700 6,200 — $ 6,200


Sub

Assets (miscellaneous) Investment in Parent Co. bonds Investment in Sub Inc.

$ 29,150 — 11,250 $ 40,400

$ 13,400 9,800 — $ 23,200

Miscellaneous liabilities Bonds payable Common shares Retained earnings

$ 1,900 10,100 15,000 13,400 $ 40,400

$ 9,000 — 8,000 6,200 $ 23,200

The investment in bonds and bonds payable are reported on the separate-entity balance sheets.


376


368

CHAPTER 7

Parent has interest expense of $975 on its separateentity books.


The net incomes and total assets of the two companies are unchanged from previous examples. However, the details on each statement have been changed to reflect the intercompany bond transaction that occurred on December 31, Year 1. that the intercompany bond purchase occurred on that date and that the interest expense of Parent for Year 1 relates to bonds held by bondholders outside the consolidated entity. The amount of expense ($975) is made up of the $1,000 interest paid, less the $25 amortization of the issue . Before the Year 1 consolidated financial statements are prepared, the three calculations in Exhibit 7.10 are made. Exhibit 7.11 illustrates the direct approach to the preparation of the Year 1 consolidated financial statements. Exhibit 7.8 , which was prepared to allocate the gain in both beforetax and after-tax dollars, was used in preparing the consolidated income

EXHIBIT 7.10 CALCULATION OF CONSOLIDATED NET INCOME—for Year 1 The gain on bond retirement is allocated to the two s as a consolidation adjustment.

Net income—Parent Co. Add after-tax bond gain allocated (8f) Adjusted Net income—Sub Inc. Add after-tax bond gain allocated (8i) Adjusted Consolidated net income

$ 3,400 60 3,460 1,700 120 1,820 $ 5,280


$ 5,098 (a) 182 (b)

CALCULATION OF NON-CONTROLLING INTEREST at December 31, Year 1 The gain allocated to Sub affects non-controlling interest at the end of the year.

Sub Inc. Common shares Retained earnings

$ 8,000 6,200 14,200 120 14,320 10% $ 1,432 (c)

Add after-tax bond gain allocated (8i) Adjusted Non-controlling interest’s ownership

CALCULATION OF CONSOLIDATED RETAINED EARNINGS at December 31, Year 1 This schedule shows the calculation at a point in time; that is, at the end of Year 1.

Retained earnings—Parent Co. Add after-tax bond gain allocated (8f) Adjusted Retained earnings—Sub Inc. Acquisition retained earnings Increase since acquisition Add after-tax bond gain allocated (8i) Adjusted Parent’s ownership

$13,400 60 13,460 6,200 4,500 1,700 120 1,820 90%

1,638 $15,098 (d)


377


CHAPTER 7


369

EXHIBIT 7.11 Year 1 Consolidated Statements Adjusted for Intercompany Bondholdings (Direct Approach) PARENT COMPANY CONSOLIDATED INCOME STATEMENT for the Year Ended December 31, Year 1 Sales (20,000 1 8,000) Gain on bond retirement (0 1 0 1 [8a] 300)

Net income

$28,000 300 28,300 975 18,625 3,420 23,020 $ 5,280

Attributable to Shareholders of Parent (10a) Non-controlling interest (10b)

$ 5,098 182

Interest expense (975 1 0) Miscellaneous expenses (13,425 1 5,200) Income tax expense (2,200 1 1,100 1 [8b] 120)

The gain on bond retirement appears on the consolidated income statement because the gain was realized with a transaction with outsiders.


$12,000 5,098 17,098 2,000 $15,098


PARENT COMPANY CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET at December 31, Year 1 Assets—miscellaneous (29,150 1 13,400) Investment in Parent Co. bonds (0 1 9,800 2 9,800)

$42,550 –0– $42,550

Miscellaneous liabilities (1,900 1 9,000) Bonds payable (10,100 1 0 2 10,100) Deferred income tax liability (0 1 0 1 [8b] 120) Total liabilities Common shares Retained earnings Non-controlling interest (10c)

$10,900 –0– 120 11,020 15,000 15,098 1,432 $42,550

statement and in calculating consolidated net income and retained earnings, as follows: 1. The entity column reflects the amounts used in preparing the consolidated income statement. Note that the after-tax column is not used because the before tax amount and the tax amount are adjusted separately.

The bonds payable are zero on the consolidated balance sheet because outsiders no longer hold them.


378


370

CHAPTER 7


2. Both of the allocation columns (Parent Co. and Sub Inc.) were used to calculate consolidated net income attributable to the parent and non-controlling interest for the year, and to calculate non-controlling interest and consolidated retained earnings at the end of the year, but only using after-tax amounts. This is because they are used to adjust the after-tax net incomes and equities of the two companies. The before-tax and tax columns are presented only to show that the columns cross-add. In summary, the eliminations made for the intercompany bondholdings had the following effect on the consolidated statements: 1. The elimination of $9,800 in assets and $10,100 in liabilities resulted in a $300 before-tax gain, which was reflected in the income statement. Income tax is accrued on the consolidated financial statements to match the gain on bond retirement.

The after-tax gain is allocated to non-controlling and controlling interests.

2. An increase of $120 (40% 3 300) to income tax expense and to a deferred tax liability reflected the tax effects of the gain. 3. The two adjustments in the income statement increased the net income of the entity by $180; this was allocated to the two equities in the balance sheet, as follows:

Gain allocated to Parent Co. Gain allocated to Sub Inc.

Total


Controlling interest

$ 60 120 $180

$— 12 $12

$ 60 108 $168

4. The adjustments made in preparing the consolidated balance sheet can be summarized conceptually as follows: Debit side: 2 9,800

Investment in bonds Credit side: Bonds payable Deferred income tax liability Non-controlling interest Retained earnings

210,100 1 120 1 12 1 168 2 9,800

Equity Method Journal Entries If Parent used the equity method, the following entries would be made on December 31, Year 1: These entries capture the net effect of all consolidation adjustments.

Investment in Sub Inc. Investment income 90% of the Year 1 net income of Sub Inc. (90% 3 1,700 5 1,530) Investment in Sub Inc. Investment income Bond gain allocated to Parent Co. Investment in Sub Inc. Investment income 90% of bond gain allocated to Sub Inc. (90% 3 120 5 108)

1,530 1,530

60 60

108 108


379


CHAPTER 7


371

The related equity method s of Parent will show the following changes and balances in Year 1: Investment in Sub Inc. January 1, Year 1 Changes during Year 1 Income from Sub Inc. Bond gain to parent 90% of bond gain to subsidiary Balance, December 31, Year 1

Investment Income The investment contains cumulative adjustments to the end of the period, whereas the investment income contains adjustments for only one period.

$11,250 1,530 60 108 $12,948

$1,530 60 108 $1,698

ing for Gain in Subsequent Years We will now focus on Year 2 so that we can illustrate the consolidation eliminations that must be made in years subsequent to the original intercompany bond purchase. At the end of Year 2, the two companies prepared the financial statements shown in Exhibit 7.12. Focus initially on the items “interest revenue”3 and “interest expense,” which each company recorded in the following manner: Parent Company

Sub Inc.

1,000 Interest expense Cash To record payment of Year 2 interest Bonds payable Interest expense To amortize issue (100 4 4 5 25)

1,000

25 25

Cash 1,000 Interest revenue To record receipt of Year 2 interest Investment in bonds of Parent Co. Interest revenue To amortize discount on the purchase of bonds (200 4 4 5 50)

1,000

These entries are made on the separate-entity books of Parent and Sub.

50 50

Note that the entries recording the amortization of the issue and the purchase discount increased the respective net incomes of the two companies. The $25 of income reported by Parent is equal to one-quarter of the gain that was attributed to Parent from a consolidated point of view on December 31, Year 1, from the deemed retirement of the bonds. In the same manner, the $50 of income reported by Sub is equal to one-quarter of the gain that was attributed to Sub from a consolidated point of view on December 31, Year 1, from the deemed retirement of the bonds. Because the bonds mature four years after the date of the intercompany purchase and because the original gain on bond retirement was created due to the existence of the unamortized issue and the discount on the intercompany purchase of bonds (100 1 200 5 300), the concept that the gain is realized on the consolidated financial statements before it is recorded by the constituent companies becomes evident. Both Sub’s interest revenue of $1,050 (1,000 1 50) and Parent’s interest expense of $975 (1,000 2 25) represent intercompany revenues and expenses that

The income resulting from the and discount amortization, which is being reported by the separate entities, has already been reported on the consolidated financial statements.


380


372

CHAPTER 7


EXHIBIT 7.12 INCOME STATEMENTS—for Year 2

The separate-entity income statements show interest revenue and expense for bonds that were retired from a consolidated viewpoint.

Sales Interest revenue

Interest expense Miscellaneous expenses Income tax expense Net income

Parent

Sub

$25,000 — 25,000 975 17,375 2,600 20,950 $ 4,050

$10,950 1,050 12,000 — 6,900 2,000 8,900 $ 3,100

RETAINED EARNINGS STATEMENTS—for Year 2


Parent

Sub

$13,400 4,050 17,450 2,500 $14,950

$ 6,200 3,100 9,300 — $ 9,300

BALANCE SHEETS—at December 31, Year 2

The separate-entity balance sheets show investment and bonds payable for bonds that were retired from a consolidated viewpoint.

Parent

Sub

Assets (miscellaneous) Investment in Parent Co. bonds Investment in Sub Inc.

$32,700 — 11,250 $43,950

$18,450 9,850 — $28,300

Miscellaneous liabilities Bonds payable Common shares Retained earnings

$ 3,925 10,075 15,000 14,950 $43,950

$11,000 — 8,000 9,300 $28,300

are eliminated on the Year 2 consolidated income statement with the following incomplete working paper entry: The difference between interest revenue and interest expense is due to the difference in amortization of the bond and discount.

Interest revenue Interest expense To eliminate Year 2 intercompany interest revenue and expense

1,050 975

In past examples, the elimination of intercompany revenues and expenses (sales and purchases, rental revenue and expense, etc.) had no effect on the net income of the entity because the amounts eliminated were always equal. Referring back to the journal entries made by both companies, you will see that this equal component is still present. We are still eliminating $1,000 in interest revenue and expense in the working paper elimination. However, we are also eliminating the portions of the gain on bond retirement that were recorded by both companies as


381


CHAPTER 7


a result of the amortization of the and discount in Year 2. Failure to do this would result in the gain on bond retirement being recorded twice over the life of the bonds. It is because we do not allow this portion of the gain to be reflected in the Year 2 consolidated income statement that we have an unequal elimination of intercompany revenue and expense on the working paper elimination entry. The elimination of $1,050 intercompany interest revenue and $975 intercompany interest expense decreases the before-tax net income of the entity by $75. We will describe this reduction of the entity’s before-tax net income as the “interest elimination loss.” The realization of a gain on bond retirement on the consolidated income statement in the year of acquisition of intercompany bonds will always result in an interest elimination loss affecting the entity’s before-tax net income in all subsequent consolidated income statements until the bonds mature. This interest elimination loss does not appear as such in the consolidated income statement because it results from eliminating an amount of intercompany interest revenue that is larger than the amount of intercompany interest expense eliminated. Conversely, the realization of a loss on bond retirement in the year of acquisition of intercompany bonds will always result in an “interest elimination gain” in all subsequent consolidated income statements because the amount of interest expense eliminated will always be larger than the amount of interest revenue eliminated. As stated previously, the entity’s Year 2, before-tax net income has been decreased by $75. This results from eliminating the portion of the gain on bond retirement recorded by the constituent companies in Year 2. Recall that the entire before-tax gain was realized for consolidated purposes in Year 1; also recall that to satisfy the matching principle an income tax expense was recorded and a deferred tax liability was set up on the consolidated balance sheet. Both companies paid (or accrued) income tax on a portion of this gain in Year 2—a total of $30 (75 3 40%). These companies also recorded the income tax paid (or accrued) as an expense, but from a consolidated point of view, the payment was a reduction of the deferred tax liability previously set up. We must therefore decrease income tax expense when preparing the consolidated income statement because it is not a consolidated expense.4 The incomplete income statement working paper elimination entry is as follows: Interest revenue Interest expense Income tax expense To eliminate Year 2 intercompany interest revenue and expense and to adjust for the income tax effect of the elimination

1,050 975 30

The addition of the income tax expense entry still leaves us with an unequal elimination on the consolidated income statement. However, this interest elimination loss is now in after-tax dollars and amounts to $45 (1,050 2 975 2 30). A reconstruction of the intercompany bond chart for the life of the bonds as shown in Exhibit 7.13 will illustrate how this loss is allocated to the two constituents each year. To further illustrate this, examine the interest s of the two companies from the date of the intercompany purchase to the date of maturity of the bonds.

373

The intercompany interest must be eliminated on consolidation to avoid double counting of income pertaining to the bonds.

Income tax expense must be eliminated on consolidation to match with the elimination of the interest revenue and interest expense.


382


374

CHAPTER 7


EXHIBIT 7.13 ALLOCATION OF GAIN ON BOND

The interest elimination loss for each year is equal to the amortization of the bond and bond discount on the separate-entity books.

By the end of Year 5, the cumulative income recorded on the separate-entity books of Parent and Sub is equal to the $300 gain on bond retirement that was reported in the Year 1 consolidated income statement.

Entity Parent Co. Sub Inc. Before 40% After Before 40% After Before 40% After tax tax tax tax tax tax tax tax tax Gain on bond, Dec. 31, Year 1 Interest elimination loss—Year 2 Balance—gain— Dec. 31, Year 2 Interest elimination loss—Year 3 Balance—gain— Dec. 31, Year 3 Interest elimination loss—Year 4 Balance—gain— Dec. 31, Year 4 Interest elimination loss—Year 5 Balance, Dec. 31, Year 5

$300 $120 $180 $100

$ 40 $

60 $200

$ 80 $120 (a)

75

30

45

25

10

15

50

20

30 (b)

225

90

135

75

30

45

150

60

90 (c)

75

30

45

25

10

15

50

20

30

150

60

90

50

20

30

100

40

60

75

30

45

25

10

15

50

20

30

75

30

45

25

10

15

50

20

30

75

30

45

25

10

15

50

20

30

$–0–

$–0–

$–0–

$–0–

$–0–

$–0–

$–0–

$–0–

$–0–

Year ended Dec. 31

Parent’s interest expense

Sub’s interest revenue

Difference


$ 975 975 975 975 $3,900

$1,050 1,050 1,050 1,050 $4,200

$ 75 75 75 75 $300

The preparation of a bond chart would be the first step in the preparation of the Year 2 consolidated statements. This chart would have the same format as the one shown above but would comprise only the first three lines from that particular chart. Before the Year 2 consolidated financial statements are prepared, the three calculations in Exhibit 7.14 are made. The Year 2 consolidated financial statements prepared using the direct approach are shown in Exhibit 7.15. The unequal elimination of the intercompany interest revenue and expense and the income tax adjustment made in the preparation of the consolidated income statement were explained earlier. This created the “hidden” after-tax interest elimination loss of $45 in this statement. This loss is depicted and allocated in the chart above. The eliminations made in the preparation of the Year 2 consolidated balance sheet require elaboration. The item “Investment in Parent Co. bonds” in the balance sheet of Sub has a balance of $9,850 after the Year 2 amortization of the discount on purchase (9,800 1 50). Bonds payable in the balance sheet of Parent Co. has a balance of $10,075 after the Year 2 amortization on


383


CHAPTER 7


375

EXHIBIT 7.14 CALCULATION OF CONSOLIDATED NET INCOME—Year 2 Net income—Parent Co. Less after-tax interest elimination loss allocated (13b) Adjusted Net income—Sub Inc. Less after-tax interest elimination loss allocated (13b) Adjusted Consolidated net income

$ 4,050 15 4,035

The interest elimination loss is allocated to Parent and Sub based on Exhibit 7.13.

3,100 30

3,070 $ 7,105


$ 6,798 (a) 307 (b)

CALCULATION OF CONSOLIDATED RETAINED EARNINGS at January 1, Year 2 Retained earnings—Parent Co. Add after-tax bond gain allocated (Dec. 31, Year 1) (13a) Adjusted Retained earnings—Sub Inc. Acquisition retained earnings Increase since acquisition Add after-tax bond gain allocated (Dec. 31, Year 1) (13a) Adjusted Parent Co. ownership Consolidated retained earnings

$13,400 60 13,460 6,200 4,500 1,700 120 1,820 90%

This schedule shows the calculation at a point in time; that is, at the beginning of Year 2, which is the same as at the end of Year 1.

1,638 $15,098 (c)

CALCULATION OF NON-CONTROLLING INTEREST at December 31, Year 2 Sub Inc. Common shares Retained earnings Add after-tax bond gain allocated as at Dec. 31, Year 2 (13c) Adjusted shareholders’ equity Non-controlling interest’s ownership

$ 8,000 9,300 17,300 90 17,390 10% $ 1,739 (d)

When the consolidated balance sheet is being prepared, these two intercompany s are eliminated by the following incomplete entry: Bonds payable Investment in Parent Co. bonds To eliminate the intercompany bonds on December 31, Year 2

10,075 9,850

This entry is somewhat similar to the entry made on December 31, Year 1 (see under the section “Intercompany Bondholdings—with Gain or Loss”) except that the before-tax amount needed to balance at this time is a gain of $225 instead of the $300 gain that was required a year ago. Furthermore, the $225 gain does not appear as such in the consolidated income statement in Year 2. Recall that the $300 gain appeared on the Year 1 consolidated income statement. A gain on bond retirement appears as such only once in the year of the intercompany purchase. Recall also that

Only the portion of the gain on bond retirement allocated to Sub affects noncontrolling interest.

This entry eliminates the bonds payable and investment in bonds but is not yet complete.


384


376

CHAPTER 7


EXHIBIT 7.15 Year 2 Consolidated Statements Adjusted for Intercompany Bondholdings (Direct Approach) PARENT COMPANY CONSOLIDATED INCOME STATEMENT for the Year Ended December 31, Year 2 There was no interest revenue earned from outsiders and no interest expense paid to outsiders during the year.

Sales (25,000 1 10,950) Interest revenue (0 1 1,050 2 1,050)

Net income

$35,950 –0– 35,950 –0– 24,275 4,570 28,845 $ 7,105

Attributable to Shareholders of Parent (14a) Non-controlling interest (14b)

$ 6,798 307

Interest expense (975 1 0 2 975) Miscellaneous expenses (17,375 1 6,900) Income tax expense (2,600 1 2,000 2 [13b] 30)

PARENT COMPANY CONSOLIDATED RETAINED EARNINGS STATEMENT for the Year Ended December 31, Year 2 Balance, January 1 (14c) Net income

$15,098 6,798 21,896 2,500 $19,396


PARENT COMPANY CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET at December 31, Year 2 There is no bond payable to outsiders and no investment in bonds by outsiders at the end of the year.

At the end of Year 2, the deferred tax liability is the 40% tax on the difference between income recognized for consolidation purposes ($300) and income recognized by the separate entities ($75).

Assets—miscellaneous (32,700 1 18,450) Investment in Parent Co. bonds (0 1 9,850 2 9,850)

$51,150 –0– $51,150

Miscellaneous liabilities (3,925 1 11,000) Bonds payable (10,075 1 0 2 10,075) Deferred income tax liability (0 1 0 1 [13c] 90) Total liabilities Shareholders’ equity Common shares Retained earnings Non-controlling interest (14d)

$14,925 –0– 90 15,015 15,000 19,396 1,739 $51,150

Recall also that a portion of the gain was recorded in Year 2 by Parent and Sub, was eliminated in preparing the Year 2 consolidated income statement and is not reflected again. The $225 needed to balance this journal entry is, therefore, a credit of $300 to retained earnings at the beginning of Year 2 and the combined effect of $75 from eliminating the intercompany interest revenue and interest expense pertaining to the bonds. The bond chart (see Exhibit 7.13) indicates that the entity’s deferred


385


CHAPTER 7


377

with respect to this gain is $90 as at this date. We can now extend the working paper entry by including the deferred tax component as follows: Bonds payable Investment in Parent Co. bonds Deferred income tax liability To eliminate the intercompany bond s and set up the deferred tax liability as at December 31, Year 2

10,075 9,850 90

The after-tax gain needed to balance is now $135. The bond chart (see Exhibit 7.13) shows this gain as allocated $45 to Parent and $90 to Sub. To summarize, the Year 2 elimination entries made for the intercompany bondholdings had the following effect on the consolidated statements: 1. The adjustments made in the income statement created an after-tax interest elimination loss of $45, which decreased the entity’s net income and was allocated to the two equities as follows:

Loss allocated to Parent Co. Loss allocated to Sub Inc.

Total



$15 30 $45

$— 3 $ 3

$15 27 $42

2. The elimination of $9,850 in assets and $10,075 in bond liabilities, together with the adjustment to reflect the $90 deferred tax liability, resulted in an aftertax increase of $135 in the equity side of the balance sheet. This was allocated to the two equities, at December 31, Year 2, as follows: Total Gain allocated to Parent Co. Gain allocated to Sub Inc.

$ 45 90 $135



$— 9 $ 9

$ 45 81 $126

The interest elimination loss for the year is first allocated to Parent and Sub and then to non-controlling and controlling interests for the year.

The difference between gain on bond retirement and interest elimination loss for all years to date is first allocated to Parent and Sub and then to non-controlling and controlling interests at the end of the year.

that the original $300 gain in Year 1 was allocated to the two equities in the consolidated balance sheet as at December 31, Year 1 (see Exhibit 7.8). 3. The adjustments made in the preparation of both the December 31, Year 2, balance sheet and the Year 2 income statement can be summarized conceptually with respect to their effect on the consolidated balance sheet as follows: Asset side: Investment in bonds Liability side: Bonds payable Deferred income tax liability Non-controlling interest Balance, Dec. 31, Year 1 Year 2 entity net income Consolidated retained earnings Balance, Dec. 31, Year 1 Year 2 entity net income

2 $ 9,850 2 $10,075 1 90 1 12 2 3

1

9

1168 2 42

1

126 $ 9,850

The $126 increase in consolidated retained earnings is automatically reflected when the consolidated income and retained earnings statements are prepared.

This chart shows the adjustments to the consolidated balance sheet at the end of Year 2.


386


378

CHAPTER 7


The $9 increase in non-controlling interest is captured in the calculation of the amount of this equity (preceding item 2).

Equity Method Journal Entries If Parent has used the equity method, the following entries will be made on December 31, Year 2:

These entries should cause Parent’s separate-entity income under the equity method to be equal to consolidated net income attributable to Parent’s shareholders.

Investment in Sub Inc. Investment income 90% of the Year 2 net income of Sub Inc. (90% 3 3,100 5 2,790)

2,790 2,790

Investment income Investment in Sub Inc. Interest elimination loss allocated to Parent Co.

15

Investment income Investment in Sub Inc. 90% of interest elimination loss allocated to Sub Inc. (90% 3 30 5 27)

27

15

27

The related equity method s of Parent will show the following changes and balances in Year 2: Investment in Sub Inc. The investment under the equity method ($15,696) is different than the investment under the cost method ($11,250 as per page 372).

December 31, Year 1 Change during Year 2 Income from Sub Inc. Interest loss to parent 90% of interest loss to subsidiary Balance, December 31, Year 2

Investment income

$12,948 2,790 (15) (27) $15,696

$2,790 (15) (27) $2,748

Less Than 100% Purchase of ’s Bonds Our example assumed that Sub purchased 100% of Parent’s bonds for $9,800 on December 31, Year 1. Suppose we changed the assumption so that only 40% of Parent’s bonds were purchased, for $3,920. The elimination needed to prepare the Year 1 consolidated statements would be as follows: A gain on bond retirement is recognized only on the portion of the bonds being retired from a consolidated perspective.

Bonds payable (40% 3 10,100) Investment in bonds of Parent Co. Gain on bond retirement

4,040 3,920 120

If only 40% of the bond liability has been eliminated, the consolidated balance sheet will show bonds payable amounting to $6,060, representing the 60% that is not intercompany and is payable to bondholders outside the entity. When consolidated income statements are later prepared, only 40% of the interest expense will be eliminated; the remaining 60% will be left as consolidated interest expense.

Intercompany Purchases during the Fiscal Year Our previous example also assumed that the intercompany purchase of bonds took place on the last day of the fiscal year. If the purchase took place during the fiscal year, the Year 1 consolidated income statement contains both the gain on bond retirement and the hidden loss resulting from the elimination of intercompany interest revenue earned and expense incurred for the period subsequent to the acquisition.


387


CHAPTER 7


379

Gains (Losses) Not Allocated to the Two Equities The four approaches that can be taken to allocate bond gains (losses) were outlined in the section “Intercompany Bondholdings—with Gain or Loss.” The illustrations used approach 4 because it is the most logical. It allocates the gain or loss on consolidation based on how the separate entities will eventually report the income or loss on their separate-entity financial statements. The calculations for this approach may be a bit more cumbersome, but they do have a lot of merit. Because IFRSs are silent on this matter, any of these approaches may be used. Under approaches 1 to 3, the gain or loss is allocated to only one of the companies, and the bond chart (see Exhibit 7.13) is much simpler, as it needs only the entity columns. The “agency” method (approach 1) also has a lot of merit because only a company that has issued bonds can logically retire them; allocating the gain or loss to the issuing company puts the emphasis on the economic substance of the transaction rather than on its actual form. In the example used, the entire $300 gain would be allocated to Parent Co. If the example used was changed so that the bonds were originally issued by Sub Inc., and the agency method was followed, the $300 gain would at first be allocated to the subsidiary; however, because Parent owns 90% of Sub, non-controlling interest would reflect 10% of this gain.

The other approaches would allocate the gain on bond retirement differently to Parent and Sub, which changes the amounts allocated to non-controlling interest.

Gains (Losses) Allocated to Two Equities—Loss to One, Gain to the Other Suppose that the issuing had $10,000 in bonds outstanding with a carrying amount of $10,350, and the purchasing paid $10,050 to acquire all of the issue on the open market. From the entity point of view, there is a before-tax gain on bond retirement of $300, calculated as follows: Carrying amount of bonds Cost to purchase bonds Gain on bond retirement

$10,350 10,050 $ 300

If we allocate the gain to the two s (approach 4), we see that the issuing is allocated a gain of $350, while the purchasing is allocated a loss of $50. This can be verified by the following calculation: Carrying amount of bond liability Par value of bond liability Gain to issuing

$10,350 10,000 $ 350

Cost of investment in bonds Par value of bond liability Loss to purchasing

$10,050 10,000 $ 50

In subsequent years, the entity’s interest elimination loss will be allocated as a loss to the issuing and a gain to the purchasing . See Self-Study Problem 2 for a comprehensive consolidation problem involving intercompany bondholdings. It includes most of the issues we have covered in Part B of this chapter.

Effective-Yield Method of Amortization Our previous examples have assumed that both companies use the straight-line method to amortize the s and discounts. All of the end-of-chapter problems assume the straight-line method, unless stated otherwise. This method leads

The gain is equal to the difference between the cost to retire the bonds and the carrying amount of the bonds when they are retired.

The $300 gain is allocated to the s based on the or discount on their separate-entity books.


388


380

CHAPTER 7


to fairly easy calculations because the yearly amortizations are equal. If one or both companies use the effective-interest method of amortization, the calculations become more complex, but the concepts remain the same. The following examples illustrate the effective-interest method. On December 31, Year 0, Subco issued $100,000 face value bonds for a price of $92,791. The bonds pay interest on December 31 each year at a stated rate of 10%, and mature on December 31, Year 5. The market rate of interest was 12% on December 31, Year 0. Given that the stated rate of interest was lower than the market rate, the bonds were issued at a discount. The issue price of the bonds can be determined by taking the present value of future cash flows using a discount rate of 12% as follows: The effective rate used in the present value calculations and bond amortization tables is the market rate of 12%.

Principal $100,000 3 (P/F, 12%, 5 years) (0.56743) Interest 10,000 3 (P/A, 12%, 5 years) (3.60478)

$56,743 36,048 $92,791

The following schedule shows how Subco would amortize the discount for its separate-entity financial statements and that the amortization of the bond discount increases interest expense (decreases income) each year over the term of the bonds:

The bond discount is amortized on Subco’s separate-entity books over the remaining term of the bonds using the effective rate of 12%.

Period

Interest paid

Interest expense

Amortization of bond discount


Year 0 Year 1 Year 2 Year 3 Year 4 Year 5

$10,0001 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000

$11,1352 11,271 11,424 11,594 11,785

$1,1353 1,271 1,424 1,594 1,785

$ 92,791 93,9264 95,197 96,621 98,215 100,000

1 3

The market value of the bonds will increase when the market rate decreases.

2

$100,000 3 10% 5 $10,000 $10,000 2 $11,135 5 2 $1,135

4

$92,791 3 12% 5 $11,135 $92,791 1 $1,135 5 $93,926

The market rate of interest for these bonds decreased to 8%, and these bonds were trading at a price of $105,154 on December 31, Year 2. If Subco redeems the bonds on this date, it will prepare the following journal entry: Loss on bond redemption Bonds payable Cash

9,957 95,197 105,154

Now assume that Subco did not redeem its own bonds but Pubco purchased them in the open market on December 31, Year 2, for $105,154. The following schedule shows the amortization of this by Pubco using the effective-interest method and shows that the amortization of the bond decreases interest revenue (decreases income) each year over the remaining term of the bonds:

Pubco amortizes its bond on its separateentity books using its effective rate of 8%.

Period

Interest received

Interest revenue

Amortization of bond



$10,0001 10,000 10,000

$8,4122 8,285 8,149

$1,5883 1,715 1,851

$105,154 103,5664 101,851 100,000

1 3

$100,000 3 10% 5 $10,000 $10,000 2 $8,412 5 $1,588

2 4

$105,154 3 8% 5 $8,412 $105,154 2 $1,588 5 $103,566


389


CHAPTER 7


From a separate legal entity perspective, Subco has bonds payable on its balance sheet, while Pubco has an investment in bonds on its balance sheet. From a consolidated perspective, these bonds were redeemed when Pubco purchased them on the open market. A loss on redemption of $9,957 (105,154 2 95,197) should be recorded on the consolidated income statement. In subsequent years, Subco and Pubco will amortize the bond discount and on their separate-entity books. From a consolidated perspective, the amortization of the bond discount and should be eliminated because the bonds no longer exist. The following bond chart shows how the loss on bond redemption and the elimination of bond amortization is allocated to Pubco and Subco each year over the remaining life of the bonds: Loss on bond, Dec. 31, Yr 2 Interest elimination gain—Yr 3 Balance—loss, Dec. 31, Yr 3 Interest elimination gain—Yr 4 Balance—loss, Dec. 31, Yr 4 Interest elimination gain—Yr 5 Balance—loss, Dec. 31, Yr 5

Entity

Pubco

Subco

$9,957 3,012 6,945 3,309 3,636 3,636 $ –0–

$5,154 1,588 3,566 1,715 1,851 1,851 $ –0–

$4,803 1,424 3,379 1,594 1,785 1,785 $ –0–

381

From a consolidated perspective, the bonds were redeemed at a loss of $9,957.

To further illustrate, examine the interest s of the two companies from the date of the intercompany purchase to the date of maturity of the bonds: Year ended Dec. 31

Pubco’s interest revenue


Difference

Year 3 Year 4 Year 5

$ 8,412 8,285 8,149 $24,846

$11,424 11,594 11,785 $34,803

$3,012 3,309 3,636 $9,957

Under the effective-interest method, the difference between interest revenue and interest expense changes over time. Under the straight-line method, the difference would be $3,319 ($9,957/3) each year for three years. Under both methods, a loss on bond redemption of $9,957 is recorded on the consolidated income statement in Year 2. In turn, consolidated income is increased by a total of $9,957 over the three-year remaining term of the bonds as the amortization of the bond and discount is eliminated.

Disclosure Requirements The disclosure requirements for consolidated financial statements were summarized in Chapters 3 and 4. In addition to those requirements, the entity would normally indicate that intercompany transactions have been eliminated. The excerpt below is taken from the 2011 financial statements of Bell Canada Enterprises Inc., Canada’s largest telecommunications company. Basis of Consolidation We consolidate the financial statements of all our subsidiaries. Subsidiaries are entities we control, where control is the power to govern the financial and operating policies of an entity so as to obtain benefits from its activities. The results of subsidiaries acquired or sold during the year are consolidated from the date of acquisition and up to the date of disposal. Where necessary, adjustments are made to the financial statements of subsidiaries to conform their ing policies with ours. All intercompany transactions, balances, income and expenses are eliminated on consolidation.5

From the separate-entity perspective, Pubco and Subco continue to amortize the bond discount or using their effective rates. The loss on redemption was recognized in Year 2 from a consolidated perspective and over the three-year period ending in Year 5 from a single-entity perspective.


390


382

CHAPTER 7

LO8


ASPE Differences • As mentioned in Chapter 3, private companies can either consolidate their subsidiaries or report their investments in subsidiaries under the cost method, equity method, or fair value method. • Whereas public companies can adopt the revaluation model or the cost model to value property, plant, and equipment, private companies using ASPE, must use the cost model. • Whereas impairment losses for property, plant, and equipment and intangible assets other than goodwill can be reversed under IFRSs, they cannot be reversed under ASPE.

U.S. GAAP Differences U.S. GAAP and IFRSs for intercompany transactions have many similarities. The significant differences are summarized as follows: 1. Whereas IFRSs require that property, plant, and equipment and intangible assets be ed for using the cost method or the revaluation method, these assets must be reported at cost less accumulated amortization and accumulated impairment losses under U.S. GAAP. 2. Whereas impairment losses on property, plant, and equipment and intangible assets other than goodwill can be reversed under IFRSs in certain circumstances, they cannot be reversed under U.S. GAAP.

summary This chapter completed the illustrations of the holdback and realization of intercompany profits and gains in assets by examining the consolidation procedures involved when the profit relates to an asset subject to depreciation. The gain is held back in order to state the depreciable asset at its historical cost less accumulated depreciation from a consolidated perspective. The intercompany profit is subsequently realized as the assets are used or consumed in generating revenues over its remaining life. Because there are differences between the periods in which the tax is paid and those in which the gains are realized in the consolidated statements, income tax must be allocated. The second part of the chapter examined the gains and losses that are created in the consolidated statements by the elimination of intercompany bondholdings. When the investing company purchases the bonds from outsiders, the bonds are effectively retired from a consolidated perspective. The difference between the price paid to retire the bonds and the carrying amount of the bonds is a gain or a loss. These gains and losses can occur only if there were s or discounts involved in the issue or purchase of these bonds. In the case of intercompany bondholdings, the gains or losses are recognized in the consolidated statements before they are recorded by the d companies, whereas intercompany asset gains are recorded by the d companies before they are recognized in the consolidated statements.


391


CHAPTER 7

383


When the parent company uses the revaluation model to revalue its property, plant, and equipment under IAS 16, the consolidated financial statements should reflect the fair value of these assets at the revaluation date, less accumulated depreciation since the revaluation date. When intercompany transactions occur, the gain or loss on the intercompany transaction must be eliminated and the values reinstated as if the intercompany transaction had not occurred.

Significant Changes in GAAP in the Last Three Years No major changes occurred in the last three years for the topics presented in this chapter

Changes Expected in GAAP in the Next Three Years No major changes are expected in the next three years.

S ELF- STUDY PROBLEM 1 LO1, 3

The following are the Year 15 financial statements of Penn Company and its subsidiary Sill Corp. Year 15 income statements Miscellaneous revenues Investment income Gain on sale of equipment Gain on sale of patent

Miscellaneous expenses Depreciation expense Patent amortization expense Income tax expense Profit Year 15 retained earnings statements Balance, January 1 Profit Dividends Balance, December 31 Statement of financial position, December 31, Year 15 Miscellaneous assets Land and buildings Equipment Accumulated depreciation Patent (net) Investment in Sill Corp.

Ordinary shares Retained earnings Miscellaneous liabilities

Penn

Sill

$500,000 9,194 14,000 — 523,194 309,600 120,000 800 33,000 463,400 $ 59,794

$300,000 — — 7,500 307,500 186,500 80,000 — 16,000 282,500 $ 25,000

$162,000 59,794 221,794 25,000 $196,794

$154,000 25,000 179,000 8,000 $171,000

$271,600 200,000 — (80,000) 19,200 285,994 $696,794

$131,000 656,000 44,000* (250,000) — — $581,000

$400,000 196,794 100,000

$200,000 171,000 210,000

$696,794

$581,000

* For illustrative purposes, we are assuming that this is the only equipment owned by either company.


392


384

CHAPTER 7


Additional Information Penn owns 80% of Sill and has used the equity method to for its investment. The acquisition differential on acquisition date has been fully amortized for consolidation purposes prior to Year 15, and there were no unrealized intercompany profits or losses in the assets of the companies on December 31, Year 14. During Year 15, the following intercompany transactions took place: • On January 1, Year 15, Penn sold used equipment to Sill and recorded a $14,000 gain on the transaction as follows: Selling price of equipment Carrying amount of equipment sold Cost Accumulated depreciation—Dec. 31, Year 14 Gain on sale of equipment

$44,000 70,000 40,000

30,000 $14,000

This equipment had an estimated remaining life of 8 years on this date. • On January 1, Year 5, Sill developed a patent at a cost of $34,000. It has been amortizing this patent over 17 years. On October 1, Year 15, Sill sold the patent to Penn and recorded a $7,500 gain, calculated as follows: Selling price of patent Carrying amount of patent sold Cost Amortization: To December 31, Year 14 (10 3 2,000) Year 15 (¾ 3 2,000) Gain on sale of patent

$20,000 34,000 20,000 1,500

21,500

12,500 $ 7,500

Penn is amortizing this patent over its remaining legal life of 6¼ years. • Both gains were assessed income tax at a rate of 40%.

Required: (a) Using the reported profits of both companies, prepare a calculation which shows that Penn’s separate-entity profit is equal to consolidated profit attributable to Penn’s shareholders. (b) Using Penn’s investment , prepare a calculation which shows that the acquisition differential is fully amortized. (c) Prepare the following Year 15 consolidated financial statements: (i) Income statement (ii) Retained earnings statement (iii) Statement of financial position

SOLUTION

TO

SELF-S TUDY P ROBLEM 1 UNREALIZED PROFITS Before tax Equipment (Penn selling): Gain recorded, Jan. 1, Year 15 Depreciation, Year 15 (14,000 4 8) Balance unrealized, Dec. 31, Year 15

$14,000 1,750 $12,250

40% tax $5,600 700 $4,900

After tax 8,400 (a) 1,050 (b) $ 7,350 (c) $


393


CHAPTER 7


Patent (Sill selling): Gain recorded, Oct. 1, Year 15 Amortization, Year 15 (7,500 4 6¼ 3 ¼) Balance unrealized Dec. 31, Year 15

Before tax

40% tax

$ 7,500 300 $ 7,200

$3,000 120 $2,880

Deferred income tax asset—December 31, Year 15: Equipment profit Patent profit

(a)

Add: After-tax patent gain realized in Year 15 (e) Adjusted profit Consolidated profit

25,000 4,500 20,500 180 20,680 $ 63,930

Less: Unrealized after-tax patent gain, Dec. 31, Year 15 (f) Adjusted shareholders’ equity Penn’s ownership Unamortized acquisition differential

(c) (i)

$ 59,794 (j) 4,136 (k)

Investment in Sill Corp. (equity method): Balance, Dec. 31, Year 15 Add: Unrealized after-tax equipment gain, Dec. 31, Year 15 (c) Sill Corp., Dec. 31, Year 15: Ordinary shares Retained earnings

$ 4,500 (d) 180 (e) $ 4,320 (f)

$ 59,794 9,194 50,600 8,400 42,200 1,050 43,250

Attributable to Shareholders of Penn Non-controlling interest (20% 3 20,680)

(b)

After tax

$ 4,900 (g) 2,880 (h) $ 7,780 (i)

Profit Penn Co. Less: Investment income Profit Penn—own operations Less: January 1 equipment gain (a) Add: After-tax equipment gain realized in Year 15 (b) Adjusted profit Profit Sill Corp. Less: October 1 patent gain (d)

385

$285,994 7,350 293,344 200,000 171,000 371,000 4,320 366,680 80%

293,344 $ –0–

CONSOLIDATED INCOME STATEMENT—for Year 15 Miscellaneous revenues (500,000 1 300,000) Gain on sale of equipment (14,000 1 0 2 [a] 14,000) Gain on sale of patents (0 1 7,500 2 [d] 7,500) Miscellaneous expenses (309,600 1 186,500) Depreciation expense (120,000 1 80,000 2 [b] 1,750) Patent amortization expense (800 2 [e] 300) Income tax expense (33,000 1 16,000 2 [c] 4,900 2 [f] 2,880) Profit Attributable to Shareholders of Parent (j) Non-controlling interest (k)

$ 800,000 –0– –0– 496,100 198,250 500 41,220 736,070 $ 63,930 $ 59,794 4,136


394


386

CHAPTER 7


CONSOLIDATED RETAINED EARNINGS STATEMENT—for Year 15

(ii)

Balance, January 1 Profit

$ 162,000 59,794 221,794 25,000 $ 196,794


CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION— at December 31, Year 15

(iii)

Miscellaneous assets (271,600 1 131,000) Land and buildings (200,000 1 656,000) Equipment (0 1 44,000 2 [a] 14,000 1 40,000*) Accumulated depreciation (80,000 1 250,000 2 [b] 1,750 1 40,000*) Patent (19,200 1 0 2 [f] 7,200) Deferred income taxes (0 1 0 1 [i] 7,780)

$ 402,600 856,000 70,000 (368,250) 12,000 7,780 $ 980,130

Ordinary shares Retained earnings Non-controlling interest** Miscellaneous liabilities (100,000 1 210,000)

$400,000 196,794 73,336 310,000 $ 980,130

* It is necessary to increase equipment and accumulated depreciation by $40,000 in order to re-establish the original historical cost of the equipment and the accumulated depreciation as at the date of the intercompany sale. ** Sill Corp.—Adjusted shareholders’ equity (see part [b])


$366,680 20% $ 73,336


The financial statements of Parson Corp. and Sloan Inc. for the year ended December 31, Year 5, are as follows: INCOME STATEMENTS—for Year 5 Miscellaneous revenues Interest revenue Dividend revenue Miscellaneous expenses Interest expense Income tax expense Profit

Parson

Sloan

$650,000 5,662 7,500 663,162 432,000 — 92,000 524,000 $139,162

$200,000 — — 200,000 129,600 9,723 24,000 163,323 $ 36,677

RETAINED EARNINGS STATEMENTS—for Year 5 Balance, January 1 Profit Dividends

$245,000 139,162 384,162 70,000

$ 90,000 36,677 126,677 10,000

Balance, December 31

$314,162

$116,677


395


CHAPTER 7

387


STATEMENTS OF FINANCIAL POSITION—at December 31, Year 5 Investment in Sloan shares Investment in Sloan bonds Miscellaneous assets

$ 96,000 61,210 607,000 $764,210

$

— — 372,600 $372,600

Ordinary shares Retained earnings Bonds payable Miscellaneous liabilities

$150,000 314,162 — 300,048 $764,210

$ 80,000 116,677 101,002 74,921 $372,600

Additional Information • Parson acquired 75% of Sloan on January 1, Year 1, at a cost of $96,000. On this date, Sloan’s retained earnings amounted to $40,000, and the acquisition differential was allocated entirely to goodwill. Impairment tests conducted yearly since acquisition yielded a loss of $3,200 in Year 2 and a further loss of $800 in Year 5. Parson uses the cost method to for the investment. • Sloan has a 10%, $100,000 bond issue outstanding. These bonds were originally issued at a to reduce the effective interest cost to 9.6%, and mature on December 31, Year 8. On January 1, Year 5, the unamortized issue amounted to $1,279. Sloan uses the effective interest method to amortize the . • On January 1, Year 5, Parson acquired $60,000 face value of Sloan’s bonds at a cost of $61,548, which generates an effective rate of return of 9.2%. The purchase is being amortized by Parson using the effective interest method. • Both companies pay income tax at a rate of 40%. • Gains and losses from intercompany bondholdings are to be allocated to the two companies when consolidated statements are prepared.

Required: (a) Prepare the following Year 5 consolidated financial statements: (i) Income statement (ii) Retained earnings statement (iii) Statement of financial position (b) Prepare a calculation of consolidated retained earnings at December 31, Year 5. (c) Prepare the Year 5 journal entries that would be made by Parson if the equity method was used to for the investment in Sloan’s shares. (d) Calculate the balance in the “Investment in Sloan shares” as at December 31, Year 5, if Parson had used the equity method.

S OLUTION

TO

SELF-STUDY PROBLEM 2 Cost of 75% of Sloan

$ 96,000

Implied value of 100% of Sloan Carrying amount of Sloan, January 1, Year 1 Ordinary shares Retained earnings

$128,000 80,000 40,000

120,000 (continued)


396


388

CHAPTER 7


Acquisition differential—January 1, Year 1 Allocated to revalue Sloan’s identifiable net assets Balance—goodwill Impairment losses Year 1 to Year 4 Year 5 Balance—goodwill, December 31, Year 5

8,000 –0– 8,000

$

Non-controlling interest, January 1, Year 1 (25% 3 128,000))

$ 32,000 (d)

3,200 (a) 800 (b) 4,000 (c)

INTERCOMPANY TRANSACTIONS YEAR 5 BEFORE-TAX BOND LOSS Cost of 60% of Sloan’s bonds acquired Jan. 1, Year 5 Carrying amount of liability Bonds payable Bond

$ 61,548 100,000 1,279 101,279 60%

Amount acquired by Parson Bond loss to be reflected in the Year 5 consolidated income statement

$

Allocated as follows: Cost of bonds Face value of bonds (intercompany portion)

$

$

Before-tax gain—Sloan

1

BOND AMORTIZATION SCHEDULE—SLOAN Amortization Interest Interest of bond paid expense

Period Jan. 1, Year 5 Year 5 1 2

767 (g)

Amortized cost of bonds $101,279

$10,0001

$9,7232

$2773 2

$100,000 3 10% 5 $10,000 $10,000 2 $9,723 5 $277

3

1,548 (f)

$ 60,000 60,767

Face value of bonds Carrying amount of bonds (intercompany portion)

Period

781 (e)

$ 61,548 60,000

Before-tax loss—Parson

Jan. 1, Year 5 Year 5

60,767

4

$101,279 3 9.6% 5 $9,723 $101,279 2 $277 5 $101,002

BOND AMORTIZATION SCHEDULE—PARSON Interest Amortization of Interest received revenue bond $6,0001

$60,000 3 10% 5 $6,000 $61,548 3 9.2% 5 $5,662

$5,6622 3 4

101,0024

$3383

Amortized cost of bonds $61,548 61,2104

$6,000 2 $5,662 5 $338 $61,548 2 $338 5 $61,210

INTERCOMPANY INTEREST REVENUE AND EXPENSE Interest paid by Sloan 10% 3 100,000 amortization Total expense Intercompany portion

10,000 277 9,723 60%

$ 5,834 (h)

(continued)


397


CHAPTER 7

389


Interest received by Parson 10% 3 60,000 amortization Before-tax interest elimination gain to entity

6,000 338

5,662 (i) $ 172 (j)

Allocated: Before-tax loss to Sloan (277 3 60%) Before-tax gain to Parson Total gain allocated (before-tax dollars)

$ 166 (k) 338 (l) $ 172 (m)

SUMMARY Parson Co.

Entity Before 40% tax tax Jan. 1/Year 5 bond loss (gain) Int. elim. gain (loss) Year 5 Dec. 31, Year 5 Balance, loss (gain)

(a) (i)

Sloan Inc.

After Before 40% tax tax tax

After Before 40% tax tax tax

$929

$781

$312

$469

172

69

103

$609

$243

$366

$1,548 $619 338

135

203

$1,210 $484

$726

After tax

$(767) $(307) $(460) (n) (166)

( 66)

(100) (o)

$(601) $(241) $(360) (p)

CALCULATION OF CONSOLIDATED NET INCOME—for Year 5 Profit—Parson Less: Dividend from Sloan January 1 after-tax bond loss allocated (n) Add: Year 5 after-tax interest elimination gain allocated (o) Adjusted profit—Parson Profit—Sloan Add: January 1 after-tax bond gain allocated (n) Less: Year 5 after-tax interest elimination loss allocated (o) Acquisition-differential amortization (b) Adjusted profit—Sloan Consolidated profit

$139,162 7,500 929

8,429 130,733 203 130,936

36,677 460 (100) (800)

Attributable to Shareholders of Parson Non-controlling interest (25% 3 36,267)

36,237 $167,173 $158,114 (q) 9,059 (r)

CONSOLIDATED INCOME STATEMENT—for Year 5 Miscellaneous revenues (650,000 1 200,000) Interest revenue (5,662 1 0 2 [i] 5,662) Dividend revenue (7,500 1 0 2 7,500) Miscellaneous expenses (432,000 1 129,600) Loss on bond retirement (n) Interest expense (9,723 2 [h] 5,834) Goodwill impairment loss (b) Income tax expense (92,000 1 24,000 2 [p] 243) Profit Attributable to Shareholders of Parson (q) Non-controlling interest (r)

$850,000 — — 561,600 781 3,889 800 115,757 682,827 $167,173 $158,114 9,059


398


390

CHAPTER 7


(ii)

CALCULATION OF CONSOLIDATED RETAINED EARNINGS at January 1, Year 5 Retained earnings—Parson Retained earnings—Sloan Acquisition retained earnings Increase since acquisition Less: Goodwill impairment loss (a) Parson’s ownership Consolidated retained earnings, Jan. 1, Year 5

$245,000 90,000 40,000 50,000 3,200 46,800 (s) 75%

35,100 $280,100 (t)

CONSOLIDATED RETAINED EARNINGS STATEMENT—for Year 5 Balance, January 1 (t) Profit Dividends Balance, December 31

(iii)

$280,100 158,114 438,214 70,000 $368,214

CALCULATION OF NON-CONTROLLING INTEREST at December 31, Year 5 Shareholders’ equity—Sloan Ordinary shares Retained earnings

$80,000 116,677 196,677 360 4,000 201,037 25% $50,259 (u)

Add: Net Year 5 after-tax bond gain allocated (p) Add: Unimpaired goodwill (c) Adjusted shareholders’ equity

ALTERNATIVE FORMAT Non-controlling interest, date of acquisition (d) Adjusted increase in Sloan’s retained earnings since acquisition (25% 3 [v] 73,037)

$32,000 18,259 $50,259

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION— at December 31, Year 5 Goodwill (c) Deferred income tax asset (p) Investment in Sloan bonds (61,210 1 0 2 61,210) Miscellaneous assets (607,000 1 372,600)

$

Ordinary shares Retained earnings Non-controlling interest (u) Bonds payable (101,002 2 60,000 2 [p] 601) Miscellaneous liabilities (300,048 1 74,921)

$150,000 368,214 50,259 40,401 374,969 $983,843

4,000 243 — 979,600 $983,843


399


CHAPTER 7

(b)


PROOF—CONSOLIDATED RETAINED EARNINGS at December 31, Year 5 Retained earnings—Parson Less: Net Year 5 after-tax bond loss allocated (p) Adjusted retained earnings Retained earnings—Sloan Acquisition retained earnings

$314,162 726 313,436 116,677 40,000

Increase since acquisition Less: Goodwill impairment losses ([a] 3,200 1 [b] 800) Add: Net Year 5 after-tax bond gain allocated (p)

76,677

Adjusted increase Parsons’ ownership

73,037 75%

(4,000) 360 (v) 54,778

Consolidated retained earnings

(c)

391

$368,214

EQUITY METHOD JOURNAL ENTRIES Investment in Sloan Investment income 75% of Sloan’s Year 5 profit (75% 3 36,677) Investment in Sloan Investment income 75% of the net Year 5 bond gain allocated to Sloan (75% 3 360) Cash Investment in Sloan Dividends received from Sloan

27,508 27,508

270 270

7,500 7,500

Investment income Investment in Sloan Year 5 goodwill impairment loss (75% 3 800)

600

Investment income Investment in Sloan Year 5 net bond loss allocated to Parson

726

600

726

Investment in Sloan shares

(d) Balance, December 31, Year 4—cost method Increase in retained earnings to Jan. 1, Year 5 ([s] 46,800 3 75%) Balance, December 31, Year 4—equity method Investment income, Year 5 (see equity method journal entries) Dividends from Sloan Balance, December 31, Year 5—equity method

$ 96,000 35,100 131,100 26,452 (7,500) $150,052


400


APPENDIX 7A Depreciable Assets under Revaluation Model LO9 An entity can report its property, plant, and equipment at fair value on an annual basis.

The revaluation surplus is reported through other comprehensive income.

IAS 16: Property, Plant and Equipment allows a reporting entity to use either the revaluation method or the amortized cost method to measure its property, plant, and equipment. The same method must be used for each class of property, plant, and equipment. The revaluation adjustment is reported in other comprehensive income unless it indicates an impairment loss, in which case it is reported in net income. The reversal of an impairment loss is also reported in net income to the extent of any previous impairment loss. Depreciation expense is based on the revalued amount. The revaluation surplus is transferred directly to retained earnings, either as the asset is depreciated or when the asset is sold. We will illustrate the preparation of consolidated financial statements when there has been an intercompany sale of equipment, which had been remeasured under the revaluation model allowed in IAS 16. Sub acquired the equipment for $5,000 and was depreciating the equipment over an estimated useful life of five years. After three years, the accumulated depreciation was $3,000 and the carrying amount was $2,000. Let us now assume that Sub remeasured its equipment to $2,300, the fair value of the equipment, and that both the original cost and the accumulated depreciation were to be grossed up using the proportional method for the increase in value. Sub had not revalued the equipment since it was acquired. Sub would make the following entry on its separate-entity books: Equipment [(2,300/2,000 3 5,000) 2 5,000] Accumulated depreciation [(2,300/2,000 3 3,000) 2 3,000] Other comprehensive income—revaluation surplus

750 450 300

Depreciation expense for the first six months of Year 1 would have been $575 (2,300/2 years 3 6/12). When Sub sold the equipment to Parent for $2,100 on July 1, Year 1, it would make the following entries on its separate-entity books: Cash Accumulated depreciation (3,000 1 450 1 575) Equipment (5,000 1 750) Gain on sale of equipment6 To record sale of equipment The revaluation surplus is transferred to retained earnings when the property is sold.

Accumulated other comprehensive income—revaluation surplus Retained earnings To transfer revaluation surplus to retained earnings

2,100 4,025 5,750 375 300 300

Given that the parent controls the subsidiary, the parent could have imposed the sale price for the equipment. It does not necessarily reflect the fair value of the equipment. The parent would make the following entries related to the equipment in Year 1: Equipment Cash To purchase equipment Depreciation expense (2,100/1½ 3 ½) Accumulated depreciation Depreciation expense for six months

392

2,100 2,100 700 700


CHAPTER 7


401

393

When preparing the consolidated financial statements at the end of Year 1, the following entries would have to be made in the consolidated working papers to report the amounts that would have appeared had the intercompany transaction not occurred: Gain on sale of equipment Equipment To reverse gain on sale

375 375

Equipment Accumulated depreciation To reinstate accumulated depreciation at date of intercompany sale

4,025 4,025

Accumulated depreciation Depreciation expense To recognize gain through usage of equipment by reversing excess depreciation

125

Retained earnings Accumulated other comprehensive income—revaluation surplus To reinstate revaluation surplus

300

125

300

The following table summarizes what would have appeared on the three sets of financial statements for Year 1 after processing the journal entries indicated above: Parent Equipment Accumulated depreciation Equipment—net

Sub

2,100 700 1,400

Accumulated other comprehensive income Gain on sale Depreciation expense

Consolidated 5,750 4,600 1,150

300 700

375 575

The consolidated statements should report amounts that would have existed had the intercompany transaction not occurred.

1,150

The consolidated amounts reflect what would have been on Sub’s separateentity financial statements and on the consolidated financial statements had the intercompany transaction not occurred.

REVIEW QUESTIONS Questions, cases, and problems that deal with the appendix material are denoted with an asterisk. LO1, 2

1. Explain how an intercompany gain of $2,700 on the sale of a depreciable asset is held back on the consolidated income statement in the year of sale and realized on subsequent consolidated income statements. What income tax adjustments should be made in each instance?

LO1, 2

2. “The realization of intercompany inventory and depreciable asset profits is really an adjustment made in the preparation of consolidated income statements to arrive at historical cost numbers.” Explain.

LO2

3. An intercompany inventory profit is realized when the inventory is sold outside the entity. Is this also the case with respect to an intercompany profit in a depreciable asset? Explain.


402


394

CHAPTER 7


LO1, 2

4. An intercompany gain on a depreciable asset resulting from a sale by the parent company is subsequently realized by an adjustment to the subsidiary’s depreciation expense in the preparation of consolidated income statements. Should this adjustment be taken into in the calculation of net income attributable to non-controlling interest? Explain.

LO1, 2

5. Why does an intercompany sale of a depreciable asset (such as equipment or a building) require subsequent adjustments to depreciation expense within the consolidation process?

LO1, 2

6. If an intercompany sale of a depreciable asset has been made at a price above carrying amount, the beginning retained earnings of the seller are reduced when preparing each subsequent consolidation. Why does the amount of the adjustment change from year to year?

LO1, 2

7. When there has been an intercompany sale of a used depreciable asset (i.e., accumulated depreciation has been recorded for this asset), it is necessary to gross up the asset and accumulated depreciation when preparing the consolidated financial statement. Explain what is meant by gros the asset and accumulated depreciation and why this action is necessary.

LO9

*8. When a company sells equipment that had previously been remeasured to fair value under the revaluation model of IAS 16, it transfers the revaluation surplus from accumulated other comprehensive income directly to retained earnings. What adjustments must be made to accumulated other comprehensive income when preparing consolidated financial statements if the sale is from the parent to the subsidiary?

LO9

*9. “There should never be a gain on an intercompany sale of equipment when the selling company uses the revaluation model under IAS 16 and the equipment is sold at fair value.” Is this statement true or false? Explain.

LO5

10. Four approaches could be used to allocate gains (losses) on the elimination of intercompany bondholdings in the preparation of consolidated financial statements. Outline these four approaches. Which approach is conceptually superior? Explain.

LO5

11. An interest elimination gain (loss) does not appear as a distinguishable item on a consolidated income statement. Explain.

LO1, 5

12. The adjustment for the holdback of an intercompany gain in assets requires a corresponding adjustment to a consolidated deferred tax asset. The adjustment for a gain from intercompany bondholdings requires a corresponding adjustment to a consolidated deferred tax liability. In both cases, the tax adjustment is made because of a gain. Why is the tax adjustment different? Explain.

LO1, 5

13. “Some intercompany gains (losses) are realized for consolidation purposes subsequent to their actual recording by the s, while others are recorded by the s subsequent to their realization for consolidation purposes.” Explain, referring to the type of gains (losses) that apply in each case.

LO6

14. Explain how the recognition of gains on the elimination of intercompany bondholdings is consistent with the principle of recording gains only when they are realized.

LO6

15. Explain how the matching principle s the recognition of deferred income tax expense when a gain is recognized on the elimination of intercompany bondholdings.


403


CHAPTER 7


395

C ASES Case 7-1 LO1, 3

Enron Corporation’s 2000 financial statements disclosed the following transaction with LIM2, a nonconsolidated special purpose entity (SPE) that was formed by Enron: In June 2000, LIM2 purchased dark fibre optic cable from Enron for a purchase price of $100 million. LIM2 paid Enron $30 million in cash and the balance in an interest-bearing note for $70 million. Enron recognized $67 million in pre-tax earnings in 2000 related to the asset sale.

Investigators later discovered that LIM2 was in many ways controlled by Enron. In the wake of the bankruptcy of Enron, both American and Canadian standard-setters introduced ing standards that require the consolidation of SPEs that are essentially controlled by their sponsor firm. By selling goods to SPEs that it controlled but did not consolidate, did Enron overstate its earnings?

Required: Determine how this transaction should have been ed for assuming that (a) Enron controlled LIM2 and used consolidated financial statements to report its investment in LIM2; (b) Enron had significant influence over LIM2 and used the equity method to report its investment; and (c) Enron did not have control or significant influence over LIM2 but LIM2 was considered a related party and Enron had to apply IAS 24: Related Party Disclosures.

Case 7-2 LO5

Several years ago, the Penston Company purchased 90% of the outstanding shares of Swansan Corporation. The acquisition was made because Swansan produced a vital component used in Penston’s manufacturing process. Penston wanted to ensure an adequate supply of this item at a reasonable price. The former owner, James Swansan, who agreed to continue managing this organization, retained the remaining 10% of Swansan’s shares. He was given responsibility over the subsidiary’s daily manufacturing operations but not for any of the financial decisions. At a recent meeting, the president of Penston and the company’s chief financial officer began discussing Swansan’s debt position. The subsidiary had a debtto-equity ratio that seemed unreasonably high considering the significant amount of cash flows being generated by both companies. Payment of the interest expense, especially on the subsidiary’s outstanding bonds, was a major cost, one that the corporate officials hoped to reduce. However, the bond indenture specified that Swansan could retire this debt prior to maturity only by paying 107% of face value. This was considered prohibitive. Thus, to avoid contractual problems, Penston acquired a large portion of Swansan’s liability on the open market for 101% of face value. Penston’s purchase created an effective loss on the debt of $300,000: the excess of the price over the carrying amount of the debt as reported on Swansan’s books. Company ants are currently computing the non-controlling interest’s share of consolidated net income to be reported for the current year. They are


404


396

CHAPTER 7


unsure about the impact of this $300,000 loss. The subsidiary’s debt was retired, but officials of the parent company made the decision.

Required: (a) Determine who lost the $300,000. (b) Explain how the loss should be allocated on the consolidated financial statements.

Case 7-3 LO1, 2

On January 1, Year 1, Plum purchased 100% of the common shares of Slum. On December 31, Year 2, Slum purchased a machine for $84,000 from an external supplier. The machine had an estimated useful life of six years with no residual value. On December 31, Year 4, Plum purchased the machine from Slum for $100,000. The estimated remaining life at the time of the intercompany sale was four years. Plum pays income tax at the rate of 40%, whereas Slum is taxed at a rate of 30%. When preparing the consolidated statements for Year 5, the controller and manager of ing at Plum got into a heated debate as to the proper tax rate to use when eliminating the tax on the excess depreciation being taken by Plum. The controller thought that Slum’s tax rate should be used since Slum was the owner of this machine before the intercompany sale. The manager of ing thought that Plum’s tax rate should be used since Plum was the actual company saving the tax at the rate of 40%. In Year 6, the Canada Revenue Agency (CRA) audited Plum. It questioned the legitimacy of the intercompany transaction for the following reasons: 1. Was the selling price of $100,000 a fair reflection of market value? 2. Was Plum trying to gain a tax advantage by saving tax at a rate of 40% rather than the 30% saving that Slum used to realize? Plum argued that, under the of the sale, CRA was better off because CRA received tax in Year 4 from the gain on the intercompany sale. Had the intercompany sale not occurred, CRA would not have received this tax.

Required: (a) Determine the economic benefits, if any, to the consolidated entity from tax savings as a result of this intercompany transaction. Was it a good financial decision to undertake this transaction? Explain. (b) Would your answer to (a) be any different if Plum owned only 60% of the common shares of Slum? Explain. (c) Indicate what amount of tax savings related to depreciation expense would be reflected on the consolidated income statement under the alternatives suggested by the controller and manager, or other options you could suggest. Which method would you recommend? Explain your answer using basic ing principles.

Case 7-4 LO1, 2

Stephanie Baker is an audit senior with the public ing firm of Wilson & Lang. It is February Year 9, and the audit of Canadian Development Limited (CDL) for the year ended December 31, Year 8, is proceeding. Stephanie has identified several transactions that occurred in the Year 8 fiscal year that have major ing implications. The engagement partner has asked Stephanie to draft


CHAPTER 7


405

397

a memo addressing the ing implications, financial statement disclosure issues, and any other important matters regarding these transactions. CDL is an important player in many sectors of the economy. The company has both debt and equity securities that trade on a Canadian stock exchange. Except for a controlling interest (53%) owned by the Robichaud family, CDL’s shares are widely held. The company has interests in the natural resources, commercial and residential real estate, construction, transportation, and technology development sectors, among others.

Changes in Capital Structure During Year 8, CDL’s underwriters recommended some changes to the company’s capital structure. As a result, the company raised $250 million by issuing one million convertible, redeemable debentures at $250 each. Each debenture is convertible into one common share at any time. CDL’s controlling shareholders acquired a sizeable block of the one million debentures issued; a few large institutional investors took up the remainder. The company proposes to partition the balance sheet in a manner that will include a section titled “Shareholders’ Equity and Convertible Debentures.” The company views this classification as appropriate because the convertible debt, being much more akin to equity than debt, represents a part of the company’s permanent capital. Maurice Richard, the controller of CDL, has emphasized that the interest rate on the debentures is considerably lower than on normal convertible issues and that it is expected that the majority of investors will exercise their conversion privilege. The company has the option of repaying the debt at maturity in 20 years’ time, through the issuance of common shares. The option will be lost if the company is unable to meet certain solvency tests at the maturity date. The company’s intention was to raise additional permanent capital, and convertible debt was chosen because of the attractive tax savings. The debentures are redeemable at $250 from January 1, Year 15, to January 1, Year 18. At the same time as the company issued the convertible debentures, two million common shares were converted into two million preferred, redeemable shares. The carrying amount of the two million common shares was $20 million. The preferred shares do not bear dividends and are mandatorily redeemable in five years at $20 per share. They have been recorded at their redemption value of $40 million, and the difference between this redemption value and the carrying amount of the common shares ($20 million) has been charged against retained earnings.

Disposal of Residential Real Estate Segment Intercity Real Estate Corporation (IRE) is a wholly owned subsidiary of CDL and has two operating divisions: a money-losing residential real estate division and a highly profitable commercial real estate division. The two divisions had been combined into one legal entity for tax purposes as the losses arising from the residential real estate division have more than offset the profits from the commercial real estate division. During Year 8, CDL decided to dispose of its shares of IRE. However, CDL wished to retain the commercial real estate division and decided to transfer the division’s assets to another corporation prior to selling the shares of IRE. As part of the sale agreement, just before the closing, the commercial real estate assets were transferred out of IRC to CDL, which then transferred the assets to a newly


406


398

CHAPTER 7


created subsidiary, Real Property Inc. (RPI). In order to maximize the asset base of RPI, the commercial real estate assets were transferred at fair values, which greatly increased their tax base and created considerable income for tax purposes. Maurice has explained to Stephanie that since the transfer would create income for tax purposes, it was necessary for both CDL and the purchaser to agree on the fair value of the commercial real estate assets, even though they were not part of the IRC sale. IRC’s purchaser agreed to the values used because the loss carryforwards, which would otherwise have expired, offset the income for tax purposes. CDL is planning to take RPI public sometime this year. The commercial real estate assets of RPI have been recorded at the values established in the sale of IRC, because management believes that this amount represents the cost of acquiring the business from IRC. Maurice has stressed that the transfer between IRC and RPI is very different from the majority of transactions between companies under common control. He argues that the transfer of the commercial real estate assets to RPI represents a bona fide business combination, since there is a change of substance and not just of form. CDL maintains a policy of granting subsidiaries a high degree of autonomy and, in substance, they do not function “under common control.” Maurice indicated that the real estate assets are worth more to CDL as a result of this transaction because of the increase in the tax values of the assets. Finally, an unrelated party was involved in the transaction and in the determination of the fair value of the assets. Stephanie noted that after the transfer the real estate business changed. RPI has undertaken a major refurbishing program and has just bought a large chain of shopping centres that has doubled the company’s asset base.

Required: Assume the role of Stephanie Baker, and prepare the memo for the partner. (CICA adapted)

Case 7-5 LO1, 8

Bakersfield Ball Boys Limited (BBB) operates a Canadian professional baseball club, the Bakersfield Ball Boys, that won the Canadian Baseball League title in October Year 10. BBB is 30% owned by Mr. Bill Griffin, Bakersfield’s wealthiest citizen; 19% by Excavating Inc., a real estate development company; and 51% by Tall Bottle Ltd. (Tall Bottle), a national brewery and a public company. Your employer, Mayer & Partners, has audited BBB’s financial statements for the past several years. It is now May 3, Year 11, and you, the CA, are responsible for the audit of BBB for the year ending June 30, Year 11. The club’s year-end was chosen to correspond with the year-end of Tall Bottle, even though the baseball season runs from April to October. In addition to marking BBB’s first-ever Canadian championship, the year ending June 30, Year 11, will be noteworthy from an operational standpoint. You and your staff have become aware of the following: 1. BBB moved into Big Top, a newly built stadium with a retractable roof, on August 1, Year 10. Seating capacity is 70,000. The new stadium is a great improvement over the 30,000-seat NoWay Park stadium used for the preceding seven years. On July 20, Year 10, BBB signed a 10-year lease with the new stadium’s owners. However, BBB’s lease on the old premises was not due to expire until January 1, Year 14. BBB therefore paid $3.6 million to terminate its lease.


CHAPTER 7


407

399

2. Commencing with the Year 10 baseball season (April Year 10 to October Year 10), the league started a new revenue equalization program. In October, each baseball club in the league is required to remit to the league 50% of the revenues from the ticket sales for the season. The league then distributes these revenues, after deducting league costs, in equal amounts to each club. For the Year 10 baseball season, BBB contributed $11.6 million to the league and received $9.2 million, its share of net league revenues. The new equalization program was not ed for in the June 30, Year 10, financial statements. 3. Immediately before the start of the Year 11 baseball season in April, three of the club’s top players were signed to long-term contracts. As a result of these commitments, the club decided to purchase annuities on behalf of these players that would fund the amount required to cover each salary. The annuities for each player were purchased on April 2, Year 11. Amounts of the contracts and annuities are as follows: Player Frank Ferter Hugh G. Blast Bill Board

Term

Salary

Annuity purchased

3 years 5 years 4 years

$1,500,000 per year $ 900,000 per year $1,200,000 per year

$4,166,000 $3,950,000 $4,370,000

The contracts of Ferter and Blast specify that if they suffer a careerending injury, their contracts will become null and void. Board’s contract is guaranteed for the full term. On April 15, Year 11, Board was injured, forcing him to retire from playing baseball. As required by his contract, he has since been moved to the front office and is performing public relations and istrative services for both BBB and Tall Bottle. Tall Bottle pays BBB $5,000 for each of Board’s appearances at a Tall Bottle function. Board has made two appearances at Tall Bottle since his injury. Ferter has a bonus clause in his contract under which he will be paid $50,000 if he is selected to play for the All Star Team. Although he is favoured to capture this honour, the selections will not be announced until after the financial statements have been issued. Because of Ferter’s exceptional ability and the fact that he is considered a “player who will increase the popularity of the sport in this city for many years to come,” management proposes to amortize the cost of his contract over a 10-year period. 4. On April 2, Year 11, the club renewed its contract with Sportsplus, a local television station, for three years. Sportsplus will pay BBB $30,000 per game for the right to televise 25 regular season games and $75,000 for each playoff game. In addition, BBB received a $250,000 bonus for re-g, and $315,000 for its high ratings over the previous contract term. Tall Bottle enjoys an exclusive advertising contract with Sportsplus as BBB’s official sponsor. The contract provides Tall Bottle with three one-minute ads for each game televised by Sportsplus. The advertising was granted to Tall Bottle by Sportsplus free of charge in exchange for BBB’s local television rights. 5. BBB’s contract with its management includes a bonus clause, to take effect in the year ended June 30, Year 11. Bill Griffin and Excavating Inc. had opposed the scheme, as the bonus is based on annual pre-tax income. However, they agreed to it after much pressure from management and Tall Bottle.


408


400

CHAPTER 7


6. On October 3, Year 10, the day before the last playoff game, a windstorm caused the roof at Big Top to collapse, resulting in structural damage of $4,500,000 to the stadium. This unforeseen event forced BBB’s last playoff game to be played at NoWay Park. Hence, the club announced that some of the 70,000 seats sold for Big Top could be used at NoWay Park and that the $35 cost of the remaining tickets could be either refunded or applied toward the cost of tickets for any of BBB’s Year 11 games. Also, the 40,000 fans who could not attend the game at NoWay were given $12 gift certificates that could be used toward purchasing tickets for any future BBB game. As a result of the roof collapse at Big Top, BBB incurred the following costs for its final playoff game at NoWay: Groundskeepers Cleaning crew Food vendors Stadium rental

$ 9,000 15,250 19,200 132,500

A separate cleaning crew had to be hired for the NoWay Park game, as the club’s regular cleaning crew was required to assist in the cleanup at Big Top. BBB’s lease costs of $50,000 were not waived during the reconstruction of Big Top. Had the playoff game been played at Big Top, the following costs would have been incurred: Groundskeepers Cleaning crew Food vendors

$16,500 25,750 32,900

Actual food sales at NoWay were $191,750, with food costs averaging 50% of sales. BBB was required to pay the stadium owners a 10% share of sales, whereas, at Big Top, BBB would have been required to pay a 15% share of sales. BBB’s management has asked your firm to prepare a statement of loss to its claim for damages in accordance with its business-interruption insurance policy. The insurance policy covers the loss of income as well as the additional expenses that result from a disaster. The partner in charge of the engagement has asked you, the CA, to prepare the information requested by the client. In addition, the partner would like you to present a memo with your analysis of the ing issues that you and your staff have become aware of, as well as your recommendations.

Required: Prepare the information requested by the client and the memo to the partner. (CICA adapted)

Case 7-6 LO1, 8

Enviro Facilities Inc. (EFI) is a large, diversified Canadian-controlled private company with several Canadian and U.S. subsidiaries, operating mainly in the waste management and disposal industry. EFI was incorporated more than 50 years ago, and has grown to become one of the top four waste management firms in Canada. The Glass family started the business, but currently no family are actively involved in the management. The shares are owned by family , family trusts, and a limited number of friends. In Year 4, the Glass family decided


CHAPTER 7


409

401

to sell the company to a third party within the next two or three years, to realize the value of their shareholdings. EFI has an August 31 year-end. The company has elected to report using International Financial Reporting Standards (“IFRSs”). Up until the Year 4 fiscal year-end, a national firm of chartered ants had audited EFI. In early Year 5, the company put the audit up for tender and replaced the incumbent firm with Bevan & Bevan (BB), Chartered ants, a regional firm. It is now October 18, Year 6. Three days ago, BB resigned from the engagement because of a conflict of interest, although the audit was reportedly 60% complete. Chu and Partners (Chu), Chartered ants, was the runner-up firm in the Year 5 audit tender. EFI offered the engagement to Chu. After speaking with the BB partner in charge of the audit, Chu accepted the audit engagement on condition that BB provides all the audit documentation prepared to date. Chu was formally appointed auditors, and an engagement letter has been signed. Materiality has been set by Chu at $6.5 million, based on income and balance sheet trends. You, the CA, work for Chu. BB’s audit files have now arrived, and you and your staff have prepared the following notes: 1. A team of provincial sales tax auditors has been auditing EFI for nearly six months, but the audit is still not complete. The auditors are disputing the exemption claimed by EFI from the 8% tax on purchases of certain waste processing supplies and equipment. About 20% of total purchases of $451 million fell into this category during the four-year audit period, according to EFI. 2. On June 23, Year 6, EFI received a wire transfer of 10 million Hong Kong dollars to its general Canadian dollar bank , in payment of an outstanding customer invoice. EFI’s bank converted the funds to $7.5 million Canadian, incorrectly assuming that the transfer was for Singapore dollars. On that day, 7.290 Hong Kong dollars would buy a Canadian dollar. EFI has not informed the bank of the error and has taken the difference into income. 3. During Year 6, EFI lost a decision in the Federal Court of Appeal in a lawsuit brought by Waste Systems Integrated Limited for patent infringement. In an unusual award, the court ordered EFI to pay $18 million for shares of Waste Systems Integrated Limited, a private company, which had been in some financial difficulty. EFI has decided not to appeal the decision to the Supreme Court, and the shares were purchased before year-end. 4. EFI issues debt for long-term financing purposes through three major investment dealers. In July Year 6, Moody’s, the credit rating agency, put EFI’s credit rating on alert for downgrade due to the potential negative effects of progressive toughening of environmental legislation applying to waste disposal sites. 5. EFI bids on various municipal waste pick-up and disposal contracts. EFI buys waste-disposal sites to dump the waste collected and defers and amortizes the cost of the sites over the expected useful lives, stated in tonnes of capacity, years of remaining usage, or cubic metres of waste capacity. Amortization of the cost of these sites represents 41% of EFI’s operating expenses. Of EFI’s assets, 64% are waste disposal sites. Provisions for cleanup and site sealing costs are accrued on the same basis as the amortization of the sites.


410


402

CHAPTER 7


6. EFI defers and amortizes over five years the costs of locating new waste disposal sites and negotiating agreements with municipalities. 7. During Year 6, EFI was awarded a contract to collect and dispose of all the waste for the Regional Municipality of Onkon-Lakerton for five years, commencing in Year 7. The contract requires the municipality to pay EFI $9.50 per metric tonne of waste collected. Because of aggressive recycling, composting, and waste reduction programs being carried out by the municipality, EFI negotiated a clause in the agreement that states that the company will be paid a minimum of $3.2 million per annum, regardless of the collection volume. EFI has recorded $16 million ($3.2 million 3 5 years) as revenue in Year 6. 8. In July Year 6, two U.S. subsidiaries of the company were notified that they are potentially responsible for violations of U.S. law. The legal proceedings have commenced, based on allegations that prior to being acquired by EFI, these subsidiaries improperly disposed of hazardous waste. The salepurchase agreement under which the subsidiaries were acquired contains price-adjustment clauses to protect EFI against pre-purchase liabilities. 9. In October Year 6, EFI sold trucks and other garbage collection equipment to a U.S. subsidiary for $20 million, and reported a gain of $9 million. The of the sale required a cash payment of $12 million on delivery, with the balance due in annual installments of $4 million, plus interest over a 2-year period. 10. Every year, EFI updates the estimates of the remaining useful lives of waste disposal sites, using the services of a consulting engineering firm. In the past, EFI used Folk & Co., Environmental Engineers, for these reviews. Folk & Co. did no other work for EFI. Starting in Year 6, EFI used Cajanza Consulting Engineers for the reviews. Based on the new consultants’ report, the useful lives of all waste-disposal sites have been increased between 4% and 26%, and the sealing/cleanup provision reduced by $13.6 million. 11. In light of the planned sale of EFI, the board of directors has decided to stop buying waste-disposal sites and to sell two sites where the cleanup provisions exceed the sites’ carrying amounts. EFI plans to sell the two sites to Enviro (Bermuda) Inc. for a dollar. The controlling shareholders of Enviro (Bermuda) Inc. are the same as the controlling shareholders of EFI. EFI plans to dump waste in these sites. Chu’s audit personnel heard a rumour that Enviro (Bermuda) Inc. does not plan to comply with environmental legislation. 12. During the year, EFI implemented a new cost ing system for the production of composting material. Organic material is extracted from residential garbage collected, and then processed, composted, bagged, and sold for use by gardeners. In the past, no cost has been assigned to the raw material inputs. The new system allocates a portion of total collection costs to these raw material inputs at standard cost.

Required: The partner has requested a memo that deals with the significant ing issues. (CICA adapted)


411


CHAPTER 7


403

P ROBLEMS Problem 7-1 LO3

X Company owns 80% of Y Company and uses the equity method to for its investment. On January 1, Year 2, the investment in Y Company had a balance of $86,900, and Y Company’s common shares and retained earnings totalled $100,000. The unamortized acquisition differential had an estimated remaining life of six years at this time. The following intercompany asset transfers took place in Years 2 and 3: January 1, Year 2, sale of asset to X at a profit of $45,000; and April 30, Year 3, sale of asset to Y at a profit of $60,000. Both assets purchased are being depreciated over five years. In Year 2, Y reported a net income of $125,000 and dividends paid of $70,000, while in Year 3 its net income and dividends were $104,000 and $70,000, respectively.

Required: Calculate the December 31, Year 3, balance in the “Investment in Y.” (Assume a 40% tax rate.)

Problem 7-2 LO1

Peggy Company owns 75% of Sally Inc. and uses the cost method to for its investment. The following data were taken from the Year 4 income statements of the two companies: Revenues Miscellaneous expenses Depreciation expense Income tax expense Total expenses Profit

Peggy

Sally

$580,000 110,000 162,000 123,000 395,000 $185,000

$270,000 85,000 97,000 35,000 217,000 $ 53,000

In Year 2, Sally sold equipment to Peggy at a gain of $15,000. Peggy has been depreciating this equipment over a five-year period. Sally did not pay any dividends in Year 4. Use income tax allocation at a rate of 40%.

Required: (a) Calculate consolidated profit attributable to Peggy’s shareholders for Year 4. (b) Prepare a consolidated income statement for Year 4. (c) Calculate the deferred income tax asset that would appear on the Year 4 consolidated statement of financial position.

Problem 7-3 LO1

The comparative consolidated income statements of a parent and its 75%-owned subsidiary were prepared incorrectly as at December 31 and are shown in the following table. The following items were overlooked when the statements were prepared: • The Year 5 gain on sale of assets resulted from the subsidiary selling equipment to the parent on September 30. The parent immediately leased the equipment back to the subsidiary at an annual rental of $12,000. This was the only intercompany rent transaction that occurred each year. The equipment had a remaining life of five years on the date of the intercompany sale.


412


404

CHAPTER 7


• The Year 6 gain on sale of assets resulted from the January 1 sale of a building, with a remaining life of seven years, by the subsidiary to the parent. • Both gains were taxed at a rate of 40%. CONSOLIDATED INCOME STATEMENTS Miscellaneous revenues Gain on sale of assets Rental revenue Miscellaneous expenses Rental expense Depreciation expense Income tax expense Non-controlling interest Net income

Year 5

Year 6

$750,000 8,000 3,000 761,000 399,800 52,700 75,000 81,000 32,500 641,000 $120,000

$825,000 42,000 12,000 879,000 492,340 64,300 80,700 94,500 5,160 737,000 $142,000

Required: Prepare correct consolidated income statements for Years 5 and 6.


On December 31, Year 2, HABS Inc. sold equipment to NORD at its fair value of $2,000,000 and recorded a gain of $500,000. This was HABS’s only income (other than any investment income from NORD) during the year. NORD reported income (other than any investment income from HABS) of $200,000 for Year 2. Both companies paid dividends of $100,000 during Year 2.

Required: (a) Calculate NORD’s income before taxes for Year 2 assuming that (i) HABS and NORD are not related; (ii) NORD owns 75% of HABS and reports its investment in HABS on a consolidated basis; (iii) NORD owns 75% of HABS and reports its investment in HABS using the equity method; and (iv) NORD owns 75% of HABS and reports its investment in HABS using the cost method. (b) Calculate HABS’s income before taxes for Year 2 assuming that (i) NORD and HABS are not related; (ii) HABS owns 75% of NORD and reports its investment in NORD on a consolidated basis; (iii) HABS owns 75% of NORD and reports its investment in NORD using the equity method; and (iv) HABS owns 75% of NORD and reports its investment in NORD using the cost method. (c) Compare and contrast the income reported under the reporting methods (ii), (iii), and (iv) above. Which method best reflects the economic reality of the business transaction?


413


CHAPTER 7



405

The balance sheets of Forest Company and Garden Company are presented below as at December 31, Year 8. BALANCE SHEETS—at December 31, Year 8 Forest

Garden

Cash Receivables Inventories Investment in shares of Garden Plant and equipment Accumulated depreciation Patents Investment in bonds of Forest

$ 13,000 25,000 80,000 207,900 740,000 (625,900) — — $440,000

$ 48,800 86,674 62,000 — 460,000 (348,400) 4,500 58,426 $372,000

Current liabilities Dividends payable Bonds payable 6% Common shares Retained earnings

$ 59,154 6,000 94,846 200,000 80,000

$ 53,000 30,000 — 150,000 139,000

$440,000

$372,000

Additional Information • Forest acquired 90% of Garden for $207,900 on July 1, Year 1, and s for its investment under the cost method. At that time, the shareholders’ equity of Garden amounted to $175,000, the accumulated amortization was $95,000, and the assets of Garden were undervalued by the following amounts: Inventory Buildings Patents

$12,000 $10,000 $16,000

remaining life, 10 years remaining life, 8 years

• During Year 8, Forest reported net income of $41,000 and declared dividends of $25,000, whereas Garden reported net income of $63,000 and declared dividends of $50,000. • During Years 2 to 7, goodwill impairment losses totalled $1,950. An impairment test conducted in Year 8 indicated a further loss of $7,150. • Forest sells goods to Garden on a regular basis at a gross profit of 30%. During Year 8, these sales totalled $150,000. On January 1, Year 8, the inventory of Garden contained goods purchased from Forest amounting to $18,000, while the December 31, Year 8, inventory contained goods purchased from Forest amounting to $22,000. • On August 1, Year 6, Garden sold land to Forest at a profit of $18,000. During Year 8, Forest sold one-quarter of the land to an unrelated company. • Forest’s bonds have a par value of $100,000, pay interest annually on December 31 at a stated rate of 6%, and mature on December 31, Year 11. Forest incurs an effective interest cost of 8% on these bonds. They had a carrying amount of $93,376 on January 1, Year 8. On that date, Garden acquired $60,000 of these bonds on the open market at a cost of $57,968. Garden will earn an effective rate of return of 7% on them. Both companies use the effective-interest method to for their bonds.


414


406

CHAPTER 7


The Year 8 income statements of the two companies show the following with respect to bond interest. Forest Interest expense Interest revenue

Garden

$7,470 $4,058

• Garden owes Forest $22,000 on open on December 31, Year 8. • Assume a 40% corporate tax rate and allocate bond gains (losses) between the two companies.

Required: (a) Prepare the following statements: (i) Consolidated balance sheet (ii) Consolidated retained earnings statement (b) Prepare the Year 8 journal entries that would be made on the books of Forest if the equity method was used to for the investment. (c) Explain how a loss on the elimination of intercompany bondholdings is viewed as a temporary difference and gives rise to a deferred income tax asset. (d) If Forest had used parent company extension theory rather than entity theory, how would this affect the debt-to-equity ratio at the end of Year 9?


Income statements of M Cop. and K Co. for the year ended December 31, Year 6, are presented below:

Sales Rent revenue Interest revenue Income from subsidiary Gain on land sale Cost of goods sold Distribution expense istrative expense Interest expense Income tax expense Profit

M Co.

K Co.

$600,000 — 6,700 30,320 — 637,020 334,000 80,000 147,000 1,700 20,700 583,400 $ 53,620

$350,000 50,000 — — 8,000 408,000 225,000 70,000 74,000 6,000 7,500 382,500 $ 25,500

Additional Information • M Co. uses the equity method to for its investment in K Co. • M Co. acquired its 80% interest in K Co. on January 1, Year 1. On that date, the acquisition differential of $25,000 was allocated entirely to buildings; it is being amortized over a 20-year period. • Amortization expense is grouped with distribution expenses, and impairment losses, if any, are grouped with other expenses. • M Co. made an advance of $100,000 to K Co. on July 1, Year 6. This loan is due on demand and requires the payment of interest at 12% per year. • M Co. rents marine equipment from K Co. During Year 6, $50,000 rent was paid and was charged to istrative expense.


415


CHAPTER 7


407

• In Year 4, M Co. sold land to K Co. and recorded a profit of $10,000 on the sale. K Co. held the land until October, Year 6, when it was sold to an unrelated company. • During Year 6, K Co. made sales to M Co. totalling $90,000. The December 31, Year 6, inventories of M Co. contain an unrealized profit of $5,000. The January 1, Year 6, inventories of M Co. contained an unrealized profit of $12,000. • On January 1, Year 4, M Co. sold machinery to K Co. and recorded a profit of $13,000. The remaining useful life on that date was five years. Assume straight-line depreciation. • K Co. paid dividends of $20,000 during Year 6. • Tax allocation is to be used, assuming a 40% average corporate tax rate for this purpose.

Required: (a) Prepare a consolidated income statement for Year 6. (b) Now assume that M Co. is a private company, uses ASPE, and chooses to use the cost method to report its investment in K Co. Prepare M Co.’s income statement for Year 6 under the cost method.

Problem 7-7 LO1, 5

Pure Company purchased 70% of the ordinary shares of Gold Company on January 1, Year 6, for $483,000 when the latter company’s accumulated depreciation, ordinary shares and retained earnings were $75,000, $500,000 and $40,000, respectively. Non-controlling interest was valued at $195,000 by an independent business valuator at the date of acquisition. On this date, an appraisal of the assets of Gold disclosed the following differences:

Land Plant and equipment Inventory

Carrying amount

Fair value

$150,000 700,000 120,000

$200,000 770,000 108,000

The plant and equipment had an estimated life of 20 years on this date. The statements of financial position of Pure and Gold, prepared on December 31, Year 11, follow: Pure

Gold

Land Plant and equipment Less accumulated depreciation Patent (net of amortization) Investment in Gold Co. shares (equity method) Investment in Gold Co. bonds Inventory s receivable Cash

$ 100,000 625,000 (183,000) 31,500 546,670 227,000 225,000 212,150 41,670 $1,825,990

$ 150,000 940,000 (220,000) — — — 180,000 170,000 57,500 $1,277,500

Ordinary shares Retained earnings Bonds payable (due Year 20) s payable

$ 750,000 1,019,960 — 56,030 $1,825,990

$ 500,000 200,000 477,500 100,000 $1,277,500


416


408

CHAPTER 7


Additional Information • Goodwill impairment tests have resulted in impairment losses totalling $18,000. • On January 1, Year 1, Gold issued $500,000 of 8½% bonds at 90, maturing in 20 years (on December 31, Year 20). • On January 1, Year 11, Pure acquired $200,000 of Gold’s bonds on the open market at a cost of $230,000. • On July 1, Year 8, Gold sold a patent to Pure for $63,000. The patent had a carrying amount on Gold’s books of $42,000 on this date and an estimated remaining life of seven years. • Pure uses tax allocation (40% rate) and allocates bond gains between s when it consolidates Gold. • Pure uses the equity method to for its investment.

Required: Prepare a consolidated statement of financial position as at December 31, Year 11.

Problem 7-8 LO1, 3, 5, 6, 7

On January 2, Year 1, Poplar Ltd. purchased 80% of the outstanding shares of Spruce Ltd. for $2,000,000. At that date, Spruce had common shares of $500,000 and retained earnings of $1,250,000 and accumulate depreciation of $600,000. Poplar acquired the Spruce shares to obtain control of mineral rights owned by Spruce. At the date of acquisition, these mineral rights were valued at $750,000, were not recognized on Spruce’s separate-entity balance sheet, and had an indefinite useful life. Except for the mineral rights, the carrying amount of the recorded assets and liabilities of Spruce were equal to their fair values. On December 31, Year 4, the trial balances of the two companies were as follows: Poplar

Spruce

Cash s receivable Inventory Plant and equipment Investment in Spruce (cost) Investment in Poplar bonds Cost of goods sold Other expenses Interest expense Income tax expense Dividends

$ 1,000,000 2,000,000 3,000,000 14,000,000 2,000,000 — 2,400,000 962,000 38,000 600,000 600,000 $26,600,000

$ 500,000 356,000 2,250,000 2,900,000 — 244,000 850,000 300,000 — 350,000 250,000 $8,000,000

s payable Accumulated depreciation: plant and equipment Bonds payable on bonds payable Common shares Retained earnings, January 1 Sales Dividend revenue Interest revenue

$ 2,492,000 4,000,000 500,000 8,000 4,500,000 10,000,000 4,900,000 200,000 — $26,600,000

$2,478,500 1,000,000 — — 500,000 2,000,000 2,000,000 — 21,500 $8,000,000


CHAPTER 7


417

409

Additional Information • The Year 4 net incomes of the two companies are as follows: Poplar Ltd. Spruce Ltd.

$1,100,000 521,500

• The mineral rights owned by Spruce have increased in value since the date of acquisition and were worth $925,000 at December 31, Year 4. • On January 2, Year 2, Spruce sold equipment to Poplar for $500,000. The equipment had a carrying amount of $400,000 at the time of the sale. The remaining useful life of the equipment was five years. • The Year 4 opening inventories of Poplar contained $500,000 of merchandise purchased from Spruce during Year 3. Spruce had recorded a gross profit of $200,000 on this merchandise. • During Year 4, Spruce’s sales to Poplar totalled $1,000,000. These sales were made at a gross profit rate of 40%. • Poplar’s ending inventory contains $300,000 of merchandise purchased from Spruce. • Other expenses include depreciation expense and copyright amortization expense. • On January 2, Year 2, Poplar issued 8%, 7-year bonds with a face value of $500,000 for $514,000. Interest is paid annually on December 31. On January 2, Year 4, Spruce purchased one-half of this issue on the open market at a cost of $242,500. Intercompany bond gains (losses) are to be allocated between the two s. • Tax allocation will be at a rate of 40%.

Required: (a) Prepare the following consolidated financial statements: (i) Income statement (ii) Retained earnings statement (iii) Balance sheet (b) Calculate the December 31, Year 4, balance in the “Investment in Spruce” if Poplar had used the equity method to for its investment. (c) Explain how the recognition of gains on the elimination of intercompany bondholdings is consistent with the principle of recording gains only when they are realized.


On January 1, Year 1, Porter Inc. purchased 85% of the voting shares of Sloan Ltd. for $3,026,000 in cash. On this date, Sloan had common shares outstanding in the amount of $2,200,000 and retained earnings of $1,100,000. The identifiable assets and liabilities of Sloan had fair values that were equal to their carrying amount, except for the following: • Plant and equipment (net) had a fair value $200,000 greater than its carrying amount. The remaining useful life on January 1, Year 1, was 20 years with no anticipated salvage value. • s receivable had a fair value $75,000 less than carrying amount. • Long-term liabilities had a fair value $52,680 less than carrying amount. These liabilities were issued at par and mature on December 31, Year 10.


418


410

CHAPTER 7


Additional Information • Between January 1, Year 1, and December 31, Year 3, Sloan earned $345,000 and paid dividends of $115,000. • Goodwill impairment tests yielded losses as follows: Year 1, $30,300; Year 2, $6,075; Year 4, $12,125. • On January 1, Year 2, Sloan sold a patent to Porter for $160,000. On this date, the patent had a carrying amount on the books of Sloan of $185,000 and a remaining useful life of five years. • On September 1, Year 3, Porter sold land to Sloan for $93,000. The land had a carrying amount on the books of Porter of $72,000. Sloan still owned this land on December 31, Year 4. • For the year ending December 31, Year 4, the income statements revealed the following:

Total revenues Cost of goods sold Amortization expense Interest expense Other expenses (including income tax) Total expenses Net income

Porter

Sloan

$2,576,000 1,373,000 483,000 115,000 237,000 2,208,000

$973,000 467,000 176,000 44,700 108,300 796,000

$ 368,000

$177,000

Porter records its investment in Sloan using the cost method and includes dividend income from Sloan in its total revenues. • Porter and Sloan paid dividends of $125,000 and $98,000, respectively, in Year 4. • Sloan issued no common shares subsequent to January 1, Year 1. Selected balance sheet s for the two companies as at December 31, Year 4, were as follows:

s receivable (net) Inventories Plant and equipment (net) Patent (net) Land Long-term liabilities Retained earnings

Porter

Sloan

$ 987,000 1,436,000 3,467,000 263,000 872,000 1,876,000 4,833,000

$ 133,000 787,000 1,234,000 –0– 342,000 750,000 1,409,000

• During Year 4, Porter’s merchandise sales to Sloan were $150,000. The unrealized profits in Sloan’s inventory on January 1 and December 31, Year 4, were $14,000 and $10,000, respectively. At December 31, Year 4, Sloan still owed Porter $5,000 for merchandise purchases. • During Year 4, Sloan’s merchandise sales to Porter were $55,000. The unrealized profits in Porter’s inventory on January 1 and December 31, Year 4, were $1,500 and $2,500, respectively. At December 31, Year 4, Porter still owed Sloan $2,000 for merchandise purchases. • Use income tax allocation at a rate of 40% and straight-line amortization of property, plant, and equipment and long-term liabilities.


CHAPTER 7


419

411

Required: (a) Compute the balances that would appear in the consolidated balance sheet of Porter and Sloan as at December 31, Year 4, for the following: (i) (ii) (vi) (iv) (v)

Patent (net) Goodwill Retained earnings Non-controlling interest Long-term liabilities

(b) Now assume that Porter is a private company, uses ASPE, and chooses to use the equity method to report its investment in K Co. Calculate the total revenues, including investment income, that would be presented in the income statement drawn up by Porter for the year ended December 31, Year 4. (c) Assume that Sloan pays interest annually at the rate of 6% on its long-term liabilities. When Porter acquired Sloan on January 1, Year 1, the fair value of Sloan’s long-term liabilities would have produced an effective yield of 7%. Calculate long-term liabilities on the consolidated financial statements, assuming that Porter and Sloan use the effective-interest method to for their long-term liabilities. (SMA adapted)

Problem 7-10 LO5, 7

Alpha Corporation owns 90% of the ordinary shares of Beta Corporation and uses the equity method to for its investment. On January 1, Year 4, Alpha purchased $160,000 of Beta’s 10% bonds for $150,064. Beta’s bond liability on this date consisted of $800,000 par 10% bonds due January 1, Year 8, and unamortized discount of $73,065. Interest payment dates are June 30 and December 31. The effective rate of interest is 6% every six months on Alpha’s bond investment and 6.5% every six months for Beta’s bond liability. Both companies have a December 31 year-end and use the effective-interest method to for bonds. Alpha uses income tax allocation at a 40% tax rate when it prepares its consolidated financial statements. Beta reported a profit of $114,000 in Year 4 and declared a dividend of $30,000 on December 31.

Required: (a) Calculate the amount of the gain or the loss that will appear as a separate item on the Year 4 consolidated income statement as a result of the bond transaction that occurred during the year. (b) Prepare the equity method journal entries that Alpha would make on December 31, Year 4. (c) Calculate the amount of the bond liability that will appear on the December 31, Year 4, consolidated statement of financial position.

Problem 7-11 LO5, 7

Parent Co. owns 75% of Sub Co. and uses the cost method to for its investment. The following are summarized income statements for the year ended December 31, Year 7. (Sub Co. did not declare or pay dividends in Year 7.)


420


412

CHAPTER 7


INCOME STATEMENTS—for Year 7 Parent Interest revenue Other misc. revenues Interest expense Other misc. expenses Income tax expense Net income

$

8,750 900,000 908,750 — 600,000 124,000 724,000 $184,750

Sub $ — 500,000 500,000 44,000 350,000 42,000 436,000 $ 64,000

Additional Information On July 1, Year 7, Parent purchased 40% of the outstanding bonds of Sub for $152,500. On that date, Sub had $400,000 of 10% bonds payable outstanding, which mature in five years. The bond discount on the books of Sub on July 1, Year 7, amounted to $20,000. Interest is payable January 1 and July 1. Any gains (losses) are to be allocated to each company. Both companies use the straight-line method to for bonds.

Required: Prepare a consolidated income statement for Year 7 using a 40% tax rate.

Problem 7-12 LO5, 7

Palmer Corporation owns 70% of the ordinary shares of Scott Corporation and uses the equity method to for its investment. Scott purchased $80,000 par of Palmer’s 10% bonds on October 1, Year 5, for $76,000. Palmer’s bond liability on October 1, Year 5, consisted of $400,000 par of 10% bonds due on October 1, Year 9, with unamortized discount of $8,000. Interest payment dates are April 1 and October 1 of each year, and straight-line amortization is used. Intercompany bond gains (losses) are to be allocated to each . Both companies have a December 31 year-end. Scott’s financial statements for Year 5 indicate that it earned profit of $70,000 and that on December 31, Year 5, it declared a dividend of $15,000.

Required: (a) Prepare the journal entries under the equity method that Palmer would make in Year 5. (Assume a 40% tax rate.) (b) Compute the amount of the bond liability that will appear on the December 31, Year 5, consolidated statement of financial position.

Problem 7-13 LO1, 4

On December 31, Year 1, RAV Company purchased 60% of the outstanding common shares of ENS Company for $780,000. On that date, ENS had common shares of $500,000 and retained earnings of $120,000. In negotiating the purchase price, it was agreed that recorded assets and liabilities were fairly valued except for equipment, which had a $30,000 excess of carrying amount over fair value, and land, which had a $120,000 excess of fair value over carrying amount. The equipment had a remaining useful life of six years at the acquisition date and no salvage value. ENS did not record the fair value deficiency on the equipment because ENS


421


CHAPTER 7


413

felt that it would recover the carrying amount of this equipment through future cash flows. In addition, ENS ed and owns a number of Internet domain names, which are estimated to be worth $100,000. The right to the names expires in 12 years but the registration can be renewed for 20 years every 20 years, for a nominal fee. The adjusted trial balances for RAV and ENS for the year ended December 31, Year 5, were as follows: RAV Cash s receivable Inventory Land Building—net Equipment—net Investment in ENS Cost of goods purchased Change in inventory Amortization expense Income taxes and other expenses Dividends paid Total debits

$ 150,000 275,000 594,000 600,000 710,000 690,000 516,000 2,340,000 60,000 240,000 960,000 540,000 $ 7,675,000

s payable Long-term debt Common shares Retained earnings, beginning Sales Other revenues Investment income from ENS Total credits

$ 465,000 900,000 1,200,000 600,000 4,220,000 80,000 210,000 $ 7,675,000

ENS $

75,000 226,000 257,000 170,000 585,000 349,000

2,137,000 (30,000) 120,000 432,000 304,000 $ 4,625,000 $ 296,000 540,000 500,000 279,000 3,010,000

$ 4,625,000

Additional Information • Each year, goodwill is evaluated to determine if there has been a loss. The recoverable impairment amount for ENS’s goodwill was valued at $100,000 at the end of Year 4 and $75,000 at the end of Year 5. • RAV’s inventories contained $200,000 of merchandise purchased from ENS at December 31, Year 5, and $250,000 at December 31, Year 4. During Year 5, sales from ENS to RAV were $600,000. Merchandise was priced at the same profit margin as applicable to other customers. RAV owed $150,000 to ENS at December 31, Year 5, and $157,000 at December 31, Year 4. • On July 1, Year 2, ENS purchased a building from RAV for $750,000. The building had an original cost of $800,000 and a carrying amount of $600,000 on RAV’s books on July 1, Year 2. ENS estimated the remaining life of the building was 15 years at the time of the purchase from RAV. • ENS rented another building from RAV throughout the year for $5,000 per month. • RAV uses the equity method of ing for its long-term investments. • Both companies pay tax at the rate of 40%. Ignore deferred income taxes when allocating and amortizing the acquisition differential.


422


414

CHAPTER 7


Required: (a) Prepare a consolidated income statement for the year ended December 31, Year 5. (b) Prepare the current assets, property, plant, and equipment and intangible assets sections of the consolidated balance sheet at December 31, Year 5. (c) Calculate non-controlling interest on the consolidated balance sheet at December 31, Year 4. (d) If RAV had used the cost method instead of the equity method of ing for its investment in ENS, would RAV’s net income for Year 5 increase, decrease, or remain the same on (i) its separate-entity income statement? (ii) the consolidated income statement? Briefly explain. (CGA-Canada adapted)

Problem 7-14 LO5, 7

Shown below are selected ledger s from the trial balance of a parent and its subsidiary as of December 31, Year 9.

Investment in bonds of P Investment in shares of S (equity method) Sales Interest income Investment income Gain on sale of land Common shares Retained earnings Bonds payable 8% Cost of sales Interest expense Selling and istrative expense Income tax expense Dividends

$

P Co.

S Co.

— 139,899 630,000 — 15,339 7,000 300,000 85,000 198,000 485,000 17,000 50,000 34,000 10,000

$ 39,000 — 340,000 1,850 — — 100,000 50,000 — 300,000 — 20,000 8,740 8,000

Additional Information • P Company purchased its 90% interest in S Company in Year 1, on the date that S Company was incorporated, and has followed the equity method to for its investment since that date. • On April 1, Year 5, land that had originally cost $15,000 was sold by S Company to P Company for $21,000. P purchased the land with the intention of developing it, but in Year 9 it decided that the location was not suitable and the land was sold to a chain of drug stores. • On January 1, Year 2, P Company issued $200,000 face value bonds due in 10 years. The proceeds from the bond issue amounted to $190,000. • On July 1, Year 9, S Company purchased $40,000 of these bonds on the open market at a cost of $38,750. Intercompany bondholding gains (losses) are allocated between the two s. • S Company had $75,000 in sales to P Company during Year 9. • Use income tax allocation at a 40% tax rate.


423


CHAPTER 7


415

Required: (a) Prepare a consolidated income statement for Year 9. (b) Prepare a consolidated statement of retained earnings for Year 9.


Financial statements of Champlain Ltd. and its 80%-owned subsidiary Samuel Ltd. as at December 31, Year 5, are presented below. STATEMENTS OF FINANCIAL POSITION—at December 31, Year 5 Champlain

Samuel

Property, plant, and equipment Accumulated depreciation Investment in Samuel—at cost Inventories s receivable Cash

$198,000 (86,000) 129,200 35,000 60,000 18,100 $354,300

$104,000 (30,000) — 46,000 55,000 20,600 $195,600

Ordinary shares Retained earnings Dividends payable s payable

$225,000 68,300 5,000 56,000 $354,300

$50,000 70,000 5,500 70,100 $195,600

STATEMENTS OF INCOME AND RETAINED EARNINGS for the Year Ended December 31, Year 5

Sales Dividend and miscellaneous income Cost of sales Selling expense istrative expense (including depreciation and goodwill impairment) Income taxes Profit Retained earnings, January 1 Dividends paid Retained earnings, December 31

Champlain

Samuel

$535,400 9,900 545,300 364,000 78,400 46,300

$270,000 — 270,000 206,000 24,100 20,700

13,800 502,500 42,800 45,500 (20,000) $ 68,300

6,200 257,000 13,000 68,000 (11,000) $ 70,000

Additional Information • Champlain acquired 8,000 ordinary shares of Samuel on January 1, Year 1, for $129,200. Samuel’s shares were trading for $14 per share on the date of acquisition. The retained earnings and accumulated depreciation of Samuel were $12,000 and $17,000, respectively, on that date, and there have been no subsequent changes in the ordinary shares . On January 1, Year 1, fair values were equal to carrying amounts except for the following: Carrying value Inventory Patent

$50,000 –0–

Fair value $32,000 14,000


424


416

CHAPTER 7


• The patent of Samuel had a remaining legal life of eight years on January 1, Year 1, and any goodwill was to be tested annually for impairment. As a result, impairment losses occurred as follows: Pertaining to Champlain’s purchase Non-controlling interest’s share

Year 2

Year 4

Year 5

$21,000 4,000 $25,000

$13,800 2,600 $16,400

$19,200 3,600 $22,800

• On January 1, Year 5, the inventories of Champlain contained items purchased from Samuel on which Samuel had made a profit of $1,900. During Year 5, Samuel sold goods to Champlain for $92,000, of which $21,000 remained unpaid at the end of the year. Samuel made a profit of $3,300 on goods remaining in Champlain’s inventory at December 31, Year 5. • On January 1, Year 3, Samuel sold equipment to Champlain at a price that was $21,000 in excess of its carrying amount. The equipment had an estimated remaining life of six years on that date. • Champlain sold a tract of land to Samuel in Year 2 at a profit of $7,000. This land is still held by Samuel at the end of Year 5. • Assume a corporate tax rate of 40%.

Required: (a) Prepare the following consolidated financial statements: (i) Income statement (ii) Retained earnings statement (iii) Statement of financial position (b) Explain how the historical cost principle s the elimination of the profit on the sale of the equipment from Samuel to Champlain when preparing Samuel’s consolidated financial statements. (c) If Champlain had used the parent company extension theory rather than the entity theory, how would this affect the return on equity attributable to shareholders of Champlain for Year 5? (d) Calculate goodwill and non-controlling interest on the consolidated statement of financial position at December 31, Year 5, under the parent company extension theory.

Problem 7-16 LO1, 2

On December 31, Year 1, the Peach Company purchased 80% of the outstanding voting shares of the Orange Company for $964,000 in cash. The balance sheet of Orange on that date and the fair values of its tangible assets and liabilities were as follows: Cash and s receivable Inventories Plant and equipment Accumulated depreciation

Current liabilities Long-term liabilities Common shares Retained earnings

Carrying amount

Fair value

$ 200,000 300,000 600,000 (100,000) $1,000,000

$175,000 300,000 800,000

$ 100,000 200,000 500,000 200,000

100,000 216,850

$1,000,000


425


CHAPTER 7


417

The difference between the fair value and the carrying amount of cash and s receivable of the subsidiary at December 31, Year 1, was adjusted by Orange in Year 2. At the acquisition date, the plant and equipment had an estimated remaining useful life of 10 years with no residual value. The long-term liabilities mature on December 31, Year 6. Any goodwill arising from the business combination will be tested for impairment. Peach uses the cost method to for its investment in Orange. Both Peach and Orange use the straight-line method to calculate all depreciation for depreciable assets and amortization of s or discounts on long-term liabilities. The statements of income and changes in retained earnings of the two companies for the year ending December 31, Year 5, were as follows: Sales of merchandise Other revenues Total revenues Cost of goods purchased Change in inventory Depreciation expense Interest expense Other expenses (including income tax) Total expenses Net income Retained earnings, 1/1/Year 5 Dividends Retained earnings, 31/12/Year 5

Peach

Orange

$6,000,000 200,000 6,200,000 2,525,000 (25,000) 500,000 400,000 1,300,000 4,700,000 1,500,000 4,200,000 (200,000) $5,500,000

$1,000,000 20,000 1,020,000 390,000 10,000 80,000 16,000 194,000 690,000 330,000 300,000 (50,000) $ 580,000

Additional Information • Goodwill impairment losses were recorded as follows: Year 2, $3,600; Year 4, $30,000; Year 5, $11,200. • On December 31, Year 4, Orange sold a warehouse to Peach for $54,000. It had been purchased on January 1, Year 3, for $100,000 and had an estimated 20-year life on that date with no salvage value. • During Year 4, Orange sold merchandise that it had purchased for $120,000 to Peach for $250,000. None of this merchandise had been resold by Peach by December 31, Year 4. Both companies for inventories on the first-in, first-out basis. • Peach had sales of $200,000 to Orange during Year 4, which gave rise to a gross profit of $125,000. This inventory was resold by Orange during Year 4 for $225,000. • During Year 5, Orange sold merchandise that had been purchased for $160,000 to Peach for $300,000. Since the sales occurred in December of Year 5, all of this merchandise remained in the December 31, Year 5, inventories of Peach and had not been paid for. • During September Year 5, Peach had sales of $280,000 to Orange, which increased Peach’s gross profit by $160,000. By December 31, Year 5, one-half of this merchandise had been sold to the public by Orange. • On January 1, Year 5, Peach sold to Orange for $28,000 a machine that had cost $32,000. On January 1, Year 5, it had been depreciated for six years of its estimated eight-year life. • During Year 5, Peach charged Orange $25,000 for management fees. • Assume a 40% corporate tax rate.


426


418

CHAPTER 7


Required: (a) Prepare a consolidated income statement for Peach and its subsidiary, Orange, for the year ending December 31, Year 5. Assume that the loss from sale of the warehouse will be eliminated. (b) Prepare a consolidated statement of retained earnings for Peach and its subsidiary, Orange, for the year ending December 31, Year 5. (c) Explain the rationale for not always eliminating losses on intercompany sales of depreciable assets when preparing consolidated financial statements. (d) Assume that Orange pays interest annually at the rate of 8% on its long-term liabilities. When Peach acquired Orange on December 31, Year 1, the fair value of Sloan’s long-term liabilities would have produced an effective yield of 6%. Calculate interest expense and non-controlling interest on the consolidated income statement assuming that Peach and Orange use the effective-interest method to for their long-term liabilities. (SMA adapted)


On January 1, Year 1, Handy Company (Handy) purchased 70% of the outstanding common shares of Dandy Limited (Dandy) for $7,000. On that date, Dandy’s shareholders’ equity consisted of common shares of $250 and retained earnings of $4,500. The financial statements for Handy and Dandy for Year 6 were as follows: BALANCE SHEETS at December 31, Year 6 Handy

Dandy

Cash s receivable Inventory Property, plant, and equipment—net Investment in Dandy Total

$ 1,340 2,800 3,400 4,340 7,000 $18,880

$ 780 1,050 2,580 3,010 — $7,420

Current liabilities Long-term liabilities Common shares Retained earnings Total

$ 4,200 3,100 1,000 10,580 $18,880

$ 540 1,230 250 5,400 $7,420

STATEMENTS OF INCOME AND RETAINED EARNINGS for Year Ended December 31, Year 6 Handy Sales Cost of sales Gross profit Other revenue Selling and istrative expense Other expenses Income before income taxes Income tax expense Net income Retained earnings, beginning of year Dividends paid Retained earnings, end of year

$21,900 14,800 7,100 1,620 (840) (5,320) 2,560 800 1,760 10,420 (1,600) $10,580

Dandy $7,440 3,280 4,160 — (420) (2,040) 1,700 680 1,020 5,180 (800) $5,400


427


CHAPTER 7


419

Additional Information • In negotiating the purchase price at the date of acquisition, it was agreed that the fair values of all of Dandy’s assets and liabilities were equal to their carrying amounts, except for the following:

Inventory Equipment

Carrying amount

Fair value

$2,100 2,500

$2,200 3,000

• Both companies use FIFO to for their inventory and the straight-line method for amortizing their property, plant, and equipment. Dandy’s equipment had a remaining useful life of 10 years at the acquisition date. • Goodwill is not amortized on a systematic basis. However, each year, goodwill is evaluated to determine if there has been a permanent impairment. It was determined that goodwill on the consolidated balance sheet should be reported at its recoverable amount of $1,100 on December 31, Year 5, and $1,030 on December 31, Year 6. • During Year 6, inventory sales from Dandy to Handy were $5,000. Handy’s inventories contained merchandise purchased from Dandy for $2,000 at December 31, Year 5, and $2,500 at December 31, Year 6. Dandy earns a gross margin of 40% on its intercompany sales. • On January 1, Year 2, Handy sold some equipment to Dandy for $1,000 and recorded a gain of $200 before taxes. This equipment had a remaining useful life of eight years at the time of the purchase by Dandy. • Handy charges $50 per month to Dandy for consulting services and has been doing so throughout Years 5 and 6. • Handy uses the cost method of ing for its long-term investment. • Both companies pay taxes at the rate of 40%. • Amortization expense is grouped with production expenses, and impairment losses are grouped with other expenses.

Required: (a) Prepare a consolidated statement of income for the year ended December 31, Year 6. Show ing calculations. (b) Calculate consolidated retained earnings at January 1, Year 6, and then prepare a consolidated statement of retained earnings for the year ended December 31, Year 6. Show ing calculations. (c) Explain how the historical cost principle s the adjustments made on consolidation when there has been an intercompany sale of equipment. (d) Calculate goodwill impairment loss and non-controlling interest on the consolidated income statement for the year ended December 31, Year 6, under the parent company extension theory. (CGA-Canada adapted)

*Problem 7-18 LO9

SENS Ltd. acquired equipment on January 1, Year 1, for $500,000. The equipment was depreciated on a straight-line basis over an estimated useful life of 10 years. On January 1, Year 3, SENS sold this equipment to MEL Corp., its parent company, for $420,000. MEL is depreciating this equipment on a straight-line basis over an estimated useful life of 8 years.


428


420

CHAPTER 7


MEL and SENS revalue their property, plant, and equipment to fair value each year under IAS 16 and transfer the revaluation surplus to retained earnings over the useful life of the asset or upon sale of the asset. The fair value of this equipment was $460,000 at the end of Year 1, $416,000 at the end of Year 2, and $370,000 at the end of Year 3. When the equipment is remeasured to fair value, both the original cost and accumulated depreciation are grossed up for the increase in value.

Required: Assume that this is the only equipment owned by the two companies and ignore income tax. Compute the balances that would appear in MEL’s separate-entity statements, SENS’s separate-entity statements, and MEL’s consolidated statements for Years 1, 2, and 3 for each of the following: (a) (b) (c) (d) (e)

Equipment Accumulated depreciation Accumulated other comprehensive income—revaluation surplus Gain on sale of equipment Depreciation expense

WEB-BASED PROBLEMS Web Problem 7-1 LO1, 4, 9

Access the 2011 consolidated financial statements for Barrick Gold Corporation by going to investor relations section of the company’s website. Answer the questions below. Round percentages to one decimal point and other ratios to two decimal points. For each question, indicate where in the financial statements you found the answer, and/or provide a brief explanation. (a) Are the expenses on the income statement presented by function or nature? Briefly explain. (b) What is amortization on the other intangible assets during the year, and why does amortization expense not appear as a separate component on the income statement? (c) Review the useful lives of the company’s intangible and tangible assets. If you had to pick one instance where you felt that the useful life was either understated or overstated, which asset would it be, and why? (d) What portion of the company’s assets is property, plant, and equipment? Has the portion increased or decreased from last year? (e) How does the company value its plant and equipment? (f) Assume that one of the subsidiaries sold equipment to the parent two years ago and reported a substantial gain. The parent still owns and uses this equipment. Due to an oversight, the intercompany gain has never been eliminated when preparing the consolidated statements. What is the impact of this error on total asset turnover and return on assets for the current year? (g) Now assume that the company changes its policy to report its plant and equipment at fair value. Also, assume that the fair value of plant and equipment is greater than its carrying amount. What impact would this change in policy have on return on equity for the year and the share price for the company?


CHAPTER 7



429

421

Access the 2011 financial statements for RONA Inc. by going to investor relations section of the company’s website. Answer the same questions as in Web Problem 7-1. For each question, indicate where in the financial statements you found the answer, and/or provide a brief explanation. (Some questions may not be applicable.)



430


8 chapter

Consolidated Cash Flows and Ownership Issues learning objectives After studying this chapter, you should be able to do the following: LO1 Prepare a consolidated cash flow statement by applying concepts learned in prior courses and unique consolidation concepts discussed here.

LO2 Prepare consolidated financial statements in situations where the parent’s ownership has increased (step purchase).

LO5 Calculate consolidated net income attributable to the shareholders of the parent and non-controlling interest in situations where a parent has direct and indirect control over a number of subsidiary companies.

LO3 Prepare consolidated financial statements after the parent’s ownership has decreased.

LO6 Analyze and interpret financial statements involving ownership changes.

LO4 Prepare consolidated financial statements in situations where the subsidiary has preferred shares in its capital structure.

LO7 Identify some of the differences between IFRSs and ASPE involving ownership changes.

INTRODUCTION

Different classes of shares typically have different voting and/or different dividend rights.

422

While it is still the norm in Canada for the capital structure of a company to consist of common and/or preferred shares, some companies no longer use the common shares and preferred shares to describe their shares. Instead, they may use such as Class A and Class B shares and then describe the essential features of them. In other parts of the world, common shares are often referred to as ordinary shares. Celestica Inc., a world leader in the delivery of innovative electronics manufacturing services, refers to its two classes of shares as subordinate voting shares and multiple voting shares. The subordinate shares entitle the holder to one vote per share, whereas the multiple voting shares entitle the holder to 25 votes per share. The holders of the subordinate voting shares and multiple voting shares are entitled to share ratably in any dividends of the company. Onex Corporation, one of Canada’s largest corporations, with global operations in the services, manufacturing, and technology industries, owns the multiple voting shares of Celestica, while the non-controlling shareholders own most of the subordinated voting shares. This share distribution gives Onex Corporation 71% of the votes but only 8% of the dividends. The non-controlling interests get 29% of the votes but 92% of the dividends.


CHAPTER 8

Consolidated Cash Flows and Ownership Issues

431

423

Up to now in this text, the companies involved in the business combination had only common shares outstanding, and the parent obtained control over the subsidiary in one purchase. In this chapter, we will consider situations where the subsidiary also has preferred shares outstanding and those where the parent’s ownership interest changes. We commence the chapter with a discussion of certain factors that are unique to the overall consolidation process and that must be considered when the consolidated cash flow statement is prepared.

CONSOLIDATED CASH FLOW STATEMENT In the previous chapters, we illustrated the direct approach to preparing the consolidated balance sheet and the consolidated income and retained earnings statements. In this approach, the individual statements of the parent and its subsidiaries are combined. We will now focus on the preparation of the final consolidated statement—the cash flow statement. While this statement could be prepared by combining the separate cash flow statements of the parent and its subsidiaries, this would involve eliminating all intercompany transactions, including intercompany transfers of cash. It is much easier to prepare the cash flow statement using comparative consolidated balance sheets and the consolidated income statement because these statements do not contain any intercompany transactions. In all of the illustrations in this chapter, we will assume that cash flows from operations are presented using the indirect method, whereby net income is adjusted for the effects of non-cash items such as depreciation, amortization, and changes in working capital items and for gains and losses associated with investing and financing cash flows. If the direct method were used, only the items affecting cash would be presented in the first place. Therefore, we would not need to adjust for non-cash items. The preparation of the cash flow statement for a single unconsolidated company is well covered in introductory and intermediate ing texts. The basic process used to determine the reasons for the change in cash or cash equivalents is one of analyzing the changes that have occurred in all non-cash items on the balance sheet. The procedures used to carry out this analysis (a working paper or a series of T-s) will not be repeated here. Instead, we will describe items that are unique to consolidated statements and that must be taken into in the analysis. The major items that require special attention are summarized below: 1. Acquisition-date fair value differences are depreciated in the consolidated income statement. While some of the amortizations may be obvious from their descriptions in the income statement, others may be buried in expense s. Because amortizations have no effect on cash flows, we must adjust the year’s net income for them in order to arrive at cash flow from operations. 2. Dividends paid by subsidiaries to the parent company do not change the consolidated entity’s cash. Dividends paid by the parent to its shareholders, and dividends paid by the subsidiaries to non-controlling shareholders, reduce the cash of the consolidated entity. These dividends can be presented as either operating or financing activities. The dividends paid to non-controlling shareholders should be disclosed or presented separately.

LO1

Under the indirect method, we start with net income and show the adjustments to convert it to a cash basis.

The change in cash can be determined by analyzing the change in non-cash items during the period.

The consolidated cash flow statement contains adjustments for items that are unique to consolidated financial statements, such as amortization of acquisition differential.


432


424

CHAPTER 8


3. A change in the parent’s ownership percentage during the year requires a careful analysis to determine its effect on consolidated assets, liabilities, and equities. This will be illustrated in a later section of this chapter (on ownership changes). 4. In the year that a subsidiary is acquired, special disclosures are required in the cash flow statement. The following example illustrates this. The consolidated balance sheet of Parent Company and its five subsidiaries as at September 30, Year 1, is shown below: PARENT COMPANY CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET at September 30, Year 1 Cash Other assets Goodwill

$ 500,000 900,000 120,000 $1,520,000


$ 500,000 200,000 720,000 100,000 $1,520,000

On October 1, Year 1, Parent acquired 80% of the outstanding common shares of its sixth subsidiary, Sable Ltd., for a total cost of $140,000. The shareholders of Sable received cash of $90,000 and common shares of Parent with a market value of $50,000 in this transaction. The management of Parent determined that the other assets of Sable had a fair value of $205,000 on this date. The balance sheet of Sable on September 30, Year 1, is shown below: SABLE LTD. BALANCE SHEET at September 30, Year 1 This is the separate-entity balance sheet of Sable.

Cash Other assets

$ 30,000 200,000 $230,000


$ 70,000 100,000 60,000 $230,000

Parent’s journal entry to record the acquisition of 80% of the common shares of Sable would be as follows on October 1, Year 1: This entry is recorded on the separate-entity records for Parent.

Investment in Sable Ltd. Common shares Cash

140,000 50,000 90,000

We will now prepare the consolidated balance sheet of Parent on October 1, Year 1, incorporating the latest acquisition and assuming that this acquisition was the only transaction that occurred on October 1, Year 1, for the parent and all of its subsidiaries.


433



CHAPTER 8

425

The calculation and allocation of the acquisition differential for the Sable investment is shown: Cost of 80% investment in Sable

$140,000

Implied value of 100% of Sable Carrying amount of Sable Acquisition differential Allocated: Other assets Goodwill

$175,000 160,000 15,000

Non-controlling interest (175,000 3 20%)

$ 35,000

The components of the acquisition differential are reported on the consolidated balance sheet.

5,000 $ 10,000

The consolidated balance sheet appears below: PARENT COMPANY CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET at October 1, Year 1 Cash (500,000 1 30,000 2 90,000) Other assets (900,000 1 200,000 1 5,000) Goodwill (120,000 1 10,000)

$ 440,000 1,105,000 130,000 $1,675,000

Liabilities (500,000 1 70,000) Common shares (200,000 1 50,000) Retained earnings Non-controlling interest (100,000 1 35,000)

$ 570,000 250,000 720,000 135,000

The assets and liabilities of the subsidiary are added to the consolidated balance sheet.

$1,675,000

Preparing the Consolidated Cash Flow Statement We can now prepare the consolidated cash flow statement for the day that has elapsed by analyzing the changes in the two consolidated balance sheets. We know that the only transaction that has taken place is Parent’s acquisition of 80% of Sable. The journal entry of Parent to record the acquisition was illustrated earlier. If we were preparing the cash flow statement of the parent company, we would use our knowledge of this entry in our analysis. But we are preparing the consolidated cash flow statement, and the “Investment in Sable” does not appear in the consolidated balance sheet. In order to do the proper analysis we need to visualize the effect of this new acquisition on the consolidated balance sheet. We can depict this effect in the form of a “consolidating entry” in the following manner: Cash Other assets (200,000 1 5,000) Goodwill Liabilities Non-controlling interest Cash Common shares

30,000 205,000 10,000

This entry shows the incremental effect of purchasing the subsidiary. 70,000 35,000 90,000 50,000

Note that the portion of the entry shown in boldface is the amount of the “Investment in Sable” that made up the parent’s acquisition journal entry.


434


426

CHAPTER 8

The investment is replaced by the underlying assets and liabilities in the consolidation process.


Using this analysis, we would normally show the purchase of other assets and goodwill as cash outflows from investing activities and the increase in liabilities, non-controlling interest, and common shares as cash inflows from financing activities. However, IAS 7 requires that only the net cash outflow from a business combination be presented on the cash flow statement, and the details of the changes in non-cash s arising from the business combination be disclosed in the notes to financial statements.1 Therefore, the consolidated cash flow statement for Parent Company would be presented as follows: PARENT COMPANY CONSOLIDATED CASH FLOW STATEMENT for the Day Ended October 1, Year 1

Only the net change in cash is presented on the consolidated cash flow statement.

Operating cash flow Investing cash flow: Acquisition of Sable, less cash acquired in acquisition $30,000 (note 1) Financing cash flow: Net change in cash for the two-day period Cash, September 30, Year 1 Cash, October 1, Year 1

$

nil

(60,000) nil (60,000) 500,000 $440,000

Note 1: Effective October 1, Year 1, the company acquired 80% of the common shares of Sable for a total consideration of $140,000. The acquisition, which was ed for by the acquisition method, is summarized as follows: The details of the changes in non-cash items are disclosed in the notes to the consolidated cash flow statement.

Net assets acquired: Other assets Goodwill Liabilities Non-controlling interest Consideration given: Common shares Cash Less cash acquired on acquisition

$205,000 10,000 (70,000) (35,000) $110,000 $ 50,000 90,000 140,000 30,000 $110,000

Note that the only item appearing on the cash flow statement is a $60,000 cash outflow under investing activities. The $60,000 is the difference between the cash paid for the shares of the subsidiary ($90,000) and the cash held by the subsidiary on the date of acquisition ($30,000). The other assets acquired and liabilities assumed in the business acquisition are not shown on the face of the cash flow statement as investing and financing activities but are disclosed in the notes to the financial statements. Therefore, when we prepare a cash flow statement, we must differentiate between those changes in non-cash items arising from a business combination and those arising from other activities. Those changes arising from the business combination are netted and given one line on the cash flow statement, with the details disclosed in the notes to the financial statements. The other changes are presented on the face of the cash flow statement, according to normal practices.


435


CHAPTER 8


427

In our discussion of the consolidated cash flow statement, we have focused entirely on items unique to consolidated statements, on the assumption that the overall process for preparing such statements has been covered in earlier financial ing courses. The next major topic in this chapter, ownership changes, also presents items that require analysis as to their effects on consolidated cash flows. The cash flow effects for these ownership changes will be discussed in the appropriate sections.

CHANGES IN PARENT’S OWNERSHIP INTEREST A parent’s ownership interest will change for any of the following: (a) The parent purchases additional holdings in its subsidiary (block acquisitions). (b) The parent sells some of its holdings in its subsidiary. (c) The subsidiary issues additional common shares to the public, and the parent does not maintain its previous ownership percentage.

The parent’s percentage of ownership can change when the parent buys or sells shares of the subsidiary or when the subsidiary issues or repurchases shares.

(d) The subsidiary repurchases some of its common shares from the non-controlling interest. When the parent’s ownership changes, the percentage of subsidiary common shares held by the non-controlling interest also changes. The major consolidation problem involved with ownership change is the effect such changes have on the valuation of subsidiary net assets and non-controlling interest in the consolidated statements. When the parent’s ownership percentage increases, a portion of the unamortized acquisition differential will be transferred from the non-controlling interest to the parent. When the parent’s ownership decreases, a portion of the unamortized acquisition differential will be transferred from the parent to the non-controlling interest. We will use a comprehensive example to illustrate various changes in a parent’s ownership interest. We will begin with step-by-step acquisitions.

Block Acquisitions of Subsidiary (Step Purchases) The consolidation illustrations that we have used in previous chapters have assumed that the parent company achieved its control in a subsidiary by making a single purchase of the subsidiary’s common shares. On the date of acquisition, the fair values of the subsidiary’s assets (including goodwill) and liabilities were determined and then brought onto the consolidated balance sheet along with the carrying amounts of the parent’s assets and liabilities. The non-controlling interest at the date of acquisition was also measured at fair value. In periods subsequent to the date of acquisition, the subsidiary’s net assets were ed for based on the values determined at the date of acquisition. They were not remeasured to fair value at each reporting date. We will now consider a situation where the parent achieves its control position through a series of block acquisitions (sometimes described as “step purchases”).

Purchase of First Block of Shares On January 1, Year 1, Par Company acquires 1,000 common shares (10% of the outstanding shares) of Star Company for $20,000. The 10% voting interest does not give Par control or significant influence. The investment is classified as fair value through profit or loss. On this date, the shareholders’ equity of Star consists of common shares of $100,000 and retained earnings of $70,000. During Year 1, Star reported net income of $10,000 and did not declare

Any time the parent’s percentage of ownership increases, we will for the transaction as a purchase. Any time the parent’s percentage decreases, we will for the transaction as a sale.

LO2 The subsidiary is measured at fair value on the consolidated balance sheet on the date the parent obtains control.


436


428

CHAPTER 8


any dividends. At the end of Year 1, the fair value of Star’s shares was $22 per share. Par’s journal entries for Year 1 for the FVTPL investment follow: FVTPL investments are reported at fair value at each reporting date.

Investment in Star Cash To record purchase of 1,000 shares of Star for $20 per share Investment in Star Gain on Star To record unrealized gain on FVTPL investment in Star

20,000 20,000 2,000 2,000

The acquisition differential at the date of acquisition is ignored. Par’s share of Star’s income for the year is also ignored because the investment is reported at its fair value of $22,000 at the end of Year 1.

The equity method is used once the investor obtains significant influence.

The investment is adjusted to fair value when the investor obtains significant influence over the investee.

Purchase of Second Block of Shares On January 1, Year 2, Par acquires another 2,000 common shares of Star for $44,000. The carrying amounts of Star’s net assets are equal to fair values except for specialized equipment, which is undervalued by $10,000. The equipment has an estimated remaining useful life of five years. During Year 2, Star reported a net income of $30,000 and paid dividends of $20,000. At December 31, Year 2, the fair value of Star’s shares was $25 per share. Par now owns 30% of Star and, presuming no other factors to the contrary, has obtained significant influence in the key decisions for Star. As a result, Star is now an associate and Par will now adopt the equity method of ing for its 30% interest. The change in reporting method will be ed for prospectively as a change in estimate because the circumstances changed from not having significant influence to having significant influence.2 In our current example, the investment in Star will reflect the fair value of Star’s share at January 1, Year 2. Par paid fair value for the 2,000 shares it just purchased. The carrying amount of the previous investment also reflects its fair value because as a FVTPL investment it must be reported at fair value. If the previous investment had been reported at cost, it would be revalued to fair value when the equity method was first adopted, and a gain or loss on revaluation would be reported in net income. The carrying amount of the investment in Star after the new investment would be equal to the fair value of the shares in Star at this date. for revaluing to fair value can be found in paragraph 26 of IAS 28, which states that the concepts underlying the procedures used in ing for the acquisition of a subsidiary are also adopted in ing for the acquisition of an investment in an associate. As we will see later, the revaluation of a previous investment to fair value is consistent with the requirements when an investor first obtains control of a subsidiary. Revaluing to fair value can also be ed by the use of the equity method, which requires that an investment in an associate must initially be recorded at cost. The cost of the asset 30% interest in Star is the fair value of the 10% investment in Star plus the $44,000 in cash. Under the equity method, an acquisition differential is calculated and subsequently amortized, similar to the process used for consolidation. The acquisition differential is first calculated when the equity method first becomes applicable and is calculated as if the entire 30% were purchased on this date. The acquisition cost incorporates the cost of the current purchase plus the fair value of the prior investments.


437


CHAPTER 8


429

The calculation and allocation of the acquisition differential as at January 1, Year 2, is as follows: Acquisition cost for 30% of Star (44,000 1 20,000 1 2,000) Carrying amount of Star’s net assets: Common shares Retained earnings (70,000 1 10,000) Total shareholders’ equity Par’s ownership interest

$66,000 100,000 80,000 180,000 30%

Acquisition differential Allocated: Equipment (10,000 3 30%) Goodwill

The acquisition differential must be identified and amortized under the equity method.

54,000 12,000 3,000 $ 9,000

The investment in Star is reported as a separate line on Par’s balance sheet and is ed for using the equity method. Consolidated financial statements are not appropriate, since Par only has significant influence and does not have control over Star. The acquisition differential, which includes the fair value excess pertaining to the equipment and the goodwill, is retained as a component of the investment and not reported separately on Par’s balance sheet. Since the fair value of Star’s shares went up during Year 2, there appears to be no impairment in the investment in Star or the underlying goodwill. The fair value excess component pertaining to the equipment must be depreciated over its useful life of five years. Par’s journal entries for Year 2 for the significant-influence investment would be as follows: Investment in Star Cash To record purchase of 2,000 shares of Star for $22 per share Investment in Star Investment income To record 30% of reported income for the year (30% 3 30,000) Investment income Investment in Star To record amortization of acquisition differential related to equipment (3,000/5 years) Cash Investment in Star To record dividends received during the year (30% 3 20,000)

44,000 44,000 9,000 9,000 600 600

6,000 6,000

The balance in the investment at the end of Year 2 is $68,400 (22,000 1 The investment is not 44,000 1 9,000 2 600 2 6,000). The fair value of the investment is $75,000 reported at fair value under (3,000 shares 3 $25 per share) but is ignored under the equity method, since it the equity method. exceeds the carrying amount of the investment.

Purchase of Third Block of Shares On January 1, Year 3, Par acquires another 1,000 common shares of Star for $25,000. The carrying amounts of Star’s net assets are equal to fair values except for specialized equipment, which is undervalued by $10,000. The equipment has an estimated remaining useful life of four years. During Year 3, Star reported a net income of $40,000 and paid dividends of $20,000. At December 31, Year 3, the fair value of Star’s shares was $29 per share.


438


430

CHAPTER 8


Par now owns 40% of Star, still has significant influence in the key decisions for Star, and will continue using the equity method. An acquisition differential for this 10% step is calculated and allocated as follows: A separate allocation of the acquisition differential should be prepared for each incremental investment.

Cost of 10% of Star Carrying amount of Star’s net assets: Common shares Retained earnings (80,000 1 30,000 2 20,000) Total shareholders’ equity Par’s ownership interest Acquisition differential Allocated: Equipment (10,000 3 10%) Goodwill

$25,000 100,000 90,000 190,000 10%

19,000 6,000 1,000 $ 5,000

There are now two separate and incremental calculations and allocations of acquisition differential based on the purchase price for each step. The allocation for the 30% step is carried forward with its previous values and is not revalued to fair value on the date of the third step. The following acquisition-differential amortization schedule is prepared to keep track of the allocation and amortization of the acquisition differentials for each step: ACQUISITION-DIFFERENTIAL AMORTIZATION SCHEDULE Second Step

The previous block acquisitions are not normally revalued when there is a new acquisition.

Jan 1, Year 2, purchase Amortization for Year 2 Balance, December 31, Year 2 Jan 1, Year 3, purchase Amortization for Year 3 Balance, December 31, Year 3

Equip.

Goodwill

$3,000 (600) 2,400

$9,000

(600) $1,800

Third Step Equip.

Goodwill

9,000

$9,000

$1,000 (250) $ 750

$5,000 $5,000

Total $12,000 (600) 11,400 6,000 (850) $16,550

Since the fair value of Star’s shares went up during Year 3, there appears to be no impairment in the investment in Star or the underlying goodwill. The fair value excess component of the investment is being depreciated over its useful life. Par’s journal entries for Year 3 for the investment in Star, an associate, would be as follows:

The amortization of the acquisition differential is recorded in the investment under the equity method.

Investment in Star Cash To record purchase of 1,000 shares of Star for $25 per share

25,000

Investment in Star Investment income To record 40% of reported income for the year (40% 3 40,000)

16,000

Investment income Investment in Star To record amortization of acquisition differential related to equipment Cash Investment in Star To record dividends received during the year (40% 3 20,000)

25,000

16,000 850 850 8,000 8,000


439


CHAPTER 8


431

The balance in the investment at the end of Year 3 is $100,550 (68,400 1 25,000 1 16,000 2 850 2 8,000). The fair value of the investment is $116,000 (4,000 shares 3 $29 per share) but is ignored under the equity method, since it exceeds the carrying amount of the investment.

Purchase of Fourth Block of Shares On January 1, Year 4, Par acquires another 3,000 common shares of Star for $87,000. The carrying amounts of Star’s net assets are equal to fair values except for specialized equipment, which is undervalued by $7,500. The equipment has an estimated remaining useful life of three years. During Year 4, Star reported a net income of $50,000 and paid dividends of $20,000. At December 31, Year 4, the fair value of Star’s shares was $34 per share. Par now owns 70% and has control over Star. The business combination should be reported on a consolidated basis. The change in reporting method will be ed for prospectively as a change in estimate because the circumstances changed from not having control to having control. IFRS 3 states that the previously held equity interest should be revalued at fair value with the revaluation adjustment reported in net income. If, before the business combination, the acquirer recognized changes in the value of its non-controlling equity investment in other comprehensive income, the amount that was recognized in other comprehensive income is reclassified and included in the calculation of any gain or loss as of the acquisition date. Therefore, Par will make the following entries on January 1, Year 4: Investment in Star Unrealized gain on investment To adjust investment in Star to fair value (116,000 2 100,550)

15,450

Investment in Star Cash To record purchase of 3,000 shares at $29 per share

87,000

The investment is adjusted to fair value when the investor first obtains control of the investee.

15,450

87,000

The investment in Star now contains a balance of $203,000 (100,550 1 15,450 1 87,000), which is equal to the fair value of the 7,000 shares. When the parent first obtains control of the subsidiary, we must prepare a new calculation and allocation of the acquisition differential for the percentage ownership at the time of the purchase, to reflect the revaluation of the entire subsidiary to fair value. In so doing, we will ignore the acquisition differentials and amortizations from the previous steps. The acquisition-differential calculation and amortization for the 70% interest as at January 1, Year 4 is as follows:

Any previous acquisition cost allocations are replaced by a new acquisition cost allocation on the date of a business combination.

Value of 70% of Star

$203,000

Implied value of 100% of Star Carrying amount of Star’s net assets: Common shares Retained earnings (90,000 1 40,000 2 20,000) Total shareholders’ equity Acquisition differential Allocated: Equipment Goodwill

$290,000

The acquisition differential is calculated and allocated to value the subsidiary at 100% of its fair value.

100,000 110,000 210,000 80,000 7,500 $72,500

Since the fair value of Star’s shares went up during Year 4, there appears to be no impairment in Star’s goodwill. The fair value excess attributed to the equipment must be depreciated over its useful life of three years. The following


440


432

CHAPTER 8


acquisition-differential amortization schedule is prepared to keep track of the allocation and amortization of the acquisition differential. ACQUISITION-DIFFERENTIAL AMORTIZATION SCHEDULE

Equipment Goodwill


Amortization Year 4


$ 7,500 72,500 $80,000

$2,500

$ 5,000 72,500 $77,500

$2,500

Assuming that Par continues to use the equity method on its separate-entity books, the journal entries for Year 4 would be as follows: Investment in Star Investment income To record 70% of reported income for the year (70% 3 50,000) Only the parent’s share of the amortization of the acquisition differential is recorded in the parent’s books.

The investment is not adjusted to fair value subsequent to the date of acquisition.

The subsidiary’s net assets are not revalued on the consolidated financial statements when the parent’s percentage ownership increases.

Investment income Investment in Star To record Par’s share of amortization of acquisition differential related to equipment (70% 3 2,500) Cash Investment in Star To record dividends received during the year (70% 3 20,000)

35,000 35,000 1,750 1,750

14,000 14,000

The balance in the investment at the end of Year 4 is $222,250 (203,000 1 35,000 2 1,750 2 14,000). The fair value of the investment is $238,000 (7,000 shares 3 $34 per share) but is ignored under the equity method and under consolidation, since it exceeds the carrying amount of the investment.

Purchase of Fifth Block of Shares On January 1, Year 5, Par acquires another 2,000 common shares of Star for $68,000. The carrying amounts of Star’s net assets are equal to fair values except for specialized equipment, which is undervalued by $6,000. The equipment has an estimated remaining useful life of two years. During Year 5, Star reported a net income of $60,000 and paid dividends of $20,000. At December 31, Year 5, the fair value of Star’s shares was $38 per share. Par now owns 90% of Star, continues to have control over Star, and continues to report its investment on a consolidated basis. However, it does not treat this additional purchase like the other step purchases because there is no change in control; that is, it does not calculate an acquisition differential for this purchase and does not revalue the existing acquisition differential. The transaction is treated as an equity transaction; that is, a transaction with owners in their capacity as owners. Simply put, the parent is acquiring an additional 20% of Star from the non-controlling interests. In such circumstances, the carrying amount of the portion of the non-controlling interests sold to the parent will be allocated to the parent. Any difference between the amounts by which the non-controlling interests are adjusted and the fair value of the consideration paid or received by the parent must be recognized as a direct charge or credit to owners’ equity, and attributed to the owners of the parent. The carrying amount of the non-controlling interests sold to the parent was $63,500, calculated as follows:


441


CHAPTER 8


Star’s common shares Star’s retained earnings (110,000 1 50,000 2 20,000)

Non-controlling interests’ percentage ownership Non-controlling interests at December 31, Year 4

$100,000 140,000 240,000 77,500 317,500 30% $ 95,250

Portion sold to controlling interest (2,000/3,000)

$ 63,500

Unamortized acquisition differential

433

Any difference between the amount paid and the carrying amount of net assets being purchased from the non-controlling interest is recognized as a direct charge or credit to owner’s equity.

Since Par paid $68,000 for the shares, it paid $4,500 more than the carrying amount previously attributed to these shares on the consolidated balance sheet. This $4,500 would be recognized as a direct charge to Par’s retained earnings on the date of the purchase. Since the fair value of Star’s shares went up during the year, there appears to be no impairment in Star’s goodwill. The acquisition-differential amortization schedule for Year 5 is as follows:

Equipment Goodwill


Amortization Year 5


$ 5,000 72,500 $77,500

$2,500

$ 2,500 72,500 $75,000

$2,500

Assuming that Par continues to use the equity method on its separate-entity books, the journal entries for Year 5 would be as follows: Investment in Star Retained earnings Cash To record purchase of 2,000 shares at $34 per share

63,500 4,500

Investment in Star Investment income To record 90% of reported income for the year (90% 3 60,000)

54,000

Investment income Investment in Star To record Par’s share of amortization of acquisition differential related to equipment (90% 3 2,500)

2,250

Cash Investment in Star To record dividends received during the year (90% 3 20,000)

18,000

68,000

54,000

2,250

18,000

The balance in the investment at the end of Year 5 is $319,500 (222,250 1 63,500 1 54,000 2 2,250 2 18,000). The investment can be segregated as follows: Carrying amount of Star’s net assets: Common shares Retained earnings (140,000 1 60,000 2 20,000) Total shareholders’ equity Unamortized acquisition differential Par’s ownership interest Total

These entries are recorded on the separate-entity books of the parent.

$100,000 180,000 280,000 75,000 355,000 90% $319,500

The investment can be reconciled to the subsidiary’s equity at any point in time when the parent uses the equity method.


442


434

CHAPTER 8


Non-controlling interest on the balance sheet comprises the non-controlling interest’s share of the subsidiary’s equity and the unamortized acquisition differential at the balance sheet date.

Similarly, the non-controlling interest can be calculated using these same components as follows: Carrying amount of Star’s net assets: Unamortized acquisition differential

Non-controlling interest’s ownership interest

$280,000 75,000 355,000 10% $ 35,500

We will now illustrate the consolidation process by using the following condensed balance sheets for Par and Star at the end of Year 5: The parent’s retained earnings under the equity method are equal to consolidated retained earnings.

Par

Star

Investment in Star (equity method) Equipment—net Other assets

$ 319,500 500,000 700,000 $1,519,500

$140,000 490,000 $630,000


$ 450,000 500,000 569,500 $1,519,500

$350,000 100,000 180,000 $630,000

The consolidated balance sheet at December 31, Year 5, is as follows: PAR COMPANY CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET at December 31, Year 5 Both the parent’s and the non-controlling interest’s shares of the unamortized acquisition differential appear on the consolidated balance sheet.

Numerous small purchases can be grouped into one block purchase when calculating and allocating the acquisition differential.

Equipment—net (500,000 1 140,000 1 2,500) Other assets (700,000 1 490,000) Goodwill (0 1 0 1 72,500)

$ 642,500 1,190,000 72,500 $1,905,000

Liabilities (450,000 1 350,000) Common shares Retained earnings Non-controlling interest

$ 800,000 500,000 569,500 35,500 $1,905,000

Numerous Small Purchases Assume that Par attempts to purchase the remaining outstanding shares of Star by making daily open-market purchases of the subsidiary’s shares. At the end of two months, it abandons the idea. During this period, it has made 35 separate share purchases, which, in total, represent 4% of the subsidiary’s outstanding shares. Since it would be impractical to calculate 35 acquisition differentials, these purchases can be combined and treated as a single block purchase of 4%. Repurchase of Shares by Subsidiary When the subsidiary repurchases and cancels some or all of the common shares being held by the non-controlling shareholders, the parent’s percentage ownership in the common shares will increase. The increase in ownership will be ed for as an equity transaction similar to the purchase of the fifth block of shares.


443


CHAPTER 8


435

Consolidated Retained Earnings—Cost Method The examples used to illustrate block purchases have assumed that the parent company uses the equity method to for its investment. If the parent had used the cost method, schedules would have to be prepared to derive balances such as retained earning for the consolidated financial statements. These schedules have been extensively illustrated in earlier chapters and require only slight modification when block acquisitions have been made. In our comprehensive example, Par used the equity method during the period it had control of Star. If Par had used the cost method for internal record keeping, it likely would have adopted the cost method when it first obtained control of Star on January 1, Year 4. It would simply have added the $87,000 cost of the fourth purchase to the carrying amount of the investment at that point, which was $100,550 as per our earlier discussion. It would not likely have made any adjustment to value the investment at fair value as required for consolidation purposes. If so, the balance in the investment at January 1, Year 4 would have been $187,550 (100,550 1 87,000). The $68,000 cost of the fifth purchase would be added on January 1, Year 5 to bring the investment to $255,550 (187,550 1 68,000) at that date and at December 31, Year 5. This compares to a balance of $319,500 under the equity method at the end of Year 5. The difference of $63,950 (319,500 2 255,550) for the investment would be offset by a $63,950 reduction in retained earnings. Therefore, retained earnings for Par under the cost method would have been $505,550 (569,500 under equity method minus 63,950) at December 31, Year 5. Consolidated retained earnings would be calculated as follows: CALCULATION OF CONSOLIDATED RETAINED EARNINGS at December 31, Year 5 Retained earnings of parent—cost method Adjust investment to fair value at date of business combination Less: Parent’s share of acquisition-differential amortizations Year 4 purchase 1,750 Year 5 purchase 2,250 Retained earnings of subsidiary at the time of Year 5 purchase 140,000 Retained earnings of subsidiary at the time of Year 4 purchase 110,000 30,000 Increase since Year 4 purchase Parent’s ownership percentage 70% 180,000 Retained earnings of subsidiary—Dec. 31, Year 5 Retained earnings of subsidiary at the time of Year 5 purchase 140,000 40,000 Increase since Year 5 purchase Parent’s ownership percentage 90% Loss on purchase of shares from non-controlling interest, Jan. 1, Year 5 Consolidated retained earnings

$505,550 15,450

(4,000)

21,000

36,000 (4,500) $569,500

Consolidated Cash Flow Analysis Par Company’s fifth block purchase of shares (on January 1, Year 5, for $68,000) requires further analysis to determine the effect on the Year 5 consolidated balance sheet. This cash has left the consolidated entity, so the effect of the transaction must appear on the Year 5 consolidated cash flow

Consolidated retained earnings should recognize the parent’s percentage ownership for each step of the step-by-step acquisitions.


444


436

CHAPTER 8


statement. We can depict the effect of the fifth purchase on the consolidated balance sheet with the following entry: The cost of purchasing additional shares in the subsidiary should be reported in financing activities on the consolidated cash flow statement.

LO3

Retained earnings Non-controlling interest Cash

4,500 63,500 68,000

This transaction simply moved cash and reallocated shareholders’ equity between the controlling and non-controlling interests. No new assets were acquired. The $68,000 cash outflow should appear in the financing activities section of the cash flow statement, since it is similar to purchasing shares from a shareholder. It would be described as “Purchase of additional shares in subsidiary from non-controlling interests.”

Parent Sells Some of Its Holdings in Subsidiary Let us continue with the previous illustration involving Par and Star. Assume that on January 1, Year 6, Par sold 900 shares in Star Company on the open market for $34,200. Note that after the sale, Par’s ownership percentage is 81% (8,100 4 10,000). Note also that Par has disposed of 10% of its investment in Star (900 4 9,000). Another way of calculating the percentage of investment disposed is as follows: Ownership before sale Ownership after sale Change Percentage of investment sold: 9 4 90 5 10%

Gains (losses) on transactions with shareholders are credited (charged) directly to shareholders’ equity.

Since Par still has control of Star, consolidated financial statements will continue to be prepared. This transaction is, once again, treated as an equity transaction; that is, a transaction between shareholders of the consolidated entity. The parent is selling part of its interest in Star to the non-controlling interest. The carrying amount of the portion sold is $31,950 (10% 3 319,500); it will be allocated from the parent to the non-controlling interest. Since the amount received was $34,200, the owners of the parent are better off by $2,250 as a result of this transaction. This benefit is not reported in net income since this transaction between owners has not resulted in a change in control. The gain will be recognized as a direct increase to consolidated contributed surplus. Since the equity method should produce the same results as the consolidated financial statements, Par would make the following entry to record the sale of 900 shares: Cash Investment in Star (10% 3 $319,500) Contributed surplus

Non-controlling interest is increased by the carrying amount of the shares sold by the parent.

90% 81% 9%

34,200 31,950 2,250

The total unamortized acquisition differential to be reported on the consolidated financial statements would remain the same in total. However, the portion belonging to the non-controlling interest would increase because the non-controlling interest now owns 19% of the subsidiary. The portion belonging to the controlling interest would decrease because the parent has sold 10% of its interest.


445


CHAPTER 8

437


The following schedule shows the change in values for the controlling and noncontrolling interests as a result of Par’s sale of 900 shares: Controlling Interest Before Percentage ownership Share of Star’s shareholders’ equity Unamortized acquisition differential Equipment Goodwill Total

Sold

Non-controlling Interest

After

Before

Bought

After

90% $252,000

9% 81% $25,200 $226,800

10% $28,000

9% 19% $25,200 $53,200

2,250 65,250 $319,500

225 6,525 $31,950

250 7,250 $35,500

225 6,525 $31,950

2,025 58,725 $287,550

475 13,775 $67,450

We will now illustrate the consolidation process by using the following condensed balance sheets for Par and Star at January 1, Year 6. The previous balance sheets have been updated for the entry to record the sale of 900 shares by Par. Par

Star

Investment in Star (319,500 2 31,950) Equipment—net Other assets (700,000 1 34,200)

$ 287,550 500,000 734,200 $1,521,750

$140,000 490,000 $630,000

Liabilities Common shares Retained earnings Contributed surplus

$ 450,000 500,000 569,500 2,250 $1,521,750

$350,000 100,000 180,000 $630,000

The consolidated balance sheet at January 1, Year 6, is as follows: PAR COMPANY CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET at January 1, Year 6 Equipment—net (500,000 1 140,000 1 2,025 1 475) Other assets (734,200 1 490,000) Goodwill (58,725 1 13,775)

$ 642,500 1,224,200 72,500 $1,939,200

Liabilities (450,000 1 350,000) Common shares Retained earnings Contributed surplus Non-controlling interest

$ 800,000 500,000 569,500 2,250 67,450 $1,939,200

The sale of the shares to the non-controlling interest increased the entity’s cash by $34,200. This cash inflow must appear on the consolidated cash flow statement. We can depict the effect of the sale on the consolidated balance sheet with the following entry: Cash Non-controlling interest Contributed surplus

34,200 31,950 2,250

The subsidiary’s net assets are not revalued when the parent sells a portion of its investment in the subsidiary.


446


438

CHAPTER 8

The proceeds from selling shares in the subsidiary should be reported in financing activities on the consolidated cash flow statement.


This transaction simply reallocated shareholders’ equity between the controlling and non-controlling interests. The $34,200 cash inflow should appear in the financing activities section of the cash flow statement and would be described as “Sale of shares in subsidiary to non-controlling interest.”

Income Statement Analysis On December 31, Year 6, Star reported a net income of $40,000 and paid dividends amounting to $15,000. A goodwill impairment test conducted on December 31, Year 6, indicated that an impairment loss of $6,000 had occurred. The following acquisition-differential amortization schedule would be made on December 31, Year 6: ACQUISITION-DIFFERENTIAL AMORTIZATION AND IMPAIRMENT SCHEDULE

Equipment Goodwill


Amortization/Impairment Year 6

$ 2,500 72,500 $75,000

$2,500 6,000 $8,500

Balance Dec. 31, Year 6 $ 0 66,500 $66,500

Note that the Year 6 amortization completely eliminates the acquisition differential related to the equipment because this is the last year of the equipment’s useful life. Par’s equity method journal entries for Year 6 would be as follows:

Dividends received from the subsidiary are recorded as a reduction in the investment under the equity method.

Investment in Star Investment income To record 81% of Star’s net income for Year 6 (40,000 3 81%)

32,400

Cash Investment in Star To record dividends received from Star in Year 6 (15,000 3 81%)

12,150

Investment income Investment in Star To record Par’s share of amortization of the acquisition differential for Year 6 (8,500 81%)

32,400

12,150 6,885 6,885

The following are the Year 6 income statements of Par and Star:

Miscellaneous revenue Investment income Miscellaneous expenses Equipment depreciation expense Net income

Par

Star

$200,000 25,515 225,515 130,000 — 130,000 $ 95,515

$150,000 — 150,000 90,000 20,000 110,000 $ 40,000

Investment income is replaced with the revenues and expenses of Star, the amortization of the acquisition differentials, and the non-controlling interest. The Year 6 consolidated income statement prepared using the direct approach appears below:


447



CHAPTER 8

439

PAR COMPANY CONSOLIDATED INCOME STATEMENT for the Year Ended December 31, Year 6 $350,000 220,000 22,500 6,000 248,500 $101,500

Miscellaneous revenues (200,000 1 150,000) Miscellaneous expenses (130,000 1 90,000) Equipment depreciation (0 1 20,000 1 2,500) Goodwill impairment loss (0 1 0 1 6,000)

Net income Attributable to Shareholders of Par Company Non-controlling interest [19% 3 (40,000 2 8,500)]

$ 95,515 5,985

The non-controlling interest is charged with its share of the amortization of the acquisition differential.

Over the past few pages, we have ed for a series of acquisitions and dispositions of shares in an investee. Exhibit 8.1 summarizes the key decisions made in each step of the process. See Self-Study Problem 1 for a comprehensive problem involving changes in ownership. It includes most of the issues we have covered so far this chapter.

SUBSIDIARY ISSUES ADDITIONAL SHARES TO PUBLIC Let us assume that Par did not sell 900 shares on January 1, Year 6, and that, instead, Star Company issued an additional 2,500 shares for $95,000 on January 1, Year 6. Star would record this transaction as follows: Cash Common shares To record the issuance of 2,500 shares

95,000 95,000

Star now has 12,500 common shares issued. Because Par did not buy any of the new issue, its holdings have remained constant (9,000 shares) but its ownership interest has declined to 72% (9,000 4 12,500). This represents a 20% reduction in its investment, calculated as follows: Ownership before share issue Ownership after share issue Change

90% 72% 18%

Percentage of investment reduced: 18 4 90 5 20%

EXHIBIT 8.1

Overview of Step-by-Step Acquisitions Step Number

Percentage acquired Percentage owned Reporting method Previous investment revalued to fair value New allocation of acquisition differential required Acquisition differential for what percentage

1

2

3

4

5

6

10 10 FVTPL

20 30 Equity

10 40 Equity

30 70 Cons

20 90 Cons

(9) 81 Cons

N.A.

Yes

No

Yes

No

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

N.A.

30

10

100

N.A.

N.A.

The parent’s percentage interest decreases when the subsidiary issues additional shares and the parent does not purchase any of the additional shares.


448


440

CHAPTER 8


The effect of this reduction on the unamortized acquisition differential is the same as if the parent had sold a portion of its holding in the subsidiary to the non-controlling interest. In this case, 20% of the parent’s share of the unamortized acquisition differential has been “disposed of” as a result of the share issue. However, at this point, the only entry to record the transaction is made by Star. Parent must also adjust its investment to record the effect of this transaction on its investment. The following analysis indicates the amount of the adjustment: The parent gave up 20% of its old investment and received 72% of the increase in the subsidiary’s equity.

Gains (losses) on transactions with shareholders are not reported in net income.

Loss due to reduction of investment —20% 3 319,500 Gain due to ownership of new assets resulting from subsidiary share issue—72% 3 95,000 Net benefit to parent due to share issue

$63,900

68,400 $ 4,500

In our previous example, we explained the reasoning for removing 20% from the investment . The unamortized acquisition differential is included in the $319,500 amount, and if this differential has been reduced by 20%, a logical extension is to remove 20% from the total investment balance. If the subsidiary had issued the 2,500 shares for no consideration, the investment would have to be reduced by $63,900 (20% 3 319,500), and a loss equal to that amount would be recorded by Par as a direct charge to owner’s equity. But Star received $95,000 for its new share issue, and Par now owns 72% of the net assets of its subsidiary, including the additional cash received as a result of the new share issue. Par has gained by the 72% ownership interest in the assets received by Star. It should be obvious that the net charge or credit to owners’ equity resulting from the transaction depends on the amount that the subsidiary received from its new share issue. This gain is not reported in net income, since this transaction between owners has not resulted in a change in control. The gain will be recognized as a direct increase to consolidated contributed surplus and to the parent’s separateentity contributed surplus under the equity method. Given the facts of this particular example, Par would make the following journal entry under the equity method on January 1, Year 6: Investment in Star 4,500 Contributed surplus To record the effect of subsidiary’s issue of 2,500 shares on parent’s investment

4,500

As in our previous example, we assume that in Year 6, Star reported a net income of $40,000 and paid $15,000 in dividends. Par’s equity method journal entries for Year 6 would be as follows:

The parent absorbs 72% of the amortization of the acquisition differential.

Investment in Star Investment income To record 72% of Star’s net income for Year 6 (40,000 3 72%)

28,800

Cash Investment in Star To record dividends received from Star in Year 6 (15,000 3 72%)

10,800

Investment income Investment in Star To record Par’s share of the amortization of the acquisition differential for Year 6 (8,500 3 72%)

28,800

10,800 6,120 6,120


449


CHAPTER 8


441

The elimination of the parent’s interest in the subsidiary’s shareholders’ equity against the parent’s investment leaves a balance equal to the unamortized acquisition differential. This will now be illustrated. Investment in Star Balance, December 31, Year 5 Increase due to subsidiary share issue Star net income (40,000 3 72%) Star dividends (15,000 3 72%) Acquisition-differential amortization Balance, December 31, Year 6 Shareholders’ equity of Star Common shares—December 31, Year 5 Share issue—Year 6 Common shares, December 31, Year 6 Retained earnings, December 31, Year 6 (180,000 1 40,000 2 15,000) Total, December 31, Year 6 Par’s ownership interest Balance—unamortized acquisition differential

$319,500 4,500 28,800 (10,800) (6,120) 335,880

The investment comprises the parent’s share of the subsidiary’s equity plus the unamortized acquisition differential.

100,000 95,000 195,000

205,000 400,000 72%

288,000 $ 47,880

The $47,880 represents Par’s 72% of the total acquisition differential of $66,500, as per the earlier discussion under “Income Statement Analysis”. Non-controlling interest at December 31, Year 6, is $130,620 (28% 3 [400,000 1 66,500]). The Year 6 income statements of Par and Star are shown below, followed by the consolidated income statement. Miscellaneous revenue Investment income Miscellaneous expenses Equipment depreciation expense Net income

Par

Star

$200,000 22,680 222,680 130,000 — 130,000 $ 92,680

$150,000 — 150,000 90,000 20,000 110,000 $ 40,000

PAR COMPANY CONSOLIDATED INCOME STATEMENT for the Year Ended December 31, Year 6 Miscellaneous revenues (200,000 1 150,000) Miscellaneous expenses (130,000 1 90,000) Equipment depreciation (0 1 20,000 1 2,500) Goodwill impairment loss (0 1 0 1 6,000) Net income

$350,000 220,000 22,500 6,000 248,500 $101,500

Attributable to Shareholders of Par Company Non-controlling interest [28% 3 (40,000 2 8,500)]

$ 92,680 8,820

Consolidated Cash Flow Analysis To recap, the issue of 2,500 shares on January 1, Year 6, was recorded by Star Company with the following journal entry: Cash Common shares

95,000 95,000

The unamortized acquisition differential is not revalued when the parent’s percentage ownership changes as long as the parent still has control.


450


442

CHAPTER 8


Also, in order to record the effect of the reduction on its investment, Par made the following journal entry on this date: Investment in Star Contributed surplus

4,500 4,500

As a result of this share issue, the non-controlling interests increased by $90,500 calculated as follows: Non-controlling interest can be reconciled to the subsidiary’s shareholders’ equity and the unamortized acquisition differential at any point in time.

NCI after subsidiary share issue: Shareholders’ equity before issue New share issue Shareholders’ equity after issue Unamortized acquisition differential

$280,000 95,000 375,000 75,000 450,000 28%

NCI’s share

126,000 35,500 $ 90,500

NCI before subsidiary share issue Increase in non-controlling interest

The effect of this transaction on the consolidated financial statements can be depicted as follows: The consolidated entity received cash from the noncontrolling interest.

Cash Non-controlling interest Contributed surplus

95,000 90,500 4,500

This transaction increased the equity of both the controlling and the noncontrolling interests. The $95,000 cash inflow should appear in the financing activities section of the cash flow statement and would be described as “Issuance of shares by subsidiary to non-controlling interest.” The excess of proceeds over the value of the transfer of equity to the non-controlling interests was recorded directly to retained earnings.

Disclosure Requirements The disclosure requirements for a business combination were listed near the end of Chapter 3. Exhibit 8.2 is an extract from Goldcorp Inc.’s 2011 consolidated financial statements. It provides an example of disclosure when a parent sells a partial interest in a subsidiary. Goldcorp is a gold producer engaged in the operation, exploration, development, and acquisition of precious metal

EXHIBIT 8.2

Extracts in Part from Goldcorp’s 2011 Financial Statements

30. NON-CONTROLLING INTERESTS Terrane

Total

– 213 –

$ 51 – (8)

$ 51 213 (8)

–

53

53

– – $213 – $213

(96) (43) $ – – $ –

(96) (43) $213 – $213

El Morro At January 1, 2010 Acquisition of El Morro project Share of net earnings (loss) Impact of change in ownership interest Prior to disposition of remaining interest in Terrane (a) Disposition of remaining interest in Terrane (b) At December 31, 2010 Share of net earnings (loss) At December 31, 2011

$


CHAPTER 8

EXHIBIT 8.2


451

443

(continued )

(a)

On April 16, 2010, Terrane completed a bought-deal financing agreement with a syndicate of underwriters for the sale of 63,637,000 Units which were sold to the public at a price of C$1.10 per Unit for gross proceeds of C$70 million ($70 million). Each Unit consists of one common share and one-half common share purchase warrant. Each whole warrant entitles the holder to purchase one additional common share of Terrane at a price of C$1.50 per share for a period of 12 months from closing. Concurrent with the issuance of Units to the underwriters, 27,273,000 Units were issued at the same price on a nonbrokered private placement basis to Goldcorp for C$30 million ($30 million). These issuances resulted in a decrease to Goldcorp’s interest in Terrane and gave rise to an increase in non-controlling interests of $50 million. An adjustment was made to increase retained earnings directly by $15 million to reflect the difference between the increase in noncontrolling interests and the Company’s share of proceeds received. Issuances of common shares resulting from exercises of stock options outstanding during the period from January 1, 2010 to October 20, 2010 also gave rise to an increase in non-controlling interests of $3 million and a decrease of $1 million to retained earnings.

(b)

On October 20, 2010, the Company disposed of its remaining 58.1% interest in Terrane and derecognized the carrying amount of non-controlling interests on the date of disposition (note 11(b)).

Source: Reproduced with permission from http://www.goldcorp.com/files/Goldcorp_AR%202011_L.pdf

properties in Canada, the United States, Mexico, and Central and South America. In 2010, it reported a direct credit of $14 million to retained earnings pertaining to partial sales of operating companies under continuing control. In our previous examples, we recorded the gain from these transfers of equity in contributed surplus. In both cases, the gain went directly to shareholders’ equity without being recognized in net income. Both methods are acceptable under IFRSs.

SUBSIDIARY WITH PREFERRED SHARES OUTSTANDING

The difference between Goldcorp’s share of proceeds from issuance of new shares and the increase in noncontrolling interests was recorded directly to retained earnings.

LO4

All of the consolidation examples that we have used up to this point have assumed that the subsidiary companies have only one class of shares, common shares, in their capital structures. We now examine situations where the subsidiary also has preferred shares. The basic concepts of consolidation do not change, but when there is more than one class of shares outstanding, there is an additional problem involved in determining the amount of non-controlling interest in the net assets and net income of the subsidiary. The following example will illustrate the approach that is used.

Illustration—Preferred Shareholdings On December 31, Year 1, the shareholders’ equity of Sonco Inc. was as follows: Preferred shares, $10 dividend, cumulative, redeemable at $105 per share Issued and outstanding 1,000 shares Common shares Issued and outstanding 30,000 shares Total share capital Retained earnings (Note 1)

$100,000 360,000 460,000 140,000 $600,000

Note 1: On December 31, Year 1, dividends on preferred shares were one year in arrears.

If the subsidiary were wound up today, how much of its equity would go to the preferred shareholders?


452


444

CHAPTER 8


On January 1, Year 2, Parco Ltd. purchased 27,000 common shares of Sonco for $450,000. The acquisition differential was allocated entirely to franchise agreements, to be amortized over a 10-year period. Because the parent company acquired control by purchasing 90% of the voting common shares, the non-controlling interest consists of the shareholdings represented by 10% of the common shares and 100% of the preferred shares. In order to calculate any acquisition differential associated with the common share purchase, and the amount of the non-controlling interest in both classes of shares, it is necessary to split the shareholders’ equity of Sonco into its preferred and common share capital components in the following manner: Total The preferred shareholders would get the first $115,000, and the common shareholders would get the rest.

Preferred shares Redemption on preferred Common shares Total share capital Retained earnings

$100,000 — 360,000 460,000 140,000 $600,000

Preferred $100,000 5,000 — 105,000 10,000 $115,000

Common $

— (5,000) 360,000 355,000 130,000 $485,000

The $115,000 allocated to preferred share capital represents the total amount that the company would have to pay to the preferred shareholders if the preferred shares were redeemed on this date. It is made up of the redemption price on 1,000 shares ($105,000) and the one year’s dividends in arrears ($10,000) on these shares. By using the two components of shareholders’ equity, both the acquisition differential and the non-controlling interest on the date of acquisition can be calculated, as follows: The acquisition differential on the common shares is calculated in the same way as before.

Cost of 90% of common shares

$450,000

Implied value of 100% of Sonco’s common shares Carrying amount of common shares of Sonco Acquisition differential Allocated: Franchise agreement Balance

$500,000 485,000 15,000 15,000 $ —0—

Non-controlling interest, January 1, Year 2 Preferred shares (115,000 3 100%) Common shares (500,000 3 10%)

$115,000 50,000 $165,000

The preparation of the consolidated balance sheet on January 1, Year 2, will not be illustrated, but it should be obvious that the only difference from previous examples lies in how the non-controlling interest is calculated on this date. The financial statements of Parco and Sonco on December 31, Year 2, are shown in Exhibit 8.3. Parco uses the cost method to for its investment. In order to prepare the Year 2 consolidated financial statements, it is again necessary to split the shareholders’ equity of Sonco into its preferred and common share components. Because there has been no change in total share capital, the allocation of this component is identical to the one made as at January 1 (see above).


453



CHAPTER 8

445

EXHIBIT 8.3 YEAR 2 INCOME STATEMENTS

Revenues—miscellaneous Dividends from Sonco Expenses—miscellaneous Net income

Parco

Sonco

$ 750,000 27,000 777,000 688,000 $ 89,000

$420,000 — 420,000 360,000 $ 60,000

The parent received 90% of the dividends paid to common shareholders.

YEAR 2 RETAINED EARNINGS STATEMENTS Balance, January 1 Net income Dividends Balance, December 31

Parco

Sonco

$381,000 89,000 470,000 90,000 $380,000

$140,000 60,000 200,000 50,000 $150,000

BALANCE SHEETS—December 31, Year 2 Parco

Sonco

Assets—miscellaneous Investment in Sonco—at cost

$ 510,000 450,000 $ 960,000

$810,000 — $810,000

Liabilities Preferred shares Common shares Retained earnings

$ 180,000 — 400,000 380,000 $ 960,000

$200,000 100,000 360,000 150,000 $810,000

The parent has an investment in the common shares of the subsidiary but no investment in the preferred shares.

But retained earnings has changed, so we will allocate the retained earnings statement in the following manner: Total Balance, January 1, Year 2 Net income (see point 2)

Dividends (see point 1) Balance, December 31, Year 2

$140,000 60,000 200,000 50,000 $150,000

Preferred

Common

$

$130,000 50,000 180,000 30,000 $150,000

10,000 10,000 20,000 20,000 $ —0—

It is important to note the following regarding the allocation process: 1. All dividends in arrears plus the current year’s dividends must be paid to preferred shareholders before any dividends are paid to common shareholders. In this situation the dividends paid by Sonco were as follows: Preferred ($10 3 1,000 3 2 years) Common

$20,000 30,000 $50,000

Any calculations involving the subsidiary’s equity must be split between common and preferred shareholders.


454


446

CHAPTER 8

For cumulative shares, the preferred shareholders’ claim on income is one year’s worth of dividends in any given year, whether or not dividends are declared in that year.


2. When preferred shares are cumulative, the preferred shareholders are entitled to income equal to the yearly dividend, even when the company has no income or has suffered a loss for the year. This means that the net income (or loss) for a particular year must be allocated to its preferred and common shareholders. In the situation we are examining, the Year 2 net income is allocated as follows: To preferred shareholders To common shareholders Total net income

$ 10,000 50,000 $ 60,000

The allocation of total shareholders’ equity as at December 31, Year 2, can now be prepared as shown below: Share capital Retained earnings

Total

Preferred

Common

$460,000 150,000 $610,000

$105,000 –0– $105,000

$355,000 150,000 $505,000

Because Parco has used the cost method to for its investment, we must make the two calculations shown in Exhibit 8.4 before preparing the Year 2 consolidated financial statements: The Year 2 consolidated financial statements are shown in Exhibit 8.5.

EXHIBIT 8.4 CALCULATION OF CONSOLIDATED NET INCOME, YEAR 2 The preferred shareholders’ claim on income is one year’s worth of dividends.

$ 89,000 27,000 62,000

Net income, Parco Less: Common dividends from Sonco (90% 3 30,000) Net income, Sonco Less: Allocated to preferred shares Net income, common shares Less: Acquisition-differential amortization (15,000 4 10) Adjusted income for common shares Income for preferred shares Consolidated net income Attributable to Shareholders of Parent (62,000 1 90% 3 48,500) Non-controlling interest Preferred net income (100% 3 10,000) Common net income (10% 3 48,500)

60,000 10,000 50,000 1,500 (a) 48,500 10,000 $120,500 $105,650 (b) 10,000 4,850 14,850 (c)

CALCULATION OF NON-CONTROLLING INTEREST at December 31, Year 2 The non-controlling interest owns all of the preferred shares and 10% of the common shares of the subsidiary.

Non-controlling interest Date of acquisition (see text just prior to Exhibit 8.3) Share of income from subsidiary (c) Share of dividends (100% 3 20,000 1 10% 3 30,000) At December 31, Year 2

$165,000 14,850 (23,000) $156,850 (d)


455


CHAPTER 8


447

EXHIBIT 8.5 YEAR 2 CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS (When Subsidiary Has Preferred Shares) PARCO LTD. CONSOLIDATED INCOME STATEMENT for the Year Ended December 31, Year 2 Revenues (750,000 1 420,000) Expenses (688,000 1 360,000 1 [4a] 1,500) Net income

$1,170,000 1,049,500 $ 120,500

Attributable to Shareholders of Parent (4b) Non-controlling interest (4c)

$ 105,650 14,850

The non-controlling interest includes all of the income pertaining to the preferred shares and 10% of the income pertaining to the common shares.

PARCO LTD. CONSOLIDATED RETAINED EARNINGS STATEMENT for the Year Ended December 31, Year 2 Balance, January 1 Net income

$ 381,000 105,650 486,650 90,000 $ 396,650


PARCO LTD. CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET at December 31, Year 2 Assets—miscellaneous (510,000 1 810,000) Franchise agreements (15,000 2 [4a] 1,500)

$1,320,000 13,500 $1,333,500

Liabilities (180,000 1 200,000) Common shares Retained earnings Non-controlling interest (4d)

$ 380,000 400,000 396,650 156,850 $1,333,500

The subsidiary’s common and preferred shares do not appear on the consolidated balance sheet.

Other Types of Preferred Shares In the example above, the preferred shares are cumulative. If the shares were noncumulative, net income would be allocated to the preferred shares only if preferred dividends were declared during the year, since dividends are never in arrears with this type of preferred share. If dividends are not declared in a particular year, no income would be allocated to the preferred shares because the preferred shareholders would never get a dividend for that year. If the preferred shares are participating, the allocation of net income will follow the participation provisions.

Subsidiary Preferred Shares Owned by Parent A parent company may own all or a portion of its subsidiary’s preferred shares in addition to its common share investment. When the cost of the investment in

The amount of income, dividends, and equity belonging to the preferred shareholders depends on the rights of the preferred shareholders.


456


448

CHAPTER 8

Any acquisition differential related to the preferred shares should be treated similarly to a retirement of the preferred shares by the subsidiary itself.


preferred shares is different from the carrying amount of the shares acquired, a problem arises as to how to treat the preferred share acquisition differential in the consolidated financial statements. Since preferred shares do not typically share in earnings beyond the amount of the specified dividend rate (the exception is fully participating shares), the value of the preferred shares is usually based on the present value of future dividends and not any goodwill or fair value excess for identifiable net assets. Therefore, it would not be appropriate to allocate any acquisition differential to identifiable net assets or goodwill. Since the dividend rate is usually specified when the preferred shares are issued, there is a fair amount of certainty as to the amount of future dividends. Interest rates have the biggest impact on the value of preferred shares because they affect the discount rate used in determining the present value of future dividends; the higher the discount rate, the lower the value of the preferred shares, and vice versa. The acquisition of the subsidiary’s preferred shares by the parent is viewed as a retirement of the preferred shares. Any acquisition differential should be charged to consolidated retained earnings or credited to contributed surplus. This practice is consistent with the ing treatment when a company repurchases its own shares from the market. Let us now assume that in addition to Parco’s 90% investment in Sonco’s common shares, it also purchased 30% of Sonco’s cumulative preferred shares for $40,000. The purchase price would be allocated as follows: Cost of 30% of preferred shares Carrying amount of Sonco’s preferred shares Portion acquired by Parco (30%) Acquisition differential Allocated to consolidated retained earnings Balance

$40,000

115,000 34,500 5,500 5,500 $ —0—

The non-controlling interest’s share of the preferred shares at January 1, Year 2 would be $80,500 (115,000 3 70%). If Parco used the equity method to for both investments, the journal entry to record its investment in Sonco’s preferred shares would be as follows: Investment in Sonco’s preferred shares Retained earnings Cash

34,500 5,500 40,000

Consolidated retained earnings at the date of acquisition would be $375,500 (Parco’s separate-entity retained earnings of 381,000 2 paid to retire Sonco’s preferred shares of 5,500). See Self-Study Problem 2 for a comprehensive consolidation problem where the parent has an investment in both the common shares and preferred shares of its subsidiary.

LO5

INDIRECT SHAREHOLDINGS When one company has control over another company, financial reporting by means of consolidated financial statements is required. In all the examples that we have used up to this point, the parent has had a direct ownership of over 50%


457


CHAPTER 8


449

of the common shares of the subsidiary. We continue to assume that over 50% ownership of the voting shares is necessary for control, but we now modify the assumption to allow this percentage to be achieved by both direct and indirect ownership. The following diagrams illustrate both direct and indirect holdings. In this first diagram, B and C are subsidiaries of A through direct control: B

75% A 60%

C

The second example, below, illustrates indirect control. G is a subsidiary of F, but F, in turn, is a subsidiary of E. Because E can control the voting shares of G through its control of F, G is also a subsidiary of E.

Both F and G are considered to be subsidiaries of E and therefore should be consolidated with E.

E

90%

F

70%

G

In the third example, K is a subsidiary of J through direct control. L is also a subsidiary of J through indirect control, because 55% of its voting shares are controlled directly or indirectly by J, even though only 43% [25% 1 (60% 3 30%)] of L’s net income will flow to J under the equity method of ing. K

60% 30%

J 25%

L

While many Canadian companies have intercorporate structures that are far more complex than those illustrated, the consolidation procedures for indirect

J can control L because it has control of 55% of the votes at L’s shareholders’ meetings.


458


450

CHAPTER 8


holdings are not as complicated as the diagrams might indicate. that if a parent company has 50 subsidiaries, the amount of cash appearing on the consolidated balance sheet is the sum of the cash from 51 separate balance sheets. This basic concept applies to most items appearing in the consolidated statements. In addition, we emphasized in past chapters the following statements that describe the fundamental relationships resulting from the parent’s use of the equity method to for its investment: The parent’s separate-entity net income under the equity method should be equal to consolidated net income attributable to the parent’s shareholders.

1. The parent’s net income equals consolidated net income attributable to the parent. 2. The parent’s retained earnings equal consolidated retained earnings. 3. The elimination of the parent’s share of the shareholders’ equity of the subsidiary against the investment leaves a balance consisting of the parent’s share of the unamortized acquisition differential. This balance is used to revalue the net assets of the subsidiary when the consolidated balance sheet is prepared. 4. The portion of the shareholders’ equity of the subsidiary that is not eliminated, and the non-controlling interest’s share of the unamortized acquisition differential appear on the consolidated balance sheet as non-controlling interest.

The principles applied when consolidating directly controlled subsidiaries apply equally well when consolidating indirectly controlled subsidiaries.

Since these fundamental relationships also apply when we have indirect holdings, the key to the preparation of consolidated statements when control is achieved by a mixture of direct and indirect investments is the use of the equity method of ing for each investment for internal record-keeping purposes. (If the cost method has been used, adjustments to the equity method must be made.) The following example will illustrate these concepts. Parent Inc. owns 80% of the common shares of Subone Ltd. (which is sufficient for control) and 45% of the common shares of Subtwo Ltd. (which we assume is not sufficient for control). However, Subone owns 25% of the common shares of Subtwo. This investment combined with the parent’s 45% investment gives the parent control of 70% of the voting shares; therefore, Subtwo is considered a subsidiary of Parent. Each investment is ed for using the equity method for internal recordkeeping purposes. In order to simplify the illustration, we assume that on acquisition date the fair values of the identifiable net assets of the investee corporations were equal to their carrying amounts, with the acquisition differentials from each investment being allocated to unrecorded computer databases. We will illustrate the preparation of consolidated financial statements for Year 6, during which Parent had a net income from its own operations amounting to $135,000. Subone had a net income from its own operations amounting to $75,000, while the net income of Subtwo was $40,000. Exhibit 8.6, which shows the calculation of the Year 6 consolidated net income, is useful because it illustrates the use of the equity method of ing by both Subone and Parent. Regarding the preparation and interpretation of Exhibit 8.6, the following should be noted:

The amortization of the acquisition differential is allocated to the subsidiary to which it pertains.

1. Acquisition-differential amortizations are recorded by each company owned by another company in the group. This is the first adjustment shown. The amounts have been assumed. Any adjustments required for intercompany gains and losses are also made here (as would the deduction for intercompany dividends if the cost method had been used by Parent and Subone).


459


CHAPTER 8


451

EXHIBIT 8.6 CALCULATION OF CONSOLIDATED NET INCOME—Year 6 Parent Net income before investment income $135,000 Less: Database amortization—Subtwo

Allocate Subtwo 25% to Subone 45% to Parent Less: Database amortization—Subone Consolidated net income Allocate Subone 80% to Parent Non-controlling interest

Subtwo

$75,000

$40,000 (300) 39,700

9,925

(9,925) (17,865)

17,865

Total $250,000 (300) (a)

(200) 84,725

11,910

(200) (b) 249,500

(67,780) $16,945

$11,910

28,855 (c)

152,865 67,780

Parent net income—equity method Consolidated net income attributable to parent

Subone

Subone accrues its share of Subtwo’s income before Parent accrues its share of Subone’s income.

$220,645 $220,645 (d)

2. Because Parent cannot record its 80% share of Subone’s net income until Subone has recorded its 25% share of Subtwo’s net income, Subtwo’s net income is allocated first. 3. Subone’s net income using the equity method can now be determined. 4. After Subone’s net income has been allocated, Parent’s net income using the equity method is determined. This amount, of course, equals consolidated net income attributable to Parent.

The allocation of income to investors must start at the lowest level of the corporate hierarchy and work its way up.

5. The portion of the net income of Subtwo and Subone that was not allocated is the non-controlling interest in that net income. 6. The “Total” column shows amounts that appear in the consolidated income statement. Consolidated net income attributable to the parent is $220,645, while non-controlling interest is $28,855. Exhibit 8.7 shows the Year 6 financial statements of the three companies.

EXHIBIT 8.7 INCOME STATEMENTS—Year 6

Miscellaneous revenues Investment income—Subone Investment income—Subtwo Miscellaneous expenses Net income

Parent

Subone

Subtwo

$475,000 67,780 17,865 560,645 340,000 $220,645

$285,000 — 9,925 294,925 210,000 $ 84,925

$90,000 — — 90,000 50,000 $40,000

(continued)

For these separate-entity statements, the investor has used the equity method to for its investment.


460


452

CHAPTER 8


EXHIBIT 8.7

(continued ) RETAINED EARNINGS STATEMENTS—Year 6


Parent

Subone

Subtwo

$279,120 220,645 499,765 45,000 $454,765

$116,400 84,925 201,325 30,000 $171,325

$ 80,000 40,000 120,000 10,000 $110,000

BALANCE SHEETS—December 31, Year 6 Parent

Subone

Subtwo

Other assets Investment in Subone Investment in Subtwo

$608,500 281,900 104,365 $994,765

$402,925 — 53,400 $456,325

$460,000 — — $460,000


$300,000 240,000 454,765 $994,765

$110,000 175,000 171,325 $456,325

$250,000 100,000 110,000 $460,000

In preparing the Year 6 consolidated income statement, we eliminate the three investment income s and replace them with the revenues and expenses of the two subsidiaries, the database amortization expense, and the non-controlling interest in the net incomes of the subsidiaries. The consolidated retained earnings statement is identical to that of Parent and requires no preparation. In preparing the consolidated balance sheet, we eliminate the investors’ portion of the shareholders’ equity of the investee companies against the investment s; this leaves a balance consisting of the unamortized acquisition differentials. The amount of shareholders’ equity not eliminated represents non-controlling interest. The following calculations illustrate this: The unamortized acquisition differential can be derived by backing out the parent’s share of the subsidiary’s equity from the investment .

Parent: Investment in Subone Shareholders’ equity, Subone Common shares Retained earnings Parent ownership Balance—Parent’s share of unamortized databases Non-controlling interest’s share of unamortized databases (assumed) Total unamortized databases from Subone Investment in Subtwo Shareholders’ equity, Subtwo Common shares Retained earnings Parent’s ownership Balance—Parent’s share of unamortized databases

$281,900 175,000 171,325 346,325 80%

277,060 4,840 1,210 $ 6,050 $104,365

100,000 110,000 210,000 45%

94,500 9,865


CHAPTER 8


Subone: Investment in Subtwo Shareholders’ equity, Subtwo (above) Subone ownership Balance—Investor’s share of unamortized databases Parent’s total share of unamortized databases Non-controlling interest’s share of unamortized databases (assumed) Total unamortized databases from Subtwo

53,400 210,000 25%

52,500 900 10,765 4,615 $ 15,380

461

453

The unamortized acquisition differential relating to the non-controlling interest is an assumed figure, which must be incorporated in the consolidated financial statements.

CALCULATION OF NON-CONTROLLING INTEREST at December 31, Year 6 Shareholders’ equity, Subone (346,325 3 20% 1 1,210) Shareholders’ equity, Subtwo (210,000 3 30% 1 4,615)

$ 70,475 67,615 $138,090

Exhibit 8.8 shows the preparation of the Year 6 consolidated financial statements using the direct approach.

EXHIBIT 8.8 PARENT INC. CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS at December 31, Year 6 CONSOLIDATED INCOME STATEMENT

Net income

$ 850,000 600,000 500 600,500 $ 249,500

Attributable to Shareholders of Parent (6d) Non-controlling interest (6c)

$ 220,645 28,855

Miscellaneous revenues (475,000 1 285,000 1 90,000) Miscellaneous expense (340,000 1 210,000 1 50,000) Database amortization ([6a] 300 1 [6b] 200)

The consolidated income statement includes the amortization of the acquisition differential for a period of time for the directly controlled and indirectly controlled subsidiaries.

CONSOLIDATED RETAINED EARNINGS STATEMENT Balance, January 1 Net income

$ 279,120 220,645 499,765 45,000 $ 454,765


CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET Other assets (608,500 1 402,925 1 460,000) Databases (6,050 1 15,380)

$1,471,425 21,430 $1,492,855

Liabilities (300,000 1 110,000 1 250,000) Common shares Retained earnings Non-controlling interest

$ 660,000 240,000 454,765 138,090 $1,492,855

The consolidated balance sheet includes the unamortized acquisition differential at a point in time for the directly controlled and indirectly controlled subsidiaries.


462


454

CHAPTER 8

LO6


ANALYSIS AND INTERPRETATION OF FINANCIAL STATEMENTS Under ASPE, the parent company can report its investment in a subsidiary using the cost method or the equity method or on a consolidated basis. In this chapter, we prepared consolidated financial statements where the subsidiary had preferred shares in its capital structure. We will now compare how the financial statements would look if the parent had used the cost method or equity method. Exhibit 8.9 presents the Year 2 income statements and balance sheets for Parco’s separate-entity statements under two scenarios: (1) when Parco uses the cost method and (2) when Parco uses the equity method. The last column presents the consolidated financial statements taken from Exhibit 8.5. The values for the cost method are taken directly from Exhibit 8.3. The values for the equity method are the same as the cost method except for the investment income, retained earnings, and investment in Sonco. The investment income replaces the dividend income and is the amount required to make net income under the equity method equal to

EXHIBIT 8.9

Impact of Presentation Method on Debt-to-Equity and Return-on-Equity Ratios INCOME STATEMENTS for the Year Ended December 31, Year 2 Parco-Separate Entity

The net income for the parent’s separate-entity income statement under the equity method is equal to consolidated net income attributable to the shareholders of the parent.

Revenues—miscellaneous Dividends from Sonco Investment income from Sonco

Cost

Equity

$750,000 27,000

$750,000

$1,170,000

43,650 793,650 688,000 $105,650

1,170,000 1,049,500 $ 120,500

777,000 688,000 $ 89,000

Expenses—miscellaneous Net income

Cons.

Attributable to Shareholders of Parco Non-controlling interest

$ 105,650 14,850

BALANCE SHEETS at December 31, Year 2 Assets—miscellaneous Investment in Sonco Franchise agreements


Debt to equity Return on equity – for all shareholders – for shareholders of Parco

$510,000 450,000

$510,000 466,650

$1,320,000

$960,000

$976,650

$180,000 400,000 380,000

$180,000 400,000 396,650

$960,000

$976,650

$380,000 400,000 396,650 156,850 $1,333,500

0.23

0.23

0.40

n/a 11.4%

n/a 13.3%

12.6% 13.3%

13,500 $1,333,500


463


CHAPTER 8


consolidated net income attributable to the shareholders of Parco. Retained earnings under the equity method are equal to consolidated retained earnings. The investment under the equity method changes by the same amount as the change in retained earnings. The exhibit also indicates the debt-to-equity ratio and return-on-equity ratio for each set of financial statements. Note the following from Exhibit 8.9: • The separate-entity net income and return-on-equity ratio under the cost and equity methods are different. • The separate-entity net income and retained earnings under the equity method are equal to consolidated net income attributable to the shareholders of Parco and consolidated retained earnings, respectively. • The separate-entity return on equity under the equity method is equal to the consolidated return on equity for the shareholders of Parco. • The solvency position looks worst on the consolidated financial statements because the subsidiary’s debt is included on the consolidated financial statements. This increases the debt-to-equity ratio.

ASPE Differences

455

Retained earnings for the parent’s separate-entity balance sheet under the equity method are equal to consolidated retained earnings.


LO7

• As mentioned in Chapter 3, private companies can either consolidate their subsidiaries or report their investments in subsidiaries under the cost or equity method. • When consolidated statements are not prepared, any investment in preferred shares that are quoted in an active market should be reported at fair value, with any adjustments to fair value reported in net income. These are the requirements normally applied to equity instruments traded in an active market. Investments in preferred shares that are not quoted in an active market should be reported at cost less accumulated impairment losses and the impairment losses reported in net income, unless the entity has made an irrevocable election to measure at fair value.

U.S. GAAP Differences U.S. GAAP and IFRSs for topics in this chapter are virtually the same.

summary In this chapter, we examined four topics that present special problems in consolidated financial statement preparation. While the consolidated balance sheet and income statement are prepared by combining the statements of the parent and its subsidiaries, the consolidated cash flow statement is best prepared by analyzing the changes in successive consolidated balance sheets.


464


456

CHAPTER 8


The next topic addressed changes in the parent’s percentage ownership and the effect that such changes have on the non-controlling interest, and particularly on unamortized acquisition differentials. These ownership changes also require special attention when the consolidated cash flow statement is prepared. Preferred shares in the capital structure of subsidiary companies present unique problems in calculating non-controlling interest if the parent’s ownership of the preferred shares is not the same as its ownership of the common shares. The problem is solved by allocating shareholders’ equity and any changes therein to preferred and common share components. Control by a parent company can be achieved through direct ownership of the subsidiary’s voting shares or through indirect ownership by other subsidiaries or investees. If the equity method is used for all of the investment s, the consolidation process is fairly easy because the major problem involved with indirect holdings is how to determine the amount for non-controlling interest. If the cost method is used to for the investments, we apply the basic procedure of adjusting from cost to equity, and then continue preparing the consolidated statements in the normal manner. This adjustment from cost to equity can be very involved when the affiliation structure is complex.

Significant Changes in GAAP in the Last Three Years When the investor first obtains significant influence over an investee, any previous investments in the investee, which were reported under the cost method, are revalued to fair value and the revaluation gain or loss is reported in net income.

Changes Expected in GAAP in the Next Three Years The direct method may be required for the cash flow statement. The notes to the financial statements would require a reconciliation of cash flows (starting point) to net income (ending point).


On January 1, Year 1, Mio Company acquired 1,000 ordinary shares of Aaron Company for $12,000 when the shareholders’ equity of Aaron was as follows: Ordinary shares (10,000 no par value shares issued and outstanding) Retained earnings

$50,000 40,000 $90,000

In addition, Mio had the following investments and divestments in Aaron: Date

Action

# of shares

Price

Jan. 1, Year 2 Jan. 1, Year 3 Jan. 1, Year 4 Jan. 1, Year 5

Bought Bought Bought Sold

2,000 2,500 3,000 1,500

26,000 35,000 45,000 24,000


465


CHAPTER 8


457

The following are the statements of retained earnings for Mio from Year 1 to Year 5:

Retained earnings, beginning of year Profit Dividends Retained earnings, end of year

Year 1

Year 2

Year 3

Year 4

Year 5

$70,000 17,000 (9,000) $78,000

$78,000 18,000 (9,000) $87,000

$87,000 19,000 (10,000) $96,000

$ 96,000 20,000 (11,000) $105,000

$105,000 21,000 (12,000) $114,000

The following are the statements of retained earnings for Aaron from Year 1 to Year 5:


Year 1

Year 2

Year 3

Year 4

Year 5

$40,000 10,000 (6,000) $44,000

$44,000 11,000 (7,000) $48,000

$48,000 12,000 (8,000) $52,000

$52,000 13,000 (8,000) $57,000

$57,000 14,000 (10,000) $61,000

Additional Information • For internal record-keeping purposes, Mio uses the cost method to for its investment in Aaron. • Aaron’s ordinary shares are publicly traded. The market value of the shares at the close on December 31 of one year was the same as the market value on January 1 of the next year. • Any acquisition differential is allocated to patents with a life expectancy until December 31, Year 8. Neither company has any patents recorded on their separate-entity records. • There were no unrealized profits from intercompany transactions since the date of acquisition.

Required: A. For each of Years 1 to 5, determine and prepare the following items for Mio’s general-purpose financial statements prepared in accordance with IFRSs: (a) Method to be used to report the investment in Aaron and the balance in the investment under the relevant reporting method (b) Net income attributable to the shareholders of Mio (c) Patents (d) Non-controlling interests on the balance sheet (e) Statement of retained earnings B. Prepare a schedule to show that the difference in the investment between the cost and equity methods is equal to the difference in the sum of retained earnings (RE) and contributed surplus between the cost and equity methods for each of Years 1 through 5.


466


458

CHAPTER 8

SOLUTION

TO


SELF-S TUDY P ROBLEM 1 Jan. 1, Year 2

Cost of purchase Previous equity interest remeasured at fair value 1,000 shares @ $13 per share 3,000 shares @ $14 per share Acquisition cost of 30% Acquisition cost of 55%

Implied value of 100% Carrying amount of Aaron’s net assets Common shares Retained earnings

Jan. 1, Year 3

26,000

35,000

13,000

42,000 39,000 77,000 140,000 50,000 44,000 94,000 30%

Acquisition differential Allocated to: Patents Patent amortization, Year 2 (over 7 years)

28,200 10,800

50,000 48,000 98,000 100%

98,000 42,000 42,0001

10,800

(a)

1,543

Allocation and amortization of acquisition differential allocated to patents

Purchase on Jan. 1, Year 3 Amortization for Year 3 (over 6 years) Dec. 31, Year 3 NCI sold 3,000/4,500 3 15,750

Total

Parent

NCI

42,000 (7,000) 35,000

23,100 (3,850) 19,250 10,500 29,750 (5,950) 23,800 (4,200) 19,600 (4,900) 14,700

18,900 (3,150) 15,750 (10,500) 5,250 (1,050) 4,200 4,200 8,400 (2,100) 6,300

35,000 (7,000) 28,000

Amortization for Year 4 (over 5 years) Dec. 31, Year 4 Mio sold 1,500/8,500 3 23,800 Amortization for Year 5 (over 4 years) Dec. 31, Year 5

(7,000) 21,000

(b) (c)

(d) (e)

(f) (g)

(a) Investment in Aaron: Percentage owned, end of year Reporting method Balance, beginning of year Cost of purchase Adjustment to fair value on Jan 1 Loss on equity transaction Average cost of investment sold Equity income Dividends received Amortization of patent Adjustment to fair value on Dec 31 Balance, end of year

Year 1

Year 2

Year 3

Year 4

10 FVTPL 0 12,000

30 Equity 13,000 26,000

55 Consol1 38,657 35,000 3,3435

85 Consol1 75,350 45,000

Year 5 70 Consol1 114,750

(3,900)8 3

1,0002 13,000

6

3,300 (2,100)4 (1,543)a

6,600 (4,400)7 (3,850)b

38,657

75,350

9

11,050 (6,800)10 (5,950)d 114,750

(20,250)11 9,80013 (7,000)14 (4,900)f 92,400


467


CHAPTER 8

459


Notes 1. Consolidated statements are required. Investment does not appear on consolidated statements. However, equity method will provide all relevant information required for consolidated statements. 2. 26,000/2,000 shares 3 1,000 shares 2 12,000 5 1,000 through net income 3. 30% 3 11,000 5 3,300 4. 30% 3 7,000 5 2,100 5. 35,000/2,500 3 3,000 2 38,657 5 3,343 6. 55% 3 12,000 5 6,600 7. 55% 3 8,000 5 4,400 8. 45,000 2 61,650 (from d below) 3 3,000/4,500 5 3,900 9. 85% 3 13,000 5 11,050 10. 85% 3 8,000 5 6,800 11. 114,750 3 1,500/8,500 5 20,250 12. 24,000 2 20,250 5 3,750 through contributed surplus 13. 70% 3 14,000 5 9,800 14. 70% 3 10,000 5 7,000 15. 24,000 2 (12,000 1 26,000 1 35,000 1 45,000) 3 1,500/8,500 5 3,176

(b)

Net income attributable to shareholders of Mio:

Mio’s net income under cost method Dividends from Aaron Reverse gain on sale under cost method Equity income Amortization of patent Adjustment to fair value Mio’s net income under FVTPL

Year 1

Year 2

Year 3

Year 4

Year 5

17,000

18,000 (2,100)4

19,000 (4,400)7

20,000 (6,800)10

3,3003 (1,543)a

6,6006 (3,850)b 3,3435

11,0509 (5,950)d

21,000 (7,000)14 (3,176)15 9,80013 (4,900)f

17,657

20,693

18,300

15,724

n/a

35,000

28,000

21,000

50,000 52,000 102,000 45% 45,900 15,750c 61,650

50,000 57,000 107,000 15% 16,050 4,200e 20,250

50,000 61,000 111,000 30% 33,300 6,300g 39,600

1,0002 18,000

Mio’s net income under equity method (c)

Patents on consolidated balance sheet:

(d)

NCI on balance sheet: Aaron’s ordinary shares Aaron’s retained earnings

n/a

NCI’s share NCI’s share of patent Total NCI (e)

(f)

Statement of Retained Earnings: Retained earnings, beginning of year Profit Loss on equity transaction Dividends Retained earnings, end of year

$70,000 18,000

$79,000 17,657

$87,657 20,693

(9,000) $79,000

(9,000) $87,657

Retained earnings—cost method RE & contributed surplus—equity method Difference

$78,000 79,000 $ (1,000)

Investment—cost method Investment—equity method Difference

$101,750 15,724

(10,000) $98,350

$ 98,350 18,300 (3,900)8 (11,000) $101,750

$87,000 87,657 $ (657)

$96,000 98,350 $ (2,350)

$105,000 101,750 $ 3,250

$114,000 109,224 $ 4,776

$12,000 13,000

$38,000 38,657

$73,000 75,350

$118,000 114,750

$ 97,176 92,400

$ (1,000)

$

$ (2,350)

$

$

(657)

3,250

(12,000) $105,474

4,776


468


460

CHAPTER 8


SELF- S TUDY P ROBLEM 2 LO4

On January 1, Year 1, X Company acquired 800 common shares of Y Company for $24,000 and 180 $5 cumulative, nonparticipating preferred shares for $19,800. On this date, the shareholders’ equity s of Y Company were as follows: Common shares (1,000 no par value shares issued) Preferred shares (200 no par value shares issued) Retained earnings (note 1)

$10,000 20,000 12,000

Note 1: Preferred dividends were two years in arrears on January 1, Year 1.

The income statements for the two companies for the year ended December 31, Year 5, are presented below.

Additional Information • Any acquisition differential is allocated to patents, to be amortized over 10 years. • In Year 5, Y paid dividends totalling $9,000. Preferred dividends were two years in arrears on December 31, Year 4. • X uses the cost method to for its investment in Y. • Y purchases merchandise for resale from X. In Year 5, Y purchased $33,000 in merchandise from X and had items in inventory on December 31, Year 5, on which X had made a profit of $2,500. The January 1, Year 5, inventory contained an intercompany profit of $1,400. • X rents equipment from Y, and in Year 5 paid a rental charge of $3,000 and recorded an payable to Y of $2,000 for the balance of the rentals. • On July 1, Year 3, Y sold a building to X at a profit of $13,000. X is depreciating this building on a straight-line basis over a 10-year useful life. • Depreciation and rent of tangible capital assets are included in distribution expense, whereas amortization of intangible assets is included in selling and istrative expense. • Y paid $20,000 to X for management fees in Year 5. • Assume a corporate tax rate of 40%. INCOME STATEMENTS for year ended December 31, Year 5

Sales Dividend and management fees Rental revenue Cost of sales Distribution expense Selling and istrative expense Interest expense Income tax expense Profit

X Company

Y Company

$600,000 27,500 — 627,500 343,900 25,000 207,000 1,700 20,000 597,600 $ 29,900

$400,000 — 11,200 411,200 234,700 70,000 74,000 6,000 9,000 393,700 $ 17,500


469


CHAPTER 8


461

Required: Prepare a consolidated income statement for Year 5.

S OLUTION

TO

SELF-STUDY PROBLEM 2 Calculation of acquisition differential Cost of 90% of preferred shares (180/200) Carrying amount of preferred: Preferred shares Dividends in arrears (200 3 5 3 2)

$19,800 $20,000 2,000 22,000 90%


19,800 $ –0–

Cost of 80% of common shares (800/1,000)

$24,000

Implied value of 100% of common shares Carrying amount of common: Common shares Retained earnings Less: Preferred dividend arrears

$30,000 10,000 12,000 (2,000) 20,000 $10,000

Acquisition differential—patents Intercompany revenues and expenses Dividends—preferred (90% 3 1,000 3 3) —common (80% 3 [9,000 2 3,000])

$ 2,700 4,800 $ 7,500 (a)

Management fees

$20,000 (b)

Rent (3,000 1 2,000)

$ 5,000 (c)

Sales

$33,000 (d)

Before Tax

Tax 40%

After Tax

Opening inventory—X selling

$1,400

$ 560

$ 840

(e)

Closing inventory—X selling

$2,500

$1,000

$1,500

(f)

Building realized—Y selling

$1,300

$ 520

$ 780

(g)

Intercompany profits

Calculation of consolidated net income—Year 5 X net income Less: Dividends from Y (a) Closing inventory profit (f) Add: Opening inventory profit (e)

$29,900 7,500 1,500

9,000 20,900 840 21,740


470


462

CHAPTER 8


Total Y net income Less: Patent amortization (10,000 4 10) Add: Building profit (g)

17,500

Preferred 1,000

1,000

Common 16,500 (1,000) (h) 780 16,280 (i)

Consolidated net income Attributable to Shareholders of Parent (21,740 1 90% 3 1,000 1 80% 3 16,280) Non-controlling interest (10% 3 1,000 1 20% 3 16,280)

17,280 $39,020

$35,664 (j) 3,356 (k)

CONSOLIDATED INCOME STATEMENT—Year 5 Sales (600,000 1 400,000 2 [d] 33,000) Dividend and management fees (27,500 1 0 2 [a] 7,500 2 [b] 20,000) Rental revenue (0 1 11,200 2 [c] 5,000)

Net income

$967,000 0 6,200 973,200 546,700 88,700 262,000 7,700 29,080 934,180 $ 39,020

Attributable to Shareholders of Parent (j) Non-controlling interest (k)

$ 35,664 3,356

Cost of sales (343,900 1 234,700 2 [d] 33,000 2 [e] 1,400 1 [f] 2,500) Distribution (25,000 1 70,000 2 [c] 5,000 2 [g] 1,300) Selling and istrative (207,000 1 74,000 2 [b] 20,000) 1 [h] 1,000) Interest (1,700 1 6,000) Income tax (20,000 1 9,000 1 [e] 560 1 [g] 520 2 [f] 1,000)


1. Is the consolidated cash flow statement prepared in the same manner as the consolidated balance sheet and income statement? Explain.

LO1

2. A parent company acquired a 75% interest in a subsidiary company in Year 4. The acquisition price was $1,000,000, made up of cash of $700,000 and the parent’s common shares with a current market value of $300,000. Explain how this acquisition should be reflected in the Year 4 consolidated cash flow statement.

LO1

3. Why is the amortization of the acquisition differential added back to consolidated net income to compute net cash flow from operating activities in the consolidated cash flow statement?

LO1

4. Why are dividend payments to non-controlling shareholders treated as an outflow of cash in the consolidated cash flow statement but not included as dividends paid in the consolidated retained earnings statement?

LO2

5. When should the change in ing for a long-term investment from the cost method to the equity method be ed for retroactively, and when should it be ed for prospectively?

LO2

6. When a parent increases its investment in a subsidiary from 60 to 75%, should the acquisition differential from the 60% purchase be remeasured at fair value? Explain.


471


CHAPTER 8


463

LO3

7. When a parent decreases its investment in a subsidiary from 76 to 60%, should the non-controlling interest be remeasured at fair value? Explain.

LO3

8. A parent company will realize a loss or a gain when its subsidiary issues common shares at a price per share that differs from the carrying amount per share of the parent’s investment, and the parent’s ownership percentage declines. Explain why this is so. Also explain how the gain or loss is recognized in the financial statements.

LO3

9. If a gain or a loss is realized by a parent company as a result of the sale of a portion of the investment in a subsidiary, should the gain or loss be eliminated in the preparation of the consolidated income statement? Explain.

LO4

10. The shareholders’ equity of a subsidiary company contains preferred and common shares. The parent company owns 100% of the subsidiary’s common shares. Will the consolidated financial statements show non-controlling interest? Explain.

LO4

11. A company’s net income for the year was $17,000. During the year, the company paid dividends on its non-cumulative preferred shares amounting to $12,000. Calculate the amount of the year’s net income that “belongs to” the common shares.

LO4

12. Explain how an acquisition differential from an investment in preferred shares should be reflected in the consolidated financial statements.

LO4

13. Explain how the non-controlling interest in the net assets and net income of a subsidiary is reported when the parent owns 90% of the subsidiary’s common shares and 30% of the subsidiary’s cumulative preferred shares.

LO4

14. Explain the difference in the calculation of consolidated net income attributable to shareholders of parent and consolidated retained earnings depending on whether the preferred shares of a subsidiary are cumulative or non-cumulative.

LO5

15. What is the major consolidation problem associated with indirect shareholdings?

Case 8-1

On December 31, Year 7, Pepper Company, a public company, agreed to a business combination with Salt Limited, an unrelated private company. Pepper issued 72 of its common shares for all (50) of the outstanding common shares of Salt. This transaction increased the number of outstanding Pepper shares from 100 to 172. Pepper’s shares were trading at around $10 per share in days leading up to the business combination. The condensed balance sheets for the two companies on this date were as follows:

C ASES LO3

Pepper

Salt

Book value

Fair value

Book value

Fair value

Tangible assets Intangible assets (excluding goodwill)

$500 200 $700

$600 500

$100 250 $350

$120 350


$400 300 $700

410

$170 180 $350

200


472


464

CHAPTER 8


On January 1, Year 8, Pepper sold 40% of its investment in Salt to an unrelated third party for $450 in cash. The CFO at Pepper stated that Salt must have been worth $1,125 if the unrelated third party was willing to pay $450 for a 40% interest in Salt. If so, Pepper saved $405 by buying Salt for only $720. Accordingly, the CFO wants to recognize a gain of $405 in the Year 7 income statement to reflect the true value of the Salt shares. You have been asked by the CFO to prepare a presentation to senior management on the ing implications for the business combination and subsequent sale of 40% of the investment. She would like you to consider two alternative methods of valuing Salt on the consolidated balance at the date of acquisition— one based on cost of purchase and one based on the implied value of the subsidiary based on the sales price on January 1, Year 8.

Required: Prepare this presentation, answering the following questions: (a) How would Pepper’s consolidated balance sheet differ at the date of acquisition under the two different valuation alternatives? Which method best reflects economic reality? Which method is required by GAAP? (b) How would Pepper’s consolidated balance sheet look after the sale of the 40% interest in Salt to the unrelated third party under the two alternatives?

Case 8-2 LO2

For the past 10 years, Prince Company (Prince) has owned 75,000 or 75% of the common shares of Stiff Inc. (Stiff). Elizabeth Winer owns another 20% and the other 5% are widely held. Although Prince has the controlling interest, you would never know it during the annual shareholders’ meetings. Winer keeps the board of directors on its toes by asking a lot of tough questions and continually threatening legal action if her rights as a minority shareholder are not protected. Rick Impatient owns 100% of the shares of Prince. After Prince’s latest shareholders’ meeting, he decided that Prince would offer to purchase Winer’s shares in Stiff or Prince would sell its interest in Stiff as Impatient was tired of all of the heckling from Winer. The shares of Stiff were recently trading for $100 per share. On November 13, Year 13, Prince offered to pay $108 per share to Winer for her 20% interest in Stiff. To Impatient’s surprise, Winer accepted the offer and the transaction was consummated on December 31, Year 13. At December 31, Year 13, the unamortized acquisition differential relating to prior purchases by Prince was $500,000, which pertained solely to goodwill. On the closing date, the shares of Stiff had a carrying amount of $70 per share and all identifiable net assets had a fair value equal to carrying amount except for unrecognized patents, which had a fair value of $1.3 million and an estimated useful life of four years. The CFO of Prince wants to recognize the entire acquisition differential related to the new purchase from Winer as goodwill in order to minimize the impact on earnings for Years 13 and 14. The controller, on the other hand, believes that some of the acquisition differential should be charged to income in Year 13 as a loss because of the excessive price paid for the shares.

Required: How would you resolve the dispute? Provide the arguments to your position, and indicate the impact of your decision on consolidated profit attributable to Prince’s shareholders for Years 13 and 14. State your assumptions.


473


CHAPTER 8

Case 8-3 LO3


465

Traveller Bus Lines Inc. (TBL) is a wholly owned subsidiary of Canada Transport Enterprises Inc. (CTE), a publicly traded transportation and communications conglomerate. TBL is primarily in the business of operating buses over short- and long-distance routes in central and western Canada and the United States. TBL also has a school bus division operating in eastern Canada. CTE and its subsidiaries are audited by DeBoy Shoot, which issued an unqualified audit opinion on CTE’s June 30, year-end consolidated financial statements. This was the only audit opinion issued on the CTE group of companies. TBL has a July 31 year-end. It is now September 8, Year 7. CTE has been reporting operating losses for several years and has put TBL up for sale as part of a strategy to change its focus. This is the first of several planned divestitures, designed to restore CTE’s lacklustre share price. Currently, the only interested party is an employee group led by TBL’s president, Dan Williams. Williams’s management buyout team consists of the vicepresident of operations and the CFO. Handling the negotiations at CTE’s corporate office is Eva Joel, vice-president of strategic divestitures. The buyout team has submitted the first draft agreement of purchase and sale for review. Exhibit I, below, contains extracts from the draft agreement; notes made by CTE’s lawyer are shown in italics. You, a CA at Heatley Dan LLP, have gathered some additional background information (Exhibit II). Andrew wants to maximize the total selling price. He asked the partner in charge of the advisory services at Heatley Dan LLP to review the information given and provide recommendations on how CTE can maximize the total selling price and how the agreement should be changed to minimize possible disputes in the future. In addition, he would like a summary of the ing issues of significance to CTE that will arise on the sale of TBL. The partner has asked you to prepare the draft report to Joel.

Required: Prepare the draft report.

(CICA adapted)

EXHIBIT I EXTRACTS OF DRAFT PURCHASE AND SALE AGREEMENT Agreement of purchase and sale between the employee group (hereinafter the Purchaser) and Canada Transport Enterprises Inc. (hereinafter CTE) for the assets and liabilities of the business known as Traveller Bus Lines Inc. (TBL). 1. The assets and liabilities of TBL are those included in its draft July 31, Year 7, financial statements. 2. Excluded from the liabilities to be assumed by the purchaser are all environmental liabilities, including, but not limited to, gasoline and diesel fuel spills and tank leakage, pesticide residues, and all other chemical contamination. 3. The purchase price is determined by the sum of (A) the carrying amount of the net assets at July 31, Year 7, which is twelve million dollars ($12 million), plus (B) 55% of the net reported income after taxes, for the 12-month period ending July 31, Year 8 (the contingent consideration). Lawyer’s Note: The contingent consideration should be worth at least $3.6 million, since the division’s earnings computed on this basis have averaged more than $6.6 million for the last four years before deducting head office charges. 4. This agreement is conditional on the Purchaser obtaining adequate financing and, after inspection, finding TBL’s records satisfactory.

(continued)


474


466

CHAPTER 8


EXHIBIT I

(continued )

5. CTE agrees not to compete with the Purchaser for 10 years. 6. CTE will provide a loan guarantee for up to 25% of the purchase price for the Purchaser. 7. The Purchaser agrees to provide full maintenance services to the truck and trailer fleet of one of CTE’s other subsidiaries for five years. Charges will be based on cost plus 10%. 8. The central bus station will be restored by CTE to its original condition by December 31, Year 7. 9. CTE will provide free advertising to the Purchaser, on request, for one year following the closing date. The Purchaser will create all the advertising material, including TV commercials. 10. All bus route rights will be assigned to the Purchaser. 11. The purchase price will be allocated based on carrying amounts. 12. The sale will close on October 1, Year 7, at 12:01 A.M., and the entire consideration with the exception of the contingent consideration will be due and payable one (1) month after closing. The contingent consideration is due one (1) month after the July 31, Year 8, financial statements are finalized. 13. Overdue amounts will be charged interest at a rate of 11% per annum. 14. CTE will act in a consulting capacity to advise the Purchaser for a fee of $25,000 per annum.

EXHIBIT II INFORMATION GATHERED 1.

2.

3.

4. 5.

Exclusive rights to most bus routes were obtained almost 40 years ago when the provincial governments were handing out the routes at no cost to the local bus lines. They had no competition at that time. Other similar bus routes were subsequently purchased for significant amounts. TBL’s summary draft financial statements for July 31, Year 7, are as follows (in thousands of dollars): Revenue Expenses (including $2,403 of head office charges) Income before income taxes Current taxes Deferred taxes Net income

$48,123 40,239 7,884 2,995 567 $ 4,322

Current assets Long-term assets Liabilities Deferred taxes Equity

$14,133 25,131 (21,264) (6,000) $12,000

The TBL maintenance department has recently completed a study that demonstrated that the school buses would last 15 years, rather than the 10 years on which the straight-line depreciation rates have always been based. All school boards pay a non-refundable deposit, three months before the beginning of the school year in September, to guarantee bus service for the coming school year. TBL ran a “Travel the Country” promotion in June Year 7. Sales of the three-month es for unlimited travel, costing $400, were brisk. The driver punches the

(continued)


475


CHAPTER 8

EXHIBIT II


467

(continued )

each time the holder takes a trip. To compensate travellers who use their es fewer than 10 times in the three-month period, TBL permits them to trade in their es for either a pair of skis or a pair of in-line skates or the cash value of these items ($150). 6. CTE’s consolidation entries for Year 7 related to TBL are a fair value increment of $432,300 for property, plant, and equipment and $2,332,000 for goodwill, which is checked for impairment on an annual basis. 7. Included in TBL’s long-term assets is a note receivable for $3.1 million, secured by the real property of a chain of four gas stations. Because of fierce competition from stations owned by the large oil companies, the value of the properties has declined from $4.2 million, the amount stated in the May Year 6 appraisal, to $2.4 million, according to the May Year 7 appraisal released on July 22, Year 7. The payments on the note are being made on schedule. 8. On August 18, Year 7, the Panamee School District announced the cancellation of all school bus services previously contracted for Year 7/8 in the school district. 9. The management buyout team plans to spend $500,000 on TV ments that promote bus travel in a national advertising campaign starting in early Year 8. The team also plans to retrofit all long-distance buses at substantial cost. 10. TBL moved all maintenance operations to a new facility in June Year 7. The building was purchased for $3.4 million, and the company had to vacate a leased facility 18 months before the end of the lease. The prospects of subletting the facility do not look good.

Case 8-4 LO3, 7

Capilano Forest Company Ltd. (CFCL) has been owned and managed by an experienced forester, Don Strom, for 20 years. The company has performed well in the last few years, but the industry is cyclical. In the interior of British Columbia, CFCL manufactures lumber of all grades from raw logs. A small lumberyard and sales office are located in Vancouver. Your firm has been re-appointed auditor for CFCL, and you, a CA, the senior on this engagement, have been going over some issues with the recently hired controller of the company, Everett Green. CFCL had been searching for a controller for several months. Green agreed to accept the position with the condition that his compensation package include a bonus based on net income. Strom finally agreed to this form of remuneration, despite initial resistance. A large Japanese lumber importer has recently expressed an interest in purchasing CFCL. Therefore, Green proposes to make changes to CFCL’s ing policies, which he believes will maximize the value of the company. During the year, CFCL was granted, by the Ministry of Forests, the right to log a large area of standing timber on Crown land. Although CFCL does not own the land, it does have the right to log all the timber on it, subject to an allowable annual limit. This right was granted to the company at no initial cost. However, a fee is paid to the Ministry based on the number of logs removed from the forest. Shortly after CFCL received this right, the Ministry announced that all holders of logging rights over Crown land are responsible for reforesting the lands at their own cost; the ruling applies to all rights granted in the last five years. After eight months of logging, CFCL has still not carried out any reforestation. The controller is proposing that CFCL record receipt of this right at fair value. In addition, he would like to include in the financial statements the fair value of rights received from the Ministry two years ago. These rights do not currently appear on the company’s balance sheet.


476


468

CHAPTER 8


CFCL recently purchased the right to log the standing timber on a mine site. As part of the purchase contract, CFCL agreed that it would cease logging in five years when mining commenced. Although CFCL would probably be unable to log all the timber in this period, the five-year rights were considered to be worth considerably more than the purchase price. Since logging operations began, however, it has become apparent that many of the trees are infested by insects and are therefore worthless. Green does not think that this presents a valuation problem for financial reporting. “These rotten trees are part of the cost of the good ones and will be expensed as the good trees are sold. The purchase price will be allocated to all the good trees on the mine site.” With respect to the costing of trees on land that CFCL owns, Green contends that these trees really have no cost. “We paid for the land, which produces the trees. The trees themselves do not have any cost. If anything, replanting and pesticide expenses are the only costs we have. The situation is similar to owning land on which we have a building and machinery producing widgets. When we sell the widgets, we don’t expense the land, do we?” Last year, the company acquired 100% of the common shares of NAN Limited, a forestry company operating out of Nanaimo, British Columbia, for $3 million. The acquisition differential of $500,000 was assigned to the timber. NAN owned a large tract of land and timber along the Pacific Coast. This year, 20% of this tract, along the shoreline, was sold to a resort developer. CFCL has assigned a cost of $25,000 to this parcel. At the date of original purchase, CFCL considered this parcel to be worthless from a logging standpoint. The rest of this land is abundant in timber. CFCL paid a for NAN because its land had rich soil and a moist, coastal climate ideal for tree growth. Lately, however, the company has been having problems logging the area. Environmentalists have vowed that no one will be allowed to destroy its natural beauty. Roadways have been blocked on several occasions by these protesters. In addition, they have campaigned aggressively against the company and its products. In response, CFCL has spent large amounts on public relations advertising and on legal costs in order to obtain injunctions. These amounts, as well as the estimated costs of idle time related to the protests, will be capitalized as goodwill. On December 1, CFCL signed an agreement to sell 25% of its interest in NAN for $800,000. It wants to report a gain of $50,000 on the sale. Green intends to include in goodwill costs relating to forest fires burning in areas surrounding CFCL’s land. Although none of CFCL’s timber has been damaged by the fires, the company did pay for resources to help control the disaster. As the controller explained, “It was in our best interests to help combat fires because they were headed toward our timber.” The fires continue to burn, and CFCL has promised an additional $300,000 in aid. CFCL has gained a reputation among Japanese companies as a good source of clear pine. CFCL can sell the Japanese as much pine as it can cut. Orders currently outstanding will take the company at least six months to fill. Under the of the contracts, the purchase price, denominated in yen, may be increased or decreased by a maximum of 5%, depending on the grade, as determined by inspection at a Japanese harbour. The company would like to record the revenue on these contracts as soon as the lumber is cut. The company sells wood chips as a by-product of its sawmill operations. It entered into a three-year contract with a large pulp mill, Remul Ltd., under which


477


CHAPTER 8


469

Remul can purchase all the chips produced by CFCL. CFCL would have plenty of willing customers, given the current market demand, for any chips that Remul did not take. CFCL transports the chips by truck and rail car. The truck drivers have been on strike for the last two weeks. Green does not see this strike lasting much longer, and he would, therefore, like to recognize the revenue on the chips as they are produced. The partner on this engagement has asked you to prepare a memo discussing the ing alternatives and to make recommendations for the issues raised with the controller.

Required: Prepare the requested memo.

Case 8-5 LO2

You, a CA, have recently accepted a job at the ing firm of Cat, Scan, & Partners, as a manager, and have been assigned the audit of Vision Clothing Inc. (VCI). The partner in charge had been at VCI the previous week and had met with the controller to discuss the year-end audit. The partner has requested that you review his notes and prepare a detailed report for the client regarding ing and other issues (excluding tax and assurance). He handed you his notes and extracts from the current year’s preliminary financial statements (Exhibit III), from which you learn the following about the company.

EXHIBIT III VISION CLOTHING COMPANY EXTRACTS FROM CONSOLIDATED INCOME STATEMENT for the years ended January 31 (in Thousands of Dollars)

Sales Cost of goods sold Gross margin Selling expenses Head office expenses Earnings before the following: Amortization Interest Earnings before taxes Income taxes Earnings (loss) from investment in d companies Net earnings Attributable to: Shareholders of VCI Non-controlling interest

Year 3 (Preliminary)

Year 2 (Audited)

$1,305,125 848,332 456,793 272,453 138,938 45,402 52,600 37,484 (44,682) 17,873 (26,809)

$1,244,102 721,579 522,523 315,333 150,186 57,004 42,380 31,381 (16,757) 6,660 (10,097)

$ $ $

4,700 (22,109) (19,684) (2,425) (22,109)

$ $ $

(850) (10,947) (7,523) (3,424) (10,947)

(continued)


478


470

CHAPTER 8


EXHIBIT III

(continued )

VISION CLOTHING COMPANY EXTRACTS FROM CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET as at January 31 (in Thousands of Dollars)

Year 3 (Preliminary)

Year 2 (Audited)

$ 42,420 250,713 61,962 0 17,873 372,968 27,825 353,420 127,472 $881,685

$145,400 250,209 57,432 2,660 0 455,701 23,125 312,800 123,842 $915,468

$212,790

$257,135

55,412 34,800 303,002

22,160 4,200 283,495

93,000 58,208 100,000 251,208

133,000 48,889 150,000 331,889

195,500 75,566 56,409 327,475 $881,685

146,000 95,250 58,834 300,084 $915,468

Assets Current Cash and short-term investment Inventory Other current assets Income taxes recoverable Deferred taxes Investment in d companies Property, plant, and equipment—net Goodwill

Liabilities and Shareholders’ Equity s payable Current portion of long-term debt and financing lease obligations Other current liabilities Long term Long-term debt Finance lease obligations Debentures payable Shareholders’ equity Ordinary shares Retained earnings Non-controlling interest

General background: VCI was incorporated 15 years ago under the Canada Business Corporations Act and operates stores across Canada and the United States. Its principal business is the operation of women’s and men’s clothing stores. These chains operate through different divisions and subsidiaries. The retail clothing industry has been hit hard by the recession in recent years, and many large companies and familiar names have been forced out of business. Each VCI chain functions as an autonomous unit to which VCI provides capital and central services. This decentralized organization permits the chains to remain sensitive to the needs of their markets. The corporation’s year-end is January 31. It is now February Year 3.


CHAPTER 8


479

471

Notes from the meeting with the client: 1. In February Year 2, VCI successfully completed a public share offering of 6 million Class A non-voting shares at an offering price of $8.25 per share. Underwriter’s fees amounted to $5 million. In November Year 2, VCI considered another public offering; however, the price per share had fallen to $4.00 and the directors decided to defer the issue to a later date. To date, fees of $1 million related to this deferred offering have been incurred and capitalized to current assets. The share issue was used to redeem debentures of $50 million in March Year 2. Under the provisions of the debenture agreement, one third of the original $150 million debenture can be redeemed each March at the discretion of the debenture holders. At any time, debenture holders have the option to convert the debentures at their face value for voting shares at their market value. 2. The company recorded a gain of $3.7 million from an increase in its ownership interest of an d company, XYZ Ltd. The increase occurred as a result of a share redemption by XYZ Ltd. Following the redemption, VCI’s ownership rose from 25% to 29%. The gain represents 4% of the fair market value of XYZ Ltd. 3. Two years ago, VCI decided to diversify and purchased the assets of a chain of children’s shoe stores, Tiny Tot Togs (TTT). They have operated TTT as a division of VCI. The assets of TTT will be sold in the near future for an estimated $5 million. TTT has lost $18 million to date. VCI believes that $5 million is the fair market value for the company, even though it has invested over $30 million in TTT. 4. During the year, VCR invested in a new management reporting and consolidation software package, which the finance department has just implemented and tested. VCI’s management information systems department produced the package internally. Total costs to develop, implement, and test the software package have been estimated at about $2 million. This amount has been allocated to property, plant, and equipment. It includes about $800,000 to $1 million in salaries and benefits for those employees who devoted most of their time to this project. The amount also includes $700,000 to $1 million spent on new hardware, including monitors, enhanced keyboards, computer chips, and extended memory upgrades necessary to run the new software package. 5. On October 31, Year 2, VCI amalgamated with a subsidiary, Style Co. The amalgamation occurred because VCI had large loss carry-forwards due to expire soon, and future losses were anticipated. Style Co. had been profitable for several years and was forecasting further profits of $9 million for the year ending January Year 3. Because of Style Co.’s size, inventory was counted at year-end only. The quarterly inventory valuations were estimated using prior-year gross margins less a provision for shrinkage. During Year 2, Style Co. began installing a state-ofthe-art inventory system that was far superior to its old system. The new system was installed prior to the year-end inventory count at January 31, Year 3. When the count was taken, inventory was found to be overstated by $20 million, turning Style Co.’s original $9 million profit for the year into an $11 million loss. The problem was explained as being possibly a combination of a shrinkage problem, gross margin miscalculations (on which original budgets were based), and/or system conversion problems (e.g., incorrectly inputted data). Inventory averages approximately $100 million at cost and $150 million at retail.


480


472

CHAPTER 8


VCI’s controller suggested that the inventory shortage must have occurred throughout the year and that Style Co.’s third-quarter profit should be restated. 6. VCI has strong representation in many shopping malls, so it has been able to negotiate favorable leases. In many cases, landlords have provided funds to cover all, or a significant portion of, the leasehold improvements as a result of the economic pressures to attract and keep good tenants. VCI received approximately $20 million in September Year 2, to remodel new and existing locations. Leases are generally signed for seven years, at the end of which time the stores are usually remodeled. VCI has recorded these transactions as a credit against divisional expenses on the preliminary January 31, Year 3 statements.

Required: Prepare the report to the client and the memo to partner.


The following Year 1 consolidated cash flow statement was prepared for Standard Manufacturing Corp. and its 60%-owned subsidiary, Pritchard Windows Inc.: STANDARD MANUFACTURING CORP. CONSOLIDATED CASH FLOW STATEMENT for the Year Ended December 31, Year 1 Cash flows from operating activities: Consolidated net income* Non-cash items included in income Depreciation Goodwill impairment loss Bond amortization Loss on sale of equipment Decrease in inventory Increase in s receivable Net cash provided by operating activities Cash flows from investing activities Purchase of buildings Sale of equipment Net cash used in investing activities Cash flows from financing activities Dividends paid To Standard’s shareholders To non-controlling shareholders Bond issue Preferred share redemption Net cash used in financing activities Net increase in cash Cash balance, January 1 Cash balance, December 31

$129,800 45,200 1,000 (2,000) 23,000 20,000 (12,000) $205,000 (150,000) 60,000 (90,000)

(50,000) (6,000) 100,000 (120,000) (76,000) 39,000 50,000 $ 89,000

* Consolidated net income was $120,000 attributable to Standard’s shareholders and $9,800 attributable to non-controlling interests.


481


CHAPTER 8


473

Required: (a) Did the loss on the sale of equipment shown above result from a sale to an or a non-? Explain. (b) Explain why the amortization of bond is treated as a deduction from net income in arriving at net cash flow from operations. (c) Determine the net income of Pritchard Windows for Year 1. (Assume no intercompany transactions or unrealized profits and that the only change in the unamortized acquisition differential during the year was the goodwill impairment loss.) (d) Explain why dividends to non-controlling shareholders are not shown as a dividend in the consolidated retained earnings statement but are shown as a distribution of cash in the consolidated cash flow statement. (e) Determine the amount of dividends paid by Pritchard Windows in Year 1.


Financial statements of Par Corp. and its subsidiary Star Inc. on December 31, Year 12, are shown below: BALANCE SHEETS at December 31, Year 12 Par

Star

Cash s receivable Inventories Land Plant and equipment Accumulated depreciation Investment in Star common shares

$ 40,000 100,000 55,000 30,000 400,000 (180,000) 280,000 $725,000

$

1,000 85,000 48,000 70,000 700,000 (300,000) — $604,000

s payable Accrued liabilities Preferred shares Common shares Retained earnings

$ 92,000 8,000 — 450,000 175,000 $725,000

$180,000 10,000 50,000 200,000 164,000 $604,000

RETAINED EARNINGS STATEMENTS for the Year Ended December 31, Year 12

Balance, January 1 Net income (loss) Dividends Balance, December 31

Par

Star

$180,000 30,000 210,000 35,000 $175,000

$208,000 (24,000) 184,000 20,000 $164,000


482


474

CHAPTER 8


Other Information • On January 1, Year 5, the balance sheet of Star showed the following shareholders’ equity: $8 cumulative preferred shares, 500 shares issued Common shares, 2,000 shares issued Deficit (Note 1)

$ 50,000 200,000 (80,000) $170,000

Note 1: Dividends on preferred shares are two years in arrears.

On this date, Par acquired 1,400 common shares of Star for a cash payment of $280,000. The fair values of Star’s identifiable net assets differed from carrying amounts only with respect to the following:

s receivable Inventory Plant Long-term liabilities

Carrying amount

Fair value

$42,000 65,000 600,000 400,000

$40,000 72,000 650,000 420,000

The plant had an estimated remaining useful life of five years on this date, and the long-term liabilities had a maturity date of December 30, Year 12. Any goodwill is to be tested annually for impairment. • Both Par and Star make substantial sales to each other at an intercompany selling price that yields the same gross profit as the sales they make to unrelated customers. Intercompany sales in Year 12 were as follows: Par to Star Star to Par

$400,000 330,000

• During Year 12, Par billed Star $2,000 per month in management fees. At yearend, Star had paid for all months except for December. • The January 1, Year 12, inventories of the two companies contained unrealized intercompany profits as follows: Inventory of Par Inventory of Star

$30,000 21,000

• The December 31, Year 12, inventories of the two companies contained unrealized intercompany profits as follows: Inventory of Par Inventory of Star

$35,000 37,000

• On July 1, Year 7, Star sold equipment to Par for $82,000. The equipment had a carrying amount in the records of Star of $60,000 on this date and an estimated remaining useful life of five years. • Goodwill impairment losses were recorded as follows: Year 7, $92,500; Year 9, $46,470; and Year 12, $19,710. • Assume a 40% corporate tax rate. • Par has ed for its investment in Star by the cost method. • All dividends in arrears were paid by December 31, Year 11.


CHAPTER 8


483

475

Required: (a) Prepare, with all necessary calculations, the following: (i) Year 12 consolidated retained earnings statement (ii) Consolidated balance sheet as at December 31, Year 12 (b) How would the return on equity attributable to Par’s shareholders for Year 12 change if Star’s preferred shares were non-cumulative instead of cumulative? (c) On January 1, Year 13, Star issued common shares for $100,000 in cash. Because Par did not purchase any of these shares, Par’s ownership percentage declined from 70 to 56%. Calculate the gain or loss that would be charged or credited to consolidated shareholders’ equity as a result of this transaction.


On December 31, Year 5, the ant of Regent Corporation prepared a reconciliation (see below), which was used in the preparation of the consolidated financial statements on that date. Investment in Argyle Ltd.—equity method balance Shareholders’ equity of Argyle 8,000 common shares Retained earnings Regent’s ownership Regent’s share of unamortized acquisition differential Non-controlling interest’s share of unamortized acquisition differential Total unamortized acquisition differential Allocated: Land Equipment—remaining useful life, 8 years Trademarks—remaining useful life, 10 years

$315,000 50,000 175,000 225,000 90%

202,500 112,500 12,500 $125,000 $ 28,333 44,444 52,223 $125,000

Additional Information • On December 31, Year 6, Argyle reported a net income of $50,000 (earned evenly throughout the year) and declared dividends of $20,000. • On April 1, Year 6, Argyle issued an additional 2,000 common shares at a price of $75 each. Regent did not acquire any of these shares. • On October 1, Year 6, because the market price of Argyle’s common shares had fallen, Regent purchased 1,300 shares of Argyle on the open market at $60 per share. The decline in value is not believed to be permanent. Any acquisition differential was allocated 20% to land, 35% to equipment, and 45% to trademark.

Required: (a) Prepare an acquisition-differential amortization schedule for Year 6 while showing the controlling and non-controlling interests’ share of the changes occurring throughout the year. (b) Now assume that Regent is a private company, uses ASPE, and chooses to use the equity method to report its investment in Argyle. Calculate the equity method balance in the investment in Argyle as at December 31, Year 6, and reconcile this balance to Argyle’s shareholders’ equity and to the unamortized acquisition differential.


484


476

CHAPTER 8


Problem 8-4 LO1, 3

The comparative consolidated statement of financial position at December 31, Year 2, and the consolidated income statement for Year 2, of Parent Ltd. and its 70%-owned subsidiary are shown below. Year 2

Year 1

Plant and equipment Accumulated depreciation Goodwill Inventory s receivable Cash

$5,350,000 (2,350,000) 530,000 989,500 600,000 810,000 $5,929,500

$5,100,000 (1,980,000) 565,000 490,000 710,000 335,000 $5,220,000

Ordinary shares Retained earnings Non-controlling interest Long-term liabilities Current liabilities

$ 800,000 916,000 515,000 3,100,000 598,500 $5,929,500

$ 800,000 520,000 — 2,600,000 1,300,000 $5,220,000

Revenues Cost of purchases and other expenses Change in inventory Depreciation Goodwill impairment loss Profit

$8,500,000 8,179,600 (499,500) 370,000 35,000 8,085,100 $ 414,900

Attributable to Shareholders of Parent Non-controlling interest

$ 376,500 38,400

Additional Information • On December 31, Year 1, Parent owned 100% of Sub. On this date, the shareholders’ equity of Sub amounted to $1,120,000, and the parent’s unamortized acquisition differential of $565,000 was allocated entirely to the goodwill of Sub. • On January 1, Year 2, Parent sold 30% of its shares of Sub for $629,000 cash and recorded an increase to retained earnings of $123,500 on the transaction. Parent uses the equity method to for its investment. • Parent paid $104,000 in dividends during Year 2.

Required: Prepare, in good form, a consolidated cash flow statement for Year 2 in accordance with the requirements of IAS 7.

Problem 8-5 LO5, 7

On April 1, Year 7, Princeton Corp. purchased 70% of the ordinary shares of Simon Ltd. for $910,000. On this same date, Simon purchased 60% of the ordinary shares of Fraser Inc. for $600,000. On April 1, Year 7, the acquisition differentials from the two investments were allocated entirely to broadcast rights to be amortized over 10 years. The cost method is being used to for both investments.


485


CHAPTER 8


477

During Year 7, the three companies sold merchandise to each other. On December 31, Year 7, the inventory of Princeton contained merchandise on which Simon recorded a gross margin of $32,000. On the same date, the inventory of Fraser contained merchandise on which Princeton recorded a gross margin of $18,000. Assume a 40% tax rate. The following information is available:

Ordinary shares Retained earnings—Jan. 1, Year 7 Profit—Year 7* Dividends declared—Dec. 31

Princeton

Simon

Fraser

$600,000 650,000 100,000 25,000

$550,000 400,000 200,000 30,000

$300,000 300,000 150,000 70,000

* Earned evenly throughout the year.

Required: Calculate the following: (a) (b) (c) (d)

Problem 8-6 LO4

Consolidated profit attributable to Princeton’s shareholders for Year 7. Non-controlling interest as at December 31, Year 7. Consolidated broadcast rights as at December 31, Year 7. Profit on Princeton’s separate-entity income statement, assuming that Princeton was a private company, uses ASPE, and uses the equity method to report its investments in subsidiaries.

On January 1, Year 5, PET Company acquired 900 ordinary shares of SET Company for $63,000. On this date, the shareholders’ equity s of SET Company were as follows: Ordinary shares (1,000 no par value shares issued) Preferred shares (4,000 no par value shares issued) (Note 1) Retained earnings

$20,000 40,000 30,000 $90,000

Note 1: The preferred shares are $1, cumulative, nonparticipating with a liquidation value of 1.05. They were two years in arrears on January 1, Year 5. The following are the statements of retained earnings for the two companies for Year 5: PET Retained earnings, beginning of year Profit Dividends Retained earnings, end of year

$50,000 30,000 (25,000) $55,000

SET $30,000 22,000 (15,000) $37,000

Additional Information • PET uses the cost method to for its investment in SET. • Any acquisition differential is allocated to patents with an estimated useful life of six years as at January 1, Year 5. Neither company has any patents recorded on their separate-entity records.


486


478

CHAPTER 8


Required: (a) Prepare a consolidated statement of retained earnings for Year 5. (b) Prepare an independent calculation of consolidated retained earnings at the end of Year 5. (c) Calculate non-controlling interest for the consolidated income statement for Year 5 and non-controlling interest for the consolidated statement of financial position at the end of Year 5.

Problem 8-7 LO3

On January 1, Year 8, Summer Company’s shareholders’ equity was as follows: Common shares Retained earnings

$20,000 70,000 $90,000

Plumber Company held 90% of the 4,000 outstanding shares of Summer on January 1, Year 8, and its investment in Summer Company had a balance of $126,000 on that date. Plumber s for its investment by the equity method. Any acquisition differential was allocated to unrecorded trademarks with a remaining useful life on January 1, Year 8, of 10 years. The following events took place subsequent to January 1, Year 8: • On July 1, Year 8, Plumber sold 720 of the Summer Company shares it held at a price of $30 per share. • During Year 8, Summer reported a net income of $20,000 (earned equally throughout the year) and declared dividends of $5,000 on December 31. • During Year 9, Summer reported a net income of $28,000 and paid dividends of $8,000 on November 15. • On December 29, Year 9, Summer issued an additional 500 shares to third parties at a price of $46 per share.

Required: (a) Calculate the gain or loss in Year 8 and Year 9 as a result of the ownership change that took place each year. (b) Would the gain or loss appear on the consolidated income statement each year? Explain. (c) Calculate the consolidated trademarks as at December 31, Year 9. (d) Does the value for the trademarks on the consolidated balance sheet as calculated in part (c) comply with the historical cost principle? Explain.

Problem 8-8 LO1

The ant of Kara Enterprises has just finished preparing the consolidated balance sheet, income statement, and retained earnings statement for Year 2, and has asked you for assistance in preparing the consolidated cash flow statement. Kara has only one subsidiary, which is 80% owned, and in addition has a longterm investment of 45% in the outstanding shares of Pacific Finance Co. The following items have been prepared from the analysis of the Year 2 consolidated statements: Decrease in s receivable Increase in s payable Increase in inventory Equity earnings from Pacific Finance

$25,000 3,000 15,000 90,000


CHAPTER 8


Increase in bonds payable Building purchased for cash Depreciation reported for current period Gain recorded on sale of equipment Carrying amount of equipment sold Goodwill impairment loss Dividends received from Pacific Finance Net income attributable to Kara’s shareholders Net income attributable to non-controlling interest Dividends paid by parent company Dividends paid by subsidiary company Cash balance, January 1, Year 2

487

479 120,000 580,000 73,000 8,000 37,000 3,000 25,000 450,000 14,000 60,000 30,000 42,000

Required: Prepare the consolidated cash flow statement.

Problem 8-9 LO1, 3

Parent Co. owns 9,500 shares of Sub Co. and s for its investment by the equity method. On December 31, Year 5, the shareholders’ equity of Sub was as follows: Common shares (10,000 shares issued) Retained earnings

$100,000 170,000

On January 1, Year 6, Parent sold 1,900 shares from its holdings in Sub for $66,500. On this date and prior to the sale, the balance in the investment in Sub was $320,000, and the unamortized acquisition differential was allocated in the following manner: 45% to land 30% to equipment (remaining useful life, 4 years) 25% to patents (remaining useful life, 10 years)

During Year 6, Sub reported a net income of $150,000 and paid dividends totalling $70,000.

Required: (a)

(i) Prepare the journal entry that Parent would make on January 1, Year 6, to record the sale of the 1,900 shares. (ii) Calculate the amount of the unamortized acquisition differential that would be allocated to land, equipment, and patents on December 31, Year 6. (iii) Prepare an independent proof of the unamortized acquisition differential on December 31, Year 6.

(b) The ant of Parent must prepare a consolidated cash flow statement for Year 6 by analyzing the changes in the consolidated balance sheets from December 31, Year 5, to December 31, Year 6. She needs some assistance in determining what effect Parent’s sale of 1,900 shares had on the consolidated financial statements. Prepare a journal entry to record the effect that the January 1, Year 6, sale of shares had on the consolidated entity.


488


480

CHAPTER 8


Problem 8-10 LO2

On January 1, Year 5, Pic Company acquired 7,500 ordinary shares of Sic Company for $600,000. On January 1, Year 6, Pic Company acquired an additional 2,000 ordinary shares of Sic Company for $166,000. On January 1, Year 5, the shareholders’ equity of Sic was as follows: Ordinary shares (10,000 no par value shares issued) Retained earnings

$200,000 300,000 $500,000

The following are the statements of retained earnings for the two companies for Years 5 and 6: Pic


Sic

Year 5

Year 6

Year 5

Year 6

$500,000 130,000 (100,000) $530,000

$530,000 140,000 (120,000) $550,000

$300,000 100,000 (90,000) $310,000

$310,000 110,000 (90,000) $330,000

Additional Information • Pic uses the cost method to for its investment in Sic. • Any acquisition differential is allocated to customer contracts, which are expected to provide future benefits until December 31, Year 7. Neither company has any customer contracts recorded on their separate-entity records. • There were no unrealized profits from intercompany transactions since the date of acquisition.

Required: (a) Calculate consolidated profit attributable to Pic’s shareholders for Year 6. (b) Calculate the following balances for the consolidated statement of financial position at December 31, Year 6: (i) Customer contracts (ii) Non-controlling interest (iii) Retained earnings

Problem 8-11 LO5

Intercompany shareholdings of an d group during the year ended December 31, Year 2, were as follows: York Ltd.

Queen’s Company

McGill Company

90% of Queen’s Company 80% of McGill Company

70% of Carleton Ltd. 10% of McGill Company

60% of Trent Ltd.

The equity method is being used for intercompany investments, but no entries have been made in Year 2. The profits before equity method earnings for Year 2 were as follows: Profit York Ltd. Queen’s Company McGill Company Carleton Ltd. Trent Ltd.

$54,000 22,000 26,700 15,400 11,600


CHAPTER 8


489

481

Intercompany profits before taxes in the December 31, Year 2, inventories and the selling companies were as follows: Selling corporation

Profit made by selling corporation

York Ltd. McGill Company Carleton Ltd.

$10,000 1,000 2,400

Use income tax allocation at a 40% rate. Assume that there is no acquisition differential for any of the intercompany shareholdings.

Required: (a) Calculate consolidated profit attributable to York’s shareholders for Year 2. (b) Calculate the amount of consolidated profit attributable to non-controlling interest that would appear on the Year 2 consolidated income statement. (c) Will the consolidation adjustment for unrealized profits be any different if McGill Company sells inventory to Carleton Ltd. or York Ltd.? Use the revenue recognition principle to explain your answer.

Problem 8-12 LO3, 6

Craft Ltd. held 80% of the outstanding ordinary shares of Delta Corp. as at December 31, Year 12. In order to establish a closer relationship with Nond Corporation, a major supplier to both Craft and Delta, all three companies agreed that Nond would take an equity position in Delta. Accordingly, for a cash payment of $15 per share, Delta issued 12,250 additional ordinary shares to Nond on December 31, Year 12. This was the last transaction that occurred on this date. Statements of financial position for the two companies just prior to this transaction were as follows: CRAFT LTD. STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION at December 31, Year 12 Buildings and equipment (net) Investment in Delta Inventory s receivable Cash

$ 600,000 490,000 180,000 90,000 50,000 $1,410,000

Ordinary shares Retained earnings Mortgage payable s payable

$ 480,000 610,000 250,000 70,000 $1,410,000

DELTA CORP. STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION at December 31, Year 12 Buildings and equipment (net) Inventory s receivable Cash

$400,000 200,000 120,000 65,000 $785,000


490


482

CHAPTER 8


Ordinary shares (Note) Retained earnings Accrued liabilities s payable

$250,000 350,000 85,000 100,000 $785,000

Note: 49,000 ordinary shares outstanding on December 31, Year 12.

Additional Information • Craft has used the equity method of ing for its investment in Delta since it acquired its 80% interest in Delta in Year 2. At that time, the acquisition differential was entirely allocated to inventory and patent, which still exists but is not recorded on Delta’s separate-entity books. • There were no unrealized intercompany asset profits as at December 31, Year 12.

Required: (a) Prepare a consolidated statement of financial position as at December 31, Year 12 (show calculations for all items on the balance sheet). (b) If Craft had used parent company extension theory rather than entity theory, how would this affect the return-on-equity ratio for Year 12?

Problem 8-13 LO5

A Company owns 75% of B Company and 40% of C Company. B Company owns 40% of C Company. The following information was assembled at December 31, Year 7. A Company

B Company

Cash s receivable Inventory Investment in C Investment in B Property, plant, and equipment Accumulated depreciation

$ 117,800 200,000 277,000 85,000 409,250 2,800,000 (1,120,000) $2,769,050

$

49,300 100,000 206,000 92,000 — 1,500,000 (593,000) $1,354,300

$ 20,000 44,000 58,000 — — 220,000 (90,000) $252,000

s payable Bonds payable Preferred shares Common shares Retained earnings, January 1 Net income Dividends

$ 206,000 1,000,000 — 1,200,000 314,250 118,800 (70,000) $2,769,050

$

$

88,000 700,000 50,000 400,000 61,000 55,300 — $1,354,300

C Company

2,000 — — 200,000 30,000 20,000 — $252,000

Additional Information • A Company purchased its 40% interest in C Company on January 1, Year 4. On that date, the negative acquisition differential of $10,000 on the 40% investment was allocated to equipment with an estimated useful life of 10 years. • A Company purchased its 75% of B Company’s common shares on January 1, Year 6. On that date, the 100% implied acquisition differential was allocated $40,000 to buildings with an estimated useful life of 20 years, and $53,333 to patents to be amortized over 8 years. The preferred shares of B Company are non-cumulative.


491


CHAPTER 8


483

• On January 1, Year 7, B Company purchased its 40% interest in C Company for $92,000. The carrying amount of C Company’s identifiable net assets approximated fair value on this date. • The inventory of B Company contains a profit of $2,400 on merchandise purchased from A Company. The inventory of A Company contains a profit of $3,000 on merchandise purchased from C Company. • On December 31, Year 7, A Company owes $20,000 to C Company and B Company owes $2,000 to A Company. • Both A Company and B Company use the equity method to for their investments but have made no equity method adjustments in Year 7. • An income tax rate of 40% is used for consolidation purposes.

Required: (a) Calculate non-controlling interest’s share of consolidated net income for Year 7. (b) Prepare a consolidated statement of retained earnings for Year 7. (c) Prepare a consolidated balance sheet as at December 31, Year 7. Show all calculations.

Problem 8-14 LO1

Parento Inc. owns 80% of Santana Corp. The consolidated financial statements of Parento follow: PARENTO INC. CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET at December 31, Year 4 Year 4

Year 3

Cash s receivable Inventory Land Buildings and equipment Accumulated depreciation Databases

$118,600 115,000 232,000 86,000 598,000 (205,000) 16,800 $961,400

$ 49,800 126,000 192,000 114,000 510,000 (168,000) 19,200 $843,000

s payable Accrued liabilities Bonds payable Bond Common shares Retained earnings Non-controlling interest

$ 54,400 7,200 320,000 9,600 180,000 363,480 26,720 $961,400

$ 31,200 27,000 240,000 10,800 180,000 330,000 24,000 $843,000

PARENTO INC. CONSOLIDATED INCOME STATEMENT for the Year Ended December 31, Year 4 Sales Cost of sales Selling expense istrative expense Interest expense Income tax Net income Attributable to Parento’s shareholders Non-controlling interest

$960,000 535,000 144,600 159,800 31,400 37,000

907,800 $ 52,200 $ 47,880 4,320


492


484

CHAPTER 8


Parento Inc. purchased its 80% interest in Santana Corp. on January 1, Year 2, for $114,000 when Santana had net assets of $90,000. The acquisition differential was allocated $24,000 to databases (10-year life), with the balance allocated to equipment (20-year life). Parento issued $80,000 in bonds on December 31, Year 4. Santana reported a net income of $24,000 for Year 4 and paid dividends of $8,000. Selling and istrative expense includes the following: Depreciation of buildings and equipment Database amortization Loss on land sale

$37,000 2,400 2,000

Parento reported a Year 4 equity method income of $47,880 and paid dividends of $14,400.

Required: (a) Prepare a consolidated cash flow statement for Year 4. (b) Why are 100% of the dividends paid by Santana not shown as a cash outflow on the cash flow statement?

Problem 8-15 LO3, 7

On January 1, Year 5, Wellington Inc. owned 90% of the outstanding common shares of Sussex Corp. Wellington s for its investment using the equity method. The balance in the investment on January 1, Year 5, amounted to $235,800. The unamortized acquisition differential on this date was allocated entirely to vacant land held by Sussex. The shareholders’ equity of Sussex on January 1, Year 5, was as follows: Common shares (7,200 shares outstanding) Retained earnings

$ 28,000 134,000 $162,000

The following events occurred in Year 5: • The net income of Sussex for Year 5 amounted to $36,000, earned equally throughout the year. • On April 1, Year 5, Sussex issued 1,800 shares at a price of $25 per share. Wellington did not acquire any of these shares. • On June 30, Year 5, Sussex paid dividends amounting to $12,000. • On September 15, Year 5, Sussex sold 30% of its vacant land at its carrying amount. • On December 31, Year 5, Wellington sold 648 shares of its investment in Sussex for $22,000.

Required: Calculate the following as at December 31, Year 5: (a) The acquisition differential allocated to vacant land and the split in value between the parent and the non-controlling interest. (b) The balance in the investment , assuming that Wellington is a private company, uses ASPE, and chooses to use the equity method to report its investment in Sussex. (c) The amount of non-controlling interest on the consolidated balance sheet.


493


CHAPTER 8



485

On January 1, Year 8, Panet Company acquired 40,000 common shares of Saffer Corporation, a public company, for $500,000. This purchase represented 8% of the outstanding shares of Saffer. It was the intention of Panet to acquire more shares in the future in order to eventually gain control of Saffer. On January 1, Year 10, Panet purchased an additional 135,000 common shares of Saffer for $1,890,000. Saffer’s shareholders’ equity section was as follows: 10% non-cumulative preferred shares Common shares, no par value, 500,000 shares outstanding Retained earnings

$ 500,000 3,000,000 2,700,000

On this date, the fair values of Saffer’s assets were equal to carrying amounts, except for inventory, which was undervalued by $120,000, and land, which was undervalued by $1,000,000. On January 1, Year 11, Panet purchased an additional 225,000 common shares of Saffer for $3,600,000. Saffer’s shares were trading on the open market for $15 per share on the date of acquisition. The shareholders’ equity section for Saffer was as follows: 10% non-cumulative preferred shares Common shares, no par value, 500,000 shares outstanding Retained earnings

$ 500,000 3,000,000 3,200,000

On January 1, Year 11, the fair values of Saffer’s assets were equal to carrying amounts except for the following: Carrying amount

Fair value

$ 200,000 10,000,000 2,000,000

$ 140,000 10,900,000 2,200,000

s receivable Plant and equipment (net) Long-term liabilities

The plant and equipment had a remaining useful life of 20 years. The longterm liabilities mature on December 31, Year 20. The balance sheets as at December 31, Year 12, and the income statements for the year ending December 31, Year 12, for the two companies are as follows: BALANCE SHEET Panet Assets: Cash s receivable Inventories Plant and equipment (net) Investment in Saffer Land Total assets Liabilities: Current liabilities Long-term liabilities Shareholders’ equity: 10% non-cumulative preferred shares Common shares Retained earnings Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity

Saffer

$

500,000 2,400,000 500,000 10,610,000 7,417,300 5,500,000 $26,927,300

$

200,000 300,000 400,000 9,000,000 — 1,000,000 $10,900,000

$ 3,000,000 4,000,000 7,000,000

$

— 9,000,000 10,927,300 19,927,300 $26,927,300

500,000 3,000,000 4,900,000 8,400,000 $10,900,000

500,000 2,000,000 2,500,000


494


486

CHAPTER 8


INCOME STATEMENT Sales Investment income from Saffer Cost of goods sold Selling and istrative expense Income tax Other expenses Net Income

Panet

Saffer

$15,000,000 697,700 15,697,700 9,500,000 2,500,000 1,032,000 468,000 13,500,000 $ 2,197,700

$9,000,000 — 9,000,000 6,200,000 530,000 730,000 440,000 7,900,000 $1,100,000

Additional Information • Dividends declared and paid during Year 12: Panet Saffer

$500,000 200,000

• On January 1, Year 12, the inventory of Panet contained an $85,000 intercompany profit, and the inventory of Saffer contained an intercompany profit amounting to $190,000. • During Year 12, Saffer sold inventory to Panet for $2,600,000 at a gross profit margin of 35%. Sales of $400,000 remained in Panet’s inventory at December 31, Year 12. • During Year 12, Panet sold inventory to Saffer for $3,900,000 at a gross profit margin of 45%. Sales of $250,000 remained in Saffer’s inventory at December 31, Year 12. • Saffer sold a piece of equipment to Panet on July 1, Year 12, for $450,000. At that time, the carrying amount of the equipment in Saffer’s books was $240,000, and it had a remaining useful life of 10.5 years. Panet still owes Saffer for 30% of the purchase price of the equipment. The gain on sale has been netted against other expenses in Saffer’s Year 12 income statement. • Panet uses the equity method to for its investment in Saffer. Both companies follow the straight-line method for depreciating plant and equipment, and for s or discounts on long-term liabilities. • A goodwill impairment loss of $92,000 was recorded in Year 11, and a further loss of $58,000 occurred in Year 12. The impairment losses are to be applied at 80% to Panet’s shareholders and 20% to non-controlling interest. • Depreciation expense is included with selling and istrative expenses, whereas goodwill impairment losses are included in other expenses. • Assume a 40% tax rate.

Required: (a) Prepare the following Year 12 consolidated financial statements: (i) Income statement (ii) Balance sheet (b) Calculate goodwill impairment loss and non-controlling interest on the consolidated income statement for the year ended December 31, Year 12, under parent company extension theory.


495


CHAPTER 8


487

(c) If Panet had used parent company extension theory rather than entity theory, how would this affect the debt-to-equity ratio at the end of Year 12?

Problem 8-17 LO3, 4

On December 31, Year 6, Ultra Software Limited purchased 70,000 common shares (70%) of a major competitor, Personal Program Corporation (PPC), at $30 per share. Several shareholders who were unwilling to sell at that time owned the remaining common shares and the preferred shares. The preferred shares, which are non-cumulative, are entitled to a $12 dividend. Each is convertible into two common shares. Immediate conversion of these preferred shares has been, and will continue to be, highly unlikely due to the current market conditions for the shares. Management is concerned, however, about the effect that any future conversion would have. At December 31, Year 6, PPC’s net assets had a carrying amount of $1,525,000. The identifiable assets and liabilities had carrying amounts equal to fair values, with the following exceptions: • Software patents and copyrights had a total market value estimated as $300,000 above carrying amount. These were expected to have a five-year useful life. • Inventories of packaged software had a cost to PPC of $20,000 and an estimated selling price of $140,000. Estimated future selling expenses for these items were $15,000. • An unrecorded brand name had an estimated fair value of $2,375,000. This will be amortized over 40 years. • In determining the purchase price, the management of Ultra noted that PPC has two years remaining on a long-term contract to supply seats to a major car manufacturer. Given the rapid rise in input costs, PPC earns a negative gross margin on this contract. An independent appraiser indicated that the fair value of this unfavourable supply contract is a negative $500,000. The trial balances at December 31, Year 8, for these two companies are provided as Exhibit IV.

EXHIBIT IV TRIAL BALANCES at December 31, Year 8 in Thousands of Dollars Ultra Cash s receivable Inventory Patents and copyrights Furniture and equipment (net) Building (net) Land Investment in PPC s payable Mortgage payable Bank loan payable

PPC

$ 320 300 350 350 540 800 450 2,100

$ 150 280 380 450 675 925 200 $

340 350

$ 138 320

(continued)


496


488

CHAPTER 8


EXHIBIT IV

(continued ) Ultra

Preferred shares (12,500 outstanding) Common shares (300,000 outstanding) Common shares (100,000 outstanding) Retained earnings Sales Other income Gain on sale of patent Loss on sale of computer Cost of purchases Change in inventory Other expenses (incl. tax) Depreciation Interest Dividends

PPC 1,400 3,000 100 117 4,530 7 50

1,300 6,200 120 1,080 4,035 15 850 75 45 $11,310

$11,310

2,590 10 675 142 35 150 $6,662

$6,662

In Year 7, PPC sold packaged software costing $30,000 to Ultra at a price of $45,000. Of this software, 60% was still in Ultra’s inventory at December 31, Year 7. During Year 8, packaged software costing $42,000 was sold by PPC to Ultra for $60,000. Ultra’s inventory at December 31, Year 8, included $22,000 of goods purchased in this sale. Neither of these packaged software inventories sold to Ultra had a fair value difference at acquisition. Goodwill is tested for impairment on an annual basis. Each year, it was determined that goodwill was not impaired. Included in the Year 8 income of PPC was a gain of $50,000 on the sale of patents to another company. This sale took place on June 30, Year 8. These patents had a fair value difference of $20,000 at acquisition. On September 30, Year 8, Ultra sold surplus computer hardware to PPC. This equipment had a cost of $6,000,000, was one-half depreciated, and was sold for its fair value of $2,000,000. Disassembly and shipping costs of $80,000 were paid by Ultra. There was estimated to be a nine-year remaining useful life in its new use. Preferred dividends were paid in all years, and no new shares have been issued since the acquisition date. Assume a 40% tax rate.

Required: (a) In accordance with GAAP, prepare the following: (i) Consolidated income statement for the year ended December 31, Year 8. (ii) Consolidated statement of retained earnings for the year ended December 31, Year 8. (iii) Schedule showing the values of the following consolidated balance sheet s as at December 31, Year 8: (1) Software patents and copyrights (2) Packaged software inventory (3) Non-controlling interest


497


CHAPTER 8

489


(b) Write a brief note to the management of Ultra outlining the financial reporting implications in the event that the preferred shareholders of PPC exercise their conversion privilege. (problem prepared by Peter Secord, St. Mary’s University)

Problem 8-18 LO2

The summarized trial balances of Phase Limited and Step Limited as of December 31, Year 5, are as follows (amounts in thousands): Phase

Step

Property, plant, and equipment Investment in Step Current assets Dividends declared Cost of goods sold Other expenses

$ 540 257 173 80 610 190 $1,850

$298 — 89 40 260 55 $742

Ordinary shares Retained earnings, beginning Liabilities Sales, gains, and other revenue

$ 400 360 88 1,002 $1,850

$200 104 38 400 $742

Phase had acquired the investment in Step in three stages: Date Jan. 1/Year 2 Jan. 1/Year 4 Jan. 1/Year 5

Shares

Cost

Step’s retained earnings

4,000 6,000 6,000

$ 50,700 98,300 108,000

$ 28,000 69,000 104,000

The January 1, Year 2, acquisition enabled Phase to elect 3 to the 10-member board of directors of Step. The January 1, Year 4, acquisition did not give Phase control over Step. Any difference between cost and the underlying carrying amount for each acquisition is attributable equally to land and to patents, which are expected to produce benefits until December 31, Year 11. Step had issued 20,000 shares on July 1, Year 1, the date of incorporation, and has neither issued nor retired shares since that date. Other information follows: • Sale of depreciable assets (six-year remaining useful life), from Phase to Step, on June 30, Year 5, at a gain of $60,000. • Intercompany sales: Year 4 Year 5

Phase to Step Step to Phase Phase to Step Step to Phase

$50,000 20,000 80,000 10,000

• Opening inventory of Phase contained merchandise purchased from Step for $10,000. Company policy was for a 20% gross margin on intercompany sales. Ending inventory of Phase contained merchandise purchased from Step for $5,000. One-half of the goods sold intercompany during Year 5 had not been paid for by year-end. • Assume a 40% tax rate.


498


490

CHAPTER 8


Required: Compute the following consolidated amounts as of December 31, Year 5: (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g)

Patents Property, plant, and equipment Current assets (ignore deferred income taxes) Non-controlling interest on statement of financial position Retained earnings, beginning Cost of goods sold Profit attributable to Phase’s shareholder’s (statement not required) (adapted from a problem prepared by Peter Secord, St. Mary’s University)

WEB-BASED PROBLEMS Web Problem 8-1 LO1, 2, 3, 6

Access the 2011 consolidated financial statements for Thomson Reuters Corporation by going to investor relations section of the company’s website. Answer the questions below. For each question, indicate where in the financial statements you found the answer, and/or provide a brief explanation. (a) Does the company employ the direct or indirect method of ing for operating cash flows? (b) What was the biggest cash outflow during the year? (c) Describe how the cash paid for business acquisitions was reported in the statement of cash flows. (d) State the company’s ing policy for reporting share transactions between the company and non-controlling shareholders that do not result in a loss of control of a subsidiary. (e) Were there any share transactions between the company and noncontrolling shareholders in 2010 and/or 2011 that did not result in gaining or losing control? If so, describe how the transactions were reported and the impact, if any, on consolidated net income. (f) Assume that the company sold a subsidiary during the year and realized a substantial gain. If the company had reported the income from discontinued operations rather than in income from continuing operations, what impact would this have had on the company’s share price? Briefly explain.

Web Problem 8-2 LO1, 2, 3, 6

Access the 2011 financial statements for BCE Inc. by going to investor relations section of the company’s website. Answer the same questions as in Problem 1. Round percentages to one decimal point and other ratios to two decimal points. For each question, indicate where in the financial statements you found the answer, and/or provide a brief explanation. (Some questions may not be applicable.)



499


9 chapter

Other Consolidation Reporting Issues

learning objectives After studying this chapter, you should be able to do the following: LO1 Identify when a special-purpose entity should be consolidated and prepare consolidated statements for a sponsor and its controlled special-purpose entities.

LO2 Describe and apply the current ing standards that govern the reporting of interests in t arrangements. LO3 Understand the deferred tax implications of the ing for a business combination.

LO4 Describe the requirements for segment disclosures and apply the quantitative thresholds to determine reportable segments. LO5 Analyze and interpret financial statements involving other consolidation reporting issues. LO6 Identify some of the differences between IFRSs and ASPE involving other consolidation reporting issues.

INTRODUCTION In the previous chapters, the parent controlled the subsidiary through voting rights. However, there are other means of controlling the operating and financial policies of the subsidiary. Shoppers Drug Mart, the leading player in Canada’s retail drugstore marketplace and the number-one provider of pharmacy products and services, controls associate-owned stores through franchise and operating agreements. As we will see in this chapter, the entities that are controlled by contracts and operating agreements must be consolidated in a fashion similar to that used in previous chapters. Many Canadian companies participate in arrangements whereby they tly control the operations of another entity. For example, West Fraser Timber Co. Ltd., a British Columbia-based integrated wood products company, has significant investments in a newsprint company and a pulp and paper company, which are tly controlled with other entities. West Fraser’s sales and income before taxes in 2011 in these t ventures represented 8% and 89% of the company’s total sales and income before taxes, respectively. Later in this chapter, we will consider various types of t arrangements. After that, we look at how deferred income taxes affect the ing for a business combination. This chapter concludes with the disclosure requirements associated with a company’s operating segments.

An entity can be controlled without holding the majority of the voting shares.

491


500


492

CHAPTER 9


LO1

An SPE is an entity created to accomplish a very specific business activity.

SPEs are often able to obtain debt financing at very favourable interest rates.

Before GAAP were changed, many companies used SPEs as a vehicle for “off-balancesheet financing.”

The risks and rewards may not be distributed in accordance with equity ownership but rather with some other variable interest attaching to a sponsoring firm as a result of contractual arrangements.

SPECIAL-PURPOSE ENTITIES Special-purpose entities (SPEs) have long been used by businesses as a vehicle to carry out specific activities. Until recently, the only financial reporting involvement for a company establishing an SPE was the disclosure requirements regarding related-party transactions. Now GAAP require that some types of SPEs be subject to consolidation in the same manner as is a subsidiary. An SPE is a proprietorship, partnership, corporation, or trust set up to accomplish a very specific and limited business activity. Over the past decade, SPEs have been used to lease manufacturing assets, hedge financial instruments, borrow against high-quality receivables, conduct research and development activities, and carry out a variety of other specified functions. Low-cost financing of asset purchases is often a major benefit of establishing an SPE. Rather than engaging in the business transaction directly, the sponsoring business sets up an SPE to purchase and finance the asset acquisition. The SPE then leases the asset to the sponsor. This strategy saves the business money because the SPE is often eligible for a lower interest rate. This advantage is achieved for several reasons. First, the SPE typically operates with a very limited set of assets—in many cases, just one. By isolating an asset in an SPE, the risk of the asset is isolated from the overall risk of the sponsoring firm. Thus, the SPE’s creditors remain protected by the specific collateral in the asset. Second, the business activities of an SPE can be strictly limited by its governing documents. These limits further protect lenders by preventing the SPE from engaging in any activities not specified in its agreements. Another apparent reason for establishing an SPE was to avoid the consolidation of the SPE with the sponsoring enterprise and to thereby avoid having to show additional debt on the consolidated balance sheet. Because governing agreements limited the activities and decision making in most SPEs, the sponsoring enterprise was able to control the activities of the SPEs through the governing agreements. They did not have to own a majority of the voting shares to maintain control. In fact, a sponsoring enterprise usually owned very little, if any, of the voting shares of the SPE. Therefore, the sponsoring enterprise did not control the SPE through a voting interest and did not, until the late 1990s, have to consolidate the SPE. Like all business entities, SPEs generally have assets, liabilities, and investors with equity interests. Unlike most businesses, the role of the equity investors can be fairly minor. They may serve simply as a technical requirement to allow the SPE to function as a legal entity. Because they bear relatively low economic risk, equity investors are typically provided only a small rate of return. Small equity investments are normally insufficient to induce lenders to provide a low-risk interest rate for an SPE. As a result, another party (often the sponsoring firm that benefits from the SPE’s activities) must be prepared to contribute substantial resources to enable the SPE to secure the additional financing needed to accomplish its purpose. For example, the sponsoring firm may guarantee the debt of the SPE. Other contractual arrangements may limit returns to equity holders, while participation rights provide increased profit potential and risks to the sponsoring firm. Risks and rewards such as these cause the sponsor’s economic interest to vary depending on the success of the created entity—hence the term variableinterest entity (VIE). In contrast to a traditional entity, an SPE’s risks and rewards may not be distributed according to share ownership but according to other variable interests. Exhibit 9.1 provides several examples of variable interests in SPEs.


CHAPTER 9


501

493

EXHIBIT 9.1 VARIABLE INTERESTS IN SPEs The following are some examples of variable interests in SPEs and the related potential for losses or returns accruing to the sponsor:

Variable interests

Potential losses or returns

• Guarantees of debt

• If an SPE cannot repay liabilities, sponsor will pay and incur a loss. • If an SPE cannot repay its senior debt, the sponsor as subordinated debt holder may be required to absorb the loss. • Sponsor as holder of debt may participate in returns of SPE. • If leased asset declines below the residual value, sponsor, as lessee, will make up the shortfall. • Sponsor as holder of debt or equity may participate in residual profits. • Sponsor as service provider receives portion of residual profits.

• Subordinated debt instruments

• Variable-rate liability • Lease residual guarantee

• Non-voting equity instruments • Services

A firm with variable interests in an SPE increases its risk with the level (or potential level in the case of a guarantee) of resources provided. With increased risks come increased incentives to exert greater influence over the decision making of the SPE. In fact, the primary sponsor of the SPE will regularly limit the decisionmaking power of the equity investors through the governance documents that establish the SPE. Although, technically, the equity investors are the owners of the SPE, in reality they may retain little of the traditional responsibilities, risks, and benefits of ownership. In fact, the equity investors often cede financial control of the SPE to the primary sponsor in exchange for a guaranteed rate of return.

Consolidation of SPEs In 1998, the IASB issued SIC 12 Consolidation—SpecialPurpose Entities. It required that an SPE should be consolidated when the substance of the relationship between an entity and the SPE indicates that the SPE is controlled by that entity. Canada and the United States did not adopt any special requirements related to an SPE until 2003, after the collapse of Enron, a large American public company. Enron Corp. provided what was undoubtedly the most famous example in recent memory of the improper use of SPEs. In the investigation of its bankruptcy, in which its creditors and employees lost an estimated $60 billion, the following questionable ing practices came to light: • Not consolidating SPEs and thereby keeping billions of dollars of debt off its balance sheet • Recognizing inflated profits on sales to the nonconsolidated SPEs • Recognizing revenue from sales of forward contracts that were, in effect, disguised loans • Inflating the fair value of investments • Not adequately disclosing related-party transactions

The equity investors of an SPE typically receive a guaranteed rate of return as a reward for ceding control to the SPE’s sponsor.


502


494

CHAPTER 9


In order to determine if consolidation is required, it is first necessary to determine if there is a primary beneficiary of the VIE.

Many SPEs are created to conduct activities that are part of the primary beneficiary’s ongoing activities.

The more risks taken on by the sponsor, the greater the returns received by the sponsor.

In the wake of the Enron collapse, the American and Canadian ing standards boards adopted ing standards for the consolidation of SPEs that were controlled by means other than voting interests. These standards have been commonly referred to as the “Enron standards.” Although Canada did not have any special requirements for consolidating SPEs at the time of Enron’s collapse, Canadian GAAP did require a Canadian company to prepare consolidated statements when one company controlled another entity regardless of the form of control, that is, voting control or control through other means. In the United States, consolidation was required when one entity owned the majority of the voting shares. Therefore, SPEs would typically not have been consolidated in the United States prior to 2004. In 2003, the CICA issued ing Guideline 15 (AcG-15): Consolidation of Variable Interest Entities. Each enterprise involved with a variable interest entity (VIE) must determine whether the financial provided by that enterprise makes it the primary beneficiary of the VIE’s activities. The primary beneficiary of the VIE is then required to include the assets, liabilities, and results of the VIE in its consolidated financial statements. In May 2011, the IASB issued IFRS 10, Consolidated Financial Statements. It replaced IAS 27 and SIC 12. It provides a broader and more encoming definition of control, as outlined in Chapter 3. IFRS 10 does not use the primary beneficiary or variable interest entity. It uses the more generic of parent and subsidiary. In this chapter, we will continue to use the primary beneficiary and variable interest entity, to distinguish between control achieved through contractual agreements, versus parent and subsidiary, for control achieved through voting shares. As we learned in Chapter 3, when assessing control, it is necessary to identify how returns from the entity’s activities are shared and how decisions, if any, are made about the activities that affect those returns. A reporting entity must consider all relevant facts and circumstances, including the items discussed below, in making the judgment as to whether it has control. Understanding the purpose and design of a structured entity helps us assess how the activities of that entity are directed and how returns are shared among its participants. For example, a reporting entity is likely to control a structured entity that has been created to undertake activities that are part of the reporting entity’s ongoing activities (e.g., the entity might have been created to hold legal title to an asset that the reporting entity uses in its own activities, providing a source of financing for the reporting entity). Generally, the more a reporting entity is exposed to the variability of returns from its involvement with an entity, the more power the reporting entity likely has to direct the activities of that entity which cause the returns to vary. A reporting entity likely has the power to direct the activities of a structured entity if it is exposed to a variability of returns that is potentially significant to the structured entity, and if the reporting entity’s exposure is more than that of any other party. Control of an entity that has a limited range of activities, such as an entity that manages an asset securitization, is determined on the basis of how that limited range of activities is directed and how the returns it receives from its involvement with the entity are shared. A reporting entity identifies what activities cause the returns to vary and assesses whether it has the power to direct those activities. A reporting entity’s ability to act when circumstances arise constitutes power if


CHAPTER 9


that ability relates to the activities that cause the reporting entity’s returns to vary. A reporting entity does not have to exercise its power in order to have power to direct the activities of a structured entity. For example, if the only assets of an entity are receivables, then managing any defaulting receivables is the only activity that causes the returns to vary and, thus, affects the returns of the structured entity’s participants. In this example, the party with the power to direct how defaulting receivables are managed and can affect its returns from its involvement through this power, controls that entity. A reporting entity can control a structured entity by means of related arrangements. For example, a reporting entity could establish a structured entity whose founding documents restrict its activities to purchasing fixed-rate receivables of the reporting entity for cash, collecting payments from those receivables, and ing those payments to the investors in the structured entity. Receivables that are overdue by more than a specified period are put back to the reporting entity. A reporting entity can have the power to direct the activities of a structured entity if it can change the restrictions or predetermined strategic operating and financing policies by which the structured entity operates. For example, a reporting entity can have the power to direct the activities of a structured entity by having the right to dissolve the entity or to change (or veto any changes to) the entity’s charter or by-laws. Or it can have the right to dissolve an entity by holding liquidation, redemption, or other rights. Since the primary beneficiary controls the resources of the VIE and will obtain the future returns from these resources, these resources meet the definition of an asset and should be included on the consolidated balance sheet of the primary beneficiary. Similarly, since the primary beneficiary usually bears the risk of absorbing the bulk of any expected loss of the VIE, it is effectively assuming responsibility for the liabilities of the VIE. Accordingly, these liabilities should be included on the consolidated balance sheet of the primary beneficiary. The fact that the primary beneficiary may own no voting shares whatsoever becomes inconsequential because such shares do not effectively allow the equity investors to exercise control. Thus, in assessing control, a careful examination of the VIE’s governing documents and the contractual arrangements among the parties involved is necessary, to determine who bears the majority of the risks and has the greatest participation in the potential upside in the value of the net assets of the VIE. The following scenario provides an example of a structured entity and its primary beneficiary.

Example Fleur Co. is a Quebec-based utility company. It is negotiating to acquire a power-generating plant from Rouyn Inc. for $105 million. If Fleur purchased the plant directly, it would finance the acquisition with a 5% bank loan for $100 million and $5 million in cash. Alternatively, it could set up a separate legal entity whose sole purpose would be to own the power-generating plant and lease it back to Fleur. Because the separate entity would isolate the plant from Fleur’s other risky assets and liabilities and provide specific collateral, the interest rate of the financing would be 4%, which would save the company $1 million per year. To obtain the lower interest rate, Fleur must guarantee the separate entity’s debt and must also maintain certain predefined debt-to-equity ratios on its own balance sheet. To take advantage of the lower interest rate, on January 1, Year 1, Fleur establishes Energy Co. for the sole purpose of owning and leasing the power

503

495

Control of an SPE is usually based on who directs the key activities of the SPE.

The definitions of assets and liabilities can be used to the inclusion of the SPE’s assets and liabilities on the consolidated balance sheet.


504


496

CHAPTER 9


plant to Fleur. An outside investor will provide $5 million in cash in exchange for 100% of the common shares of Energy Co. Fleur and Energy sign an agreement with the following : • Energy’s sole purpose is to purchase and own a power-generating plant. The purchase price will be financed by a $100 million loan and a $5 million equity investment. • Fleur has veto power on all key operating, investing, and financing decisions. The equity investors will earn a 10% return and bear very little risk.

• Fleur will lease the power plant for five years for annual payments of $4.5 million to cover the cost of the interest and provide a 10% return on the $5 million investment by the outside investor. • At the end of five years (or any extension), Fleur can renew the lease for a further five years, purchase the power plant for $105 million, or pay $5 million to buy the common shares from the outside investor. It appears that Energy is a structured entity controlled by Fleur for the following three reasons: 1. Energy was established to provide power solely to Fleur, and the power is essential to Fleur’s ongoing activities. 2. The outside investor will earn a 10% return and has very little risk. Fleur bears most of the risk of a change in utility rates and will receive any profit from the sale of power or the sale of the plant at the end of the lease term after the investor has received the guaranteed return. 3. The activities of Energy are restricted to owning and operating a powergenerating plant. Fleur has the power to direct these activities through its veto power on all key operating, investing, and financing decisions.

The primary beneficiary bears most of the risks and receives the residual returns.

Fleur is the primary beneficiary. It has control over Energy, receives most of the benefits, and is exposed to the major risks, even though it has invested no assets in Energy. Accordingly, Energy should be consolidated with Fleur. An implied value of the VIE has to be determined in order to perform the initial consolidation.

Initial Measurement Issues The financial reporting principles for consolidating VIEs are basically the same as for consolidating a parent and its subsidiary. The total consideration given is identified, and this determines the total implied value of the VIE. When the primary beneficiary gets control of the net assets of an existing business by purchasing these net assets from the existing owners, the total consideration given is the sum of the following: • Fair value of consideration paid by the primary beneficiary to the owners of the business (plus the fair value of any previously held interests) • Fair value of the NCI of the VIE When the primary beneficiary contributes its own assets to an existing business and gets control of the net assets of this business, these assets are measured at the carrying amount of these assets prior to the transfer. Since the primary beneficiary had control of these assets both before and after this transfer, there is no change in the benefits and risks associated with them. Accordingly, these assets are measured at carrying amount rather than fair value. Any profit recognized by the


505


CHAPTER 9


primary beneficiary will be eliminated when determining the carrying amount for the SPE. This treatment is consistent with the entries made in Chapters 6 and 7 to eliminate unrealized profits from intercompany transactions. Once the total implied value is determined, this value is allocated first to the identifiable assets received and the liabilities assumed in this business combination. In general, the identifiable assets and liabilities are measured at fair value. However, the assets contributed by the primary beneficiary are measured at carrying amount. In addition, IFRS 3 identifies some instances where the VIE’s assets and liabilities are not reported at fair value at the date of acquisition. If the implied value of consideration given is greater than the value attributed to the identifiable net assets, the difference is reported as goodwill when the VIE is a business or as a loss on purchase when the SPE is not a business. The definition of a business was discussed in Chapter 3. If the implied value of consideration given is less than the value attributed to the identifiable net assets received, then there is negative goodwill. All fair values used for NCI and assets and liabilities of the structured entity must be carefully reviewed to ensure that they are accurate. Once the values are confirmed, the excess of the value attributed to the net assets received over the implied value of the consideration given is reported as a gain on purchase if the VIE is a business. If the VIE is not a business, then the total consideration given is allocated to the identifiable assets on a proportionate basis such that there is no negative goodwill. The following example will illustrate the consolidation process for a VIE.

With a few exceptions, the initial consolidation records the assets and liabilities of a VIE at fair values.

The amounts of the implied value and the consideration received are compared to determine the amount of any goodwill or negative goodwill.

Example XYZ Co. contributes a patent to VAR Inc. on January 1, Year 3. VAR is a business and is deemed to be a VIE. XYZ is the primary beneficiary. The patent had a carrying amount of $1 million on XYZ’s separate-entity balance sheet and a fair value of $5 million. Var owned property, plant, and equipment with a carrying amount of $60 million and a fair value of $80 million. The balance sheet of VAR at the date of acquisition after XYZ’s investment is as follows (in millions): Carrying amount

Fair value

$ 5 60 $65

$15 80

40

40

5 20 $65

5 ??

Patent Property, plant, and equipment Total assets

Liabilities Owners’ equity XYZ NCI Total liabilities and equity

The allocations to be used in the consolidation of XYZ and VAR depend on the value assigned to NCI. We will demonstrate these valuation principles using the following fair values for NCI: Situation A B C

Fair value of NCI $40 37 44

497

In this example, the fair value of NCI is varied for illustrative purposes.


506


498

CHAPTER 9


Implied value of consideration given Carrying amount of amount contributed by XYZ Fair value of NCI in VAR Total implied value Value of VAR’s identifiable net assets received Carrying amount of amount invested by XYZ Fair value of VAR’s own assets Less: Fair value of VAR’s liabilities Total value allocated to net assets received Difference between consideration given and received Assigned on consolidation to Goodwill Gain on purchase Balance to assign

A

B

C

5 40 45

5 37 42

5 44 49

5 80 (40) 45 0

5 80 (40) 45 (3)

5 80 (40) 45 4

0

(3) 0

4 0

Note that the fair value assigned to the NCI is used to determine the total value of consideration given for VAR Inc. as a whole. This amount becomes the equivalent of the acquisition cost. In situation A, the total consideration given equals the sum of the values attributed to VAR’s identifiable assets and liabilities. In situation B, the consideration given is less than the sum of VAR’s net assets, resulting in a “negative goodwill” situation, which is ed for as prescribed in IFRS 3. In situation C, the consideration given is greater than the sum of the values attributed to VAR’s identifiable net assets and the difference is reflected as goodwill. The following journal entries summarize the values for VAR to be consolidated with XYZ under the three different scenarios:

If VAR meets the definition of a business, positive goodwill can be reported on the consolidated balance sheet.

Goodwill Patent Property, plant, and equipment Liabilities NCI Owners’ equity re: XYZ Gain on purchase

A

B

C

5 80

5 80

4 5 80

(40) (40) (5)

(40) (40) (37) (44) (5) (5) (3)

The credit to owners’ equity of $5 million will be eliminated against the debit balance for the investment in VAR on XYZ’s books when preparing the consolidated balance sheet. In subsequent years, the normal consolidation procedures are followed.

Consolidation Issues Subsequent to Initial Measurement After the initial measurement, consolidations of VIEs with their primary beneficiary should follow the same process as if the entity were consolidated based on voting interests. The implied acquisition differential must be amortized. All intercompany transactions must be eliminated. The income of the VIE must be allocated among the parties involved (i.e., equity holders and the primary beneficiary). For a VIE, contractual arrangements, as opposed to ownership percentages, typically specify the distribution of its income. Disclosure Requirements IFRS 12 requires an entity to disclose information that enables s of its consolidated financial statements to understand the nature of, and changes in, the risks associated with its interests in consolidated structured


CHAPTER 9


entities. In particular, an entity shall disclose the of any contractual arrangements that could require the parent or its subsidiaries to provide financial to a consolidated structured entity, including events or circumstances that could expose the reporting entity to a loss. Canadian Tire Corporation is a leading Canadian retailer with a Canadian Tire outlet within 15 minutes for 90% of Canadians. Canadian Tire consolidates a number of SPEs, which it controls. Relevant excerpts from Canadian Tire’s 2011 financial statements are presented in Exhibit 9.2.1

507

499

The primary beneficiary must disclose its basis of control and the nature and extent of risks resulting from its involvement with the SPE.

EXHIBIT 9.2 EXTRACTS (IN PART) FROM CANADIAN TIRE’S 2011 FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 3. Significant ing Policies The ing policies set out below have been applied consistently to all periods presented in these consolidated financial statements, and have been applied consistently throughout the Company.

Basis of consolidation These consolidated financial statements include the s of Canadian Tire Corporation, Limited and entities it controls. Control exists when Canadian Tire Corporation, Limited has the power, directly or indirectly, to govern the financial and operating policies of an entity/ arrangement so as to obtain benefit from its activities.

Special-purpose entities The Company has established a number of SPEs. The Company does not have direct or indirect shareholdings in these entities. An SPE is consolidated, if, based on the evaluation of the substance of its relationship with the Company, including consideration of the Company’s exposure to the SPE’s risks and rewards, the Company concludes that it controls the SPE. SPEs were established under that impose strict limitations on the decision-making powers of the SPEs’ management. As a result, in such instances, since the Company either receives the majority of the benefits related to the SPEs’ operations and net assets, the Company is exposed to risks related to the SPEs’ activities, and/or the Company obtains the majority of the residual or ownership risk related to the SPEs, these SPEs are controlled by the Company. See Note 44 for further discussion on the consolidation of SPEs.

41. Guarantees and Commitments The Company has provided the following significant guarantees to third parties:

Standby letters of credit and performance guarantees Franchise Trust, a legal entity sponsored by a third party bank, originates loans to Dealers for their purchase of inventory and fixed assets. While Franchise Trust is consolidated as part of these financial statements, the Company has arranged for the third party bank to provide standby letters of credit to Franchise Trust to the credit quality of the Dealer loan portfolio. The third party bank may also draw against the standby letters of credit to cover any shortfalls in certain related fees owing to it. In any case where a draw is made against the standby letters of credit, the Company has agreed to reimburse the third party bank issuing the standby letters of credit for the amount so drawn. In the unlikely event that all the standby letters of credit had been fully drawn simultaneously, the maximum payment by the Company under this reimbursement obligation would have been $137.2 million at December 31, 2011 (2010 – $179.4 million). The Company has not recorded any liability for these amounts, due to the credit quality of the Dealer loans and to the nature of the underlying collateral, represented by the inventory and fixed assets of the borrowing Dealers.

(continued)

Canadian Tire controls a number of SPEs even though it does not own any shares of these SPEs.


508


500

CHAPTER 9


EXHIBIT 9.2

(continued )

44. Transition to International Financial Reporting Standards D. Reconciliation of shareholders’ equity from previous GAAP to IFRS (viii) Consolidation Dealer loan program Franchise Trust, a legal entity sponsored by a third party bank, originates loans to Dealers for their purchase of inventory and fixed assets. The Company has arranged for several major Canadian banks to provide standby letters of credit to Franchise Trust to the credit quality of the loan portfolio. The Company was not required to consolidate any part of Franchise Trust under previous GAAP. Under IFRS,1 the Company is required to consolidate an entity/arrangement (or a portion thereof) it is considered to control based on the criteria set forth in IAS 27 and SIC 12. The Company has determined that it controls the portion (silo) of Franchise Trust that issues loans to Dealers under the Dealer loan program and accordingly, is required to consolidate the silo of Franchise Trust containing the Dealer loan program. Source: Reproduced with permission from Canadian Tire Corporation. http://corp.canadiantire.ca/EN/ Investors/FinancialReports/Annual%20Reports%20Library/CTC_AR_2011.pdf

Some examples of VIEs in Canada are described below. Air Canada uses SPEs for leasing aircraft and engines and for the fueling of aircraft.

1. Air Canada has aircraft and engine leasing transactions with a number of SPEs that are VIEs. As at December 31, 2011, Air Canada controlled leasing entities covering 35 aircraft. The company also participates in fuel facilities arrangements operated through fuel facility corporations along with other airlines to contract for fuel services at various major Canadian airports. The fuel facility corporations are entities incorporated under federal or provincial statutes in order to acquire, finance, and lease assets used in connection with the fuelling of aircraft and ground equipment. As at December 31, 2011, Air Canada controlled three of the fuel facility corporations in Canada. Air Canada’s involvement with five other fuel facility corporations was not consolidated because the company felt that its risk of loss was remote.

Empire consolidates many of its franchise stores, even though it does not own a majority interest in these stores.

2. Empire Company Limited, which owns 100% of Sobeys, consolidates many of its franchise stores because franchise agreements result in the company being deemed the primary beneficiary of the stores. The company also consolidates an independent entity that provides warehouse and distribution services for one of its distribution centres.

LO2 In a t arrangement, participants contribute resources to carry out a specific undertaking.

T ARRANGEMENTS A t arrangement is a contractual arrangement whereby two or more parties undertake an activity together and tly control that activity. t arrangements are established for a variety of purposes (e.g., as a way for parties to share costs and risks, or as a way to provide the parties with access to new technology or new markets) and can be established using different structures and legal forms. IFRS 11, t Arrangements, requires that parties to a t arrangement assess their rights and obligations to determine the type of t arrangement in which they are involved. A common example of a t arrangement is where one venturer


CHAPTER 9


provides the technical expertise, and the other provides marketing and/or financial expertise. t arrangements are often formed for expensive and risky projects. They are fairly common in the oil-and-gas exploration sector and in large real estate developments. Also, a Canadian company will often form a t arrangement with a foreign company or the government of a foreign country as a means of expanding into international markets. For example, Bombardier produces trains for China by operating under a t agreement with a Chinese car manufacturer. t arrangements are classified into two types: t operations and t ventures. The type of t arrangement an entity is a party to depends on the rights and obligations that arise from the arrangement. An entity assesses its rights and obligations by considering the structure and legal form of the arrangement, the contractual agreed to by the parties to the arrangement, and, when relevant, other facts and circumstances. A t arrangement that is not structured through a separate vehicle is a t operation. A t arrangement in which the assets and liabilities relating to the arrangement are held in a separate vehicle can be either a t venture or a t operation. A t operation is a t arrangement whereby the parties that have t control of the arrangement (i.e., t operators) have rights to the assets, and obligations for the liabilities, relating to the arrangement. Each operator contributes the use of assets or resources to the activity. An example would be a case in which one venturer manufactures part of a product, a second venturer completes the manufacturing process, and a third venturer handles the marketing of the product. Revenue and expenses are shared in accordance with the t arrangement agreement. Some t operations involve the establishment of a corporation, partnership, or other entity, or a financial structure that is separate from the venturers themselves. An example of this type of arrangement is an oil pipeline. The venturers may contribute assets to a separate legal entity for the construction of the pipeline. Once the pipeline is completed, it is tly owned and used by the venturers, who share the costs in accordance with an agreement. A t venture is a arrangement whereby the parties that have t control of the arrangement (i.e., t venturers) have rights to the net assets of the arrangement. An entity is a party to a t venture if it has rights only to a share of the outcome generated by a separate entity, which has its own assets and liabilities. We will illustrate the ing for both types of t arrangements. The ing principles involved with reporting a t arrangement are contained in IFRS 11. It deals with the financial reporting of an interest in a t arrangement. IFRS 11 presents the following definitions relevant to our discussions: t control is the contractually agreed sharing of control of an arrangement, which exists only when decisions about the relevant activities require the unanimous consent of the parties sharing control. t operator is a party to a t operation that has t control of that t operation. t venturer is a party to a t venture that has t control of that t venture.

A distinctive feature of these descriptions is the concept of t control, which must be present for a t arrangement to exist. t control is established by an agreement between the parties (usually in writing) whereby no one party can

509

501

In many t operations, the venturers contribute the use of assets but retain title to the assets.

In t ventures, the venturers contribute assets to a separate legal entity, which has title to the assets.


510


502

CHAPTER 9

t control is the key feature in a t arrangement. This means that no one venturer can unilaterally control the venture regardless of the size of its equity contribution.


unilaterally control the t arrangement regardless of the number of assets it contributes. For example, a single entity (Company L) could own more than 50% of the voting shares of Company M. This would normally indicate that Company M is a subsidiary; however, if there was an agreement establishing t control, Company M would be a t arrangement and not a subsidiary, and Company L would be a t operator or venturer and not a parent.

ing for t Operations An operator’s interest in a t operation is reported in a fashion similar to activities carried out by any entity. It applies relevant IFRSs as it recognizes the following: (a) The assets it controls and the liabilities it incurs (b) The expenses it incurs (c) Its share of the revenue and expenses from the sale of goods or services by the t arrangement

Example 1 APP Inc., BIB Ltd., and COT Inc. sign an agreement to produce fridges

APP reports the assets contributed to the t operations on its own books until the final product is sold to the end customer.

for sale to wholesalers. APP will produce the motors and condensers for use in the fridges. BIB will receive the motors and condensers from APP, purchase all other parts, and assemble the fridges. COT will market, sell, and distribute the fridges to wholesalers. The three companies must agree to all major operating and financing decisions. The proceeds from sale of the fridges will be distributed 25% to APP, 45% to BIB, and 30% to COT. APP will for the assets, liabilities, and expenses involved with producing the motors and condensers for the t operations in the same manner as it would if it were producing these items for its own operations. The cost of the motors and condensers would be included in inventory. When the inventory is shipped to BIB, it is similar to inventory on consignment. No revenue is recognized until the inventory is eventually sold by COT. At that time, APP would recognize its 25% share of the sales revenue related to the sale of the fridges. In this example, each of the three companies used their own assets to fulfill their contribution to the t arrangement. They shared in the revenues only from the sale of the fridges. When the venturers tly own certain assets, the ing becomes a bit more complicated. In addition to ing for their own assets and liabilities used in the t operation, they would have to for their share of the costs and expenses involved with the tly owned assets. This is a form of proportionate consolidation but on a very limited basis.

Example 2 DOC Inc., EGG Ltd., and FRY Inc. sign an agreement to collectively purchase an oil pipeline and to hire a company to manage and operate the pipeline on their behalf. The costs involved in running the pipeline and the revenue earned from the pipeline are shared by the three parties based on their ownership percentage. All major operating and financing decisions related to the pipeline must be agreed to by the three companies. The cost of purchasing the pipeline was $10,000,000. The pipeline has an estimated 20-year useful life with no residual value. The management fee for operating the pipeline for Year 1 was $2,000,000. Revenue earned from the pipeline in Year 1 was $3,300,000. DOC invested $3,000,000 for a 30% interest.


511


CHAPTER 9


DOC would prepare the following entries for Year 1 to capture its share of the activities related to the pipeline: Pipeline Cash Pipeline operating expenses (30% 3 2,000,000) Cash Cash (30% 3 3,300,000) Revenue from pipeline Amortization expense—pipeline (3,000,000/20 years) Accumulated amortization—pipeline

3,000,000 3,000,000

503

DOC reports its proportionate share of the assets, liabilities, revenues, and expenses of the t operation.

600,000 600,000 990,000 990,000 150,000 150,000

Example 3 Instead of contributing cash for a 30% interest in the pipeline, DOC contributed steel pipes to be used by the company constructing the pipeline. DOC had manufactured the pipes at a cost of $2,200,000. All parties to the contract agreed that the fair value of these pipes was $3,000,000 and the fair value of the pipeline once it was completed was $10,000,000. All other facts are the same as in Example 2. IFRS 11 indicates the following: When an entity enters into a transaction with a t operation in which it is a t operator, such as a sale or contribution of assets, it is conducting the transaction with the other parties to the t operation and, as such, the t operator shall recognize gains and losses resulting from such a transaction only to the extent of the other parties’ interests in the t operation. When such transactions provide evidence of a reduction in the net realizable value of the assets to be sold or contributed to the t operation, or of an impairment loss of those assets, those losses shall be recognized fully by the t operator.

A portion of the gain can be recognized on the contribution of assets to a t operation.

In our illustration, the other venturers have a 70% interest in the t operation. DOC should recognize a gain of $560,000 (70% 3 [3,000,000 2 2,200,000]). The following journal entries would be recorded:

A gain can be recognized when the significant risks and rewards have been transferred.

Pipeline Steel pipes Gain on steel pipes (70% of gain) Unrealized gain — contra (30% of gain) Amortization expense (3,000,000/20) Accumulated amortization Unrealized gain — contra (240,000/20) Amortization expense

3,000,000 2,200,000 560,000 240,000 150,000 150,000 12,000 12,000

The unrealized gain is a contra to the pipeline ; it should not be reported as a deferred gain on the liability side of the balance sheet. When DOC prepares a balance sheet, the unrealized gain will be offset against the pipeline such that the pipeline’s net cost is $2,760,000 ($3,000,000 2 $240,000). As the net cost of the pipeline is being amortized, the unrealized gain is also being amortized. In effect, the unrealized gain is being brought into income over the life of the pipeline. As the pipeline is being used to generate revenue on transactions with outsiders, the venturer’s own share of the unrealized gain is being recognized in income. This is similar to what happened in Chapter 7, when the unrealized profits from an intercompany sale of a depreciable asset were realized over the life of the depreciable asset.

The t operator’s own interest in the gain is recognized over the life of the asset.


512


504

CHAPTER 9


ing for an Interest in a t Venture When parties to an agreement to establish or purchase a corporation, partnership, or other entity, or a financial structure that is separate from the venturers themselves, and this entity is tly controlled by two or more venturers, this entity is called a t venture. The reporting of investments in t ventures has undergone considerable change in Canada in recent years. The following table indicates the current status and effective usage dates for different reporting methods:

Proportionate consolidation was required for reporting t ventures in Canada prior to 2011.

The equity method is required for reporting t ventures under IFRS 11.

Method

Status

Proportionate consolidation

GAAP in Canada prior to adoption of IFRSs in 2011

Proportionate consolidation or equity method

GAAP under IFRSs prior to adoption of IFRS 11 in 2013

Equity method

GAAP under IFRSs upon adoption of IFRS 11 in 2013

Equity method

U.S. GAAP both in the past and going forward

Proportionate consolidation is a method of ing whereby a venturer’s share of each of the assets, liabilities, income, and expenses of a tly controlled entity is combined line by line with similar items in the venturer’s financial statements or reported as separate line items in the venturer’s financial statements. Proportionate consolidation is an application of the proprietary theory, which was illustrated in Chapter 4. Under IFRS 11, the venturer must use the equity method to report its investment in a t venture. The equity method is described in IAS 28. Under this method, the venturer recognizes its share of the income earned by the t venture through one line on the income statement, income from t venture, and through one line on the balance sheet, investment . In addition, the venturer needs to make adjustments through these same s for its share of the following items, which are illustrated below: • Allocation and amortization of acquisition differentials • Unrealized profits from intercompany transactions • Contributions to the t venture

Acquisition Differentials The formation of a t venture by its venturers cannot result in acquisition differentials in the investment s of the venturers. However, if a venturer purchased an interest in an existing entity, it could pay an amount different from its interest in the carrying amount of the t venture’s net assets, resulting in an acquisition differential. This acquisition differential would be allocated and amortized in the same manner illustrated previously for parent– subsidiary affiliations.

Intercompany Transactions You will recall from our discussions in past chapters that intercompany profits in assets are fully eliminated from the consolidated statements of a parent and its subsidiaries. If the subsidiary was the selling company, 100% of the profit, net of income tax, is eliminated and allocated to both the


513


CHAPTER 9


NCI and the controlling interest. If the parent was the selling company, the entire net-of-tax profit is eliminated and allocated to the shareholders of the parent. For intercompany transactions between a venturer and the t venture, only the venturer’s share of the unrealized profit is eliminated. The other venturers’ share of the profit from the intercompany transaction is considered realized if the other venturers are not related to each other. Since none of the venturers can individually control the entity, any transaction carried out by the t venture should be viewed as an arm’slength transaction to the extent of the other venturers’ interest in the t venture. The venturer’s own interest in the profit from the intercompany transaction is not realized because the venturer cannot make a profit by selling to or buying from itself. The same treatment is prescribed for the sale of assets at a loss except in situations where the transaction provides evidence of a reduction in the net realizable value of the asset, in which case the full amount of the loss is immediately recognized. Example 4 below illustrates the use of the equity method to report an interest in a t venture. Appendix 9A repeats Example 4 using proportionate consolidation rather than the equity method. The method of presentation is quite different. However, the net income attributable to and the retained earnings of the investor in the t venture are the same under both methods.

505

For a t venture, the venturer’s share of any intercompany asset profits is eliminated regardless of whether the sale was upstream or downstream.

Example 4 Explor Ltd., a Calgary-based oil exploration company, is a t venture in which A Company has a 45% ownership interest. A Company, an original founder of Explor, uses the equity method to for its investment but has made no entries to its investment for Year 4. The following are the financial statements of the two companies on December 31, Year 4: INCOME STATEMENTS—Year 4 Sales Cost of sales Miscellaneous expenses

Income before taxes Income tax expense Net income

A Company

Explor

$900,000 500,000 100,000 600,000 300,000 120,000 $180,000

$370,000 180,000 40,000 220,000 150,000 60,000 $ 90,000

BALANCE SHEETS—December 31, Year 4 A Company

Explor

Miscellaneous assets Inventory Investment in Explor

$654,500 110,000 85,500 $850,000

$277,000 90,000 — $367,000


$130,000 300,000 420,000 $850,000

$ 87,000 100,000 180,000 $367,000

During Year 4, A Company sold merchandise totalling $110,000 to Explor and recorded a gross profit of 30% on these sales. On December 31, Year 4, the inventory of Explor contained items purchased from A Company for $22,000, and Explor had a payable of $5,000 to A Company on this date.

These statements are the financial statements of a venturer and a t venture.


514


506

CHAPTER 9


The unrealized after-tax profit to be eliminated at the end of Year 4 is $1,782, calculated as follows: Only the venturer’s own 45% interest of the gain is considered to be unrealized.

Intercompany profits in inventory: Total at end of year (22,000 3 30%) Before-tax profit considered realized—55% Unrealized before-tax profit—45% Tax on profit (40%) After-tax unrealized profit

$6,600 3,630 2,970 1,188 $1,782

The following entries would be made by Company A in Year 4 under the equity method:

Only the venturer’s share of profits is eliminated.

Invest in Explor (45% 3 90,000) Income from t venture (45% 3 90,000) Income from t venture Invest in Explor To eliminate unrealized profits

40,500 40,500 1,782 1,782

These entries will increase Company A’s net income to $218,718, calculated as follows: Income of A Company Less after-tax unrealized inventory profit Adjusted net income Income of Explor A’s ownership interest Net income

$180,000 1,782 178,218 $90,000 45%

40,500 $218,718

Since A Company used the equity method prior to this year, no adjustments are necessary for its retained earnings at the beginning of the year.

Contributions to the t Venture Suppose that on the date of formation of a t venture, instead of contributing cash, a venturer contributes non-monetary assets and receives an interest in the t venture and that the assets contributed have a fair value that is greater than their carrying amount in the records of the venturer. Would it be appropriate for the venturer to record a gain from investing these non-monetary assets in the t venture? If so, how much, and when should it be recognized? The requirements set out in IFRS 11 regarding this matter are as follows: 1. The investment should be recorded at the fair value of the non-monetary assets transferred to the t venture. 2. Only the gain represented by interests of the other nonrelated venturers should be recognized on the date of the contribution and only if the transaction has commercial substance as per IAS 16. This same principle was applied in Example 3 on a transfer of an asset to a t operation. If the transaction does not have commercial substance, then the entire gain is considered to be unrealized. It shall be ed for in the same manner as the venturer’s share of the gain, which is described in the next paragraph. 3. The portion of the gain represented by the venturer’s own interest should be unrealized until the asset has been sold to unrelated outsiders by the t


515


CHAPTER 9


venture. Alternatively, the unrealized gain can be recognized over the life of the asset if the asset is being used to generate a positive gross profit for the t venture. In effect, the product or service being sold by the t venture to an outsider is allowing the venturer to recognize a portion of the unrealized gain. It is similar to selling a portion of the asset to outsiders. The unrealized gains are contra s to the investment in t venture . They will be offset in the investment on the balance sheet.

507

The unrealized gain is recognized as the asset is used to generate a profit on transactions with outsiders.

4. If a loss results from the recording of the investment, the portion of the loss represented by the interest of the other unrelated venturers is recognized immediately into income. When it is evident that the asset contributed to the t venture is impaired, the entire loss is immediately recognized. 5. When the venturer transfers assets to the t venture and receives assets in addition to an interest in the t venture, the assets received can be considered the proceeds from the partial sale of the assets to the other unrelated venturers, provided that the assets came from the investment of the other venturers or from the other venturers’ share of t venture borrowings.

When assets are indirectly received from the other venturers, the assets are considered to be proceeds of a partial sale to the other venturers.

The following examples will illustrate these concepts.

Example 5 A Co. and B Inc. formed JV Ltd. on January 1, Year 1. A Co. invested equipment with a carrying amount of $200,000 and a fair value of $700,000 for a 40% interest in JV Ltd., while B Inc. contributed equipment, which was similar to the equipment contributed by A Co., with a total fair value of $1,050,000, for a 60% interest in JV Ltd. We will concern ourselves only with the recording by A Co. of its 40% interest in JV Ltd., and we will assume that the equipment has an estimated useful life of 10 years. On December 31, Year 1, JV Ltd. reported a net income of $204,000. We will assume that the transaction does not have commercial substance in this situation because A Co. owned a similar portion of the same type of equipment both before and after the contribution to the t venture. The gains are calculated as follows: Fair value of equipment transferred to JV Ltd. Carrying amount of equipment on A Co.’s books Unrealized gain on transfer to JV Ltd.

$700,000 200,000 $500,000

A Co.’s journal entry to record the initial investment on January 1, Year 1, is as follows: Investment in JV Ltd. Equipment Unrealized gain—contra

700,000 200,000 500,000

Using the equity method of ing, A Co. will record its 40% share of the yearly net incomes or losses reported by JV Ltd.; in addition, it will recognize the unrealized gains in income over the life of the equipment. The December 31, Year 1, entries are as follows: Investment in JV Ltd. Equity earnings from JV Ltd. (40% 3 204,000) Unrealized gain2contra (500,000 / 10) Gain on transfer of equipment to JV Ltd.

81,600 81,600 50,000 50,000

A Co.’s $500,000 gain from investing equipment is unrealized.


516


508

CHAPTER 9


This method of recognizing the gain from investing will be repeated over the next nine years, unless JV Ltd. sells this equipment before that period expires. If it does, A Co. will immediately take the balance in the unrealized gains into income.

Example 6 The facts from this example are identical in all respects to those from Example 5, except that we assume that B Co. contributes technology (rather than equipment) with a fair value of $1,050,000. We will assume that the transaction does have commercial substance in this situation because A Co. owned equipment before its contribution to the t venture but indirectly owned a portion of equipment and technology after the contribution. Of the $500,000 difference between the fair value and carrying amount of the equipment, the percentage ownership of the other venturers, 60%, can be recognized as a gain. A Co.’s 40% portion is an unrealized gain and is presented as a contra to the investment . A Co.’s journal entry to record the initial investment on January 1, Year 1, is as follows: A Co. recognizes a gain of $300,000, which is the portion of the gain deemed sold to outsiders.

Investment in JV Ltd. Equipment Gain on sale of equipment Unrealized gain—contra

700,000 200,000 300,000 200,000

The December 31, Year 1, entries are as follows:

A portion of the unrealized gain is taken into income each year.

Investment in JV Ltd. Equity earnings from JV Ltd. (40% 3 204,000)

81,600

Unrealized gain—contra (200,000/10) Gain on transfer of equipment to JV Ltd.

20,000

81,600 20,000

This method of recognizing the gain from investing will be repeated over the next nine years, unless JV Ltd. sells this equipment before that period expires. If it does, A Co. will immediately take the balance in the unrealized gains into income.

Example 7 The facts from this example are identical in all respects to those from Example 5, except that we assume that A Co. receives a 40% interest in JV Ltd., plus $130,000 in cash in return for investing equipment with a fair value of $700,000, while B Inc. contributed equipment with a fair value of $725,000 plus cash of $130,000, for a total contribution of $855,000. The original gain on the transfer ($500,000) is the same as in Example 5. However, because the $130,000 in cash received by A Co. came entirely from the cash invested by B Inc., it is considered to be the sale proceeds of the portion of the equipment deemed to have been sold. In other words, A Co. is considered to have sold a portion of the equipment to B Inc. (through the t venture) and will immediately record a gain from selling, computed as follows: A gain is recognized for the portion (130 4 700) of the equipment deemed to be sold.

Sale proceeds Carrying amount of equipment sold (130 4 700 3 200,000) Immediate gain from selling equipment to B Inc.

$130,000 37,143 $ 92,857


CHAPTER 9


517

509

A Co.’s January 1, Year 1, journal entry to record the investment of equipment and the receipt of cash would be as follows: Cash Investment in JV Ltd. Equipment Gain on transfer of equipment to JV Ltd. Unrealized gain2contra

130,000 570,000 200,000 92,857 407,143

The December 31, Year 1, entries are as follows: Investment in JV Ltd. Equity earnings from JV Ltd. (40% 3 204,000)

81,600

Unrealized gain2contra (407,143/10) Gain on transfer of equipment to JV Ltd.

40,714

81,600 40,714

Assuming a December 31 year-end, the $133,571 (92,857 1 40,714) gain on transfer of equipment to JV Ltd. will appear in A Co’s Year 1 income statement. The unamortized balance of the A’s share of the unrealized gain of $366,429 (407,143 2 40,714) will be offset against the investment .

Example 8 In this last example, we will increase the amount of cash that A Co. received when it invested equipment for a 40% interest in JV Ltd. Let us assume that the cash received was $150,000 instead of the $130,000 that we used in Example 7. Because B Inc. invested only $130,000 cash in the t venture, the additional $20,000 was borrowed by JV Ltd. In this situation, the $150,000 cash received is considered to be partly sale proceeds and partly a return of equity to A Co. The allocation of the cash between sale proceeds and return of equity is made as follows: Sale proceeds: From B Inc.’s investment in JV Ltd. From borrowings of JV Ltd. B Inc.’s proportion Return of equity to A Co.: A Co.’s proportion of JV borrowings Total cash received

$130,000 20,000 60%

40%

12,000 142,000 8,000 $150,000

When some of the cash received by A Co. comes from t venture borrowings, only B Co.’s share of the cash borrowed is considered proceeds from the sale of equipment.

The gain from selling is computed as follows: Sale proceeds Carrying amount of assets sold (142/700 3 200,000) Immediate gain from selling equipment to B Inc.

$142,000 40,571 $101,429

A Co.’s January 1, Year 1, journal entry would be as follows: Cash Investment in JV Ltd. Equipment Gain from transfer of equipment to JV Ltd. Unrealized gain—contra

150,000 550,000 200,000 101,429 398,571

The realized gain is based on the portion of the equipment deemed to be sold to the other venturers.


518


510

CHAPTER 9


On December 31, Year 1, A Co.’s journal entries would be as follows: Investment in JV Ltd. Equity earnings from JV Ltd. (40% 3 204,000) Unrealized gain—contra Gain from transfer of equipment to JV Ltd. (398,571 4 10 years)

81,600 81,600 39,857 39,857

In the preceding examples, A Co. used the equity method to report its interest in the t venture. If A Co. had used proportionate consolidation, the “unrealized gain—contra ” becomes a contra to the assets originally contributed to the t venture. It will be deducted from the venturer’s share of the related assets. These assets on the proportionately consolidated balance sheet will be reported at an amount equal to the venturer’s share of what would remain of the carrying amount of the assets had they not been contributed to the t venture. In effect, the contra brings these assets back to the historical cost amounts on the consolidated balance sheet.

Disclosure Requirements IFRS 12 requires an entity to disclose information that enables s of its financial statements to evaluate the following: (a) The nature, extent, and financial effects of its interests in t arrangements, including the nature and effects of its contractual relationship with the other investors with t control of t arrangements (b) The nature of, and changes in, the risks associated with its interests in t ventures. To meet these objectives, the more substantial items required to be disclosed are as follows: An entity must disclose the nature and extent of its operations conducted through t arrangements.

• The nature of the entity’s relationship with the t arrangement and and the proportion of ownership interest held. • The venturer’s interest in each of current assets, non-current assets, current liabilities, non-current liabilities, revenues, and profit or loss from t ventures. • The nature and extent of any significant restrictions on the ability of the t ventures to transfer funds to the venture. Exhibit 9.3 is an extract from TransAlta Corporation’s 2011 consolidated financial statements. It provides an example of disclosure for t arrangements. Since IFRS 12 was not effective until 2013, TransAlta was not yet using IFRS 12 in 2011. As such, the note disclosure in Exhibit 9.3 did not comply with all of the requirements of IFRS 12. In particular, the note did not disclose the nature of the entity’s relationship with the t arrangement, the proportion of ownership interest held, or the interests in each of the t ventures. TransAlta is Canada’s largest publicly traded power generator and marketer of electricity and renewable energy.

Differentiate between venturers who have t control and investors who do not have t control.

Investor in t Arrangement An investor in a t arrangement is a party to a t arrangement and does not have t control over that t arrangement. For example, a t venture could have some owners who have t control over the key decisions and other investors who are ive investors and do not participate in the key decisions for the t venture. The investor receives a return on investment without being actively involved in the operating and financing decisions of the t arrangement. The investor must for the investment in accordance with IAS 39, or by using the equity method if it has significant influence in the t arrangement.


519


CHAPTER 9


511

EXHIBIT 9.3 EXTRACTS IN PART FROM TRANSALTA’S 2011 FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2. ing Policies W. t Ventures A t venture is a contractual arrangement that establishes the by which two or more parties agree to undertake and tly control an economic activity. TransAlta’s t ventures are generally classified as two types: tly controlled assets and tly controlled entities. A tly controlled asset arises when the t venturers have t control or t ownership of one or more assets contributed to, or acquired for and dedicated to, the purpose of the t venture. Generally, each party takes a share of the output from the asset and each bears an agreed upon share of the costs incurred in respect of the t venture. The Corporation reports its interests in tly controlled assets in its consolidated financial statements using the proportionate consolidation method by recognizing its share of the assets, liabilities, revenues, and expenses in respect of its interest in the t venture. In tly controlled entities, the venturers do not have rights to individual assets or obligations of the venture. Rather, each venturer is entitled to a share of the net earnings of the tly controlled entity. The Corporation reports its interests in tly controlled entities using the equity method. Under the equity method, the investment in the tly controlled entity is initially recognized at cost and the carrying amount is increased or decreased to recognize the Corporation’s share of the tly controlled entity’s net earnings after the date of acquisition. The Corporation’s share of net earnings resulting from transactions between the Corporation and the tly controlled entities are eliminated based on the Corporation’s ownership interest. Distributions received from the tly controlled entities reduce the carrying amount of the investment. Any excess of the cost of an acquisition less the fair value of the recognized identifiable assets, liabilities, and contingent liabilities of an acquired tly controlled entity is recognized as goodwill and is included in the carrying amount of the investment and is assessed for impairment as part of the investment. Investments in tly controlled entities are evaluated for impairment at each statement of financial position date by first assessing whether there is objective evidence that the investment is impaired. Objective evidence could include, for example, such factors as significant financial difficulty of the investee, or information about significant changes with an adverse effect that have taken place in the technological, market, economic, or legal environment in which the investee operates, which may indicate that the cost of the investment may not be recovered. If such objective evidence is present, an impairment loss is recognized if the investment’s recoverable amount is less than its carrying amount. The investment’s recoverable amount is determined as the higher of value in use and fair value less costs to sell.

7. Investments The Corporation’s investment in tly controlled entities, ed for using the equity method, consists of its investments in CE Gen and Wailuku. The change in investments is as follows: Balance, Jan. 1, 2010 Equity income Distributions received Change in foreign exchange rates Balance, Dec. 31, 2010 Equity income Distributions received Change in foreign exchange rates Balance, Dec. 31, 2011

202 7 (9)    (10) 190 14 (15) 4 193

(continued)

TransAlta uses the proportionate consolidation method to for its investments in tly controlled assets.

TransAlta uses the equity method to for its investments in tly controlled entities.


520


512

CHAPTER 9


EXHIBIT 9.3 TransAlta disclosed the amount of revenues, expenses, assets and liabilities relating to its interests in tly controlled entities.

(continued )

Summarized information on the results of operations and financial position relating to the Corporation’s pro-rata interests in its tly controlled entities is as follows:

Year ended Dec. 31

2011

2010

Results of operations: Revenues Expenses Proportionate share of net earnings

133 (119) 14

136 (129) 7

As at

Dec. 31, 2011 Dec. 31, 2010

Financial position: Current assets Long-term assets Current liabilities Long-term liabilities Non-controlling interests Proportionate share of net assets

42 423 (29) (229) (14) 193

Jan. 1, 2010

42 437 (28) (246) (15) 190

48 486 (36) (280) (16) 202

Source: Reproduced with permission from TransAlta. http://www.transalta.com/investor-centre

See Self-Study Problem 1 for a comprehensive problem involving t ventures. It includes most of the issues we have covered in this chapter pertaining to t ventures. LO3

DEFERRED INCOME TAXES AND BUSINESS COMBINATIONS Up to this point, we have ignored the income tax implications associated with business combinations. Corporate tax law in this area is quite complex and can be fully understood only by readers who have been exposed to the topic through indepth tax courses. There is always the danger that essential ing concepts associated with business combinations and consolidated financial statements could be overshadowed if an attempt is made to combine basic ing issues with complex tax allocation procedures. Attentive readers will now have achieved a reasonable understanding of the broad ing concepts behind consolidated statements. To complete our coverage of this financial reporting process, we now turn our attention to the additional effects that income tax allocation can have on the ing for a business combination. But before we do this, we provide the following useful background material.

Deferred Income Tax Concepts A temporary difference occurs when the carrying amount of an asset or a liability does not equal its tax base.

IAS 12: Income Taxes uses the balance sheet (or liability) approach. This approach requires that the differences between the carrying amount of an asset or a liability in the balance sheet and its tax base be ed for. These differences are called temporary differences. The tax base of an asset is the amount that will be deductible for tax purposes against any taxable economic benefits that will flow to an entity when it recovers the carrying amount of the asset. If those economic benefits will not be taxable, the tax base of the asset is equal to its carrying amount. The tax base of a liability is its carrying amount, less any amount that will be deductible


521


CHAPTER 9


for tax purposes in respect of that liability in future periods. In the case of revenue received in advance, the tax base of the resulting liability is its carrying amount, less any amount of the revenue that will not be taxable in future periods. Under IAS 12, there are two basic types of temporary differences: deductible and taxable. A deductible temporary difference is one that can be deducted in determining taxable income in the future when the asset or liability is recovered or settled for its carrying amount. These differences exist when (a) the carrying amount of an asset is less than its tax base, or (b) an amount related to a liability can be deducted for tax purposes. ing for these differences results in deferred income tax assets. A taxable temporary difference is one that will result in future taxable amounts when the carrying amount of the asset or the liability is recovered or settled. Such differences, which result in deferred income tax liabilities, occur mainly when the carrying amount of an asset is greater than its tax base. A few examples will illustrate some of these concepts. We assume a 40% tax rate in each case.

513

When the carrying amount of an asset is greater than its tax base, the result is a deferred tax liability.

Example 1 A company has an payable of $3,000 on its balance sheet at the end of Year 1 for unpaid expenses that were deducted for tax purposes during Year 1. The carrying amount is $3,000. The tax base of the liability is as follows: Carrying amount Less: Amount deductible for tax in future periods Tax base

$3,000 –0– $3,000

Because the carrying amount and the tax base are equal, a temporary difference does not exist.

Example 2 At the end of Year 1, a company has an receivable of $1,000 from sales made during the year. This receivable is expected to be collected through a series of instalments during Years 2 and 3. For tax purposes, the revenue is taxable in the year of collection. The carrying amount at the end of Year 1 is $1,000, while the tax base is zero. This creates a taxable temporary difference of $1,000, requiring a deferred tax liability of $400.

Example 3 At the end of Year 1, a company has a warranty liability of $1,500. Warranty costs are deductible for tax purposes only when they have been paid. The carrying amount is $1,500, while the tax base is zero. We have a deductible temporary difference of $1,500, requiring a deferred tax asset of $600. Example 4 An asset is purchased at a cost of $2,000. For financial statement purposes, it will be depreciated using the straight-line method over a five-year life, with no estimated residual value. For tax purposes, capital cost allowance (CCA) will be taken at a 30% rate, subject to the half-year rule in the first year. The following illustrates the yearly depreciation and CCA over the first three years: Year 1 cost Year 1: Depreciation CCA

Carrying amount

Tax base

$2,000 400 —

$2,000 — 300

(continued)

A deductible temporary difference gives rise to a deferred tax asset.


522


514

CHAPTER 9

When the cumulative amount of CCA taken exceeds cumulative book depreciation, the result is a deferred tax liability.


Balance, end of Year 1 Year 2: Depreciation CCA Balance, end of Year 2 Year 3: Depreciation CCA Balance, end of Year 3

Carrying amount 1,600 400 — 1,200 400 — $ 800

Tax base 1,700 — 510 1,190 — 357 $ 833

Note that at the end of Year 1, there is a deductible temporary difference of $100, requiring a deferred tax asset of $40. At the end of Year 2, we have a taxable temporary difference of $10, requiring a deferred tax liability of $4. By the end of Year 3, we are back to a deductible temporary difference of $33, requiring a deferred tax asset of approximately $13. Note also that while the carrying amount of this asset becomes zero at the end of Year 5, it will have a positive tax base for an infinite number of future years. In other words, the reversing that inevitably must occur is often a very long time happening. These examples have focused on some of the basics behind the liabilility method and will be useful in understanding some of the business combination illustrations that follow. However, before we examine the deferred income tax effects associated with a business combination, there is one other interesting provision of IAS 12 that needs to be examined.

The Acquisition of an Asset at a Price Different from the Tax Base (other than in a business combination) Because the liability method requires the recording of

Deferred taxes are not recorded when acquiring a single asset for which there is a temporary difference.

a deferred tax asset or liability whenever the carrying amount of an asset or liability differs from its tax base, a unique situation exists when a single asset is purchased and its tax base is different from its cost on the date that it was acquired. IAS 12 states that when an asset is acquired other than in a business combination, and the transaction does not affect ing profit or taxable profit, the entity does not recognize any deferred tax liability or asset either on initial recognition or subsequently. For example, an entity purchases an asset for $1,000 with an estimated useful life of five years and an estimated residual value of zero. However, the tax base is zero because depreciation of the asset is not deductible for tax purposes. On disposal, any capital gain would not be taxable and any capital loss would not be deductible. Although there is a taxable temporary difference on the date the asset was acquired, IAS 12 states that a deferred tax liability should not be recognized in this situation. If the liability were recorded, the carrying amount of the asset would have to be increased by this amount. Then, the reported amount would be different than the amount paid, which may be confusing or less transparent to the s of the financial statements.

Business Combination Illustrations IAS 12 not only requires application of the liabilility method, but it also requires that deferred income taxes associated with the acquisition differential be ed for. We use the following simple illustrations to convey the basic concepts involved and the reasoning behind them.


523


CHAPTER 9


515

Example Sub Co. has a single productive asset. The balance sheet of this company is shown below: SUB CO.—BALANCE SHEET at December 31, Year 3 Asset Deferred tax asset

$800 12 $812


$300 512 $812

There is a deferred tax asset on the separate-entity books of the subsidiary.

The tax base of the single asset and the liabilities is as follows: Asset Liabilities Net

$830 300 $530

Using a 40% tax rate, Sub Co. has correctly applied the provisions of IAS 12 by setting up in its separate-entity statements a deferred tax asset of $12 for the deductible temporary difference of $30. On January 1, Year 4, Parent Inc. purchased 100% of Sub Co. for $1,000 cash. Parent determines that the fair value of Sub’s single asset is $950 and that the fair value of its liabilities is $300. The calculation of the acquisition differential is made in the following manner: Cost of 100% of Sub Co. Book value of net assets of Sub Co. Acquisition differential Allocated: Asset (950 2 800) Deferred income tax asset (liability) (see calculation below) Balance, goodwill

$1,000 512 488 150 (60)

90 $ 398

The calculation of the deferred tax liability to be used for consolidation purposes is as follows: Asset fair value used in consolidation Tax base of the asset Taxable temporary difference Tax rate of Sub Co. Deferred tax liability—as recalculated for consolidation Deferred tax asset—as previously stated by Sub Adjustment required on consolidation

$950 830 120 40% 48 12 $ 60

Because the fair value and the tax base of Sub’s liabilities are both $300, no deferred income tax implications are associated with these liabilities. Note that in applying these concepts, we are replacing a $12 deferred tax asset on the balance sheet of Sub Co. with a deferred tax liability of $48 on the consolidated balance sheet, with respect to the same asset. Note also that no deferred taxes are recorded

When a business combination occurs, the acquirer records the net assets acquired at fair values, and when the tax base of these net assets are a different amount, a deferred tax asset or liability becomes part of the allocation of the acquisition cost. A subsidiary’s deferred tax asset is replaced by a deferred tax liability upon consolidation.


524


516

CHAPTER 9


No deferred taxes are recognized for the difference between the tax base and carrying amount for goodwill.

in relation to the goodwill of $398. Goodwill is measured as a residual. Therefore, it would be inappropriate to recognize a deferred tax liability on the temporary difference related to the goodwill because it would increase the carrying amount of goodwill and it would no longer be a residual amount. Also, goodwill is usually not deductible for tax purposes. Any difference between the carrying amount for goodwill and the tax base would be a permanent difference. Let us assume that Parent Inc. was formed on December 31, Year 3, by the issuance of common shares for $1,000 in cash. The nonconsolidated balance sheet of Parent is shown below, followed by the consolidated balance sheet (with bracketed amounts indicating its preparation using the direct approach): PARENT INC.—BALANCE SHEET at January 1, Year 4 Investment in Sub Co.

$1,000

Common shares

$1,000

PARENT INC.—CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET at January 1, Year 4 Assets (800 1 150) Goodwill

$ 950 398 $1,348

Liabilities Deferred tax liability Common shares

$ 300 48 1,000 $1,348

The deferred tax liability that appears on the consolidated balance sheet can be verified as follows: Carrying amount of assets above (excluding goodwill) Tax base of assets Taxable temporary difference Tax rate Deferred tax liability In preparing consolidated financial statements in subsequent periods, the values used for each subsidiary’s net assets have to be compared with their tax base in order to determine new values for deferred tax assets and liabilities.

$ 950 830 120 40% $ 48

The treatment of the acquisition differential at the date of acquisition is fairly complicated in situations involving deferred income taxes. In subsequent periods, we must compare the carrying amount of an asset or liability with its tax base on each date that a balance sheet is prepared, and make an adjustment to previously recorded deferred tax balances. When we prepare a consolidated balance sheet subsequent to acquisition, we will amortize the acquisition differential for all items, including deferred income taxes. See Self-Study Problem 2 for a comprehensive problem involving deferred income taxes pertaining to the acquisition differential. It illustrates the calculation of deferred income taxes at the date of acquisition and the amortization of the acquisition differential pertaining to deferred income taxes subsequent to the date of acquisition.

Operating Loss Carry-Forwards Under IAS 12, ing recognition can be given to the carry-forward of unused tax losses, to the extent it is probable that there will be a taxable profit which the


525


CHAPTER 9


deductible temporary difference can be utilized against. If the acquired company has already recognized a deferred tax asset due to the potential carry-forward of unused tax losses, this deferred tax asset will be allowed to stand on the date of the business combination. The combining of the two companies does not ordinarily change this status. However, if the acquired company was not able to recognize unused tax losses, the fact that it is combining with the acquiring company may provide the additional impetus to satisfy the “probability” criterion. This could be the result of the combined companies doing business with each other or because they will be able to reduce future costs, both of which could result in greater possibilities of having future taxable incomes lower than they were before the combination. The deferred income tax asset would be identified as part of the acquisition differential and recognized on the consolidated financial statements. Note that recognizing such a deferred tax asset as part of the acquisition differential reduces the amount that otherwise would have been allocated to goodwill. This concept must also be taken into in situations where a deferred tax asset was not recognized as an asset on the acquisition date, but subsequently becomes recognizable. An entity shall recognize acquired deferred tax benefits that it realizes after the business combination as follows:

517

The tax benefits of operating loss carry-forwards, which were not previously recognizable by either party to the business combination, may be recognized as an asset.

(a) Acquired deferred tax benefits recognized within the measurement period (maximum of one year from acquisition date) that result from new information about facts and circumstances that existed at the acquisition date must be applied to reduce the carrying amount of any goodwill related to that acquisition. If the carrying amount of that goodwill is zero, any remaining deferred tax benefits must be recognized in profit or loss. (b) All other acquired deferred tax benefits realized must be recognized in profit or loss. The acquiring company could also benefit from a business combination in that the probability of realizing a pre-acquisition deferred tax asset of the acquirer could change. An acquirer may consider it probable that it will recover its own deferred tax asset that was not recognized before the business combination. For example, the acquirer may be able to utilize the benefit of its unused tax losses against the future taxable profit of the acquiree. In such cases, the acquirer recognizes a change in the deferred tax asset in the period of the business combination but does not include it as part of the ing for the business combination. Therefore, the acquirer does not take it into in measuring the goodwill or bargain purchase gain it recognizes in the business combination.

Disclosure Requirements The following summarizes the more substantial items required to be disclosed pertaining to deferred income tax arising from a business combination: • The amount of the change, if it is a business combination in which the acquirer causes a change in the amount recognized for its pre-acquisition deferred tax asset. • A description of the event or change in circumstances that caused the deferred tax benefits to be recognized, if the deferred tax benefits acquired in a business combination are not recognized at the acquisition date but then are recognized after.

The entity must disclose the amount and reason for changes in deferred tax assets pertaining to a business combination.


526


518

CHAPTER 9

LO4

Corporate expansion has created multinational companies engaged in diversified activities.


SEGMENT DISCLOSURES For simplicity, most of the examples used in previous chapters were unrealistic, in that they consisted of a parent company and a single subsidiary. When you consider all companies that trade on the Toronto Stock Exchange, very few are made up of only two companies, and many of the larger ones consist of the parent and a substantial number of subsidiaries. The consolidation process treats these separate legal entities as a single economic entity by aggregating the components of their financial statements. In past years, all companies comprising a given consolidated group were often in a single line of business and located in Canada, so this aggregation of statements provided useful information to the s of the consolidated statements. However, the tremendous corporate expansion that started in the 1970s created companies engaged in diversified activities in many parts of the world, and it became obvious that the basic consolidated financial statements were not providing adequate information. Financial statement s needed information about a company that would allow them to assess all of its different components, which have different growth potentials, profitability characteristics, and inherent risks, which all vary with the products and services being provided and the markets being entered. Consolidated financial statements do not provide this information.

IFRS 8: Operating Segments Public companies are required to disclose information about their lines of business, products and services, countries where they operate, and major customers.

IFRS 8: Operating Segments must be applied for the separate and consolidated financial statements of an entity whose debt or equity instruments are traded in a public market, or of an entity that files, or is in the process of filing, the financial statements with a securities commission or other regulatory organization for the purpose of issuing any class of instruments in a public market. The entity must disclose information about its operating segments in addition to information about its products and services, the countries in which it operates, and its major customers. It is expected that such information will provide s with a better understanding of a company’s performance and its prospects for future cash flows. Operating segments are identified based on how a company’s management organizes its components internally for assessing performance and making strategic decisions. This identification focuses on the financial information that the company’s decision makers use for that purpose. Each component is called an operating segment and is defined as follows: (a) Engages in business activities from which it may earn revenues2 and incur expenses (including those relating to transactions with other components of the same enterprise) (b) Operating results are regularly reviewed by the entity’s chief operating decision maker to allocate resources the segment and assess its performance (c) Discrete financial information is available for it

Identification of Reportable Operating Segments IFRS 8 requires information to be disclosed about all operating segments that meet certain quantitative thresholds. The requirement description follows.


527


CHAPTER 9


An enterprise should disclose separately information about an operating segment that meets any of the following quantitative thresholds: (a) Its reported revenue, including both sales to external customers and intersegment sales or transfers, is 10% or more of the combined revenue, internal and external, of all operating segments.

519

Three tests (revenue, profit, and assets) are used to determine whether or not a particular operating segment is reportable. Each test applies a 10% rule.

(b) The absolute amount of its reported profit or loss is 10% or more of the greater, in absolute amount, of the (i) combined reported profit of all operating segments that did not report a loss and (ii) combined reported loss of all operating segments that did report a loss. (c) Its assets are 10% or more of the combined assets of all operating segments. These quantitative thresholds establish which reportable operating segments require separate disclosures. Any segments falling outside these guidelines may be combined under the category “Other,” provided that at least 75% of a company’s total external revenue is included in reportable segments. If it is not, additional operating segments must be disclosed. IFRS 8 also suggests that from a practical point of view, the total number of operating segments reported will probably not exceed ten.

At least 75% of a company’s total external revenue must be reported in a segment other than the “other” segment.

Example The following illustrates an application of quantitative thresholds. For internal evaluation purposes, JK Enterprises Inc. generates information from its six divisions. In of IFRS 8, these divisions are operating segments. The following amounts (stated in millions) have been assembled to determine which of these operating segments are reportable in accordance with the standard’s quantitative thresholds. Operating segments Auto parts Office furnishings Publishing Retail Finance Software

Revenues

Operating profit (loss)

Assets

$53.9 8.6 6.5 5.0 11.8 7.9 $93.7

$18.1 1.3 (2.1) (2.8) 3.7 3.9 $22.1

$10.9 1.2 1.4 3.2 14.0 0.9 $31.6

Revenue Test 10% 3 $93.7 5 $9.37

From this test, auto parts and finance are identified as reportable segments.

Operating Profit (Loss) Test To apply this test, first compute separate totals for all profits and all losses. Then choose the largest of the absolute amount of the two totals, as follows: Total of all operating profits Total of all operating losses 10% 3 $27.0 5 $2.7

$27.0 4.9

Auto parts, retail, finance, and software are identified as reportable segments.

The operating profit test considers the larger of the absolute amount of total profits and total losses.


528


520

CHAPTER 9


Asset Test 10% 3 $31.6 5 $3.16

Auto parts, retail, and finance are identified as reportable segments. Following is a summary of all three quantitative tests for JK Enterprises: Operating segments Separate disclosure is required if a segment satisfies any one test.

Auto parts Office furnishings Publishing Retail Finance Software

Revenues

Operating profit (loss)

Assets

X

X

X

X

X X X

X X

Thus, separate disclosures are required for auto parts, retail, finance, and software, as each satisfies at least one of the tests. The cumulative revenue for these four segments is 83.9%, which satisfies the requirement of having at least 75% of total revenue being reported in segments other than the “Other” segment. Office furnishings and publishing can be combined and reported as “Other.” IFRS 8 outlines extensive disclosures required for each reportable segment.

Disclosure Requirements The following disclosures are required for each reportable segment that has been identified by the quantitative thresholds: 1. Factors used by management to identify segments 2. The types of products and services that generate revenues 3. A measure of profit (loss) 4. Total assets 5. Liabilities for each reportable segment if such amounts are regularly provided to the chief operating decision maker 6. Each of the following, if the specific amounts are included in the measure of profit (loss) regularly reviewed by the chief operating decision maker: (a) Revenues from external customers (b) Intersegment revenues (c) Interest revenue and expense (This may be netted for a particular segment only if that segment receives a majority of its revenues from interest and if the chief operating decision maker uses the net number to assess performance.) (d) Depreciation and amortization (e) Material income and expense items (f) Equity income from associates and t ventures (g) Income taxes (h) Significant non-cash items other than depreciation and amortization 7. The amount of investment in associates and t ventures ed for by the equity method 8. The amounts of additions to non-current assets other than financial instruments, deferred tax assets, and post-employment benefits assets 9. Explanations of how a segment’s profit (loss) and assets have been measured, how common costs and tly used assets have been allocated, and of the ing policies that have been used


529


CHAPTER 9


10. Reconciliations of the following: (a) The total of the reportable segments’ revenues to the entity’s revenue (b) The total of the reportable segments’ measures of profit or loss to the entity’s profit or loss (c) The total of the reportable segments’ assets to the entity’s assets (d) The total of the reportable segments’ liabilities to the entity’s liabilities if segment liabilities are reported separately (e) The total of the reportable segments’ amounts for every other material item of information disclosed to the corresponding amount for the entity

521

Reconciliations of the segments’ total revenues, profits, assets, and liabilities to the entity’s overall revenues, profits, assets, and liabilities must be provided.

The following information must also be disclosed, unless such information has already been clearly provided as part of the segment disclosures. This additional information is also required in situations where the company has only a single reportable segment: 1. The revenue from external customers for each product or service, or for each group of similar products and services, whenever practical. 2. The revenue from external customers broken down between those from the company’s country of domicile (i.e., Canada) and those from all foreign countries. Where revenue from an individual country is material, it must be separately disclosed. 3. Goodwill; property, plant, and equipment; and intangible assets broken down between those located in Canada and those in foreign countries. Where assets located in an individual country are material, they must be separately disclosed. 4. When a company’s sales to a single external customer are 10% or more of total revenues, the company must disclose this fact, as well as the total amount of revenues from each customer and which operating segment reported such revenues. The identity of the customer does not have to be disclosed. As with all financial reporting, comparative amounts for at least the last fiscal year must also be presented. The disclosures required by IFRS 8 provide external s with the information that top management uses to assess performance. The presentation of a measure of profit, revenue, and assets for each reportable segment allows a statement to calculate a measure of return on assets, margin, and turnover and the risks associated with each segment, so that the relative contribution of each segment to the overall profitability of the company can be assessed and compared with that of the previous year. BCE is Canada’s largest telecommunication company. Relevant excerpts from its 2011 financial statements pertaining to its different operating segments are presented in Exhibit 9.4.

Revenue must be segregated by product or service and by geographical area.

The entity must disclose a measure of profit, revenue, and assets for each reportable segment.

EXHIBIT 9.4 EXTRACTS (IN PART) FROM BCE’S 2011 FINANCIAL STATEMENTS Note 3 | Segmented Information The ing policies used in our segment reporting are the same as those we describe in Note 2, Significant ing Policies. Our net earnings are reported in four segments: Bell Wireline, Bell Wireless, Bell Media and Bell Aliant. Our segments reflect how we

(continued)

BCE breaks down its operations into four different segments, based on how it manages its business.


530


522

CHAPTER 9


EXHIBIT 9.4

Certain costs are managed on a total company basis and are not segregated by segment.

The Bell Media segment was reported as a separate segment for the first time in 2011 due to BCE’s purchase of CTV. Intersegment transactions are eliminated.

(continued )

manage our business and how we classify our operations for planning and measuring performance. Accordingly, we operate and manage our segments as strategic business units organized by products and services. Segments negotiate sales with each other as if they were unrelated parties. We measure the performance of each segment based on segment profit, which is equal to operating revenues less operating costs for the segment. We also allocate severance, acquisition and other costs and depreciation and amortization to the segments. Substantially all of our finance costs, expected return on pension plan assets and other income are managed on a total company basis and, accordingly, are not reflected in segment results. The inter-segment eliminations eliminate any intercompany transactions included in each segment’s results. Our operations and most of our assets are located in Canada. The Bell Wireline segment provides local telephone, long distance, Internet, data, video and other services and products to Bell Canada’s residential, small and medium-sized business and large enterprise customers, primarily in the urban areas of Ontario and Québec. Satellite video services are provided nationwide. Also included in this segment is our wholesale business, which buys and sells local telephone, long distance, data and other services from or to resellers and other carriers. On January 1, 2011, Bell acquired xwave, a division of Bell Aliant, specializing in IT professional services and advanced technology solutions. As a result, 2010 results for Bell Wireline and Bell Aliant reflect the change in ownership of xwave. The Bell Wireless segment provides wireless voice and data communication products and services to Bell Canada’s residential, small and medium-sized business and large enterprise customers across Canada. On April 1, 2011, BCE acquired the remaining 85% of CTV Inc. (CTV) common shares that it did not already own. CTV is reported as a new segment, Bell Media, which also includes certain assets that we transferred to it from our wireline business. The Bell Media segment provides specialty TV, digital media, conventional TV and radio broadcasting entertainment services to customers across Canada. The Bell Aliant segment provides voice, data, Internet, video, wireless and value-added business solutions to residential and business customers in the Atlantic provinces and in rural and regional areas of Ontario and Québec.

SEGMENTED INFORMATION

For the Year Ended December 31, 2011

InterBell Bell Bell Segment Note Wireline Wireless Media Eliminations

Bell

Bell Aliant

16,954

2,543

InterSegment Eliminations

BCE

Operating revenues 10,308

External customers Inter-segment Total operating revenues Operating costs

5

Segment profit(1) Severance, acquisition and other costs Depreciation and amortization

6

5,191

1,455

–

–

19,497

313

40

87

(261)

179

232

(411)

–

10,621

5,231

1,542

(261)

17,133

2,775

(411)

19,497

(6,466) (3,408)

(11,868)

(1,208)

261

(10,821)

(1,458)

411

4,155

1,823

334

–

6,312

1,317

–

7,629

(189)

(13)

(165)

–

(367)

(42)

–

(409)

(2,195)

(433)

(81)

–

(2,709)

(552)

–

(3,261)

(continued)


531


CHAPTER 9

EXHIBIT 9.4

523


(continued )

For the Year Ended December 31, 2011

InterSegment Bell Bell Bell Note Wireline Wireless Media Eliminations

Bell Aliant

Bell

InterSegment Eliminations

BCE

Finance costs Interest expense

(842)

Interest on employee benefit obligations

(984)

Expected return on pension plan assets

1,032 129

Other income Earnings before income taxes

3,294

Goodwill allocated by groups of CGUs

16

2,521

2,302

1,393

Indefinite-life intangible assets allocated by groups of CGUs

14

1,314

2,058

1,973

619

Capital expenditures (1)

–

6,216

969

–

7,185

1,511

–

4,883

339

–

5,222

91

–

2,683

573

–

3,256

The chief operating decision maker uses only one measure of profit to make decisions and assess performance, being operating revenues less operating costs for the segment.

REVENUES BY PRODUCT For the Year Ended December 31

2011

2010

Revenues Local and access Long distance Data Wireless Video Media Equipment and other

2,852 903 3,811 4,769 1,831 1,455 1,333

3,012 923 3,985 4,469 1,749 – 1,369

Total external revenues Inter-segment revenues

16,954 179

15,507 162

Bell

17,133

15,669

2,775

2,808

Bell Aliant Inter-segment eliminations BCE

(411)

(408)

19,497

18,069

Wireless is the largest product line in of sales.

Source: Reproduced with permission from BCE. http://www.bce.ca/investors/investoroverview

ANALYSIS AND INTERPRETATION OF FINANCIAL STATEMENTS Under IFRSs, the equity method must be used to report an investment in a t venture. Under ASPE, investors can report their interest in t ventures using proportionate consolidation, the cost method, or the equity method. Exhibit 9.5 presents the income statements and balance sheets for Example 4

LO5


532


524

CHAPTER 9


EXHIBIT 9.5

Impact of Presentation Method on Return-on-Equity and Debt-to-Equity Ratios INCOME STATEMENTS—Year 4

The equity method reports income from the t venture on one line, whereas proportionate consolidation reports the income on a lineby-line basis.

Sales Income from t venture

Cost of sales Miscellaneous expenses Income before taxes Income tax expense Net income

Equity method


$900,000 64,530 964,530 500,000 100,000 600,000 364,530 145,812 $218,718

$1,017,000

1,017,000 534,470 118,000 652,470 364,530 145,812 $ 218,718

BALANCE SHEETS—December 31, Year 4

Net income and retained earnings under the equity method are equal to consolidated net income and retained earnings using proportionate consolidation.

Miscellaneous assets Inventory Deferred charge—income taxes Investment in Explor (85,500 1 40,500 2 1,782)


Return on equity (net income/shareholders’ equity) Debt to equity (liabilities/shareholders’ equity)

Equity method


$654,500 110,000 124,218 $888,718

$776,900 147,530 1,188 — $925,618

$130,000 300,000 458,718 $888,718

$166,900 300,000 458,718 $925,618

28.8% 17.1

28.8% 22.0

under two scenarios: equity method and proportionate consolidation. The exhibit also indicates the return-on-equity ratio and debt-to-equity ratio for each reporting method. Note the following from Exhibit 9.5: • The net income and retained earnings under the equity method are equal to consolidated net income and consolidated retained earnings, respectively. • The return on equity under the equity method is equal to the consolidated return on equity. The debt-to-equity ratio is higher under proportionate consolidation.

• The debt-to-equity ratio is higher on the consolidated statements because the venturer’s share of the t venture’s debt is included on the consolidated financial statements but not included on the investor’s balance sheet under the equity method. • The solvency position looks worst on the consolidated financial statements due to the higher debt-to-equity ratio.


CHAPTER 9


533

525

ASPE Differences An entity is a variable interest entity and subject to consolidation under ASPE when, by design, one or more of the following conditions exist:

LO6

(a) The total equity investment at risk is not sufficient to permit the entity to finance its activities without additional subordinated financial provided by any parties, including equity holders. In most cases, if equity at risk is less than 10% of total assets, the risk is deemed insufficient. (b) As a group, the holders of the equity investment at risk lack any one of the following three characteristics of a controlling financial interest: (i) The direct or indirect ability to make decisions about an entity’s activities that have a significant effect on the success of the entity. (ii) The obligation to absorb the expected losses of the entity. (iii) The right to receive the expected residual returns of the entity. The following pertain to private enterprises: • May report association with VIEs using full consolidation, the cost method, or the equity method but must be consistent with the method used for reporting subsidiaries. • May report interest in t ventures using proportionate consolidation, the cost method, or the equity method. • May use the taxes payable method or the future income tax payable method, which is similar to the liability method under IFRSs, to for income tax. • Not required to disclose any information about operating segments.

Private enterprises can use proportionate consolidation to report their investments in t ventures.

For the third point above, deferred income taxes need not be recognized; however, the entity must prepare and disclose reconciliation between the statutory rate and the effective tax rate.

U.S. GAAP Differences U.S. GAAP and IFRSs have many similarities for the topics presented in this chapter. The significant differences are summarized as follows: 1. IFRSs require that an interest in an SPE be consolidated when the parent controls the SPE. The same definition of control is used for assessing control based on voting interest versus contractual arrangements. U.S. GAAP assess control of an SPE by determining whether the reporting entity receives the majority of benefits from and is exposed to the majority of the risks of loss for the SPE. 2. Under IFRSs, there is an exemption from recognizing a deferred tax liability (asset) for the initial recognition of an asset or liability in a transaction that is not a business combination, and at the time of the transaction, which affects neither ing profit nor taxable profit. Under U.S. GAAP, there is no such exemption.

U.S. GAAP considers benefits and risks rather than control when determining whether or not an SPE should be consolidated.


534


526

CHAPTER 9


3. Whereas IFRSs require the disclosure of liabilities of operating segments when this information is provided to the chief operating decision maker, U.S. GAAP does not require this disclosure even if this information is provided to the chief operating decision maker.

summary In this chapter, we have examined four different topics, which almost wind up our study of business combinations and the preparation of consolidated financial statements. Consolidation is required for a VIE, which is controlled by a primary beneficiary on a basis of control other than through ownership of a voting interest. For an interest in a t operation, the venturer should recognize the assets it controls and the liabilities it incurs, the expenses it incurs, and its share of the revenue and expenses from the sale of goods or services by the t arrangement. The equity method should be used to report an investment in a t venture. Deferred tax assets and liabilities should be recognized on the consolidated financial statements for the differences between the carrying amounts and the tax bases of subsidiary’s net assets. Consolidation hides information about the lines of business conducted by multinational conglomerates. Required segment disclosures are designed to provide financial statement s with relevant information that will aid them in assessing company results.

Significant Changes in GAAP in the Last Three Years 1. Definition of control has broadened to include control through voting rights, contracts, or operating agreements. 2. Interests in t ventures are reported using the equity method rather than having a choice between proportional consolidation and the equity method. 3. A venturer can recognize the portion of a gain that is attributable to the interests of the other venturers on contribution of a non-monetary asset to a t venture if the transaction has commercial substance.

Changes Expected in GAAP in the Next Three Years No major changes are expected for topics in this chapter.

SELF- S TUDY P ROBLEM 1 The following are the Year 5 financial statements of MAR Corporation and OTT Company, a t venture in which MAR has a 35% ownership interest: Year 5 income statements Sales Management fees Interest

MAR

OTT

$906,750 25,000 —

$250,000 — 3,600


535


CHAPTER 9

Gain on land sale Dividends Cost of sales Interest expense Other expenses Income tax expense Profit Year 5 retained earnings statements Balance, January 1 Profit Dividends Balance, December 31 Balance Sheets—at December 31, Year 5 Cash s and notes receivable Inventory Property, plant, and equipment (net) Investment in OTT Company

Notes payable Other liabilities Common shares Retained earnings

527


— 5,250 937,000 540,000 3,600 196,400 80,000 820,000 $117,000

20,000 — 273,600 162,000 — 71,600 16,000 249,600 $ 24,000

$153,000 117,000 270,000 50,000 $220,000

$ 72,000 24,000 96,000 15,000 $ 81,000

$ 12,000 70,000 32,000 448,000 30,000 $592,000

$ 15,000 63,000 27,000 66,000 — $171,000

$ 60,000 212,000 100,000 220,000 $592,000

$

— 40,000 50,000 81,000 $171,000

Additional Information • On January 1, Year 3, MAR purchased 35% of the common shares of OTT for $30,000 and signed a t venture agreement with the other two parties in the t venture. On that date, OTT had retained earnings of $10,000, and the carrying amounts of its identifiable net assets were equal to fair values. • The companies sell merchandise to each other. MAR sells to OTT at a gross profit rate of 38%; OTT earns a gross profit of 40% from its sales to MAR. • The December 31, Year 4, inventory of MAR contained purchases made from OTT amounting to $7,000. There were no intercompany purchases in the inventory of OTT on this date. • During Year 5 the following intercompany transactions took place: (a) OTT made a $25,000 payment to MAR for management fees, which was recorded as “other expense.” (b) OTT made sales of $75,000 to MAR. The December 31, Year 5, inventory of MAR contained merchandise purchased from OTT amounting to $16,500. (c) MAR made sales of $100,000 to OTT. The December 31, Year 5, inventory of OTT contained merchandise purchased from MAR amounting to $15,000. (d) On July 1, Year 5, MAR borrowed $60,000 from OTT and signed a note bearing interest at 12% per annum. Interest on this note was paid on December 31, Year 5. (e) In Year 5, OTT sold land to MAR, recording a gain of $20,000. This land is being held by MAR on December 31, Year 5.


536


528

CHAPTER 9


• Goodwill impairment tests have been conducted yearly by MAR since the date of acquisition. MAR’s 35% share of the losses due to impairment was as follows: Year 3, $1,040; Year 4, $320; Year 5, $680. • MAR has ed for its investment using the cost method for internal record keeping. • Both companies pay income tax at a rate of 40%. Ignore income tax on the acquisition differential.

Required: (a) Calculate the following balances to be reported by MAR under the equity method: (i) Retained earnings as at January 1, Year 5. (ii) Net income for Year 5. (iii) Investment in OTT as at December 31, Year 5. (b) Prepare MAR’s journal entries under the equity method for Year 5. *(c) Prepare consolidated financial statements for MAR for Year 5.

SOLUTION

TO

SELF-S TUDY P ROBLEM 1 CALCULATION AND AMORTIZATION OF THE ACQUISITION DIFFERENTIAL Cost of 35% of OTT, Jan. 1, Year 3 Carrying amount of OTT, Jan. 1, Year 3 Common shares Retained earnings

$30,000 50,000 10,000 60,000

MAR’s share (35%) Acquisition differential Allocated to revalue the net assets of OTT Goodwill, Jan. 1, Year 3 Amortized (impairment losses): Year 3–Year 4 Year 5 Goodwill, Dec. 31, Year 5

21,000 9,000 –0– 9,000 1,360 (a) 680 (b)

INTERCOMPANY ITEMS Notes receivable and payable (35% 3 60,000) Management fee revenue and expense (35% 3 25,000) Sales and purchases (35% 3 [75,000 1 100,000]) Interest revenue and expense (35% 3 [12% 3 60,000 3 1/2 yr]) Dividend from OTT (35% 3 15,000)

2,040 $ 6,960 (c) $21,000 8,750 61,250 1,260 5,250

(d) (e) (f) (g) (h)

UNREALIZED PROFITS Inventory Opening (7,000 3 40% 3 35%)—OTT selling Ending OTT selling (16,500 3 40% 3 35%) MAR selling (15,000 3 38% 3 35%) Land—OTT selling (20,000 3 35%)

Before tax

40% tax

After tax

$ 980

$ 392

$ 588 (i)

$2,310 1,995 $4,305

$ 924 798 $1,722

$1,386 (j) 1,197 (k) $2,583 (l)

$7,000

$2,800

$4,200 (m)


537


CHAPTER 9


529

CALCULATION OF RETAINED EARNINGS at January 1, Year 5

(a) (i)

Retained earnings, Jan. 1, Year 5—MAR Less: Amortization of acquisition differential (a)

$153,000 1,360 151,640

Retained earnings, Jan. 1, Year 5—OTT Acquisition retained earnings Increase

72,000 10,000 62,000

MAR’s interest (35%) Less: Opening inventory profit (i) Adjusted increase Consolidated retained earnings, Jan. 1, Year 5

21,700 588 21,112 (n) $172,752 (o)

CALCULATION OF NET INCOME—Year 5

(ii)

Income of MAR Less: Dividends from OTT (h) Ending inventory profit (k) Amortization of acquisition differential (b) Adjusted net income Income of OTT MAR’s interest (35%) Less: Ending inventory profit (j) Land gain (m)

$117,000 5,250 1,197 680

7,127 109,873

24,000 8,400 1,386 4,200

Add: Opening inventory profit (i) Adjusted net income Net income under equity method

5,586 2,814 588 3,402 (p) $113,275 (q)

BALANCE IN INVESTMENT at December 31, Year 5

(iii)

Balance in investment under cost method Less: Ending inventory profit (k) Amortization of acquisition differential (a & b) Adjusted Retained earnings, Dec. 31, Year 5—OTT Acquisition retained earnings Increase MAR’s interest (35%) Less: Ending inventory profit (j) Land gain (m) Adjusted increase Balance in investment under equity method

$30,000 1,197 2,040

3,237 26,763

81,000 10,000 71,000 24,850 1,386 4,200

5,586 19,264 $46,027

YEAR 5 EQUITY METHOD JOURNAL ENTRIES (See Calculation of Net Income)

(b)

Investment in OTT (p) Investment income (p) Adjusted net income of OTT.

3,402

Cash

5,250

Investment in OTT (h) Dividends from OTT

3,402

5,250


538


530

CHAPTER 9


Investment income Investment in OTT (k) Ending inventory profit—MAR selling

1,197 1,197

Investment income (b) Investment in OTT Amortization of acquisition differential

680 680

MAR CORPORATION CONSOLIDATED INCOME STATEMENT

(c)

Sales (906,750 1 35% 3 250,000 2 [f] 61,250) Management fees (25,000 1 35% 3 0 2 [e] 8,750) Interest (0 1 35% 3 3,600 2 [g] 1,260) Gain on land sale (0 1 35% 3 20,000 2 [m] 7,000) Dividends (5,250 1 35% 3 0 2 [h] 5,250) Cost of sales (540,000 1 35% 3 162,000 2 [f] 61,250 2 [i] 980 1 [j] 2,310 1 [k] 1,995) Interest expense (3,600 1 35% 3 0 2 [g] 1,260) Other expenses (196,400 1 35% 3 71,600 2 [e] 8,750) Goodwill impairment loss (0 1 35% 3 0 1 [b] 680) Income tax expense (80,000 1 35% 3 16,000 1 [i] 392 2 [j] 924 2 [k] 798 2 [m] 2,800) Profit

$933,000 16,250 0 0 0 949,250 538,775 2,340 212,710 680 81,470 835,975 $113,275

RETAINED EARNINGS STATEMENT Balance, January 1 Profit

$172,752 113,275 286,027 50,000 $236,027


BALANCE SHEET Cash (12,000 1 35% 3 15,000) s and notes receivable (70,000 1 35% 3 63,000 2 [d] 21,000) Inventory (32,000 1 35% 3 27,000 2 [j] 2,310 2 [k] 1,995) Property, plant, and equipment (net) (448,000 1 35% 3 66,000 2 [m] 7,000) Deferred income taxes (0 1 35% 3 0 1 [j] 924 1 [k] 798 1 [m] 2,800) Goodwill (c)

$ 17,250 71,050 37,145 464,100 4,522 6,960 $601,027

Notes payable (60,000 1 35% 3 0 2 [d] 21,000) Other liabilities (212,000 1 35% 3 40,000) Common shares Retained earnings

$ 39,000 226,000 100,000 236,027 $601,027


On December 31, Year 2, Pat Inc. purchased 80% of the outstanding ordinary shares of Sam Company for $620,000. At that date, Sam had ordinary shares of $400,000 and retained earnings of $125,000. In negotiating the purchase price, it


539


CHAPTER 9


531

was agreed that the assets on Sam’s balance sheet were fairly valued except for plant assets, which had an $80,000 excess of fair value over carrying amount. It was also agreed that Sam had unrecognized intangible assets consisting of trademarks that had an estimated value of $50,000. The plant assets had a remaining useful life of 8 years at the acquisition date, and the trademarks would be amortized over a 10-year period. Any goodwill arising from this business combination would be tested periodically for impairment. Pat s for its investment using the cost method and prepares consolidated statements using the parent company extension theory. Additional Information • Impairment tests performed at the end of Year 6 indicated that Sam’s portion of the goodwill had a recoverable amount of $85,000 and the trademarks had a recoverable amount of $29,000. The impairment loss on these assets occurred entirely in Year 6. • On December 26, Year 6, Pat declared dividends of $72,000, while Sam declared dividends of $40,000. • Depreciation and amortization expense is reported in selling expenses, while impairment losses are reported in other expenses. • Both companies pay income tax at the rate of 40%. Condensed financial statements for Pat and Sam for the year ended December 31, Year 6, were as follows: STATEMENTS OF FINANCIAL POSITION at December 31, Year 6 Assets Plant assets—net Investment in Sam Company Other assets Shareholders’ Equity and Liabilities Ordinary shares Retained earnings Deferred tax liability Other liabilities

Pat

Sam

$ 460,000 620,000 580,000 $1,660,000

$ 320,000 — 804,000 $1,124,000

$1,000,000 220,000 40,000 400,000 $1,660,000

$ 400,000 300,000 30,000 394,000 $1,124,000

INCOME STATEMENTS for the Year Ended December 31, Year 6 Sales Interest and dividend income Cost of goods sold Selling expenses Other expenses Income tax expense Profit

Pat

Sam

$1,740,000 68,000 1,808,000 1,276,000 44,000 166,000 130,000 1,616,000 $ 192,000

$1,030,000 4,000 1,034,000 720,000 70,000 74,000 70,000 934,000 $ 100,000


540


532

CHAPTER 9


Required: (a) Prepare a schedule to allocate the acquisition differential at the date of acquisition and a schedule to amortize the acquisition differential from the date of acquisition to the end of Year 6. Deferred income taxes should be recognized on the acquisition differential at the date of acquisition. (b) Prepare the journal entries for Pat’s separate-entity books to for the investment in Sam for Year 6 and determine the investment income from Sam for Year 6 under: i) the equity method, and ii) the cost method. (c) Prepare consolidated financial statements for Year 6.

SOLUTION

TO


Cost of 80% of Sam

620,000

Implied value of 100% Carrying amount of Sam’s net assets 5 Carrying amount of Sam’s shareholders’ equity Ordinary shares Retained earnings Acquisition differential Allocated: Plant assets Trademarks

775,000

400,000 125,000

Deferred income tax liability (130,000 3 40%) Subtotal Goodwill for 100% Less: NCI’s share at 20% (not recognized on consolidated SFP) Goodwill for Pat’s 80% (recognized on consolidated SFP)

Plant assets (8 years) Trademarks (10 years) Deferred tax liability (@ 40%) Subtotal Goodwill for Pat’s 80% Total NCI’s share [20% 3 (h)] Pat’s share [(j) – (k)]

(a)

78,000 172,000 34,400 137,600

(b)

120,600

(c)

FV – CA 80,000 50,000 130,000 (52,000)

NCI at date of acquisition (20% 3 [(a) 525,000 1 (b) 78,000])

Bal

525,000 250,000

Amortization

Loss

Bal

Dec. 31/Yr2

to Dec. 31/Yr5

Yr6

Yr6

Dec. 31/Yr6

80,000 50,000 130,000 52,000 78,000 137,600 215,600 15,600 200,000

30,000 15,000 45,000 18,000 27,000 — 27,000 5,400 21,600

10,000 5,000 15,000 6,000 9,000 — 9,000 1,800 7,200

1,000 1,000 400 600 52,600 53,200 120 53,080

40,000 29,000 69,000 27,600 41,400 85,000 126,400 8,280 118,120

Equity Method

(b) Investment in Sam (80% 3 100,000) Investment income To record Pat’s share of Sam’s income

(d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) (k) (l)

Cost Method

80,000 80,000

(continued)


541


CHAPTER 9


Equity Method Cash (80% 3 40,000) Investment in Sam Dividend income To record Pat’s share of Sam’s dividend

32,000

533

Cost Method 32,000

32,000 32,000

Investment income [(l) (7,200 1 (l) 53,080) 60,280 Investment in Sam 60,280 To record Pat’s share of amortization & impairment of acquisition differential

Investment income for Year 6 under the equity method is $19,720 (80,000 2 60,280) and $32,000 under the cost method. Total income under equity method is $179,720 (192,000 2 32,000 1 19,720). (c)

Calculation of consolidated profit attributable to NCI Sam’s profit NCI’s share @ 20% Acquisition differential amortization [(k) 1,800 1 (k) 120]

(m)

100,000 20,000 (1,920) 18,080

(n)

Calculation of consolidated retained earnings at December 31, Year 6 Pat’s retained earnings, Dec. 31, Year 6 (under cost method) Sam’s retained earnings Dec. 31, Year 6 Acquisition retained earnings Increase Pat’s share Less: Acquisition differential amortization [(l) 21,600 1 (l) 7,200 1 (l) 53,080]

220,000 300,000 125,000 175,000 3 80%

140,000 (81,880) 278,120 (o)

Calculation of NCI at December 31, Year 6 NCI at acquisition (c) Sam’s retained earnings Dec. 31, Year 6 Acquisition retained earnings Increase NCI’s share Less: Acquisition differential amortization [(k) 5,400 1 (k) 1,800 1 (k) 120]

120,600 300,000 125,000 175,000 3 20%

35,000 (7,320) 148,280 (p)

PAT INC. CONSOLIDATED INCOME STATEMENT for the Year Ended December 31, Year 6 Sales (1,740,000 1 1,030,000) Interest & investment income (68,000 1 4,000 2 [m] 32,000) Cost of sales (1,276,000 1 720,000) Selling expenses (44,000 1 70,000 1 [f] 15,000) Other expenses (166,000 1 74,000 1 [f] 1,000 1 [i] 52,600) Income tax expense (130,000 1 70,000  2 [g] 6,000 2 [g] 400)

2,770,000 40,000 2,810,000 1,996,000 129,000 293,600 193,600 2,612,200

(continued)


542


534

CHAPTER 9


Profit

197,800

Attributable to: Pat’s shareholders (5 income under equity method) Non-controlling interest (n)

179,720 18,080 197,800

PAT INC. CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET at December 31, Year 6 Plant assets (460,000 1 320,000 1 [d] 40,000) Trademarks (0 1 0 1 [e] 29,000) Goodwill (0 1 0 1 [i] 85,000) Other assets (580,000 1 804,000)

820,000 29,000 85,000 1,384,000 2,318,000

Ordinary shares Retained earnings (o) Non-controlling interest (p) Deferred income tax liability (40,000 1 30,000 1 [g] 27,600) Other liabilities (400,000 1 394,000)

1,000,000 278,120 148,280 97,600 794,000 2,318,000

APPENDIX 9A Reporting an Interest in a t Venture Using Proportionate Consolidation LO2

Example Explor Ltd., a Calgary-based oil exploration company, is a t venture in which A Company has a 45% ownership interest. A Company, an original founder of Explor, uses the equity method to for its investment but has made no entries to its investment for Year 4. The following are the financial statements of the two companies on December 31, Year 4: INCOME STATEMENTS—Year 4

Sales Cost of sales Miscellaneous expenses Income before taxes Income tax expense Net income

A Company

Explor

$900,000 500,000 100,000 600,000 300,000 120,000 $180,000

$370,000 180,000 40,000 220,000 150,000 60,000 $ 90,000


543


CHAPTER 9


535

BALANCE SHEETS—December 31, Year 4 A Company

Explor

Miscellaneous assets Inventory Investment in Explor

$654,500 110,000 85,500 $850,000

$277,000 90,000 — $367,000


$130,000 300,000 420,000 $850,000

$ 87,000 100,000 180,000 $367,000

These statements are the financial statements of a venturer and a t venture.

During Year 4, A Company sold merchandise totalling $110,000 to Explor and recorded a gross profit of 30% on these sales. On December 31, Year 4, the inventory of Explor contained items purchased from A Company for $22,000, and Explor had a payable of $5,000 to A Company on this date. A Company will use the proportionate consolidation method when it reports its investment in Explor for Year 4. Following are the calculations of the amounts that are used in the elimination of intercompany transactions in the preparation of the consolidated financial statements: Intercompany sales and purchases: Total for the year A Company’s ownership interest Amount eliminated Intercompany receivables and payables: Total at end of year A Company’s ownership interest Amount eliminated Intercompany profits in inventory: Total at end of year (22,000 3 30%) Profit considered realized—55% Unrealized—45%

$110,000 45% $ 49,500 (a) $ $ $ $

The other venturer’s share of the intercompany transactions is considered realized from a consolidated viewpoint.

5,000 45% 2,250 (b) 6,600 3,630 2,970

(c)

The following explanations will clarify the calculations made: 1. Because the proportionate consolidation method will use 45% of Explor’s financial statement items, we eliminate only 45% of the intercompany revenues, expenses, receivables, and payables. If we eliminated 100% of these items, we would be eliminating more than we are using in the consolidation process.

Only the venturer’s share of intercompany transactions is eliminated when consolidation takes place.

2. The inventory of Explor contains an intercompany profit of $6,600 recorded by A Company. Because there is t control, A Company has realized $3,630 of this profit by selling to the other und venturers, and therefore only A Company’s 45% ownership interest is considered unrealized. 3. Income tax allocation is required when timing differences occur. Assuming that A Company pays income tax at a rate of 40%, the income tax effects of the inventory profit elimination can be calculated as follows:

Inventory—A selling

Before tax

40% tax

$2,970

$1,188

After tax $1,782 (d)

Unrealized profit is always eliminated from the selling company’s income.


544


536

CHAPTER 9


Because A Company has not recorded this year’s equity method journal entries, we must calculate consolidated net income for Year 4 as follows: Income of A Company Less after-tax unrealized inventory profit (d) Adjusted net income Income of Explor A’s ownership interest Consolidated net income

$180,000 1,782 178,218

$90,000 45%

40,500 $218,718

The preparation of the Year 4 consolidated statements without the use of a working paper is illustrated next. A COMPANY CONSOLIDATED INCOME STATEMENT for the Year Ended December 31, Year 4 Intercompany revenues and expenses, receivables and payables, and unrealized profits in assets are eliminated in the preparation of the consolidated financial statements.

Sales (900,000 1 [45% 3 370,000] 2 [a] 49,500) Cost of sales (500,000 1 [45% 3 180,000] 2  [a] 49,500 1  [c] 2,970) Miscellaneous expenses (100,000 1 [45% 3 40,000])

$1,017,000 534,470 118,000 652,470 364,530 145,812 $ 218,718

Income before taxes Income taxes (120,000 1 45% 3 60,000 2 [d] 1,188) Net income

A COMPANY CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET at December 31, Year 4 Miscellaneous assets (654,500 1 [45% 3 277,000] 2 [b] 2,250) Inventory (110,000 1 [45% 3 90,000] 2 [c] 2,970) Deferred income taxes (d) Total assets Liabilities (130,000 1 [45% 3 87,000] 2 [b] 2,250) Shareholders’ equity Common shares Retained earnings Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity

$776,900 147,530 1,188 $925,618 $166,900 300,000 458,718

758,718 $925,618

The amounts used in the preparation are explained as follows: Under the proportionate consolidation process, only the venturer’s share of the t venture’s financial statement items is used.

1. With the exception of shareholders’ equity and deferred income tax, the first two amounts used come from the individual financial statements and consist of 100% of A Company plus 45% of Explor. 2. The adjustments labelled (a) through (d) eliminate the intercompany revenues and expenses, receivables and payables, unrealized inventory profit, and income tax on the unrealized inventory profit. It is assumed that miscellaneous expenses include income tax expense. 3. Consolidated shareholders’ equity consists of the common shares of A Company plus consolidated retained earnings.


CHAPTER 9


545

537


1. Explain the similarities and differences between a subsidiary and a variable interest entity and between a majority shareholder for a subsidiary and a primary beneficiary for a variable interest entity.

LO1

2. Explain how the definitions of assets and liabilities can be used to the consolidation of variable interest entities.

LO2

3. Explain how to for an interest in a t operation.

LO2

4. Y Company has a 62% interest in Z Company. Are there circumstances where this would not result in Z Company being a subsidiary of Y Company? Explain.

LO2

5. The treatment of an unrealized intercompany inventory profit differs between a parent–subsidiary affiliation and a venturer–t venture affiliation. Explain where the differences lie.

LO2

6. A venturer invested non-monetary assets in the formation of a new t venture and did not receive any monetary consideration. The fair value of the assets invested was greater than the carrying amount in the ing records of the venturer. Explain how the venturer should for the investment.

LO2

7. Explain how the revenue recognition principle s the recognition of a portion of gains occurring on transactions between the venturer and the t venture.

LO3

8. X Company recently acquired control over Y Company. On the date of acquisition, the fair values of Y Company’s assets exceeded their tax bases. How does this difference affect the consolidated balance sheet?

LO3

9. A parent company has recently acquired a subsidiary. On the date of acquisition, both the parent and the subsidiary had unused income tax losses that were unrecognized in their financial statements. How would this affect the consolidation figures on the date of acquisition?

LO3

10. What is the difference between a deductible temporary difference and a taxable temporary difference?

LO3

11. Explain how it is possible to have a deferred tax liability with regard to the presentation of a subsidiary’s assets in a consolidated balance sheet, whereas on the subsidiary’s balance sheet the same assets produce a deferred tax asset.

LO3

12. Explain how the definition of a liability s the recognition of a deferred income tax liability when the fair value of an asset acquired in a business combination is greater than the tax base of this asset.

LO4

13. Describe the three tests for identifying reportable operating segments.

LO4

14. For each of its operating segments that require separate disclosure, what information must an enterprise disclose?

LO4

15. In accordance with IFRS 8, Operating Segments, answer the following: (a) What information must be disclosed about business carried out in other countries? (b) What information must be disclosed about a company’s products or services? (c) What information must be provided about a company’s customers?


546


538

CHAPTER 9


LO4

16. What sort of reconciliations is required for segmented reporting?

LO4

17. Explain how the use of the information provided in segment disclosures can aid in the assessment of the overall profitability of a company.

Case 9-1

Mr. Landman has spent the last 10 years developing small commercial strip malls and has been very successful. He buys a residential property in a high-traffic area, rezones the property, and then sells it to a contractor who builds the plaza and sells it to investors. Mr. Landman has often been hired to manage the commercial plazas for a fee. Now Mr. Landman wants to become a real estate baron. Rather than just developing the plazas for resale, he wants to form partnerships with builders and/or investors to build commercial properties and keep them as long-term investments. He has found two properties suitable for development and made offers to the current owners to purchase these properties on January 1, Year 2. The offers are conditional upon arranging suitable financing for the acquisition. Mr. Landman intends to set up two separate companies to buy, develop, and hold the properties. Elgin Company will purchase the property on Elgin Street for $1,200,000 and build a small office building at an expected cost of $2,800,000. Mr. Landman’s holding company, Holdco, will invest $1,200,000 in Elgin for 30% of its common shares. Ms. Richer, a private investor, will invest $2,800,000 for a 70% interest in Elgin. According to the of the shareholders’ agreement, Mr. Landman and Ms. Richer must agree on all major operating and financing decisions. Otherwise, the property will be sold in the open market and the company will be wound up. The second company, Metcalfe Inc., will buy a recently developed strip mall on Metcalfe Street for $2,000,000. The purchase will be financed with a first mortgage of $1,500,000 and $500,000 of equity. Mr. Landman’s holding company will invest $200,000 in Metcalfe for 40% of its common shares and will manage the property. Ms. Richer will invest $300,000 for a 60% interest in Metcalfe. The shareholders’ agreement contains the following :

CASES LO1, 2, 6

• Ms. Richer is guaranteed a return of her investment of $300,000 plus cumulative dividends of $24,000 a year. • Mr. Landman is responsible for making all key operating, investing, and financing decisions. • Mr. Landman’s holding company guarantees the payment of dividends to Ms. Richer on an annual basis. After both shareholders have received cumulative dividends equal to 8% of their initial investments, Ms. Richer will receive 10% and Mr. Landman’s holding company will receive 90% of the undistributed profits. Holdco typically finances its acquisitions with 75% debt and 25% equity. The debt financing has a maximum debt-to-equity ratio of 3:1.

Required: How should these two investments be reported on the financial statements of Holdco? Provide arguments to your recommendations.


547


CHAPTER 9

Case 9-2 LO1, 6


539

P Co. is looking for some additional financing in order to renovate one of the company’s manufacturing plants. It is having difficulty getting new debt financing because its debt-to-equity ratio is higher than the 3:1 limit stated in its bank covenant. It is unable to attract an equity partner because the sole owner of P Co. has set equity partner conditions that make it practically impossible to find a new equity investor. Part of the problem results from the use of historical cost ing. If the company’s assets were recorded at fair value, the debt-to-equity ratio would be much lower. In order to get around the requirements for historical cost ing, the CFO for P Co. came up with the following plan. On September 2, Year 5, P Co. will sell its manufacturing facility to SPE for $900,000 in the form of a non-interest-bearing note receivable. SPE will be set up for the sole purpose of renovating the manufacturing facility. No other activities may be carried out by SPE without the approval of P Co. Mr. Renovator, an unrelated party, will invest $600,000 in cash to cover the estimated cost of the renovation and will be the sole owner of SPE. On January 1, Year 6, after the renovation is complete and one day after P Co.’s year-end, SPE will sell the manufacturing facility back to P Co. at $1,560,000 and will be wound up. P will finance the repurchase with a $660,000 bank loan and by offsetting the remaining $900,000 against the note receivable from SPE from the original sale of the manufacturing facility to SPE. By selling the unrenovated facility and repurchasing the renovated facility, P Co. hopes to reflect the facility at its fair value, borrow the money to finance the renovation, and improve its debt-to-equity position. The existing and pro forma balance sheets (in 000s) and debt-to-equity ratios for P Co. and SPE are presented below in condensed form: P Co. Sep. 1/5 Note receivable from SPE Manufacturing facility Other assets Note payable to P Co. Other liabilities Common shares Retained earnings Debt-to-equity ratio

P Co. Dec. 31/5 $

P Co. Jan. 1/6

SPE Dec. 31/5 $1,500 0 $1,500

900

$

150 1,350 $ 1,500

1,350 $ 2,250

$1,560 1,350 $2,910

$ 1,200 15 285 $ 1,500

$ 1,200 15 1,035 $ 2,250

$1,860 15 1,035 $2,910

600 0 $1,500

4:1

1.14:1

1.77:1

1.5:1

$900

The CFO would like you to prepare a memo in which you discuss the ing issues related to these proposed transactions.

Required: Prepare the memo requested by the CFO. Ignore income taxes.

Case 9-3 LO1

IFRS 10 affects many Canadian business enterprises that are involved with variable-interest entities (VIEs) and special purpose entities (SPEs). Retrieve the annual reports (for the year specified) of any two of the following companies: • Tim Hortons Inc. (2012) • Air Canada (2011) • Empire Company Limited (2011)


548


540

CHAPTER 9


Required: Write a brief report on each company that describes 1. the extent of its involvement with VIEs and SPEs, and 2. the effect of the requirements of IFRS 10 on the reporting of its interests in VIEs and SPEs.

Case 9-4 LO2, 6

Tropical Juices Limited (Tropical) was incorporated under Canadian federal legislation two years ago as a 50:50 t venture of Citrus Growers Cooperative (Citrus) of the United States and Bottle Juices Corporation (Bottle) of Canada to sell Citrus’s juices in Canada. Excerpts from the t venture agreement are provided in Exhibit I. Both Citrus and Bottle produce and sell juices separately as well as through Tropical. One year ago the owners of Bottle sold all their shares in Bottle to Douglas Investments Limited (DIL). The contract of sale between DIL and the former shareholders of Bottle included representations and warranties with respect to Tropical. Excerpts from the sale contract are provided in Exhibit II. DIL required that representations and warranties about Tropical be written into the sale contract because Citrus and Bottle were still negotiating the ing

EXHIBIT I TROPICAL JUICES LIMITED EXCERPTS FROM THE T VENTURE AGREEMENT Citrus shall provide the following to Tropical: • • • •

Blending formula and drink recipes Brand names Ongoing supply of juice concentrates Advertising in Canada

Bottle shall provide the following to Tropical on an ongoing basis: • Capital equipment and personnel needed to process the juice at their existing premises • Returnable bottles supply • Processing and distribution of the juice Citrus and Bottle shall share equally in the net income of Tropical, after specific charges are made to Tropical for services provided by Citrus and Bottle. The specific charges are as follows: 1. 2.

Bottle is allowed to charge Tropical 1% per year on the capital investment in assets needed to process, bottle, and distribute the juices. Both Bottle and Citrus are permitted to charge Tropical for a. Disbursements they make on behalf of Tropical, and b. Reasonable charges for istrative and other allocations of t costs incurred on behalf of Tropical juices and their own juices.

3.

Citrus is permitted to charge fair value for all juice concentrates provided to Tropical.

Citrus and Bottle shall help market Tropical juices, although Tropical shall have primary responsibility for selling its own juices. Citrus and Bottle shall allocate to Tropical its proportionate share of any revenue from sales that consist of both Tropical juices and their own juices.


549


CHAPTER 9


541

EXHIBIT II BOTTLE JUICES CORPORATION EXCERPTS FROM THE SALE CONTRACT The following , representations, and warranties are made with respect to Tropical: 1.

2. 3.

4.

DIL is entitled to one-half of the net income of Tropical commencing with the second year of operations, which ends on June 30, Year 2. One-half of the net income of Tropical for the first year of operations shall be paid to the former shareholders of Bottle. Bottle warrants that the total revenue will not be less than $3.3 million for each of the years ended June 30, Years 2 and 3. Bottle warrants that operating expenses excluding depreciation, interest, and imputed charges shall not exceed $1.76 million for each of the years ended June 30, Years 2 and 3. Bottle warrants that depreciation, interest, and imputed charges shall not exceed, for each of the years ended June 30, the following amounts: Year 2 Year 3

5. 6.

$605,000 550,000

All computations are to be in accordance with generally accepted ing principles for private enterprises. If the representations and warranties are not fulfilled, then DIL shall be fully compensated for its portion of the amount of the deficiency.

policies to be used by Tropical. The selection of ing policies is still not resolved, and the two parties cannot come to an agreement. Draft financial statements for Tropical for the years ended June 30, Year 1, and June 30, Year 2, were prepared, based on the ing policies selected by Bottle’s controller. For the second year, the results were as follows: Revenue Operating expenses, excluding depreciation, interest, and imputed charges Depreciation, interest, and imputed charges

$2,959,000 2,128,500 643,500

The t venture agreement between Citrus and Bottle permits the appointment of an arbitrator to resolve disputes over ing policies. Your firm has been appointed arbitrator and has been asked by all three parties (owners of Citrus and present and previous owners of Bottle) to submit a report containing binding decisions on all matters of contention. Each decision in this arbitration report must be ed by sound reasoning so that each party can fully understand the decisions. You, the CA, have been asked to prepare the arbitration report. You interview each of the parties and are told the following: Comments of Citrus 1. “We disagree with Bottle’s charge for the cost of returnable bottles. It charged the entire cost of the bottles (which it owns) to the first year in Tropical even though the bottles have a life of 20 to 25 months.” 2. “Bottle had to purchase new machinery for bottling Tropical juices because a different shape of bottle is used. It borrowed the necessary funds and charged the interest to Tropical. We reject this charge.”


550


542

CHAPTER 9


3. “Bottle spent $360,800 training its employees to manufacture and sell Tropical juices. We disagree with this sum being expensed and charged to Tropical in the first year.” 4. “Bottle charged Tropical 16% on the capital investment being used to produce Tropical juices. We agree with the 16%, but we do not agree with the 16% being applied from the date that the first Tropical juices were produced.” 5. “Bottle charged Tropical fair value for the computer services it provided. We believe that Bottle should have charged Tropical for these services at cost.” 6. “Bottle had a three-week strike. When the strike was over, Bottle produced its own juices to replenish its own inventory, and did not produce Tropical juices for almost one month. We believe that Tropical should be credited in the first year for imputed gross profits during the months after the strike.” Comments of Previous Owners of Bottle 7. “Tropical has benefited from Citrus’s advertising of the Citrus brand names in the United States. Citrus has charged Tropical for this advertising using the ratio of the Canadian population reached by the U.S. television-advertising signal to the combined Canadian and U.S. populations reached by the signal. In our opinion, this does not make sense.” 8. “We understand that Citrus is complaining that we were charging proportionate repair costs for the machinery and equipment being used to produce Tropical juices and our own juices. We consider this to be an appropriate charge.” 9. “We charged Tropical on the basis of our costs of producing Tropical juices. Citrus objects to our use of full absorption costing even though this was the method we used for our financial statements.” Comments of DIL 10. “After completing the purchase of Bottle, we discovered that Bottle’s management had been manipulating the profits between years.” 11. “Tropical sells large quantities of juices to distributors who pay Tropical only when the juices are resold. However, Tropical has recorded revenue when the juices are shipped to the distributors. We disagree with this practice.” 12. “Citrus bought a new refrigerated tanker truck in the second year to deliver bulk concentrates to Tropical. It is charging the cost to Tropical at one-third per year, commencing in the second year. We disagree with this approach.” 13. “Citrus charges interest to Tropical on the receivable from Tropical. We disagree.”


Case 9-5 LO4

Segment reporting can provide useful information for investors and competitors. Segment disclosures can result in competitive harm for the company making the disclosures. By analyzing segment information, potential competitors can identify and concentrate on the more successful areas of a disclosing company’s business.


CHAPTER 9


551

543

Indeed, the IASB recognizes that competitive harm is an issue of concern for companies disclosing segment information. In developing IFRS 8, the IASB considered giving, but ultimately decided not to give, companies an exemption from providing segment information if they believed that doing so would result in competitive harm. The IASB believed that such an exemption would be inappropriate because it would provide a means for broad non-compliance with the new standard. IFRS 8 requires disclosures to be provided by country when revenues or longlived assets in an individual country are material. However, IFRS 8 does not specify what is material for this purpose but leaves this to management judgment. Some commentators have expressed a concern that firms might use high materiality thresholds to avoid making individual country disclosures, perhaps to avoid potential competitive harm.

Required: What factors might a company consider in determining whether an individual foreign country is material to its operations? Should the IASB establish a percentage test to determine when an individual country is material?

Case 9-6 LO2, 6

Pluto Technology Venture (PTV) is an unincorporated t venture with three current owners. A few other prospective owners are awaiting an opportunity to invest in PTV. PTV was organized three months ago to combine the knowledge, assets, and finances of a group of organizations that specialize in computer graphics and animation. One of the venturers, Flash Limited (FL), required a considerable infusion of cash to survive. FL transferred the assets and liabilities of one of its major operating divisions to PTV in exchange for PTV ownership units and cash. The second venturer, Bulge Capital Corporation (BCC), invested in PTV mainly by way of a cash contribution. The third venturer, Everest Properties Limited (EPL), contributed a building to house PTV’s main operations and also provided some office and istrative personnel. The three current owners have agreed that an unincorporated t venture is the appropriate form of organization for the next several years. The directors of PTV would like your firm to prepare a report that discusses all of the important ing issues. They would like specific recommendations as to how PTV should for its transactions, and explanations as to why the recommended ing is appropriate. In your meetings with various interested parties, you have learned the following: 1. Profits of PTV are to be divided in proportion to the number of ownership units that are held by each venturer. According to the Agreement Among Venturers: “Profits” are to be “all inclusive” for all activities of PTV. All inclusive is defined as profits from operations and from all changes in the valuation of assets and liabilities. In arriving at the profit, deductions are allowed for individual payments to the venturers for various services that they provide over and above the initial contribution to PTV. 2. Financial statements have to be provided each quarter to PTV’s banker. The banker and PTV have arranged a lending formula that is closely linked to two PTV measurements: quarterly and annual cash flow, and the fair market value of PTV’s assets less liabilities.


552


544

CHAPTER 9


3. The financial statements are to be used in part to set the prices that are to be paid to PTV for any new t venture units. 4. PTV develops software for specific clients and develops software products that it sells to the general educational market. Software that is developed for specific clients tends to be on a cost-plus basis, whereby PTV is paid 60–120 days after successful completion of each phase of the software. Different clients specify different definitions of cost. PTV carries the costs on its books as work in progress until clients are invoiced. FL has been granted non-exclusive marketing rights to some of PTV’s educational products. FL may sell the products in specified regions at prices that it deems appropriate. FL is entitled to a 20% discount from the price that other distributors have to pay. 5. The identifiable assets and liabilities of FL initially contributed to PTV were (in thousands of dollars): Book Value Receivables Inventory Prepaid expenses Equipment Accumulated amortization Software under development Liabilities

$ 340 915 60 6,410 (3,830) 100 (605) $3,390

Fair Market Value $ 310 735 60 6,100 1,500 (605) $8,100

The assets and liabilities were assigned a value of $8.8 million. In exchange, FL was given a 30% interest in PTV and $2.2 million in cash. 6. BCC invested $8.8 million in cash, in exchange for a 40% interest in PTV. In addition, BCC loaned $2 million to PTV at 5% interest. The market rate of interest is currently 8%. 7. EPL received a 30% interest in PTV in exchange for a building that was recorded on its books at $4.9 million (cost $6 million and accumulated depreciation of $1.1 million). EPL also rents space in another building to PTV at an amount below fair market value. 8. EPL has signed a “management agreement” with PTV to perform management services until PTV grows to the point where it needs its own management team. EPL is allowed under the agreement to charge for its services at cost plus 25%. The agreement also covers the use of equipment by PTV. PTV can either rent the equipment or rent with an option to purchase, at specified rates and amounts. 9. One prospective t venturer has loaned PTV $1 million at the market rate of interest for a period of one year. After one year, the prospective venturer is permitted to acquire a 10% interest in PTV at its fair market value. At that time, the prospective venturer must pay the balance of the purchase price or forgo the $1 million. 10. PTV is in the process of renovating the building. The value of the building is expected to rise because of the renovations and because of general economic conditions.


553


CHAPTER 9


545

11. PTV leases computers and equipment under a three-year contract. Since PTV signed the lease, prices have dropped by 30%, and a further drop is possible. 12. Competition in the industry has been very aggressive in recent months and is expected to persist. Costs of inputs can fluctuate significantly. The selling prices of finished goods can also fluctuate significantly. 13. PTV has invested some of the cash that was received from the current and prospective t venturers in short-term, high-yielding bonds. 14. PTV has begun to conduct t projects with other organizations and has contributed about $320,000 to date to developing specialized computer graphics packages. 15. Last week PTV signed a two-year contract with a film company to develop animation materials. The contract should generate revenue of $10 million to $14 million.



Pharma Company (Pharma) is a pharmaceutical company operating in Winnipeg. It is developing a new drug for treating multiple sclerosis (MS). On January 1, Year 3, Benefit Ltd. (Benefit) signed an agreement to guarantee the debt of Pharma and guarantee a specified rate of return to the common shareholders. In return, Benefit will obtain the residual profits of Pharma. After extensive analysis, it has been determined that Pharma is a variable interest entity and Benefit is its primary beneficiary. The balance sheets (in millions) of Benefit and Pharma on January 1, Year 3, were as follows: Benefit

Pharma

Carrying amount

Carrying amount

Fair value

Current assets Property, plant, and equipment Intangible assets

$250 400 50 $700

$ 50 80 20 $150

$ 50 90 70 $210


$145 325 10 220 $700

$ 60 120 1 (31) $150

$ 60 125

An independent appraiser determined the fair values of Pharma’s non-current assets. The appraiser was quite confident with the appraised value for the property, plant, and equipment but had some reservations in putting a specific value on the intangible assets.


554


546

CHAPTER 9


Required: Prepare a consolidated balance sheet at January 1, Year 3, assuming that the agreement between Benefit and Pharma established the following fair values for the common shares of Pharma: (a) $25 (b) $20 (c) $35

Problem 9-2 LO3

Leighton Corp. has just acquired 100% of the voting shares of Knightbridge Inc. and is now preparing the financial data needed to consolidate this new subsidiary. Leighton paid $700,000 for its investment. Details of all of Knightbridge’s assets and liabilities on acquisition date were as follows:

Land Buildings Equipment Inventory Instalment s receivable Trade liabilities

Fair value

Tax base

$100,000 180,000 200,000 150,000 120,000 240,000

$100,000 110,000 130,000 150,000 –0– 240,000

Required: Determine the amounts that will be used to prepare a consolidated statement of financial position on the date of acquisition, assuming that Knightbridge’s tax rate is 45%. Knightbridge has not set up deferred tax amounts for any of its assets or liabilities.

Problem 9-3 LO1

On December 31, Year 4, Russell Inc. invested $20,000 in Charger Corp. Prior to this Russell had no interest in Charger. Upon review of the documentation related to Russell’s investment, the controller of Russell determined that Charger is a variable interest entity and Russell is its primary beneficiary. Immediately after Russell’s investment, Charger Corp. prepared the following balance sheet: Cash Marketing software Computer equipment

$ 20,000 140,000 40,000 $200,000

Long-term debt Russell equity interest Non-controlling interest

$120,000 20,000 60,000 $200,000

Each of the above amounts represents the fair value at December 31, Year 4, except for marketing software. Charger Corp. is carrying on a business.

Required: (a) If the marketing software was undervalued by $20,000, what reported amounts for Charger’s financial statement items would appear in Russell’s December 31, Year 4, consolidated balance sheet? (b) If the marketing software was overvalued by $20,000, what reported amounts for Charger’s financial statement items would appear in Russell’s December 31, Year 4, consolidated balance sheet? (c) Calculate goodwill and non-controlling interest for part (b) under parent company extension theory.


555


CHAPTER 9

Problem 9-4 LO3


547

On January 1, Year 5, AB Company (AB) purchased 80% of the outstanding common shares of Dandy Limited (Dandy) for $8,000. On that date, Dandy’s shareholders’ equity consisted of common shares of $1,000 and retained earnings of $6,000. In negotiating the purchase price at the date of acquisition, it was agreed that the fair values of all of Dandy’s assets and liabilities were equal to their carrying amounts and tax base except for the following:

Equipment

Fair value

Carrying value

Tax base

$950

$700

$600

Dandy has recorded deferred income taxes on its separate-entity balance sheet on all temporary differences. Dandy had a loss carry-forward of $800 as at December 31, Year 4. This carry-forward can be applied against taxable income in the future. Dandy did not previously recognize the benefit of the carry-forward because it was not sure whether it would earn $800 in taxable income in the future. Now that AB controls Dandy, AB is sure that Dandy will be able to utilize the loss carry-forwards because AB will transfer income-earning assets to Dandy if necessary to generate taxable income in Dandy. AB plans to utilize these loss carry-forwards as soon as possible. Both companies use the straight-line method for amortizing their property, plant, and equipment and pay taxes at a rate of 40%. Dandy’s equipment had a remaining useful life of 10 years at the date of acquisition. Dandy reported income before application of any loss carry-forwards as follows for the first three years after being acquired by AB: Year Year 5 Year 6 Year 7

Net income $ 0 100 200

Required: (a) Calculate goodwill at the date of acquisition. Be sure to consider the deferred tax implications on the acquisition differential. (b) Calculate non-controlling interest at the date of acquisition. (c) Prepare a schedule to show the amortization of the acquisition differential for the three-year period ending December 31, Year 7. Assume that the goodwill impairment loss was $300 in Year 6, the deferred income tax liability is amortized at the same rate as the equipment, and the loss carry-forwards are applied against income as the income is earned. (d) Explain why the acquisition differential related to the equipment gives rise to a deferred income tax liability.

Problem 9-5 LO3

On January 1, Year 1, Green Inc. purchased 100% of the common shares of Mansford Corp. for $335,000. Green’s balance sheet data on this date just prior to this acquisition were as follows: Cash s receivable Inventory

Book value

Tax base

$ 340,000 167,200 274,120

$ 340,000 –0– 274,120

(continued)


556


548

CHAPTER 9


Book value

Tax base

Land Buildings (net) Equipment (net)

325,000 250,000 79,000 $1,435,320

325,000 150,000 46,200 $1,135,320

Current liabilities Deferred tax liability Non-current liabilities Common shares Retained earnings

$ 133,000 120,000 — 380,000 802,320 $1,435,320

$ 133,000 —

The balance sheet and other related data for Mansford are as follows: MANSFORD CORP.—BALANCE SHEET at January 1, Year 1 Book value

Fair value

Tax base

Cash s receivable Inventory Land Buildings (net) Equipment (net)

$ 52,500 61,450 110,000 75,000 21,000 17,000 $336,950

$ 52,500 61,450 134,000 210,000 24,000 16,000 $497,950

$ 52,500 61,450 110,000 75,000 15,000 12,000 $325,950

Current liabilities Non-current liabilities Deferred tax liability Common shares Retained earnings

$ 41,115 150,000 4,400 100,000 41,435 $336,950

$ 41,115 155,000

$ 41,115 150,000 —

Additional Information • As at January 1, Year 1, the estimated useful lives of the building and equipment were 15 years and 4 years, respectively, and the term to maturity was 10 years for the non-current liabilities. • There has been no goodwill impairment since the date of acquisition. • For both companies, the income tax rate is 40%. Deferred income taxes are recognized on the consolidated financial statement pertaining to the temporary differences arising from the acquisition differential.

Required: (a) Prepare a consolidated balance sheet at January 1, Year 1. (b) Prepare a schedule of amortization/impairment of the acquisition differential for the period from January 1, Year 1, to December 31, Year 4.

Problem 9-6 LO3

Assume that all of the facts in Problem 5 remain unchanged except that Green paid $201,000 for 60% of the voting shares of Mansford.


557


CHAPTER 9


549

Required: (a) Prepare a consolidated balance sheet at January 1, Year 1. (b) Calculate goodwill and non-controlling interest under parent company extension theory. (c) Explain how the definition of a liability s the recognition of a deferred income tax liability when a parent purchases shares in a subsidiary and the fair values of the subsidiary’s identifiable net assets are greater than their carrying amounts.

Problem 9-7 LO1

The statements of financial position of Prime Inc. and Variable Ltd. on December 31, Year 11, were as follows: Prime Land Manufacturing facility Accumulated depreciation s receivable Cash Ordinary shares Retained earnings Long-term debt Current liabilities

Variable Ltd.

Carrying amount

Carrying amount

Fair value

$ 400,000 1,050,000 (300,000) 250,000 200,000 $1,600,000

$ 80,000 520,000 (200,000) 50,000

$200,000 300,000

$450,000

$550,000

$

$ 10,000 90,000 290,000 60,000 $450,000

50,000 750,000 525,000 275,000 $1,600,000

50,000

$280,000 60,000

Variable’s manufacturing facility is old and very costly to operate. For the year ended December 31, Year 11, the company lost money for the first time in its history. Variable does not have the financial ability to refurbish the plant. It must either cease operations or find a partner to carry on operations. On January 1, Year 12, Prime agreed to provide an interest-free loan of $200,000 to Variable on the following and conditions: • Prime Inc. would be hired by Variable to refurbish the manufacturing facility at a fixed cost of $200,000 and would be retained to manage the business. • Prime Inc. would have full authority to make all major operating, investing, and financing decisions related to Variable. • The ordinary shares of Variable were valued at $208,000 as at January 1, Year 12. Prime has the option to buy the shares of Variable at any time after January 1, Year 17, at $208,000 plus any dividends in arrears. • The existing shareholders of Variable would be guaranteed a cumulative dividend of 8% a year on the value of their shares. Prime would receive the residual profits after the dividends were paid to the ordinary shareholders. Variable earned income of $200,000 and paid dividends of $50,000 over the five-year period ended December 31, Year 16. The statements of financial


558


550

CHAPTER 9


position of Prime Inc. and Variable Ltd. on December 31, Year 16 were as follows: Prime

Variable

Land Manufacturing facility s receivable Cash

$ 400,000 650,000 275,000 20,000 $1,345,000

$ 80,000 260,000 70,000 180,000 $590,000


$

$ 10,000 240,000 290,000 50,000 $590,000

50,000 660,000 450,000 185,000 $1,345,000

Assume that Variable is a variable interest entity and Prime is the primary beneficiary. The manufacturing facility had an estimated remaining useful life of 10 years as at January 1, Year 12. The long-term debt matures on December 31, Year 21. Prior to Year 12, Prime had no business relations with Variable.

Required: (a) Calculate consolidated retained earnings at December 31, Year 16. (b) Prepare a consolidated statement of financial position for Prime at December 31, Year 16. (c) Use the definition of a liability to explain the rationale for including the liabilities of the variable interest entity on the consolidated statement of financial position for the primary beneficiary.

Problem 9-8 LO4

The following information has been assembled about Casbar Corp. as at December 31, Year 5 (amounts are in thousands): Operating segment

Revenues

Profit

Assets

A B C D E F

$12,000 9,600 7,200 3,600 5,100 1,800

$3,100 2,680 (1,440) 660 810 (270)

$24,000 21,000 15,000 9,000 8,400 3,600

Required: Determine which operating segments require separate disclosures.

Problem 9-9

The following are the December 31, Year 9, balance sheets of three related companies:

LO2, 6

Pro Ltd. Cash s receivable Inventory Investment in Forma Corp.—at cost Investment in Apex Inc.—at cost

$

70,000 210,000 100,000 416,000 150,000

Forma Corp.

Apex Inc.

$ 1,500 90,000 62,500 — —

$200,000 110,000 70,000 — —

(continued)


559


CHAPTER 9


551

Pro Ltd.

Forma Corp.

Apex Inc.

Land Plant and equipment Accumulated depreciation

100,000 636,000 (185,000) $ 1,497,000

110,000 550,000 (329,000) $485,000

60,000 290,000 (60,000) $670,000

s payable Bonds payable Common shares $12 preferred shares Retained earnings

$ 175,000 312,000 800,000 — 210,000 $ 1,497,000

$ 90,000 — 100,000 200,000 95,000 $485,000

$130,000 — 500,000 — 40,000 $670,000

Additional Information • On January 1, Year 5, Pro purchased 40% of Forma for $116,000. On that date, Forma’s shareholders’ equity was as follows: Common shares Retained earnings

$100,000 80,000 $180,000

All of the identifiable net assets of Forma had fair values equal to carrying amounts except for the following, for which fair values exceeded carrying amounts as follows: Inventory Plant and equipment

$20,000 50,000

• One of Forma’s products, the Epod, was unique in the market place and was a hot seller. Forma could not produce this product fast enough to meet the customer demand. The order backlog would take more than 6 months to complete. An independent appraiser valued the order backlog at $40,000 at the date of acquisition. • On September 30, Year 7, Pro purchased the remaining 60% of Forma for $300,000. On that date, Forma’s shareholders’ equity was as follows: Common shares Retained earnings

$100,000 110,000 $210,000

On this date, the following net assets of Forma were undervalued by the amounts shown: Inventory Land Plant and equipment

$10,000 60,000 70,000

• For consolidation purposes, any acquisition differential allocated to plant and equipment is amortized over 20 years from each date of acquisition. A goodwill impairment loss amounting to $2,025 was recorded in Year 8. • During Year 8, Forma issued 2,000 cumulative, $12, no-par-value preferred shares. Pro did not acquire any of these shares.


560


552

CHAPTER 9


• The inventories of Pro contained intercompany profits from items purchased from Forma in the following amounts: December 31, Year 8 December 31, Year 9

$40,000 45,000

• During Year 9, Pro and two other unrelated companies formed Apex, which is a t venture. Pro invested $150,000 cash for its 30% interest in Apex. • The year-end inventories of Apex contained a $12,000 intercompany profit from items purchased from Pro since its formation in Year 9. • Forma paid dividends in all years prior to Year 9. • On December 31, Year 9, the s receivable of Pro contained the following: Receivable from Forma Receivable from Apex

$13,000 40,000

• Use income tax allocation at a 40% rate as it applies to unrealized profits only. Ignore deferred income taxes on the acquisition differential.

Required: (a) Prepare the Year 9 consolidated balance sheet assuming that (i) Pro is a public company and reports its investment in Apex using the equity method; and *(ii) Pro is a private company and reports its investment in Apex using proportionate consolidation. *(b) Calculate the current ratio for each of the balance sheets in Part (a). Which reporting method presents the strongest liquidity position? Briefly explain.

Problem 9-10

The following are the Year 9 income statements of Kent Corp. and Laurier Ltd.

LO2, 6 INCOME STATEMENTS for the Year Ended December 31, Year 9 Sales Other income Gain on sale of land Cost of sales Selling and istrative expenses Other expenses Income tax Net income

Kent

Laurier

$3,000,000 200,000 — 3,200,000 1,400,000 500,000 100,000 400,000 2,400,000 $ 800,000

$1,200,000 70,000 100,000 1,370,000 560,000 300,000 130,000 150,000 1,140,000 $ 230,000

Additional Information • Kent acquired its 40% interest in the common shares of Laurier in Year 3 at a cost of $825,000 and uses the cost method to for its investment for internal record keeping.


CHAPTER 9


561

553

• The acquisition-differential amortization schedule pertaining to Kent’s 40% interest showed the following write-off for Year 9: Buildings Goodwill impairment loss Long-term liabilities Acquisition-differential amortization—Year 9

$9,000 13,000 22,000 12,500 $9,500

• Depreciation expense and goodwill impairment loss are included with selling and istrative expenses. • In Year 9, rent amounting to $125,000 was paid by Laurier to Kent. Kent has recorded this as other income. • In Year 6, Kent sold land to Laurier and recorded a profit of $75,000 on the transaction. During Year 9, Laurier sold 30% of the land to an unrelated land development company. • During Year 9, Laurier paid dividends totalling $80,000. • It has been established that Kent’s 40% interest would not be considered control in accordance with IFRSs. • Assume a 40% tax rate.

Required: (a) Assume that Kent is a public company and Laurier is a t venture that is owned by Kent and two other unrelated venturers. Also assume that Kent acquired its interest after Laurier’s initial formation, and that the acquisition differentials are therefore valid. Prepare the income statement of Kent for Year 9 using the equity method (show all calculations). *(b) Assume that Kent is a private company and Laurier is a t venture. Prepare Kent’s consolidated income statement for Year 9 using proportionate consolidation. (Show all calculations.)

Problem 9-11 LO2

Albert Company has an investment in the voting shares of Prince Ltd. On December 31, Year 5, Prince reported a net income of $860,000 and declared dividends of $200,000. During Year 5, Albert had sales to Prince of $915,000, and Prince had sales to Albert of $500,000. On December 31, Year 5, the inventory of Albert contained an after-tax intercompany profit of $40,000, and the inventory of Prince contained an after-tax intercompany profit of $72,000. On January 1, Year 4, Albert sold equipment to Prince and recorded an aftertax profit of $120,000 on the transaction. The equipment had a remaining useful life of five years on this date. Albert uses the equity method to for its investment in Prince.

Required: Prepare Albert’s Year 5 equity method journal entries under each of the following two assumptions: (a) Albert owns 64% of Prince, and Prince is a subsidiary. (b) Albert owns 30% of Prince, and Prince is a t venture.


562


554

CHAPTER 9


Problem 9-12 LO2

On January 1, Year 1, Amco Ltd. and Newstar Inc. formed Bearcat Resources, a t venture. Newstar contributed miscellaneous assets with a fair value of $825,000 for a 60% interest in the venture. Amco contributed plant and equipment with a carrying amount of $300,000 and a fair value of $1,000,000 and received a 40% interest in the venture plus $450,000 in cash. On December 31, Year 1, Bearcat reported a profit of $180,000 and declared a dividend of $75,000. Amco has a December 31 year-end and will for its 40% interest using the equity method. (Assume a 20-year useful life for the plant and equipment.)

Required: (a) Assume that the miscellaneous assets contributed by Newstar included cash of $450,000. Also, assume that the transaction had commercial substance when Amco transferred the plant and equipment to the t venture. Prepare Amco’s Year 1 journal entries. (b) Assume that there was no cash in the assets contributed by Newstar and that the cash received by Amco had been borrowed by Bearcat. Also, assume that the transaction did not have commercial substance when Amco transferred the plant and equipment to the t venture. Prepare Amco’s Year 1 journal entries.

Problem 9-13

The following are the Year 9 income statements of Poker Inc. and Joker Company:

LO2 INCOME STATEMENTS for the Year Ended December 31, Year 9 Sales Other income Gain on sale of trademark Cost of goods sold Selling and istrative expenses Other expenses Income before income taxes Income taxes Profit

Poker

Joker

$1,000,000 200,000 — 1,200,000 600,000 200,000 50,000 850,000 350,000 105,000 $ 245,000

$800,000 110,000 40,000 950,000 550,000 150,000 40,000 740,000 210,000 63,000 $147,000

Additional Information • Poker acquired a 60% interest in the common shares of Joker on January 1, Year 4, at a cost of $420,000 and uses the cost method to for its investment. At that time, Joker’s carrying amount of shareholders’ equity was $600,000 and the fair value of each of its assets and liabilities equalled carrying amount except for equipment, which had a fair value of $100,000 in excess of carrying amount and an estimated remaining useful life of 10 years. • In Year 9, Joker paid a management fee of $50,000 to Poker. Poker recorded this as other income. • In Year 5, Poker sold two trademarks with an indefinite life to Joker and recorded a total gain on sale of $60,000 ($30,000 for each trademark). During Year 9, Joker sold one of these trademarks to an unrelated company for a gain of $40,000.


563


CHAPTER 9


555

• Depreciation expense is included with selling and istrative expenses. • During Year 9, Joker declared and paid dividends totalling $200,000. • The income tax rate is 30% for both companies.

Required: (a) Assume that Joker is a t venture that is tly owned by Poker and several unrelated venturers, and that Poker uses the equity method to report its investment. Prepare Poker’s income statement for the year ended December 31, Year 9. (b) Assume that Joker is not a t venture and, furthermore, that Poker’s longterm investment provides it with control over Joker. Prepare Poker’s consolidated income statement for the year ended December 31, Year 9.

Problem 9-14 LO2

Jager Ltd., a t venture, was formed on January 1, Year 3. Clifford Corp., one of the three founding venturers, invested equipment for a 40% interest in the t venture. The other two venturers invested land and cash for their 60% equity. All of the venturers agreed that the equipment had a fair value of $2,000,000, and a remaining useful life of approximately eight years. Clifford had acquired this equipment two years ago, and the carrying amount on Clifford’s records on January 1 Year 3 was $1,800,000. Clifford recorded its investment in the t venture at $2,000,000. On December 31, Year 3, Jager recorded a net income of $200,000. Clifford uses the equity method to record its investment.

Required: (a) Assume that the transaction did not have commercial substance when Clifford transferred the equipment to the t venture. Prepare Clifford’s Year 3 journal entries. (b) Assume Clifford had received a 40% interest and $1,000,000 in cash in return for investing this equipment in the venture. Also assume that the other venturers contributed cash in excess of $1,000,000 for their ownership interests, and that the transaction did not have commercial substance when Clifford transferred the equipment to the t venture. Prepare Clifford’s Year 3 journal entries.

Problem 9-15 LO2, 5

The following balance sheets have been prepared as at December 31, Year 5, for Kay Corp. and Adams Co. Ltd.: Kay

Adams

Cash s receivable Inventory Property and plant Investment in Adams

$

60,000 80,000 600,000 1,400,000 360,000 $2,500,000

$

30,000 170,000 400,000 900,000 — $1,500,000

Current liabilities Bonds payable Common shares Retained earnings

$ 400,000 500,000 900,000 700,000 $2,500,000

$ 150,000 600,000 450,000 300,000 $1,500,000


564


556

CHAPTER 9


Additional Information • Kay acquired its 40% interest in Adams for $360,000 in Year 1, when Adams’s retained earnings amounted to $170,000. The acquisition differential on that date was fully amortized by the end of Year 5. • In Year 4, Kay sold land to Adams and recorded a gain of $60,000 on the transaction. Adams is still using this land. • The December 31, Year 5, inventory of Kay contained a profit recorded by Adams amounting to $35,000. • On December 31, Year 5, Adams owes Kay $29,000. • Kay has used the cost method to for its investment in Adams. • Use income tax allocation at a rate of 40%, but ignore income tax on the acquisition differential.

Required: (a) Prepare three separate balance sheets for Kay as at December 31, Year 5, assuming that the investment in Adams is a (i) control investment; *(ii) t venture investment, and is reported using proportionate consolidation; and (iii) significant influence investment. (b) Calculate the debt-to-equity ratio for each of the balance sheets in Part (a). Which reporting method presents the strongest position from a solvency point of view? Briefly explain.

WEB-BASED P ROBLEMS Web Problem 9-1 LO1, 2, 3, 5

Access the 2012 consolidated financial statements for Empire Company Limited by going to the investor relations section of the company’s website. Answer the questions below. For each question, indicate where in the financial statements you found the answer, and/or provide a brief explanation. (a) How does the company report its interest in companies it controls through means other than majority share ownership? (b) What impact does the consolidation of special-purpose entities or variable interest entities have on the company’s debt-to-equity ratio? (c) What percentage of the company’s net income is derived from investments in tly controlled entities? (d) What percentage of the company’s assets is through investments in tly controlled entities? (e) Until 2013, tly controlled entities could be reported using proportionate consolidation or the equity method. What method of reporting did the company use in the current year? If it had used the other method, what would have been the impact on its debt-to-equity ratio and returnon-equity ratio? Briefly explain. (f) How would a bank change its assessment of the risk and solvency of the company based on the change in the debt-to-equity ratio?


CHAPTER 9


565

557

(g) What were the statutory and effective tax rates on income from continuing operations? Identify the two biggest factors that caused these two rates to be different. (h) What amount of deferred income tax was recorded as part of the ing for the main business acquisition during the year, and how did this affect the amount allocated to goodwill?

Web Problem 9-2 LO1, 2, 3, 5


Access the 2012 consolidated financial statements for CAE Inc. by going to the investor relations section of the company’s website. Answer the same questions as in Problem 1. For each question, indicate where in the financial statements you found the answer, and/or provide a brief explanation. (Some questions may not be applicable.) Access the 2011 consolidated financial statements for Rogers Communications Inc. by going to the investor relations section of the company’s website. Answer the questions below. For each question, indicate where in the financial statements you found the answer, and/or provide a brief explanation. (a) Are the company’s operating segments based on product lines, geographical areas, or some other factor? (b) Does the company provide disclosures about major customers? If so, what is the nature of the disclosure? (c) Which of the operating segments is the biggest in of revenues? (d) Which of the operating segments reported the highest percentage of growth in revenues from the previous year and what was that percentage? Based on this growth rate, approximately how many years will it take for the sales of this segment to double? (e) Which of the operating segments is the biggest in of profit? (f) Which of the operating segments reported the highest percentage of growth in profit margin from the previous year? (g) Which of the operating segments is the biggest in of assets? (h) Which of the operating segments reported the highest percentage of growth in return on assets from the previous year?


Access the 2011 consolidated financial statements for Barrick Gold Corporation by going to the investor relations section of the company’s website. Answer the same questions as in Problem 3. For each question, indicate where in the financial statements you found the answer, and/or provide a brief explanation. (Some questions may not be applicable.)



566


10 chapter

Foreign Currency Transactions

learning objectives After studying this chapter, you should be able to do the following: LO1 Translate foreign currency transactions and balances into the functional currency. LO2 Prepare journal entries and subsequent financial statement presentation for forward exchange contracts that are entered into for speculative purposes. LO3 Describe the concept of hedging and prepare a list of items that could be used as a hedge against foreign currency risk. LO4 Prepare journal entries and subsequent financial statement presentation for forward exchange contracts that hedge existing monetary positions. LO5 Prepare journal entries and subsequent financial statement presentation for

forward exchange contracts that hedge firm commitments. LO6 Prepare journal entries and subsequent financial statement presentation for forward exchange contracts that hedge highly probable future transactions. LO7 Analyze and interpret financial statements involving foreign currency transactions and forward contracts. LO8 Identify some of the differences between IFRSs and ASPE involving foreign currency transactions and hedging. LO9 Incorporate the time value of money when determining the fair value of a forward contract.

INTRODUCTION

Many Canadian companies enter into foreign currency– denominated transactions.

558

Many Canadian companies conduct business in foreign countries as well as in Canada. For some companies, foreign business simply means purchasing products and services from foreign suppliers or selling products and services to foreign customers. Other companies go far beyond importing and exporting; they borrow and lend money in foreign markets and conduct business in foreign countries through sales offices, branches, subsidiaries, and t ventures. Bombardier Inc., a Canadian transportation company, in its 2011 annual report, reported export revenues of $17.1 billion, representing 93% of total revenues.1 No specific ing issues arise when the parties involved in an import or export transaction agree that the settlement will be in Canadian dollars. Because it is a Canadian-dollar–denominated transaction, the company will record the foreign purchase or sale in exactly the same manner as any domestic purchase or sale.


567


CHAPTER 10


In many situations, however, the agreement calls for the transaction to be settled in a foreign currency. This means one of two things: (a) the Canadian company will have to acquire foreign currency in order to discharge the obligations resulting from its imports, or (b) the Canadian company will receive foreign currency as a result of its exports and will have to sell it in order to receive Canadian dollars. Transactions such as these are called foreign currency–denominated transactions. As the foreign currency exchange rate fluctuates, so does the Canadian-dollar value of these foreign transactions. Companies often find it necessary to engage in some form of hedging activity to reduce losses arising from fluctuating exchange rates. The Bank of Nova Scotia uses derivative financial instruments to accommodate the risk management needs of its customers, for proprietary trading and asset/ liability management purposes. Derivative instruments designated as “asset/ liability management” are those used to manage the bank’s interest rate, foreign currency, and other exposures, which include instruments designated as hedges. At the end of fiscal year 2011, the Bank of Nova Scotia, Canada’s third-largest bank, had derivative financial instruments with a notional value of $2,542 billion.2 Aside from foreign currency risk, there are many other types of risk a company is exposed to and many different ways of hedging this risk. Bombardier used an innovative contract to increase sales by 38% in a past year. It offered buyers a $1,000 rebate on its snowmobiles if a pre-set amount of snow did not fall that season. The company was able to make such a guarantee by buying a weather derivative based on a snowfall index. When the season ended, the level of snowfall resulted in no payment received on the weather derivative. However, Bombardier did not have to pay any rebates to its customers either. Furthermore, the buyers purchased the snowmobiles earlier in the season because they did not wait for the snow to fall before making their purchase. This change led to a reduction in working-capital requirements (due to lower inventory-holding costs) and less strain on production capabilities. The company therefore benefited from lower costs as well as increased earnings. This chapter covers ing issues related to foreign currency transactions and foreign currency hedging activities. Chapter 11 deals with the translation of the financial statements of a foreign operation. To provide background for subsequent discussions, this chapter begins with a brief look at exchange rates.

559

Many tools and techniques are available to hedge against different kinds of risks.

CURRENCY EXCHANGE RATES Both the recording of foreign currency–denominated transactions and the translation of foreign currency financial statements require the use of currency exchange rates. An exchange rate is simply the price of one currency in of another currency. Exchange rates fluctuate on a continuous basis. Historically, governments have tried to stabilize rates between their currencies. Shortly after World War II, a group of the world’s major trading nations agreed to “peg” the rates at which their currencies would be exchanged in of U.S. dollars. Since these pegged rates stayed reasonably steady, the ing for foreign transactions was fairly simple. Differences in inflation rates and major changes in the balance of payments among the participating nations were contributing factors to the eventual demise of this agreement in the early 1970s. The end of pegged rates led to the present system, in which market forces determine exchange rates. This system of floating exchange rates is not totally

An exchange rate is the price to change one currency into another currency.


568


560

CHAPTER 10


market driven in the short term because governments often intervene in the market place to lessen the swings in the value of their currencies. It is not uncommon to hear that the Canadian dollar has weakened in relation to the U.S. dollar and the Bank of Canada has made massive purchases of Canadian dollars in order to soften the decline or that the U.S. Federal Reserve Bank and the central banks of other countries have intervened in the foreign currency markets by purchasing U.S. dollars because the U.S. dollar was declining in relation to other major currencies. Sometimes, interventions of this nature are fruitless, as was the case in 1994, when Mexico’s central bank abandoned its attempt to prop up the peso and allowed a substantial devaluation to take place.

Reasons for Fluctuating Exchange Rates Currencies trade in markets in such major cities as New York, London, Paris, and Tokyo, and transfers of enormous amounts of currency between countries can take place in a matter of seconds. The price of a currency will fluctuate in much the same manner as the price of any other commodity. There are many reasons why a country’s currency price changes, of which the major ones are the following: Exchange rates fluctuate over time due primarily to differences in inflation rates, interest rates, and trading practices between the two countries.

• Inflation rates. As a general rule, if country A has a higher rate of inflation than country B, the price of A’s currency will weaken relative to B’s. In a period of inflation, the purchasing power of a country’s currency declines. If this currency will not buy as much in goods as it did before, then neither will it buy as much currency of another country as it did before. • Interest rates. Higher interest rates attract foreign investment and in so doing drive up the price of the currency of the country with the higher interest rates. • Trade surpluses and deficits. As a country exports more than it imports, its currency strengthens and becomes worth more.

Exchange rates can be quoted directly or indirectly.

The direct method is the reciprocal of the indirect method.

The spot rate is the rate to exchange currency today, whereas the forward rate is the rate agreed to today for exchanging currency at a future date.

Exchange Rate Quotations

Exchange rates showing the value of the Canadian dollar in of other foreign currencies are quoted daily on the Internet and in many Canadian business newspapers. The amounts that usually appear are called direct quotations, which mean that the amounts represent the cost in Canadian dollars to purchase one unit of foreign currency. For example, a quotation of EUR1.00 5 CDN1.2883 means that it costs 1.2883 Canadian dollars to purchase one euro. An indirect quotation would state the cost in a foreign currency to purchase one Canadian dollar. For example, a quotation of CDN1.00 5 EUR0.7762 indicates that it costs 0.7762 euros to purchase one Canadian dollar. An indirect quotation can be obtained by computing the reciprocal of the direct quotation. Conversely, a direct quotation can be obtained by computing the reciprocal of the indirect quotation (1 4 1.2883 5 0.7762, and 1 4 0.7762 5 1.2883). Direct quotations are the most useful ones for recording transactions denominated in foreign currencies. Using the exchange rates quoted above, a Canadian company would record the purchase of €10,000 of inventory from a European supplier as $12,883. Examples of foreign exchange quotations on particular days in 2009 and 2012 for three countries’ currencies are shown in Exhibit 10.1. These rates represent the amount in Canadian dollars that a commercial bank would charge if it sold one unit of foreign currency to a major customer. The first rate quoted is called the spot rate. If a customer wanted to purchase 5,000 euros on the date in 2012 that


569


CHAPTER 10


561

EXHIBIT 10.1 FOREIGN EXCHANGE DIRECT QUOTATIONS

Country United States–spot rate 1 month forward 2 months forward 3 months forward 6 months forward 12 months forward

Currency

2009 CDN$ per unit

2012 CDN$ per unit

U.S. Dollar

1.0296 1.0296 1.0297 1.0297 1.0298 1.0315

1.0334 1.0340 1.0347 1.0354 1.0376 1.0420

European Union–spot rate 1 month forward 3 months forward 6 months forward 12 months forward

Euro

1.4805 1.4803 1.4802 1.4799 1.4802

1.2883 1.2894 1.2921 1.2960 1.3040

Japan–spot rate 1 month forward 3 months forward 6 months forward 12 months forward

Yen

0.011335 0.011337 0.011341 0.011351 0.011405

0.012999 0.012999 0.013000 0.013002 0.013007

Notice that the Canadian dollar increased relative to the euro from 2009 to 2012.

these rates were quoted, the cost would be $6,442 (5,000 3 1.2883). Note that if the bank were to purchase euros from the customer, the amount that it would pay the customer would be slightly less than the amount quoted per euro. The bank’s selling rate has to be greater than its purchasing rate if it is to make a profit dealing in foreign currencies. The forward rates quoted (one month forward, two months forward, etc.) are the rates for forward exchange contracts. A forward exchange contract is an agreement between a bank and a customer to exchange currencies on a specified future date at a specified rate. For example, when a bank enters into a forward exchange contract in 2012 with a customer to purchase 5,000 euros six months forward, the bank is committing itself to take delivery of this quantity of euros six months from this date, and to pay the customer $6,480 (5,000 3 1.2960) at that time. Of course, there is also a commitment on the part of the customer to sell 5,000 euros to the bank in six months’ time. The use of forward exchange contracts in hedging transactions will be illustrated later in this chapter.

ING FOR FOREIGN CURRENCY TRANSACTIONS

LO1

Before we deal with the detailed ing requirements for foreign currency transactions, it is important to note that currency issues can be discussed and analyzed from many different perspectives. For Chapters 10 and 11, we need to differentiate among the following perspectives: • Currency in which the transaction is denominated (denominated currency) • Currency in which the transaction is recorded in the internal ing records (recording currency or internal record-keeping currency)

We need to differentiate among the denominated, recording, functional, and presentation currencies.


570


562

CHAPTER 10


• Currency of the primary economic environment in which the entity operates (functional currency) • Currency in which the financial statements are presented by the reporting entity (presentation currency, which is commonly referred to as reporting currency)

A Canadian company would typically use the Canadian dollar as its recording and presentation currency.

All transactions must be translated to the functional currency of the reporting entity.

Exhibit 10.2 shows examples of how these different currency perspectives could exist for individual companies. The last line indicates the method used to translate from one currency to another in the order in which the currencies are translated. Company E will need to translate three different times. Up until now in this book, we have been dealing with Company A, where the Canadian dollar was the currency used for the four perspectives listed above. The transactions were denominated in Canadian dollars—that is, the invoices, agreements, cheques, and so on were written in Canadian dollars; the general ledger was maintained in Canadian dollars; the company operated in Canada; and the financial statements were presented in Canadian dollars. In this chapter, we deal with Company B-type situations where transactions are denominated in different currencies. We are then faced with deciding which currency should be used to record the transaction and which currency should be used when presenting the financial statements to external s. In Chapter 11, we will deal with Companies C, D, and E, where the recording currency is different from the functional and/or presentation currency. IAS 21 requires that individual transactions be translated into the functional currency of the reporting entity. In turn, IAS 21 states that an entity can present or report its financial statements in any currency it wants to use. Presumably, the entity will present its financial statements in the currency most useful to its s. Most Canadian companies will present their financial statements in Canadian dollars. However, some Canadian companies may present their financial statements in U.S. dollars, because many of the s of the financial statements will be American investors or creditors, or will be international investors or creditors who understand and monitor the U.S. dollar more easily and readily than the Canadian dollar.

EXHIBIT 10.2 EXAMPLES OF CURRENCY PERSPECTIVES Chapters 1–9 Chapter 10 Company type

Company A

Company B

Company C

Company D

Company E

Canada

Japan

Argentina

Canadian $

Various currencies

Various currencies

Various currencies

Various currencies

Canadian $

Canadian $ (1) Euro (1)

Yen (1)

Peso (1)

Canadian $

Canadian $

Canadian $ (2) Yen

Canadian $

Canadian $

Canadian $ (2) US $ (3)

(1) Temporal N/A

(1) Temporal (2) Temporal

(1) Temporal (1) Temporal (2) Current rate (2) Temporal (3) Current rate

Incorporated in Canada

Company E must translate from one currency to another currency three different times.

Transactions denominated in Transactions recorded in Functional currency Presentation currency

Chapter 11

Canadian $

Method used N/A for translation N/A

Canadian $ (2)


571


CHAPTER 10


IAS 21 defines functional currency as the currency of the primary economic environment in which the entity operates and foreign currency as any currency other than the functional currency of the entity. The primary economic environment is normally the one in which the entity primarily generates and expends cash. Exhibit 10.3 lists the indicators that should be considered when determining the functional currency and gives an example of a condition that would indicate that the Canadian dollar is or is not the functional currency. When the above indicators are mixed and the functional currency is not obvious, management uses its judgment to determine the functional currency that most faithfully represents the economic effects of the underlying transactions, events, and conditions. As part of this approach, management gives priority to indicators 1 and 2 before considering the others, which are designed to provide additional ing evidence to determine an entity’s functional currency. Professional judgment must be exercised in identifying the functional currency. In this chapter, we will assume, unless otherwise noted, that we are dealing with Company B, where the Canadian dollar is the recording currency, the functional currency, and the presentation currency. We will now focus on the issues associated with import/export transactions and foreign currency–denominated debt. ing problems arise when there are exchange rate changes between the date of a transaction and the eventual settlement in foreign currency. During this period, the company holds foreign currency– denominated monetary assets and liabilities, and questions arise as to how to measure these items if financial statements need to be prepared in the intervening period and what to do with any gains or losses that may result from such measurements. Monetary items are units of currency held and assets and liabilities to be received or paid in a fixed or determinable number of units of currency. s receivable and investments in bonds are some obvious examples of monetary assets; s payable and bond liabilities are monetary liabilities. A foreign currency–denominated monetary position is a net asset position if monetary assets exceed monetary liabilities or a net liability position if monetary liabilities exceed monetary assets.

563

In this chapter, the Canadian dollar is the recording, functional, and presentation currency.

A monetary item is converted into cash at a fixed and predetermined amount of currency.

EXHIBIT 10.3 INDICATORS FOR CHOOSING FUNCTIONAL CURRENCY Functional currency Indicator

Canadian dollar

Not Canadian dollar

1. Sales prices

Sales occur in Canada and are denominated in Canadian dollars.

2. Operating costs

Labour and materials are obtained in Canada and denominated in Canadian dollars. Competitors are Canadian, or company is listed on a Canadian exchange. Debt and equity instruments are issued in Canadian dollars. Excess cash is retained in Canadian dollars.

Sales occur in foreign countries and are not denominated in Canadian dollars. Labour and materials are obtained from foreign countries and are not denominated in Canadian dollars. Competition comes from foreign entities or companies listed on a foreign exchange. Debt and equity instruments are not issued in Canadian dollars. Excess cash is not retained in Canadian dollars.

3. Competition and regulation 4. Financing 5. Operating surpluses

The functional currency is the currency of the primary economic environment in which the entity operates.


572


564

CHAPTER 10

The historical rate is the rate on the date of the transaction, and the closing rate is the rate at the end of the reporting period.


Some not so obvious examples of monetary items are pensions and other employee benefits to be paid in cash, provisions that are to be settled in cash, and cash dividends that are recognized as a liability. Similarly, a contract to receive (or deliver) a variable number of the entity’s own equity instruments, or a variable amount of assets in which the fair value to be received (or delivered) equals a fixed or determinable number of units of currency, is a monetary item. Conversely, the essential feature of a non-monetary item is the absence of a right to receive (or an obligation to deliver) a fixed or determinable number of units of currency. Examples are amounts prepaid for goods and services (e.g., prepaid rent); goodwill; intangible assets; inventories; property, plant, and equipment; deferred income taxes; and provisions that are to be settled by the delivery of a non-monetary asset.3 For ing purposes, there are basically three rates used in translating foreign currency into the reporting currency: the closing rate, the historical rate, and the forward rate. The spot rate at the end of the reporting period of the financial statements is called the closing rate. The spot rate on the date of a transaction is called the historical rate for that transaction. The agreed rate for exchange of currencies at a future date is called the forward rate. To illustrate the use of these , consider the following example.

Example

The average rate is the weighted average of the historical rates for the period.

Individual transactions must be translated into the functional currency at the historical rate.

ABC Co. has a year-end of December 31. On November 13, Year 1, ABC purchased inventory from a French supplier when the spot rate for one euro (€) was €1 5 $1.50. On November 14, Year 1, ABC entered into a contract with a bank to purchase euros in 60 days at a rate of €1 5 $1.48. The spot rate on December 31, Year 1, was €1 5 $1.49. The financial statements for Year 1 were finalized on March 14, Year 2, and released to s on March 15, Year 2. In this example, the closing rate is $1.49, the historical rate for the purchase of the inventory is $1.50, and the forward rate for the planned purchase of euros is $1.48. If inventory was purchased every day throughout the year, the historical rate for each purchase should technically be used to translate the purchase for each day. This procedure is very costly and usually not worth the cost–benefit tradeoff. From a practical point of view, it is usually sufficient to use an average rate to approximate the actual rates for the period. The average rate represents the average of the historical rates throughout the period. However, if exchange rates fluctuate significantly, the use of the average rate for a period is inappropriate. According to IAS 21, a foreign currency transaction must be recorded, on initial recognition, in the functional currency by applying to the foreign currency amount the spot exchange rate between the functional currency and the foreign currency at the date of the transaction. At the end of each reporting period, (a) foreign currency monetary items must be translated using the closing rate,

(b) non-monetary items that are measured in of historical cost in a foreign currency must be translated using the historical rate, and (c) non-monetary items that are measured at fair value in a foreign currency must be translated using the exchange rates at the date when the fair value was determined. For ease of identification, we will refer to this method of translation as the temporal method. Any exchange adjustments arising on the settlement of monetary items or on the translation of them at rates different from those at which they were translated


573


CHAPTER 10


on initial recognition, during the period, or in previous financial statements must be recognized in profit or loss in the period in which they arise, with two exceptions. First, when a gain or loss on a non-monetary item is recognized in other comprehensive income, any exchange adjustment pertaining to that item must also be recognized in other comprehensive income. For example, IAS 16 requires some gains and losses arising on a revaluation of property, plant, and equipment to be recognized in other comprehensive income. When such an asset is measured in a foreign currency, any exchange difference resulting from the translation of the remeasured amount into the functional currency should also be recognized in other comprehensive income. Second, an available-for-sale financial asset (such as an investment in bonds) is treated as if it were carried at amortized cost in the foreign currency. Exchange differences resulting from changes in the amortized cost of this asset are recognized in profit or loss, and other changes in carrying amount are recognized in other comprehensive income. This translation process should produce results consistent with the valuation practices for domestic operations. For a financial statement item to be reported at historical cost, the historical cost of the item in foreign currency multiplied by the historical rate will derive the historical cost in Canadian dollars. For a financial statement item to be reported at fair value at the end of the year, the fair value of the item in foreign currency multiplied by the spot rate on the date when fair value was determined will derive the fair value in Canadian dollars. If historical cost in foreign currency is multiplied by the closing rate or if the fair value in foreign currency is multiplied by the historical rate, the Canadian dollar figure is neither historical cost nor fair value. When an item is reported at fair value, the fair value is usually determined at the end of the reporting period. If so, the exchange rate at the end of the period (i.e., the closing rate) is used to translate this item into Canadian dollars. Unless otherwise specified, the examples in the text always assume that fair values were determined at the end of the reporting period. According to Canadian GAAP, monetary assets and monetary liabilities are typically measured at fair value, non-monetary assets are usually measured at the lower of historical cost and market value, and non-monetary liabilities and shareholders’ equity are usually measured at historical amounts. Revenues and expenses are usually measured at historical amounts. As we study the different translation methods in this and the next chapter, we should evaluate whether the translation methods preserve the normal measurement requirements under Canadian GAAP.

565

The translation method should, ideally, produce either historical cost in dollars or fair value in dollars consistent with normal measurement requirements for the financial statement items.

Import/Export Transactions Denominated in Foreign Currency When a Canadian company purchases goods from a foreign supplier, it is usually billed in the currency of the foreign country. However, the transaction is recorded in the company’s ing records in the functional currency, which is assumed to be the Canadian dollar. The following example illustrates the ing for an import transaction.

An Import Example On June 1, Year 1, Maritime Importers Inc. purchased merchandise from a supplier in Australia at a cost of 10,000 Australian dollars (A$), with payment in full to be made in 60 days. The exchange rate on the date of purchase was A$1 5 CDN$0.941 and A$1 5 CDN$0.949 on June 30, Year 1, the company’s

Unless otherwise noted, all examples in this chapter assume that the Canadian dollar is the functional currency.


574


566

CHAPTER 10


year-end. Maritime paid its supplier on July 30, Year 1, when the exchange rate was A$1 5 CDN$0.953. The following journal entries, recorded in Canadian dollars, illustrate the company’s purchase of merchandise, year-end adjustments, and subsequent payment. June 1, Year 1 Inventory s payable (10,000 3 0.941) The cost of the purchase is finalized when the item is purchased.

9,410

The purchase of the inventory at a cost of A$10,000 and the related liability are translated at the spot rate on the date of purchase. The value of the inventory has been fixed at its historical cost and is not exposed to exchange fluctuations except in the situation where the selling price declines and the lower of cost and net realizable value requirement is applied. In such a case, the lower of cost and net realizable value requirement would be applied by comparing the Canadian dollar historical cost of the inventory with the net realizable value in Canadian dollars.4 On the other hand, Maritime now has a monetary position that is exposed to exchange fluctuations. The Canadian dollar amount required to pay A$10,000 will change as the exchange rate changes. To better reflect the cost of settling this obligation, this monetary liability should be remeasured to current value at each reporting date. On the company’s year-end, the payable of A$10,000 must be translated at the closing rate. The previously recorded amount ($9,410) is increased by $80 to reflect a translated liability of $9,490 (10,000 3 0.949). June 30, Year 1 Exchange loss s payable To adjust the payable to the closing rate

Foreign exchange adjustments are included in profit in the period in which they occur.

9,410

80 80

The resulting foreign exchange loss would be reported in net income for the year ended June 30, Year 1. On the settlement date, the exchange rate has increased from CDN$0.949 to CDN$0.953. The A$10,000 payable is increased by $40 to reflect its translation at the spot rate at this date (10,000 3 0.953 5 9,530). The company purchases 10,000 Australian dollars from its bank at a cost of $9,530 and remits Australian dollars to its Australian supplier. The foreign exchange loss of $40 will appear on the income statement for the year ended June 30, Year 2. The following journal entries record the transactions: July 30, Year 1 Exchange loss s payable To adjust the payable to the spot rate s payable Cash (10,000 3 0.953) Payment to supplier

40 40 9,530 9,530

An Export Example We will now consider an example of the export of goods by a Canadian company.


CHAPTER 10


575

567

On November 15, Year 1, Regina Malt Producers Ltd. shipped a carload of malt to a brewery in the United States, with full payment to be received on January 31, Year 2. The selling price of the malt was US$26,000. Regina Malt has a December 31 year-end. The following exchange rates existed on the dates significant for ing purposes: Transaction date—Nov. 15, Year 1 Selling price US$26,000 Exchange rate US$1 5 CDN$1.125 Year-end—Dec. 31, Year 1 Exchange rate US$1 5 CDN$1.129 Settlement date—Jan. 31, Year 2 Exchange rate US$1 5 CDN$1.119

The journal entries required on the dates noted above are as follows: Nov. 15, Year 1 s receivable Sales

29,250 29,250

The s receivable and the sales are recorded at the November 15 spot rate (US$26,000 3 1.125 5 CDN$29,250). The sales amount has been established at historical value and is unaffected by future exchange rate fluctuations. The s receivable (a monetary item) is at risk to exchange rate fluctuations. Note that while s receivable has been recorded at CDN$29,250, it is, in fact, a receivable of US$26,000. At the company’s year-end, the exchange rate has changed to US$1 5 CDN$1.129, and the receivable must appear in the financial statements at $29,354 (US$26,000 3 1.129). The following journal entry adjusts the s receivable to the closing rate: Dec. 31, Year 1 s receivable Exchange gain

104 104

This exchange gain will appear in the company’s Year 1 income statement. By January 31, Year 2, which is the settlement date, the value of the U.S. dollar has declined relative to the Canadian dollar. When Regina Malt collects US$26,000 from its customer and delivers the U.S. dollars to its bank, it receives only CDN$29,094 (26,000 3 1.119). The journal entry to record the receipt of US$26,000, its conversion to Canadian dollars and the resultant loss is as follows: Jan. 31, Year 2 Cash Exchange loss s receivable Received from U.S. customer

29,094 260 29,354

The exchange loss of $260 will appear in the Year 2 income statement. Note that the actual exchange loss between the transaction date and the settlement date was $156 (29,250 2 29,094). Because the company’s year-end occurred between

The sale is translated at the historical rate to produce a historical price in Canadian dollars. This is consistent with normal measurement requirements to record sales at historical values.

The s receivable is translated at the closing rate to produce a current value in Canadian dollars. This is consistent with normal measurement requirements to record monetary items at current values.


576


568

CHAPTER 10


these two dates, the exchange loss will appear in the two income statements in the following manner: Year 1 income statement Exchange gain Year 2 income statement Exchange loss Total exchange loss on the transaction

Exchange gains/losses are reported in profit, even though they may be unrealized.

$104

260 $156

The previous examples have illustrated the concept that exchange gains and losses resulting from the translation of a monetary position (i.e., a receivable or payable) are reflected in income in the year in which they occur. Note that these exchange gains and losses are actually unrealized in the sense that they result from the translation of a liability or a receivable. The exchange gain or loss is realized when the liability is paid or the receivable is collected.

Transaction Gains and Losses from Non-current Monetary Items Many Canadian companies borrow money in foreign markets, mainly because the capital markets in Canada are relatively small. The following example illustrates the ing for foreign currency–denominated debt.

Example Sable Company has a calendar year-end. On January 1, Year 1, the company borrowed 2,000,000 Swiss francs from a Swiss bank. The loan is to be repaid on December 31, Year 4, and requires interest at 8% to be paid each December 31. Both the annual interest payments and the loan repayment are to be made in Swiss francs (SF). During the term of the loan, the following exchange rates necessary for our analysis were in effect: Jan. 1, Year 1 Average, Year 1 Dec. 31, Year 1 Dec. 31, Year 2 Dec. 31, Year 3 Dec. 31, Year 4

SF1 5 $1.076 SF1 5 $1.073 SF1 5 $1.069 SF1 5 $1.070 SF1 5 $1.071 SF1 5 $1.067

Sable Company would record the transactions as follows: Jan. 1, Year 1 Cash Loan payable (2,000,000 3 1.076)

Interest expense is translated at the average of the historical rates to produce a historical price in Canadian dollars. This is consistent with normal measurement requirements to record interest expense at historical values.

2,152,000 2,152,000

This entry records the incurrence of a four-year loan of SF2,000,000 translated at the spot rate. On December 31, the company purchases 160,000 Swiss francs (2,000,000 3 8%) from its bank to make the interest payment, at a cost of $171,040 (160,000 3 1.069). A question arises as to whether the amount paid should be reflected as the interest expense for the past year. that interest expense was SF160,000, which accrued throughout the year. It seems logical, therefore, to translate the interest expense using the average of the Year 1 exchange rates, or better still, to translate the monthly interest at the average rate for each month. In either case, when the interest is actually paid at the end of the year, an exchange gain or loss will have to be recorded. Using the average


CHAPTER 10


577

569

exchange rate for Year 1, the journal entry to record the interest expense and payment is as follows: Dec. 31, Year 1 Interest expense 171,680 Exchange gain Cash To record interest expense at the average Year 1 rate of SF1 5 $1.073, and the payment of interest at the year-end rate of SF1 5 $1.069

640 171,040

On December 31, the loan is translated for financial statement purposes at $2,138,000 (2,000,000 3 1.069). The next entry adjusts the loan payable to the amount required on that date: Dec. 31, Year 1 Loan payable Exchange gain

14,000 14,000

The $14,640 total exchange gain resulting from the interest payment and the translation of the loan will appear in the Year 1 income statement. Journal entries for Years 2 through 4 will not be illustrated; however, the following summarizes the yearly exchange gains and losses from translating the principle amount of the loan liability. The exchange gains and losses on the interest are not included.

Exchange gain (loss)

Total

Year 1

Year 2

Year 3

Year 4

$18,000

$14,000

$(2,000)

$(2,000)

$8,000

SPECULATIVE FORWARD EXCHANGE CONTRACTS A forward exchange contract is one in which an exchange broker (usually a bank) and its customer agree to exchange currencies at a set price on a future date. Forward contracts can be either fixed dated or option dated. A fixed-dated contract specifies a fixed date such as June 18. An option-dated contract specifies a certain period, such as the month of June. A company may enter into a forward exchange contract purely to speculate on future exchange movements. For example, a company might enter into a contract to purchase foreign currency at a 60-day forward rate in anticipation that the spot rate in 60 days’ time will be greater than the original forward rate. If its projection turns out to be accurate, it will purchase the foreign currency from the bank at the contracted price and immediately sell the currency to the bank at the higher spot rate. The following example deals with a speculative forward exchange contract.

Example On December 1, Year 1, Raven Company enters into a forward contract to sell one million Philippines pesos (PP) to its bank in exchange for Canadian dollars on March 1, Year 2, at the market rate for a 90-day forward contract of PP1 5 $0.0227. On December 31, Year 1, Raven’s year-end, the 60-day forward rate to sell Philippines pesos on March 1 is quoted at PP1 5 $0.0222. On March 1, Year 2, the currencies are exchanged when the spot rate is PP1 5 $0.0220. According to IAS 39 and IFRS 9, this forward contract is considered a financial instrument. It must be recorded at fair value on the date the contract is entered

The loan payable is translated at the closing rate to produce a current value in Canadian dollars. This is consistent with normal measurement requirements to record monetary items at current values.

Exchange gains and losses occur on items translated at the closing rate but not on items translated at historical rates.

LO2 In a forward exchange contract, two parties agree today to exchange currencies at a future date at a specified exchange rate.


578


570

CHAPTER 10

Under the gross method, the receivable and payable under the forward contract will be offset against each other, and only the net amount will be reported on the balance sheet at each reporting date.


into and be remeasured at fair value throughout its life, with any gains or losses reflected in net income as they occur. There are two methods of recording this forward contract: the gross method and the net method. Under the gross method, the receivable from the bank and the payable to the bank are recorded separately at fair value. Under the net method, the receivable and payable are netted against each other and only the net receivable or net payable is recorded. The entries for this contract under the gross and net methods are shown in Exhibit 10.4. Either method is acceptable for internal recording-keeping purposes. However, when the financial statements are prepared, the receivable from the bank and the payable to the bank will be netted against each other and only the net amount shown as either an asset or a liability on the balance sheet. We will use the gross method for all subsequent illustrations in this chapter. The “$” symbol behind receivable from bank in the first entry indicates that the receivable is denominated in Canadian dollars, whereas the “PP” behind the payable to bank indicates that the s payable is denominated in

EXHIBIT 10.4 JOURNAL ENTRIES FOR SPECULATIVE FORWARD CONTRACT Gross method A forward contract is a financial instrument that must be measured at fair value throughout its life.

December 1, Year 1 Receivable from bank ($) Payable to bank (PP) Record forward contract at forward rate (PP1,000,000 3 0.0227 5 $22,700) December 31, Year 1 Forward contract Payable to bank (PP) Exchange gain Revalue forward contract at fair value (PP1,000,000 3 (0.0227 2 0.0222) 5 $500)

When the forward rate changes, the fair value of the forward contract changes.

March 1, Year 2 Forward contract Payable to bank (PP) Exchange gain Revalue forward contract at fair value (PP1,000,000 3 (0.0222 2 0.0220) 5 $200)

22,700 22,700

500 500 500

500

200 200 200

Payable to bank (PP) Cash (PP) Deliver PP1,000,000 to bank to pay off liability (PP1,000,000 3 0.0220 5 $22,000)

22,000

Cash ($) Receivable from bank ($) Receive $22,700 from bank

22,700

Cash ($) Forward contract Settle forward contract on net basis by receiving $700 (22,700 2 22,000)

Net method

200

22,000

22,700 700 700


579


CHAPTER 10


Philippines pesos. In other words, Raven will receive Canadian dollars and will pay Philippines pesos to settle this forward contract. The fair value of the forward contract on December 1, Year 1, is zero because the two parties have just entered into a contract at the market rate for forward contracts. Under the gross method, the receivable and payable are both recorded at the future rate. Since the receivable and payable are equal and offsetting, there is no entry under the net method. Some ants may object to using the gross method for recording the forward contract on December 1 because forward exchange contracts are “executory” in nature. An executory contract is one in which neither party has performed its obligation to the other. Most contracts trigger ing recognition only when one of the parties fulfills the obligation as agreed. For example, when a company places an order with a manufacturer for the purchase of machinery, neither party makes an ing entry. The delivery of the machinery, or a down payment prior to delivery, results in ing recognition by both parties because of the performance by one. While forward exchange contracts are certainly executory, they are also firm commitments and once entered cannot be cancelled. For this reason, IFRSs require that the forward contract be recorded. On December 31, the forward contract is remeasured at fair value. We use the market rate for forward contracts maturing on March 1 to determine the fair value of Raven’s contract. On this date, the 60-day forward rate to sell Philippines pesos on March 1 is PP1 5 $0.0222, whereas Raven’s contract is locked in at PP1 5 $0.0227. Raven’s contract will generate $22,700 on March 1, whereas contracts executed on December 31 would generate only $22,200 on March 1 for 1 million Philippines pesos. Therefore, Raven’s contract is worth an extra $500 as of March 1. Theoretically, we should discount this $500 for two months. Practically speaking, the amount would usually not be discounted because the difference between the nominal amount of $500 and the present value of $500 for two months is not material and is not worth the effort to calculate. In the appendix to this chapter, we illustrate how this forward contract would be ed for with discounting. Unless otherwise noted, no examples in the text will use discounting. The forward contract will simply be measured at the forward rate for the term to maturity. Note that the gain of $500 is recorded under both the gross and net methods. When financial statements are prepared at December 31 under the gross method, the “due from bank” of $22,700 and the “due to bank” of $22,200 will be offset against each other and only the net receivable of $500 will be presented on the balance sheet, and will likely be called forward contract. Therefore, the financial statement presentation will be the same under both the gross and net methods, even though the underlying s have different balances. On March 1, Year 2, the forward contract is once again remeasured to fair value. Since the contract is being settled on this date, the market value of this forward contract is based on the spot rate for this date; that is, PP1 5 $0.0220. The contract is worth $700 because Raven will get $22,700 from the bank, whereas PP1,000,000 is worth only $22,000 in the market on March 1. Therefore, Raven has gained $700 on this contract in total, and $200 since December 31. The first entry on March 1 records this $200 gain. The other entries record the exchange of pesos for dollars.

571

Forward contracts must be recorded according to IFRSs.

The forward contract is worth more when the Philippines peso declines in value; that is, the Canadian dollar increases in value.


580


572

CHAPTER 10


If we combine all of the journal entries under both the gross and net methods, we end up with the following entry: The gross and net methods produce the same overall result in the end.

Cash ($) Exchange gain—Year 1 Exchange gain—Year 2

700 500 200

In the end, Raven gained $700 by speculating on rate changes. If the exchange rates had changed in the other direction—that is, if the Canadian dollar had decreased rather than increased in value—Raven would have lost money on this speculative contract. In the next few sections, we will illustrate how forward contracts can be used to hedge existing and anticipated exposure to foreign currency risk. Throughout the remainder of this chapter and in the end-of-chapter material, we will use the gross method of ing for forward contracts. This makes it easier to see how the forward contract is effective in hedging against the currency risk under different situations. LO3 A hedging instrument is the item used to offset the risk exposure. The hedged item is the item with the risk exposure that the entity has taken steps to modify.

A foreign exchange hedge is a means of reducing or eliminating exchange losses on an overall basis by entering into a position to offset the risk exposure.

HEDGES The previous examples illustrated the ing for the foreign exchange gains and losses that result from holding a foreign currency–denominated monetary position during a period of exchange rate changes. There are many possible ways for an enterprise to protect itself from the economic (and ing) effects that result from such a position. This type of protection is generally referred to as “hedging,” which can be defined as a means of transferring risk arising from foreign exchange (or interest rate, or price) fluctuations from those who wish to avoid it to those who are willing to assume it.5 In order to hedge the risk of exchange rate fluctuations, a company takes a foreign currency position opposite to the position that it wishes to protect. The item with the risk exposure that the entity wishes to hedge and has taken steps to hedge is called the hedged item. The item used to offset the risk is called the hedging instrument. In the ideal case, the hedged item is perfectly hedged by the hedging instrument and there is no longer any overall exposure to currency fluctuations. The entity has eliminated the overall risk of further exchange losses but also loses any possibility of gains from currency fluctuations. When ing for the hedge, we want to properly reflect whether the hedge has been effective. If the hedge is truly effective, there should be no overall exchange gain or loss reported on the income statement, other than the cost of establishing the hedge. The exchange gains or losses on the hedged item will be offset by exchange losses or gains on the hedging instrument. But what happens when the hedging instrument is purchased in advance of the hedged item? For example, a forward contract may be purchased in Year 1 to hedge a transaction expected to occur in Year 2. How can the Year 1 gains or losses on the forward contract be offset against the Year 2 losses or gains on the anticipated transaction when the anticipated transaction has not yet occurred? The solution is hedge ing as defined and described in IFRS 9. Under hedge ing, the exchange gains or losses on the hedging instrument will be recognized in profit in the same period as the exchange gains or losses on the hedged item when they would otherwise be recognized in different periods.


581


CHAPTER 10


573

It is important at this stage to differentiate between the “hedge” and “hedge ing”. While they may sound similar, they are very dissimilar. A hedge is an item that attempts to minimize or eliminate the risk of suffering a loss. The forward contract can be used to minimize the loss from changes in exchange rates. Hedge ing, on the other hand, is a means of ing for the hedging instrument—that is, the forward contract and the hedging item—in order to properly show that the two items acting together are effective in minimizing or eliminating the potential loss. Hedge ing involves special ing requirements that allow the entity to defer or accelerate income recognition in order to show that a gain or loss on the hedging item is being offset by a loss or gain on the hedging item. It is also important to note that hedge ing is optional. The entity can choose to apply hedge ing and thereby ensure that gains and losses on the hedged item are reported in the same period as the gains and losses on the hedging instrument. Alternatively, it could choose to not apply hedge ing and for the hedged item and the hedging instrument in isolation of each other. Prior to 2013, the requirements for hedge ing were contained in IAS 39. These requirements were developed when hedging activities were relatively new and not as widely understood as they are today. In general, the hedging item had to be a derivative; for example, a forward contract or an option. A derivative is a financial instrument or other contract with all three of the following characteristics:

Under hedge ing, the exchange gains or losses on the hedging instrument will be reported in income in the same period as the exchange gains or losses on the hedged item.

(a) Its value changes in response to the change in a specified interest rate, financial instrument price, commodity price, foreign exchange rate, index of prices or rates, credit rating or credit index, or other variable (sometimes called the “underlying” variable).

A derivative is a financial instrument or other contract whose value changes in response to the change in some underlying variable, which requires no initial investment, and which will be settled at a future date.

(b) It requires either no initial net investment or an initial net investment that is smaller than would be required for other types of contracts with a similar expected response to changes in market factors. (c) It is settled at a future date. Over the years, managers have developed a better understanding of risks and ways to mitigate risk. Many new financial instruments and other management strategies have been invented to deal with risk. As such, the requirements in IAS 39 now appear to be too restrictive and may make it impossible to apply hedge ing to faithfully represent the effectiveness of the companies hedging activities. With these restrictions, investors may not be able to understand the risks an entity faces, what management is doing to manage those risks, and how effective those risk management strategies are. In 2013, new requirements for hedge ing were adopted by the IASB and are now contained in IFRS 9. These requirements are effective January 1, 2015, but can be adopted earlier. Some of the major changes and how they differ from IAS 39 are as follows: 1. The requirements for hedge ing are less restrictive and are more closely aligned with risk management activities undertaken by companies when hedging their financial and nonfinancial risk exposures. IFRS 9 allows any financial asset or most financial liabilities measured at fair value through profit or loss to be designated as a hedging instrument. However, only contracts with a party external to the reporting entity can be designated as hedging instruments.

The new hedge ing requirements in IFRS 9 are less restrictive and more closely aligned with the entity’s risk management activities.


582


574

CHAPTER 10


Cautionary Note: At the time of writing this textbook, the requirements pertaining to hedge ing were contained in IAS 39. However, there was an exposure draft to change certain requirements for hedging. The textbook has been written under the assumption that the requirements in the exposure draft will be adopted. Any changes from what is finally adopted in IFRS 9 and what is written in the textbook will be communicated through the OLC in future years.

2. An entity may view in combination, and tly designate as the hedging instrument, any combination of the following: (a) derivatives or a proportion of them and (b) non-derivatives or a proportion of them.

The new hedge ing requirements in IFRS 9 will help investors to better understand the extent and effect of an entity’s hedging activities and to assist them in forecasting future cash flows.

6. Disclosure requirements are more comprehensive and focus on the risks that entities are managing, how they are managing those risks, and the outcomes of that risk management activity, including the effect on the financial statements. This is to help investors to understand better the extent and effect of companies’ hedging activities and to assist them in forecasting future cash flows.

To qualify for hedge ing, the entity must expect that the hedge will be effective and must document how the hedging relationship will meet the hedge effectiveness requirements.

3. Under IAS 39, components (parts) of financial items can be hedged, but not components of nonfinancial items. IFRS 9 allows any item that has a risk component that can be identified and measured to be a hedged item. This would include nonfinancial items. These new requirements would enable entities to apply hedge ing that reflect their risk management activities. 4. IAS 39 does not allow net positions to be hedged. However, companies often hedge net positions; for example, they may hedge a net foreign exchange position of 20 that is made up of an asset of 100 and a liability of 80. This creates an inconsistency between hedge ing and risk management activity. IFRS 9 extends the use of hedge ing to net positions for a group of items and to components of a group and, thereby, improves the link to risk management. 5. IAS 39 sets a high hurdle before hedge ing is available. It also sets a high hurdle for hedge ing to continue. These hurdles result from a strict quantitative test. The ing consequences of failing this test are drastic. This is widely criticized as being arbitrary and for causing hedge ing not to be available or to stop when a hedge is a good one economically. IFRS 9 bases the qualification for hedge ing on how entities design hedges for risk management purposes. It allows hedging relationships to be adjusted without necessarily stopping and potentially restarting hedge ing. This enables hedge ing to better reflect risk management activity, which often requires adjustments to hedges to accommodate changes in market conditions.

We will now discuss and illustrate the requirements for hedge ing as per IFRS 9 in more detail. A hedged item can be a recognized asset or liability, an unrecognized firm commitment, a highly probable forecast transaction, or a net investment in a foreign operation. The hedged item can be a single item, a group of items, or a component of these items. The hedged item must be reliably measurable. If a hedged item is a forecast transaction (or a component thereof), that transaction must be highly probable. To qualify for hedge ing, the following three conditions must be met: (a) The hedging relationship consists only of eligible hedging instruments and eligible hedged items. (b) At the inception of the hedge, there is formal designation and documentation of the hedging relationship and the entity’s risk management objective and strategy for undertaking the hedge. That documentation includes identification of the hedging instrument, the hedged item, and the nature of the risk being hedged and how the entity will assess whether the hedging relationship meets the hedge effectiveness requirements. (c) The hedging relationship meets the hedge effectiveness requirements.


583


CHAPTER 10


Hedge effectiveness is the extent to which changes in the fair value or cash flows of the hedging instrument offset changes in the fair value or cash flows of the hedged item. Hedge ineffectiveness is the extent to which there is no such offset or the changes in the fair value or cash flows of the hedging instrument more than offset those on the hedged item. An entity considers the relationship between the weightings of the hedging instrument and the hedged item (the hedge ratio) when assessing whether the hedging relationship will minimize the expected ineffectiveness. For example, an entity wants to hedge a forecast purchase of 100 tonnes of a commodity of a particular grade in Location A, and that commodity usually trades at about 90% of the price for the exchange-traded benchmark grade of the same commodity in Location B. If the entity wants to hedge the forecast purchase of 100 tonnes with exchange-traded forward contracts, then a forward contract volume to purchase 90 tonnes of the benchmark grade of the commodity in Location B would be expected to offset best the entity’s exposure to changes in the cash flows for the hedged purchase. Hence, a hedge ratio of 1.11:1 would minimize expected hedge ineffectiveness. At the inception of the hedging relationship and on an ongoing basis, an entity must assess whether a hedging relationship meets the hedge effectiveness requirements. At a minimum, an entity must perform the ongoing assessment at each reporting date or at a significant change in the circumstances affecting the hedge effectiveness requirements, whichever comes first. The assessment relates to expectations about hedge ineffectiveness and offsetting and therefore is only forward looking. Hedges can be designated for ing purposes as fair value hedges, cash flow hedges, or hedges of a net investment in a foreign operation.6 In a fair value hedge, the entity uses a hedging instrument to hedge against the fluctuation in the fair value of the hedged item. This method will be used when the hedged item (such as long-term debt) will be measured at fair value. The gain or loss in the fair values of the hedging instrument and hedged items are both recognized in profit or loss in the period of the change in values, with one exception. If the hedging instrument hedges an equity instrument for which an entity has elected to present changes in fair value in other comprehensive income, then the gain or loss on the hedging instrument is also presented in other comprehensive income. In a cash flow hedge, the entity uses a hedging instrument (such as a derivative) to hedge against the fluctuation in the Canadian-dollar value of future cash flows (such as future sales). The gain or loss on the hedging instrument is initially reported in other comprehensive income and subsequently reclassified to profit when the hedged item affects profit. There are many different types of hedging instruments such as forward exchange contracts, futures contracts, and options. We will use forward exchange contracts to illustrate hedge ing.

Hedging a Recognized Monetary Item Vulcan Corporation of Toronto, Ontario, has a December 31 year-end. On November 1, Year 1, when the Bulgarian lev (BL) was worth $0.870, Vulcan sold merchandise to a Bulgarian customer for BL200,000. The of the sale required payment in full on February 15, Year 2. On November 15, Year 1, the spot rate was BL1 5 $0.865 and the three-month forward rate was BL1 5 $0.842. In order to protect the receivable from further exchange losses, Vulcan entered into a contract with its bank on this date, to deliver BL200,000 in three months’ time.

575

Hedge effectiveness must be assessed at the inception of the hedging relationship and on an ongoing basis.

A hedge is designated as a fair value hedge or a cash flow hedge based on the exposure hedged.

LO4


584


576

CHAPTER 10

The forward contract is used to offset the risk of decline in value of the s receivable from the customer.

Hedge ing is optional and will not be applied in this situation.


At year-end, the spot rate was BL1 5 $0.869 and the 45-day forward rate was $0.852. On February 15, Year 2, Vulcan received BL200,000 from the customer and settled the forward contract with the bank when the spot and forward rates were $0.860. Before preparing the journal entries, try to understand the rationale for entering into the hedge and the expected results. From November 1 to November 15, the Canadian-dollar value of the receivable declined from $174,000 (200,000 3 0.870) to $173,000 (200,000 3 0.865) because of the strengthening of the Canadian dollar relative to the Bulgarian lev. Vulcan was concerned about a further slide in the value of the lev and further erosion in the value of the receivable. To minimize the loss from a further decline, Vulcan was entered into a forward exchange contract to fix the amount it will receive in Canadian dollars when the receivable is collected, and that is $168,400 (200,000 3 0.842). In effect, Vulcan was prepared to pay $4,600 ($173,000 2 $168,400) in order to avoid bigger losses. This differential of $4,600 is called a discount on the forward contract. It will be expensed as a foreign exchange loss over the term of the forward exchange contract. Although the forward contract is a hedge of the s receivable, we will not apply hedge ing in this situation. Both the s receivable and the forward contract are measured at fair value at each reporting date, with the exchange adjustments reported in profit. Since the exchange adjustments on both items are already being reported in profit in the same period, it is not necessary to use hedge ing. We will for each item separately as we did for the previous examples in this chapter. If the company wanted to use hedge ing and designated the forward contract as a fair value hedge, the ing would look exactly the same as ing for each item separately. So there is no point in using hedge ing in this particular situation. Hedge ing is necessary only when the exchange adjustments would otherwise be reported in profit in different periods. A timeline for the transactions follows: Nov 1

Nov 15

Dec 31

Feb 15

Sell goods on

Hedge receivable

Yearend

Collect receivable and settle forward exchange contract

Vulcan will record the sale and the receivable at the spot rate on the transaction date with the following journal entry: The “BL” indicates that the s receivable is denominated in Bulgarian levs. The “$” indicates that the sale is being measured in dollars and will not be adjusted for exchange rate changes.

Nov. 1, Year 1 s receivable (BL) Sales ($) BL200,000 3 0.870 5 174,000

174,000 174,000

On November 15, the receivable is hedged when the spot rate is BL1 5 $0.865. The exchange loss that occurred during the period when the receivable was not hedged is recorded next, followed by the entry to record the forward contract. Nov. 15, Year 1 Exchange gains and losses s receivable (BL) Exchange loss prior to the date of hedge, BL200,000 3 (0.870 2 0.865)

1,000 1,000


585


CHAPTER 10

Receivable from bank ($) Payable to bank (BL) To record forward contract at forward rate—BL 200,000 3 0.842


577

168,400 168,400

The receivable from the bank represents the amount of Canadian dollars that Vulcan will receive when it delivers BL200,000 to the bank in three months. As this is denominated in Canadian dollars, it will not be affected by subsequent changes in the spot rate or forward rate. The payable to bank represents an obligation of Vulcan to deliver BL200,000 to the bank in three months’ time and is denominated in Bulgarian levs. It should be reported at fair value throughout the term of the contract. The fair value is determined by multiplying BL200,000 by the forward rate for the remaining term of the contract. At yearend, the s receivable and payable to the bank are adjusted to fair value as follows: Dec. 31, Year 1 s receivable (BL) Exchange gains and losses To adjust the receivable to the December 31 spot rate —BL200,000 3 (0.869 2 0.865)

800 800

Exchange gains and losses Payable to bank (BL) To adjust the forward contract to the December 31 forward rate —BL200,000 3 (0.852 2 0.842)

2,000 2,000

The $2,000 adjustment can be broken down as follows: • An $800 loss on forward contract, the hedging instrument offsets the $800 gain on the s receivable, the hedged item. • The other $1,200 is the portion of the $4,600 discount on the forward contract being expensed in this period. Financial statements are prepared as at December 31. The following partial trial balance is presented to show only the s used to record these particular transactions. PARTIAL TRIAL BALANCE at December 31, Year 1 Dr. s receivable Exchange gains and losses Sales Receivable from bank ($) Payable to bank (BL)

The closing rate is used when the item can be settled at any time, whereas the forward rate is used when the item must be settled at a future date.

Cr.

$173,800 2,200 $174,000 168,400

$344,400

170,400 $344,400

The s associated with the hedge have been segregated in the trial balance to emphasize their nature. These executory contract items should be shown at their net amount in the balance sheet because they will be settled simultaneously and on a net basis. The presentation of how the items shown on the trial balance will be presented in the year-end financial statements is shown next.

The discount on the forward contract is, in effect, expensed over the term of the forward contract.


586


578

CHAPTER 10


VULCAN CORP. PARTIAL BALANCE SHEET at December 31, Year 1 Assets s receivable Other items

The receivable from and payable to the bank are offset against each other and only the net difference of a $2,000 liability is reported.

$173,800 XXX $ XXX

Liabilities and Shareholders’ Equity Forward contract (170,400 2 168,400) Other items

$ 2,000 XXX $ XXX

VULCAN CORP. PARTIAL INCOME STATEMENT for the Year Ended December 31, Year 1 Sales Expenses: Foreign exchange loss Other Profit

$174,000 $2,200 XXX $

XXX XXX

The $2,200 foreign exchange loss consists of the $1,000 loss before the hedge was put in place and $1,200 expense pertaining to the $4,600 discount on the forward contract. On the February 15 settlement date, the receivable from the Bulgarian customer and the payable to bank are adjusted to current value as follows: Feb. 15, Year 2 Only the foreigndenominated receivables and payables must be remeasured. The receivable from the bank is denominated in Canadian dollars and is not affected by changes in exchange rates.

Exchange gains and losses s receivable (BL) To adjust the receivable to the spot rate— BL200,000 3 (0.869 2 0.860)

1,800

Exchange gains and losses Payable to bank (BL) To adjust the forward contract to the forward rate— BL200,000 3 (0.860 2 0.852)

1,600

1,800

1,600

The total of the exchange losses recognized in Year 2 is $3,400, which is the remaining amount of the discount on the forward contract. This brings the total exchange loss on the forward contract to $4,600 ($1,200 from Year 1 and $3,400 for Year 2), which is equal to the discount on the forward contract. The Bulgarian customer sends BL200,000 to Vulcan, which is deposited in a Bulgarian lev cash . Vulcan delivers the BL200,000 to the bank to discharge its forward contract obligation and receives $168,400 as agreed. The following journal entries record these events: Feb. 15, Year 2 Cash (BL) s receivable (BL) Collection from Bulgarian customer

172,000 172,000


587


CHAPTER 10

Payable to bank (BL) Cash (BL) Delivery of levs to bank

172,000

Cash Receivable from bank Receipt of Canadian dollars from bank

168,400


579

172,000

168,400

You may be overwhelmed with the number of entries above and may not appreciate the overall effect. To see the big picture, all of the above entries for Year 1 and Year 2 can be condensed into one entry as follows: Cash ($) Foreign exchange loss before hedge Foreign exchange loss (5 discount on forward contract) Sales

168,400 1,000 4,600 174,000

The net impact on profit is equal to the amount of cash received. This is a typical result in ing. Sales were recorded at the historical rate, which is consistent with our measurement model. The exchange losses occurred for two reasons. First, the company lost $1,000 in the value of the s receivable due to the increase in value of the Canadian dollar relative to the Bulgarian lev before the hedge was put into place. Then, the company incurred a loss of $4,600 to put the hedge into place. In the end, the ing for the hedge reflects the objective of the hedge in the first place. See Self-Study Problem 1 for an illustration of a hedge of s payable arising from a purchase of merchandise.

Hedging an Unrecognized Firm Commitment On June 2, Year 2, when the spot rate was US$1 5 CDN$1.26, Manning Inc. of Vancouver ordered merchandise from an American supplier for US$350,000. Delivery was scheduled for August 1 with payment to be made in full on delivery. Upon placing the order, Manning immediately entered into a 60-day forward contract with its bank to purchase US$350,000 on August 1 at the forward rate of US$1 5 CDN$1.28. Manning’s year-end is June 30. On August 1, the merchandise was received, and Manning purchased the U.S. dollars from the bank and paid its supplier. In this example, the purpose of the forward contract is to fix the amount to be paid for the inventory. The hedged item is the commitment and the hedging instrument is the forward contract. The commitment to purchase the inventory is normally not recognized for ing purposes because there is no asset or liability at the time of the commitment. The inventory and related s payable will be recorded only when the inventory is actually received. Since we must report the forward contract when the contract is signed, we will have a mismatch in the current year because the hedging instrument is recognized but the hedged item is not. Without hedge ing, the exchange gains or losses on the forward contract would be reported in the current year, whereas no exchange gain or losses would be reported on the s payable because it does not legally exist in the current year. Therefore, hedge ing is necessary to report the exchange gains or losses on the hedged item and the hedging instrument in the same period. We can designate the forward contract as a cash flow hedge and defer the recognition in net income by recognizing the exchange gains or losses on the forward

Accrual ing is more complicated than cash ing, but in total and over time, it presents the same overall effect on profit as cash ing.

LO5 The forward contract is used to offset the risk of an increase in the cost of the inventory.


588


580

CHAPTER 10

The on the forward contract is a cost of fixing the purchase price of the inventory.


contract in other comprehensive income (OCI) and not recording anything with respect to commitment to purchase goods. Alternatively, we could designate the forward contract as a fair value hedge and advance the recognition in profit of the exchange gains or losses on the commitment to purchase goods so that they match against the exchange gains or losses being recorded in profit on the forward contract. The on the forward contract is $7,000 [US$350,000 3 (1.28 2 1.26)]. It is the amount that Manning is prepared to pay to fix the amount of the cash flows required to purchase the inventory. Since the forward contract was intended to fix the cost of the inventory, the $7,000 will be reported as a cost of the inventory and will be reflected in income when the inventory is sold. The relevant exchange rates for this example are as follows: Date

Spot Rate

Forward Rate

June 2 June 30 August 1

US$1 5 CDN$1.260 US$1 5 CDN$1.268 US$1 5 CDN$1.272

US$1 5 CDN$1.280 US$1 5 CDN$1.275 US$1 5 CDN$1.272

A timeline for the transactions follows:

The gross method is used to for the forward contract.

The exchange gains or losses on the hedging instrument for the cash flow hedge are reported in other comprehensive income for now and will be reported in profit when the exchange gains or losses on the hedged items are reported in profit.

June 2

June 30

August 1

Order goods and hedge order

Year-end

Receive goods, settle forward contract, and pay supplier

Manning’s journal entries to record the forward contract and the purchase of inventory are presented in Exhibit 10.5 under three different ing methods: (1) the forward contract is designated as a cash flow hedge, (2) the forward contract is designated as a fair value hedge, and (3) hedge ing is not applied. The rationale for each entry is explained below. The first journal entry would be made if Manning uses the gross method of ing for the forward contract. Payable to bank represents the amount in Canadian dollars that Manning will pay the bank in August when it receives US$350,000. The amount recorded will not be affected by future exchange rate fluctuations. Receivable from bank is the hedge of the expected future liability. It is denominated in U.S. dollars and represents Manning’s right to receive U.S. dollars from the bank in August. It should be reported at fair value and is accordingly translated at the forward exchange rate. Note that the net balance of this executory contract is zero, and if a balance sheet were prepared at this time, the receivable from bank and payable to bank would be offset, and no amount would appear on the balance sheet. At year-end, the second journal entry is made to adjust the receivable from the bank to its fair value. Note that the exchange adjustment on the forward contract is reported in other comprehensive income for the cash flow hedge and in net income for the fair value hedge. However, if hedge ing is not applied the exchange adjustment is reported in net income, which is the same treatment we used when ing for a speculative forward contract. On the June 30, Year 2, balance sheet, the $1,750 difference between the receivable from the bank ($446,250) and the payable to the bank ($448,000) would be reported as forward contract under current liabilities. The OCI is reported in comprehensive income. In turn, the balance at the end of the year for accumulated OCI for cash flow hedges is reported as a separate component of shareholders’ equity.


589


CHAPTER 10


581

EXHIBIT 10.5 JOURNAL ENTRIES FOR HEDGING A FIRM COMMITMENT Transaction No.

Cash flow hedge

Fair value hedge

No hedge ing

June 2, Year 2 1. Receivable from bank (US$) 448,000 448,000 448,000 Payable to bank (CDN$) 448,000 448,000 448,000 To record forward contract at forward rate—350,000 3 1.280 June 30, Year 2 2. OCI–Exchange gains and losses 1,750 Exchange gains and losses 1,750 1,750 Receivable from bank (US$) 1,750 1,750 To adjust forward contract to June 30 forward rate—350,000 3 (1.280 2 1.275)

1,750

The forward rate is used to revalue the forward contract and commitment asset at each reporting date.

3. Commitment asset 1,750 Exchange gains and losses 1,750 To adjust value of s receivable to June 30 forward rate —350,000 3 (1.280 2 1.275) August 1, Year 2 4. OCI–Exchange gains and losses 1,050 Exchange gains and losses 1,050 1,050 Receivable from bank (US$) 1,050 1,050 To adjust forward contract to August 1 forward rate—350,000 3 (1.275 2 1.272)

1,050

5. Commitment asset 1,050 Exchange gains and losses 1,050 To adjust value of s receivable to August 1 forward rate—350,000 3 (1.275 2 1.272) 6. Payable to bank (CDN$) Cash (CDN$) Payment to bank

448,000

448,000 448,000

The exchange loss on the forward contract is reported in profit for the fair value hedge to match against the exchange gain on the commitment asset.

448,000 448,000

448,000

7. Cash (US$) 445,200 445,200 445,200 Receivable from bank (US$) 445,200 445,200 445,200 Receipt of US$350,000 from bank at August 1 spot rate—350,000 3 1.272 8. Inventory 445,200 445,200 445,200 Cash (US$) 445,200 445,200 445,200 To record the inventory purchase and pay cash at the August 1 spot rate—350,000 3 1.272 9. Inventory 2,800 2,800 OCI—reclassification of 2,800 exchange gains and losses Commitment asset To reclassify OCI and commitment asset to cost of inventory

2,800

If Manning designated the forward contract as a fair value hedge, the third entry would be made. It records a gain on the firm commitment through profit to match the loss on the forward contract. Both the forward contract and the firm commitment are measured at fair value using the forward rate. As such, the

The exchange loss on the forward contract is reported in OCI for the cash flow hedge and will be removed from OCI when the hedged item is recognized; that is, when the inventory is received.


590


582

CHAPTER 10

The change in value of the commitment is recognized in profit to match the change in value of the forward contract.

The exchange losses incurred on the hedging instrument increase the cost of the inventory and will be reported in net income when the inventory is sold.


exchange loss on the forward contract will be offset by the exchange gain on the firm commitment. The commitment asset would be reported as a current asset. On August 1, the receivable from the bank is adjusted to its fair value in the fourth journal entry. Once again, the exchange adjustment is recorded in OCI for the cash flow hedge and in net income for the fair value hedge and when hedge ing is not applied. In turn, journal entry number five adjusts the commitment asset to fair value to offset the loss from revaluing the forward contract to fair value. Journal entries six and seven record the exchange of currencies with the bank under the of the forward contract. Manning settled its obligation to the bank by giving the bank $448,000 in Canadian dollars. The bank gives Manning $350,000 in U.S. dollars. Then, journal entry eight records the payment of $350,000 in U.S. dollars to the supplier upon delivery of the inventory. There are two options for removing the accumulated exchange adjustment of $2,800 from other comprehensive income for the cash flow hedge and from the commitment asset for the fair value hedge. Option one is to remove the $2,800 when the inventory is delivered and report it as an adjustment of the inventory. In turn, this amount will affect the amount reported as cost of goods sold when the inventory is sold. The second option is to remove the $2,800 when the inventory is sold and show it as other income or net against cost of goods sold on the income statement. In both cases, the $2,800 will be reflected in the income statement when the inventory is sold. Since the objective of the hedge was to fix the price of the inventory, the first option will be used and is ed for in journal entry nine. The summarized entries for the combined effect of all of entries in Exhibit 10.5 are as follows Cash Flow Hedge Inventory Exchange gains and losses Cash (CDN$)

Under hedge ing, the forward contract fixed the purchase price of the inventory at the forward rate on the date of the hedge.

448,000

Fair Value Hedge 448,000

448,000

No Hedge ing 445,200 2,800

448,000

448,000

Under all three methods, the net cash outflow is $448,000. This amount was fixed when the forward contract was signed. Under hedge ing, the inventory is recorded at $448,000, the amount fixed by the forward contract. When hedge ing is not used, the inventory and forward contract are reported separately as if they were not related. The inventory is reported at $445,200, which is the value of US$350,000 paid to the supplier using the spot rate on the date of the payment. The $2,800 exchange loss on the forward contract is reported in net income in the same manner as a speculative forward contract. Under all three reporting methods, $448,000 will eventually be expensed. However, the timing and line description on the income statement are different. Under hedge ing, the $448,000 will be expensed as cost of goods sold when the inventory is sold. When hedge ing is not applied, the $448,000 is expensed through a combination of $2,800 in exchange losses over a two-year period, and $445,200 as cost of goods sold when the inventory is sold. This is a typical result in ing. The amount expensed on a cumulative basis is equal to the cash paid on a cumulative basis. At the beginning of this problem, we determined that the company was willing to pay a of $7,000 to fix the amount of the inventory. When hedge ing was applied, the inventory was recorded at $448,000. Furthermore, no


591


CHAPTER 10


exchange gains or losses were reported in profit because the commitment to purchase inventory was effectively hedged by the forward contract. When hedge ing was not applied, there was no relationship between the forward contract and the amount recorded for the cost of the inventory. In the above example, the inventory was paid for on delivery. If Manning had purchased the inventory on credit, it would have been exposed to foreign currency risk on the s payable. It could have entered into a forward contract to hedge both the commitment to buy inventory and the amount required to settle the payable. In this case, the $7,000 would have to be split between the two objectives. Part of the $7,000 would be reported as a cost of the inventory and reflected in net income when the inventory is sold. The other part would be recognized in net income over the period of time between the origination and settlement of the s payable. For further analysis and discussion of the impact of the three reporting methods on key financial ratios, see the Analysis and Interpretation of Financial Statements section. Also, see Self-Study Problem 2 for another illustration of a cash flow hedge of a firm commitment to sell equipment.

Hedging a Highly Probable Forecasted Transaction

SD1 5 $0.852 SD1 5 $0.849 SD1 5 $0.835 SD1 5 $0.840

Applying the concepts of hedge ing, Alana will make the following journal entries: Jan. 1, Year 1 Cash Loan payable (SD) (600,000 3 0.852)

511,200 511,200

During Year 1, the revenue stream is recorded at the average exchange rate for the year. Thus, the following entry is recorded: Cash Sales revenue (200,000 3 0.849)

When hedge ing is not applied, the forward contract is ed for as if it were a speculative contract.

LO6

The following example illustrates the ing when long-term debt is used as a hedge of a future revenue stream. The hedge will be ed for as a cash flow hedge because it is hedging the variability of future cash flows. Alana Enterprises, a Canadian company that has carried out business activities in Singapore for a number of years, has decided to protect itself against foreign currency fluctuations over the next three years, during which it expects a revenue stream of at least 200,000 Singapore dollars (SD) per year. On January 1, Year 1, the company borrows SD600,000, payable in full at the end of three years, and designates the loan as a hedge against the future three-year revenue stream. In order to simplify the illustration, we will omit the payment of yearly interest and assume that there is no difference between the exchange rate at the end of each year and the average exchange rate for that year. Furthermore, we will assume that the cash received in Singapore dollars will be immediately used to pay operating expenses. Relevant exchange rates for the Singapore dollar are as follows: Jan. 1, Year 1 Dec. 31, Year 1 Dec. 31, Year 2 Dec. 31, Year 3

583

169,800 169,800

The loan payable is the hedging instrument, and the future revenue stream is the hedged item.


592


584

CHAPTER 10

In Year 1, the entire loan is needed to hedge three years of forecasted revenues, and the entire exchange gain on the loan should be reported in other comprehensive income to be eventually offset against the future revenue stream.


On December 31, Year 1, the loan payable has to be reflected in the financial statements at fair value using the closing rate. The entry to record the exchange gain on the loan payable resulting from a decrease in the exchange rate from $0.852 to $0.849 is as follows: Dec. 31, Year 1 Loan payable (SD) OCI—cash flow hedge (Year 1) (600,000 3 [0.852 2 0.849])

1,800 1,800

One-third of the hedged revenue stream has been received, and so the following adjusting entry is made to match one-third of the gain from the hedge against the revenue received: Since one-third of the revenue stream has been realized, one-third of the other comprehensive income should be brought into income.

Dec. 31, Year 1 OCI—cash flow hedge (Year 1) Sales revenue (200/600 3 1,800)

600

Two-thirds of the exchange gain is deferred in other comprehensive income to be matched against the foreign currency revenues when they are received in the following two years. The company has lost because it has received less revenue in Canadian dollars than would be the case if the exchange rate had not changed, but it has also gained due to the fact that its liability (measured in Canadian dollars) has decreased. The liability hedges the revenue stream; consequently, the gain in one offsets the loss in the other. The total revenue for the year is $170,400, which is made up of the translated revenue of $169,800 plus the recognized exchange gain on the hedge of $600. Note that this is the same amount as would have been received in translated revenue if the exchange rates had not changed since January 1, Year 1 (200,000 3 0.852). If the exchange rates do not change over the next two years, the total translated revenue plus the recognized revenue from the hedge will be $170,400 each year. Note also that while the loan is still SD600,000, one-third of the foreign revenue stream has been received; therefore, one-third of this loan balance no longer qualifies as a hedge and is exposed to foreign currency risk. Because of this, any future exchange gains and losses on this portion must be reflected immediately in income. During Year 2, revenue in Singapore dollars is received and translated at the average rate. This results in the following entry: Cash Sales revenue (200,000 3 0.835)

In Year 2, only two-thirds of the loan is a hedging instrument. The other onethird of the loan is exposed to foreign currency risk; the related exchange gain is reported in profit.

600

167,000 167,000

On December 31, Year 2, the loan payable is reduced by $8,400 (600,000 3 [0.849 2 0.835]) to reflect its translation at the closing rate; also, the gain on the one-third portion that no longer qualifies as a hedge is immediately reflected in profit, and the balance of the gain from the hedge portion is initially deferred with the following entry: Dec. 31, Year 2 Loan payable (SD) Exchange gain (1/3 3 8,400) OCI—cash flow hedge (Year 2)

8,400 2,800 5,600


593


CHAPTER 10


585

The other comprehensive income hedges the foreign currency revenues of Years 2 and 3. Year 2 revenue has been received and translated at the average exchange rate for the year. Therefore, the Year 2 portion (one-half) of the deferred gain is matched against this revenue with the following entry: Dec. 31, Year 2 OCI—cash flow hedge (Year 2) Sales revenue (½ 3 5,600)

2,800 2,800

In addition, the portion of the deferred Year 1 exchange gain must be matched against Year 2 revenues with the following entry: Dec. 31, Year 2 OCI—cash flow hedge (Year 1) Sales revenue

600 600

that the purpose of the hedge was to ensure that the foreign currency revenue in Year 2 was at least $170,400 (200,000 3 0.852). The actual foreign revenue adjusted for the hedge gains was equal to this amount, as the following calculation indicates: Foreign currency revenue (200,000 3 0.835) Exchange gain on Year 1 hedge Exchange gain on Year 2 hedge

$167,000 600 2,800 $170,400

The final revenue figure of $170,400 is the equivalent Canadian dollar value of the anticipated sale when the hedge was first put into place.

In addition, the Year 2 income statement will reflect the additional exchange gain ($2,800) that came from the portion of the loan that no longer qualifies as a hedge. The balance of the accumulated other comprehensive income (AOCI) that will appear on the December 31, Year 2, balance sheet is calculated as follows: OCI, Year 1 Less reflected in income: Year 1 Year 2 OCI, Year 2 Less reflected in income Year 2 AOCI, December 31, Year 2

1,800 600 600

1,200 5,600 2,800

$ 600 2,800 $3,400

Because SD400,000 from the total revenue of SD600,000 has been received at the end of Year 2, the loan balance that still qualifies as a hedge is only SD200,000. The Year 3 entries to record the foreign currency revenues and to adjust the loan to the current rate are as follows: Cash Sales revenue (200,000 3 0.840) Dec. 31, Year 3 OCI—cash flow hedge (Year 3) (1/3 3 3,000) Exchange loss (2/3 3 3,000) Loan payable (SD) (600,000 3 0.005)

168,000 168,000

1,000 2,000 3,000

In Year 3, only one-third of the loan is a hedging instrument. The other twothirds of the loan is exposed to foreign currency risk; the related exchange gain is reported in profit.


594


586

CHAPTER 10

By the end of Year 3, all of the other comprehensive income has been transferred to profit to match the timing of the income recognition on the hedged item, being the revenue stream.


The foreign currency revenue has all been received, so none of the Year 3 loss pertaining to the hedge ($1,000) needs to be deferred. The remaining loss from the portion of the loan that is not a hedge ($2,000) is also expensed in the year. A final entry is made to match the balance of the other comprehensive income from prior years against the Year 3 foreign currency revenue: OCI—cash flow hedge (Year 1) OCI—cash flow hedge (Year 2) OCI—cash flow hedge (Year 3) Sales revenue

600 2,800 1,000 2,400

An entry would also be made to pay off the loan that is due on this date. The following calculation summarizes the amount reflected in profit in Year 3 from the foreign currency revenue, the hedge gains and losses, and the exchange loss from the non-hedge portion of the loan: The hedging instrument was used to fix the final revenue figure at $170,400, the equivalent Canadian dollar value of the anticipated sale when the hedge was first put into place.

Foreign currency revenue (200,000 3 0.840) Year 1 and 2 exchange gains on hedge Year 3 exchange loss on hedge Hedged foreign currency revenue Remainder of Year 3 loan exchange loss Effect on Year 3 profit

$168,000 3,400 1,000

2,400 170,400 2,000 $168,400

This simplified example has illustrated a possible use of hedge ing. In a more realistic situation, differences would occur because the average rates used to translate the revenue stream are different from the year-end rates used to translate the foreign currency loan, and the actual revenues would probably turn out to be different from those expected when the hedge was designated. However, the broad concepts illustrated would still apply, and because an increasing portion of the foreign currency–denominated debt ceases to be eligible for a hedge each year, the resultant income recognition pattern is similar to the defer-and-amortize pattern that used to occur for foreign currency debt.

Disclosure Requirements The following summarize the main disclosures required in IAS 21 for the effects of changes in foreign exchange rates: (a) The amount of exchange differences recognized in profit or loss (b) Net exchange differences recognized in other comprehensive income The following summarize the main disclosures required in IFRS 9 related to hedges: The entity must disclose the type of hedge and the risks being hedged.

(a) An entity’s risk management strategy and how it is applied to manage risk (b) How the entity’s hedging activities may affect the amount, timing, and uncertainty of its future cash flows (c) The effect that hedge ing has had on the entity’s primary financial statements Some of the specific disclosure requirements are as follows: (a) The carrying amount of the hedging instruments (financial assets separately from financial liabilities) (b) The notional amounts or other quantity (e.g., tonnes or cubic metres) related to the hedging instruments


CHAPTER 10


595

587

For fair value hedges: (i) The carrying amount of the accumulated gains or losses on the hedged item presented in a separate line item in the statement of financial position, separating assets from liabilities For cash flow hedges: (i) The balance in the cash flow hedge reserve for continuing hedges that will be reclassified when the hedged item affects profit or loss (ii) For hedges of net positions, the hedging gains or losses recognized in a separate line item in the income statement

The disclosure requirements pertaining to hedges and hedge ing are quite extensive.

(iii) The amount reclassified from the cash flow hedge reserve into profit or loss as a reclassification adjustment For fair value and cash flow hedges (i) Changes in the value of the hedging instrument recognized in other comprehensive income (ii) Hedge ineffectiveness recognized in profit or loss Bombardier Inc., a Canadian company, is a manufacturer of transportation equipment, including business and commercial aircraft and rail transportation equipment and systems. It is the world’s only manufacturer of both planes and trains. Exhibit 10.6 contains excerpts from Bombardier’s 2011 financial statements pertaining to foreign currency transactions and hedges. In 2011, Bombardier had not yet adopted IFRS 9 and, therefore, did not provide the extensive disclosure required by this IFRS.

EXHIBIT 10.6 EXTRACTS (IN PART) FROM BOMBARDIER’S 2011 FINANCIAL STATEMENTS Summary of significant ing policies Foreign currency transactions2Transactions denominated in foreign currencies are initially recorded in the functional currency of the related entity using the exchange rates in effect at the date of the transaction. Monetary assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies are translated using the closing exchange rates. Any resulting exchange difference is recognized in income except for exchange differences related to retirement benefits asset and liability, as well as financial liabilities designated as hedges of the Corporation’s net investments in foreign operations, which are recognized in OCI. Non-monetary assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies and measured at historical cost are translated using historical exchange rates, and those measured at fair value are translated using the exchange rate in effect at the date the fair value is determined. Revenues and expenses are translated using the average exchange rates for the period or the exchange rate at the date of the transaction for significant items.

Financial instruments (a) Financial instruments classified as HFT Derivative financial instruments2Derivative financial instruments are mainly used to manage the Corporation’s exposure to foreign exchange and interest-rate market risks, generally

(continued)

Some revenues and expenses are translated at the exchange rate at the date of the transaction rather than the average rate for the period.


596


588

CHAPTER 10


EXHIBIT 10.6

(continued )

through forward foreign exchange contracts, interest rate swap agreements, cross currency interest-rate swap agreements and interest-rate cap agreements. Derivative financial instruments include derivatives that are embedded in financial or nonfinancial contracts that are not closely related to the host contracts. Derivative financial instruments are classified as HFT, unless they are designated as hedging instruments for which hedge ing is applied (see below). Changes in the fair value of derivative financial instruments not designated in a hedging relationship, excluding embedded derivatives, are recognized in cost of sales or financing expense or financing income, based on the nature of the exposure. Embedded derivatives of the Corporation include financing rate commitments, call options on long-term debt and foreign exchange instruments. Upon initial recognition, the fair value of financing rate commitments linked to the sale of products is recognized as deferred charge in other assets. The deferred charge is recorded as an adjustment of the sale price of the related products. Call options on long-term debt that are not closely related to the host contract are measured at fair value, with the initial value recognized as an increase of the related long-term debt and amortized to net income using the effective interest method. Upon initial recognition, the fair value of the foreign exchange instruments not designated in a hedge relationship is recognized in cost of sales. Subsequent changes in fair value of embedded derivatives are recorded in cost of sales, other expense (income) or financing expense or financing income, based on the nature of the exposure.

Hedge ing The company formally documents and assesses whether the hedging instruments are highly effective.

Designation as a hedge is only allowed if, both at the inception of the hedge and throughout the hedge period, the changes in the fair value of the derivative and non-derivative hedging financial instruments are expected to substantially offset the changes in the fair value of the hedged item attributable to the underlying risk exposure. The Corporation formally documents all relationships between the hedging instruments and hedged items, as well as its risk management objectives and strategy for undertaking various hedge transactions. This process includes linking all derivatives to forecasted cash flows or to a specific asset or liability. The Corporation also formally documents and assesses, both at the hedge’s inception and on an ongoing basis, whether the hedging instruments are highly effective in offsetting the changes in the fair value or cash flows of the hedged items. There are three permitted hedging strategies.

The company applies both fair value and cash flow hedge ing.

Fair value hedges2The Corporation generally applies fair value hedge ing to certain interest-rate derivatives and forward foreign exchange contracts hedging the exposures to changes in the fair value of recognized financial assets and financial liabilities. In a fair value hedge relationship, gains or losses from the measurement of derivative hedging instruments at fair value are recorded in net income, while gains or losses on hedged items attributable to the hedged risks are ed for as an adjustment to the carrying amount of hedged items and are recorded in net income. Cash flow hedges2The Corporation generally applies cash flow hedge ing to forward foreign exchange contracts and interest-rate derivatives entered into to hedge foreign exchange risks on forecasted transactions and recognized assets and liabilities. In a cash flow hedge relationship, the portion of gains or losses on the hedging item that is determined to be an effective hedge is recognized in OCI, while the ineffective portion is recorded in net income. The amounts recognized in OCI are reclassified in net income as a reclassification adjustment when the hedged item affects net income. However, when an anticipated transaction is subsequently recorded as a nonfinancial asset, the amounts recognized in OCI are reclassified in the initial carrying amount of the related asset.

(continued)


597


CHAPTER 10


589

12. FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS Derivatives and hedging activities The carrying amounts of all derivative and non-derivative financial instruments in a hedge relationship were as follows as at:

December 31, 2011 Assets Derivative financial instruments designated as fair value hedges Cross-currency interest-rate swap Interest-rate swap

Derivative financial instruments designated as cash flow hedges1 Forward foreign exchange contracts Derivative financial instruments designated as hedges of net investment Cross-currency interest-rate swap Derivative financial instruments classified as HFT2 Forward foreign exchange contracts Interest-rate swap Cross-currency interest-rate swap Embedded derivative financial instruments: Foreign exchange Call options on long-term debt Financing rate commitments Total derivative financial instruments Non-derivative financial instruments designated as hedges of net investment Long-term debt

$ 12 297 309

Liabilities

$ 39 — 39

January 31, 2011 Assets

Liabilities

$ 22 80 102

$ 68 — 68

195

284

390

509

—

—

—

36

19 — —

14 4 —

9 — —

48 6 —

4 21 — 44 $548

3 — — 21 $344

16 40 — 65 $557

8 — 2 64 $677

$ —

$1,029

$ —

$715

Forward foreign exchange contracts were designated as cash flow hedges.

Long-term debt was designated as hedges of net investment.

1

The maximum length of time of the derivative financial instruments hedging the Corporation’s exposure to the variability in future cash flows for anticipated transactions is 22 months as of December 31, 2011. 2 Held as economic hedges, except for embedded derivative financial instruments.

The net gains on the hedging instruments designated in fair value hedge relationships and the net losses on the related hedged items attributable to the hedged risk recognized in financing expense, amounted to $311 million and $304 million respectively for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2011 ($123 million and $119 million respectively for the fiscal year ended January 31, 2011). The methods and assumptions used to measure the fair value of financial instruments are described in note 32-Fair value of financial instruments.

31 FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT Market risk Foreign exchange risk The Corporation is exposed to significant foreign exchange risks in the ordinary course of business through its international operations, in particular to the Canadian dollar, pound sterling and euro. The Corporation employs various strategies, including the use of derivative financial instruments and by matching asset and liability positions, to mitigate these exposures.

(continued)

The net gains on the hedging instruments designated in fair value hedge relationships were reported in financing expense.


598


590

CHAPTER 10


EXHIBIT 10.6

The company tries to mitigate foreign currency risk by matching asset and liability positions.

(continued )

The Corporation’s main exposures to foreign currencies are managed by the segments and covered by a central treasury function. Foreign currency exposures are managed in accordance with the Corporation’s Foreign Exchange Risk Management Policy (the “FX Policy”). The objective of the FX Policy is to mitigate the impact of foreign exchange movements on the Corporation’s consolidated financial statements. Under the FX Policy, potential losses from adverse movements in foreign exchange rates should not exceed pre-set limits. Potential loss is defined as the maximum expected loss that could occur if an unhedged foreign currency exposure was exposed to an adverse change of foreign exchange rates over a one-quarter period. The FX Policy also strictly prohibits any speculative foreign exchange transactions that would result in the creation of an exposure in excess of the maximum potential loss approved by the Board of Directors of the Corporation. Under the FX Policy, it is the responsibility of the segments’ management to identify all actual and potential foreign exchange exposures arising from their operations. This information is communicated to the central treasury group, which has the responsibility to execute the hedge transactions in accordance with the FX Policy. In order to properly manage their exposures, each segment maintains long-term cash flow forecasts in each currency. BA has adopted a progressive hedging strategy while BT hedges all its identified foreign currency exposures to limit the effect of currency movements on their results. The segments also mitigate foreign currency risks by maximizing transactions in their functional currency for their operations such as material procurement, sale contracts and financing activities. In addition, the central treasury function manages balance sheet exposures to foreign currency movements by matching asset and liability positions. This program consists mainly in matching the long-term debt in foreign currency with long-term assets denominated in the same currency. The Corporation mainly uses forward foreign exchange contracts to manage the Corporation’s exposure from transactions in foreign currencies and to synthetically modify the currency of exposure of certain balance sheet items. The Corporation applies hedge ing for a significant portion of anticipated transactions and firm commitments denominated in foreign currencies, designated as cash flow hedges. Notably, the Corporation enters into forward foreign exchange contracts to reduce the risk of variability of future cash flows resulting from forecasted sales and purchases and firm commitments. The Corporation’s foreign currency hedging programs are typically unaffected by changes in market conditions, as related derivative financial instruments are generally held to maturity, consistent with the objective to lock in currency rates on the hedged item.

Sensitivity analysis Foreign exchange risk arises on financial instruments that are denominated in foreign currencies. The foreign exchange rate sensitivity is calculated by aggregation of the net foreign exchange rate exposure of the Corporation’s financial instruments recorded in its statement of financial position. The following impact on EBT for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2011, is before giving effect to cash flow hedge relationships.

Effect on EBT Gain (loss)

A 10% change in the U.S. dollar/Canadian dollar exchange rate would change earnings before taxes by $21, which is equal to 2% of earnings before taxes.

110%

CAD/USD

GBP/USD

EUR/USD

EUR/SEK

Other

$21

$(3)

$14

$25

$19

The following impact on OCI for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2011 is for derivatives designated in a cash flow hedge relationship. For derivatives that qualify for hedge ing, any change in fair value is mostly offset by the re-measurement of the underlying exposure.

(continued)


CHAPTER 10


599

591

Effect on OCI before income taxes Gain (loss)

Variation

CAD/USD

GBP/USD

EUR/USD

EUR/SEK

Other

110%

$190

$4

$49

$29

$74

Source: Reproduced with permission from Bombardier, Inc. http://ir.bombardier.com/modules/misc/ documents/99/28/87/48/13/Bombardier_AR2011_en.pdf

ANALYSIS AND INTERPRETATION OF FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

LO7

Earlier in this chapter, we prepared journal entries to for the hedge of a firm commitment by Manning Inc. to purchase inventory from a foreign supplier under three reporting methods. Exhibit 10.7 shows the net impact of the aforementioned journal entries on selected items on Manning’s Year 2 income statement and balance sheet and on three key financial ratios. The first column shows assumed amounts for the numerator and denominator for three key ratios before Manning signed the purchase order and entered into the forward contract. The last three columns show the cumulative effect of the journal entries on the Year 2 financial statements and on the key ratios. We assume that there were no transactions other than the purchase order and the forward contract.

EXHIBIT 10.7

Impact of Hedge ing Method on Key Ratios Before transactions

Cash flow hedge

Impact on income statement Net income OCI Comprehensive income

(1,750) (1,750)

Impact on balance sheet Current assets Current liabilities Shareholders’ equity

1,750 (1,750)

Impact on key ratios: Current ratio Current assets Current liabilities Debt-to-equity ratio Total debt Shareholders’ equity Return on equity Net income Shareholders’ equity

Fair value hedge

No hedge ing (1,750) (1,750)

1,750 1,750

The fair value hedge method shows the best liquidity position (i.e., highest current ratio) because the commitment asset is included in current assets.

1,750 (1,750)

2,000,000 1,000,000 52.000

2,000,000 1,001,750 51.997

2,001,750 1,001,750 51.998

2,000,000 1,001,750 51.997

3,300,000 1,100,000 53.000

3,301,750 1,098,250 53.006

3,301,750 1,100,000 53.002

3,301,750 1,098,250 53.006

165,000 1,100,000 515.00%

165,000 1,098,250 515.02%

165,000 1,100,000 515.00%

163,250 1,098,250 514.86%

The cash flow hedge method shows the best performance (i.e., highest return on equity) because exchange losses are reported in OCI and do not negatively affect net income.


600


592

CHAPTER 10


Note the following from Exhibit 10.7: • There is no impact on net income or comprehensive income under the fair value hedge, because the exchange loss on the forward contract is offset by an exchange gain on the commitment asset. Total shareholders’ equity is the same for all three methods but the components of shareholders’ equity will have different values.

• There is a negative impact of $1,750 on comprehensive income for the other two methods, but the cash flow hedge shows the loss in OCI, whereas the loss is reported in net income when hedge ing is not used. The loss through OCI ends up in accumulated OCI, which is a separate component of shareholders’ equity, whereas the negative net income ended up in retained earnings. • All methods report a current liability of $1,750 but only the fair value hedge shows a current asset, which is the commitment asset of $1,750. • Manning’s liquidity looks the best under the fair value hedge because the current ratio is highest. The commitment asset was included in current assets under this method but not in the other methods.

The fair value hedge method shows the best solvency position (i.e., lowest debtto-equity ratio) because shareholders’ equity is not negatively affected by exchange losses.

LO8

• Manning’s solvency looked the best under the fair value hedge because the debt-to-equity ratio was lowest. Shareholders’ equity was not negatively affected by any exchange losses under the fair value hedge, whereas it was negatively affected for the other two methods. • The return on equity uses net income rather than comprehensive income as the numerator. The cash flow method shows the best return on equity because of the higher net income and lower shareholders’ equity. The no hedge ing method shows the worst return on equity because the exchange loss is reported in net income.

ASPE Differences • Hedge ing is permitted only when the critical of the hedging instrument match those of the hedged item. Enterprises are not required to assess hedge effectiveness. An enterprise is required to determine only that the critical of the two components of the hedging arrangement continue to match. • An entity may designate only the following hedging relationships pertaining to foreign currency exposure: — An anticipated purchase or sale of a commodity hedged with a forward contract to mitigate the effect of future price changes of the commodity. — An anticipated transaction denominated in a foreign currency hedged with a forward contract to mitigate the effect of changes in future foreign currency exchange rates. — a foreign currency–denominated interest-bearing asset or liability hedged with a cross–currency interest rate swap to mitigate the effect of changes in interest rates and foreign currency exchange rates. — The net investment in a self-sustaining foreign operation hedged with a derivative or a non-derivative financial instrument to mitigate the effect of changes in foreign currency exchange rates.


CHAPTER 10


• Hedge ing for private companies follows an accrual-based model and is much simpler than hedge ing for public companies. For example, an entity s for a qualifying hedge of an anticipated transaction as follows:

601

593

Hedge ing is more restrictive and much simpler for private enterprises.

— When the anticipated transaction occurs, it is recognized initially at the amount of consideration paid or received. — When the hedging item matures before the hedged item is recognized, the gain or loss on the hedging item is recognized as a separate component of equity until the hedged item is recognized. When the hedged item is recognized, the gain or loss on the hedging item is transferred from the separate component of equity to the carrying amount of the hedged item or to net income. — When the forward contract matures, the gain or loss on the contract is recorded as an adjustment of the carrying amount of the hedged item. When the hedged item is recognized directly in net income, the gain or loss on the forward contract is included in the same category of net income. • Disclosure is minimal compared to the disclosure required for public companies.

U.S. GAAP Differences U.S. GAAP and IFRSs for foreign currency transactions have many similarities. The significant differences are summarized as follows: 1. Whereas IFRSs give priority to certain indicators when determining the functional currency, U.S. GAAP do not give priority to any of the indicators. 2. Whereas IFRSs report foreign currency gains or losses on available-for-sale debt securities in net income, U.S. GAAP report these exchange gains or losses in other comprehensive income.

summary Transactions denominated in foreign currency are recorded in Canadian dollars at the spot rate in effect on the date of the transaction. At the date of the balance sheet, foreign currency assets and liabilities are translated into Canadian dollars to preserve the normal measurement at either historical cost or current value. Any gains or losses arising from changes in exchange rates on the exposed items are reflected in profit for the period. The use of hedging instruments such as forward exchange contracts minimizes or completely eliminates the risks associated with exchange rate changes. If all risks are removed, the hedge is “perfect.” It also is possible to have a situation in which only a portion of a position is hedged and the balance is at risk or in which, as was illustrated, a portion of the hedging instrument ceases to act as a hedge and becomes exposed to foreign currency risk.


602


594

CHAPTER 10


In a speculative forward exchange contract and for a fair value hedge, exchange gains and losses are recognized in profit in the period of the change in exchange rates. In a cash flow hedge, the exchange gains and losses on the hedging instrument are initially reported in other comprehensive income and subsequently reclassified to profit when the hedged item affects profit.

Significant Changes in GAAP in the Last Three Years 1. The requirements for hedge ing have changed and are now contained in IFRS 9 rather than IAS 39. IFRS 9 is effective for 2015, with the option for early adoption. IAS 39 is effective until IFRS 9 is adopted. 2. The requirements for hedge ing in IFRS 9 are less restrictive and are more closely aligned with risk management activities undertaken by companies when hedging their financial and nonfinancial risk exposures. 3. In a fair value hedge, if the hedging instrument hedges an equity instruments for which an entity has elected to present changes in fair value in OCI, then the gain or loss on the hedging instrument is also presented in OCI. 4. Disclosure requirements are more comprehensive and focus on the risks that entities are managing, how they are managing those risks, and the outcomes of that risk management activity, including the effect on the financial statements.

Changes Expected in GAAP in the Next Three Years 1. The new requirements for hedge ing as per IFRS 9 must be adopted for fiscal years beginning on or after January 1, 2015, or earlier, with early adoption allowed. 2. No other major changes are expected in the area of foreign currency transactions or hedge ing for foreign currency risk.

SELF- STUDY PROBLEM 1 LO1, 4

Hedging an Existing Monetary Position On November 15, Year 1, Domco Ltd. of Montreal bought merchandise from a supplier located in Brunei for 100,000 Brunei dollars (BD). The Brunei dollar was trading at $0.81 on that date, and the of the purchase required Domco to pay the on January 30, Year 2. On December 1, when the spot rate was BD1 5 $0.813, Domco entered into a forward contract with its bank to receive BD100,000 at the 60-day forward rate of BD1 5 $0.82. On December 31, Year 1, Domco’s year-end, the spot rate was BD1 5 $0.825 and the 30-day forward rate was BD1 5 $0.831. On January 30, Year 2, when the spot rate was BD1 5 $0.838, Domco settled the forward contract with its bank and paid BD100,000 to the Swiss supplier.

Required: (a) Prepare the journal entries required in Year 1 and Year 2, assuming that hedge ing is not applied. (b) Prepare a partial statement of financial position as at December 31, Year 1, which shows s payable and the forward contract. (c) Prepare one journal entry to summarize the combined effect of all entries in Part (a).


CHAPTER 10

S OLUTION

TO


603

595

SELF-STUDY PROBLEM 1 (a)

Nov. 15, Year 1 Inventory ($) s payable (BD) (BD100,000 3 0.81) Dec. 1, Year 1 Exchange gains/losses s payable (BD) To adjust the s payable to the Dec. 1 spot rate (BD100,000 3 [0.813 2 0.810]) Receivable from bank (BD) Payable to bank ($) To record the forward contract (BD100,000 3 0.82) Dec. 31, Year 1 Exchange gains/losses s payable (BD) To adjust the s payable to the Dec. 31 spot rate (BD100,000 3 [0.825 2 0.813]) Receivable from bank (BD) Exchange gains/losses To adjust the forward contract to the Dec. 31 forward rate (BD100,000 3 [0.831 2 0.820]) Jan. 30, Year 2 Exchange gains/losses s payable (BD) To adjust the s payable to the Jan. 30 spot rate (BD100,000 3 [0.838 2 0.825]) Receivable from bank (BD) Exchange gains/losses To adjust the forward contract to the Jan. 30 forward rate (BD100,000 3 [0.838 2 0.831])

(b)

81,000 81,000 300 300

82,000 82,000

1,200 1,200

1,100 1,100

1,300 1,300

700 700

Payable to bank ($) Cash ($) Deliver Canadian dollars to bank

82,000

Cash (BD) Receivable from bank (BD) Receive BD100,000 from bank (BD100,000 3 0.838)

83,800

s payable (BD) Cash (BD) Pay BD100,000 to supplier (BD100,000 3 0.838)

83,800

82,000

83,800

83,800

DOMCO LTD. STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION at December 31, Year 1 Assets Forward contract (Note 1)

$ 1,100

Liabilities s payable

$82,500


604


596

CHAPTER 10


Note 1: Receivable from bank Payable to bank Net amount of forward contract

(c)

Inventory Exchange loss (before hedge) Exchange loss (5 on contract) Cash

$83,100 (82,000) $ 1,100 81,000 300 700 82,000


Hedging an Unrecognized Firm Commitment On October 15, Year 2, Sellcompany Ltd., located in Canada, signed a contract to sell equipment to Buycompany, which is located in a country whose currency is the foreign currency unit (FC). The selling price of the equipment was FC200,000 and the of the sale called for delivery to be made on January 30, Year 3, with payment in full due on delivery. Having signed the sales order, Sellcompany immediately entered into a forward contract with its bank to sell FC200,000 on January 30, Year 3, at the forward rate of FC1 5 $1.22. The spot rate on October 15 was FC1 5 $1.20. On December 31, the year-end of Sellcompany, the spot rate was FC1 5 $1.222 and the 30-day forward rate was FC1 5 $1.231. On January 30, Year 3, when the spot rate was FC1 5 $1.24, Sellcompany delivered the equipment, received FC200,000 from Buycompany, and settled the forward contract with the bank.

Required: (a) Prepare the journal entries required in Year 2 and Year 3 for Sellcompany, assuming that the forward contract is designated as a cash flow hedge. (b) Prepare a partial statement of financial position as at December 31, Year 2, which shows the presentation of the hedge s. (c) Prepare one journal entry to summarize the combined effect of all entries in Part (a).

SOLUTION

TO

SELF-STUDY PROBLEM 2

(a)

Oct. 15, Year 2 Receivable from bank ($) Payable to bank (FC) To record the forward contract (FC200,000 3 1.22) Dec. 31, Year 2 OCI—cash flow hedge Payable to bank (FC) To adjust the forward contract to the forward rate FC200,000 3 (1.231 2 1.220) Jan. 30, Year 3 OCI—cash flow hedge Payable to bank (FC) To adjust the forward contract to the Jan. 30 forward rate FC200,000 3 (1.240 2 1.231)

244,000 244,000

2,200 2,200

1,800 1,800


CHAPTER 10


Cash (FC) Sales To record equipment sale at FC200,000 3 1.24

248,000

Payable to bank (FC) Cash (FC) Deliver FC to bank

248,000

Cash ($) Receivable from bank ($) Receive Canadian dollars from bank

244,000

597

248,000

248,000

244,000

Sales OCI—cash flow hedge To reclassify other comprehensive income as an adjustment of sales

4,000 4,000

SELLCOMPANY LTD. STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION at December 31, Year 2

(b)

(c)

605

Liabilities Forward contract (Note 1)

$

Note 1: Payable to bank Receivable from bank Net amount of forward contract

$246,200 (244,000) $ 2,200

Cash Sales

2,200

244,000 244,000

In the end, the sales were recorded at $244,000, the amount fixed by the forward contract. Furthermore, no exchange gains or losses were reported in income because the commitment to sell the equipment was effectively hedged by the forward contract.

APPENDIX 10A Determining the Fair Value of Forward Exchange Contracts The fair value of a forward exchange contract is based on the relative merits of the contract compared with other contracts in the market and the time value of money. If the contract states that the company must sell foreign currency at a rate that is better than what is currently available in the market, the contract has a positive value. On the other hand, if the contract states that the company must sell foreign currency at a rate that is worse than what is currently offered in the market, the contract has a negative value. Therefore, the following factors

LO3 The fair value of a forward contract is based on its relative merits compared with other contracts in the market and the time value of money.


606


598

CHAPTER 10


are usually considered to determine the fair value of a forward contract at any point in time: 1. The forward rate when the forward contract was entered into 2. The current forward rate for a contract that matures on the same date as the forward contract entered into 3. A discount rate, typically the company’s incremental borrowing rate In Exhibit 10.4, we considered the first two factors above when we measured the forward contract at $500 at December 31, Year 1. Since the $500 value will be realized only on March 1, Year 2, it should be discounted to derive its present value at December 31, Year 1. Assuming that Raven’s incremental borrowing rate is 12% per annum or 1% per month, the fair value of the forward contract at December 31 is $490.15 ($500 3 0.9803).7 The journal entries to record the fair value of the forward contract in Exhibit 10.4 under the gross and net methods when discounting is applied are shown in Exhibit 10A.1. Only the first three entries are shown here because the remaining entries would be the same as in Exhibit 10.4.

EXHIBIT 10A.1 JOURNAL ENTRIES FOR SPECULATIVE FORWARD CONTRACT Gross method December 1, Year 1 Receivable from bank ($) Payable to bank (PP) Record forward contract at forward rate (PP1,000,000 3 0.0227 5 $22,700) The value of a forward contract should be recorded in present value .

December 31, Year 1 Forward contract Payable to bank (PP) Exchange gain Revalue forward contract at fair value (PP1,000,000 3 (0.0227 2 0.0222) 3 0.9803 5 $490) March 1, Year 2 Forward contract Payable to bank (PP) Exchange gain Revalue forward contract at fair value ([22,700 2 490] 2 PP1,000,000 3 0.0220 5 $210)

Net method

22,700 22,700

490 490 490

490

210 210 210

210


1. Briefly summarize the ing issues arising from foreign currency– denominated transactions.

LO1

2. What is the difference between pegged and floating exchange rates?


607


CHAPTER 10


599

LO1

3. You read in the newspaper, “One U.S. dollar can be exchanged for 1.15 Canadian dollars.” Is this a direct or an indirect quotation? If your answer is indirect, what is the direct quotation? If your answer is direct, what is the indirect quotation?

LO1

4. Differentiate between a spot rate and a forward rate.

LO1

5. How are foreign currency–denominated assets and liabilities measured on the transaction date? How are they measured on a subsequent balance sheet date?

LO1

6. Describe when to use the closing rate and when to use the historical rate when translating assets and liabilities denominated in a foreign currency. Explain whether or not this practice is consistent with the way we normally measure assets and liabilities.

LO1

7. Differentiate between a spot rate and a closing rate.

LO3, 5

8. Differentiate between the ing for a fair value hedge and a cash flow hedge.

LO3

9. List some ways that a Canadian company could hedge against foreign currency exchange rate fluctuations.

LO3

10. What are some typical reasons for acquiring a forward exchange contract?

LO4

11. If a foreign currency2denominated payable has been hedged, why is it necessary to adjust the liability for balance sheet purposes?

LO1

12. Explain the application of lower of cost and net realizable value to inventory that was purchased from a foreign supplier.

LO5

13. How does the ing for a fair value hedge differ from the ing for a cash flow hedge of an unrecognized firm commitment?

LO2

14. What is the suggested financial statement presentation of hedge s recorded under the gross method? Why?

LO5

15. What is meant by hedge ing?

LO2, 3

16. Would hedge ing be used in a situation where the hedged item and the hedging instrument were both monetary items on a company’s statement of financial position? Explain.

LO6

17. When long-term debt hedges a revenue stream, a portion of the long-term debt becomes exposed to the risk of changes in exchange rates. Why is this?

LO5

18. When will the paid on a forward contract to hedge a firm commitment to purchase inventory be reported in income under a cash flow hedge? Explain.

Case 10-1

Interfast Corporation, a fastener manufacturer, has recently been expanding its sales through exports to foreign markets. Earlier this year, the company negotiated the sale of several thousand cases of fasteners to a wholesaler in the country of Loznia. The customer is unwilling to assume the risk of having to make payment in Canadian dollars. Desperate to enter the Loznian market, the vice-president for international sales agrees to denominate the sale in lrubles (LR), the national currency of Loznia. The current exchange rate for the lruble is $2. In addition, the customer indicates that he cannot make payment until all of the fasteners have been sold. Payment of LR200,000 is scheduled for six months from the date of sale.

C ASES LO3, 4


608


600

CHAPTER 10


Fearful that the lruble might depreciate in value over the next six months, the head of the risk management department at Interfast enters into a forward contract to sell lrubles in six months at a forward rate of $1.80. The forward contract is designated as a fair value hedge of the lruble receivable. Six months later, when payment is received from the Loznian customer, the exchange rate for the lruble is $1.70. The corporate treasurer calls the head of the risk management department into her office. Treasurer:

I see that your decision to hedge our foreign currency position on that sale to Loznia was a bad one.

Department Head:

What do you mean? We have a gain on that forward contract. We’re $20,000 better off from having entered into that hedge.

Treasurer:

That’s not what the books say. The ants have recorded a net loss of $40,000 on that particular deal. I’m afraid I’m not going to be able to pay you a bonus this year. Another bad deal like this one and I’m going to have to demote you back to the interest rate swap department.

Department Head:

Those bean counters have messed up again. I told those guys in international sales that selling to customers in Loznia was risky, but at least by hedging our exposure, we managed to receive a reasonable amount of cash on that deal. In fact, we ended up with a gain of $20,000 on the hedge. Tell the ants to check their debits and credits again. I’m sure they just put a debit in the wrong place or some ing thing like that.

Required: Have the ants made a mistake? Does the company have a loss, a gain, or both from this forward contract? Explain.

Case 10-2 LO3

Long Life Enterprises was a well-established Toronto-based company engaged in the importation and wholesale marketing of specialty grocery items originating in various countries of the western Pacific Rim. They had recently also entered the high-risk business of exportation, to several of these same countries, of fresh Atlantic lobster and crab. Although Canada has extensive trading relationships with several countries in the Pacific Rim, these transactions were not normally priced or settled in of the Canadian dollar. Both the U.S. dollar and the Japanese yen were somewhat more common in these transactions. Further, various local currencies were involved, especially for small transactions involving specialty items, and a wide variety of credit were in use for both imports and exports. The entire situation was complicated by the perishable nature of some of the imports and the high mortality risk for both lobster and crab. Both situations led to uncertainty as to the face amount of the associated receivable or payable and hindered the ability of the firm to adopt the policy of specific hedging of each of the receivable or payable contracts. Most recently, the Canadian dollar had risen against other major currencies, leading to major losses on the large receivables outstanding because of the seasonal lobster harvest. More generally, management was concerned about losses that might arise from both export and import transactions. For the most recent


609


CHAPTER 10


601

fiscal year, foreign currency losses had exceeded gains by some $40,000—an amount the company could not afford during the present stage of rapid growth.

Required: What steps would you propose to the management of Long Life Enterprises to reduce the foreign exchange costs associated with their receivables and payables? As a part of this process, suggest a way of structuring transactions or affairs that would reduce the impact of fluctuations in the relative values of currencies. (case prepared by Peter Secord, St. Mary’s University)

Case 10-3 LO1

Canada Cola Inc. (CCI) is a public company engaged in the manufacture and distribution of soft drinks across Canada. Its primary product is Canada Cola (“Fresh as a Canadian stream”), which is a top seller in Canada and generates large export sales. You met with Jane MacNamara, the partner in charge of the CCI audit engagement, to commence planning for the audit of CCI. During this meeting, MacNamara informed you that early this year CCI entered into an agreement with the government of Russia and has commenced the manufacture and sale of Canada Cola in Russia. A short summary of this agreement is contained in Exhibit I. MacNamara would like you to prepare a detailed report that discusses the ing implications of this new division of CCI for this engagement.

Required: Prepare the report.

(CICA adapted)

EXHIBIT I SUMMARY OF AGREEMENT 1. 2.

3. 4. 5. 6.

7.

Case 10-4 LO3, 4, 6

The Russian government will provide the land and the building for the plant. It will make no further investment. CCI will install bottling machinery costing $5 million in the Russian plant. Once installed, this machinery may not be removed from Russia. No other plants may be established in Russia without the consent of the Russian government. CCI will be required to provide the funds for the initial working capital. CCI will sell U.S. dollars to the Russian government in exchange for local currency (rubles). CCI will be wholly responsible for the management and daily operations of the plant. Canadian managers will be transferred to Russia. CCI will be permitted to export its cola syrup to Russia at CCI’s Canadian cost. Only Canada Cola may be bottled at the Russian plant and the entire output from the plant can only be sold in Russia. CCI and the Russian government will share equally in the profits from the sale of Canada Cola in Russia. Although foreign currency can be converted into rubles, rubles cannot be converted back into any foreign currency. Therefore, the Russian government will sell vodka to CCI (at the prevailing export market price in Russia) in exchange for the rubles CCI earns in profits. CCI will be permitted to export this vodka to Canada, where it may be sold in the Canadian domestic market only.

International Manufacturing Company (IMC) is a large, Canadian-based corporation with worldwide operations. IMC has issued debt instruments in Swiss francs, euros, and U.S. dollars to take advantage of low interest rates. All these financing arrangements were completed on a fixed-interest-rate basis.


610


602

CHAPTER 10


The Canadian dollar has weakened considerably in the past few years, and as a result, IMC has accrued substantial foreign exchange losses on the debt instruments. These losses have seriously impaired IMC’s ability to report increased earnings during the last few years, in spite of its successful operations. IMC’s investment banker has recommended the following alternatives to management: 1. IMC considers using the currency-swap market to minimize losses on its debt. IMC would enter into an agreement with a third party, whereby IMC agreed to pay the obligation of the third party’s debt in Canadian dollars in exchange for the third party agreeing to pay the obligation of IMC’s foreign debt. Pursuing this option would entail an additional cost if the investment banker were required to guarantee the payment of the foreign debt. 2. IMC considers buying back the Swiss franc, euro, and U.S.-dollar bonds on the bond market and refinancing them now. Interest rates for all currencies are much higher at present than at the time that these bonds were issued. Management has asked you, the CA, to prepare a report that discusses the ing and financial reporting implications of each of the investment banker’s recommendations. Management is considering a third option as well: using the existing debt to hedge forecasted sales of IMC products in these foreign countries. Management also wants to know the ing and financial reporting implications of this option.


Case 10-5 LO1, 2, 3

(CICA adapted)

ZIM Inc. (ZIM) is a high-technology company that develops, designs, and manufactures telecommunications equipment. ZIM was founded in Year 5 by Dr. Alex Zimmer, the former assistant head of research and development at a major telephone company. He and the director of marketing left the company to found ZIM. ZIM has been very successful. Sales reached $8.3 million in its first year and have grown by 80% annually since then. The key to ZIM’s success has been the sophisticated software contained in the equipment it sells. ZIM’s board of directors recently decided to issue shares to raise funds for strategic objectives through an initial public offering of common shares. The shares will be listed on a major Canadian stock exchange. ZIM’s underwriter, Mitchell Securities, believes that an offering price of 18 to 20 times the most recent fiscal year’s earnings per share can be achieved. This opinion is based on selected industry comparisons. ZIM has announced its intention to go public, and work has begun on the preparation of a preliminary prospectus. It should be filed with the relevant securities commissions in 40 days. The offering is expected to close in about 75 days. The company has a July 31 year-end. It is now September 8, Year 8. You, a CA, work for Chesther Chathan, Chartered ants, the auditors of ZIM since its inception. You have just been put in charge of ZIM’s audit, due to the sudden illness of the senior. ZIM’s year-end audit has just commenced. At the same time, ZIM’s staff and the underwriters are working 15-hour days trying to write the prospectus, complete the required legal work, and prepare for the public


611


CHAPTER 10


603

offering. The client says that the audit must be completed so that the financial statements can go to the printer in 22 days. ZIM plans to hire a qualified chief financial officer as soon as possible. An extract from ZIM’s ing records is found in Exhibit II. You have gathered the information in Exhibit III from the client. You have been asked by the audit partner to prepare a memo dealing with the key ing issues.

EXHIBIT II EXTRACT FROM ING RECORDS (in Thousands of Dollars) Revenue Month of July

Total fiscal Year 8

Deferred development costs1

$ 815 540 700 — 2,077 402 670 — — — $5,204

$ 8,802 4,715 4,241 2,104 2,077 1,640 1,350 400 394 — $25,723

$ 9,463 — 359 1,431 — 1,500 2,159 725 1,825 691 $18,153

Product Zibor Resale components Webstar IDSL 600 Transact training Firewall Plus Transact 700J ATM 4000 Photon phasing project 1

Cumulative costs for each product that have been deferred and recorded on the balance sheet.

EXHIBIT III INFORMATION GATHERED FROM THE CLIENT 1.

2.

3.

4.

The job market for top software and hardware engineering talent is very tight. As a result, ZIM has turned to information technology “head hunters” to attract key personnel from other high-technology companies. During the year, ZIM paid $178,000 in placement fees, and the company is amortizing the payments over five years. The search firm offers a one-year money-back guarantee if any of the people hired leaves the company or proves to be unsatisfactory. On July 29, Year 8, the company made a payment of $100,000 to a computer hacker. The hacker had given the company ten days to pay her the funds. Otherwise, she said she would post on the Internet a security flaw she had detected in the ZIM’s Firewall Plus software. Ale Zimmer had been working on a photon-phasing project when he left the telephone company. He has moved this technology ahead significantly at ZIM, and a prototype has been built at a cost of $691,000. The project has been delayed pending a decision on the direction that the project will take. ZIM defers and amortizes software and other development costs according to the following formula: Annual amortization rate =

Sales in units for the year

Total expected sales in units during product life

(continued)


612


604

CHAPTER 10


EXHIBIT III

(continued )

5. In line with normal software company practice, ZIM releases, via the Internet, software upgrades that correct certain bugs in previously released software. 6. During a routine visit to the AC&C Advanced Telecommunications laboratory in southern California, a ZIM engineer discovered that nearly 600 lines of code in an AC&C program were identical to those of some ZIM software written in Year 6—right down to two spelling mistakes and a programming error. 7. The ATM 4000 has been the company’s only product flop. High rates of field failures and customer dissatisfaction led ZIM to issue an offer, dated July 30, Year 8, to buy back all units currently in service for a total of $467,500. Southwestern Utah Telephone is suing ZIM for $4 million for damages related to two ATM 4000 devices that it had purchased through a distributor. The devices broke down, affecting telephone traffic for two weeks before they were replaced. 8. ZIM also resells components manufactured by a Japanese telecommunications company. The effort required to make these sales to existing customers is minimal, but the gross margin is only 12% versus an average of 60% for the company’s other products, excluding the Transact and 700J lines. 9. During the first two years of operation, ZIM expensed all desktop computers (PCs) when purchased, on the grounds that they become obsolete so fast that their value after one year is almost negligible. In the current year, ZIM bought $429,000 worth of PCs and plans to write them off over two years. 10. Revenue is recognized on shipment for all equipment sold. are FOB ZIM’s shipping location. 11. ZIM’s director of marketing, Albert Buzzer, has come up with a novel method of maximizing profits on the Transact product line. Transact is one of the few ZIM products that has direct competition. Transact routes telephone calls 20% faster than competing products but sells for 30% less. ZIM actually sells the product at a loss. However, without a special training course offered by ZIM, field efficiency cannot be maximized. Customers usually realize that they need the special training a couple of months after purchase. Buzzer estimates that the average telephone company will spend three dollars on training for every dollar spent on the product. Because of the way telephone companies budget and for capital and training expenditures, most will not realize that they are spending three times as much on training as on the product. 12. In May Year 2, ZIM paid back a U.S. denominated, $25 million long-term debt prematurely to take advantage of a favourable interest rate. The US$25 million loan was subject to a cross-currency swap. The agreement with the third party was to pay CAN$33 million and receive US$25 million from the third party in May Year 4. This represented the exchange rate at the time the transactions were entered into. Although the swap was used to hedge the currency risk on the long-term debt, it was not formally designated as a hedge for reporting purposes. The U.S. dollars exchange rate at the time of the payout was CAN$1.20. ZIM recognized the $3 million gain on the repayment of the U.S. loan. ZIM negotiated a CAN$30 million one-year loan with Beemow Bank to repay the US$25 million loan. The spot exchange rate as at January 31, Year 3, was CAN$1.27, whereas the forward exchange rate for contracts expiring in May Year 4 was CAN$1.25. 13. The IDSL equipment was sold to customers in May Year 8. In September Year, ZIM provided the custom software required to operate the IDSL 600 equipment. The software was “shipped” via the Internet.


(CICA adapted)


CHAPTER 10


613

605

P ROBLEMS Note: Some problems use direct exchange rate quotations; others use indirect quotations.

Problem 10-1 LO1, 2, 4, 9

Manitoba Exporters Inc. (MEI) sells Inuit carvings to countries throughout the world. On December 1, Year 5, MEI sold 10,000 carvings to a wholesaler in a foreign country at a total cost of 600,000 foreign currency units (FCs) when the spot rate was FC1 5 $0.741. The invoice required the foreign wholesaler to remit by April 1, Year 6. On December 3, Year 5, MEI entered into a forward contract with the Royal Bank at the 120-day forward rate of FC1 5 $0.781. Hedge ing is not applied. The fiscal year-end of MEI is December 31, and on this date the spot rate was FC1 5 $0.757 and the forward rate was FC1 5 $0.791. The payment from the foreign customer was received on April 1, Year 6, when the spot rate was FC1 5 $0.802.

Required: (a) Prepare the journal entries to record (i) the sale and the forward contract, (ii) any adjustments required on December 31, and (iii) the cash received in Year 6. (b) Prepare a partial balance sheet of MEI on December 31, Year 5, that shows the presentation of the receivable and the s associated with the forward contract. *(c) Now assume that a discount rate of 6% per annum, or 0.5% per month, is applied when determining the fair value of the forward contract at December 31, Year 5. Prepare the journal entries to record (i) the sale and the forward contract, (ii) any adjustments required on December 31, and (iii) the cash received in Year 6.

Problem 10-2 LO1

Moose Utilities Ltd. (MUL) borrowed $40,000,000 in U.S. funds on January 1, Year 1, at an annual interest rate of 12%. The loan is due on December 31, Year 4, and interest is paid annually on December 31. The Canadian exchange rates for U.S. dollars over the life of the loan were as follows: January 1, Year 1 December 31, Year 1 December 31, Year 2 December 31, Year 3 December 31, Year 4

CDN$1.159 CDN$1.168 CDN$1.160 CDN$1.152 CDN$1.155

Exchange rates changed evenly throughout the year.

Required: (a) Prepare journal entries for MUL for Year 1. (b) Calculate the exchange gains or losses that would be reported in the profit of the company each year over the life of the loan.


614


606

CHAPTER 10

Problem 10-3 LO1


Grammy Ltd., a Canadian company, is dealing with a supplier in a foreign country. On May 1, Year 4, the company made purchases totalling FF3,270,000; this amount is payable in six months. Grammy did not hedge the transaction in any way. On the due date, Grammy found itself in financial difficulty. The supplier agreed to accept a non-interest-bearing note payable for FF3,000,000 and FF270,000 in cash. The note payable is due July 1, Year 6. Grammy did not hedge the note. Grammy has a December 31 fiscal year-end. May 1, Year 4 November 1, Year 4 December 31, Year 4

$1 5 FF2 $1 5 FF2.6 $1 5 FF3.8

Required: Prepare the journal entries for Year 4 for the s payable and the note payable. (CGA-Canada adapted)

Problem 10-4 LO1

On January 1, Year 5, Ornate Company Ltd. purchased US$2,000,000 of the bonds of the Gem Corporation. The bonds were trading at par on this date, pay interest at 9% each December 31, and mature on December 31, Year 7. The following Canadian exchange rates were quoted during Year 5: January 1, Year 5 December 31, Year 5

US$1 5 CDN$1.372 US$1 5 CDN$1.321

Exchange rates changed evenly throughout the year. These bonds were trading at 102 at December 31, Year 5.

Required: Prepare the journal entries for Year 5 assuming that the investment in bonds is (a) held to maturity, (b) held for trading, and (c) available for sale.

Problem 10-5 LO1, 2, 5, 7

On October 1, Year 6, Versatile Company contracted to sell merchandise to a customer in Switzerland at a selling price of SF400,000. The contract called for the merchandise to be delivered to the customer on January 31, Year 7, with payment due on delivery. On October 1, Year 6, Versatile arranged a forward contract to deliver SF400,000 on January 31, Year 7, at a rate of SF1 5 $1.20. Versatile’s yearend is December 31. The merchandise was delivered on January 31, Year 7, and SF400,000 were received and delivered to the bank. Exchange rates were as follows:

October 1, Year 6 December 31, Year 6 January 31, Year 7

Spot rates

Forward rates

SF1 5 $1.18 SF1 5 $1.21 SF1 5 $1.19

SF1 5 $1.20 SF1 5 $1.22 SF1 5 $1.19


CHAPTER 10


615

607

Required: (a) Prepare the journal entries that Versatile should make to record the events described assuming that the forward contract is designated as a cash flow hedge. (b) Prepare a partial trial balance of the s used as at December 31, Year 6, and indicate how each would appear on the company’s financial statements. (c) Prepare the journal entries that Versatile should make to record the events described, assuming that the forward contract is designated as a fair value hedge. (d) Prepare a partial trial balance of the s used as at December 31, Year 6, and indicate how each would appear on the company’s financial statements. (e) Describe how the ing for the hedge affects the current ratio, and indicate which ing treatment for the hedge would show the strongest liquidity position.

Problem 10-6 LO1, 2, 4, 9

Hamilton Importing Corp. (HIC) imports goods from countries around the world for sale in Canada. On December 1, Year 3, HIC purchased 10,000 watches from a foreign wholesaler for DM600,000 when the spot rate was DM1 5 $0.741. The invoice called for payment to be made on April 1, Year 4. On December 3, Year 3, HIC entered into a forward contract with the Royal Bank at the 120-day forward rate of DM1 5 $0.781. Hedge ing is not applied. The fiscal year-end of HIC is December 31. On this date, the spot rate was DM1 5 $0.757 and the 90-day forward rate was DM1 5 $0.786. The payment to the foreign supplier was made on April 1, Year 4, when the spot rate was DM1 5 $0.802.

Required: (a) Prepare the journal entries to record (i) the purchase and the forward contract, (ii) any adjustments required on December 31, and (iii) the payment in Year 4. (b) Prepare a partial statement of financial position for HIC on December 31, Year 3, that presents the liability to the foreign supplier and the s associated with the forward contract. *(c) Now assume that a discount rate of 6% per annum or 0.5% per month is applied when determining the fair value of the forward contract at December 31, Year 3. Prepare the journal entries to record (i) the purchase and the forward contract, (ii) any adjustments required on December 31, and (iii) the payment in Year 4.

Problem 10-7 LO1, 5, 7, 8

On August 1, Year 3, Carleton Ltd. ordered machinery from a supplier in Hong Kong for HK$500,000. The machinery was delivered on October 1, Year 3, with requiring payment in full by December 31, Year 3. On August 2, Year 3, Carleton entered a forward contract to purchase HK$500,000 on December 31, Year 3, at a rate of $0.165. On December 31, Year 3, Carleton settled the forward contract and paid the supplier.


616


608

CHAPTER 10


Exchange rates were as follows: August 1 and 2, Year 3 October 1, Year 3 December 31, Year 3

Spot rates

Forward rates

HK$1 5 C$0.160 HK$1 5 C$0.164 HK$1 5 C$0.169

HK$1 5 C$0.165 HK$1 5 C$0.168 HK$1 5 C$0.169

Required: (a) Assume that the forward contract was designated as a cash flow hedge of the anticipated transaction to purchase the machinery and that the entire balance in accumulated other comprehensive income on October 1 was transferred to the machinery when the machinery was delivered. Calculate the following amounts for the financial statements for the year ended December 31, Year 3: (i) Machinery (ii) Exchange gains/losses (iii) Cash flows for the period (b) Assume that the forward contract was designated as a cash flow hedge of both the purchase of the machinery and the payment of the s payable. Of the balance in accumulated other comprehensive income on October 1, 50% was transferred to the machinery when the machinery was delivered and the other 50% was reclassified into net income when the supplier was paid. Calculate the following amounts for the financial statements for the year ended December 31, Year 3: (i) Machinery (ii) Exchange gains/losses (iii) Cash flows for the period (c) Assume that Carleton is a private company and uses ASPE for reporting purposes. Calculate the following amounts for the financial statements for the year ended December 31, Year 3: (i) Machinery (ii) Exchange gains/losses (iii) Cash flows for the period (d) Explain the similarities and differences between the balances under the three scenarios above. Which scenario would present the higher return on equity for Carleton for Year 3?


EnDur Corp (EDC) is a Canadian company that exports computer software. On February l, Year 2, EDC contracted to sell software to a customer in Denmark at a selling price of 600,000 Danish krona (DK) with payment due 60 days after installation was complete. On February 2, Year 2, EDC entered into a forward contract with the Royal Bank at the five-month forward rate of CDN$1 5 DK5.20. The installation was completed on April 30, Year 2. On June 30, Year 2, the payment from the Danish customer was received and the forward contract was settled. Exchange rates were as follows:

February 1 and 2, Year 2 April 30, Year 2 June 30, Year 2

Spot rates

Forward rates

$1 5 DK5.06 $1 5 DK5.09 $1 5 DK5.14

$1 5 DK5.20 $1 5 DK5.18 $1 5 DK5.14


CHAPTER 10


617

609

Required: (a) Assume that the forward contract was designated as a cash flow hedge of the anticipated sale and that the entire balance in accumulated other comprehensive income (AOCI) on April 30 was transferred to sales when the installation was completed. Calculate the following amounts for the financial statements for the year ended June 30, Year 2: (i) Sales (ii) Exchange gains/losses (iii) Cash flows for the period (b) Assume that EDC could have entered into a three-month forward contract on February 2, Year 2, to hedge the sale of the software with a forward rate of $1 5 DK5.15. If so, this forward contract would have fixed the sales price for the software. Also, assume that the amount transferred from AOCI to the sales on April 30 is the amount required to fix the sales price at the three-month forward rate and the balance of the AOCI is reclassified into net income when EDC received payment from the customer. Calculate the following amounts for the financial statements for the year ended June 30, Year 2: (i) Sales (ii) Exchange gains/losses (iii) Cash flows for the period (c) Explain the similarities and differences between the balances under the two scenarios above.

Problem 10-9 LO1

Winn Ltd. conducted two foreign currency transactions on September 1, Year 4. In the first transaction, it sold DM750,000 in merchandise to a foreign company. Since this sale was so special, Winn agreed to collect the note receivable on September 1, Year 8. There is no risk of default on the receivable, since the customer is a very large and prosperous company. The note has an interest rate of 10% per year, payable at the end of December each year. Both the interest and the note will be paid in DMs. This receivable was not hedged in any way. In the second transaction, Winn purchased FF1,200,000 worth of inventory from a company in another foreign country. This amount will be payable on November 1, Year 5. There is no interest on this liability, and it is not hedged. EXCHANGE RATES September 1, Year 4 December 31, Year 4 Year 4 Sept.–Dec., Year 4 November 1, Year 5 December 31, Year 5 Year 5

Spot rate Spot rate Average rate Average rate Spot rate Spot rate Average rate

$1 5 DM2.5 $1 5 DM2.8 $1 5 DM2.3 $1 5 DM2.6

$1 5 FF3.9 $1 5 FF3.4 $1 5 FF4.1 $1 5 FF3.6 $1 5 FF3.1

$1 5 DM3.6 $1 5 DM3.0

Required: Prepare all the journal entries for Years 4 and 5 for the two transactions. Assume a December 31 year-end. (CGA-Canada adapted)


618


610

CHAPTER 10

Problem 10-10 LO1, 2, 4


On August 1, Year 1, Zip Ltd. purchased some merchandise from a foreign company for DM450,000. The liability was not due until March 1, Year 2. Zip was quite confident that the exchange rate fluctuations were not a problem and took no action to hedge the liability. On November 1, Year 1, Zip looked at the exchange rates and decided that they had better hedge the liability with a 120-day forward contract. Assume a December 31 year-end, assume all months have 30 days, and assume hedge ing is not adopted. EXCHANGE RATES August 1, Year 1 November 1, Year 1 November 1, Year 1 December 31, Year 1 December 31, Year 1 March 1, Year 2 December 31, Year 2 March 1, Year 3

Spot rate Spot rate 120-day forward rate Spot rate 60-day forward rate Spot rate Spot rate Spot rate

$1 5 DM2.5 $1 5 DM2.1 $1 5 DM1.9 $1 5 DM1.7 $1 5 DM1.8 $1 5 DM2.7 $1 5 DM2.9 $1 5 DM2.4

Required: (a) Prepare all the journal entries for Years 1 and 2 for Zip for these transactions. (b) Assume that the liability was a note due on March 1, Year 3 (instead of Year 2, as given above), and that Zip does not hedge in any way. Prepare all the journal entries for Year 1. (c) Explain why some of the financial statement items in this problem are translated at historical rates whereas other items are translated at closing rates. (CGA-Canada adapted)

Problem 10-11 LO1, 2, 4

On February 1, Year 3, Harrier Ltd., a Canadian company, sold goods to a company in a foreign country and took a note receivable for FF6,200,000. The note matures on February 1, Year 5, and bears interest at the market rate of 6%, payable annually. There was no danger of default on the note, but Harrier decided to hedge the cash receivable from the note with a forward contract. The contract was for one year and matured on February 1, Year 4. On that date, Harrier settled the forward contract and decided to leave the note in an unhedged position for the remainder of its life. Hedge ing is not applied. Harrier has a December 31 year-end.

February 1, Year 3 December 31, Year 3 February 1, Year 4 December 31, Year 4 February 1, Year 5

Spot rates

Forward rates

$1 5 FF3.9 $1 5 FF3.1 $1 5 FF4.2 $1 5 FF3.4 $1 5 FF3.3

$1 5 FF3.3 $1 5 FF3.0 $1 5 FF4.2

Required: Prepare all the journal entries related to the note receivable for Years 3 and 4. (CGA-Canada adapted)


CHAPTER 10

Problem 10-12 LO1, 5, 7, 8


619

611

On June 1, Year 3, Forever Young Corp. (FYC) ordered merchandise from a supplier in Turkey for Turkish lira (TL) 200,000. The goods were delivered on September 30, with requiring cash on delivery. On June 2, Year 3, FYC entered a forward contract as a cash flow hedge to purchase TL200,000 on September 30, Year 3, at a rate of $0.73. FYC’s year-end is June 30. On September 30, Year 3, FYC paid the foreign supplier in full and settled the forward contract. Exchange rates were as follows:

June 1 and 2, Year 3 June 30, Year 3 September 30, Year 3

Spot rates

Forward rates

TL1 5 $0.70 TL1 5 $0.69 TL1 5 $0.74

TL1 5 $0.730 TL1 5 $0.725 TL1 5 $0.740

Required: (a)

(b) (c) (d)

(e)

Problem 10-13 LO1, 2, 4

(i) Prepare all journal entries required to record the transactions described above. (ii) Prepare a June 30, Year 3, partial trial balance of the s used in Part (i), and indicate how each would appear in the year-end financial statements. Prepare all necessary journal entries under the assumption that no forward contract was entered. Prepare all necessary journal entries to record the transactions described above, assuming that the forward contract was designated as a fair value hedge. Assume that Carleton is a private company and uses ASPE for reporting purposes. Prepare all necessary journal entries to record the transactions described in the body of the question above. Which of the above reporting methods would present the highest current ratio at September 30, Year 3? Briefly explain.

Hull Manufacturing Corp. (HMC), a Canadian company, manufactures instruments used to measure the moisture content of barley and wheat. The company sells primarily to the domestic market, but in Year 3, it developed a small market in Argentina. In Year 4, HMC began purchasing semi-finished components from a supplier in Romania. The management of HMC is concerned about the possible adverse effects of foreign exchange fluctuations. To deal with this matter, all of HMC’s foreign currency–denominated receivables and payables are hedged with contracts with the company’s bank. The year-end of HMC is December 31. The following transactions occurred late in Year 4: • On October 15, Year 4, HMC purchased components from its Romanian supplier for 800,000 Romanian leus (RL). On the same day, HMC entered into a forward contract for RL800,000 at the 60-day forward rate of RL1 5 $0.408. The Romanian supplier was paid in full on December 15, Year 4. • On December 1, Year 4, HMC made a shipment to a customer in Argentina. The selling price was 2,500,000 Argentinean pesos (AP), with payment to be received on January 31, Year 5. HMC immediately entered into a forward contract for AP2,500,000 at the two-month forward rate of AP1 5 $0.226.


620


612

CHAPTER 10


During this period, the exchange rates were as follows:

October 15, Year 4 December 1, Year 4 December 15, Year 4 December 31, Year 4

Spot rates

Forward rates

RL1 5 $0.395 AP1 5 $0.249 RL1 5 $0.387 AP1 5 $0.233

AP1 5 $0.222

Hedge ing is not adopted.

Required: (a) Prepare the Year 4 journal entries to record the transactions described above and any adjusting entries necessary. (b) Prepare the December 31, Year 4, balance sheet presentation of the receivable from the Argentinean customer, and the s associated with the forward contract.

Problem 10-14 LO1, 6, 8

As a result of its export sales to customers in Switzerland, the Lenox Company has had Swiss franc denominated revenues over the past number of years. In order to gain protection from future exchange rate fluctuations, the company decides to borrow its current financing requirements in Swiss francs. Accordingly, on January 1, Year 1, it borrows SF1,400,000 at 12% interest, to be repaid in full on December 31, Year 3. Interest is paid annually on December 31. The management designates this loan as a cash flow hedge of future SF revenues, which are expected to be received as follows: Year 1 Year 2 Year 3

SF 560,000 490,000 350,000 SF1,400,000

Actual revenues turned out to be exactly as expected each year and were received in cash. Exchange rates for the Swiss franc during the period were as follows: January 1, Year 1 Average, Year 1 December 31, Year 1 Average, Year 2 December 31, Year 2 Average, Year 3 December 31, Year 3

$1.05 $1.10 $1.15 $1.20 $1.25 $1.27 $1.30

Required: Prepare the journal entries required each year.

Problem 10-15 LO1

On January 1, Year 4, a Canadian firm, Canuck Enterprises Ltd., borrowed US$200,000 from a bank in Seattle, Washington. Interest of 7% per annum is to be paid on December 31 of each year during the four-year term of the loan. Principal


CHAPTER 10


621

613

is to be repaid on the maturity date of December 31, Year 7. The foreign exchange rates for the first two years were as follows: January 1, Year 4 December 31, Year 4 December 31, Year 5

US$1.00 5 CDN$1.38 US$1.00 5 CDN$1.41 US$1.00 5 CDN$1.35

Exchange rates changed evenly throughout the year.

Required: Determine the exchange gain (loss) on the loan to be reported in the financial statements of Canuck Enterprises for the years ended December 31, Year 4 and Year 5. (CGA-Canada adapted)


Access the 2011consolidated financial statements for Barrick Gold Corporation by going to investor relations section of the company’s website. Answer the questions below. For each question, indicate where in the financial statements you found the answer, and/or provide a brief explanation. (a) What currency is used in presenting the financial statements? (b) What percentage of net income is represented by foreign exchange gains or losses? (c) Identify the location(s) in the annual report where the company provides disclosures related to its management of foreign exchange risk. (d) Indicate if and how the company describes the significance of foreign currency issues to the overall success/profitability of the company and sensitivity of its income to a change in foreign exchange rates. (e) Describe the types of hedging instruments the company uses to hedge foreign exchange risk. (f) Describe the manner in which the company discloses the fact that its hedges are effective in offsetting gains and losses on the underlying items being hedged. (g) Does the company apply hedge ing to ing for its hedging instruments? If so, what portion of its hedging instruments are fair value hedges, and what portion are cash flow hedges? (h) What was the amount of foreign exchange gains or losses for the year on cash flow hedges? Describe how these gains or losses are reported.


Access the 2011 financial statements for Atco Ltd. by going to investor relations section of the company’s website. Answer the same questions as in Problem 1. For each question, indicate where in the financial statements you found the answer, and/or provide a brief explanation. (Some questions may not be applicable.)



622


11 chapter

Translation and Consolidation of Foreign Operations learning objectives After studying this chapter, you should be able to do the following: LO1 Contrast an enterprise’s foreign currency ing exposure with its economic exposure and evaluate how effectively the translation methods capture the economic effects of exchange rate changes.

LO4 Prepare translated financial statements for self-sustaining foreign operations using the current rate method.

LO2 Differentiate between an integrated and a self-sustaining foreign operation, and describe the translation method that is used in the translation of each type.

LO6 Analyze and interpret financial statements involving foreign operations.

LO3 Prepare translated financial statements for integrated foreign operations using the temporal method.

LO5 Use translated financial statements to prepare consolidated financial statements.

LO7 Identify some of the differences between IFRSs and ASPE involving foreign operations.

INTRODUCTION Consolidated financial statements are required when one entity has control over another entity. With the ever-expanding global economy, it is now very common for a subsidiary to be in a foreign country, as is indicated by the following: Most Canadian public companies have subsidiaries in foreign countries.

• Manulife Financial Corporation, a leading Canadian-based financial services company, operating worldwide, offering a diverse range of financial protection products and services, directly or indirectly owned 58 or more foreign subsidiaries in 14 countries at December 31, 2011. • Potash Corporation of Saskatchewan, the world’s largest producer of potash, directly or indirectly owned 55 or more foreign subsidiaries in nine countries at December 31, 2011. • Royal Bank of Canada, Canada’s largest bank and one of the world’s most highly rated financial institutions, directly or indirectly owned 58 foreign subsidiaries in 14 countries at October 31, 2011.

614


623


CHAPTER 11

Translation and Consolidation of Foreign Operations

Companies establish operations in foreign countries for a variety of reasons, including developing new markets for their products, taking advantage of lower production costs, or gaining access to raw materials. Some multinational companies have reached a stage in their development in which domestic operations are no longer considered to be of higher priority than international operations. Prior to preparing consolidated financial statements or ing for an investment under the equity method, the financial statements of the foreign subsidiary or investee company must be translated into the investor company’s presentation currency. IAS 27 requires that consolidated financial statements be prepared using uniform ing policies for like transactions and other events in similar circumstances. This means that the financial statements of the foreign operations should be adjusted to reflect the ing policies of the parent company. Unless otherwise noted, we will assume the reporting entity is a Canadian company and its functional currency is the Canadian dollar. This chapter deals with the issue of translating the foreign entity’s financial statements into the parent’s presentation currency prior to consolidation. Three major issues are related to the translation process: (1) what the functional currency of the foreign operation is, (2) what the presentation currency (also known as the reporting currency) of the parent company is, and (3) where the resulting translation adjustment should be reported in the consolidated financial statements. These issues are examined first from a conceptual perspective and second by the manner in which they have been resolved by the IASB. We will start by discussing the difference between ing exposure and economic exposure.

LO1

615

Foreign-currency– denominated financial statements must be translated to the presentation currency of the reporting entity.

ING EXPOSURE VERSUS ECONOMIC EXPOSURE Exposure is the risk that something could go wrong. Foreign currency exposure is the risk that a loss could occur if foreign exchange rates changed. Foreign currency risk can be viewed from three different perspectives: translation exposure (ing exposure), transaction exposure, and economic exposure. Readers must keep these in mind as they interpret financial statements that contain foreign currency gains and losses.

Translation (ing) Exposure This exposure results from the translation of foreign-currency–denominated financial statements into Canadian dollars. Only those financial statement items translated at the closing rate or the forward rate create an ing exposure. If an item is translated at the historical rate, the Canadian-dollar amount is fixed at historical cost and will not be affected by rate changes. However, if an item is translated at the closing rate or the forward rate, the Canadian-dollar amount will change every time the exchange rate changes. Each item translated at the closing rate is exposed to translation adjustment. A separate translation adjustment exists for each of the exposed items. Positive translation adjustments increase shareholders’ equity, whereas negative translation adjustments decrease shareholders’ equity. Positive translation adjustments on assets can be offset by negative translation adjustments on liabilities. If total exposed assets are equal to total exposed liabilities throughout the year, the translation adjustments (although perhaps significant on an individual basis) net to a zero balance. The net translation adjustment needed to keep the consolidated balance sheet in balance is based solely on the net asset or net liability exposure.

ing exposure exists when financial statement items are translated at the closing rate or the forward rate.


624


616

CHAPTER 11

Net asset exposure means that more assets than liabilities are exposed.


A foreign operation has a net asset exposure when assets translated at the closing or forward exchange rate are larger in amount than liabilities translated at the closing or forward exchange rate. A net liability exposure exists when liabilities translated at the closing or forward exchange rate are larger than assets translated at the closing or forward exchange rate. The relationship among exposure, exchange rate fluctuations, and effect on shareholders’ equity (S/E) is summarized as follows: Foreign currency Balance sheet exposure

Appreciates

Depreciates

Net asset Net liability

Increases S/E Decreases S/E

Decreases S/E Increases S/E

The gains and losses that result from the translation are usually unrealized in the sense that they do not represent actual cash flows. Because these ing gains and losses are reflected in the financial statements, they may have an impact on the enterprise’s dividend policies, share prices, and so on. It is important to assess the extent to which they represent transaction and/or economic exposure. Transaction exposure exists when there is a lapse in time between the origination of a receivable or payable and the settlement of the receivable or payable.

Transaction Exposure This exposure exists between the time of entering a transaction involving a receivable or payable and the time of settling the receivable or payable with cash. It affects the current cash flows of the enterprise. The resulting cash gains and losses are realized and affect the enterprise’s working capital and earnings. The concept of transaction exposure was discussed in Chapter 10.

Economic exposure exists when the present value of future cash flows would change as a result of changes in exchange rates.

Economic Exposure Economic exposure is the risk that the economic value of

Economic exposure is not easy to measure.

the entity could decrease due to the occurrence of a future event such as a change in foreign exchange rates. Economic value, theoretically speaking, is the present value of future cash flows. Practically speaking, it is difficult to measure the impact on economic value because it is affected by so many variables. When exchange rates change, it could affect the cost of purchases, the selling price of sales, the volume of sales, interest rates, inflation rates, and so on. The economic impact could vary from company to company or from year to year depending on the nature of operations of the company. For example, a Canadian assembly plant that purchases components from a company in Japan will suffer economically if the dollar weakens in relation to the Japanese yen. It will cost the Canadian importer more dollars to purchase the product, and the Canadian competition may be such that the cost increase cannot be ed on to the customers. On the other hand, a Canadian company selling to customers in Japan may be economically better off when the dollar weakens relative to the Japanese yen. The Japanese customer’s cost to buy the goods would go down and that could increase the volume of purchases. What is the impact for a Canadian parent when it has a subsidiary in Japan and the Canadian dollar weakens relative to the yen? It depends on the nature of operations of the subsidiary and whether it is highly integrated with the Canadian parent or fairly independent. If the subsidiary manufactures locally and sells locally, its own income in yen may not be affected. However, the Canadian-dollar equivalent will increase because each yen of income translates in to more dollars. If it buys from and sells to the Canadian market, its income may go down because the volume of sales may decrease with the higher cost to Canadian customers.


625


CHAPTER 11


617

But, the Canadian-dollar equivalent of the reduced net income may be similar to before. Therefore, the economic exposure is dependent on whether the foreign subsidiary is closely linked to the activities of the parent or operating independently of the parent. IAS 21 tries to capture the economic effects by establishing a situational approach to determining the translation method to be used for certain foreign operations. Even though it is difficult to measure the net impact of exchange rate changes on the present value of future cash flows, it is desirable to capture as much of the impact as possible in the financial statements. We do report assets and liabilities at fair values for certain situations. In so doing, we are capturing the economic value of these assets and liabilities. To illustrate the difference between ing exposure and economic exposure, let us consider a basic example with simplified assumptions. Distant Ltd. is a wholly owned subsidiary of Parent Co. Distant was incorporated on January 1, Year 1, with Parent Co. being its sole shareholder. It is located in ForeignLand, whose currency is foreign currency (FC). Throughout Year 1, the exchange rate was FC1 5 $2, and there was no inflation in ForeignLand. Its condensed balance sheet as at December 31, Year 1, is presented below both in FC and Canadian dollars: Monetary assets Inventory Property, plant, and equipment

FC 300 800 1,900 FC3,000

$ 600 1,600 3,800 $6,000

Monetary liabilities Shareholders’ equity

FC2,100 900 FC3,000

$4,200 1,800 $6,000

The fair value was equal to carrying amount for all assets and liabilities at December 31, Year 1. General price levels increased by 10% and the exchange rate changed to FC1 5 $1.81818 on January 1, Year 2. Distant’s balance sheet as at January 1, Year 2, is presented below under two different scenarios: (1) using traditional GAAP, and (2) where all assets and liabilities are revalued to their true economic value, which is represented by fair value. The 10% general price level increase will cause the non-monetary assets to increase in value. Initially, we assume that they will also increase by 10%. However, the monetary items remain at their previous values because these values were set by contract and the values do not change when economic conditions change. Under traditional GAAP, the balance sheet does not change to reflect the change in purchasing power of the foreign currency units and the non-monetary assets are retained at their historical cost. Under the second scenario, the non-monetary assets are revalued to fair value to reflect their true economic value on that date. GAAP

Economic value

Monetary assets Inventory Property, plant, and equipment

FC 300 800 1,900 FC3,000

FC 300 880 2,090 FC3,270

Monetary liabilities Shareholders’ equity

FC2,100 900 FC3,000

FC2,100 1,170 FC3,270

Generally, there is an inverse relationship between inflation rates and exchanges rates; that is, when inflation goes up, the value of the currency goes down.

Fair values may be a good proxy for economic values.


626


618

CHAPTER 11


There are two methods for translating financial statements of foreign operations: the temporal method and the current rate method. We will discuss these methods in detail throughout this chapter. These methods would be applied to the GAAP-based balance sheet above. To present the true economic value of Distant to the Canadian shareholders, the economic value balance sheet should be translated into Canadian dollars. The three balances sheets would appear as follows:

The temporal and current rate methods use the GAAPbased balance sheet where some items are measured at current value and some items are measured at historical cost.

Temporal

Current rate

Economic value


$ 545 1,600 3,800 $5,945

$ 545 1,455 3,455 $5,455

$ 545 1,600 3,800 $5,945

Monetary liabilities Shareholders’ equity, as previously reported Gain (loss) due to change in value of assets in FC Gain (loss) due to change in exchange rate

$3,818 1,800

$3,818 1,800

327 $5,945

(163) $5,455

$3,818 1,800 540 (213) $5,945

As we will see later in this chapter, the temporal method translates certain items at the historic rate and certain items at the closing rate, whereas the current rate method translates all assets and liabilities at the closing rate. For the economic value column, all assets and liabilities are translated at the closing rate. It is a coincidence that the temporal method and economic values are equal. This occurred because the non-monetary assets increased in value by 10%, which is offset by a 10% change in the exchange rate. If the non-monetary assets had increased in value by 12% (i.e., fair value of inventory increased to FC896 and fair value of property, plant, and equipment increased to FC2,128) and the exchange rate changed to FC1 5 $1.81818, then the three balance sheets would be as follows:

The economic value column measures all assets and liabilities at fair value.

Temporal

Current rate

Economic value


$ 545 1,600 3,800 $5,945

$ 545 1,455 3,455 $5,455

$ 545 1,629 3,869 $6,043

Monetary liabilities Shareholders’ equity, as previously reported Gain (loss) due to change in value of assets in FC Gain (loss) due to change in exchange rate

$3,818 1,800

$3,818 1,800

327 $5,945

(163) $5,455

$3,818 1,800 648 (223) $6,043

Note the following from the above balance sheets: • Neither the temporal method nor the current rate method truly reflects economic reality. In order to accurately reflect economic reality, all assets and liabilities should be reported at fair value. At present, GAAP requires some, but not all, assets and liabilities to be reported at fair value. Neither translation method captures the true economic value of the reporting entity.

• The temporal method shows a gain from translating at the new exchange rate, whereas the current rate method reports a loss. Which one is right? We will now direct our attention to the two translation methods.


627


CHAPTER 11


TRANSLATION UNDER IAS 21

LO2

Until the adoption of IFRSs in 2011, two major methods for translating foreign operations were used under Canadian GAAP: (1) the temporal method and (2) the current rate method. IAS 21 uses a similar approach for translating foreign operations but does not refer to the approaches by a particular name. For ease of identification, we will continue to refer to these methods using the same names; that is, temporal and current rate methods. Where differences exist between the IFRS requirements and the old Canadian requirements, the IFRS requirements will be used. The objective of translation is to express financial statements of the foreign operation in Canadian dollars (or other presentation currency) in the manner that best reflects the reporting enterprise’s exposure to exchange rate changes, as determined by the economic facts and circumstances. We will discuss these methods from the perspective of a Canadian-based multinational company translating foreign currency financial statements into Canadian dollars. The same principles could be applied if the Canadian company decided to use a reporting currency other than the Canadian dollar. For example, the Canadian company may choose to use the U.S. dollar as its reporting currency in order to satisfy the external s of the financial statements. We will discuss this option later in this chapter. IAS 21 establishes ing standards for the translation of the financial statements of a foreign operation (a subsidiary, t venture, associate, or branch) for use by a reporting enterprise (a Canadian investor). A foreign operation is viewed as either integrated or self-sustaining for translation purposes, depending on whether the functional currency of the foreign entity is the same as or different from the functional currency of the Canadian reporting entity. To determine whether a specific foreign operation is integrated with its parent or self-sustaining, IAS 21 created the concept of the functional currency. As discussed in Chapter 10, the functional currency is the primary currency of the entity’s operating environment. The foreign entity’s functional currency can be either the parent’s functional currency (usually the Canadian dollar) or a foreign currency (usually the local currency of the foreign entity). The interrelationship of the functional currency, the classification of the foreign entity, and the translation method can be depicted as follows: Functional currency of foreign entity

Classification of foreign entity

619

Translation method

The translated statements should reflect the reporting enterprise’s exposure to exchange rate changes.

The functional currency is the primary currency of the entity’s operating environment.

Translation adjustment reported in

Same as parent’s

Integrated

Temporal method

Net income

Currency of country where its resides

Self-sustaining

Current rate method

Other comprehensive income

Currency of a country Self-sustaining other than parent’s country and other than country where it resides

Current rate method

Other comprehensive income

In addition to introducing the concept of functional currency, IAS 21 introduced some new terminology. The presentation currency is the currency in which the entity presents its financial statements. For Canadian-based corporations, this is typically the Canadian dollar. The presentation currency of a foreign operation is typically the currency of the country in which its main operations are located. The financial statements of the foreign operation must be translated in order to prepare consolidated financial statements. If the foreign operation’s presentation

The foreign operation is integrated with the parent if it has the same functional currency as the parent.


628


620

CHAPTER 11

The foreign operation is selfsustaining if it has a different functional currency than the parent.

Foreign exchange adjustments are reported in other comprehensive income for self-sustaining foreign operations.


currency is a foreign currency, but its functional currency is the same as the parent’s functional currency (i.e., the Canadian dollar), the foreign entity’s financial statements must be translated to Canadian dollars using the temporal method; any translation adjustments must be reported as exchange gains or losses in net income. (This is the example of Company C from Exhibit 10.2 in Chapter 10.) If the foreign operation’s functional currency is the not the same as the parent’s functional currency, the foreign entity’s financial statements must be translated to Canadian dollars using the current rate method; any translation adjustments must be reported as exchange gains or losses in other comprehensive income. (This is the example of Company D from Exhibit 10.2.) The exchange adjustments for the self-sustaining subsidiary are not recognized in net income because the changes in exchange rates have little or no direct effect on the present and future cash flows from operations. They merely serve to keep the balance sheet in equilibrium and are a mechanical by-product of the translation process. The cumulative amount of the exchange differences is presented in a separate component of equity until disposal of the foreign operation. When the exchange differences relate to a foreign operation that is consolidated but not wholly owned, they must be allocated to the shareholders of the parent company and the non-controlling interest in the consolidated statement of comprehensive income and, in turn, in the consolidated statement of changes in equity. When the parent sells all or part of its self-sustaining foreign operations, or receives a liquidating dividend, a proportionate amount of the accumulated exchange gains and losses is taken out of equity through other comprehensive income, and the realized exchange gains or losses are reported in net income. We will illustrate the presentation of other comprehensive income and a separate component of equity for accumulated other comprehensive income later in this chapter. If the parent hedges its investment in a self-sustaining foreign operation with a forward exchange contract, the exchange gains or losses on the forward contract are also reported in other comprehensive income to offset the unrealized losses or gains on the investment. Exhibit 11.1 lists the indicators that should be considered when determining the functional currency for a foreign operation and gives an example of a condition

EXHIBIT 11.1 INDICATORS FOR EVALUATING A FOREIGN OPERATION Indicator Functional Currency

In effect, the indicators determine whether the foreign operation is integrated or self-sustaining.

1. to 5. 6. Extension of parent 7. Autonomy

Canadian dollar

Not Canadian dollar

See Exhibit 10.3. Only goods imported from the parent are sold.

See Exhibit 10.3. The foreign operation generates income, incurs expenses, and accumulates cash in its local currency. The foreign entity has a significant degree of autonomy. Intercompany transactions are a low proportion of overall activities.

The parent dictates the operating procedures. 8. Intercompany Intercompany transactions transactions are a high proportion of overall activities. 9. Cash flows Cash flows of the foreign operation directly affect cash flows of the parent. 10. Financing The parent provides cash cash flows to pay obligations.

Cash flows of the foreign operation have little effect on cash flows of the parent. Cash from local operations is sufficient to pay obligations.


CHAPTER 11


629

621

that would indicate whether the Canadian dollar is the functional currency. The first five indicators were explained in Chapter 10; they apply to domestic and foreign operations. When the above indicators are mixed and the functional currency is not obvious, management uses its professional judgment to determine the functional currency that most faithfully represents the economic effects of the underlying transactions, events, and conditions. As part of this approach, management gives priority to the first three indicators before considering the others, which are designed to provide additional ing evidence in determining an entity’s functional currency.

TRANSLATION METHODS The Temporal Method The temporal method of translation is used for integrated operations. The basic objective underlying the temporal method is to produce a set of translated financial statements as if the transactions had occurred in Canada in the first place; in other words, use the same process we used in Chapter 10 to translate individual transactions and balances into Canadian dollars. For example, assume a subsidiary in had sales of €100,000 when the exchange rate was €1 5 $1.25. These sales would be reported on its income statement in euros. When the subsidiary’s income statement is translated to Canadian dollars under the temporal method, the Canadiandollar amount would be $125,000. Similarly, if a Canadian company had sales to a customer in on the same date, it would report this sale at $125,000 in its Canadian-dollar general ledger. In both cases, the temporal method was used to report sales at $125,000 being the Canadian-dollar equivalent on the date of the sale. In effect, the temporal method preserves the Canadian dollar as the unit of measure and measures financial statement items according to the normal measurement practices for Canadian domestic transactions and operations. It is entirely consistent with our traditional ing model. Under normal measurement practices, certain financial statement items are reported at historical cost, whereas other items are reported at fair value. The temporal method is designed to maintain this reporting practice when translating the foreign currency statements into Canadian dollars. If the financial statement item is supposed to be reported at fair value, when translating the item into Canadian dollars we need to take the fair value of the item in foreign currency and apply the rate of the date that the fair value was determined. To obtain historical values, revenues and expenses should be translated in a manner that produces substantially the same reporting currency amounts that would have resulted had the underlying transactions been translated on the dates they occurred. To translate revenues of a foreign subsidiary, use the exchange rate on the date that the transaction giving rise to the revenue occurred. The following examples illustrate this concept. In all of these examples, assume the following exchange rates: January 1 January 31 Average for January

FC1 5 $1.50 FC1 5 $1.60 FC1 5 $1.56

Example A On January 1, Subco sold goods for cash of FC100. The revenue is earned and determined on this date. The revenue of FC100 would be translated into $150, its historical value.

The temporal method gives the same results, as if the transactions had occurred in Canada.

Use historical exchange rates to translate revenues and expenses.


630


622

CHAPTER 11


Example B On January 1, Subco sold goods for FC100 with payment due within 30 days. On January 31, FC100 was received from the customer. The revenue is earned and determined on January 1. The revenue of FC100 would be translated into $150. Receiving the cash on January 31 does not change the historical value of the sale. It does result in an exchange gain on the s receivable of $10 [FC100 3 ($1.60 2 $1.50)].

Example C On January 1, Subco received FC100 as a prepayment for goods to be delivered within 30 days. On January 31, Subco delivered the goods and earned the sale. Although the revenue was earned on January 31, the amount of the revenue in Canadian dollars was determined on January 1 when the cash was received. The revenue of FC100 would be translated into $150. Use average rates to approximate historical exchange rates throughout the period.

Example D On each day in January, Subco sold goods for cash of FC100. Rather

Use historical rates to measure expenses based on the historical cost of the related balance sheet items.

The same concept can be applied in translating expenses. Use the exchange rate on the date that the transaction giving rise to the expense occurred. Since depreciation expense is directly related to the purchase of a depreciable asset, depreciation expense should be translated using the exchange rate on the date that the depreciable asset was purchased. Similarly, cost of goods sold is based on the cost of the inventory. Therefore, use the exchange rate on the date when the inventory was purchased when translating the cost of goods sold.

than using 31 different exchange rates for the 31 days of the month, the average rate for the month, $1.56, can be applied to the total revenue for the month, FC100 3 31 3 $1.56 5 $4,836.

The Current Rate Method The current rate method should be used to translate a self-sustaining foreign operation.

The current rate method preserves the relationship of balance sheet items.

The current rate method is used for translating self-sustaining operations except when the foreign operation operates in a highly inflationary economy. For a foreign operation to be classified as self-sustaining, its functional currency must be different from the functional currency of the parent. The foreign operation must be financially and operationally independent of the reporting enterprise such that the exposure to exchange rate changes is limited to the reporting enterprise’s net investment in the foreign operation. For example, the subsidiary may arrange its own financing to buy property, plant, and equipment in its own country. The foreign cash it gets from selling its products in the local environment is used to pay off its foreign debt. The Canadian parent is not concerned only with the exchange risk on monetary items as it would for transactions in Canada. It is concerned with the overall risk of its net investment in the foreign subsidiary. Therefore, all assets and liabilities should be translated at the closing rate in order to present its exposure to currency risk on its net investment in the foreign operation. This method is also much simpler than the temporal method because it uses the same rate for all assets and liabilities, which maintains the relationship between assets and liabilities when switching from the foreign currency to the reporting currency. Under the current rate method, share capital is translated at historical rates. All revenues and expenses are translated using the exchange rate in effect on the dates on which such items are recognized in income during the period. If the revenues or expenses were recognized in income evenly throughout the period, the average rate for the period is used to translate these items.


631


CHAPTER 11


623

A peculiarity resulting from the current rate method is that a property carried at historical cost in the foreign entity’s statements will be translated into differing Canadian dollar values if exchange rates fluctuate over some time frame. The following example will illustrate this.

Example A German entity has land on its balance sheet with a historical cost of €100,000 euros. On five successive balance sheets, denominated in euros, the land appears as €100,000. If the value of the euro changes with respect to the Canadian dollar each year during the five-year period and the current rate method of translation is used, the translated amount will be different each year. A reader of the German financial statements would observe the same amount reflected each year, while a reader of the translated financial statements would see a different amount each year and may improperly conclude that land sales or purchases have taken place. Despite this particular shortcoming, this method is one of the two currently sanctioned under IFRSs. The IASB recognizes that the exchange adjustments under the current rate method have little or no direct effect on the present and future cash flows from operations. Accordingly, the exchange adjustments are not recognized in profit or loss; they are included in other comprehensive income. Both of the translation methods that have been discussed will produce different amounts for balance sheet and income statement items and different amounts for the translation gain or loss because the total amount of the balance sheet items at risk to exchange rate changes is different under each. It is not inconceivable to have an exchange gain from the use of one method and an exchange loss from the use of the other method. In fact, we saw this result in the Distant company example at the beginning of this chapter. The current rate method is used to translate the foreign currency financial statements of a self-sustaining operation, with one exception, discussed next.

Using historical cost in foreign currency and the current rate does not provide historical cost or fair value in Canadian dollars.

Highly Inflationary Economies While Canada has had fairly low rates of inflation in the past 25 years, this has not been the case in other parts of the world. Argentina, Brazil, Chile, Mexico, Turkey, and Israel have all had inflation rates higher than Canada’s during this period. Between 1985 and 1993, Argentina experienced yearly rates of between 120% and 3,000%. If the self-sustaining foreign operation operates in a highly inflationary environment relative to that of the reporting enterprise, translation using the current rate method could produce distorted and meaningless results. IAS 29 does not establish an absolute rate at which hyper-inflation is deemed to arise. Hyper-inflation is indicated by characteristics of the economic environment of a country that include, but are not limited to, the following: (a) The general population prefers to keep its wealth in non-monetary assets or in a relatively stable foreign currency. (b) The general population regards monetary amounts not in of the local currency but in of a relatively stable foreign currency. Prices may be quoted in that currency. (c) Sales and purchases on credit take place at prices that compensate for the expected loss of purchasing power during the credit period, even if the period is short. (d) Interest rates, wages, and prices are linked to a price index. (e) The cumulative inflation rate over three years is approaching, or exceeds, 100%.

Hyper-inflation causes the population to measure wealth and value using a currency of a more stable country.


632


624

CHAPTER 11


The following example illustrates the kind of distortion that can occur when the current rate method is used during a period of very high inflation.

Example In Year 1, a Canadian company purchases a self-sustaining foreign subsidiary located in Chile. The exchange rate at this time is 1 peso (Ps) 5 $1.00, and it remains constant during the year. The subsidiary has land carried at a historical cost of Ps1,000,000. On December 31, Year 1, the land is translated into dollars for consolidation purposes as follows: Ps1,000,000 3 1.00 5 $1,000,000 There is usually an inverse relationship between the strength of a country’s currency and the level of inflation in that country.

During Year 2, Chile experiences an inflation rate of 500%. Because the inflation rate in Canada is minuscule during this period, this large inflation differential is fully reflected in the foreign exchange market. The result is a weakening of the peso relative to the Canadian dollar. On December 31, Year 2, the exchange rate is Ps1 5 $0.20. If the land were translated at the closing rate on this date, the result would be as follows: Ps1,000,000 3 0.20 5 $200,000 While it is easy to see in this example that the $800,000 difference is due to the exchange rate change, large differences such as this are difficult to interpret without all the facts. If the Chilean subsidiary prepared price-level-adjusted historical cost statements, the land would appear on the subsidiary’s balance sheet at Ps5,000,000. Translation using the current rate method on December 31, Year 2, would not produce distorted results, as the following illustrates: Ps5,000,000 3 0.20 5 $1,000,000 When a self-sustaining foreign operation operates in a hyper-inflationary economy, its financial statements must be translated into Canadian dollars using the following procedures: (a) All amounts (i.e., assets, liabilities, equity items, income, and expenses for the current year) must be translated at the closing rate. (b) Comparative amounts must be those that were presented as current-year amounts in the relevant prior-year financial statements (i.e., they are not adjusted for subsequent changes in exchange rates).

Price-level-adjusted financial statements are useful for countries experiencing high inflation.

The foreign entity must restate its financial statements in accordance with IAS 29 before applying the translation method set out above. When the economy ceases to be hyper-inflationary and the entity no longer restates its financial statements in accordance with IAS 29, it must use as the historical costs for translation the amounts restated to the price level at the date the entity ceased restating its financial statements. Under IAS 29, both the current year’s figures and last year’s comparatives must be stated in of the measuring unit current at the end of the reporting period. Using the example of the Chilean subsidiary above, the measuring unit is the peso, which experienced 500% inflation during the year. Non-monetary items that were carried at historical costs are restated by applying a general price index. Monetary and non-monetary items that were carried at fair value or recoverable amount are not restated because they are already expressed in of the monetary unit current at the end of the reporting period. After the restatement, all assets and liabilities are stated at fair value or at a price-level-adjusted value, which may approximate


633


CHAPTER 11


625

fair value. When these items are translated to the Canadian dollar at the closing rate, the translated values will approximate the fair value in of Canadian dollars.

ILLUSTRATION OF TRANSLATION AND CONSOLIDATION

LO3

The translation and preparation of consolidated financial statements will now be illustrated under the two translation methods required by IAS 21.

Example On December 31, Year 1, Starmont Inc., a Canadian company, acquired 100% of the common shares of Controlada S.A., located in Estonia, at a cost of 2,000,000 kroons (K). The exchange rate was K1 5 $0.128 on this date. Starmont’s journal entry (in Canadian dollars) to record the share acquisition is as follows: Dec. 31, Year 1 Investment in Controlada Cash (K2,000,000 3 0.128)

256,000 256,000

This example assumes that the carrying amounts of the subsidiary’s net assets were equal to fair values and that there is no goodwill on consolidation. Because this is an “acquisition” business combination, the exchange rate on the date of acquisition is used to translate all s of the subsidiary on acquisition date and becomes the historical rate to be used in subsequent years, where appropriate. The translation of the balance sheet of Controlada from kroons into Canadian dollars at December 31, Year 1, is shown in Exhibit 11.2. Note that the translation of a subsidiary on the date of acquisition is the same regardless of whether the entity is integrated or self-sustaining. The preparation of the acquisition-date consolidated balance sheet appears in Exhibit 11.3. The figures in the Starmont column come from Starmont’s separateentity financial statements. Note that the translated shareholders’ equity of the

When the parent acquires the subsidiary, the parent indirectly buys all of the net assets of the subsidiary.

EXHIBIT 11.2 CONTROLADA S.A. TRANSLATION OF BALANCE SHEET TO CANADIAN DOLLARS at December 31, Year 1 Estonian Kroons

Exchange rate

Canadian dollars

Cash s receivable Inventories Plant and equipment (net)

K

40,000 360,000 1,200,000 900,000 K2,500,000

0.128 0.128 0.128 0.128

5,120 46,080 153,600 (a) 115,200 $320,000 (b)

Current liabilities Bonds payable

K

0.128 0.128

$

Common shares Retained earnings

50,000 450,000 500,000 1,500,000 500,000 K2,500,000

0.128 0.128

$

6,400 57,600 64,000 (c) 192,000 64,000 $320,000

Controlada has to be translated into dollars in order to consolidate with Starmont’s Canadian-dollar financial statements. For consolidation purposes, we never use an exchange rate older than the rate at the date of acquisition.


634


626

CHAPTER 11


EXHIBIT 11.3 PREPARATION OF CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET at December 31, Year 1 Starmont With no acquisition differential and the subsidiary wholly owned, the investment is equal to the subsidiary’s shareholders’ equity.

Controlada (From Ex. 11.2)

Starmont Consolidated

Cash s receivable Inventories Plant and equipment Investment in Controlada

$ 70,000 90,000 200,000 300,000 256,000 $916,000

$

5,120 46,080 153,600 115,200 — $320,000

$ 75,120 136,080 353,600 415,200 — $980,000


$ 80,000 300,000 200,000 336,000 $916,000

$

$ 86,400 357,600 200,000 336,000 $980,000

6,400 57,600 192,000 64,000 $320,000

subsidiary is equal to the parent’s investment , so the consolidating procedure is simply to eliminate one against the other.

Translation and Consolidation Subsequent to Acquisition On December 31, Year 2, Controlada forwarded the financial statements shown in Exhibit 11.4 to the Canadian parent. Sales, purchases, bond interest, and other

EXHIBIT 11.4 CONTROLADA S.A. FINANCIAL STATEMENTS at December 31, Year 2 (in kroons) INCOME STATEMENT The subsidiary uses its local currency, kroon, in its own financial records and for reporting in its own country.

Sales Cost of goods purchased Change in inventory Depreciation expense Bond interest expense Other expenses Net income

K9,000,000 7,400,000 (400,000) 100,000 45,000 1,555,000 8,700,000 K 300,000

(a) (b)

(c) (d)

STATEMENT OF RETAINED EARNINGS Balance, beginning of year Net income Dividends Balance, end of year

K 500,000 300,000 800,000 100,000 (e) K 700,000

(continued)


635


CHAPTER 11

EXHIBIT 11.4


627

(continued ) BALANCE SHEET

Cash s receivable Inventory Plant and equipment (net)

K 100,000 400,000 1,600,000 (f) 800,000 K2,900,000


K 250,000 450,000 1,500,000 700,000 K2,900,000

expenses occurred evenly throughout the year. The translation process will now be illustrated under these two assumptions: (a) The subsidiary is integrated because its functional currency is the Canadian dollar. (b) The subsidiary is self-sustaining because its functional currency is not the Canadian dollar. The exchange rates for the year were as follows: Dec. 31, Year 1 Dec. 31, Year 2 Average for Year 2 Date of purchase for inventory on hand at end of Year 2 Date dividends declared and paid

K1 5 $0.128 K1 5 $0.104 K1 5 $0.115 K1 5 $0.110 K1 5 $0.1064

Exhibit 11.5 illustrates the rates to be used for self-sustaining operations (the current rate method) and integrated operations (the temporal method). Translation of the numerous revenues, expenses, gains, and losses at the historical rates is generally impractical. A weighted-average exchange rate for the period would normally be used to translate such items. When goodwill is impaired, it is not measured at fair value as it is at the date of acquisition. It is written down by an amount equal to the excess of the carrying amount of the net assets over the recoverable amount for the cash generating unit. The impairment loss is more like amortization than it is a revaluation to fair value. Therefore, the value of goodwill after the write-down is similar to an amortized cost amount. Accordingly, goodwill should be translated at the historical rate under the temporal method.

Integrated Foreign Operation Assuming that Controlada is an integrated foreign operation, the statements would be translated using the temporal method. Exhibit 11.6 illustrates this process. The following discussion regarding the exchange rates used and the disposition of the translation gain should be noted: • Monetary items are translated at the current rate, while non-monetary items are translated at appropriate historical rates, unless the non-monetary item is to be reported at fair value.

The Canadian dollar strengthened during Year 2.

The temporal method uses translation rates to produce either historical cost or fair values for all assets and liabilities.

LO4


636


628

CHAPTER 11


EXHIBIT 11.5 Exchange Rates Financial statement items

For depreciation, historical rate for temporal method is the rate when the asset was acquired whereas it is the rate when expense was incurred for current rate method.

Monetary Non-monetary—at cost or amortized cost Non-monetary—at fair values Goodwill Deferred revenues Common shares Dividends Revenues Depreciation and amortization Cost of sales Opening inventory Purchases Ending inventory

Temporal method Integrated operations

Current rate method Self-sustaining operations

Closing Historical (Note 1) Historical Historical Historical Historical Historical Historical

Closing Closing (Note 1) Closing Closing Historical Historical Historical Historical Historical — — —

Historical Historical Historical

Note 1: The rate of the date that fair value was determined should be used. If fair value was determined on the last day of the period, then the closing rate should be used.

EXHIBIT 11.6 CONTROLADA S.A. TRANSLATION OF FINANCIAL STATEMENTS TO CANADIAN DOLLARS at December 31, Year 2 (Integrated Foreign Operation) INCOME STATEMENT Kroons (From Ex. 11.4) Cost of goods sold and depreciation expense are translated using the historical rates of the related balance sheet s.

Sales Cost of goods purchased Change in inventory Depreciation expense Bond interest expense Other expenses Foreign exchange gain (7a) Total expenses Net income

K9,000,000 7,400,000 (400,000) 100,000 45,000 1,555,000

Exchange rate 0.115 0.115 Calculated 0.128 0.115 0.115

8,700,000 K 300,000

Canadian dollars $1,035,000 851,000 (22,400) 12,800 5,175 178,825 (2,600) 1,022,800 $ 12,200 (a)

RETAINED EARNINGS Kroons Balance—beginning Net income (a) Dividends Balance—end

K 500,000 300,000 800,000 100,000 K 700,000

Exchange rate 0.128

Canadian dollars $

0.106 $

64,000 12,200 76,200 10,600 (b) 65,600

(continued)


637


CHAPTER 11

EXHIBIT 11.6


629

(continued ) BALANCE SHEET Kroons

Exchange rate

Canadian dollars


K 100,000 400,000 1,600,000 800,000 K2,900,000

0.104 0.104 0.110 0.128

$ 10,400 41,600 176,000 102,400 $330,400


K 250,000 450,000 1,500,000 700,000 K2,900,000

0.104 0.104 0.128

$ 26,000 46,800 192,000 65,600 $330,400

• Common shares and beginning-of-year retained earnings are translated at the historical rate on the date of acquisition. In future years, the translated amount for retained earnings will have to be calculated.

Assets to be reported at fair value are translated at the closing rate and assets to be reported at cost are translated at the historical rates.

Shareholders’ equity s are translated at historical rates.

• Revenue and expenses, with the exception of depreciation and cost of goods sold, are translated at the average rate for the year. Depreciation is translated at the historical rates used to translate the related assets. The three components of cost of goods sold are translated at the historical rates when these goods were purchased. Because the components of cost of goods sold are translated using different rates, the translated amount for this items is calculated as follows: Beginning inventory (2a) Less: Ending inventory (4f) Change in inventory Purchases (4b) Cost of goods sold

K1,200,000 1,600,000 (400,000) 7,400,000 K7,000,000

3 3

0.128 0.110

3

0.115

$153,600 176,000 (22,400) 851,000 $828,600

Purchases are translated at the average rate for the year. Inventories are translated at historical rates. The foreign exchange gain is calculated in Exhibit 11.7. It represents the change in values due to ing exposure, which was defined at the outset of this chapter. ing exposure exists only on items translated at the closing rate. In most cases, under the temporal method, the exposed items are the monetary items. However, when non-monetary items are measured at fair value, these non-monetary items will be translated at the closing rate and will be included in the exposed position. When the rate changes, items translated at the closing rate will be measured at a different amount in Canadian dollars. At the start of Year 2, the net exposed position was a net liability position of K100,000. These items were translated at the closing rate of 0.128 at the end of Year 1. If there were no new transactions during Year 2, there would still be a net exposed liability position of K100,000 at the end of year. These exposed items would be translated at 0.104 to equal $(10,400). The translated amounts would have changed from $(12,800) to $(10,400) for an exchange gain of $2,400. However, there were new transactions

The three components of cost of goods sold are each translated at the rate when these goods were purchased.

Exchange gains or losses only occur on items translated at the closing rate.


638


630

CHAPTER 11


EXHIBIT 11.7 CALCULATION OF YEAR 2 TRANSLATION ADJUSTMENT (Integrated Foreign Operation)

This schedule reconciles the change in ing exposure during the year and calculates the gains or losses due to the change in exchange rates.

Net monetary position Dec. 31, Year 1* below Changes during Year 2 Sales Purchases Bond interest expense Other expenses Dividends Net changes Calculated net monetary position Dec. 31, Year 2 Actual net monetary position Dec. 31, Year 2* below Exchange gain, Year 2

Kroons

Exchange rates

K (100,000)

0.128

9,000,000 (7,400,000) (45,000) (1,555,000) (100,000) (100,000)

0.115 0.115 0.115 0.115 0.106

Canadian dollars $

(12,800) 1,035,000 (851,000) (5,175) (178,825) (10,600) (10,600)

(23,400) K (200,000)

0.104 $

(20,800) 2,600 (a)

*NET MONETARY POSITION, KROONS December 31

Only monetary items are exposed to exchange rate changes in this illustration.

The exchange gain or loss is reported in net income under the temporal method.

Cash s receivable Current liabilities Bonds payable Net monetary position

Year 2 (From Ex. 11.4)

Year 1 (From Ex. 11.2)

K 100,000 400,000 (250,000) (450,000) K(200,000)

K 40,000 360,000 (50,000) (450,000) K(100,000)

that changed the net monetary position during the year. These new transactions were initially translated at the rate on the date of the transaction. These new transactions changed the net exposed position to a net liability position of K200,000 at the end of Year 2. The items comprising the exposed position at the end of Year 2 are translated at the closing rate at the end of that year. This results in an overall exchange gain of $2,600 for the year for all items. To determine the items that changed the exposed position during the year, we need to follow a process similar to that used when we prepare a cash flow statement, looking at all non-cash items on the balance sheet and determining whether cash was involved. For the exposed position, we look at all non-exposed items on the balance sheet and determine whether an exposed item was involved. For example, when sales occurred during the year, cash or s receivable would have increased. However, when depreciation was recorded, the other side of the entry was accumulated depreciation, which is not part of the exposed items. Therefore, sales do change the exposed position but depreciation does not. The exchange gain is reported in net income under the temporal method. This is consistent with the reporting of exchange gains or loss on individual foreign currency transactions, which were covered in Chapter 10.


639


CHAPTER 11


631

After the translation adjustment is reflected in Controlada’s income statement, the translated statements are ready for the consolidation process. They also become the basis for the following equity method journal entries by Starmont on December 31, Year 2: Investment in Controlada Equity earnings (6a) To record 100% of the Year 2 net income of Controlada Company

12,200

Cash (6b) Investment in Controlada Dividend received from Controlada Company

10,600

12,200

10,600

Exhibit 11.8 shows the Year 2 financial statements of Starmont (which would be taken from Starmont’s separate-entity financial statements), the translated statements of Controlada using the temporal method, and the consolidated financial statements. Note that the investment equals the shareholders’ equity of the subsidiary, and that there is no non-controlling interest or acquisition differential. The investment is replaced with the assets and the liabilities of Controlada, and equity earnings are replaced with revenues and expenses.

The exchange gains or losses are based on the ing exposure, which is based on the translation method.

EXHIBIT 11.8 PREPARATION OF CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS YEAR 2 (Integrated Foreign Operation) INCOME STATEMENT

Sales Equity earnings

Cost of goods purchased Change in inventory Depreciation Bond interest Other expenses Foreign exchange gain (7a) Net income

Starmont



$3,000,000 12,200 3,012,200 2,520,000 (20,000) 20,000 30,000 200,000 — 2,750,000 $ 262,200

$1,035,000 — 1,035,000 851,000 (22,400) 12,800 5,175 178,825 (2,600) 1,022,800 $ 12,200

$4,035,000 — 4,035,000 3,371,000 (42,400) 32,800 35,175 378,825 (2,600) 3,772,800 $ 262,200

Controlada


The exchange gain is reported in net income.

RETAINED EARNINGS Starmont Balance—beginning Net income Dividends Balance—end

$ 336,000 262,200 598,200 50,000 $ 548,200

$

$

64,000 12,200 76,200 10,600 65,600

$ 336,000 262,200 598,200 50,000 $ 548,200

(continued)

The parent’s income under the equity method is equal to consolidated net income attributable to the parent’s shareholders.


640


632

CHAPTER 11


EXHIBIT 11.8

(continued ) BALANCE SHEETS

The subsidiary’s assets and liabilities replace the investment when preparing the consolidated balance sheet.


Starmont

Controlada

Cash s receivable Inventories Plant and equipment (net) Investment in Controlada (equity)

$ 100,200 290,400 220,000 280,000 257,600 $1,148,200

$

10,400 41,600 176,000 102,400 — $ 330,400

$ 110,600 332,000 396,000 382,400 — $1,221,000


$ 100,000 300,000 200,000 548,200 $1,148,200

$

$ 126,000 346,800 200,000 548,200 $1,221,000

26,000 46,800 192,000 65,600 $ 330,400

See Self-Study Problem 1, Part (a), for another example of the translation of an integrated foreign operation.

Self-sustaining Foreign Operation If the subsidiary is considered self-sustaining, the translation of its Year 2 financial statements will be as shown in Exhibit 11.9. EXHIBIT 11.9 CONTROLADA S.A. TRANSLATION OF FINANCIAL STATEMENTS TO CANADIAN DOLLARS at December 31, Year 2 (Self-Sustaining Foreign Operation) INCOME STATEMENT

All revenues and expenses are assumed to have occurred evenly throughout the year.

Sales Cost of goods purchased Change in inventory Depreciation expense Bond interest expense Other expenses Net income

Kroons (From Ex. 11.4)

Exchange rate

K9,000,000 7,400,000 (400,000) 100,000 45,000 1,555,000 8,700,000 K 300,000

0.115 0.115 0.115 0.115 0.115 0.115 0.115

STATEMENT OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME Exchange Kroons rate Net income Other comprehensive income Currency translation adjustments (10a) Comprehensive income

K 300,000

K 300,000

0.115

Canadian dollars $1,035,000 851,000 (46,000) 11,500 5,175 178,825 1,000,500 $ 34,500 (a)

Canadian dollars $

34,500

$

(51,100) (b) (16,600)

(continued)


641


CHAPTER 11

EXHIBIT 11.9


633

(continued ) STATEMENT OF RETAINED EARNINGS Exchange Kroons rate

Balance, beginning of year Net income

K 500,000 300,000 800,000 100,000 K 700,000

Dividends Balance, end of year

0.128 0.115

Canadian dollars $

0.106 $

64,000 34,500 98,500 10,600 (c) 87,900

Only the net income from the regular income statement is carried forward to the statement of retained earnings.

BALANCE SHEET Kroons

Exchange rate

Canadian dollars


K 100,000 400,000 1,600,000 800,000 K2,900,000

0.104 0.104 0.104 0.104

$

Current liabilities Bonds payable Common shares Retained earnings Accumulated translation adjustments (b)

K 250,000 450,000 1,500,000 700,000

0.104 0.104 0.128

$

K2,900,000

10,400 41,600 166,400 83,200 $ 301,600 26,000 46,800 192,000 (d) 87,900 (e) (51,100) (f) $ 301,600

All assets and liabilities are translated at the current rate.

Other comprehensive income is carried forward to accumulated other comprehensive income.

The procedure used in Exhibit 11.9 was to translate the income statement first, then the retained earnings statement, and then the balance sheet. The following features of the current rate translation process are emphasized: • The average rate for Year 2 is used for all revenues and expenses in the income statement. • All assets and liabilities are translated at the closing rate. • Common shares and beginning retained earnings are translated at the acquisition date historical rate, thus establishing the translated amount on that date. In future periods, the amount for the translated beginning retained earnings will have to be calculated. In practice, the ant will look at last year’s translated financial statements for this amount. Dividends are translated at the historical rate on the date of declaration. In situations where the dividends were not paid by year-end, the dividends payable will be translated at the closing rate, and a hidden exchange gain or loss will result from the translation of these items. (In this example, the dividends were declared and paid on December 31.) • The amount required to balance the balance sheet is the unrealized exchange loss from the translation of the subsidiary’s financial statements using the current rate method. The unrealized exchange losses for the year must be presented in other comprehensive income on the statement of comprehensive income. The accumulated exchange gains and losses for all years to date are presented as a separate component of shareholders’ equity. Since Year 2 is

The average rate is used when the revenues and expenses occur evenly throughout the year. All items within shareholders’ equity are translated using the historical rate applicable for each item.

Differentiate between other comprehensive income for the year that is reported in comprehensive income and accumulated other comprehensive income that is reported in shareholders’ equity.


642


634

CHAPTER 11


the first year in which Controlada is reporting unrealized exchange losses, the cumulative losses on the balance sheet are equal to the loss reported in comprehensive income for the year. In this example, comprehensive income is presented as a separate statement. It includes net income from the income statement and other comprehensive income.

Exchange gains and losses occur only on those items translated at the closing rate and only if the rates change during the period.

Starmont’s journal entries are recorded in Canadian dollars.

In this illustration, the financial statements were translated sequentially, with the foreign exchange loss being the last item needed to balance the balance sheet. In reality, the gain or loss can be calculated before attempting the translation process. Exhibit 11.10 illustrates this process. In a self-sustaining operation such as this one, it is the net assets (assets less liabilities) that are at risk and exposed to currency fluctuations. Net assets equal shareholders’ equity, and if the common shares remain unchanged, the only changes that usually occur are changes to retained earnings, which are net income and dividends. The process involves translating the opening position, using the closing rates at that time, and translating the changes to the exposed items at the rates at which they occurred. The result is a calculated position. The actual end-of-year net asset position is translated at closing rates, with the difference between the two numbers representing the exchange gain or loss from translation. Notice that if the exchange rate had remained constant throughout Year 2, all items in Exhibit 11.10 would have been translated at $0.128 with no exchange gain or loss occurring. Starmont uses the equity method for internal record keeping purposes. It would make the following journal entries on December 31, Year 2: Investment in Controlada (9a) Equity earnings 100% of translated net income

34,500

Cash (9c) Investment in Controlada Dividend received

10,600

34,500

10,600

Other comprehensive income (9b) 51,100 Investment in Controlada 51,100 To record 100% of the change in the unrealized exchange loss from translation for Year 2

EXHIBIT 11.10 INDEPENDENT CALCULATION OF YEAR 2 TRANSLATION LOSS (Self-Sustaining Foreign Operation)

Assets minus liabilities are called net assets and are equal in amount to shareholders’ equity.

Net assets, Dec. 31, Year 1 Changes in net assets, Year 2 Net income Dividends Calculated net assets Actual net assets Exchange loss from translation

Kroons

Exchange rate

Canadian dollars

K2,000,000

0.128

$256,000

300,000 (100,000)

0.115 0.106

K2,200,000

0.104

34,500 (10,600) 279,900 228,800 $ 51,100 (a)


643


CHAPTER 11


Exhibit 11.11 illustrates the preparation of the consolidated financial statements. Starmont uses the equity method for internal record keeping. Note that equity earnings are equal to the subsidiary’s net income ($34,500) and are therefore eliminated and replaced with the subsidiary’s revenue and expenses.

635

Net equity earnings should be equal to the subsidiary’s net income when there is no acquisition differential or non-controlling interest.

EXHIBIT 11.11 PREPARATION OF CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS YEAR 2 (Self-Sustaining Foreign Operation) STATEMENT OF NET INCOME AND COMPREHENSIVE INCOME


Cost of goods purchased Change in inventory Depreciation Bond interest Other expenses Net income Other comprehensive income Foreign currency translation adjustments (10a) Comprehensive income

Starmont


$3,000,000 34,500 3,034,500 2,520,000 (20,000) 20,000 30,000 200,000 2,750,000 284,500

$1,035,000 — 1,035,000 851,000 (46,000) 11,500 5,175 178,825 1,000,500 34,500

Starmont Consolidated $4,035,000 — 4,035,000 3,371,000 (66,000) 31,500 35,175 378,825 3,750,500 284,500 (a)

(51,100) (16,600)

(51,100) (b) $ 233,400

64,000 34,500 98,500 10,600 87,900

$ 336,000 284,500 620,500 50,000 (c) $ 570,500

Cash $ 100,200 s receivable 290,400 Inventories 220,000 Plant and equipment (net) 280,000 Investment in Controlada (equity method) 228,800 $1,119,400

$

10,400 41,600 166,400 83,200 — $ 301,600

$ 110,600 332,000 386,400 363,200 — (d) $1,192,200

Current liabilities Bonds payable Common shares Retained earnings Accumulated translation adjustments

$

$ 126,000 346,800 200,000 (e) 570,500 (f) (51,100) (g) $1,192,200

(51,100) $ 233,400

$

Other comprehensive income is reported separately from net income.

RETAINED EARNINGS Balance—beginning Net income

$

Dividends Balance—end

$

336,000 284,500 620,500 50,000 570,500

$

$

Consolidated retained earnings are the same as the parent’s retained earnings under the equity method.

BALANCE SHEETS

$ 100,000 300,000 200,000 570,500 (51,100) $1,119,400

26,000 46,800 192,000 87,900 (51,100) $ 301,600

Accumulated translation adjustments are reported separately from retained earnings.


644


636

CHAPTER 11


The parent’s investment is eliminated against the shareholders’ equity of the subsidiary in the following manner: The investment under the equity method should be equal to the subsidiary’s shareholders’ equity when there is no acquisition differential or non-controlling interest.

Investment in Controlada (11d) Shareholders’ equity—Controlada Common shares (11e) Retained earnings (11f) Accumulated translation adjustments (11g) Acquisition differential

$228,800 192,000 88,100 (51,300)

228,800 –0–

$

With no acquisition differential or non-controlling interest, the investment is replaced with the assets and the liabilities of the subsidiary. Note that the parent’s share (in this case, 100%) of the subsidiary’s accumulated translation adjustments appears as a separate component of consolidated shareholders’ equity. The parent’s equity method journal entries made the consolidation process straightforward. The consolidated statement of changes in equity for the year ended December 31, Year 2, is presented in Exhibit 11.12. Note that net income is added to retained earnings, whereas other comprehensive income is added to accumulated translation adjustments.

Comparative Observations of the Two Translation Methods Integrated subsidiaries usually have a net liability exposure, whereas selfsustaining subsidiaries usually have a net asset exposure.

Under the current rate method, the net assets position of the foreign entity is at risk from currency fluctuations, while under the temporal method it is typically the net monetary position that is at risk. For most companies, monetary liabilities are greater than monetary assets, so they are usually in a net monetary liability position. This is the case with Controlada S.A. If the foreign currency weakens with respect to the Canadian dollar, a self-sustaining operation will show a foreign exchange loss while an integrated foreign operation will show a foreign exchange gain. This can be seen in Exhibit 11.7, where an integrated operation produced a gain of $2,600 and in Exhibit 11.10, where a self-sustaining operation produced a loss of $51,100. If the Canadian dollar weakens with respect to the foreign currency (i.e., the foreign currency strengthens) a self-sustaining operation will reflect an exchange gain and an integrated operation will reflect an exchange loss. These observations are only true when monetary liabilities are greater than monetary assets and when there is not a major change in exposed position from beginning to the end of the period.

EXHIBIT 11.12 CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF CHANGES IN EQUITY (Self-Sustaining Foreign Operation)

Balance—beginning Net income (11a) Other comprehensive income (11b) Dividends (11c) Balance—end * ATA 5 Accumulated translation adjustments

Common shares

Retained earnings

$200,000

$336,000 284,500

ATA* $

Total 0

(51,100) $200,000

(50,000) $570,500

$(51,100)

$536,000 284,500 (51,100) (50,000) $719,400


645


CHAPTER 11


637

See Self-Study Problem 1, Part (b), for another example of the translation of a self-sustaining foreign operation.

Complications with an Acquisition Differential

LO5

The previous example assumed a 100% controlled subsidiary and no acquisition differential. The existence of an acquisition differential presents complications in the consolidation process when the current rate method is used and the subsidiary is less than 100% owned. We will change some of the facts from the previous example in order to illustrate this.

Example Assume that Starmont purchased 90% of Controlada on December 31, Year 1, at a cost of K2,340,000. The carrying amounts of Controlada’s net assets were equal to fair values on this date except for a patent, which had a fair value of K600,000 in excess of carrying amount. The patent had a remaining useful life of 10 years and no residual value at the date of acquisition. The same exchange rates are assumed; thus, the financial statements of Controlada and their translation will not change from the previous example. However, the change in the acquisition cost and the percentage purchased creates an acquisition differential and a noncontrolling interest. Starmont’s journal entry to record the acquisition on December 31, Year 1, is as follows: Investment in Controlada Cash To record the acquisition of 90% of Controlada for $299,520 (2,340,000 3 0.128)

299,520 299,520

The calculation in Exhibit 11.13 of the acquisition differential in kroons and Canadian dollars on December 31, Year 1, is made to prepare the acquisition-date consolidated balance sheet. Exhibit 11.14 shows the balance sheets of the parent and the subsidiary and the consolidated balance sheet at December 31, Year 1, the date of acquisition.

Consolidation Integrated We assume that 90%-owned Controlada is an integrated foreign operation. In this case, the existence of an acquisition differential

The subsidiary’s separateentity financial statements are the same regardless of the parent’s percentage ownership in the subsidiary.

EXHIBIT 11.13 CALCULATION OF ACQUISITION DIFFERENTIAL Cost of 90% investment

K2,340,000

3

0.128

5

$299,520

Implied value of 100% Book value of subsidiary’s net assets Assets Liabilities Net assets Acquisition differential Patent Balance—goodwill

K2,600,000

3

0.128

5

$332,800 (a)

2,500,000 (500,000) 2,000,000 600,000 600,000 K —0—

3 3

0.128 0.128

5 5

3 3

0.128 0.128

5 5

320,000 (64,000) 256,000 76,800 76,800 (b) $ —0—

Non-controlling interests (10% 3 [a] 332,800)

33,280 (c)

The acquisition differential is translated at the exchange rate on the date of acquisition.


646


638

CHAPTER 11


EXHIBIT 11.14 PREPARATION OF CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET at December 31, Year 1 Starmont

Patent and non-controlling interest appear on the consolidated balance sheet.



Cash s receivable Inventories Plant and equipment Investment in Controlada Patent (13b)

$ 26,480 90,000 200,000 300,000 299,520 — $916,000

$

5,120 46,080 153,600 115,200 — — $320,000

$

31,600 136,080 353,600 415,200 — 76,800 $1,013,280

Current liabilities Bonds payable Common shares Retained earnings Non-controlling interest (13c)

$80,000 300,000 200,000 336,000 — $916,000

$

$

6,400 57,600 192,000 64,000 — $320,000

86,400 357,600 200,000 336,000 33,280 $1,013,280

and a non-controlling interest pose no particular consolidation problems. The acquisition differential amortization schedule for Year 2 is shown in Exhibit 11.15. Using the Year 2 acquisition differential amortization schedule and Controlada’s translated financial statements (Exhibit 11.16), Starmont would make the following equity method journal entries on December 31, Year 2: Cash (90% 3 [6b] 10,600) Investment in Controlada Equity earnings (90% 3 [6a]12,200) To record parent’s share of dividends and net income

9,540 1,440

Equity earnings (90% 3 [15a] 7,680) Investment in Controlada Amortization of acquisition differential

6,912

10,980

6,912

Exhibit 11.16 shows the preparation of the Year 2 consolidated financial statements.

EXHIBIT 11.15 ACQUISITION DIFFERENTIAL AMORTIZATION SCHEDULE There is no exchange adjustment because patent is translated at the historical rate under the temporal method.

Patent—Dec. 31, Year 1 (13b) Amortization—Year 2 Patent—Dec. 31, Year 2

K600,000 60,000 K540,000

3 3 3

0.128 0.128 0.128

5 5 5

$76,800 7,680 (a) $69,120 (b)


647


CHAPTER 11


639

EXHIBIT 11.16 PREPARATION OF CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—YEAR 2 (Integrated Foreign Operation) INCOME STATEMENT


Cost of goods purchased Change in inventory Depreciation Bond interest Other expenses Patent amortization (15a) Foreign exchange gain (7a) Net income

Starmont


$3,000,000 4,068 3,004,068 2,520,000 (20,000) 20,000 30,000 200,000 — — 2,750,000 $ 254,068

$1,035,000 — 1,035,000 851,000 (22,400) 12,800 5,175 178,825 — (2,600) 1,022,800 $ 12,200

Attributable to Shareholders of Starmont ([a] 254,520 – [b] 452) Non-controlling interest

Starmont Consolidated $4,035,000 — 4,035,000 3,371,000 (42,400) 32,800 35,175 378,825 7,680 (2,600) 3,780,480 $ 254,520 (a)

$ 254,068 452 (b)

RETAINED EARNINGS Starmont Balance—beginning Net income Dividends Balance—end

$ 336,000 254,068 590,068 50,000 $ 540,068

Controlada $

$

64,000 12,200 76,200 10,600 65,600

Starmont Consolidated $

$

336,000 254,068 590,068 50,000 540,068

The parent’s retained earnings under the equity method are equal to consolidated retained earnings.

BALANCE SHEETS Starmont Cash s receivable Inventories Plant and equipment (net) Investment in Controlada (equity) Patent (15b)

Current liabilities Bonds payable Common shares Retained earnings Non-controlling interest

$

Controlada

55,620 290,400 220,000 280,000 294,048 — $ 1,140,068

$

$

$

100,000 300,000 200,000 540,068 — $ 1,140,068

$

$


10,400 41,600 176,000 102,400 — — 330,400

$

66,020 332,000 396,000 382,400 — (c) 69,120 (d) $ 1,245,540

26,000 46,800 192,000 65,600 — 330,400

$

126,000 346,800 200,000 (e) 540,068 (f) 32,672 $ 1,245,540

There is no accumulated translation adjustment for exchange gains or losses under the temporal method.


648


640

CHAPTER 11


The following points are worth noting in regard to the preparation of the consolidated statements: 1. Consolidated income statement: Patent amortization and non-controlling interest are consolidation adjustments.

(a) Equity earnings are eliminated and replaced with the revenues and the expenses of the subsidiary, patent amortization, and the non-controlling interest as follows: Net income, Controlada (6a) Patent amortization (15a)

$12,200 (7,680) 4,520 (452) $ 4,068

Non-controlling interest @ 10% Equity earnings

(b) Non-controlling interest is 10% of the subsidiary’s net income less 10% of the patent amortization. 2. Consolidated retained earnings: Because the parent has used the equity method, all items are identical to the parent’s retained earnings. 3. Consolidated balance sheet: (a) The investment is eliminated and replaced with the assets and the liabilities of the subsidiary, the unamortized acquisition differential, and the non-controlling interest. (b) The non-controlling interest is calculated as follows: Non-controlling interest on the balance sheet is based on the subsidiary’s shareholders’ equity plus the unamortized patent at the end of the year.

Common shares (16e) Retained earnings (16f) Patent (16d)

$192,000 65,600 69,120 326,720 10% $ 32,672

The unamortized acquisition differential can be verified by the following calculation: Investment in Controlada (16c) Shareholders’ equity of Controlada ([16e] 192,000 1 [16f] 65,600) Unamortized acquisition differential (patent)—parent’s share —non-controlling interest’s share (10% 3 [16d] 69,120) Total unamortized acquisition differential (patent)

$294,048 257,600 90%

231,840 62,208 6,912 $ 69,120

Consolidation—Self-Sustaining Assuming that Controlada is a self-sustaining operation, we will now illustrate the preparation of the Year 2 consolidated financial statements. The translated financial statements are the same as were shown in the previous example, and are reproduced again as part of Exhibit 11.18. Included in the subsidiary’s shareholders’ equity is the accumulated unrealized loss of $51,100. The non-controlling interest in the consolidated balance sheet includes 10% of the subsidiary’s shareholders’ equity, and therefore includes 10% of this accumulated loss. Consolidated shareholders’ equity attributable to the parent will



CHAPTER 11

649

641

show the other 90% of this translation adjustment. A further exchange loss arises in the consolidation process because of the manner in which the acquisition differential amortization schedule is translated. Assume that the amortization expense related to the patent occurred evenly throughout the year. The acquisition differential amortization schedule is translated as shown in Exhibit 11.17.

EXHIBIT 11.17 TRANSLATION OF ACQUISITION-DIFFERENTIAL AMORTIZATION SCHEDULE Patent—Dec. 31, Year 1 (13b) Patent amortization—Year 2 Calculated patent—Dec. 31, Year 2 Actual patent—Dec. 31, Year 2 Exchange loss—unrealized

K600,000 60,000

3 3

0.128 0.115

5 5

K540,000

3

0.104

5

$76,800 6,900 (a) 69,900 56,160 (b) $13,740 (c)

A patent for a self-sustaining subsidiary is translated at the closing rate.

DISPOSITION OF ACCUMULATED UNREALIZED LOSSES 90% control

Total Accumulated unrealized loss—subsidiary statements (9b) Accumulated unrealized loss—acquisition differential (c)

10% non-control

$51,100

$45,990

$5,110 (d)

13,740 $64,840

12,366 $58,356

1,374 (e) $ 6,484

EXHIBIT 11.18 PREPARATION OF CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—YEAR 2 (Self-Sustaining) STATEMENT OF NET INCOME AND COMPREHENSIVE INCOME

Starmont Sales Equity earnings Cost of goods purchased Change in inventory Depreciation Bond interest Other Patent amortization (17a) Individual net incomes Net income Other comprehensive income Foreign currency translation adjustments Comprehensive income

$3,000,000 24,840 3,024,840 2,520,000 (20,000) 20,000 30,000 200,000 — 2,750,000 274,840



$1,035,000 — 1,035,000 851,000 (46,000) 11,500 5,175 178,825 — 1,000,500 34,500

$4,035,000 — 4,035,000 3,371,000 (66,000) 31,500 35,175 378,825 6,900 3,757,400 277,600

(58,356) $ 216,484

(51,100) $ (16,600)

The parent accrues its share of the subsidiary’s income after it has been translated into Canadian dollars.

(a) (b)

(64,840) $ 212,760 (c)

(continued)

Consolidated other comprehensive income includes $51,100 from translating the subsidiary’s separate-entity statements plus $13,740 from translating the acquisition differential on consolidation.


650


642

CHAPTER 11


EXHIBIT 11.18

(continued ) Starmont


Net income attributable to Shareholders of Starmont ([b] 277,600 2 [d] 2,760) Non-controlling interest (10% 3 [(a) 34,500 2 (17a) 6,900])


$ 274,840

2,760 $ 277,600

Comprehensive income attributable to Shareholders of Starmont ([c] 212,760 2 [e] (3,724)) Non-controlling interest (10% 3 [(c) (16,600) 2 (17a) 6,900 2 (17e) 13,740])

(d)

$ 216,484

(3,724) (e) $ 212,760

RETAINED EARNINGS Balance—beginning Net income Dividends Balance—end

$ 336,000 274,840 610,840 50,000 $ 560,840

$

$

64,000 34,500 98,500 10,600 87,900

$ 336,000 274,840 610,840 50,000 $ 560,840

BALANCE SHEETS

Accumulated translation adjustments are only the parent’s share. The noncontrolling interest’s share of accumulated translation adjustments is included in the $28,496 for noncontrolling interest.

Cash s receivable Inventories Plant and equipment Investment in Controlada (equity) Patent (17b)

$

55,620 290,400 220,000 280,000 256,464 — $1,102,484

$

10,400 41,600 166,400 83,200 — — $ 301,600

$

66,020 332,000 386,400 363,200 — 56,160 $1,203,780

Current liabilities Bonds payable Common shares Retained earnings Accumulated translation adjustments Non-controlling interest

$ 100,000 300,000 200,000 560,840

$26,000 46,800 192,000 87,900

$ 126,000 346,800 200,000 560,840

(58,356) — $1,102,484

(51,100) — $ 301,600

(f) (g)

(h) (i)

(58,356) (j) 28,496 $1,203,780

The following points should be noted: Amortization expense is translated at the average rate.

An exchange adjustment occurs because the patent is restated when it is translated at the closing rate at the end of the year.

• The acquisition differential (in this case, patent) on December 31, Year 1, is translated at the historical rate on that date. • The Year 2 amortization expense is translated at the average rate for Year 2 because the expense was incurred evenly throughout the year. • The unamortized balance on December 31, Year 2, is translated at the closing rate. When different exchange rates are used to translate the schedule, an exchange gain or loss will always result. In this case, there is a loss of $13,740, which appears as part of the accumulated translation adjustments in the shareholders’ equity of


651


CHAPTER 11


643

the parent company. The allocation of the two exchange losses resulting from the translation of the financial statements and the acquisition differential to controlling and non-controlling interest was illustrated above. Using the translated financial statements of Controlada (see Exhibit 11.18) and the translated acquisition differential amortization schedule, Starmont would make the following equity method journal entries on December 31, Year 2: 9,540 Cash (90% 3 [9c] 10,600) Other comprehensive income (90% 3 [9b] 51,100) 45,990 Equity earnings (90% 3 [9a] 34,500) 31,050 Investment in Controlada 24,480 To record the parent’s share of dividends, net income, and loss on translation of statement Equity earnings (90% 3 [17a] 6,900) 6,210 Other comprehensive income (90% 3 [17c] 13,740) 12,366 Investment in Controlada To record the amortization and exchange adjustment on the acquisition differential

18,576

Note that Year 2 equity earnings are $24,840 (31,050 – 6,210) above when the subsidiary is classified as self-sustaining. In the previous example, when the subsidiary was classified as integrated, the equity earnings were $4,068. The difference is due to (a) the use of different exchange rates in the translation, and (b) the fact that there is no exchange loss on the translation of the acquisition differential amortization schedule under the temporal method. The preparation of the Year 2 consolidated financial statements is illustrated in Exhibit 11.18. The following explanations regarding the preparation of the consolidated statements should be noted: 1. Consolidated statement of comprehensive income: (a) Equity earnings are eliminated and replaced with the revenues and expenses of the subsidiary, the patent amortization expense, and the noncontrolling interest. (b) Non-controlling interest in net income is 10% of subsidiary net income less 10% of the patent amortization expense. (c) This statement takes the net income and deducts the unrealized foreign exchange loss to determine comprehensive income. (d) Non-controlling interest absorbs 10% of the unrealized exchange loss reported in other comprehensive income.

The equity earnings are quite different under the temporal method than under the current rate method.

Non-controlling interest on the consolidated statement of comprehensive income is based on the income recorded by the subsidiary, plus the consolidation adjustments for patent amortization loss and exchange loss.

2. Consolidated retained earnings: Because the parent has used the equity method, all items are identical to the parent’s retained earnings. 3. Consolidated balance sheet: (a) The investment is eliminated and replaced with the assets and the liabilities of the subsidiary, the unamortized acquisition differential, and the non-controlling interest. (b) The non-controlling interest is calculated as follows: Common shares (18h) Retained earnings (18i) Accumulated translation adjustments (18j) Patent (18g)

$192,000 87,900 (51,100) 56,160 284,960 10% $ 28,496

Non-controlling interest on the balance sheet is based on the subsidiary’s shareholders’ equity, plus the consolidation adjustment for unamortized patent at the end of the year.


652


644

CHAPTER 11


4. Consolidated accumulated translation adjustments: This shows the parent’s share of the accumulated translation adjustments at the end of the year. Since Year 2 is the first year after acquisition, the accumulated losses are equal to the losses reported in other comprehensive income for the year. The unamortized acquisition differential can be verified by the following calculation: Investment in Controlada (18f) Shareholders’ equity of Controlada (18h 1 18i 1 18j)

Unamortized acquisition differential (patent)—parent’s share Non-controlling interest’s share (10% 3 [18g] 56,160) Total unamortized acquisition differential (patent)

$256,464 228,800 90%

205,920 50,544 5,616 $ 56,160

Other Considerations The previous examples have illustrated the translation of a foreign operation’s financial statements and the consolidation of these statements with those of the reporting enterprise. We will now look at some other items that must be considered when a foreign subsidiary is being consolidated. Inventory is translated at the closing rate for a selfsustaining operation and the LCNRV principle need not be applied. For an integrated operation, the LCNRV principle must be applied using historical cost in Canadian dollars and net realizable value in Canadian dollars.

Lower of Cost and Net Realizable Value (LCNRV) Certain items, such as inventory, will be measured at the LCNRV. If the subsidiary is self-sustaining, the method of valuation used is of no consequence in the translation because all of the assets are translated at the closing rate, regardless of whether they are carried at cost or net realizable value. If the foreign operation is integrated, assets carried at cost are translated at historical rates, while assets carried at net realizable value are translated at the closing rate. that the temporal method remeasures, in Canadian dollars, transactions that have been incurred by the foreign operation. Therefore, the translated financial statements should reflect the LCNRV in Canadian dollars as if the parent itself had carried out the inventory acquisitions of its foreign subsidiary. When assets are measured at the LCNRV, a write-down to net realizable value may be required in the translated financial statements, even though no write-down is required in the foreign currency financial statements. For example, if the net realizable value (denominated in foreign currency) is greater than historical cost (denominated in foreign currency), no write-down will have occurred in the foreign operation’s statements. But if the foreign currency weakens, it is quite possible that the net realizable value translated at the closing rate will be less than historical cost translated at the historical rate. In this situation, translated net realizable value will be used in the translated financial statements. On the other hand, it may be necessary to reverse a write-down in the foreign currency financial statements prior to translation, if the net realizable value amount translated at the closing rate exceeds historical cost translated at the historical rates. For example, if the net realizable value (denominated in foreign currency) is less than historical cost (denominated in foreign currency), a write-down would have taken place in the foreign operation’s statements. If the foreign currency has strengthened so that the net realizable value translated at the closing rate is greater than historical cost translated at the historical rate, this write-down


653


CHAPTER 11


645

will have to be reversed prior to translation. The inventory (now carried at cost) will be translated at the historical rate.

Intercompany Profits In the preparation of consolidated financial statements, intercompany profits in assets are eliminated. If the profits are contained in the assets of the Canadian parent, there is no particular problem eliminating them. The asset acquired was recorded by the parent at the foreign-currency–denominated price, translated at the exchange rate on the date of the transaction. The profit rate can be applied for the items still on hand to determine the amount of profit to be eliminated. If the profits are contained in the assets of an integrated subsidiary, the amount of unrealized profit can still be determined in foreign currency. Because the asset itself is translated at the historical rate, using the historical rate to translate and eliminate the profit will result in a translated asset at historical cost to the consolidated entity. When the profit is contained in the assets of a translated self-sustaining subsidiary, the asset has been translated at the closing rate. The historical exchange rate should be used to calculate the amount of the profit. This eliminates the same profit that was recorded in the first place. However, the translated assets will not be reported at historical cost to the consolidated entity. This is one of the anomalies of the current rate method.

Cash Flow Statement To prepare a cash flow statement for a foreign subsidiary, we ignore the cash flow statement of the foreign subsidiary; that is, we do not translate each item on the foreign currency cash flow statement into Canadian dollars by applying a translation rate to each item. Rather, we use the translated balance sheet and translated income statement to determine the cash flows during the year. We analyze the changes in the translated balance sheet s from last year to this year using either a worksheet approach or T- approach and then prepare the cash flow statement based on this analysis. This is a similar approach to what we used in Chapter 8 when we prepared a consolidated cash flow statement by analyzing the changes in the consolidated balance sheet from last year to this year.

The historical rate should be used in determining the intercompany profit to be eliminated. This eliminates the same profit that was recorded in the first place.

A cash flow statement is prepared by analyzing the change in a non-cash item on the balance sheet after it has been translated into Canadian dollars.

Tax Effects of Exchange Adjustments Exchange differences arising from translating the financial statements of a foreign operation into Canadian dollars are usually not taxable or deductible until the gains or losses are realized. Since these differences were recognized for ing purposes but not for tax purposes, a temporary difference occurs, and deferred income taxes should be recognized in the financial statements of the reporting entity. Also, as we learned in Chapter 9, a temporary difference arises on the consolidated financial statements when an acquisition differential is allocated to an asset other than goodwill. We ignored the tax impact on the acquisition differential and for the foreign exchange adjustments in the illustrations in this chapter to avoid complicating the illustrations. Disclosure Requirements The following summarizes the main disclosures required in IAS 21 for the effects of changes in foreign exchange rates related to foreign operations: (a) The amount of exchange differences recognized in profit or loss. (b) Net exchange differences recognized in other comprehensive income.

An entity must disclose the exchange adjustments reported in profit and other comprehensive income.


654


646

CHAPTER 11


(c) When the presentation currency is different from the functional currency, that fact must be stated with disclosure of the functional currency and the reason for using a different presentation currency. (d) When there is a change in the functional currency, that fact and the reason for the change in functional currency must be disclosed. TransAlta Corporation is Canada’s largest publicly traded power generator and marketer of electricity and renewable energy. Exhibit 11.19 contains excerpts from TransAlta’s 2011 financial statements pertaining to foreign currency operations.

EXHIBIT 11.19 EXTRACTS (IN PART) FROM TRANSALTA’S 2011 FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2. ing Policies D. Foreign Currency Translation

The Canadian dollar is both the functional currency and the presentation currency.

The Corporation, its subsidiary companies, and t ventures each determine their functional currency based on the currency of the primary economic environment in which they operate. The Corporation’s functional currency is the Canadian dollar, while the functional currencies of the subsidiary companies and t ventures’ are either the Canadian, U.S., or Australian dollar. Transactions denominated in a currency other than the functional currency of an entity are translated at the exchange rate in effect on the transaction date. The resulting exchange gains and losses are included in each entity’s net earnings in the period in which they arise. The Corporation’s foreign operations are translated to the Corporation’s presentation currency, which is the Canadian dollar, for inclusion in the consolidated financial statements. Foreign-denominated monetary and non-monetary assets and liabilities of foreign operations are translated at exchange rates in effect at the end of the reporting period, and revenue and expenses are translated at exchange rates in effect on the transaction date. The resulting translation gains and losses are included in Other Comprehensive Income (“OCI”) with the cumulative gain or loss reported in Accumulated Other Comprehensive (Loss) Income (“AOCI”). Amounts previously recognized in AOCI are recognized in net earnings when there is a reduction in the net investment as a result of a disposal, partial disposal, or loss of control.

E. Financial Instruments and Hedges The current rate method is used when the functional currency differs from the presentation currency.

II. Hedges c. Hedges of Foreign Currency Exposures of a Net Investment in a Foreign Operation In hedging a foreign currency exposure of a net investment in a foreign operation, the effective portion of foreign exchange gains and losses on the hedging instrument is recognized in OCI, and the ineffective portion is recognized in net earnings. The amounts previously recognized in AOCI are recognized in net earnings when there is a reduction in the hedged net investment as a result of a disposal, partial disposal, or loss of control. The Corporation primarily uses foreign currency forward contracts, and foreigndenominated debt to hedge exposure to changes in the carrying amounts of the Corporation’s net investments in foreign operations that result from changes in foreign exchange rates. Gains and losses on these instruments that qualify for hedge ing are reported in OCI with fair values recorded in risk management assets or liabilities, as appropriate.

(continued)


655


CHAPTER 11

EXHIBIT 11.19


647

(continued )

14. Risk Management Activities I. Hedges a. Net Investment Hedges i. Hedges of Foreign Operations Long-Term Debt U.S. dollar denominated long-term debt with a face value of US$820 million (Dec. 31, 2010 – US$820 million), and borrowings under a U.S. dollar denominated credit facility with a face value of US$300 million (Dec. 31, 2010 – US$300 million) have been designated as a part of the hedge of TransAlta’s net investment in foreign operations. The Corporation hedges its net investment in foreign operations with U.S. denominated borrowings, cross-currency interest rate swaps, and foreign currency forward sale contracts.

U.S.-dollar–denominated long-term debt has been designated as a part hedge of the net investment in foreign operations.

ii. Effect on the Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income For the year ended Dec. 31, 2011, a net after-tax loss of $1 million (Dec. 31, 2010 – loss of $24 million), relating to the translation of the Corporation’s net investment in foreign operations, net of hedging, was recognized in OCI. All net investment hedges currently have no ineffective portion.

B. Nature and Extent of Risks Arising from Financial Instruments The following discussion is limited to the nature and extent of risks arising from financial instruments.

I. Market Risk c. Currency Rate Risk The Corporation has exposure to various currencies, such as the euro, the U.S. dollar, and the Australian dollar, as a result of investments and operations in foreign jurisdictions, the net earnings from those operations, and the acquisition of equipment and services from foreign suppliers. The foreign currency risk sensitivities outlined below are limited to the risks that arise on financial instruments denominated in currencies other than the functional currency. The possible effect on net earnings and OCI, for the years ended Dec. 31, 2011 and 2010, due to changes in foreign exchange rates associated with financial instruments outstanding as at the date of the Statements of Financial Position, is outlined below. The sensitivity analysis has been prepared using management’s assessment that a six-cent (2010 – six-cent) increase or decrease in these currencies relative to the Canadian dollar is a reasonable potential change over the next quarter.

Year ended Dec. 31 Currency USD AUD EUR Total

2011

2010

Net earnings (decrease)

Net earnings (decrease)

increase2

OCI gain2,3

increase2

OCI gain2,3

(4) 2 2 (4)

11 2 3 14

(4) 1 2 (3)

9 2 2 9

2 These calculations assume an increase in the value of these currencies relative to the Canadian dollar. A decrease would have the opposite effect. 3 The foreign exchange impacts related to financial instruments used as hedging instruments in net investment hedges have been excluded.

Source: Reproduced with permission from TransAlta Corporation. http://www.transalta.com/sites/ default/files/TA_Statements_2011_Final_SEDAR_0.pdf

TransAlta discloses the effect on net earnings of a six-cent increase in the exchange rate.


656


648

CHAPTER 11

LO6


ANALYSIS AND INTERPRETATION OF FINANCIAL STATEMENTS A company must use the temporal method when translating an integrated foreign operation and the current rate method when translating self-sustaining foreign operation. Exhibit 11.20 presents the statements of comprehensive income and balance sheets for Controlada under these two translation methods. The exhibit also indicates the return on equity, debt-to-equity ratio, and current ratio for each translation method. Note the following from Exhibit 11.20: • The temporal method reports a gain from foreign currency, whereas the current rate method shows a loss; the gain is reported in net income under

Exhibit 11.20

Impact of Translation Methods on Key Ratios

CONTROLADA’S STATEMENTS OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME

Exchange gains and losses are reported in net income under the temporal method and in other comprehensive income under the current rate method.

The temporal method reports an exchange gain, whereas the current rate method reports an exchange loss.

Exchange gains and losses end up in retained earnings under the temporal method and in accumulated other comprehensive income under the current rate method.

Sales Foreign exchange gain Cost of goods purchased Change in inventory Depreciation Bond interest Other expenses Net income OCI—translation adjustment Comprehensive income

Temporal method (From Ex. 11.6)

Current rate method (From Ex. 11.9)

$1,035,000 2,400 1,037,400 851,000 (22,400) 12,800 5,175 178,825 1,025,400 12,000

$1,035,000

$ 12,000

1,035,000 851,000 (46,000) 11,500 5,175    178,825 1,000,500 34,500 (51,300) $ (16,800)

CONTROLADA’S BALANCE SHEETS Cash s receivable Inventories Current assets Plant and equipment (net)

$ 10,400 41,600 176,000 228,000 102,400 $ 330,400

$ 10,400 41,600 166,400 218,400 83,200 $ 301,600

Current liabilities Bonds payable Common shares Retained earnings Accumulated translation adjustment

$ 26,000 46,800 192,000 65,600

$ 26,000 46,800 192,000 88,100 (51,300) $ 301,600

$ 330,400 Return on equity (net income / shareholders’ equity) Debt to equity (liabilities / shareholders’ equity) Current ratio (current assets / current liabilities)

4.7% 0.28 8.8

15.1% 0.32 8.4


CHAPTER 11


657

649

the temporal method, and the loss is reported in OCI under the current rate method. • The temporal method reports a positive comprehensive income, whereas the current rate method reports a negative comprehensive income. • The main profitability ratio, being return on equity, is better under the current rate method because it uses net income rather than comprehensive income as the numerator. • The debt-to-equity ratio is lower under the temporal method because shareholders’ equity is higher due to the foreign exchange gain as compared with a negative translation adjustment under the current rate method.

Profitability ratios look better under the current rate method, whereas liquidity and solvency ratios look better under the temporal method.

• The solvency position looks worse under the current rate method due to the higher debt-to-equity ratio because of the lower equity. • The current ratio is higher under the temporal method due to the higher amount for inventory. • The liquidity position looks better under the temporal method due to the higher current ratio. These ratios refer to one company for the same year. Which set of ratios more faithfully represents the true economic position of the company? That question needs to be answered to determine which ing method should be used to better reflect the true financial position of the company.

ASPE Differences

LO7

• As mentioned in Chapter 3, private companies can either consolidate their subsidiaries or report their investments in subsidiaries under the cost method or the equity method or at fair value if the securities are traded in an active market. Under the cost method or the fair value method, the financial statements of a foreign subsidiary do not have to be translated. • The exchange rate at the end of the reporting period is called the current rate, not the closing rate. • The functional currency is not used to classify foreign operations. Instead, the foreign operation is classified as either integrated or self-sustaining using similar, but not exactly the same, factors to those used under IFRSs to determine the functional currency. • The translation gains and losses from translating self-sustaining foreign subsidiaries do not go through OCI but are reported as a separate component of shareholders’ equity because OCI does not exist under ASPE. • When the foreign operations are located in a highly inflationary environment, the temporal method is used regardless of whether the operation is integrated or self-sustaining. No adjustments are made for inflation prior to translation.

OCI does not exist under ASPE.


658


650

CHAPTER 11


U.S. GAAP Differences U.S. GAAP and IFRSs for foreign operations have many similarities. The only significant difference is summarized as follows: Under IFRSs, the financial statements of a foreign operation whose functional currency is highly inflationary are adjusted for inflation prior to being translated to the presentation currency. Under U.S. GAAP, no adjustments are made for inflation. Instead, the financial statements are translated as if the parent’s reporting currency were the functional currency.

summary Before the equity method or consolidation reporting can be used, the financial statements of foreign entities must be translated into the parent company’s presentation currency. If the entity is considered to be an integrated foreign operation, the temporal method of translation is used. This method produces results that are consistent with the normal measurement and valuation of assets and liabilities for domestic transactions and operations. Exchange gains or losses are included in net income. The current rate method is used when the foreign operation is self-sustaining. This method translates all assets and liabilities at the current rate to reflect that all assets and liabilities are exposed as part of the net investment in the foreign subsidiary. This results in some assets being reported in the presentation currency at values other than historical cost or current value. Exchange gains and losses from the translation are not reflected in net income but rather are shown in other comprehensive income, which ends up being reported on a cumulative basis as a separate component of shareholders’ equity. The consolidation of the translated financial statements of a self-sustaining subsidiary creates additional exchange gains and losses from the translation of the acquisition differential.

Significant Changes in GAAP in the Last Three Years No major changes have occurred in the translation and reporting of foreign operations.

Changes Expected in GAAP in the Next Three Years No major changes are expected for the translation and reporting of foreign operations.


Barros Corp. is located in Brazil. The company was incorporated on January 1, Year 1, and issued its no-par common shares for 3.0 million Brazilian reals (R). The Canadian parent acquired 90% of these shares on January 1, Year 4. The financial statements for Barros on December 31, Year 5, are shown below:


659


CHAPTER 11


STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION at December 31, Year 5 Year 5

651

Year 4

Property, plant, and equipment Accumulated depreciation Inventory s receivable Cash

R5,000,000 (2,500,000) 1,050,000 2,710,000 1,000,000 R7,260,000

R 5,000,000 (2,000,000) 1,155,000 2,550,000 500,000 R 7,205,000

Ordinary shares Retained earnings Bonds payable—due Jan. 3, Year 11 s payable

R3,000,000 1,660,000 2,500,000 100,000 R7,260,000

R 3,000,000 1,505,000 2,500,000 200,000 R 7,205,000

INCOME STATEMENT for the Year Ended December 31, Year 5 Sales Cost of sales Selling and istrative Miscellaneous expenses Income tax Profit

R35,000,000 28,150,000 2,440,000 2,000,000 1,045,000 33,635,000 R 1,365,000

STATEMENT OF RETAINED EARNINGS for the Year Ended December 31, Year 5 Balance, January 1 Profit Dividends Balance, December 31

R 1,505,000 1,365,000 2,870,000 1,210,000 R 1,660,000

Additional Information • On January 1, Year 1, Barros issued bonds at par for R2.5 million. • Barros acquired the plant assets on January 1, Year 1, for R5.0 million. The plant assets are being depreciated on a straight-line basis over a 10-year life. • Barros uses the FIFO basis to value inventory. The December 31, Year 4, inventory was acquired on October 1, Year 4. The inventory on hand on December 31, Year 5, was acquired on December 15, Year 5. • Selling and istrative expense includes depreciation expense of R500,000. • Barros declared and paid dividends on December 31, Year 5. • Under the temporal method, Barros’s December 31, Year 4, retained earnings were translated as $778,607. Under the current rate method, Barros’s December 31, Year 4, retained earnings were translated as $684,091 and accumulated other comprehensive income were translated as $174,547.


660


652

CHAPTER 11


• Exchange rate information: Jan. 1, Year 1 Jan. 1, Year 4 Oct. 1, Year 4 Average, Year 4 Dec. 31, Year 4 Dec. 15, Year 5 Average, Year 5 Dec. 31, Year 5

CDN$1 5 R2.50 CDN$1 5 R2.00 CDN$1 5 R1.94 CDN$1 5 R1.95 CDN$1 5 R1.91 CDN$1 5 R1.80 CDN$1 5 R1.86 CDN$1 5 R1.82

Required: (a) Translate Barros’s Year 5 financial statements into dollars, assuming that Barros’s functional currency is the Canadian dollar. (b) Assume that Barros’s functional currency is the Brazilian real: (i) Translate the Year 5 financial statements. (ii) Prepare the Year 5 equity method journal entries that would be made by the Canadian parent.

SOLUTION

TO

SELF-S TUDY P ROBLEM 1 (a) Canadian dollar is functional currency Reals

Rate

Dollars

1,155,000 28,045,000 29,200,000 1,050,000 28,150,000

/ 1.94 / 1.86

595,361 15,077,956 15,673,317 583,333 15,089,984

500,000 1,940,000 2,440,000

/ 2.00 / 1.86

250,000 1,043,011 1,293,011

350,000

/ 1.91

183,246

35,000,000 (28,045,000) (1,940,000)** (2,000,000) (1,045,000) (1,210,000) 760,000

/ 1.86 / 1.86 / 1.86 / 1.86 / 1.86 / 1.82

1,110,000

/ 1.82

18,817,204 (15,077,956) (1,043,011) (1,075,269) (561,828) (664,835) 394,305 577,551 609,890 32,339

Year 5 Inventory Jan. 1 Purchases

Inventory Dec. 31 Cost of sales Depreciation expense Other selling and istrative Total selling and istrative Net monetary position Dec. 31, Year 4* Changes Year 5 Sales Purchases Selling and istrative Miscellaneous expenses Income tax Dividends Calculated Dec. 31, Year 5 Actual Dec. 31, Year 5*** Exchange gain Year 5 * 2,550 1 500 2 2,500 2 200 5 350 ** Excluding R500,000 of depreciation expense *** 2,710 1 1,000 2 2,500 2 100 5 1,110

/ 1.80


661


CHAPTER 11


653

Translation of Year 5 income statement Sales Cost of sales Selling and istrative Miscellaneous expenses Income tax Net income before exchange gain Exchange gain Profit

35,000,000 28,150,000 2,440,000 2,000,000 1,045,000 33,635,000 1,365,000

/ 1.86 Calc. Calc. / 1.86 / 1.86

Calc. 1,365,000

18,817,204 15,089,984 1,293,011 1,075,269 561,828 18,020,092 797,112 32,339 829,451

Translation of Year 5 retained earnings Balance Jan. 1 Profit

1,505,000 1,365,000 2,870,000 1,210,000 1,660,000

Given Above

Property, plant, and equipment Accumulated depreciation Inventory s receivable Cash

5,000,000 (2,500,000) 1,050,000 2,710,000 1,000,000 7,260,000

/ 2.00 / 2.00 / 1.80 / 1.82 / 1.82

2,500,000 (1,250,000) 583,333 1,489,011 549,451 3,871,795


3,000,000 1,660,000 2,500,000 100,000 7,260,000

/ 2.00 Above / 1.82 / 1.82

1,500,000 943,223 1,373,627 54,945 3,871,795

4,505,000 1,365,000 5,870,000 1,210,000

/ 1.91 / 1.86

4,660,000

/ 1.82

2,358,639 733,871 3,092,510 664,835 2,427,675 2,560,440

Dividends Balance Dec. 31

/ 1.82

778,607 829,451 1,608,058 664,835 943,223

Translation of Year 5 balance sheet

(b) (i) Brazilian real is functional currency Year 5 Net assets Jan. 1, Year 5 Profit—Year 5 Dividends Calculated Dec. 31, Year 5 Actual net assets Dec. 31, Year 5 Exchange gain Year 5 (to be reported in other comprehensive income)

/ 1.82

132,765

Cumulative translation adjustment Balance Dec. 31, Year 4 Exchange gain—Year 5 Balance Dec. 31, Year 5

174,547 132,765 307,312

Translation of Year 5 income statement Sales Cost of sales Selling and istrative Miscellaneous expenses Income tax

35,000,000 28,150,000 2,440,000 2,000,000 1,045,000

/ 1.86 / 1.86 / 1.86 / 1.86 / 1.86

18,817,204 15,134,408 1,311,828 1,075,269 561,828

(continued)


662


654

CHAPTER 11


Profit Other comprehensive income—unrealized exchange gains Comprehensive income

33,635,000 1,365,000

18,083,333 733,871 132,765 866,636

Translation of Year 5 retained earnings Balance Jan. 1 Profit

1,505,000 1,365,000

Given / 1.86

684,091 733,871

Dividends

2,870,000 1,210,000

/ 1.82

1,417,962 664,835

Balance Dec. 31

1,660,000

753,127

Translation of Year 5 balance sheet Property, plant, and equipment Accumulated depreciation Inventory s receivable Cash

5,000,000 (2,500,000) 1,050,000 2,710,000 1,000,000

/ 1.82 / 1.82 / 1.82 / 1.82 / 1.82

7,260,000 Ordinary shares Retained earnings Accumulated translation adjustment Bonds payable s payable

2,747,252 (1,373,626) 576,923 1,489,011 549,451 3,989,011

3,000,000 1,660,000

/ 2.00

2,500,000 100,000

/ 1.82 / 1.82

7,260,000

1,500,000 753,127 307,312 1,373,627 54,945 3,989,011

(ii) Equity method journal entries of Canadian parent—Year 5 Investment in Barros Corp. Investment income 90% of Year 5 translated net income (90% 3 733,871)

660,484

Cash Investment in Barros Corp. 90% of Year 5 dividends (90% 3 664,835)

598,352

Investment in Barros Corp. Other comprehensive income 90% of Year 5 exchange gain (90% 3 132,765)

119,489

660,484

598,352

119,489


On January 1, Year 4, Parento Ltd. purchased 90% of the shares of Barros Limited for 5.4 million Brazilian reals (R). The exchange rate at that time was CDN$1 5 R2. Financial statements of Parento are presented below. Financial statements of Barros were presented and translated in Self-Study Problem 1.


663


CHAPTER 11


655

PARENTO LTD STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION at December 31, Year 5 Property, plant, and equipment Accumulated depreciation Investment in Barros—at cost Inventory s receivable Cash

$ 8,000,000 (3,000,000) 2,700,000 1,400,000 1,960,000 800,000 $11,860,000


$ 5,000,000 1,500,000 2,000,000 3,360,000 $11,860,000

STATEMENT OF PROFIT AND RETAINED EARNINGS for the Year Ended December 31, Year 5 Sales Dividend income

$15,000,000 598,352 15,598,352 11,509,352 2,100,000

Cost of sales Selling and istrative expense (including depreciation and impairment losses) Miscellaneous expense Income taxes

889,000 440,000 14,938,352 660,000 1,240,000 (400,000) $ 1,500,000

Profit Retained earnings, Jan. 1 Dividends paid Retained earnings, Dec. 31

Additional Information • On January 1, Year 4, Barros’s shareholders’ equity consisted of common shares of R3,000,000 and retained earnings of R1,350,000. The fair values of all identifiable net assets were equal to carrying amounts except for the following: Inventory Patent

Carrying amount

Fair value

R850,000 –0–

R970,000 400,000

• The patent of Barros had a remaining legal life of eight years on January 1, Year 4. Any goodwill was tested annually for impairment. There was a goodwill impairment loss of R100,000 in Year 5 and no impairment loss in Year 4. • On January 1, Year 5, the inventories of Parento contained items purchased from Barros on October 1, Year 4, on which Barros had made a profit of R90,000. During Year 5, Barros sold goods to Parento for R920,000, of which R210,000 remained unpaid at the end of the year. Barros made a profit of R330,000 on goods remaining in Parento’s inventory at December 31, Year 5. These goods had been purchased from Barros on December 15, Year 2.


664


656

CHAPTER 11


• Assume a corporate tax rate of 40%. Ignore income taxes on the acquisition differential. • Parento’s functional currency and presentation currency are the Canadian dollar. • Exchange rates were provided in Self-Study Problem 1

Required: (a) Prepare Parento’s consolidated statement of financial position and consolidated statement of profit for Year 5, assuming that Barros’ functional currency is the Canadian dollar. Hint: Use Barros’ translated financial statements from Part (a) of Self-Study Problem 1. (b) Prepare Parento’s consolidated statement of financial position and consolidated statement of comprehensive income for Year 5, assuming that Barros’s functional currency is the Brazilian real. Hint: Use Barros’ translated financial statements from Part (b) of Self-Study Problem 1.

SOLUTION

TO

SELF-S TUDY P ROBLEM 2 Calculation, allocation, and amortization of acquisition differential Cost of 90% investment in Barros

R5,400,000

Implied value of 100% investment in Barros (5,400,000 / 0.9) Carrying amounts of Barros’s net assets: Ordinary shares Retained earnings Total shareholders’ equity Acquisition differential, Jan. 1, Year 4 Allocation: Inventory Patent Balance—Goodwill

R6,000,000 R3,000,000 1,350,000 4,350,000 1,650,000 FV – BV R 120,000 400,000

R 600,000

NCI at date of acquisition (10% 3 6,000,000)

Inventory Patent Goodwill

520,000 R1,130,000

Balance Jan. 1/4

Amortization Year 4

Balance Year 4

Amortization Year 5

Balance Dec. 31/5

R 120,000 400,000 1,130,000 R1,650,000

R120,000 50,000 – R170,000

– R 350,000 1,130,000 R1,480,000

– R 50,000 100,000 R150,000

– R 300,000 1,030,000 R1,330,000

Intercompany profits and transactions Reals Opening inventory—Barros selling Closing inventory—Barros selling Sales and purchases Receivables and payables Dividend income (1,210,000 3 90%) Deferred income taxes (Dec. 31, Year 5) Closing inventory (b)

90,000 330,000 920,000 210,000 1,089,000

Rate CDN$ 1.94 1.80 1.86 1.82 1.82

Tax

After tax

46,392 18,557 27,835 183,333 73,333 110,000 494,624 115,385 598,352 73,333

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f)


665


CHAPTER 11


657

(a) Temporal method: Use rate of CDN$1 5 R2.00 for all items in acquisition differential because all items are measured at historical cost.


Balance Jan. 1/4

Amortization Year 4

Balance Year 4

60,000 200,000 565,000 825,000

60,000 25,000 – 85,000

– 175,000 565,000 740,000

Amortization Year 5 – 25,000 50,000 75,000

Balance Dec. 31/5 – 150,000 515,000 665,000

(g) (h) (i) (j)

Calculation of consolidated profit—Year 5 Profit of Parento Less: Dividends from Barros (e) Adjusted profit Profit of Barros Add: Opening inventory profit (a) Less: Closing inventory profit (b) Less: Amortization of acquisition differential (j) Profit

660,000 598,352 61,648 (k) 829,451 27,835 (110,000) (75,000)

Attributable to Shareholders of Parento (61,648 1 90% 3 [l] 672,286) NCI (10% 3 [l] 672,286)

672,286 (l) 733,934 666,705 (m) 67,229 (n) 733,934

Calculation of consolidated retained earnings—End of Year 5 Parento’s retained earnings, end of Year 5 Barros’ retained earnings, end of Year 5 Barros’ retained earnings, date of acquisition (1,350,000 / 2.00) Change since acquisition Closing inventory profit (b) Amortization of acquisition differential (j) (85,000 1 75,000) Adjusted change since acquisition Parento’s share @ 90% Consolidated retained earnings, end of Year 5

1,500,000 943,223 675,000 268,223 (110,000) (160,000) (1,777)

(o) (1,599) 1,498,401 (p)

Calculation of non-controlling interests—End of Year 5 NCI, date of acquisition (R600,000 / 2.00) Change in Barros’ retained earnings since acquisition (o) NCI’s share @10%

300,000 (1,777) (178) 299,822 (q)

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION—at December 31, Year 5 (Temporal Method) Property, plant, and equipment (8,000,000 1 2,500,000) Accumulated depreciation (3,000,000 1 1,250,000) Patents (0 1 0 1 [h] 150,000) Goodwill (0 1 0 1 [i] 515,000) Deferred income tax (0 1 0 1 [f] 73,333) Inventories (1,400,000 1 583,333 2 [b] 183,333) s receivable (1,960,000 1 1,489,011 2 [d] 115,385) Cash (800,000 1 549,451)

10,500,000 (4,250,000) 150,000 515,000 73,333 1,800,000 3,333,626 1,349,451 $13,471,410

(continued)


666


658

CHAPTER 11


Ordinary shares Retained earnings (p) Non-controlling interests (q) Bonds payable (2,000,000 1 1,373,627) s payable (3,360,000 1 54,945 2 [d] 115,385)

$ 5,000,000 1,498,401 299,822 3,373,627 3,299,560 $13,471,410

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF PROFIT for the Year Ended December 31, Year 5 (Temporal Method) Sales (15,000,000 1 18,817,204 2 [c] 494,624) Dividend income (598,352 2 [e] 598,352)

$33,322,580 0 33,322,580

Cost of sales (11,509,352 1 15,089,984 2 [c] 494,624 1 [b] 183,333 2 [a] 46,392) Selling & istrative expense (2,100,000 1 1,293,011 1 [h] 25,000 1 [i] 50,000) Miscellaneous expense (889,000 1 1,075,269) Exchange gain (0 1 32,339) Income taxes (440,000 1 561,828 2 [b] 73,333 1 [a] 18,557)

26,241,653 3,468,011 1,964,269 (32,339) 947,052 32,588,646 $ 733,934

Profit Attributable to Shareholders of Parento (m) NCI (n)

$

666,705 67,229

(b) Current rate method Translate to Canadian dollars. Use average rate for amortization. Then, adjust to amount using closing rate at end of year.


Balance Jan. 1/4

Amort Year 4

Adjust Year 4

60,0001 200,0004 565,00010 825,000

61,5382 25,6415 – 87,179

1,5383 8,8873 26,6233 37,048

Balance Dec. 31/4

Amort Year 5

Adjust Year 5

– – – 183,2466 26,8827 8,4718 591,62311 53,76312 28,0748 774,869 80,645 36,545

Balance Dec. 31/5 (ba) 164,8359 (bb) 565,93413 (bc) (bd) 730,769

Notes: 1. 120,000 / 2.00 2. 120,000 / 1.95 3. Exchange adjustment to get to desired amount at end of Year 4 as per next column 4. 400,000 / 2.00 5. 50,000 / 1.95 6. 350,000 / 1.91 7. 50,000 / 1.86 8. Exchange adjustment to get to desired amount at end of Year 5 as per next column 9. 300,000 / 1.82 10. 1,130,000 / 2.00 11. 1,130,000 / 1.91 12. 100,000 / 1.86 13. 1,030,000 / 1.82


667


CHAPTER 11


659

Calculation of consolidated profit—Year 5 Profit of Parento Less: Dividends from Barros (e) Adjusted profit Profit of Barros Add: Opening inventory profit (a) Less: Closing inventory profit (b) Less: Amortization of acquisition differential (bd) Profit

660,000 598,352 61,648 733,871 27,835 (110,000) (80,645)

Attributable to Shareholders of Parento (61,648 1 90% 3 [bf] 571,061) NCI (10% 3 [bf] 571,061)

(be)

571,061 632,709

(bf)

575,603 57,106 632,709

(bg) (bh)

Calculation of consolidated retained earnings—End of Year 5 Parento’s retained earnings, end of Year 5 Barros’ retained earnings, end of Year 5 Barros’ retained earnings, date of acquisition (1,350,000/2.00) Change since acquisition Closing inventory profit (b) Amortization of acquisition differential (bd)

1,500,000 753,127 675,000 78,127 (110,000) (167,824) (199,697)

Parento’s share @ 90% Consolidated retained earnings, end of Year 5

(bi)

(179,727) 1,320,273

(bj)

Calculation of accumulated translation adjustment—End of Year 5 On Barros’ separate-entity statement of financial position Adjustments on consolidation ([bd] 37,048 1 [bd] 36,545)

307,312 73,593 380,905

Attributable to Shareholders of Parento (90%) NCI (10%)

342,814 38,091 380,905

(bk)

Calculation of non-controlling interests—End of Year 5 NCI, date of acquisition (R600,000/2.00) Change in Barros’ retained earnings since acquisition (bi) NCI’s share @10% Share of accumulated translation adjustment (bl)

300,000 (199,697) (19,970) 38,091 318,121 (bm)

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION—at December 31, Year 5 (current rate method) Property, plant, and equipment (8,000,000 1 2,747,252) Accumulated depreciation (3,000,000 1 1,373,626) Patents (0 1 0 1 [bb] 164,835) Goodwill (0 1 0 1 [bc] 565,934) Deferred income tax (0 1 0 1 [f] 73,333) Inventories (1,400,000 1 576,923 2 [b] 183,333) s receivable (1,960,000 1 1,489,011 2 [d] 115,385) Cash (800,000 1 549,451)

10,747,252 (4,373,626) 164,835 565,934 73,333 1,793,590 3,333,626 1,349,451 $13,654,395

(continued)


668


660

CHAPTER 11


Ordinary shares Retained earnings (bj) Accumulated translation adjustment (bk) Non-controlling interests (bm) Bonds payable (2,000,000 1 1,373,627) s payable (3,360,000 1 54,945 2 [d] 115,385)

$ 5,000,000 1,320,273 342,814 318,121 3,373,627 3,299,560 $13,654,395

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME for the Year Ended December 31, Year 5 Sales (15,000,000 1 18,817,204 2 [c] 494,624) Dividend income (598,352 2 [e] 598,352) Cost of sales (11,509,352 1 15,134,408 2 [c] 494,624 1 [b] 183,333 2 [a] 46,392) Selling & istrative expense (2,100,000 1 1,311,828 1 [bb] 26,882 1 [bc] 53,763) Miscellaneous expense (889,000 1 1,075,269) Income taxes (440,000 1 561,828 2 [b] 73,333 1 [a] 18,557) Profit Other comprehensive income Exchange adjustments (0 1 132,765 1 [bd] 36,545) Comprehensive income Profit attributable to Shareholders of Parento (bg) NCI (bh)

$33,322,580 0 33,322,580 26,286,077 3,492,473 1,964,269 947,052 32,689,871 632,709

$ $ $

Comprehensive income attributable to Shareholders of Parento ([bg] 575,603 1 90% 3 [bo] 169,310) NCI ([bh] 57,106 1 10% 3 [bo] 169,310)

$ $

169,310 (bo) 802,019 575,603 57,106 632,709 727,982 74,037 802,019

REVIEW QUESTIONS LO1 LO1 LO1 LO3

LO2 LO2

1. The temporal and current rate methods each produce different amounts for translation gains and losses due to the items at risk. Explain. 2. What are the three major issues related to the translation of foreign currency financial statements? 3. Why might a company want to hedge its balance sheet exposure? What is the paradox associated with hedging balance sheet exposure? 4. How are gains and losses on financial instruments used to hedge the net investment in a self-sustaining foreign operation reported in the consolidated financial statements? 5. What is the major objective to be achieved in the translation of foreigncurrency–denominated financial statements? 6. What should happen if a foreign subsidiary’s financial statements have been prepared using ing principles different from those used in Canada?


CHAPTER 11


669

661

LO2

7. What is the difference between a self-sustaining and an integrated foreign operation? What method of translation should be used for each?

LO3

8. What translation method should be used for a self-sustaining subsidiary that operates in a highly inflationary environment? Why?

LO2

9. How are translation exchange gains and losses reflected in financial statements if the foreign operation’s functional currency is the Canadian dollar? Would the treatment be different if the foreign operation’s functional currency were not the Canadian dollar? Explain.

LO3, 4

10. Does the temporal method use the same unit of measure as the current rate method? Explain.

LO5

11. The amount of the accumulated foreign exchange adjustments appearing in the translated financial statements of a subsidiary could be different from the amount appearing in the consolidated financial statements. Explain how.

LO5

12. The application of the lower of cost and net realizable value requirement to the translated financial statements requires different treatment with regard to the two classifications of foreign operations described in IAS 21. Explain fully.

LO3, 4

13. “If the translation of an integrated foreign operation produced a gain, the translation of the same company could produce a loss if the operation were instead considered to be self-sustaining.” Do you agree with this statement? Explain.

LO1

14. Explain how the temporal method produces results that are consistent with the normal measurement and valuation of assets and liabilities for domestic transactions and operations.

LO5

15. When translating the financial statements of the subsidiary at the date of acquisition by the parent, the exchange rate on the date of acquisition is used to translate plant assets rather than the exchange rate on the date when the subsidiary acquired the plant assets. Explain the rationale for this practice.

LO3, 4

16. If the sales of a foreign subsidiary all occurred on one day during the year, would the sales be translated at the average rate for the year or the rate on the date of the sales? Explain.

Case 11-1

The Rider Corporation operates throughout Canada buying and selling widgets. In hopes of expanding into more profitable markets, the company recently decided to open a small subsidiary in California. On October 1, Year 2, Rider invested CDN$928,000 in Riderville USA Ltd. Its investment was immediately converted into US$940,000. One-half of this money was used to purchase land to be held for the possible construction of a plant, and one-half was invested in held-for-trading equity securities. Nothing further happened at Riderville throughout the remainder of Year 2. However, the U.S. dollar weakened relative to the Canadian dollar and the exchange rate at December 31, Year 2, was US$1 5 CDN$0.95. Fortunately, the value of the land purchased by Riderville increased to US$500,000 and the securities were worth US$490,000 at the end of the year. The ant for Rider realized that the investments of the U.S. subsidiary had increased in value but did not plan to report this unrealized gain in the

C ASES LO1, 3, 4


670


662

CHAPTER 11


consolidated financial statements. However, the CEO wants to report the true economic value of these investments.

Required: (a) What is the true economic value of the assets owned by Riderville USA at the end of Year 2? (b) Can Rider report the economic value of these assets in the consolidated balance sheet under IFRSs? If not, how should Rider report each of these assets on its consolidated balance sheet and how should the related gains be reported? Assume that the securities are classified as fair value through profit or loss.

Case 11-2 LO4

Summarized below are the balances in the accumulated unrealized exchange s in the consolidated balance sheets of four companies at the end of two successive years. Each company reported in footnote disclosures that its foreign subsidiaries were self-sustaining and that the financial statements of the subsidiaries had been translated into Canadian dollars using the current rate method. Assume that the balance sheets of each of the companies’ foreign subsidiaries have not changed significantly during Year 6. Accumulated unrealized exchange gains (losses) ($millions) A Company B Company C Company D Company

Year 6

Year 5

201 52 (170) (180)

30 (75) (190) (164)

Required: For each company, give a logical explanation for the change that has occurred in the accumulated unrealized exchange s during the year. For each company, indicate whether the Canadian dollar is stronger or weaker in Year 6, compared with Year 5.

Case 11-3 LO2, 4

Nova Mine Engineering is a junior Canadian company with a variety of operating subsidiaries and other undertakings that provide mine engineering and management services in Canada and in several less-developed countries. One of these subsidiaries is active in Zimbabwe, which is rich in mineral resources and has an active mining industry. This company, Zimbabwe Platinum Management (ZPM), is under review prior to year-end translation and consolidation. The staff of ZPM consists primarily of junior and intermediate Nova staff who have been seconded to the operation on one- to three-year . Between the companies there is information flow but no product movement. Capital investment in Zimbabwe is restricted to movable equipment and working capital with a value of about CDN$3,000,000. Management of Nova has long been concerned about its inability to hedge against fluctuations in the Zimbabwean dollar. All payments to ZPM from the state Mineral Marketing Corporation have recently been made in this currency,


CHAPTER 11


671

663

rather than in U.S. dollars as specified in earlier contracts. It is this inability to hedge that has increased Nova’s concern about the long-run fit of ZPM within the portfolio of Nova companies, as well as the current financial statement presentation. The currency has declined in value by 65% during the year. Other concerns include Zimbabwe’s persistent high inflation, recently about 35%, which is expected to increase even further. Political uncertainty is also a concern, as a result of recent nationalizations in the agricultural sector and growing unrest among the poor.

Required: In a briefing note, advise senior management of Nova how the investment in the subsidiary ZPM should be measured and reported, and what disclosures should be made with respect to this investment in the annual report of the parent company. (case prepared by Peter Secord, St. Mary’s University)

Case 11-4 LO2, 3, 4

Vulcan Manufacturing Limited (VML) is a Canadian-based multinational plastics firm, with subsidiaries in several foreign countries and worldwide consolidated total assets of $500 million. VML’s shares are listed on a Canadian stock exchange. VML is attracted to developing countries by their growing demand for its products. In recognition of trade barriers designed to encourage domestic production in those countries, and in order to service local demand, VML incorporated a foreign subsidiary in a South American country on September 1, Year 4. The subsidiary, South American Plastics Inc. (SAPI), manufactures patented sheet plastic and sells virtually all of its output locally. Also, almost all labour and raw materials are provided locally. SAPI finances its day-to-day activities from its own operations and local borrowing. During Year 4 and Year 5, the South American country suffered an inflation rate of more than 100%, accompanied by substantial devaluation of the local currency and a drastic increase in interest rates. The government is expected to impose wage and price controls in Year 6. The inflation rate is expected to stabilize at more moderate levels sometime in Year 6 or Year 7. The CFO of VML has recently received SAPI’s draft balance sheet as at August 31, Year 5 (Exhibit I), together with some comments prepared by SAPI’s controller (Exhibit II). He is somewhat surprised by the return on investment of nearly 12%. This figure is well above the target rate agreed upon for bonus purposes, which was set at 3% in recognition of start-up costs associated with the first year of operations. The apparently favourable performance will result in large bonuses for SAPI’s management. Increases in SAPI’s domestic selling price have kept pace with the general rate of inflation and increases in input prices and borrowing costs in the South American country. The CFO is satisfied that the inflation and devaluation the country has experienced has not seriously affected SAPI’s cash flows from operations. In the annual report to Canadian shareholders for the year ended August 31, Year 5, the CFO wants to communicate to shareholders the economic impact that inflation and devaluation in the South American country have had on VML’s investment in SAPI. He is concerned that gains or losses arising from translation of the statements in accordance with IAS 21 will mislead shareholders.


672


664

CHAPTER 11


EXHIBIT I SOUTH AMERICAN PLASTICS INC. Extracts from Draft Balance Sheet as at August 31, Year 5 (in Thousands) Assets Cash Held-to-maturity investments s receivable Inventory (at cost) Prepaid expenses Plant assets Less accumulated depreciation

Liabilities and Shareholders’ Equity Current monetary liabilities Long-term debt Common shares Retained earnings

FC* 10,020 3,120 93,000 67,200 8,040 181,380 143,111 14,311 128,800 FC 310,180 FC 65,140 157,200 222,340 51,000 36,840 87,840 FC 310,180

*An FC is a unit of the currency used in the South American country in which SAPI is located.

EXHIBIT II SOUTH AMERICAN PLASTICS INC. Controller’s Comments on Financial Statements 1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Opening Balances: SAPI’s balance sheet on September 1, Year 4, consisted of cash of FC208,200,000; long-term debt of FC157,200,000; and common shares of FC51,000,000. Held-to-maturity Investments: The held-to-maturity investments were purchased when 1FC 5 $0.31. The aggregate market value for the investments at August 31, Year 5, was FC3,000,000 due to an increase in interest rates in the market. Inventories: Inventories were purchased when 1FC 5 $0.30. VML values inventory at the lower of cost and net realizable value. The aggregate net realizable value of the inventory was FC100,000,000 at August 31, Year 5. Prepaid Expenses: The amounts, representing prepaid rent and property taxes, were paid when 1FC 5 $0.26. Plant Assets: Plant assets were purchased shortly after the date of SAPI’s formation at a time when 1FC 5 $0.40. The recoverable amount of the fixed assets (in their current condition) was FC200,000,000 at August 31, Year 5. Current Liabilities: All current liabilities were incurred at a time when 1FC 5 $0.25.

(continued)


CHAPTER 11

EXHIBIT II 7.

8. 9.


673

665

(continued )

Long-Term Debt: The debt represents a floating interest rate loan, which will be repaid in foreign currency units on August 31, Year 8. Retained Earnings: No dividends were paid during the Year 5 fiscal year. Exchange Rates: Sep. 1, Year 4 Aug. 31, Year 5 Average rate for year

1 FCU 5 $0.40 1 FCU 5 $0.20 1 FCU 5 $0.30

The CFO believes that the exchange gains and losses will obscure the true impact of foreign inflation and devaluation on SAPI’s economic value in Canadian-dollar . He has called the audit partner and you, the Senior, into his office. The following conversation ensues: CFO: We have to issue our financial statements soon, and we have to apply IAS 21 to our South American subsidiary. I must confess that I don’t know IAS 21 as well as you two do. My staff tells me that we must use a special method this year, due to the local hyper-inflation, although I confess that I don’t see why. Apparently we will have a choice between the temporal method and the current rate method once the inflation rate stabilizes, which I expect to happen in Year 6 or Year 7. I am very reluctant to use a special method on this year’s statements. It forces me to include fictitious gains and losses in our consolidated income statement. Partner: Your staff is correct in stating that IAS 21 requires the use of a special method for the year just ended. However, shareholders should not be misled by exchange gains or losses in comprehensive income provided that they are fully disclosed as such. CFO: I guess I just do not understand IAS 21. For example, how might the adoption of the current rate method in Year 6 or Year 7 improve matters? It seems to me that an overall exchange loss will arise if the rate keeps on going down. What does the loss mean? As long as our subsidiary’s cash flows keep pace with local inflation, it will be able to maintain its expected rate of profitability and therefore its ability to pay dividends to us. Yet shareholders will see an exchange loss! Partner: I will have Senior prepare a report that explains to you how the exchange gains or losses under either translation method tie in with the notion of risk underlying IAS 21. We will also explain how this notion alleviates your concern about communicating the true economic risk to shareholders. Senior will recommend ways to tell the whole story to shareholders. CFO: Sounds great. I would also like Senior to provide advice on any other important issues related to SAPI. For starters, I have some concerns about the way our bonus plan for SAPI’s management is working. One possibility I am considering is to evaluate SAPI’s performance in Canadian-dollar .

Required: Prepare the report to the CFO.

(CICA adapted)


674


666

CHAPTER 11

Case 11-5 LO5


RAD Communications Ltd. (RAD), a Canadian public company, recently purchased the shares of TOP Systems Inc. (TOP), a Canadian-controlled private corporation. Both companies are in the communications industry and own television, radio, and magazine and newspaper businesses. Both companies have subsidiaries operating worldwide. After it purchased TOP, RAD decided to divest itself of some of the TOP subsidiaries (the Group). BritCo is a private British company that is in the process of acquiring the shares of the Group from TOP. The purchase price for the Group being sold has been determined, in general , to be a fixed price adjusted for the working capital balance of the Group at RAD’s year-end date of March 31, Year 9. March 31, Year 9, was also the closing date of the purchase-and-sale transaction. The parties have 90 days after the closing date of the transaction to agree on the calculation of the working capital balance. Janis Marczynski, the chief negotiator for BritCo, has approached Paul Bouchard, a partner at Bouchard and Beatrix, Chartered ants (B&B), to provide her with advice on the purchase transaction. Specifically, Marczynski wants B&B to review the agreement and relevant facts to determine whether RAD has appropriately determined the amount of the closing working capital. Furthermore, if any matters come to B&B’s attention that suggest the financial statements of the Group may have misled BritCo, then B&B should bring these items to her attention. Marczynski has stated that BritCo now thinks that the purchase price for the Group may be too high and is looking for ways to reduce the price. Thus, she wants to be made aware of any possible points that she can use in her final negotiations. BritCo has provided B&B with a copy of the purchase-and-sale agreement, excerpts of which are presented in Exhibit III.

EXHIBIT III TOP SYSTEMS INC. (VENDOR) AND BRITCO (PURCHASER) EXCERPTS FROM PURCHASE-AND-SALE AGREEMENT 5.1. The share purchase price shall be adjusted by an amount equal to the “consolidated working capital.” This amount is hereafter referred to as the “price adjustment,” as defined in clause 5.2. 5.2. The price adjustment shall be determined as follows: a. Combine the working capital of the Group (aggregated current assets of the Group less aggregated current liabilities of the Group), less the non-controlling interest as at March 31, Year 9, adjusted for any sums payable to or receivable from other of the Group. b. Include s for each of the companies of the Group and, in the case of those companies with subsidiaries, on a consolidated basis, in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (“IFRSs”). 5.3. The vendor shall prepare a draft consolidated working capital statement as soon as practicable after the agreement date. 5.4. For the purpose of review, the vendor agrees to instruct JR to permit the purchaser to examine all final working papers, schedules, and other documents used or prepared by JR. 5.5. If the purchaser objects to the calculation of the price adjustment, the purchaser shall give notice in writing to the vendor. The purchaser shall set out in reasonable detail the nature of any such objections and the amount by which the purchase price will be reduced if the purchaser’s objections are accepted. The vendor shall have the right to recover from the purchaser any costs associated with reviewing and analyzing objections of the purchaser that are of a frivolous and unable nature.


675


CHAPTER 11

667


It is now May 15, Year 9, and BritCo has received the unaudited consolidated working capital statement of the Group prepared by RAD (Exhibit IV). Marczynski is concerned about the dramatic increase in the working capital compared with that reflected in previous financial statements. RAD has arranged for Jeanette Riley, Chartered ant (JR), the auditor of TOP’s financial statements for the year in question, to supply the necessary working papers to assist B&B in its review. JR will provide B&B with her working papers once they have completed their audit for Year 9. RAD has already provided B&B with excerpts of JR’s working papers for Year 8, reproduced in Exhibit V, copies of which TOP had obtained informally from the audit staff during the course of the audit.

EXHIBIT IV CONSOLIDATED WORKING CAPITAL STATEMENT OF THE GROUP (NOTE 1) at March 31, Year 9 (in Millions of Canadian Dollars) Current assets Cash Receivables Inventory Prepaids Other

Current liabilities Bank indebtedness s payable Deferred revenue Other Consolidated working capital (price adjustment)

$

215 19,763 4,225 7,655 2,917 34,775

7,000 1,191 6,332 1,345 15,868 $18,907

Note 1: Comprises the s of the companies being sold; i.e., Co., Co., U.K.Co., SwitzerlandCo., and a Canadian subsidiary, CanadaCo.

EXHIBIT V EXCERPTS FROM THE WORKING PAPERS OF JR RELATING TO THE AUDIT OF TOP SYSTEMS INC. AND ITS SUBSIDIARIES FOR THE YEAR 8 FISCAL PERIOD 1. 2.

3.

Only selected subsidiaries of TOP were audited. Those companies were audited on a limited basis only, owing to the consolidated materiality level. Included in the “Receivables” balance of Co. is an intercompany note receivable from a Canadian company that is not part of the Group. The note bears interest at the prime rate in Canada plus 3%. The rate charged on the note was generally about 4% below interest rates on French notes of similar and risks at the time that the note was issued. The Canadian company has recorded the note as a long-term obligation. “Other current assets” include an amount reflecting the refundable dividend tax on hand (RDTOH). The amount of the RDTOH was immaterial; thus, no audit work in this area was warranted.

(continued)


676


668

CHAPTER 11


EXHIBIT V 4.

5. 6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

(continued )

Included in the “Receivables” balance are certain income tax refunds that Co. will receive when dividends are paid to its shareholders. No accruals are made for foreign withholding taxes that may be payable when dividends are paid by Co. “Other current assets” include an amount for goodwill. This goodwill relates to the acquisition of a subsidiary by CanadaCo. “Deferred revenues” include payments made by rs for long-term contracts. Some of these contracts can be for up to five years. Some rs pay up-front g fees, which are taken into income when received. Some rs who sign up for long-term contracts may receive one additional year of free advertising. rs can elect to take this free year at the beginning or at the end of the contract term. “Prepaids” include costs for various broadcasting licences. The s include the initial costs of obtaining the licences, such as various regulatory fees, legal and ing fees, other consulting fees, etc., and various fees for limited-term licences, ranging from one- to ten-year periods. Certain printing presses of SwitzerlandCo. were leased instead of being purchased. The future lease payments were not disclosed in the consolidated financial statements. The lease was immaterial and thus did not warrant any further audit work. A Belgian company that is not being acquired effectively hedged certain current debts payable by CanadaCo. The financial statements did not record any gain or loss because of the fluctuations in the value of the Canadian dollar. Foreign exchange losses on transactions were included as part of “Deferred revenue,” while gains were taken into income in the current period.

You, a CA, work for B&B. Bouchard asks you to draft a memo addressing the concerns and requirements of Marczynski.


Case 11-6 LO4

(CICA adapted)

Mega Communications Inc. (MCI) is a Canadian-owned public company operating throughout North America. Its core business is communications media, including newspapers, radio, television and cable. The company’s year-end is December 31. You, a CA, have recently ed MCI’s corporate office as a finance director, reporting to the chief financial officer, Robert Allen. It is October Year 3. Mr. Allen has asked you to prepare a report that discusses the ing issues that might arise with the auditors during their visit in November. MCI’s growth in Year 3 was achieved through expansion into the United States by acquiring a controlling interest in a number of newspapers, television, and cable companies. Since the U.S. side of MCI’s operations is now significant, management has decided to change the reporting currency from the Canadian dollar to the U.S. dollar for MCI’s consolidated financial statements. MCI uses the Canadian dollar for its internal record keeping and to for its Canadian operations. All of MCI’s foreign subsidiaries, which are all wholly owned, use the local currency for internal record keeping and for reporting purposes. MCI’s shareholders’ equity at the beginning of the period was $220 million, including a separately disclosed cumulative foreign exchange gain of $45 million


CHAPTER 11


677

669

primarily relating to its U.S. subsidiaries. Management merged this balance with retained earnings because “the operations it relates to are no longer considered foreign for ing purposes, and as a result, no foreign currency exposure will arise.” With recent trends to international free trade, MCI decided to position itself for future expansion into the South American market. Therefore, in Year 3, MCI bought a company that owns a radio network in a country in South America, which has high inflation. MCI was willing to incur losses in the start-up, since it was confident that in the long run it would be profitable. The South American country has had a democratic government for the last two years. Its government’s objectives are to open the country’s borders to trade and lower its inflation rate. The government was rather reluctant to let a foreign company purchase such a powerful communication tool. In exchange for the right to buy the network, MCI agreed, among other conditions, not to promote any political party, to broadcast only pre-approved public messages, and to let the government examine its books at the government’s convenience. Management has recorded this investment on the books using the cost method. In Year 3, MCI acquired a conglomerate, Cyril’s Holdings (CH), which held substantial assets in the communications business. Over the past three months, MCI has sold off 80% of CH’s non-communications related businesses. In the current month, MCI sold CH’s hotel and recreational property business for $175 million, realizing a gain of $22 million ($14.5 million after tax). The assets related to the non-communications businesses were scattered throughout the U.S. and MCI lacked the industry expertise to value them accurately. Management therefore found it difficult to determine the net realizable value of each of these assets at the time CH was acquired. Newspaper readership has peaked leaving no room for expansion. In Year 2, to increase its share of the market, MCI bought all the assets of a competing newspaper for $10 million. In Year 3, MCI ceased publication of the competing newspaper and liquidated the assets for $4.5 million. In Year 3, MCI decided to rationalize its television operations. Many of CH’s acquisitions in the television business included stations in areas already being served by other stations operated by MCI. MCI systematically identified stations that are duplicating services and do not fit with MCI’s long-range objectives. These assets have been segregated on the balance sheet and classified as current. The company anticipates generating a gain on the disposal of the entire pool of assets, although losses are expected on some of the individual stations. Operating results are capitalized in the pool. Once a particular station is sold, the resulting gain or loss is reflected in income. Nine stations are in the pool at the present time. In Year 3, three were sold, resulting in gains of $6.5 million after tax. Losses are expected to occur on several of the remaining stations. Although serious negotiations with prospective buyers are not underway at present, the company hopes to have disposed of them in early Year 4. In order to facilitate the sale of these assets, MCI is considering taking back mortgages. In Year 3, MCI estimated the fair market value of its intangible assets at $250 million. Included, as intangibles, are newspaper and magazine circulation lists, cable subscriber lists, and broadcast licences. Some of these assets have been


678


670

CHAPTER 11


acquired through the purchase of existing businesses; others have been generated internally by operations that have been part of MCI for decades. Amounts paid for acquired intangibles are not difficult to determine; however, it has taken MCI staff some time to determine the costs of internally generated intangibles. In order to increase subscriptions for print and electronic media, MCI spends heavily on subscription drives by way of ments, cold calls, and free products. For the non-acquired intangibles, MCI staff has examined the ing records for the past 10 years and have identified expenditures totalling $35 million that were expensed in prior years. These costs relate to efforts to expand customer bases. In addition, independent appraisers have determined the fair market value of these internally generated intangibles to be in the range of $60 million to $80 million. In order to be conservative, management has decided to reflect these intangibles on the December 31, Year 3, balance sheet at $60 million. The market value of companies in the communications industry has been escalating in the past few years, indicating that the value of the underlying assets (largely intangibles) is increasing over time. MCI management would prefer not to amortize broadcasting licences, arguing that these licences do not lose any value and, in this industry, actually increase in value over time. One of the items included in the intangible category is MCI’s patented converter, which was an unplanned by-product of work being done on satellite communications devices a few years ago. MCI has sold $25 million of its s receivables to a medium-sized financial intermediary, PayLater Corp. The receivables are being re-sold to a numbered company whose common shares are owned by PayLater Corp. MCI receives one half of the consideration in cash and one half in subordinate non-voting, redeemable shares of the numbered company, bearing a dividend rate of 9%. The dividend payments and share redemption are based on the collectibility of the receivables. The purchase price is net of a 4% provision for doubtful s. MCI has recorded a loss of $1 million on this transaction. PayLater has an option to return the receivables to MCI at any time for 94% of their face value. The arrival of direct broadcast satellite that transmits multiple TV signals to digital boxes will revolutionize the television industry. The technology is expected to provide the choice of over 150 channels. In response to this new development, which is seen as a threat, the communication industry is developing its own interactive communication services at a cost of over $6 billion. This service will allow viewers to interact with banks, shops, and other viewers through the television. MCI hopes this will allow it to maintain its market share of viewers. MCI has invested in the installation of fibre optic cable, which can transmit far more, far faster than conventional cable. The cost of the cable itself is negligible. MCI will be using it for transmission between its stations in two major Canadian cities. MCI needed only six cables to link all its television and radio stations between the two cities, but decided that it might as well put in 36 cables, since it was doing the digging anyway. To date, MCI has sold six cables and charges a monthly fee to new owners to cover their share of all maintenance expenses. MCI is leasing 10 other cables for 15-year periods.



CHAPTER 11


679

671

P ROBLEMS Note: Some problems use direct exchange rate quotations, while others use indirect quotations. For direct quotations, the foreign currency is multiplied by the exchange rate to arrive at Canadian dollars; for indirect quotations, division is used.


On December 31, Year 1, Precision Manufacturing Inc. (PMI) of Edmonton purchased 100% of the outstanding ordinary shares of Sandora Corp. of Flint, Michigan. Sandora’s comparative statement of financial position and Year 2 income statement are as follows: STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION at December 31 Year 2

Year 1

Plant and equipment (net) Inventory s receivable Cash

US$ 6,600,000 5,700,000 6,100,000 780,000 US$19,180,000

US$ 7,300,000 6,300,000 4,700,000 900,000 US$19,200,000

Ordinary shares Retained earnings Bonds payable—due Dec. 31, Year 6 Current liabilities

US$ 5,000,000 7,480,000 4,800,000 1,900,000 US$19,180,000

US$ 5,000,000 7,000,000 4,800,000 2,400,000 US$19,200,000

INCOME STATEMENT for the Year Ended December 31, Year 2 US$30,000,000 23,400,000 600,000 700,000 3,800,000 28,500,000 US$ 1,500,000

Sales Cost of purchases Change in inventory Depreciation expense Other expenses Profit

Additional Information • Exchange rates Dec. 31, Year 1 Sep. 30, Year 2 Dec. 31, Year 2 Average for Year 2

US$1 5 CDN$1.10 US$1 5 CDN$1.07 US$1 5 CDN$1.05 US$1 5 CDN$1.08

• Sandora declared and paid dividends on September 30, Year 2. • The inventories on hand on December 31, Year 2, were purchased when the exchange rate was US$1 5 CDN$1.06.


680


672

CHAPTER 11


Required: (a) Assume that Sandora9s functional currency is the Canadian dollar: (i) Calculate the Year 2 exchange gain (loss) that would result from the translation of Sandora9s financial statements. (ii) Translate the Year 2 financial statements into Canadian dollars. (b) Assume that Sandora9s functional currency is the U.S. dollar: (i) Calculate the Year 2 exchange gain (loss) that would result from the translation of Sandora9s financial statements and would be reported in other comprehensive income. (ii) Translate the Year 2 financial statements into Canadian dollars. (c) Which functional currency would Sandora prefer to use if it wants to show the following: (i) The strongest solvency position for the company (ii) The best return on shareholders9 equity Briefly explain your answers.


On December 31, Year 1, Kelly Corporation of Toronto paid 13 million Libyan dinars (LD) for 100% of the outstanding common shares of Arkenu Company of Libya. On this date, the fair values of Arkenu9s identifiable assets and liabilities were equal to their carrying amounts. Arkenu9s comparative balance sheets and Year 2 income statement are as follows: BALANCE SHEET at December 31 Year 2

Year 1

Current monetary assets Inventory Plant and equipment (net)

LD10,780,000 1,800,000 6,600,000 LD19,180,000

LD 9,600,000 2,400,000 7,200,000 LD19,200,000

Current monetary liabilities Bonds payable, due Dec. 31, Year 6 Common shares Retained earnings

LD 1,900,000 4,800,000 5,000,000 7,480,000 LD19,180,000

LD 2,400,000 4,800,000 5,000,000 7,000,000 LD19,200,000

INCOME STATEMENT for the Year Ended December 31, Year 2 Sales Inventory, Jan. 1 Purchases Inventory, Dec. 31 Depreciation expense Other expenses Net income

LD16,000,000 2,400,000 10,840,000 (1,800,000) 600,000 2,360,000 14,400,000 LD 1,600,000


CHAPTER 11


681

673

Additional Information • Exchange rates Dec. 31, Year 1 Sep. 30, Year 2 Dec. 31, Year 2 Average for Year 2

LD1 5 $0.52 LD1 5 $0.62 LD1 5 $0.65 LD1 5 $0.58

• Arkenu Company declared and paid dividends on September 30, Year 2. • The inventories on hand on December 31, Year 2, were purchased when the exchange rate was LD1 5 $0.63.

Required: (a) Assume that Arkenu9s functional currency is the Canadian dollar: (i) Calculate the Year 2 exchange gain or loss that would result from the translation of Arkenu9s financial statements. (ii) Prepare translated financial statements for Year 2. (b) Assume that Arkenu9s functional currency is the Libyan dinar: (i) Calculate the Year 2 exchange gain or loss that would result from the translation of Arkenu9s financial statements. (ii) Prepare translated financial statements for Year 2. (iii) Calculate the amount of goodwill that would appear on the December 31, Year 2, consolidated balance sheet if there was an impairment loss of LD50,000 during the year. (iv) Calculate the amount, description, and location of the exchange gain or loss that would appear in Kelly9s Year 2 consolidated financial statements. (c) Which functional currency would Arkenu prefer to use if it wants to show the following: (i) The strongest solvency position for the company (ii) The best return on shareholders9 equity Briefly explain your answers.

Problem 11-3 LO3, 7

On January 1, Year 3, Jets Ltd., a Winnipeg-based private company, purchased 80% of the shares of Buenos Inc. for 1,900,000 Argentine pesos (AP)—an amount which, at that date, translated to $655,172. The Year 3 financial statements for Buenos are as follows: BALANCE SHEET at December 31, Year 3 Cash s receivable Inventory Plant assets, net

AP 820,000 317,500 730,000 1,722,500 AP3,590,000

Current monetary liabilities Notes payable Common shares Retained earnings

AP 380,000 700,000 900,000 1,610,000 AP3,590,000


682


674

CHAPTER 11


INCOME STATEMENT for the Year Ended December 31, Year 3 Sales Cost of sales Gross profit Other expenses Net income

AP10,350,000 6,400,000 3,950,000 3,590,000 AP 360,000

Additional Information • The FIFO inventory method is used. The opening inventory, which was purchased before December 31, Year 2, cost AP600,000. The exchange rate at the time of inventory purchase was $1 5 AP2.71. The purchases during the year were Purchase Number 1 Purchase Number 2

AP

Exchange rate

2,000,000 4,530,000

$1 5 AP3.0 $1 5 AP3.12

• The plant assets were purchased when the company was formed (January 1, Year 1). The common shares were issued at the same time. The exchange rate at that date was $1 5 AP1.5. The cost of the plant assets is AP2,450,000, and the accumulated depreciation is AP727,500 at December 31, Year 3. Depreciation expense of AP122,500 is included with other expenses. • The notes payable are due on January 1, Year 7, and were issued on December 31, Year 2. • The “sales” and “other expenses” on the income statement were incurred evenly throughout the year. • The dividends of AP200,000 were paid on December 31, Year 3. • The balances in pesos at December 31, Year 2, were as follows: Cash s receivable Current monetary liabilities Notes payable

AP 450,000 AP 405,000 AP(250,000) AP(700,000)

• Exchange rates: Dec. 31, Year 2 Jan. 1, Year 3 Year 3 average Dec. 31, Year 3

$1 5 AP2.9 $1 5 AP2.9 $1 5 AP3.25 $1 5 AP3.6

Required: (a) There will be a foreign exchange gain or loss on the translated income statement prepared in Part (b). Prepare a schedule to calculate the foreign exchange gain or loss under the temporal method. (b) Prepare the Canadian-dollar income statement for Buenos for Year 3, using the temporal method and assuming that the income statement will be used to consolidate with Jets Ltd. (CGA-Canada adapted)


683


CHAPTER 11

Problem 11-4 LO3, 4, 5, 7

675


On January 1, Year 1, P Company (a Canadian company) purchased 90% of S Company (located in a foreign country) at a cost of 14,400 foreign currency units (FC). The carrying amounts of S Company9s net assets were equal to fair values on this date except for plant and equipment, which had a fair value of FC22,000, with a remaining useful life of 10 years. A goodwill impairment loss of FC100 occurred evenly throughout Year 1. The following exchange rates were in effect during Year 1: Jan. 1 Average for year When ending inventory purchased Dec. 31

FC1 5 $1.10 FC1 5 $1.16 FC1 5 $1.19 FC1 5 $1.22

The statement of financial position of S Company on January 1, Year 1, is as follows: S Company (FC) Plant and equipment (net) Inventory Monetary assets (current)

20,000 8,000 10,000 38,000

Ordinary shares Retained earnings Bonds payable (mature in eight years) Current liabilities

10,000 3,000 16,000 9,000 38,000

The December 31, Year 1, financial statements of P Company (in $) and S Company (in FC) are shown below: STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION P Company $

S Company FC

Plant and equipment (net) Investment in S Company (at cost) Inventory Monetary assets (current)

60,000 15,840 30,000 31,552 137,392

18,000 — 11,000 17,000 46,000

Ordinary shares Retained earnings Bonds payable Current monetary liabilities

30,000 41,392 40,000 26,000 137,392

10,000 8,000 16,000 12,000 46,000

INCOME STATEMENT

Sales Dividend income Cost of sales Other expenses (including depreciation) Profit

P Company $

S Company FC

360,000 4,392 (180,000) (155,000) 29,392

100,000 — (59,000) (32,000) 9,000


684


676

CHAPTER 11


Dividends were declared on December 31, Year 1, in the amount of $22,000 by P Company and FC4,000 by S Company.

Required: (a) Prepare the December 31, Year 1, consolidated financial statements, assuming that S Company9s functional currency is each of the following: (i) The Canadian dollar (ii) The foreign currency unit (b) Now assume that P Company is a private company. It uses ASPE and has chosen to use the equity method to report its investment in S Company. Calculate the balance in the investment at December 31, Year 1, assuming that S Company9s functional currency is the Canadian dollar.

Problem 11-5 LO3

Mex Ltd. is an integrated foreign subsidiary. At the end of the current year, the inventory of the company was as follows: Cost Net realizable value

14,862,000 pesos 12,100,000 pesos

Applying the lower of cost and net realizable value, the company wrote the inventory down by Ps2,762,000 for presentation in its financial statements. When these financial statements were received by the parent company in Canada for translation, it was determined that the year-end spot rate was $1 5 Ps382. The closing inventory at cost is composed of the following: Purchase

Amount in pesos

Historical exchange rate

1 2 3

3,200,000 6,132,000 5,530,000

$1 5 Ps341 $1 5 Ps360 $1 5 Ps375

Required: (a) At what amount would the inventory be shown on the translated balance sheet of Mex? And what amount of loss from write-down would appear on the translated income statement? (b) If the year-end spot rate was $1 5 Ps281, at what amount would the inventory be shown on the translated balance sheet? And what amount of loss from write-down would appear on the translated income statement? (CGA-Canada adapted)

Problem 11-6 LO3, 4

Maple Limited (Maple) was incorporated on January 2, Year 1, and commenced active operations immediately in Greece. Common shares were issued on the date of incorporation for 100,000 euros (€), and no more common shares have been issued since then. On December 31, Year 4, the Oak Company (Oak) purchased 100% of the outstanding common shares of Maple. The balance sheet for Maple at December 31, Year 10, was as follows:


CHAPTER 11


Cash s receivable (Note 1) Inventory (Note 2) Equipment—net (Note 3)

€ 100,000 200,000 300,000 1,100,000 €1,700,000

s payable Bonds payable (Note 4) Common shares Retained earnings

€ 250,000 700,000 100,000 650,000 €1,700,000

685

677

Additional Information • The s receivable relate to sales occurring evenly throughout the month of December, Year 10. • Maple uses the FIFO method to for its inventory. The inventory available for sale during the year was purchased as follows: Date of purchase December 31, Year 9 March 1, Year 10 November 1, Year 10

Cost of purchase

Exchange rate

€100,000 1,000,000 180,000

€1 5 $1.56 €1 5 $1.60 €1 5 $1.63

• The equipment was purchased on May 26, Year 4. • The bonds were issued on May 26, Year 4, to finance the purchase of the equipment. • Maple reported net income of €200,000, which was earned evenly throughout the year, and paid dividends of €160,000 on July 1, Year 10. • Foreign exchange rates were as follows: January 2, Year 1 May 26, Year 4 December 31, Year 4 December 31, Year 9 July 1, Year 10 Average for Year 10 Average for December Year 10 December 31, Year 10

€1 5 $1.30 €1 5 $1.40 €1 5 $1.42 €1 5 $1.56 €1 5 $1.61 €1 5 $1.59 €1 5 $1.64 €1 5 $1.66

Required: (a) Translate the balance sheet of Maple at December 31, Year 10, into Canadian dollars assuming that Maple9s functional currency is the Canadian dollar. Assume that the translated balance sheet will be consolidated with Oak9s balance sheet. For retained earnings, simply use the amount required to balance your balance sheet. (b) Calculate the foreign exchange gain or loss on the bonds payable for the year ended December 31, Year 10, and state how it would be reported on the yearend financial statements. (c) Prepare an independent calculation of the unrealized exchange gains or losses that would be reported in other comprehensive income for Year 10, assuming that Maple9s functional currency is the euro.


686


678

CHAPTER 11


(d) Since the current rate method uses the closing rate to translate equipment, the translated amount should represent the fair value of the equipment in Canadian dollars. Do you agree or disagree? Briefly explain. (CGA-Canada adapted)


In preparation for translating the financial statements of a foreign subsidiary that is highly integrated with its Canadian parent, you have the following information: FC Inventory (FIFO cost, net realizable value of FC1,300,000)

1,150,000

An examination of the working papers of the foreign subsidiary9s auditor shows the following information: Opening inventory Purchases February 15, Year 3 April 15, Year 3 August 1, Year 3 October 12, Year 3 November 15, Year 3 Cost of goods sold for the year

FC 350,000 205,000 588,000 410,000 362,000 547,000 1,312,000

Exchange rates: January 1, Year 3 (opening inventory) February 15, Year 3 April 15, Year 3 August 1, Year 3 October 12, Year 3 November 15, Year 3 December 31, Year 3 Year 3 average

$1 5 FC2.5 $1 5 FC3.1 $1 5 FC3.4 $1 5 FC4.3 $1 5 FC4.8 $1 5 FC5.5 $1 5 FC6.1 $1 5 FC4.0

Note: This is not considered excessive or high inflation in of the temporal method.

Required: (a) Calculate the Canadian-dollar amount of the inventory at the fiscal year-end (December 31), and the Canadian-dollar amount of any item(s) that would appear on the income statement. (b) If the foreign subsidiary were self-sustaining, what would your answer to Part (a) be? (c) Define ing exposure and describe its impact on the translation of financial statement items in this problem. (CGA-Canada adapted)


On December 31, Year 2, PAT Inc. of Halifax, Nova Scotia, acquired 90% of the voting shares of Gioco Limited of Italy, for 690,000 euros (€). On the acquisition date, the fair values equalled the carrying amounts for all of Gioco9s identifiable


CHAPTER 11


687

679

assets and liabilities. Selected balances from Gioco9s general ledger on December 31, Year 2, were as follows: Equipment Building Accumulated amortization Common shares Retained earnings

€ 150,000 1,350,000 195,000 600,000 96,000

Gioco purchased the building and equipment on January 1, Year 1. The condensed trial balance of Gioco for the year ending December 31, Year 5, was as follows: s receivable Inventory Building Equipment Cost of goods purchased Change in inventory Amortization expense Other expenses Dividends paid Total debits

€ 197,000 255,000 1,350,000 350,000 1,080,000 120,000 130,000 470,000 300,000 €4,252,000

Current monetary liabilities Common shares Retained earnings, beginning Sales Accumulated amortization Total credits

€ 682,000 600,000 300,000 2,250,000 420,000 €4,252,000

Additional Information • Gioco9s sales, inventory purchases, and other expenses occurred uniformly over the year. • Gioco9s inventory on hand at the end of each year was purchased uniformly over the last quarter. On December 31, Year 4, the inventories totalled €375,000, and on December 31, Year 5, they totalled €255,000. • On January 1, Year 5, Gioco purchased equipment for €200,000. The equipment has an estimated useful life of eight years and a residual value of €5,000. Gioco uses the double-declining-balance method to calculate amortization expense. There were no other purchases of property, plant, and equipment between Year 2 and Year 5. • The dividends were declared and paid on January 1, Year 5. • The exchange rates for the euro and the Canadian dollar were as follows: Jan. 1, Year 1 Dec. 31, Year 2 Average for the Year 4 fourth quarter Dec. 31, Year 4/Jan. 1, Year 5 Dec. 31, Year 5 Average for Year 5 Average for the Year 5 fourth quarter

$1 5 €0.50 $1 5 €0.60 $1 5 €0.68 $1 5 €0.70 $1 5 €0.80 $1 5 €0.76 $1 5 €0.79


688


680

CHAPTER 11


Required: (a) Translate into Canadian dollars the following items on Gioco9s financial statements for the year ended December 31, Year 5, assuming that Gioco9s functional currency is the Canadian dollar: (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v)

s receivable Inventory Equipment Accumulated amortization Common shares

(b) Translate into Canadian dollars the following items on Gioco9s financial statements for the year ended December 31, Year 5, assuming that Gioco9s functional currency is the euro: (i) (ii) (iii) (iv)

Cost of goods purchased Amortization expense Inventory Common shares

(c) For Gioco, which functional currency would show the strongest current ratio for the company9s translated financial statements? Briefly explain. (d) Prepare an independent calculation of the unrealized exchange gains or losses to be included in other comprehensive income for Year 5, assuming that Gioco9s functional currency is the euro. (CGA-Canada adapted)

Problem 11-9 LO3, 7

Dom Ltd., a private Canadian company, has a subsidiary, Tarzan Inc., in a country that uses the tar (Tz) as its currency. Before this 100%-owned subsidiary can be consolidated, the financial statements must be translated from tars to Canadian dollars. However, the person responsible for the translation has quit suddenly and left you with a half-finished job. Certain information is available but you must determine the rest. TARZAN INC. FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (IN Tz) at December 31, Year 4 Land Buildings (Note 1) Accumulated depreciation Inventory (Note 2) s receivable Cash

Tz 500,000 800,000 (300,000) 400,000 200,000 100,000 Tz1,700,000

Ordinary shares Retained earnings Note payable (Note 3) s payable

Tz 300,000 750,000 400,000 250,000 Tz1,700,000

Sales Cost of goods sold

Tz5,200,000 3,100,000 2,100,000 (1,950,000) Tz 150,000

Other expenses (including depreciation of 80,000) Profit


CHAPTER 11


689

681

Additional Information 1. There were two buildings and one piece of land. The land and building 1 (Tz300,000) were acquired when Dom formed Tarzan. The exchange rate at that time was $1 5 Tz2. Building 2 was acquired when the exchange rate was $1 5 Tz3.2. The depreciation expense is proportional to the purchase prices. The accumulated depreciation relating to Building 2 is Tz200,000. 2. The opening inventory was Tz500,000, and the purchases during the period were Tz3,000,000. Tarzan uses a periodic FIFO inventory system. The opening inventory had an exchange rate of $1 5 Tz3.5, and the purchases were made 30% from the parent and 70% from the local area. The local area purchases were made evenly throughout the year; the purchases from the parent were recorded by the parent at $232,558. The ending inventory was purchased when the exchange rate was $1 5 Tz4. 3. The note payable, which is due on January 1, Year 8, was created on July 1, Year 4. 4. The retained earnings at January 1, Year 4, translated into $181,818. 5. The other expenses were incurred evenly throughout the year. 6. No dividends were declared during the year. 7. Exchange rates: Jan. 1, Year 4 2004 average, July 1, Year 4 Dec. 31, Year 4

$1 5 Tz3.7 $1 5 Tz3.9 $1 5 Tz4.1

Required: (a) Assume that Tarzan is an integrated foreign operation. Prepare the financial statements of Tarzan in Canadian dollars. Show your calculations in good form. (b) If the net realizable value of the ending inventory was Tz350,000, what would the Canadian-dollar value of the inventory be? Assume all the other information given in the question remains constant. (CGA-Canada adapted)

Problem 11-10 LO3, 4

In Year 1, Victoria Textiles Limited decided that its Asian operations had expanded such that an Asian office should be established. The office would be involved in selling Victoria9s current product lines; it was also expected to establish supplier s. In the Asian market, there were a number of small manufacturers of topquality fabrics, particularly silk and lace, but from Victoria9s home office in Ontario it was difficult to find and maintain these suppliers. To assist in doing so, a wholly owned company, Victoria Textiles (India) Limited, was created, and a facility was established in India in January Year 2. The new company, VTIL, was given the mandate from head office to buy and sell with other Victoria divisions and offices across Canada, as if it were an autonomous, independent unit. To establish the company, an investment of 10,000,000 Indian rupees (IR) was made on January 1, Year 2. VTIL proved to be quite successful, as shown in the following financial statements at December 31, Year 4. After one year of operations, VTIL had borrowed funds and expanded facilities substantially, as the initial market estimates had turned out to be quite conservative. However, during this time the rupee had fallen in value relative to the Canadian dollar. As a result, Victoria9s management was somewhat confused about how to evaluate VTIL9s success, given the changing currency values.


690


682

CHAPTER 11


FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (in Thousands of Indian Rupees) BALANCE SHEETS Year 4

Year 3

Cash s receivable Inventories Prepaid expenses Plant assets (net)

4,100 2,900 4,800 1,900 7,900 21,600

3,900 2,100 3,500 1,700 8,900 20,100

Current monetary liabilities Unearned revenue Long-term debt

2,400 800 6,000 9,200 10,000 2,400 21,600

900 500 6,000 7,400 10,000 2,700 20,100

Year 4

Year 3

20,200 11,300 8,900 4,400 700 600 3,200

12,000 6,300 5,700 2,800 400 400 2,100

Common shares Retained earnings

INCOME STATEMENTS Sales Cost of sales Gross profit Operating expenses Interest Taxes Net income

Additional Information • The exchange rate at January 1, Year 2, when VTIL was originally established, was $0.075 per rupee. • Of the original investment of IR10 million, IR4 million was used to acquire plant and equipment, which is being depreciated on a straight-line basis over 10 years. • At June 30, Year 3, an expansion was completed at a cost of IR6 million, which was financed entirely by a six-year note obtained from an Indian bank. Interest is to be paid semiannually. The exchange rate at July 1, Year 3, was $0.062 per rupee. The new expansion is also to be depreciated on a straight-line basis over 10 years. (A half-year9s depreciation was recorded in Year 3.) Depreciation expense of IR1,000 in Year 4 and IR700 in Year 3 is included in operating expenses. • Inventory is ed for on the FIFO basis. The inventory at the end of Year 3 and Year 4 was acquired when the exchange rates were $0.045 and $0.027 per rupee, respectively. • Sales, purchases, and operating expenses were incurred evenly throughout the year, and the average exchange rate for the year was $0.031. • The prepaid expenses and unearned revenue at December 31, Year 4, arose when the exchange rates were $0.03 and $0.028 per rupee, respectively.


CHAPTER 11


691

683

• Income taxes were paid in equal monthly instalments throughout the year. • Dividends of 3,500 in Year 4 and 500 in Year 3 were declared and paid each year on December 31. • The foreign exchange rates per rupee at each of the following dates were as follows: Dec. 31, Year 3 June 30, Year 4 Dec. 31, Year 4

$0.041 $0.036 $0.025

Required: (a) Prepare a Canadian-dollar balance sheet at December 31, Year 4, and an income statement for the year then ended, assuming that VTIL9s functional currency is as follows: (i) The Canadian dollar (ii) The Indian rupee (Note: There is insufficient information to translate retained earnings and accumulated foreign exchange adjustments. Plug these two items with the amount required to balance the balance sheet.) (b) Which method should Victoria Textiles Limited apply to its investment in this subsidiary? Explain. (adapted from a problem prepared by Peter Secord, St. Mary’s University)

Problem 11-11 LO1, 3, 4

The financial statements of Malkin Inc., of Russia, as at December 31, Year 11, follow the Additional Information section. Additional Information • On January 1, Year 11, Crichton Corporation of Toronto acquired a controlling interest in Malkin. • Relevant exchange rates for the Russian ruble (RR) were as follows: Jan. 1, Year 11 Dec. 31, Year 11 Average for Year 11

$1 5 RR28.00 $1 5 RR28.20 $1 5 RR28.09

• The land and buildings were purchased in Year 5 when the exchange rate was RR26.50. • During Year 11, equipment costing RR125,000 was purchased for cash. Depreciation totalling RR25,000 has been recorded on this equipment. The exchange rate on the date of the equipment purchase was RR28.18. The remaining equipment was purchased on the date the subsidiary was acquired, and no other changes have taken place since that date. Depreciation on the buildings of RR105,00 and depreciation of RR63,000 on all the equipment are included in other expenses. • The December 31, Year 11, inventory was acquired during the last quarter of the year, when the average exchange rate was RR28.04. • On January 1, Year 11, the inventory was RR525,000 and was acquired when the average exchange rate was RR28.27.


692


684

CHAPTER 11


• • • •

The bonds mature on December 31, Year 16. Other operating expenses were incurred equally throughout the year. Dividends were declared and paid on December 31, Year 11. On January 1, Year 11, liabilities were greater than monetary assets by the amount of RR1,033,000. • The common shares were issued in Year 1 when the exchange rate was RR25.00. FINANCIAL STATEMENTS at December 31, Year 11 BALANCE SHEET Cash s receivable Inventories—at cost Land Buildings Accumulated depreciation Equipment Accumulated depreciation

RR 105,000 168,000 357,000 430,000 1,460,000 420,000 483,000 168,000

s payable Miscellaneous payables Bonds payable Common shares Retained earnings

1,040,000 315,000 RR2,415,000 RR 210,000 105,000 600,000 850,000 650,000 RR2,415,000

RETAINED EARNINGS STATEMENT Balance, January 1 Net income

RR 470,000 630,000 1,100,000 450,000 RR 650,000


INCOME STATEMENT Sales Cost of sales Other expenses Net Income

RR3,150,000 1,680,000 840,000 2,520,000 RR 630,000

Required: (a) Assume that Malkin9s functional currency is the Canadian dollar. Translate the financial statements into Canadian dollars for consolidation purposes. (b) Assume that Malkin9s functional currency is the Russian ruble. Translate the balance sheet only into Canadian dollars for consolidation purposes. (c) Explain whether the current rate method produces results that are consistent with the normal measurement and valuation of assets and liabilities for domestic transactions and operations.


CHAPTER 11

Problem 11-12 LO2, 3, 4


693

685

SPEC Co. is a Canadian investment company. It acquires real estate properties in foreign countries for speculative purposes. On January 1, Year 5, SPEC incorporated a wholly owned subsidiary, CHIN Limited. CHIN immediately purchased a property in Shanghai, China, for 70 million Chinese yuan (Y). At that time, the land and building were valued at Y30 million and Y40 million, respectively. The previous owner had purchased the property in Year 1 for Y36 million when the exchange rate was $1 5 Y5.13. The building had an estimated useful life of 20 years with no residual value on January 1, Year 5. The draft financial statements for CHIN as at and for the year ended December 31, Year 5, follow: CHIN LIMITED STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION at December 31, Year 5 Land Building Accumulated amortization

Y30,000,000 40,000,000 (2,000,000) Y68,000,000

Common shares Retained earnings (deficit) Mortgage payable

Y20,000,000 (2,000,000) 50,000,000 Y68,000,000

CHIN LIMITED INCOME STATEMENT for the Year Ended December 31, Year 5 Rent revenue Interest expense Amortization expense Other expenses Profit (loss)

Y 6,000,000 (5,000,000) (2,000,000) (1,000,000) Y (2,000,000)

Additional Information • The purchase of the property was financed with Y20 million of equity provided by SPEC and a Y50 million mortgage from a Chinese investor. The mortgage payable has a term of 10 years and requires interest-only payments of Y5 million on December 31 each year, and a final payment of Y50 million on December 31, Year 14. The market rate of interest on the mortgage was equal to the stated rate throughout Year 5. • The property is rented for Y0.5 million per month, which is consistent with rent being charged by other property owners in the area. The rent is due on the last day of each month. CHIN hires local workers and buys all of its materials and supplies from local suppliers. CHIN incurred the other expenses evenly throughout the year. • The exchange rates were as follows: Jan. 1, Year 5 Average for Year 5 Average for 12 days when rent payments were received Dec. 31, Year 5

$1 5 Y6.92 $1 5 Y7.20 $1 5 Y7.25 $1 5 Y7.50


694


686

CHAPTER 11


Required: (a) Should CHIN be classified as a self-sustaining or an integrated subsidiary? Explain. (b) Ignore your answer to Part (a). Calculate the foreign exchange adjustment for Year 5, assuming that CHIN9s functional currency is the Chinese yuan, and indicate how this adjustment will be reported in CHIN9s Canadian-dollar financial statements. Show ing calculations. (c) Ignore your answers to Parts (a) and (b). Translate CHIN9s Year 5 income statement into Canadian dollars, assuming that CHIN9s functional currency is the Canadian dollar. Ignore foreign exchange gains and losses. (d) Assume that SPEC does not own any shares of CHIN. Instead, SPEC acquired the property in Shanghai directly. SPEC financed the acquisition with Y20 million of its own funds and a Y50 million mortgage. If SPEC argued that the mortgage payable is a hedge of the anticipated sale of the land, what difference would it make for reporting purposes whether or not the mortgage payable is deemed to be an effective hedge of the anticipated sale of the land? Briefly explain. (CGA-Canada adapted)

Problem 11-13 LO3, 4

White Company was incorporated on January 2, Year 1, and commenced active operations immediately. Common shares were issued on the date of incorporation and no new common shares have been issued since then. On December 31, Year 5, Black Company purchased 70% of the outstanding common shares of White for 1.4 million foreign pesos (FP). On this date, the fair values of White9s identifiable net assets were equal to their carrying amounts except for a building, which had a fair value of FP100,000 in excess of carrying amount. The remaining useful life of the building was 10 years at the date of acquisition. The following information was extracted from the financial records of the two companies for the year ended December 31, Year 6:

Building—net Common shares Retained earnings, beginning of year Depreciation expense—buildings Income before foreign exchange Dividends paid

Black

White

$3,000,000 100,000 800,000 200,000 150,000 80,000

FP2,700,000 200,000 900,000 300,000 160,000 100,000

Additional Information • • • • •

Black uses the cost method to for its investment in White. White purchased its building on December 31, Year 3. The recoverable amount for goodwill at the end of Year 6 was FP720,000. Dividends were declared and paid on July 1. Foreign exchange rates were as follows: Jan. 2, Year 1 Dec. 31, Year 3 Dec. 31, Year 5 Average for Year 6 July 1, Year 6 Dec. 31, Year 6

FP1 5 $0.30 FP1 5 $0.24 FP1 5 $0.20 FP1 5 $0.18 FP1 5 $0.17 FP1 5 $0.15


CHAPTER 11


695

687

Required: (a) Compute the balances that would appear in the Year 6 consolidated financial statements for the following items, assuming that White9s functional currency is the Canadian dollar. White9s income before foreign exchange gains is $30,000, and the exchange gains from translating White9s separate-entity financial statements to Canadian dollars is $50,000. (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) (vi) (vii)

Building—net Goodwill Depreciation expense—building Net income (excluding other comprehensive income) Other comprehensive income Non-controlling interest on the income statement Non-controlling interest on the balance sheet

(b) Compute the balances that would appear in the Year 6 consolidated financial statements for the same s as in Part (a), assuming that White9s functional currency is the foreign peso.

Problem 11-14 LO5

On January 1, Year 1, Par Company purchased all the outstanding common shares of Bayshore Company, located in California, USA, for US$120,000. The carrying amount of Bayshore9s shareholders9 equity on January 1, Year 1, was US$90,000. The fair value of Bayshore9s plant and equipment was US$10,000 more than carrying amount, and the plant and equipment are being depreciated over 10 years, with no salvage value. The remainder of the acquisition differential is attributable to a trademark, which will be amortized over 10 years. During Year 1, Bayshore earned US$20,000 in income and declared and paid US$8,000 in dividends on December 1, Year 1. Par uses the equity method to for its investment in Bayshore. Management has determined that the Canadian dollar is the recording functional and presentation currency for Par Company. The exchange rates were as follows throughout the year: Jan. 1, Year 1 Dec. 1, Year 1 Dec. 1, Year 1 Average for year

US$1 5 CDN$0.99 US$1 5 CDN$0.96 US$1 5 CDN$0.95 US$1 5 CDN$0.97

Required: (a) Assume that the Canadian dollar is the function currency for Bayshore Company. (i) Prepare a schedule showing the differential allocation and amortization for Year 1. The schedule should present both Canadian dollars and U.S. dollars. (ii) Prepare Par Company9s journal entry for adjustments pertaining to the amortization of the acquisition differential for Year 1. (b) Assume that the U.S. dollar is the functional currency for Bayshore Company. (i) Prepare a schedule showing the differential allocation and amortization for Year 1. The schedule should present both Canadian dollars and U.S. dollars. (ii) Prepare Par Company9s journal entry for adjustments pertaining to the amortization of the acquisition differential for Year 1.


696


688

CHAPTER 11


WEB-BASED P ROBLEMS Web Problem 11-1 LO6

Access the 2011 annual report for Manulife Financial Corporation by going to investor relations section of the company9s website. Answer the questions below. For each question, indicate where in the financial statements you found the answer, and/or provide a brief explanation. (a) What is the functional currency of the parent company, and what currency is used in presenting the financial statements? (b) What is the predominant currency of the company9s foreign operations, and what other currencies are functional currencies of entities within the consolidated group? (c) What were the foreign exchange gains or losses reported in net income during the year? Are the foreign exchange gains or losses segregated between foreign transactions and foreign operations? (d) Explain if and how the company hedges its net investments in foreign operations and how it reports exchange gains or losses on these hedges. (e) If the reporting currency appreciates by 10% relative to the U.S. dollar in the next year, will the company likely report foreign exchange gains or foreign exchange losses in operating income? (f) If the company had used the U.S. dollar as its presentation currency this past year, would it likely have reported exchange gains or exchange losses? Briefly explain.

Web Problem 11-2 LO6

Access the 2011 annual report for Bombardier Inc. by going to investor relations section of the company9s website. Answer the same questions as in Problem 1. For each question, indicate where in the financial statements you found the answer, and/or provide a brief explanation. (Some questions may not be applicable.)



697


12 chapter

ing for Not-for-Profit and Public Sector Organizations learning objectives After studying this chapter, you should be able to do the following: LO1 Define not-for-profit organizations (NFPOs) and describe how they differ from profitoriented organizations.

LO5 Prepare journal entries and financial statements under the restricted fund method.

LO2 Describe and apply the not-for-profit ing and reporting practices currently mandated in the CICA Handbook.

LO6 Prepare journal entries and financial statements under the deferral method.

LO3 Explain the objectives of fund ing, and prepare financial statements using fund ing. LO4 Explain how formal recording of a budget and encumbrances helps NFPO managers control operations.

LO7 Analyze and interpret the financial statements of NFPOs. LO8 Identify the main differences following IFRSs and ASPE for NFPOs. LO9 Outline the basics of public sector financial reporting.

INTRODUCTION A substantial portion of Canada’s economic activity is conducted by organizations whose purpose is to provide services (or products) on a non-profit basis. The size of the portion becomes clear when one considers that included in this non-business area is the government sector, encoming the federal, provincial, and local governments, as well as the not-for-profit sector. This latter sector encomes a wide variety of organizations such as charities, hospitals, universities, professional and fraternal organizations, and community clubs. A charity is a type of NFPO that is established and operated for charitable purposes and must devote its resources to charitable activities. It cannot use its income for the personal benefit of its or governing officials. While our major concern in this chapter is the ing and financial reporting for Canadian not-for-profit organizations (NFPOs), the reporting requirements for governments are summarized in Appendix 12B. The NFPO sector is a very large one in our economy and consists of over 90,000 ed charities and an additional 70,000 voluntary organizations. It has been estimated that the

Over 160,000 NFPOs in Canada receive more than $112 billion each year from government grants and private donations.

689


698


690

CHAPTER 12

LO1

ing for Not-for-Profit and Public Sector Organizations

charity sector alone receives over $112 billion a year from governments, private individuals, and corporations. Not-for-profit organizations are defined in Part III of the CICA Handbook as . . . entities, normally without transferable ownership interests, organized and operated exclusively for social, educational, professional, religious, health, charitable or any other not-for-profit purpose. A not-for-profit organization’s , contributors and other resource providers do not, in such capacity, receive any financial return directly from the organization. [4400.02]

There are a number of ways in which NFPOs differ from profit-oriented organizations.

NFPOs differ from profit-oriented organizations in the following ways: • They typically provide services or goods to identifiable segments of society without the expectation of profit. They accomplish this by raising resources and subsequently spending or distributing these resources in a manner that fulfills the organization’s objectives. • The resources are provided by contributors without the expectation of gain or repayment. Most of these resources consist of donations from the general public and grants from governments and other NFPOs. Often, a portion of the resources received has restrictions attached that govern the manner in which they can be spent. • As the definition cited above indicates, there is no readily defined ownership interest that can be sold, transferred, or redeemed in any way by the organization. • While many NFPOs have paid employees, they are governed by volunteers who receive little or no remuneration or gain for the time and effort they provide. In some small organizations there are no paid employees and all effort is provided entirely by volunteers.

Well-defined GAAP for NFPOs have existed in Canada only since 1997.

While financial reporting for NFPOs in Canada is well defined today, this has been the case only since April 1997, when seven very detailed Handbook sections became operational. Prior to this date, ing in this area was in a state of flux, moving from a situation where there were no real authoritative pronouncements at all, to one where there was just a single Handbook section that gave only broad guidance for some issues and left many other important ones unresolved. A few large organizations, such as hospitals and universities, published detailed manuals in an attempt to establish consistent reporting practices for all of a given association. Unfortunately, the practices set out for hospitals were different from those recommended for universities, and in both situations did not have to follow their organization’s recommendations. Smaller NFPOs followed a wide range of diverse practices, such as using the cash basis only, or a mixture of cash and accrual ing. Many did not capitalize capital asset acquisitions, and of the few that did capitalize, many did not provide for subsequent periodic amortization. A wide range of practices was also followed for donated materials, services, and capital assets, ranging from no recording to a full recording of all items. A large number of NFPOs used fund ing in their end-of-year financial statement presentations, and many organizations still do. Later in this chapter we fully explore the concepts involved in fund ing and fund presentations in accordance with current Handbook requirements. First, though, it is useful to examine the main ing and reporting requirements for NFPOs today.


699


CHAPTER 12


NOT-FOR-PROFIT REPORTING TODAY In 1997, seven new sections specifically dedicated to NFPOs were added to the CICA Handbook. In 2008, the NFPO Handbook sections underwent a major review. As a result, one new NFPO section was added and many changes were made to other NFPO sections. In December 2010, the Handbook was restructured into five parts to implement the strategy of the ing Standards Board (AcSB) of adopting different sets of standards for different categories of entities. As part of this restructuring, the not-for-profit (NFP) sector was classified into two sectors: the public NFP sector and the private NFP sector. The public NFP sector includes NFPOs (such as hospitals) that are controlled by the government. These NFPOs have a choice to follow the CICA Public Sector ing (PSA) Handbook including the 4200 series or the PSA Handbook without the 4200 series. Appendix B of this chapter discusses ing standards applicable to the public sector. The private NFP sector includes NFPOs that are not controlled by the government. They have a choice to follow either Part I (International Financial Reporting Standards) or Part III (ing Standards for Not-for-Profit Organizations) of the CICA Handbook. In choosing between the two options, the organization would consider the needs of the s of their financial statements and the comparability of their financial reporting with counterparts in industry. It is expected that most private sector NFPOs will adopt Part III of the CICA Handbook. The remainder of this chapter will describe ing standards for the private sector NFPOs, and will refer to the private NFPOs simply as NFPOs. Furthermore, any references to Part II or Part III will be references to these parts of the CICA Handbook. An NFPO applying Part III of the Handbook also applies Part II (ing Standards for Private Enterprises) to the extent that the Part II standards address topics not addressed in Part III. Some of the standards in Part II are of limited or no applicability to NFPOs either, because the topics are specifically addressed in Part III or the standards in Part II relate to transactions or circumstances that do not pertain to NFPOs. The standards in Part III are based closely on standards in the Handbook prior to the restructuring into the different parts. Part III carries forward the 4400 series of sections from the old Handbook, largely without change, except for the split of Section 4230 into Sections 4231 and 4232. Five new sections were added, containing relevant material from Part II that were customized for the private NFP sector. The new standards became effective for fiscal periods beginning on or after January 1, 2012. In the material that follows, the pronouncements of each section of Part III will be discussed and in some instances illustrated. For the first five sections presented below, the standards in Part III are very similar to the standards in Part II. The main differences between the two sections will be described.1

Section 1001: Financial Statement Concepts for Not-for-Profit Organizations This section describes the objectives of financial statements, qualitative characteristics of financial information, elements of financial statements, and recognition and measurement in financial statements. The mains s of the NFPOs’ financial statements are the , contributors, and creditors. They are interested, for the purpose of making resource allocation decisions, in the entity’s cost of service

691

LO2

Private sector NFPOs can either follow IFRSs or Part III of the CICA Handbook combined with relevant sections from ASPE.

Many sections of the Handbook that previously applied only to profitoriented organizations now apply to NFPOs as well.

Part III of the Handbook now contains the ing standards that deal with issues that are unique to NFPOs.

Cautionary Note: Unless otherwise noted, all of the illustrations in the body of the chapter and end-ofchapter material will use Part III of the CICA Handbook in combination with Part II.


700


692

CHAPTER 12


The cost of service and how that cost was funded are key information needs for the s of an NFPO.

and how that cost was funded and in predicting the ability of the entity to meet its obligations and achieve its service delivery objectives. The excess or deficiency of revenues and gains over expenses and losses can be an important indicator of the entity’s ability to obtain resources to cover the cost of its services. and contributors also require information about how the management of an entity has discharged its stewardship responsibility to those that have provided resources to the entity. Information regarding discharge of stewardship responsibilities is especially important as resources are often contributed for specific purposes, and management is able for the appropriate utilization of such resources.

Part II of the Handbook provides a substantial portion of GAAP for NFPOs.

Section 1101: Generally Accepted ing Principles for Not-for-Profit Organizations This section describes the primary and other sources of GAAP for NFPOs. The primary sources of GAAP, in descending order of authority, follow: (i) Sections 1470–4470 of Part III of the Handbook, including appendices (ii) Sections 1505–3870 in Part II, to the extent that the topics in those sections are not specifically discussed in Part III, including appendices (iii) “ing Guidelines” in Part II, including appendices An NFPO should present only one set of general-purpose financial statements prepared under Part III of the Handbook in any particular period. If it prepares additional sets of financial statements under Part III for different purposes, these are special-purpose financial statements and should refer to the general-purpose financial statements.

The financial statements for an NFPO are similar to the financial statements required under ASPE.

Section 1401: General Standards of Financial Statement Presentation for Notfor-Profit Organizations This section describes fair presentation in accordance with GAAP, going concern, financial statements required for NFPOs, and comparative information. The standards in this section are similar to the standards in Section 1400 in Part II. The general-purpose financial statements consist of the statement of financial position, statement of operations, statement of changes in net assets, and statement of cash flows. Notes to financial statements, and ing schedules to which the financial statements are cross-referenced, are an integral part of such statements. When financial statements are not prepared on a going-concern basis, that fact shall be disclosed, together with the basis on which the financial statements are prepared and the reason why the organization is not regarded as a going concern. Financial statements shall be prepared on a comparative basis, unless the comparative information is not meaningful or the standards set out in Part III permit otherwise.

Section 1501: First Time Adoption by Not-for-Profit Organizations This section

Changes in policies would normally be applied retrospectively when first adopting Part III of the Handbook.

applies when an NFPO is adopting Part III for the first time. Most NFPOs will have used this section when they converted from the old Handbook to Part III of the Handbook in 2012. For the NFPOs that adopted Part I rather than Part III in 2012 or earlier and later decide to change to Part III, they would follow Section 1501 of Part III at that time. When converting to Part III for the first time, changes in ing policies must be applied retrospectively, unless there are exemptions or restrictions as outlined and defined in Section 1501. The entity’s first set of financial statements


701


CHAPTER 12


693

must show comparative numbers for the previous year as if Part III had always been applied. In addition, the entity must present a statement of financial position on the transition date, which is the beginning of the earliest period for which an organization presents full comparative information. For example, if the first set of financial statements is presented for the year ended December 31, 2012, comparative numbers would be presented for 2011 and an opening statement of financial position would be presented as at January 1, 2011. The entity has an option to not retrospectively adjust when it changes its ing policies in its first set of financial statements under Part III for certain standards in the following areas: business combinations; fair value for property, plant, and equipment; employee future benefits; cumulative translation differences for self-sustaining foreign operations; financial instruments; and asset retirement obligations. These same elective exemptions are available for private entities transitioning to Part II. On the other hand, retrospective application is prohibited for some aspects of the standards. The prohibitions include derecognition of financial assets and financial liabilities, hedge ing, estimates, and non-controlling interests.

Section 3032: Inventories Held by Not-for-Profit Organizations Except as otherwise provided for in this section, an NFPO applies the section on inventories in Part II. When an NFPO recognizes donations of materials and services, the inventories should initially be recorded at fair value, which is its deemed cost from that point forward. Without this requirement, the inventory would not be recognized because it had no cost to the NFPO. An NFPO may hold inventories whose future economic benefits or service potential are not directly related to their ability to generate net cash flows. These types of inventories may arise when an NFPO distributes certain goods at no charge or for a nominal charge. For example, a food bank would buy food, not to resell it, but to distribute it for free to the homeless. In this case, the future economic benefits or service potential of the inventory for financial reporting purposes is the amount the organization would need to pay to acquire the economic benefits or service potential, if this was necessary to achieve the objectives of the organization. Therefore, an NFPO measures inventories at the lower of cost and current replacement cost (instead of net realizable value), when they are held for distribution at no charge or for a nominal charge or for consumption in the production process of goods to be distributed at no charge or for a nominal charge.

An NFPO may receive inventory without any cost and may have no intention of ever selling the inventory.

Section 4400: Financial Statement Presentation by Not-for-Profit Organizations An NFPO must present the following financial statements for external reporting purposes: • Statement of operations • Statement of financial position • Statement of changes in net assets • Statement of cash flows The names provided here are for descriptive purposes only; an organization can choose the titles it wishes to use. For example, the statement of operations is

An NFPO must present four financial statements.


702


694

CHAPTER 12

The equity section of the statement of financial position is called “net assets” and must be broken down into three categories (if applicable).


sometimes called the statement of revenues and expenses, the statement of financial position could be called a balance sheet, and net assets is sometimes referred to as fund balances or accumulated surplus. The statement of operations can be combined with the statement of changes in net assets. The primary purpose of a statement of operations is to communicate information about changes in the organization’s economic resources and obligations for the period. Specifically, this statement provides information about the cost of the organization’s service delivery activities for the period and the extent to which these expenses were financed or funded by contributions and other revenue. The information provided in the statement of operations is useful in evaluating the organization’s performance during the period, including its ability to continue to provide services, and in assessing how the organization’s management has discharged its stewardship responsibilities. The statement of financial position should show classifications for current assets, non-current assets, current liabilities, and non-current liabilities. Net assets (total assets less total liabilities) must be broken down into the following categories (if applicable): • Net assets maintained permanently in endowments • Internally restricted and other externally restricted net assets • Unrestricted net assets Prior to 2009, net assets invested in capital assets had to be shown as a separate component of net assets. Starting in 2009, a reporting entity has three options for reporting this item: • Continue to show it as a separate component of net assets • Disclose it in the notes to the statements • Do not present or disclose it separately

Revenues and expenses should be reported on a gross basis when the entity acts as a principal in the transactions.

Many organizations still present or disclose this item separately because it indicates that this portion of net assets is not available for current use. However, some organizations will not present or disclose the item separately because their s may not fully understand its nature. Information about total gross revenues and expenses is necessary for s to fully understand the organization’s operations. The statement of operations will show the revenues and the expenses for the period. Expenses may be classified by object (salaries, rent, utilities), by function (istrative, research, ancillary operations), or by program. An organization should use the method that results in the most meaningful presentation under the circumstances. When an organization has expenses and revenues from the provision of goods or services and acted as a principal in the transactions involved, it recognizes the expenses and the revenues on a gross basis. When it is not acting as a principal in the transactions, it earns the equivalent of a commission or fee or receives the equivalent of a contribution and recognizes revenue for only the net amount received. The following two examples provide guidance in determining whether to recognize revenues and expenses on the gross basis or the net basis.

Example 1 An NFPO engages in a number of fundraising activities, which include a fundraising telethon, a telephone campaign, a direct mail campaign, special events, and a lottery. The organization uses an outside fundraising consultant


CHAPTER 12


703

695

to conduct the telethon but uses the NFPO’s own staff and volunteers in the telethon and the telephone campaign. Funds solicited in each of the activities are raised in the name of the organization. The NFPO is the principal when it receives most of the benefits and/or incurs most of the risks. Even though the organization uses an outside fundraising consultant to conduct the telethon, the organization is the principal in the relationship with the donors as the funds are raised in its name and using its staff and volunteers. The organization has discretion in selecting the outside fundraiser, in establishing the fees to be paid, and in determining the specifications of the telethon. It also has the credit risk if donors to the telethon do not pay according to their pledge. Thus, the organization recognizes the gross fundraising amounts raised in each of the activities as revenue of the organization and the total expenses of each activity, including the fees charged by any outside party, as expenses of the organization.

Example 2 An NFPO is given the net proceeds from an event held by others to benefit the organization, but without having any control over, or responsibility for, the gross amounts of revenues or expenses involved. In this situation, the organization is not the principal in the fundraising event as it was not involved in organizing the event and did not bear any risks in connection with it. The amount received by the organization is a donation from the organizers. Neither the gross revenues nor the gross expenses of the event are recognized in the organization’s financial statements. The net proceeds received are recognized as a contribution. Disclosure of gross revenues and expenses is not required. The statement of operations does not have a section for other comprehensive income. Similar to a private for-profit entity, foreign exchange adjustments for a selfsustaining foreign operation and the exchange adjustments for a cash flow hedge are given special treatment. These adjustments are recognized directly and accumulated separately in the net assets section of the statement of financial position. The statement of changes in net assets must show changes in each of the three net asset categories required on the statement of financial position. The cash flow statement must segregate changes in cash between operating, investing, and financing activities. Cash flows from operations can be presented using either the direct method or the indirect method. The 2012 financial statements (excluding footnotes) of the United Way of Ottawa-Carleton presented in Appendix 12A provide an example of an NFPO’s financial statements.

THE BASICS OF FUND ING Fund ing can be and has been used very successfully to keep track of restricted resources and/or programs, and to convey information through the financial statements about the restrictions placed on the organization’s resources. The concepts involved can be summarized as follows: Fund ing comprises the collective ing procedures resulting in a self-balancing set of s for each fund established by legal, contractual or voluntary actions of an organization. Elements of a fund can include assets, liabilities, net assets, revenues and expenses (and gains and losses where appropriate). Fund ing involves an ing segregation, although not necessarily a physical segregation, of resources. [4400.02]

Other comprehensive income does not exist as a separate category on the statement of operations.

LO3


704


696

CHAPTER 12


The following simple example illustrates the use of fund ing as a means of reporting this form of stewardship. Fund ing is often used to convey information about restricted resources.

Example 3 The financial statements of the Helpful Society (HS) at the end of Year 1 are presented in Exhibit 12.1. HS presents two funds in its year-end financial statements. The resources in the general fund can be used to carry out the normal activities of the organization, while the resources in the building fund, which was established during the current year, are restricted. Each year, the organization raises money through donations and spends the funds raised on programs A, B, and C. During the current year, the general fund’s revenues were $7,100 greater than its expenses; as a result, its equity (described as fund balance) increased by that amount. Note that revenues and expenses are measured under the accrual method, so the statement does not show cash inflows and outflows. The assets on hand at the end of the year can be viewed as resources that are spendable. The liabilities at this date are a claim against these resources; therefore, the fund balance

EXHIBIT 12.1 HELPFUL SOCIETY STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION December 31, Year 1 General fund This exhibit illustrates fund ing. When combined with a policy of non-capitalization of capital assets it becomes a resources-in-and-out form of stewardship reporting.

Assets Cash Pledges receivable Investments in debt securities Total Liabilities and Fund Balance s payable and accrued liabilities Fund balance Total

$ 17,500 50,000 25,000 $ 92,500 $ 60,300 32,200 $ 92,500

Building fund $

6,000

88,635 $ 94,635

Total $

23,500 50,000 113,635 $ 187,135 $

$ 94,635 $ 94,635

60,300 126,835 $ 187,135

STATEMENT OF REVENUE AND EXPENSES AND CHANGES IN FUND BALANCES for the Year Ended December 31, Year 1 Revenues Contributions Interest Total Expenses Program A Program B Program C Fundraising Miscellaneous Total Excess of revenue over expenses Fund balance, January 1 Fund balance, December 31

General fund

Building fund

Total

$923,000 2,700 925,700

$102,000 102,000

$1,025,000 2,700 1,027,700

6,410 955 7,365 94,635 0 $ 94,635

625,000 190,000 100,000 10,010 955 925,965 101,735 25,100 $ 126,835

625,000 190,000 100,000 3,600

918,600 7,100 25,100 $ 32,200


705


CHAPTER 12


at the end of the current year represents net resources amounting to $32,200 that is available for spending in future years. During the current year, a special fundraising campaign was initiated to raise the money necessary to purchase and furnish a building. The building fund’s resources on hand at the end of the year, amounting to $94,635, were the result of $102,000 collected during the year, less the fundraising costs and miscellaneous expenses incurred, which amounted to $7,365. The campaign will continue until its goal is reached. At that time, the purchase of the building and furnishings will be recorded as an asset of this fund. This example was presented to illustrate the basic idea behind financial reporting on a fund basis. In our example, the columnar approach is used to present the two funds. An alternative that gained some prior acceptance was the layered approach, which presented funds one after another, so that the first page would show the operating fund statements, the second page would show the building fund, and so on. The columnar approach is preferred because of a requirement to show totals for each financial statement item for all funds presented. A fund basis can be used, but it is not necessary to prepare all statements using this method. For example, the operating statement could be presented on a fund basis while the rest of the statements could be presented on a non-fund basis. An organization that uses fund ing in its financial statements should provide a brief description of the purpose of each fund reported in the notes to the financial statements.

Section 4410: Contributions—Revenue Recognition An NFPO can have two

697

Helpful Society presents funds in separate columns for both the statement of financial position and the statement of revenues and expenses, and for changes in fund balances.

LO2

basic types of revenues: • Contributions • Other types (investments, the sale of goods and services) A contribution is a type of revenue that is unique to NFPOs. It is defined as “a non-reciprocal transfer to a not-for-profit organization of cash or other assets or a non-reciprocal settlement or cancellation of its liabilities” (paragraph 4420.02). Non-reciprocal means that the contributor does not directly receive anything for the contribution. Included here are donations of cash, property or services, government grants, pledges, and bequests. Besides receiving contribution revenue, NFPOs may also receive other types of revenue, such as from investments or from the sale of goods and services. These other types of revenue are ed for in accordance with Part II Section 3400: Revenue. Government funding to an NFPO is typically classified as a contribution, because the government itself does not receive anything from the contribution. When the government is the direct recipient of the good or the service, the receipt from the government is recognized as revenue earned rather than contribution revenue. In the same fashion, payments received from of an NFPO are classified as either revenues earned or contributions, depending on whether the member does or does not receive goods or services for the amount paid. The Handbook defines three different types of contributions: • Restricted contributions • Endowment contributions • Unrestricted contributions

Contribution revenue is a type of revenue that is unique to NFPOs, because it is non-reciprocal.

NFPOs receive three different types of contributions: restricted, endowment, and unrestricted.


706


698

CHAPTER 12

Board-created endowments and restrictions are reported differently than external contributions.

Many NFPOs receive a major source of their revenues from endowment earnings.


Restricted contributions are subject to externally imposed stipulations as to how the funds are to be spent or used. The organization must use the resources in the manner specified by the donor. There may be times when the directors of an organization decide to use certain contributions for certain purposes, but these are considered to be internally imposed restrictions and are often referred to as reserves or appropriations. They are reported differently than the restrictions imposed by external parties, mainly because future boards could reverse the designation. Endowment contributions are a special type of restricted contribution. The donor has specified that the contribution cannot be spent, but must be maintained permanently. Endowment contributions are often invested in high-grade securities. There are many examples of endowments. University scholarships are often funded by the investment income earned on endowment contributions made by donors in prior years. Some well-known private universities, such as Harvard and Stanford, have hundreds of millions of dollars in endowment funds, and use the earnings as their major source of revenue since they do not receive government funding. The Toronto Symphony Orchestra has established an endowment fund as a device to help fund its daily operations. And finally, the Winnipeg Foundation operates with substantial endowment funds. Quite often, restrictions are also placed on how the endowment income can be spent. In other words, investment income can be restricted or unrestricted. Unrestricted contributions are those that are not restricted or endowment contributions. They can be used for any purposes that are consistent with the goals and objectives of the organization.

Section 4420: Contributions Receivable Section 4420 provides guidance on how to apply accrual ing concepts to contributions. It states the following: A contribution receivable should be recognized as an asset when it meets the following criteria: (a) The amount to be received can be reasonably estimated (b) Ultimate collection is reasonably assured [4420.03]

Pledges are promises to donate cash or other assets to an NFPO, but they are legally unenforceable.

Normally a contribution receivable represents a future inflow of cash, but it could also represent the future receipt of other assets or services valued at fair value. The credit side of the journal entry could be to revenue, using the restricted fund method, or if the deferral method of recording is being used, to deferred revenue for a restricted contribution, or to increase net assets of endowments for an endowment contribution. (The restricted fund and deferral methods are discussed later in this chapter). The section provides additional guidelines for the recording of receivables associated with pledges and bequests. Because pledges cannot be legally enforced, collectibility is out of the control of the organization. If the organization has the ability to estimate the collectibility based on historical results, it should recognize the pledged amounts as a receivable offset with an allowance for estimated uncollectible amounts. Otherwise, the recognition of pledges should be delayed until the time cash is received. When an allowance for pledges is established, the debit is typically made to contribution revenue rather than to bad debt expense. Since the pledge is not legally binding, it is inappropriate to call the non-payment of a pledge a bad debt expense. Bequests also pose a problem of uncertainty relating both to the timing of receipt and to the amount to be collected. Wills must be probated and at times are subject


707


CHAPTER 12


to legal challenges. Because of this extreme uncertainty, bequests are generally not accrued until probation has been completed and the time for appeal has ed.

699

Bequests are normally not recorded until a will has been probated.

Section 4431: Tangible Capital Assets Held by Not-for-Profit Organizations In December 2010 when Part III of the Handbook was introduced, ing for capital assets was split into two sections, 4431 and 4432. Prior to the introduction of NFPO standards into the Handbook in 1997, NFPOs followed a variety of practices with regard to the financial reporting of their capital assets. Some organizations capitalized all acquisitions and amortized them over their estimated useful lives in the operating statement. Others capitalized them but did not provide amortization. A fairly large number wrote them off in their operating statements in the year of acquisition. In this latter situation, the operating statement showed revenues and expenditures, and from a perspective reflected the inflow and outflow of spendable resources. When the AcSB proposed the requirement of capitalization and amortization of all acquisitions, respondents to the exposure drafts voiced strong opposition. The arguments against capitalization were as follows: • It would change the nature of the operating statement from one that reflects resources spent to one that reflects the cost of resources used.

There was strong opposition to the proposal that all NFPOs be required to capitalize and amortize acquisitions of capital assets.

• s would not understand the new ing, having become used to seeing capital asset acquisitions as expenditures. • As most other assets appearing in a statement of financial position represent spendable resources, the addition of non-spendable resources such as unamortized capital assets would confuse readers. • Capitalization and amortization would be costly to apply, especially on a retroactive basis. • Small NFPO financial statement s are interested in seeing only what money has been spent and what money is left over. The counter-arguments in favour of capitalization were as follows: • Readers of the financial statements of profit-oriented entities are quite used to seeing capital assets in the statement of financial position and amortization in the operating statement. They are confused when they do not see these items in the financial statements of an NFPO. • The cash flow statement adequately shows resources spent. The operating statement should reflect resources used. Section 4431 requires an NFPO to capitalize all tangible capital assets in the statement of financial position and to amortize them as appropriate in the statement of operations. The cost of a purchased capital asset includes all costs incurred to make the asset ready for use. When a capital asset is donated, it is recorded at fair value (if known), and the resultant credit is recorded based on the requirements for contributions, which will be discussed later in this chapter. If the entity paid less than fair value, the asset is recorded at fair value and the difference between fair value and cost is recorded as a contribution. Capital assets of limited useful life are to be amortized on a rational basis over their estimated useful lives. No maximum period of amortization is specified. When an NFPO enters into a lease agreement that would be treated as a capital lease in accordance with Part II Section 3065, the asset is capitalized in accordance with the provisions of

GAAP require large NFPOs to capitalize and amortize their capital assets.


708


700

CHAPTER 12


that section. When an asset no longer contributes to the organization’s ability to provide services, it should be written down to estimated residual value, with the resulting loss reported as an expense in the statement of operations. Note that this is not the same impairment test as prescribed in Part II Section 3063. An exemption from the requirement to capitalize is granted to small NFPOs (those whose two-year average revenues are less than $500,000).

Small NFPOs Section 4431 contains a compromise provision applicable to NFPOs whose two-year average annual revenues in the statement of operations are less than $500,000. Organizations such as these are encouraged to follow the section’s recommendations but are exempted from doing so if they disclose the following: • ing policy for capital assets • Information about capital assets not shown in the statement of financial position • Amount expensed in the current period if their policy is to expense capital assets when acquired This leaves a small NFPO the following choices: • Expensing when acquired • Capitalizing but not amortizing • Capitalizing and amortizing

When an NFPO no longer meets the exemption test, it must capitalize and amortize its capital assets and apply the new policy on a retroactive basis.

If an NFPO has revenues above $500,000, it is required to capitalize and amortize. If its revenues subsequently fall below $500,000, it is not allowed to change its policy. If an NFPO has revenues below $500,000, chooses not to capitalize and amortize, and subsequently has revenues above $500,000, then it ceases to be a small NFPO and must capitalize and amortize prospectively. This requirement should be recognized by all small NFPOs that decide to exempt themselves from the section’s recommendations, because retroactive restatement can be costly.

Section 4432: Intangible Assets Held by Not-for-Profit Organizations This section was introduced to clarify that Part II Section 3064: Goodwill And Intangible Assets applies to an NFPO’s intangible assets. The same requirements as discussed above for tangible capital assets also apply for intangible assets. Section 4440: Collections Held by Not-for-Profit Organizations Collections are works of art and historical treasures that have been excluded from the definition of capital assets because they meet all of the following criteria: • Held for public exhibition, education, or research • Protected, cared for, and preserved • Subject to organizational policies that require any proceeds from their sale to be used to acquire other items for the collection, or for the direct care of the existing collection Collections have been excluded from the definition of capital assets, and NFPOs are allowed three alternative reporting options.

The requirements of Section 4440 allow an NFPO to choose an ing policy from the following: • Expense when acquired • Capitalize but do not amortize • Capitalize and amortize


709


CHAPTER 12


701

Although collections are usually held by museums or galleries, other organizations may also have items that meet the definition of a collection. For example, an organization’s library may include rare books that would be considered to be a collection for purposes of this section. The regular library materials, however, would not usually meet the definition of a collection. Organizations holding collections act as custodians for the public interest. They undertake to protect and preserve the collection for public exhibition, education, or research. The existence of a policy requiring that any proceeds on the sale of collection items be used to acquire additional items or for the direct care of the collection provides evidence of the organization’s commitment to act as custodian of the collection. NFPOs that have collections are required to include in their disclosures a description of the ing policies followed with regard to collections, a description of the collection, any significant changes made to the collection during the period, the amount spent on the collection during the period, the proceeds from any sales of collection items, and a statement of how the proceeds were used.

Section 4450: Reporting Controlled and Related Entities by Not-for-Profit Organizations This section outlines the financial statement presentation and disclosures required when an NFPO has a control, significant influence, t venture, or economic interest type of relationship with both profit-oriented and NFPOs. The breakdown used is quite similar to that for profit-oriented organizations, but the required financial reporting has some differences.

Control Investments An NFPO can have an investment or relationship that gives it the continuing power to determine the strategic operating, investing, and financing policies of another entity without the cooperation of others. The other entity can be profit-oriented or an NFPO. Control of a profit-oriented organization is normally evidenced by the right to appoint the majority of the board of directors because of ownership of voting shares. Because an NFPO does not issue shares, control of such an entity is normally evidenced by the right to appoint the majority of the board of directors as allowed by that entity’s by-laws or articles of incorporation.

A control investment is one that gives an NFPO control over either profit-oriented organizations or other NFPOs.

Control over NFPOs An example of a not-for-profit control situation is a national organization with local chapters. A large portion of funds raised by the local chapters goes to the national body, and any projects carried out by the local bodies must be approved (and perhaps funded) by the national organization. The Handbook’s reporting requirements are as follows. An organization should report each controlled NFPO in one of the following ways: (a) Consolidating the controlled organization in its financial statements. (b) Providing the disclosure set out in Paragraph 4450.22. (c) If the controlled organization is one of a large number of individually immaterial organizations, by providing the disclosure set out in Paragraph 4450.26. [4450.14]

Because there is no investment in the statement of financial position and no shareholders’ equity in the others, consolidation is achieved by simply

Consolidation of an NFPO is one of three alternatives allowed. The alternatives apply to each controlled NFPO.


710


702

CHAPTER 12


combining the financial statements on a line-by-line basis, and at the same time eliminating any transactions that occurred between the organizations. Accordingly, in the NFP sector, consolidated financial statements have often been referred to as combined financial statements Since three alternatives are allowed, the management of the organization has to determine the ing policy to be used. Note that the alternatives listed above are for each controlled entity. This means that if an organization has control over three NFPOs, all of which are material, it could choose to consolidate only one, and provide the required disclosure for the other two, provided that it reports consistently on a year-to-year basis. Later paragraphs further clarify the overall meaning by suggesting that if an NFPO has control over a large number of NFPOs, the decision to consolidate or not should be applied on a group basis. For example, it could establish a policy to consolidate all organizations in Groups A and B and not consolidate the organizations in Group C. Paragraph 22 requires the disclosure of the totals of all of the assets, liabilities, net assets, revenues, expenses, and cash flows of any controlled NFPOs that are not consolidated. Paragraph 26 requires the disclosure of the reasons that the controlled organizations have been neither consolidated nor included in the disclosure set out in paragraph 4450.22. Possible reasons could include cost–benefit considerations and the decision not to exercise financial control. A controlled profit-oriented organization can either be consolidated or reported using the equity method.

Control over Profit-Oriented Companies Section 4450 states an NFPO should report each controlled profit-oriented enterprise in either of the following ways: (a) Consolidating the controlled enterprise in its financial statements. (b) ing for its investment in the controlled enterprise using the equity method and disclosing total assets, liabilities, and shareholders’ equity at the reporting date and revenues, expenses, net income and cash flows for the period. It should be noted that the requirements here are also applicable to each controlled entity, which could result in some subsidiaries being reported under the equity method and others being consolidated.

A tly controlled organization can be either proportionately consolidated or reported using the equity method.

t Control This is the contractual right to tly control an organization with at least one other entity. An interest in a t venture would be reported by either method: • Proportionately consolidating the t venture. • Reporting the interest using the equity method. Consistent with the requirements for controlled entities, the alternatives here apply to each t venture, so that some may be proportionately consolidated and others may not, depending on the ing policy determined by management. The section also states that if the NFPO’s proportionate interest in the t venture cannot be determined, it should not be considered to be a t venture in accordance with this section, but might be either a significant influence or a control type of relationship. This seems to indicate that the t venture would have to be one that issued shares, and thus probably a profit-oriented organization. However, if two or three NFPOs created another NFPO as a t venture to carry out certain activities, and agreed to the percentage owned by each of the non-profit venturers, then the reporting alternatives outlined here would apply.


711


CHAPTER 12


703

Significant Influence When control is not present, the NFPO may still be able to exercise significant influence over the strategic operating, investing, and financing activities of the other entity. Factors suggesting the presence of significant influence include the ability to place on the board of directors, the ability to participate in policy making, substantial transactions between the entities, and the sharing of senior personnel. If the significant-influence investment is in a profit-oriented enterprise, it must be ed for using the equity method. If the significant-influence relationship is with another NFPO, the equity method is not used; instead, full disclosure of the relationship is required. This provision makes sense when one considers that applying the equity method requires using a percentage based on the number of shares held. Because an NFPO does not issue shares, it would be virtually impossible to determine the percentage needed to apply the method.

A significant-influence investment in a profitoriented organization is reported using the equity method. A significantinfluence investment in another NFPO requires only full disclosure of the relationship.

Economic Interest An economic interest in another NFPO exists if that organization holds resources for the reporting organization or if the reporting organization is responsible for the other organization’s debts. There are varying degrees of economic interest, ranging from control or significant influence to neither of the two. When an organization has an economic interest in another NFPO over which it does not have control or significant influence, the nature and extent of this interest should be disclosed. An investment in a profit-oriented organization that is not subject to control, significant influence, or t control, is reported at fair value or using the cost method as per the requirements in the Part II Section 3856: Financial Instruments. This concludes the discussion of Section 4450. A summary of the various types of investment that an NFPO can have and the reporting requirements for each follows:

When an organization has an economic interest in another NFPO, the nature and extent of this interest should be disclosed.

Investment

Required reporting

Control of NFPO Control of profit entity t venture Significant influence: NFPO Profit entity Economic interest Other investment: Profit entity

Consolidate or disclose Consolidate or equity method Proportionately consolidate or equity method Full disclosure Equity method Full disclosure Fair value method or cost method or amortized cost method

Section 4460: Disclosure of Related-Party Transactions by Not-for-Profit Organizations Related parties exist where one party is able to exercise control, t control, or significant influence over another party. The other party may be either another NFPO or a profit-oriented enterprise. If one NFPO has an economic interest in another NFPO, the two parties are related. A related-party transaction has occurred when there has been a transfer of economic resources or obligations or services between the parties. Unlike Part II Section 3840, which prescribes both measurement and disclosure, this standard prescribes only disclosure for relatedparty transactions and does not state any requirements related to measurement. The disclosures required here are virtually identical to those required in Part II

An NFPO must disclose all related-party transactions with another NFPO or a profit-oriented entity.


712


704

CHAPTER 12


Section 3840. This section requires that the NFPO should disclose the following information about its transactions with related parties: (a) A description of the relationship between the transacting parties. (b) A description of the transaction(s), including those for which no amount has been recorded. (c) The recorded amount of the transactions classified by financial statement category. (d) The measurement basis used for recognizing the transaction in the financial statements. (e) Amounts due to or from related parties and the and conditions relating thereto. (f) Contractual obligations with related parties, separate from other contractual obligations. (g) Contingencies involving related parties, separate from other contingencies.

Section 4470: Disclosure of Allocated Expenses by Not-for-Profit Organizations When an organization classifies its expenses by function on the statement of operations, it may need or want to allocate certain expenses to a number of functions to which the expenses relate. For example, fundraising expenses and general expenses usually contribute to or produce the output of more than one function and are often considered to be directly related to the output of each of those functions. Since aggregate amounts reported for fundraising and general functions are often of particular significance to financial statement s, this standard requires that the following be disclosed when these two types of expenses are allocated to other functions: An NFPO must disclose details related to any allocation of fundraising and general costs to different functions.

• The ing policy for the allocation of expenses among functions, the nature of the expenses being allocated, and the basis on which such allocations have been made. • The amounts allocated from functions, and the amounts and the functions to which they have been allocated. However, this section does not require organizations to classify their expenses by function or to undertake any allocations. Only if it does so is the above disclosure necessary.

ING FOR CONTRIBUTIONS An NFPO can choose either the deferral method or the restricted fund method to for contributions.

Part III has defined two methods of ing for contributions: the deferral method and the restricted fund method. The deferral method can be used with or without fund ing. The restricted fund method has to be used in combination with fund ing. If the organization wants to present an overall picture of the organization— that is, a set of statements with only one column for each year—it must use the deferral method. If it wants to report on a fund ing basis—separate columns for different funds—it can choose the deferral method for all funds or the restricted fund method. With fund ing, it is easier to present and report on the different restrictions placed on contributions. However, as we will see, the deferral method does a better job of matching revenues to expenses, which makes it easier to see what portion of expenses is financed by contributions and what portion is financed by other sources.


CHAPTER 12


713

705

The Deferral Method The deferral method matches contribution revenues with related expenses. Unrestricted contributions are reported as revenue in the period received or receivable, because there are no particular related expenses associated with them. Endowment contributions are not shown in the operating statement; rather, they are reflected in the statement of changes in net assets. This is because endowment contributions, by definition, will never have related expenses. Restricted contributions must be matched against related expenses. This matching principle has different implications for different kinds of restricted contributions, as follows:

The deferral method requires that contribution revenue be matched to expenses.

• Restricted contributions for expenses of future periods are deferred and recognized as revenue in the same periods as the related expenses are incurred. • The handling of restricted contributions for the acquisition of capital assets depends on whether related expenses are associated with them. If the capital asset is subject to amortization, the related expense is the yearly amortization. The restricted contribution is deferred and recognized as revenue on the same basis as the asset is being amortized. If the capital asset is not subject to amortization (e.g., land), there will be no expenses to match against. In the same manner as for endowment contributions, the restricted capital asset contributions of this type are reflected in the statement of changes in net assets. • Restricted contributions for expenses of the current period are recognized as revenue in the current period. Matching is achieved, and there is no need for deferral. Investment income can be either unrestricted or restricted. Unrestricted investment income is recognized as revenue when it is earned. Restricted investment income has to be recognized in the same manner as restricted contributions. For example, if an endowment contribution states that the purchasing power of the contribution must be preserved, some portion of the income earned must be used to increase the endowment. This portion is treated in exactly the same manner as an endowment contribution, and is reflected in the statement of changes in net assets. Other types of restricted investment income must be deferred and matched against expense in the manner previously discussed. If all investment income is restricted, it is quite possible that all investment income earned in a period will be deferred. The matching of revenue and expense for an NFPO is the exact opposite to that for a profit-oriented enterprise. With the latter, revenues are recognized and then expenses are matched with those revenues. With an NFPO, restricted revenues are matched to expenses. This means that if contributions have been collected to fund certain expenses and those expenses have yet to be incurred, the contributions are recognized as deferred revenue until a later period, when they can be matched with the expenses.

The Restricted Fund Method This method requires an NFPO to report a general fund, at least one restricted fund, and, if it has endowments or receives endowment contributions, an endowment fund. The general fund reports all unrestricted revenue and restricted contributions for which no corresponding restricted fund is presented. The fund balance represents net assets that are not subject to externally imposed restrictions. The

Contributions for a depreciable asset are recognized as revenue as the asset is being amortized.


714


706

CHAPTER 12


restricted funds will be used to record externally restricted revenue. Specific requirements are outlined as follows: Contributions are reported as revenue when received/ receivable if a separate restricted or endowment fund has been established for these contributions.

The provisions of the deferral method might have to be applied when the restricted fund method is used.

Fund balances for the restricted and endowment funds represent the amount of net assets restricted for that fund’s purpose.

• Endowment contributions will be reported as revenue in the endowment fund, and because there are no related expenses associated with endowment contributions, no expenses will appear in the statement of operations of the endowment fund. • The general fund records all unrestricted contributions and investment income, including unrestricted income from endowment fund investments. • If some of the endowment fund income is restricted, it is reflected as revenue in the particular restricted fund involved. • If some of the endowment fund income is permanently restricted, because the purchasing power of the endowment is required to be maintained, it is recorded as revenue of the endowment fund. • Externally restricted contributions for which there is a corresponding restricted fund are recorded as revenue of the restricted fund when received or receivable. • If an externally restricted contribution or externally restricted investment income is received for which there is no corresponding restricted fund, the amounts are recorded in the general fund in accordance with the deferral method. In other words, they are recorded as deferred revenue in the general fund and matched with the related expenses in that fund when these expenses are incurred. • If management decides to impose internal restrictions on general fund unrestricted contributions, the contributions are initially reported as revenue in the general fund. The transfers are reported in the statement of changes in fund balances below the line “excess of revenue over expenses.” Note disclosure should clearly indicate the amount of resources shown in restricted funds that have been designated as such by management, because these amounts do not satisfy the Handbook’s definition of a contribution. The excess of revenues over expenses in the general fund represents the increase in unrestricted resources during the period. The fund balance in the general fund shows the unrestricted net assets at the end of the period. A restricted fund shows no deferred revenue. The fund balance of a restricted fund represents the amount of net assets that are restricted for that particular fund’s purpose. The fund balance in the endowment fund represents the net assets that have permanent restrictions on them. Under the restricted fund method, instead of presenting a statement of changes in net assets (as is required under the deferral method of recording contributions), a statement of changes in fund balances is prepared. Because of the requirement to capitalize long-lived assets, capital assets must appear on the statement of financial position of either the general fund or one of the restricted funds (excluding the endowment fund). This has been a summary of the two methods of ing for contributions. Before we show these concepts in an extensive illustration, some additional topics must be addressed.

NET ASSETS INVESTED IN CAPITAL ASSETS The Handbook provides an option to report “net assets invested in capital assets” as a separate component of net assets. This amount represents resources spent on and tied up in capital assets and therefore not available for future spending.


715


CHAPTER 12


707

The amount shown depends on the method used to for contributions. If the restricted fund method is used, the amount represents the unamortized portion of all capital assets less associated debt, regardless of whether they were purchased from restricted or unrestricted resources. If the deferral method is used, the amount presented represents the unamortized portion of capital assets (net of associated debt) that were purchased with unrestricted resources. The following example will illustrate the differences.

Example At the beginning of the current period, an NFPO purchases equipment costing $5,000 with a useful life of two years. We will assume first that the equipment is acquired from restricted resources, and then from unrestricted resources. We will focus on the equipment transaction only, and the effect of the transaction on the financial statements of the NFPO. In order to do this, we also assume that the organization was formed at the beginning of the period and that the equipment acquisition is the only transaction that has occurred.

The Restricted Fund Method Purchase from Restricted Resources Assume that the equipment is purchased from a restricted fund contribution of $5,100. The capital fund records contributions of this nature, as well as the acquisition of capital assets and their subsequent amortization. The journal entries are as follows: Capital fund Cash Contribution revenue

5,100 5,100

Equipment Cash

5,000

Amortization expense Accumulated amortization

2,500

5,000 2,500

Because the capital fund did not exist before the start of the period, the financial statements at the end of the period appear as follows: CAPITAL FUND OPERATING STATEMENT AND CHANGES IN FUND BALANCE Contribution revenue Amortization expense Excess of revenue over expense Fund balance—start of period Fund balance—end of period

$5,100 2,500 2,600 0 $2,600

The restricted contribution is reported as revenue when received.

STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION Cash Equipment Accumulated amortization Total assets Fund balance Invested in capital assets Externally restricted funds Total fund balance

$ 100 $5,000 2,500

2,500 $2,600 $2,500 100 $2,600

An NFPO can report “net assets invested in capital assets” as a separate component of net assets.


716


708

CHAPTER 12

The unamortized balance of equipment purchased with restricted resources is reflected in the amount of fund balance invested in capital assets.


Note that the fund balance section shows two classifications: • The $2,500 invested in capital assets represents the unamortized balance of spent resources that have not yet been reflected in the statement of operations as an expense. • Externally restricted funds of $100 represent resources that can be spent only to acquire capital assets. As the equipment is amortized on the operating statement, the fund balance itself is reduced, and it is the statement of financial position category “invested in capital assets” that reflects the reduction.

Purchase from Unrestricted Resources Now assume that the equipment is purchased from unrestricted resources. The general fund receives an unrestricted contribution of $5,100 and uses it to acquire equipment. The journal entries in the general fund and the capital fund are as follows: General fund Cash Contribution revenue Transfer to capital fund Cash

5,100 5,100 5,000 5,000

The general fund’s operating statement after the transaction shows the following: GENERAL FUND STATEMENT OF OPERATIONS AND CHANGES IN FUND BALANCE Transfers between funds are reported in changes in fund balances, not as revenues and expenses.

Revenues Expenses Excess of revenue over expense Fund balance—start of period Transfer to capital fund Fund balance—end of period

$5,100 0 5,100 0 (5,000) $ 100

STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION Cash Total assets Fund balance Unrestricted funds Total fund balance

$ 100 $ 100 $ 100 $ 100

The capital fund records the acquisition of the equipment and its amortization with the following entries: Capital fund Equipment Transfer from general fund Amortization expense Accumulated amortization

5,000 5,000 2,500 2,500


717


CHAPTER 12


709

The end-of-period financial statements show the following: CAPITAL FUND STATEMENT OF OPERATIONS AND CHANGES IN FUND BALANCE $2,500 (2,500) 0 5,000 $2,500

Amortization expense Excess of revenue over expense Fund balance—start of period Transfer from general fund Fund balance—end of period

STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION Equipment Accumulated amortization Total assets Fund balance Invested in capital assets Total fund balance

$5,000 2,500 $2,500 $2,500 $2,500

The unamortized balance of equipment purchased with unrestricted resources is also reflected in the amount of fund balance invested in capital assets.

Note that regardless of the source of resources used to acquire the equipment (restricted or unrestricted), the unamortized balance appears as an asset on the statement of financial position of the capital fund, and the fund balance shows a classification “invested in capital assets” in an amount equal to the asset balance. This is not the case when the deferral method with no fund ing is used.

The Deferral Method Purchase from Restricted Resources Assume that the equipment is purchased from a restricted fund contribution of $5,100. The journal entries to record the contribution, acquisition, and first year’s amortization are as follows: Cash Deferred contributions—capital assets

5,100

Equipment Cash

5,000


2,500

Deferred contributions—capital assets Contribution revenue

2,500

5,100 5,000 2,500 2,500

Financial statements that reflect these transactions are as follows: STATEMENT OF OPERATIONS AND CHANGES IN NET ASSETS Contribution revenue Amortization expense Excess of revenue over expenses Net assets—start of period Net assets—end of period

$2,500 2,500 0 0 $ 0

Deferred contributions includes unspent resources restricted to purchase capital assets in the future.


718


710

CHAPTER 12


STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION Cash Equipment Accumulated amortization Total assets

Deferred contributions includes restricted resources that have been spent to acquire capital assets but have not yet been matched to amortization expense.

$ 100 $5,000 2,500

Deferred contributions—capital assets Net Assets Unrestricted Total

2,500 $2,600 $2,600 0 $2,600

Deferred contributions of $2,600 includes two components: $100 in unspent resources restricted to future spending on capital assets and $2,500 in restricted resources that has been spent acquiring capital assets, but has not yet been reflected as revenue on the operating statement because there has yet to be an expense to match it against. When amortization occurs, an equal amount is recognized as revenue. Because there is no effect on the “excess of revenue over expense” amount, there is no effect on the equity section “net assets.” As the equipment decreases on the asset side due to amortization, the amount “deferred contributions” decreases by the same amount on the liability side. Because this equipment was purchased from restricted resources, there can be no amount shown under “invested in capital assets” in the net assets section.

Purchase from Unrestricted Resources Assume now that the equipment was purchased from an unrestricted contribution of $5,100. The journal entries to record the events are as follows: Unrestricted contributions are reported as revenue when received.

Cash Contribution revenue

5,100

Equipment Cash

5,000


2,500

5,100 5,000 2,500

The financial statements that reflect these transactions are as follows: STATEMENT OF OPERATIONS Contribution revenue Amortization expense Excess of revenue over expenses

$5,100 2,500 $2,600

STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION Cash Equipment Accumulated amortization

Net assets invested in capital assets represents the unamortized balance of equipment purchased with unrestricted resources.

Total assets Net Assets Invested in capital assets Unrestricted Total

$ 100 5,000 2,500 2,500 $2,600 $2,500 100 $2,600


CHAPTER 12


719

711

Note that the statement of operations does not include a reconciliation of opening and ending net assets. A separate statement is usually presented. Because net assets represents total equity, the changes in the classifications of this equity must be shown in the statement as follows: STATEMENT OF CHANGES IN NET ASSETS Invested in capital assets Balance—start of period Excess of revenue over expenses Investment in capital assets Balance—end of period

$ 0 ($2,500) 5,000 $2,500

Unrestricted $

0 5,100 (5,000) $ 100

Total $

0 2,600 0 $2,600

Under the deferral method, a statement of changes in net assets is prepared.

The “unrestricted” column represents resources that can be spent for any purpose. The organization received an unrestricted contribution of $5,100 and spent $5,000 on equipment. At the end of the period it has $100 left to spend. The transfer of $5,000 to the category “invested in capital assets” depicts the acquisition of capital assets from unrestricted resources. The operating statement shows an excess of revenue over expenses of $2,600. A $2,500 deduction for the amortization of assets purchased with unrestricted resources was used to arrive at the excess of revenue over expenses. Note that this does not represent resources spent, but rather the cost of services provided by the equipment. By transferring this deduction to “invested in capital assets,” the amount of the operating results allocated to unrestricted resources becomes $5,100, which represents the actual inflow of spendable resources, and the amount shown for “invested in capital assets” is equal to the unamortized balance of the equipment purchased from unrestricted resources.

Donated Capital Assets, Materials, and Services Donated Capital Assets

An NFPO is required to record the donation of capital assets at fair value. If fair value cannot be determined, a nominal value will be used. A nominal value could be in the range of $1 to $100 for small NFPOs, and $1,000 and higher for large NFPOs. If an organization receives an unsolicited donation of a capital asset that it has no intention of using, it should be reflected in its financial statements as “other assets” instead of as a capital asset, and a loss or gain should be reflected in the statement of operations when disposal of the asset occurs. The following illustrates the recording of donated capital assets.

Example A capital asset with a fair value of $10,000 is donated to an NFPO. The initial treatment depends on which of the two methods of recording contributions is being used. If the deferral method is used and the capital asset is subject to amortization (e.g., equipment), the contribution should be deferred and revenue should be recognized later, to match to the amortization expense. The journal entry would be as follows: Equipment Deferred contributions—capital assets

10,000 10,000

Donated capital assets must be recorded at fair value or, if fair value cannot be determined, at a nominal value.

A donated depreciable asset is reported as deferred contributions under the deferral method.


720


712

CHAPTER 12


Assuming a five-year useful life, in each succeeding year the following entries will be made as the equipment is amortized: Amortization expense Accumulated amortization

2,000

Deferred contributions—capital assets Contribution revenue

2,000

2,000 2,000

If the deferral method is being used and the asset is not subject to amortization (e.g., land), the following entry is made: Land Net assets invested in capital assets

10,000 10,000

Because no future expense will be associated with the asset, deferral is not required and the donation of land is reflected in the statement of net assets. If the restricted fund method is being used, the fair value of the donated capital asset is recorded as revenue in the capital fund as follows: A donated depreciable asset is reported as contribution revenue under the restricted fund method.

Capital fund Equipment Contribution revenue—donated equipment

10,000 10,000

Donated land will be treated in the same manner, except that the debit will be to land instead of equipment. Small NFPOs that have adopted a policy of non-capitalization of acquisitions of capital assets will still be required to record donated capital assets at fair value. For example, the donation of equipment with a fair value of $10,000 is recorded in the following manner: Equipment expense Contribution revenue—donated equipment

10,000 10,000

Regardless of whether the organization uses the deferral method or the restricted fund method, the entry is the same because the required matching automatically occurs with the entry. Donated materials and services can be reported if they are needed by the organization.

Donated Materials and Services The requirements for the reporting of donated materials and services are different from those for donated capital assets. An NFPO has the option of reporting or not reporting donated material and services; however, it can only report these donations if fair value can be determined, if the materials and services would normally be used in the organization’s operations and if the NFPO would have been purchased these material and services if they had not been donated. Section 4410 also makes it clear that the fair value of the services of volunteers is normally not recognized due to the difficulty in determining such values. Furthermore, an organization would probably not record donated materials if it acts as an intermediary for immediate distribution. For example, due to the difficulty of determining fair values and the large number of transactions, a food bank would not normally record the donation of food that it distributes to its clients.

Example A radio station donated free airtime to help a charity publicize its fundraising campaign. The fair value of the airtime is $5,200, and the policy of the


721


CHAPTER 12


713

organization is to record the value of donated materials and services. The journal entry is as follows: Advertising expense Revenue—donated airtime

5,200 5,200

If the restricted fund method was being used, this entry would be made in the general fund. If the donation consisted of office supplies rather than airtime, the entry to record the donation under the deferral method would be as follows: Office supplies (asset) Deferred contribution

5,200 5,200

If half of the supplies were used, the entries would be as follows: Supplies expense Office supplies

2,600

Deferred contribution Contribution revenue

2,600

2,600 2,600

Donated materials and services should be reported as contribution revenue when the materials and services are expensed.

The same entries would likely be used under the restricted fund method. Due to the nature of the items donated, the transaction would normally be recorded in the general fund. The deferral method must be used for the general fund. See Self-Study Problem 1 for a comprehensive problem involving an NFPO. It includes many of the issues we have covered in this chapter so far.

BUDGETARY CONTROL AND ENCUMBRANCES Budgeting is an essential element of the financial planning, control, and performance evaluation processes for some NFPOs. The budget serves several important purposes: 1. Expresses the strategic plan. If, for example, more money is budgeted for research and less for recreational activities, s of the financial statements are made aware of the strategic priorities of the organization. 2. Serves as an expression of financial intent for the fiscal year. The budget presents the financial plan for the NFPO for the period. 3. Provides control because it establishes spending limitations for each activity. 4. Offers a means of evaluating performance by allowing a comparison of actual results with the levels found in the budget. 5. Indicates whether the NFPO anticipates having sufficient revenues to pay for the anticipated expenditures. In the current economic climate when many NFPOs face declining contributions, the amount and handling of proposed deficits should be of interest to every stakeholder. Governments and some NFPOs often use a formal budget recording system together with an encumbrance system as a device to help control spending. Prior to the commencement of a fiscal year, a formal budget is drawn up that shows the budgeted revenues and expenses for the coming year. The usual starting point in the process is a preliminary expense budget based on how the managers of the organization would like to see spending take place. Then a revenue budget

LO4 The actual recording of the budget in the records, along with the use of an encumbrance system, is a device used by NFPOs and governments to control spending.


722


714

CHAPTER 12


is prepared based on the expected results from the revenue-raising activities of the coming year. If this revenue budget is realistic, the next step is to scale down the controllable expenses so that the organization does not plan to have expenses greater than its expected revenues. NFPOs and local governments do not (and in the case of many local governments, are not allowed to) budget for a deficit in any one year unless they have a surplus from prior years. Because both types of organizations raise money each year and then spend it, any deficit spending in a particular year eventually must be offset by surplus spending in later years. Once the budget has been formally ed by the board of directors (or the local government legislative body), the spending for applicable budgeted expenses commences. Often an NFPO’s actual expenses turn out to be equal to the amount budgeted, and problems arise when actual revenues are less than budget. Government grants are sometimes reduced, or do not increase as much as was budgeted for, or some fundraising activity is not as successful as was forecast. If this happens over a series of years, the accumulated deficit problem will have to be addressed and the NFPO will have to organize special deficit-reduction fundraising activities in addition to the normal, annual fundraising for operations.

Budgetary Control If deficits are to be avoided, the managers of NFPOs must have timely information regarding actual results compared with amounts budgeted. This can be accomplished by formally recording the budget in the ing system. Budget s can be incorporated in an NFPO’s general ledger.

Example The following is the summarized budget that was approved by the board of directors of an NFPO: Budgeted revenues (in detail) Budgeted expenses (in detail) Budgeted surplus

$900,000 890,000 $ 10,000

If the organization records the budget in its ing records, the following journal entry is made at the start of the fiscal year: Estimated revenues (control ) Appropriations (control ) Budgetary fund balance

Budget s are used as a control device, and the amounts are not usually reflected in an NFPO’s external financial statements.

900,000 890,000 10,000

While it may appear strange to debit an for budgeted revenues and to credit an for budgeted expenses, the logic becomes clearer when one considers that budgeted revenues represent expected resource inflows and that budgeted expenses (with the exception of amortization) represent expected resource outflows. The general ledger s used are control s to the very detailed subsidiary ledger s needed to keep track of actual versus budgeted amounts, particularly in relation to expenses. Spending is often a continuous process, while revenues are received at various times throughout the year. If during the year it appears that actual revenues will be less than budget, it is a difficult task to reduce the budgeted expenses remaining in order to avoid a deficit. It is, however, possible with a system such as this to ensure that actual expenses do not exceed budget. The overall concept of “spending” in this context is based on an accrual system of measurement, not on a cash basis. At the end of the fiscal year the budget s are reversed as part of the closing journal entries, and these amounts are not reflected in the organization’s external financial statements.


723


CHAPTER 12


Encumbrance ing This involves making entries in the ing records to record the issuance of purchase orders for the acquisition of goods and services from outside suppliers. The amounts recorded are estimates of the actual costs. It is not the normal practice to use encumbrance ing for employee wage costs, because this particular type of expenditure can be controlled by other means; nor is it normal to use encumbrances for amortization. When the goods and services ordered are actually received, the original encumbrance entry is reversed and the invoiced cost of the goods or services acquired is recorded.

715

Encumbrance ing involves the actual recording of purchase orders at the time of issuance. From a control standpoint, a budget item has been spent at this moment.

Example Purchase order #3056A is issued for the acquisition of office supplies expected to cost $950. The journal entry to record the purchase order is as follows: Encumbrances Estimated commitments2

950 950

When the supplies ordered under purchase order #3056A are received at an invoiced cost of $954, the following journal entries are required: Estimated commitments Encumbrances

950

Supplies expense s payable

954

950 954

Control over expenditures is achieved by mandating that the spending of a budgeted amount has occurred when the purchase order is issued, not when the goods are received or paid for. In this example, if the budgeted amount for supplies is $3,000, there is an unspent budget amount of $2,050 after the purchase order is issued, and an unspent amount of $2,046 after the receipt of the actual supplies. The use of encumbrance ing along with a system of budgetary control prevents the issuing of purchase orders when there are no uncommitted budgeted amounts. The only ing problem involved is the financial statement presentation of outstanding purchase orders at the end of a fiscal period. Should the encumbrances be reflected in the operations statement as similar to expenses, and the estimated commitments appear in the statement of financial position as liabilities? In the past, NFPOs have presented these s in this manner. Currently, encumbrances are not recognized in the financial statements because they do not meet the definition of a liability. A purchase order is an executory contract under which neither party has performed. No obligation exists until goods are delivered. It follows that outstanding encumbrances should not be reflected as elements of financial statements, but rather should be disclosed in the footnotes to the statements if the amounts are material.3

COMPREHENSIVE ILLUSTRATION OF THE RESTRICTED FUND METHOD The following example (with 000s omitted) will be used to illustrate the journal entries made for various funds and the annual general-purpose financial statements prepared using the restricted fund method of ing for contributions. The Blue Shield Agency is a charitable organization located in a mid-sized Canadian city. The major goal of the organization is to provide food and shelter

Amounts for outstanding encumbrances are considered to be executory contracts and, therefore, are not recorded in an NFPO’s external financial statements.

LO5


724


716

CHAPTER 12


for the homeless. It operates out of its own premises, and while it has some permanent employees, it also relies heavily on volunteers. The agency’s funds have four sources: • Government grants are received annually to fund the regular food and shelter operating activities. When the need arises, special government grants are solicited to fund capital asset additions and major renovations. • Donations are received as a result of public campaigns held each March to raise funds for the current year’s operating costs. • A United Way grant is received each November to help fund the next year’s operations. • Investment income is received from an endowment fund and other investments. The agency maintains its records in accordance with the restricted fund method of ing for contributions, and prepares its annual financial statements on this basis. The three funds being used are described below. The general fund captures the agency’s operating activities.

General Fund This fund is used to record the agency’s operating activities. Revenues consist of government operating grants, the proceeds from the annual fundraising campaign, the United Way grant, investment income from the endowment fund, and term deposit interest. Each year, the grant from the United Way is recorded as deferred revenue to be matched against the operating expenses of the year following. Expenses are for the food and shelter programs and for istration costs. An encumbrance system is used to ensure that costs do not exceed budgeted amounts, but the budget itself is not formally recorded in the ing records. While some donated materials and services are received each year, no record of these donations is made in the ledger s. Small-equipment purchases made from this fund are capitalized in the capital fund.

Capital Fund This fund is used to for restricted funds raised for building and equipment acquisitions. The capital fund also records the capitalization of buildings and equipment and the amortization taken. Equipment acquisitions made from the general fund are also capitalized in this fund. Approximately 20 years ago the city donated a building to the agency. While the city retained title to the land on which the building is situated, the agency will not be required to move, and the building will not be torn down, as long as the agency continues with its programs. The value of the donated building was not recorded at the time of the donation because it was the organization’s policy not to capitalize buildings and equipment. When the current Handbook sections became operative several years ago, the organization spent considerable time and money searching past records to determine the cost of capital assets purchased from both restricted and non-restricted contributions and the fair values of capital assets donated. The new Handbook sections had to be applied retrospectively, and the following journal entry was made in the capital fund at that time to accomplish this: The previously unreported capital assets were recorded in the capital fund with an accompanying increase in net assets.

Equipment and furniture Buildings Accumulated amortization Fund balance—investment in capital assets

1,100 2,000 1,200 1,900


725


CHAPTER 12


717

Endowment Fund The $500 in this fund was bequeathed to the agency by its founder five years ago. Investment income earned is to be used for operating purposes and is recorded in the general fund. The statements of financial position of the funds of Blue Shield as at January 1, Year 6 (the start of the next fiscal year), are presented in Exhibit 12.2. This form of presentation of fund financial statements is called the multicolumn approach because each of the fund’s financial statements is presented in its own separate column. If fund ing is used, the Handbook requires that totals be shown for each item presented in the statement of financial position and statement of changes in fund balances, so that the “big picture” for the entire organization can be seen. This approach can become very cumbersome if an organization has a large number of funds that need to be presented separately because of all of the restrictions involved. An alternative is to combine the funds into a single set of statements, use the deferral method of ing for contributions, and provide extensive footnote disclosure of resource restrictions. For the statement of operations, a total column must be presented for general funds, endowment

EXHIBIT 12.2 BLUE SHIELD AGENCY STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION January 1, Year 6 (in thousands of dollars) General fund Current Assets Cash and term deposits Pledges receivable

$417 490 907

Investments Capital assets: Equipment and furniture Buildings Accumulated amortization Total assets Current Liabilities s payable Wages payable Accrued liabilities Deferred revenue Fund Balances Investment in capital assets Externally restricted Unrestricted Total liabilities and fund balances

$907 $613 70 82 40 805

102 102 $907

Capital fund $

Endowment fund

Total

$500

$ 479 490 969 500

$500

1,482 2,095 (1,517) 2,060 $3,529

62

62

1,482 2,095 (1,517) 2,060 $2,122 $

50

$ 663 70 82 40 855

50 2,060 12

$500

2,072 $2,122

500 $500

2,060 512 102 2,674 $3,529

When reporting on a fund basis, the total for each financial statement item must be shown.

Instead of a section for owner’s equity, an NFPO’s statement of financial position has a section called “fund balances” or “surplus.”


726


718

CHAPTER 12


funds, and restricted funds. Although it is desirable to show a total for all funds, it is not necessary under the restricted fund method.

Year 6 Events The year’s events are summarized as follows (all dollar amounts are in thousands unless stated otherwise): (a) The s and wages payable and the accrued liabilities at the beginning of the year were paid. (b) The deferred revenue from Year 5 consisted of the grant from the United Way. An entry was made to recognize this as revenue in Year 6. (c) The pledges receivable at the beginning of the year were collected in full. (d) The fundraising campaign was held in March to collect funds for Year 6 operations. Cash of $1,187 was collected, and pledges expected to realize $800 were received. Total fundraising costs were $516, of which $453 was paid in cash, $50 is owed to suppliers, and $13 has been accrued. (e) During Year 6, the agency announced a plan to construct an addition to its building at an estimated cost of $1,500. The budget includes equipment acquisitions. The addition will be built in two phases, with completion expected in Year 8. At the end of Year 6 the first phase was out for tender, with construction to commence early in Year 7. The government announced a grant of $600 in Year 6 to cover the first phase and has remitted $450 of this, with the balance promised in Year 7. The agency spent $103 on equipment near the end of Year 6, of which $91 has been paid and $12 is owed. At the beginning of the year, the agency had $62 on hand from a previous building campaign and an unpaid liability of $50 for capital asset purchases. A public campaign will be conducted next year to raise the balance of the funds needed to complete the project. (f) Government grants for operating purposes totalled $1,200 in Year 6, of which $910 was received during the year, with the balance expected in January, Year 7. (g) The agency uses an encumbrance system as a means of controlling expenditures. (Note: Wages of agency employees are not subject to encumbrance because purchase orders are not issued for this type of expenditure.) During the year, orders estimated to total $1,964 were issued for the purchase of goods and services. (h) Invoices totalling $1,866 were received on purchase orders originally recorded at an estimated cost of $1,870. Suppliers were paid $1,446 on for these invoices, and the balance owing is still outstanding. The costs were allocated as follows: Shelter program Food program istration

$650 960 256

(i) The total wage costs, of which $357 was paid and $183 is payable at year-end, were as follows: Shelter program Food program istration

$ 90 150 300


727


CHAPTER 12


719

(j) The United Way grant amounting to $65 was received in December. (k) Late in the year a prominent er donated $50 to be held in endowment, with the income earned to be unrestricted. (l) The investments in the endowment fund earned interest of $40; a further $14 in interest was received from the term deposits held in the general fund. (m) Refrigeration equipment costing $3 was purchased with general fund cash. (n) The Year 6 amortization charges amounted to $150 of which $90 pertains to capital assets that had been donated or purchased with funds restricted for the purchase of capital assets and of which $60 pertains to capital assets that had been purchased with unrestricted funds. (o) At the end of the year the balances in the encumbrance s were closed. The journal entries required to record these events in each of the three funds are presented next in the order listed: (a) General fund s payable Wages payable Accrued liabilities Cash Capital fund s payable Cash

613 70 82 765

ing records are maintained for each individual fund. Journal entries show the fund being adjusted.

50 50

(b) General fund Deferred revenue Revenue—United Way grant

40 40

(c) General fund Cash Pledges receivable

490 490

(d) General fund Cash Pledges receivable Revenue—donations Expenses—fundraising Cash s payable Accrued liabilities

1,187 800 1,987 516 453 50 13

(e) Capital fund Cash Government grant receivable Revenue—government grant Equipment Cash s payable

450 150 600 103 91 12

(f) General fund Cash Government grant receivable Revenue—government grant

Contributions and pledges for the current year are reported as revenue in the current year.

910 290 1,200

Contributions and pledges for a restricted fund are reported as revenue when received/receivable.


728


720

CHAPTER 12


(g) General fund Encumbrances Estimated commitments Encumbrances are reversed when the goods and services are received.

1,964 1,964

(h) General fund Estimated commitments Encumbrances Expenses—shelter program Expenses—food program Expenses—istration Cash s payable

1,870 1,870 650 960 256 1,446 420

(i) General fund Expenses—shelter program Expenses—food program Expenses—istration Cash Wages payable Contributions for next year’s activities are deferred when a separate restricted fund is not established for the contributions.

90 150 300 357 183

(j) General fund Cash Deferred revenue—United Way

65 65

(k) Endowment fund Cash Revenue—contribution

50 50

(l) General fund Cash Revenue—investment income

54 54

(m) General fund Transfer to capital fund Cash Capital fund Equipment Transfer from general fund

3 3 3 3

(n) Capital fund Expenses—amortization Accumulated amortization

150 150

(o) General fund Estimated commitments Encumbrances

94 94

After these journal entries are posted, financial statements as at December 31, Year 6, can be prepared as shown in Exhibit 12.3. Note that while a fund type of cash flow statement could be prepared, the one in this illustration has been prepared on a non-fund basis, which is in accordance with the Handbook’s pronouncements. Letters shown in parentheses represent the journal entries affecting the cash .


CHAPTER 12


729

721

EXHIBIT 12.3 BLUE SHIELD AGENCY STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION December 31, Year 6 (in thousands of dollars)

Current Assets Cash and term deposits Pledges receivable Government grants receivable

General fund

Capital fund

Endowment fund

$

$ 371

$ 50

99 800 290 1,189

Investments Capital assets: Equipment and furniture Buildings Accumulated depreciation $1,189

Total assets Current Liabilities s payable Wages payable Accrued liabilities Deferred revenue

$ 470 183 13 65 731

Fund Balances Investment in capital assets4 Externally restricted funds Unrestricted funds Total liabilities and fund balances

150 521

1,588 2,095 (1,667) 2,016 $2,537 $

Total

50 500

$ 520 800 440 1,760 500

$550

1,588 2,095 (1,667) 2,016 $4,276

12

$ 482 183 13 65 743

12 2,016 509

$550

458 458

2,525

550

2,016 1,059 458 3,533

$1,189

$2,537

$550

$4,276

BLUE SHIELD AGENCY STATEMENT OF REVENUES, EXPENSES, AND CHANGES IN FUND BALANCES for the Year Ended December 31, Year 6 (in thousands of dollars) General fund Revenues Government grants United Way grant Contributions Investment income

$1,200 40 1,987 54 3,281

Capital fund

Endowment fund

$ 600 $ 50

600

The deferral method is used to for contributions reported in the general fund.

50

Total $1,800 40 2,037 54 3,931

(continued)

Fund balances show the restrictions on the net assets of the organization.


730


722

CHAPTER 12


EXHIBIT 12.3

(continued ) General fund

Expenses are classified by function.

Expenses Shelter program Food program istration Fundraising Amortization

Capital fund

Endowment fund

740 1,110 556 516

Excess of revenue over expenses Interfund transfers Fund balances, January 1 Fund balances, December 31

Total 740 1,110 556 516 150 3,072 859

2,922 359 (3) 102

150 150 450 3 2,072

500

2,674

$ 458

$2,525

$550

$3,533

50

BLUE SHIELD AGENCY CASH FLOW STATEMENT for the Year Ended December 31, Year 6 (in thousands of dollars) It is not required to present a cash flow statement on a fund basis.

Cash Flows from Operating Activities Cash received from government operating grants (f) Cash received from United Way grant (j) Cash received from general contributions (c), (d) Cash received from investment income (l) Cash paid to suppliers (a), (h) Cash paid to employees (a), (i) Cash paid for fundraising (d) Net cash used in operating activities

$ 910 65 1,677 54 (2,141) (427) (453) (315)

Cash Flows from Investing Activities Cash paid for capital asset acquisitions (a), (e), (m) Net cash used in investing activities

(144) (144)

Cash Flows from Financing Activities Contributions of cash for endowment (k) Cash received from government grant (e) Net cash generated through financing activities

50 450 500

Net increase in cash and term deposits Cash and term deposits—January 1 Cash and term deposits—December 31

41 479 $ 520

The closing entries for each fund are prepared as follows: Revenues, expenses, and fund transfers are closed to fund balances.

General fund Revenue—government grant Revenue—United Way grant Revenue—contributions Revenue—investment income Expenses—shelter program Expenses—food program Expenses—istration Expenses—fundraising Fund balance

1,200 40 1,987 54 740 1,110 556 516 359


CHAPTER 12

Fund balance Transfer to capital fund Capital fund Revenue—government grant Expenses—amortization Fund balance Transfer from general fund Fund balance Endowment fund Revenue contributions Fund balance


731

723

3 3 600 150 450 3 3 50 50

This comprehensive example has illustrated the s used and the resulting financial statements under the restricted fund method. The extensive footnote disclosures required by the Handbook have not been illustrated.

COMPREHENSIVE ILLUSTRATION OF THE DEFERRAL METHOD

LO6

To illustrate the journal entries made and the annual general-purpose financial statements prepared using the deferral method of ing for contributions, we will use the same basic information as was used in the previous example (with 000s omitted). Although not required, Blue Shield will show “net assets invested in capital assets” as a separate component of net assets. When the Handbook’s current NFPO sections became operative several years ago, the organization spent considerable time and money searching past records to determine the cost of capital assets purchased from both restricted and nonrestricted contributions, as well as the fair values of capital assets donated. Because the new Handbook had to be applied retrospectively, the following journal entries were made at that time to accomplish this: Equipment and furniture Accumulated amortization Net assets invested in capital assets

1,100 300 800

This entry recognized the cost of equipment acquired in past years using unrestricted contributions and the accumulated amortization to date. Buildings Accumulated amortization Deferred contributions related to capital assets

2,000 900 1,100

This entry recorded the fair value of the building donated by the city and the accumulated amortization taken to date. A capital asset donation is treated in the same manner as a contribution restricted for the purchase of a capital asset. As the asset is amortized, a portion of the deferred contribution is recognized as a match against this expense. The statement of financial position of Blue Shield as at January 1, Year 6 (the start of the next fiscal year), is presented in Exhibit 12.4. When this statement of financial position is compared to the statement of financial position under the restricted fund method (see Exhibit 12.2), the amounts used on the asset side are fairly obvious. The liability side needs further clarification. The amount in deferred revenue is the United Way grant. The deferred

Net assets invested in capital assets represent the portion of unrestricted net assets that is tied up in capital assets and is not available for future spending. Deferred contributions represent the unamortized amount of capital assets either donated or acquired with restricted contributions.


732


724

CHAPTER 12


EXHIBIT 12.4 BLUE SHIELD AGENCY STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION January 1, Year 6 (in thousands of dollars) It is quite common to not present separate funds when the entity uses the deferral method.

Current Assets Cash and term deposits Pledges receivable Investments Capital assets: Equipment and furniture Buildings Accumulated amortization Total assets Current Liabilities s payable Wages payable Accrued liabilities Deferred revenue

Long-Term Liabilities Deferred contributions related to capital assets Deferred building campaign contributions Total liabilities Net assets invested in capital assets represents the unamortized amount of capital assets purchased from unrestricted contributions.

The deferred contributions distinguish between unspent contributions and the unamortized portion of contributions being matched to amortization expense.

Net Assets Net assets invested in capital assets5 Net assets restricted for endowment purposes Unrestricted net assets Total liabilities and net assets

$ 479 490 969 500 1,482 2,095 (1,517) 2,060 $3,529 $ 663 70 82 40 855 920 12 932 1,787 1,140 500 102 1,742 $3,529

building campaign contributions balance is the externally restricted fund balance from the capital fund, and represents restricted funds received but not spent on capital assets. When this money is spent, an amount will be transferred from this deferred contribution to the deferred contributions related to capital assets . The deferred contributions related to capital assets balance represents that portion of the unamortized balance of capital assets that was either donated or purchased from contributions restricted for capital asset purchases. This will be transferred to revenue in future periods as these assets are amortized. The differences in presentation are as follows: Restricted fund method: Fund balances—investment in capital assets Fund balances—externally restricted

$2,060 12 $2,072


733


CHAPTER 12


Deferral method: Liability—deferred contributions related to capital assets Liability—deferred building campaign contributions

$ 920 12 932 1,140 $2,072

Net assets—net assets invested in capital assets

725

The financial statement presentation for contributions is substantially different under the two different reporting methods.

The $500 net assets restricted for endowment purposes is the fund balance from the endowment fund and originated from the founder’s bequest. Interest earned is not restricted. The unrestricted net asset balance comes from the general fund balance.

Year 6 Events The year’s events for all transactions are the same as were used in the previous example. The journal entries required to record these events are presented next in the order listed. (a) s payable Wages payable Accrued liabilities Cash

(b) Deferred revenue

663 70 82 815 40

Revenue—United Way grant

(c) Cash

40 490

Pledges receivable

(d) Cash Pledges receivable Revenue—donations Expenses—fundraising Cash s payable Accrued liabilities

(e) Cash Government grant receivable Deferred building campaign contributions

490 1,187 800 1,987 516

450 150 600 103

Deferred building campaign contributions Deferred contributions—capital assets

103

Government grant receivable Revenue—government grant

(g) Encumbrances

91 12 103 910 290 1,200 1,964

Estimated commitments

(h) Estimated commitments Encumbrances Expenses—shelter program Expenses—food program Expenses—istration Cash s payable

Contributions and pledges for the current year are reported as revenue in the current year.

453 50 13

Equipment Cash s payable

(f) Cash

Fund ing is not applied and journal entries are not segregated by fund.

1,964 1,870 1,870 650 960 256 1,446 420

Contributions restricted for depreciable capital assets are reported as deferred contributions.


734


726

CHAPTER 12


(i) Expenses—shelter program Expenses—food program Expenses—istration Cash Wages payable Contributions for next year’s activities are deferred until related expenses are recognized.

(j) Cash

90 150 300 357 183 65

Deferred revenue—United Way

(k) Cash

65 50

Net assets—endowment Endowment contributions are reported directly in net assets.

(l) Cash

50 54

Revenue—investment income

(m) Equipment

54 3

Cash

(n) Expenses—amortization

3 150

Accumulated amortization Deferred contributions are brought into income as the capital assets are amortized over their useful lives.

Deferred contributions—capital assets Amortization of deferred contributions

(o) Estimated commitments Encumbrances

The excess of revenues over expenses is split between invested in capital assets and unrestricted in the statement of changes in net assets.

150 90 90 94 94

After these journal entries are posted, financial statements as at December 31, Year 6, can be prepared as shown in Exhibit 12.5. The statement of revenue and expenses shows not only unrestricted revenues and expenses but also the restricted revenues recognized during the year as a match to the expenses associated with them (amortization in this case). The $299 excess of revenues over expenses is transferred to the “total” column in the statement of changes in net assets. In the statement of changes in net assets, the $60 amortization expense from assets acquired with unrestricted resources is transferred so that it is deducted in the invested in capital assets column, leaving $359 as the amount of operating results allocated to unrestricted resources. The unrestricted resources that were spent on equipment during the period ($3) are shown as a transfer from the unrestricted column to the invested in capital assets column. An examination of the statement of financial position shows the following equality regarding capital assets purchased from restricted and unrestricted resources: Deferred contributions—capital assets (restricted) Net assets invested in capital assets (unrestricted) Total capital assets (from both sources)

$ 933 1,083 $2,016

If the entity chooses to not present the “net assets invested in capital assets” separately, the balance from this would be included in unrestricted net assets. There would not be a separate column for invested in capital assets in the statement of changes in net assets. There would be no need to allocate amounts between the unrestricted column and invested in capital assets column, as described above. The ing would be simpler but the information value of this would be lost.


735


CHAPTER 12


727

EXHIBIT 12.5 BLUE SHIELD AGENCY STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION December 31, Year 6 (in thousands of dollars) Current Assets Cash and term deposits Pledges receivable Government grants receivable Investments

$ 520 800 440 1,760 500

Capital assets Equipment and furniture Buildings Accumulated amortization Total assets Current Liabilities s payable Wages payable Accrued liabilities Deferred revenue

1,588 2,095 (1,667) 2,016 $4,276 $ 482 183 13 65 743

Long-Term Liabilities Deferred contributions related to capital assets Deferred building campaign contributions Total liabilities Net Assets Net assets invested in capital assets Net assets restricted for endowment purposes Unrestricted net assets Total liabilities and net assets

933 509 1,442 2,185

The unamortized portion of spent restricted contributions is segregated from the unspent restricted contributions.

1,083 550 458 2,091 $4,276

The net assets invested in capital assets does not have to be reported separately; it could be combined with unrestricted net assets.

BLUE SHIELD AGENCY STATEMENT OF REVENUES AND EXPENSES for the Year Ended December 31, Year 6 (in thousands of dollars) Revenues Government grants United Way grant Contributions Investment income Amortization of deferred contributions

$1,200 40 1,987 54 90 3,371

(continued)


736


728

CHAPTER 12


EXHIBIT 12.5

(continued )

Expenses Shelter program Food program istration Fundraising Amortization of capital assets

740 1,110 556 516 150 3,072

Excess of revenues over expenses

$ 299

BLUE SHIELD AGENCY STATEMENT OF CHANGES IN NET ASSETS for the Year Ended December 31, Year 6 (in thousands of dollars)

The net assets invested in capital assets captures the portion of the unrestricted net assets that is not available for future spending.

Invested in capital assets

Restricted for endowment purposes

$1,140 (60)

$500

Balance, Jan. 1 Excess of revenues over expenses Endowment contributions Investment in capital assets Balance, Dec. 31

Unrestricted

Total

$102 359

$1,742 299 50

50

3 $1,083

$550

(3) $458

$2,091

BLUE SHIELD AGENCY CASH FLOW STATEMENT for the Year Ended December 31, Year 6 (in thousands of dollars) Cash Flows from Operating Activities Cash received from government operating grants (f) Cash received from United Way grant (j) Cash received from general contributions (c), (d) Cash received from investment income (l) Cash paid to suppliers (a), (h) Cash paid to employees (a), (i) Cash paid for fundraising (d) Net cash used in operating activities The cash flow statement segregates cash flows by operating, investing, and financing activities.

$ 910 65 1,677 54 (2,141) (427) (453) (315)

Cash Flows from Investing Activities Cash paid for capital asset acquisitions (a), (e), (m) Net cash used in investing activities

(144) (144)

Cash Flows from Financing Activities Contributions of cash for endowment (k) Cash received from government grant (e) Net cash generated through financing activities

50 450 500

Net increase in cash and term deposits Cash and term deposits, Jan. 1

41 479

Cash and term deposits, Dec. 31

$ 520


737


CHAPTER 12


729

The endowment contribution received during the year does not appear on the operating statement because no expenses will ever appear for the required matching process to occur. Instead, this special restricted resource is shown on the statement of changes in “net assets” as an increase in net assets restricted for endowment. Extensive footnote disclosure is required when statements are prepared using the deferral method, in order to clearly define the amount and nature of restricted and unrestricted resources. Closing entries as at December 31, Year 6, are presented next. Revenue—government grant Revenue—United Way grant Revenue—contributions Revenue—investment income Expenses—shelter program Expenses—food program Expenses—istration Expenses—fundraising Unrestricted net assets To close the unrestricted revenues and expenses

1,200 40 1,987 54

Revenues and expenses are closed to fund balances.

740 1,110 556 516 359

Unrestricted net assets Net assets invested in capital assets To transfer the amount of capital assets acquired from unrestricted resources6 Net assets invested in capital assets Amortization of deferred contributions Expenses—amortization

3 3 60 90

Net assets invested in capital assets is updated for changes in capital assets financed by unrestricted resources.

150

To close restricted revenues and the expenses related to capital assets7

ANALYSIS AND INTERPRETATION OF FINANCIAL STATEMENTS Now that you have prepared journal entries and financial statements for NFPOs, you are now ready to analyze and interpret the financial statements of an NFPO. Let’s use the Blue Shield financial statements to calculate and interpret key financial ratios for an NFPO. Blue Shield operates a 50-bed homeless shelter. It is open 365 days a year but is not necessarily fully occupied every night. For Year 6, the number of person days that the facility was used was 15,000. The following three ratios would typically be used by donors and other s to assess the efficiency and effectiveness of the organization: Name of ratio

Numerator/denominator

What it tells

Cost per person day Debt-to-equity ratio Stewardship ratio

Total expenses/Total person days Total liabilities/Total net assets Total revenues/Total expenses

Efficiency of operations Ability to meet obligations How the entity discharged its stewardship responsibility

The following table presents these three ratios under the two different methods of reporting contributions. The first two columns are taken from Exhibit 12.3 for the restricted fund method and the last column is from Exhibit 12.4 for the deferral method.

LO7

The cost per person day or cost per unit of output is a key ratio for many NFPOs.


738


730

CHAPTER 12


Restricted Fund Method Name of Ratio

Deferral Method

General fund

All funds

Cost per person day

$195

$205

$205


1.60

0.21

1.04

Stewardship ratio

1.12

1.28

1.10

Notice the following from the table above: • The ratios are significantly different between the two reporting methods. Which method best reflects reality for this organization? Which method would be most useful to the ? • The ratios are significantly different between the general fund and the total of all funds under the restricted fund method. Which column would the use in calculating the ratios? Is it useful to have all the columns under the restricted fund method? • The organization looks most efficient using only the general fund under the restricted fund method. Should one use only the general fund, all funds, or any combination of funds under the restricted fund method? The debt-to-equity ratio is usually higher under the deferral method because some contributions are reported as deferred contributions, which appears in the liability section of the statement of financial position.

• The solvency of the entity looks much better using all funds under the restricted fund method. Why is there such a big difference between the restricted fund method and the deferral method? Under the restricted fund method, the restricted funds are shown as revenue when received and end up as an addition to net assets. Under the deferral method, many of the contributions are deferred as a long-term liability. • The stewardship ratio compares revenues to expenses. Some donors would not want to see a high ratio because it implies that the funds were not used as expected. The deferral method matches the contribution revenues to expenses on an accrual basis. Therefore, it is expected that the ratio would be lower under the deferral method. See Self-Study Problem 2 for a comprehensive problem involving the preparation of a balance sheet under the two methods of reporting contributions. The NFPO uses fund ing under both methods of reporting contributions. It is important to note how the NFPO has ed for donated goods and services. By recording donated goods or services, the bottom line on the statement of operations is usually not affected. However, both revenues and expenses would likely increase. This could have a significant impact on the cost per person day and stewardship ratio.

Disclosure Requirements The disclosure requirements for NFPOs are quite extensive. Some of those requirements were briefly described throughout the chapter. The following summarizes the main disclosures required in Section 4410 related to revenue from contributions: The major sources of and ing policies for contributions must be disclosed.

• Contributions by major sources, including the nature and amount of contributed materials and services recognized in the financial statements. • The policies followed in ing for endowment contributions, restricted contributions, and contributed materials and services.


739


CHAPTER 12


731

• The nature and amount of changes in deferred contribution balances for the period. • How and where net investment income earned on resources held for endowment is recognized in the financial statements. United Way/Centraide Ottawa is a non-profit Ontario corporation and a ed charity. Excerpts from United Way/Centraide Ottawa’s 2012 financial statements are provided in Exhibit 12.6. The 2012 financial statement followed Part V of the Handbook. Starting in 2013, United Way plans to follow Part III, combined with the relevant sections from Part II.

EXHIBIT 12.6 EXTRACTS (IN PART) FROM UNITED WAY/CENTRAIDE OTTAWA’S 2012 FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 1. Significant ing policies: The financial statements have been prepared in accordance with Canadian generally accepted ing principles and include the following significant ing policies:

(a) Revenue recognition: United Way/Centraide Ottawa follows the deferral method of ing for contributions for not-for-profit organizations. from the general public consists of pledges and donations relating to the current year’s campaign. Pledges receivable are recorded at an estimated realizable value at the time of pledge commitment by individuals and organizations. Funds raised during a campaign, net of related campaign expenses and provisions are used to provide funds for funded programs, other Canadian ed charities and operations in the following fiscal year. Pledges and donations received by the United Way/Centraide Ottawa that are undesignated or are directed from/to an impact area by the donor are recognized as revenue in the year that they are received or pledged. Pledges and donations received by the United Way/Centraide Ottawa that are designated by the donor to funded agencies, charities and other United Ways/Centraides are considered to be restricted by purpose, and are recorded as deferred designated campaign revenue and are recognized as revenue in the year the amount is paid to the designated organization. Investment revenue earned on restricted endowed investments is recognized as revenue when the related expenditure is incurred. Investment revenue earned on unrestricted investments is recognized in the current year. Contributions to endowment are recorded as direct increases to the endowment net asset balance.

The United Way uses the deferral method to for contributions.

(b) Expense recognition: Program, fundraising and resource development expenses are recognized in the period incurred. Allocations and designations expenses are recognized in the period paid or in the period that the annual allocation is approved by the Board and the recipient agencies are notified. (j) Donated services: No amounts have been reflected in the financial statements for donated services, since no objective basis is available to measure the value of such services. Nevertheless, a substantial number of volunteers have donated significant amounts of their time in United Way/ Centraide programs, services and fundraising campaigns. Source: Reproduced with permission from United Way/Centraide Ottawa. http://unitedwayottawa.ca/ sites/default/files/files/documents/annual-reports/2011-united-way-ottawa-financial-statements-en.pdf]

Donated services are not recognized because the value of the services is not objectively measurable.


740


732

CHAPTER 12

LO8


ASPE Differences 1. Part II does not contain any standards specifically tailored for NFPOs. However, if the NFPO chooses to follow Part III of the Handbook, it must follow the relevant standards in Part II. 2. IFRSs do not contain any standards specifically tailored for NFPOs. If the NFPO chooses to follow IFRSs, it does not apply Part III of the Handbook.

summary Fourteen sections in Part III of the Handbook are specifically dedicated to NFPOs. In addition, NFPOs must follow relevant sections of Part II of the Handbook. These Handbook sections have dramatically changed the financial reporting of NFPOs over the past 15 years. We have moved from a situation where virtually no authoritative standards existed to one where full and proportionate consolidation of controlled and tly controlled entities is allowed, and asset capitalization and amortization are required for all but “small” organizations. Rather than mandating a single reporting model, the new standard gives NFPOs the choice between the deferral and restricted fund methods of financial statement presentation and allows them the flexibility to use a mix of both methods if they feel that it will result in a better presentation. While these changes have moved not-for-profit more toward a business approach of reporting and away from the stewardship-ofresources approach that was previously used, not-for-profit reporting is still very distinct, and certainly far more complex than it was before.

Significant Changes in GAAP in the Last Three Years 1. Part III of the Handbook was introduced. It contains the 4400 series and five other standards that are unique to NFPOs. 2. For fiscal periods beginning on or after January 1, 2012, private sector NFPOs must adhere to either IFRSs or ASPE combined with Part III of the Handbook. Public sector NFPOs must adhere to either IFRSs or the CICA Public Sector ing Handbook with or without the 4200 series.

Changes Expected in GAAP in the Next Three Years No significant changes are expected in Part III of the Handbook in the next three years.


Watrous Housing Corporation (WHC) is a community-sponsored not-for-profit housing organization that was incorporated on September 1, Year 5. Its purpose is to provide residential accommodation for physically disabled adults in the town of Watrous. The nature of WHC’s operations and its source of funding are described in Exhibit I. The executive director of WHC has asked for your


741


CHAPTER 12


733

EXHIBIT I NATURE OF OPERATIONS • In October Year 5, WHC purchased a 15-unit apartment building in downtown Watrous for $750,000. It then spent $250,000 in renovations to upgrade the building to make it accessible for physically disabled adults. • WHC offers 24-hour non-medical attendant care. care services are provided through a combination of staff and volunteers. The staff receive a monthly salary. As an inducement to recruit and retain qualified care workers, each staff member is allowed 15 sick days per year. The employee can bank the sick days not used in any one year. Upon termination or retirement, the employee is paid for banked sick days at the wage rate in effect at that time. • Rental payments are due the first day of each month and are geared to each tenant’s income. Most of the tenants are very good about making their rent payments on time. Some rental payments are received late. On August 31, Year 6, there was $13,000 of unpaid rent. • WHC plans to install central air conditioning in the building in April Year 7 at an expected cost of $50,000. This expenditure is being financed by a special fundraising drive. By August 31, Year 6, this fundraising drive had raised $20,000 in cash and $15,000 in pledges from citizens in the local community.

SOURCES OF FUNDING • The cost of acquiring and renovating the apartment building was financed by a $1,000,000 cash donation received from the estate of Mr. Smith who had stipulated that the funds be used for the purchase of a property. • The provincial government funds approximately 70% of non-medical care and costs. Claims are made monthly for the previous month’s eligible costs. • WHC depends on outside fundraising efforts, primarily door-to-door canvassing and sponsored bingos, to cover the remaining non-medical care and costs.

assistance in establishing ing policies for WHC for its general-purpose, year-end financial statements. The ing policies should be consistent with Part III combined with relevant sections of Part II of the CICA Handbook.

Required: Identify the major ing issues, and provide recommendations on the ing treatment of these issues in WHC’s financial statements for the year ended August 31, Year 6. Assume that WHC wants to use fund ing with two funds, a general fund and a capital fund, and wants to use the deferral method to for contributions. Also assume that annual revenues exceed $700,000.

S OLUTION

TO

SELF-STUDY PROBLEM 1 WHC should adopt the following recommendations for the related ing issues for its year-end financial statements: • The accrual basis of ing should be used in order to properly match revenues to expenses. • The cost of acquiring and renovating the apartment building should be capitalized as an asset in the capital fund. • The building should be amortized over its useful life. Amortization expense should be reported as an expense of the capital fund.


742


734

CHAPTER 12


• The $1,000,000 cash donation from Mr. Smith and the cash received for the planned expenditures on air conditioning equipment should be recorded as deferred contributions in the capital fund. The deferred contributions should be amortized into revenue over the life of the related assets to match to the amortization expense on these assets. • Salary costs should be expensed as incurred in the general fund. • The estimated costs of unpaid sick leave should be set up as a liability and as an expense of the general fund on an annual basis. • The value of the volunteers’ time provided for care services can be set up as revenue and an expense of the general fund, if the amount is measurable and such services would be purchased had the volunteers not provided them. • The contributions from the provincial government should be accrued as a receivable and revenue of the general fund at the end of each month, based on actual costs incurred during the month. • The rent from the tenants should be recognized as revenue of the general fund in the month in which it is due. At the end of the year, an allowance should be set up for any doubtful s. • Donations from door-to-door canvassing and proceeds received from bingos should be recognized as revenue of the general fund as the cash is received. • The pledges received for the planned expenditure on air conditioning equipment should be recorded as pledges receivable and deferred contributions of the capital fund to the extent that the amount to be received can be reasonably estimated and the ultimate collection is reasonably assured. Since this is the first year of operation for WHC, it may not be possible to reasonably estimate the collectibility of the pledges as there is no history for collection of pledges.

SELF- STUDY PROBLEM 2 LO2, 3, 5, 6

Morina Homes is a not-for-profit organization established over forty years ago. It provides care services to seniors in the local community. Fifteen years ago, it raised $2,800,000 of restricted funds to fully fund the purchase of land and to construct and equip a new residence. In Year 4, it undertook a new public campaign to raise funds to replace some of its equipment and expand the home. Prior to Year 4, the home had only one fund, the general fund. In Year 4, the home set up a separate fund, the capital fund, to for any new funds restricted for the replacement and expansion of the home. It used the deferral method to for both funds. The following are the unclassified statements of financial position for the 2 funds of the Home at December 31, Year 4: General FUND Cash s receivable Allowance for doubtful s Inventory of supplies Investments in marketable securities Land Building Accumulated amortization of buildings

$

20,000 137,000 (17,000) 14,000

Capital FUND $216,000

284,000 370,000 1,760,000 (528,000)

(continued)


743


CHAPTER 12


General FUND Equipment Accumulated amortization of equipment Totals

675,000 (540,000) $1,891,000

s payable Deferred contributions—building and equipment Deferred contributions—future expansion Net assets contributed for land Unrestricted net assets Totals

$ 32,000 1,367,000

735

Capital FUND

$500,000

$500,000 370,000 122,000 $1,891,000

$500,000

Additional information for Year 5: a. Every month, the home bills the provincial government and its residents for home services. The s are due in 30 days. Total billings for the year were $1,101,000. b. Collections of s receivable totalled $1,087,000. s receivable written off as uncollectible amounted to $11,000. c. The estimate of doubtful s was 10% of s receivable outstanding at December 31, Year 5. d. The home received $500,000 from the estate of one of its founders. The donor requested that the principal not be spent but invested in government bonds. The interest income from the bonds is restricted for recreational activities, which are ed for in the general fund. e. The home received unrestricted donations of $50,000 and interest revenue of $30,000 from the bonds in the endowment fund. The cash received for interest was spent on recreational projects and is included in operating expenses. f. The home paid the following amounts during the year: Operating expenses Inventory of supplies Total

$1,125,000 60,000 $1,185,000

g. Equipment costing $100,000 was acquired using funds from the capital fund. h. The s payable at the end of Year 4 and Year 5 consisted of the following:

Operating expenses Inventory of supplies

Year 4

Year 5

$20,000 12,000 $32,000

$25,000 15,000 $40,000

No entries affecting s payable were made during the year. i. Supplies on hand at the end of the year were $16,000. j. Amortization was $44,000 for the building and $51,000 for the equipment, of which $6,000 pertained to equipment purchased by the capital fund. The cost of these capital assets was fully funded by contributions restricted for the purchase of these assets. k. On December 31, Year 5, the fair value of the marketable securities in the capital fund was $300,000. These securities are being held until the funds are needed for future expansion of the home. The future expansion will not likely occur until Year 8, at the earliest. Any income on these funds is restricted for use in the capital fund. The investment is classified at FVTPL for reporting purposes.


744


736

CHAPTER 12


Required: Prepare a classified statement of financial position for the three funds at December 31, Year 5, assuming that Morina Homes uses the following: (a) Deferral method combined with fund ing (b) Restricted fund method (assume that the change from the deferral method to the restricted fund method is a change in ing policy and should be applied retrospectively)

SOLUTION

TO

SELF-STUDY PROBLEM 2 (a)

MORINA HOMES Statement of Financial Position At December 31, Year 5 General Fund

Current assets Cash (1) s receivable (2) Allowance for doubtful s (3) Inventory of supplies (4)

$

Property, plant & equipment Land Building Accumulated amortization of buildings (6) Equipment (7) Accumulated amortization of equipment (8)

2,000 140,000 (14,000) 16,000 144,000

370,000 1,760,000 (572,000) 675,000 (585,000) 1,648,000

Long-term investments (5 & 9) $1,792,000 s payable (10) Deferred contributions—building and equipment (11) Deferred contributions—future expansion (12) Net assets contributed for land (13) Net assets for endowment (14) Unrestricted net assets (15)

$

40,000 1,278,000

Capital Fund

Endowment Fund

$116,000

116,000

$ 118,000 140,000 (14,000) 16,000 260,000

100,000 (6,000) 94,000 300,000 $510,000

370,000 1,760,000 (572,000) 775,000 (591,000) 1,742,000 800,000 $2,802,000

$500,000 $500,000

$ $ 94,000 416,000

370,000 $500,000 104,000 $1,792,000

Total

$510,000

Notes (values in 000’s): (letters below refer to letters in additional information in the original question) 1. 20 1 (b) 1087 1 (e) 50 1 (e) 30 2 (f) 1185; 216 2 (g) 100 2. 137 1 (a) 1101 2 (b) 1087 2 (b) 11 3. 17 2 (b) 11 1 (c) 8 4. 14 1 (f) 60 1 (h) 3 2 (i) 61 5. 284 1 (k) 16 6. 528 1 (j) 44 7. 675; 0 1 (g) 100 8. 540 1 (j) 45; 0 1 (j) 6 9. 0 1 (d) 500 10. 32 1 (h) 8 11. 1,367 2 (j) 44 2 (j) 51 1 (j) 6; (g) 100 2 (j) 6 12. 500 2 (g) 100 1 (k) 16 13. 370

$500,000

40,000 1,372,000 416,000 370,000 500,000 104,000 $2,802,000


745


CHAPTER 12


737

14. 500 15. 122 1 (a) 1101 2 (c) 8 1 (e) 50 1 (e) 30 2 (f) 1125 2 (h) 5 2 (i) 61 2 (j) (44 1 45) 1 (j) (44 1 45)

(b)

MORINA HOMES Statement of Financial Position At December 31, Year 5 (Note 1)

Assets Current assets Cash s receivable Allowance for doubtful s Inventory of supplies Investments in marketable securities

General fund

Capital fund

$

$ 116,000

2,000 140,000 (14,000) 16,000

144,000 Property, plant & equipment Land Building Accumulated amortization of buildings Equipment (2) Accumulated amortization of equipment (3)

300,000 416,000 370,000 1,760,000 (572,000) 775,000 (591,000) 1,742,000

Long-term investment in bonds s payable Fund balance (4)

Endowment fund

$144,000

$2,158,000

$500,000 $500,000

$ 40,000 104,000 $144,000

$2,158,000 $2,158,000

$500,000 $500,000

Notes: 1. All of the names and balances are the same as in Part (a), except for the following: 2. 675 1 (g) 100 3. 540 1 (j) 451 (j) 6 4. All of the contributions to the capital and endowment funds would have been reported as revenue when received and would end up in fund balances. The revenues and expenses for the current year also end up in fund balances. There are no deferred contributions in the capital and endowment funds.

APPENDIX 12A Sample Financial Statements for Not-for-Profit Organizations This appendix contains the 2012 statement of financial position, statement of operations, statement of changes in net assets, and statement of cash flows for United Way/ Centraide Ottawa.8 This organization brings people together from all parts of its

LO6


746


738

CHAPTER 12


community to identify, develop, and provide solutions for community needs, helping to ensure that the donations received will go where they are needed most and where they will have the greatest impact. The deferral method of ing has been used for contributions, and expenses have been recorded using the accrual basis. UNITED WAY/CENTRAIDE OTTAWA Statement of Financial Position March 31 Assets Current assets: Cash Pledges receivable s receivable Prepaid expenses

Land and building held for sale Long-term assets: Investments: Endowment Unrestricted Capital assets

Liabilities and Net Assets Current liabilities: s payable and accrued liabilities Deferred revenue Deferred designated campaign revenue Mortgage payable—current

2012

2011

$ 3,846,133 20,417,968 1,176,586 84,992 25,525,679 –

$ 3,077,972 20,529,217 1,844,087 42,292 25,493,568 2,062,227

1,866,225 1,437,094 3,303,319 1,110,478 4,413,797 $29,939,476

2,496,209 688,882 3,185,091 1,358,095 4,543,186 $32,098,981

$ 2,084,395 1,788,208 12,931,920 – 16,804,523

$ 2,954,977 1,620,629 12,666,409 100,000 17,342,015

26,412 – 750,000 776,412

29,430 1,272,290 750,000 2,051,720

10,391,778 100,538 1,866,225 12,358,541

10,034,154 174,883 2,496,209 12,705,246

$29,939,476

$32,098,981

Long-term liabilities: Deferred lease inducement Mortgage payable—long-term Other long-term liabilities Net assets: Unrestricted Internally restricted for community services Endowment Lease commitments Contingency and guarantee

UNITED WAY/CENTRAIDE OTTAWA Statement of Operations Year ended March 31

2012

Revenue: Donations $30,275,207 Funds transferred from other United Ways/Centraides 1,519,393 31,794,600 Gross campaign revenue Less: provision for uncollectible pledges (1,273,992) Recovery of provisioned pledges from prior year campaigns 436,699

2011 $30,559,506 1,610,236 32,169,742 (1,220,948) 1,287,628


CHAPTER 12


Net campaign revenue Other revenue Fundraising expenses: Community campaign GCWCC Resource development Recovery of fundraising costs from designated charities

Net revenue available for programs Programs: Allocations Donor directed designations Grants Targeted community investments United Way priority goal investments (Deficiency) excess of revenue over expenses

30,957,307 3,177,496 34,134,803

32,236,422 2,291,106 34,527,528

3,657,228 1,481,545 453,478 (1,697,890) 3,894,361 30,240,442

3,357,627 1,323,991 525,149 (1,475,333) 3,731,434 30,796,094

10,003,432 13,891,599 1,439,931 532,087 4,783,316 30,650,365 $ (409,923)

10,155,423 13,471,820 695,168 167,500 5,223,880 29,713,791 $ 1,082,303

UNITED WAY/CENTRAIDE OTTAWA Statement of Changes in Net Assets Year ended March 31

2012

Unrestricted: Balance, beginning of year (Deficiency) excess of revenue over expenses Transfer from internally restricted for community services Transfer from endowment Balance, end of year

2011

$10,034,154 (409,923) 9,624,231 76,090 691,457 $10,391,778

$ 8,876,851 1,082,303 9,959,154 75,000 – $10,034,154

$

$

Internally restricted for community services: Balance, beginning of year Contributions Transfer to unrestricted Balance, end of year

$

Endowment: Balance, beginning of year Contributions Transfer to unrestricted Balance, end of year

$ 2,496,209 61,473 (691,457) $ 1,866,225

$ 2,458,801 37,408 – $ 2,496,209

Total net assets

$12,358,541

$12,705,246

174,883 1,745 (76,090) 100,538

$

249,883 – (75,000) 174,883

UNITED WAY/CENTRAIDE OTTAWA Statement of Cash Flows Year ended March 31 Cash provided by (used in): Operations: (Deficiency) Excess of revenue over expenses Items not involving cash: Amortization of capital assets Amortization of deferred lease inducement Unrealized loss on unrestricted investments Loss on sale of land and building held for sale

2012

2011

$ (409,923)

$1,082,303

311,903 (3,018) (65,043) 86,003

330,713 (3,019) (33,785) –

(continued)

747

739


748


740

CHAPTER 12


Change in non-cash operating working capital: Pledges receivable s receivable Prepaid expenses s payable and accrued liabilities Deferred revenue Deferred designated campaign revenue Investing: Acquisition of capital assets Proceeds from sale of land and building held for sale Acquisitions of investments Contributions to internally restricted for community services Contributions to endowment Financing: Principal payments on mortgage Increase (decrease) in cash Cash, beginning of year Cash, end of year

111,249 667,501 (42,700) (870,582) 167,579 265,511 218,480

(2,198,589) (170,520) 33,820 792,519 375,457 663,139 872,038

(64,286) 1,976,224 (53,185) 1,745 61,473 1,921,971

(739,135) – (154,583) – 37,408 (856,310)

(1,372,290) (1,372,290) 768,161 3,077,972 $3,846,133

(100,008) (100,008) (84,280) 3,162,252 $3,077,972

The amount of mortgage interest paid by United Way/Centraide Ottawa was $31,341 (2011— $53,356). The interest is reported as a program expense, which is aligned to the purpose for which the building was originally purchased. Source: Reproduced with permission from United Way/Centraide Ottawa. http://unitedwayottawa.ca/sites/ default/files/files/documents/annual-reports/2011-united-way-ottawa-financial-statements-en.pdf

APPENDIX 12B ing for Public Sector Organizations LO9

Governments differ from business organizations in a number of ways.

The public sector consists of governments, government organizations, and not-forprofit organizations controlled by governments. Governments differ from business organizations in many ways, some of which can be summarized as follows: • Governments do not exist to make a profit, but rather to provide services. • While the major source of business revenue comes from the sale of goods or services or both, most of a government’s revenue comes from taxation. • Businesses have to compete, while governments operate in essentially a noncompetitive environment. • Often a major goal of government is the redistribution of wealth. A major goal of a business is the maximization of the wealth of its owners. • The federal and provincial governments have virtually an unlimited capacity to borrow, constrained only by their ability to raise taxes in order to repay. A business’s earning capacity is a major constraining factor in its ability to issue debt. • While a business purchases capital assets in order to earn a return, a government’s capital asset acquisitions are made to provide services. • A government’s budget plan, approved by a legislative process at the start of a fiscal period, attracts considerable attention in the press, as does the eventual


749


CHAPTER 12


741

comparison of actual results with those budgeted for originally. Businesses do not normally report their budgets, and their annual results are usually compared with results of prior periods with no mention of the year’s budget. With such differences, it is not surprising that government-reporting models have been quite different from those used by businesses. This was certainly the case 10 or 15 years ago, but lately, changes have been made that have brought government ing requirements much closer to those required for business, although many differences still exist. This will be more evident when government ing standards are summarized later in this appendix. Prior to the 1980s, a comprehensive body of ing principles for governments did not exist. The CICA was involved only with setting the financial reporting standards for business organizations; no other body had established authoritative standards for governments. The desperate financial condition of some large American cities, which, it was argued, was not adequately reported in their financial statements, became the focus of attention of standard-setting bodies in the United States, soon followed by the CICA in Canada. Before plunging into this area, the CICA created a committee with a mandate to determine what practices were being followed by the federal, provincial, and territorial governments9 and to recommend needed changes. As a result of the findings and recommendations of this committee, the CICA established the Public Sector ing and Auditing Committee (PSAAC) in 1981 and charged it with the development of ing principles for governments. Before proceeding, PSAAC created a second study group, with a similar mandate to that of the first one, to report on the financial reporting practices of cities, municipalities, towns, and villages.10 This study group made reference to a previous research study commissioned by the Certified General ants Association of Canada11 and concluded that it would use the CGA study’s findings and recommendations as a starting point for its own study. All three research studies came to similar conclusions about government financial reporting practices in general. These conclusions can be summarized by saying that there was such a diversity of terminology, measurements, and reporting practices being used that comparability among similar government organizations12 was virtually impossible and that this situation should not be allowed to continue. At first the standard-setting process proceeded slowly and only a few statements on ing and auditing were issued by PSAAC. Then in 1998, the CICA formed the Public Sector ing Board (PSAB) and proceeded with the reorganization of the CICA Handbook by transferring the auditing recommendations to the assurance section of the Handbook, and the creation of a new Public Sector ing Handbook (PSA Handbook). Previously issued ing statements were revised and amended as PSA Handbook sections.

COMPLIANCE WITH PSAB REPORTING STANDARDS If a business organization does not follow the CICA Handbook in its financial reporting it can suffer substantial penalties, because legislation and security regulations require the CICA Handbook to be used. When a new ing standard is issued, businesses (especially public companies) tend to adopt the new standard immediately. NFPOs also tend to follow the Handbook in their financial reporting. Failure to do so could result in a reduction of , especially in the area of grants from governments and from other NFPOs. Governments, though, are different. They

Prior to 1980, there was much diversity in reporting by government organizations.

The CICA has created a new Public Sector ing Handbook, which contains the GAAP applicable to federal, provincial, territorial, and local governments.


750


742

CHAPTER 12


often exhibit tardiness in adopting new standards, and sometimes refuse to adopt certain standards. The reasons for this are as follows: Some governments in Canada have failed to adopt new government ing standards for a number of reasons.

• The federal government and each of the provincial and territorial governments prepare their financial reports in accordance with the legislation enacted by each body. The adoption of a new reporting standard often requires an amendment to an act. • Local governments are created by an act of the legislature of the province or territory in which they are located. Changes in local government reporting often require changes in legislation. • Legislative changes necessary to adopt new ing standards do not rank high in the priorities of many governments. • When auditors report that a government is not following proper ing practices in its financial statements (an event that often occurs), the press notes the outrage of the opposition parties and the government’s denial of any impropriety, and then the matter is forgotten. The general public, which by and large does not understand ing at all, does not seem to be particularly interested. • The adoption of certain new standards may be perceived by a government as having the potential to make its financial condition look worse than the government is currently reporting. If so, a change in reporting would not be a high priority.

GAAP FOR GOVERNMENTS Prior to February 2007, the PSA Handbook contained four sections that applied only to federal, provincial, and territorial governments; two sections that applied only to local governments; and a number of specific-item sections that applied to all governments. In 2005, a new model for senior governments was introduced that involved some drastic changes from previous practices. While the old model focused mainly on government spending (the operating statement showed revenues and expenditures), the new model presents a government-cost approach, although it still contains the reporting of government spending. One major change that took place was the requirement that senior governments capitalize their tangible asset acquisitions and amortize them in the statement of operations. In February 2007, an amendment withdrew both the local government sections and any references to federal, provincial, and territorial governments. The PSA Handbook presently contains forty-seven sections, including eight sections for NFPOs, and six ing guidelines. The sections for NFPOs apply only to public sector NFPOs. These sections deal with matters that are unique to not-for-profit organizations or issues where the needs of financial statement s indicate that different requirements from those that apply to governments, other government organizations, or government business enterprises are appropriate. A public sector NFPO can elect to use or not use the 4200 series of the PSA Handbook. All levels of government must follow the PSA Handbook. Government business enterprises must follow Part I of the CICA Handbook. Other government organizations can either follow Part I of the CICA Handbook or the PSA Handbook. The following briefly summarizes the reporting requirement of the standards in the PSA Handbook.


751


CHAPTER 12


743

Under the new model, five financial statements are required: a statement of financial position, a statement of operations, a statement of remeasurement gains and losses, a statement of change in net debt, and a statement of cash flow.

Governments are required to present five financial statements.

Statement of Financial Position This statement presents financial assets and

The statement of financial position must show financial assets, liabilities, net debt, nonfinancial assets, and accumulated surplus/deficit.

then deducts liabilities, with the resultant difference presented as “net debt.” Then nonfinancial assets are added or subtracted to arrive at a final line called “accumulated surplus/deficit.” Financial assets include cash and equivalents, receivables, inventories for resale, loans to other governments, available-for-sale investments, and investments in government enterprises. Liabilities include s payable and accrued liabilities, pension and employee future-benefit liabilities, deferred revenue, borrowings, and loans from other governments. The net debt position indicates the extent to which the government will have to raise revenues in the future to cover its past spending. Nonfinancial assets are tangible capital assets, inventories held for consumption or use, and prepaid expenses. Tangible capital assets are assets used by the government to provide services and include land, buildings, equipment, roads, and so on. They do not include intangible assets, natural resources, and Crown lands. The accumulated surplus/deficit represents the net recognized economic resources (net assets) of the government, and provides an indicator of the government’s ability to provide future services at the end of a fiscal period.

Statement of Operations This statement reports the government’s revenues and expenses, other than remeasurement gains and losses for the period, with the difference described as the period’s surplus or deficit. This result is added to the accumulated surplus/deficit at the beginning of the period to arrive at the last line, which is called the accumulated surplus/deficit at the end of the period. Revenues include taxes, non-tax sources (including gains), and transfers from other governments. Revenue for the period should be accrued unless it is impractical to measure. If this is the case the cash basis should be used. Expenses are to be reported by function or major program. Note disclosure should report the breakdown between the major types of expenses such as salaries, debt-servicing costs, amortization of the costs of tangible capital assets, and transfer payments to other governments. A comparison must be made between the actual results for the period and results of the prior period and also with expectations (the budget) at the beginning of the period. Statement of Remeasurement Gains and Losses This statement should report the remeasurement gains and losses during the period, distinguishing between amounts arising during the period and those reclassified to the statement of operations; any other comprehensive income that arises when a government includes the results of government business enterprises and government business partnerships in its summary financial statements; and the accumulated remeasurement gains and losses at the beginning and end of the period. The remeasurement gains and losses should be segregated between exchange gains and losses on items in the amortized cost category denominated in a foreign currency, and changes in the fair value of (i) derivatives, (ii) portfolio investments in equity instruments that are quoted in an active market, and (iii) financial instruments designated to the fair value category. The accumulated remeasurement gains are reported as a separate category in the accumulated surplus section of the statement of financial position.

The operating statement must show revenues, expenses, and the period’s surplus or deficit. Comparative amounts for the previous period are required to be shown as well as the current period’s budget.


752


744

CHAPTER 12


A statement showing the period’s changes in net debt is required in comparative form with both the budget and the previous period.

Statement of Change in Net Debt This statement reconciles the net surplus/deficit for the period with the change in net debt for the period by adding back period amortization expense (and other items) and deducting the cost of tangible capital assets and other nonfinancial assets acquired during the period. The change in net debt is then added to the net debt at the beginning of the period to arrive at the net debt at the end of the period. This statement is designed to provide information about the extent to which expenditures for the period have been met by the period’s revenues. An increase in net debt indicates that revenues of future periods will have to be raised to pay for this period’s spending. This statement also has to be prepared in comparative form to the budget and the prior period’s results.

The cash flow statement shows operating, capital, investing, and financing transactions.

Statement of Cash Flow This statement reconciles cash and cash equivalents

PS 1300 requires the consolidation of the financial statements of all organizations controlled by the government. Controlled business organizations are not consolidated but rather are reported using the modified equity method.

at the beginning of the period with cash and cash equivalents at the end of the period by providing details of receipts and payments in the four categories of operating transactions, capital transactions, investing transactions, and financing transactions. Either the direct or the indirect method can be used to arrive at cash from operations, but the direct method is strongly encouraged because it provides details of cash receipts from a number of categories, and therefore is much more informative than the indirect method. This statement is similar to the statement used by business organizations, except that the latter would report capital asset acquisitions as an investing activity, while this one reports such acquisitions as a separate category.

Section PS 1300, The Financial Reporting Entity Section PS 1300 states the following: • The government reporting entity comprises all organizations controlled by the government. An organization is controlled if the government has power over its financial and operating policies and benefits from or is exposed to the results of its operating activities. • The government statements are prepared by consolidating the statements of the organizations making up the government entity. • An exception is that government business enterprises are not consolidated on a line-by-line basis but rather reported using the modified equity method. This will reflect the government’s share of the business enterprise’s profit or loss in the government’s operating results on one line in the statement of operations and the government’s share of the business enterprise’s assets and liabilities on one line on the government’s statement of financial position. • The modified equity method is exactly the same as the equity method described in Chapter 2, except that the business enterprise’s ing principles are not adjusted to conform to the ing principles used by the government.

summary The PSAB has exerted considerable effort on the establishment of a new financial reporting model covering federal, provincial, territorial, and local governments. The resultant standards exhibit significant differences from those required


CHAPTER 12


753

745

for businesses and NFPOs. Differences will always exist because the operations and needs of governments, NFPOs, and business organizations are different. While separate standards previously existed for local governments, recent amendments have eliminated any differences so that one set of standards applies to all government organizations.


1. Briefly outline how NFPOs differ from profit-oriented organizations.

LO2

2. The Handbook describes revenue that is unique to NFPOs. What is this revenue called, and what characteristic does it have that makes it unique?

LO2

3. Distinguish between unrestricted and restricted contributions of a charitable organization.

LO3

4. Briefly explain the concept of fund ing.

LO2

5. When and why would a NFPO use replacement cost rather than net realizable value to determine whether or not inventory should be written down?

LO2

6. It is common for an NFPO to receive donated supplies, equipment, and services. Do current ing standards require the recording of donations of this kind? Explain.

LO2

7. Outline the Handbook’s requirements for NFPOs with regard to ing for the capital assets of NFPOs.

LO2

8. What guidelines does the Handbook provide for pledges received by an NFPO?

LO2

9. The net assets section of an NFPO’s statement of financial position should be divided into three main sections. List the sections, and explain the reasons for each.

LO2

10. How should transfers of resources between funds be presented in fund financial statements? How should they be presented in a single set of nonfund financial statements?

LO2

11. What is the major difference between the capital asset impairment tests used by profit-oriented and NFPOs?

LO2

12. Contrast the revenue recognition and matching concepts that apply to profitoriented organizations with those that apply to NFPOs.

LO2

13. Outline the financial reporting requirements for an NFPO’s investments in other organizations.

LO4

14. Explain the use of budgetary ing and encumbrances by NFPOs.

LO2

15. Name the two methods of ing for contributions, and explain how the methods differ from each other.

LO2

16. Is it possible that an organization would be required to use certain aspects of the deferral method even though it reports using the restricted fund method? Explain.


754


746

CHAPTER 12


LO2

17. An organization raises funds for purchasing capital assets. Briefly outline how the ing for such funds raised would differ under the two methods of ing for contributions.

LO8

18. Explain how Part III of the Handbook can or should be used when an NFPO decides to use IFRS for reporting purposes.

LO9

*19. Governments are different from business organizations and NFPOs in many respects and yet in some respect they are similar. Explain.

LO9

*20. Briefly outline how the presentation of assets and liabilities on the statement of financial position of a government differs from the presentation shown on the balance sheet of a typical business enterprise.

Case 12-1

Beaucoup Hospital is located near Montreal. A religious organization created the not-for-profit hospital more than 70 years ago to meet the needs of area residents who could not otherwise afford adequate health care. Although the hospital is open to the public in general, its primary mission has always been to provide medical services for the poor. On December 23, Year 2, a gentleman told the hospital’s chief istrative officer the following story: “My mother has been in your hospital since October 30. The doctors have just told me that she will soon be well and can go home. I cannot tell you how relieved I am. The doctors, the nurses, and your entire staff have been just wonderful; my mother could not have gotten better care. She owes her life to your hospital. “I am from Alberta. Now that my mother is on the road to recovery, I must return immediately to my business. I am in the process of attempting to sell an enormous tract of land. When this acreage is sold, I will receive $15 million in cash. Because of the services that Beaucoup Hospital has provided for my mother, I want to donate $5 million of this money.” The gentlemen proceeded to write this promise on a piece of paper that he dated and signed. Obviously, all of the hospital’s officials were overwhelmed by this individual’s generosity. This $5 million gift was 50 times as large as any other gift ever received. However, the controller was concerned about preparing the financial statements for Year 2. “I have a lot of problems with recording this type of donation as an asset. At present, we are having serious cash flow problems; but if we show $5 million in this manner, our normal donors are going to think we have become rich and don’t need their .”

CASES LO2

Required: What problems are involved in ing for the $5 million pledge? How should Beaucoup Hospital report the amount?

Case 12-2 LO2

You have just completed an interview with the newly formed audit committee of the Andrews Street Youth Centre (ASYC). This organization was created to keep neighbourhood youth off the streets by providing recreational facilities where they can meet, exercise, play indoor sports, and hold dances. Since its inception,


CHAPTER 12


755

747

the organization has managed to survive on the basis of fees charged to parents whose children use the program. This year the centre received from a new provincial government program, in the form of an operating grant along with subsidy fees for those parents whose income is considered insufficient to pay the fee. A local foundation, with a long history in the community and a reputation for honouring its commitments, has also come to the aid of the centre. This outside financial came with the provision that the centre now present audited financial statements annually. Your firm is attempting to obtain the audit, as it is a November year-end, and the audit would be completed at a traditionally slow time of year. Many questions were posed during the interview, and the ASYC audit committee has requested a written response to the issues raised. Excerpts from the interview follow: • “We are looking for financial statements that are understandable to the board. For example, we have heard that we might have to capitalize and depreciate leasehold improvements. We have just completed $20,000 in expenditures to set up a weight room. We don’t understand this amortization idea. Will it make us look like we exceeded our operating budget since this budget is based on all expenditures, capital and operating? The government might consider reducing our next operating grant because of this ing. If you were selected as our auditor, would you have any problem if we simply expensed capital assets as incurred?” • “The Parent Advisory Group has organized several fundraising events. They raised $250,000 in cash donations. They hired a part-time manager and paid for advertising on a local radio station. The total costs for salaries and advertising were $65,000. The net receipts of $185,000 have been deposited in a separate ‘Computer Fund’ bank to allow for the purchase of some PCs. Our financial statements do not reflect this fund. Is that okay with you?” • “The manager of Sports Supplies Ltd. is a good friend of the centre. This year his company gave us a variety of items, such as exercise and bodybuilding apparatus and some basketball equipment. This is pretty neat stuff and must be worth at least $12,000 to $15,000. The audit committee does not want to record this because they are concerned that if it ends up in revenue our operating grants might be reduced.” • “Certain of the parents have donated goods or their time and would like to receive a tax receipt for the value of these donations. We are not certain whether we will have to reflect these in our financial statements this year. For example, 1. Jane Barnes provided valuable advice on improved management efficiency. She is a professional consultant and although these consulting fees were not budgeted for, the centre made several changes that resulted in a reduction of istrative costs. Ms. Barnes estimates that her full-rate fee would have been $7,500. 2. Rick James, who is a qualified Phys. Ed. instructor, has been substituting one day a week at no charge, which reduced our budgeted expenditures by $4,500 this year. 3. Parents have donated an awful lot of their time to operate fundraising activities (in addition to those involved with the Computer Fund). This time must be worth thousands of dollars.”


756


748

CHAPTER 12


• “Some of the staff have not been able to take their vacation this year due to scheduling problems. As a result, we will have to pay them vacation pay. These funds will be paid out after the year-end and will likely be covered by next year’s operating grant. To keep revenues and expenses matched, we want to record the vacation pay on a cash basis. Would that be okay? Otherwise, we’ll record a portion of next year’s grant as receivable this year.” • “The local foundation has provided the centre with a $30,000 grant to cover the expenses of a volunteer coordinator for two years. We received an instalment of $12,000, but we haven’t hired a coordinator yet. The coordinator will be paid on an hourly basis, and the number of hours each month will fluctuate over the next two years depending on the monthly activities.” • “The cost of the fundraising program for the year was $100,000, which includes the salary of one full time employee and the costs of preparing and mailing brochures to past and prospective donors. The brochures provide a summary of the programs at ASYC and some tips and early warnings sign to help parents recognize when their children may be involved with drugs. We are wondering whether these fundraising costs can be classified as educational costs on the statement of operations.”

Required: Prepare a draft of the response that will be sent to the audit committee.

Case 12-3 LO2

You have been recently elected to the position of treasurer on the board of directors for Canoes Are Us, a community-based service and NFPO that provides canoeing lessons and canoe rentals to various community groups. Canoes Are Us is a large NFPO with annual donations and grants in excess of $2 million. For the past several years, the canoe program has been funded through lesson fees, member contributions, and donations from the community. Canoes Are Us also relies on a large number of volunteers, including volunteers for the solicitation of donations and the performance of routine bookkeeping. Volunteer instructors are allowed to borrow canoes for their personal use for a nominal rental fee of $25 per month, as long as there are spare canoes available. The board has recently set up a program in conjunction with the local community centre to provide lessons and rentals to various groups of children from low-income families. The municipal government and the lottery commission have announced that they will provide, in total, a one-time grant of $250,000 this year to Canoes Are Us for this initiative. The grant has a number of conditions: 1. $50,000 is to be used to purchase a new truck and trailer to transport the canoes. 2. $150,000 is to be used for the purchase of new canoes and safety equipment. 3. $50,000 is restricted to covering operating costs, such as salaries, advertising, and campaign costs. 4. An external audit by independent auditors must be conducted at the end of the year and the report must be submitted to the municipal government. The books and records of Canoes Are Us were not previously audited. During a recent fundraising campaign, Canoes Are Us raised $45,000 in cash and received an additional $20,000 in pledges. The pledges are expected to be


CHAPTER 12


757

749

received by the middle of the next fiscal year. In addition, a local manufacturer has donated a new canoe valued at $2,500 to the program. The cost of the fundraising program for the year was $20,000, which includes the salary of one part-time employee and the costs of preparing and mailing brochures to past and prospective donors. The brochures describe the programs and services provided at Canoes Are Us and some tips on how to care for a canoe. You are wondering whether these fundraising costs can be classified as educational costs on the statement of operations. When you review the financial information for Canoes Are Us, you discover that the books and records have been kept on a modified accrual basis, whereby the cash basis is used for inflows but payables are accrued for outflows. Capital expenditures have been expensed in the year of purchase. There is no master list of existing canoes, and, in fact, some of the canoes appear to be in the possession of volunteer instructors on a semi-permanent basis even though the organization has full storage facilities available. The secretary to the board of directors is one of the volunteer instructors who has a canoe in her possession. You have also been advised that several instructors have unpaid rental s ranging from $50 to $400 each, and it appears that no serious efforts have been made to collect these s. In discussions with the previous treasurer about how the new grant and other funds are to be used and ed for, you discover that she is very opposed to any changes in the way that the ing records are kept and the financial statements are prepared. She says that changes would make it difficult to compare the programs and to understand how the funds are being used. She was very active in setting up the organization and was one of the driving forces behind obtaining the grant for the new program.

Required: Prepare a memorandum to the board of directors recommending, with ing explanations, what changes in ing and reporting are required in order to comply with GAAP and to fulfill the stewardship reporting objective. Assume that the deferral method is used to for contributions. (CGA-Canada adapted)

*Case 12-4 LO2

The Sassawinni First Nation is located adjacent to a town in northern Saskatchewan. The Nation is under the jurisdiction of the federal government’s Aboriginal Affairs and Northern Development Canada, and for years has received substantial funding from that department. The money has been used mainly to fund housing construction on the reserve and to provide maintenance payments to families that do not have a source of income. The houses are the property of the Sassawinni First Nation, and the band council allocates them to families on the basis of need. In addition to the housing, the band has been able to build a recreational centre, which also contains the band’s council chamber and istrative offices. A few years ago, some council with an entrepreneurial flair persuaded the Nation’s to build a shopping centre containing a large grocery store and several small specialty stores. The shopping centre is located on reserve land, and the band provided approximately 20% of the financing, with the balance coming from a provincially guaranteed bank loan. The shopping centre operates under the name Great Northern Centre Inc., and the Sassawinni First


758


750

CHAPTER 12


Nation owns 100% of its outstanding common shares. The centre has been a financial success, drawing a large proportion of its business from the ading town and surrounding agricultural area. Not only has it been a source of employment for First Nation families, but it has also generated enough cash to keep its loan payments current and has recently been able to declare and pay a dividend. Flushed with its success, the Sassawinni First Nation has submitted to the provincial government a business plan to construct a gambling casino on band property. It will be an incorporated entity and will be under the complete control of the Nation, subject only to provincial government gambling regulations. Up to the present time, the band has provided stewardship reports to the Department of Indian Affairs and Northern Development that outline the funds received from the federal government and the manner in which they have been spent. Government auditors have verified these statements, but no formal audit reports have been considered necessary. Now, with all of this new business activity taking place, proper audited financial statements will be required for the next fiscal year. You are employed by Fox, Fox, and Jameson, the public ing firm that is the auditor of Great Northern Centre Inc. Your firm has just been appointed auditor of Sassawinni First Nation, and this will be the firm’s first audit of an organization of this nature. Jane Fox, the managing partner in charge of this audit, has asked you to provide her with a written report outlining the specific ing principles that will be applicable in this case. “I am going to have to catch up quickly,” she said. “I am aware that there have been some changes in GAAP recently, but because our firm has not been involved with audits of this nature I have not paid much attention to what has been going on. One of the benefits of hiring new university grads like yourself is that you provide us with up-to-date technical knowledge.” You have just returned from interviewing the band chief, Joe Sullivan. “I am absolutely certain that we are going to get this casino,” he said. “The announcement will be made by the premier within two weeks, and I have received information from a knowledgeable insider that we will be on the list of First Nations to be granted casino licences. It will be a financial godsend to our people, employing well over 100 band and providing us with substantial profits, a portion of which will have to be devoted entirely to accommodations in accordance with the licensing agreement. This will allow us to build more housing for our , but with all the jobs that we now have, we will probably start charging rent for housing provided to those with jobs. Not only that, we have three permanent employees who have been with us for a while, and council has instructed me to investigate the possibility of providing a pension plan for them as well as for the permanent employees in our business enterprises.” When asked about the band’s ing records, Sullivan responded, “We have a very good bookkeeper, and the government auditor has always complimented her on the accuracy of her records. She provides timely statements showing us how much we have to spend. Our records are all here and go back at least 20 years. I would just as soon carry on the way we have been doing things, but with this new casino we’ll have to provide audited financial statements to the two governments—and, of course, to our .”

Required: Prepare the report requested by your firm’s managing partner.


CHAPTER 12

Case 12-5 LO2


759

751

Confidence Private is a high school in the historic city of Jeanville. It engages students in a dynamic learning environment and inspires them to become intellectually vibrant, comionate, and responsible citizens. The private school has been run as an NFPO since its inception 20 years ago. In an effort to attract sports-minded students from a variety of economic backgrounds, Confidence initiated a fundraising program in July Year 8, to raise $5 million to build a new gymnasium, swimming pool, and fitness centre, and to create an endowment fund for scholarships. The fundraising campaign was a huge success. By May 31, Year 9, the school had received the following contributions: 1. $2.0 million in cash contributions specifically designated for construction and maintenance of the facilities. 2. $3.1 million in cash contributions specifically designated for the scholarship fund. 3. Fitness equipment valued at $0.2 million. On June 15, Year 9, at the graduation ceremony, the heaster thanked the parents, students, alumni, and staff for all their , and officially closed the capital campaign. He provided the following details of the campaign: • The construction of the facility was nearing completion and would be ready for classes in September Year 9. The final cost for the facility would be approximately $1.9 million. • The contribution of fitness equipment would more than adequately equip the fitness centre. • $3.1 million in cash would be invested and managed by a professional investment adviser. The income earned on the endowment fund would be used to provide scholarships to students. Five students would receive full or partial scholarships in the fall of Year 10. Each year thereafter, it was expected that 25 to 30 students would receive full or partial scholarships to offset the annual tuition fee of $15,000. You are proud to be an alumnus of Confidence. You attended the graduation ceremony. At the garden reception after the ceremony, you accepted the heaster’s request to help out with the ing for the capital campaign and related events. He was unsure of whether the school should use the restricted fund or deferral method of ing for contributions. You agreed to provide a memo in which you would provide recommendations for ing policies to be applied for the year ended June 30, Year 9, and for future years when the facilities are being used and the scholarships are disbursed.

Required: Prepare a memo for the heaster. Explain the rationale for your recommendations and state your assumptions. (CGA-Canada adapted)

Case 12-6 LO2

In the fall of Year 5, eight wealthy business people from the same ethnic background formed a committee (CKER committee) to obtain a radio licence from the Canadian Radio-Television and Telecommunications Commission (CRTC). Their goal is to start a non-profit, ethnic community radio station for their area. They plan to call the station CKER-FM Ethnic Radio (CKER). It will broadcast music,


760


752

CHAPTER 12


news and sports from their country of origin, cultural information, ethnic cooking, and other such programs, seven days a week. The station’s capital requirements are to be financed by hips, donations, and various types of loans. It is expected that on-going operations will be ed by advertising paid for by business people from that ethnic community and by the larger business community targeting that ethnic audience, as well as by donations and hips. It is now March Year 6, and the CRTC has announced that hearings will start in one month on a number of broadcasting licence applications, including the CKER committee’s application. The CKER committee are fairly confident about the viability of their proposal; however, they have decided to seek the advice of a professional ing firm to assist with the endeavour. The CKER committee has engaged Maria & Casano, Chartered ants, for the assignment, as three of the five partners of the firm are from the same ethnic community. The partner in charge of the assignment has stated that the firm will donate half its fee for the work. You, a CA, work for Maria & Casano and have been put in charge of the assignment. You have met with the CKER committee and various volunteers associated with the project. Information gathered on station start-up is contained in Exhibit I. Exhibit II provides other information on the CKER committee’s proposal.

EXHIBIT I INFORMATION ON STATION START-UP 1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Costs to date have totalled $50,000 and are mostly transportation and meeting costs, as well as postage. The CKER committee have paid for these costs personally. To approve the licence application, the CRTC must see written commitments to finance the station’s start-up costs and operating losses in the first two years. Remaining costs to obtain the licence, excluding donated legal work, are expected to be about $8,000, and will be paid by CKER committee . If the CRTC approves the licence application, the CKER committee will immediately set up a non-profit organization and apply to Revenue Canada for charitable status, which it will likely receive. Fairly exhaustive efforts to obtain commercial financing have failed. As a result, four wealthy individuals have volunteered to provide CKER with the financing for the startup costs. They will each personally borrow $25,000 from financial institutions and give the funds to the station. These individuals expect the loans to be cost free to them as the station will make the interest and principal payments. (Assume that the loan principal is expected to be repaid over a 10-year period and that the rate of interest is 8% annually.) A “Reverse Life-Time Contribution” program will also be instituted. Under this program, a donor will pay the station a capital sum of at least $50,000. The station can do whatever it wants with the funds, but it will repay the donor an equal annual amount calculated as the capital sum divided by 90 years less the individual’s age at the time of contribution. Upon the death of the donor, the station will retain the balance of the funds. Currently, a 64-year-old station er has committed $78,000, and seven other individuals are considering this method of assisting the station. Initially, the station is to broadcast with a 2,500 watt signal. It is hoped that within three to four years it will be possible to obtain commercial financing for a second transmitter that will boost the power of the signal and the broadcast range.


761


CHAPTER 12


753

EXHIBIT II OTHER INFORMATION ABOUT PLANS FOR STATION 1.

2.

The CKER committee has analyzed census and other data to determine the potential market for the station. Engineering studies have mapped out the area that will be covered by the broadcast signal. There are about 1.1 million people in the target listening area. The latest Canadian census shows that 14% of the population comes from the target ethnic group. A number of surveys have shown that, of a given population, nearly 80% listen regularly to the radio. By applying a conservative factor of 50% to these findings, the CKER committee has arrived at a listenership figure of 5.6% or about 62,000 people. The CKER committee has found that about one in five of the businesses in the area are run by of the ethnic community, many of whom would like a medium for reaching their own people through direct advertising. The amount of time expected to be devoted to commercials per hour is four minutes in Year 1, five minutes in Year 2, and six minutes in Year 3. Advertising cost per minute, discounted to 25% below the current market rate, will be: Prime time (6 hours a day) Regular time (10 hours a day) Off-peak (8 hours a day)

3.

4.

5.

6.

$40 $30 $25

Advertising time will be sold by sales people whose remuneration will be a 15% commission. Miscellaneous revenue from renting out the recording studio when not in use by CKER could approach $3,000 per month in Year 3 but will start out at about $2,200 per month and will be $2,500 per month in Year 2. At least 120 people have committed to pay a $125 annual hip fee. hip carries no special privileges other than to be identified as a er of the station. hip is expected to grow by 20% per year. Start-up capital expenditures are as follows: transmission equipment $61,000; broadcast studio equipment $62,000; and production studio equipment $40,000. istration and other costs, including rent, are expected to total about $1,237,000 per year and will not increase when advertising sales increase. About one-third of the person-hours needed to run the station are expected to come from volunteers.

The partner has asked you to prepare a draft report to the committee discussing the viability of the proposed radio station over the initial three-year period. Since the committee is fairly confident that they will receive the licence, the partner has also asked you to recommend ing policies for the transactions that CKER is contemplating.


*Case 12-7 LO9

(CICA adapted)

The provincial government (50%) and three private companies (16.67% each) own Access Records Limited (ARL), which commenced operations on April 1, Year 1. The provincial government currently maintains, on a manual basis, all descriptive information on land in the province, such as information on ownership, legal descriptions, etc. ARL’s mandate is to computerize this information and to provide additional data not available from the manual system. The conversion of the


762


754

CHAPTER 12


manual system for several geographical regions of the province commenced on May 1, Year 1, with a targeted completion of all regions by September Year 3. The manual systems for each region will be maintained by ARL until each regional computerized system is operational. The computer files are to be available to online s; others not online must obtain the information they need by going to designated government offices for hard copies. The prime s are market research firms, publishers of databases, real estate companies, and a variety of individuals and corporations. ARL charges the s a fee based on the information obtained. Computerization will permit additional descriptive information to be added to the database. As a result, fees will increase as a region is computerized. No other organization provides this information. In calculating the pre-tax income of ARL, the following items must be taken into : • In return for providing the original information, the provincial government receives a royalty for revenue generated from information that was previously available from the manual system. Two of the private companies receive a royalty for revenue generated from any new information that they gather and enter into the database. The computer system automatically identifies charges for previously available information and charges for the new information. • The three private companies are to receive, for 10 years, a 20% rate of return on the original cost of the computer equipment and technology they were required to provide to ARL. At the end of 10 years, the computer equipment and technology will become the property of ARL. • One of the three private companies entered into a 10-year agreement to provide the land and building from which ARL operates. It receives a 12% rate of return per year on its investment in the land and building. All operating costs, including repairs and maintenance, property taxes, and necessary improvements, are to be paid by ARL. • The shareholders of ARL are to receive interest at the rate of prime plus 1% on any funds lent to ARL. If the private owners, in operating ARL, do not meet certain specified performance standards, the provincial government can acquire their shares at cost. It is now September Year 1. Your employer, Martin and Partners, Chartered ants, has been engaged by ARL as consultant for the fiscal year ending March 31, Year 2. Martin and Partners has been asked to submit a detailed report addressing significant ing matters. You obtain the following information: 1. The cash contribution of the four owners totals $40 million. Another $30–50 million will be needed to complete the computerization. ARL will borrow the additional cash from a chartered bank, using ARL’s assets as collateral. 2. Most of the total conversion cost of $70–90 million is for the costs of mapping, aerial photography, and computer graphics. 3. At the end of 10 years, the government is entitled to acquire, at fair value, the 50% of the shares that it does not own. The private companies are entitled to a reduced royalty if the provincial government acquires their shares. 4. The -fee schedule is set by the provincial government.


CHAPTER 12


763

755

5. Discounts are offered to volume s. 6. ARL intends to sell its technology to other provinces. 7. The province’s auditor is permitted access to ARL’s financial records.


(CICA adapted)


The OPI Care Centre is an NFPO funded by government grants and private donations. It prepares its annual financial statements using the deferral method of ing for contributions, and it uses only the operations fund to for all activities. It uses an encumbrance system as a means of controlling expenditures. The following summarizes some of the transactions made in Year 6: 1. The founding member of OPI contributed $100,000 on the conditions that the principal amount be invested in marketable securities and that only the income earned from the investment is spent on operations. 2. During the year, purchase orders were issued to cover the budgeted cost of $1,400,000 for goods and contracted services. 3. During the year, a public campaign was held to raise funds for daily operations for the current year. Cash of $800,000 was collected, and pledges for an additional $100,000 were received by the end of the year. It is estimated that approximately 95% of these pledges will be collected early in the new year. 4. The provincial government pledged $600,000 for the year to cover operating costs and an additional $1,000,000 to purchase equipment and furniture. All of the grant money was received by the end of the year, except for the last $50,000 to cover operating costs for December. 5. OPI used the $1,000,000 received from the provincial government to purchase equipment and furniture for the care facility. The amortization of these assets amounted to $100,000 for the year. A purchase order had not been issued for this purchase. 6. Invoices totalling $1,450,000 were received for goods and contracted services. Of these invoices, 90% were paid by the end of the fiscal year. Purchase orders in the amount of $1,375,000 had been issued for these services.

Required: In accordance with the requirements of the CICA Handbook, prepare the journal entries necessary to reflect the transactions. (CGA-Canada adapted)


The Perch Falls Minor Hockey Association was established in Perch Falls in January Year 5. Its mandate is to promote recreational hockey in the small community of Perch Falls. With the of the provincial government, local business people, and many individuals, the association raised sufficient funds to build an indoor hockey arena and it also established an endowment fund for paying travel costs to tournaments on an annual basis.


764


756

CHAPTER 12


The following schedule summarizes the cash flows for the year ended December 31, Year 5. PERCH FALLS MINOR HOCKEY ASSOCIATION ($000s) Operating fund Cash inflows Government grant for operating costs Government grant for hockey arena Corporate donations for hockey arena Registration fees Contribution for tournaments Rental of hockey arena Interest received

Capital fund

$ 90 $500 460 50 $50 70 210

Cash outflows Operating expenses Construction of hockey arena Purchase of marketable securities Travel costs for tournament Cash, end of year

Endowment fund

960

3 53

205 960

205 $ 5

$

960 0

50 3 53 $ 0

Additional Information • The new hockey arena was completed in late August Year 5. The official opening was held on August 30, with a game between the Perch Falls Old-Timers and the local firefighters. The arena is expected to have a 40-year useful life and no residual value. • A long-time resident of Perch Falls donated the land on which the arena was built. The land was valued at $100,000. The association gave a donation receipt to the donor. • A former resident of Perch Falls donated ice-making and ice-cleaning equipment to the association. A receipt for $60,000 was issued for the donation. The equipment has a useful life of 10 years and no residual value. • The donation for tournaments was contributed on January 1, Year 5, with the condition that the principal amount of $50,000 be invested in 6% corporate bonds. The interest earned on the investment can be used only for travel costs for out-of-town tournaments. All investments in bonds will be held to their maturity date. • The provincial government pledged $100,000 a year for operating costs. Ninety percent of the grant is advanced throughout the year. Upon receipt of the association’s annual report, the government will issue the last 10% of the annual grant to the association. • Registration fees and rental fees for the hockey arena are received at the beginning of the hockey season and cover the entire season, from September 1, Year 5, to April 30, Year 6. • At the end of the year, the association owed $7,000 for services received in the month of December. • The association wants to use the restricted fund method of ing for contributions and to use three separate funds: operating fund, capital fund, and endowment fund. All capital assets are to be capitalized and amortized, as applicable, over their estimated useful lives.


CHAPTER 12


765

757

Required: (a) Prepare a statement of financial position and statement of operations for each of the three funds as at and for the year ended December 31, Year 5. (b) Assume that 300 children ed with the Association in Year 5. What was the average cost per ed child for Year 5 for running the Association? What costs did you include/exclude and why? (CGA-Canada adapted)


All facts about this NFPO are identical to those described in Problem 2, except that the association wants to use the deferral method of ing for contributions. The centre will continue to use the three separate funds.

Required: Prepare a statement of financial position and statement of operations for each of the three funds as at and for the year ended December 31, Year 5.

Problem 12-4 LO2, 3, 4, 5, 6

Zak Organization is an NFPO set up for famine relief. It uses the restricted fund method of ing and has three funds: a general fund, a capital fund (through which it is raising cash to the purchase of a new istrative building), and an endowment fund. Zak has been operating for 25 years and has a December 31 year-end. Zak’s policy with respect to capital assets is to capitalize and amortize the capital assets over their expected useful lives. On June 30, Year 5, Zak received three donations from a former director: • $30,000 cash for general famine relief efforts • $50,000 to be used solely for construction of the new istrative building; of the $50,000, 70% was received in cash, with the remainder promised in February Year 6 (construction is expected to commence in October Year 6) • $600,000 cash, which was invested on July 1, Year 5, in long-term Government of Canada bonds, with 10% interest to be paid semi-annually on December 31 and June 30; the $600,000 donation was given with the stipulation that it be invested in interest-bearing securities, with the principal to be maintained by Zak, although interest earned on the securities is not restricted

Required: (a) Briefly explain how each of the three donations should be ed for using the restricted fund method of ing. In particular, should each of the donations be recognized as revenue for the year ended December 31, Year 5? If yes, in which fund(s) would the revenue be recognized (including interest earned in fiscal Year 5 on the bonds purchased with the $600,000 donation)? Note: Do not prepare journal entries. (b) If Zak used the deferral method of ing instead of the restricted fund method, how would this change the requirements for ing for the $50,000 and $600,000 donations? (c) Despite the recent donations from its former director, Zak is increasingly faced with severe budgetary constraints. Zak is considering implementing encumbrance ing in the coming year. (i) Briefly describe the process of encumbrance ing. (ii) Briefly describe how encumbrance ing might serve as a device to help control spending when it is used in conjunction with a formal budgeting system. (CGA-Canada adapted)


766


758

CHAPTER 12



You have been recruited to act as the treasurer on the board of directors of an NFPO that has had difficulty in recent years controlling its expenditures. The board of directors has very limited ing experience. The organization, Protect Purple Plants (PPP), is considering implementing an encumbrance ing system to assist in expenditure control. PPP receives an estimated $800,000 per year in regular contributions from the federal government.

Required: (a) State two advantages and two disadvantages of implementing an encumbrance ing system. (b) PPP uses the deferral method of ing for contributions and has no separate fund for restricted contributions. On January 1, Year 6, PPP received its first restricted cash contribution—$120,000 for the purchase and maintenance of land and a greenhouse building for its rare purple plant collection. On July 1, Year 6, PPP acquired land and a building for $22,000 and $80,000 cash, respectively. The building has an estimated useful life of 20 years and zero residual value. On December 31, Year 6, the remaining $18,000 cash was paid to KJ Maintenance Ltd. for a three-year maintenance contract that requires KJ personnel to provide maintenance services four days per month until December 31, Year 9. Assuming that encumbrance ing will not be implemented until Year 7, prepare the journal entries for the following dates: (i) January 1, Year 6 (ii) July 1, Year 6 (iii) December 31, Year 6 (CGA-Canada adapted)

Problem 12-6 LO2, 6

The Fara Littlebear Society is an NFPO funded by government grants and private donations. It was established in Year 5 by the friends of Fara Littlebear to encourage and promote the work of Native Canadian artists. Fara achieved international recognition for her art depicting images of journey and exploration. The society leased a small building in January Year 5. The building contains a small art gallery on the first floor and office space on the second floor. The society spent $83,850 for leasehold improvements. The art gallery opened for public viewing on April 1, Year 5. The unadjusted trial balance for the year ended December 31, Year 5, was as follows: Debit Cash Investment in bonds (Note 1) Artwork (Note 2) Leasehold improvements (Note 3) Government grant—operating costs (Note 6) Government grant—restricted for purchase of artwork Corporate donations—restricted for purchase of artwork Corporate donations—restricted for leasehold improvements Individual donations restricted for scholarships (Note 1) Interest income Revenue from ission fees to art gallery

$

Credit

5,000 80,000 300,000 83,850 $ 90,000 150,000 150,000 78,000 80,000 4,000 67,000

(continued)


767


CHAPTER 12

Rent expense (Note 3) Salaries expense (Note 4) Other expenses Scholarship awarded


759

Debit

Credit

26,000 66,000 53,150 5,000 $619,000

$619,000

Additional Information • A wealthy individual donated $80,000 with the condition that the principal be invested in low-risk investments. The principal was invested in long-term bonds, which are expected to be held to maturity. The interest on the bonds is to be used to provide scholarships to aspiring Native artists who wish to study art at a Canadian university or college. The first scholarship of $5,000 was awarded in September Year 5. • The artwork consists of 20 paintings from a number of Canadian artists. These paintings are expected to be held for at least 10 years. The paintings will likely appreciate in value over the time they are owned by the art gallery. • The society signed a 5-year lease on the building with an option to renew for one further term of 5 years. The term of the lease commenced on January 1, Year 5. The total rent paid for the year included a deposit of $2,000 for the last month’s rent. The leasehold improvements were completed on March 31, Year 5. The office space was occupied by the staff of the society, and the art gallery was opened for business on April 1, Year 5. • Salaries earned but not yet paid amounted to $5,000 at December 31, Year 5. • The society received office equipment from a local business person on January 1, Year 5. A donation receipt for $20,000 was given for this contribution. The office equipment has a useful life of five years with no residual value. • The provincial government provided an operating grant of $100,000 for Year 5, of which $90,000 was received by the end of the year. The remaining $10,000 will be received once the society provides financial statements prepared in accordance with GAAP. • The society will follow Part III of the CICA Handbook and wishes to use the deferral method of ing for contributions.

Required: (a) Explain how the matching principle is applied when the deferral method is used to for restricted contributions. (b) Prepare a statement of financial position for the society at December 31, Year 5. Show your ing calculations and state your assumptions. (You can use an assumed number for excess of revenue over expenses to balance your statement of financial position.) (CGA-Canada adapted)

*Problem 12-7 LO2, 6

The Brown Training Centre is a charitable organization dedicated to providing computer training to unemployed people. Individuals must apply to the centre and indicate why they would like to take the three-month training session. If their application is accepted, they must pay a $200 deposit. The deposit is refunded upon successful completion of the course or is forfeited as a processing fee if the individual does not complete the course.


768


760

CHAPTER 12


During the first year of operations in Year 3, 90 individuals were accepted into the course. Of these 90 individuals, 50 completed the course, 10 dropped out, and 30 were still taking the course at the end of the fiscal year. The centre receives most of its funding from the provincial government. During the year, the government advanced $1,000,000 to cover operating costs. Within two months of the year-end, the centre must provide financial statements prepared in accordance with GAAP. The government will cover all operating costs. The excess of amounts advanced over the amount expended must be carried over and applied to operating costs of the next year. Operating costs to be reimbursed are defined to exclude purchases of capital assets and are to be reduced by the amount of application fees forfeited. A private company donated computers and office equipment with a fair value of $320,000. The centre was fortunate to receive this donation. Otherwise, it would have had to raise money through other means to purchase these items. The capital assets were put into use as of April 1, Year 3, and have an estimated useful life of three years. The centre uses the straight-line method to amortize its capital assets. The part-time bookkeeper for the centre prepared the following cash flow statement for the year ended December 31, Year 3: Cash receipts Government grant Deposits from course participants Total cash receipts

$1,000,000 18,000 1,018,000

Cash expenditures Salaries and benefits istration and supplies Rent and utilities Refund of deposits Total cash disbursements Cash balance at end of year

620,000 220,000 160,000 10,000 1,010,000 $ 8,000

At the end of the year the following costs had been incurred but not yet paid: Salaries and benefits Utilities

$

8,000 6,000

The executive director of the centre has asked you for assistance in preparing the financial statements for the centre for the first year of operations. The deferral method should be used in ing for the contributions.

Required: (a) Briefly explain how the accrual basis of ing is applied when ing for capital assets for an NFPO. (b) Prepare the statement of revenues and expenses for the centre for the year ended December 31, Year 3. (c) Compute the following liabilities on the statement of financial position for the centre at December 31, Year 3: (i) Accrued liabilities (ii) Deposits from course participants (iii) Deferred contributions (CGA-Canada adapted)


CHAPTER 12

Problem 12-8 LO2, 3, 4, 5


769

761

The Ford Historical Society is an NFPO funded by government grants and private donations. It uses both an operating fund and a capital fund. The capital fund s for moneys received and restricted for major capital asset acquisitions. The operating fund is used for all other activities. The society uses the restricted fund method of ing for contributions. An encumbrance system is used within the operating fund to ensure that expenditures made in any one year do not exceed the amounts budgeted. Donated materials and services are recorded if such items would have been purchased had they not been received as donations. The following are some selected activities that took place during the current year: • Purchase orders in the amount of $500,000 for goods and services were issued during the year. • Pledges totalling $350,000 were made to the society, of which $150,000 applies to the operations of the following year. It is estimated that 3% of all pledges will be uncollectible. • Pledges of $310,000 were collected, and pledges totalling $5,000 were written off. • A government grant of $500,000 for acquisition and renovation of an office building for the society was approved by the government. All of the grant money was received except for the last 10%, which is expected to be received in the first month of the next fiscal year. • Invoices for all of the goods and services ordered during the year were received. The total cost was $510,000, of which $480,000 was paid for by the end of the year. • An old office building was acquired and renovated for a cost of $500,000. Amortization expense on the office building was $10,000. • A local radio station donated free airtime to the society. The society saved the $5,000 it would normally have paid for this airtime.

Required: Prepare the journal entries required to record these activities, and indicate which fund each journal entry will be recorded in. (CGA-Canada adapted)

Problem 12-9 LO2, 6

Fairchild Centre is an NFPO funded by government grants and private donations. It was established on January 1, Year 5, to provide counselling services and a dropin centre for single parents. On January 1, Year 5, the centre leased an old warehouse in the central part of Smallville for $2,000 per month. It carried out minor renovations in the warehouse to create a large open area for use as a play area for children and three offices for use by the executive director and counsellors. The lease runs from January 1, Year 5, to June 30, Year 7. By that time, the centre hopes to move into new quarters that are more suitable for the activities carried out. The following schedule summarizes the cash flows for the year ended December 31, Year 5: Cash inflows Government grant for operating costs (Note 1) Donations from individuals with no restrictions Donations from individuals for rent of warehouse for 2½ years Donations from individuals for purchase of land (Note 3)

$ 50,000 63,000 60,000 58,000 231,000


770


762

CHAPTER 12


Cash outflows Renovations of warehouse Salary of executive director (Note 4) Fees paid to counsellors (Note 4) Rent paid for 2½ years Other operating expenses Cash, end of year

43,000 33,000 20,000 60,000 24,000 180,000 $ 51,000

Additional Information • The provincial government agreed to provide an operating grant of $50,000 per year. In addition, the government has pledged to match contributions collected by the centre for the purchase of land for construction of a new complex for the centre. The maximum contribution by the government toward the purchase of land is $100,000. • The centre has signed an agreement to purchase a property in the downtown area of Smallville for $225,000. There is an old house on the property, which is currently used as a rooming house. The closing date is any time between July 1, Year 6, and December 31, Year 6. The centre plans to demolish the existing house and build a new complex. • The centre has recently commenced a fundraising program to raise funds to purchase the land and construct a new building. So far, $58,000 has been raised from individuals toward the purchase of the land. In the new year, the centre will focus its efforts to solicit donations from businesses in the area. The provincial government will advance the funds promised under its pledge on the closing date for the purchase of the property. • All the people working for the centre are volunteers except for the executive director and the counsellors. The executive director receives a salary of $36,000 a year, while the counsellors bill the centre for professional services rendered based on the number of hours they work at the centre. The director has not yet received her salary for the month of December. One of the counsellors received an advance of $1,000 in December Year 5, for work to be performed in January Year 6. • The centre wishes to use the deferral method of ing for contributions and to segregate its net assets between restricted and unrestricted. It capitalizes the cost of capital assets and amortizes the capital assets over their useful lives.

Required: (a) State the assumptions necessary to recognize the pledge contributions from the provincial government, and prepare the journal entry to record the pledge, if applicable. (b) Prepare a statement of operations for the Fairchild Centre for the year ended December 31, Year 5. Show your ing calculations and state your assumptions. (c) Prepare a statement of changes in net assets for the Fairchild Centre for the year ended December 31, Year 5. (CGA-Canada adapted)


771


CHAPTER 12

Problem 12-10 LO2, 3, 4, 5


763

The Far North Centre (the Centre) is an anti-poverty organization funded by contributions from governments and the general public. For a number of years it has been run by a small group of permanent employees with the help of part-timers and dedicated volunteers. It owns its premises, which are in the process of being renovated. The funds for this were obtained through a special capital fund campaign carried out last year. Its main program is the daily provision of meals to the needy. It also distributes clothing, most of which is donated. Operating funds come from government grants, interest earned from endowment investments, and a public campaign held in the latter part of each year to raise funds for the needs of the next fiscal year. The Centre maintains its records in accordance with the restricted fund method of ing for contributions, and prepares its financial statements using an operating fund, a capital fund (for all activities related to capital assets), and an endowment fund. The following are the fund trial balances as at January 1, Year 6: Debit Operating Fund Cash Pledges receivable Allowance for uncollectible pledges Grants receivable s payable Wages payable Accrued liabilities Deferred revenue Fund balance

$ 570,500 705,000 $

427,500 137,250 9,750 800,000 88,500 $1,493,000

$ 287,500 112,500 810,250 491,000

$1,701,250 Endowment Fund Cash Investments Fund balance

30,000

217,500

$1,493,000 Capital Fund Cash Grants receivable Land and building Furniture and equipment Accumulated amortization s payable Investment in capital assets Fund balance

Credit

$

$ 648,200 9,000 653,050 391,000 $1,701,250

37,500 375,000

$ 412,500

$ 412,500 $ 412,500

The following transactions took place in Year 6. 1. The Year 6 budget, the totals of which are summarized below, was recorded. Budgeted revenues Budgeted expenses Budgeted surplus

$2,200,000 2,150,000 $ 50,000


772


764

CHAPTER 12


2. The agency uses an encumbrance system in the operating fund as a means of controlling expenditures. During the year, purchase orders for goods and services at an estimated amount of $1,450,000 were issued. 3. $35,000 from endowment fund cash was invested in marketable securities. 4. Office equipment costing $2,500 was purchased with operating fund cash. 5. Invoices totalling $1,375,000 were received on purchase orders originally recorded at an estimated cost of $1,392,000. These invoices were recorded as s payable and were allocated 55% to food program, 20% to clothing program, and 25% to istration. 6. The capital fund grants receivable were collected in full, and the $9,000 in s payable was paid. During Year 6, building renovations costing $300,000 and equipment purchases of $85,000 were made. Of this cost, 90% was paid, with the balance held back and still owing at year-end. 7. Operating fund s payable amounting to $1,560,000 and the wages payable and accrued liabilities at the beginning of the year were all paid. 8. All of the operating fund pledges and grants receivable at the beginning of the year were collected in full. 9. The deferred revenue from the Year 5 fundraising campaign was made up of the following: Contributions Less: Campaign expense

$1,200,000 400,000 $ 800,000

The Centre runs the campaign with its owns people and is fully responsible for all decisions made during the campaign. 10. Government grants for operating purposes totalled $900,000, of which $850,000 was received during the year, with the balance expected early in Year 7. 11. The total wage costs for the year amounted to $400,000, of which $325,000 was paid and $75,000 is payable at year-end. These costs are to be allocated 40% each to the food and clothing programs, with the balance to istration. 12. The campaign to raise funds for next year’s operations was held in December. Cash of $500,000 was collected and pledges of $700,000 were received. It is expected that 5% of these pledges will be uncollectible. Total fundraising costs were $322,000, of which $75,000 is still owed to suppliers. 13. An endowment contribution of $8,000 cash was received. In addition, the investments in the endowment fund earned $31,200 in interest. 14. The annual depreciation on the buildings and equipment amounted to $92,000. 15. At the end of the year, the balances in the encumbrance s and the budget s were closed.

Required: (a) Prepare the journal entries necessary to reflect the Year 6 events. (b) For each fund, prepare a Year 6 statement of financial position and statement of operations and changes in fund balance.


773


CHAPTER 12


765

(c) Prepare a cash flow statement on a non-fund basis. (d) Prepare closing entries. (e) What percentage of Year 6 revenues of the operating fund were spent on program costs and what percentage was spent on istration and fundraising? How will s of these financial statements feel about these percentages?

Problem 12-11 LO2, 3, 4, 6

All facts about this NFPO are identical to those described in Problem 10, except that the deferral method of recording contributions is used for ing and for external financial reporting. Fund ing is not used. The Year 6 transactions are also identical to those described in Problem 10. The organization’s statement of financial position on January 1, Year 6, is shown below. FAR NORTH CENTRE STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION January 1, Year 6 Current Assets Cash Pledges receivable Allowance for uncollectible pledges Grants receivable Investments Capital assets: Land and buildings Furniture and equipment Accumulated depreciation

Current Liabilities s payable Wages payable Accrued liabilities Deferred Revenue Deferred contributions Deferred building campaign contributions Deferred contributions related to capital assets Net Assets Net assets invested in capital assets Net assets restricted for endowment purposes Unrestricted net assets

$ 895,500 705,000 (30,000) 330,000 1,900,500 375,000 810,250 491,000 (648,200) 653,050 $2,928,550 $ 436,500 137,250 9,750 583,500 800,000 391,000 240,500 1,431,500 412,550 412,500 88,500 913,550 $2,928,550

Required: (a) Prepare the journal entries necessary to reflect the Year 6 events. (b) Prepare a Year 6 statement of financial position, a statement of revenues and expenses, and a statement of changes in net assets for the year.


774


766

CHAPTER 12


(c) Prepare a cash flow statement for the year. (d) Prepare closing entries. (e) What are fundraising costs as a percent of total revenues for Year 6? What do you think donors to the Centre will think of this percentage?

Problem 12-12 LO2, 3, 4, 6

The William Robertson Society is a charitable organization funded by government grants and private donations. It prepares its annual financial statements using the restricted fund method in accordance with the CICA Handbook, and uses both an operating fund and a capital fund. The operating fund records the regular operating activities of the society. An encumbrance system is used within the fund to ensure that expenditures made in any one year do not exceed the amounts budgeted. It is the policy of the society to record donated materials and services received during the year, if such items would have been purchased had they not been received as donations. The capital fund s for moneys received from special fundraising campaigns conducted when there is a need for major fixed assets acquisitions. The following are some selected events that took place during the current year: • Pledges for current year’s operating costs amounting to $125,000 were received, of which $90,000 was collected in cash. • Purchase orders were issued during the year as follows: Office equipment Goods and services

$ 15,000 100,000

• A grant of $70,000 for this year’s operations was announced by the government, of which $55,000 had been received by the society at year-end. • Employee wages totalled $60,000 for the year. Wages amounting to $2,000 were unpaid at year-end. • Invoices for all of the goods and services ordered during the year were received. Of the invoiced amounts, 70% was paid. The invoiced amounts were equal to those on the purchase orders. • The office equipment that was ordered arrived. The invoiced amount of $15,300 was paid in cash, using operating funds. • A local radio station donated free airtime to the society. The station would normally bill a customer $3,000 for this airtime. • A prominent citizen made a pledge of $35,000 to help fund the operating expenditures of the next fiscal year.

Required: Prepare the journal entries required to record these events, and indicate in which fund each journal entry will be recorded.

Problem 12-13 LO2

The Valleytown Senior’s Residential Home (Valleytown) engages in palliative care, education, and fundraising programs. The costs of each program include the costs of personnel, premises, and other expenses that are directly related to providing the program. Valleytown also incurs a number of general expenses that are common to the istration of the organization and each of its programs.


CHAPTER 12


775

767

Financial and nonfinancial data for the three programs for the year ended December 31, Year 12 were as follows: Direct costs # of employees # of computer hours

Palliative

Education

Fundraising

$5,100,000 45 2,000

$1,200,000 8 400

$1,400,000 12 100

Both the education and fundraising programs include the use of the same brochures to further the work of Valleytown. The brochures are designed and intended to achieve a specific educational objective. Included in the fundraising costs above is $200,000 for brochures. Some of the brochures included in direct mail fundraising campaigns are mailed to individuals who have been identified as potential beneficiaries of the educational component of the brochures. Accordingly, 20% of the cost of those brochures is allocated from the fundraising to the education program. The majority of the direct mail campaign expenses remain a cost of the fundraising program. Valleytown presents its expenses by function on the statement of operations. It allocates certain of its general expenses by identifying the appropriate basis of allocating each component expense, and applies that basis consistently each year. Corporate governance and general management expenses are not allocated; other general expenses are allocated on the following bases: • Human resources department costs—proportionately, on the number of employees working for each program • Information technology department costs—proportionately, on the number of hours of computer time provided for each of the programs. The following summarizes the general costs for the year ended December 31, Year 12: Corporate governance Human resources department Information technology department General management

$ 300,000 800,000 1,250,000 650,000 $3,000,000

Required: (a) Prepare a schedule to allocate an appropriate amount of general costs and any other costs to the three programs. Then, indicate the percentage of total costs pertaining to the three programs and general costs. (b) Write the note to Valleytown’s Year 12 financial statements required by Section 4470.08 on the amounts allocated from fundraising and general functions, and the amounts and the functions to which they have been allocated.


Go to the website of the Salvation Army (www.salvationarmy.ca). Answer the following questions based on the 2012 audited financial statements. For each question, indicate where in the financial statements or annual report you found the answer and/or provide a brief explanation. Round percentages to one decimal point and other ratios to two decimal points.


776


768

CHAPTER 12


(a) Read the auditor’s report. There is a paragraph there that is unique to NFPOs. Explain what message it conveys. (b) Approximately how much of the organization’s fund balances are restricted? What can they be spent on? (c) How many funds are reported? (d) Approximately what percentage of the year’s revenues was spent on fundraising? (e) What is its largest single source of revenue? (f) Has the organization’s cash increased or decreased over the past two years? What was a major factor in the change? (g) Outline what is included in the ing entity. (h) Briefly explain the army’s amortization policy. (i) Which method of revenue recognition for contributions is being used? (j) What is their policy with respect to donated materials and services?



Go to the website of the Canadian Cancer Society (www.cancer.ca). Answer as many of the questions from Problem 1 as you can based on the 2012 Canada-wide financial statements. For each question, indicate where in the financial statements or annual report you found the answer and/or provide a brief explanation. (Some questions may not be applicable.) Go to the website of the University of Saskatchewan (www.usask.ca/reporting). Search for the 2012 financial statements and answer the following questions. For each question, indicate where in the financial statements or annual report you found the answer and/or provide a brief explanation. Round percentages to one decimal point and other ratios to two decimal points. (a) What ing policy was used for reporting contributions? (b) What percentage of total revenue came from government grants? Tuition fees? Donations? (c) What was the ratio of scholarship expense to tuition fee revenue? (d) Did the university report any pledges receivable and, if so, for how much? What amount is not expected to be collected within one year? (e) What percentage of total expenses was spent on educating the students, and what was spent on research during the period? List the items you include for each category. (f) What was the total value of endowment funds at the end of the year? What portion of the endowment funds is designated for scholarships? For research? (g) What method of reporting was used for investments in the various funds? What was the unrealized gain or loss from these investments during the year and how were these gains or losses reported? (h) What was the average cost for the university to graduate a student?



777

Endnotes Chapter 1 1 Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, , , Greece, Hungary, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Slovakia, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, and United Kingdom. 2 The EU countries that have maintained their own currencies are Bulgaria, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Hungary, Latvia, Poland, Romania, Sweden, and United Kingdom. On the other hand, Andorra, Kosovo, Montenegro, Monaco, San Marino, and Vatican City are not EU but do officially use the euro as their currency. 3 Ernst & Young, www.ey.com.

Chapter 2 1 The concept of control is discussed in greater detail in Chapter 3. 2 The concept of an acquisition differential is discussed in Chapter 3 and subsequent chapters. 3 Net assets are equal to total assets less total liabilities. Shareholders’ equity is equal to net assets. In making this type of calculation, it is often easier to use the amount for shareholders’ equity rather than compute the amount for net assets.

Chapter 3 1 Matt Davies, “CMA Management,”CMA Canada, June/ July 2010, pp. 14–15. 2 An exception to this occurs when the acquiree applies “push-down ing.” This topic is discussed later in this chapter. 3 Conceptual Framework for Financial Reporting, paragraph 4.4. 4 It is also possible for a parent to form a less than 100%-owned subsidiary, or for a 100%-owned subsidiary to later issue shares that are not purchased by the parent. In either case, the observations made in this paragraph are basically the same. 5 The net income of the subsidiary earned after the acquisition date would be reduced by the amortization of the acquisition differential, because the asset values in the ing records of the subsidiary are not the values used for consolidation. This concept will be discussed in Chapter 5.

Chapter 4 1 Carrying amount 1 (Fair value 2 Carrying Amount) 5 Fair value

Chapter 5 1 Some foreign jurisdictions assess tax at the corporate group level. 2 IAS 1: Presentation of Financial Statements requires a statement of changes in equity as part of the complete set of financial statements. It does not require a separate statement of retained earnings. However, the statement of changes in equity does provide reconciliation between the carrying amount of each component of equity at the beginning and the end of the period. Retained earnings is one of those components. In this textbook, we will use the statement of retained earnings as a surrogate for the retained earnings component of the statement of changes in equity. 3 Indefinite does not necessarily mean an infinite life, but rather one that extends beyond the foreseeable future. 4 IFRS 8: Operating Segments is discussed in more detail in Chapter 9. 5 LIFO is not acceptable under IFRSs. Unless otherwise noted, we will assume a FIFO cost flow in all examples in the text. 6 This example is adapted from Example 2 of IAS 36: Illustrative Examples. 7 This example is adapted from Example 7a of IAS 36: Illustrative Examples. 8 It should be emphasized again that the elimination entries shown in the working paper are not recorded in the ing records of either the parent or the subsidiary.

Chapter 6 1 Intercompany losses are not eliminated when the assets are impaired. This situation will be discussed later in this chapter. 2 The use of a contra is optional. Companies could record the adjustment to fair value directly in the land . If so, they would lose track of the original cost in the general ledger. The company could use a property, plant, and equipment subledger to track the necessary information.

Chapter 7 1 http://www.suncor.com/pdf/Suncor_financial_statements_ 2011_en.pdf 2 We will use the straight-line method in the first few illustrations because it is easier to understand. Later in the chapter, we will illustrate the effective-interest method, which is required by IFRSs. 3 The entry for interest revenue or interest expense is usually one entry that incorporates the amortization of the or discount on the bonds. In this example, we are showing two separate entries so it is easier to see that the cash amounts are equal and offsetting.

769


778


4 We must also reduce the amount of the deferred tax liability that was set up in Year 1 by $30. 5 Reproduced with the permission of BCE Inc. Copyright © 2012. All rights reserved. 6 One could argue that the gain on sale should also be reported in other comprehensive income since it is similar to revaluing the asset to its fair value. However, IAS 16 explicitly states that the gain or loss on derecognition of property, plant, and equipment should be reported in net income.

Chapter 8 1 IAS 7, paragraphs 39 and 40. 2 See the section near the end of Chapter 2 for a further discussion of changes to and from the equity method.

Chapter 9 1 IFRS 10 and 12 were not effective until 2013, when they replaced IAS 27 and SIC 12. Canadian Tire applied IAS 27 and SIC 12 in its 2011 financial statements. 2 Start-up operations may also be operating segments before earning revenues.

Chapter 10 1 http://www.sedar.com/GetFile.do?lang=EN&docClass =5&issuerNo=00001177&fileName=/csfsprod/data127/ filings/01867158/00000001/C%3A\clients\Bomb\ Ann12\BBD-FS-YE2011-En.pdf. 2 http://www.sedar.com/GetFile.do?lang=EN&docClass =5&issuerNo=00001289&fileName=/csfsprod/data125/ filings/01836557/00000001/e%3A\Scotia_FINAL\ Annual-Financials_ENG.pdf. 3 See IAS 21, paragraph 16. 4 For example, if the goods are sold to customers in Australia and the selling price of the inventory is A$9,950 on June 30 (assuming that none of the inventory purchased had been sold by year-end), the selling price in Canadian dollars would be $9,443 (A$9,950 3 0.949). Because the translated selling price is greater than the previous translated historical cost of $9,410, a writedown would not be required.

770

Endnotes

5 See John E. Stewart, “The Challenges of Hedge ing.”Journal of ancy (November 1989), pp. 48–56. 6 ing for a net investment in a foreign operation will be discussed in Chapter 11. 7 The present value factor for two months at 1% per month is calculated as 1/1.012 or 0.9803.

Chapter 12 1 Hereinafter, all Handbook sections referred to will either be found in Part II or Part III unless otherwise noted. The five sections discussed below and the 4400 series appear in Part III, whereas the other sections appear in Part II. 2 An alternative term often used is reserve for encumbrances. 3 A similar conclusion was made in a CICA research study. See “Financial Reporting for Non-profit Organizations” (Toronto: CICA, 1980), p. 52. 4 If the entity chooses to not present this separately, the $2,016 would be included in the other two components of net assets based on whether the capital assets were purchased with restricted or unrestricted resources. 5 If the entity chooses to not present this separately, the $1,140 would be included in the unrestricted net assets component of net assets. 6 This entry would not be necessary if the entity chose not to present net assets invested in capital assets separately. 7 These two s would be closed to unrestricted net assets if the entity chose not to present net assets invested in capital assets separately. 8 For a complete copy of United Way/Centraide Ottawa’s financial statements, go to www.unitedwayottawa.ca. 9 “Financial Reporting by Governments,” a research study, Toronto: CICA, 1980. 10 “Local Government Financial Reporting,” a research study, Toronto: CICA, 1985. 11 A. Beedle, “ing for Local Government in Canada: The State of the Art,” Vancouver: Canadian Certified General ants’ Research Foundation, 1981. 12 For example, the provinces of Manitoba and Nova Scotia, and the cities of Vancouver and Montreal.


779


Credits Page 12

(Exhibit 1.2)

Copyright © 2012 IFRS Foundation. All rights reserved. Reproduced by McGraw-Hill Ryerson with the permission of the IFRS Foundation®. No permission granted to third parties to reproduce or distribute.

Page 117

(Exhibit 3.7)

Reproduced with permission from Rona Inc.

Page 169

(Exhibit 4.14)

Reproduced with permission from Goldcorp Inc.

Page 212

(Exhibit 5.1)

Reproduced with permission from Rona Inc.

Page 310

(Exhibit 6.7)

Reproduced with permission from Eastern Platinum Limited.

Page 442

(Exhibit 8.2)

Reproduced with permission from Goldcorp Inc.

Page 499

(Exhibit 9.2)

Reproduce with permission from Canadian Tire Corporation.

Page 511

(Exhibit 9.3)

Reproduced with permission from TransAlta Corp.

Page 521

(Exhibit 9.4)

Reproduced with permission from BCE.

Page 587

(Exhibit 10.6)

Reproduced with permission from Bombardier Inc.

Page 646

(Exhibit 11.19)

Reproduced with permission from TransAlta Corp.

Page 731

(Exhibit 12.6)

Reproduced with permission from United Way/ CentraideOttawa.

771



781

Index A ing (translation) exposure, 615–616, 617, 630 ing for business combinations acquisition method, 99, 100–118 consolidated financial statements, 106–118 deferred income tax, 512–517 investments in subsidiaries, 203–205 new-entity method, 98–100 purchase method, 98, 99, 101 ing for contributions. See also contributions; not-for-profit organizations (NFPOs) capital fund, 707, 708, 709, 712, 716 deferral method. See deferral method endowment contributions, 697–698 endowment fund, 716, 717–718, 719 general fund, 716 net assets invested in capital assets, 706–713 restricted fund method. See restricted fund method ing for foreign currency transactions, 561–569 closing rate, 564–565 currency perspectives, 561–563 export transaction, in foreign currency, 566–568 fair value, 565 foreign currency–denominated debt, 568–569 foreign currency–denominated position, 563 forward rate, 564–565 historical rate, 564–565, 566, 567, 569 IAS 21, 562, 563 import transaction, in foreign currency, 565–566 monetary items, 563–564 temporal method. See temporal method translation, 562, 564–565. See also translation of foreign operations ing for government/public sector organizations, 740–744 ing for t arrangements, 502–503 ing for not-for-profits. See not-forprofit organizations (NFPOs) ing Guideline 15, 494 ing methods, 26–27 ing policy. See also financial statements, analysis and interpretation of financial ratios and, 69–70 investments measured at fair value, 58–59 investments not measured at fair value, 59–69

overview, 52–53 professional judgment, 4–5 related IFRSs/ IASs, 54–58 reporting methods and, 53–54. See also financial reporting ing standards convergence, 9–19 directives and, 10 control through purchase of shares, 96–97, 108–117 GAAP and, 19–26 global capital market and, 6–7 IFRS/ U.S. GAAP differences, 17–18 influences on, 8–9 international ing, 5–9 t arrangements, 502–503 ing Standards Board (AcSB), 24 ing Standards for Private Enterprises (ASPE). See ASPE accumulated depreciation, 115, 350–354, 361 accumulated other comprehensive income (AOCI), 59, 585 acquisition cost, 64, 69–70, 100–101, 164 acquisition date, 115–116. See also consolidation subsequent to acquisition date acquisition differential 100%-owned subsidiaries, subsequent to acquisition date, 215, 216–217, 219–221 80%-owned subsidiaries, subsequent to acquisition date, 223, 224, 225 allocation of, 108–110 amortization/impairment schedules. See amortization and impairment schedules annual basis, 214–215 bargain purchases and, 161 block acquisitions (step purchases), 427–436 consolidated cash flow statement, 425 consolidated income, 206 deferred income tax, 514–516 defined, 64 direct approach, 112–113 entity theory, 158 goodwill, 164–165 indirect shareholdings, 448–453 integrated foreign operation, 637–640 inventory, 216 t arrangements, 504 liabilities, assigned to, 231–233 negative acquisition differential, 162 negative goodwill, 162–163 ownership interest, 427, 439–441 parent company theory, 154 proprietary theory, 152, 153 push-down ing, 113–114

reverse takeover, 128 self-sustaining foreign operation, 640–644 subsidiary, 114 subsidiary and, 164–165, 234 subsidiary with preferred shares, 444, 447–448 working paper approach, 109–110, 111 acquisition method acquisition cost, 100–101 control through purchase of net assets, 96, 103–108 control through purchase of shares, 96–97, 108–117 date of acquisition, 100 depreciable assets, 114–115 direct approach, 112–113 goodwill, 102 identifiable assets, 101–102 IFRS 3 and, 100 illustrations, 102–105 push-down ing, 113–114 reverse takeover, 125–126 status of, 99 subsidiary formed by parent, 114 working paper approach, 109–111 acquisitions. See also acquisition method; business combinations; ownership changes integrated foreign operation, 625–626, 627–632 self-sustaining foreign operation, 632–636 AcSB, 25 Aecon Group Inc., 68–69 AFS investments, 53, 58–59, 69–70 agency approach, 366, 379 Air Canada, 500 amortization and impairment schedules. See also acquisition differential 100%-owned subsidiaries, 216–218, 219–221, 222 80%-owned subsidiaries, subsequent to acquisition date, 222–225, 228–229 consolidated financial statements, 206 analysis and interpretation of financial statements. See financial statements, analysis and interpretation ASPE CICA Handbook and, 24–25 cost method, 60, 70 IFRS/ ASPE differences, 28 intercompany transactions, 312, 382 investments in associate, 70 nonstrategic investment, 71 ASPE differences business combinations, 119 consolidation subsequent to acquisition date, 239

773


782


ASPE differences (cont.) cost vs. equity methods, ownership changes, 70 deferred income tax, 525 equity investments, 70–71 fair value, 71 hedge ing, 592–593 intercompany bondholdings, 382 t arrangements, 525 NFPOs, 732 non-wholly owned subsidiaries, 171 translation of foreign operations, 649 VIEs, 525 asset exchanges, 14 asset impairment, 18, 28, 57 asset revaluation, international ing and, 5–6 asset test, 520 associate, 60–61, 62, 63–64 Australia, 11, 12–13 available-for-sale (AFS) investments, 53 average cost, sale of investments, gain or loss, 67 average rate, 564 AXA Canada, 91

B Bank of Nova Scotia, 559 Barrick Gold, 15, 91 basket purchase, 92 BCE, 521–523 Bell Aliant Regional Communications Inc., 202 Berkshire Partners, 91 Big GAAP, 21 block acquisitions (step purchases), 427–436 Bombardier, 559, 587–591 Brazil, 12 Brookfield Renewable Energy Partners, 91 Brookfield Renewable Power Inc., 91 budget recording system, 713–715 budgetary control of NFPOs, 713–715 business, 92 business combinations ing for. See ing for business combinations ASPE differences, 119 basket purchase vs., 92 consolidated financial statements. See consolidated financial statements contingent consideration, 166–169 control, 92–96, 96–97, 103–105, 108–117 deferred income tax, 512–517 defined, 56, 90, 92 essential elements of, 92 financial statements, analysis and interpretation, 118–119 forms of, 96–98 friendly, 91 GAAP changes, 120 goodwill, 161–165, 213

774

Index

hostile, 91 IFRS 3 and, 56, 92, 100–102, 160, 234 IFRS/ U.S. GAAP differences, 119 intangible assets, 57–58 t arrangements, 500–512, 534–536 Norwalk Agreement, 14 purchase of shares, 108–117 reasons for, 90–91 reverse takeover, 124–128 SPEs, 492–500

C Canada, 12, 19–21, 24–26 Canadian Tire Corporation, 499–500 Canadian-dollar denominated transaction, 558 capital fund, 707, 708, 709, 712, 716 capital markets, 8 carrying amount, 99, 109, 112–113, 154 cash flow hedge, 575, 580, 581, 587, 591–592 cash-generating units (CGUs), 210–211, 250–253 Celestica Inc., 422 CGUs (cash-generating units), 210–211, 250–253 China, 12 CICA Handbook. See also GAAP; IFRSs ing standards, 9 ASPE and, 24–25 defined, 3 differential reporting, 19–20 equity investments, 52–58 financial statement concepts, 3–4 government/government organizations, 26 NFPOs, 25–26, 691–694 PAE and, 20–21 private enterprises, 21, 24–25 CICA Public Sector ing (PSA) Handbook, 26 Cisco Systems Inc., 149 Cliffs Natural Resources Inc., 91 closing rate, 564–565, 577, 615 code law system, 8–9 common law system, 8–9 common shares, 422 Companies Acts, 9 compound financial instrument, 28 Conceptual Framework for Financial Reporting, 106 conceptual framework for financial reporting. See also financial reporting CICA Handbook, 3 concepts, 3–4 GAAP and, 2–3 general-purpose financial statements, 2 IFRS/ U.S. GAAP differences, 17 international ing survey, 5–7 NFPOs, 691–692 professional judgment, 4–5 consolidated balance sheet

consolidation theories, 152–160 depreciable assets, 114–115 direct approach, 112–113, 163, 165 financial statements, analysis and interpretation, 118, 170 push-down ing, 113 subsidiary formed by parent, 114 working paper approach, 109–111 consolidated cash flow statement acquisition differential, 425 adjustments to, 423–425 block acquisitions (step purchases), 427–434, 435–436 decrease in ownership interest, 439–443 fair value, 423 preparation of, 425–427 repurchase of shares by subsidiary, 434 sale of portion of subsidiary holdings, 436–439, 441–442 consolidated financial statements. See also business combinations acquisition differential, 214–215. See also acquisition differential ASPE differences, 119, 455 balance in investment , 234–237 consolidated balance sheet. See consolidated balance sheet consolidated cash flow statement. See consolidated cash flow statement consolidation subsequent to acquisition date. See consolidation subsequent to acquisition date consolidation theories, 151–161 contingent consideration, 166–169 date of acquisition, 115–116 decision to use, 54–55 deferred income tax, 512–517 defined, 106, 149 disclosure requirements, 116 entity theory, 215–231 forward exchange contract, 575–587, 591–592 IFRS 10 and, 54–55, 72, 92–96, 106, 494 impairment tests, 207–214 integrated foreign operation, 625–627, 637–646, 648–649 intercompany bondholdings, 366–381 intercompany profits in depreciable assets, 350–354, 355–363 intercompany profits in inventory and land, 294–297, 298–302, 310–312 t arrangements, 502–510 limitations of, 107 negative goodwill, 161–165 non-wholly owned subsidiaries, 169–171 ownership changes, 427–436, 436–443, 454–455 parent company extension theory, 231–234 revaluation model, 392–393 segments, 518–523


783


self-sustaining foreign operation, 627–637, 637–646, 648–649 separate-entity financial statements vs., 106, 204–205 SPEs, 498–500 subsidiary with preferred shares outstanding, 443–448 consolidated income statement, after acquisition date 100%-owned subsidiaries, 216–217, 219, 221, 222 80%-owned subsidiaries, direct approach, 224, 225, 228–229 acquisition differential, 206 consolidation process, 205–206 financial statements, analysis and interpretation, 237–238, 310–312, 355–356 indirect shareholdings, 448–453 intercompany inventory profits, 293–300, 303 intercompany loans, 290–291 intercompany profits in assets, 291–293 intercompany profits in depreciable assets, 355–357 intercompany sales and purchases, 288–291 land profit, 307–308, 309 profits in depreciable assets, 352, 353 subsidiary acquired during the year, 234–235 consolidated retained earnings, 205–207, 435 Consolidated Thompson Iron Mines Ltd., 91 consolidation procedures, 64, 492–500 consolidation subsequent to acquisition date. See also consolidated financial statements 100%-owned subsidiaries, 214–221 80%-owned subsidiaries, 221–230 ASPE differences, 239 consolidated income, 205–206, 217–218, 219 consolidated retained earnings, 206–207 entity theory. See entity theory equity method of reporting, 234–237 financial statements, analysis and interpretation, 237–239 goodwill impairment, 250–253 IFRS/ U.S. GAAP differences, 239–240 impairment tests, 207–214 investments in subsidiaries, 203–205 parent company extension theory, 231–234 retained earnings, 219–221, 222 subsidiary acquired during the year, 234–235 consolidation theories for non-wholly owned subsidiaries bargain purchases, 161–165 entity theory and, 151, 152, 155–159 impact of, 170

parent company extension theory, 151, 159–161 parent company theory, 151, 152, 154–155 proprietary theory, 151, 152–153 contingent consideration, 166–169 contingent liabilities, 102 contractual agreements, 95, 97 contributions. See also not-for-profit organizations (NFPOs) ing for. See ing for contributions allocated expenses, 704 collections, 700–701 consolidations, 701–702 control, related entities, 701–703 intangible assets, 700 receivable, 698–699 related-party transactions, 703–704 tangible capital assets, 699–700 types of, 697–698 control associate and, 60–61 block acquisitions (step purchases), 427 budgetary, of NFPOs, 713–715 business combinations, 92–96, 103–105 consolidated financial statements, 106 contractual agreements, 95, 97 contributions to NFPOs, 701–703 defined, 55 entity theory and, 155 GAAP and, 172, 526 IFRS 10 and, 92–93, 94 indirect shareholdings, 448–453 t arrangements, 54, 61, 501–502, 510 power and, 93 protective rights, 96 purchase of assets, 96, 103–108 purchase of shares, 96–97, 108–117 returns, 93 reverse takeover, 98, 124 SPEs and, 494–496 statutory amalgamation, 97 variations of, 97–98 voting shares, 95 controlling shareholders, entity theory and, 155 convergence defined, 11 directives, 10, 12–13 EU and, 10, 11, 12–13, 14 IASB and, 10–11, 13 IASB/ FASB t project, 14, 16–17 IASC and, 10–11 IFRSs and, 11, 12, 13 Norwalk Agreement, 13–14 PAE and, 20–21 SEC and, 14–15, 18–19 cost method ASPE and, 60, 70 block acquisitions (step purchases), 435 equity investments, 59–60

financial ratios, 69–70 financial reporting, 53–54, 59–60 intercompany profits in depreciable assets, 355–357 intercompany transactions, 310–312 investments in subsidiaries, 203 process of, 60 retained earnings, consolidation subsequent to acquisition, 219–221, 222 subsidiary with preferred shares, 454–455 uses of, 59–60 cost per person per day, 729–730 currency exchange rates. See exchange rates current rate method after date of acquisition–selfsustaining, 625–626, 632–636 financial statement analysis, 648–649 temporal method vs., 636 translation, 618 uses of, 622–625 current ratio ing methods and, 27 equity investments ing methods, 69–70 hedge ing, 591–592 non-wholly owned subsidiaries, 170 current value, translation, 618

D Daylight Energy Ltd., 91 debt-to-equity ratio ing methods, 27 business combinations, 118 consolidation subsequent to acquisition date, 238, 239 cost vs. equity methods, 237–239 equity investments ing methods, 69–70 hedge ing, 591–592 intercompany profits in depreciable assets, 355–357 intercompany transactions, 310–312 t arrangements, 524 NFPOs, 729–730 non-wholly owned subsidiaries, 170 subsidiary with preferred shares, 454–455 translation of foreign operations, 649 deductible temporary difference, 513 deferral method defined, 704, 705 financial statement analysis, 729–730 illustration of, 723–729 net assets invested in capital assets, 709–711 deferred income tax acquisition differential, 514–516 ASPE differences, 525 assets, 513 business combinations, 512–517 defined, 512 disclosure requirements, 517

Index

775


784


deferred income tax (cont.) IAS 12 and, 512 IFRS/ U.S. GAAP differences, 525 liabilities, 513 operating loss carry-forwards, 516–517 temporary difference, 512–514 denominated currency, 561–562 depreciable assets, 114–115, 350–354. See also intercompany profits in depreciable assets depreciation, translation after date of acquisition, 628–629 derivatives, 573 development costs, 28 differential reporting, 19–20 direct approach 80%-owned subsidiaries, subsequent to acquisition date, 225–227 consolidated financial statements, 112–113, 163, 165 intercompany profits in depreciable assets, 352–354 non-wholly owned subsidiaries. See non-wholly owned subsidiaries at acquisition date proprietary theory, 152 direct quotation, 560 directives, 10, 12–13 disclosure requirements consolidated financial statements, 116 contingent consideration, 166 deferred income tax, 517 equity investments, 67–68 fair value, 53 hedges, 586–587 IFRS 12 and, 56 IFRS/ ASPE differences, 28 impairment of assets, 212 intercompany transactions, 310, 381 international ing, 6 investments in associates, 56, 67–68 t arrangements, 56, 510 NFPOs, 703–704, 730–731 operating segments, 57, 518–523 PAE and, 21 parent’s decrease in subsidiary holdings, 442–443 purchase of shares, 116–117 reverse takeover, 126 SPEs, 498–500 translation, 645–647 discount on the forward contract, 576, 577 discounted cash flow analysis, 155–156 discounting, 571 dividends, 219, 424, 446. See also shares donated capital assets, materials, services, 711–713 downstream transactions financial statements, analysis and interpretation, 310–311 intercompany profits in depreciable assets, 355–357 inventory profits, 303–305 upstream vs., 292–293, 310–311

776

Index

E Eastern Platinum, 310 effective interest method, 231, 233 effective-yield amortization, intercompany bondholdings, 379–381 80%-owned subsidiaries, consolidation subsequent to acquisition date, 221–230 acquisition differential, 223, 224, 225 consolidated financial statements, years 1&2, 225–227, 227–230 consolidated income, 224, 225 direct approach, 225–227 equity method, 234–237 goodwill impairment, 252–253 non-controlling interest (NCI), 223, 226–227 retained earnings, 224, 225–226 working paper approach, 257–261 Empire Company Ltd., 500 Encana Corporation, 7 encumbrance system, 713–715 endowment contributions, 697–698. See also deferral method; restricted fund method endowment fund, 716, 717–718, 719 Enron Corp., 493–494 entity theory consolidated balance sheet, 155–159 consolidated financial statements, end of years 1&2, 215–221, 223–230 fair value, 155–158 financial ratios, 170 GAAP and, 151 NCI and, 151, 177–178 non-wholly owned subsidiaries, 151, 155–159 working paper approach, 176–178 Equinox Minerals, 91 equity investments ASPE differences, 70–71 CICA Handbook, 52–58 cost method, 59–60 disclosure requirements, 67–68 equity method of reporting, 60–69 fair value reporting, 58–59 financial statements, analysis and interpretation, 69–71 GAAP changes, 72 IFRS/ U.S. GAAP differences, 71 IFRSs related to, 54–58 nonstrategic, 52, 54 reporting, 52–54, 59. See also financial reporting significant influence, 60–62, 65–66 strategic, 52, 54 equity method 80%-owned subsidiaries, subsequent to acquisition date, 234–237 acquisition costs, 64 ASPE and, 70 associate, 60–61 basic concepts of, 62

block acquisitions (step purchases), 427–434 changes in associate share of equity, 62, 63–64 changes to and from, 65–66 consolidated financial statements, 218, 237–239 financial ratios, 69–70 future cash flows, 62 held for sale, 67 impairment losses, 66–67 intercompany bondholdings, 370–371 intercompany profits in depreciable assets, 354–355, 360–361 intercompany profits (losses) in assets, 298, 302–303, 304, 309 intercompany transactions, 64–65, 310–312 investments in associates, 55 investments in subsidiaries, 203–205 t arrangements, 55, 504–506, 524 losses exceeding balance in investment , 66 one-line consolidation, 203–204 presentation and disclosure, 67–68 reporting equity investments, 54 retained earnings, consolidation subsequent to acquisition, 219–221, 222 sale of investments, gain or loss on, 67 significant influence, 62, 65–66 subsidiary with preferred shares, 454–455 Ernst and Young, 13 estimates, 4–5 EU. See European Union European Economic Community. See European Union European Union, 9, 10, 11, 12–13, 14 exchange rates, 57, 58, 559–561, 562, 563, 619–621, 645–647 executory contract, 571 expected value, 166–168 export transaction, in foreign currency, 566–568

F fair value. See also fair value method of financial reporting acquisition method, 102 ASPE differences, 71 block acquisitions (step purchases), 427–436 consolidated cash flow statement, 423 consolidated financial statements, 110 consolidation theories, 154, 155–158, 160 contingent consideration, 166–168 defined, 53, 207 disclosure requirements, 53 financial reporting, 52–53 foreign currency transactions, 565 forward exchange contract, 597–598 FVTOCI, 54, 58–59


785


FVTPL, 54, 58–59 IFRS 13 and, 53, 72 investments in associates, 67–68 new-entity ing method, 99 nonstrategic investment, 55–56 reporting method. See fair value method of financial reporting reverse takeover, 126 speculative forward exchange contract, 570–571 SPEs and, 496–498 temporary difference, 110 fair value hedge, 575, 580–582, 587, 591–592 fair value method of financial reporting. See also fair value ASPE and, 70 changes to and from, 65–66 financial ratios, 69–70 illustrations, 58–59 investment types, 54 fair value through OCI. See FVTOCI fair value through profit or loss. See FVTPL FASB (Financial ing Standards Board), 9, 13–14, 16–17 financial ing, 2 Financial ing Standards Board (FASB), 9, 13–14, 16–17 financial instruments, 14 financial ratios, 69–70. See also current ratio; debt-to-equity ratio; return on equity financial reporting. See also conceptual framework for financial reporting AFS investments, 53, 58–59 cost method, 53–54, 59–60 equity method, 53–54, 60–69 fair value method, 54, 58–59 financial ratios, 69–70 IAS 27 and, 615 investments in associates, 55 NFPOs, 691–695, 737–740 parent company, 56 presentation, 57. See also financial statements, analysis and interpretation of financial statement concepts, 3–4, 691–692 financial statement presentation, 53, 57 financial statements, analysis and interpretation of business combinations, 118–119 consolidated financial statements, 454–456 consolidated income statement, after acquisition date, 237–238, 310–312, 355–356 cost vs. equity methods, 237–239 equity investments ing methods, 69–71 foreign currency transactions, 591–593 hedge ing, 591–593 intercompany transactions, 310–312, 355–357

international ing, 26–28 t arrangements, 523–524 non-wholly owned subsidiaries, 169–171 not-for-profit organizations (NFPOs), 729–731 subsidiary with preferred shares, 454–455 translation of foreign operations, 648–649 fixed-date contract, 569 foreign currency, 563 foreign currency exposure, 615–617 foreign currency transactions. See also translation of foreign operations ing for, 561–569 consolidated financial statements, 615 exchange rates, 57, 559–561 financial statements, analysis and interpretation, 591–593 hedges. See hedges IFRS/ U.S. GAAP differences, 593 speculative forward exchange contract, 569–572 foreign currency–denominated position, 563 foreign currency–denominated transaction, 559 foreign exchange rates, 57, 559–561 forward exchange contract. See also hedges defined, 561, 569 discount on the forward contract, 576, 577 fair value, 597–598 hedge ing, 575–579 on, 580 speculative, 569–572, 597–598 forward rate, 564–565, 577, 615 , 9, 10, 12 Fronteer Gold Inc., 91 full consolidation, 54 functional currency, 563, 619–621 fund ing, 695–697 FVTOCI. See also other comprehensive income (OCI) defined, 58 financial ratios, 69–70 reporting methods, 54, 58–59 FVTPL defined, 58 equity method, 65–66 financial ratios, 69–70 reporting methods, 54, 58–59

G GAAP, 19–26. See also GAAP changes Big/ Little GAAP, 21 consolidation theories, 151 control, 172, 526 development of, 2–3 financial statement concepts, 3–4 general-purpose financial statements, 2 global capital market, 7

government, 26, 742–744 international ing, 5 net income reconciliation, 7 NFPOs and, 25–26, 690–694 PAE and, 20–21 private enterprises, 21, 24 push-down ing, 114 GAAP changes business combinations, 120 equity investments, 72 foreign currency transactions, 594 international ing, 29 t arrangements, 526 NFPOs, 732 non-wholly owned subsidiaries, 172 gain on sale of investments, 67 general fund, 716 generally accepted ing principles (GAAP). See GAAP; GAAP changes general-purpose financial statements, 2, 4–5 , 8, 10, 12 global capital market, 6–7 Goldcorp Inc., 168–169, 442–443 goodwill acquisition method, 102 business combinations, 161–165, 213 CGUs, impairment tests, 210–211 consolidated financial statements, 110 deferred income tax, 516 entity theory, 158 IFRS/ U.S. GAAP differences, 239 impairment, 57, 210–211, 250–253 negative goodwill, 102, 161–165 parent company extension theory, 159–160, 231 reverse takeover, 126 SPEs and, 498 subsidiary with, 164–165, 179–180 translation after date of acquisition, 627 government sector, 26, 689, 740–744 Greece, 10 gross method, 570, 572, 580, 598 group, 106

H harmonization. See convergence hedge effectiveness, 575 hedged item, 572 hedges, 572–591 ing for, 572–575, 591–592 ASPE differences, 592–593 cash flow hedge, 575, 580, 581, 587, 591–592 defined, 572 derivatives, 573 disclosure requirements, 586–587 fair value hedge, 575, 580–582, 587, 591–592 financial statements, analysis and interpretation, 591–593 hedge effectiveness, 575 hedge ratio, 575

Index

777


786


hedges (cont.) highly probable forecasted transaction, 583–586 IAS 39 and, 573–574 IFRIC 16, 58 IFRS 9 and, 56, 573–574 IFRS/ U.S. GAAP differences, 593 illustration, 587–591 investment in foreign operations, 58 OCI and, 580–581, 585–586 payable to bank, 580 receivable from bank, 580 recognized monetary item, 575–579 unrecognized firm commitment, 579–583 hedging instrument, 572 held for sale, 67 highly probable forecasted transaction, 583–586 historical cost asset revaluation, 5 inflation, 9 intercompany profits in depreciable assets, 350–354 push-down ing, 114 translation, 618 historical cost principle, 154 historical rate, 564–565, 566, 567, 569 holdback and realization, 357–363 Husky International, 91

I IASB convergence, 10–11 FASB and, 13, 14, 16–17 history of, 10–11 IFRSs and, 11 net income reconciliation, 7 Norwalk Agreement, 13–14 private enterprises, 25 SEC and, 19 IASC (International ing Standards Committee), 10–11 IASs, 11 1: Presentation of Financial Statements, 53, 57 12: Income Taxes, 57, 67–68, 72, 498– 499, 510, 512–514 16: Property, Plant and Equipment, 115, 321–322, 392–393 21: Effects of Changes in Foreign Exchange Rates, 57, 58, 562, 563, 619–621, 645–647 27: Separate Financial Statements, 56, 60, 108, 615 28: Investments in Associates and t Ventures, 55, 61, 63, 68–69, 203 36: Impairment of Assets, 57, 66–67, 207–208 38: Intangible Assets, 57–58 39: Financial Instruments, 52–53, 68, 573–574, 594

778

Index

identifiable assets, 101–102 IFRIC 16: Hedges of a Net Investment in a Foreign Operation, 58 IFRS/ ASPE differences, 27–28. See also ASPE differences IFRS for SMEs, 25 IFRS/ U.S. GAAP differences ing standards, 17–18 business combinations, 119 conceptual framework for financial reporting, 17 consolidation subsequent to acquisition date, 239–240 deferred income tax, 525 equity investments, 71 foreign currency transactions, 593 goodwill, 239 impairment tests, 240 intercompany bondholdings, 382 intercompany transactions, 312 inventory, 17 t arrangements, 525 non-wholly owned subsidiaries, 171 property, plant, and equipment, 17 SPEs, 525 translation of foreign operations, 650 IFRSs 3: Business Combinations, 56, 92, 100–102, 160, 234 8: Operating Segments, 57, 518–521 9: Financial Instruments, 53, 55–56, 58–59, 72, 573–574, 594 10: Consolidated Financial Statements, 54–55, 72, 92–96, 106, 494 11: t Arrangements, 55, 72, 500, 503, 504, 506–507 12: Disclosure of Interest in Other Entities, 56 13: Fair Value Measurement, 53, 72 ASPE differences, 27–28 CICA Handbook, 3 convergence, 11, 12, 13 government/government organizations, 26 Observations on the Implementation of IFRS, 13 PAE and, 20–21 private enterprises, 25 SEC and, 19 U.S. GAAP and, 13–19 impaired loans, 28 impairment, 60. See also impairment losses; impairment tests impairment losses CGUs and, 210 consolidation subsequent to acquisition date, 202–203 defined, 207 equity method, 66–67 goodwill, 250 intercompany transactions, 305–307 reversing for, 211

impairment tests CGUs, goodwill, 210–211 disclosure requirements, 212 goodwill, 250–253 IAS 36 and, 57, 66–67, 207–208 IFRS/ U.S. GAAP differences, 240 property, plant, equipment, and intangible assets, 208–209 import transaction, in foreign currency, 565–566 income recognition, 60, 62 income taxes, 57 indirect method, 423 indirect quotation, 560 indirect shareholdings, 448–453 Indonesia, 12 inflation, 9, 623–625 inflation rate, 560 input, 92 Intact Financial Corporation, 91, 167–168 intangible assets, 57–58, 208–209 integrated foreign operation acquisition differential, 637–640 IAS 21 and, 619–621 translation after date of acquisition, 627–632 translation method comparison, 636 intercompany bondholdings, 363–381. See also intercompany transactions allocation of gain, 366–371 ASPE differences, 382 disclosure requirements, 381 effective-yield amortization, 379–381 gain in subsequent years, 371–378 gain or loss on, 363–366 gains allocated to two entities, 379 IFRS/ U.S. GAAP differences, 382 less than 100% purchase of bonds, 378 purchase during year, 378 intercompany loans, 290–291 intercompany management fees, 291 intercompany profits in depreciable assets, 350–363. See also intercompany transactions downstream transactions, 355 equity method, 354–355, 360–361 financial statements, analysis and interpretation, 355–357 historical cost principle, 350–354 holdback and realization, 350–354 remaining gain realization, 357–363 revaluation model, 392–393 intercompany profits (losses) in assets, 291–310. See also intercompany transactions inventory losses, 305–307 inventory profits, 293–303, 303–305 investments in associates, 305 journal entries for, 298, 302–303, 304, 309 land profit, 307–309, 321–322 transfer pricing, 309–310 upstream vs. downstream transactions, 292–293, 310–311


787


intercompany rentals, 291 intercompany revenue and expenses, 288–312. See also intercompany transactions adjustments for, 297–298 financial statements, analysis and interpretation, 310–312 inventory profits, 293–303, 303–305 land profit, 307–309 loans, 290–291 losses, 305–307 management fees, 291 profits (losses) in assets, 291–310 rentals, 291 sales and purchases, 288–290 transfer pricing, 309–310 upstream vs. downstream transactions, 292–293, 310–311 intercompany sales and purchases, 288– 290. See also intercompany profits in depreciable assets intercompany transactions ASPE differences, 312, 382 bondholdings, 363–381 consolidation subsequent to acquisition date, 233–234 disclosure requirements, 310 equity method, 64–65, 310–312 financial statements, analysis and interpretation, 310–312, 355–363 IFRS/ U.S. GAAP differences, 312, 382 t arrangements, 504–506, 536 non-wholly owned subsidiaries at acquisition date, 310–312 profits (losses) in assets, 291–310 profits in depreciable assets, 350–363 revenue and expenses. See intercompany revenue and expenses upstream vs. downstream transactions, 292–293, 310–311 interest capitalization, 28 interest rate, 560 international ing, 6–9, 10–11, 29. See also convergence; IASB International ing Standards Board (IASB). See IASB International ing Standards Committee (IASC), 10–11 International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS). See IFRSs inventory costs, 14, 216 hedges, 579–583 IFRS/ U.S. GAAP differences, 17 losses, 305–307 NFPOs and, 693 profits, 293–305 investments in associates ASPE and, 70 disclosure requirements, 56, 67–68 financial reporting for, 55 IFRS/ U.S. GAAP differences, 71 impairment tests, 57 intercompany profits (losses) in assets, 305

investments in subsidiaries, 203–205 Italy, 10, 12

J Japan, 8, 12 t arrangements, 500–512. See also business combinations ing for, 502–503, 504–506, 534–536 acquisition differential, 504 ASPE differences, 525 contributions to, 506–512 control, 54, 61, 501–502, 510 defined, 500–501 disclosure requirements, 56, 510 equity method, 55, 504–506, 524 exchange rates, 57 financial reporting for, 55 financial statements, analysis and interpretation, 523–524 GAAP changes, 526 IAS 28 and, 55, 61, 63, 68–69, 203 IFRS 11 and, 55, 72, 500, 503, 504, 506–507 IFRS/ U.S. GAAP differences, 525 intercompany transactions, 504–506, 536 proportionate consolidation, 504, 511, 525, 534–536 proprietary theory, 153 U.S. GAAP differences, 525 t operator, 501. See also t arrangements t projects (IASB/ FASB), 14, 16–17 t venture. See t arrangements

K key financial statement ratios, 69–70. See also current ratio; debt-to-equity ratio; return on equity Kinross Gold Corporation, 21, 22–23

L LCNRV, 644–645 leases, 18 legal system, 8–9 liability method, 512–514 liquidating dividend, 60 Little GAAP, 21 losses in assets, intercompany. See intercompany profits (losses) in assets exceeding balance in investment , 66 impairment losses. See impairment losses lower of cost and net realizable value, 644–645

M Manulife Financial Corporation, 202, 614 memorandum of understanding (MOU), 14, 16–17 mergers. See business combinations Mexico, 12 Milestones, 18

monetary items, 563–564 MOU (memorandum of understanding), 14, 16–17 multicolumn approach, 717–718 multiple voting shares, 422

N NCI. See non-controlling interest (NCI) negative acquisition differential, 162–163 negative goodwill, 102, 161–165 net asset exposure, 615–616, 634 net assets invested in capital assets, 706–713 net identifiable assets method. See parent company extension theory net income, 7, 52 net liability exposure, 615–616 net method, 115, 570, 572, 598 net translation adjustment, 615 New Zealand, 11, 12–13 new-entity method, 98–100 Newmont Mining, 91 NFPOs. See not-for-profit organizations (NFPOs) non-business area, 689 non-cash items, 426 nonconsolidated financial statements. See separate-entity financial statements noncontrolled structured entities, 56 non-controlling interest (NCI) 80%-owned subsidiaries, 223, 226–227 consolidated retained earnings, 206–207 contingent consideration, 168 defined, 106, 150, 151 entity theory, 151, 155–159, 177–178 financial ratios, 170 indirect shareholdings, 448–453 integrated foreign operation, 637–640 parent company extension theory, 152, 159–161, 231 parent company theory, 152, 154–155 parent’s decrease in subsidiary holdings, 436–438, 439–442 parent’s increase in ownership interest, 427, 432–434 proprietary theory, 152–153 self-sustaining foreign operation, 643–644 SPEs, 496–498 subsidiary with preferred shares outstanding, 446–447 non-controlling shareholders, 150, 155 non–GAAP-based statements, 2 nonstrategic investment, 52, 54, 55–56, 71 non-wholly owned subsidiaries at acquisition date ing methods, 27 ASPE differences, 171 bargain purchases, 161–163 consolidated financial statements, 118 consolidation theories for, 151–161 contingent consideration, 166–169

Index

779


788


non-wholly owned subsidiaries at acquisition date (cont.) financial statements, analysis and interpretation, 169–171 GAAP and, 172 IFRS/ U.S. GAAP differences, 171 intercompany profits in depreciable assets, 355–363 intercompany transactions, 310–312 NCI and, 151 negative goodwill, 161–165 ratios and, 27 subsidiaries with goodwill, 164–165 U.S. GAAP differences, 171 working paper approach, 176–180 Nortel Networks, 203 Norwalk Agreement, 13–14 notes to the financial statements, 4–5 not-for-profit organizations (NFPOs) ing for contributions, 715–723 ASPE differences, 732 bequests, 698–699 budgetary control, 713–715 capital fund, 707, 708, 709, 712, 716 CICA Handbook, 25–26, 691–694 contributions. See contributions defined, 689–690 disclosure requirements, 703–704, 730–731 encumbrance ing, 713, 715 endowment fund, 716, 717–718, 719 financial reporting, 691–693, 737–740 financial statements, 693–695, 729–731 for-profits vs., 690 fund ing, 695–697, 717 fund balances, 694, 696, 697 GAAP and, 690–694, 732 government funding for, 697 government/public sector, ing for, 740–744 inventory, 693 small NFPOs, 700 not-for-profit sector, 689

O Observations on the Implementation of IFRS, 13 OCI. See other comprehensive income (OCI) OMERS, 91 100%-owned subsidiaries, consolidation subsequent to acquisition date, 214–221 acquisition differential, 215, 216–217, 219–221 goodwill impairment, 250–252 statements, end of years 1&2, 219–221 statements, end of years 1&2, 215–218 working paper approach, 254–256 one-line consolidation, 203. See also equity method Onex Corporation, 422 Ontario Securities Commission (OSC), 9

780

Index

operating loss carry-forwards, 516–517 operating profit (loss) test, 519 operating segments ASPE differences, 525 disclosure requirements, 57, 518–523 example, 521–523 IFRS 8 and, 57, 518–521 reportable, 518–521 option-dated contract, 569 ordinary shares, 422 other comprehensive income (OCI). See also FVTOCI ASPE and, 71 financial statement presentation, 57 hedges, 580–581, 585–586 reporting equity investments, 52, 53, 59 output, 92 ownership changes, 427–443 acquisition overview, 439 block acquisitions (step purchases), 427–436 decrease in ownership interest, 439–443 disclosure requirements, 442–443 financial statements, analysis and interpretation, 454–455 numerous small purchases, 434 repurchase of shares by subsidiary, 434 sale of portion of subsidiary holdings, 436–439

P pac-man defence, 91 PAE (publicly able enterprise), 20–21 parent company consolidated financial statements, 106–107, 109–111 consolidation procedures, 64 consolidation theories for non-wholly owned subsidiaries, 151–161 deferred income tax, 516 defined, 54, 106 financial ratios, 170 financial reporting, 56 indirect shareholdings, 448–453 net method, 115 ownership changes, 427–443 preferred shares owned by parent, 447–448 proportionate method, 115 reverse takeover, 124–125 separate entity vs. consolidated, 118 separate financial statements and, 56, 60, 108, 615 parent company extension theory consolidation subsequent to acquisition date, 231–234 financial ratios, 170 GAAP and, 151 goodwill, 159–160, 231, 252–253 NCI and, 152, 159–161, 231 parent company theory, 151, 152, 154–155 parent’s share, 152 parent-subsidiary relationship, 106, 107

payable to bank, 580 pegged rates, 559 PepsiCo Inc., 149 poison pill, 91 post-employment benefit, 28 Potash Corporation, 614 power, 93 preferred shares, 28, 422. See also shares on the forward contract, 580 presentation currency, 562, 619 presentation requirements, 67–68 primary beneficiary, 494 private enterprises, 21, 24–25, 119 process, of a business, 92 professional judgment, 4–5, 61 profits in assets, intercompany. See intercompany profits (losses) in assets property, plant, and equipment IAS 16, 321–322, 392–393 IFRS/ ASPE differences, 28 IFRS/ U.S. GAAP differences, 17 impairment tests for, 208–209 revaluation, 115, 321–322 proportionate consolidation, 115, 504, 525, 534–536 proprietary theory, 151, 152–153 protective rights, 96 PSA Handbook, 26, 742–744 Public Sector ing Board (PSAB), 25, 741–742 public sector not-for-profits, 740–744 publicly able enterprise (PAE), 20–21 purchase method, 98, 99, 101 purchase of assets, 96, 103–108 purchase of shares acquisition method, 106–118 defined, 96–97 depreciable assets, 114–115 direct approach, consolidated financial statements, 112–113 disclosure requirements, 116–117 other financial statements, 115–116 push-down ing, consolidated financial statements, 113–114 repurchase, by subsidiary, 434 working paper approach, consolidated financial statements, 108–112 push-down ing, 113–114

R ratios, 27. See also financial ratios receivable from bank, 580 recognized monetary item, 575–579 recording currency, 561, 562 recoverable amount, 67, 207, 208–209, 250 reportable operating segments. See operating segments reporting depreciable assets, 114–115 reporting equity investments, 52–54, 59 research and development costs, 18 restricted contributions, 697–698. See also deferral method; restricted fund method


789


restricted fund method defined, 704, 705–706 financial statement analysis, 729–730 illustration of, 715–723 net assets invested in capital assets, 707–709 restricted resources, 695–697 retained earnings 80%-owned subsidiaries, subsequent to acquisition date, 222–230 consolidated statements, end of year 2, 227–230 consolidation subsequent to acquisition date, 206–207, 218, 219–221, 222 intercompany profits in depreciable assets, 355–357 return on assets, 27 return on equity ing methods, 27 consolidation subsequent to acquisition date, 238 cost vs. equity methods, 237–239 equity investments ing, 69–70 hedge ing, 591–592 intercompany profits in depreciable assets, 355–357 intercompany transactions, 310–312 t arrangements, 524 reporting methods, 69–70 subsidiary with preferred shares, 454–455 translation of foreign operations, 649 returns, 93 revaluation model, 321–322, 392–393 revenue recognition, 18 revenue test for operating segments, 519 reverse takeover, 98, 113, 124, 125, 126–128 Rogers Communications, 51 Rona Inc., 116–118, 212–214 Royal Bank of Canada, 614

S sale of holdings in a subsidiary, 436–439 sale of investments, 67 Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) ing standards and, 9 convergence, 14–15 global capital market and, 6–7 IASB and, 19 Milestones, 18 segments. See operating segments self-sustaining foreign operation acquisition differential and, 640–644 IAS 21 and, 619–621 translation after date of acquisition, 632–636 translation method comparison, 636 selling the crown jewels, 91 separate financial statements, 56, 60, 106–107, 108, 615 separate-entity financial statements. See also separate financial statements consolidated financial statements vs., 106–107, 204–205 debt-to-equity ratio, 118

indirect shareholdings, 448–453 intercompany profits in depreciable assets, 355–357 intercompany transactions, 310–312 shareholders, 155 shareholder’s equity, 126 shares business combination through purchase of, 108–117 classes of, 422 control, 95 indirect shareholdings, 448–453 NCI and, 155 preferred, 28, 422 preferred shares owned by parent, 447–448 repurchase by subsidiary, 434 subsidiary with preferred shares outstanding, 443–447, 454–455 Shoppers Drug Mart, 491 Short Term Convergence Project, 14 SIC 12 Consolidation–Special Purpose Entities, 493 significant influence associate, 60–61 contributions to NFPOs, 703 defined, 55 equity investments, 60–62 equity method of reporting, 62, 65–66 guidelines for determining, 61 investment, 65 reporting methods, 54 sale of investments, gain or loss on, 67 single-statement format, 59 Sinopec, 91 small and medium-sized businesses (SMEs), 25 special-purpose entities (SPEs), 492–500 consolidation, 493–494, 496–498 control, 494–496 defined, 492 disclosure requirements, 498–500 examples of, 500 IFRS/ U.S. GAAP differences, 525 primary beneficiary, 494 VIEs and, 492–493, 494 special-purpose financial reports, 2 speculative forward exchange contract, 569–572, 597–598 SPEs. See special-purpose entities (SPEs) spot rate, 560 statement of comprehensive income, 63–64 statutory amalgamation, 97 step purchases (block acquisitions), 427–436 stewardship ratio, 729–730 strategic investment, 52, 54 subordinate voting shares, 422 subsequent events, 14 subsidiary acquired during the year, 234–235 acquisition differential, 114, 164–165, 234, 444, 447–448

consolidated financial statements, 106–107 consolidation procedures, 64 consolidation theories for non-wholly owned, 151–161 deferred income tax, 515 defined, 54–55, 106 depreciable assets, 114–115 disclosure requirements, 56 exchange rates, 57 financial statements, analysis and interpretation of, 454–455 formed by parent, 114 goodwill, 164–165, 179–180 indirect shareholdings, 448–453 intercompany revenue and expenses, 293–303 issue of additional shares, 439–442 NCI. See non-controlling interest (NCI) net method, 115 parent’s decrease in subsidiary holdings, 436–439, 442–443 parent-subsidiary relationship, 106, 107 preferred share outstanding, 443–447 preferred shares owned by parent, 447–448, 454–455 proportionate method, 115 repurchase of shares, 434 reverse takeover, 125 sale of portion of holdings, 436–439, 441–442 subsidiary amount, 253 Switzerland, 8–9

T tax effects of exchange adjustments, 645 taxable temporary difference, 513 taxation, 8, 57, 67–68, 72, 498–499, 510, 512–514. See also deferred income tax technology, 6 temporal method current rate method vs., 636 after date of acquisition–integrated, 627–632 defined, 564 financial statement analysis, 648–649 translation, 618, 621–622 temporary difference, 110, 512–514 testing for impairment. See impairment tests The Conceptual Framework for Financial ing, 101 trade surplus or deficit, 560 trading price, 155 transaction exposure, 616 TransAlta Corporation, 510, 511–512, 646–647 translation, 562, 564–565 translation (ing) exposure, 615–616, 617, 630

Index

781


790


translation methods, 618 translation of foreign operations ing for foreign currency transactions, 562, 564–565 at acquisition date, 625–626 ASPE differences, 649 cash flow statement, 645 current rate method. See current rate method after date of acquisition–integrated, 627–632 after date of acquisition–selfsustaining, 632–636 disclosure requirements, 645–647 financial statements, analysis and interpretation, 648–649 historical cost and, 618 IAS 21 and, 619–621 IFRS/ U.S. GAAP differences, 650 intercompany profits, 645 LCNRV and, 644–645 method comparison, 636 net translation adjustment, 615 tax effects of exchange adjustments, 645

782

Index

temporal method. See temporal method translation exposure, 615–616, 617, 630 Treaty of Rome, 10 two-statement format, 59

U United Kingdom, 8–9, 10 United States, 8–9, 12 United Way/ Centraide Ottawa, 737–740 unrecognized firm commitment, 579–583 unrestricted contributions, 697–698. See also deferral method; restricted fund method upstream transactions downstream vs., 292–293, 310–311 financial statements, analysis and interpretation, 310–312 intercompany profits, 350–355, 355–357 inventory profits, 293–303 U.S. GAAP, 13–19. See also IFRS/ U.S. GAAP differences

V value in use, 207, 212, 251–252 variable interest entity (VIE), 492–493, 525. See also special-purpose entities (SPEs) VIEs, 492–493, 525 voting shares, 95

W West Fraser Timber Co. Ltd., 491 white knight, 91 working paper approach 100%-owned subsidiaries, consolidation subsequent to acquisition date, 254–256 80%-owned subsidiaries, consolidation subsequent to acquisition date, 257–261 bargain purchases, 178–179 consolidated financial statements, 109–111 entity theory, 176–178 non-wholly owned subsidiaries at acquisition date, 176–180 purchase of shares, 108–112 subsidiary with goodwill, 164–165, 179–180


STUDENTS... Want to get better grades? (Who doesn’t?) Prefer to do your homework online? (After all, you’re online anyway…) Need a better way to study before the big test? (A little peace of mind is a good thing…)

With McGraw-Hill's Connect,

™

STUDENTS GET: • Easy online access to homework, tests, and quizzes assigned by your instructor.

• Immediate on how you’re doing. (No more wishing you could call your instructor at 1 a.m.) • Quick access to lectures, practice materials, eBook, and more. (All the material you need to be successful is right at your fingertips.) • A Self-Quiz and Study tool that assesses your knowledge and recommends specific readings, supplemental study materials, and additional practice work.

791


792


Less managing. More teaching. Greater learning.

INSTRUCTORS... Would you like your students to show up for class more prepared? (Let’s face it, class is much more fun if everyone is engaged and prepared…)

Want an easy way to assign homework online and track student progress? (Less time grading means more time teaching…)

Want an instant view of student or class performance? (No more wondering if students understand…)

Need to collect data and generate reports required for istration or accreditation? (Say goodbye to manually tracking student learning outcomes…)

Want to record and post your lectures for students to view online? (The more students can see, hear, and experience class resources, the better they learn…)

With McGraw-Hill’s Connect,

™

INSTRUCTORS GET: • Simple assignment management, allowing you to spend more time teaching.

• Auto-graded assignments, quizzes, and tests. • Detailed visual reporting where student and section results can be viewed and analyzed. • Sophisticated online testing capability. • A filtering and reporting function that allows you to easily assign and report on materials that are correlated to learning objectives and Bloom’s taxonomy. • An easy-to-use lecture capture tool. • The option to course documents for student access.

Modern Advanced ing In Canada 7th Edition 6d3x5l

Overview 3z723u

More details 2i4a6q

Related Documents g842

Modern Advanced ing In Canada 7th Edition 6d3x5l

Solutions Manual Modern Advanced ing In Canada 8th Edition Hilton 1l262r

International ing (7th Edition) 2o5n1f

ing Theory 7th Edition Godfrey 4b2k1h

Chapter 04 Modern Advanced ing 2u4r2u

Computer Role In Modern ing 1k6w53

More Documents from "amy" 2e2k5h

Government And Business Relationship In India Pdf 4blu

Ethical Hacking 1 Pdf 216e6d

Pt 2 Nurse Notes 1b6y5n

Modern Advanced ing In Canada 7th Edition 6d3x5l

Faith First Chapter Reviews Pdf 521s2k

Combinatorial Analysis Pdf 4s5l4q